This is a reproduction of a library book that was digitized

by Google as part of an ongoing effort to preserve the

information in books and make it universally accessible.

https://books.google.com
University of Virginia Library
AG5 .M38 1920 V.1
ALD The Children's encyclopedia ;

UX 002 147 655

 04. 14197
8.‫وی‬
bete

{anii @Q Alderman So.

1916.
ZZ

L 1 B
-20

EX R 1
n

E DW 1 N
AND E R S
AL D E R M
 1
1
AG
5
M38
1920
1
313281
vil

1
THE CHILDREN'S
ENCYCLOPÆDIA

EDITED BY

ARTHUR MEE

VOLUME ONE

Integral parts of THE CHILDREN'S ENCYCLOPÆDIA

are copyrighted in the United States of America,
and all rights of reproduction are reserved

LONDON
THE EDUCATIONAL BOOK CO. , LTD.
 1
1

THE AGE OF INNOCENCE

This famous picture wits painted by Sir Joshua Reynolds about 150 years ago, and now hangs in the National Gallery
in London . The children's faces at the bottom are from a famous sculpture of singers in the Cathedral at Florenco.

ij
 CONTENTS OF THIS VOLUME
This is a short guide only to the principal contents of this volume. It is not possible to
give the titles of all the Poems and Rhymes, Legends, Problems, colour pages , questions
in the Wonder Book , and many other things that come into the volume ; but in all
cases are given the piges where these parts of our book begin . The full list of these
things come into the big index to the whole work at the end of the encyclopædia.

L'AGE L'AGE
THE CHILD'S STORY OF THE EARTH CHILD'S BOOK OF FAMILIAR THINGS
The Big Ball We Live On 5 How a Lighthouse is Built 5,3
The Earth is Always Moving 117 How the Tea Comes to the Table 58
The Sun and His Family 233 The Wonder of the Telephone 59
How the Earth Was Made 393 What the Penny Does in the Slot 02
The Shaping of the Earth 475 The House Upon the Sea 169
The Earth as it is To-day 001 How theHorse's Shoe is Made 172
The End of the Life of a Tree 174
THE CHILD'S BOOK OF BIBLE STORIES How a Pin Comes Out of the Earth
II
176
The Story of Our Bible Where the Gas- light Comes From
Heroes of the Old Testament 121
Making a Basket out of Willows 253
Heroines of the Old Testament 243 How a Balloon Sails in the Sky 254
The Bible Story of Creation 355 How Our Letters Come to Us 377
Abraham , the Friend of God 471 The Building of a House 381
The Story of Isaac and His Sons 629 The Great Wonder of a Train 461
THE CHILD'S BOOK OF ITS OWN LIFE Where the Money is Made 595
Living Things Around Us .. 17 THE CHILD'S BOOK OF STORIES
How Life Began on the Earth 127 Aladdin and the Wonderful Lamp 71
A Plant's Wonderful Secret 247 Ivory Maiden Who Came to Life 73
How the Plant Lives on Air 303 Penelope's Marvellous Tapestry 73
How Life Came Out of the Sea 545 Achilles and the Queen of the Amazons 73
615 Mona and the Forsaken Merman
Why Life Needs the Land 74
St. George and the Dragon .. 76
THE CHILD'S BOOK OF WONDER The Golden Apple 78
How We Know These Things 21
The Magic Carpet 78
What Do the Birds Sing About ? and 177 Quest of the Golden Fleece .. 155
Why Does an Apple Fall ? Otlier 289 The Witch of the Forest Tree 157
Why Do We Go to Sleep ? Questions 417 Proserpine, Queen of the Underworld 138
Where Docs Music Come From ? 505 Lonely Old Woman of Morocco 158
What Holds a Building Up ? .. 619 Tiger Woman of the Jungle . : 158
Scc index for full list of questions Land of the Red Daisies 159
THE CHILD'S BOOK OF NATURE Coming of King Arthur 161
Nature's Wonderful Family 25 Sleeping Beauty 162
Animals That Serve Man 131 Little Red Riding Hood ..
164
Animals That Work for Nature 275 Little Claus and Big Claus 303
Animals That Feed and Clothe Us .. 367 Search for the Real Princess 304
Our Animal Friends 495 Dick Whittington and His Cat 300
The Animals Most Like Men 579 Legends of Things and Places 308, +31
Willow -Pattern Plate 309
CHILD'S BOOK OS MEN AND WOMEN The Boy Whom France Forgot 310
Men Who Made the World Known 33 Little Red Shoes 312
The Explorers of Africa 141 The PopeWho Ran Away ..
423
The Men Who Found Australia 293 Cunny Rabbit and the Lion 424
The First Great Men of Rome 399 Fables of Esop the Slave 425 , 612
The Emperors of Rome 523 The Witch's Ring 427
Men Who Made the Railways 587 Unhappy King of Persia 428
Steadfast Tin Soldier 430
THE CHILD'S BOOK OF POETRY Snow Girl of Sunny Land
Poetry, the Music of Words 41 430
Sindbad the Sailor 485
The Different kinds of Verse 195
How Napoleon Came from Elba 486
The Earliest English Poetry 313 Raid of theWitches 489
Why Should We Read Poetry ? 387 Cinderella and the Glass Slipper 490
How to Read Poetry 531 Legend of the Wandering Jew
How to Remember Poetry 041 492
Little Stories About Flowers 493
See index for full list of poems and nursery rhymes Rum - Pel-Stilt -Skin .. 605
THE CHILD'S BOOK OF ALL COUNTRIES The Geese Who Kept Guard of Rome 606
The Land We Live In 63 The King with the Golden Touch 608
The Work of OurIsland Home 183 The Vase from the Arabian Sca 608
The Workers of Our Land • 261 The Silkie Wife in the Shetland Isles 608
England in the Long Ago 345 Magic Boy Fiddler of Sicily.. 609
The Founding of the Nation 509 Three Nightsin theEnchanted Castle 610
The Beginning of Our Freedom 569 Little Jacob's Friend · 613
lii
E
 L'AGE J'AGE

THE CHILD'S BOOK OF GOLDEN DEEDS Drawing :

A Village of Heroes 81 How to Make your First Picture 99

Friendship of Damon and Pythias 82 How to Draw a Plain Envelope 212

Last Fight at the Coliseum .. 82 Pictures of Leaves and Twigs 340

Heroism of Grace Darling 191 How to Draw a Jam - jar 441
The Man Who Saved His Son 192 How to Draw Straight Lines 555
The Servant Who Saved His Mistress 102 Drawing and Painting a Spray of Leaves 652
The Boy Who Saved His Family 12 French :
How Alban Gave l'p His Life to the Romans 194 Picture Stories 102, 214 , 343 , 442 , 550) , 654
The Boy Who Saved the Hamlet 299
Noble Sikl in the Indian Mutiny 300)
THINGS TO MAKE AND THINGS TO DO
Modeltown :
How Mary Jones Got the Bible 300
How to Make a Model Town 105
Jeanne, the Brave Little Mother 302
Three Cups of Cold Water 433
Shakespeare's Birthplace 107
The Doctor of Burton Port 434 How to Draw
Row
Angles and Make a Tray
Cottages
217
A of .. 219
Sacrifice of a King's Sister 434 A School for Modeltown 323
The Sacrifice of Father Damien 519
How Margaret Wilson Gave l'p Her Life 521
Making Shops for Modeltown 445
The Ladly with the Lamp 027 A Large Shop for Modeltown 505
Making a Villa for Modeltowni .. 001
CHILD'S STORY OF FAMOUS BOOKS How to be your own Magician :
The Plays of Shakespeare :
Midsummer Night's Dream 85
The Inexhaustible Matchbox Trick 108
All's Well That Ends Well The Mystery of Telegraphing Thought 223
The Tempest 87 The llysterious Chinese Bat 330
Merchant of Venice 83 The Magic of a Glass of Water 454
Othello , the Moor of Venice 117
The Ball that Answers Questions . .
455
Twelfth Night ; or, What You Will 149 Pulling One Match Through Another 502
Romeo and Juliet 151 The Magic Scissors .. 664
Ilamlet, Prince of Denmark .. 153 Games to Play Sitting by the Fire.. 115 , 230
Measure for Measure .. 271 Games to be Played in the Nursery 333
A Winter's Tale 272 Games to be Playeil Out of Doors 118, 508
Much Ado About Nothing 273 Little Problems . . 116 , 232, 320 , 450 , 507, 059
As You Like It 409 100
The Boy Carpenter's Box of Tools ..
Comedy of Errors 410 ) How to Make a Kaleidoscope III
Two Gentlemen of Verona .. 411 Making Little Red Riding blood Dolls 113
King Lear 413 Jolin Chinaman Made of Peanuts 221
Taming of the Shrew 415 A Little Dutch Family Made of Cork 221
The lliad , the Odyssey , and the Eneid : How to Make a Girl's Workbox 222
The War for a Stolen Queen 539 Ral»bits and How to Keep Them
The Strange Adventures of Ulysses 540 An Easy Way to Make a Rabbit Hutch 220 )
The Victory of the Wooden Horse 542 Electricity Made at Home 228
Chaucer's Canterbury Pilgrims : How to keep a Secret in Writing 324
The Patience of Griselda 633 Name-Pictures and How to Make Them 325
The Fox Repaid in His Own Coin 634 General Waxvestas and His Family 328
The Strange Adventures of a Princess 635 Making a Set of Bookshelves 329
The Men Who Went to Kill Death 636 How to Make a Paper Box .. 332
The Romance of the Lady Emelye 637 Arranging Flowers for the House 452
The Knight and the Ugly Old Woman 638 Easiest Way to Multiply by Ninety -Nine 453
The Dead Boy Who Sang a Hymn · 039 A Little Garden Month by Month :
CHILD'S BOOK OF SCHOOL LESSONS What to Do in April 331 , 440
Reading : What to Do in May 503, 058
How to Learn the ABC OI
How to Make Our Own Toy Zoo :
Little Words 205 , 335 , 549 The Cat 449
Story Questions and Picture Answers 435 Lion and Tiger 559
A First Lesson in Grammar 647 Rabbit and Pig · 057
Writing : What to Do with a Girl's Workbasket :
How Tom and Nora Learned to Write 9+ llow to Use the Needle 327
Tom and Nora and the Pot-hooks 207 The Doll's First Little Garment 451
Making Letters .. 337 , 137 , 551 , 648 The Doll's Little Stay's 501
Arithmetic : The Doll's Knickers 663
How Fred and Charlie Counted Six 95
How Charlie Counted Twelve 209 COLOURED PLATES Frice page
O 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 338 Your Little Friends in Other Lands 1
How We Count from 10 to 99 438 Wonderful Things that Live on the Earth 32
Names of the Nurnbers from 10 to 99 552, 649 The Light that Shines over the Sea
Music : The Wonder City of the Waves 160
The Wonderful Land of Sound 97 The Sun and His Family 233
Another Game with the Piano l'airics 211 The Workers of Our Land 207
The P'oads the Fairies Travel on 339 How the Commerce of England Begar 345
The Procession in Treble Road .. 439 The Ball of Fire that Became the Earth 393
The Fairy Meeting on Bass Road 553 The Court of Fairyland 431
The Fairies in the Tulips 650 For full list of pages in colour see index
iv
.

1
 18

GANGGU
(

5B PEARSEK
YOUR LITTLE FRIENDS IN OTHER LANDS
Place the tissue leaf over them to find their names
FACE PAGE 1
 * TU MAN

MA AU ,
haon lamaan
JAAA
31
и1

CY
AERE I
I

E VEZE Yunani AUDMI

am
!

ngwa.
‫ ا‬, ۲ ‫دودا‬
avate

ushtrons .
1
‫مستقبل‬ SELON
t she did
A
ALASQUA
EUCAL

2 11
1

be
WA14VA

EII.
 MEXICAN SOUTHSEA
ISLANDERS

PIGMY
( NEGROS
HOTTENTOTS

VCE

LAPLA
DAKOTA APACHE

LAN
INDIAN INDIAN

DER

NDER
KAF

JAP
ANE
FIR
EGY

SE
ASS

PTI
YRI

AN

(CHINESE
AN

TURK
B MOOR
AV INDIAN
AR
IA
N ARAB

CANADIAN
NOR
WEG

DUTCH
AUSSIAN
IAN

GERMAN

SWISS
DUTCH

BRETON

FRENCH
AUSTRIAN

SPANISH

ITALIAN

AMERICAN
GREEK

YOUR LITTLE FRIENDS IN OTHER LANDS

Key to the Frontispiece of “ The Children's Encyclopædia "
 TO BOYS AND GIRLS EVERYWHERE
Yousaywillwhat
findyousome day,my little friends,thatthoughwords pretendto
mean, they do not say what you really mean at all , and
I do not know of any words that can tell you all I want to say to you and
all that this book means to me. Yet it is your book, and the story of it
belongs to you ; and here it is.
OMEWHERE, in a corner of the world that a mother knows, is a little
SOME
lonely girl, the gentlest little fairy who ever opened her eyes to sce mu
s
the sun. When Master Jack Frost wakes up from his sleep and drives the
children in , our little fairy rides on her rocking-horse to Fairyland, or rings
the bell on her toy shop door and pretends to sell things to somebody who is
not there, or puts her dolls to bed long before it is time, or tells her bear the
strangest stories that ever were heard. When the sun is high in the sky, she
sets to work with her spade to turn the earth upside down, or talks to the
fairies in the trees, or begs Robin Redbreast to come down and be friends.
AND ND, though Robin does not come down to her because bad boys with
stones and catapults have made him afraid of all things that have
hands, our little maid has friends in every flower that grows, in every
wind that blows ; and at night, as the great sun goes to his bed in the
west, and the dark creeps over the world ; as the days begin and end,
as the weeks go by, and the months roll on, and the years begin to
come, her little mind grows great with wonder, and she finds that behind
the world and its play, behind all that she can see and hear and feel and
know , is Something that she does not see and hear and feel and know ,
Something great and powerful that she cannot understand.
ANNDWhat
so there comes into her mind the great wonder of the earth.
does the world mean ? And why am I here ? So the
questions come, until the mother of our little maid is more puzzled
than the little maid herself. And as the questions come, when the
mother has thought and thought, and answered this and answered that,
until she can answer no more, she cries out for a book : “ Oh, for a book
that will answer all the questions ! ” And this is the book she cried for .
"HAT is how our book began to be. Let us think that we are sitting LATRES

THATby the fire, little and big children everywhere, with story-tellers and
wise men to talk to us. If we ask for stories, we shall get them . If
we are very, very little people and ask for little tales and rhymes, we
shall get them too. If we are growing up to wonder how the world
was made, and how the flowers grow, and why the sky is blue - or if
we are bigger still and go to school—we shall find that all we want
24w-(45

to know is in our book . Such a big book must have a big name, but
you will learn to say it easily, and you will know when you grow up
ໄພປີ

that it is the only name that would really do. The name is the biggest
word in all the book, for all that wise men know is written here so that
we can understand.

IT is a Big Book for Little People, and it has come into the world to
make your life happy and good . That is what we are meant to be.
That is what we must be . That is what we will help each other to be.
Your Affectionate Friend , ARTHUR MEE

D
A
 ABOUT THIS BOOK
THE PLAN OF THE CHILDREN'S ENCYCLOP /EDIA
THE CHILDREN'S ENCYCLOPÆDIA is ar- a book which is to be read through from
ranged so that any boy or girl can beginning to end . This is an encyclopædia
understand it. It is not arranged as an that teaches everything, and not merely a
encyclopædia usually is, because that book full of facts.
would have destroyed the whole plan and It would have been easy to arrange the
purpose of the work. book in A B C order, but we should not
The usual object of an encyclopædia is to then have been able to learn from it as we
put facts together in alphabetical order so can now. The editor believes that the book
that a busy man may find them quickly. is arranged in such aa way that those who
That is quite proper and convenient for the read it will be able to learn all that they can
man who wishes to look up something that know about our own life and the world.
he has forgotten , and it is , therefore, a useful The book brings the story of everything
plan for a book which is wanted only to refer into fourteen divisions, which are all given
to sometimes. But it would never do for below , with the names of their writers.
CHILD'S STORY BY DR . C. W. THE CHILD'S BOOK BY MANY
OF THE EARTH SALEEBY OF FAMILIAR THINGS WRITERS
The entire story of the earth and the universe, from the Stories and descriptions of familiar things in everyday life,
first thing we know about it. Air, sky, land, and sea . such as raiiways, snips, telephones. How we get tood and
THE CHILD'S BOOK BY DR . C. W. clothes. Where things come from . How things are done.
OF ITS OWN LIFE SALEEBY
THE CHILD'S BOOK BY MANY
How we caine to live on the earth . The story of men and
What we are . Our place and power in the
OF MEN AND WOMEN WRITERS
women. The story of famous men and women , and what they
world . The great wonder of human life made plain. bave done for the world, with characteristic pictures.
THE CHILD'S BOOK BY HAROLD
OF BIBLE STORIES BEGBIE CHILD'S BOOK WITH NOTES AND
The beautiful stories of the Bible retold . The men and OF POETRY INTRODUCTIONS
women of the Bible . The life and teaching of Jesus and the
A selection of all the best poetry that can be understood
Apostles. Good counsel and little talks on serious subjects. by boys and girls, with pictures and notes. Nursery rhymes,
CHILD'S BOOK BY ERNEST A. BRYANT with new pictures, and little verses for very little people.
OF NATURE AND EDWARD STEP
THE CHILD'S BOOK BY MANY
The entire living world except human beings. Simple OF GOLDEN DEEDS WRITERS
histories of animal and plant life. Life stories and des
The quiet heroes of the world ; a graphic record of golden
scriptions of insects, birds, animals, fishes , reptiles. deeds of heroism that should live in every child's memory.
Familiar plants, flowers, and trees of our own country.
THE CHILD'S BOOK BY FRANCES CHILD'S BOOK BY EDWARD WRIGHT
OF ALL COUNTRIES EPPS OF STORIES AND OTHERS
What the world has been and what it is. Rise of nations
All the most charming stories, fables, and fairy tales re .
and races. The people at work and at home; whence told , with new pictures. Myths, legends, and heroic tales.
they have come; where they live ; what they do ; how
they are governed . History and geography combined. THINGS TO MAKE BY MANY
AND THINGS TO DO WRITERS
THE CHILD'S STORY BY J. A.
HAMMERTON
An inexhaustible fund of entertainment for boys and girls.
OF FAMOUS BOOKS How to make toys. How to use tools. Needlework ,
What the great books of the world are about. The
story of all the famous books young people can problems, magic, simple science, mechanics, games.
understand . A first introduction to English literature. THE CHILD'S BOOK BY MANY
CHILD'S BOOK BY THE OF SCHOOL LESSONS TEACHERS
OF WONDER WISE MAN
Ordinary school subjects taught by simple words and
The answers to all the children's questions. How do we pictures. Reading by Gerald K. Hibbert , M.A.
know what happened long ago ? Where are the stars in Writing by Miss A. B. Barnard . Arithmetic by H. J.
The daytime ? How does a train keep on the rails ? Where Allport. Drawing by Miss Marion Thomson. Music by
does the rain come from ? Real questions asked by children . Miss Mary Bloxham . French exercises by Miss Lois Mee.

Each division begins in the first part of
the work and continues in each part
until the division is complete. It is quite
easy, when reading the story of anything
in the book , to turn to what came before
it or to what comes after it ,
beginning of each chapter bears the number
of , the page from which it is continued ,
and at the end of each chapter is the
number of the page on which the next
chapter begins.
The pictures ar: arranged so that they can
be understood even without reading the
chapters in which they come. The para
graphs in black type at the beginning of
ITUITUTE
many stories explain what the story is about,
so that we may understand quite clearly
what we are going to read .
When the CHILDREN'S ENCYCLOPÆDIA is
complete we shall be able to find anything
as the in any part of it quite easily with the help of
the big index at the end . The special covers
now being prepared by the editor, in which
the volumes should be bound, will make it
quite easy to find anything in any volume by
looking up a word in the index ; and when
the book is complete there will be hardly
any kind of information that a boy or girl
may want which will not be found quite
easily within its pages.
TUUDIO

?
 TO ALL WHO LOVE
OVER THE
THE CHILDREN'S ENCYCLOPÆDIA is the
first attempt that has ever been made to
tell the whole sum of human knowledge so
that aa child may understand.
NOTHING could be more false to itspurpose THECHILDREN'S
pretends to be. It is not a children's
than to imagine that it seeks to cram the
mind of a child with things that children need
not know. The CHILDREN'S ENCYCLOPÆDIA
is based upon the finest ideas of education
that have ever been expressed in English , set
forth in a book which Herbert Spencer gave
to the world now nearly fifty years ago . It
conceives the bringing up of a child as the
supreme task in which we can engage, but
it has no sympathy with those who would
set a child down at a desk almost before it
can run . It believes that in its early years
a child is its own teacher, and that in a right
environment it will teach itself more than all
the teachers in all the schools could teach it.
It cannot be urged against this book, there-
fore, that it has come to steal away the
joy of childhood and put a bitter grinding in
its place. It has come, indeed, to bring more
joy to childhood, believing that true joy of
life comes from sympathy and understanding.
ONEmade
half of the population of the world is
up of boys and girls learning at
school and little children playing at home.
Is it beyond the resources of our language
to convey to this vast number of potential
men and women such an understanding of
the world they live in as shall make
their young lives happier, and save
the waste of precious years at school ?
The creators of the CHILDREN'S ENCYCLO-
PÆDia believe that it is not, and in that belief
they have built up the simplest system of
knowledge that they can devise.
LEFT to wander in this field, the child will
find whatever it wants. For the youngest
of all , its nurse will find her lullaby. The child
in the nursery will find its nursery rhymes, and
all the best stories that have eve: been told .
The child who can be left out of doors to play
will find here the beginning of its interest in
natural
all the things. All the games
fireside enjoyment the and pastimes,
children love,
the mechanical interests of boys, the domestic
interests of girls, and home-made toys for both
of them - this is but one phase of the practical
value of the book. For the boy and girl at
school these pages teem with precious things ;
for fathers and mothers, teachers and gover-
nesses, they may well become invaluable. It
is a book for grown -ups and children too- to
be read by children or to children . It is an
3
CHILDREN ALL
WORLD
encyclopædia of everything that comes into
childhood, and by childhood it means all that
period of life when the sensitive mind is being
formed by the influences about it.
ENCYCLOPÆDIA is whatit
book that children cannot read. It is written
in the words the children know. The art of
saying things simply has long been dying out,
but the writers of this book will seek to revive
it. They will be simple by being natural ;
they will make a children's book without
childishness, a book that children may read
because it is simple, and that men may read
because it is plain . The great mysteries will
be made as clear as words can make them ; and
while the child will find its sense of wonder
grow, it will find , too, that its mind is widening
all the time , understanding more and more.
E shall teach by words and pictures too.
We
It is one of the great qualities of this
work that the most important things are told
three times. Let us, for example, consider
the story of the telephone. In the simplest
words that he can use, Mr. Harold Begbie
explains the mystery of talking over wires. At
the head of his article the matter is summarised
in clear phrases, so that from the beginning
the reader has the central point in mind.
Under the pictures the whole story is retold ,
so that the pictures by themselves may be
clearly understood . It may be doubted if there
is a single person who can fail, after reading
this story, to understand the telephone.
HE value of a work in which this method is
THE
applied to everything needsno emphasis.
If saving of time is lengthening of life, this
book should be a priceless gift of years to the
generation that is coming. There can be no
doubt which of two children a teacher would
prefer to take - one familiar with this book
or another who is not. Nor can there be
much doubt that this book in the hands of
boys and girls will add immensely to their
understanding, lightening the burden and
shortening the years of their school-life.
HERE
of is a gift to value
measureless the nation ; a thing
to parents and
teachers ; a treasury for children to which they
may come whenever they will , for whatever
they will ; an inspiration to childhood which
will make these precious years a time of happy
building -up. It is a story that will never fail,
for children who will never tire ; and it is the
best of all stories, told in the simplest of all
words, the greatest of all ends.
ARTHUR MEE
U
ont

WORLDS
Arandatet
THE
RELAX

ezature
PROCESSION

THE
OF

The earth is a great ball, floating in space. It is not the only world ; it is only a frag
ment of the great Universe— the namewe give to all createdthings. In the picture the
earth looks the biggest of all the globes, but that is only because it is the nearest to us.
Round the sun are many other worlds, and millions of stars. The great world
balls travel, always spinning, round the sun. We shall come to know these things as
we read our book, but this picture helps us to understand what a mighty universe we live
in . Nobody has ever seen the universe like this, because nobody can get outside it
to look ; and, even if we could, it is so vast that nobody could possibly see it all.
Through a telescope we can see a little bit of the world nearest our earth ; but
the majesty and wonder of the universe is something that no man can understand.
4
 The Child's Story of
THE EARTH

THE WORLD AND THE UNIVERSE

"HE earth on which we live is so big that we cannot possibly see it all at
of years . Yet the earth is only one of many, many worlds, some of them much
greater than the earth, all of them moving through space like a ball when it
is thrown in the air. The moon was once a part of it, before it broke away . What
do we know ofall these worlds ? How were they made ? Is every star a sun like
ours, and are there little children playing on balls, like the earth, that circle round
the stars ? How did the moon break away from the earth ? How does the sun give
us life and warmth ? All these questions we ask as we think of the great universe in
which we live, and we come to know more and more about the world as time goes on .
In this part of our book we shall learn all that we can about these wonderful things.

THE BIG BALL WE LIVE ON

At the bottomofthe
sea live creatures
which do not know
what light means, but always
live in utter darkness. They
have neither eyes nor ears, and
they can only feel. The world
as these creatures know it is
just of two kinds-part of it feels
as if it could not be eaten and part
of it feels as if it could . There is
no day or night ; there are no
seasons, no sun, moon, or stars ; no
sounds, no beauty of any kind ; nor
do they even know that there are
in existence any other creatures like
of the sea , the voices
By DR. SALEEBY of our friends, and
that wonderful thing
called music . But far better
than all these as a gateway
of knowledge is the sense of
sight . Through sight we find
out a never-ending number of
wonderful things. Sight shows us the
ground beneath our feet and the
heavens above us ; the sun, moon , and
stars, the shooting stars , the lightning,
and the sunset . It shows us our own
bodies and the bodies of our friends,
and a whole host of living creatures
of many kinds . Sight tells us—and od

themselves . here our sense of heat and cold helps

It is as if a child spent its life in us also—that time is divided into hours
utter darkness in bed, with nothing of light and hours of darkness.
to see or hear, and with only one This common fact of day and night
kind of change in all its life—the is really wonderful when we think of it.
change between having something in The commonest things are the most
its mouth and having nothing. That wonderful, if we look at them not
is not the sort of life that any of us merely through the eyes of our heads,
would wish to live , though there are but also through the eyes of our
people in the world whose life is not minds . This wonderful sense of sight
inuch better. tells us also of changes which do not
How different our own life is ! We come and go as rapidly as day and night ,
have many senses , or gateways of yet which never fail to come in
knowledge, as they have been called . their due order ; which go as surely
Some of these are unimportant, such as they come, and return as surely as
as taste and smell. Even the sense they go.
of feeling or touch is not of any very After months of cold and snow and
great importance, and the same may ice , there follows what the poets have
be said of the sense of heat and cold . called “ the birth of the year.” The 30
Then there comes the wonderful sense days get longer ; the buds come out in
of hearing, by which many different the trees and hedges ; the birds sing
kinds of knowledge reach us, as well more sweetly ; the world puts on a new
as many things that are beautiful- green dress ; the air becomes warm and
like the song of a bird , the sound the sun hot - we pass through spring to

5
 -THE CHILD'S STORY OF THE EARTH
summer. Everyone knows thatsummer nothing could live upon the earth ,
will not last always ; the power of all neither the creatures at the bottom of
the wisest men in the world cannot the sea, which never see the sun and do
keep it for us. The corn becomes ripe not know of its existence, nor we our
for harvest and it is early autumn ; the selves, who see it nearly every day.
leaves become brown, the flowers wither, Then there is the moon , which often
and then they seem to die ; the leaves gives us light at night, and there are the
drop from the trees, and all the green thousands of stars which make us ask
and beautiful plants seem dead. what they are. We all know the
EAT CHANGES
THEAREGRALWAYS THAT
rhyme about the twinkling little star,
GOING ON “ How I wonder what you are ? ” The
Autumn gives place to winter, with answer to this question is one of the
its cold and snow , but when spring most wonderful things that we can
comes the trees that seemed dead think of.
become green again. They did not But even if we never raised our eyes
really die, and they are as surely alive above us, or, at any rate, never looked
in winter as in summer; but they higher than the tops of the hills and
must obey the changes of the year. mountains, we should find far more
These changes will all come back again
and again and again , just as night
follows day. They were going on
thousands of years ago, and will be
going on in thousands of years to come.
The creatures that live in darkness at
the bottom of the sea know nothing of
them , but we do, and , just like the
trees, we have tolive our lives in a way
that fits them . In the daytime we are
awake ; at night we sleep.
In the summer we can do things
which we cannot do in the winter,
and we have to change our clothing -- 0
though we lighten our clothing when
the trees put on theirs, and put on more
clothes just when the trees strip them
selves . It is our business , then , to under
stand the secret of all these things.
Sight is the most precious of all the World is round like a ball , and this is the side of
senses, not merely because it tells us so The
the ballcalled the Old World, the partof the Worldthat
much more than any other sense about was known before Christopher Columbusfound America.
our own earth , but also because it The rough part of the ball is land, and the smooth part is
shows us a great and beautiful and water. There is much more water than land on the earth.
wonderful world far beyond the world things to wonder about than any man
in which we live . can understand in a lifetime ; more,
ONETHINGS
OF THEWEMOST WONDERFUL indeed , than all the men of all times put
CAN THINK OF together have yet been able to under
All our other senses put together stand a millionth part of. We shall
could never tell us about this. Our never be able to answer all the ques .
own earth , because it is ours, because tions that might be asked,and yet every
we cannot leave it, and because it answer that we do obtain , and every
affects our lives so closely, is of most question that we ask properly - even if
interest to us. Yet we find, when we we never get an answer to it-is of
look beyond the earth, that things which value to our lives. Everything that
are far away, things which we can never men find out is of value to us, and the
reach or touch, but can only see, are things that men have already found out
of great importance to us. Chief among make our lives happy and useful, and
these is the wonderful sun — the great make all the difference between our own
fire which keeps us warm and gives lives and the miserable lives of savages ,
us light and heat. Without the sun which to us seem scarcely worth living
பயனராலயயயய
raumur Z TOLD
6
 DMLI
THE BIG BALL WE LIVE ONucom
.
at all . The more we know and the
more we understand - even though it
be very , very I'ttle as compared with all
that there is to know and understand-
the better for us all .
This is a fact worth thinking about
at the very beginning. These questions
cannot be asked and answered without
trouble. Every one of us must give
some part of his life to them ; and
many men, and many women, too,
have given their whole lives to them .
Why should we trouble at all ? some
boy or girl may ask. Why should we
not just play and eat and sleep all the
time ? Why should we not be like those
creatures at the bottom of the sea ,
which seem to say of all the world
This is the other side of the ball, the New World, called
America , which the men living in the Old World did not
know until Columbus found it, four hundred years ago. telling the story of the earth , and if we
America is the greatest country in the World , so big that are going to tell the story well , we shall
it would take you a week to go across it in a fast train. have to do what a writer does when he
around them , " I do not know, and I is telling a detective story. He begins
do not want to know , and I do not
care ; it makes no difference to me, and
I cannot be bothered with it " ?
Well, there are men and women and
children who live just like that ; but it
is not really living. If you live like that,
your life is worth just about as much
as that of the creature at the bottom
of the sea, which never thinks about
anything — not even about the other
fishes or about itself. The only thing
that makes that kind of life worth
living is that it may lead to something
higher. If we ourselves are to live that
sort of Xfe , then all the time and struggle
and labour which has been needed in
7
the past for us to live at all has been
thrown away , and we have spoilt it
all in a moment. It tumbles down like
a house of cards, and we tumble with it.
Ours is the highest kind of life there is ,
and the higher the kind of life we live
the more we need to know and under
stand. Perhaps we should feel this for
ourselves if all our gateways of know
ledge were suddenly closed, if all that we
remember were forgotten , and if we be
came like creatures that live in darkness.
THETOERYEEGINNING TO THE
OF THE EARTH
Well , we have let our eyes roam in
many ways around us, up to the heavens
and down to the bottom of the sea.
Now we must begin at the beginning of
our story, and tell it as it really hap
pened. This is all very well when you
are telling a story about something you
have seen yourself, but it is a very
different thing when you were not
there , but have come in at the end , so
to speak , and have to find out what
happened by what you see around you
when you get there. We have all heard
about clever detectives who go into a
room where thieves have broken into a
safe, and find out all about it. They
make a note of everything they see ,
examine a piece of a tool that the
thieves dropped, the finger-prints on
the door of the safe, and so at last , if
they are clever and fortunate , they
are able to find out what happened ,
even though no one saw the burglars
at their work .
Now that is what men have to do in
by saying what the detective first
thought when he came upon the scene,
and how , as he found out one thing
after another, he began to put his story
together bit by bit until at last the
whole thing was as plain to him as if
he had been looking in at the window
all the time .
THE FIRST MEN WERE
HowABOUT PUZZLED
THE STORY OF THE EARTH
Now, the story of the earth is far more
puzzling, as it is far more interesting,
more wonderful, and more glorious,
than any detective story that ever was
written or ever will be written ; and
when men began to think about it first
 - THE CHILD'S STORY OF THE EARTH.
theywereveryeasily deceived. They were misled bywhat
seemed to be plain enough, but was really very different
from what it seemed to be. Until they got these mistaken
notions out of their heads, they could not get any further .
Suppose you want to go upstairs to your bed -room , and
you start by walking one step down to the kitchen , it is
quite plain that, however well and bravely and fast you
go on walking downstairs, you will never get to your bed
room . The simple truth is thatyou have started the wrong
way , and that will never do. Well, men started the wrong
way in trying to find out the story of the earth. It was not
their fault, for the wrong way looked like the right way.
They were clever men , and did not mean to be beaten . The
harder they worked the more difficulties they got into.
The MEN WHO THOUGHT THE EARTH WAS FLAT
Now, the first man who tried to understand the earth
would naturally think that there were, at any rate, two or The earth is not Alatlikea table,but
three great facts which he could start with , about which round like an orange. We know this
there was no doubt at all. To begin with, it seemed quite by the way a ship comes into sight
plain that, though there were hillsandvalleys,upsand at sea. Atfirst we see only smoke..
downs, yet , on the whole, the earth was flat. The hills 1

and the valleys seemed to be mere ups and downs, like

the ups and downs on a bad road , or on a badly -rolled
cricket ground. However far you walk your head is still
upright, at the top of you, and your feet are still beneath
you . You will never come to an edge and fall off.
Walking on the earth , or even going in a train, is not at
alllike walking on a ball, as people do at the circus.
Well, then , men thought that here was something plain.
First of all, there was this great stretched -out earth, giving
us a certain ievel upon which we live, and stretching out
in all directions. Then men began to think of everything
else in the whole world as either at that level or else above
that level like the sky, or else below that level. It was not
possible to get very far down below because of the difficulty
of digging ; but still, just as there was an above, so men
knew that, of course, there must be a below. Then we see the top of the
THE GREAT MYSTERY OF THE UNDER WORLD mast, as if the ship were
climbing up the side of a hill.
In some parts of the world it was possible, men
thought , to get hints of the lower regions, and men came
to learn that the earth below was hot and on fire.
How did they find this out ? Here and there upon the
surface of the earth there are great holes, usually found
at the tops of mountains. These mountains have a special
name which we must learn ; they are called volcanoes, and
the holes are called craters. Sometimes a volcano becomes
excited , and all sorts of things come up from belcw and
are shot up into the air through the hole at the top. Now,
these things that come cp) are all terribly hot , and with
them comes a great deal of black smoke. So it seemed
probable that what men called the under world — that is
to say, the part below the level of the earth - was a very
hot place, probably with fire always burning in it .
* Well , now we have got so far as to have in our heads a
clear notion of the flat place we live on , an up to the
heavens and a down to the lower regions ; but the greater Then the front appears,and we see
part of all this is nonsense, and the more men believed the vessel rising higherand higher
HOW WE KNOW
in it the more nonsense they invented. THE EARTH IS ROUND
8
 Samra marangmu
-THE BIG BALL WE LIVE ON amaranam
It seemed certain that the earth was flat, and if there was
one other thing that seemed certain , it was that the earth
was quite still and at rest. We do not feel the earth
moving under our feet ; we cannot imagine that it moves .
If we look “ up ” to the stars and watch them carefully
from day to day and from night to night, they seem to
come up from the edge of the earth, in a direction which
we call the East. Then they seem to travel across the
sky, and then to dip down at the other edge of the earth ,
which we call the West .
WHAT MEN USED TO THINK ABOUT THE SUN
We can easily see the sun doing this, as he seems to
do it every day. At some time in the morning we see
him in the East ; he travels across the sky, and then
he passes from our sight in the West . It used to be
thought that the great fire of the sun was put out every
night in the water in the West, and that then , in some
Ifseetheearthwere fat,we should mysterious way, it passed through the under world , and
the whole of the ship at
once, notthe front of it first wasset blazing again , and turned up next morning in the
and the rest of it bit by bit. East to begin its journey afresh. Whatever happened to
the sun at night, at any rate there seemed to be no doubt
that it did what we think we see it do - rise in the morning,
move across the sky, and set on the other side from where
we first saw it rise. The notion that the earth itself moved
seemed to be such nonsense that everybody laughed at it .
But at last there came the notion that , in spite of what
we think, the earth is not flat ! Some bold men actually
declared that the earth was nothing else than a big ball,
and that we lived on the outside of it . Many people
laughed at such an idea. “ If it is a big ball,” they said,
(6
" we should be able to go right round it and come back to
where we started from .” Now, in those days the only part
of the earth that men knew at all was scarcely more than
a spot on its surface, and beyond this they knew nothing.
So this idea of travelling boldly out in one direction and
going on and on in a straight line until you came back to
Butwe do not see itthatway. We
the place you started from seemed really too absurd.
COULD A MAN TUMBLE OFF THE EARTH ?
see the ship rising as if it were
sailing up the other side of a ball. Then , again , people argued that there could not
possibly be other people on the under side of this big ball,
for if they were they would fall off, and , indeed , if it were a
ball , anyone starting at the top of it, and walking too far in
one direction, would soon find himself beginning to slip
just as a doll might slip off an orange-until at last he
would tumble off altogether, and that would be the end of
him. It seemed a great puzzle, or, rather, it seemed not
a puzzle at all ; it simply seemed that the people who said
the earth was a ball were talking nonsense.
But these people would not stop talkir.g, and they
went on with one argument after another so strongly that
at last people believed that what they said was true.
One of their best arguments was that if you watch a ship
as it sails out to sea from the harbour, it does not behave
as it should behave if the sea were flat. Suppose the sea
were like a flat, ploughed field . You could watch the ship
go up and down and on and on , looking smaller and smaller,
At last the ship is over the circle, until at last it became just a speck , and then disappeared
sailing clear on the top of the ball. out of sight. But that is not at all what happens
WE KNOW
THEHOW EARTH IS ROUND when a ship sails out to sea. If we waich it closely,
ooOTIDtronarzt Momond
9
 LOCOXA
- THE CHILD'S STORY OF THE EARTH
we find that it begins to disappear in
a particular way. The hull—that is, the country called Spain, not very
bottom-of the ship disappears first ,
and then the ship seems to sink lower
and lower, until we can only see the
tops of the masts, and then only the
top of the highest mast, and then
nothing at all. When it has quite gone,
the ship is really near enough for us to
see quite well , but it is hidden by some-
thing - something which first hides the
lowest part , and then hides it all.
W THE SHIP COMES INTO
HowSIGHT AT SEA
Then, supposing the ship.comes back,
what do we see ? Is it , first of all , a
sort of dim shape, which gradually
becomes clearer and clearer, like a man
meeting us in a street in a fog ? Not at
all . The ship seems to rise up from
somewhere, and , as it rises , comes nearer
and nearer , so that we see the tops of
the masts first and the hull last. What
happens is exactly the same as what
happens when we stand half-way up a
little rounded hill, and a friend leaves
us , going over the top until we can only
see his head, and then nothing at all .
Then the friend comes back to us over
the hill, his head appearing first and his
feet last . It is the same with the ship.
Exactly the same thing happens in each
case . The ship has gone round the
corner, so to speak, though it is over
the corner rather than round the corner .
We cannot see it because the earth itself
(it happens to be the sea , but that does
not matter) is between us and the ship .
FIRST MEN WHO TRIED TO SAIL
THEAROUND THE GREAT EARTH - BALL
“ Very well, then ,” said some bold
sailors. “ Very well ,, then ; if the earth is
really a ball, and if there is water
enough, we shall sail around it . We
shall start out from the edge of the
land with our best boats and a big supply
of food , and we shall go straight on and
on and on , though we see nothing but
water in front of us ; and if you are
right, and if we sail long enough and our
food does not run short, we shall go
right round the ball and turn up again
at the place we left ” -not at the same
edge of the land, but at the opposite edge .
And that is what these sailors tried to
do . They went out in their best and
biggest boats; they turned their boats
straight ahead, and waved their hands
to the crying friends who thought they
UDUTUL
IO
would never see them again . The
far away
from us , which was at that time one of
the most famous countries in the world ,
was their starting place. On they went ,
and we may imagine how often those
sailors, who could not believe this story
about the carth being round, wanted to
turn back and get homeagain . Every day
they felt they were sailing further from
their homes, and what way back could
there be except the way they had come ?
But there was to be no turning
back.. Each day their leaders gazed
ahead, looking for land - land that
had never been seen, but which they
hoped to be the other side of the
land from which they had started .
And once they nearly found what they
were looking for. It was not a great
stretch of land that they saw, only
some small islands, but that was quite
enough, they thought. Where there
were islands, they said , there would
surely be land beyond them .
MEN FOUND THAT THE
НЕ,
EARTH IS A GREAT BALL
Now, in those days, people who lived
in Spain , and in our part of the world ,
used to call the land which lay furthest
East from them the Indies - it is the
same word as India. So when the
sailors came across these islands, they
thought that, by going round the other
way , they had reached some of those
same Indies which they had visited
before by travelling East , and they
called these islands to which they first
came the West Indies, and the Indies
they had left behind them they called
the East Indies. Little did those bold
sailors guess that instead of going all
the way round they had gone only a
quarter of the way. But they had
done one great thing. They had gone out
West across the sea , and had found land .
This was the beginning, and a great
beginning. Soon there followed other
sailors, equally brave, and at last they
succeeded in sailing right round the
earth . That was the end of the notion
that the earth was flat.These voyages
discovered for us what we still call the
New World , and they have been of great
importance to the lives of all of us.
But their greatest importance was really
to prove for ever that this wonderful
earth is nothing else than a great ball.
The next story of the earth is on page 117 .
 The Child's Book of
BIBLE STORIES
WHAT THE BIBLE IS
"HERE are millions of books in the world , but the most wonderful of all is the
Bible . It is the only book which is read in all nations by scholars, peasants ,
THERE
and little children. It is printed in every language . White people, black
peop'e, yellow people, red people, and brown people read this marvellous book .
It is the Wonder Book of the whole earth ; the most marvellous collection
of printed words in all the world . And it is the Book of Life. We shall
read here all the wonderful stories the Bible tells, we shall consider the beautiful
life of Jesus ; and when we have finished our stories from the Old and New
Testaments, we shall have some little talks together upon serious subjects.

THE STORY OF OUR BIBLE

covenant is really a
WHENat .you look By HAROLD BEGBIE much better word
inscriptions than testament, because
on monuments and build it is truer to the meaning. By
ings you find that the date is the Old Covenant men meant
always followed by two capital a promise made by God to
B.C.ers
lett D.seThlett
The
or. A. ersstare
e fir eseermeans
eith
of th man before Jesus appeared on the
the time Before Christ ; the second of earth ; and by the New Covenant
these means Anno Domini, the time men meant a new promise made by
God to man in the life and teaching
Thi
Afte r nk of . time and of all human
Christ of Jesus Christ . The New Covenant
history as a picture --the picture of a is really the keeping of the promise
vast country stretching under the sun made by God to man in the Old
and the
and evermoo n and
; and thenthe thes mid
, in star eveofr
for st Cov enant
Now . see what the Bible is . It
you
this picture, very lonely and sad, you is a book about God and man , and the
will see a cross rising out of the ground , hero of the book is the great central
with the figure of a Man hanging figure in the history of the human
upon it , dying for love of His friends raceThe sus ChTes
, JeOld rist . ent is the history
tam
alldthe
an enem
cou s. yBeishicall
ientr nd ed
that
B.Clo nely cr
. -in osst
fron of a certain nation called the Hebrews,
of it all the country is called A.D. or Jews , or Israelites - three names
Jesus is the centre of history and all meaning the same thing. It is
look their own history written by them
forewar
tim . dFro m mthe
; fro menn look
crosss me
the cros selves. The Jews were chosen by God
backward. Man , you see, has divided to teach the other nations alcut life
time into two great parts, two and the mystery of death . God
immense divisions. The first division promised them that they should be a
is the time before Jesus lived among blessing to all the world . What God
men ; the second division is the time promised they wrote down, and kept
after Jes us appeared on the earthd. the wri tings carefully .
r
All ove the wor ld e now divide
tim is They were a wonderful nation ,
because , although they were guilty of
thiw
in No s ,won ok wa
Boful
theder are going to read
wey. many sins and cruelties, they wor
about is divided into two parts, just shipped One God when oth er nations
as time is divided . It has its period were praying to heathen gods and
called B.C. and its period called A.D. bowing down before images made
The period called B.C. is known as with wood and stone . They were a
the Old Testament, and the period very poetic and kind -hearted people .
called A.D. is known as the New They loved to live with their flocks,
Testament . The word testament used and enjoy the simple blessings of the
to be called covenant, and this word beautiful earth . They made the home

II
 THE CHILD'S BOOK OF BIBLE STORIES mania
LA SLEUTEGELEESID HELE
the great thought of their lives. What were angry, and refused to believe that
we call family life, meaning the plea-
sures and affections of a happy home,
was the chief ideal of this brave people.
And what made them so happy and
strong was their belief that God was
watching over them.
And when they sinned, and sorrow
came upon them , and their enemies
conquered and ill-treated them , still
they said that God would deliver them ,
because He had promised. So in the
midst of their sorrows they began to
watch for the coming of some mighty
being whom they called Messiah , think-
ing that this Son of God would destroy
MANY
OM
KLADU
LEWE
John Wyclif, who was born in Yorkshire when thepriests feared to give tue Bible to the people, sent out poor
WILLOU
vuren
men to preach the story of Jesus. Wyclif was the first man to turn the eyes of the people from the Church to the
beautiful figure of Jesus Christ, and rich and poor gathered to listen. This picture was painted by Mr. Yeames.
their enemies, give them back their
flocks and herds, and set them up as the
rulers of the whole earth . All this is
written in the Old Testament .
They watched and waited for the
coming of the Messiah. The promise
of the Messiah runs through the Old
Testament like a little silver brook
winding through a dry country towards
the sea . But when the Messiah came
they found that He was not a mighty
warrior, but aa beautiful young peasant,
who sat in a weather- beaten ship with
simple fishermen , and taught people
that to forgive their enemies was better
than to fight them . And then the Jews
FYTUU KUTOTIUTUUDETE non
12
C D
He was the Messiah .
The Old Testament, then , shows us
these people seeking after the Messiah ;
and the New Testament shows us these
same people rejecting the Messiah. The
whole Bible is, therefore, a Book about
the great central Figure of Jesus
Christ, who stands in the midst of the
world's ages .
In very ancient times men used to
write the stories of their fathers on a
peculiar paper made from the pith of
an Egyptian plant called papyrus. It
was on this papyrus that the Jews
wrote their history, and the precious
writings were very carefully kept as
sacred records . Now , even before
Christ came into the world , the Greek
people were anxious to learn about the
Jews and their clever writing . Men
took the history of the Jews told on
the papyrus and wrote it down in the
language which the Greek people knew.
Now , the Greek word for papyrus
was Byblus, and this word came to
stand for Book ; so that they spoke of
the Hebrew writings as Biblia , or the
Books . The Latin nation borrowed
this word , and our first copies of the
Bible were in the Latin language and
were called Biblia Sacra, meaning the
toru om BOITIEDOTT3003 TORTUREBUTY
THE - CROSS STANDS IN THE MIDST OF TIME
KER

Think of time and of all human history as a picture —the picture of a vast country stretching under the sun and
the moon and the stars for ever and ever ; and then , in the midst of this picture , very lonely and sad , you will see
a cross rising out of the ground, with the figure of a Man hanging upon it, dying for love of His friends and
enemies . Behind that lonely cross all the country is called B.C. - in front of it all the country is called A.D.

13
 LLULAIUEO
- THE CHILD'S BOOK OF BIBLE STORIES
ELAZ LELD

Holy Books. At last Englishmen made through the country lanes , preach
their own words , and, speaking of all ing the story of Jesus in plain, homely
these writings as the Book, and not the English, all the peasants and some
Books, called it the Holy Bible. So of the nobles gathered round to listen.
that Bible means The Book. Wyclif was the first man to turn the
You must not think of the Bible as eyes of the people away from form
a single book written by one man. It and ceremony to the beautiful figure of
is many books, written at far distant Jesus Christ, the Light of the World.
times, by many very different men . We can never be grateful enough to
These different books have been col- him for his bravery.
lected and bound together, because they He stood alone against the Pope and
teach us so clearly about God and man . the mighty Church of Rome, and when
To understand the wonderful story they tried to crush him he made answer :
of the English Bible we must go back “ I believe that in the end the truth will
five hundred years and more in the conquer.” He died at Lutterworth , a
history of our country. In those days little village in Leicestershire, and after
the nobles were wicked , and the he was buried the Pope had his bones
Church had lost dug up from the
all the beauty of kindly earth, and
its earliest years . burned .
The Pope was liv About a hundred
ing in France, and years after Wyclif's
he filled England death there was
with Italian born in Glouces
priests, who lived tershire William
careless lives and Tyndale , who
made the people studied the writ
pay heavy taxes ings of Wyclif, and
to the Church in longed for the
order that it day when England
might be a great should have her
Power . own Bible , and be
But there arose free from Rome
in England at this and free from
time one of the Rome's priests.
consumer

greatest men who Once, when he was

cm

ever breathed our arguing with a

English air. His clever doctor of
10

name
was John divinity , he sud
Wyclif, and he was denly said , ““ If
born in Yorkshire. Godspare my life
He was a small , for many years I
thin , weak-looking will see that a
man , with a little boy who drives
body, but a great the plough shall
and fervent soul. know more of the
He was a very Bible than the
famous scholar, Pope of Rome.”
and he taught Long ago,when the priests thought it was dangerous for Tyndale got to
men not to obey people to read the Bible for themselves,andwhen it was gether a company
ALUE

printed
the Pope's com- the aforeign language,
onlyin inEnglishso WilliamreadTyndale was of
it. Hewrote them went
withscholars,
OU

mands, but to Bible that all might very

driven from England and had to hide across the sea, where
study the Bible he worked morning and night, printing the Bible for the quietly to Ham
for themselves, people. One day his enemiesfound him and had him put burg, and there set
and obey only in prison, wherehe was put to death and his body burned about translating
Christ Himself. The poor people re- the Latin Bible into our own English
joiced in John Wyclif, for their only language. They worked early in the
comfort was in religion , and when he morning and late at nights. We are told
sent poor men , dressed in rough serge, that in his love for the Bible Tyndale
TORRE DET
HD percuponymour COLUMN PORTO MOTT
14
 Dodaten
on2.BERLALU BERDEEL ITALIA

DODRODDI
DODUO
VOIE
DUO
John Wyclif died, William Tyndale was cruelly put to death, and the bishops burned the English Bibles.
But the enemies of religion could not keep back the Word of God from the people. Tyndale finished his Bible
before he was put to death , and copies of it were chained in the churches so that they could not be taken
away. This picture shows the people listening to the Bible being read aloud at St. Paul's Cathedral.
gladly faced “poverty, exile, bitter the English Bibles, and soon a great
absence from friends, hunger, and thirst , fire was lighted in St. Paul's Churchyard,
and cold, great dangers, and other hard and a number of the books were burned
and sharp fightings.” He set up a by the bishops and the priests. The
printing machine. friends of Tyndale were driven out of
But Tyndale knew that he was doing London , many of them across the sea.
a most dangerous work, and that if the Poor, brave, noble Tyndale was now
Pope could find him , he and his English in great danger, because the Pope made
Bible would be thrown into a fireand up his mind to get him out of the way.
burned. So he had to think how he Tyndale was driven from town to town,
could get the English Bible secretly but wherever he went he continued
into England. At last a great idea came writing the Bible in English. He lived
to him of forming a society called the for some time in Antwerp, and then the
" Christian Brotherhood .” This society cunning priests of Rome had him put
was made up of men who wanted the into a prison near Brussels. Then he was
Bible in English, and who were deter- put to death , and his body was burned.
mined to stand against the antagonism But, though they could destroy the
and cruelty of the Roman Pope, even body of this great English scholar, the
to the death. Many of these brave Pope and the priests could not destroy
men had ships, and with their help the work he had done. The English
Tyndale managed to smuggle over people had learned to love their Bible,
his pages to England. When they and they stood together and refused to
reached this country the pages were have anything to do with the Pope
secretly sent to nobles and merchants and the Church of Rome. The precious
belonging to the Christian Brotherhood . English Bibles were carried into the
But the nobles were so pleased when churches, chained with heavy steel so
they got Tyndale's writing that they that no one should take them away to
could not keep it secret,and the bishops the fires, and the people crowded in to
got to know all about Tyndale and his hear these sacred words read aloud
work. Every effort was made to find to them from morning till night.
OUTDOTTOTOX X XZTVITT RISTEITE DOZITETIT
15
While the power of the Pope was still strong in England, the Bibles that William Tyndale sent over
from Germany, where he and his scholars were writing them in English, were seized by the Pope's bishops
and burned in St Paul's Churchyard. A great artist, Mr. Seymour Lucas, has painted this picture.
Bibles can now be bought and read face of this big young man, John
everywhere. But think what it must Porter. Try to imagine that you can
have been for England to hear the Bible hear his strong voice rolling down ihe
for the first time ! It was the strangest mighty aisles. And then go back in
and most lovely music ever heard on your memory to the far-off days of
English soil. brave little John Wyclif, the days of
The whole country read scarcely any the hunted exile and martyr William
other book, and talked of nothing else Tyndale , writing the first English Bible
but this wonderful new idea of lite. in Germany, and smuggling over those
They learned that God wasthe loving precious sheets to our island home.
Father of the world , that all men are Then you will know how greatly
equal before God and members of one men and women have suffered that
great family, and that humility and you might read in your own toligue
poverty are better things than pride the story of Jesus Christ our Lord..
and wealth ! It was like the beginning
of a new world . The Bible is the Book of God,
When Bishop Bonner set up the first And unto every age it shows
six Bibles in St. Paul's Cathedral , says The ancient path that Israel trod ,
a writer, crowds of people flocked there The grave from whence our Saviou:
to hear them read aloud. “ One, John rose .
Porter ,” a book tells us, " used some
times to be occupied in that goodly Two Covenants are found therein ,
exercise . This Porter was a fresh
The Old and New, and both declare
young man , and of a big stature, How love alone can conquer sin,
and great multitudes would resort And God alone can answer prayer.
thither to hear him , because he could
read well.”
When you are taken to St. Paul's We know not who inscribed each page,
Cathedral try to picture to yourself But this we know, where'er we look,
the crowds of London people round That men have found in every age
those six great English Bibles chained The God of comfort in this Book !
to the lecterns. Try to picture the fair Tlie next story of the Bible is 0 :1 page 121 .
Emma EIUZUKI XILITEKELZE
EN
16 Warm VIXX u XXXKURXXX
 The Child's Book of
Its Own Life
ALL ABOUT YOURSELF
THE greatest wonder in the world is Life. What is it that makes us move, and
TH Ebreathe, and feel ? Nobody knows that. But there is a greater wonder still
than breathing and moving and feeling. Even animals can do these things.
What is it that makes us think, and love, and hate, and pray ? Nobody
knows. It is the world's great mystery, which no man yet has ever known.
The world is a beautiful place filled with living things, and men and women
and boys and girls are the masters of creation. We can measure the earth ,
and we know what the sun is made of, but we do not know the wonder
of ourselves — what makes you YOU, what makes me ME. In this part of our
book we shall be told all that we can know about the great mystery of Life .

LIVING THINGS AROUND US

death , and new
Of
OF alltheinterest
ing things in By DR. SALEEBY birth ; always and
our wonderful world 08 everywhere there is
life and more life. These
08 none are more interesting
than the living creatures we are the most interesting facts
find everywhere around us . of the world we live in , and
They are our own friends we must ask ever so many
and relations. If we think of questions about them .
For
the moon , beautiful but dead , a instance , what is the difference be
great splendid tomb, we shall see tween a living thing — like a fly, or
what a difference there is between a rose, or a child — and a thing that is
:โ

the moon and our own earth , which is not living or that never has lived
the mother of all living creatures . No like a stick, or a stone , or the gravel
doubt there were once living creatures or clay in the garden ? Then again ,
on the moon, too. If there were no what are the different kinds of living
animals, there were at any rate some things ? How is it they are SO
plants . But the moon has now grown different ? An elephant is very different
cold ; shehaslost from a piece of
all the air that moss, yet an
she once had elephant is
such as our own much more like
earth has now ; a piece of moss
than it is like a
she has not even
a drop of water piece of flint.
left , and so all How is this ?
The business
the plants that of our lives is to
原 once lived upon
the moon are
there ask questions,
dead now , they to try to an
and their swer them , and
to act and live
children . How in obedience to
different is the
earth ! Life fills the answers ;
and after we
the seas, covers have answered
the dry land ,
and flies in the
co these questions,
there remain
$
air above .
Everywhere many more to
there is life How can we tell whether a thing is alive or not alive ? puzzle us. We
and movement , What is the difference between a living thing, like a boy or know
that living
and birth , and a rose, and a thing that is not living, like a stick or a book ? creature die ,

B. B 17
 qazanxa . THE CHILD'S BOOK OF ITS OWN LIFE
and yet life does not die ; there is no
living thing on the earth now that was
alive 2,000 years ago , except, perhaps, a
few great trees like the cedars of
Lebanon, of which we read in the Bible .
All the living things that were alive
then---fishes and flies and birds and
flowers — are dead now ; and yet the
earth is filled with life, and never was
so filled with life before .
Why is it ? It is because of a very
wonderful fact , the fact that all living
things have children , and that these
children are like their parents, and that
when the parents die the children carry
on their lives . There is an old Greek
story of the runners who had to carry
a flaming torch , and as one runner fell,
tired out, he gave the torch to another ;
and so, though the runners fell, and
could not reach the goal , the torch was
not put out , but went on burning. The
torch is like the flame of life, and each
living creature is like the runner who
runs for a little while, and hands on the
flame of life to
the children who
will carry it on
when he is gone.
Where have
all these living
things come
from ? Weknow
that all things ,
living and dead ,
have come from
God , who sus
tains them from
everlasting to
There is an old story of the runners who had to carry a
everlasting. The flaming torch , and as one ruuner fell, tired out , he gave Must anything
questions for us the tərch to another, who carried it and handed on the really alive be
are : How did flame still burning . So every boy and girl carries on life. really
all these kinds of living things come
into existence ? What is their history ?
Who were their parents ? It is only
since the days when our grandfathers
and our grandmothers were children
that men have learnt the truth about
this, and it is well for us that we
have been born in the days when this
truth and so many others have become
known, for the more truth we know the
better it is for our lives .
We will begin by asking ourselves
this question : " How can we tell
whether a thing is alive or not alive ?”
“ Now that is really silly, you may
say, because anyone can tell in a moment
that the fly is alive and that the
ΤΙ1ΕΕΣΣΤΥΤΤΤΤΙΤΤΥ ΣΤΙΤΟΥΤΕΣΤΙΟΥΣΙΑΣΕΙΣ
18
OGTONEX
window -pane is not alive. We know
that the fly is alive, just as we know
that a little boy is alive — because he is
so lively. We call anything alive that
moves about itself, anything that jumps,
or shouts, or swims, or flies. We say
this, but is it true to do so ?.
Really it is not true. When we come
to think of it , the little boy is still alive
even when he is fast asleep. He is just
as alive when asleep as he was when he
was playing before he went to bed . Some
wiselittle child may say that this is not
really a good argument at all, for even
when the little boy is asleep he still
moves, for we can see him breathing.
Now that is quite true, for if we look at
the sleeping boy, and then at the doll
that may be lying in the same bed, we
see that the boy's chest moves up and
down , while the doll's chest does not ;
and if we put our hand to the boy's
chest very gently we may feel his heart
beating with our fingers. The heart has
not gone to sleep ; it is still moving, and
it is moving be
cause it is alive .
So that, after
all , the boy is
lively all the
time, whether
he is asleep or
awake, and the
real question is
whether a thing
which does not
seem to move
at all is alive
like the boy.
lively
like the boy ? We shall sce .
We can imagine how a bird, flying
high in the air, is able to look down
upon the surface of the earth . If we
have been up in a balloon we can under
stand what is meant by a birdseye
view . A birdseye view is a view that
the bird has of the world when it is up
in the sky ; it sees everything at once.
Now, it is always necessary to take a
birdseye view of anything that we are
trying to understand.
If we take nothing but short views
of one thing at a time, our ideas will be
as silly as a fly's idea of an elephant
must be. We must see one thing at a
time, and all things together - we must
 --LIVING THINGS AROUND USacancesce
araa
take both sorts of views. Let us kind of half-and-half life was shown
try, then , to take a birdseye view by trees and plants. The men who said
of living things . these things did not understand very
When we do this we see that there much about them. They knew that
are two great kinds of living things , and there was something strange about the
that they are very different from each oak and the acorn , but they could not
other. The difference is not in size or persuade themselves that anything
quantity, but in kind or quality. The which was not lively was really and
one kind of living things we call animals , truly alive.
and the other kind we call plants ; and But men
a big animal , such as an elephant , is began to find
much more like a little animal, such as out things at
a fly , than it is like a big plant , such as last . You
an oak. A big animal is not like a big know that
plant, nor is a little animal like a little when a child
plant. They are both quite different. climbs on to
What is the difference ? Well, there its father's
are many differences, but the difference shoulders it
we notice first when we take our birds can see much
eye view is a difference of liveliness . farther than
Animals
move about
them selves,
and plants
do not .
Shall we when it is
say, then , standing on
that plants the ground ;
are not and that is
alive ? That like what
has often men did.
been said One man
and thought, le a'r nt
because men Som e
thought that thing , the
if a thing next man
was to be We must take a birdseye view of the world and of our lives. When learnt a
called a birdishighin the air it sees all the things atonce, and we must little more ,
alive
it must be try to take a birdseye view of anything we want to understand. and the
lively. We know that plants are not man who came after him learnt a little
lively , like a boy or girl ; you can more still ; and so the world became
always find a rosebush where you left wiser and wiser. We know to-day all
it in the garden, but the cat is not that the men who lived before us knew ,
always where you left it. So men thought and we have also learnt something that
that because plants did not walk away they did not know ; so that when err
they were not really alive. learning is added to theirs, it is as if
And then men came to see the truth \re were standing on their shoulders and
of what we have already said that, taking a wider view of the world than
after all, there is something about a they were able to take. As men learned
rose which makes it more like a fly than more about the world they were able to
it is like a piece of stone, even though get a birdseye view , and the result of
the fly can fly and the rose cannot. So all their thinking is that we know now
men thought that there were two kinds that plants are just as much alive as
of life : one was real, true life, like the animals. In some ways plants are more
fiy's life, or the tiger's, or yours , and alive than animals , even though they
the other was a sort of half-and -half life , are not lively. The difference is that
not the real thing, but a kind of feeble the life of the animal shows itself in
imitation of it , just enough to make a liveliness , but the life of the plant shows
difference ; and men said that that itself in something else.
19
 wuram THE CHILD'S BOOK OF ITS OWN LIFE .
We know the animal is alive because magnifying glasses, arranged so as to
it is lively , like the boy -— like you. Your make what is called a microscope, we can
life shows itself in your liveliness. But see for ourselves that the tiny specks of
we know the plant is alive because it green stuff which give the leaf its colour
helps the animal to live and to be are moving all the time.
lively, and for many other reasons . Everything is moving. The old idea
Though the plant is very quiet and that liveliness is life and that nothing
still , its life is very important, because else is life is seen to be quite wrong and
it makes the liveliness of the animal short-sighted, and not a birdseye view
possible for the animal lives on the at all, because we find that everything
plant, and, if there were no plants , all moves , whether we can see it or not.
animals, even we ourselves , would die . The tiny specks of stuff that make up
It is very ungrateful for the animal to a pebble are always moving, and so are
live by the life of the plant, to turn the black specks that make the ink on
the plant's life into liveliness , and then this page. If liveliness means life, then
to say that the plant is only half alive, all things are alive, for all things are
or that its life does not really count . lively if only we see them clearly enough.
Animals make a great noise, but This is important to understand if we
plants do just as much work, only they are to think properly of the life of the
do it quietly. We need not always be plant. Perhaps movement is the most
shouting and jumping, and barking or important thing in the world, and perhaps
if we could really see
deep enough we should
find that life itself is
really a very special
kind of movement or
liveliness . But if life
is just a special kind
of movement, it is so
very special that of
course it makes all the
difference whether a
thing has this move
ment or not. The
best way for us to
We know the kitten is alive because it is lively . The oak tree is not lively,
but we know that it is alive because it grows. The same life that makes the understand what it is
kitten lively makes the acorn grow , first into a plant, then into a great tree, and that really makes a
we see from the oak tree that a thing may seem quite still and yet be alive. thing alive is to
blowing a trumpet to prove that we are study very simple kinds of life. The
alive. Plants do none of these things, most simple kinds are plant life oi
but their life makes all other life possible . vegetable life ; some are lively and some
We see now that life means more than are not lively, but they are all alive. If
liveliness . Many things that are not there were no plants animals could not
lively are really alive, but all living live. Plants are older than animals ;
things do not make a noise and walk that is to say, there were plants on the
about. You may look at a thing and earth before there were any animals,
never see it move for a day, or a week, and the first kinds of animals were the
or a year, yet it may be alive. Life children of the first kinds of plants.
means much more than the idea of These are only a very few of the reasons
something which moves by itself. why we should study plants,withoutany
Movement is not really life, because silly idea that they are really not worth
everything moves. Plants do not walk studying. If plants were not here to
about the garden, but they move by study we should not be here to study
themselves. When the acorn grows them . This is just one way of saying
into an oak, it moves upwards. When what we must always remember—that
the sunflower faces the sun as it grows , all living things belong to one another,
it moves not only upwards, but in other and that unless they were always serving
CGL

ways also ; and if we take the leaf each other they could not exist.
of a plant and look at it through The next part of this begins on page 127.
T'ItETI ITZUYU
20
 The Child's Book of
oy WONDER B.
I WONDER WHY
LL our lives we are asking questions ; all our lives weare saying to ourselves,
Where do I go in my
sleep ? How do I remember ? To all of us come such questions as these,
and as long as we live, however wise we grow, such questions will come. The
questions will never stop as long as the world lasts, because out of the answer to
one question another question grows ; and so, all through the world and down all
the ages of time, children and grown -ups have been saying to themselves, “ I
wonder why . " All through our book we shall find the answers to our questions,
but in this part we shall find questions about many things which we particularly
want to know . We learn, first of all, how men know things that happened
long ago, and how they have gathered up all the knowledge that is in the
world. Then we come to the questions asked by children, and any child who
sends a question to the editor of this bo - k may have it answered in this place.

HOW WE KNOW THESE THINGS

ONCE upon a time By THE WISE MAN
there was a
Wise Man who de .
clared that he could answer
every question , and there came
to the Wise Man a little child .
The little child asked the Wise
Man questions all day long,and a this book. The story of the great
the next
anothe day shebrou
r chili ght the
. All day her Man
withWise
sat with the children in the woods,
and the First Child , thinking to
puzzle the Wise Man, asked him
this question : How many boys and
girls are there in all the world ?
The Wise Man waved his wand and
the children fell asleep . When they
woke te wood ;> were full of children .
From one end of the wood to the
other the children reached in a great
and beautiful procession ; for miles
and miles , north and south and east
andn west,
see there
but boy s and s, and to
nothing
wasgirl be
every
boy and girl was happy .
Then the Wise Man said to the
First Child : “ This is the number of
( 6
all the boys and girls in the world ."
And the First Child said to them :
“ This is the Wise Man who will
arswer all the questions .”
over the faces of the children there
came
a great wonder, and every
child in the world came to the Wis?
Man and asked him questions. And
as the Wise Man answered them
there came over the faces of the
children a greater wonder still , for
the answers were SO
wonderful that the
children went on for
ever asking questions, and
the wonder of them never ended .
The Wise Man told the children
the story of the world as it is told in
carth -ball on which we live , how
through all the ages of time boys and
girls have come into the world, have
grown up into men and women , and
have built up great countries and ma le
the earth yield up its fruits - all this,
and all the story of things that hap
pened before the boys and girls were
born, the Wise Man told them . And
none could guess how he became wise,
though all the children wondered ;
and the Wise Man , seeing the wonder
in their eyes , told the children how
he knew these things.
Once upon a time, he said, there
were not nearly so many people on
the carth as there are to-day. We
cannot tell exactly what happened
the :1, because it is so very long ago ;
but we can make -believe that all the
people lived in one mill part of the
world all by themselves. They were
Then like a big family living together in the
same house. By-and -by the family
grew bigger ; more boys and girls
began to come, and at last the house
became too small for them to live in .
so some of them had to go out and
find another home. They wandered
up and down over the earth , and

21
 COLLEZILLA
THE CHILD'S BOOK OF WONDER
when any of them found a comfortable
place to live in , there they stopped and
settled .
So you see , said the Wise Man , we
are all one big family, and though now
some nations seem very different from
others, yet they are each some relation
to the other, brother or sister, or cousin ,
or something. This is why we find so
many of the same words used by
different nations ; the words father and
mother, for instance, are alike in many
different languages.
ATIONS LIVE AND DIE AND PASS
NA AWAY LIKE YOU AND ME
Some of these early nations have died,
but others are still living to -day ; for
nations, just like you and me, are born,
grow up , and die, only, of course, it
takes them a good deal longer time
than it takes us . And perhaps some
of the nations that are alive to -day
will die and pass away some time in
the future .
You may have often wondered how
we know about what happened long,
long ago , before there were any books
or newspapers, even before there was
w iting of any sort. It is quite easy to
find out what happened only a hundred
years ago , because there are plenty of
books that will tell us all about it .
But what about things that happened
thousands of years ago ?
Well, I am sure one of the times
you like most , said the Wise Man , is
the time when father takes you on his
knee, and tells you stories of what
happened when he was a little boy.
You will remember many of those
stories all your life , and when you grow
up you will tell them to vour children .
OW CHILDREN HAVE CARRIED DOWN
Now , the boys and girls who lived long
ago were just as fond of stories as you
are . They, too , would ask for stories ;
and when they grew up , they, too, would
tell these stories to their children . So
the stories came down to us, right from
the earliest time, when there was no read-
ing or writing, but simply story -telling .
That is the first way in which we get
to know what happened far, far back .
Boys and girls have been some of the
most important people in handing on to
us our story of the world . What a great
loss it would have been if those boys
and girls who lived once upon a time
OXYLITTIMETITOR
22
A KOMULATKERTEX
had forgotten the stories that were
told them !
The next way of finding out what
happened long ago, the Wise Man went
on, is by reading the earliest books.
What do you think these books were ?
Not books such as we have now , but
bricks ; just clay bricks, with writing
and pictures marked on them while the
clay was soft, and then baked hard in
the heat of the sun . Thousands of
these bricks have been dug out of the
earth at Babylon and other places.
When these cities were destroyed long
ago, they became gradually covered
with earth ; the houses, the streets , the
libraries, and everything in them were
buried under the ground. And down
under the ground these bricks have
been kept dry and clean and fresh , and
so to -day we are able to read the writing
and the pictures, and find out what the
people in those days were doing.
THE STRANGE
STBERFULSTORY
BOOKOF A DREAMER'S
The Wise Man showed the children a
book he had in his hand . It was the
Koran , which is the Bible of the people
who believe in the Prophet Mohammed .
The Prophet Mohammed, said the Wise
Man, used to have dreams, and in his
dreams he heard voices speaking to
him . When he woke he would write
down what he had heard on anything
that was handy ; if he saw a flat stone ,
or a piece of leather, or a leaf of a palm
tree , he would use it just as you use a
slate or a piece of paper, and cover it
with writing. Aiter he died, the young
man who had been what we should call
the private secretary of the Prophet
gathered the stones and leaves together,
and from them he wrote out the book
which is thought by the millions of
Mohammedans to -day to be the most
sacred book in the world .
Then the Wise Man told them of the
monuments. In ancient times when a
king did anything of which he was very
proud, such as conquering his enemies
and taking them captive, he had an
account of it carved on a big stone or
pillar, and set it up so that people
could read all about what he had done.
Thousands of these monuments have
been found, and there must stili be
thousands buried in Egypt and parts of
Asia , The writing on these stones looks
very strange to us. Most on those found
 CALL
25

HOW THE WORLD'S STORY WAS FIRST TOLD

The Egyptians painted the walls of their temples and tombs with strange letters and pictures which tell the history
of Egypt. This is from the wall of a tomb where the paint is still fresh, though it is thousands of years old

SA

VER
ANN MS NAMA LOG BA
ite 蘭
rit

LUIG ul.
.
RC

Cleopatra's Needle,
once in Egypt, and now
standing by the Thames
in London, shows the
strange writing on the
Egyptian monuments.
The Rosetta Stone, which taught us to read the strange There was no paper
writing the Egyptians leſt behind. It said the same thing in old Egypt, and the
in three kinds of writing, and one kind was the Egyptian. people wrote on bricks
Men knew one of the other kinds of writing, so that they and on the dried pith
of the papyrus plant ,
were able to find out what the Egyptian writing meant. here shown growing.

om
ET -- **
EM410
了 ILL
T

An early way of writing was to mark soft This is a piece ofpapyrus,showing how the Egyptians used it to
clay and bake it into a brick like this, write upon. Nearly all these things are in the British Museum .
23
 UNITY
MUXADA 0onnect
« THE CHILD'S BOOK OF WONDER 21

in Egypt have pictures upon them,
instead ofwords and letters. When you
are in London, said the Wise Man, you
should walk along the Thames Embank-
ment , and look at the tall column called
Cleopatra's Needle. This was fetched
from one of the great temples of Egypt,
and is covered with pictures ; we call brown Egyptian baby when Joseph
these pictures hieroglyphics, which was in Egypt ; ladies' combs and
means sacred carvings. When the first
of these old pillars was found , no one
could read the writing or understand
the pictures. It was like a hard riddle.
At last , when all the clever men were
very nearly giving up the riddle, a
great piece of good fortune happened .
Some French officers who were in
Egypt about a hundred years ago, in
1799, happened to dig up a stone
with writing on it, and, to their great
delight, the writing was in three
languages. One of
these was the
picture writing,
and another was
Greek . Now, it
was easy enough
to read the Greek ,
with people in those days ; so dry and
air- tight were the tombs that everyº
thing in them has been wonderfully
well preserved. Dolls have been found
buried with the little girls who played
with them long before Moses lived ;
a baby's rattle that amused a tiny
mirrors , gold ornaments, and jewellery,
worn perhaps when the Children of
Israel were passing through the Red
Sea . And so, little bylittle,
we are
finding out what life was like in the
old days, and are piecing together the
different bits of knowledge that we
pick up, just as you put together the
pieces of a puzzle to make the whole.
There is one more way in which we
are being helped to do this said the
Wise Man , and that is by finding buried
cities and towns
just as they were
hundreds of years
ago. In England
people have found
a few old Roman
towns , such as

and when they had Silchester and

made out
that meant they
guessed that the
picture writing
would mean just
what

THE EARLIEST GAME OF NINEPINS

P Bath , but these
are not very old ;
only 1,500 or 1,600
years. But in parts
of Asia , such as at
the same thing. These ninepins, the gate to play through , and the little Babylon , men are
And so it did. That the grave of a child who used to playwith them . They digging out whole
gave people the show us that boys and girls played the same games then towns that disap
key to the riddle , as now , andit is by findingsuch things that we know peared thousands
what happened be ore books were written to tell us.
and the whole of y :ars ago.
mystery was made clear. They found The Wise Man finished his story of
that an eagle stood for the letter how all these things are known , and the
a, a leg and foot for b, a serpent with children began to ask their questions .
horns for f, a hand for t, an owl for But first of all remember , said the Wise
m , a chicken for u , and so on . A man Man , that nothing happens by chance.
with his hands lifted up meant prayer. There is a reason and a cause for
After reading this one stone , the Wise everything . If we are clever enough we
Man went on , it was easy to read all shall find out why we live and how we
the other writings on stones and pillars are related to one another . For we are
found in Egypt . This precious stone is really one big family ; or we may say
known as the Rosetta Stone , because it that the different nations are like the
was found at a place called Rosetta , beads on a string - each bead is different
and you can see it at the British Museum and separate , but they are all joined
w enever you are in London . together by the same string. Through
Another wayin which we are finding all the story of the world we find this
out a great deal about early times, string joining up the beads ; through it
saia 'e Wise Man , is by the opening all we find some plan at work, and see
up of unany tombs and graves under- everything being guided and controlled
ground, especially in Egypt. by the hand of God .
All kinds of things used to be buried The children's questions begin on page 177.
TYYTY TIMOIY
MITEETILIUM
24
 The Child's Book of
NATURE
DO
THE STORY OF THE ANIMALS
URE, a wise man said, is the mother of us all. By Nature we really mean
Tthe
NAJATURE,
whole of life - everything that is not made by man. But many natural
things, such as the sun and moon and the earth itself, come into other parts of
our book, and here we shall read of the two most important things in Nature
Animal Life and Plant Life. There were plants on the earth before the animals
came, but it is better to begin with animals, and our book of Nature tells us
first the story of the animals, and then the story of flow rs and trees. We shall
not tell our story as grown-up people do, with big words and strange names ;
but we shall learn all that we need know now about animals and flowers. The
beginning of our story tells us of the wonderful things that live in the world with
us, and the huge monsters that once lived upon earth and have now passed away.

NATURE'S WONDERFUL FAMILY

HEN we are ..
kept awake at By ERNEST A. BRYANT
night by the noise
which cats in the garden
make, perhaps we wish that
there were no such things
as cats . Let us suppose that
all the cats were sent out of
this country. We know that our
houses would soon be swarming with
rats and mice . But something far
more strange than that would hap-
pen . Soon , nearly all those beautiful
wild flowers called heartsease would
fade away and die . We should have
scarcely a heartsease left . That
would be because the cats were gone .
What does the cat do to make
the heartsease grow ? Nothing at
all. It never touches a heartsease
if it can help it !
Well , why would the heartsease
die if the cats were to go away ?
Because , if the cats went away,
they could not catch the field-
mice. Soon there would be SO
many field -mice that they would
eat up all the nests of the humble
bees in the fields. Now, the humble
bees are the little friends which make
the heartsease grow . The heartsease
has a sweet juice which the humble
bees love. The humble bees fly into
the heartsease to drink this juice, and
in doing so they carry in with them
from other plants a dust, called
pollen, which the heartsease needs
to make its seeds. If it does not
t dust the heartsease must die.
get thaore
Theref , if our gardens are to have
this pretty flower,
we must have cats
to keep the field
mice from eating all the nests
of the humble bees . The
cats do not kill all the field
mice. That would not do .
They prevent the mice from
becoming too many. Then , though
a few mice do eat nests of the humble
bee, there are still enough bees left
to bring the yellow dust to the
heartsease .
That is a little thing which clever
men were a long time in learning .
We ought always to remember it ,
because it shows how Nature has to
plan so that the world may go on in
the best way for us. When we think
of the world , we think of a great place
where men and women and children
live . But the world was not made
simply to be a home for men and
women and children . If there were
no living creatures but ourselves,
there would be a great many empty
places in the world . There would
be a great deal of work left
undone. There are places in the
world where we cannot live.
But Nature does not like empty
spaces . She must have living
creatures everywhere, in earth and
sky and sea. And she has life
everywhere.
Our eyes are not strong enough to
see all the tiny things which live. If
our eyes were as strong as the
strongest magnifying glasses, ewe
should see that the air we breath is

A
25
 -THE CHILD'S BOOK OF NATURExxta
full of very tiny creatures. We should of tall trees ; some of the animals
see that the soil in the garden swarms could fly and swim . The animals we
with little insects. We should see that know have come from these ; through
the little drops of water which we drink thousands and thousands of years the
have in them more living creatures than
we can count. We know that there is
life in the air as there is life in the sea .
We can see the jellyfish floating on
the top of the waves . We know that
there are big fish and little fish beneath
the surface. We know that there are
monsters in the sea like whales and
sharks, we know that deep down in
the sea, deeper than the deepest coalpit
in the world, there are creatures such
as nobody has ever seen .
So there is life everywhere, all kinds
of life, as is explained in the child's
BOOK OF ITS OWN LIFE on page 17 .
Besides men and women and children ,
Nature
small , tohas many
carry workmen
on the work of, the
great and.
world
Some are big, like elephants ; some are
so small that we cannot see them . Some
fly in the air, some swim in the sea , strangely as the forests .
The story of the animals and birds
some creep in the earth . Some live
among us as our friends ; some live wild
in woods and mountains .
HE WAY WE SHALL READ ABOUT
THE
THE GREAT ANIMAL WORLD
We shall read of their wonderful
ways . We shall see how all these
animals, reptiles, birds, fishes, insects,
belong to one great family ; and how ,
though they seem so different, they
are all the same in some ways . We
shall see how men have tamed wild
beasts, and how all this great kingdom
of animal life is subject to man , the
lord of all the animals.
We shall take the big animals and the
reptiles first, then the birds, then the
insects , and after that the fishes which
live in the water, the monsters that look
like fish but really are animals, the
creatures that live in shells, and the
creatures which , although they are really
living animals, look like plants in the sea.
There have not always been the same
sort of animals on the earth as now .
Once upon a time , when there were no
men and women and children on the
earth , the only living creatures were
strange and monstrous animals such as
we see in our pictures. These huge
creatures, bigger than any animals now
alive, were the masters of the earth
before man came. Some were so big
that they could eat off the top branches
26
UZU
monsters were changing and passing
away, until in their places we have the
animals of our own time. Deep down
in the rocks we find remains of the
monsters still ; sometimes when men
dig deep down they come upon the
whole body of an animal which must
have died and been covered up when
the rocks were being formed .
LIVING THINGS HAVE 'CHANGED
has taken millions and millions
of years to make the birds and
animals the beautiful creatures that
they now are. We read in another
part of our book the story of how
forests became changed into coal , and
we have now to learn that living
things have been changed just as
makes us wonder if Nature tried all
sorts of patterns before she made up
her mind what sort of creatures should
live in the seas and on the land . Once
all creatures lived in the seas and
rivers. Some lived in shells. Others
were soft things like jelly, and had no
backbones. These had all the sea to
But
themselves for a very long time.
during this time they were growing into
separate families, unlike those which
had gone before, Proper fish began to
swim about, and there were great sea
scorpions, as big as a tall man , and
fishes with skins made like armour.
THELREPTUL
BIRDS FLYING DRAGONS,
ES,, THE MAN
After these there grew up great
creatures which could live in the water
or out of the water, as the hippo
potamus can to -day. Then came
enormous reptiles. We have nothing
living now like the reptiles which , by
slow degrees, came into existence
millions of years ago. Some of them
had bodies as large as elephants, with
heads like lizards, and huge teeth .
Some could fly, and some could swim
as well as they could walk. From
some of the flying monsters came the
birds, and still later came animals
which, instead of scales and bony
spines and great plates of bone , had
ใน

TrarirunD Maura ILO. Iuraund ZZDA

ANIMALS THAT LIVED BEFORE MAN

The flying reptile

calledpterodactyle The flying reptile
called pterodactyle
The giant lizard with two brains
called stegosaurus

First known air - breathing animal

called archægosaurus

Lizard with feet like a bird Horned animal like an

called iguanodon antelope
called sivatherium

The armiadillo , like a giant

tortoise
called glyptodon The great monster with
six horns
The elephant with four tusks fighting the tiger with called dinoceras
teeth like swords
called mastodon and macharodas
Anom

The great lizard with feet as big as a table The giant elephant that the first men fought
called mammoth
called brontosaurus

The fish - lizard of the sea The fish -lizard with a neck like a snake
called ichthyosaurus called plesiosauru ,
MEALT யாட்டியமாட்டாயாயபயமைய
2.1

எLLITE
ET LOTURURUETUTUTORIELLE VALIK
27
 QUE
THE CHILD'S BOOK OF NATURE
hair to cover them . Little by little
the animals and birds changed, until
they became the kind of creatures that
are now living; and then, last of all, things were just as carefully protected
millions and millions of years after the
lower animals, came man .
NATURE HAS BEEN PACKING,HER
OF YEARS
No man is clever enough to say how
much time passed away while all this mud in Siberia, and became frozen hard
was happening, but we know that at
one time certain kinds of creatures
lived on the earth or in the waters,
and that after these came creatures of
a different kind . There are no books
to tell us these things, because there
were no men alive to write books , but
we find the bodies of these creatures
deep down in the rocks to -day. When
you unpack a box you begin at the
top, and you know that the things
on the top were put last into the box ,
that those lower down were there before
the top ones, and that the things at the
bottom were put in first of all. Well,
Nature has been packing away things
in her cellars for millions and millions of
years. Her box is the solid rock . It was
not always solid rock . It was mud and
water . The water dried up , and as
thousands of years passed away the
mud grew harder and harder, so that
it is now rock , almost as hard as iron .
How do we find the old -time animals
in these rocks ? They were born, and
lived, and died , and were covered over.
Floods carried them away to the seas
and lakes, where mud came swirling
down with the water from the rivers.
The bodies sank and were covered with
layer after layer of mud . As time
passed away, Nature dried up the seas
and lakes, and, by pressure from within
the earth , forced up the bed of the seas
and lakes and rivers and made it dry
land . The fishes and birds and animals
which had died and been buried in the
mud were sealed up in this mass, and
as the mud hardened into rock these
creatures became part of the stone .
HºwTHAT
We LIVED
FIND THE
LONG
ANIMALS
AGO
When we dig deep down to -day we
find animals, birds, and fishes , and even
insects, many of them perfectly shaped,
in the rock , where they have lain for
millions of years. The mud which
settled about them was so soft that
it did not crush them out of shape.
TETYT
28
It preserved their shape, as it pre
served the shape of the beautiful ferns
printed in the coal. Some of the big
by the mud, without being turned to
stone . animals
Great like the mam
moth , which was a sort of huge elephant
covered with long hair, died thousands
of years ago through sinking into deep
in that mud ; and some of these have
been found lately with flesh , and skin ,
and hair all preserved .
Of course, not all the creatures which
were once alive have been preserved in
this way . Many were destroyed in
various ways after their death , but there
still remains enough to show us what
creatures of long ago were like, and to
tell from what families those now on the
earth first came. It seems very hard to
believe that the birds , with their lovely
plumage and their sweet song, came from
ugly reptiles. But birds, like reptiles,
have been found sealed up in rocks .
WHAT THELOOKED
FIRST OF ALL
LIKE
The oldest bird known is called the
archæopteryx. That is a Greek word,
which really means " ancient wing."
It was an extraordinary bird . It had
a long tail, not all feathers as a bird's
tail is now , but like a lizard's tail, long
and thick , with bones and flesh , and
with feathers growing from it . It had
two legs, with which it could walk or
perch in the trees, but it had two
other limbs like hands, which it prob
ably used to climb about the trees
instead of flying from bough to bough,
as birds now do. It had a curious eye
fitted with a sort of armour shield as
the reptiles have, and its beak was
armed with great strong teeth .
Of course, there is no such bird as
this now , and it is not surprising that
such a bird should pass away. Even
in these days two or three strange
birds have died out. The dodo was
quite common in the island of Mauritius
300 years ago, but there is not one
alive to -day in all the world , although
we may see the skeleton of one at the
South Kensington Museum . It could
not fly, because its wings were so small , 1
and the dodo family was soon all killed .
In New Zealand there used to be vast
numbers of birds called moas, which
were twice as high as the biggest
OXXXXTDOUDERER ETT BRETTO
 Nam
--NATURE'S WONDERFUL FAMILY TILDELIL
.
man — as much as 14 feet high. There was 14 feet . In many ways it was like
still lives a bird called the apteryx , or a bird. Its front legs, it is supposed ,
kiwi ( see plate facing page 32], which, had first been used as paddles to help
like the moa and the dodo, and the it to swim . As time passed away these
ostrich and the penguin , cannot fly ; became changed into wings, with which
but , though it is a fair -sized bird, it is it learned to fly. It lived on herbs.
tiny compared with the moa. The There were others rather like it which
great auk , which used to come in thou- ate flesh . One of these was a fearful
sands to the shores of Great Britain , creature called the megalosaurus, which
is another bird which has died out fed upon the flesh of the great animals
within the last hundred years. There that lived on herbs. Another was called
is not one in the world to -day, but there the brontosaurus, and a third was These
called
are a few of its egg-shells, the ceteosaurus .
and they are so rare that monsters had bodies as
men pay hundreds of big as the biggest ele
pounds for them . phants . Their legs were
Men have killed many shaped like those of the
birds and animals, but iguanodon, except that the
in making the world what front legs were longer. The
it now is Nature has length of these creatures
killed far more. Whole was as much as 80 feet ;
races of animals have and their backs , when
been destroyed by earth they were full grown , were .
quakes and floods, by the quite 14 feet from the
sinking of land into sea , ground. All these creatures
and by snow and frost and belonged to a family called
ice descending upon lands the dinosaurs, which means
where before all was sun terrible lizards.
shine and rich vegetation . The sea, as we have seen ,
Then , again , great families had wonderful creatures in
of animals have gradually those far -off days . The
died out , and given place waters teemed with what
to others better able to we now call the great fish
fight the battle of life. lizards. One of these was
Think of the horse, the ichthyosaurus, which
that swift and beautiful was 40 feet long. It had
creature ! Once upon a a wonderfully formed eye,
time, long before man which it could adjust so
appeared on the earth , as to see things quite near
the horse was a miserable or those far away. The
little thing with five toes. remains of this creature
on its front feet and three BURIED ANIMALS are common in England,
behind, and only as big as We know that huge monsters once and scientists have been
a fox. The horse has, lived, because when we dig deep able to learn that though
through a long number down weinfind their bodies,likethis,
earth, where its homeit was
they water, usedchiefly in the
to crawl on
of years, become larger buried
have lain the
for millions ofyears.
and swifter and more to the land to bask in the
beautiful, and its soft , spreading toes sun , as turtles and seals still do. The
have become hard hoofs. ichthyosaurus has died out, but the
Think, again, of the humming bird, shark lives as a relic of those bygone
that tiny beauty, notmuch bigger than a times . The whale is a much younger
good -sized bee,, and remember that it creature .
has descended from a monster called the The sloths, small animals to-day,
iguanodon , which had a great head like a which cling to the branches of trees and
lizard, 1 yard in length. It had a great live upside down , are descended from
tail and enormous hind legs, with enormous creatures which , instead of
shorter ones in front ; and when it having to climb the trees to eat the
reared itself upon its hind legs the tender shoots, were powerful enough to
height of its head from the ground pull the tree down to their mouths !
E ணன் mrrrrrr ELETTO
29
 THE CHILD'S BOOK OF NATURE
The bodies of these mon
sters were as big as ele
phants, and their front legs
had enormous power . Simi
lar to the great sloth was an
GELE
animal called the mylodon ,
the remains of which have
These pictures show us some of the strange creatures that bave
passed away , and help us to understand the story of animal life from been found in a huge cave
the first thing we know about it. Once all creatures lived in the sea, in Patagonia, along with
andthe first of all were only soft things like jelly, with no bones. the bones of other wild
animals. It must have been
buried there a very great
time ago, for among the
bones were those of animals
now extinct . In this cave
there were also the bones
of dogs and men , with
These creatures had the sea to themselves for a very long time,and bones made sharp by man
slowly they grew into separate families, unlike those which had gone be to use, perhaps, as dinner
fore. Proper fishes beganto swim about, and someofthem lived in shells. forks ; and here also was
Then on the land great forests grew ,and a new kind of animals came.
found a quantity of cut
grass , which makes us be
lieve that once upon a time
savages kept the mylodon
alive in the cave and fed it
with grass , just as we feed
cows and horses to-day.in
Nearly all these extinct
monsters made their home
at one time in Britain. In
The first crocodile appeared now , but this age is important be those days there was no
cause great trees grew , drinking in the sunshine for thousands of
years, and then fell, to be buried in the earth , and to lie there sea between England and
millions of years until they turned to coal. That is how coal began. Europe, and animals could
walk from Africa and Europe
and Asia into England and
Scotland and Ireland. There
were then in his country
tigers with tusks , lions
bigger than any now to be
found, great bears which
lived in caves, rhinoceroses
covered with wool , and
In the sea great fish -lizards grew, four times as long asa man, some herds of hippopotamuses.
with necks like snakes. There were great sea -serpents, fish with skins Scattered about the United
almost like iron,and huge animals that could live either on land or sea . Kingdom were monkeys and
gazelles, great wild cattle
and little wild horses,
beavers, raccoons, leopards,
lynxes, and cats , such as
are now only known as
Egyptian cats. There were
crocodiles and alligators in
enormous numbers in the
rivers, and wild hunting
dogs and wolves in the
woods and forests. We find
Some of these creatures could fly and swim , and some could eat off tree remains of such things as
tops. The first birds came, and flying dragons. It has taken millions
of years for these strange things to becomethe beautiful birds we know . these in quarries and coal
HOW THE ANIMALS CAME INTO THE WORLD pits and in deep cuttings
ΣΣΙΣΣΥΣΠΙΣΤΤΣτααΙΙΥΣΟΣΟΣΤΙΣΕΙΣ ΣΣΣΤΣΙΣΤΟΣ UITTYYYYrrar Inn
30
 annun NATURE'S WONDERFUL FAMILY
when railways are laid or
where wells are sunk . Ani
mals which can live now
only in the coldest parts of
the earth once lived in
Britain , and animals which
can live only in hot climates
once lived here. From this
we see how great have been
the changes in the climate
of this country in bygone
ages, and this helps us to On the land the great monsters were growing up, and the mastodon,
understand one way in like a giant elephant with four tusks, fought the savage tiger with
which animals from time to teeth like swords. There were bats in those days, and a strange little
time have come to their end . animal walked the earth which we may, perhaps, call the first horse.
These great animals, once
upon a time, had the world
to themselves. They were
the masters of the earth .
They disappeared in the
ways we have seen , and in
many other ways. Many
of them were destroyed by
the Great Ice Age, of which
we read in the STORY OF The little sloths we see to -day have descended from creatures like
that clasping a tree on the right of this picture. The giant sloth lived
THE EARTH , beginning on when the hippopotamus and elephant began, when there were horses
page 4, when the climate with many toes, and animals like tortoises bigger than a man,
of a great part of the world
was suddenly changed, and
nearly all living creatures
perished from cold .
All these things about the
early world we learn from
Nature's own storehouses ,
the rocks and bogs or frozen
wastes in which the strange
monsters of land and sea fell
and died. The great fish
lizards are no more, the Slowly the world grew into the kind of place it is to -day , and the
animals became more like those we know . Bears lived in the
monstrous flying reptiles caves, and the woolly rhinoceros and the savage hyena roamed
have gone . The gigantic the earth with the mammoth, like a giant elephant with long hair,
birds are represented only
by the ostrich and the emu .
But there are still links with
the puzzles of those old
days. There is still an
animal that flies — the bat ;
and there is still an animal
which lays eggs like a bird ,
and has a beak like a duck .
It is called the platypus ,
and it lives in Australia,
where that strange animal
the kangaroo, looking like
some of the old-world freaks, At last came man, the lord of all the animals. The first men lived in trees
is also to be found . The and caves,with thewild animals about them ,and it has taken thousands
of years for men to learn how to build houses, and tame animals,
great sloth has come down and make fires, and write books like this to tell us what aa wonderful
to very small size , though place the world has been, and how much more wonderful still it is to be.
some people believe that SOME OF THE GREAT MONSTERS OF THE PAST
31
 -THE CHILD'S BOOK OF NATURE
there are still monstrous ones alive in river just as the worm made its tunnel
Patagonia. The bats, with their wings through the hard woodwork.
and claws and mouse-like bodies, re- There is nothing more ugly at the
mind us of the curious things of old Zoo than the alligators and crocodiles.
time, and the lizardsand the armadilloes They are cruel creatures, and have to
tell us of a time when their ancestors be killed when we catch them, because,
were among the marvels of the world . when they can, they eat men . Yet we
What is the use of all these animals ? cannot afford to lose them , for they eat
That is what we often ask ourselves. things which destroy the crops, and dead
All things really have their uses. bodies of animals drowned in the rivers .
The humble animals and birds and If the alligators did not eat them , these
insects are able to teach human beings bodies would poison the rivers . The
THE NAMES OF THE WONDERFUL THINGS THAT LIVE ON THE EARTH
1 Eagle 35 Rabbits
2 Sea-gulls 36 Swallows
3 Sparrow Hawk 37 Raven
4 Doves V 38 Cobra
i Pheasant
5 Cockatoos 39
6 Tree Leopards 40 Thrush
7 Whales 41 Blue -tit
3 Lemur 42 Bat
9 Opossum 43 Kingfishers
1o Macaw 44 Wolves
II Sword-fish 45 Hyena
12 Dolphins 46 Pine Martin
13 Python 47 Sea Lion
14 Orang -outang 48 Platypus
15 Sloth 28
49 Beavers
16 Humming Bird 50 Stork
17 Elephants mus ‫ ی‬، ). 30 51 Owl
18 Hippopota 32 26 52 Kiwi-kiwi
19 Rhinoceros 53 Flying-fishes
20 Monkey 54 Salmon
21 Camel 55 Toad
22 Ostrich 56 Rat
23 Zebra 57 Shark
24 Giraffe 52 58 Penguins
25 Crocodiles 59 Bee
26 Man 47 60 Cuttle-fish
27 Squirrel 61 Star - fish
28 Deer 62 Oysters
29 Kangaroos 58
63 Tortoise
30 Sheep 57
64 Crab
31 Lion 65 Globe- fish
32 Ant-eater 66 Carp
33 Porcupine 67 Cup Sponge
34 Bear 68 Whelk
The coloured picture opposite shows 68 kinds of living things, from the jelly - fish in the sea to elephants and
men . We do not see them in the proper size, but we can tell from the picture what a wonderful world of living
things this is. No man has ever been able to count them all. By looking at the numbers in this picture, and
then at the side numbers, you will be able to find out the names of the things in the big picture opposite.

many lessons. A great man named
Brunel, of whom we shall read in another
part of our book, wanted to make a
tunnel under the Thames . It was quite
a new thing which he had to do. And
how do you think he got the idea for
the work ? He watched a little worm
burrowing its way into wood, building
round itself a case of slime which
became hard and firm , and making a
tunnel that could not fall in . And
Brunel made his tunnel under the
32
great hippopotamus, also, eats the
things which grow in the rivers. If
he did not , the rivers would become
choked with weeds, and boats would
be unable to pass up and down.
So there is work for us all . Man has
his work ; so has the elephant in the
forest, the hippopotamus in the river,
and the tiniest insect that hums in the
air. They do the work they are created
for — to help to keep the world healthy.
The next animal story is on page 131.
TUZILIZO
 SEC

WONDERFUL THINGS THAT LIVE ON THE EARTH WITH US

Their names are all given on the opposite page
FACE PAGE 32
 SMAKE
The Child's Book of
PEARE MEN & WOMEN miton
MIL
Ear

THE STORY OF GREAT LIVES

HAVEyou everthought,whenlookingthrough the window,thatonceupon

Then a man dug
things out of the earth, mixed them , and made something hard, smooth, and clear,
so that he could see through it ; and it was called glass. Who was he ? We do

BENS
not know . But let us think of the great debt we owe him as we stand at the
window and look out upon the world. And all through our lives let us remember
that we owe more than we can ever pay to those who lived before us—to those
who wrote books and painted pictures, who found steam and made railways, who
found gas and lighted our houses, who made our roads, who gave us tools to
work with ; to the doctors who found out the secret of health, to the travellers
who found new lands, to those who laid down their lives that we might live
and know more and more . We shall read here of some of the greatest of these.

NAP
OLE
ON .
MEN WHO MADE THE WORLD KNOWN WEL
LIN
Gott

ALTHOUGH millions By MANY WRITERS

and many different
of people live in peoples, they were
Great Britain , nobody as surprised as we
in this country is so stupid should be if we suddenly
as to think that these are all discovered the air above to
the people there are, or that ours be full of islands and peoples.
is the only country in the world. People living where the DAD
We know that England , weather is always warm never WIN

Scotland, and Wales are three coun- dreamed that there were such things
tries joined together, with the sea
all round them , but we know that
away over the sea to the west there
is Ireland, and right away still
farther to the west, thousands of
miles away, there is America, with
twice as many people as Britain has .
We know that crossing the sea to the
East from England we reach Europe ,
and going forward, first over the land,
then over the sea, we may get to
Egypt and China and India, and the
great lands of the East. Far down
to the south, right under our feet , as
STEPHENSOR
as snow and ice . Those who lived
where the weather is always cold
did not imagine that there were parts
of the world where it is alwayssummer,
where oranges and grapes grow wild
in the sunshine, where birds of para
dise fly like living rainbows amidst
the trees and fireflys dance like
winged rubies in the glowing air.
The story is told in the child's
STOPY OF THE EARTH , on page 5 , of
how people used to think that the
earth was flat. The people of those
early times did not find it easy to

it were, we come to Australia and make their way about the world,
New Zealand , with all their people. and to discover other countries and
BEG

It does not seem a clever thing to
know all this now, but once upon a
time people in Britain thought that
there was no other land but theirs,
and no other people but themselves.
Other people in different parts of
people. Still, little by little , they did
learn their way about. There were
people living all round the Mediter
ranean Ocean, and they began to
spread about, and to find that the
world was larger than they thought. 1

the world used to think the same
thing about their countries and them-
selves. They did not travel from
country to country as we do now , so
they could not get to know of far -off
places and different peoples. When
they did begin to learn that the
world had many different countries ,
RJULIUS CÆSAR
Qas
33
There were wonderful people living in
the north of Palestine called the
Phænicians. Their country ran along
by the sea for a distance as great as RUS
KIN
that between London and Preston,
and they built tiny ships and began
to explore this great sea. They made
friends with King David and King
HERBERT SPENCERE
 CELOR
Tamm THE CHILD'S BOOK OF MEN AND WOMEN
Solomon ; they went to Greece and
Spain ; they even came to England.
They found the way over land to India
and China and Persia , and parts of
Africa. Well, that had all been for-
gotten , and, hundreds of years later,
Rome, so proud to think herself mistress
of all the world, did not know that
there was such a place as China ! And
China had never heard of Rome!
One day somebody brought news to
the Court of China saying that far away
there was another part of the world,
with many rich people in it. The name
of the place was not known , but China
made up her mind to have the place, no
matter what it might be called. A great
Chinese general was sent with an army
through the centre of the continent of
Asia to conquer this unknown land ; but
he was taken ill before he could get far.
Centuries passed away, and Rome
was conquered by barbarians, and then
nearly all that had been learned was
lost again. Stupid men , who thought
nothing about learning, destroyed all
the writings that they could , and so
THE BOY WHO WALKED TO
Marco Polo and His Wonderful Adventures
is a wonderful thing, but it was, to
IT a great extent, the doings of a boy
which set men exploring the great seas
to find their way about the world . As
we have already seen , men from time
to time did go about, but a: they made
a secret of what they saw and did, their
knowledge was of no service to the rest quite ill by the hardships, but he got
of mankind. Marco Polo was only a
small boy of fifteen , and not very strong,
when he set out on his travels through
strange lands, among savage people, to
find his way to China, but when he grew
up , what he had seen and known was
written in a book for all men to read .
His tales of strange countries and
peoples, and of the riches and splen-
dours of other lands, made other men
want to go where he had been. His book
told them how he had got there, so they
were able to go by the route which he
had followed , but it also caused them
to make up their minds to go by sea to
the countries which he had visited .
Marco Polo did not go alone to China.
He went with his father and uncle . He
was born in Venice, anů only the love
of travel made them set out. His
34
the world was divided off again much
as it had been before, the people in one
country knowing little or nothing about
those in other countries.
Think what the world lost by this. If
all the books in the world to -day were
destroyed , and no more were printed
for hundreds of years, people would not
be able to read , and some day they
would have to begin again to learn all
that we know now. So , as that sort of
thing did happen in the old days, and
people went for hundreds of years with
out learning again what had been lost ,
we need not be surprised that Cæsar
never heard of China, or that Shake
speare never knew that there was such
a place as Australia .
We shall see in our stories of dis
coverers and explorers how the great
heroes of old times found their way about
the world ,through strange, savage lands,
and upon seas over which they had
nothing to guide them . To enjoy the
stories it will be better if we can have
a map or globe of the world before us ,
because it is then easier to understand .
CHINA
father and uncle had already been to
China and back , and now they decided
that the brave boy Marco should go with
them . They had to go over mountains,
and across terrible deserts, through hot
burning lands, and places where the cold
was terrible. Poor Marco was made
better and kept bravely on .
At last they came to China, where a
great King , called Kublai Khan, was
very pleased to see them . Marco grew
up at the Court, and became a great
favourite of the King Marco learned
to speak several languages, and was so
clever that the king sent him as his
ambassador to Cochin China, to India,
and to other lands . Each time he came
back, Marco was able to tell the King
not only the answer to the message with
which he had been sent , but all about
the countries themselves : how the people
lived, what their trades were, and what
were the big cities and rivers and moun.
tains wherever he went. The King
had never had so clever an ambassador
as this before, and he heaped riches
on Marco and his father and uncle .
 ILULUK
THE BOY WHO WALKED TO CHINA
At last find In
the Polos dia by sail
wanted to ing over
return to an the sea
Venice , to it .
from To show
which they how hard
had been Marco
absent for Polofound
twenty it to make
three people be.
years . The lieve the
King was account of
very sorry his tra
to let them vels , we

go , but at must read

last con- This strange picture is taken from a very old French book called “ The Book the story
sented , of Marvels," and showsthe great King,Kublai Khan, seated in a canopy on the of what
and they backs of four elephants , as described by Marco Polo in the account of his travels. happened
came back. Marco remembered all he when he and his father and uncle
had seen and learned, and afterwards he got back to Venice. Nobody knew
had it all written down . them. Nobody would
For long, people did not believe that the little
believe his story to be Marco Polo who had
true. They could not gone away as a boy had
think it possible that become a great traveller
there were such great and come back a rich
lands as China and man . So the Polos
India , with millions asked their old friends
upon millions of people. to a great feast. First
And the talk of silks they appeared in robes
and jewels and beauti of crimson satin ; then
ful foods and scents of they changed these for
which he told seemed other robes , and at last
just as untrue . But they came into the room
by and by, when men wearing the torn , soiled
began to know more, Marco Polo, the first European traveller old clothes which they
they saw that there was to China , who walked to China as a boy had worn in their wan .
some truth in this book. and grew up at the Court of the King. derings. Their friends
It set men studying and making bold stared in surprise, and were still more
plans for discovery . The great Colum- startled when the three men cut open the
bus , who patches
lived two of the old
hundred clothes
y e ars and show
later , was ed that
one of these were
those who filled with
studied jewels .
the book , Then the
and it people
helped believed
him great. that the
ly when strangers
he was really were
making the Polos,
up his back from
mind to
This is another quaint picture from the old Book of Marvels. It is meant to repre the far -off
try and sentMarco Polo landingat Ormuz, a once famouscity near the coast of Persia. lands .
TYYTYTUT TYYTYTYD IT

35
 IGRALCIDENTELLECTUEUEUEU
ILULITE
YUXU
YOZITET
LIETOKOYECTETUT
LEXUZUREVOLTEOMETRELEEUELE KEUZE TEU
TOZU
GEDU ZEXEL
UTZUK
za
Tuominta

2020
Ururki
Baru

30
X
CUDDUXUDUDDURVEDARSTWO

493
APRIL
IN
SPAIN
OF
QUEEN
AND
KING
THE
1,TO
AMERICA
OF
DISCOVERY
NEWS
THE
BRINGING
COLUMBUS the
until
discovery
of
voyage
great
his
on
out
set
to
encouragement
no
had
Court
H.akat
bplifethee
ing
triumph
in
received
be
grew up
heoor
boy
,asut
began
Columbus
from
return
his
Barcelona
,oat
palace
the
in
him
shows
picture
TAmerica
.to
find
sailed
he nnd
alent
bim
were
ships
and
men
him
for
pleaded
Spain hen
ofhis
Queen
born
.he
w
,tthewas
alonely
poor
,kby
soing
dhonoured
sho
Columbus
.voyage
discovery
his
Spain
of
Queen
and
King that
think
to
strange
tied
Ielling
is

To
mrYTU
EUREXIKTOR
 Tunnunc

THE MAN WHO FOUND AMERICA

The Story of Christopher Columbus and His Discovery
greater
CHRISTOPHER COLUMBUS did athought so he went to Portugal and asked the
thing than he knew. He king to help him . Now, this king was
that he discovered India ; but it was already sending out men and ships to
not India which he found by sailing explore the coast of Africa, and he
out over the great unknown sea . It thought there might be something in
was new land - America — though he the plan of Columbus. But he was a
died before the country was called by bad , deceitful man , and secretly sent
that name. other men with
Columbus a ship to do
never heard what Colum
the name bus had asked
America . to be allowed
Columbus to do . But
was very poor the men on the
as a boy, but King of Portu
he was clever, gal's ship were
and learned all cowards and
he could about turned back ,
geography and frightened by
travel. He was the great sea.
brave , too , When he
and went to heard what
sea as far as was being
ships com done , Colum
manded by bus was angry
other men The ship, named the Santa Maria , or Saint Mary, in which and sad, and
It was the deck
from from Worlship
of this went away at
cou ld car
him. Once ry Coluthe
he that mbus saile
New d tod Amer
Worl first. seen
was ica by men the Old d . once , and
was wrecked and almost wrote to the King of
drowned. Whenever he England for help. Before
could , he read about anything could come
Marco Polo's travels and of this , he went with
other great adventures . his little son to Spain ,
He was born at Genoa , and though the King
in Italy , and when he of Portugal sent for him
grew up he asked the to go back , he would
rich people of his native not . He went next to a
town to provide him with Spanish duke , who could
a ship to go and look for not help him , but sent
new lands. For he did him to King Ferdinand
not believe that the earth and Queen Isabella of
is flat, as most people did Spain . Spain was at war
at that time; he believed with the Moors, and the
it to be round . He knew plan of Columbus was
that India was far away put off from time to time ,
at the back of Italy, until at last he went
where he lived, and he Christopher Columbus, the man who away, heavy of heart, re
thought that it was part discovered the American Continent, solved to go to France.
of a very great continent but thought it was part of India. He was so poor that he
which reached far round into the sea had to stop at a monastery and beg for
on the other side of the world. And bread for his little boy. The monks took
he thought that if he sailed out across him in and were charmed with his
the ocean to the west he would come strange talk. One man there happened
to the western side of India . to be a friend of the Queen of Spain .
The people of Genoa would not have He wrote at once to her telling her how
anything to do with such a scheme, important was the plan of Columbus,
COLLONCI UZZILLIMIZ : xroLILLE ILLUULOUUUU ZEEUUTUUUUULLARI ZITETIT TITLE
37
 -THE CHILD'S BOOK OF MEN AND WOMEN

and she sent for Columbus to go again self in his richest clothes, and, bearing
to Court. But once more he was dis- the banner of Spain , he went on shore.
appointed. He was kept waiting about There he made all his crew kneel down
the Court, the queen being engaged in and bless God , and kiss the ground , and
games while the man who was waiting givethanks for God's mercies in bring
to discover the New World was sorrow- ing them to this place. Columbus then
ing in neglect. He set off for France claimed the island for the King of
at last, and then the queen knew that Spain , and went on his way finding
he really was in earnest , and this time other islands. These islands he thought
had him brought back, and caused three must be the western islands of India,
little ships to be fitted out for him . because the East Indies were on the
He set sail on Friday, August 3rd , other side of the world. So he called
1492 , when he was fifty-six years old . them the West Indies, and called the
It was a strange and wonderful voyage, people on them Indians . They were not
over an ocean which, so far as he knew , Indians, but so they were called, and all
nobody else had ever sailed . His crews the red men in America were called Red
were terrified and wanted to turn back , Indians for the same reason . It was
and he had great difficulty in making America that Columbus had found, but
them obey. They sailed on for two he thought it was India .
months and a week , and then , at ten He discovered another island , which
o'clock on the night of October 11th , is called Cuba , and a third , which he
1492 , Columbus saw a light shining in called St. Domingo , now named Hayti .
the darkness . He thought that land was One of his ships was wrecked, so he took
there , and next morning he found that the wood from her and built a fort with
he was right. There before them lay a it at Hayti . In this he left some of his
beautiful island. Columbus dressed him- men , and then returned to Spain . He

CHRISTOPHER COLUMBUS FIRST SIGHTING AMERICA IN THE YEAR 1492

Columbus, in his voyage of discovery, had often to keep up the courage of his sailors in sailing through unknown
seas, as they grew discontented at times and wanted him to steer the ship for home again. When he saw the land
he was in search of, his men, who had a little while before been in a mind to mutiny, grew shamefaced before him.
LULETTEIZYT TYYDYTYY TUTTOTETTU EXntar Itur
38
 --FINDING THE WAY TO INDIA BY SEA mm
was received with great honours, named Amerigo Vespucci explored
and soon set out again for the West. the coast which Columbus had dis
He made more dis covered , and found
coveries of islands, that it was not the
and still more in the coast of India . “ It is
third trip. Although a New Wo l.”) he said .
he had done such a For a long time the
great thing, Columbus land was called simply
was made very sad by the New World , but at
his enemies. Men were last it was decided to
angry because of his call it after the man
success, and told spite who had found that it
ful and false tales about was not India . It was
him . Once he was put called America , after
in chains , like a com Amerigo, instead of
mon thief. He was after the name of the
very poor and very man who found it .
lonely when he died . America was discovered
America
given wasland
to the the name This proved
after who is a portrait
that theofland
Amerigo Vespucci,
Columbus by Columbus in 1492. It
found was
was not India, but a separate continent, and
not named America
Columbus died . A man after whom the land was named America. until the year 1506.
FINDING THE WAY TOINDIA BY SEA
Vasco da Gama and the First Voyage Round the Cape
"HE people of Portugal thought that
THE frightened as those of Columbus had
Columbus had discovered India by been. But he kept on and on , and at
sailing to the west, so they made up last reached the Cape of Good Hope, and
their minds to discover it by sailing to found that he could get round to the
the east. To do this they had to go other side of Africa. Terrible storms
from Portugal right down the west coast seemed likely to swallow up his ships. His
of Africa. Now , although a brave sailor crew begged him to go back. " I will
named Diaz had discovered that the never go back until I have set foot in
coast did not go on for ever and ever, India ,” he said. Some of the men made
and that there was an up their minds to kill
end to it , nobody had him, but he put these
ever dared to go round men in irons , and him
the Cape of Good Hope, self took command of the
which Diaz had found. steering of the ship. They
It took a hundred years reached the Indian Ocean,
of exploring to find that and, sailing along the
there was such a place east coast of Africa ,
as the Cape, for men were found great cities . At
afraid to sail out into the one of these they were
open sea. in those days ; able to get a pilot who
they kept close to the knew the way across the
shore, and dared not go waters . They reached
far beyond the place from Calicut , in India , at last ,
which they started , for and tried to make friends
fear they should never be with the King of Calicut .
able to get back . But He was a bad man ,
now King Emmanuel of and, after taking their
Portugal fitted out three presents , tried to kill
ships, and sent a noble them . They managed
man from his Court to see to return to Portugal,
what he could do . having found out one
This nobleman was of the most important
Vasco
named Vasco da Gama . da Gama, the Portuguese things in the world—the
explorer, who first sailed to India
His men were just as round the Cape of Good Hope. way to India by sea.
DULULITU

39
 COLICA

THE FIRST VOYAGE ROUND THE WORLD

Magellan & Del Cano & How They Found the Pacific Ocean
He first man to sail round the world the coast seemed to break in two.
THEwas only a lieutenant. His name He sailed in through heavy waves
was Sebastian Del Cano , and when he into a channel which ran between
set sail on the voyage he had for his great precipices . He was the only
leader the great Ferdinand Magellan. man not afraid. His men almost died
The ships went out from Seville to of fright when a great storm arose.
the west on September 20th , 1519, He managed to calm their fears, and
and returned from the at last they got through
east on September 8th , the strange channel.
1522 , three years all And then a magnificent
but twelve days . But open ocean appeared
when they got back , before them. It was
instead of the five ships smooth and calm , and
and 270 men with which he called it the Pacific,
they had started , they which means the peace
had only one ship and ful ” ocean. That is
eighteen men . Del Cano how the great Pacific
was in command ; the Ocean was named.
brave Magellan was He had come through
dead . To understand a strait which he called
what had happened we after his own name .
must go back a little . The Magellan Straits
After the voyages of Magellan,who discovered the Pacific Ocean, had shown him the way
Columbus, the King of and died before his ship reached home again.past South America.
Spain still believed that India could be To get through it had taken him thirty
reached by sailing to the west. So he eight days, so it is not surprising that
sent Ferdinand Magellan to seek the his men were afraid. He now sailed
truth. Magellan was a Portuguese half-way round the world , and reached
noble, who had left the service of his the Philippine Islands, where he was
king because he had not been welltreated killed in a battle with natives.
in Portugal. He had already been in It was when Magellan died that
India by Da Gama's way , Del Cano, taking the only
and had seen the famous ship fit to sail on , con
Spice Islands. Now he set tinued the voyage , still in
out to do what Coluinbus had strange waters, but know
failed to do — to reach India ing that he was steering for
by the western passage. home. He came back round
He struck out boldly for the Cape of Good Hope as
what we now know as South Da Gama had come round
America. Nobody had ever from India. When he got
been able to get to the end home people saw that, as he
of it ; nobody could tell had gone out by one way
whether it was possible to and come back by another,
get round or through it . the world really was shaped
Some of his men rose in like a ball, and that Del
mutiny, and one ship left Cano had been round it .
him because the crew were The Magellan Straits are
too frightened to go farther ; still called after the man
but he would not give up. who found that they lead to
He explored all down the the East . Many attempts
coast , and at last came to a were made to follow Magel
great opening. He sailed up lan , and after fifty years Sir
it, hoping it would go right Francis Drake sailed round
through . No ; it was only a the world from England.
Del Cano,
great river. He came back, lan's who was Magel The next story of the dis
lieutenant in the first
and went on until at last voyage around the world. coverers is on page 140.
40
 The Child's Book of R
POETRY
THE WORLD'S GREAT POEMS
T is a splendid thing to be able to say something which the world will never
IT forget,and many books that will never die have been made up of fine words
spoken and written by great men and great women. Most of these never
to - be -forgotten words are in poems, because poems are much more easy to
remember than ordinary reading, which we call prose. There are thousands
of beautiful poems that everybody ought to read, and nobody who does not
read them can really know how fine a thing reading is. True poetry is more
precious than gold. It helps to make us good, and happy, and hopeful,
and it is so pleasant to read that the words sound like music. We shall
find in this part of our book some of the best of all these poems, which
vill make us anxious to read more and more poetry as time goes on .

POETRY THE MUSIC OF WORDS

two
"HERE are
ways of writing By ce J. A. HAMMERTON
a story, or telling about
a place or a thing or an
event . The one way is to
write it down in words like
those we use in speaking one to
another, but using the words
more carefully, so that they will give
as good an idea of what we have seen
or thought as words can give. This
kind of writing is called Prose. The
words and sentences used by great
writers are so well chosen and arranged
that they give us a clear idea of what
has been in the writer's mind, and
in reading them aloud we find that
they have a fine and pleasing sound .
But there is another kind of writing
in which the words and sentences used
by the writers sound far sweeter and
more musical than the words of prose.
This we call Poetry, and those who
write it are called Poets .
Prose is used to tell almost any
kind of story, or to describe any-
thing ; but there are grand things in
history, beautiful scenes in the world ,
noble thoughts in the minds of men ,
that can be better described in poetry.
Poetry began, very likely, with the
desire for singing, which comes when
we are very happy or after a success
of any kind. Long ages ago, when
our far -off forefathers could not even
read or write, they had poets who
went with them into battle , and after
the victory these poets, or bards,
as they were called , would compose
verses of fine-sounding words to
celebrate the victory. These verses
802
dat
41
they sang while they
played a harp. In
this way poetry began ,
perhaps, men having their
minds full of happy thoughts, and
finding that they could best utter
these thoughts by choosing words
of musical sound . Homer, one of
the greatest of poets, was a blind
Greek who lived more than eight
hundred years before Christ. He used
to recite in public places in Greece
his poetical descriptions of the wars
of the Greeks .
There are three kinds of poetry.
There is Dramatic Poetry, which is
written in the form of people speak
ing to each other, as in the plays of
Shakespeare. Then there is Epic
Poetry, which is usually a descrip
tion of some great event, a hero, or
the history of a nation , told in grand,
noble words. The third kind is called
Lyric Poetry, from the fact that it was
originally intended to be sung to the
playing of a lyre, which is a very
ancient musical instrument somewhat
like a harp. All beautiful songs come
into lyric poetry.
Another thing to know is that
poetry is written sometimes in rhymed
lines and sometimes without rhymes.
A rhyme means that similar sounds
occur at the ends of lines , though
the words are different. Here is one ,
with the sound that makes the rhyme
printed in different type :
The world is so full of a number of things,
I'm sure we should all be as happy as kings.
If you count the syllables in these
two lines you will find that both have
Boga
 UZI
THE CHILD'S BOOK OF POETRY ŽIDI
eleven . There should always be a cer- and happy side of life, and in the
tain number of syllables in a line of CHILD'S BOOK OF POETRY it will nearly
poetry, but the number will depend on
the plan the poet has arranged . Your
ear should always tell you when there
are too many or too few .
W when our language was so different
». THE RHYME
Ho THEIR POETS MAKE
S from what it is to-day that it looks
The words in which the same sounds
occur need not be in following lines, but
can be placed in all sorts of different
ways. The rhymes in the verse below
are alternate, which means that each
line ends with the same sound as the
next line but one after it :
Arabia's desert -1 anger
To Him shall bow the knEE ,
The Ethiopian stranger
His glory come to see.
And here is another form of verse,
in a tiny poem by Robert Louis Steven
son , in which half of the lines rhyme,
while the other half have no rhymes :
The rain is raining all around,
It falls on field and tree,
It rains on the umbrellas here ,
And on the ships at sea .
The only advantage of rhyme is that
it pleases the car and helps us to re-
member all the words of the poem , but
it does not make poetry, and much of
our finest poetry has no rhymes in it .
When a poem has no rhymes it is
called Blank Verse, and most of
Shakespeare's works, and Milton's also,
Kata
were written in this kind of verse ; full
of grand - sounding words and of lines
that would have been far less noble
and dignified if every two of them had
ended with similar sounds.
POEMSTHAT DO NOT
NEED RHYMES
For this reason nearly all poems about
great events, tragedies, the deeds of
noble men and women , are written in
blank verse , which is more suited to
TYYYYYY
those stories than lyric verse . Here is
TEZ
an example of blank verse from Shake-
speare's description of Brutus :
His life was gentle ; and the elements
So cuix'd in him , that Nature might stand up ,
And say to all the world , This was a man !
How fine these lines sound ! They
have the solemn music of a grand organ
and need no rhyme; but each line
must balance with the other in syllables
and accent. Lyric poetry, in which
the lines usually rhyme with each other,
is oftenest used to describe the lighter
TIX IITTY
42
LIETU2.10
always be the happy side of life we shall
hearabout from the poets .
English poetry has a very long his .
tory, and was first written by men
almost like a foreign tongue when we
see it printed now . But we will not
go so far back to seek for poems
among the works of our old writers.
The first really great poet who lived
in this country was Geoffrey Chaucer,
and no boy or girl could read the
poems which he wrote unless they were
iurned into modern English . Even
then they are not very well suited to
young readers, and for this reason we
Shall take very little, if anything, from
Chaucer, who died more than five cen
turies ago . After his death , for many
years there was not much good poetry
written in England, and his is the one
really great name that stands out among
the poets of what we call the Middle Ages .
GREATEST OF ALL THE POETS IN THE
WORLD , WILLIAM SHAKESPEARE
The English language in those far -off
days was going through many changes;
and it was just about the time when
Queen Elizabeth came to the throne that
it had become one of the finest languages
in the world in which to write either
prose or poetry.
Our language has not changed very
greatly since the days of Elizabeth,
so that William Shakespeare, the won
derful poet who was born during her
reign and became the greatest poct of
his age , and the greatest ever born in
England, used very much the same lan
guage as Tennyson , who lived in our
own day, nearly three hundred years
later. For this reason Shakespeare is
to be thought of as a writer of what we
call Modern English, and in his poems
we shall find that our language is used in
the most beautiful way it can be used .
We might begin our readings in the
wonderful book of English poetry with
a number of poems and passages from
Shakespeare; butperhaps young readers
will prefer to have different poems
from different poets in each part, and
thus to become acquainted with many
as soon as possible. So, like bees in a rich
garden, we shall go from flower to flower
gathering our honey as we choose.
UTY MTU
 acaGa'l THE CHILD'S
MY SHADOW
We often have fancies that conie to our minds at odd
times, but only the poet can lay hold of these fancies and
keep them for the delight of all who may read . " My
Shadow " is an example of this. We must all , in our
young days, have had some such thoughts, but only Robek
Louis Stevenson , who wrote this preity poem , was clever
enough to turn these thoughts into words that can live.
I HAVE a little shadow that goes in and out
with me ,
And what can be the use of him is more than
I can see.
He is very , very like me from the heels up to
the head ;
And I see him jump before me when I jump
into my bed .
The funniest thing about him is the way he
likes to grow-
Not at all like proper children , which is always
very slow ;
For he sometimes shoots up taller, like an
indiarubber ball,
And he sometimes gets so little that there's
none of him at all.
He hasn't got a notion of how children ought
to play,
And can only make a fool of me in every sort
of way :
He stays so close beside me, he's a coward ,
you can see ;
I'd think shame to stick to nursie as that
shadow sticks to me .
One morning , very early, before the sun was
up ,
I rose and found the shining dew on every
buttercup ;
But my lazy little shadow , like an arrant
sleepy -head,
Had stayed at home behind me, and was fast
asleep in bed .
ARMIES IN THE FIRE
Looking into the fire at night when all is stiH and only
the burning coals sputter and crackle , what strange pictures
we seem to see ! Did you ever see an army marching in
the tire ? That is what R. L. Stevenson once fancied he saw ,
a'd in this poem he paints his fancyover again in words. This
poem , like :My Shadow ," and other of Steveisson's verses
which we shall print, is taken, by permission of Messrs.
Longmans, Green & Co. , from “ A Child's Garden oflern,
THE_lamps
now glitte down the street :
Faintly sound the falling feet ;
And the blue even slowly falls
About the garden trees and walls.
Vow in the falling of the gloom
The red fire paints the empty room :
And warmly on the rocf it looks,
And flickers on the backs of books.
Armies march by tower and spire
Of cities blazing in the fire
Till, as I gaze with staring eyes,
The armies fade, the lustre dies.
Then once again the glow returns ;
Again the phantom city burns ;
And down the red -hot valley, lo !
The phantom armies marching go .
Blinking embers , tell me true ,
Where are those armies marching to,
And what the burning city is
That crumbles in your furnaces.
FORTU ZUEN TIRETTYTYYTTEET
BOOK OF POETRYXXXLaaaaaaaa
XXXXLCCLLLLLLLLL
THE BROOK
This is one of the most beautiful of all Lord Tennyson's
poems. We fancy we can hear the brook speaking as we read
these verses , and if you will sit beside a brook and read
ihem you will come to feel something of the music and poetry
of Nature, and the sound of the running brook will seem , ia
your ears, a song of joy. It is a poem of natural joy, ani
was written as part of a longer poem , but is complete in itsell.
I COME from haunts of coot and hern ,
I make a sudden sally ,
And sparkle out among the ſern ,
To bicker down a valley.
By thirty hills I hurry down,
Or slip between the ridges,
By twenty thorps, a little town,
And half a hundred bridges.
Till last by Philip's farm I flow
To join the brimming river ,
For men may come and men may go,
But I go on for ever.
( chatter over stony ways,
In little sharps and trebles,
[ bubble into eddying bays,
I babble on the pebbles.
With many a curve my banks I fret
By many a field and fallow ,
And many a fairy foreland set
With willow - weed and mallow ,
I chatter, chatter, as I flow
To join the brimming river,
For men may come and men may go,
But I go op for ever. I
I wind about, and in and out,
With here a blossom sailing,
And here and there a lusty trout,
And here and there a grayling.
And here and there a foamy lla's
Upon me, as I travel
With many a silvery waterbreak
Above the golden gravel.
And draw them all along, and flow
To join the brimming river,
For men may come and men may g ),
But I go on for ever .
I steal by lawns and grassy plots,
I slide by hazel covers ;
I move the sweet forget -me-ncts
That grow for happy lovers .
I slip , I slide, I gloom , I glance,
Among my skimming swallows ;
I make the netted sunbeam dance
Against my sandy shallows.
I murmur under moon and stars
In brambly wildernesses ;
I linger by my shingly bars ;
I loiter by my cresses ;
And out again I curve and flow
To join the brimming river,
For men may come and men may go,
But I go on for ever.
UUDETRYTYTOITETTYY
43
 en LOGIK UIXE EXCE20
THE CHILD'S
THE ENCHANTED SHIRT
This poem by John Hay, an American author and
statesman, tells of a discontented, ill-tempered king , whose
wisest doctor said he could only get well by sleeping one
night in the shirt of a happy man . His kingilom was
searched for a happy man , but the only man who was
happy was so poor that he had vo shirt at all . Thus was
the rich, discontented kingfar
made to feel shame,
greatand to realise
th : a contented mind better than possessions.
Kinghiswas
TheAnd sick. His cheek was red ,
eye was clear and bright ;
He ate and drank with a kingly zest ,
And peacefully snored at night.
But he said he was sick , and a king should
know ,
And doctors came by the score ;
They did not cure him . He cut off their heads,
And sent to the schools for more .
At last two fanious doctors came,
And one was as poor as a rat ;
He had passed his life in studious toil ,
And never found time to grow fat .
The other had never looked in a book ;
His patients gave him no trouble ;
If they recovered they paid him well,
If they died their heirs paid double .
Together they looked at the royal tongue,
As the King on his couch reclined ;
In succession they thumped his august chest,
But no trace of disease could find.
The old sage said , “ You're as sound as a
66
nut . ”
' Hang him up ! ” roared the King, in a
gale
In a ten -knot gale of royal rage.
The other leech grew a shade pale.
But he pensively rubbed his sagacious nose ,
And thus his prescription ran
The King will be well if he sleeps one night
In the shirt of a Happy Man .
Wide o'er the realm the couriers rode,
And fast their horses ran ;
And many they saw, and to many they spoke,
But they found no Happy Man .
At last they came to a village gate,
A beggar lay whistling there ;
He whistled and sang and laughed and
rolled
On the grass in the soft June air .
The weary couriers paused and looked
At the scamp so blithe and gay ;
And one of them said , Heaven save you ,
friend !
You seem to be happy to-day.”
“ ( ) yes, fair sirs ! ” the rascal laughed ,
And his voice rang free and glad ;
An idle man has so much to do
That he never has time to be sad .”
“ This is our man ,” the courier said ;
“ Our luck has led us aright ;
I will give you a hundred ducats, friend,
For the loan of your shirt to -night.”
The merry blackguard lay back on the grass,
And laughed till his face was black ;
“ I would do it , God wot, ” and he roared
with the fun ,
“ But I haven't a shirt to my back.”
UUTETTUR
UOXXXXTTYZIUUEZTETETTYNYT ZYrs
BOOK OF POETRY . AUX more
CLOUD HAMLECTRO
Each day to the King the reports came in
Of bis unsuccessful spies,
And the sad panorama of human woes
Passed daily under his eyes .
And he grew ashamed of his useless life,
And his maladies hatched in gloom ;
He opened his windows and let the air
Of the free heaven into his room .
And out he went in the world and toiled
In his own appointed way ;
And the people blessed him , the land was glad ,
And the King was well and gay .
A FAREWELL
Charles Kingsley was a clergyman who wrote some
stories that are among the best we have. He was also a
writer of poetry, and this is one of the best known of
his smaller poems. It was written for a girl as farewell
advice. Like all good people , he loved children , and
delighted to write for them . The poem reminds us that it
is better to be good and to do good than to be clever and
win fame and fortune. “ A Farewell " is printed here
by permission of Messrs. Macmillan , the publisbers.
Y
MY fairest child , I have no song to give yok ;
No lark could pipe in skies so dull and
gray .
Yet, if you will , one quiet hint I'll leave you,
For every day.
I'll teach you how to sing a clearer carol
Than lark who hails the dawn or breezy
down ,
To earn yourself a purer poet's laurel
Than Shakespeare's crown.
Be good , sweet maid , and let who can be
clever ;
Do noble things, not dream them , all day
long,
And so make Life, Death,and that vast Forever,
One grand, sweet song .
THE DAFFODILS
William Wordsworth was one of the greatest English
poets, and this poem is one of the many pieces in which he
writes clearly and lovingly of Nature and the beauties of
flower-land. It was written just a hundred years ago, after
the poet had seen a wonderful blow of golden daffodils on
the shores of Lake Ullswater, not far from where he lived.
The last four lines mean that the recollection of beautiful
things seen with our own eyes is one of life's greatest joys.
IWANDERED lonely as a cloud
That floats on high o'er vales and hills,
When all at once I saw a crowd ,
A host of golden daffodils :
Beside the lake , beneath the trees,
Fluttering and dancing in the breeze.
Continuous as the stars that shine
And twinkle on the milky way ,
They stretched in never-ending line
Along the margin of a bay :
Ten thousand saw I at a glance,
Tossing their heads in sprightly dance.
The waves beside them danced , but they
Outdid the sparkling waves in glee :
A poct could not but be gay,
In such a jocund company ;
I gazed - and gazed — but little thought
What wealth the show to me had brought.
For oft , when on my couch I lie
In vacant or in pensive mood ,
They. flash upon that inward eye
Which is the bliss of solitude ;
And then my heart with pleasure fills,
And dances with the daffodils.
44
L

Wynken Blynken ! and Nod

TYNKEN, Blynken, and Nod one night

Sailed on a river of crystal light
Into a sea of dew .
" Where are you going, and what do you wish ? ”
The old moon asked the three. 1

“ We have come to fish for the herring fish

That live in the beautiful sea ;
Nets of silver and gold have we,”
Said Wynken,
Blynken, and Nod.
HE old moon laughed and sang a song
THE As they rocked in the wooden shoe ;
And the wind that sped them all night long
Ruffled the waves of dew ;
The little stars were the herring fish
That lived in that beautiful sea.
" Now cast your nets wherever you wish ,
But never afeared are we ! ”
So cried the stars to the fishermen three,
Wynken ,
Blynken , and Nod.
LL night long their nets they threw
A For the fish in the twinkling foam ,
Then down from the sky came the wooden shoe,
Bringing the fishermen home ;
'Twas all so pretty a sail , it seemed 1
As if it could not be ;
And some folk thought'twas a dream they'd dreamed
Of sailing that beautiful sea ;
But I shall name you the fisherman three,
Wynken,
Blynken , and Nod .
WynkenaandBlynken
Nod is a are
little two little eyes,
And the wooden shoe that sailed the skies
Is a wee one's trundle -bed.
So shutwonderful
your eyessights
while that
Mother sings
Of be,
And you shall see the beautiful things
As you rock in the misty sea
Where the old shoe rocked the fisherman tlır .
Wynken ,
Blynken , and Nod.
EUGENE FIELD SB .Pearse

45
 Couro *xxx ACELCELLE
THE CHILD'S BOOK OF POETRYaman
THE TWENTY- THIRD PSALM
The Psalms of David in the Bible are among the finest
poetry we can read. Many of the ther books in the Bible
are also poetic in form , but we do not usually think of them
as poems. They are not in verse. More than two hundred
years ago a Poet Laureate, named Nahum Tate, re -wrote
ihem with rhyme, and his verses are still sung ; but he was
a poor poet. Joseph Addison was a far greater man, and
the 23rd Psalm here given was turned into verse by him .
TH'HeE Lord my pasture shall prepare,
And feed me with a shepherd's care ;
His presence shall my wants supply ,
And guard me with a watchful eye ;
My noonday walks He shall attend,
And all my midnight hours defend.
When in the sultry glebe I faint ,
Or on the thirsty mountains pant,
To fertile vales, and dewy meads,
My weary, wandering steps He leads,
Where peaceful rivers, soft and slow ,
Amid the verdant landscape flow .
Though in the paths of death I tread ,
ETTITILIYTYTTITO
With gloomy horror overspread ,
My steadfast heart shall fear no ill,
For Thou, O Lord , art with me still :
Thy friendly crook shall give meaid ,
And guide me through the dreadful shade.
Though in a bare and rugged way,
Through devious lonely wilds I stray,
Thy bounty shall my pains beguile ;
s
The barren wildernes shall smile ,
With sudden greens and herbage crown'd ,
And streams shall murmur all around .
RULE, BRITANNIA !
This famous song , which is known wherever the British
flag waves, was first sung in the year 1740, in a little play ,
or masque, performed before the Prince and Princess of
Wales of that time. As the masque was written by two
Scottish poets, named James Thomson and David Mallet,
the song has been claimed for both ; but it is usually
thought that James Thomson, who was a good poet, if
not a great one, was the author. " Rule , Britannia !” is
not the finest poetry , but it is full of pride for Britain's
greatness , and expresses thoughts we all should cherish .
When Britain first,at Heaven's command,
Arose from out the azure main ,
This was the charter of her land , . Where did you get that little tear ?
And guardian angels sung the strain :
Rule, Britannia ! Britannia rules the waves i
Britons never shall be slaves .
The nations not so blest as thce,
Must in their turn to tyrants fall ;
Whilst thou shalt flourish, great and free ,
The dread and envy of them all .
Still more majestic shalt thou rise,
More dreadful from each foreign stroke ;
As the loud blast that tears the skies
13.
Te
Serves but to root thy native oak.
Thee haughty tyrants ne'er shall tame ;
All their attempts to bend thee down
Will but arouse thy generous flame,
And work their woe and thy renown .
To thee belongs the rural reign ;
Thy cities shall with commerce shine ;
All thine shall be the subject main ,
And every shore it circles thine.
The Muses, still with freedom found,
Shall to thy happy coast repair ;
Blest Isle, with matchless beauty crown'l,
And manly hearts to guard the fair .
Rule , Britannia ! Britannia rules the waves !
Britons never shall be slaves.
TrureOT
46
A CHILD'S THOUGHT OF GOD
Elizabeth Barrett Browning, the author of these beau .
tiful verses, was a great poetess and the wife of Robert
Browning, a great poet. Her pure and simple mind enableil
her to see things with the clearness of a child's faith , and
her power of words to express herself in noble poetry .
Here she gives a wonderful idea of God's constant care
and watchfulness over those of us who seek to do His will .
They say that God lives very high !
But if you look above the pines
You cannot see our God . And why ?
And if you dig down in the mines
You never see Him in the gold ,
Though from Him all that's glory shines.
God is so good, He wears a fold
Of heaven and carth across His face
Like secrets kept, for love untold .
But still I feel that His embrace
Slides down by thrills , through all things
made,
Through sight and sound of every place :
As if my tender mother laid
On my shut lids her kisses' pressure,
Half waking me at night and said :
Who kissed you through the dark , dear
>)
guesser ? "
BABY
George Macdonald , who wrote this little poem about
the wonder of baby's first appearance, was a famous writer
of stories, but loved best ofall to make poems about child .
hood, and we shall have to take other flowers from him on
our way through the garden of English poetry. It is printed
by permission of the publishers , Messrs. Chatto & Windus.
WHERE did you come from ,baby dear ?
Out of the Everywhere into here.
Where did you get those eyes so blue ?
Out of the sky as I came through .
What makes the light in them sparkle and spin ?
Some of the starry twinkles left in.
I found it waiting when I got here .
What makes your forehead so smooth and
high ?
A soft hand stroked it as I went by.
What makes your check like a warm white
rose ?
I saw something better than any one knows.
Whence that three - cornered smile of bliss ?
Three angels gave me at once a kiss.
Where did you get this pearly ear ?
God spoke, and it came out to hear.
Where did you get those arms and hands ?
Love made itself into bonds and bands.
Feet, whence did you come, you darling
things ?
From the same box as the cherub's wings.
How did they all just come to be you ?
God thought about me, and so I grew .
But how did you come to us, you dear ?
God thought about you , and so I am here .
EDULEUR DUUUUZKOLEULUULEE
LITTLE VERSES FOR VERY LITTLE PEOPLE
NURSERY RHYMES AND THEIR USE
HAT is the use of Nursery Rhymes ? Did any boy or girl ever ask that ?
WHA Perhaps not ; but it is worth asking. The answer is very simple. Just as
we all like stories, so do most of us like poems, which are stories told in words
that sound pleasant in our ears, and are easy to remember. But before we can learn
poems we learn little verses about funny little folk , and these are called nursery
rhymes, because all mothers say them to their children, and the sounds of the words
are easy to bear in mind. In this part of our book we shall have all the best-known
nursery rhymes told over again , many of them having clever pictures with them .

RIDE A COCK -HORSE TO BANBURY CROSS

HY

cuce

‫سه‬

ce Brock 1907 FA
-

Ride a cock -borse to Banbury Cross,

To see a fine lady upon a white borse;
Rings on her fingers, and bells on her toes,
She will have music wherever she goes.
47
 armam « LITTLE VERSES FOR VERY LITTLE PEOPLE லாகவம்

THERE was an
old woman
Lived under
NIC,
a hill ;
And if she's not
gone ,
She lives
there still .

Einlack Christmas
Tº market , L'ITTLE Horner sat ina corner
to market , He put in his thumb, and he took out
to buy a fat pig , a plum ,
Home again , home And said , “ What a good boy am I ! ”
againto
To market, , Jiggety Jig .
market,to This little pig went tomarket.
buy a fat hog , This little pig stayed
at home,
Home again , home again , This little pig got roast
Jiggety Jog beef,
This little pig got none ;
This little pig cried
HERE “ Wee, wee ! ”
THE were
all the way home.
two
black FOUR and twenty tailors went to kill a
your
snail,
birds,
Sitting on The best man amongst them durst not
touch her tail ;
a hill,
The one She put out her horns like aa little Kyloe
named COW ,
Jack , Run, tailors, run , or she'll kill you all
e'en now.
The other named Jill ;
Fly away, Jack ! Fly away, Jill !
Come again, Jack ! Come again , Jill ! ERE am I , little
HERIJumping Joan ,
OBIN and Richard were two pretty
Rº men ; When nobody's with
They lay in bed till the clock struck ten ; ne

Then up starts Robin and looks at the I'm always alone.

sky ,
Oh , brother Richard , the sun's very high !
You go on with bottle and bag,
And I'll follow afteron jolly Jack Nag. MATTHEW, Mark, Luke and John,
Guard the bed that I lie on !
Four corners to my bed ,
Four angels round my head
One to watch, one to pray,
And two to bear my soul away .

COMESays s to bed,
, let'Sleepy -head,
Tarry a while, says Slow ,
Put on the pan, says Greedy Nan ,
Let's sup before we go.
The next verses and nursery rhymes begin on page 195 .
ninanzZTUTOS

48
The Lion and the Unicorn
Were fighting for the Crown , 1
The Lion beat the Unicorn
All round about the town .

Some gave them white bread ,

And some gave them brown ;
Some gave them plum cake,
And sent them out of town .

49
G

ush st
abye
Baby
on

Tree Top

Very Soft

Hush -a -bye, ba by, on the tree - top , When the wind

J : 26

blows the cra - dle will rock ; When the bough breaks the

cra - dle will fall : Down will come ba

el
by,
;:
cra - dle, and all !
jo
 un
Goosey , Goosey , Gander,
Whither shall I wander ?
Upstairs and downstairs
And in my lady's
chamber .
There I met an old man
Who wouldn't say his
prayers ,
I took him by the left leg
And threw him down the
stairs .

MUM

51
.
THE LIGHT THAT SHINES OVER THE SEA

At night , when the moon and the stars are hid, the sailor's way at sea is dark and often dangerous. We cannot put lamps at
sea as we do in the streets, but in dangerous places, where a ship might dash on the rocks, great lighthouses are built, from
the tops of which huge lanterns throw their light across the waves, warning the captain of the danger that lies near

52
 The Child's Book of
FAMILIAR THINGS

THE STORY OF COMMON THINGS

shall read in this part of the book the story of many interesting things we
WEE see and use every day. We shall learn of the wonderful way in which a cup
of tea comes to our breakfast -table -- all the way from India . We shall see how
we get our letters — all the way across the sea. We shall learn how a newspaper
is made, and how a book is printed ; how the train carries us by land, and
the ship by sea ; how a balloon rides in the air ; how a camera takes a
picture ; how the piano makes music for us ; how we can talk to friends far
away ; and a thousand other strange things which are wonderful and yet true.
The first story tells us how a lighthouse is built in the bed of the sea .

HOW A LIGHTHOUSE IS BUILT

NE of the most
ONE man lives there all by
wonderful things By MINY WRITERS himself. When he
to think of is the way hears the noise made
in which men have been by the engines of a ship,
able to make light when he knows that the ship is
darkness creeps over the world . in danger of running on the
A great city lit up at night is rocks . So he lights his little
a beautiful sight to look upon . lamp and waves it, just as he
Have you thought, when you has done now , to show us
have been in the dark , how where we are. ”
difficult it must be for the And now, having got to
sailor to find his way at sea know where he was, the cap
when the moon is not shining and the tain was able to start the ship again ,
stars have shut their eyes ? We can . and steer away safely.
not put lamps everywhere in the sea There are many places where ships
as we do in the streets, yet there are are in danger. There are hidden
dangerous rocks which would wreck a rocks ; there are great cliffs where they
ship if the captain did not see them. may run ashore at night ; there are
On these rocks, then, and at dan- great banks of sand just beneath the
gerous parts of the sea coasts, men water where they may stick ſast. The
build lighthouses, with lanterns that ships have to be guarded from these
throw a great light over the dark dangers. But we cannot have men
water, to help the sailor to find his running down to the water's edge with
way and keep his ship out of danger. lamps wherever these dangers are.
THE LONELY OLD MAN ON Instead of that, we build great light
houses , whose light can be seen far
One dark night, many years ago, over the sea .
athe
ship
coastwasof sailing
Greece.on Itwas
the sea near
so dark BUILDING A HOUSEWAVES
AMID
that the captain could not see how to These lighthouses are built in all
guide the vessel, so he made up his sorts of places. Some are on the
mind to stay until morning brought land ; some are built out in the sea
the light to let him see where to steer. . on rocks., over, which the waves are
Soon after he had stopped the lessel : oftert svçeping; : Others are built on
someone cried out : “ I see a light 1!: :said:.. These are hard to build, be
There, far away, was a tiny light, like cause, before ; tbe foundations can be
a dim , distant star, twinkling in the laid, great pites OC Citiaber have to be
blackness that hung over the sea .. driven down into the soft sand , so as
“ I know now where we are, " said to make a firm base for the lighthouse.
the captain . “ We are near the big Men who build lighthouses are SO
rocks of Cape Matapan. A kind old brave and clever that if they could
Penga bo od
E 53
 THE CHILD'S BOOK OF FAMILIAR THINGS
only keep to their work without being
interfered with by the sea they would
soon get the work done. But they
cannot work for long, because the
angry sea will not let them . Once, the
men who built a lighthouse could only
work for
times thirty hours
a lighthouse in ayears
takes year !to build.
Some
The great Bell Rock lighthouse in
Scotland is built on a rock exposed in
the cold , rough sea . When the men
began to work,only two at a time could
be there . There was not room for more .
The first thing they had to do was to
scrape the thick layers of seaweed off
the rock, then drill holes in the rock,
so that they could drive in iron rods ,
and build round these a strong iron
platform . This was really only the
beginning of the work .
BUILDERS GRIPPED THE SEAWEED
H °
Every few minutes the waves came
dashing over the rock, and the poor
men had to lie flat down, grip the sea-
weed with all their might, and hold their
breath until the water had passed over
them . Then they would get up again
and go on with their work . When the
first Eddystone lighthouse was built
it took the men four years to make
twelve holes in the rock , so that they
might build the foundations on which
the lighthouse could stand.
When they have got as far as this
the work really begins. Heavy tools ,
machinery, and all sorts of stone and
otheſ materials , have to be brought to
the spot in ships or boats, and it is
hard and dangerous work to get them
into the right positions.
One of the most wonderful ways of
building a lighthouse was that in which
the new lighthouse at Beachy Head was
built. There was a lighthouse there on
the top of the cliffs, but it was placed
too high. Sailors at sea in a fog could
not see the light, so a new lighthous
was built at the foot of the cliff, but
right in the sea . :First'et.ad they had ..bonse, one on top of another. First , there
to make a greatshofe : in the challi : Is thedoor by which the men enter and
under the sea ; then , witеn.the.itide : jtceive their goods. Above these are
was low , they built forhå •Clyisoliddle a : store roomsand rooms to live and sleep
big, thickwall,calied i sam . Thegadale in ; then the room where the men trim
the dam so big that they could' work
inside the ring until the tide was very
high ; then they had to get out .
The men next built in the sea a high
platform , made of iron , like a pier at
54
2012an
the seaside, only shorter, and very
strong. This was their workshop, where
they put their things when the tide
came in . But up on the top of the
cliff they had another workshop , and all
sorts of things with which to build.
A RAILWAY
RUNNING THROUGH THE AIR
To bring these things from the top
of the cliff down to the sea they made
a railway in the air. They had great
the
wire ropes fastened on the intoptheof sea,
cliff and on the platform
then fastened once more in a bed of
concrete set in the sea . These ropes
reached from the cliff down to the plat
form in the sea, and were so strong that
a weight of over a hundred tons would
not have broken them . Two of these
wire ropes made a sort of railway for
trucks to glide down , and two more
made another railway to carry up
other trucks. Then , when one truck
carried down its load , it caused the other
truck to come up on the other ropes .
In these trucks the men went down
to their work , and each truck could
carry twelve men out over the sea nearly
three hundred yards through the air.
Down this railway they carried all
the machinery and all the great blocks
of granite that they needed . Some of
the blocks of granite weighed as much
as four cartloads of coal each , but they
were carried down without accident .
Each piece of granite had come from
Cornwall, and had been cut so that it
would exactly fit into the next . To
make quite sure that they fitted pro
perly, they were all built up on land ,
then numbered and taken to pieces ,
and put together again in the sea in
exactly the same order.
WHAT THE INSIDE OF THE
LIGHTHOUSE IS LIKE
This lighthouse is forty - eight feet
thick at the bottom , and for a long way
up it is a solid granite rock . Then come
the eight rooms built inside the light
the lamps and, on top of all, the room
in which the great lantern is kept. The
lantern throws its light across the sea
and turns round and round, so that it
can be seen from any side.
-

HOW WAS THE LIGHTHOUSE

LIGHT HOUSE PUT THERE ?

UMUT
MY
TUM
OUT
If you had been spending a holiday at Beachy Head a few years ago, you would haveseen a lighthouse on the
top of the bigh cliff there, and, looking down from the cliffs, you would have seen the clear sea, as in this picture.

If you go to Beachy Head now, you will find the sea still beating against the rocks, but rising out of it, with the waves
beating all round, is a lighthouse. How did the lighthouse come to be there ? The pictures on next page will show you.
ΟΤΙΥΙΙΤΙΙΤΟΣΙΕ OZYTYTTYYTrunu UT DITITOM
DOMUZYTYYDYTO
55
A BUILDER'S WORKSHOP IN THE SEA

The lighthouse builders waited until the tide was out, and then dug a great hole in the sand. They next built an iron
platform , which they made their workshop when the tide was in. They could then work whether the tide was in or out.

ALLA

When the tide was out they went on with their digging and building, and round the great hole they built a highwall to
keep back the sea when the tide came in. Down below , safe inside the wall, they laid thefoundations ofthelighthouse,
56
A LIGHTHOUSE.RAILWAY IN THE AIR

Buthow did themen get down from the cliffs ? And how did their stones and tools comethere? Theymade a railway
in the air,withwire ropes, strong enough to bear 1,000 men, reaching from the top of the cliffs to the platform in the sea.

49
Down this railway came big trucks, carrying the workmen and the iron and stone of which the lighthouse was to
be made. When the last stone was in its place , the platform and the railway were taken away and the lamp in the
new ligainouse was lit. Every night the lantern shines to guide the sailor on his way , and keep his ship off the rocks.
These photographs are taken by Weston , stbourne.
57
HOW THE TEA COMES TO THE TABLE

BLUZEULERUTAL
W
Tea has a long journey of many thousands of miles before it reaches the teapot. Some of it grows in
China, in small fields and on the hillsides, but most of it grows in the large tea - gardens of India. The 1

tea grows in small bushes, and the leaves are picked and put into baskets. Great numbers of men, women,
and children spend all the working part of their lives picking the tea-leaves from the plant. The leaves must
be carefully picked offwith the thumb-nail, without being torn, and a good picker picks 20 or 30 pounds in a day.

After being sorted, the green leaves are spread out After lying in a good draught, the leaves are taken
on long wooden trays in a house where they can off the trays and rolled between heavy rollers. Some
get plenty of air to make them tough without be. are then put on one side to become black and strong ,
coming hard and dry. They are then like kid. and the rest of the tea is packed while it is green.

The tea is next wrapped up in lead packets or packed in wooden chests, and the packets and chests are
taken to the ship by oxen. The good ship brings the tea thousands of miles by sea, and at last it comes 1

home and we find it on our table ; and when we see the tea-leaf floating in the cup we shall have a new 1
interest in it now that we know the story of its long journey. To make one pound of tea ready for use
takes a man's work for a day, and a man must work for a week to prepare tea to last one of us for a year.
my ‫פוד'יזזזזזזזזזזזזזזזז‬ YTYYTYTYY * ! ‫דז'יזזזזזזזזזז‬ ?? ‫ז‬ ? ‫וזיזרע‬
58
CETRIT
UTTYPYT

lod

THE WONDER OF THE TELEPHONEA

WHAT THIS STORY TELLS YOU
PAT

THEN we speak a word we make the air tremble ; every different word
WHEN
makes the air tremble in a different way. We call these tremblings air
waves .
But an air wave does not carry sound so far or so fast as electricity,
so we use the telephone to change the air waves into electric waves, which
travel along the wire quicker than sound travels from the tongue to the ear.
When we speak into the telephone, an iron disc, like a penny, changes the air
waves into electric waves, which travel along the wire to a disc at the other
end. When they strike this disc the electric waves become air waves again , and give
off exactly the same sounds as the sounds which first made the waves. These sounds
are the words from our lips. Our words strike one disc and become electric waves ;
the waves strike another disc and become words again, because both discs
are in tune and give off exactly the same sound when the waves strike them .
EN who have been up in balloons
MEN The movements of your tongue and
tell us that as they mount higher lips set up movements in the air, and
and higher in the air they lose all these movements are called waves, be
sounds of man , and hear only the bark- cause they go forward something like
ing of dogs ; and when the sound of the surface of the sea . We can hear
barking dies away, the men in the people speak because these sound waves
balloon can hear the scream of a steam- enter our ears and beat against the
engine piercing the air, and this scream ear -drums. Now, the telephone re
of steam travels farther than any other ceives these sound waves from our
sound in theworld. That is a wonderful lips, carrying the waves along the wire
thing. But the telephone is far more and letting them enter the ear of the
mysterious than a steam -engine, and friend at the other end of the wire
the reason is that the telephone does in exactly the same manner as the tele
not merely carry sound a long distance, phone received these sound waves from
but carries the human voice, and our lips. The wonder is that the mes
takes words and sage is given off
laughter over by the wire ex
.
miles and miles . ELECTO, WAVES actly as the wire
Think how won received it from
derful it is that a our lips. Men
wire should speak have been able to
words to you. If This picture will help you to understand the wonder make a machine
of the telephone
after you have read this story .
it made a mere to do this because
fizzling or crackling noise in your ear they have discovered waves ofelectricity,
that would not be very wonderful . But similar to the waves made in the air by
this wire says words in your ear which sound . Men can make these electric
you can understand ; words which waves, so that the electric wire which
have meaning ; words which tell you im- carries our messages is really carrying
portant things. Even here the mystery electric waves jusť like the air waves
does not stop. Most wonderful of all made by our voices . But elec
is it that the words which come to your tricity is very, very rapid ,
ear on the telephone have the very tone carrying sound faster than the
of the voice which utters them miles voice can travel . Suppose the
and miles away. You can always tell human voice could be heard in
on a telephone whether it is your father, Glasgow from London . Well ,
your mother,your uncle , or your brother a message by telephone would
who is speaking. You recognise the voise. get there much more quickly ,
How strange, how wonderful is this ! because electric waves are
Let us see if we can understand it. much more rapid than air
If you put your hand before your waves . So you see that the
mouth and speak against it , you will telephone wire does not really
feel warm breath striking against it . carry words at all. The wire
OUZITUTT UKITUZTUTULULIITTITYTI
59
 prazna
«THE CHILD'S BOOK OF FAMILIAR THINGS
does not carry such In London there is
words as love, business, a telephone exchange
health . No ; it carries which receives over
electric waves which, 150,000,000 messages in
if you could see them, a single year. It is a
would look like the wonderful sight, this
jagged edges of a badly. exchange. The walls
cut page in a book. It are covered with what
carries waves ; it does are called switch -boards,
not carry words . But the boards which enable
the man at the other a boy living in East
end of the telephone London to talk to a
does not hear the fizzing, boy in West London ,
or the mere whisper, of and a girl in North
these waves ; he hears London to speak to a
words ; he hears love, girl in Plymouth. These
business, and health switch -boards are filled
just as if his friend when you talk into the telephone with tiny holes like a
had spoken these words yourwords cause ittle waves in the bee's honeycomb, each
into his ear. How is it ? air. These pass through a small bearing a number, and
Well, all we can say disc, like a penny , and then
the electricity at the other into
side, over them are dull glass
is this. By means of an which carries the waves along the wire. knobs no bigger than a
electricmagnetat shoe button , also
the end ofthe wire having numbers.
the electric waves In front of these
strike against a boards sit the
little disc of clerks , who are
stretched iron , generally women .
and cause it to At their ears
tremble. The the clerks have
trembling of the receivers — that is,
air that they

Try
the part of the
cause is exactly telephone which
like the trem gives off a mes
bling of the air sage; and just
caused by your under their lips
voice , and so the is a transmitter -
iron disc pro that is, the part
duces the very The wires go from poleto pole,along the streets ,over house- of the telephone
words you spoke! tops, sometimes seen
sea. You have
underthethewires
grounind,and sometimes under the which sends a
the streets and along the
That is the ex message. These
planation ; but , if country roads. Here we see workmen busy mending them.
two things are
you think hard, worn by them
you will see that all the time they
it really does not are on duty ;
explain the great the receiver fits
mystery of the over the head ,
telephone. It and the trans
does not tell us mitter is worn
how the exact by a band
sound of a voice round the breast .
in London , with Their hands have
its little laughs to be quite free .
and jerks , can Directly a man
come from a disc in his house or
of iron in Edin his office lifts his
burgh, as if the After going many miles, the wires reach the greattelephone telephone in his
mouth were in exchange, where all the wires.meetin the
under theground. hand, one of th.
that very room . make your words again when they reach the other end. knobs of dull
‫גזיזת‬
TO 10XXXIX ODDIUITITYTTUR
бо
 -THE WONDER OF THE TELEPHONE
glass on the switch switch-board all day
board lights up. The !ong, it is so still that
clerk sees the light , you could almost hear
looks at the number a pin drop on the floor.
under it , and puts a How different is it
plug into one of the in an office where some
holes in the honey bad- tempered or im
patient person is
comb bearing the same
number. The man can ‘ ringing-up " the ex
then speak to her. As change ! You can hear
soon as the plug is him shouting into the
put in , the man is telephone, wanting to
connected with the ex know why he is being
change, and he tells kept waiting, as if,
the clerk that he wants indeed , it is the easiest
to speak to someone thing in the world to
whose number is, let unite immediately all
us suppose, 123 Man the thousands of wires
chester. Asshe
quicklifts
as Theringing of yourbelllights
, a little electric which run through the
lightning wire called a plug into a hole called a exchange. A man like
another plug joined to " jack ," so that she can hear you, because this is called, in the
the firstone, and puts your waves then run into her own wire. exchange, “ akicker.”
it into the hole They laugh at
bearing the himbecause he
number the is so ignorant of
man wants . the tremendous
When she does business of the
this a bell rings telephone . He
in the office at does not com
Manchester ; plain while he
the owner of stands at a
that office takes crowded coun
up his tele ter of a tele .
phone, and then graph office.
he is speaking waiting to send
direct with his off a telegram ,
friend in Lon because he can
you havetold her the number of your friend's telephone ,
don. When When
the telephon e-girl puts another jack intoyour friend's number, see how busy
they have and your friend'sbell rings. There are so many telephones that everybody is ,
finished talking, there must be hundreds of girls, and they are busy all day long. and waits pa
and put down tiently. But be
their telephone , causehe cannot see
the little light goes the telephone wire,
out , and the clerk the exchange, and
removes the plugs . the telephone clerk,
They are then he does not under
“ cut off.” stand how busy
This is the busi everybody is at the
ness of a telephone exchange, and
exchange. It is thinks he ought
wonderful to see not to be kept
holy quietly every waiting a minute.
thing is done. But you will
There is no noise , never be a kicker,
no excitement . At last you are " through,"and the electric waves run because you know
Although the little along the wire, over the house-tops,under thestreet, something about
" glow - worms” past the jacks, until they reach your friend's tele- the wonder and
are bobbing in perfect Then they strike the disc, and the disc turns the mystery
the electric waves back into air waves, which cause the of
and out on the sound of your words so that your friend can hear. the telephone .
morum 61 vertrva
 Oxu CA COTIZICE I IZOGUCNOTTE Dmracanariammanson

GIOJOS
WHAT THE PENNY DOES IN THE SLOT

MUDHOZ-
SIC

P
E
BUTIK SCOTCH

GUTTER SCOTCH
CALUATE POTEKA BUTTER SCOTCH
PER
BUTTER SCOTCH
XXX

BUTTER SCOTC
DO TEA SCOTCH
SCOTC
But TCH
BUTTER
BUTTER SCON
BUTTER SCOTCH
BUTTER SCOG
BUTTER SCOTCH

BUTTER SCOTCH
BUTTER SCOTCH
DUTTER SCOTCH

You have often wondered, perhaps, what happens In this picture one side of the machine is taken out, and
when you put a penny in the slot of the little iron sweet we see the penny drop down the slot until it drops on a
shops at the railway -stations. These pictures show catch that fits into a little niche in one side of a tray. The
you how the penny works. A very clever man once penny's weight pushes down the catch so that it cannot
had an idea that he could make a penny do the work of hold the tray back. The niche is cut out of one side of
a shopkeeper, and so he invented a machine like this. the tray only, so that the tray is not really cut in two.
BUTTER XON NE ATS
BUTTER SCOTCH
SW EET
BUTTER SCOIL
OTTES SCOTT

BUTTER SCOTCH
BUYTER SCOTCH
BUTTER SCOTT
TETEZI
RETTY

When you pull the handle of the machine, the tray

TYT

draws the penny along the iron teeth underneath until

BETT BATTERIET
it reaches the space at the end of the teeth. Through
this space the penny falls into the bottom of the machine.
10

BUITER STCW
BUTTERSE
BUTTER SCOTCH
BUTTER SCOTCH

BUTTER SCOTCH
BUTTEN SCOTCH
BUTTER SCOTCH

PULL

The tray holds a little stack of packets , one above the other, and as the tray comes out the bottom packet comes
with it , through a hole just wide enough for one packet to pass. When the packet is right out , the packet
then at the bottom of the stack falls into the back end of the tray, and when the tray is pushed right back this
packet remains still , and so comes to the front of the tray , where it rests until the next penny brings it ont.
The next Familiar Things begin on pige 169.
IT LTZ 20 LEXULTITT XXFILMU XX ARIZOXELIZAKI ZX129 X umur
62
 le The Child's Book of
ALL COUNTRIES
THE STORY OF THE WORLD
THEN we are grown up and old enough to cross the sea , the greatest
WHEN wonder that will come to us will be the great wonder of countries.
Once upon a time men and women lived nowhere in particular, but spent their
lives in wandering from place to place. So they wandered all over the world,
some here, some there, till they settled down and made homes. Through all
the years these homes have been growing into great countries, and nothing is
so wonderful as to travel in ships and trains and see the places where other
people live, with the glorious monuments that seem almost to speak to us of
the way in which, through all the ages, men have lived and toiled and suffered
and died to make the world a beautiful place. We shall read here the story of
what the world is, and what the world has been , and we begin with a little
island, the happiest little country in the worid — the land in which we live.

THE LAND WE LIVE IN

F you ask a very
little girl where By FRANCES EPPS
she lives , the happy an
swer will come quite
readily, “ With father and
mother," or, “ In our home."
She feels satisfied that there
is no more to say, because she
does not yet know that the
four walls which shut her in SO
safely with her loved ones stand
in a beautiful and interesting home
land , which lies on the outside of
a great, wonderful ball, rolling on
always through space round
round the sun.
This knowledge must come to her
as she grows older, and learns to
notice, to think, to ask questions, and
to enjoy pictures and stories. Little
by little the veil which hid all but
home from her baby eyes gradually
becomes thinner, and at last fades
away as she realises that there is
space and life and stir all round her
home. Later comes the keen longing
to see clearly into the near and far
distance , and to find out what is there
and who is there. Day by day her
thoughts widen, and her mind dwells
upon what is beyond.
A journey to the seaside will show
us that there are other fields and
woods besides those near home which
salt air of the sea
side, we shall see
that the land on which
we walk about, with its
trees , its fields and towns,
does not stretch away and
away for ever, but that the
sea comes flowing up in little
white waves to meet it . And
then for some happy weeks we watch
the sea and the curling waves , the
golden sunbeams dancing on the
water, the boats with their sails ,
and the smoke of the steamers ,
and we ask questions and try to
answer them all day long. Why does
the sea look green , or blue, or
grey ? Is it the paint off the boats ?
Why is there sometimes plenty of sand
to play on , and sometimes no sand at
all ? How soon does it get deep,
and how deep ? What is there on
the other side ? How far could we
walk on and on along the sand. ?
At last someone who knows the
66
shapes by heart says : Let us make
a model in the sand , the shape of the
country we live in our homeland
-and find out what we can from
it. " Stones and seaweed , and thick ,
damp sand , make a firm foundation ,
and then we cut out the shape of the
island of Great Britain .
When the tide comes up we are 0

we know so well, other towns besides
the town in which we live, and that
everywhere there are yet more and
more people living and working.
When we find ourselves in the fresh ,
delighted for the sea to surround it
entirely, and with a stick we point out
that there is shore and sea all round
the edge of our island home. Day by
day we make fresh and better models,

PARATE AA BG
63
 THE CHILD'S BOOK OF COUNTRIES

till we are sure which part of it is pass quiet towns . How near the great
England, which is Wales, and which cathedral at Canterbury seems to come
Scotland ; where our home is ; which up towards us ! How white are the
part of the coast we are visiting. chalk cliffs of Dover !
Perhaps we notice, too, where the But soon there is a change. Smoke
sun rises and sets, and how the shadow that nearly blinds us pours out from
of the stick falls at midday, till we thousands of chimneys, big and little,
understand that if we face the north stretching along miles and miles of
the south is behind us, with the east streets on both sides of a big river
on our right hand, and the west on what a pity that it is so dirty !
our left. At last it will become plain running down to the sea. A roar and
that Scotland lies to the north of a din comes up to us from the people
England, that Wales lies to the west , and and the traffic , with now and then the
that Kent is in the south -east corner of piercing whistle of an engine, or a hoot
England, running down to the sea. from a deafening siren on the river.
Now we are ready to finish the picture It is London . We pass over the
model of our home . greatest city in the
land — the British Isles world . Nowhere do
-by adding Ireland so many people live
N
EA

to the west of Great together, making so

OC

Britain , with the sea much noise and

LAN

ŅOH
running up between , ABERDEEN
smoke, as in London .
if we can manage it. SEA
Now we turn north
ND

If we find this diffi COURGN

wards, over green
country and farms,
LA

cult, we must be con

tent with an outline over small towns, and
RE

NEBCASTLE

of the islands on the BELIAJI low fields with ditches

sand, shown up with o YORK
between, and here and
GRADFORD
ES

2. LEEDS
little white stones ; oudi Nuts LIVERPOOL
MANCHESTER there tall cathedrals .
PAL

and as we plant a NOTTINGHAM

DERBY To the right is the
rose in England, a Jos BARANGNAM
LEICESTER
sea - coast, where the
thistle in Scotland , CORN 2 children are playing
LONDON
a leek in Wales , a bit BRISTOL
and bathing and
of shamrock in Ire SOUTHAMPTON COETSMOUS bringing the red
land , we talk of the roses into their
hills and lakes and cheeks. How peace
rivers that make up This is a map of the United Kingdom, which is ful and quiet are the
the countries, showing the name we Thegive to theKingdom
United British Islan ds,in which
is made up of fields full of cattle !
by models in the wet four countries - England,Scotland, Ireland,and But soon we come
sand what we mean . Wales. England, Wales, and Scotland are to a very different
If only we could part of one large island, which we call Great kind of country.
Britain ; Ireland stands in the sea by itself.
fly like those gulls ! Huge, tall chimneys
How much they must see of all this ! ” pour out black smoke in the great busy
suggests the youngest of the party. towns , and even the fields stretching
That is a capital idea ! Let us start at between them are black and sad -look .
)
once on a “ make -believe " journey with ing. The sirens are hooting again, not
the swift, white birds , and imagine our- from steamers, but from the large
selves with strong, tireless wings and buildings with the tall chimneys, to
keen eyes looking down from above tell the people that it is time to come
on the British Isles, in which we live, to work or go to dinner. We see
to get a birdseye view of a large the women and girls with shawls over
spread of country or town all at once. their heads. What do they work at ?
We pass quickly over the part we Making stuff for the clothes we wear;
saw in the train . There are such the glass and china, knives and forks
pleasant-looking cornfields and hop- for our tables ; needles and pins , boots ,
gardens and orchards, such pretty fireplaces, curtains, blankets — all the
meadows and woods, that we can things we use in our homes. And all
understand people saying that valleys over the country, but especially in the
laugh and sing. Here and there we blackest of the busy places, we hear
Cur
CUKUUUUUNTUK
64
 PORT ROSE
ER DtE
TONNanot ABERCE
DUNSAN
EDINBURGH

O N
ND
IN
R
PRD
LO
BERWICK

AM
2K
CLASGOS MELROSE KELIO PR
ON

PELLEN
THE CHILDREN'S
CARSTA

TA
SANDURAS
SO
NR
MAP
N A
OF RAILWAYS
LOLLIDE lat బలది
Aves
.
PA
DUMFRIES NEWCASTLE

150

CARLISLE SUNDLALAND
DURNAN

THAN
WHITEHAVEN
AM WRITO
APAN

KENDAL CAR N
SCARAORO
TA LIS O
N LI NATHALLEA
R2
A
T FILE
Rita RIOUNGTON

O K
OLANCASTER BAN YOR
samo
ANSLA

TLLLTWO
LEEDS
BLACKPOOL யே HULL
FOTO
CRAR பாட
WPROSTON V
SOBTN PORT EN
CO

MANCHESTER RN * WH

LIVERPOOL
bourne

LLANDUDNS CARR
SE
SWEI HELD
GL

ROLVEN
TR

ISRAEF
//

T
AS

RAIN TO LINCOLN
AI

CO
TO
N

CHESTE NOTTINGHAM
KULGREWE
BOSTON
WELLS CRONER
RUASON
பார் DERBY CHUSTER
N
SMA FRON LO NDON SWESTR R STUFORD
op
TE
ES sin Thin CUPIL
AN gur
AN TOM g SERTA
LEICES DUUR YAGMOUT
TAN WONTA PETEKBORO FOR FICUT
NORWICH
TWETTOR
RSA SARSONO
AF
MA
a
Are
TA 0155
WUN NALES
cau Sharon DOO m
oY
AALAY
ARMYADLA STA
FRAMLINGMAN
BIRMINGHAN RUCOY
PUZ
BUILT BPDORO CAMBRIDGE
LAL PORR ON
TRA PORTANT
FRA IN " Ades
RE
AT

IN
PL

BALLON IPSWICH
CHELTENHA SALUTON S DRAINQUE
ACQUA
ROSS BISHGP
STARE
MONMUIY LAN 80
NF
O
LAWICH
ABERGAVENNYS GLOUCESTE AI
Bicuta TR YA
LACTON
Utvas
PRECES
Gray
SWANSEA USK
STROUD
OVORD
ཡ་
NLATN
RN RRES
ENUMAT BIBLOT
SIV TO
BRISTOL 4.60 So
BRIDCERCARDIFT कसा
न CAP TRAIN TO
CUAR FRA
.
POR PENZANCE SIN FOR MASCATE
)
YATTON TRAIN MARCATE
N

WESTON SUPLA
DO

BATH TROWBRIDGE
guns
RED
MARC
‫گدایی‬ TRAIN L. CARUGAABU
R NE
G P DO
nalunor I A
P O DOVE
wy
S T TRAN LONDON
T TUNGSDCE F

S
HORSHAN
ILMINSTER E N TOLETOWE
ONS SALISOVAY
OD DOM YLOVIL RYE
TOUT
THVERTON ICHT

PORTS HOUT PASTINS

CREDITO ATHINETE
DORCHESTUS
GOURNEN
BAIRPORT
LEETLE
TRAIN PA ONDON
WEYMOUTH VENTNOR

LYMOUTH
TORQUAY

In the days before there were any railways, people had to go from town to town in coaches drawn by
horses, and the journey from one town to another sometimes took many days. Then a clever man named
George Stephenson made an engine to go by steam , and since then railways have been laid all over England .
There are more than thirty thousand miles of railways in England, id thousands of rains are always run
ning. There are still some little villages without railways, but the railway is not very far away , and we can
leave London after breakfast any morning and be in any part of the country we want to go to at bed - time.
65
 IEZUILUIL Una&
THE CHILD'S BOOK OF COUNTRIES
the whirring and thumping of the works hasty glance at the two wonderful
in the mills and factories, and of the iron bridges near beautiful Edinburgh.
steeds , eating coals, and breathing fire As Ireland is so near to this “ narrow
and smoke like the dragons in our story- waist " of Scotland , the seagull party
books, racing about in every direction, will fly over the few miles of sea that
dragging behind them carriages filled separate the north of Ireland from the
with people, and waggons loaded with west of Scotland. What a busy place
wool, cotton , coal, and other things we see with our bird's eye as we hover
needed in the mills. over Belfast ! It reminds us of Glasgow
We are now over one of the parts of on the Clyde, where we heard the clang
England where coal can be dug out of of the hammers. They seem as loud
the earth , and such parts of the country here, for some of the largest ships in
are always busy and noisy and black . the world first glide into the water
We are quite breathless and deafened at Belfast. Look at the fine quays and
with the bustle, and ready to enjoy the docks , the tall chimneys and hand
quiet of the heathery Yorkshire moors some streets . But we soon pass over
which lie ahead of us . To the west of the busy city, and find ourselves over
them lies the grand chain of hills that grand rocks with the sea dashing against
make the “ backbone” of England , and them , and forcing a way here and there
further on, in the north -west, we can into the land. Nearly all round the
almost see ourselves in the bright, still “ other island,” as Ireland is often
lakes , set like blue eyes among the called, we can see the chains of hills
giant hills of standing like
Cumberland . rough , strong
The air is sentinels to
colder as we guard the
cross the hills flatter land
into Scotland inside . What
and pass over a contrast , as
another busy we look down
district of from above ,
works and are the dark
mills, over bogs and
countless The landwelive in is only a very tiny part of the whole earth ,just great lakes ,
steamers movd; show usthet whosee
le earth,and atntrthey topleft-han
our own cou
d corner of the globe bright green
as hardly more than a little white meadows , and
ing to an on the righ we
fro like bees speck . Yet no country has a greater power in the world than ours. low hills of
about a hive . That loud hammering the centre , to the grand and jagged
of metal is from the shipbuilding yards mountain wall which lies round
on the River Clyde . about it ! The damp air, brought by
Soon all below us is still . Great the soft west wind from the great
solemn mountains seem to stand on ocean , sheds such a soft light on lake
guard , in their uniform of brown, and field and mountain side that we
yellow , and purple, from their covering feel we are in fairyland as we pass
of bracken and heather, with patches over Killarney and many another
of dark woods and Auttering silver lovely spot, and we are quite glad
birches . See the gleams of light from that there is no large Black Country
the trickling streams, and the water to spoil them as we have seen in
falls that make music on their rough England and Scotland.
sides . What a number of lakes ! The We start homewards from “ Dublin's
sea runs into the land from either side fair city , " with a glance at its fine parks
as if trying to meet in the middle ! and houses and the busy crowds, and
And now just a peep at the very north cross over to Wales , passing by the
of Scotland , where the waves are great port of Liverpool, to which so
beating and hissing and surging over many İrish folk come to find the work
the rocks — no wonder that point below they cannot get in the land in which
is called Cape Wrath ! they were born . Let us now enjoy the
It is so cold that we are glad to turn beautiful, restful mountains of Wales ;
southwards, and on our way give a there are great masses of them
TYTEZUMUUUU
66 CLOUUUUU
ITEETITI un'ULOU
 -THE LAND WE LIVE IN COMITC CICGXGALO

everywhere. We get peeps of shining and listen to what old Father Thames
lakes and waterfalls, and children play- can tell us.
ing on the seashore ; and here and We will take a steamer, if they are
there we pass over busy districts running ; if not , we can stand a while
where toilers get coal out of the earth , on London Bridge, or on the Tower
and slates and stones from the hillsides . Bridge, or on that delightful wharf in
THE TOTTLE BOATS CARRY THE FISH front of the Tower. It is always
beautiful and wonderful there , whether
We pass another hive of shipping in the stiff breeze in your face brings a
the English Channel, and at last find taste of the sea over which it has come ,
ourselves over the sweet West Country. and the sunshine turns the muddy water
Everything moves slowly here. The into shining gold, or there is a misty
people who live here never hurry. fog, and the steamers and barges loom
All is peaceful and placid. The dear, darkly through it as they twist and turn
shaggy ponies on the high , breezy and hoot and shriek . How those three
moors only hurry when you try to barges tied together seem to swagger
catch them . The pretty, brown -sailed along behind the fussy little tug !
fishing boats all around the coast move Time yourself, and see how long a list
gently and slowly into the quiet you can make in five minutes of what you
harbours with their silvery loads. can see of the cargoes in boats and barges
How blue is the sea, and how blue is -fish , coals , oil in casks, stone for
the sky ! How gay the shutters of the building, oranges, ice, and so on. But
little stone houses, looking like toy busy as it all is, it is busier still further
houses from our height ! How de- down the river, and the ships are larger
licious it must be to bathe in those as we come to the docks , for here are
little coves among the brown rocks ! the deep basins , with convenient wharves
But this is a long trip in the air, and and quays for them to lie alongside,
we must not linger to look at those and give up what they have brought,
grey men-of- war in the Channel, nor at or take in fresh cargoes to carry away .
those whale-like torpedo boats near THIEETHESHIPS THAT BRING GOODS FROM
ENDS OF THE EARTH TO LONDON
Portsmouth, nor even at the soldiers
and sailors exercising on the common . Wherever you look you can see cranes
We must sweep on over the round swaying as they swing round to lift
chalk downs , covered with springy grass weights in and out ; huge warehouses
and sweet wild thyme, all cheerful with forstoring goods ; the trolleys , waggons,
the song of larks, tillwe find ourselves trains ; hundreds of busy, shouting
back on the Kentish sands , whence we sailors, and men carrying loads and
started to get a first glimpse of our packing . What thousands of ships !
homeland. Sand modelling becomes What miles and miles of docks , and
more interesting than ever, for now we what stacks and stacks of boxes , sacks ,
know where to throw up little hills , casks, and bales ! How it all sets us
thinking ! Where have they
and make lakes and rivers out of green from all come
seaweed. ? What is in them ? Where are
WONDERFUL SIGHT DOWN they all going ?
THEONDON'S BUSY RIVER Think over what you use in your
But the holidays are over, and as we home every day, and what you see in
settle down happily in the home where the shops . Many of these things come
once we had no thought for what lay through the Port of London .
beyond , we find that a new delight Now, large as London is , and much
has been given to us. It is the power as its thousands of homes use of every
of being able to see over again with a thing they can afford to buy, a great
sort of inside eye, which we call deal of all these cargoes before you is
memory, the views we have had of simply on its way to somewhere else.
wide valleys and busy towns, mountains, The docks are used as a sort of junction
rivers, and lakes. for goods - not passengers — to change at ;
But we want to see more of London and some of these goods are taken from
than we have yet seen from the tops of one ship to another and packed off to
trams , or from our birdseye view. other countries in ships, and some are
Let us first find our way to the river, sent to places all over the British Isles.
umum
67
 2

ENGLAND THROUGH A BIRD'S EYE : WHAT IT WOULD LOOK LIKE 1

If you hold these two pages flat, and fix your eyes closely on the picture, you will begin to realise 1
68
 ico

Skies

1
1

IF WE COULD SEE IT ALL AT ONCE FROM A GREAT HEIGHT

very clearly what England is like, and what it would look like if we could see it all at once , from a balloon
F 69
 -THE CHILD'S BOOK OF COUNTRIESamamma,
But do not think that the Port of web, the railways being the threads
London is the only junction for goods stretched in all directions.
in the British Isles . If your home is Now , eager as you may be to travel
at Glasgow or Liverpool, or Belfast, or on these lines of railways, to see more
Hull or Bristol, you can go to great of the homeland, there is something
docks and watch many such scenes as you want to do first. The question
these on the Thames . you asked about the other side of the
HOWROTHEG OODS ARE CARRIED sea, when you first began to watch
FROM TO it , is still unanswered ; the dreams
And now you want to know how the that the flash of white cliffs across the
goods are sent over England, or to waves brought to you as you played
Scotland, Ireland, or Wales ? You on the Kentish coast are still only
understand at once how steamers can dreams; the wonder that filled your
take things by sea abroad or round mind , when you watched the busy ports,
our coasts ; but do you know that as to where the incoming ships come
barges can travel right across England, from , and the outgoing ships go to , is
say, from London to Liverpool on an still unsatisfied . You want , in fact ,
" inland voyage " ? Where there is no to “ place ” your homeland on that
natural river , or in cases where it is great round ball which is our world.
not wide or deep enough , canals have Perhaps you can get a model of it ;
been dug out by the work of men's the same shape, but thousands of
heads and hands . Sometimes the times smaller than it really is . Take
canals join two rivers. Perhaps you it in your hands. The real world is
noticed the Regent's Canal , when you a ball so huge that it would take
visited the Zoological Gardens. and you three months of travel in steamer
realised that it is a slow way of travel- and train to go right round it.
ling as you watched the poor, thin The 1E PLACE OF OUR LITTLE ISLAND
horse tug the barge along . But it ON THE GREAT EARTH - BALL
costs less than to send goods by rail. Turn your globe round, noticing as
If you 100K at a plan or map of you do so the blue colour that covers
London you will notice a sort of ring so much of its surface and shows the
of great stations , the ends of the sea, and remember that there are three
railway lines that branch out in every times more water than land in our
direction. Beyond the passenger part world ; the other colours in patches of
of the stations are the " sidings," where varying shapes show where dry land rises,
trucks are being emptied, or loaded Do you think our British Isles take
with goods brought from other stations , up a large proportion of this dry land ?
or goods that have been made in You cannot find them , though you
London itself , or have been sent by know their shape quite well, you say.
vans from the docks ; and the goods There they are , under your little finger
go to supply the homes and the fac- the islands you thought so large, ds
tories in the districts through which you passed from the Kentish coast to
the railway passes . the wild seas of Cape Wrath, then to
GREAT SPIDER'S WEB OF RAILWAYS the rocky sentinels of Ireland that look
THELLREVER OURLAND for ever towards the setting sun , then
You want to know where the railways by Wales and the West Country to the
go to ? Then get a railway map , and breezy South Downs.
see how the Great Northern Railway There is Australia on the globe ,
runs to York, and then on, under 25 times larger than the British Isles ;
another name, to Scotland ; how the India, 11 times larger ; Canada , 30 times
Midland and North -Western also run larger than our homeland .
towards Scotland . Then trace the You can find answers to some of your
Great Western from Paddington, and questions now . The white cliffs across
the South -Western from Waterloo to the Channel are in France ; the steamers
Wales and the West Country. Finish come from any countries beyond the
with the shorter lines that run from sea that have anything to send that we
London to the South Coast , and you need , and go to those that need some
will see that the position of the great thing we have to send.
city is like the centre of a spider's The next story of our land is on page 183.
ZZYILIULUTTUTILITYTEIX TEXELUITIT MUOYUUTTILIITTOLID
70
 The Child's Book of
STORIES
THE TALES OF LONG AGO
E turn to this part of our book for our stories, the great stories that we all love
WE to hear. And what wonderful tales they are — tales of fairies, and giants, and
ogres, and goblins, and castles, and mysteries which no wise man could ever
understand. We shall read them here together. We shall meet here friends
and enemies. Brave Jack the Giant Killer , beautiful Little Red Riding Hood,
sad little Cinderella - all these and a whole host of wonderful people come into
this part of our book . Who wrote these tales we do not know ; but we know
that since the world began boys and girls in every country have sat by the
fire listening to the tales which never make us tired, and we know , too,
that children will sit listening to them patiently as long as the world lasts.

Aladdin and the Wonderful Lamp

NCE upon a time an African put on his finger. A spirit then
ONO magician came to China to appeared before him, and said :
(

find a wonderful lamp . I am the slave of the ring. ))

In order to get it he had to What do you wish me to do ? ” )

crawl through a passage leading
to a fairy palace beneath the
earth. The passage was very
small , and anyone who let his
dress touch thewalls was killed by
magic. The magician did not like
to risk his own life , so he made friends
with a little Chinese boy, called Alad- gave her the wonderful lamp, and asked
din , and took him to the fairy palace.
" In this place ," said the magician ,
a treasure is hidden . Do what I
tell you and you will become the
richest man on earth. Keep this ring
on your finger, and do not let your
clothes touch anything until you have
put out the little lamp that burns
in the garden, and placed it in your
pocket. Then you can take away
as much treasure as you wish .”
Down jumped Aladdin into the
passage leading to the palace. He
found the lamp in a garden where
diamonds and pearls and rubies grew
upon the trees. Putting it under his
vest, he filled his pockets with jewels
DOC
“ Please take me home,” said
Aladdin .
In the twinkling of an eye he
found himself outside his mother's
house. She was a poor widow, and
had nothing for him to eat and no
money to buy him anything. So he
her to sell it and get some bread .
It is very dirty,” she said, giving
it a rub.
A spirit then appeared , and said :
“ I am the slave of the lamp. What
do you wish me to do ? ”
The widow was too frightened to
reply , but Aladdin boldly said :
* Please bring us something nice
to eat.”
In the twinkling of an eye a table
appeared on which there were all
kinds of meat and wine, in dishes of
gold and goblets of crystal.
Having dined in this manner, Alad
din went out for a walk, just as the
daughter of the King was riding by.

and returned to the passage. Princess Badroulboudour, as she was

“ Give me the lamp, and then I
will help you out ,” said the magician.
" No," said Aladdin ; " help me out
and then I will give you the lamp.”
This made the magician very angry ,
and he closed up the opening in the
earth, and went back to Africa .
For two days Aladdin wandered
about the fairy palace without finding
anything to eat, or any way of escape.
On the third day he happened to
.sub the ring which the magician had
called , was a lovely girl , and Aladdin
fell in love with her. He went indoors
)
and rubbed the wonderful lamp, and
said to the spirit :
“Please make me rich and build me
the finest mansion in the world .”
In the twinkling of an eye Aladdin
and his mother found themselves in a
palace of gold , with six hundred ser
vants to wait upon them , and wealth
enough to buy a kingdom. They sent
forty basins of gold filled with diamonds

71
 av THE CHILD'S BOOK OF STORIES
and pearls and rubies to the King, and wife at a dinner- table in his palace in
he was so pleased with the gift that he the farthest part of Africa. They were
allowed Aladdin to marry Princess Bad- overjoyed to see one another, but before
roulboudour. Aladdin and his wife lived they were able to escape the magician
together in peace in the palace of gold came upstairs to dine with the Princess.
until the African magician came againto Aladdin quickly crept under the table,
try and get the wonderful lamp. He and placed a powder in his wife's hand,
found that Aladdin was away hunting, which she put in her glass of wine. i
and, disguising himself as a hawker, he “ Here is an excellentwine,” she said
walked around the palace shouting : to the magician ; “ just taste it . "
“ New lamps for old ! Who will
)
The bad magician drank the wine
change new lamps for old ? ” eagerly, and down he dropped, dead.
“ I will,” said the Princess, running Aladdin rushed out , found the lamp
out into the courtyard . in the magician's pocket, and rubbed it.
The Princess remembered that there Oh, please,” he said to the spirit ,
was a little dirty lamp in Aladdin's room, " take the palace back to the place from
and she brought it out, and, in exchange which it was removed ! ”
for a large, bright, new one, gave it to the Immediately the palace was taken
magician. It was the wonderful lamp ! up from the spot on which it stood in
So the magician at once rubbed it , and Africa, and set down in China, opposite
commanded the spirit to carry the the palace of the King, who gave them
palace of gold and everything in it to all his riches and made them his heirs.
the farthest part of Africa.
“ Am I dreaming ? ” said Aladdin,
when he came back from hunting.
Where his palace had stood
there was only a patch of bare
ground . Happily , he still wore
the ring which the magician had
placed on his finger, and he now
happened to rub it again.
“ What do you wish me to
do ? ” said the slave of the ring.
“Please bring back my wife
and my palace," said Aladdin.
“ Only the slave of the lamp
can do that,” replied the spirit.
“ Well, take me to Princess
Badroulboudour,” said Aladdin .
And in the twinkling of an eye
he found himself sitting beside his
UN

The magician sat at dinner with the Princess,

and the Princess put a powder into her wine.
“Here is an excellent wine," she said to the
magician ; "just taste it . " The bad magician
drank eagerly, and dropped down dead.
72
 THE IVORY MAIDEN
The sculptors ofancient Greece were
cleverest in the world . The
the
images which they made out of gold
and ivory and exquisite marble were
of wonderful beauty. The most mar-
vellous of these statues was the ivory moved by Pygmalion's strange and
maiden carved by Pygmalion, the King wild passion for a statue . And as he
of the island of Cyprus. It was a figure
of divine loveliness , and it seemed to
breathe.
When Pygmalion finished his work,
he gazed at it at first in a kind of awe .
Was it about to move and speak ?
Then, overcome by a strange and wild
passion of love, he clasped the ivory
maiden in his arms, and tried to kiss
her into life . But all in vain . No
PENELOPE'S MARVELLOUS TAPESTRY
PENELOPE, a celebrated princess of
Greece, was the wife of Ulysses,
the brave warrior of whose prowess
many tales are told .
One day Ulysses told Penelope that
war had broken out in Troy, and that
he must go and help to fight.
Penelope was sad to be left all alone,
but determined to be brave and look
forward to his return. But the wars
lasted many years , and Ulysses was
away so long that everybody thought
he must have been killed. Penelope
alone believed that he still lived .
At last foreign princes came to the
land, and, seeing how beautiful Penelope
was , wanted to marry her.
But Penelope refused to believe that
Ulysses was dead, and would have
nothing to do with the princes , who
declared that they would not go away
ACHILLES AND THE QUEEN OF THE AMAZONS
'HE Amazons were a warlike race of
THE women who lived near the Black
Sea. They never allowed any man to
dwell in their country, and they even
sent their own sons away, and brought
up only their daughters. They were
strong and hardy in body, and brave and
daring in soul, and they delighted in
hunting and fighting . But one day,
when they were hunting , their Queen
shot an arrow at a deer, and missed it,
and killed her own sister.
“ I will not slay myself,” said the
Queen. “ I will die on the sword of the
bravest man in the world .”
Achilles was then the bravest man
UTOR
73
WHO CAME TO LIFE
mortal kisses had the power to change
cold and hard ivory into warm and
tender flesh .
Happily, however, Venus, who was
the goddess of love , was very deeply
was again clasping his work and kissing
it , Venus came and breathed life into
it, and the ivory figure slowly changed
into a living maiden in the sculptor's
arms . Then , to the great joy of
Pygmalion , he found that his beloved
loved him as passionately as he loved
her. She was named Galatea , and
they were married in great splendour,
and lived very happily together.
till she promised to marry one of them .
This made Penelope unhappy, but
as she sat at her work one day she
thought of a plan to keep the princes
from troubling her.
“ Wnen this piece of tapestry is
finished, " she said , holding out а
beautiful piece of needlework, “ I will
choose another husband .”
All day Penelope worked at the
tapestry, and at night, when she was
alone, she unravelled all she had done
in the day. In this way the work was
never finished . The princes were
amazed at her industry, but as the
princess would not marry until it was
done they could only wait and leave her
in peace. Then at last, after he had
been away twenty years , Ulysses came
home from the wars , to find his beauti
ful wife waiting for him .
in the world, and he was fighting among
the Greeks and against the Trojans.
So the Queen of the Amazons gathered
an army, and marched to help the
Trojans. At first Achilles would not
fight with women , but the Amazons
charged the Greeks and defeated them ,
and he had to appear.
The Queen of the Ainazons fell in
love with Achilles as soon as she saw
him, yet she struck him fiercely and
hurt him, and he struck back and hurt
her. Then , when he saw how young
and lovely and valiant she was , he fell
in love with her. But it was too late .
He had killed her.
TOOIIULIITUDATURIKULUM

MONA AND THE
FORSAKEN MERMAN
And with one sweep of his sword he
M ONAScilly
was the prettiest girl in the
Isles. One day she was cut off her head. The next morning the
Prince asked his father if he might marry.
standing on a rock by the sea-shore ,
and the King of the Mermen saw her You were married yesterday,” said
and fell in love with her. Catching
hold of her foot, he dragged her down
to his palace beneath the sea .
He was an ugly old man, and Mona
did not like him , and would
wed him . His son , who was
kind and handsome young merman ,
also fell in love with Mona, and she
fell in love with him . This made
the King very angry, and he said to
the Prince :
“ It is time that you were married .
I have chosen the fairest mermaid in
my kingdom for your wife , and the
wedding will take place this afternoon.
Make haste and dress for it ."
Then , taking Mona to the kitchen ,
6
he said : “ You will have to prepare
the wedding feast. If all the pies and by the sea-shore at sunset, and bring
tarts and puddings are not ready in an
hour I shall cut your head off.”
There were only rows of empty pots
in the kitchen , and Mona could not find
anything to cook.
But when the wedding party entered
the church , the young Prince spoke.
“ I have forgotten the ring," he said .
“ I must run back and get it.”
On reaching the palace he rushed
to the kitchen and found Mona in tears .
Let me help you,” he said. " This
is how mermen prepare dinners .”
He touched the pots with aa magic
wand and filled them with meats and
puddings, so that when the wedding
party came back to the palace Mona
had an admirable feast ready for them .
The King of the Mermen saw it and he
was furious .
Someone has been helping you ,”
he said . “ I will see into this .'
At midnight the Prince and his bride
retired to their room.
“ Stand by their door and hold this
lighted candle, " said the King to Mona.
When it has burned half-way through
I shall cut off your head.”
When the candle was nearly burned
half-way, the Prince asked his bride to
hold it while Mona lighted the fire.
' Is the candle burned half-way
through ? " said the old King.
Yes," said the bride.
KOZOIDIZAXO
XXX
the old King
But you have cut my wife's head
off ,” said his son . 11
When the old King understood what
not had happened he thought that , after all,
a he had better let Mona and his son
marry. So they were married , and for
some years they lived together very 1
happily, and Mona had two charming
little baby mermaidens. One day Mona !
asked if she might go up to earth
once more and visit her mother and
father.
“ Very well,” said the merman . " I
will build an enchanted bridge of crystal
stretching from our palace to the Scilly
Isles . You must be careful not to let
any man kiss you , and I will wait for you
you back safely beneath the waves."
Everybody in the island thought that
Mona was drowned . Her father was
wild with joy to see her again , and
he ran up and kissed her very tenderly.
As soon as her lips touched his, she
forgot all about her husband and her
little mermaidens and her palace under
the sea .
She was not able to remember where
she had been . Yet she would sit for
hours by the shore and gaze sadly at the
waves, and try to think of something
that had happened there. Sometimes
as she lay awake in her father's cottage
she seemed to hear voices calling.
“ What a strange noise the wind is
making to-night ! " she used to say.
But one summer night , when her
window was wide open, someone came
beneath it and called her.
6
“ Ah, Mona, Mona!” he said . “ You
promised to return at sunset, and you
keep me waiting still. Mona, have you
forgotten the merman who loved you ?
Your little baby mermaidens cry for
you, Mona, and you do not come.
Mona listened, and everything came
back to her mind . She jumped up out
of bed and opened the cottage door.
The merman was standing there, and
she returned with him to her palace
under the sea and was never seen
again on the earth.
74
MONA AND THE MERMAN PRINCE IN THE PALACE AT THE BOTTOM OF THE SEA
Standing by the sea - shore, Mona was seized by the King of the Mermen, who carried her down to his palace
at the bottom of the sea . The King's son, a kind and handsome young merman , fell in love with Mona.
75
 XoXoXocument ILOAM CLERM20 aromama.com ELIZORXUL

ST. GEORGE AND THE DRAGON

ST. GEORGE of Merry, England was a louder and louder sound of roaring.
the youngest and the bravest of St. George had scarcely time to clutch
the seven champions of Christendom . his spear and lift up his shield before
Clad in bright armour, with his magic the dragon was upon him .
sword Ascalon by his side, he used to It was the most terrible monster that
travel on his war-horse in far countries was ever seen on earth . It was an enor
in search of adventures . mous serpent, with two great wings and
One day, as he was riding across a four strong feet , armed with cruel claws,
marsh in the land of the pagans, he saw and in its tail there was a long, poisonous
a noble and lovely maiden walking all sting.
alone towards the sea -shore. It rushed through the air upon St.
She was dressed in . beautiful robes, George, and a burning flame came from
like a bride on her wedding -day, but its jaws. With a sudden stroke of its
her face was pale and sorrowful, and wing, it nearly felled him to the ground ;
she stared in terror at the sea . but as it passed he gave it so fierce a
thrust that his spear broke into a thou
OnSt.hearing
George the
rodesound
quickly up to
of his her.
horse's sand pieces. Swinging back, the dragon
hoofs, the girl turned round, and again struck at him with its tail , and
cried : knocked him from his war -horse.
" Flee, young knight, flee , or you andThedizzy.
fire of its breath made him faint
He rose up, reeling like
will perish also ! ”
66
God forbid that I should face a dying man , but his strength re
when a maiden is in peril ! ” said St. turned when he drew his magic sword
Ascalon .
George.
As he spoke the sea in front of him In trying to strike him once more, the
began to rise up in great waves, and dragon exposed the tender part of its
from the waves there came the sound of body beneath its wing, and there St.
roaring. At the same time he heard a George wounded it. So deep was the
noise far behind him . He turned round, wound that the dragon stood still and
and saw that the walls of the city on trembled. St. George then knelt down
the hills above the marsh were crowded and prayed.
with people , who were shrieking and Undo your sash and tie it about
wringing their hands. the dragon's neck . It will not harm
“ The dragon , the dragon ! ” cried the you ,” he said to Princess Sabra.
maiden . * Flee, or it will upon The Princess did so .
you ! ” “ Now lead it to the market - place
The sound of roaring grew louder. in the city," he said .
“ Flesh and blood cannot withstand The dragon followed the Princess as
the burning flame that comes from its meekly as a lamb. When they reached
6
jaws," said the maiden . “ It has de the city, all the people ran away , but
stroyed two armies of soldiers ; it has St. George told them to have no fear ;
eaten up all our sheep and cattle, and and with a blow of his magic sword
Ascalon he killed the monster in the
laid waste my father's kingdom . Escape
while you can, and do not try to defend market - place.
me ! “ I did this, ” he said to the pagans ,
“ Every year a young virgin comes “ to show to you the power of God ,
to this marsh to be killed and eaten by and to convert you all to the true
the monster, in order to prevent it fromfaith ."
rushing upon the city and slaying all When the pagans learned that it was
the people. I am Princess Sabra, the a Christian knight who had subdued the
daughter of the King, and the lot has dragon and made it as meek as a lamb,
now fallen upon me. Oh , horror , you they gave up their false idols and becanie
are too late ! " good Christians. Princess Sabra was the
While Princess Sabra was speaking, first to be baptised, and it was not long
the sea began to rise up in greater before shewas married to her true knight,
waves , and from the waves there came St. George of Merry England.
TYTTITY ELIXLIITOZU
76
 ya

THOMAS MAYBANK

ST. GEORGE AND THE PRINCESS LEADING THE DRAGON TO THE MARKET- PLACE
" Tie your sash about the dragon's neck and drag it to the market-place," St. George said to
the Princess, and she did so. The people fled as it came along, but the dragon was as meek as aa lamb.
77
 THE STORY OF THE
NE of the goddesses was so mis
ONEchievous and caused so much
trouble that she was named Discord , and
Jupiter, king of the gods, drove her from
his kingdom . This made her so angry
that she determined to be revenged.
At a grand wedding that took place
on the earth, when all the goddesses
except Discord were present , Discord
threw in a golden apple, on which was
written, “ To the Fairest.” Discord
knew that this would cause great
jealousy ; and so it did, for each of
the goddesses claimed that she was
the most beautiful , and ought, there-
fore, to have the prize.
At last Juno, Minerva, and Venus
were chosen as the most beautiful .
There was only one prize, however, and
everyone was so afraid of offending men, and sailed to the land where
these three powerful goddesses that
they dared not decide which of the
three should have the apple.
It was arranged that a young shep-
herd named Paris should make the
choice, and each of the three goddesses
offered Paris a precious gift if he would
award her the prize. Juno offered him
a kingdom ; Minerva offered him great
THE STORY OF THE
A SULTAN of Indiahad
some sons, and they allthree
fell inhand
love
with their pretty cousin , Princess
Nourounnihar. One day their father where he had arranged to meet his
called them together and said :
“ You know how fond I am of
curious objects ? Well, I will grant the
hand of the Princess to him who brings
me the most wonderful thing.”
After arranging to meet at an inn
at the end of the year, the three
brothers set out on their travels .
Prince Houssain , the eldest, went to
Bisnagar, where he saw a Crier offering
a carpet for forty purses of gold.
“ That's a lot ofmoney for a carpet,”
he said .
" No, it isn't," said the Crier. “ Just
sit on it, and wish yourself in some
other place ."
Prince Houssain sat on the carpet,
and wished himself in his house, and ,
lo ! he found himself in his bed-
room . So he returned to the Crier,
and gave him forty purses of gold
for the carpet .
78
GOLDEN APPLE
success in battle ; Venus said she would
give him the most beautiful woman in
the world for his wife .
Paris chose Venus as the fairest.
Some say that Venus was chosen
because of her famous girdle, which
gaye to anybody who wore it great
beauty and grace. Others say that
Paris chose Venus because she promised
him the most beautiful wife.
Paris was the son of the King and
Queen of Troy, who had cast him off
when a baby, but had now called him
back to his home . He never forgot
Venus's promise, and when he was aa brave
warrior he heard of the great beauty of
Helen , and said to himself, “ This is the
woman Venus promised me."
So Paris assembled his ships and
Helen lived . There he found Helen ,
and stole her from her husband and
took her back to Troy. Helen's hus
band, Menelaus, came to Troy with
all his princes to fetch Helen away,
and for years a terrible war was fought
between them . In the end Paris was
killed, and Menelaus carried Helen
back to her own home in Sparta .
MAGIC CARPET
“ I'm sure I shall win Nourounnihar
with the carpet," he said .
He then wished himself in the inn
brothers, and there waited for them .
Prince Ali , the second brother, went
to Shiraz, where he saw a Crier offering a
plain ivory tube for forty purses of gold.
That's a lot of money for a tube,"
he said .
" No, it isn't," said the Crier. " Just look
through it , and wish to see somebody."
Prince Ali looked through it, and
wished to see the Princess, and, lo ! he
saw her sitting with her maids-of-honour
in his father's palace . So he gave the
Crier forty purses of gold, saying :
6
“ I'm sure I shall win Nourounnihar
with this tube.”
He hastened to the inn , and there he
and Houssain waited for Ahmed.
Prince Ahmed had gone to Samar
cand . There he met a Crier who offered
him an apple for forty purses of gold.
“ That's a lot of money for an apple,”
he said .
VYZYCE PIEZZURUTULIITTYYLI DOO OLLUYURUXKORMY
 THE STORY OF
" No, it isn't," said the Crier. Just
let the man who is dying in the next
Street smell the apple .
The Prir.ce did so , and the dying
UNI
man at once recovered his health .
After paying the forty purses of gold ,
CELLCOLALEUCALC
Prince Ahmed hastened to the inn and
showed iiis brothers his apple , and
they showed him their carpet and tube.
" It's hard to say which is the most
ECCET
wonderful,” said Prince Houssain.
“ Lend me your tube, Ali. ”
Houssain looked through it, and
wished to see Princess Nourounnihar.
Houssain , looking through the magic tube, saw the Princess. She lay pale on her bed, dying. The brothers
jumped on the magic carpet, which carried them to the castle , and Prince Ahmed's magic apple saved her life.
Heavens ! ” he cried . “ What do
I see ? She is lying pale andmotionless
on a bed, and her maids are weeping.
Oh , she's dying ! "
Quick, jump on the carpet ! ” said
Prince Ahmed . They all jumped on
it, and wished themselves in the
Princess's bed-room. When they got
there Prince Ahmed let her smell
his apple, and she regained perfect
health .
“6 Now , which of us has won Nouroun-
nihar ? ” said the brothers .
“ You all had an equal share in
curing her,” said the Sultan . “ I'll
SZEITEN
THE MAGIC CARPET
tell you how to settle the matter.
Take a bow and arrow each , and go
into the great plain outside the city.
He who shoots his arrow farthest shall
marry the Princess ."
Crowds came to watch the contest .
Houssain sent his arrow a good way ;
Ali sent his still farther ; Prince Ahmed
shot so well that his arrow went out
of sight ! Nobody, however, could
find it, so the Sultan decided that Ali
had won Nourounnihar.
Prince Ahmed did not grieve long
for his pretty cousin . What troubled
LE
him was the way in which his arrow had
disappeared . He wandered for weeks
about the plain seeking it , and at last
found the palace of fairy Pari- Banou .
It was Pari- Banou who had sent the
Criers with the magic carpet and the
enchanted tube and the fairy apple.
But she did not want Prince Ahmed
to marry Nourounnihar, so she had
caught up his arrow and carried it
away. She wanted to marry him
herself. Ahmed fell deeply in love
with her, and married her, and with her
help he became the Sultan of India .
The next stories begin on page 155.
MONTROITTI MITTYY
79
 THE FAITHFUL SENTINEL OF POMPEII

When the city of Pompeii was destroyed by a burning mountain, just after Jesus was born , a brave soldier stood
at his post to the last , watching death come towards him. When, 2,000 years after, the diggers found the ruins
of the city buried in the earth , they found the soldier's body lying where he had kept watch. Sir Edward Poynter has
painted this picture of the sentinel who was “ Faithful Unto Death , " and it hangs in the Liverpool Art Gallery
eo
 re The Child's Book of
Beach on GOLDEN DEEDS

THE QUIET HEROES OF THE WORLD

"HERE are many kinds of herces. The soldier who comes home in triumph,
TH to the sound of trumpets and the waving of flags, leaves behind him on
the battlefield the hero who has fallen in the fight. It is a fine and thrilling
thing to see the conquering hero come, but not less thrilling is it to think of
the hero who will never come again. And let us remember, always, the heroes
of every day—the boys and girls who do noble things that are not written
about in books. Let us remember the great heroism of simple lives, the golden
deeds of quiet, simple people. We read in other parts of our book of great
things done by great men and women, and many heroes will come into that
story of famous people. But we shall read here of great things done by simple
people whose names, perhaps, are not known at all. This is the great book of
simple heroes and of the golden deeds that light up the pathway of the brave.

A VILLAGE OF HEROES
If Derbyshire
you have beenand
to a through their sickness
By MANY WRITERS
and sustained them in
have travelled their grief. In their
among the beautiful hills which deep sorrow the people of Eyam
we call the Peak Country, you were like one family,
have passed, perhaps, through Then the brave heart of the
the little village of Eyam . It rector's wife, Catherine Mom
is only a hamlet, but the sight pesson , began to fail . People
of this little group of houses and the were dying on every hand ; there was o

little village church is one of the things
that ought to thrill every boy and girl
who loves a golden deed.
Perched snugly in a green hollow of
3
no hope for her husband and her chil
dren , and she urged the rector to fly.
In that terrible hour the rector was
true to himself. He urged his wife

the rocky uplands, Eyam must have to take away the children and save
been as pleasant a village to live in as herself and them . But Catherine
could be found in the days when Mompesson was not such a woman as
William Mompesson became rector at that. She sent her children away to : 33 g
the village church and William Stanley friends and stayed with her husband .
E
The crisis had come. The plague
1
preached at the village chapel. That
was in the time when the Great Plague held Eyam fast , and it was clear that
of London was raging, more than 240 any further flight of people from the
years ago. Eyam was 150 miles away village would spread the plague in the
from London, and no place could have villages around, perhaps through all
seemed safer from the plaguethan this. Derbyshire, perhaps right up through
But the little invisible microbes that the North of England, which was yet
carry disease about the world come free from it .
in many ways. They may come on When this time came the people
the wind , they may come in the train . of Eyam , led by William Mompesson
They came to Eyam in a packet of and William Stanley, made a great
patterns posted from London to the decision , which ought to be written
village tailor. The Great Plague of down in our history in letters of
London was in that little packet, and gold . They shut themselves off
in a few days the tailor and his family from the world. The church was o

were in their graves . closed, and every day the people met
There was terror in the village, and to comfort one another in a cave .
one by one the people fled . But the Trade was given up , every man left
plague remained, and for a year it his work , the schools were shut , and
spread. All through this time the the houses became hospitals for the
rector and his wife , with the minister sick . Nobody came into the village
at the little chapel , nursed the people and nobody went out, and all the work
C OF
SI
 PATRONAALILAR
-THE CHILD'S BOOK OF GOLDEN DEEDS .
that men and women did was nursing died , among them the brave Catherine
the sick or burying the dead. Mompesson . So, day after day, death
For four months Eyam was left to took away the brave people of Eyam
itself without once coming into touch until , in the middle of October, 1666,
with the world . Had the king died, when the plague suddenly ceased ,
nobody in Eyam would have known there was not one whole family left,
anything about it, so completely shut and out of 300 people 259 had died.
off were they from the world about That is the golden deed of an English
them . They shut themselves up in village nearly 250 years ago, and the
June, and in July 56 of them were laid memory of this village of heroes
in the churchyard. In August 72 more should help to make us heroes all.
THE FRIENDSHIP OF DAMON & PYTHIAS
IONYSIUS was a tyrant who ruled his friend for the sake of his wife and
DIONYS
the town of Syracuse, in Sicily. children. At last the death -day dawned ,
Whoever made him angry was put to the very hour drew nigh, and Dionysius
death . The tyrant's wrath fell one day came to see his prisoner die .
upon a youth named Damon , who had Quietly and bravely Pythias prepared
complained of the cruelty of Dionysius , for his execution. His friend , he said ,
and Damon was condemned to die. He had had an accident, or perhaps he was
begged first to be allowed to go to see ill . At almost the very moment for the
his wife and children , but Dionysius execution, however, Damon arrived and
laughed him to scorn . Once you get embraced his friend . He was tired and
out of my way," he thought, “ you will travel- stained. His horse had been
never come back .” killed and he had had to get another,
Damon said that he had a friend who but by hard riding he returned just in
would answer for his return, and his time to save Pythias from suffering for
friend Pythias came forward to offer him . But Pythias did not wish it so.
himself as surety for Damon . If Damon He pleaded with Damon , he pleaded
did not come back, he said , he would die with Dionysius, to let him bear the
in his friend's place. punishment.
The tyrant was astonished that a Dionysius had never seen such faith
man should love his friend so dearly, fulness before. Here was something
and he gave Damon six hours to go to beautiful that he did not think existed
see his wife and children . in the world—a friendship that wel.
Damon expected to be back within comed death if death would help a
four hours , but when four hours had friend. His heart was stirred within
gone he had not come . Five hours, him ; he wanted men like these to be
then almost six hours passed , and still his friends. He came up to Damon and
there was no sign of him. The happiest Pythias as they were disputing, each
man in the prison was Pythias , who eager to give up his life for the other.
actually hoped that Damon would not Dionysius took their hands, set them
return, because he was willing and free, and begged to be allowed to share
anxious to suffer in his place and spare their friendship.
THE LAST FIGHT AT THE COLISEUM
the proud days when Rome ruled band of Christians hid themselves in
IN the world , and the emperor lived in great holes in the ground lest they
a palace of white marble, or in a house should be tortured and put to death .
of pure gold , the Coliseum was the To this day we can walk through the
greatest theatre ever known to be set catacombs in which the first followers
up on the earth . of Jesus hid themselves from Nero,
There to this day it stands, shat- the monster who lived in a golden
tered and broken , but still, perhaps, house inside the city gates. They say
the most impressive ruin in all the that when Nero's house was burned the
world . In the dark days when Rome streets of Rome ran with melted gold.
was falling from her great place in In these dark and shameful days ,
the world , when Peter and Paul were the great white Coliseum , rising storey
crucified outside its gates , the little after storey from the ground, with
TUULU.XXXTO U2TUTZ
82
 -THE LAST FIGHT AT THE COLISEUM ...
great galleries inside to hold 40,000
people, was a wondrous sight to see.
Here came all Rome to see the great
wild beasts set loose and tear them-
selves to pieces. Here came the
gladiators, strong men trained to fight
each other until one of them was killed .
Here the Christians were thrown alive
to the lions to make a Roman holiday.
No place in the world has seen more
cruel sights than this
But slowly Christianity made its way,
until the very emperor became a
Christian. Then these shameful things
ceased , and the Coliseum became only
a circus . Still, however, the people
THE RUINED COLISEUM, WHERE MEN AND WILD BEASTS FOUGHT IN THE OLD DAYS OF ROME
longed to see the old sights back again ,
and at times the old fury would break
out. The Christians had been growing
stronger and stronger for 400 years,
when there came a terrible day for
Rome. Alaric, the leader of the Goths,
came thundering outside Rome, which ,
having only a poor mad boy for
its emperor, must have fallen but
for a brave general and his mon,
who set the Goths to fight.
Such rejoicing there was in Rome
that day that the people flocked to the
Coliseum, cheering the brave general.
There was a great hunting of beasts
and a wonderful performance, as in the
olden time, when suddenly there came
Comm0 ULIOOTITUmum Umzu
83
awama
out of one of the narrow passages
leading into the arena a gladiator, with
spears and swords. The rejoicing of
the people knew no bounds.
Then there happened a strange
thing. Into the middle of the arena
came an old man , bare-headed and
bare -footed , calling upon the people
to prevent the shedding of blood.
The crowd shrieked back to him to
stop his preaching and to go away.
The gladiators came forward and forced
him aside, but still the old man came
between them. A storm of stones fell
upon him from the angry people.
The gladiators struck him down, and
the old man perished before the eyes
of Rome .
He was a hermit, named Telemachus ,
one of those holy men who, tired of the
wickedness of the world , had gone to live
in the hills . Coming to Rome to visit
the sacred shrines , he had seen the
people flocking to the Coliseum, and,
pitying them for their cruelty, had
gone to stop it or to die .
He died, but his work was done.
All that was best in Rome was stirred
by the sight of the hermit slain in the
midst of the arena, and there was no
more slaughter in the great theatre.
It was the last fight at the Coliseum .
The next Golden Deeds are on page 191 .
INUTIT CEDUOLILLLO
SCENES FROM SHAKESPEARE STORIES

Oberon , King of the Fairies, having quarrelled with Titania, caused Puck to drop some magic juice into
her eyes, so that when she awoke she would love the first thing she saw . Bottom, a stupid weaver, whose
head had been changed into that of an ass , was the first creature Titania saw. and 'she fell in love with him .

BA

Shylock was a money -lending Jew who made a bond with a Christian that if he failed to pay a debt on
a certain day he was to forfeit a pound of flesh. Shylock tried to enforce his bond, but was outwitted,
and left the court in disgrace Here we see the children jeering at the malicious Jew .

SA
 The Child's Story of
FAMOUS BOOKS
THE WORLD'S GREAT BOOKS
BooksS are among the most precious things man has been able to invent. The
world's great books are its greatest treasures . For the man who writes
a book may tell us a story that will never be forgotten , or he may express some great
thought that will set all other men thinking. It is through books that we know
nearly everything. There are two kinds of writing - prose and poetry, about
which you can read on page 41. Great books may bewritten either in prose or in
poetry , but here we shall deal with the famous books just as if they were written
in prose, as it is the long stories they tell which we are going to tell
over again in the form of short stories. The dramas of William Shake
speare, which are chief among the great treasures of English literature, were
all written in poetry, but we shall tell the stories of these famous works
just like other stories. Though Shakespeare's plays were written for acting
on the stage, they are also among the most beautiful books that we can read.

THE PLAYS OF SHAKESPEARE

A MIDSUMMER NIGHT'S DREAM
HERE was
E
THERDuke once
of Athens
a

By J , A. HAMMERTON
named Theseus , who SA
was betrothed to Hip
polyta, Queen of the Amazons.
Ît happened that when they were
talking of their coming marriage,
an elderly courtier named Egeus
came to them with his daughter
Hermia and her two rival lovers, asking
for the help of the Duke. It was her
father's wish that Hermia should wed
Demetrius, and she would have none
butLysander. On hearing this Theseus
told her that, by the law of Athens, she
must do as her father wished , else she
could be put to death or condemned to
remain unmarried all her life.
Hermia was fain to profess she pre-
ferred to remain unmarried. But when
she had drawn apart with Lysander
theyagreed to meet the next day in a
wood a mile distant and escape from
Athens together. They tookanother
into their secret ,however, and told their
plans to Helena, a friend of Hermia.
As Helena was in love with Demetrius,
she thought that by telling him of
Hermia's purpose he would follow the
lovers, and poor Helena herself would
go after them so that she might have
the happiness of being near Demetrius,
although he was not fond of her.
About this very time, Oberon , the
king of the fairies,had quarrelled with
his queen, Titania, because she would
not give him a little negro boy, of past, and, mistaking Lysander for
whose mother she had been very fond.
HDD
G 85
Oberon
play aa
decided to
trick on
Titania for this, and
so he told Puck, his
mischief-loving fairy servant, to
put the magic juice of love- in .
dleness into Titania's eyes as
she slept, that when she awoke
she would fall in love with the
first living creature she might see.
It so chanced that a company of
rough workmen were rehearsing in
that wood a little play which they were
to perform at the wedding festivities
of Duke Theseus, and by a magic touch
Puck changed the head of one named
Bottom , a weaver, into that of an ass !
This fat, ungainly man with the ass's
head was the first thing Titania , the
lovely queen of the fairies, saw when
she had rubbed the sleep from her
eyes , and, thanks to the juice of love
in -idleness, she straightway fell in love
with Bottom, wound her arms about
his hairy neck, bound flowers around
his flapping ears, and bade her fairy
attendants obey his every wish .
Puck had also been told by Oberon
that an Athenian who was lost in the
wood was neglecting his true love for
a maiden who shunned him , and he
bade the mischief-making fairy change
the heart of this misguided Demetrius.
But Lysander and Hermia, wearied
with their walk from Athens, were lying
down to rest when Puck came flying
Demetrius, the fairy squeezed the magic
BERIB
 MULBO -THE CHILD'S STORY OF FAMOUS BOOKS
juice into his eyes. Then , Helena coming lovewith the donkey -head, he made her
up as Lysander awoke, he immediately believe that she had only been having a
told her of his love for her. The charm had foolish dream , and restored her eyes to
worked on the wrong lover. Lysander now their usual sense, agreeing that they
left Hermia, and followed Helena, who would never quarrel again . Bottom , the
always fled from him, as she still loved weaver, was also made happy by getting
Demetrius. Presently, while Oberon and his own head back, though he had been
Puck were roaming in the wood, they happy enough with the ass's head.
found poor Hermia trying to dismiss the The sound of aa horn rang through the
persistent Demetrius. On discovering that wood ; Theseus and Hippolyta were out
this was the Athenian of whom Oberon hunting. They came upon Helena and
had spoken, Puck at once repaired his Demetrius, Hermia and Lysander, all of
mistake by charming the eyes of Deme- them happily reconciled to one another ;
trius, who, seeing Helena next, straight and when Egeus reminded the Duke
way fell in love with her. But imagine that this was the day for Hermia to
the dismay of Helena when she thought make her final choice, Demetrius told
that bothLysander and Demetrius were how his love had changed, saying :
mocking her in now pretending to be in And all the faith , the virtue of my heart,
love with her ! Happily, what the The object and the pleasure of mine eye,
magic love-juice could do, it could also Is only Helena.
undo, and another drop of it from Puck So Lysander had no longer a rival
soon restored Lysander to his Hermia. for the hand of Hermia , and to cele
Oberon, in the meantime, had begun brate the day with merriment they ali
to regretthe trick played upon his queen,, went to the palace to watch the work
and, having obtained the little black boy ing men's play in which Bottom, the
from her while she thought herself in weaver, was the principal actor.
ALL'S WELL THAT ENDS WELL
ERTRAM , the young Count of Rou-
BERT in-law, promising to aid her in the
sillon, in the South of France, bade mission to the King.
farewell to his widowed mother before he When , in due time, Helena came
left their castle for the Court of the King
before the ailing King, he was unwilling
at Paris. His mother was not alone in to allow her to try to cure his disease ;
her sorrow over his departure, for no but she persisted, saying that if she
sooner had he gone than Helena, a lady failed she was willing to suffer any
whom the Countess had brought up as punishment. As her reward on his
if she had been her own daughter, was recovery, she demanded that he should
overwhelmed with grief. She mourned give her a nobleman of the Royal blood
because she loved Bertram, yet dared of France as her husband, to be chosen
not let it be known , as she, the daughter by herself. To this he agreed .
of a physician, though a famous one, After the King recovered , he called
could not hope to marry a nobleman of together a number of his courtiers , ex
the Royal blood of France. plained the terms he had arranged with
In the midst of her grief a daring idea the fair physician , adding that he would
came to Helena's mind . The King of give her wealth and raise her rank in
France was then so ill that all his gratitude for having cured his disease.
learned men despaired of his life. He When Helena went forward to Bertram
was suffering from a disease which her and signified him as her choice, the young
dead father had been able to cure, and the Count hotly refused thus to be forced
remedy for which Helena knew . " Why
Why,"
," into marriage ; but his sense of loyalty
thought she, “ should I not also go to overruled his pride, and he at length
the Court of the King ? ” Her thoughts agreed to marry Helena. No soonerwas
she spoke aloud, thinking herself alone ; the ceremony over, however, than he
butshe was overheard by a servant, who arranged secretly to go to the wars in
told the Countess. Tuscany,and leave his unsought bride.
Instead of being angry, the Countess Poor Helena, the unconscious mes
told her that she had discovered the real senger of evil tidinys, brought back to
cause of her tears, and even said she theCountess at Rousillon aletter from
wouldwelcome Helena as her daughter- her son , in which he vowed never to
86
 -ALL'S WELL THAT
return . He also told Helena he would
never see her again until she had ob-
tained a ring with which he never parted.
Helena, gentle and timid in most
things, was not to be repulsed in this
disdainful fashion ; so, dressed as a
pilgrim , she set out for Florence, in
the country of the wars.
In Florence there lived a widow and
her daughter, Diana. Often had Bertram
told Diana of his love for her, though
she had always refused to listen ; he
even wished her to promise to be hiswife
when Helena would die. But Helena,
unknown to Bertram , had come to stay
in Florence with this widow and her
daughter, nor did she ask for their help
in vain . Diana now showed more
friendliness to Bertram , and begged him
to give her his ring, saying she would
give him one in return .
In the darkness of the night, at the
appointed place, without saying a single erring Count had now conceived a real
word, according to the agreement, rings
were exchanged betweenBertram and
not Diana, as he supposed, but Helena ,
whom he could not see .
THE STORY OF
L ONG ago, on a bare and lonely island
in the Mediterranean Sea, there lived
three people. One was a wise old man,
named Prospero, who had with him his
beautiful young daughter, Miranda.. The
third was their servant, Caliban. But,
although there were only three people,
Prospero had yet another servant - a
fairy, or a tricksy sprite," named
Ariel. Ariel loved his master dearly,
because he had once been imprisoned
in the heart of a pine- tree, and
Prospero, who knew the secret of
many mysteries, had rescued him from
that strange prison, in which Ariel had
been secured by the magic of an old
witch, named Sycorax, who once lived
on the island. Caliban was her son ; a
creature so low and ugly as to be
scarcely human .
It happened that one day, when
Miranda was looking out at the wild,
storm-tossed sea, she saw a vessel in
distress, and knowing that her father
had learned the secrets of magic power,
she begged him to calm the sea and now the tide of fortune is turning, for,
save the poor sailors from death . But
he answered that he himself had caused
that very storm to rise, and calmed her
fears by promising that nobody would
87
ENDS WELL
Meanwhile, in France it had been
given out that Helena was dead, since
she had disappeared from Rousillon,
and in Bertram's absence it was arranged
that he should marry for the second
time, but to a bride of nobler birth.
Bertram, however, discovered a sudden
love for the wife he supposed lost, and
on returning to his ancestral castle he
refused to marry again. The widow
from Florence came to Rousillon , where
the King was on a visit, and with her
were Diana and Helena, disguised.
Diana told a strange story to the King,
and when all were completely mystified
by Diana declaring that the ring had
been given to her, yet not to her ; that
Bertram had met her at midnight, yet
that it was not she ; the riddle was
unsolved by bringing forward Bertram's
still living wife, who had actually got
the ring from him, and for whom the
affection .
So Helena and Bertram were ,after many
trials and misunderstandings, happily
united , and all's well that ends well."
THE TEMPEST "
be drowned. The story which he then
told her was strange indeed.
“ Twelve years ago," said he, “ I
was the Duke of Milan, but I cared
nothing for wealth and power and fame.
I was happiest only when with my
little child and my books. My brother,
your uncle Antonio, to whom I left the
government of the state, was not like
me, and, greedy of power and posses
sions, he wanted my dukedom for him
self. To this end he went to the King of
Naples - then an enemy of mine and
promised that if the King would help
him to steal my lands he would richly
reward him . It was so agreed, and one
night these enemies of mine secured
both you and me, and hurried us away
into an old ship that could scarcely
float. Happily, some good friend saw
that the boat contained no lack of use
ful things, and, above all, my beloved
books , which have been of so great
comfort to us since our leaky vessel
floated to this uninhabited island . And
by means of the wisdom I have gained,
my ancient enemies, all of whom are
in that storm -tossed ship, will soon be
delivered into my hands."
TOUT DUX
 -THE CHILD'S STORY
Even while Prospero was talking, his
fairy servant, Ariel, had made himself
invisible - for, of course, he could do
anything that fairies do , and might even
have crouched inside a little girl's
thimble. He beached the ship in less
time than fifty sailors could have done
it , and he brought the crew to shore,
though no one could tell how. He
next took Ferdinand, the son of the
King of Naples, apart from the others,
leading him to where Prospero and
Miranda:: were — perhaps just by designs of Sebastian and Antonio were
whispering in his ear ! There is no
outwitting a fairy like Ariel, unless one
is a witch, like Sycorax.
As soon as Miranda set eyes upon the
Prince, she fell in love with him. And he
-well, he thought he would never be
happy withouther. Prospero noted this
and was delighted ; but he desired to
test Ferdinand's love, and pretended at
first to treat him as a spy.
In another part of the island the
King of Naples and his companions
rescued from the ship were lying asleep,
but the King's own brother, Sebastian,
and Antonio , the usurper of the duke
dom of Milan, were awake, and plotting
to kill the King, in order that they might showed them Ferdinand and Miranda
obtain his possessions if they got back playing happily together at chess.
to Italy. But they reckoned without
the tricksy Ariel, whose wise master had good services of Ariel that he set the
sent him to watch over the King. The
lively but invisible little sprite sang in
the ear of Gonzalo, the kind old noble-
THE MERCHANT OF VENICE
so that his wealth was on the waters ,
ANTONIO
rich andwas the nameof
generous a very
man who lived in and for that reason he had no ready
Venice long ago, and whose merchan-
dise many ships carried over the seas
to distant lands. Though Antonio was
so rich, his greatest friend, Bassanio ,
was so poor that he once said of him-
self, All the wealth I have runs in my
veins," meaning that he was a gentle-
man, but lacked worldly possessions .
Now, this Bassanio loved very deeply
a lady, both beautiful and rich , named
Portia, who lived in a distant place
called Belmont , and, when once he de-
sired to visit her, he confessed to
Antonio that he could not go there for
lack of money. On hearing this, An-
tonio, ever ready to help a friend, began
to arrange for Bassanio to get the
necessary gold . Unfortunately, at that
time Antonio's ships were all at sea,
OF FAMOUS BOOKS
man who had provided Prospero with
his books and valuables when he was
sent adrift, and this was what he sang :
While you here do snoring lie,
Open-ey'd conspiracy
His time doth take.
If of life you keep a care,
Shake off slumber and beware.
Awake ! Awake !
Up started Gonzalo , then the King
awakened, and they decided to set out
to look for Ferdinand. So the evil
ruined by Ariel , who led the company
to a cave, outside of which Prospero
had drawn a magic circle.
When they were all standing spell
bound within this magic circle, Prospero,
dressed in the rich clothes he had brought
from Milan, appeared before them. His
old enemies were in doubt as to whether
this might not be his spirit, but he told
them his strange story, and said that
he forgave them all freely.
The King of Naples now told Pros
pero that he had lost his son on the
island, and Prospero, smiling, said that
he had just lost his daughter. Then,
leading the party into the cave, he
So pleased was Prospero with the
faithful fairy free before the whole
party sailed away for the wedding of
Prince Ferdinand and Miranda .
money . At length he determined to
borrow from an old Jew , who was a
regular money-lender . Shylock was his
name, and he hated Antonio because
that kind merchant would always lend
his money without charging interest,
thus injuring Shylock's trade. He also
knew that Antonio despised him, and ,
above all, he disliked Antonio because
he was a Christian. So when his enemy,
as he regarded Antonio, came to borrow
money from him , thoughts of revenge
passed through the Jew's mind .
If only Antonio's ships were wrecked,
or if pirates should steal from them,
Antonio would not be able to repay the
loan, said Shylock . But the cunning
Jew then pretended to make a bargain
in jest, and offered to lend the money
88
 52

herethe bee fucks,Shere suck I

'In or cowship's bellllie
There I couch when owls do сту . A
On abats back 1 dofly
After summer memily
Merrily, merrily shall I live now ,
Under the bloggom that hangs on the bough
Thomas Pireann

ARIEL'S SONG, FROM SHAKESPEARE'S PLAY, “ THE TEMPEST "

Ariel's Song describes the life of a fairy supposed to be the servant of a wise prince in exile, as told on page 87.
வகைவகை com coxana
89
 -THE CHILD'S STORY
on condition that Antonio repaid it in
three months' time, or else forfeited a
pound of his own flesh ! Antonio did not
doubt that his ships would return in
time, so agreed cheerfully to this strange
bargain , and got the money which en-
abled Bassanio , accompanied by his
friend Gratiano , to go on his visit to
Portia, the rich heiress .
It was known that when Portia's father
was dying he gave her three caskets - one
of gold, one of silver ,and one of lead. On
each of these was an inscription. “ Who secondly, he must not take one drop
chooseth me shall gain what many men
desire ,” was written on the gold one ;
“ Who chooseth me shall get as much as
)
he deserves,” on the silver one ; and on
the lead one were the words, Who
chooseth me must give and hazard all he
hath .” Inside one of these caskets was a
portrait of Portia, and whichever one of
the men who professed to love her should
choose that casket was to wed her .
Various suitors came to try their
fortune in this strange lottery of love,
and those who were conceited chose the
gold or silver caskets. But now came
Bassanio , whom Portia really loved ,
and she and her maid , Nerissa,
trembled lest he should take the wrong
casket . He chose the leaden one, in
which , of course, was the portrait.
In the midst of all their joy at this
happy choice, Bassanio receives a letter
from Antonio , who says that all his ships
are lost, and Shylock is demanding his
pound of flesh ; but adds that he would
gladly die for his friend if Bassanio
were only there to bid him farewell .
Bassanio told his lady the unhappy
story, and she bade him haste away to be
with his friend ; but as soon as he had
gone she sent to her cousin, a famous
lawyer, Doctor Bellario, to borrow his
robes, and with these for herself, and
the dress of a lawyer's clerk which she
had borrowed for Nerissa, Portia and
her maid set out for Venice.
Assembled in the Court of Justice she and Nerissa asked for their rings,
there were all those interested in the
strange case-Antonio, Bassanio, Shy.
lock, Gratiano, the Duke of Venice, and
many others—when Nerissa, dressed
as a lawyer's clerk, entered and read a
letter from Doctor Bellario, in which he
wrote that he was ill ; but his young
friend, Doctor Balthazar, from Rome,
would defend the case ably, and that
The next stories of Famous Books begin on page 147 .
90
OF FAMOUS BOOKS
he had never known so young a
body with so old a head.” Thus was
Portia, disguised as a lawyer, announced .
Now, Portia was as wise as she was
beautiful , and in her speech she first of
all raised the hopes of Shylock until
he praised her for “ aa Daniel come to
judgment.” He was entitled to the pound
of Antonio's flesh , she argued. But she
made two conditions — first, he must take
exactly one pound in weight , not the
weight of a hair more or less ; and
of blood , as that was not mentioned in
the bond .
Of course , these conditions were im
possible, and Shylock, now seeing where
his blind hatred of “ the fool that lends
out money gratis ” had led him , was
willing to leave the court without his
money, since to take his bond would have
led to his being condemned to death
himself. But Portia would not let him
go so easily. She stayed him, saying:
“ There is a law whereby, if any
foreigner in Venice shall scheme against
the life of a citizen, his money shall be
forfested, half of it going to the State,
the other half to his intended victim,
and his own life will rest with the mercy
of the Duke."
Thus Shylock lost his bond and might
have lost his life ; but that was spared
on condition that he willed his fortune
to his own daughter, Jessica, whom
he had ill-treated , and to her lover,
Lorenzo, and also that he renounced
his religion .
In his delight at the happy issue,
Bassanio offered the pretended doctor
of laws anything he might ask ; but,
to his dismay, a ring which Portia had
given him on his departure from Bel
mont was required of him. The lawyer's
clerk also demanded Gratiano's ring,
which Nerissa had given to him .
When Bassanio returned to Belmont ,
bringing with him Antonio to see Portia,
which neither of the men could produce.
After pretending to be very angry with
their lovers, Portia and Nerissa showed
the rings on their own fingers. Antonio
then knew whose wise speech had saved
his life, and his joy was complete when
Portia gave him a letter in which it was
stated that three of his ships , which were
thought to belost, hadsafely come to port.
 The Child's Book of
SCHOOL LESSONS
WHAT OUR LESSONS WILL TEACH US
E shall not learn in our book all that we must know when we are grown
We up and go to school, but we shall begin to learn many things which will help
us at school and help to make us useful when we grow up. Everything we read in
the CHILDREN'S ENCYCLOPÆDIA will be useful to us and make our school life easier,
but in this part we shall learn some special things. We shall learn what figures are,
and the wonderful things that can be done with them . We shall try to draw
pictures of the things we see at home and in the streets. We shall learn how to
read and write, so that we can read the story -books ourselves and write letters to
our friends.We shall find out all about music and what a beautiful thing it is,
so that we can learn to play the piano and sing ; and those who are learning
French will find here little stories written in French which they will be able
to read and understand. All these useful things we shall learn just as
if this were our school, and we shall find them as interesting as real stories.
‫܀‬ 2.02
RTE READING கேம்
HOW TO LEARN THE A B C
EFORE
BE we can read our story-books ourselves we must learn our letters.
Then, when we have learned these, we shall be able to make words and
read them , and when we can read we shall find that nothing in the world
brings us more happiness than reading books.
There are twenty-six letters in the alphabet , and we can write them in
two ways, because sometimes we want to write them big and sometimes little.
Here they are all together, the little letters and the big letters side by side.
The Big and Little Letters of the Alphabet

...o
A aа Ee li L1 Рp Ss W w
Bb Ff M m Q It Xx
c Gg Jj
a
C
Сс Nn u Yy
U น у
Dd Hh Kk 0
Oo. Rr Vy
Vv Z zZ
We must learn these letters until we know them as well as we know our
names, and it will help us to remember our letters if we learn the Animal O
Alphabet on the next page. That is an easy way of learning ABC, and we 6
must read the Animal Alphabet, and say it over and over again until we
can say it through without a mistake. Here is another way of remembering
where the letters come ; it is a little rhyme telling us the place of each letter :
A before B , C before D, M before N , O and P then ;
F after E, H after G, R after Q, then S, T, U,
9

I before J , L after K , V and W next come to view ;

with X, Y, and Z, all the letters are said.
Now we must learn to put the letters together and make words, and we
shall find it very interesting, as we get along with our lessons, to see how
the letters come together to make the very words we know.
I F spells IF O F spells OF W E spells WE GO spells GO
IN spells IN O N spells ON B Espells BE NO spells NO
I S spells IS OR spells OR H E spells HE SO spells so
IT spells IT O X spells OX M E spells ME T O spells TO
Pictures will help us to learn the words , and a clever artist has drawn
some pictures to show us what the words below them mean.
ra

91
 AUDrexa HC Canan Oz

THE CHILD'S NEW ANIMAL ALPHABET

IS THE IS THE
IS THE

A ANT
B BEE
CD
С D
IS THE
DOG

CAT
as it crawls on the ground that goes buzzing around | fast asleep by the fire | jumping higher and higher
IS THE IS THE GOOSE
IS THE

E EEL

OF
that you hardly can hold
.
FOX

rather cunning thaa bold

G
with its toes stretched out wide

H
IS THE IS THE
J IS THE
IBEX JAY
HORSE
will you go for a ride ? that looks like a goat with its harsh screeching note

K
IS THE
L
IS THE
M IS THE
KANGAROO LION MOUSE
hopping along majestic and strong 1 who of cheese is so fond
IS THE IS THE PIG

N NEWT
OF
IS THE OTTER
as he swims in the pond who feeds upon fish with his snout in the dish

Q
IS THE
RAS
IS THE IS THE
QUAIL RABBÍT SQUIRREL
such a fat little bird so cosily furred with his tail up his back

T
IS THE
U IS THE
V IS THE
TIGER UNICORN VULTURE
streaked yellow and black unknown to -day 1 who swoops on his prey

ya
WIS
THE WOLF
IS THE
XIPHAS
IS THE
YELLOW -HAMMER
IS THE
ZEBRA
ZW
that Red Riding Hood saw | with sharp -pointed jaw I just hark how it pipes ! | with beautiful stripes
92
 DLA KORODEO

THE CHILD'S FIRST LITTLE WORDS

AM
Spells
AM JAM RAM
HAM

AN
Spells
AN CAN FAN PAN VAN
wa
AT
Spells
AT BAT CAT HAT RAT

OX
Spells
OX OX BOX FOX

A IN A

HAT BOX

A CAT ON A MATIA HAM IN A PAN

The next school lessons begin on page 205.
93
 5WRITING 20:52el
HOW TOM AND NORA LEARNED TO WRITE
A Box for MasterTom , and abox in the picture. “ People hold their pens
>
for Miss Nora , " said the post- and pencils in different ways," the
man, as Tom and Nora came to the door mother said ; “ but we will learn a good
one morning. way, which is easier in the end. See
“ Two beautiful boxes of crayons," how nicely you can make a little stroke
said the mother, when the parcels were over a stroke that I am going to make,
opened ; and there, neatly tucked and then make some strokes quite by
away in the little wooden bed, lay six yourselves. Watch me.”
coloured chalks, the very things Tom Then she made four strokes, nearly
and Nora had wanted. For Tom and straight down, from the top line to
Nora longed to learn to write to their the bottom one, and put little marks
Cousin Jack, who lived in America, and where the children were to start making
have the letter carried thousands and strokes themselves. The mother's strokes,
thousands of miles across the sea in a when they were finished , were like this :
ship, and over the mountains and along
the great railways of the great country
where the oranges grow .
“Oh, mother," cried Nora, clapping
her hands, “ do let us begin now ! We
TIT
Tom and Nora wrote over their
could tell Jack all about our birthdays. mother's strokes with their blue chalk,
May we beginat once ? " and then tried hard to make strokes
Yes," replied their mother , " you themselves.
shall start now. Bring the ruler and When they had finished , Tom said
pencil, and Tom can ask father for some that his railway lines looked like fences
sheets of unruled paper .” leaning sideways ; and Nora told her
mother that she understood why the
long lines were like crutches, " because ,"
(0
she said , " they really did help us along,
>
Will you make us some more, please ?
This time the mother drew two lines
without the little marks where Tom and
Nora were to begin .
Write inside the lines, and find out
where to begin for yourselves,” she said.
Hold your chalk more lightly,
How to hold your pencil when writing Tom ; and sit up straight, Nora. Now
Thesewere brought, and Nora and Tom start , and don't write too fast, or you
watched their mother rule two lines. will write badly ."
“ They are like railway lines , " said
Tom.
They are your crutches," said his
mother.
Nora thought it very strange that
TITUTII Tom's strokes
Tom should want crutches, which are
for lame people , because he wasn't
lame at all when he ran out of the room
to fetch the paper ; and she laughed
merrily when her mother told her she
TIITIT Nora's strokes
When they had finished , Nora's
would want crutches also .
When two sets of lines had been strokes looked nicer than Tom's.
ruled, one for Tom and one for Nora, “ That is because she ended them on
they were told to watch how their the lines, " said their mother.
mother held the pencil firmly between Some of Tom's strokes went outside
her thumb and the first two fingers, with the lines, and were not quite straight. 1
the little finger resting on the paper, and Nora kissed him and said, “ Never
her arm between the wrist and the mind, Tom ; I am older than you, so
elbow resting lightly on the table, as I ought to write better."
94
 -ARITHMETIC.de
During the next few days they wrote " Then let me begin with N , ” said
many rows of strokes, until they were Nora, because her own name began with
able to make them quite straight, and N ; and Tom thought he would like to
the right distances apart. make his own letter T, though he would
Then their mother told them that they not say so, because he was not selfish .
had been making the figure 1 , which is But when their mother said they
the same as a stroke, and now that should make the letter i first, because
they could do that, they were ready to that would do for all three of them, they
begin inaking a letter of the alphabet. both thought it a capital plan .
(
Nora said she would like to begin with We will learn to make i to -morrow ,"
A B C, and learn how to write all the they said, as they put their crayons into
letters she had learned ; but her mother the boxes and went off to bed themselves.
said that that was not an easy way. Our next school lessons begin on page 205.
ARITHMETIC :
HOW FRED AND CHARLIE COUNTED SIX
"RED and Charlie have been on a visit ploughing," said Uncle Jack, “ making
FREDto their uncle's farm . They had the ground ready for sowing the
such a good time there, and are never corn . The field is too big for a man
tired of telling us about the things they to dig it all with a spade, so it is done
did, and the animals they saw ; the with a plough. You can see how the
cows and horses, the sheepand pigs, the plough turns the soil over, as the horses
ducks and geese and turkeys. drag it along. It would be
The first morning of their very hard work for one
visit they got up very early, horse, so we put another one
))
because Uncle Jack had pro with it .”
mised to take them for a “ I know how many horses
))

walk round the farmyard that makes," said Fred.

and through the fields. As Charlie doesn't, because
soon as they had had break he's never been to school, so
)
fast, they started out. The he can't count."
first thing they saw was gh “ Well, you tell him how
Jimmy, looking at them Fred and Charlie had to many horses it makes, and
over his stable door. Jimmy ride in turns, because there he'llsoon learn .”
was the donkey. “ I should was only one
donkey. " Why," said Fred, “ one
like a ride on the donkey, Uncle Jack ,” horse and one horse make two horses."
66
said Fred. “ Very well, we'll see about Quite right. And if you have a ride
that when we get back from our walk .” on the black horse , and a ride on the
But, of course, Charlie wanted a ride, grey horse, as well as a ride on the )

too. So Uncle Jack said they would donkey,

have to take turns, because there was
how many rides will that be ? ”
“ Three rides, said Fred. “Two
only one donkey. First Charlie could rides on the horses and another one on
have a ride, and then Fred , because the donkey make three rides altogether.”
Charlie was younger than Fred. “That's the way ; we shall soon teach
The boys were so pleased at the Charlie to count.
thought of the donkey rides they could By this time they had come to the
talk of nothing else till they had gone meadows. “ I believe Charlie can tell
us how many
quite a long
way, and come cows there are
to a field standing by
where old the gate,
Jake was said Uncle
ploughin g. Jack .
Whatever is ' Oh , yes ! ”
old Jakedoing answered
Uncle ? " asked Charlie .
Fred . “ There's one
“ He is The plough would be very hard work indeed for one horse,
so the farmers put another with it, making two horses. lying down,
95
 THE CHILD'S BOOK OF SCHOOL LESSONS
rabbits were frightened ,
and ran away as fast as
they could. Now , when
rabbits run away it is very
easy indeed to see them,
because they have such
white tails ; so it turned
out that there was another
one yet, besides the four
that Fred saw, and, as
Uncle Jack said , that
made five.
Charlie was really get
ting on fast with his
counting now . Three
There were some cows atthe gate. One cow was lying down,another rabbits and one rabbit
was eating the grass, and another standing looking at the boys made three .
more make four ; four
and another one eating the grass. That rabbits and one more make five. Before
makes two . And there's another one they got home again he was able to
standing looking at us. That makes count as far as six . He counted five
three. " crows, busy looking for something to
And so they went along, with Charlie, eat , and just as he had said “ One, two,
I am afraid, thinking a great deal more three, four, five," another crow came
about donkeyrides thanabout learning down from the tree where it was sitting,
to count. Still, you see , he was learning, so that now there were six of them .
because he remembered, after seeing Charlie was very pleased
the plough, that one horse and one indeed with himself when
horse made two horses, and that a he found he could count
ride on each of the horses and a ride as many as six things. He
on the donkey as
well made three rides
altogether ; and so he
was able to tell Uncle
Jack that one cow lying
down, one cow eating
the grass, and one cow
standing looking at
them made three cows ENLLA
altogether. Presently , It.hr
as they came through Going home,Charlie counted five crows looking for something to eat,and justas
a gap in the hedge, he had said " One, two, three, four, five," down came one crow and made six.
Charlie saw something else that he could was busy with his counting on the
count
(
- one, two, three little rabbits. way home, and his uncle gave him
Oh, I can see more than that ! ” this little rhyme to help him to
said Fred. “ There's another one sitting remember up to six :
up a little way from the others. That One, two, the cock crew .
makes four." Three, four, hear the bull roar.
But the boys made such a noise that the Five, six , the clock ticks.
“ I can make a better
rhyme than that,” said
Fred .
One, two, we are going to the
Zoo .
Three, four, we will hear the
lion roar .
Five , six , see the monkey at
Presently Charlie saw some rabbits - one, two, three . Then Fred his tricks.
caught sight of another sitting up a little way off. That made four. Our next school lessons
But the boys were so excited that they almost missed another
littlerabbit running away, and , as Uncle said, that made five. begin on page 205.
96
 MUSIC Car gece
THE WONDERFUL LAND OF SOUND
I WANTto take
country so you to the
beautiful that wonderful landit ofourSound,a
we will call Magic
Kingdom .

. e
onc
Inthis Kingdom there are Fairies who will sing to us, and
when we know them, and can understand their language,

em
they will tell us stories of the winds, they will bring

th
to
to us the songs of the birds, the murmur of the brook,
and all the beautifulsounds in the world.
In this wonderful Fairyland , also, we shall find
little black Goblins ; but they are good -hearted short
Goblins, as kind as they are black, for in this names,

em
beautiful land Fairies and Goblins help one

trh
which

e
another, and join together to tell us the most all of us
delightful stories. will find
We have all seen this Magic Kingdom, easy to re
which is in nearly all our homes. We call it mem ber .

n
ca
the Piano. Whenever I am there, I am so There are
happy that it makes me want to show only seven of

so s
ce
pla r

t
i
you the way, and help you to understand them , so they

tha
the
all the beautiful things which the Fairies all have taken the
whispered in the days of long ago. names of the first
Let us open the door of this Fairy seven letters of the
land . Inside we see what looks like alphabet. Let us
a long black line and a long white say to ourselves,
line. If we look closely we see “ Seven little Fairies,
that these lines are really made seven little names .)")
up of about fifty little white A B C D E F G
pieces and not quite so many
s
lin

little black pieces. The fifty FAIRY A FAIRY B

Try
. ive
Gob

little white pieces are FAIRY C FAIRY D

l

where the Fairies dwell, FAIRY E FAIRY F FAIRY G

the black pieces are the We will not talk about
homes of the Goblins. the Goblins' names to-day,
The Fairies live in but there is something im
the white houses and portant that we must notice
the Goblins in the particularly . The homes of the
black ones . Goblins — the thirty - five little black
ic
r

The Fairies are

Faie

houses — are arranged in twos and

th

very simple threes, and this arrangement is a great

little people, help in finding out and remembering
and like to the homes of the Fairies.
make it In nearly all pianos Fairy A has eight
quite easy houses. They all look exactly alike, and
hou e

for us to
it

all are named A, after Fairy A herself.

s
Wh

talk to We must find out where Fairy A lives, and

them , so must first of all notice the group of three black
they houses. Look carefully at these three Goblins'
have homes, and then remember that Fairy A lives
k

on the right side of the middle black house .

c

very
Bla
of

Fairy B is satisfied with seven homes, all

exactly alike, and each one is named after herself,
B. Again we must notice the three little black houses,
because Fairy B is always found on the right side
i s
Thi
tshe

of the third little black house.

Fairy C has seven houses, all named C, after herself,
and they are on the left side of the TWO little black ses
grouped together.
97
 HOMES OF THE SEVEN LITTLE FAIRIES

To the
Home 1
of
FAIRY A

To the
Home
of
FAIRY B

LC
To the
Home
of
FAIRY C

D
To the
Home
of
FAIRY D

To the
Home
of
FAIRY E

To the
Home
of
FAIRY F

To the
Home
of
FAIRY G
&
These pictures show you the seven little Fairies in their homes, each Fairy carrying her name with her.
Notice how the little black houses of the Goblins that guard the fairy houses are arranged in twos and threes.
SOURCES moren VOCTIVO TEXTO
98
 HISTODO
Here again are the seven little Fairies, all in their homes in the Land of Sound - A , B, C, D, E, F, G
Fairies D, E , F, G have also seven
homes each, and each of these little
houses bears the name of the Fairy
to whom it belongs. Let us see where
they live.
Look again at the little group of two
Goblins' houses. The little Fairy living
between these two black houses is Fairy D ,
and wherever we see just two Goblins
together we can be quite sure that
Fairy D is to be found hetween them.
Fairy E feels that she wants to be one
of this happy party, and she has her
home next to D, so that Fairy E is on
the right side of the second black house.
Fairy F and Fairy G like a group of
three Goblins, so Fairy F lives on the
S6790
HOW TO MAKE
Would
TOULD you like to learn how to
draw, and to be able to make
pictures of the things you see ?
It is really easier to learn how to
draw than to learn to write, te, though
it isn't easy at first to draw things like
houses, or horses, or cows. Yet all the
lovely pictures
that hang on the
walls are drawn
by people who
once found it
difficult to hold a
pencil or a chalk .
Some day , per
haps, you will be How to hold your chalk when drawing
able to make beautiful pictures, too.
Would you like to begin to -day and see
what you can do ?
You must get two large pieces of
paper, one brown and the other white.
Ordinary brown parcel paper will do
quite well; the best white paper for
you at present is called cartridge paper,
Then you must get some white and
TDOOROCArema FOOD TOGO
left of the first of the three black houses,
while Fairy G lives next door to her, on
the left side of the middle black house.
Now we have found out where all the
little Fairies live. Let us look at the pic
tures very carefully, and then go to the
Piano, and see if we can find the little
houses all ready and waiting for us there.
Every day we will enjoy a real game
of play withthe Fairies and Goblins in
the Magic Kingdom . We can think
we are the postmen of Fairyland, and
each morning we must take the Fairies
their letters, being sure to go to the
right houses, and careful not to forget
any of our little friends .
Our next school lessons begin on page 205.
DRAWING CHO WAS
YOUR FIRST PICTURE
some coloured chalks. If you have a
paint-box, you must learn to use it , and
I hope it is the kind of box that has
moist colours in pans or in tubes. You
must have a jar of clean water ready, and
your paint- box must be quite clean, too.
No one can paint with dirty colours or
brushes.
If you can find
a drawing - board
and four drawing
pins, you can
fasten your sheet
of brown paper to
the board at each
corner ; but if you
have not a board, you shoulduse a big
book with a smooth cover. Put a box
or another book under the end of the
board ; this makes the paper slant a
little, and saves you from having to
stoop. It is bad for your eyes and
back to stoop over your work.
When everything is ready, choose
something easy to draw . Suppose you
99
 THE CHILD'S BOOK OF SCHOOL LESSONS
get an orange, or an apple, or an egg, try to rub it out, but make it over and
and put it a little way in front ofyou on over again till you get it right. If you
the table. Then take a nice thick piece are drawing an orange, make it aa little
of white chalk . It is very difficult to flat at the top and the bottom . An egg
hold it properly at first, especially if is rather long, and thicker at one end
you have learnt how to write, because than at the other. Apples are all sorts
the right way to hold a chalk is quite of funny shapes, not any of them quite
different from theway in which we hold round, and you can often see the stalks.
our pens. The fingers must not be I have made a picture of each one
close to the point of the chalk , but to show you how they ought to look ,
half-way down, as we hut you must copy the
see in the picture. Don't real things for your
hold your chalk too selves, and not my
tightly, and if your drawings.
fingers feel stiff and ache When you have made
at first, do not mind a good picture, you can
that, but try very hard put the brown paper
to hold it right - it is away, and choose a
very, very important. white piece. If you are
When you can manage drawing an orange, try
to hold the chalk in the to find а piece of
proper way, you can coloured chalk exactly
begin to copy what you the right shade of
have chosen . Do not yellow, and draw with
make a thin line with it on the white paper,
the point, but iet the beginning in exactly the
side of the chalk touch same way as you did be
the paper, and rub it fore. See that you are
round and round tili you The right way, and the wrong way to holding the chalk pro
single perly. An apple must
Do not chalk in round.
get something like the begin with challe.chalk
shape you are copying. have green and red
Take care that it is not too small ; all chalk, too, if it has a rosy cheek. You
your drawings must be big. It is much cannot draw a white egg with white
better that they should be too big than chalk on white paper, because it would
too little. If you hold the chalkin the not show, but some eggs look brown or
right way it will be easier to rub it round pink , and you can draw these if you
and round, and it will not take so long can find chalks to match the colour.
to get the right size as it would if you If you want to use your paint-box ,
held your fingers close up to the point. remember it must be quite clean before
The pictures show you the right way you begin. Take a rather thick brush .
and the wrong way to begin. If your Some brushes are good and some are bad.
first drawing does not look good, do not The best brush for you to use at present

This is how the orange should look in chalk This is how the apple should look in chalk
watermometer 100 SITUITITOARDINEM CREUSE West
 som
-DRAWING
costs twopence, and has No.6 on the and if there is too much water in it
handle. If it has any loose hairs, or if it will run all down the paper.
some of them are longer than others, it Hold your brush rather low down,
is a bad brush , and you had better not and try to paint from one copy. Do
try to use it, as these hairs will make not make any lines with your brush,
lines where you do not want them. but begin in the same way as you
A good brush will have the hairs so began with your chalk . Paint as
arranged that you will be able to draw smoothly as you can, and do not go
them all smoothly together to a point over the same place twice , or go up and
after you have dipped it in the water . down with your brush .
If your paint -box has hard cakes of It is rather difficult at first to paint
paint, youmust first put a little water anythingthat has twocolours, like the
in a clean saucer and rub the hard cake rosy apple. I will tell you how to do
well in it until it , and you can
you have enough try, but do not be
colour mixed . If surprised if it does
your box has moist not look right the
colours in pans, first time.
you must first dip Put the green
the brush in water paint all over in
and then in the the shape of the
colour, and you apple first, and
should then put as wait a little while .
much colour as you Then take some
want to use inthe bright red paint,
tin lid of the box . with only a very
Tube colours must little water in it ,
be used carefully , on the point of a
and the tube clean brush. Be
should be squeezed fore the green paint
very gently at the on your apple is
bottom . Put out quite dry, touch it
only a little colour, with the point of
and always put this brush in the
on the little cap place where the
again when you rosy cheek is. The
have squeezed any red paint will run
colour out. into the green and
For the apple look very nice if
you must mix blue This shows an apple and how to begin to paint it you have done it
and yellow to carefully.
gether. There are different blues and Little Japanese girls and boys write
yellows in your box, and you must try all their letters with a paint-brush and
which will make the green most like the black paint, and so it is easier for them
colour you want . to hold their brushes properly, because
If the apple has aa red cheek you must they have so much practice. If you ask
choose the proper red, and mix both someone to show you some Japanese
colours — the green and the red - ready pictures it will help you to do your own.
in separate parts of your paint-box or If you have found all these things easy
saucer The orange must have bright to do, you can try to make a dish of fruit
yellow , and if the yellow in your box or to draw an egg inanegg -cup, but it is
is too pale, mix a little red with it till much better to do a little ata time and a
you get the right shade. For the pink little every day. It is a very good plan to
or brownish egg, you must take a little see if you can remember what you have
brown or red paint, made pale with drawn, and to do it over again without
water. Never use Chinese white or any looking at the thing itself ; and another
white paint when you are painting on good plan is to test your drawing by
white paper. If your paint is too dry asking your friends to guess what it is.
it will make your work look smeary , Thenext school lessons begin on page 205.
DOUTORUMLULUKUU
on IOI

H
 LITTLE PICTURE-STORIES IN FRENCH
You will not be able to learn to speak French from these lessons. There are some sounds
in French which cannot be made clear on paper, and you will only be able to understand
these by hearing them spoken. But these lessons will help you very much if you are learning
French at school, or if there is someone at home who can help you to understand how the
words should be said . The French people say E just as we say A, and say I just as we say E.
But there are some sounds which are not so easy to learn as these, and it will be better to
ask someone to help you when reading these little lessons than to try to learn all these
difficult things yourself, however hard we might try to make them easy for you. These lessons
tell us the story of a visit to France and of the visitor's doings among the French people,
and the pictures help to make the language quite clear, The first line under the picture
is the French . The second line gives the English word for the French word above
it . But the French people do not always put their words
together in the same way as
we do, and the third line shows how we make up the words into our own language.

175 CHOOT

Louis L'école — The school

Je m'appelle Louis , et j'ai dix ans Jeannette et moi nous allons à l'école
" I myself call Louis, and I have ten years Tenny and I we go to the school
My name is Louis, and I am ten years old Jenny and I go to school
Maintenant nous sommes en vacances
Now we are in holidays
Now we have a holiday

Jeannette - Jenny
Ma seur Jeannette a huit ans
My sister Jenny has eight years Maman - Mamma Papa
My sister Jenny is eight yearsold Nous allons en France
We are going in France
We are going to France
Nous allons avec papa et maman
We are going with papa and mamma
We are going with papa and mamma

Bébé - Baby
Mon petit frère a deux ans
My little brother has two years
My little brother is two years old
La bonne - The nurserymaid
On l'appelle Bébé Bébé va venir et la bonne aussi
One him calls Baby Baby is going to come and the nurse also
He is called Baby Baby is going and nurse also
102
 Nos malles – Our trunks Dans le fiacre - In the cab
Notre bonne a fait toutes nos malles Nous sommes six dans le fiacre
Our nurse has made all our trunks We are six in the cab
Our nurse has packed all our trunks There are six of us in the cab
Nos jouets sont dans la grande malle
Our toys are in the large trunk
Our toys are in the large trunk 1 2 3
Un deux trois
One two three
A1
4 5 6
quatre cing six
four five six

Nos jouets - Our toys

Nous avons beaucoup de jouets
We have тапу of toys
We have many toys
Bébé emporte son bateau à voiles
Baby is taking his sailing boat
Baby is taking his sailing boat

Le cheval - The horse

Le cheval marche très bien
The horse goes very well
The horse'goes very well
Nous aimons aller en fiacre
Le fiacre - The cab We like to go in cab
Le fiacre est à la porte We like riding in a cab
The cab is at the door
The cab is at the door
ttt
MLEKTON

T'A : TI

Le cocher - The driver La gare – The station

Le cocher met les bagages sur le fiacre Nous arriverons bientôt à la gare
The driver puts the luggage on the cab. We shall arrive soon at the station
The driver is putting the luggage on the cab We shall soon arrive at the station
The next picture stories in French are in that part of our book beginning on page 205.
103
CAN WE ALWAYS BELIEVE OUR OWN EYES ?
If you fix your eyes
on the two white
spaces between the
lines it will appear
as if the top space
becomes wider at the
ends, and as if the bot
tom space becomes
wider in the middle.
But both lines are
perfectly straight.

1 7
Which line is the longer ?
The black line on the right
appears longer than the line
beside it, but both lines are
exactly the same length .
This shows how a circle appears
to have sides and corners. These
black spots, if looked at intently ,
seem to have six sides, like a honey
comb, but they are all quite round.

-X Who is the biggest ? Thepoliceman,

But the
There is a blind spot in both your eyes - part of the eye, that is most people would say.
to say, is blind. You can prove this by closing your left eye and policeman is really the smallest,
looking at the X with your right. Hold the paper a foot away, and the little girl is the biggest.
and draw it towards you. Though looking at the X, you will This curious effect was first used
see the spot too, but at a certain point the spot will disappear. By
drawing it still nearer to you , you will bring the spot into view again. by a clever artist for Pears' Soap.

Which square is the larger Most One of these sets of lines looks higher
people would say the white, but the than it is wide, and the other wider
white is smaller than the black . than it is high , but both are square .

Turn the page round

and round to the left .
The plain rings will
appear to revolve
rapidly to the left,
and the others to
go slowly round in
the opposite direction . O 000
The poet was perfectly right when he said that things are not always what they seem . We cannot always believe
our own eyes. Our vision of things is never quite perfect. There is always a little error in our sight, and this
page shows us how we may deceive our eyes and make them believe that things are not what they are .
KOORIDORERELEROULOT
104
 1

THINGSAND
TO MAKE
THINGS TO DO
THE BOOK OF WORK AND PLAY
LL work and no play makes Jack a dull boy and Jill a dull girl. Healthy
ALL play is natural and necessary for us all, and when school is over it is right
that we should go merrily to our games. We shall learn here how to play them .
We shall learn, also, many other things. It is remarkable what we can do at
home when rain drives us indoors and the long winter evenings come, and we
shall discover hundreds of ways of amusing ourselves and making use of our
hands. We shall learn how to make wonderful things with cardboard and paper
and other materials . The boy will learn what to do with his little box of tools,
and the girl what to do with her needle and her clever fingers. Magical illusions,
conjuring tricks, puzzles, problems, and simple scientific experiments will fill
our pages and give us an entertainment of which we shall never grow tired.

HOW TO MAKE A MODEL TOWN

A Wonderful Work for Boys and Girls
It is a very troublesome thing to build
of money. There is the land to buy,
streets to make, drains to lay, architects,
builders, clerks, foremen , and workmen to
pay. Then inspectors and surveyors come
to see that the work is being doneas they like.
So that not many people have ever built a
whole town alone. We will try to do so .
We shall be architects and builders as
well. The ordinary builder does not make
his plans. He may take the plans of the
architect, and make his walls the sizes given
him by the plans. But we must take the
drawings given us and make new drawings
for ourselves, the proper size
of the houses we want to make.
We shall learn here how to
build a town - let us name it
Modeltown. We shall not
start as grown -up builders do,
and our town will not cost
very much either. A very
few pennies carefully spent
will give us the materials for
houses, churches, shops, rail
way - stations, fire - stations,
.
bridges, a grand hall, and all
the belongings of a go -ahead
town. Itmay be possible to
find in your home most of the
things needed some card
board boxes, a penknife with
a nice sharp point, which is
better than scissors, a gluepot,
a pencil, a ruler marked in
inches, and a pair of compasses
or dividers.
But if you want to build the Brush Compasses Spill our city. Put some pieces of
town very well indeed I will
tell you what to get. For a foundation pot with a little water. Put the jam -pot
nothing is better than sheets of strawboard
-the brown or yellow board which perhaps
you would call cardboard. Our town can
be made to stand upon a few imperial sheets
of this, costing from twopence upwards. If
you cut one of these in half you will have
a very nice plot on which to erect build
ings. Some white cardboard, such as
is used for mounts for pictures, will be
the best material for the houses. Large
sheets, enough to build a church or a
museum and a few houses with , can be
got for twopence, or it will cost more if a
thick quality is used . You will want a rule
marked in inches, with each inch divided into
eight parts . You will have given you with
Part 2 of this book a set of scale rules which
you will find very helpful. You will also be
told the meaning of scale rules and how to
use them. You must have a pair of dividers,
or compasses, to measure up the lengths of
your walls. A cheap pair was
bought for threepence - here
it isin the picture.
Two set-squares, which can
be bought for a penny each,
will save you a great deal of
time and settingout by com
passes. If we do not buy
these, we can learn how to
makea simple instrument of the
same kind in that part of our
book beginning on page 217,
Builders use mortar and
nails and difficult joints in
woodwork to stick the build
ing together, but we shall not
want any such ; troublesome
materials. Stickphast, secco
tine, or even gum will stick
our house together. But far
better than any of these is
glue, and it is also cheaper.
A penny will buy enough for
glue, broken small, into a jam
into an old saucepan with plenty of water
in it, and let it get very hot on the side of
the fire or on the stove. Soon the glue will
melt, and it must then be used hot.
For the larger surfaces it will be necessary
to have a brush . The brush shown in the

105
 THINGS TO MAKE AND THINGS TO DO.com
picture is quite large enough, and costs a sometimes if we are to do our work well.
penny. But for the smaller slips which fasten So be careful with the knife, and get and keep
the walls together this brush is too large and a sharp, keen point. You must have, too, a
messy. Ma ke nice, steady
some nice long, hand , or you
tight spills as in will let the knife
the picture and slip and spoil
use the points of the plan or cut
these. They will the ruler.
do quite well. Do Some of the
the work quickly , Bend at dotted line buildings will
so that the glue have more than
does not set be one floor. To
fore you stick the support these
surfaces together , against the side
and in a minute walls, we shall
or so the wall will use s ma 11
be fast. Other
things may have
to be held for
some time to pre
1
1. Plan for making the roof
splinters of
wood, glued to
floor and wall.
Now, I do not

END WALL FRONT END WALL

Bend at all the dotted lines

vent slipping: know whether

You will you can be
want , of FLOOR trusted with
course, a lead а box of
pencil with a matches, even
sharp point, safety ones .
and a knife If your mother
also you says “ Yes, "
must have. then get a
But what boy box , cut off
or girl is with BACK WALL the striking
out a knife ? head, and you
Only, this have got all
knife , besides the timber you
being sharp 2. First plan for making Shakespeare's birthplace want. If you
enough to cannot have
point the pencil cleanly , must have a sharp matches yourself, ask your father to prepare
point to the blade, and the keener the point these for you ; or, if you prefer to supply the
is the better it will be, for not only will wood yourself , get a bundle of firewood ,
you have to cut out the shapes from the costing one halfpenny,and you will find that
cardboard , but some of the lines must be most of the sticks will “ splinter " into the
cut only half through, so that the cardboard necessary sizes . But take care not to cut
will bend at a sharp and clean angle , but not yourself . If you make the pieces the size of
come apart. It is easier to cut the shape out matches, they will do very well.
completely than to cut the line only half We shall want our buildings to look well
through, but we shall have to cut half through after they are built. Plain white cardboard

3. End of roof 4. Top of small attic windows 5. Top of large attic windows 6. Chimney
Make all your lines double the length of the lines in these pictures
106 el
 -HOW TO BUILD SHAKESPEARE'S BIRTHPLACE.es
by itself will never do. And this brings us
to the colour -box, fitted with its penny cakes We shall begin Modeltown with an easy
of students ' colours. Indigo, French blue,
black , Prussian blue, lake, light red, ver-
milion, gamboge, chrome, ochre, burnt
umber and raw umber, burnt sienna, and
vandyke brown is a very good list of
useful colours. Get a small brush ,
of sable if possible ; or, if not sable,
then one of camel's hair will do.
The colours can be mixed on
a white plate. Then you
will want a sheet or two of
sand -paper of two dif
ferent roughnesses, to
imitate what the builders
call rough -mortared sur
faces. If you have to
buy this, ask for one
sheet number o and
one sheet number 2.
Another way, perhaps a
better way, of making
the walls look like
rough stone is to paint
them with thin hot glue, 7. Marks for end walls of Shakespeare's house. for you to make a draw
and to put dry sand on
it at once. The sand will remain on the care that each line in it is exactly twice as
glue and look like stone.
That for the present closes the list of things
we need, and we may proceed to build . We
shall finish each part of our town by itself.
A house, a villa, a church , a shop, will
each be separately built. Itwill neverdo to let
these buildings stand anywhere to be knocked
down or crushed, or to get dirty . A storage
place must be found. A big box on the
upper shelf of a cupboard would be capital.
Now, before we begin to make the first
building in our town, we must have all our
tools and materials in order , and ready at
hand . Let us understand what they are :
A sharp penknife, with a well-pointed blade.
A pair of compasses.
The scale rules given with Part 2.
A lead pencil.
Some paints and brushes and crayons.
A gluepot and glue, or a tube of seccotine.
Two sheets of strawboard, to begin with .
Twosheets of white cardboard, to begin with.
Some wooden matches without heads.
H
8. Markings for the front of Shakespeare's birthplace
Shakespeare's Birthplace
house-a model of Shakespeare's birthplace
at Stratford -on -Avon, one of the simplest
houses, though one of the wisest men lived in
it. We shall make this house without
using the scale rules which we shall use
in making most of the other buildings,
as we shall begin in the simplest way
possible.
The first thing we shall want
is a piece of white cardboard,
which mustnot be too thick ,
or it will be difficult to
work with. We can make
the four walls and the
floor out of one piece.
All that is necessary is to
cut out the cardboard to
the shape of the drawing
I have made, shown in
the picture [ 2] , but you
should make your drawing
twice as large as mine.
The best way would be
ing of your own, taking
long as mine. You can do this with a rule
and your compasses .
You will notice that one part of the drawing
is marked " floor,''two other parts are marked
“ end ) walls,” and another is marked “ back
wall . By bending the cardboard you get
the floor and all the four walls to fit together,
so that they make the house without the roof.
To bend the cardboard you must cut it
half-way through with the penknife, and the
cut must not be on the side towards which
you are going to bend it, but on the other
side, so that you will bend the cardboard
with the cut outside. In this way it will bend
easily, whereas if you tried to bend it with
the cut inside you would probably break
What you make is really a little box,
with peaks on the top of the end walls, and
more peaks where the three attic windows
are . You will find it better to mark the
black lines shown in pictures 7 and 8 before
the cardboard has been folded up to make
the walls, and while it is still flat.
107
 THINGS TO MAKE AND THINGS TO DO .
The dotted lines show where you must these pieces to the roof, the two bent-up
bend the card (after cutting it half through). pieces going under the large roof. Having
Do not bend the card too far or you will run made and put on the part of the roof over
the risk of breaking the card. Thenyou will the large window, it willbe easy to make and
find that thesmallpieces bent over from the put on two pieces for the two smaller attic
end walls will touch the ends of the floor, windows, the shape of which you will take
and the pieces bent over from the sides of from picture 4. Both are the same ze,
the back wall will fit into the end walls. and the shape is given . When the roof is
Now, using glue, or gum , or seccotine, fix made so far, paint it red. Get the tint like
these pieces to the places they touch, and you red tiles. Red ink will do very well. Put it
will have a strong little box. This is the on with a small brush , or with a feather.
house without the roof. Paint the windows Now wecome to the last thing—the chim
with light blue paint. You will easily know ney . Cut out two chimneys the shape shown
which are windows. They are shaded with in picture 6, but twice the size, and fix them
tiny dots in picture 8. so as to make two square tubes. Now double
Now we begin the more difficult task of the two tails over towards the inside of the
making the roof. The attic windows make tubes. You will probably have to tie the
it more difficult, but chimneys with thread
it is not too difficult. while the glue is
First cut out a piece setting hard, and you
of cardboard the will do it better if you
same shape as pic put a pencil or some
ture 1 , but of course thing else about the
twice the size if you same size into the
are making the chimneys while they
house double the are setting Then
size of the picture. glue the chimneys on
Having cut the to the roof, one in
cardboard the shape front close to the ridge
of the roof, now cut on the right-hand side
out two pieces of and the other about
cardboard the shape 9. Shakespeare's birthplace made in cardboard
the middle, a little way
of the drawing in picture 3, bend both the down the back slope of the roof. The last
roof and the roof end pieces at the dotted picture [9] will show you where the chimneys
lines, and glue or cement the end pieces should be placed. Paint the tops of the chim
underneath the roof ; stick them near to, but neys black , or make them black with ink.
not quite at, the ends of the roof. They must Wehave now completed a little model of
be put on so that the tops of the two end walls one of the most famous houses in the world,
will come on the outside of the roof ends and by looking at picture 9, you will see
when the roof isplaced on the top of the walls. what it oughtto be like when you have
Now cut a piece of cardboard the shape finished it. You will notice, however, that
of the large attic window. This shape is we have not attempted to make the windows
shown in picture 5. Don't forget to make and the porch over the door, but have merely
it twice the size of the picture. It has three drawn these on the front. These things are
dotted lines. The line in the middle is very difficult to do until we have become very
where you bend the pieces down to form clever at this work, but you may be able to add
the ridge, and the other two lines must be these exactly as they are with a little practice.
bent inthe opposite direction, which means The next building lesson , describing how to 1
that you must make the half-through cut on make more difficult houses and buildings, is in
the under side of the cardboard . Now glue that part of our book beginning on page 217.

HOW TO BE YOUR OWN MAGICIAN

The Inexhaustible Matchbox Trick
FANCY every boy has a yearning to be once more, when opened, it is found to be
I a conjurer, and, within certain limits, there full . The third batch of matches is shaken
is no reason why he should not. There out, after which the operator endeavours to
are plenty of capital tricks that can be done put them all back again, but without success,
by an intelligent boy, if he will take pains, for, even when packed as closely as possible,
and the first we will take is the trick of the the box cannot be made to accommodate
inexhaustible matchbox, an excellent piece more than half those upon the table.
of mystery making: The secret lies mainly inthe fact that the
The effect of this trick is as follows. An matchbox used, though ordinary in kind, has
ordinary “ safety ” matchbox, of small size undergone a special preparation, as follows :
-the kind you can buy for a halfpenny from With a sharp penknife, split six or seven of
any oilman - after being shown full, is com- the matches right down the middle. Take
pletely emptied, the matches being turned out the “ drawer " portion of the box, turn
out upon the table- cloth. The box is closed . it over, and smear the underside with glue
When again opened, it is found to be full of or seccotine ; then lay the half-matches, all
matches, as at first. These also are turned pointing the same way, side by side upon
out. Once more the box is closed, and it . If this is neatly done, the inverted
108
 THE BOY
drawer thus treated will have all the appear-
ance of a full one right side up. When the
glue is dry, reversethe drawer again , re-
placing the matches that it contained. Push
it half-way only into the outer case ; and,
into the opposite end of the same case, push
the drawer portion , also full, of another box.
You will thus have two drawers in one case ,
the appearance being as shown in the picture.
The unprepared drawer is represented by a ;
the prepared one by 6. This box, at a suitable
moment, the owner brings forward as if it
were one in ordinary use, taking care to keep
the end 6 well covered by his right hand.
Making some re
mark about the a 6
strange pro .
perties of
matches of this
brand, he offers
to give an illus
tration of one of
them . So say The magic matchbox that any boy may make
ing, he shakes
out the visible matches upon the table, and
shows the box empty. Remarking “ Now
I will just close the box again, ” he brings
the left hand up to it, as if merely to push in
the drawer, but, as a matter of fact, presses
in 6 from the opposite end, thereby pushing
out the empty drawer into his left hand,
where it remains concealed. He holds up the
box in the right hand, showing it fairly closed.
This calls all eyes to the box, and gives him
an opportunity to drop the empty drawer into
his lap if he is seated ,or, if otherwise, behind
CARPENTER
a book or other convenient object placed
beforehand on the table. Then, blowing
upon the box, and pronouncing some magical
formula, he pushes open the box again ,
showing that it is still full of matches. This
is done with the one hand only, the other
falling carelessly on the matches already
turned out on the table, and secretly getting
possession of a score or so of them , which he
holds against the palm by the pressure of the
thumb. The second lot of matches is now
shaken out upon the first, and again the box
is closed. Once more the performer blows
upon it, and, under cover of so doing, turns
it upside down.
When he again
opens it, it is
once more ap
parently full, the
matches glued
to the bottom of
the drawerbeing
now brought into
view. Transfer
ring it to the opposite hand, he gives it a
shake, allowing the matches concealed in
that hand to fall from it as if out of the
box, then again turning it, so as to bring
the empty side of thedrawer uppermost.
“ Now ," he says, “ you can all testify that
these matches came out of this box. To
show you that there is no deception, and that
they have really multiplied , we will try how
many we can put back again ." He fills the
box, but there is still an equal number left
over. These he presents to the company.

THE BOY CARPENTER'S BOX OF TOOLS

And How to Make the Box in Your Own Home
VERY boy should have a box of tools, able to do much good with it. You should
EY practice,
and know how to use them ,
you may make many
With
things
get a saw that costs not less than half- a
crown, and if you can give three or four
useful and ornamental. shillings for it, it will be well
While you will not be able to worth the extra cost. Car
have as many tools as a proper penters usually buy saws
carpenter,you may, with careful costing from five to eight
saving and wise spending, have The axe shillings.
enough to do many useful The tools you will need are
things which an axe, a ham
would otherwise mer, a saw , a
have to be sent chisel , a plane,
out to be done. a screw -driver,
There are, of and a gimlet.
course, different Let us look at
qualities of tools, thesetools, and
and you should see how they
ANNUNAR

purchase the best are used .

you can afford . The first is
You could get a the axe, or
toy saw for a hatchet. We
shilling, or even shall want only
for less, but you a small axe .
would not be You may not

Using the axe The saw Using the saw

109
 -THINGS TO MAKE AND THINGS TO DO NEAR
have to buy a special axe, as there is claws in the way shown in thepicture you
usually an axe for chopping wood in any can draw out nails from wood so as to use
house, and you may be able to borrow them over again . When you have
this when you require it. The axe is drawn them out you will probably find
used for splitting wood, as you see. that they are bent, and that you cannot
Wood has what is called a grain, which drive them in again properly. There
is always up the way the tree has grown, fore you must straighten them. Put
and it can be split up the way of the The square them on a piece of iron , stone, or a
grain, but not across the grain. block of hard wood — not upon
When you wish to cut wood across anything that must not be
the grain you must use a saw. damaged -- and place the point
When the grain of the wood is downwards as in the picture.
very regular you can split wood Then strike the high place
evenly with the axe , but if the with the hammer until the nail
grain is twisted you cannot do so. is straight. Use new nails
Therefore, even when you want whereveryou can, but you must
to have the plank of wood cut the begin with the idea that you are
way of the grain Using thesquare going to spend as little money
it may be neces as possible . A
sary to use the chisel is used to
saw instead of cut the wood
the axe . There where an axe
The hammer The chisel or a saw
are many saws.
The kind would not
you want is be suitable .
a handsaw, We use a
say about chisel, for
fourteen or instance, to
sixteen in cut away the
ches long. wood to
You can use make room
this both for for a lock on
sawing the a door, and
long way of sometimes
the grain and before put
across the ting on
grain . There hinges.
are many
Taking out nails We use a
ways of saw gimlet to
ing, but there make holes
is only one chiefly when
right way. we are
You must
work the saw Using the hammer Using a chisel going to put
in screw
backwards and forwards regularly , not nails. For ordinary driving nails
rocking it from side to side, or you it is not necessary to make holes with
will cut unevenly ; and not jerking it the gimlet unless the wood is very
out and in, or you will blunt the hard and liable to split.
saw, and tire yourself very soon. The screwdriver is for putting in
Before beginning to saw ,
make a pencil-line on the Straightening
bent nail
a screw-nails. It is pressed against
the head of the screw -nail with its
wood where you want to point in the slot of the
cut it, and make head , and is
the saw follow the turned round at
line very carefully. the same time.
The Screwdriver Now we come
You must have also
rule, a set-square will
The gimlet abefoot to the plane. If you look The plano
useful in marking wood, at an ordinary
and the CHILDREN'S wooden fence and
ENCYCLOPÆDIA scale then at a door in
rules, given with Part 2, a house you will
will help you. notice a great dif
A hammer is ference in the
a tool you surface of the
cannot possibly wood . The fence
do without. Its will probably be
chief use is for rough , or almost
driving in nails. hairy . The reason
Get what is is that the door
called a claw has been planed
hammer . By Using a screw and the fence has
Using a gimlet using the two driver not. All wood to Using the plano
IIO
 HOW TO MAKE A KALEIDOSCOPE
which we want to give a smooth surface these pieces, plane them until they are
must be planed. Another reason for planing good enough , and nail them together so
is that if we paint wood that has not been that they look like the top picture, with
planed we use much more paint than we the end pieces fitted inside the sides.
should use if the wood had The total length when
been planed. Wood not nailed up is eighteen inches,
planed uses up paint as and the width will now be
blotting-paper uses up ink. more than seven inches
In using the plane, push it it will be eight inches if
forward on thewood steadily, the wood of the sides is
and press upon it evenly ali half an inch thick . Now
the time. The point of the nail on pieces of wood to
plane-iron, which does the make the bottom , having cut
work, must stick out below The ends and sides of the box them out as you did the
the bottom of the plane, but sides. You may get the
not too far. bottom in one
The plane-iron piece, but if the
and the chisel wood is not
must be kept wide enough
sharp, and if you must nail
you can afford pieces together.
to buy an Box end, and posi Now you
oilstone you tion of bottom The position
The lid of the box of a hinge must make the
should do so. lid. Take one
The stone is called an oilstone be or more pieces of width
wood
cause it is used with a little oil in making the same
rubbing the edge of a tool upon it.
The first thing you
might make with your
tools is a box in which to
keep them. You can no
Æ altogether as the bottom.
Nail across them, as in the
drawing, two pieces that
do not go quite to the
doubt find somewhere
edge. The lid isusenow
made. You can it
an empty soap or sugar as a lift-off lid or you
box, or you may prob can put it on with hinges,
ably buy one from the which you can buy. Fix
grocer for twopence. The completed tool-box these on with screw
Having got the box, nails, screwing them to
take the sides apart by pulling out the the edge of the lid first. Then chisel away
nails. Now measure off two pieces eighteen a little of the wood from the back of the
inches long and six inches wide. These are box so as to make room for the hinges.
for the two sides of our tool-box. Then You can put a lock on it if you like,
measure off two other pieces six inches by and fit inside a tray to hold nails and other
seven inches to make the ends. Cut out small things.

HOW TO MAKE A KALEIDOSCOPE

*HE little toy which is called a kaleido- such a kaleidoscope also. If you put the
THEscope will give you great enjoyment. three mirrors together so as to form a
It is the most famous toy in the world . triangle, and stand in the middle of the
There is a good deal of triangle, you will see how one
mystery about it, and many boy or girl can become a
grown-up people will be quite large crowd. You will see
puzzled to know how all the not only your reflection in the
beautiful things that can be mirror, but also the reflection
seen in a kaleidoscope are of your reflections repeated
made to appear. many times. Wave your
Kaleidoscope is a long handkerchief, and you will
word , and we should under seem to see dozens and
stand what it means before hundreds of boys or girls
we begin to make one. It wavinghandkerchiefs. If you
is a word made from three have a light above your head,
Greek words, and means an and if the mirrors incline a
instrument with which we can little towards each other at
see things of beautiful form . the top, the effect will be
It will be good for you to more remarkable still.
know what the three Greek in making the kaleidoscope pierce the But not many people have
bottom of the tin neatlyand sharply
words are. Theyare Kalos, with a nail to make the eyehole. these large mirrors, and even
beautiful, EIDOS, form , and if they have they may not be
SKOPEO , I see . Sometimes people make able to bring them together into the form
large kaleidoscopes, and if there are in your of a triangle . So we shall make a small
house three large mirrors you can make kaleidoscope, one that we can hold in our
πασα III
 LE THINGS TO MAKE AND THINGS TO DO.
hands, and may even be able to put into of the ends of the three pieces of glass.
our pocket. It will not cost much either. This piece of glass must bequite clear with
First we must get a small round tin box ; wat any black paper on it. Now make a nar
an empty row cardboard ring
cocoa or and fix it inside the
mustard tin round the side,
tin will do so that it will keep
if it is the piece of round
round . glass from falling
Now take out. The cardboard
a nail with ring must be so
a sharp thick that the round
point and piece of glass will
make a not fall through it,
hole in the " and must be narrow ,
middle of so that yet another
Tiethe three pieces of glasstogether like thebottom round piece of glass
before puttingtheminsidethe tin. ofthetin.
this may go on thetop
The hole will not be quite large enough. of it and still be just
Get some other thing with a sharp point to under the edge of Put the cardboard ring
make it larger ; a small iron poker or a coal- the tin. Thissecond between the glass discs.
hammer, perhaps . The best tool to use round piece of glass must be obscured glass
would be what blacksmiths calla punch, but -the white- looking glass that you cannot see
you are not likely to have one of these. But through. You can get this from a glazier.
you can easily make the hole about as large Before you put on this second piece of
as a threepenny-piece. Now you will need glass, however, you must find some small
three pieces of glass half an inch pieces of broken coloured glass, or
shorter than the tin is deep, and coloured glass beads. These will lie in
just so wide that when you place the space between the two round pieces
the three in the box, in the form of glass. Now make the second piece
of a triangle, their corners will of glass fast in some way, so that it will
touch the sides of the tin , with very not fall. out when you turn up the tin .
little room to spare. If you can There are several ways of doing this. If
get three pieces of looking-glass, the top piece of glass is very little below
so much the better. If you use the top of the tin , you can bend the edge
common glass, paste black paper of the tin inwards a little, so that the glass
on the back of each piece. If you cannot fall out. Another way is to gum
cannot get glass at all, three some paper to the top piece of glass,
pieces of tin will do, or one piece and gum it also to the tin ; but if you
of tin bent over in two places so do this you must not put the paper
as to make a triangle. But let us far enough over the glass tocome
suppose that you are using glass into theinside of the triangle.
with black paper on the back . It is desirable to cover the tin
the
The best way tofind theproper three pieces ofglass intheting withcoloured paper, and the
size of the three pieces ofglass is kaleidoscope is then complete.
to cut out pieces of cardboard, all exactly Look through the hole in the bottom ,
alike, until you find the right size to go into holding the other end up to the light, turn
the tin to make the proper triangle, and then it round and round , and thousands of
you have only to buy three pieces of glass pictures will come.
the same size as the card. Any glazier or You could never count the number of new
picture-frame maker will sell you the three pictures you can make with a kaleidoscope.
pieces for not more than twopence. No two are ever quite the same, and
you cango
Before you put the glasses into the box, on making fresh ones for ever. The pieces
tie them together in of glass are re
the form of a triangle flected in the
with a piece of string, three mirrors
or paste a band of many times , and
paper round them so all the reflec
that they will remain tions make what
in the right position . is called a pat
Then put them into lern . Designers
the box. If you have of carpets and
made the glasses the other things
right size , they will often use a
come to within half kaleidoscope to
an inch of the top of give them pat
the rim of the tin . terns , but no
Now you must get man could draw
a round piece of so many beauti
This shows the inside of the glass that will go into ful designs as This shows you how the last
kaleidoscope as it would look the tin easily and fit we can get in glass disc may be fixed at theend
if a piece were cut away. it right on the top this way. of the tin with gummed paper.
II2
 MAKING LITTLE RED RIDING HOOD DOLLS
WoulIdknow
you lik e to make your own dolls ?
hrw very much nicer and
so we will begin to make the legs. For these
we must slit the part of the paper which
dearer to us are the toys which we remains from the body, and wind a piece of
have made ourselves out of scraps, and so cotton round each side to form the thighs,
I am going to tell you howto make a lot knees, andlegs, folding the ends of the paper
of lovely things which your friends will never under to shape the feet, as our first picture
believe were made by little nursery folks. We shows. These will be covered with black
will make a whole family of dolls, andwe tissue-paper to represent the little shoes.
will name them after our friend Little Red For the faceyou can cut out a picture-head
Riding Hood. of a child which you will find in any paper
Wewill start with a doll like the one in or magazine, and gum it on to the head-part
the picture at the bottom of this page ( 3 ]. of the doll, colouring the face pink for the
Doesn't she look quaint and pretty in her cheeks, blue for the eyes, red for the lips,
little cloak and hood ? Well, you can make and brown for the hair and eyelashes.
a whole family of these, with nothing but The doll now needs only to be dressed.
paper, for a penny! A short piece of any coloured
First buy a roll of assorted paper you like will do for the
crepe paper, such as is used for dress, but it must be wide enough
making lampshades and flowers. to go right round the little lady.
By asking for the assorted kind Cut the paper exactly the length
you will have in one roll several of the doll from neck' to half-way
sheets of paper of different between the knees and the feet.
colours, a most important point Then stick the edges of the paper
to remember if we are to dress together at the back ; pass it over
our dolls. To make the body, the head, and tie round the neck
take a piece of pink paper and after making two holes for the
roll it to form a ball about the arms to go through .
size of a big marble. This will For the cloak , take a piece of
make the head. Now have a red paper longer than the one
large sheet of the same crepe used for the dress, but this time
paper about 14 or 15 inches long, it must meet in front without
and draw it several times being joined. Leave aa long piece
through your hands until it is above the head, and tie it with
as narrow as the round piece cotton round the neck as shown
which forms the head. Place 1. The body of the paper doll in picture 2. The piece left
this ball in the centre of the above the head is for the hood
paper, and then fold it over and tie a piece of Little Red Riding Hood. Round off the
of cotton quite tight under the ball. Now corners with a pair of scissors, and gather
we have made thehead . the fulness by carefully running a thread all
The next thing is to make the arms. These round the hood. This must be done very
are made together by creasing a piece carefully to avoid tearing the paper. If
of the paper about 18 inches long very you prefer it, a piece of very narrow
tightly, and folding the ends over until baby-ribbon can be threaded through from
they almost touch each other. Tie them each side, and tied on the top in a neat
firmly at each end to form the wrists, little bow . A piece of the same ribbon
and again near should be tied
the centre. This round the neck
will look like a and finished in a
long roll, which bow to hide the
you will slip just cotton which
under the head keeps the paper
between the folds in place.
of the pink Our first paper
crinkled paper . doll is now com
Another piece of plete , and in the
cotton must now picture [3 ] she
be wound tightly certainly looks
round under the charming .
arms to make the Now let us
shape of the upper give Red Riding
part of the body. Hood a sister
Our doll begins in cardboard.
to look hopeful, This can be
and we can see made quiteeasily.
already a little of Place a piece of
her shape. But thin paper over
the most im- picture 4, and
portant part re- trace the outline.
2. Cloak for paper doll mains to be done, Then lay the 3. The finished paper doll

113
 STOLLA
-THINGS TO MAKE AND THINGS TO DO
paper over a is the first part of
piece of card- our wool doll .
board , and by The arms are
going over the made by twisting
drawing with a long piece of
a sharp pencil wool round and
you will make round until it
a mark on the forms a cord .
cardboard by When two of
which you can these are done,
cut the doll cut one end of
out . each into a tassel
When you for the hands,
have traced and sewing the other
cut two pieces end on to the top
exactly alike, part of the body.
stick the two The head is the
heads and most interesting
bodies together, part to make. The
leaving the legs picture [6] shows
loose, SO that you the best way
they may be to do it - in the
4. Pattern of cardboard doll
bent apart to shape of a ball. 5. How the doll stands upright
form a support. You will find that the For this you must take two round pieces of
doll then stands cardboard as big
all by itself, as a five-shilling
The next picture piece, put them
[5 ] shows this. quite close to
If you have a gether, and make
box of paints a round hole
now is the time as big as a shilling
for you to use
them . Paint the
through the cen
face in a pretty, tre. Through this
you must wind
pink shade, and round and round
try to shade it so as much wool as
as to give the youcan get on the
doll nice rosy cardboard . Put
cheeks, blue eyes, the point of the
red lips, and dark scissors between
hair. The dress the two card
should be a very boards, and cut
pretty green the wool evenly
colour, and the all round . The
cloak , of course, picture shows
must be of bright exactly how this
red . Paint the should be done.
stockings red and 6. Making the head, arms, and body of the wool doll
Theil wind a
the shoes black. When finished she should piece of cotton round the wool between
look like Red Riding Hood in picture 7 . the pieces of cardboard , and tie it firmly in
She has a little the middle . Take
woollen sister, away the card
who is a dainty boards and shake
little person . To the wool, and you
make the body, will have a
take half an round , tight ball .
ordinary skein Mark the eye
of white Berlin lashes on the ball
wool , cut in a with black silk,
bunch of about the nose and
18 inches long. mouth with red
Then tie it silk, and the eyes
tightly in the with blue silk.
middle — the pic- For the eyes blue
ture [ 6 ] shows beads are a great
you how . Fold success ,
the wool over To complete
and tie again just the doll, tie round
under the first the waist a sash
knot to form the of satin ribbon,
waist line, as in and make a red
7. The finished cardboard doll the picture. This cloak and hood. 8. Red Riding Hood wool doll
114
 GAMES TO PLAY SITTING BY THE FIRE
No boy or girl need ever be
dull on a dark night or a
rainy day. There are hundreds
of ways of enjoying ourselves
by the fireside, and here are
some games that we can play
as we sit, even without
moving from our chairs.
BUZ
PLAYERS take it in turn to
count up to 100 , but instead of
saying " seven ” the word “ Buz ”
must be used, and repeated at fourteen ,
twenty - one, and all the multiples of seven .
If “ Bang " be used also at every fifth interval,
someone will surely have to pay forfeit.
RHYMES
The"I'm
playerat oneofendofour
thinking a word thatrowrhymes
says:
with rip " (though any word may be chosen ).
Then each in turn tries to guess what the
word is by asking a question , thus : “ Is it
something that sails on the sea ? ”. If wrong
the thinker replies : “ No; not a ship. ”
Another perhaps asks : • Do we partly
speak with it ? " 66
No ; not lip ." “ Can we
do it with a rope ?” cries a third. “ Yes,"
answers the thinker, “ the word is skip."
Then the guesser chooses a word, and the
game begins again .
HOW, WHEN, AND WHERE ?
One of the party must leave the room
while the rest select a word to be
guessed. The player is then called back
and begins the task of finding the word by
asking each of the party the three questions :
How do you like it ? When do you like it ?
And where do you like it ? Supposing the
word to be a simple name like " tea " or
sugar,"" the answers will soon reveal it ;
but the game can be made more difficult by
choosing a word with two meanings, such
ás “ pen .” This may either mean the little
tool we write with , or the pen that sheep
are folded in.
I LOVE MY LOVE
WHOEVER sits first in the row is A , and
says: “ I love my love with an A, be
cause he is affable " (or anything nice be-
ginning with the first letter of the alphabet).
I hate him with an A , because he is artful
(or something else not nice) . “ He took me
to Aden and gave me some apples. His
name is Andrew , and he comes from Aber
deen.” Of course, these last descriptions of
" my love " may vary as the playerwishes,just
as the first do. The next player uses words
beginning with a B, and so on down to Z.
RUSSIAN GOSSIP
gamewill
Thisgrows. show youhow easily a story
No. I whispers to No. 2 a short
sentence. No. 2 repeats it to No. 3, adding an
adjective or an adverb. No. 3, in telling it to
No. 4 , adds another word, andwhen the story
reaches the last player he, or she, repeats it
aloud. You will be surprised to find how
Di 115
the story has
grown since start
ing from No. 1 .
SPELLING BEE
Thisfor isclever
a game
dren .
chil
The first
player begins a word, which he does not tell,
starting with A, the second player adds a
letter, and all the other players do so in
turn. The player ending a word drops out
or pays forfeit.
Suppose the first player says T, the second
R , the third E. Now comes the critical
moment ; if the_fourth player says E, he
finishes a word - Tree. But if he is clever he
will say A, and then the fifth player may,
perhaps, say T. But he need not do so , as
he can say S , leaving the next player to say
U. Then the next might say R , and the
next E , which would end the word Treasure.
If the eighth player is clever, however, he will
say I instead of E, so that the tenth player
must make the word Treasuring or Treasuries.
The great point of the game is to keep a
word up as long as possible, but, of course,
some words must end. No proper names are
allowed, and it is best not to count words of
three letters. The game should be played
through from A to Z , the first word begin.
ning with A, the second with B, and so on.
HIDE AND SEEK ON THE HEARTHRUG
Oneof the players is countedout to go,
and hide, but, without leaving the circle
thinks of some good place in which it may be
supposed he or sheis hiding: Having called
“ Cuckoo ! ” the others begin guessing one
spot after another until the right one is hit
upon, when the guesser hides in turn. In
such a game the hiding ground may be any.
where in the world : * A street in Paris,
or “ The top of Mont Blanc." Each player
takes it in turn to ask questions as to the
whereabouts and nature of the hiding place ;
but as the one who is answering may only
say “ Yes ” or “ No," the seekers may have
a long search. It istheir business to question
the hidden one so that his answers, “ Yes "
or “ No," give some idea of the place For
example, they will naturally ask whether it is
far or near, high or low, and so on.
The next games are in that part of our
book beginning on page 217.
 LITTLE PROBLEMS FOR CLEVER PEOPLE
UR fathers and mothers have spent many hours - perhaps. days, perhaps
OURweeks — of their lives in puzzling over problems and trying to find
out riddles. We shall find in this part of our book some of the things that
have puzzled them, with many new puzzles that we can work out for ourselves.
There are many puzzles so strange and bewildering that thousands and thousands
of people have never been able to understand them . Perhaps your father and
mother may have been puzzled by these ; but we shall try to make them so
clear by pictures and simple answers that we shall all understand. The answers
to the following problems are in the part of our book beginning on page 217.
1. DID GEORGE WALK ROUND THE 7. WHOSE PORTRAIT IS IT ?
MONKEY ? One of the problems that have most
George was trying to tease the monkey puzzled our fathers and mothers is the old
which was seated on the top of a barrels problem (of
6
a man looking at a portrait,
organ . But, although he walked all round saying: “ Brothers and sisters have I none,
the barrel-organ,the monkey always turned but this man's father is my father's son."
soas to face theboy the whole time. Whose portrait is it ?
When the boy has walked round the organ , 8. WHAT DID THE CORK COST ?
has he walked round the monkey ?
A bottle and a cork cost 27d. If the
2. HOW MANY APPLES DID MABEL bottle cost 2d. more than the cork , how
BUY ? much does the cork cost ?
Mabel bought some apples at three for 9. HOW MANY GIRLS ARE THERE ?
twopence , and an equal number of halfpenny If 63 is divided amongst fifty boys and
oranges. If she spent sevenpence altogether, girls,the boys getting is. 3d. each, and the
how many apples and oranges did she buy ? girls'is. each, how many girls are there ?
3. HOW DOES MARY GET THE EGGS ? 10. THE MISSING CANARIES
Alice and Mary gather the eggs on the farm . Grandfather gave a children's party at
One morning Alice discovers that several which twenty little guests were present.
eggs have been laid on a The old gentleman had pre
small square island in the pared a surprise for the children,
middle of a square pond, and, each of whom was to receive a
having no plank long enough live canary. But when the time
to reach across, she leaves came to present the canaries it
the eggs alone. was found that many of them
Mary sees them the next had flown . The host sent out
morning, and, looking round for others to replace them,
for a means to reach the saying to the messenger :
island, finds two planks, Bring back as many and half
neither of which will quite as many — that is, one and a half
reach from the edge of the times as many - as there are
pond to the island. But they left in the cage, and two and a
are her only means of access half more."
to the eggs, and, placing When the messenger came
them so that she can step How does Mary get the eggs ? back with these there were
across them, Mary reaches enough birds to go round,
the island and takes the eggs home in her making twenty inall. How many canaries
basket. How does Mary reach the island ? flew away ?
4. WHO IS TOM'S UNCLE'S SISTER ? 11. HOW FAST WAS THE HORSE
(

“ Father , Tom says his uncle's sister is WALKING ?

)
not his aunt. ' " Well, I expect he is right.”
If Tom's uncle's sister is not Tom's aunt,
who is she ?
5. HOW MANY STAMPS HAD THEY ?
Three children- Jack , Frank, and Harry ,
divided some postage-stamps amongst them .
Jack had half of them and one more ; Frank
had one more than half of those left ; Harry
had the remaining three. How many stamps
were there ?
6. HOW LONG WAS THE STRING ?
A boy had two pieces of string, one of
which was just twice as long as the other.
He cut 6 inches off each piece, and then
found that one was just three times as long
as the other. How long were they at first ?
The next part of Things to Make and Things to Do begins on page 217.
116
I was walking along a country road steadily
at the rate of four miles an hour. I saw a
horse and cart going in the same direction, and
when I saw them they were exactly 220 yards
in front of me. I overtook them in 15 minutes.
At what rate was the horse walking?
12. HOW MUCH DOES A BRICK
WEIGH ?
A brick weighs six pounds and half of its
own weight. What is the weight of the brick ?
13. HOW MUCH ARE EGGS ?
“ What are eggs a dozen ? " Mary asked .
“ Two more for a shilling, " said the grocer,
“would make them a penny per dozen less ."
“ Then,” said Mary, “ I will take one
shillingsworth .” How many did she buy ?
 The Child's Story of
THE EARTH

WHAT THIS STORY TELLS US

E have learned already that the earth is round like a ball ; we learn
Wenow that the great earth -ball is always spinning. If you could throw
a ball into the air which would spin round and round like a top, and travel
through space without ever stopping, the ball would be doing what the
earth is always doing. Nothing seems so still as the earth on which we
stand, but that is because it moves so smoothly. The earth is really moving
faster than the fastest train ; but we cannot tell that it is moving because
it moves so quietly and smoothly, and everything moves with it. It is this
movement that makes day and night. The sun does not rise nor set ; it is the
earth passing in and out of the sunlight that makes day light and night dark .

THE EARTH IS ALWAYS MOVING

Thethatfirswet thing
are in
CONTINUED FROM PAGE 10 slowed up with a
jerk ; then , when the
9

clined to say when we ' bus goes on a little

are told the earth moves is that faster, our bodies are left
we do not feel the earth moving, behind a little, and then are
but the answer to that is easy . jerked forward . So we know
When you are in a train in a that the ' bus is taking us
station , you sometimes cannot where we want to go .
tell whether the train is moving or The more smoothly the 'bus travels,
not , except , perhaps , by looking at the less can we feel its travelling.
another train standing at the other Now , of all the things that men can
platform , and sometimes you think travel in, the balloon is said to be the
your train is moving, until you see smoothest , because when the air is
that the platform is quite still. It quiet you cannot feel its motion at
was the moving of the other train all. It is better than travelling in the
that made you think your train was best steamer, the newest electric
moving. So it proves nothing to say train , or the finest motor-car. But
that we do not feel the earth moving really the smoothest thing to travel
with us. If you are travelling in a on is the earth itself, which we are all
train , or on a boat, or in a balloon,
really travelling on all the time, no
or on this great earth of ours , you matter whether we are swimming or
have only two ways of judging walking, or flying in a balloon . The
whether you are moving or not . One best proof of the smoothness of the
is by feeling the movement under earth's motion is that no one has oo

you, and the other by noticing that
things outside seem to be moving
past you.
Now, certainly we cannot feel the
earth move under us , but this is
simply because the movement is so
smooth. When you are inside a very
big boat, you cannot tell whether the
boat is moving if the sea is smooth .
If you shut your eyes in a balloon
on a calm day you cannot tell that it
is moving - often you cannot tell even
if your eyes are open . When we fee)
that a 'bus is moving under us, that
is only because its movement is jerky.
Every time the ' bus moves a little
more slowly, our bodies go on moving
forward at the old rate , and then are
ever felt the earth moving . Sometimes
a little bit of the outside of the earth
moves by itself, and then people feel it.
That is called an earthquake, and is
quite different. No one has ever felt
the movement of the earth as a whole.
What would happen if the earth
suddenly stopped moving ? If suddenly
the earth did stop moving , as a 'bus
pulls up sharp, or as you pull your arm
up sharp when you throw a ball , what
would happen to us ? When a ' bus 0
stops suddenly , all the passengers are
jerked forwards. When you pull up
your arm sharply to throw a ball, it
is thrown forward ever so far . The
earth is going so fast that , if it were
suddenly to stop moving, all the loose

117
 OXULXLLO
-THE CHILD'S STORY OF THE EARTH muassam COLTO

things and many of the fixed things earth, you certainly should ask your
on it would be thrown off into space. father or mother to get you one. It is
They would not travel very far, perhaps, very nice to have a big one, as large as
because they soon would be stopped by a giant snowball , but it is quite easy to
the air, just as the air helps to stop a get cheap little ones, no bigger than
ball when you throw it . But we may be an orange, and it is wonderful how
quite sure that , if the earth suddenly much you can learn from one of these
stopped moving , all men and women with very little trouble . Now, if you
and children and animals would be have such a globe, you can easily learn
killed , all the water would be splashed from it som ething about the first kind
out of the sea, all the fishes would die,of movement of the earth .
and every city und THE MEANING OF DAY AND NIGHT There are , at
building would be least, three different
destroyed. That is ways in which the
not likely to happen . earth is moving, and
If you cannot feel we must look at
that the thing you them all . The one
are travelling on is we shall begin with
moving, there is explains why the
only one way of sun seems to rise
finding out that it every morning in
is moving, and that the east , and to set
is by looking at every evening in
things outside , and the west. Take your
seeing what they little globe - or, if
seem to do . Now , you have not a
clever men have globe, an india
been doing this for rubber ball or an
ages and ages, and orange will do — and
there seemed to be hold it in your hand
no doubt at all opposite a lighted
about what they candle in a room
saw . As we have where everything
already seen, when else is dark . The
we look up at the side of the ball
sky we find the sun , next to the candle
for instance , seem will be lit up, and
ing to travel once the side away from
right round the the candle will be
earth every day . dark . Put a spot
But just as a little if we could look down upon the earth as if we were of ink on the ball,
boy in a railway looking down on a spinning top,this iswhat aman and call it your
train can make a wou ld look like if he were big enough for us to see house ,and hold the
him . Suppose he stands in England at the time we
mistake and can call sunrise. To the right of the picture we see him ball so that the
sometimes think entering the sunlight. As the earth spins round it spot of ink is
that the other train carries
over
him nearer the sun,until
we
at midday the sun opposite the
is moving, when it is of the sunlight, at thetimewecall sunset,and heis candle . Now turn
really his train that in darkness untilmorning brings him round into the the ball slowly
is moving, so all the light again. This is the meaning of day and night. round, and as you
men who thought they saw the sun do so the spot of ink will travel round
moving across the sky were wrong. until at last it loses the light of the
It was not the sun that was moving, candle. Then , as you go on turning,
but the earth . We still taſk of the the spot of ink will at last become lit
sun rising and setting, and no doubt up again .
men will go on doing so for ages , but The candle stands for the sun , and
the sun does not rise and set . It is when the spot of ink is just opposite
simply the earth that is twisting round the candle , that is midday. Then ,
like a top. If you have not got a globe , as the ball — or the earth - goes on
a little round model of the round turning, the spot of ink — or your
118
 -THE EARTH IS ALWAYS MOVINGævatumom
house - loses the candle -light; that is would just go on being day-time. Do
to say , the sun sets, and it is night. you think that all the people from the
Then the spot turns to the side where other side of the world, where it was
the ball is lit up, and if you were on that , night all the time, would jump into
spot you would say the sun had risen. their ships and come over to our side
Just think what it would be like if it so as to see the sun again ? I am sure
were always day, or if it were always they would, but I am also very sure
night. If the earth were not for ever that before long we should all be
spinning round and round like a top, very glad to get on to the dark
and if it were quite still , one half of it side of the earth, for a time, at
would always be in daylight, whilst any rate . If we did not, I think
the other would have an endless night. we should all go mad . The best
So long as you hold your ball , or globe, thing for us is that the earth should
or orange, still, one half of it must be go on spinning as it spins now , and

THE EARTH ON A WINTER'S NIGHT IN ENGLAND THE EARTH ON A SUMMER'S DAY IN ENGLAND

This shows us why it is light by day and dark at night ; it shows us also how the earth goes round the sun.
In the right-hand picture of the earth it is midday in England, and our country , which has a ring round it in
the picture so that you can find it , is in the full light of the sun. The other half of the world is in darkness,
and it is night there. The earth is always spinning, and as it spins round we pass out of the light, and our
side of the earth is then dark . That is night. So the earth spins round, in the light and out of it. It
also travels round the sun . It takes the earth half a year to travel half round the sun as seen here, and on
its jonrney right round the sun it spins round 365 times, making 365 days and 365 nights, which we call a year.
next the candle, and the other half that we should have the day to be
must be away from it. What do you awake in and the night for sleep.
think would happen if the earth I have just read a story of some bees
stopped moving round andround, and that worked hard all day, and then,
if it slowed down quietly like a top so just after they had all gone to rest ,
as not to jerk us all off ? Suppose it someone lit a brilliant electric light,
stopped with our part facing the sun , like those we see in the streets , and
we should say : “ The sun is standing brought a sham day back to them .
still in the heavens.” The lamplighters They started work again until the
would do their work at the ordinary electric light was put out, and then ,
time. People would say : “ It is a very soon after, the sun rose, and they
bright evening," and then they would ) started again. At the end of that day
say : . “ Whatever has happened ? ” they were all worn out , and died from
There would be no night at all. It overwork. But the natural and proper
UD OUT INITY
119
 -THE CHILD'S STORY OF THE EARTH
thing for bees, and for men , too, who spinning on a table, and as it spins it
live on a great spinning top, is to be
awake when the part of the top they
are o is facing the sun , and to be
asleep when it is turned the other way.
to its spinning. Now, on the whole,
But the spinning of the earth , which
gives us night and day, is by no one night is just about as dark as
means the earth's only movement. You another, and one day as bright
will have noticed , when spinning a
top , that sometimes it stands in one
place
as it spins, along sometimes,
it moves ,but
and spinsthere the table.
Whenthis happens the top is moving
in two ways at once. It is at the same
time spinning on itself, so to speak, and
also being moved as a whole from one
place to another. The earth is like the top .
All the time that the earth is spinning
upon itself it is also moving as a whole,
just as the top does when itmoves along
the table. We do not feel this, but
it is the most important movement of
the earth, even though its results are
not so startling as the day and night
which the spinning movement gives us.
GREAT FACT IN NATURE THAT
THE
There is no need now to ask what
holds the earth “ up." We know that
the earth is not supported by anything,
but flies through space without stop-
ping from one year's end to another.
Now, I have purposely said " from
one year's end to another,” because this
movement of the earth explains one
year's end and another. A year, you
know , is a real thing — not like a week.
You think aa week is a real thing because
Sunday always comes back every seven
days, and so do the other days. But
wemight just as well miss out Wednes -
day,, Thursday,, Friday, and Saturday,
andmake the week three days only. Long
ago men agreed to call seven days a
week, and we do so still . But a week
is an artificial thing ; a day is a natural
thing, and so is a year. We say a week
is an artificial thing because nothing in
Nature makes it ; but a day is a natural
thing because a great fact in Nature
makes it , that fact being the spinning
of the earth . A year is also a natural
thing because it is made by this second
kind of movement of the earth , like the
movement of the top along the table.
Let us think of a spinning ball new ,
instead of a spinning top. You know
very well that a ball can spin as it
goes along, because you can set it
RIZZ 120
will also run in one direction or another.
What direction does the earth move in,
then ? We have already seen that day
and night, which never fail us, are due
as
of all the
another — that is, if we think
days and nights we can remember.
THEEARTH HIS ALWAYS FLYING
ROUND THE SUN
This means that the earth does not get
much nearer to the sun orgo much further
from it. It stays at just about the same
distance, and yet it always goes moving
onwards, onwards, onwards. That
means that it must go round the sun . If
you tied a string from your ball to your
candlestick you could make the ball
fly round the candle, only it would not
be so easy to make the ball spin as it
flew . If you could make it spin, and if
you could make it spin on itself just
about 365 times whilst it was going
right round the candle once , that would
be like what the earth is doing. The
earth is always flying round the sun, and
if you made a mark, so to speak, at
some point , and then waited until the
earth came back to that point after
going round the sun once, the time the
earth took in its journey would be a
year, and during that journey round the
sun the earth would have spun round
on itself 365 times. Really, it is about
365 and a quarter times , and it is that
we may not forget that quarter that
every four years we have what we call
leap year,making the year 366 days long
instead of 28 .
N ruary 29 days ED
by giving Feb
A GREATEMISTAKE
HAVKE BEL IEVMILLIONS
THAT
OF
Now, this is very far from being all
that there is to say about the year , and
we shall come back to it. But at present,
you remember, we are just trying to see
the great facts which men had to dis
cover before they could get any further
with the story of the earth . These facts
are that the earth is not flat , but a ball .
It is not at rest, but never ceases
moving. It spins round on itself,
making day and night, and in doing so
it has led millions of men to think that
the sun goes round the earth every day.
Also , this spinning earth travels right
round the sun or a year.
The next story of the earth is on page 233.
 The Child's Book of
BIBLE STORIES
WHAT THIS STORY TELLS US
THERE is no book in the world which contains so many interesting stories

and strange occurrences, and as soon as we have finished one of these

exciting stories we find ourselves at the beginning of another. The Old
Testament, then , is a Book of Heroes. Eight names in this book stand
out from all the rest, their stories being so wonderful that the world can
never forget them . These names are Abraham , Joseph , Moses, David, Job,
Isaiah, Solomon, and Daniel. Before we come to our Bible Stories, in which
we shall meet these great figures again and again, we may read here
something of the characters of the greatest heroes and heroines of the Bible,
beginning with the eight great men whose names and lives stand out like
gold among all others. All our first stories are from the Old Testament.

HEROES OF THE OLD TESTAMENT

CONTINUED FROM PAGE 16
a tale which takes
us far back in the
world's history, when men's
riches consisted in the number of
their flocks and herds . Abraham
was a very rich man , for he had
many oxen and sheep and camels, and
a vast retinue of servants . He lived
a happy life in the sunshine and the
open air, and he liked to sit at his
tent door of an evening and look
across the plain at his many cattle
going to the river to drink , and at the
long line of his servants coming slowly
back from the wells with water-pots
upon their heads. He was happy, not
so much because he was rich, but
because he loved God, and trusted
Him in all things. When his faith was
put to a terrible test he did not shrink
from it. He was so sure that God's
way must be the right way that he
could not refuse to go upon it.
So Abraham stands in the history of
men as the great example of faith .
When we hear of any man who trusts
God with all his heart, we say of him :
" That man has the faith of an
Abraham .” Abraham is the quiet,
peaceful, God-fearing man who obeys
God in all things , without any com-
plaint and without even a question,
however terrible and hard may be the
work to which God calls him .
Joseph's story is the wonderful
romance of a young genius , the
favourite of his father and the envied
of his brothers . Joseph used to dream
dreams, and these
dreams made him
more hated by his
brothers than ever, for in these
visions he saw that one day he
would be raised high above his
brothers. So the favourite son
was taken by these brothers and sold
as a slave. He passed out of his own
land, and was carried to a foreign
country, and presently he became a
servant in the palace of the King. It
seemed now that his life might become
prosperous and happy, even though he
was living in an alien land, for in the
palace of a rich king men may rise to
wealth and power. But the wife of
Potiphar, one of the King's ministers ,
was not a good woman , and because
Joseph was honourable she hated him ,
and said words against him ,so that the
King was angry and cast Joseph into
prison . For many years Joseph lingered
in the prison, but it came to pass, as
we shall read when we hear the whole
story, that the great King lifted him
one day out of prison , and set him
over his whole house to rule it for the
happiness of the people. And Joseph
prospered the land. Hewore theKing's
ring upon his finger. He rode in the
King's chariot. And when he drove
forth the people cried : “ Bow the
knee ! ” And they bowed themselves
before him .
Then came the day when Joseph's
dreams proved true, for his brothers
came into this land during a great
famine to buy corn , and they bowed

‫ ܢ‬m
I2I
 LILILOTERILEGATO
-THE CHILD'S BOOK OF BIBLE STORIES
Defore Joseph. And Joseph made them bring
down their father — thefather who had loved him so
greatly, and he gave them the richest land in the
great King's country, and he loved his father and
he forgave all his brothers, and they lived in this
rich land happily and cheerfully for many years.
MOSES, PERHAPS THE WISEST RULER WHO EVER LIVED
Moses is a name which reminds us at once of
a wise ruler, perhaps the wisest ruler that ever
lived. He was born in Egypt at a time when the
King of Egypt was afflicting the Hebrews, and
just after the King had given orders that every
male Hebrew child should be killed. The mother
of Moses , who was a Hebrew woman, loved her
little son too well to have him cruelly slain. So
she made a cradle of bulrushes, and cov red it with
Abraham is the great example of faith. slime and pitch, and put the child therein, and laid
He was a quiet, peaceful, faithfulman, him in the flags by the river. Then , when the
who feared and obeyed God in allthings. King's daughter came down to bathe in the river,
the sister of the child stood near ; and when the
Princess found the baby and was pleased with it,
the sister drew close to her, and said : “ Shall I
go and call to thee a nurse of the Hebrew women ,
that she may nurse the child for thee ? ” This idea
pleased the Princess , and , though she knew it
not , the mother of the little child was brought
to nurse him .
So Moses, although he was a hated Hebrew ,
grew up in the King's palace, and he grew up
loving his own people, and all the luxury and
splendour of the King's palace could not make him
forget his people. Then, when the time came for
God to deliver the poor Hebrews out of the hands
of their oppressors, it was Moses who was chosen
to stand before the King and warn him of God's
Joseph, sold by his brothers as a slave, anger against his tyranny.
rose to power in Egypt, where he brought And it was Moses who presently led the poor
prosperity to the people, and made a Hebrews out of this cruel land towards a happy
home for his father,whom he dearly loved. land promised tothem by God ; and he gave
them laws from Heaven — the wisest laws in all
the world—and he ordered them to obey certain
customs which made them healthy and strong,and
kept them free from sickness and disease . Many
battles did they fight under Moses during their
long and difficult progress to the Promised Land,
so that we now look back upon Moses not only as
a most wise and careful ruler, but also as a great
and successful soldier. He was certainly one of the
greatest and wisest men that have ever lived .
DAVID, PERHAPS THE MOST LOVED OF ALL BIBLE HECOES
David is a name more dear to men than any
other name in the Old Testament. Perhaps he is
the most loved of all the men in the whole Bible.
For his is a story which shows us how splendidly
and bravely a man may fight against terrible
Moses was a great leader of men and temptations, andkeep on fighting in spite of many
one of thewisestrulers. He led thechil. dreadful falls. David is so completely a man, so
dren of Israel out of the kingdom of the
cruel Pharaoh into the Promised Land completely like all the rest of us, that we love
122
 -HEROES OF THE OLD TESTAMENT
him and read what he has to say to us with
affection and tenderness.
He was a great king. In those days kings not
only went at the head of their armies ; they also
loved to beautify their houses and indulge them
selves with all the wonderful things of Art. David
was a great captain, a great poet, and a great
singer. We think of him as a tall, kingly man ,
with bronzed face, sad, dark eyes, and long black
hair, which fell upon his shoulders. He loved
God, and it was one of his chief pleasures to make
songs concerning the power and greatness of the
wonderful God who had made the heavens and
the earth and all that is contained in them .
SOLOMON , THE WISE AND WONDERFUL SON OF DAVID
But every now and then his passionate nature
hurled him into sin. He did things unworthy of David was a great king and a lovable
himself, and for days and weeks he would be man ; a captain, a poet, and a singer.
plunged into the blackest misery, upbraiding him- This is Michael Angelo's portrait of him .
self for his folly and calling upon God to forgive
him . Through all his passionate life — and once
he committed a very grievous and cowardly sin
-he never abandoned his love for God ; never
became a really wicked man rejoicing in evil and
mocking good , but always struggled on towards

mount
God, hoping and praying that one day he would
gain the victory over his own body. Because he
never lost heart we admire him ; because he always
loved God we follow him ; and because he wanted
so hard to be good , even while he was wicked, we
understand him and we love him.
Solomon is not such a lovable man as his father,
David ; but in some ways his story is even more
interesting. For Solomon, without having any
great and beautiful love for God, discovered that
without God he could not bear to live.
He was a very rich man , a very powerful man , Solomon was a rich and powerful king ,
a very proud and ambitious man , and, in addition and a great and wonderful scholar. His
palaces and temples were so magnificent
to all this, he was a very great and wonderful that men camefrom alllands to see them .
scholar. His palace and his temple, and all the
great buildings he set up, were the wonders of the
world . People came out of all lands to see the
magnificence of Solomon. There had never been
such magnificence in the world before. One
powerful queen, who came to see what all the
world was talking about, exclaimed, when she saw
the wonderful glory of Solomon in his kingdom ,
that not half the truth had been told to her.
NOT ALL HIS GLORY COULD MAKE SOLOMON A HAPPY MAN
But in the midst of all this Solomon was unhappy.
He could not satisfy himself. Not all the gold and
ivory and precious stones in the world could bring
rest to his heart. We say now, when we hear of
any rich man devoting all his life to building a
beautiful house for himself, that he is another
foolish Solomon . For the great and powerful We sayman
patient of Job
who that he wasHethesuffered
ever lived. most
Solomon found thatthere was no lastingpleasure almost more than man canbear, but
in these things. He ate the richest meats and never lost faith in God and in God's love .
i
STELLEN UIT muumULELUT
123
 -THE CHILD'S BOOK OF BIBLE STORIES
drank the costliest wines ; he arrayed
himself in the grandest purple and set
upon his head a crown of the purest
gold ; but still he was only filled with
dissatisfaction and unrest.
Then , as he was a great scholar and
a poet, he thought he would find joy
in the making of books. So he spent
days and nights in composing lovely
poems and wise proverbs, and every-
body praised them, and he heard all the
world exclaiming at his wisdom and his
inspiration. But still he was unhappy,
And at last he saw , when he had ex-
hausted all that the world could give
him , that a life lived without God is
a life lived in vain , and he prostrated
himself before God , and became humble
like a little child . The wisdom of
Solomon was his discovery that nothing
can satisfy man's heart
but the love of God .
Daniel's story is one of
courage. There is a well
known hymn called
“ Dare to be a Daniel."
It means that however
much we may have to
suffer, we must always
have the courage to
stand up for, and , if
necessary, die for , what
we know to be righi.
Daniel's name is like a
trumpet-call to men who
have to suffer for doing
what is right. Daniel is a
man who never feared . Daniel's story is one of courage. He we, too , should be able to
Not all the cruelties and was one of the noblest and bravest of serve God.
tortures of wicked men Babylon
men , andwhen
became the greatestwent
Nebuchadnezzar
could turn him from
doing what he knew was his duty to God.
The name Daniel means “ God is my
Judge,” and never did man so truly
live up to the meaning of his name as
this brave and noble man who thought
only of God in all that he said and
did. He was born of a princely lineage,
and when he was quite a boy he was
carried to Babylon . Nebuchadnezzar,
the great King, kept Daniel at his side.
and Daniel was always warning him
against evil courses and interpreting
the dreams which came to the King as
warnings from God . When the King
went mad , Daniel acted as viceroy, ana
rebuked the people for idolatry, and
warned the greatest in the land of the
doom overhanging those who lived
124
their lives as if there were no God and
Judge over all the earth .
Then the people were angry, and
because he would not unsay what he
had said he was thrown into a den of
lions. But the lions did not kill him,
and he came out of the lion's den
without harm , and King Darius set
him over his kingdom. Finally he died
in exile. He might have been one of
the richest and strongest men in the
world, but because he feared God and
because God was his Judge he pre
ferred a life of suffering and torment,
and lived always in the midst of many
and great dangers . He could not forsake
truth. He could not deny God for all
the pomp and splendour of the earth.
Job is a name which you have pro
bably heard from your earliest years.
It stands in the world
for patience. He was a
y
wealth man who feared
God and lived a clean ,
simple , and patriarchal
life in the land of Uz .
He had everything he
could wish for : many
flocks and herds, a host
of friends , a loving and
affectionate family, and
the happiness of a clean
conscience. Many people
must have said of him :
“ Ah, it is easy for Job to
serve God ! If we had as
many flocks and herds
God has
mad. blessed Job plenteously ,
manin
and so it is only natural
that Job should praise God." But in
the midst of all his great health and
wealth , calamities of the most tragic
kind overcame the patriarch. He was
stripped of his flocks and herds, bereft
of his family, smitten with hideouspains
and diseases, and he lay for weeks and
months at death's door without any
really true friends to love and care for
him . His lot could not have been worse.
From health and riches, he was thrown
suddenly to poverty and disease.
But his faith in God lasted all through
his distress. God had blessed him, and
now God was trying him, he said ; God
surely would do only what was right,
and he would praise God even though
He slew him . It was a most splendid
 -HEROES OF THE OLD TESTAMENTXXXII
exhibition of patience under tribula-
tion. To bear sorrow as Job bore it, not to
grumble and complain when our bless-
ings and comforts are taken away from
us, is the lesson we learn from his life.
He came in the end to be richer and
more prosperous than he had ever been
before, and in that happy state he had
the great joy of knowing that he could
praise and love God as much and as
sincerely under affliction as he could
under the smile of the Heavenly
Father's blessing.
Isaiah , whose name means Salvation
of Jehovah, is the greatest prophet in
the Old Testament, and he is the chief
link between the Old World before the
Cross and the New World since Jesus
( 6
came . He is called the “ Evangelist
Prophet,” because while he denounced
the wickedness of the age
in which he lived, he also
prophesied the good news
of a better age when
Christ should come into
the world and teach
men to call Jehovah their
Heavenly Father.. We
know very little of Isaiah
except that he was a
married man, and that
his wife prophesied with
him . A prophet is one
who spends his life in
lonely communion with
God , praying often ,
meditating often, and
only speaking or writing Isaiah knew no fear. He denounced all that hath taken venison ,
when he hears in his soul evil, and called the world to prepare for and brought it me, and I
the word of Almighty the coming of the Perfect Man - Jesus. have eaten of all before
God . This was how Isaiah lived . No
prophet ever saw the future more clearly
than Isaiah, and no prophet ever
expressed in more beautiful language
the things that he saw.
Isaiah is certainly one of the greatest
heroes of the Old Testament, not so
much for what he did , though he must
have been a fearless man, but rather
because he has written for us some
of the most lovely things in the
literature of all the world, and chiefly
because he foresaw the coming of the
Perfect Man - Jesus. I think, when you
are older, that more than all the other
heroes of the Old Testament , more even
than the great human-hearted David,
you will love and reverence and
cherish the name of Isaiah, the sweet
TOOTULOTUELDOO
125
singer of the Salvation of God. Now,
although these are the names which
stand out most clearly from the
pages of the Old Testament, there
are others — many others—almost as
splendid. Weshall find, when we come
to read the Bible for ourselves, that
there are heroes on almost every page .
We shall read , for instance, of Noah ,
who built a mighty Ark, and when the
floods came upon the earth went into
the Ark with his family and two of
every living thing, and floated upon
the face of the waters until the storm
had abated , the waters were assuaged ,
and once more the sun shone upon
green fields and happy woodlands.
We shall read , too, of those famous
brothers Esau and Jacob, the twin sons
of a venerable patriarch named Isaac.
Jacob was the favourite
of his mother, Rebekah,
and she contrived that
he should receive the
chief blessing of Isaac,
his father, instead of
Esau, the eldest son .
When Esau came in to
his father and asked for
his blessing, the old blind
man said : “ Who art
thou ? ” And he said :
“ I am thy son , thy
>)
first -born , Esau .” Then
Isaac trembled very ex
ceedingly , and said :
“ Who ? Where is he
thou camest, and have blessed him ?
Yea , and he shall be blessed .” And
when Esau heard the words of his
father, he cried with a great and ex
ceeding bitter cry, and said : “" Bless
me, even me also , O my father.”
But Isaac had given the chief blessing
to Jacob, and he could not take it away.
Nevertheless, he gave a blessing unto
Esau also, and when Esau arose and went
out from his father he hated Jacob his
brother, and determined to kill him .
But, as we shall read when we come to
their story, the two brothers became
friends, and Jacob, after a life of long
wandering and many adventures, de
veloped into a good man , and God called
him Israel and made him the father
of the great Hebrew people.
 THE CHILD'S BOOK OF BIBLE STORIES
, Then we shall read of Samuel, the
noble and inspiring figure on whom the
Jews look as one of the great heroes of
their history.
NE OF THE GREATEST OF HEROES,
ONSAMUEL, WHO MADE A NATION GOOD
He was apure and sacred man who
found the Hebrews living in dreadful
sinand lawlessness, andby his quiet “ I have not troubled Israel ; but thou,
wisdom, his firmness, and his obedience
to God lifted them up and made them
better and kinder people. To make a
whole nation good is a work that only the
greatest of heroes can achieve, and as
we read what Samuel did we are filled
with admiration for his wisdom and
his strength.
It was Samuel who gave the Jews God, and slew all the prophets ofthe
their first king . This king,
is a very great figure in the Bible .
He was a handsome, noble-looking young stands for all time as the hero of great
a giant in height, and very
man , alniost
gracious in his manner. He listened to
wise old Samuel at first, and ruled the
people justly.
But as he grew older he would listen
to no one but himself. He became dark
of brow and was plunged often into
moods of the blackest despair. He gave
way to fits of the fiercest anger. He
became haughty, arrogant, and vain .
Everybody was afraid of him .
the beautiful shepherd -boy named
David , whose music lulled the King's
melancholy ,becamehateful to themoody Samson . But, like many other heroes
monarch, and he sought to slay him .
HE SAD LIFE OF KING SAUL AND THE
THEWILD, STRANGE FIGURE OF ELIJAH
King Saul abandoned God ; he drove
faithful old Samuel from him — Samuel
never ceased to love the King, in
spite of his wickedness and cruelty
—and finally, for disobeying God's
word , he was wounded in battle, and,
falling upon his own sword rather than
be taken a prisoner, he perished miser-
ably, he and his son Jonathan.
Then there is the wild, strange figure that I may feel the pillars whereupon
of Elijah, who seems to us , when we
read about him , like a whirlwind sent
to rouse the whole world from wicked-
ness. He stood up before King Ahab
and boldly rebuked him for his ungodly back to him , and he bowed himself with
(6
ways. He prophesied famine.
Lord God of Israel liveth ,” he ex-
claimed, “ before whom I stand, there
shall not be dew nor rain these years
but according to my word." And while
WIZI ULIT . rt*UURER DU
there was famine Elijah was fed by
ravens ; and when the brook dried up
by which he was living he went to a
widow-woman, whose meal never wasted
while she fed him , and whose son he
raised up for her from a state of death.
Then Ahab, the King , sent for him,
and said unto him : Art thou he that
troubleth Israel ? " And he answered :
and thy father's house, in that ye have
forsaken the commandments of the
Lord .” Then he gave a proof to Ahab
that the god the King worshipped was
no god, mocking the prophets of that
false god ; and afterwards he proved
that the true God is indeed Very
false god.
Saul, Then, of course, we shall read with
delight the story of Samson, whose name
bodily strength. When we hear of any
very strong man, we say : “ He is another
Samson,” because everybody reads the
Bible, and everybody knows of the
strong man who was called Samson .
Samson had tremendous strength, so
that he could rend lions, and pluck up
the gates of cities, and slay armies
with his own right arm.
Even SAMSON THEMAN WITH THE
STRENGTH OF
There is no hero among the Greeks
so wonderful as the great Hebrew
of old time, he surrendered his strength
to easy living, and he allowed a wicked
woman to know that if his hair were cut
off his strength would go ; and she cut
off his hair in his sleep, and his enemies
caught him and put out his eyes. After
this he was taken out of prison and led
about by a little lad, and the people
mocked the strong man who had become
so weak . But at great feast given by
the lords of these Philistines, he said to
the little lad at his side : “ Suffer me
the house standeth, that I may lean
upon them .” And he leaned upon the
pillars, and said : “ Let me die with
the Philistines.” And his strength came
As the all his might, and the house fell upon
the lords and upon all the people that
were therein . So Samson died , killing
many of his enemies.
The next Bible stories begin on page 243.
125 LIITTYMIOTY
1
 The Child's Book of
BiA Its Own Life

WHAT THIS STORY TELLS US

Weknowthat
be alive life issomethingmorethanmove
liveliness,
andthata thing may
find
out how life began . Once upon a time there was no life on the earth, which
was too hot for anything to live upon it. But as the world cooled, life
began in the coolest part of it — that is, in the sea , and the first living
thing, perhaps, was the seaweed. We are quite sure, at any rate, that
the first living things were plants, because plants are the only things that
know how to obtain food from air and water, Every living thing must
have one thing to live upon - a kind of gas called oxygen, and plants feed
on the oxygen, which they take in by breathing. Then the animals, and we
ourselves, live upon the plants, and without plants not one of us could live.
No man has ever been able to draw life straight from the air as the plants can
do. We read here of the wonderful way in which plants breathe and live.

HOW LIFE BEGAN ON THE EARTH

WEE out
want to find
what it is CONTINUED FROM PAGE 20
that makes us call
some things living
and others not living ; and we
have agreed that our best plan
is to look at the simplest kinds
of living things, which are plants ,
and to learn from them . Another
reason why we should do this is that
in the story of life plants came first,
and so we are beginning at the
beginning.
All wise men are sure that there
was a time when there was no life at
all upon the earth - no animals , not
even any plants, whether on the dry
land or in the sea. Indeed, there
could not then be any life, because
the things that life needs were not to
be found . Many wonderful things
happen in a fire, but there is never
any life in fire — it is too hot . And
the dry land of the earth was once
too hot for any life to be on it , just
as a hot cinder is. As for the sea , it
was alsoso hot as to be nearly boiling, you had looked throughout the whole
and no life can exist in boiling water.
A little while before, the water that
now makes the sea was so hot that it
actually hung in the air in the form
of what is called water vapour , and
only when the hot earth became a
little cooler did most of the water in
the air turn liquid and fall in a great
shower of the first rain that ever was
into the low -lying parts of the earth's
surface — the parts that
we now call the bed
of the sea.
Well, in all the sea,
and in all the air, and on all
the dry land , there was nothing
that did what a plant çan do
nothing alive. Then , at last, as
men think, when the water far down
in the sea became cool enough - cooler,
of course , than the surface water upon
which the hot sun shone all day
the first living things, the smallest
and simplest kinds of plants, came
to be . We need not ask ourselves
exactly what those first plants were
like, because all kinds of plants are
really the same, and so it will do just
as well if we take some kind of plant
that we all know, and look at it.
Grass will do very well , only we must
think of it as living in water, like
seaweed .
Now, grass , like all living things ,
plants and animals too, breathes and
feeds, and grows — and dies. Wherever
earth before the time we are speaking
of, you would have found nothing
that did these things - nothing alive.
But when we find something that
breathes, as you are breathing at this
minute, and as I am breathing, and
as every blade of grass on earth,
every flower and fly and fish is breath
ing—then we know that it is alive.
If it breathes it must feed ; this feeding

E.
127
 -THE CHILD'S BOOK OF ITS OWN LIFE .
makes it grow when it is young ; and
at last it must die . These, then, when
we find them , are the proofs of life .
And now let us look more closely at
the life of the plant .
WHAT WOULD HAPPEN IF ALL THE
PLANTS IN THE WORLD WERE KILLED
Of course, no plant , no tree or flower,
can ever be so interesting, in itself, as
an animal . Even a humble animal like
the goldfish , which you may keep in a
bowl of water in the drawing-room , or
even a mere fly, has something about
it that seems to make it more wonderful
than the most splendid tree. It is all
very well, for instance, to say that a
cabbage is alive, but how very dull and
stupid and half awake is that sort of
vegetable life, compared with the animal
life of even a lazy caterpillar that
crawls over that leaf, and especially
compared with a butterfly !
Now, I quite agree that animals show
life in its most striking way, and
that there is a great gap between the
stupid, silent, rooted cabbage and the
lark singing and soaring in the sky Now, all animals are really vegetarians.
above it. And yet vegetable life was
the first life , which had to exist before
any animal life could be at all ; and
even to-day all the animal life in the
world, including the life of our own
bodies, entirely depends upon vegetable
life. If all the plants in the world
were killed, in a few short days every
animal, every fish in the sea , and
every man , woman, and child upon the
earth would die also .
If animals can fly and jump and sing
as plants cannot, yet plants can do
wonderful things which animals cannot,
things , indeed, which make it possible
for animals to do all that they can do.
MAN CAN DO WHAT A BLADE
N° OF GRASS CAN DO
The life of the plant is so wonderful
in what it does that even to-day,
after hundreds of years of thinking
and studying and adding new knowledge
to old knowledge, men cannot do, even
with wonderful machinery and electri-
city and all their discoveries, the things
which the smallest blade of grass does
all the day without " trying,' without
thinking about it, or making any fuss
at all ! Very likely men may some day
learn how to do the things that the
plant now does for us and for all
animals; and perhaps, after a long time,
128
men may become so clever that, with
great trouble and much preparation,
and great noise and planning and
expense, they may be able to do so
well what plants now do for us that it
might be possible to do without plants
altogether ; but I really do not think
that that time will ever come . Even
if, after thousands of years, we learnt
to do what plants can do , we could
never do it so easily and cheaply and
quickly and well as they do. We can
never beat perfection, and the way of
the plants is perfect.
Now, what is it that plants do so
well , and animals cannot do at all,
but yet cannot do without ? Animals
breathe and grow and feed just as well
as plants, and sometimes even more
quickly ; but the great difference is
that plants can feed on anything, so
to speak, whilst animals can only feed
on what plants have made for them .
You know , perhaps, what a vegetarian
is - someone who eats vegetables or
plants, but not the flesh of animals.
Even if we eat beef, the ox had to
eat grass. It is from grass that the ox
made the beef we eat , and if there were
no grass , where would beef come from ?
THEIS MARVELLOUS THING ABOUT PLANTS
THAT THEY EAT ALMOST ANYTHING
Now, we see how important this is
if we remember that every living
thing must eat or die. When we say
“ eat,” you think of putting something
into your mouth and biting it ; but
many living things have no mouths,
and still they eat. If we say they feed,
that will be better. That is one of
the great differences between what is
living and what is not living. If a
fly, or a man , or a blade of grass, gets
no food it will die ; but a stone will
remain just the same for hundreds of
years without any need of food. The
stone is not alive . That shows us how
important is the great food question .
And the marvellous thing about plants
is that they feed on almost anything, on
things that are not alive, and never
have been alive, whilst animals can only
feed on them . Both the animal and
the plant may be starved, and then
both will die ; but the animal having
air and water and lifeless earth will
die of starvation, whilst for the plant
these lifeless things, with which the
 --HOW LIFE BEGAN ON THE EARTHccaramanca.
animal can do nothing , are a rich and
plentiful feast.
We see, then , why we can be sure
that the first kinds of living things were
plants . No kind of animal could have
been first, because there is no kind of
animal that can feed itself without the
help of the plant. When life first
appeared on the earth , there was
nothing for it to feed upon but lifeless
things , like air and salt and water ; and
the only kind of living creature that
can live on such things is the plant .
PLANTS , LIVE. NOW EXACTLY ASTHEY
LIVED MILLIONS OF YEARS AGO
Now, what plants did at first they
do still. This is very interesting if we
think what a great difference there is
between those first simple plants, with
their short lives and tiny bodies, and
the great tree of
to -day. Yet these
trees , differentin so
many ways, living
for hundreds of
years, and some
times so large that
you could drive
four horses abreast
through the trunk
of one of them ,
feed in just the
same way as the
first plants that
were formed at the
bottom of the sea
ages ago. the
because just Life began in the sea,and nearly the first living thing, And this is what
It islittle
perhaps, was the seaweed such as we find on the beach. we find : If we dig
plants of long ago
and even the biggest trees of to-day do
their feeding and growing and breathing
in the same way that we group them
together , calling them all plants, and
giving the name of vegetable life to that
which they all show .
Now let us see the way in which
plants, have become more wonderful
since the beginning, and then , after
we have seen what the story of plant
life has been , we can look more closely
at the way in which it serves us .
If we dig down very deeply into the
earth we find ourselves passing through
the first layer to another layer of a
different kind , and then to another and
another, and so on . We know that
these different layers, lying below the
one that we live on , were once at the
surface, or the “ top ," and then have
KunctCUT OUR OTURUT
129
been covered up ; and so as we dig
down, and find remains of different
kinds of animals and plants, and proof
that they once lived in one layer or
another, we can tell something as to
what the story of life has been on the
earth . This is most important and
interesting SO far as the story of
animal life is concerned , and men have
been studying it carefully for many
years . We shall have to talk about it
later. It is only a very few years ,
however, since men began to under
stand the history of plant life as it is
shown in the record of the rocks. Of
course , you can guess a good reason
why it is so much more difficult to find
out what the plants of long ago were
like than to tell the story of animals
of long ago. Nearly all animals have
bones, which are
hard things, and
may last for ages,
or at any rate leave
marks that last for
ages . It is not so
easy for a plant
to be preserved,
because most of it
is soft , and the
oldest plants were
altogether soft .
However, we have
learned a great deal
about the history of
plants quite lately.
down far enough ,
we come to layers of the crust , or shell,
of the earth that have no signs of
life of any kind, whether animal or
vegetable . Above these layers we begin
to find the first records of the story of
life-records of vegetable life and of
animal life .
THE VERY FIRSTH THINGS THAT LIVED
You can guess, perhaps, what kind of
plants those first ones were . There
were no trees or flowers, but there
were plants rather like seaweed, and
also simple plants of a very humble
kind that were close relatives of
simple plants of to-day, like the
mushroom and the toadstool . Those
men who know most about this matter
are also sure that near the very begin
ning of life there were to be found the
ITTYYTUTETT
 THE CHILD'S BOOK OF ITS OWN LIFE-.
kinds of plants which we now call
microbes , some of which are apt to
enter our bodies now and make us ill .
Then, again — and this is very interest-
ing - we have sufficient proof to make
sure that, at the very beginning, or at any
rate as soon as there was any animal
life at all , there were green plants—the
simplest kind of green plants. Now, it
is easy to tell you why this is so impor-
tant . It is the green stuff in the plant ,
as we shall see in a very short time,
that makes it able to feed upon the
air, as animals cannot do ; and there-
fore, so soon as we find any traces of
animals, we should expect also to find
traces of green plants, for we are
assured that , without green plants ,
there would have been no animals at all .
HAVE NOW THAT GREW LONG AGO
THEOLANTFERNS
So, when we do find traces of green
plants as soon as we should expect to
find them — that is to say, at least as soon
as the first animals — we are well pleased .
As long as we could not find plants so
soon as that, we were puzzled to under-
stand how animals could live at all .
Then , higher up, later in history, and
nearer our own days, we find evidence
that plant life was becoming richer, and
the bodies of the plants becoming
bigger and more powerful. This stage
is the stage of the ferns, and in those
days everything seems to have been
just exactly right for the life of ferns,
which flourished richly for a long , long
time. They became very large , too
giant ferns, such as we cannot see
nowadays — and the age through which
they lived must have been a very long
one . The remains of these are now
changed into coal, and very useful we
find them to-day all over the world .
TIME WHEN THE FLOWERS
THECAME INTO THE WORLD
But all this time there is no sign at
all of what are called the higher
plants ; there were no trees , no flowers,
or, to use a general sort of word ,
there were no flowering plants. Perhaps
you think that flowering plant is a
funny word to apply to a tree, because,
though you know many kinds of trees
that bear flowers, perhaps you think
you know many other kinds that do
not ; but, as a matter of fact , all trees
bear flowers, without a single exception ,
and all trees are just the largest and
130
most wonderful kinds of flowering
plants. It was not until long ages after
the time of the ferns that the flowering
plants appeared.
When this new kind of vegetable
life appeared, it soon made room for
itself. Many of the kinds of plants
that had a good time of it before
died out, either altogether or very
nearly. The flowering plants were
cleverer than any of the older kinds ;
they were fitter to live in the world
that they found around them, and so
they succeeded . Just as animals with
backbones are the masters of the
animal kingdom, so the plants that
bear flowers are the masters of the
vegetable kingdom . They have not
entirely destroyed all the older kinds.
We can still find living plants of lower
kinds, which are really not very different
from many of the plants found deep
down in the earth, and which lived at
a time when there were no flowering
plants at all. But, still, the story of
the plants is a story that leads steadily
up from very small beginnings to the
flowering plants, including all the mighty
trees, and nearly all the other kinds of
plants are, so to speak, just allowed to
go on living ; the flowering plants are
the masters.
E PLANTS LEARN NOTHING NEW, BUT
THE
LEARN TO DO OLD THINGS BETTER
But with all these changes and through
all this long history, certain great
powers possessed by the earliest plants,
and certain things in the way they are
made , have gone on , and the only
difference has been that, age after age,
plants have learnt to make more and
more of these powers ; so that, if the
great trees have beaten the ferns and
mosses, it is only because they have
learnt to do in a better way what the
mosses and the ferns have long been
doing not quite so well.
As we shall see , this is not the case
with animals. During the ages they
have learnt to do new things, and have
made fresh powers for themselves, some
of them so wonderful that we can
scarcely guess how they came ; but the
vegetable world has merely learnt how to
do better the things it has been doing
from the first. So far as their long history
is concerned , this is the chief difference
between animals and plants.
The next part of this is on page 247.
MOLTEXT TYY
 The Child's Book of
NATURE
WHAT THIS STORY TELLS , US
"HERE is an animal friend of every man in every land. Many animals are man's
THI enemies, and in some parts of the world men live in great danger from the
lion, the tiger, the wolf, and other wild beasts . Once upon a time the animals
lived in the world alone : there were no men and women and children at
all. Then came man , and by his wonderful mind man conquered the animal
world . With his hands man has made weapons with which he has been able
to tame wild animals, and all over the world to - day are animals which help
man in his work . This part of our animal book tells us the story of the most
useful of these animal workers - horses, oxen, zebras, donkeys, mules, buffaloes,
elephants, reindeer, camels, yaks, and llamas, and gives us pictures of all these.

ANIMALS THAT ZEBRA MULE

SERVE MAN
ELEPHANT CAMEL , YAK ,
HORSE AND LLAMA
OX DONKEY BUFFALO REINDEER

A LON G , long time and llamas, and the

ago, nearly four CONTINUED FROM PAGE 3 ? yak and the reindeer
hundred years now, have to do the work
a great soldier named Cortes of the trains and motor -cars.
sailed from his home in Spain Camels are the only animals
and conquered a country called that can travel in the great
Mexico. The people there sandy deserts ; strong, hardy
were in some things very clever dogs are the only creatures
indeed. They had made pathways which travellers in the Arctic regiɔns
through the water, they had built have to draw their sledges . Long,
fine houses and temples of stone. long ago the people of India learned
how to tame the buffalo, to make it
They were skilful in making beauti-
ful ornaments of gold. But these draw the plough and carts with heavy
wonderful people had never seen a loads, and to carry a rider upon its
horse or a donkey ! back . From India tame buffaloes
Wherever they travelled on land were taken to Egypt and to Europe.
they had to go onfoot. They had no To-day it does most of the work in
carriages to drive in, no horses to ride India and Egypt, as the horse does in
on, and trains had never been in our own land .
t
vented . They though horses the most In its wild state the buffalo is
wonderful animals in the world . one of the most savage of animals .
What a strange place England would If hurt it will attack a man or a lion ..
be without our splendid friends the Even the tiger is then afraid of it.
horses, donkeys, and mules ! For The wild buffalo is much stronger
hundreds and hundreds of years they than the tame one ; but the tame
have been doing work which man alone buffalo is stronger than the ox, and
could never have done. Long before can do more work, and keep work
trains and motor-cars were dreamed ing longer . It is very gentle and
of, these good , patient, powerful kind , but if it be badly treated,
animals had been carrying stone for then it becomes as fierce as the wild
buildings, iron and steel formachinery, ones.. The buffalo has a hump
coal for the fires and the furnaces. upon its shoulders, and must not le
England could never have become so mistaken for a bison . The bison
great a country had it not been for the lives in North America. We shall
s. hear of that later on . The bison is
help of animal
There are still places in the world wild , just as the Cape buffalo is wild.
where men have to manage without Those of which we are now reading
trains and motor-cars. In those places are the tame ones, and among the best
horses and mules, elephants and camels of men's animal friends.

131
 THE CHILD'S BOOK OF NATURES
men and women , roaming
about the world , came to live
here . It was a very different
sort of horse from that which
now looks so handsome in a
carriage. It was of a dingy
colour. It had a short , stiff
mane, and a thin tail very
much like a donkey's.
Men were savages in those
days, and not a great deal
better than the cleverest of the
monkeys, though they had sense
enough to make friends with
UNT

the dog, and get it to help in

hunting. They used to hunt
the horse for food . Then they
began to tame it and make it
carry them and their goods on
its back. It was a long, long
This is a zebra, which belongs to the same family of animals as time before they had carts.
the horse and the ass. Once there was so difference between There were no roads worth
them, but their habits of life have brought about a great change. speaking of until the Romans
Nearly all the animals which work came here and made them . Little by
in this way for man have either hard , little the horse began to grow nicer
tough hoofs , or feet fitted with broad , looking, as he was well cared for. But
flat nails. This makes it possible for the English horse did not become the
them to bear the strain of heavy loads beautiful , swift creature it now is until
without hurting their feet. În the about three hundred years ago, when
far-away days horses had five toes, just some splendid horses from the Arabs ,
as we have. Even now baby horses are the finest horses in the world, were
sometimes born with several toes. Now, brought into this country. Nowadays
however, they have usually a hard hoof, we have several sorts of horses . There
and on this men fix a shoe of iron to is the great big dray- horse , which can
prevent the hoof from being chipped or draw heavy loads up steep hills. There
broken by the hard, stony roads. is the lighter horse, which trots along
Horses lived in England long before pulling a big load in a van. There is
the handsome, high -spirited
carriage horse . There is the
horse which can gallop fast and
far, jumping hedges and ditches,
with a man on its back ; and
there is the swiftest of all , the
racehorse, a slim , fiery creature,
>

which is the greyhound of the

horse family. If you want to
know what our old horses were
like, look at the wild horses in
the Zoological Gardens, brought
from foreign parts. They are
very much like the horses in
this country thousands of years
ago.
Horses are very clever animals ,
and, if kindly treated, love their
masters and mistresses dearly.
If they do wrong they seem as
This little Shetland pony is only thirty -two inches high , about as
high as a table. He draws the lawn -mower in a beautiful sorry for it afterwards as a

garden and pulls alittle girlin a trap in the lanes of Kent. child should be. Some years
orr. TTT 172TTIILIZOI
132
 anuman

THE PATIENT ANIMALS THAT BEAR MAN'S BURDENS

The first of these pictures is of a mule ; the animals in the second are donkeys. In countries where men have to
travel up great mountains, they could not do without these patient animals to carry their burdens. They carry
heavy things on their backs, and walk along stony tracks up the mountain-sides where no horse could stand.

There are many kinds of horses in England : this is a big dray -horse such as we see in the streets. Horses
lived in England long before men and women , but the first horses were queer animals like the foreign horses
we see at the Zoo. We see in one of the pictures on page 31 what the horse was like thousands of years
ago, but great: care and good treatment have made the horse the handsome animal it is to-day.
DOOYEELTELLOU
133
K
 THE CHILD'S BOOK
ago a gentleman was riding home late
at night, when his horse jumped with
fright at seeing a heap of white stones
on the side of the road . That is what
is called “ shying.” It is natural for
the horse to shy and rear and plunge
away when it is startled . Ages ago,
Ages ago,
when the horse ran wild, other savage
animals and wild men used to hide in
the bushes and other places, and the
horse, by rearing and springing aside,
would perhaps manage to get away.
LITTLE PONY THAT PLAYS
A IN A GARDEN
Well , this horse, which threw its long heads, and thin , little tails, with
rider from the saddle, ran away. The
gentleman could not get up because
one of his legs was broken . He lay
where he had fallen, in great pain .
Presently he heard the sound of
galloping hoofs. It was his horse
coming back. It had raced home to its
stable, and had neighed loudly there
as if to tell of the accident, and now
had come back to his master . It stayed
there watching over him and neighing all without donkeys and mules. These
until, hours later, help came, brought
to the spot by the cries of the horse.
It is not always the biggest horse
which is the cleverest. A little girl
whose portrait is in this book has the
tiniest of tiny Shetland ponies. It is
smaller than a really big mastiff dog.
A big mastiff is thirty -five inches high
at the shoulder. This pony is only
thirty -two inches high at the shoulder. gets used to doing a thing in a certain
He has never been taught to do any
tricks, but he has plenty of his own .
Sometimes he is taken into a beautiful
garden to romp for an hour on the lawns.
When the gardener is stooping down at
his work, the pony will creep quietly
up on the lawn behind him , snatch off
his cap, and rush away, carrying it in
his mouth as a dog would carry a stick.
HORSE THAT WOULD OPEN THE
A STABLE DOOR
One horse used to be able to open
its stable door with its teeth , and walk
off to the fields . Other horses and
donkeys used to look out of their stables
and wish that they, too, could go. So
one day this horse, belonging to a great
American general named Jackson , hear-
ing its friends calling as it was going
off to the pasture, walked back to the
other stables , opened every door with
its mouth , and led all its friends off
to the meadow with it .
134
OF NATURE
The donkey is supposed to be a.
stupid creature. He is not really
stupid, but he has a firm will, and likes
to have his own way. We do not get
the best donkeys in this country . In
their wild state in the East they are
splendid creatures , fleet and strong and
proud, andnearly as bigas horses . The
donkeys of Spain are fine fellows, and
in Egypt the donkey is more precious
than the horse .
The donkey is the father of the mule,
the she-horse is its mother. The mule
and the donkey have long ears and
a plume of hair at the end. The donkey
can live on very poor food ; it is the
only animal in this country that will
eat thistles. The mule likes the same
sort of food that horses have. It lives
to an even greater agethan the donkey,
and is a wonderful hill-climber.
In the countries where men have to
travel much in the mountains, carrying
merchandise, they could not manage at
animals climb like goats. They carry
heavy burdens on their backs, and walk
along little stony tracks up the moun
tain-sides where no horse could stand.
WHEN , TRAMCARS IN LONDON WERE
DRAWN BY MULES
The donkey has a wonderful memory ,
so has the mule . Indeed, a mule's
memory is rather a nuisance, for if it
way, nothing will make it alter that
habit and do something else.
Some of us can remember when
tramcars in London used to be drawn
by mules. Two big mules , or three
small ones , were harnessed to a tramcar,
and away they would trot , with their
bells ringing, looking like great slim
donkeys with their woolly hair shorn off .
A whole book might be written about
the elephant. It is the biggest animal
in the world ; yet , with those it loves,
it is the tenderest and most faithful
of creatures . The biggest elephants
live in Africa , where cruel, senseless
men have slaughtered so many that
the Government has had to say that
they shall not do this shameful thing
any longer.
They do not tame elephants in Africa ;
India is the home of the tame elephant.
ost of em are born wild , but they
are trapped by skilful hunters, and
THE ONLY :ANIMAL THAT CAN CROSS THE DESERT

The camel is called the Ship of the Desert. The one at the top is the Bactrian camel, with two humps ; the
Arabian camels, at the bottom , have only one. The camel is the only animal that can carry men across the desert
sands. Its feet have great pads, which open out as it treads, pressing firmly on the sand. For thousands of years
the camel has been carrying men across the deserts. It can carry four men's weight on its back ; it carries food
and drink in its own body. When it drinks the camel fills many cells, knit together like honeycombs, with water,
enough for a week's journey across the burning sands. When thirsty the camel draws water from these cells, and
when hungry it draws strength from its hump, which becomes smaller on a long journey, until it almost disappears.
These photographs and many others in these pages are by Gambier Bolton, the celebrated
animal photographer ; and others are by Lewis Medland, C. Knight, and W. Reid,
UnoTOONIZIANO TULOTU
135
 XXXIX -THE
A CHILD'S BOOK OF NATUREzubia
soon become as tame as horses. They on its tusks. It picks up its driver
do an enormous amount of work . No with its trunk and puts him carefully
other animal is so strong, and perhaps on its back. Yet so wonderfully is
no other animal is quite so intelligent. this trunk made that the elephant
A child may guide an elephant, and can pick up a needle with it . Here
they are often used to carry children is a true story of the wonders of an
in India . elephant's trunk .
A native woman who has to goaway Hº'SOLDIER A PILL
AN ELEPHANT GAVE A SICK
from her house takes her little one and
places it down before the elephant. In the island of Ceylon , where there
The big creature is fastened with a rore are a great many elephants, there was
or chain to its leg so that it can move a young one which had been caught
about freely. And it takes the greatest and tamed when it was a little thing.
care of the child left in its charge. The The doctors at a hospital used to take
little one plays about in perfect safety . it round the wards with them in the
The animal does not tread upon it , and morning, when it would see the sick
no savage beast dare come near while soldiers take their medicines and pills.
the elephant is on guard. One morning a native soldier dropped
Once an elephant left to look after his pill on the floor. In an instant the
a child in this way walked round and elephant picked it up with its trunk,
round in a ring, keeping the little one popped the pill into the man's open
in the centre. When the child started mouth, and, with a great puff, blew it
to trot away, the elephant carefully down.
picked it up with its trunk, and placed The elephant in his wild state plucks
it back again in the centre of the ring, tender leaves from the trees with its
so that it could not run off into danger. trunk ; food growing about the roots
A TREEELEPHANT CAN PICK UP A of trees it digs up with his tusks . It
OR A NEEDLE takes up water with its trunk and
No girl could be more careful of a pours it down its throat. When the
baby than this, yet this animal nurse flies worry, it breaks off the branch of
was a giant weighing as much as a tree, and, making a hand of its trunk ,
several horses could pull. The biggest uses the branch like a fan .
elephant ever heard of seems to have The tusks of the elephant are the
measured as much as fourteen feet long ivory teeth which grow out and
in height . The biggest ever seen in downwards from the two sides of its
England was a famous elephant called mouth . Some of them weigh over two
Jumbo, which the parents of us will hundred pounds each. This ivory ,
remember to have seen at the Zoo. which is very precious, is made into
It was so tall that if one man had all sorts of beautiful carved work ,
stood upon the head of another, the statues, billiard balls, chessmen, and all
man on the top would only then have sorts of ornaments. Asservants of men,
just reached to the top of Jumbo's the elephants are worth far more than
head . He was eleven feet high , and their ivory, and people who love these
weighed as much as a hundred men . kind , clever creatures regret that they
The elephant eats hay and green food should be mercilessly slain.
and grain, and drinks a great quantity ELEPHANT
of water . It needs so much food to THAT FEW PEOPLE NOTICE

keep it alive and well that you could The tusk is the elephant's weapon of
not pay for its meals with less than defence as well as a help in getting food.
from £2 to £4 a week. The Indian Sometimes a lion or tiger will attack an
elephant has small ears ; the African elephant. The big animal is not often
elephant can always be recognised by afraid . If it can get one blow at its
its large ears. In other ways they are enemy with its tusks, the lion or
a good deal alike . With both the trunk tiger will not need a second blow to
is the most wonderful organ . It is like kill it , or, at any rate, to make it stop
a very long nose divided into two tubes, fighting
and crowded with muscles and nerves . The eye of the elephant is very
With its trunk the elephant can pick small, but the sight is excellent , while
up a good -sized tree, carrying it off its sense of smell is so keen that this
ODUERCO
UOXINZORILE VIITT .
136
 THE REINDEER, THE LLAMA , AND THE ELEPHANT

The reindeer is as precious tomen in cold lands as the Thisis a llama, an animal of South America. It
camel is in hot lands. It can draw a sledge loaded with can carry 112 pounds on its back and does not require
goods, and the people of Lapland could not do without it. much food. It has a long neck and holds its head high.

The elephant is the biggest and strongest animal in the world ; yet it will take the greatest care of a little
child . In India the children are guarded by elephants, and while the elephant is on guard no savage beast dare
come near. The elephant can pick up a fallen tree with its trunk ; yet the trunk is so wonderfully made that it
can also pick up a needle . Its ivory tusks are very precious ; the ivory is made into billiard balls, chessmen, and
ornaments. But the elephant is one ofthetruest friends of man , and it is cruel that it should be mercilessly slain,
LECTICUTZ LEO KULTUULT TOIT
137
 amza
CUTECAXEROTIC
-THE CHILD'S BOOK OF NATURE nad mamamme
in itself is as good as extra eyes. A. The feet of the camel are fitted with
blind elephant can make its way great , broad pads. As he treads, his
about simply by smelling and feeling big, soft feet spread out and press
its way with its trunk. firmly upon the sand, just as the
There is one curious thing about an webbed foot of the sea- bird presses
elephant which few people notice . Its firmly against the water.
hind leg is differently shaped fromthose WhXJTHE.CAMELS
of other animals. The hind leg of a BURNING SANDS CAN
IY
CROSS THE
horse or a dog bends backwards, so But one of the most wonderful things
that when the animal lies down it about the camel is the way he keeps
draws its hind legs up beneath its body. himself from thirst. The inside of the
Now, the elephant's hind legs are camel is fitted with honeycomb cells,
shaped like the legs of men ; they bend which hold a great deal of water.
forward, and when it lies down the When he does have a chance to drink ,
elephant stretches its back legs out the camel swallows as much water as
behind him. This is one of Nature's he can take. After that he can plod
wonderful provisions to help the bravely across the burning sands for
elephant. It is so heavy that if its five or six days without tasting water
legs were shaped like the legs of other again, carrying on his back a weight
animals it would not be able to get up of 500 or 600 pounds, and eating
again when it lay down . nothing but the thorny, prickly food
He has a memory which never forgets growing here and there in the wilds.
a kindness ; nor does he forgive an un- That is the life lived by the camel
kindness, whether by a man or by which carries the loads. There are
another elephant . The story of the other camels not so heavy in build , called
elephant spurting water over the tailor dromedaries, upon which men ride.
who had pricked his trunk with a These run along at the rate of eight
needle is very likely true. But he or ten miles an hour, and can keep on
did not carry the water in the trunk. at that pace for a whole day and half
The elephant does not carry water like the night without taking rest. No
a camel. He uses his trunk to drink other animal could do that.
with, and when he is thirsty he lets The Arabian camel has one hump ;
down his trunk like a pipe and draws the Bactrian camel, which lives in
up the water. colder climates, has two humps . These
THE CAMEL IS CALLED THE humps are made up chiefly of fat , and
WHYSHIP OF THE DESERT
when the camels are on a long, hard
We all know why the camel is called journey the humps get less and less,
the Ship of the Desert. It is the only until at last they almost disappear.
animal that can cross the great sandy This is because in his hump the camel
wastes where no water is . A horse, carries nourishment , from which he
or any other animal, carrying a burden draws strength while he is at work.
uponthe
into its back,
loose, would
shiftingsinksand
so that
deeply
it THEY WONDEREUL STORY of the
CAMEL OF

would soon get tired. When the wind Ever since man can remember, camels
blows and great sand-storms rage, any have been tamed and used for the
other animal than the camel would be service of human beings, but there are
suffocated unless protected by its camels still wild in parts of Central
master . The camel has nostrils which Asia. They have aa curious history. It
he can close tightly, and so keepthe is believed that , ages and ages ago,
a great sand-storm swept over a
sand from getting into his lungs. But
most important of all is his power to smiling, fruitful country, where many
go without water. people lived. The storm buried all
For thousands of years the camel the cities, and all the people in them ,
has been serving man by carrying him and only the camels managed to live
through the desert, and in the course through it . The camels which are now
of time he has become so well fitted in that part of the world , wild and free,
to his life that , if he were allowed are supposed to be the descendants of
to go free, he would still make the the camels which escaped with their
desert his home. lives in those terrible days.
138
 ELLE UUEucanau OLX
ANIMALS THAT SERVE MAN
It would be hard to
say which is the most
precious animal in the
whole world. The man
who owns camels thinks
that the camel is ; the
man who owns reindeer
thinks the reindeer is.
Among the Laplanders
and other people who
live in the cold lands,
the reindeer is just what
the camel is to those who
live in hot, sandy lands.
It can carry men and
packages on its back nine
or ten miles an hour, all
day long. It can draw a This is a buffalo. Long ago thepeople of India learnedtotame the buffalo,
sledge loaded with goods, and in India and Egypt this animal does the work that our horses do.
The camel's hair makes brushes and surprised him with an animal such as
cloth. The hair of the reindeer makes no other people have. This is the
cloth ; its skin makes leather, and also llama. It is about three feet high at
the covering of tents and boats ; its the shoulder, but has a long neck and
sinews make cords ; its bones make looks like a camel without a hump.
many useful things. Its flesh is food The llama is strong, and can carry a
for its master ; its fat makes oil for his load of 112 pounds on its back. It
lamp and for him to drink. does not require much food, and is
Like the camel, it gives milk which very gentle and good -tempered with its
he can drink . Like the camel again, friends. But if it should be teased it
it grows strong on very little food . In does a horrid thing, it spits .
winter it has to depend on a sort of There is an animal for man in nearly
moss which grows beneath the snow. every land. In the cold lands which lie
The poor creature often has hard work thousands of feet high in Central Asia
to get a meal, being compelled to dig there is the friend of the people of Tibet.
down through the snow with its hoofs This is the yak. It is a sort of link
and horns and nose. A Laplander is between the sheep and the ox. It has
said to be rich if he has many reindeer. long, handsome horns, like aa Scotch ox,
Although Cortes surprised the people but short legs and long hair, which make
of South America with his horses, they it look like a sheep. With a load on its
back it can travel
twenty miles a day,
a great distance
when you think how
terrible the hills are .
When some Eng
lish soldiers went
from India to Tibet ,
all their things were
carried over the
snowy mountains by
yaks . The milk of
the yak is rich and
good, and some of
its hair makes ropes
and tents, while the
better part is used
for fine cloth .
This is a yak , a strong animal that can carry heavy burdens twenty miles a day.
English soldiers have had their baggage carried up high mountains by The next story of ani.
these animals. The yak gives milk , and its hair makes ropes and tents. mals is on page 275.
Umronu DTCOOL

139
 aammmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmanamantaramramanarannuarrannuaturmarammannaramunaamaraammmaaaa

THE LAST JOURNEY OF DAVID LIVINGSTONE

DrumOOT
UZTIZ
2002

David Livingstone, a poor factory boy in Scotland, went out to South Africa as a missionary and made his
home among savages and wild beasts. There he spent his life in teaching the people about the love of God, and
in exploring the country. He worked without end, and at last he became very ill. “ Build me a hut to die
in , " he said to his faithful servants. “ I am very cold ; put more grass on the hut. ” They built him a hut and left
him, and in the morning they found him kneeling, dead. This picture shows his servants carrying him home to die.
Στασιαττι τττΙΣΙΠΙΣπιταχτητα :
140
 The Child's Book of
SHAKE MIL
Miton
PEARE MEN & WOMEN

WHAT THIS STORY TELLS US

E began , on page 33, the story of the men who have helped to make the
28 WEworld known, and here we read more of the lives and travels of the great
discoverers. This story tells us of the great explorers who have made Africa known
to the world ; who have gone out to that great continent of wild country and
savage people, have faced great dangers, found great rivers, and made maps of
Africa which are so plain that to - day we know the country almost as well as our own.
We could never have this kind of knowledge of the countries of the world but for
the heroism of the brave men who give up their lives to make these countries known.

THE EXPLORERS OF AFRICA

HY do men call be sure whether that
WaxAfrica the Dark
CONTINUED FROM PAGE 40
really happened,
Continent ? It is not though we believe WEL
OL LIN
because the sun does it did. But men Got

not shine there . Nowhere does
the sun shine with more heat
and brightness than in Africa .
The reason why we call Africa
the Dark Continent is that for
hundreds and hundreds of years
CRO
thousands upon thousands of miles of
ELL
the land of Africa were unknown to
did not dare to go right into
the country. They lived up
in the North of Africa, and
they knew what the land about
them was like , but no more. If you
look at the map you will find the
River Nile running into the Mediter DAR
ranean Sea . By the sides of that WIN

men , because the great continent was
so difficult and dangerous to explore.
We read in the child's BOOK OF
COUNTRIES, beginning on page 63,
how railways are being laid down in
Africa , and how rapidly the country
is being opened up to-day, but even
FARA
river, in the valley through which it
ran , all the learned men of the Old
World lived . That was before Greece
and Rome had become powerful and
learned nations .
These learned men were Egyptians ,
who made slaves of the children of

yet travellers who pass beyond where Israel . It was into their land, the land
DAY

the railway runs have to travel
through great forests where there are
wild beasts, and insects as deadly as
the animals. They have to face fever
and plagues. They have to pass
through sandy deserts and through
landsflooded in winter and parched
in summer. All that is very terrible,
of Egypt, that Jesus was taken when
a child , so that Herod should not
have Him killed . They built great
cities and wonderful temples and
nionuments such as have never been
built since . They had good laws.
They had a way of writing on bricks
of clay, and, considering that all the
STO
RIVNES

but it is the only way in which men rest of the people in the world were
STEPHET

little better than savages, these Egyp

ING

have been able to make known to

the world what Africa is like . For
thousands of years men knew almost
nothing at all of Africa.
Hundreds of years before Jesus was
born, men in tiny ships went sailing
along parts of the coast of Africa.
Herodotus, a great writer of history,
who lived long, long ago, tells us of a
CLAD
STO
man who, more than 600 years before
NE Jesus lived, sailed right down one
tians were very wonderful people in
deed. Yet they dared not travel far up
theriver alongwhose banks they lived .
When the power of the Egyptians
died away, there came the civilisation
of the Phænician people. The Pheni
cians were brave travellers, especially
on the sea. They came to Britain
when the people here were only RUS
savages. But the Phænicians dared KIN

coast of Africa, round by what we not go far into the heart of Africa .
now call the Cape of Good Hope, Next the brave and skilful Greeks
and up the other side . We cannot ruled in Egypt. Later still the
RJULIUS CÆSAR HERBERT SPENCEA
141
 ZAXECORALEXXLECL VALD
-THE CHILD'S BOOK OF MEN AND WOMEN
Romans were the governors — they with savage animals . If that man
ruled all theworldwhich wasthen known. about whom Herodotus wrote really did
But still no more of Africa was known sail round the coasts of Africa, then
to them than had been 2,000 years passed before
known to the Egyptians. another man did it . The
They gave the name of man who next did it
Africa to a small place was Vasco da Gama, of
in the north of the con whom we read on page
tinent by the south 39. During those 2,000
shore of the Mediter years many people had
ranean , and they spoke gradually made their
of the rest of the con way in'and from the
tinent , which they had north. The Arabs had
never explored, as the come in great numbers,
land stretching away and vast tribes of savage,
towards the setting wandering men from
sun , and they did not Asia had followed them.
know where or how it But still no white man
ended . So the cleverest had been there. At last
people in the world Jamesin 1770,Bruce
and went
came from Scotland to Africa
to Abyssinia. There men began to cross the
lived for thousands of he found a savage people whowould have sea from Europe and
years in a land of which killedhim, butwereso amazed bythewon settle down on the coasts
they knew nothing , derfulthingshedid that they let him live. of Africa . Men from
except just that portion in which they Britain began to explore along the
made their homes. It was as strange coast. But nothing important was done
as it would have been if the Britons, in this way until 1770 , when a daring
then the Romans , and afterwards the traveller named James Bruce went
Saxons and travelling
the Danes and through a part
the Normans , of Africa
had all settled called Abys
down by the sinia.
banks of The people
the River of Abyssinia
Thames , and were then
had never ruled by a

dared to go king who was

farther into supposed to be
England to a descendant 1

see what the of Solomon ,

rest of the the great king
country was of whom we
like . read in the
The reason Bible . But
for this fear of they were
the people was savage, cruel
that the real people. They
Africa lay at would have
the other side killed Bruce
of the great if he had not
Sahara Desert , been a won
which no man The people of Abyssinia had never seen a gun until Bruce showed them
one, andwhen they saw him shoot through a table theythoughthe derful inan .
could cross , was amagician. The King made him master ofpart ofhis country,but First of all ha
because there Bruce spent his time in this ship exploring the River Nile andwriting a cured the ill
was no water book. People would not believe his book until long after his death. ness of people
or food for himself or his beasts ; while, in the King's palace, and that made the
if men landed upon the coasts lower King and Queen his friends. Thepeople
down , they found either more deserts themselves became his friends when
or mountains , or terrible forests filled they saw the strange things he could
TERTUTUMUTULOTTITUTE
142
 THE EXPLORERS OF AFRICA.com
do with a gun. They had never seen a be allowed to explore. He went through
gun before, and they thought Bruce many dangers to discover the source of
must be a wonderful hunter when they ariver which he believed to be the great
saw him shoot birds flying high up in Nile. He did discover the source of it ,
the air. When he pretended to shoot a but the river was not the real Nile. It
tallow candle through a table — which was the Blue Nile, which is the largest
he did to surprise them — they thought of the small rivers flowing into the great
he must be a magician. When they White Nile itself. When he wished to
saw him tame and ride savage horses, return , there were many dangers in his

EGYPT

‫لول‬
THE
CREAT DESERT
THAT NO
MAN COULD
CROSS

THE STORY OF AFRICA

This map shows the great
continent of Africa and
helps us to understand a
very wonderful thing about
it. At the top corner on
the right hand we see
Egypt, with its pyramids
and temples, and there,
thousands of years ago ,
people lived in great cities
on the banks of the River
Nile. Away beyond them
stretched the great desert
that no man could cross ,
and the great people of
Egypt knew nothing at all
of the vast country that
stretched beyond. All this
other part, where the trees
are in this map , was wild
country , and we read in this
story how men have ex
plored it and made it known .

theywondered stillmore, and gave him path. He could not leave by the way
the best horse in all the country, asking he had gone in, but had to pass through
him to have it always saddled, to drive strange lands, among wild people, who
in front of him wherever he went . would have killed him if they could.
Bruce did all sorts of strange things . But he got safely to the coast at
to please his savage friends, and the last, and reached England without an
King made him master of part of his accident. He wrote a great book
country . But all Bruce wanted was to describing his travels and adventures .
கைவகையான vozu VOLTOUULUULUU VOLUNDU
143
 THE CHILD'S BOOK OF MEN AND WOMEN-
Do you remember how the friends of
Marco Polo made fun of Polo's book ,
and would not believe the stories of his
travels to China and India ? Well, the
same thing happened when Bruce wrote
his book . People laughed at his stories .
They did not believe that there could be
such things and such people in the world
as he described. Forty years passed
away before people would believe him .
Then another traveller went to Abys-
sinia , and found that all that Bruce
had written was true. But Bruce was
by that time dead ; he never was
believed while he lived .
H °WAMUNGO PARK, A SCOTTISH DOCTOR , been a poor gardener, went out from
GAVE UP
Marco Polo's book made men want
to explore the parts of the world to
which he had been . Bruce's book
made them want to know more about
Africa . But to do what they wished
was dangerous, and they could do it
only very slowly.
Mungo Park was the next man to do
anything important. He was a young
Scottish doctor, but a long sea voyage
to distant parts made him desire to be
a traveller. His first adventure in
Africa brought him into trouble. Sav-
ages captured him , and kept him a
prisone . He escaped , but fell ill in the
wilds r
, and would have died had not a
kind native found him and carried him
back to the coast . He set off again
after a few years , with forty- five fol-
lowers. By the time he reached the
River Niger there were only seven
remaining with him . He wrote an
account of his travels and sent this
back to England, then continued his
journey in a canoe. The boat struck
on a hidden rock in a great river, and
while Park and his friends were trying
to get it right again , savages came up
and killed them all .
UGH CLAPPERTON , THE POOR BOY WHO
HºBECAME A COMMANDER IN THE NAVY
More and more men now began ex-
ploring. Hugh Clapperton, a poor boy
who rose to be a commander in the
Navy, went out to discover where the
Niger rises . He did not succeed in that,
but he made other discoveries, and the
British Government paid him to go out
again . Other men went with him , one
of them being Clapperton's servant, a
brave fellow named Richard Lander .
Clapperton and all the others, except
UUMU DODILLOILOLOU
144
καικικιακάτι
Lander, died on the journey. Lander
wrote down all that had happened, and
was able to get back to England to tell
of important discoveries which had been
made. His work was so satisfactory
that the Government sent him and his
brother out again . They gained more
knowledge of the country, but they paid
for it with their lives, being at last killed
by natives
Little by little we were getting to
know the land of Africa . Maps were
made, and all that was discovered was
printed in books , so that nothing might
be forgotten . Robert Moffatt, who had
England as a missionary. Settling in
Bechuanaland, in the midst of savages,
he converted the heathen and travelled
far . Moffat had a beautiful daughter,
and a young man named David Living
stone fell in love with her. Livingstone
had been a poor, hard-working boy in
a factory in Scotland . But he rose
early and worked late , and studied so
hard and well that he was able to be
come a missionary. He had made up
his mind to go to China , but a dreadful
war broke out there, so he went to
Africa instead , and there joined Moffatt
and married his daughter.
'HE BEGINNING OF DAVID LIVINGSTONE'S
THELIFE AS EXPLORER AND MISSIONARY
Livingstone wished to start a mission
of his own in the Transvaal , but as that
could not be he went to the north of
Moffatt's home, where no white man had
ever been before . On his way he dis
covered a great lake , called Lake Ngami,
and this made him determine to explore
the country from side to side. It took
him nearly four years to do this . He
explored from the lake right away to the
Atlantic Ocean on the west ; then ,
turning back , he explored from the east
of the lake until he came out on the
coast of the Indian Ocean , that ocean
into which Vasco da Gama sailed after
making his way round by the Cape of
Good Hope. Livingstone was often ill ,
and short of food and medicine, but he
never lost courage. Wherever he went
he preached the Gospel, and the natives
loved him . Some of them followed him
as his disciples to the end of his life .
He came to England for a short rest ,
and then went out again . His wife died
in Africa, but though this left lin sad
at heart and lonely, he carried on his
YAQOYUXUERUT ) Ant
 THE EXPLORERS OF AFRICA
work of exploring the country and made up another package and pre
preaching the Gospel to the people. He tended that the body was in it. This
traced the course of important rivers , they took back and buried. But the
and discovered great lakes, like seas, real body they hid in a bundle, as if it
in the middle of enormous forests ; and were merely a parcel of goods, and so got
he searched for parts it safely to Zanzibar.
of the country most From there it was
likely to suit white brought to England,
men . Again he came and buried in West
home to England , minster Abbey .
rested, and once more Before Livingstone
returned to make his died, his friends in
home among savages England had been very
and wild beasts, and anxious about him , not
suffer again from having heard of him
fevers . At last he could for a very long time ;
go no farther, but and another explorer
settled down, almost was sent out to find
starving , and almost the missionary. The
dead from illness, at a man who went to find
place called Ujiji. him was Henry Morton
There he was found by Stanley. As a boy he
a man who had been was so poor that he
sent after him with had to go to the work
food and clothes. Mungo Park was a young doctor who went house school in the
As soon as his health out to Africa from Scotland. He went up little village in Wales
was better, Living. theRiver Niger in a canoe. The boat struck where he was born. His
on a rock, and savages came up and killed
stone went on once
Mungo Park and all those who were with him. real name was Row
more with his work, lands , but he went
and never ceased until his last illness to America when a youth, and took the
came upon him . Then he had to rest name of Stanley, from an American
at Ilala . He was very ill . “ Build me gentleman who was a good friend to
a hut to die in , ” Livingstone said to his him . He travelled a great deal ,
men. “ I am very cold ; and always did his
put more grass on the work so well, and had
hut.” They built him such confidence, that
a hut and left him , and the owner of an
in the morning found American newspaper
him kneeling beside told him to take all
his bed , dead . The great the money he needed
missionary and tra and go to Africa to
veller had been called find Livingstone .
home to God while he So Stanley set out ,
knelt in prayer. His and on arriving at
loving servants knew Zanzibar he got to
that his friends would gether all the men he
wish to have him wanted , and set off
buried in England , so to where Livingstone
they set out to carry would be found if he
his body all the way were still living, or
to Zanzibar, hundreds where news would be
of miles away . The had of his death if he
savages through whose HughClapperton was apoor Scottish boy were not alive. Stanley
country they had to whowentto
a explore Africaanddiedwhile going arrived at Ujiji justin
pass were afraid of time to save the mis
the missionary now that he was dead, sionary's life. It was a wonderfulmeet
and thought that if the body passed ing. Stanley was so glad to find the man
that way it would bring evil upon whom he had travelled so far to seek
them . So Livingstone's followers that he would have liked to kiss him
FrontTTI UZUN
145
 -THE CHILD'S BOOK OF MEN AND WOMEN
There before his hut stood Livingstone,
pale and thin and ill , and very poorly
clad. Around him clustered crowds of
natives. Stanley could not show how
great was his joy. All he could say was:
“ Dr. Livingstone, I presume ? ” This
sounded so strange and prim a greeting
in that far - off forest, but Livingstone
could not help smiling. He raised his
cap and politely answered : “ Yes."
Then Stanley put on his hat and
Livingstone put on his cap. The two
men gazed at each other, then they
clasped hands in gladness , and Stanley
he traced the course of the River Congo
to the sea. Afterwards he went to
Africa again to rescue Emin Pasha, a
German traveller, lost with his men.
Many other famous men have helped
to make Africa known. Speke and
Grant risked grave perils to explore
the great lakes. Sir Samuel Baker
made further explorations and found
a lake, which he called Albert Nyanza.
Wherever Baker went his wife also went.
By this time the whole of Africa was
getting known , though not very
thoroughly. Great Britain had made the

141

When Livingstone was in Africa his friends heard nothing of him for a long time, and Henry Morton Stanley
was sent to find him . He arrived after a journey of great peril, and found Livingstone, pale, thin , and ill, standing
at the door of his hut. Stanley could not show how great was his joy ; he could only say : " Dr. Livingstone, I
presume ? " For days after that the two men talked, Livingstone telling Stanley of his adventures, and listening
eagerly to Stanley's news of the outer world . In the picture Livingstone is on the right, raising his cap.
said : " I thank God, doctor, that I have
9 land in the south, called Cape Colony,
been permitted to see you." And for her own, and from there long journeys
days after that the two men talked the to the north were frequently made.
hours away, Livingstone listening to People from Portugal and Germany
Stanley's news of the outer world , and and France and Belgium went to live
telling the story of his own adventures. along the coasts, and from these little
Stanley left food and clothes and colonies men went forth to discover more
medicine with the doctor, and then and more of the interior of the land .
returned to tell the wonderful story We are getting to know more of the
and make himself famous . Poor Living- Dark Continent, but we do not yet know
stone remained in the dark land to all . Africa is three times as big as
die. Afterwards Stanley went back to Europe, and in some parts of it men
Africa as an explorer. He marched can only travel a few miles in a day.
round the great Lake Tanganyika ; The next story of the explorers is on 293.
IT IULIER

146
 The Child's Story of
FAMOUS BOOKS

THE PLAYS OF SHAKESPEARE

E have already read the stories of four of Shakespeare's plays, and four
We ,
comedies and tragedies were founded on stories which he did not invent.
Some of the stories had been favourites on the Continent and in England
long before the great poet made use of them for his plays. They might have
been forgotten for ever if he had not retold them by means of the characters
he created, and in his own wonderfully beautiful language. He wrote both
tragedies and comedies, and he excelled all other dramatists the world has
known by being equally great both in tragedy and comedy. A tragedy is a
poetic play in which the characters suffer great sorrows, some of the chief
persons die, and the end is sadness. A comedy is a play in which all ends
happily. The first four plays we read have all been comedies. But we
are now going to read the stories of three tragedies, “ Othello , " “ Romeo
KS

and Juliet," and “ Hamlet,” and another comedy, “ Twelfth Night.”

OTHELLO, THE MOOR OF VENICE

Thecity of Venice, sa CONTINUED FROM PAGE 90
though now only
one of the many beauti
ful towns of Italy, was for
merly the scene of a great
republican government that sent
its ambassadors to the mighty
nations of the world and ruled
over many other towns as well as
Venice itself ; while its ships traded
to far countries, and its soldiers and
sailors won colonies in other lands . In
these great days a Moor, or dark-
skinned man from the North of
Africa, named Othello, was a brilliant
leader of the army of Venice. He
was a man of noble mind, despite his
black skin , and so able that he was
sent to be governor of the island of villainy ; while Cassio was frank and
Cyprus, which then belonged to Venice.
Now, in addition to all his triumphs
as a soldier, Othello had the fortune
to win the love of one of the most
beautiful women in Venice, whose name
was. Desdemona, the daughter of
Brabantio, a senator, or member of the
Government of Venice. It may seem
strange that a black man should be
loved by a fair lady who had refused
many richer suitors ; but she thought
more of his noble mind than of his
looks, and all her delight was to listen
to his thrilling tales of the battles in
which he had fought, of his hairbreadth
escapes , of strange adventures through
which he had passed by land and sea.
But her father,
Brabantio , did not
know of the things she
kept hidden in her heart,
as she knew he would never
approve of her wedding the
His anger was terrible
Moor.
when one night he was awakened
by two men, who told him that
Desdemona had left him and was now
married to Othello. One of these
men was Iago, who long had served
the Moor as one of his officers, but
who now hated him bitterly, since
Othello had chosen Cassio as his
lieutenant when lago thought he
should have been preferred. Iago was
cunning, spiteful, and capable of any
open , but easily led astray.
Brabantio appealed against Othello
to the Duke of Venice and the
senators, who at first were in his
favour. But Othello answered the
charge of stealing away Desdemona
in so manly a way that the duke and
others were soon won to his side ,
especially as Desdemona herself proved
that she loved the gallant Moor and
was proud to be his wife.
That very night the devotion of
Othello to the country he had served
so well was put once more to the test ,
as he was ordered off to defend
Cyprus, which was in danger of being
attacked by the Turks.

हि FELDOLMEEL
147
 -THE CHILD'S STORY
The great soldier at once sets out for
Cyprus, Desdemona being left in the care
of “ honest Iago ,” as Othello still thinks
him faithful , and Iago's wife, Emilia, is
asked to attend on Desdemona. Cassio
follows in another vessel; lago, with
Desdemona , setting sail in a third .
Cassio is the first to arrive, his vesse)
having lost Othello's in a storm , and Iago,
who “has had most favourable and
happy speed ," reaches the island before
the Moor. Iago's hatred of Cassio for
having been preferred by Othello is making lighť of the matter, he said,
UKOMMELETTE
MEX
OF FAMOUS BOOKS
disturbance among the soldiers. The
crafty Iago, however, now began to
work his plot , plying the luckless
Cassio with wine until he became in
toxicated, and in a drunken brawl
wounded Montana , the governor of
the island, whom Othello was to
replace. Coming on the scene of the
disgraceful brawl, Othello heard an
account of it from Iago , who was the
cause of all the trouble ; and, thinking
Iago was trying to shield Cassio by

Here we see the lovely Desdemona with her father, Brabantio, and her lover, the brave Moor. She
thought more of Othello's noble mind than of his black skin, and all her delight was to listen to his
tales of the wars in which he had fought, of his hairbreadth escapes, his strange adventures by land and sea.
speedily seen , and his crafty mind is with sorrow , “ Cassio , I love thee,
at work to ruin the lieutenant , whom but never more be officer of mine,'
Desdemona treats with greater friend- appointing Iago to the charge of the
liness than she does the malicious Iago. guard . Thus, the first part of the
When Othello arrived, soon after villain's scheme of treachery had suc
Desdemona, he not displeased
was ceeded. But worse-far worse — was
to hear that the Turkish ships had yet to come.
all been shattered in the storm which Poor Cassio now appealed to Desde
had so nearly wrecked his own vessel, mona that she might intercede with
for now he was able to devote more her husband on his behalf . This the
time to his bride , “ my fair warrior," as gentle Desdemona did , but Iago's new
he lovingly called her. On the nightofhis villainy was to make Othello believe
arrival he bade Cassio keep order in she pleaded for Cassio because she had
the castle , and see there should be no fallen in love with him. So well did
148
 -OTHELLO
mamman , THE MOOR OF VENICE AXXX

he instil the poison of doubt into Desdemona a gift she should have
Othello's mind that at length the esteemed so precious.
Moor began to lose faith in his wife, Othello , now believing that his wife
and, believing she had ceased to love had ceased to love him , determined to
him , became almost mad with jealousy . kill her ; but as she lay asleep in bed he
Chance favoured the evil designs of bent over her and kissed her, she looked
lago , as it so happened that before so beautiful. His kiss awakened her, and
they were married Othello had given in answer to her frightened questions he
Desdemona a beautifully -worked hand- bade her say her prayers, telling her he
kerchief supposed to be of magic power, knew of her love for Čassio . In vain did
to make its owner loved and amiable ; poor Desdemona plead her innocence ;
but to make her become hateful to her jealous husband covered her with
her lover if ever she should lose it . Iago the bed -clothes and smothered her.
longed to get possession of this, and She was not yet dead when Emilia
urged his wife to steal it. got into the room and told of her
One day, when Othello was in an ill husband Iago's evil doings, exclaiming
mood of doubting, and complained of a that the misguided Moor had murdered
pain in his head, Desdemona offered a saint, whose last words were of love
him the handkerchief ; but he put it for Othello .
from him, saying, “ Your napkin is too Iago, who has come in , stabs his wife for
little ," and it fell to the floor, where denouncing him, and then runs out ; but
Emilia quickly picked it up and passed others arrive, and Iago is brought back ,
it to lago. This fateful little hand- Othello in his anger wounding him .
kerchief now became a tool of great Realising in an awful agony how
mischief, as it was conveyed to Cassio's beguiled he had been to trust so vile
house by lago, and poor Cassio, finding a man and mistrust so good a wife,
it , presented it to a woman as a pretty Othello stabbed himself, and, falling
thing, not knowing to whom it had upon the body of his innocent bride,
belonged , and still less guessing that exclaimed with his dying breath :
Othello had been brought by lago to
I kiss'd thee ere I kill'd thee :-no way but
watch him with the handkerchief , as this,
a proof that Cassio had received from Killing myself, to die upon a kiss.

TWELFTH NIGHT ; OR, WHAT YOU WILL

Fancy Shakespeare at a loss for a
title ! It seems absurd that one
whose mind was so full of fancies , so rich
in thoughts, should ever have been at a
loss for a title for a play he had written .
Yet such was the case with the comedy
which we know as “ Twelfth Night ; or,
What You Will.” It is said to have
been christened “ Twelfth Night ” for
no better reason that that it was first
performed on January 6th , which was
observed as a festival in Shakespeare's
day, and long afterwards, being the
twelfth day after Christmas.
Illyria was the nameof a country on
the Adriatic Sea, and, while sailing
thither, the twin son and daughter of a
gentleman of Messaline were wrecked .
The youth's name was Sebastian, his
sister was called Viola.
Both of them had the good fortune
to escape from drowning during the
shipwreck, but they did not reach the
land together , and each was ignorant
149
of the other's fate . Viola was saved
by a sea captain , by whose help she
contrived to dress up as a
page ,
and made her way to the court of
Orsino, Duke of Illyria. It was safer
for her to assume this disguise than to
travel as an unprotected girl in a
strange land, and she had no difficulty
in getting accepted as a page to the
Duke, for she looked such a handsome
boy !
Now, the Duke was in love with a
young and rich lady of his land , the
Countess Olivia, and wished to marry
her. But Olivia had rejected his pro
posals, refused to see him, and even
spoke of shutting herself up for seven
years to mourn for a dead brother .
The Duke thought that his handsome
young page would be a good messenger
to send to Olivia on his behalf, and so
Viola was sent by Orsino to plead with
the fair countess on behalf of her
princely lover. But, greatly to Viola's
 -THE CHILD'S STORY OF FAMOUS BOOKS
embarrassment, instead of_softening has soon excellent cause to regret :
Olivia's heart towards the Duke, the having forced the youth to fight. The
messenger had spoken so sweetly that Countess , having witnessed what she
Olivia fell in love with the pretty page . supposes to be the manly conduct of the
A new and unpleasant actor now came Duke's page in the encounter with Sir
upon the scene, in the person of a drunken Andrew , is more than ever charmed with
old courtier named Sir Andrew Ague. him , and, inviting Sebastian into her
cheek , who had the audacity to con- house, frankly declares her love for him,
sider himself a rival for the hand of and her willingness to marry him.
Olivia. This Sir Andrew, noticing that Here is , indeed, the strangest of
the Countess was so favourably dis- Sebastian's adventures ; but as the
posed to the engaging young attendant lady is young and lovely, he accepts the
of the Duke, made bold to challenge situation gallantly, and , a priest being
Viola to a duel . at hand, the wedding ceremony is not
Viola's disguise had thus brought her delayed. Olivia no longer dreams of
into a strange adventure, and she had seven years' mourning !
no idea what the issue would be . But The next scene in this queer comedy
three months had now passed since the of errors takes us to the audience
shipwreck, and her brother, Sebastian, chamber of the Duke, whither Antonio
in company with his friend Antonio, has been brought by his captors before
who was so devoted to the young Orsino. There Antonio, seeing Viola
gentleman that he had even given with the Duke, and still mistaking her
him all his money, was on his way to the for her twin brother, chides her for the
palace of Orsino. Antonio, having been way in which she has repaid his constant
at the time in arms against the Duke, friendship of the past three months.
was afraid to accompany Sebastian to The Duke, of course, was mystified
the palace, and thus their ways had to completely by Antonio's words, as he had
separate, to their mutual sorrow . had his page for three months ; but con
Soon after leaving his friend, Antonio fusion became worse confounded when
was surprised to come upon two persons Olivia arrived , and, seeing Viola there ,
about to engage in aa duel, and thinking addressed her as “ husband." The Duke
the younger of them to be none other was enraged that his attendant should,
than Sebastian, he promptly interfered as he now thought, have betrayed his
on his behalf. The duellists , however , trust and made love to the lady, nor were
as we may guess, were Sir Andrew and matters improved when Viola denied
Viola, the notorious old coward having Olivia's statement that they were
forced the young page to draw her married, and the priest, who performed
sword , much against her will , just at the ceremony, was called to bear witness
the moment of Antonio's timely arrival. to it ! Sir Andrew Aguecheek added a
The immediate result of Antonio's further touch to the confusion by appear
interference was not only to stop the ing and stating that the Duke's page had
fight , but to bring some of the followers but recently in a quarrel broken his head ,
of the Duke upon the scene, and they, and thatofhisboon companion, Sir Toby
recognising hiin as a former enemy, put Belch , Olivia's uncle, for whom he
him under arrest. Hereupon he turned to sought the services of a surgeon.
Viola, and asked her-thinking her Sebas- When matters were thus at their
tian — to give him back some of his worst, all was suddenly made clear by
money, knowing he might have need of the appearance of Sebastian himself,
that ; but Viola showed her natural who, after explanations, discovered
astonishment at this request , and pro- that the Duke's page was none other
tested that she had never seen him before . than his own sister, whom he had never
While Viola's adventures are thus hoped to see again, believing her to be
increasing, Sebastian , too, is having his drowned. As Sebastian had so quickly
share of misunderstanding, for Sir become the husband of Olivia, who,
Andrew Aguecheek , baulked of his while refusing to become the wife of
revenge on the timid page, comes upon the Duke , was nothing loth to be his
Sebastian in front of Olivia's house, “ sister ,” Orsino chose the true romantic
and mistaking him for Viola, draws his ending for this comedy of the twins by
sword upon the youth ; but the coward offering his hand and heart to Viola.
150
 ROMEO AND JULIET
In lived
the ancient Italian
two noble townof
families Verona
who were suggestedtheyshouldgoto
at masked, theball
and when Romeo saw the many
deadly enmity with each other. One lovely ladies who would be there he
family was named Montague, and the might forget the disdainful Rosaline.
other, Capulet . Romeo , the brave The lover thought it would be
and handsome youth, heir of the impossible ever to forget Rosaline ; but
Montagues, was in love with a lady when , in due time, he was mingling
called Rosaline; but she refused to with the dancers in his foeman's house ,
have anything to do with him , which he saw a lady who was so fair that she
made him so sorrowful that he shunned seemed to be " a snowy dove trooping
with crows,” and he de
termined that he would
speak to her as soon as he
could. While asking a
servant the name of the
fair one, Tybalt, a young
Capulet, recognised
Romeo's voice ,andwanted
to challenge him ; but the
lord of the house kept him
back, saying that Romeo
bore himself like a gentle
man , and was said to be
a virtuous and well
governed youth."
Romeo had now come
up to the fair lady, and,
kissing her hand, had
spoken a few words of
admiration , and received
the assurance that he was
not displeasing to her.
But when he knew that she
was none other than Juliet ,
the only child of Capulet,
he was very sad. For he
had fallen in love with the
daughter of his father's
mortal enemy:
At midnight Romeo de
parted , but he felt that
he could not go homeward
and leave the place where
At a masked ball in Verona, Romeo, the heir of the Montagues, a family Juliet was ; so he climbed
at feud with the Capulets, falls in love with Juliet, the only daughter over the orchard wall into
of Capulet,not knowingwhothe ladyis. Thus begins one of William Capulet's garden, and
Shakespeare's great tragedies,
the story of which is retold on this page.
while he was hidden by the
all gaiety and lay sleepless at nights. darkness of the night he saw the lady
It chanced one day, when Romeo was appearing at the window. She called his
speaking in the street with his cousin name to the night air, saying :
Benvolio, that a servant came to him , O Romeo, Romeo ! Wherefore art thou
asking if he could read a paper he carried, Romeo ?
on which were the names of the guests Deny thy father, and refuse thy name ;
to whom he was bearing invitations Or, if thou wilt not, be but sworn my love,
to a ball given by the great Capulet . And I'll no longer be a Capulet.
Romeo noticed Rosaline was to be When she had spoken more words in
among the guests, whereon Benvolio this strain . Romeo stepped forward
151
 -THE CHILD'S
SUCIJOS
STORY OF
and told her that his name was now
hateful to himself since it was that of
her family's enemies. That night they
vowed their love for each other, and
purposed to be married at all risks.
In the early morning we next see
Romeo at the cell of Friar Laurence,
a priest, who thought the lover had
come from his usual sleepless night
weeping over Rosaline's hardness, and ready to take her
was surprised to hear of the new
love, but rejoiced to think that now,
perhaps, the feud between the
Capulets and the Montagues would
come to an end with the union of this
couple. Willingly he consented to
marry them secretly.
Before long Juliet herself arrived ,
and presently the priest had made her
Romeo's bride.
Soon after this, Romeo's friend,
Mercutio , a kinsman of the Prince of
Verona, and a very quick -tempered man ,
engages in a quarrel with Tybalt, and
Romeo appears on the scene . Tybalt
immediately turns upon Romeo, who,
having solately wedded a Capulet,
now feels kindly towards the family,
and refuses the challenge . Thereupon
Mercutio draws his sword on Tybalt, but
the latter kills him .
Romeo could not let his friend's
death pass unavenged, and scarcely
had he slain Tybalt than the Prince
arrived . He had long been vexed by
these family feuds, and now his dis-
pleasure was so great that he banished
Romeo .
Friar Laurence advised Romeo to
flee to Mantua, and there to wait until
he could make his marriage known ,
implore the Prince's pardon , and come
back to Verona . Juliet's old nurse
brought Romeo a ring from his young
bride, and after a brief meeting with
Juliet he hastened from Verona.
Juliet was plunged in sorrow , but
her mother thought it was for the death
of her cousin Tybalt ; and when a young
nobleman named Paris asked for her
daughter's hand, Lady Capulet agreed
that they should be married within a
few days.
At first Juliet refused , and then she
went to take counsel of the Friar ,
saying she would kill herself rather than
be married to Paris . As a desperate
plan of escape the Friar gave her a
phial, from which she was to drink on
152
FAMOUS BOOKS
the eve of the wedding her mother
had arranged. It contained a drug
which would make her fall into a
trance with all the appearance of death ,
and she would then be taken to the
family vault . Meanwhile Friar Laurence
was to send for Romeo, and when
Juliet had awakened from her long
sleep her lover would be by her side
with him to
Mantua .
The strange and dangerous scheme
of the Friar was carried out so far that
Romeo came to the tomb after Juliet
had been placed in it ; but he had come
thinking she was really dead , and had
provided himself with poison that he
might die beside her. Paris, however,
was there before him , having come to
strew flowers on Juliet's coffin . The
two men quarrelled and fought at the
grave, Paris being killed .
When Romeo had opened the vault,
he laid the body of Paris beside that of
Tybalt, and then he gazed on the beauti
ful face of his wife , kissed her for the
last time, and drank the poison.
Romeo had been in the tomb for
half an hour when Friar Laurence came
to find Juliet , as it was now time she
should recover . On entering the vault
he saw Romeo lying near the blood
stained Paris, and called anxiously to
Juliet to arise, for she was now begin
ning to show signs of life. She awoke,
and he told her that if she would
but come, he would put her “ among
a sisterhood of holy nuns.” But , hear
ing the sound of approaching footsteps,
he fled .
When the sight of her dead Romeo
and the bleeding Paris met the awakened
eyes of Juliet, she snatched up Romeo's
dagger and stabbed herself.
The watchmen came in, and then they
summoned the Montagues and Capulets,
and the Friar was brought back. He
explained to the astonished company
the cause of the tragedy, and when the
Prince reproached them with the death
of the youthful lovers on account of
the feud between thefamilies, Monta
gues and Capulets alike were stricken
with remorse .
Montague reared to “ the true and
faithful Juliet ” a statue of pure gold ,
and the same honour was paid to
Romeo by Capulet. Thus ended the
rivalry and hatred of the two families.
 cardian cortancerCAT

HAMLET, PRINCE OF DENMARK

PRECISELY asthe clock struck twelve brother, in order that the latter might
at midnight, the ghost of the former wed his queen and sit upon his throne,
King of Denmark used to appear on the Hamlet's whole thoughtsturned bitterly
walls of the Castle of Elsinore. Scared to means of vengeance. Encouraged by
soldiers of the guard told Prince Hamlet his father's spirit, he resolved never to
of this, and he determined to speak to rest until the usurper had paid for his
his father's spirit next time it appeared. crime ; and, the better to carry out his
For this purpose he waited through the plans, he feigned madness, speaking
cold , dark night until the midnight strangely even to Ophelia, á beautiful
hour, when the ghost was seen beckon- maiden whom he loved .
ing to him . His faithful officers would It chanced that a company of players
have detained him , but Hamlet broke came to the castle, and Hamlet, looking
from them , and went after the spirit . every way for means to convict the

Hamlet, Prince of Denmark , had sworn to avenge the death of his father, the King, who had been killed by his
own brother Claudius pouring poison in his ear as he slept. Claudius had then married the dead King's widow .
Hamlet got some actors to perform at the Court a play which recalled the death of his father. Here we see Claudius
and the Queen greatly disturbed by the performance, Hamlet, on the floor, watching their behaviour closely .
Hamlet, we must know , had been so new King of his crime, suddenly con
full of love for his father that his grief ceived that by means of these play
for the King's death two months before actors he might bring home to his
had increased daily, rather than lessened, mother and stepfather his knowledge
and was now mingled with horrified of their evil deeds.
anger at his own mother, Queen Ger- With this end in view, Hamlet
trude, and his father's brother Claudius, arranged that the company would per
who had married the Queen in less than form next day a play that dealt with
two months after the death of the King . the murder of a Duke of Venice , and into
The young Prince's mind was full of this some new lines which Hamlet was to
strange unrest at this disgraceful con- write would be introduced. We can guess
duct, and he was suspicious as to the that these new lines would refer to a
death of his beloved father. So that King, poisoned by his brother so that
when the ghost revealed to him the the latter might enjoy his possessions
fact that he had been poisoned by his and wed his widow ; for Hamlet
mamumur ULT
153
 THE CHILD'S STORY OF FAMOUS BOOKS
exciaimed , when he had made this Hamlet 10 Denmark. Returning to
arrangement with the players : Elsinore with his faithlul friend Horatio,
The play's the thing, they entered a churchyard where a
Wherein I'll catch the conscienceof the King. new grave was being dug, and there
And so it all falls out. When the they stood watching the gravediggers,
tragedy is performed before the King little dreaming for whom the grave
and Queen next day, the mimic deeds was being made. Presently appeared
enacted on the stage are so like in a funeral procession . Hamlet and his
every detail to the manner in which friend withdrew, but from their hiding
Hamlet's father had been done to death, place they saw the corpse of Ophelia
by the pouring of apoisonous drug into borne in the midst. That unhappy girl
his ear as he lay asleep, that the guilty had been drowned while gathering
Claudius and Queen Gertrude can stand flowers by the side of a brook .
it no longer, and leave the room in great Tenderly the body was laid in the
excitement and disorder. grave ; but Laertes, Ophelia's brother,
The play had caught the conscience distraught at her death , threw himself
of the King ! upon her body and begged that he
In great agitation Claudius expressed might be buried with her. Hamlet
to Queen Gertrude his wrath against then ran forward and leapt in beside
Hamlet, and bade her reprimand her the living and the dead. A fierce
son for his strange conduct. She struggle ensued, Laertes accusing
struggle
summoned Hamlet to her private Hamlet of his sister's death , since his
apartment; but Ophelia's father, the conduct had turned her mind. But in
aged Polonius, who was Lord Chamber- the end they all withdrew , and poor
lain of the kingdom, remained hidden Ophelia was left in her grave.
behind a curtain, fearing lest some A duel, however, had to be fought
violence might result from the Prince's between Hamlet and Laertes, and the
supposed madness. When the Queen whole Court assembled to watch the
reproved her son for having the play fateful combat. Claudius hoped it
performed, he straightway told her would rid him of Hamlet, and caused
that he would not let her go until a cup of poisoned wine to be placed
he had “ set up a glass where she might in readiness for the Prince, that he
see the inmost part of herself.” So might drink it when exhausted, in case
wild were his words that the Queen , he overcame Laertes, for whose use a
tearing he would kill her, called for has been provided.
poisoned rapier Laertes
help , and Polonius echoed the call. In the struggle and Hamlet
Hamlet, pretending thatthe disturbance unknowingly changed swords, but
was created by a rat behind the curtain, not before the Prince had received
thrust in his sword and killed the old a wound from the poisoned point ;
courtier. Then , with wild , strange words and Laertes , in his turn , was next
of scorn , he reproached his mother till wounded with the same sword. Mean
she entreated him to speak no more . while, Queen Gertrude, drinking in
But sad was the fate that befell the honour of her son's clever swords
beautiful Ophelia. Believing her lover's manship, partook of the deadly wine,
affection to have turned to hatred, and and died.
hearing of her father's death at his hand , The death of his mother showed
she could do naught but brood over her Hamlet the last villainy of the wicked
woes, until at length her mind gave Claudius, which had entirely mis
way . carried and robbed him of his Queen.
King Claudius, of course , had but Laertes, dying, forgave the Prince,
one thought now — to be rid of Hamlet, and seeing all clear at the last, he de
whom he believed to possess his secret. nounced the King as the cause of all
The Prince was sent to England with a their woe ; while Hamlet, turning his
sealed letter from Claudius, in which the steel on Claudius, made the murderer
King desired that Hamlet should be drink the deadly cup himself ; and
put to deathThe
not to be.
on ship
landing. But this was presently, Hamlet's own wound taking
bearing the Prince effect, the chief actor in this strange,
was attacked by pirates, who took all sad tragedy breathed his last.
on board prisoners , eventually restoring The next Famous Books begin on page 271 .
T54
 The Child's Book of
STORIES
THE QUEST OF THE GOLDEN
RINCE JASON was CONTINUED FROM
PRINCE
the son of the
PAGE 7
King of Tolcos, who
had been dethroned and
slain by the wicked King Pelias,
and it was promised that , if Jason
should find the Golden Fleece, he
should cast Pelias down and reign
himself.
The Golden Fleece was one of the
most beautiful things on the earth. It
was taken from the back of a brave .
ram that had saved two children's
lives by sacrificing its own , and in
memory of that brave deed the ram's
fleece was turned into gold. It hung
in a sacred grove, coveted by mighty
kings, who owned nothing so beautiful.
Clad in a leopard's skin, and sandals
tied with golden strings, with a spear
in each hand, Jason started out. He
came to a town near the sea, where a
great crowd was gathered to see Pelias
sacrifice a black bull to the god Nep-
tune. The people stared at Jason, who
had lost one of his sandals, and there
were cries of “ Look ! Look ! He
wears but one sandal ! He is here at
last ! Whence has he come ? What
will he do ? What will the King say ? ”
For long before the people had
been told that a man wearing one
sandal should come to claim the king-
dom , and upon seeing Jason with one
sandal great alarm seized the King.
He thought to entrap him by a ques-
tion. “ What would you do, Jason ,
with the man you were doomed to be
ruined and slain by ? "
155
FLEECE
“ I would send
him for the Golden
Fleece,” said Jason,
for he knew that , before he
could obtain bis kingdom, he must
find the Golden Fleece, though
the search for it was the most
difficult and dangerous quest in
the world .
" Then go ," said Pelias, " and bring
the Golden Fleece ."
" I go," replied Jason, " and on my
return to lolcos you shall come
down from your throne and give me
your crown and sceptre .”
Now, in the midst of a great wood
stood a wonderful tree, known as the
Talking Oak. It could answer ques
tions, and tell those who came to ask
of it what they should do. So to
this wonderful tree came Jason .
“ What shall I do, that I may find
the Golden Fleece ? ” he asked .
“ Go to Argus,” said the oak, “ and
bid him build a galley with fifty oars,
wanting fifty strong men to row it .'
Argus built the great vessel , and,with
forty -nine strong, brave comrades ,
Jason rowed away to find the Go.den
Fleece. On their way they fought
and defeated the six -armed giants,
scattered the flock of fierce birds that
shot arrows at them, and at last they
came to Colchis, near where was the
grove of the Golden Fleece . Even
now, however, when they were so
near, there were many dangers to pass
through before the prize could be won.
The King of Colchis was angry with
 -THE CHILD'S
Jason for coming to take the Golden
Fleece away, and put great obstacles in
his path. First , Jason had to tame the
brazen -footed and brazen -lunged bulls,
whose breath was so hot that it burned
to a cinder anyone who came near ; but
the King's daughter, Medea, who was
an enchanted princess , showed Jason
how he could escape from being burned
and the way to tame them. Jason did
as he was told, and tamed the great
bulls . Then, harnessing the bulls to a
THOMAS MATBANK
HARNESSING THE BULLS TO A PLOUGH, JASON PREPARED THE SOIL TO SOW DRAGONS' TEETH
plough , he made ready the soil to sow
dragons' teeth , which Medea gave him ;
and when Jason had sown, a great army
of warriors sprang up from them .
Guard the Golden Fleece ! ” shouted
the warriors, and they ran with all their
might at Jason to kill him . But the
Princess deceived the warriors, and
caused them to fight each other until
they were all slain.
Then Jason asked the King to let him
fight the dragon guarding the grove in
which the Golden Fleece was kept ; but
156
BOOK OF STORIES
the King refused his request. Then the
Princess said : “ Meet me at midnight ,
and I will lead youto the sacred grove .
They met and walked together beneath
the trees to where, in the moonlight ,
gleamed the glory of the Golden Fleece.
But it was not yet won , for, with a hiss
and a rattle, the dragon came on with
jaws opened as wide as the gates of a
palace. Into its jaws Medea threw an
enchanted gold box containing a sleep
ing - draught , and as the box rolled
Turva
down the monster's throat the dragon
fell insensible.
Run ! ” shrieked the Princess.
“ Seize the Golden Fleece and escape,
)
for the dragon will soon awake ! ”
On Jason ran and seized the prize,
but as he carried it away the dragon
awoke and came after him . But just
as the dragon reached him Jason leaped
on board the galley, to the joyful shouts
of his comrades, who rowed him back
to Iolcos, where Pelias was overthrown
and Jason reigned as king.
 THE WITCH OF THE FOREST TREE
RINCE MIRKO was
PRIN the son of a They looked up, and saw a Tartar
King of Hungary. His father died witch sitting in the tree.
fighting in a battle with the Tartars, " Throw this powder on the fire," said
and Mirko was forced to fly for his life. the witch , “ and it will burn better."
After riding for seven days he came to Mirko did so, and a strange smoke
a palace made of diamonds. It was a arose , and the witch descended, saying :
66
dark night , and Mirko was tired and You killed my children, the seven
hungry . So he boldly entered the gate Tartars. Now it is your turn to die ! "
of the palace, and was astonished to Mirko felt the magic stealing over
find no one living in it . There was an him , and called on the Princess to help
excellent dinner in the dining -room , and , him . But the strange smoke had over
after eating, Prince Mirko
went into a bed -room and
laid down to sleep. He had
scarcely closed his eyes
when seven great, fierce
Tartars came thundering
into6 the palace.
“ Ho, ho,” cried the
tallest of the Tartars,
“ I smell Christian
blood !” And, rushing
upon Mirko, he hacked
him into little pieces , and
threw the pieces out of
the window . The next
morning a lovely girl
crept from a hiding-place
beneath the palace and
poured over the pieces
the water of life. Mirko
at once sprang up,
stronger and handsomer
than before, and the
lovely girl disappeared.
" Ho, ho," cried the
tallest of the Tartars,
“ the little Prince has
come to life ! ” And he
hacked Mirko again into
little pieces. On the
second morning the same
thing happened. On the The Prince and Princess lighted a fire in a great forest. “ How cold it is ! "
third morning the lovely said a voice overhead. They looked up and saw a witch sitting in the tree.
girl again poured the
water of life upon Mirko, and said to come her. Mirko carried the water of
him : “ I am the Princess of this castle. life, and he poured some quickly over
The Tartars have killed my father. But her, and over himself, and they then
I needhide no more, for you are stronger caught the witch and forced her to lead
than them all.” them to where their fathers were buried .
So, indeed , he was. With one stroke of “ I seem to have slept a long time,'
his sword he killed the seven Tartars, said the old King, rubbing his eyes, as
and he and the Princess then set out the water touched him . The Princess's
to find their fathers and pourupon them father said the samething.
the water of life. At night theyentered Soon afterwards Mirko married the
a forest , and lighted a fire beneath a tree . Princess, and his father gave up his
"How cold it is ! " said a voice overhead. throneand made them King andQueen.
157
 CECCO

PROSERPINE, QUEEN OF THE UNDERWORLD

CERES
andwas a good andakindlyspirit
shetaught men how to grow, carried
world. away. Proserpine
Dis then to thea Under
summoned council
corn . She had a beautiful daughter of all the spirits. They decreed that if
named Proserpine , who was as beautiful Proserpine had eaten nothing in the
as a flower. Underworld she still belonged to Ceres .
One day, as Proserpine was pluck- Now, Proserpine had been so unhappy
ing blossoms, the earth opened beside with Dis that she had eaten no food.
her, and out of it there came a chariot But , seeing a red pomegranate growing
drawn by black horses, and in on a tree by a gloomy river, she had
the chariot sat a spirit with a golden plucked it, because it reminded her of
circlet round his head . He was Dis , the flowers of earth. Dis thought that
the King of the Underworld, and he this gave him power to keep her for ever.
carried Proserpine away to his dark But the spirits decided that Proserpine
kingdom , and made her his Queen . should stay with him only for three
Ceres wandered about the earth in months in every year, and return for
search of her daughter, and during her nine months to Ceres .
wanderings no corn grew, and all men So every spring, when the young
were in great misery. But at last the wheat rose from under the ground,
Spirit ofthe Sun told her that Dis had Proserpine came up with the flowers.
THE LONELY OLD WOMAN OF MOROCCO
ago there was a poor woman But one morning the children in
SOMEin time
Morocco who had no children , their play upset a pail of milk in the
and she felt very lonely. So she went to kitchen , and this made the woman very
the wise man of her tribe and asked him angry , and she said :
where she could find some merry boys You miserable children of a tree !
and girls to live with her. The wise I wish I had never had anything to
man told her to fill a basket with some do with you .”
dates growing on a palm tree in her And she went out in a fury. When
garden , and then leave the basket in her she returned , all the children of the
kitchen , and go to the church and pray . tree were gone , and the house was
The woman did so, and when she lonely. The woman was now sorry.
came back she found her house full of She went to the palm tree, and saw that
young men and maidens and children. all the fruit was growing again ; but
So she became very happy with her new when she put out her hand to gather the
family. The young men went out to dates once more the dates turned into
work and brought her much money, and eyes and stared at her, and she ran
the maidens kept house for her, and the away in terror and never went back
children laughed and sang to her. to the garden again.
THE TIGER WOMAN OF THE JUNGLE
Burma there are two races of people.
INn One race lives in villages and tills the
to the jungle. All his deep love for
her returned , and he set out again
ground ; the other race lives among for the hills, taking with him the clothes
wild beasts in the jungle on the hills. of his dead baby. He followed the
One day a villager set out for tracks of the tigress until he came to a
the hills, where he found a beautiful cave, and there he saw the eyes of the
hill-woman, whom he led to his village wild beast blazing in the darkness.
and married. For a time they lived He was not afraid. He put down the
happily together, and had a little baby's clothes at the mouth of the cave,
baby girl . But the baby died, and the and the tigress leaped out upon him .
villager began to neglect his wife. But when she saw the clothes of her
Coming home very late one night , he little dead girl her heart was melted.
found his hut empty, and about it were Instead of killing the villager, she
the marks of a tigress's feet. He knew suddenly changed into a woman, flung
what had happened. His wife had her arms about his neck , and went back
changed into a tigress and gone back joyfully with him to their empty hut.
TEOLUXOTTI EIZO

158
 thaaithiaththaithaanam Hatharaaaalaam

THE LAND OF THE RED DAISIES

A FAIRYanda
magic witchfellout about a Marry atspell
oncea sweet and trustfulwife,
.”
young and handsome King of the country The King then commanded all the
and asked him to decide to which of them young girls in the country to assemble
the ring belonged. The fairy said the before his palace so that he might choose
witch had stolen it from her, and the one of them to be his bride. He looked
witch said that she had bought it from a at each of them in turn , and each of
magician in the Land of Red Daisies . them in turn started back in disgust at
The King looked at the ring, and, find- the sight of his ass's head , and he sadly
ing no name upon it , he handed it to dismissed them all. As he was coming
the witch, and said : away he saw something moving behind
“ Let me see what enchantment you
))
a tree, and found there a pretty beggar
can work with it." maid. Being barefooted and clothed in
The witch rubbed the ring, and rags she had been ashamed to stand
nothing wonderful appeared. among the other girls. The King looked
The King then handed the ring to the at her, and, finding that her eyes were
fairy, and she kissed it and touched his full of pity, shyness, and love, he
silver throne with it , and the throne exclaimed : You shall be my Queen ."
turned into pure gold . He appointed ten maids of honour
“ Rings belong to those who can use to array her in beautiful robes and
them ,” said the King, giving the ring to
the fairy .
glittering jewels, and then he led her
to the cathedral, where they were
“ And asses' heads belong to those married.
who deserve them ," said the witch, “ Now ," he said, do not seek to
touching the King with her wand . know anything about me until to
The courtiers gave a cry of horror. morrow morning, and then you shall
The King had become a man with an know everything .'
ass's head. But the fairy said to him : But in the night the young Queen
“ Love can cure the effects of hate. touched her husband's head and felt

ser

The King, who had become a man with an ass's head, called all the young girls before him. He looked at
the beggar -maid , whose eyes were full of pity, shyness, and love. " You shall be my Queen, " he said .
159
 -THE CHILD'S BOOK OF STORIES...
AZIECKOULURJ
that he had a human face ; and she
got up and lighted a candle and looked
at him. Yes, it was true ! The ass's
head had disappeared, and he was a
young and handsome man again. She
made a movement of joy, and tipped
up the candle. A drop of burning
grease fell upon her husband's hand,
and he awoke and said :
<<
Unhappy girl ! To -morrow morn-
ing the spell would have been entirely
removed . Now the witch has regained
her powerover me, and I must go and live
with her in the Land of Red Daisies."
In a moment he was gone ; but the
young Queen felt that she could not
live without him , and set out to find
the Land of Red Daisies .
Outside the palace she met the fairy.
60
Please show me the way to the
Land of Red Daisies,” said she .
“ That is the place where the witch
lives,” said the fairy, “ and I have
never been there. But take my magic
ring, and it will, perhaps, help you ."
And so it did.. The young Queen
had only to kiss it and touch a stone
with it , and she obtained gold to buy
food and lodging with . In this way she
wandered to the end of the country and
came to a hut on the edge of a great
desert . In the hut was a little old
woman, and the young Queen said to her :
(
Please show me the way to the
Land of Red Daisies."
“ I do not know where it is," said the
little old woman , “ but my pig often goes
there and comes back laden with precious
things. It departs suddenly, and I can
never tell when it is about to go .”
“ Very well,” said the young Queen,
“ I will sleep beside your pig, and wait
until it sets out for the Land of Red
Daisies, and then follow it."
She lay down in her beautiful robe in
160
reba macam
the straw beside the pig . In the middle
of the night the pig shook itself and
ran out , and she followed it , and came
through the great desert into a strange,
red land. The daisies were red , and the
grass was red, and the leaves of the trees
were red, and amid the trees stood a
strange, red palace.
She tied the pig to a tree, and in the
wood she met a ragged peasant girl,
whom she persuaded to change clothes
with her. Then she went to the red
palace and was engaged as a maid.
“ You must work very hard and help
me to get the feast ready,” said the
cook . Our mistress is a witch, and
her daughter isabout to marry the King
of the country beyond the great desert.
“ That is my husband," said the
young Queen to herself, and going up
stairs, she peeped into the room where
he was sitting, and saw that it was so .
In the middle of the night she got
out of bed and came to the room where
he slept , and lighted a candle and
awakened him. He was bewitched , and
did not recognise her. But he remem
bered everything when she kissed the
magic ring and touched him with it.
They crept softly downstairs and got
out of the palace, and found the tree to
which the pig was tied. The poor animal
was very hungry, and as soon as it was
released it started back home. They
followed it in the moonlight, across the
great desert, and came at break of
day into their own country, where
they lived together in peace and
happiness.
non TUTTO ILLETTER numar
 THE COMING OF KING ARTHUR
ſo bells were rung in England when this will do .” And hc pulled it
N° Prince Arthur was born . It was out of the stone and brought it to
a time of trouble, and the King kept Sir Kay.
his birth secret , and gave him to Sir Kay read the writing on the hilt ,
Merlin , and Merlin gave him to Sir nd ran to Sir Hector, crying :
Hector, and Sir Hector brought him “ I have got the sword of the stone.
up as his own child . I am King of England ! ”
When the King died the people Sir Hector did not believe him, and
grieved that he had left no heir. The he said :
(6
lords began to fight for the crown, If you have pulled it out , you can
and Merlin saw it would be difficult put it in again , and take it out before
to get them to welcome Arthur as my eyes.”
their King. So he said :
66
Sir Kay tried and failed, but Arthur
Come to London , and God will drove the sword deep into the stone.
show by a miracle who is the rightful Sir Kay and Sir Hector seized it, and
heir to the throne.” none of them could move it .
la cauta

Arthur pulled out the sword that no one else could move, and was acclaimed rightful King.
The lords came to London, and they Arthur again pulled the sword out of
found in the churchyard of the cathe- the stone, and then, turning round, he
dral a great stone. On the stone was saw Sir Hector and Sir Kay kneeling
an anvil, and in the anvil was a sword, at his feet .
66
and on the hilt was written : Alas ! my dear father and brother,"
(6

“ He who pulls out this sword is the
rightful King of England.”
The lords seized the sword, but none
of them could move it , and the knights
and the common people seized it, and
none of them could move it.
Sir Hector and Sir Kay, his son,
came to London , and with them came
Arthur. They passed the cathedral, and
Sir Kay found that he had left his sword
behind, and sent Arthur to get it . On
his way back the boy saw the sword
on the stone, and said : “ Perhaps
161
he cried , “ why do you kneel to me? ”
“ No, my true King,” said Sir Hector,
you are no child of mine, and now I
know whose son you are.”
The next day the lords came to the
cathedral, and Arthur plunged the
sword into the stone, and none of them
could move it. Then he pulled it out
again.
So the boy was acclaimed to be the
heir to the throne, and all the people
rejoiced that they had at last found
their rightful King.
 THE STORY OF
NCE upon a time all the fairies of
ONCEthe country were invited to the
christening of a little baby Princess.
Seven fairies came, and they acted as
godmothers ; and a feast was held in
their honour. Just as the feast began
an ugly old fairy appeared.
had seen her for fifty years, and , thinking
that she had left the country, the King
and Queen had not troubled to invite
her. This made her very angry, and
as she sat down she muttered :
“ Before I leave this place I will turn
)
all their joy to sorrow.'
Happily, the youngest fairy over-
1 of being pricked by a
The Prince strode through thecastle gates and found thecourtyardcovered and she felldown in a
with bones of horses and soldiers. And over all brooded an awful silence.
THE SLEEPING BEAUTY
heard the threat, and slipped away and
hid herself behind a curtain .
When the feast was ended the other
fairy godmothers came to the little
Princess and gave her their christening
gifts. The first fairy bestowed on her
Nobody the gift of angelic beauty; the second,
the gift of angelic goodness ; the third
gave her the gift of genius ; the fourth ,
the gift of exquisite gracefulness ; the
fifth endowed her with the utmost
sweetness of voice, and the last
blessed her with every other gift .
“ Hold ! See, your gifts are useless! "
cried the ugly old fairy . “ For I give
your godchild the gift
Vi spindle, and of dying
from the wound.”
The King and Queen
began to weep. But the
youngest fairy sprang
from behind the cur
tains and said :
“ Do not weep , my
dear King and Queen .
The Princess shall not
perish . Yet II cannot
change entirely the spell
which an older fairy has
cast upon her. She will
be pricked by a spindle.
Yes ! But instead of
dying she will only fall
into a sleep lasting a
hundred years, and
from that sleep she will
be awakened by a kiss.”
The King at once
made a law forbidding
everybody to use a
spindle, and the Prin
cess never saw one
until she was sixteen
years of age. Then , in
climbing about one of
her father's castles in
the country, she came
to a garret, and found
there a simple old serv
ing-woman spinning
flax with a spindle and
distaff. The Princess
took up the spindle to
ThomasMB look at it, and the
point ran into her hand,
162
 THE STORY OF THE SLEEPING BEAUTY
deep sleep. The King and
Queen summoned all their
doctors, but none of them could
awaken the Princess. In the
meantime the youngest fairy
arrived . She bade the King
and Queen return to their
palace, and leave all their
courtiers in the castle . Then
she dressed the Princess in a
lovely robe and laid her in a
golden chamber, and cast a spell
upon every living thing in the
place. A high, dense thicket
of briers, thorns, and brambles
at once sprang up around it.
Many personslost their lives
in trying to force a passage
through the trees, and at last
no one dared to approach it .
The King and Queen died
without leaving an heir, and a
new line of kings began to reign ,
and in the wars and tumults
of a hundred years the story
of the Sleeping Princess was
forgotten . At the end of that
time the son of one of the new
kings lost his way while out
hunting, and wandered until
he came to the Enchanted
Castle. He asked who lived in
this strange, lonely place. Some
replied that it was the haunt of
witches; others said it was the The Prince opened the door of the Golden Chamber. In the
dwelling -place of a terrible ogre. middle stood a great bed, and on it lay a young Princess.
The Prince did not fear danger. He breathed, and touched her lips with his .
tied his horse to a tree, and, sword The Princess opened her eyes.
in hand , made his way to the castle. “ Is that you,my Prince ?” she said . “ I
He entered the wood, and the briers have been waitinga long, long time."
and thorns and great trees bent aside They began to tell each other the
and let him pass, and he strode on story of their adventures, but they were
through the gate of the castle. He soon interrupted. For every living thing
found it a place of strange death . The in the castle had awakened with the
courtyard was covered with the bodies Princess. The dogs barked, the cocks
of horses and dogs and soldiers. In the crew, and the soldiers took up their
corridors lay waiting -maids and pages, arms. The messengers ran along the
serving-men and messengers, and in the corridors with messages given to them
rooms beautiful ladies were stretched a hundred years ago, and upset the
beside tall knights and gallant courtiers. trays of the waiting-maids. The cour
The Prince trembled, but he did not tiers made love to the beautiful ladies,
turn back. Still striding on, he opened and the maid of honour entered the
the door of the Golden Chamber, and Golden Chamber and said the dinner
there he saw a wonderful sight . In the cooked a hundred years ago was ready,
middle of the chamber stood a great bed Soon after they went to a little chapel
hung with rich curtains, and on the bed in the Enchanted Castle, where they
was a young Princess of angelic loveli- were married, and then set out for the
ness. Surely she lived ? He leaned over palace of the King, where they were
the Sleeping Beauty to see if she welcomed with wonder and joy.
LITUM
163
.
TELEON TEOLLICLEULEXA
THE STORY OF LITTLE
A LITTLE
the gedge
irl once
of alived cottage
in awood.
great Herat
mother had made her a pretty little red
cloak with a hood to fit over her fair
curls, and she was so fond of it that
she hardly ever wore anything else.
And so everybody called her Little Red
Riding Hood.
At the other side of the wood was
a tiny house among the trees, where
Little Red Riding Hood's grandmother
lived all alone . One fine afternoon
Little Red Riding Hood's mother said :
66
“ Your grandmother is not very well.
In this basket I have put some eggs,
a jar of honey, and some butter. Put
on your cloak, and take them to her,
with my love. But be sure that you
do not stay long on the way, because
it will soon be dark , and then, you
know , the wolves come out.”
So Little Red Riding Hood put on
her cloak, and away she went .
But the wild flowers were very beauti-
ful in the wood, and she put down her
basket on the trunk of aa tree and began
picking them .
Little Red Riding Hood was very
fond of flowers. She knew all their
names, and when she spoke to them
she loved them so that she thought
they understood all that she was saying,
The little grey squirrels, with their
funny long tails, darted out from the
bushes and ran up the trees , where
the birds were singing among the
leaves. And Little Red Riding Hood
forgot all about the wolves.
Soon it began to grow dark, and, re-
membering what her mother had said ,
she jumped up, and was picking up her
basket, when there bounded up to her
a great wolf !
66
Where are you going ? ” asked
the wolf. He spoke so kindly in his
big, gruff voice that Little Red Riding
Hood thought he could not possibly the cottage she found her mother
hurt her. So she told him she was waiting for her at the door.
carrying some eggs and honey and The mother drew Little Red Riding
butter to her grandmother, who lived
in the little house at the edge of the
forest .
Oh," said the wolf, “ I know where
that is ! ” And he ran on and was soon
out of sight.
The wolf ran very fast , and did not
stop until he came to the little house.
164
RED RIDING HOOD
He knocked at the door, and the grand
mother's voice called out :
“ Pull the bobbin and the latch will
>
go up ."
He pushed open the door, and , going
straight up to where the old lady lay
in bed , opened his mouth and devoured
her ! Then he put on her nightdress
and cap, jumped into the bed, and
cuddled down among the clothes .
Presently came a tap at the door.
“ Pull up the bobbin and the latch
>
will go up ! ” called out the wolf in a
voice like the grandmother's.
Little Red Riding Hood walked in.
Draw up a chair,” said the wolf,
" and tell me what you have in your
basket.”
Little Red Riding Hood got a chair
and sat down by the side of the bed.
“ I have brought you something nice
to eat , granny,” she said, as she bent
over the bed. “ But what great ears
you have, grandmamma ! ”
“ All the better to hear you with ,”
said the wolf.
“ What great eyes you have, grand
mamma !
“ All the better to see you with .”
“ And, oh , what great teeth you have ,
grandmamma !
* All the better to eat you with !”
cried the wolf, jumping out of bed .
Little Red Riding Hood ran scream
ing to the door. The wolf ran after her,
and had almost caught her, when a shot
from a gun was heard, and the wicked
wolf dropped down dead.
A woodcutter who was passing had
heard the cries of Little Red Riding
Hood , and popped his gun through
the window in time to save her .
Little Red Riding Hood was very
grateful to the woodcutter, but she had
been so frightened that she ran all
the way home. When she came to
Hood in, and listened to her story of
all that had happened. She was
delighted to have her little girl home
again, and Red Riding Hood was so
happy to be out of danger that she
promised her mother never to be dis
obedient any more.
The next stories begin on page 303.
 LITTLE RE
R ED
D RIDING HOOD IN THE WOOD

&

THE WOLF BOUNDED UP TO RED RIDING HOOD AS SHE GATHERED THE DAISIES IN THE WOOD
Little Red Riding Hood found the flowers so beautiful that she stopped on her way through the wood to pick them .
Soon it began to grow dark , and as she picked up her basket to go there bounded up to her
M
165 a great wolf.
THE WONDER CITY OF THE WAVES

The passing of a ship at sea in the full light of the moon is one of the most impressive sights that we can see. The great
ship seems to speak to us of the wonderful power of man as it sails along the waves with thousands of people on board. The
turning over of this leaf will give us a glimpse of these people on board , living as happily as if they were in their own homes.

166
 The Child's Book of
FAMILIAR THINGS
WHAT THIS STORY TELLS US
THEseaisone intheworld. Every day therearethousands
ships at of the busiest places
animals, and goods of all kinds. All the food that comes into our country must
come over the sea , and some of the ships that bring it are many weeks
on the way. If we go to India we live on the sea for weeks, and for one
week we may never see land. But the good ship carries us safely through
the water, with music, and food, and friends, and toys, and beds, and all we want
on board . This story tells us how the ship rides on the sea , like a floating town.

THE HOUSE UPON THE SEA

IT is wonderful to CONTINUED FROM PAGE 62
read in the story
books of giants carry ..
ing usabout
H hills away. It over
and far theworld, the
is more
wonderful to know that in real
life there are giants who do things
just as wonderful. The steamship
is more wonderful than all the giants
in the fairy tales , for the steam-
ship is a giant that carries thousands
of people. Suppose there are five
people living in your house, and you
all want to go to America. Well,
two hundred families like yours from
the same village , and two hundred
families more from a second village,
and two hundred more families from
a third village could all go to America
by the same ship.
That would be three thousand
people, as many as live in a small
town . But that wouldn't matter.
The ship could carry them all at one
time, and take their trunks and boxes,
too . Instead of being in a city on
land , you would be in a city on the
sea, racing across the water faster
than the fastest horse can run . You
would get to America in less than a
week . There would be no need to
take food with you . The ship carries
the steam which
drives the ship, be
cause the water in the
sea is salt. If that salt water
were boiled to be turned into
steam , it would leave the dry salt
behind , and chokethe boilers . Sothe
ship has to carry fresh water,which has
no salt , or else it must have a machine
to remove the salt from the sea-water,
and boil the water after the salt is gone.
This great ship carrying so many
people and such heavy machinery is
made to ride across the sea by the
strongest giant that works for us . That
giant is steam . It is just the same
sort of steam which you see coming out
of the kettle, only that which drives
the ship is made hotter than that
which curls out of the kettle-spout .
A hundred years ago people would
have thought a steamship a very, very
wonderful thing . In those days they
did not travel by steamships. There
were no such things then. When a
boy sees a pond , he likes to get a
big piece of wood and make a raft, so
that he can ride on the water . That
raft is as good as the first boats which ,
long , long ago, men had to use. If they
wanted to cross a lake or a river, they
had to float across on an old log .
San

food and drink ; it carries beds for you
to sleep in, baths for you to wash in,
books for you to read , cows to give you
milk , hens to lay eggs for you. It has
a telegraph office without any wires,
from which , while still at sea , you can
send a message to your friends on land .
For itself the good ship carries
thousands of tons of coal and thou-
sands of gallons of water . It must
carry water wherever it goes , to make
When men got to know more about
making these things , they used to
scrape out the inside of the log, so
that they could ride inside, and not
have their toes bitten off by crocodiles .
Then they made better boats , and
found out that they could make them
go faster by using sails and oars. The
oars are long pieces of wood, with flat
ends, which dip in the water, and
when pulled through the water they

N 169
 - THE CHILD'S BOOK OF FAMILIAR THINGS
make the boat go along. The sails are furnaces, and turns the water in th.
blown upon by the wind, and the wind boilers to steam . This steam is so
drives them along, carrying the boat strong that it drives the machinery of
with them . the ship ; then it is cooled and turned
But for a long time men did not back into water, and boiled up again
become much cleverer in making boats . to make steam once more . All the
They made them larger, but they had machinery of the ship is worked by this
to use oars , or trust to the wind to drive giant . At one end of the ship is a screw
them . When they made very big ships with three long blades . The steam
they could not use oars, so then they turns this screw.
had only the wind to help them . When When you twist a screw against a
the wind did not blow the ship stood piece of wood, the screw makes its way
still , or was carried along by the water , into the wood , turning round and round
perhaps where they did not want to go. and going forward . That is what the
Nelson's ships were all like this . screw does when the steam makes it
It took a long time for men to learn go round in the water. The water is
how to make a ship go by steam . Some all round the screw , and when the screw
men tried to do it, but people did not twists round , the water resists—that is ,
believe that it the water tries to
could be done, and stop the screw so as
would not help not to be pushed
them . Many men out of its place.
tried and failed, By resisting, the
and died broken MAURETANA
KIVER
water becomes like
hearted . More wood, and the
than a hundred screw eats its way
years ago a little forward through
ship was made to the water, and so
go by steam along makes the ship go.
the River Clyde, in The faster the
Scotland. It pulled screw turns
barges which were round, the faster
too heavy for the great ship
horses, but people travels, SO that
would not believe we have a ship
that it was any weighing 50,000
good , and that tons riding along as
little ship was How a ship would look in a street. The curious things smoothly as a cab,
cast aside behind arethe screws which drive the ship through the but so quicklythat
and water. The engines turn the screws round, and as they
neglected until it turn they push away thewater andmove the ship forward. it can go a mile in
fell to pieces. two minutes . The
Years after, a ship driven by steam wind may be blowing the way the ship
went across the Atlantic Ocean to goes, or against it ; it does not matter
America. Everybody said that this to the ship: The great giant steam
was wonderful, but they did not think sends the ship the right way .
it could always be done, so nearly Many men work on these ships --some
twenty years more went hy. Then a times 500 on one vessel. The hardest
clever man named Brunel built a ship work is that of the stokers , who look
called the Great Western . It was after the fires. When you go on to a
driven by steam, and went from Bristol ship, you see people playing games on
to New York in a fortnight, while the deck, or having dinner below , or read
ships driven by wind took at least a ing in the library, or resting in the little
month . Since then thousands of steam- cabins. And right down under them
ships have been built , and now we can all are the men keeping up the
get to America in five days. great fires. Only an iron plate or so
What is it that this wonderful steam keeps the sea from these men , so deep
does ? Weli, deep down in the bottom
> down in the water are they. The heat
of the ships men burn great heaps of is so great that cold air from above has
coal. The coal makes big fires in the to be pumped down by electric fans.
UUDUTRUST
179
 WHAT IT IS LIKE ON BOARD A GREAT SHIP

Every great ship has a doctor on board, and Little children sleep as soundly on the sea as if they were in bed
in his surgery he works as if he were on land. at home. The beds are fixed one above the other in small cabins.

A M

The great furnaces and boilers on a big ship would weigh more than a cathedral. The men walk through them as
if they were in a street, with iron walls almost as high as houses. Behind these great iron walls the fire is boiling
the water and making the steam which drives the wheels of the engines round and moves the ship along.

This is how the officers of the ship The rooms on a ship are beautifully iurnished , and some oi them are big
talk from the deck to the men enough to hold a thousand people. This is the dining - .00 n on one o ' the
down below in the engine -rocm . great ships of the Canadian Pacific Railwa ; which tase peop.e to Canada .
171
 Tauno TUCUELA

HOW THE HORSE'S SHOE IS MADE &

The feet of a horse are covered with horny mattei The horse in the picture has lost a shoe and is
called hoofs, which would serve the horse very well it going to the blacksmith's, where a new shoe can be
it had only to run about on the plains in a wild made and fitted in a quarter of an hour, as you will
state. But its feet must be protected on the hard see if you notice the time of the clock in these pictures.
roads, and so iron horse- shoes are nailed to the hoofs Here the blacksmith is measuring a bar of iron .

li

The smith then thrusts the iron into the fire, blowing his The smith bends the iron a little and a man with a
bellows hard and making the heat so great that the heavy hammer strikes until it is bent into the shape of
iron becomes white with heat. When he pulls it out half a ring. This is very quickly done, as the blows
of the fire it is almost as soft as lead, so that it can be from the heavy hammer bend the iron quite easily, the
hammered into any shape the blacksmith wants to make. blacksmith holding it all the time between his nippers.
17 ?
H
 HOW THE BLACKSMITH PUTS IT ON

tu

The next step is to shape the shoe to fit the horse's The shoe is shaped by striking the half -made shoe on the
hoof. We have heard the clanging of the hammers rounded end of the anvil until it is neat and smooth inside.
on the anvil as this is being done, and here The smith and his assistant now turn to the fat sides of
we see men busy making the shoe to fit the shoe, and beat the iron so that the end pieces turn
the
The iron must be struck quickly while it is hot. down to make the heels. These make the shoe fit firmly.

The shoe is then put in the furnace again and made as The hoof is like leather, and the smith pares round the
hot as before, so that tho smith can take a steel tool mark to prepare for fizing the shoe. Then he drives nails
and drive nine holes into it, through which the nails through the holes, which slant towards the outside of the
can be put in. The shoe is fitted by heating the iron hoof, so that the nails come out on the front without touch
and pressing it on to the hoof, where it burns a mark. ing the flesh. The ends are filed off and the shoe is on.
173
 acus CELLULOID

THE END OF THE LIFE OF A TREE

Trees are among the most beautiful things in the In the first picture a man is marking aa tree tnat must die.
world, and we have only to go where there are no trees For many years it has grown in a beautiful lane, but it
to know how they add to the glory of the earth. Yet has now been sold to the builder, who must have wood to
we must cut them down ; for all strength comes from the build houses and to make tables with. After the tree has
earth , and man cannot do without the strength of trees. been marked, the men come to pull it up by the roots.
TEXTOTT

It is easier to uproot the tree when the bark has been stripped at the bottom and the foot of the tree chopped about
a little. The men then dig about the tree, loosening the roots ; and one of them climbs the tree and throws a rope
round the top of the trunk . Pulling at this rop themen have great power, and slowly the tree falls to the ground.
TOIMITTENTE ETTE CUREKITZUK
174
 DOTV
FULL ALTE ACCUM
anaand 12
AND HOW IT IS PULLED UP BY THE ROOTS

The first thing to be done when the tree has fallen is to remove the root by chopping and sawing. The branches are
then trimmed and cut off. Gardeners use many of them for training up creeping plants; many are sawn into logs to
make the bright log fires that burn so brightlyon winter nights. At last the horses come to carry the trunk away.

Titu

dere we see all that is left of a beautiful tree : a thing of beauty made into a thing of use. The tree may be used in
many ways. It may be made into paper; but as this is an ash tree it will probably be used in building, or in making
furniture. Bark is often stripped off and sold for tanning leather ; it has a wonderful power of making leather
wear well, so that we need trees even for our boots ! The tree shown here is worth about £ 6, but the wood will
be worth much more when the carpenters have made it into beautiful things such as we see in our home.
TEOTTITETIT TUTO Doru TULOY 20TUUTTUURITER
175
 HOW A PIN COMES OUT OF THE EARTH
L
Et us go and dig up some pins." while a little hammer comes down and
Should we not laugh if somebody " taps " on one end ofthe wire, flattening
said this ? But, though we could not it . That makes the pin's head . Next ,
dig pins out of the earth, we do have the point must be made. For this the
to dig up the stuff pin is carried along
of which pins are to another part of
made. the machine, where
Pins are so cheap there are little files,
and so easily lost which quickly grind
that you would the other end of the
never think how pin and make it
hard it is to make sharp and smooth.
them . They have to Other parts of the
be made by a machine rub off the
wonderful machine. rough edges, and
Before this machine send the pins pitter
was invented it took The brass from which pins are usually made does pattering into a big
fourteen men to not look at all like a pin. It must be made first box .
make a pin. Then into wire, and then drawn in this way through a We have now got
a man invented a machine which makes the wire thin and smooth. the brass wire made
machine which does all the work itself. into a proper pin, but it is still yellow ;
The neat , white pin which looks like silver so we take it to a room where big tubs
is generally made of brass, and brass has go whirling round . The tubs are filled
to be made with shining
from copper silver liquid
and zinc , and the pins
which , like are dropped
a 11

out of the
ground. If
other
metals,have
to be dug
000
Another machine cuts the wire to the proper length, and in another
you saw the the
into

they are
covered
it .
When they
come

little piece of wire is held fast while a hammer comes down and with what
brass from taps one end, making the pin's head. In another part of the machine we
out

call
which pins a little file grinds the other end of the wire and makes the pin - point. nickel ,
are made you would never think that it which makes them look like silver. As
could be changed into such sharp, bright soon as they are dried the pins are ready
little things as pins. The brass must be for use , and another machine sticks
1
made, first of all , into them in rows on the
wire, and we will suppose paper sheets that we buy.
that we have a coil of Nobody knows where all
brass wire before us. The the pins go. If all the
wire has to be run off from pins that have been lost
the coil to a part of the could be got together
machine which makes it they would make heaps
straight and stiff. Then as high as mountains .
the wire goes on to Once there was a
another part of the Queen of England who
machine, which cuts it up fretted so much about
into the proper length. the number of pins lost
And now the little pieces every day that she used
of wire are carried along to make the great ladies
on the machine to a sort at her Court hunt all over
of hand made of steel . the palace for them. She
This takes hold of each The pin is now made, but it is yellow , put these pins into
piece of wire as it comes and itis nextdipped into atubof shining cushions, working fancy
along, and holds it fast ; liquid and made like silver, readyforuse. patterns with them .
The next Familiar Things begin on page 151 .
176
 D300 The Child'sBook
WONDER
of Bu
WHAT THE WISE MAN TELLS US
"HE Wise Man, who explained to the children on page 21 how we know
,
for the children's questions. And these are the questions the children asked.
They came in tens, in hundreds, and at last in thousands ; there were so many
things the children wondered about that only the Wise Man could possibly
tell them. We shall set down the questions here and the answers that the
Wise Man gave , and so all through our book the questions and answers will
go on . We shall not have room to consider the trouble the questions gave to the
Wise Man and the happiness that his answers gave to the children, but sometimes,
perhaps, we may put very special questions in big letters, and often we shall
try to show the clever pictures the Wise Man drew to make his answers clearer.
WHAT DO THE BIRDS SING ABOUT ?
"He birds were sing the first music tha '
THE ing in the wood , CONTINUED FROM PAGE 24 was heard on the
and the First Child earth. But do re
asked the Wise Man : member the most
What do the birds sing about ? beautiful thing about the birds'
And the Wise Man said : singing, which is, that they
Whenever a child or a bird or never sing so that people may
anyone else sings naturally, it say “ What a beautifulvoice you
sings about its feelings. If you have got ! ” but always because
have no feelings you ought not to they have some beautiful feeling which
sing . Sometimes we sing just to show makes them sing. A bird flew down
that we are cleverer than other people, from a great height over the heads of
and when we do that ve do not feel the children, and one of them asked :
what we are singing, and everyone is Why do the birds fly so high ? And
glad when we stop. But ' the birds the Wise Man said :
only sing when they must-when This is why they fly so high. If
their feelings find their way out some- you stand on the top of St. Paul's
how. Then they try to tell the world Cathedral on a sunny day, you can
how happy they are. The feelings see nearly all over London. The
that birds sing aboutare always happy higher you go the more you can see,,
feelings. When a bird if your eyes are strong enough .
is ill , or miserable , or These birds have very strong
unhappy, it never sight. Their eyes can see as
sings. Generally birds well as ours would if we used
sing to express their a telescope.
feelings of love, and to The big birds look down
call to their mates and from the great height
their friends when they at which they are fly
want company . At ing, and they see many
other times they sing birds flying below.
simply for the joy of These birds below
living, as the lark sings watch the earth. They
when he goes up into see food thrown away
the sky. He sings for by men and placed in
the joy of his nest on the garden by children ,
the ground, and for the and in a moment they
joy of the light, and fly down to get it . The
the joy of the air, and bird which is right up
the joy of freedom . in the air knows what
I believe that the sing. The birds sing because they are happy, they are doing, and
ing of the birds was to express their feelings of love and joy. swoops down quickly

エクク
 XGXTENCE
«THE CHILD'S BOOK OF WONDER
to take its share. These birds get a of mosquito. In the hot lands this
good meal. If they did not eat that mosquito, when it stings, forces a
food it would soon become bad in the deadly poison into the blood of the
sunshine, and make us ill : but it serves person it bites.
ihe birds for a good dinner , and by eating What the doctor does , having found
it the birds save us from being ill. So out the cause of the fever , is to get rid
we see how in all parts of the world of that cause . He finds that the mos
Nature looks after her big family . quito lays the eggs from which the
What is the use of a moth ? asked young ones are born in moist, swampy
one of the children . And the Wise Man places . So the doctor drains the swamps
told them how hair and wool are rubbed and dries up all the puddles. Then the
off the thousands and thousands of mosquito eggs cannot be hatched , and ,
hairy and woolly animals in the world . there being no mosquitoes , men cannot
and how, if this hair and wool were be poisoned. The mosquito has taught
never destroyed , it would , in the course men that they must be clean and careful
ofmany years, become a great nuisance . in their homes.
The moths eat this and so prevent us The children's next questions were
from suffering from such a nuisance. about themselves. One of them was :
But still the child was not satisfied. Why do we see ourselves in the
Moths eat our clothes , sir, he said , glass ? The glass , said the Wise Man, is
expecting that after this there would made with a layer of quicksilver behin !
no longer be a good word to be said for it . If that were not there, we should see
the wicked moth . He was mistaken . through the glass as we see through the
Moths never eat the clothes which window . But the quicksilver prevents
we have on , or the clothes which we the light going through and sends it back
wear regularly, said the Wise Man . If again. The glass and the quicksilver are
you have too many clothes to wear , you both perfectly smooth and flat.
should give them to poor people who Now, we can see ourselves in any
have not enough . So that moths teach thing that is perfectly smooth and
us not to be greedy, not to hoard up flat, and that is able to throw the
things which other people would be light from our faces back to us . Of
thankful to have ! course, we cannot see ourselves in what
That is a lesson which not all of us We call dull surfaces , because they
would expect, said the Wise plan . keep the light ; nor can we see ourselves
Other nasty things in thi ngs
things with
teach us just as rough surfaces, be
well. Those of us cause they do not
who have relatives throw the light
in hot lands know back fairly, but
how badly people scatter it in all
there suffer from directions . If you
fever. throw a ball
And now, after against a perfectly
all these years , smooth wall , and
after many brave throw it straight,
men have died it will come
from fever, a doc straight back to
tor has discovered you . If you throw
that fever there can it sideways , you
be checked, and know that it will
can be done away come off the wall
with . The fever is in a certain way.
caused by the sting You could easily
of a nasty little throw it to the
insect called a mos wall SO that it
quito. What we would bounce off
call the " midge " it to a friend
Why do birds fly so high ? Because when they are
in this country is high in the air they see other birds picking up food. standing further
really one form Then they know where thefoudis, and Ay down to it. along the wall.
LITU
178
 DOUTORITET
La

VIDEO
TULI
DOUTU
When we look into the glass the lightfrom our faces strikes the glass and comes back to us. The back ofthe
glass is covered with quicksilver so that the light cannot go through, and the surface is made perfectiy smooth
so that it throws back the light from our faces straight, exactly as it strikes the glass. If the glass were rough ,
the roughness would send back the light from our faces so broken up that it would not make a clear image.
But if instead of a smooth wall you will follow , of course . We all know what
had a heap of loose stones to bounce the makes shadows, but we do not all know
ball against, you could never tell where what wonderful things shadows make.
the ball would go after you had thrown it . For instance , the moon is lit by the sun's
Now, when you stand opposite a good light; and sometimes the earth “ gets
glass, the light from your face hits the in the light," as you do when you
glass and comes straight back , just as if stand in front of the lamp someone is
it were made of a lot of little balls; but reading by. So the earth prevents the
if you stand opposite something that is sunlight from reaching the moon, and
rough, the light comes back this way, throws a round shadow , which we can
and that , and the other , just as if you see across the moon as the earth gets
threw a handful of marbles against a in the way This is an “ eclipse of
heap of stones - and, of course, you the moon .
cannot see yourself. The glass throws Then shadows make strange things
your image back to you as your body when they are thrown far away. The
throws its own image on theground in the shadow of your hand becomes very big
sunshine. But on the glass your image if it is thrown on a wall far off. And
comes back light, and your shadow on sometimes the shadow of a man's body
the ground is dark , because it is made may look like a strange giant and
by your standing in the way of the light. frighten the man who is making it !
Why cannot we jump off our There is a mountain in Germany, called
shadows ? a child asked ; and the the Brocken , nearly a mile high , where
Wise Man , smiling, said : a man's shadow is sometimes thrown on
Because, wherever we go, our shadows the clouds.
YOUR
179
 - THE CHILD'S BOOK OF WONDER
Why does a river run into the
sea ? was the next question , and the
Wise Man said :
The surface of the earth is not level.
It has mountains and hollows, and hills
and valleys. Now, everything, and es-
pecially anything that can run, like
water , is always drawn towards the
centre of the earth , because the earth
pulls it , just as the earth pulls a ball if
you drop it from your hand, or stops
the ball and pulls it back again when
you throw it up. So all the water in
the world is always trying to run to the
lowest places to get as near to the middle
of the earth as it can . The very lowest
of all places are the great basins of the
oceans and the seas, and that is why they
are full of water. A river runs to the sea
for the same reason that drops of water
run down a window -pane. All rivers run
HOW THE RAIN RISES FROM THE SEA , AND HOW THE RIVERS CARRY IT BACK TO SEA
14
The sun draws up the water from the sea as moisture, which mixes with the clouds and is carried overland by
the wind, as the arrows in this picture show. When the air cools the moisture becomes water again and falls -as
rain . The rain on the hills runs down into the valleys and along the rivers back to the sea, because all
water, like everything that can run , tries to find the lowest place on the earth , which is the bed of the sea .
downhill all the time, even when to our
eyes they seem to be running on the level .
But the next thing you will ask is ,
where does all the water come from ,
and also why does the sea not get too
full ? You will find that a wise man in the
Bible long ago said : “ All the rivers run
into the sea, yet the sea is not full ;
unto the place from whence the rivers
come, thither they return again.” Now,
that is the true answer, though perhaps
you cannot understand it at first. The
water returns to the places where the
rivers came from because the heat of
the sun sucks it up into the air from the
sea, and the wind carries it over the
land , and it makes clouds and falls as
rain on the hills and the high places ,
where it is gathered into little streams
and makes the rivers again, doing
liseful work all the time as it flows.
180
That is why the sea is not too full and
does not rise and wash away the land
even though all the rivers in the world are
always running down into it. Did you
ever think that a river might be tired
of running down such a long way to the
sea ? A poet thought so once, and said :
“ Even the weariest river
Winds somewhere safe to sea."
Why is the sea salt ? then asked one
of the children , and the Wise Man said :
It is the rivers that make the sea salt.
The sea was first made by the water that
was in the air falling into all the deep
holes on the earth. That was the first
rain that ever fell, and it was quite fresh ,
like all rain—that is to say, there was
no salt in the water. Thus the sea at first
was made of fresh water. But there are all
sorts of salt in the earth , and as the rivers
run into the sea they melt the salt out
of the ground they run over and carry
it into the sea , although when tia : sun
sucks up the water again and ma as the
rain it does not suck up the salt with it .
Now , I have just told you that it is
the water sucked up by the sun that
makes the rivers, and so the rivers start
with fresh water ; but by the time they
have reached the sea they have melted
quite a lot of salt, which they add to the
salt already in the sea. So from day to
day, and from age to age, the sea gets
salter and salter ; and wise men have
even guessed the age of the sea and the
length of time that the rivers have been
running into the sea by noticing how
much salt the rivers carry into it every
day. Then it is not a hard sum to find
out how long it must have taken for the
sea to become as salt as it is now.
The next questions begin on page 289.
THE MAN'S SHADOW ON THE CLOUDS

We make a shadow when we stand in the way of the light. When we hold a stick in front of a lighted
candle, the shape of the stick is thrown upon the wall, because the light cannot shine through it. That is the
stick's shadow. So, when we stand in the sun, our shadows are thrown upon the ground because the sun
cannot shine through us. This shadow of two men on the clouds is made on the top of a high mountain
called the Brocken , in Germany. At sunset a great wall of mist hangs above the Brocken, and, owing to
the great height of the mountain and to the position of the sun, the shadow of the mountain - top, of the obser
vatory tower, and of whatever happens to be in the light, is thrown upon the wall of mist as we see here.
181
 THE WATERWAYS OF OUR LAND
EXPLANATION
A NDweed BERWICK

T Rivers are shown like this

' o
cu
t

vi
R.N
v
o Canals are shown like this

AnnaBn.
T ith
HAWICK
R.E Cruel
ALNWICX
Names of Towns written like --- LINCOLN
sk Names ofRivers written like - R.Trent
Names ofMountains,and
DUMFRIES NEWCASTLEON TVNE other PhysicalFeatures
are written like Scaw Fell
HEXHAM
SUNDERLAND
CARLISLE
DURHAM
WORKINCTONCES Croaste R.WE HARTLEPOOL
Skidan Tres NORTH
WHITEHAVEN
5022
BY
APPLE STOCKTORS RIDES BORO
pees
WHITBY
Scaw
KAMBLESIDE RICHMOND
Yorkshire
I. of Moors MASCARBOROUGH

MAN
DOUGLAS
FILEY S EA
BARROW CASTES
IN FURNESS ORIDLINGTON
HIPSK
karen Reibble Vida YORK
IRISH FLEETWOOD HORNSEA
BLACKPOOL
LEEDS HULL
SEA TERUG BRADFOR
WAKETTLE Hum
SOUTHPORT
WIGAN
Recalder
WOUDERSFIEL DO
ber
La LIVERPOOD
CRIMSBY
ABUMANCHESTER SONCASTE
tours
UANDUDNO STOCKPORTS SHEETILLO
Bangles The Pea LINCOLN
2018
CHESTER MACCI ESFIELD CHESTERFIELD BORNCASTLE
n

Snowdor
De .r v

ST. AS
ma

SKECNESS
Do.
r

CARNARVU S8509
R

REWARK
NA CREWE
RABON MAKLEY
NOTTINGHAN
e WELLS
Tr

a
Rul Rub
LECCELTA
STAFFORD BOSTON CROMERYARM
en

DER GRANTHAM
OUSED

OUT
t

SWUSTRY
SPADA Krosne
H
re

LOOLICY SHREWSBURY BURTON ESTAMFORD LYNN NORWICK

po

BARMOUTH a WISBLOU
LICHFIELD DAKRAMlon
Pa

r SLOWPOOL
ve ARABORTY LEICESTER el
"se Pav
T

LOWES1993
PETERBORO
NE

Talithmon KIDOES TRETFORD

2409
BIRMINGHAMRUNC OVENTRY
R.

Brane 0163 VE
.AvonSA RUGBY
ABERYSTWITH MINSTER ELY
SUNGRY
LUOLOW HUNTINGGON
RXAYADER WARWICK
ARATFORD NORTHAMPTON Rouse SAXNUNDHAN
EDMUNE
Recher

DWORCESTE
Aue n SALUFORD CAMBRIDG E IPSWICH
Всяканили илми та влати W NB UL O U S E R .Com
MALVER
NE BA R C olne
Bereift LLANADOCK HEREFORD BUCKINGHAM LUFTON HEREFORD FELIXSTOW
HBRECON QUELTAMOS
Re Towy ROSS AYLESERY HARWICH
MONMOUT SALBANS COLCHESTER
n

CARMARTWEN
CLAUCESTER W OXFORD WATVORLEN ARRU
ve

CLACTON
#Chitoners
Se

SWANSEA RUST
HERENCISTER Cole LONDON CHELÁSFORD
RUBSP . HENLEYS MoutSOUTHEND
LLANOATE
WALLINGFORD h of the Thamesa
BRIDGEND CARDIFF USBRISTOL MARLBORO WESTENSTERS MARGATE
BRISTOL CHANNELWESTO NES
S MARES
BATH 8.Kennet
ALDE
h BROCHETEN
READINO ares CROYDON Ant
Stou
t
RAMSGATE
ILFRACOMBE TROWBRIDGE
GULLDEORD
Downs MAISTON ...CANTERBURY
WELLS
Salisbury
BRISEWATER Plain RW A TUNBRIDGE DOVER
o
BARNSTAPLE
mo
Perre RSHAN WELLS
n t X -WINCHESTER OLKESTONE
Ex R.Zo SALISBURY
Ta

Sou
th
I

SOUTHAMPTON DOW LEWE CALAIS

we

RYE
BO

PO

TAUNTON YEOVIL
OCH RNE

TORINO
N

STOURMESTER
RT
U

WIMBORNE CHCHE PER HASTINGS

RIS MOU
BRI

T
SM

AEASTBOURNE
TCH TH

OU

VEXETER
O

WE
DPO

LAVNESTON
SDORCHESTER BOULOGNE *
TH
URC

YM
N

Yes Tordur VE
m OU
RT

part
H

EXMOUTH NT
TLIG MOUTH
TH NO
R
SANA PLYMOUTH C Η Α Ν Ν Ε L
H

TORQUAY
Ι
TAS
SAL

DARTMOUTH
R Somme

Ε Ν
ENGLISH DIEPPE
MOKATILI
Allwater comesfrom thesea and goes back to thesea . Thesun drawsit up into the air as moisture and moisture falls
as rain. The rain falling on the hills runs down into the valleys , carving out deep places in the land as it goes and
so making the river beds, along which the water runs back to the sea. The chief use of rivers and of the canals
which men make where there are no rivers, is to bring ships and boats from town to town ; but the time may come when
rivers will he p to do the work of factories and mills. Rivers are so valuable that towns always spring up on their banks .
182
 The Child's Book of
ALL COUNTRIES
WHAT THIS STORY TELLS US
WE looked
have been onajourney,in
down upon it as the ourfancy,
birds look over
downtheland,we
upon it in livein, and have
their flight. We
have seen its high hills and its broad plains, its golden valleys and its bleak moor
lands, its great forests of trees, its long lines of steel railways, its silver rivers
running to the sea . Here we take another rapid journey over our homeland, catch
ing glimpses of the work going on in the fields and farms and gardens. We see
how the different parts of our land are cultivated to yield for us the things we need.

THE WORK OF OUR ISLAND HOME

OST of us have
Mos thought at some
time or other how
delightful it would be to live
on a desert island like Robinson
Crusoe. Perhaps we have even
gone so far as to wander away
with an old umbrella and some
saved provisions into the loneliest
corner we can find, there to test and
enjoy the feeling of utter freedom .
But somehow we were always secretly
glad to hear the tinkle of the tea-
bell , and had to own to ourselves
that it is dull to have no one to
‫النخوه‬
‫وه‬
invisible to us , un
CONTINCED FROM PAGE 70
less we seek them
out, as the busy elves
in the fairy story were to
the good cobbler and his wife.
For example, as you go each
day to buy in shops all that
is needed for food and cloth
ing, you receive not only the help
of those who keep the shops and
serve you , but the help of an
endless chain of workers by whom
the things for sale have been grown,
or made , or packed . Many of these
workers live in our homeland ; others

speak to —no one to help in building live beyond the sea .

OOA

the shelter and making the fire, and Remembering our winged flight over
duller still to have no one to admire the British Isles , you exclaim that

our shelter and fire when finished .
So it generally happened that we
contentedly put aside the delightful
romance , the adventures and freedom
of the lonely life , as we returned to a
comfortable meal in a cheery home,
all provided for us by the work and
thought of others.
Try to see what a sharp contrast
there is between the life of Robinson
Crusoe, cast away on an island all by
himself, and our own life in England
to-day . Crusoe had to get and make
everything for himself or do without
it ; we, in our island home, depend
on the help of others for everything
that we have .
If you think carefully how you
spend your time from morning till
night , it will be easy enough to re-
cognise the helpers whose work goes
0
far to make your life so happy and
comfortable . But besides these
visible helpers are thousands and
thousands of others always at work ,
some by night , some by day, as
183
OO
you have seen already some of these
workers from a distance . In the
country fields and hillsides there were
a few together, here and there ; in the
docks and streets of mighty London
there were great crowds; in the busy,
smoky districts where coal is found,
and the mills shoot up their tall
chimneys, workers passed in never
ending streams. You want now to
see them closer , for these are some of
the helpers on whose work we depend
So much . Let us first visit the
country fields and hillsides.
Perhaps you sometimes go to stay
at a farmhouse in a quiet part of the
country , where there is a long drive
from the station between hedges full
of sweet, wild roses . Beyond the
hedges lie fields of growing corn and
the green meadows.
There are green fields , too, where
the cows and sheep eat all day long.
You are never tired of watching the
men of the farm attend to the crops
which one day will give food for man
i
 THE CHILD'S BOOK OF COUNTRIES
and beast, of seeing them dig in the lighter shading-- the uplands of the
gardens and fields and care for the South of Scotland and the Cheviots,
cattle , while their wives are busy with which used to be a barrier between the
housework and looking after the little two countries ; the Chiltern and the
children , who by -and -by will be workers Cotswold Hills towards the South of
too. The butter-making and fowls all England.
give work ; and your day is never long HE GREATEST HEIGHTS
THEIN OUR COUNTRY
OF LAND
enough for all you want to see,
There are thousands of farms like this, A picture on page 187 shows the
some larger, some smaller, over the heights of some of our great mountains,
greater part of our islands. You will those dazzling white cliffs capped with
have noticed the different colours of green at Dover and Beachy Head, as
the fields as you pass quickly by - the well as the grassy downs of Sussex and
deep green of the meadow-lands ; the the Isle of Wight, that we saw on our
tender green or rich golden yellow, journeys by air and sea round the
according to the season, of the corn- South Coast .
fields ; the blue -green of the beans and The Cotswolds and the Chilterns are
turnips ; the pinkish-purple of the the heights from which flow the streams
clover ; the blazing yellow of the that feed the River Thames. The “ Irish
mustard. Guard ” will all answer to their names
Now, the food produced in these as we call the roll from the picture. The
fields by the labour of the farmers and tallest of all , Carrantuohill, overlooks
the thousands of workers whom they the beautiful lakes of Killarney and the
employ all over the country wherever the creeks of Kerry and Cork , as well as
soil is suitable , and on the grassy hill- the gloomy, tempest-scourged country
sides, is collected and sold in the nearest where the thunder of the waves never
market town , or else it is sent straight ceases . From the Peak at the south
to the large town where it is most needed. end of the Pennines we studied that
The shops cannot get enough things grand view over the industry of South
grown at home to supply their cus- Lancashire. From Plynlimmon we saw
tomers, and have to get supplies brought the Severn start on its curved journey.
from over the sea . Our little Mother The heights in the mountain masses of
Country is too small to produce enough Wales and Cumberland seem like chil
food for her large family. dren measuring one against the other,
WHAT THE FACE OF OUR the Welsh Snowdon beating the Cum
COUNTRY IS LIKE brian Scaw Fell by the whole height of
Let us now study the map of Eng. St. Paul's. At last we come, at the top
land and Wales on the next page, which of the picture, to the great giants of the
shows us so clearly where the hills and Highlands, so bare and cold, so grand
mountains are , and the rivers and lakes . and still . Do you remember how, in
A little thought about the face of the our fancy, we slept beneath the shadow
country will help us to know and love of Ben Nevis on the day we steamed
its beauties, as well as to urderstand down the Caledonian Canal ?
the work of the men who spend their WHERE THE GREAT RIVERS OF THE
lives in the fields about the farms or
tending cattle on the hills . If you have ever made putty and clay
First of all , let us notice that range models of hills , and tried experiments
of hills, so often called the backbone of in building dams across running water,
England—the Pennines, that run from you will easily understand how the
the Cumberland group of mountains speed and course of the rivers depend
down the west side of England to the upon the height, direction , and group
Peak district in Derbyshire. Next , let ing of the mountain ranges. Water
us take in the great masses ofmountains, always runs downhill faster if the
rising one above the other, like waves in slope is steep ; slower if there is a
a stormy sea, all over the North of gradual or nearly level course between
Scotland, and nearly all over Wales . In the mountains and the sea .
Ireland the mountains lie chiefly round . So where will you expect to find the
the coast, with a double guard to the longest rivers in the United Kingdom ?
south . Lastly, let us look at the hills in Not in the mountainous masses of the
184
 -THE WORK OF OUR ISLAND HOME
North of Scotland , or in Wales ; not ever stayed in Ireland , or near the
on the west side of the Pennines , west coast of Great Britain , you may
though there are several very useful remember rain falling for a fortnight
short rivers that run into the Irish Sea. at a time, and how moist the air feels
Look rather to the eastward slope of generally.
the country, and find the Thames, On the other side of the Pennines the
rising in the Cotswold Hills near Wales , climate is drier ; and this is one point ,
and flowing gently right across the among many, which decides for the
country, a stream cf pleasure ” as farmer what he shall grow on his land.
well as of business . Grass needs a great deal of rain ; wheat
Now see the Trent draining the Mid- likes sunshine and dryness ; roots , oats,
lands after a long and useful course, and and barley will grow almost anywhere.
the Yorkshire rivers, like the veins of a Let us now travel about on the various
leaf, hastening down amidst beautiful railway lines, and see what glimpses of
scenery and busy towns, to be all farming we can catch as we pass. If
gathered into we take the
the wide Hum Great Western
ber as into a from Padding
stalk . Further ton , and run
north, on the up the Thames
same coast, are Valley, we shall
the rich and see many corn
grimy Tees and fields ; and as
Tyne , and , we pass Read
next, the beau ing we shall be
tiful Tweed, full reminded of the
of silver sal familiar biscuits
mon , and the made there, and
wide mouths, sent out to
or firths, of the places all over
Forth and Tay . the world. At
Back to back first it was the
with the Firth flour of the
of Forth is the district that
mouth of the started the in
Clyde, the most dustry ; but that
important river is not enough to
in Scotland. supply it now.
The other great On our jour
river on the ney to the coast
west coast is of Kent we saw
the Severn . You
This is what the surface of the land is like in our own
many beautiful
will notice its fields of corn .
country. The picture shows the hills and the rivers of England
curved course and Wales in what we call “relief ," making them appear to There is an old
as it pursues stand out from the paper. It is from a map made by saying about
the great map - artists, Messrs. George Philip & Sons.
its way from ( 6
the Isle of
Plynlimmon to the Bristol Channel, Thanet : “ When the country wrings,
)
which is back to back with the great the Island sings,” which means that
port of London. this part of Kent is so dry that, when
Off the west coast of England and the rest of the country is very wet,
Wales is Ireland . The surface has the thin crust of earth over the chalk
often been compared to a saucer, the you will have noticed it in the railway
hills round the edge being the rim . cuttings - receives only enough moisture
From the low ground in the middle to make the crops grow and the people
the water drains off with difficulty, and happy.
the slow rivers often spread out into If we take the Great Eastern or the
chains of lakes : notice particularly the Great Northern line up to York, we
Shannon and the Erne. In many places shall find still miore corn - land in
wet bogs are formed . If you have the eastern counties , and in the

185
 - THE CHILD'S BOOK OF COUNTRIES
wide, fertile plain of York also great
fields of roots . About the lowlands
round the Wash, and in Lincolnshire and
Leicestershire, is much juicy grass for
sheep . We shall notice the sheep feeding
in numbers on the slopes of the Penn ns,
and the beautiful moors and hills of
Yorkshire an 1 Northumberland .
EDINBURGHOFASCOTLE SPLENDID
Crossing the Tweed on a fine, high
bridge, we find ourselves in Scotland,
and soon we are running by the North-
British line through the splendid
farms of the Lothians which lie round
about Edinburgh. Perhaps your por-
ridge is made from oatmeal grown in
these breezy, sunny fields — you know
how oats toss their gay heads in the
dance ? -for there is none better.
Wheat and fruit, too, come from this
fine farming region .
It takes about eight hours to travel
from London to the Scottish capital -
about four hundred miles. Edinburgh
is one of the most beautiful cities in the
world , with its Castle Rock, and its fine
hill and steep crags. It is the second
largest city in Scotland , and has wide,
handsome new streets and fine gardens ;
but much in
oldhouses more
the interesting are the
narrow, winding high THE BROAD YALLEY IN WHICH The
streets
built in the long ago.
We cross next the wonderful Forth
Bridge to the pleasant fields and hills
of Fife . As we whiz across the long
bridge in the train , we feel as if we are
at sea ; and very pretty are the shores
on either side of the Firth of Forth,
and the views up and down it . The
fields in Fife are of all colours - green ,
yellow , brown, with all sorts of crops.
1E GREAT MOUNTAINS AND THE LITTLE
THETUMBLE - DOWN COTTAGES
Soon there is another long bridge,
the bridge over the Firth of Tay, with
a glorious view of blue hills in the
distance up the river, and of Dundee
in front, in a haze of smoke from the pendent people, used to storms and
tall chimneys which stand out against hard work and hard living. Many are
the hills behind. Round about Dundee
are many fruit- farms, and a good deal
of corn is grown . Another fertile dis-
trict lies about the plain by the sea
from Buchan Ness to the Moray Firth .
You will have noticed how the line has
to go out of the direct way, and follow
the river valleys ; and many a splendid
view we shall get of the mountains
TUITINITUUT
186
and rushing rivers -many full of
salmon - as we travel past the granite
city of Aberdeen, so sparkling after a
shower of rain ; past Inverness, the
handsome capital of the Highlands,
onwards to the very north, to Wick
and Th so , as far as the line goes .
There is little farming here : it is so
cold, and often wet and misty , and the
hills are bare and rocky. We must not
be afraid of cattle as we walk about
these hills, for we meet them at every
turn, especially the small, shaggy black
cattle , with long horns. We can tramp
for miles over the springy heather and
turf without being tired , so clear 13 the
air, so fine the surroundings - if it does
not pour with rain . And as for drives ,
one can go on for hours and hours
through glens and passes , every turn of
the road bringing fresh delights - a
waterfall, or a black -looking mountain
lake, or grand masses of rocks.
But if you tell the old driver how
much you admire the brown and purple
giants and their scenery, he says sadly :
They're nae use ," and points to the
empty, tumble -down cottages , once
homes of families now gone to the other
side of the world .
OF LIES
There is less and less work , less and
less living for people here, as more and
more of the land is given up to deer
forests and grouse -moors , and men are
no longer needed to till the patches of
oats and potatoes which once grew in
the sheltered valleys . How they must
long, these emigrants who have settled
in far- off lands, for the glorious sight of
the mist rolling up the valley, for the
fine smell of the peat fire, for the music
of the “ wee burns,” as they hum and
chatter and sing beside the roadside !
lp in the Highlands, where the snow
lies for many months, and there are few
roads and towns, we find sturdy, inde
shepherds, who, with their fine collie
dogs, mind the live stock on the hill
sides . They care much for learning,
and read and think a great deal . The
little children --often fair -haired and
barefooted, though their mothers seem
to be always knitting stockings - some
times have to walk many miles to school .
We will travel back from Inverness
COCK
 THE GREAT HEIGHTS OF GREAT BRITAIN

BEN NEVIS 44,06 feet

The HighestMountain BEN MAC DHUI 4290 feetCAIRN TOUL
in Scotland
CAIRN GORM 4244
4095 n s
a n i
BEN LAWERS Perthshije pi ta
3984 feet r am o un
G M

LOCHNAGAR Aberdeens
9786
SNOWDON Highest Mountain
3571 feet in Wales CARRANTUOHILL 3429 Teet BEN WYVIS Ross
Highest Mountain
Ireland 3429
SCAW FELL Cumberland : BEN LOMOND
MBRANDON 3229 feel Highest Mountain CUILLIN PEAKS
vinEngland 3137 3107
Kerry
3127
SKIDDAW 3022 CADER IDRIS Wales
29591t
isle of Skye HELVELLYN 9055 1
BRECKNOCK BEACONS ('umberlund
S.Wales
MUILREA Mayo
26901 Ireland CHEViỘT 2676
ERRICAL Donegal
PLYNLIMMON Wales 2274
2469

YES TOR Devonshire THEPEAK Derbyshire

SNAE FELL Isle of Man
oo
209961
m 2001 2088 feel
rt
Da DUNKERRY BEACON SLIEVE BLOOM Mountains
4707R Ireland
oor Devonshire
Edm
YORKSHIRE MOORS
BROWN WILLY MALVERN HILLS
Cornwall 1395 THE WREKIN Solop
1364 4320
COTSWOLD HILLS
LEITH HILL North Downs 1134.1
9670 CHILTERN HILLS
905
SOUTH DOWNS
SECATHARINESDOWN 814. At
1780ft
Isle of Wight BEACHY HEAD SHAKESPEARES CLIFF Dover
596 576 feet
This

Mountains are always described as so many feet high measured from the level of the sea to the mountain -top. There
is a machine that can tell us exactly the height of any part of a mountain . Because all the mountains are measured
from the level of the sea, it often happens that some mountains which are really very high do not look so, as the sur
rounding land may also be high above sea -level. But in this picture we see exactly what the mountains of England
and Scotland would look like if they could all be brought together-Ben Nevis, Cairn Gorm , and other Scottish moun
tains towering above all the rest. Visitors to London are always impressed by the splendid building of St. Paul's
Cathedral, with its beautiful dome ; but it would take eleven St. Paul's Cathedrals , placed one above the other, to
reach the top of Ben Nevis, the highest point on which we can stand in Great Britain. At the bottom of the picture
are Nelson's Column in Trafalgar Square, Eddystone Lighthouse, the Houses of Parliament, and the Monument,
erected in memory of the Great Fire of London, showing how they compare with the hills and mountains.

187
 Amenrantri
THE CHILD'S BOOK OF COUNTRIES
by the Caledonian Canal, through the In beautiful Wales we shall find that :
valley of Glenmore. Do you notice
how this valley divides the great moun-
tain masses of the North of Scotland in
a slanting direction, from north -east to
south -west, and how the great, broad
valley to the south of it — which is black
with the numbers of lines on the railway
map on page 65 —takes the same slant ?
In this broad valley lie nearly all the
business and wealth of Scotland.
LINGERINO
NATURE AMONG
IN THE GLORIES OP
It takes a steamer a whole day to
pass through the three lakes and the
chain of locks , called Neptune's Ladder,
between Inverness and Loch Linnhe ;
but at last we come to the end of the
canal, and sleep under the shadow of
Ben Nevis , the highest mountain of the
United Kingdom .
Happy are we if we can linger about
beautiful Perthshire, which all lies in
the basin of the River Tay. We can
take steamer trips from Perth to
Dundee , where the Tay is as beautiful
as the far - famed Rhine ; on the fine,
breezy lakes , such as Loch Tay and
Loch Katrine, where we shall see
Ellen's Isle and the Silver Strand. Who
does not also know the beauties of the
rocks and trees in the grand Pass of the
Trossachs ? Perhaps , too , you have
seen, amongst the nation's pictures, the
graceful silver birches painted by
MacWhirter; the Highland cattle, in
the mountain mists, painted by Peter
Graham . The poets and the painters
will help you to see and understand
the glory of “ Bonnie Scotland.”
Many sheep feed on the southern up-
lands of Scotland , among the lovely dales
and hills so dear to Sir Walter Scott and
the ploughman poet Burns , and men-
tioned so often by them in their songs.
It is chiefly pasture-land on the slopes
of the Cumberland and Pennine Hills .
HE SHEEP ON THE HILLS OF WALES , AND
THETHE PASTURE - LAND OF IRELAND
Further south, in Cheshire and Shrop-
shire , we find a great dairy country,
famous for cheese . South of that,
again, we run into the beautiful orchards
of apples, pears , and cherries which
have made Herefordshire and Somerset-
shire famous for fruit and cider, and
which, together with the hop -gardens,
make us think again of Kent , on the op-
posite side of England, below London .
DECOURUENDOURI XEMBO
188
the riches of the farmer lie chiefly in
his flocks of sheep on the hills, minded
often by barefooted girls and boys,
with their faithful, clever dogs. How
you would enjoy hearing those Welsh
children sing ! Many of them have
such lovely voices.
Let us now take a steamer from
Bristol to Cork, or, a shorter passage
still, from Fishguard to Waterford .
The boats we meet coming out from
these ports, and others along the coast
of Ireland, are taking to England some
of the things that the sister island
furnishes for the nation's larder.
Ireland has been called one immense
pasture-land, because so much grass is
grown in the damp districts where
there are heavy showers all day, and
)
little ones between .” The “ Emerald
Isle , as Ireland is called, is famous
chiefly for butter, bacon , cattle, and
horses . At the back of the ports, and
in some other parts of the country, are
ploughed lands for crops , as well as
grass . Potatoes, oats, and roots are
the chief of these . Behind Dublin , the
fine capital of Ireland, just opposite
Holyhead, are many nursery gardens
growing vegetables for the city.
TH1E STONY GROUND ON WHICH
EPEASANTS CAN HARDLY LIVE
IRISH
There are not so many railway lines
in Ireland as in England ; and often
a journey to an out-of-the-way place
has to be finished on a coach or on
a car, in which the passengers sit
sideways, back to back.
The sodden, dark bogs in the middle
of the country—where it is so difficult
for the rivers and rain to drain away,
as there is so little slope - take up
a great deal of the surface of Ireland,
though in some places the peat on
them is dry enough to cut and use for
fuel , as is done on some of the moors
in the Highlands of Scotland. You
will often see the peasants cutting it,
and propping up the square blocks
to dry before carrying them home in
baskets . As coal is very scarce, this
peat is of great use.
In many parts of Ireland, especially
towards the west, there is much stony
and poor ground, where it is very
difficult to grow anything, even enough
potatoes and oats for the poor Irish
peasants to live upon .
DOUDOUNT
 Gumtunt
-THE WORK OF OUR ISLAND HOME
You will notice from the map on of the Old World -- for porpoises and
page 64 how the sea runs into the land bottle-nosed whales come a-fishing too.
along the west coasts of Ireland and The eastern shores of Ireland are
Scotland, making them look like the flatter, on the whole, and more sandy
sharp teeth of a saw . The rolling waves than the western . We see fishing
of the same great Atlantic beat along carried on everywhere, and many
these shores, and the shores of Norway steamers plying busily between the
too ; and in storms they dash in fury ports on either side of the Irish Sea.
against the rocky cliffs, and carry away One of the most splendid parts of the
all the softer parts within reach. coast is on the north -east corner. The
Can you fancy what the roar is, on a old story runs that once upon a time the
really windy, stormy day, when one giants who lived there planned to build
stands on a bold headland in Cork or a raised road from Ireland to Scotland,
Kerry, or further north ? Perhaps you so as to pass over dryshod. But the
would like it better on a calm summer causeway was never finished ; and the
evening, when the blue water laps great six -sided pillars, all fitting wonder
gently at the feet of the giant cliffs , or fully into each other, form the platform
runs , as blue- green as a peacock's breast , of the Irish end of the giants' work.

narono
XT
TEXT:

THE LANES OF IRELAND : A PICTURE OF IRISH PEASANTS GOSSIPING IN GALWAY

This picture of life in Ireland , painted by Sir Ernest Waterlow, R.A. , hangs in the Tate Gallery, London.
up the narrow creeks shaded by trees ?
You watch the sunset, with nothing
between you and the glorious blaze of Canal, are pillars of the same-shaped
yellow , crimson, and purple, as the
sun — the giver of all colour-seems to
sink into the vast, mysterious ocean.
The misty glow on the islands off
the shore makes them look too lovely
and wonderful to be solid earth , such
as we live upon.
Happily for the dwellers along this
shore, there is a harvest for them to
gather which needs neither sowing nor
tilling , only boats and nets, and brave
men to face the weather. It must be
exciting work sometimes fishing along
that grand west coast — the very end
ச NTLTTLrRLEELI ண
INETT
189
In the little island of Staffa, not
far from the south end of the Caledonian
kind of rock . If this be the Scotch end
of the causeway, you will see that the
giants did not choose the nearest way
across the water.
The water is the chief highway for
all the coming and going and trading
up and down the west coast of Scotland.
You will notice how few railway lines
there are. So there are boats and
yachts of every kind sailing in all
directions. Even thesheep are passengers
sometimes , and it is an interesting pic
ture to see them as they go from one
island to another for change of pasture.
ROZTOTT TUULUTUOTTURUUN COULD
 1

- THE CHILD'S BOOK OF COUNTRIES

You will wonder at the countless When you think over your visit to
islands , and will see the mountainous the farm , the delights of watching the
and poor soil of the mainland as well daily work , the glowing forge, the saw
as of the islands, where the crofters mill turned by a running stream , the
have as hard a task to make a living sails of the windmill flying round in
by spinning and fishing and cultivating the breeze, you may feel quite sure
their fields as the Irish peasants in that a country life is the best and most
Donegal and Galway. interesting one possible.
BUSY SCENE THE SEA- BIRDS
THELOOK DOWN UPON But it can be dull work following the
plough from morning till night , or
Fishing is the chief occupation, and digging roots hour after hour, or
fine indeed are the herrings caught getting up in the dark and cold to tend
in the beautiful sea -lochs. You will the animals ; and often the men find
notice the Outer Hebrides , which form it hard enough to earn money to clothe
a sheltering bar to the coast . Fishing and feed their families.
is the main work here, too, and also What a change for them if they join
around the red sandstone cliffs of the those streams of workers we saw in the
Orkneys , and still further north about smoky districts where coal is found !
the Shetlands. Here are seals basking No more working by hand, or with the
in the bays, sheep feeding on the help of water and wind, for here, as
uplands ; here, too, the brave, strong we have already seen , there is a great
little ponies , not much larger than a giant power which sets the machinery
big dog, caper about and thrive in their in motion in the mills and factories ;
thick , rough coats in spite of the cold. and this giant is tireless so long as he
The busy women of the islands are to is fed and kept in order. His food is 1

be seen knitting all sorts of garments
from the soft, fine Shetland wool . Over
them all circle thousands of sea- birds.
All along the east coast of Great
Britain, from Wick to Deal, the fishing
fleets put out to the shallow grounds
of the North Sea, whence they bring
cod, herrings, plaice, and other fish to
send off by train to London, or to the
nearest market where it is needed. The
ice in which the fish is packed comes
from Norway, across the North Sea.
IE TOWNS BY THE SEA , AND THE MEN
THEWHO LIVE BY CATCHING FISH
As we come to the fishing towns,
Grimsby, and Yarmouth, and Deal, the
" oilies," or oilskins, that the men wear,
the jerseys and the great sea- coats,
show what sort of weather fishermen
expect. Sometimes they come back
with a good catch, sometimes with
a poor one ; sometimes, if it turns very fields, and a very large and important
rough , their boats and nets are broken
up and lost.
We have now had a glimpse of the
beauties on the face of our Mother
Country ; we have seen many thou-
sands of our fellow -countrymen at
work in the fields, on the hillsides,
These
round the coasts , and at sea.
belong to the army of helpers who
provide, in our own country, our daily send away many millions of tons to
bread and butter, meat and vegetables, other countries that need it .
fruit and fish .
190
coal , which men must get from pits in
the earth , bring to the surface , and send
to the places where it is needed.
THE GREATUPCELLARSFOR
WHERE
US
NATURE
It is fortunate for our country that
kind Nature laid down , ages ago in her
cellars, rich stores of the precious black
diamonds. It is easy to put your finger
on the chief coalfields of Great Britain
as you study the railway map.
Wherever the lines are thickest - except
round London — there coal is found and
worked . In that deep , wide valley 1
about the Forth and Clyde coal is
worked ; in the district about the Tees
and Tyne on the east coast is plenty of
coal ; on both sides of the Pennine
backbone there are many collieries .
In the Midlands, too, are several coal
one in the South of Wales. Ireland has
very little coal .
There are many thousands of men
who spend their lives in the dark of
the coal-mines, getting up not only
enough coal to provide all the homes
that can afford to buy it and all the
hungry giants of steam that work on it
in the United Kingdom , but enough to
The next story of our land is on page 261 .
 The Child's Book of
‫تم سے‬ GOLDEN DEEDS

WHAT THESE STORIES TELL US

WEgirl who many
JE read of kinds of heroism in these stories. The first tells us of a
made her name ring through the world in a single day-Grace
Darling, who faced an angry sea and risked her own life to save the lives of
many who were perfect strangers to her. We read again of a boy who saved
the wholc of his family by bearing pain bravely. Another story tells us of a
faithful Chinese servant who saved his mistress and her child from the hands
of wicked men, and starved himself to give them food ; and still another
tale is that of a merchant who saw a man drowning and jumped into the
river to save him , to find that he was saving his own son. Such stories
help to make us brave, and to understand the goodness that is in the world.

THE HEROISM OF GRACE DARLING

Darling, tended the
A FAST rising storm
overtook the
CONTINUED FROM PAGE 8
lamps, living with
steamer Forfarshire as his wife and his
she reached the open sea oft daughter Grace. Neithe of these
Spurn Head on September 6th, three had slept through the
1838 , on her way from Hull to night, for the waves had been
Dundee. thundering upon the rocks and
In the fairest weather this ship, dashing over the lantern high
o
with her leaky boilers, was none too above the sea . o

safe, but as the storm gathered in
0
fury, and she rolled and tossed amid
the mountainous seas, her boilers
were strained, and great rents were
made, through which water poured
and put out the fires, making the
vessel unmanageable. The crew tried
to use her sails, so as to keep the ship
out at sea , but they were quickly
blown to shreds. As night fell, they
tossed and drifted in the dark at the
mercy of the storm , and at midnight
the great Farne light, off the North-
umberland coast , was seen , warning
them of their terrible danger. For
at this point rocks that go down a
hundred fathoms deep lie off the
coast .
Upon these rocks the shin , with her
terrified crew, was dashed and cut in
two. The stern part sank in deep
water with over forty souls ; whilst
the bow, with nine sailors and pas.
sengers clinging to the wreck , was fast
on the rocks, swept by the waves and
buffeted by the storm.
When it was light enough, Grace
mounted the lighthouse tower with
the telescope . Far away in the
raging sea were the nine poor souls
clinging to the wreck. Knowing full
well that, with a rising tide and the
storm still growing, they must perish ,
the brave girl determined to try to
save them . Her father and mother
tried to persuade her not to go out
to what seemed certain death , but she
said : “ If father will not go with me ,
I will go alone.” Seeing that she was
ermined, her mother helped to
launch the lighthouse boat , in which
the brave girl and her brave father
rowed towards the wreck and the
men who were in such dire peril of
their lives . Undaunted by danger,
battling with the winds and the angry
waters , they at last reached the
wreck , and brought the sufferers back
in safety to the lighthouse.
The story of Grace Darling's heroism
spread quickly throughthe country and
through the world. Generous people o

It is easy to imagine their terror as
they clung there, waiting for the dawn
and praying for help. As the dawn
broke they could see, a mile away,
the Longstone lighthouse , built on the
outer island of the group , where a
weather-beaten old sailor, named
sent money and presents to the brave
girl, whom many people came long
distances to see . But she lived only
four years after this to enjoy her fame
and good fortune, and when she died
they laid her to sleep within sight
of the scene of her golden deed .

191
 000

THE MAN WHO SAVED HIS SON

The merchant never hesitated. He
A FRENCH
taken merchant namedyears
ill in the early Labatwas
of the forgot his age , his illness, his comfortable
last century , and retired to a beautiful house, his own safety, and, hurrying
country house on the banks of the down, he dived in after the drowning
River Adour. Here, one morning, stranger. Such is the call of Humanity.
his gaze was attracted by a rider He was a good swimmer, but the
struggling with a restive horse on heavily-booted horseman was hard to
the opposite bank. The old iner- save, and it was only after a terrible
chant, who was wearing a dressing: struggle that the merchant succeeded in
gown, peered across the distance, andbringing him safely to shore.
watched the battle between man and Then , with a cry which must have
horse with anxious eyes. Suddenly he startled the morning echoes, the grand
was horrified to see the rider hurled old merchant exclaimed fervently :
violently from the back of the plunging “Sacred Humanity, what do I not
horse, and thrown into the river. owe you ? I have saved my son ! ”
THE SERVANT WHO SAVED HIS MISTRESS
ONn the
a small island off Australia, inside
Great Barrier Reef, North
the woman and child into it , and, taking
a jug of water and a little food, paddled
Queensland, an Englishman was one away to an uninhabited islet, three or
day obliged to visit a distant town for four miles distant . From there they saw
supplies , leaving his wife and their baby the natives destroy the little house.
in the care of their Chinese servant. So long as she lived the woman kept
While he was away , the servant came a diary of events , writing how the
in great alarm , saying that the natives , Chinaman made them as comfortable
who were very fierce and cruel, had come as possible, and how finally, after many
from the mainland, and were marching days of denial, he went off by himself
down the island towards their house . and hid in the bush, where later he
What could be done ? There was no was found , starved to death, wrapped
hiding-place on the little island , and the in his old ragged quilt.
master had gone away in the only boat. Alas ! before help came, the mother
The Chinaman hastily launched a huge and her babe died , too ; and all were
copper vessel used for cooking , helped found, with the diary that told the story .
THE BOY WHO SAVED HIS FAMILY
BOUT two hundred years ago, the and, suspecting that they had hidden
A Huguenots , who were the Protes. their children under the vegetables,
tants of France, were being bitterly he rode up and said with a
6
sneer :
persecuted for their religious beliefs. “ Going to market, are you ? Then I .

In the village of Thorigne lived a weaver
named Daniel Bonnet. He had a wife
and three children, the youngest being
a little boy of five years old .
As they were Huguenots, suffering
great hardships, they decided to leave
France and go to America, where
they would be free to worship God
as they liked .
When all was ready they started off ;
but in order to get away safely they
put their three children on the back of
a donkey and covered them over with
vegetables. Then they set off as though
they were going to market ; for if it
had been known that they were going
they would have been stopped.
Not long after they had left the
village , one of the soldiers saw them ,
192
will try if your carrots are tender.” With
that he drove his sword into the load
on the donkey's back with all his might,
but, hearing no sound , he thought he
had made a mistake, and galloped off.
We can imagine the agony which
the poor parents felt. They dare not
stop to look what had happened, but
had to go on until they were far away
from everyone, and out of sight. When
at last they took off the vegetables,
they found their little boy had been
stabbed through the thigh. The little
fellow looked up at them , and said
with pride : " But I did not speak,
mother," and then fainted away.
Thanks to his courage, the family
were able to escape across the sea, and
to found a new home in a happier land. ,
THE HEROINE OF LONGSTONE LIGHTHOUSE

ZXman
me
Novo
mm
me
THE LIGHTHOUSE ON FARNE ISLANDS FROM WHICH GRACE DARLING ROWED TO THE WRECK

Grace Darling was one of the bravest girls who ever lived. Her father kept the lighthouse on Farne
Islands, where, in the stormy night of September 6th , 1838, the steamer Forfarshire was wrecked. Through
that bitter night nine men and women clung to the wreckage as it tossed on the rocks, swept by the
waves and buffeted by the storm. In the morning , as soon as it was light, Grace Darling mounted the
lighthouse tower with the telescope. On the rocks in the raging sea she saw the wreck . She launched
the lighthouse boat, and, with her father, rowed through the storm to where nine people were in peril
of their lives. They reached the wreck and brought the sufferers back in safety to the lighthouse.
Grace Darling's story is told on page 191
193
 TOOTED
HOW ALBAN GAVE UP HIS LIFE TO THE ROMANS
ACCORDING to the old story, itwas
in the third century that Alban
lived . The Romans ruled in Britain ,
and the persecution under the Emperor
Diocletian was raging fiercely in our
land .
Alban was a kindly Roman, living at
Verulam , who gave shelter to a Christian
minister named Amphibolus, whose
life was sought by the persecutors.
The godly life and cheerful faith of
the fugitive minister so deeply im-
pressed Alban that he sought
understand the religion which gave
his guest such great courage .
ST. ALBANS CATHEDRAL, CROWNING THE HILL ON WHICH ENGLAND'S FIRST MARTYR DIED
day he saw the soldiers drawing near
to his house.
They have tracked the deer to
9
his hiding-place,” said Alban ; “ but
though the dogs have scented blood, golden deed of faith
they shall not lap it from my floor.”
He changed clothes with Amphi- has written :
bolus, and the hunted minister fled .
Alban gave himself up to the soldiers
and was brought before the judge , who
found out the mistake. The judge was
very angry, and declared that Alban
ought to die , because he had sheltered a
rebel. But he offered him life on con-
dition that he would sacrifice to the
idols . But Alban refused .
)
" Of what family art thou ? ” asked
the judge .
tomar OSCUEDUDUZLULO
non LLC
6
“ By my parents I am called Alban ;
I worship the living God , the Creator
of all," he answered .
(6
“ Then , if you would enjou long life,
sacrifice to
))
the gods."
“ Nay, ” said Alban, “ the gods you
worship are no gods. I cannot bow
down to worship what is worthless. "
Then they scourged him, and led
him forth to be beheaded . The place
was a hill crowned with flowers, and,
passing through the throngs who had
to assembled, Alban knelt and prayed
for himself and for his foes. The
One headsman was so melted by the prayer
that he refused to do his office, and
another was called in, by whom both
were beheaded .
Thus was Alban tried , and of his
one of the
greatest of our poets, Wordsworth ,
England's first martyr, whom no threats
could shake.
Self - offered victim , for his friend he died
And for the faith : nor shall his name
forsake
That hill , whose flowery platform seems to rise
By nature decked for holiest sacrifice.
The old name of Verulam was
changed to St. Albans ; and on the
flower - crowned hill now stands the
stately shrine shown on this page.
The next Golden Deeds begin on page 299.
194
 The Child's Book of
POETRY

WHAT WE SHOULD KNOW OF POETRY

IN things that we should know about poetry : the various kinds of verse, the
differences between the poetry of the great poets, the old poetry and the new poetry ,
and so on. We can understand great poems without knowing all about the different
styles of poetry, just as we can understand a steam -engine without knowing the
names of all its parts ; but we ought to know something about the kind of
literature we are reading, and these little lessons in poetry will help us better
to understand the full purpose of the poet and the full meaning of the poem .

THE DIFFERENT KINDS OF VERSE

Othe formsof verseof
NLY a very few ca poetry, and much of
CONTINUED FROM PAGE 48
it would not be set to
3D *
need be explained or music . A verypopular
illustrated here ; but these few form is called the sonnet. This
are important, as you will under is the most beautiful style of all
stand what is meant by them, when the smaller poems, but it is not
their names occur in other reading, very suitable for poetry that
if you learn them now. would interest children . A sonnet

83.-03
Strictly speaking, a single line of must have fourteen lines, neither
poetry is a verse, but usually any

8
more nor less . Some of our finest
number of lines over two are called a poetry is in the form of these little
verse ; three, four, five, six , even twenty fourteen - line poems.
lines, or more, may be a verse. The elegy is another form of
Verses in poetry are like steps in a lyric poetry, and was originally a
stair ; they ought to lead on to the funeral poem . Hence , any poem
end. Each verse should take us a step about the death of a great man
nearer the end of the poem . Look, for is called an elegy, especially if it
instance , at “ The Battle of Blen- mourns for his death . But a solemiz
heim ," on page 198, and you will see poem expressing the sadness of life
it has eleven verses, each of six lines , be considered an elegy,
may also fam
and each verse moves the story on a like the ous Elegy written
step. In “ The Wind in a Frolic ,” in a Country Churchyard ,” which
on page 197, there are verses of will be printed in due course in our
different lengths. Another name for pages.
a verse is a stanza . The ode, the psalm , and the hymr.
Short verses of only two lines, or are also other forms of lyric poetry .
any pair of lines ending with the The ode was originally meant to
same rhyme occurring in a longer verse, be sung , and may be called a
are called couplets. This is a couplet : song of praise addressed to a great
man, to a great nation , or to any
Twinkle, twinkle, little star ; thing living or dead that can be
How I wonder what you are !
" addressed in a poetic way, for
(6
Any four rhymed lines of poetry instance,, “ An Ode to Spring." Odes
form a quatrain . The verses in are not now written to be sung ; but,
)
“ Queen Mab ," on page 196, are quat- of course, psalms are meant for sing
rains . We have already learned what ing, and hymns also .
lyric poetry is. You will remember that There are a great many other kinds
it is chiefly poetry which is capable of of poetry ; but we need not trouble 00

being sung, as it began by men com- our young heads with more than
posing verses to sing to the accompani- these, as the verses we shall print in
ment of a harp or lyre. There are, this book will be , for the most part ,
however, many divisions of lyric simple in form .

195
 THE CHILD'S BOOK OF POETRYMAS
THE LITTLE STAR
Jane Taylor was one of a family distinguished for their
literary work in the first half of last century. With her
sister Ann she wrote several books of simple hymns and
verses which were great favourites in the young days of
the older folk now living. " The Little Star " is one of the
prettiest and simplest of Jane Taylor's poems for children.
LE,I twinkle,little
TWINK
How wonder what you ; !
starare
Up above the world , so high ,
Like a diamond in the sky.
When the blazing sun is gone,
When he nothing shines upon ,
Then you show your little light,
Twinkle, twinkle, all the night.
Then the traveller in the dark,
Thanks you for your tiny spark ;
He could not tell which way to go
If you did not twinkle so.
In the dark blue sky you keep,
And often through my curtains peep ;
For you never shut your eye
Till the sun is in the sky.
As your bright and tiny spark
Lights the traveller in the dark,
Though I know not what you are ,
Twinkle, twinkle, little star.
QUEEN MAB
Thomas Hood , who died in 1845, was a very gifted poet
and brave man. He wrote several poems that will never be
forgotten, and when battling with ill-health and disease he
wrote many comic poems which have set everybody laughing
who has read them , and will make many more laugh in the
days to come. For he could be bumorous as well as
pathetic, gay as well as sad. In " Queen Mab ” he
is neither , but just fanciful, which suits young folk
best of all. Queen Mab, of course, reigns over the fairies.
A LITTLE fairy comes at night,
Her eyes are blue, her hair is brown ,
With silver spots upon her wings,
And from the moon she flutters down .
She has a little silver wand ,
And when a good child goes to bed
She waves her wand from left to right,
And makes a circle round its head .
196
And then it dreams of pleasant things,
Of fountains filled with fairy fish ,
And trees that bear delicious fruit ,
And bow their branches at a wish :
Of arbours filled with dainty scents
From lovely flowers that never fade ;
Bright flies that glitter in the sun ,
And glow-worms shining in the shade.
And singing birds with gifted tongues,
For singing songs and telling tales,
And pretty dwarfs to show the way
Through fairy hills and fairy dales.
But when a bad child goes to bed ,
From left to right she weaves her rings,
And then it dreams all through the night
Of only ugly, horrid things !
Then wicked children wake and weep ,
And wish the long black gloom away ;
But good ones love the dark , and find
The night as pleasant as the day.
ABOU BEN ADHEM AND THE ANGEL
This famous poem by Leigh Hunt is not to be taken as
teaching us that it is better to love our ſellow -men than
to love God. You might think that , at first reading.
The real purpose of the poem is to teach us that
while there are many people who are ready to proclaim
that they love the Lord , not so many are ready to love
their fellow -men . Yet God is best worshipped by our
loving our fellow -men , and the Lord loves them that do so .
ABOUBEN
Awoke ADHEM (may his tribe increase!)
one night from a deep dream
of peace,
And saw , within the moonlight of the room ,
Making it rich, and like a lily in bloom ,
An angel writing in a book of gold ;
Exceeding peace had made Ben Adhem bold ,
And to the Presence in the room he said ,
“ What writest thou ? ” The vision rais'd his
head,
And with a look made all of sweet accord ,
Answer'd, “ The names of those who love the
Lord . ”
“ And is mine one ? ” said Abou . " Nay, not
so ,"
Replied the angel. Abou spoke more low,
But cheerily still ; and said, “ I pray thee,
then ,
Write me as one who loves his fellow -men.”
The angel wrote, and vanish'd. The next
night
He came again with a great wakening light,
And show'd the names whom love of God had
bless ' ,
And lo ! Ben Adhem's name led all the rest .
THE NORTH WIND
TheAnd
northwewinddothblow
shall have snow, ,
And what will poor Robin do then, poor thing ?
He'll sit in a barn ,
And keep himself warın ,
And hide his head under his wing, poor thing.
DOLZER DOLILEDOLULU
DOUDOCCO DUTE U
 ULELLAZCOITO

THE WIND IN A FROLIC

By WILLIAM HOWITT
The wind one morning sprang up from sleep,
Saying, “ Now for a frolic ! now for a leap !
Now for a madcap galloping chase !
I'll make a commotion in every place ! ”
So it swept with аa bustle right through a great town,
Cracking the signs and scattering down
Shutters ; and whisking, with merciless squalls,
Old women's bonnets and gingerbread stalls.
There never was heard a much lustier shout
As the apples and oranges trundled about ;
And the urchins that stand with their thievish eyes
For ever on watch , ran off each with a prize .
Then away to the field it went blustering and
humming,
And the cattle all wondered whatever was coming ;
It plucked by the tails the grave matronly cows,
And tossed the colts' manes all over their brows ;
Till , offended at such an unusual salute,
w They all turned their backs, and stood sulkyand mute.
Sº on it went capering and playing its pranks,
Whistling with reeds on the broad river's banks,
Puffing the birds as they sat on the spray,
Or the travellers grave on the king's highway.
It was not too nice to hustle the bags
Of the beggar, and flutter his dirty rags.
' Twas so bold that it feared not to play its joke
With the doctor's wig or the gentleman's cloak .
Through the forest it roared, and cried gaily,“ Now ,
b You sturdy old oaks, l'll make you bow !”
o And it made them bow without more ado ,
Orit cracked their great branches through and through.
Then it rushed like a monster on cottage and farm ,
Striking their dwellers with sudden alarm ;
And they ran out like bees in a midsummer swarm .
hotele

There were dames with their kerchiefs tied over

their caps ,
To see if their poultry were free from mishaps ;
The turkeys they gobbled , the geese screamed aloud,
a
And the hens crept to roost in a terrified crowd ;
There was rearing of ladders and logs laying on ,
Where the thatch from the roof threatened soon
to be gone .

But the wind had swept on , and had met in a lane

With a schoolboy, who panted and struggled in vain ;
For it tossed him and twirled him then passed, and
he stood
With his hat in a pool and his shoes in the mud.
THEN away went the wind in its holiday glee ;
And now it was far on the billowy sea,
And the lordly ships felt its staggering blow ,
And the little boats darted to and fro .
But lo ! it was night, and it sank to rest
On the sea- birds' rock in the gleaming west ;
La ning to think, in its fearful fun ,
How little of mischief it really had done.
ID DOLOR

197
 THE CHILD'S BOOK OF POETRY
(6
THE BATTLE OF BLENHEIM “ It was the English ,” Kaspar cried ,
The great battle of Blenheim, a town on the River Danube, “ Who put the French to rout ;
wasfought on August 13th, 1704, Marlborough commanding
theEnglish army allied with the Germans against the French
But what they fought each other for
and Bavarians. It was “ a famous victory ," but 37,000 lives I could not well make out .
were lost. The poem was written by Robert Southey, who But everybody said ,” quoth he,
was made Poet Laureate of England in 1813, though we “ That ' twas a famous victory .
cannot call him a great poet. Bymeans ofa very simple talk
between an old man and a little boy and girl, who had found “ My father lived at Blenheim then,
the skull of one of the slain soldiers a hundred years after Yon little stream hard by ;
the battle, the poet shows us what a terrible curse is war .
They burn’d his dwelling to the ground ,
It was a summerevening, And he was forced to fly :
Old Kaspar's work was done, So with his wife and child he fled ,
And he before his cottage door Nor had he where to rest his head .
Was sitting in the sun ;
And by him sported on the green “ With fire and sword the country round
His little grandchild , Wilhelmine. Was wasted far and wide ;
She saw her brother Peterkin And many a childing mother then
Roll something large and round, And new -born baby died :
Which he beside
the rivulet But things like that , you know, must be,
In playing there had found ; At every famous victory.
He came to ask what he had found ,
That was so large and smooth , and round . “ They say it was aа shocking sight
After the field was won ;
Old Kaspar took it from the boy, For many thousand bodies here
Who stood expectant by ;
And then the old man shook his head, Lay rotting in the sun :
And with a natural sigh But things like that, you know, must be,
“ ' Tis some poor fellow's skull,” said he, After a famous victory.
“ Who fell in the great victory. “ Great praise the Duke of Marlbro' won,
“ I find them in my garden , for And our good Prince Eugene.”
There's many here about ; “ Why, 'twas a very wicked thing !
And often when I go to plough Said little Wilhelmine.
The ploughshare turns them out ; Nay, nay, my little girl," quoth he,
For many thousand men ,” said he, " It was a famous victory !
“ Were slain in that great victory. '
“ Now tell us what 'twas all about," “ And everybody praised the Duke
Young Peterkin he cries, Who this great fight did win .” 9
And little Wilhelmine looks up But what good came of it at last ? ”
With wonder -waiting eyes. Quoth little Peterkin.
“ Now tell us all about the war, Why , that I cannot tell,” said he,
60
And what they fought each other for." But ' twas a famous victory ."

23

" 'Tis some poor fellow's skull," said he, “ Who fell in that great victory."
198
 -THE CHILD'S BOOK OF POETRY

VLOR
‫דיווי‬

lilii
(dewer
MU

“ I remember, I remember
The house where I was born . "

I REMEMBER , I REMEMBER THE HOMES OF ENGLAND

In this famous poem by Thomas Hood the author seeks to
endear to us the pure joys of childhood, the happiest years
of all . Memory is the friend of old people, for it enables
them to recall the happy days of long ago, days which now
exist for all boys and girls. There is a tone of sadnessin
Hood's poem , as he knew sorrow and much ill-health when
he was a man . A happy, healthy childhood is the most la: t .
ing of all the joys on earth ; something worth remembering.
REMEMBER, I remember
I The house where I was born,
The little window, where the sun
Came peeping in at morn ;
He never came a wink too soon,
Nor brought too long a day ;
But now I often wish the night
Had borne my breath away !
I remember, I remember
The roses, red and white,
The violets and the lily -cups,
Those flowers made of light :
The lilacs , where the robin built,
And where my brother set
The laburnum on his birthday
The tree is living yet !
I remember, I remember
Where I was used to swing ,
And thought the air must rush as fresh
To swallows on the wing:
My spirit flew in feathers then,
That is so heavy now ;
And summer pools could hardly cool
The fever on my brow !
I remember , I remember
The fir trees, dark and high ;
I used to think their slender tops
Were close against the sky :
It was a childish ignorance,
But now ' tis little joy
To know I'm farther off from Heaven
Than when I was a boy.
Mrs. Hemans was a favourite poetess in the days of our
grandfathers. She died in 1835. Though not a great writer,
yetshe composed many beautiful poems, which will not soon
be forgotten, as her words were sweet and her thoughts were
full of kindness and love. “ The Homes of England " is a
poria which ought to make us all feel proud of our nativeland.
The stately homesofEngland I
How beautiful they stand ,
Amidst their tall ancestral trees,
O'er all the pleasant land !
The deer across their greensward bound,
Through shade and sunny gleam ;
And the swan glides past them with the sound
Of some rejected stream .
The merry homes of England !
Around their hearths by night,
What gladsome looks of household love
Meet in their ruddy light !
There woman's voice flows forth in song,
Or childish tale is told ,
Or lips move tunefully along
Some glorious page of old.
The blessed homes of England I
How softly on their bowers
Is laid the holy quietness
That breathes from Sabbath hours !
Solemn , yet sweet, the church -bell's chime
Floats through their woods at morn ;
All other sounds, in that still time,
Of breeze and leaf are born .
The cottage homes of England I
By thousands on her plains,
They are smiling o'er the silvery brooks,
And round the hamlet's fanes.
Through glowing orchards forth they peep.
Each from its nook of leaves ;
And fearless there the lowly sleep,
As the birds beneath their eaves.

199
 amarmamma
THE CHILD'S BOOK OF POETRY
The free, fair homes of England ! THE VIOLET
Long , long , in hut and hall , It is more than eighty years since Jane Taylor, who
wrote this little poem , died . She wrote many poems for
May hearts of native proof be reared children, and though most of them read a little old .
To guard each hallowed wall ! fashioned now - for ideas change just as dresses do
And green for ever be the groves, the simple teaching of such poems as “ The Violet "
is as much needed in our own days as eighty years ago.
And bright the flowery sod,
When first the child's glad spirit loves Down in agreen and shady bed,
A modest violet grew,
Its country and its God I
Its stalk was bent , it hung its head,
THE FATHERLAND As if to hide from view .
While it is right that we should be proud of our And yet it was a lovely flower,
native land , it is also right that we should not admire No colours bright and fair ;
anything which is not nobleand true, even if it is found in It might have graced a rosy bower,
our native land. The true “ Fatherland " means any country , Instead of hiding there.
anywhere , that can show deeds of mercy , justice, and
brotherly love. That is what James Russell Lowell, the Yet there it was content to bloom ,
famous American poet, who wrote this poem , wants us to In modest tints arrayed ;
feel. In a word , we have to admire these grand qualities
wherever we find them , be it in England or elsewhere. And there diffused its sweet perfume,
Within the silent shade.
WHERE is the true man's fatherland ? Then let me to the valley go,
Is it where he by chance is born ? This pretty flower to see ;
Doth not the yearning spirit scorn That I may also learn to grow
In such scant borders to be spanned ? In sweet humility.
Oh yes ! his fatherland must be
As the blue heaven, wide and free ! 1

Is it alone where freedom is,

Where God is God and man is man ?
Doth he not claim a broader span
For the soul's love of home than this ?
Oh yes ! his fatherland must be
As the blue heaven , wide and free !
Wnere'er a human heart doth wear
Joy's myrtle-wreath or sorrow's gyves,
Where'er a human spirit strives
After a life more true and fair,
There is the true man's birthplace grand,
His is the world - wide fatherland ! Saya

Where'er a single slave aoth pine,

Where'er one man may help another
Thank God for such a birthright, brother
That spot of earth is thine and mine !
There is the true man's birthplace, grand,
His is a world-wide fatherland !
A WISH
Samuel Rogers, who died in 1855, was a wealthy banker and
the friend of many poets and literary men .
good deal of poetry , but not of a very high order. “ A
Wish ”, life,
country is a andpretty
it islittle poem in
interesting praise that
to know
lived in a splendid mansion all his life .
is that we most admire those things which we have not got !
MINEA be a cotbeside a hill ;
beehive's hum shall soothe my ear ;
A willowy brook that turns a mill
With many a fall shall linger near.
The swallow, oft , beneath my thatch,
Shall twitter from her clay-built nest ;
Oft shall the pilgrim lift the latch,
And share my meal , a welcome guest.
Around my ivied porch shall spring,
Each fragrant flower that drinks the dew ;
And Lucy, at her wheel, shall sing
In russet gown and apron blue .
The village church among the trees ,
Where first our marriage vows were given ,
With merry peals shall swell the breeze
And point with taper spire to heaven.
THE MOUNTAIN AND THE SQUIRREL
Emerson was a famous American writer and thinker. He
was seldom humorous in his poems, but this is one of the
He wrote a
exceptions. Though the verse is humorous, its lesson is
quite serious, for it reminds us that we have each our
ofthe simple
its author particular work to do and our special abilities for doing it.
How true it The all-wise Creator has not made us all alike, and we
must do our best with the gifts He has given us .
The mountain and the squirrel
Had a quarrel ,
And the former called the latter “ Little
prig ;
Bun replied ,
“ You are doubtless very big :
But all sorts of things and weather
Must be taken in together
To make up a year,
And a sphere.
And I think it no disgrace
To occupy my place .
If I'm not so large as you ,
You are not so small as I,
And not ḥalf so spry ;
I'll not deny you make
A very pretty squirrel track.
Talents differ ; all is well and wisely put ;
If I cannot carry forests on my back .
Neither can you crack a nut. ' 1

200
 Um CONDO

LITTLE VERSES FOR VERY LITTLE PEOPLE

LITTLE PollyFlinders,
Sat among the cinders,
Warming her pretty little toes ;

SAR
Her mother came and caught her,
And whipped her little daughter
For spoiling her nice new clothes.
ISS KITTY was rude at the table one
Miss day,
And would not sit still on her seat ;
Regardless of all that her mother could
say ,
From her chair
little Kitty kept
running away
All the time they
were eating THERE was a little girl, who had a
little curl ,
their meat.
Right in the middle of her fore
head ;
When she was good, she was very, very
good ,
But when she was bad, she was horrid .

One day she went upstairs, while her

parents, unawares ,
In the kitchen down below were
V occupied with meals ;
And she stood upon her head, on her
little truckle bed,
And she then began hurraying with
her heels.

Her mother heard the noise, and

thought it was the boys
A -playing at a combat in the attic ;
But when she climbed the stair, and
saw Jemima there,
As soon as she saw that the beef was She took and she did whip her most
removed, emphatic.
She ran to her chair in great haste ;
But her mother such giddy behaviour
reproved
By sending away the sweet pudding she
loved ,
Without giving Kitty one taste.
R OWLEY POWLEY, pudding and pie,
Kissed the girls and made them cry :
When the girls came out to play,
Rowley Powley ran away.

old manbored
CHEREWhowaswasanhorribly tree,a bee ;
in a by
When they said , “ Does it buzz ? ”
He replied, “ Yes, it does ! B
It's a regular brute of a bee ! "
TUT
um 201
 OLD MOTHER HUBBARD
She went to the hatter's
To buy him a hat,
And when she came back
He was feeding the cat.

She went to the barber's

To buy him a wig,
But when she came back
He was dancing a jig. ‫سےبے‬
She went to the fruiterer's
To buy him some fruit,
But when she came back
LD Mother Hubbard He was playing the
Went to the cupboard flute.
To get her poor dog a bone ; She went to the tailor's
But when she got there To buy him a coat,
The cupboard was bare , But when she came back
And so the poor dog had none. He was riding a goat.
She went to the baker's
To buy him some bread , She went to the
But when she came back cobbler's
The poor dog was dead. To buy him some
shoes ,
But when she came
She went to the joiner's back
To buy him a coffin , He was reading
But when she came back
the news.
The dog was laughing.
She took a clean dish
To get him some tripe, She went to the sempster's
But when she came back To buy him some linen ,
He was smoking his pipe. But when she came back
The dog was spinning.
She went to the fishmonger's
To buy him some fish , She went to the hosier's
And when she came back To buy him some
He was licking the dish . hose,
But when she came back
He was dress'd in his
She went to the ale -house clothes.
To get him some beer,
But when she came back
The dog sat in a chair . The dame made a curt
sey,
She went to the tavern The dog made a bow ;
For white wine and red , The dame said , “ Your
But when she came back servant,'
The dog stood on his head . The dog said , “ Bow-wow !"
202
JACK AND JILL WENT UP THE HILL

Jack fell down

and broke his
w

crown

And Jill fell

tumbling
after

U
* JU

Jack and Jill

went up the
hill

To fetch a
pail of water

Diffum
203
 LITTLE BO-PEEP HAS LOST HER SHEEP
She found them, indeed, but it made her
heart bleed ,
For they'd left
all their tails
behind them.

It happened one
day, as Bo
peep did
L ITTLE
' has Bo-peep
lost her
stray
Into a meadow
sheep, hard by ,
And can't tell where
to find them ; There she espied
Leave them alone , and their tails
they'll come home, side by side,
And bring their tails All hung on a
behind them. tree to dry.
Little Bo-peep fell fast asleep, She heaved a

And dreamt she heard them bleating ; sigh , and

And when she awoke she found it a joke, wiped her eye,
For still they all were fleeting. Then went o'er hill and dale, oh ;
And tried what she
Then up she took could, as a shep
her little crook , herdess should ,
Determined for To tack to each
to find them ; sheep its tail, oh.

Lit - tle . Bo - peep

-
has lost her sheep, And can't tell

where to find them ; Leave them a lone , and

E
they'll come home, And bring their tails be hind them.

The next verses and rhymes begin on page 313.

204
 The Child's Book of
SCHOOL LESSONS
HOW TO FIND YOUR SCHOOL LESSONS
OU will be able to find your School Lessons quite easily if you read this
You carefully. The Child's Book of School Lessons gives us lessons each
time in reading, writing , arithmetic, music, drawing, and French, and on the
first page of the lessons, always at the bottom of this paragraph in black
type, is given the number of the page where the previous lessons stop. At
the end of the lessons, after the French stories, is always given the number
of the page where the next lessons begin . All that you have to do, there
fore, to find where the previous lessons stop is to look for the note below this
paragraph ; and all that you have to do to find where the next lessons begin
is to look at the note following the French stories at the end of the lessons.
CONTINUED FROM PAGE 103

IS READING CARDS
HOW TO LEARN LITTLE WORDS
AN we say now that we know our A B C, do you think ? We must try to
CANlearn it perfectly, so as to be able to know any letter whenever we see it.
In our last lesson we learnt aa few words of two letters each, and a few more of
three letters each. Perhaps, before we go on to words of four letters, we had
better be sure about the three-letter words. Hero are a few more of them.
A P spells
AP, which is not
a word at all ;
but if we put
a C, or an M, or
a T in front of
it in turn , we
get real words. CAP MAP TAP
E N spells
EN , and if we ;
put first a D,
or an H , or an
M in front, we
get DEN , HEN
and MEN .
DEN HEN MEN
IN
spells
IN ; put an F,
or a P , or a Tin
front , and what
do you find ?
Why, FIN , PIN
T
and IN .
FIN PIN TIN
One
more .
U G spells UG,
and
with an
M , or PRESENT
E
an R ina P,fronor t,
we have these
very
words different
MUG,.
PUG andR UG MUG PUG RUG

205
 -THE CHILD'S BOOK OF SCHOOL LESSONS
Or perhaps you can
learn words better in this If father would give
way : me a penny ,
When boys and girls are I would soon be inside
fast asleep, of this shop :
And beasts go out to
prowl , It's the jolliest window
of any ,
If you're awake, you'll
often hear And oh, how I should
The hooting of an like that TOP ! TOP
OWL . OWL

COW SUN
BOY-TOY
This is how What is it makes the day
We draw a COW. If you want to give joy light when
To a poor little BOY,
Just give him a TOY. The night is past and
You have many ; done ?

NE
Although you have a lot, We know it is the SUN,
LONDON MAGAZI There are boys who have not : And SUN spells Sun.
In fact , there are some
without any .
Two and two are four.
2
2
CAR
4
If you live in a town, BED
And you want to go down Whenandyou
cou
begin to add
To see where the toy nt , “ Oh, mother, just a
a

shops are ; And to arithmetic you minute more ! '

If you take my advice, come ; Poor Willie always said
You won't stop to think The first thing you will Whenever night - time
twice, have to learn, came , and he
But will jump on the very Will be to do this little Was ordered off to
first CAR, SUM . BED .

14 /
whos

A HEN AND A COW THE PIN IS TOO

ARE IN THE FIELD LONG FOR THE BOX
n
noo
206
 WRITING ::SERVISS
TOM AND NORA AND THE POT- HOOKS
on after breakfast, Tom and Nora
Soon stick, and makethem all alike. Thinking
fetched their chalks, paper, pencí ,
.of something we know often helps us to
and ruler, and put a chair ready for do something new and strange. Now
their mother. When she came, she ' ' we are going to make some pot-hangers.
said : “ Before we start writing we must See, I begin by making a stroke down
see that we are sitting in a nice, easy wards, but, near the bottom line, turn
way, in the middle of our chairs, with round and down to the right, touch
backs straight, heads up, shoulders well the line, and curve up in a stroke which
back, arms and hands alone touching is lighter than the down stroke, like this :
the table, and the left hand resting on
the paper to hold it down. That's TUTU "
right. You are both sitting nicely."
Mother," said Nora, " you said we The children wrote with their green
should make the letter i to -day. Do chalks over their mother's pencilled out
you think we can try without our lines, and then by themselves. While
crutches ? ”
“No, Nora, not yet,” she replied . writingTomthoughtof the hook on
the door where his coat was hung up.
“ We are not even going to start with “ I see why this is called a hanger,” he
the letter i. There is something to do
said ; “ but why a pot-hanger ?
first, and that is to make pot-hooks and “ Yesterday ," said his mother, “ when
pot-hangers."
Tom asked what these were, for he we were walking through the wood, we
had never heard of them . saw some gipsies boiling their food in
“ You shall see some,” said his a pot hung over the fire by a hook.
mother, who had been busily ruling lines . Our pot-hangers are something like that.
Let us turn our paper upside down, and
“ Watch me make a pot-hook. We call look at the pot-hooks we made a little
because it is like thepiece whileago. ”
it a pot-hook
of hooked iron that is used to lift or
“How funny !” cried Tom . “ They
hold pots. Cook uses one for taking have just changed into each other ! ”
off the stove- lid .” )

Then she made some pot-hooks,
starting between the lines, and making but
pot-hook upside down is nota pot-hook,
a curve up and round to the right, and
ending in a thick down stroke , like this :
Mn
Tom found the pot -hooks rather diffi-
cult to make by himself, evenly and
neatly, and all alike. Some were fat and
others thin, and one or two seemed
trying to jostle those in front along ;
but they were all about the same height ,
because , as he said , the railway lines
made him stop when he wanted to
go too far up or down .
When Nora had finished her row with
violet chalk , her mother said : Well,
Nora, wbich do you think the best ? ”
Nora 10oked carefully along her row,
and said , with a little sigh : “ Oh,
mother, I think one of yours is the only bour next door."
best, but perhaps if I try hard again
I can make better ones .
That's right,” said her mother.
“ Think of ever so many hooks like
the end of grandfather's big walking-
JOU
“ So they have," said Nora, “ and a
a pot-hanger.”
Are we going to write i soon ? "
asked Tom .
“ I think you can write already,”
was the reply. “ Just see. This is i .'
And, having ruledmore lines, she made
this letter for them to write over, and
copy in black chalk :
iiii
“ It looks like a pot-hanger ! ” ex
claimed Nora .
“ So it does, only it has a little dot
over it . We can think of that as a tiny
black eye, like a wee fly's eye. That
will help us to remember letter i. Each
letter i has its own little eye, and
the eye does not belong to the neigh
Tom and Nora were eager to write
letter i. They used their red chalks
for it, and found it quite easy to make.
For several days they practised mak .
ing pot-hooks, pot-hangers, and i,
207
 -THE CHILD'S BOOK OF SCHOOL LESSONS
and then their mother said they were
ready to write u, n, and m, in
lead pencil.
Nora asked her father for three pen
cils , one for her mother, one for Tom ,
and one for herself . As her hands were
very small, she could not sharpen them
herself, so she begged her father to
make three beautiful points.
66
Here, Nora ,” he said , as he handed
them to her, “ I shall expect you and
Tom to make the nicest u , n , and
m I have seen yet ; they will be so
fine we shall want to have them framed ."
Nora laughed, and said :
Oh , no, father ; but we are going
to try very hard .” And she went off to
get paper and ruler.
Her mother said they must still
have lines, and she ruled them just as
before.
“ We are going to make u first,”
she said ; “ it comes a long way down
the alphabet , but it is such an easy
letter for you now that you both make
i so well. Now watch me.”
Nora and Tom looked , and were
surprised to see their mother make
apot-hanger witha short,upward
,
stroke before it , and then another
nn
, n,
pot-hanger ; but instead of leaving a
space between them , she joined the
second one on to the end of the first,
keeping the pencil on the paper all the
time. She wrote very lightly , and made
the down -strokes thicker than the up-
strokes, and put little ticks to show where
the letters were to begin , like this :
И, И, И, ,
Nora thought u was very like two
things she could make already — two
pot-hangers together, and two i's to
gether without their dots .
Tom was getting on finely between
his railway lines, when, snap ! went
the point of his pencil . Then he had
to wait for a new point to be made.
He was careful after that not to press
so heavily on the paper , for he saw
that the point could be broken very
easily .
Nora waited for Tom to finish his
line, and then they both started afresh
without any guide but the lines above
and below . Tom found he had to be
very careful to keep the two parts
of u even distances apart. He made
208
some too close together, and some too
far apart, some above the line, and
some below, like this :
ut t u
* Oh, Nora, how do you do them so
nicely ? Do tell me !” he cried.
" I think," said Nora, “ that I look
first, and think where my pencil is
going. You see, if we don't think just
where the pencil is going, and how much
room we shall want , the letters will
never make a nice neat row ."
Tom watched Nora make a u,
and after looking carefully at his
mother's copy, he tried again, and
this time made quite a nice line.
" N will be easy now , " said their
mother , as she ruled some more lines.
>
“ You shall say what it is like."
But she had only made half of it
when Tom said, “ That is a pot-hook ,"
and as she finished it Nora exclaimed ,
That is a pot-hook ending in a
pot-hanger, just as if it had a little
curly tail like Fido's."
“ I keep my pencil on the paper
until the end of the letter,” their mother
said, “ and make good round curves.
We should be very careful about that ,
because many people who write fast
make u and n just alike, and waste
the timeof other people who try to find
out which is meant .
" N is your letter, Nora ; but it
is a small n, and people's names begin
with big or capital letters. We will
make them later on . The other letter
we have to make to -day is m .”
Oh , yes, mother,” said Nora, “ that
is yourletter, so we must make very nice
ones . I wonder if it is a hard letter ."
mm
ΥΠΥΥΥ, mΥΥ ,
1)
“ No," said their mother. “ You will
not find it at all difficult now .”
When m was written , Tom and
Nora saw that it was just liken
with another pot-hook in the middle,
and they found it quite easy to write.
That is enough for to-day,” said
their mother. When you have prac.
tised these letters and can write them
well we will try some others."
 ARITHMETIC
HOW CHARLIE COUNTED TWELVE
We canall remember - how Charlie count the things in the pictures, without
learned to count six , the day he even having to think much about it .
went for a walk with Uncle Jack. Let Suppose wedo one more, just to make
us see whether we can count the owls quite sure of the way. We will find
in the picture : one-two-three-four out how many seven and five make.
-five - six. If you look at the next picture, you
But it is time that we knew the names will see seven little chickens with their
of the numbers which come after six. mother, and five other little chickens
Charlie counted six crows, so we will see by their water -dish . Count how many
how many birds there are when we chickens there are altogether. There
count the six crows and the six owls . were seven in the first lot ; then, going
to the other chickens, we say eight,
nine, ten, eleven, twelve ; so that
seven and five make twelve .
Shall we see what else we can learn
from the picture of the owls ? Sup
pose the two sitting at the end flew
away, how many would be left ? If
we count them, we find one, two, three,
There are six owls sitting on this branch . Two are at four. So , as there were six at first,
one end and four at the other. So two and four make six .
we have found that two taken away
Well, say “ six " to begin with. Then from six leaves four.
the first owl—the one with his eyes shut This is called subtracting two from
-makes seven. Another owl makes six . It is really just the same thing as
eight ; another one makes nine ; the adding, because we have only to count
white one makes ten ; the next one makes how many owls must sit on the branch
eleven ; and the last one makes twelve. with the first two to make six altogether.
Now let us count them all once more , In just the same way with the
and try to remember the names of the chickens, we know that when there are
numbers - one, two, three, four, five, six ; Seven with their mother it takes five at
that's all the crows. Seven, eight, nine, the dish to make twelve altogether ; so
ten, eleven, twelve ; that's all the owls. that five from twelve leaves seven ,
But we have been learning a great and seven from twelve leaves five.
deal more than to count as far as You remember when we counted six
twelve. We have really been adding crows and six owls, and found it made
numbers together. When we put a twelve birds altogether ? How many
number of things to another number,
and count how many there are alto
gether, we are adding the two numbers
together. So, when Charlie saw five
crows on the ground, and another crow
flew down to them from a tree, Charlie
found out that one added to five
makes six.
We can do another little sum with
the picture of the owls. How many do There are twelve chickens with their motherin this pic
twoand four make ? You see, there ture. Fiveare at the dish and seven round the mother.
are two owls sitting together at one end So that, if we take five from twelve, seven are left.
of the branch, and there are four more sixes were there ? Two, of course. The
sitting further along. Now, when we crows made the first six, and the owls the
counted them before, we found one, two, second six. So that, instead of saying
three, four, five, six owls ; so we have six and six make twelve, it would
learned that two and four make six. mean just the same thing if we said two
If you do a lot of little sums like sixes make twelve.
that, you will soon be clever enough See, now, whether you can tell how
to tell the answer without having to many threes there are in the chickens.
209
 Canon ACCOUNXICOXCA

THE LITTLE CHILD'S NEW COUNTING RHYME

MY
1
AL
2 WE ARE GOING TO THE ZOO
2 THE COCK CREW

1
3 3
4 TUTTI INOINNITU 4 II . un atbildes
«

HEAR THE BULL ROAR

( և

WE WILL HEAR THE LION ROAR

$
5 5
6 6
SEE THE MONKEY AT HIS TRICKS THE CLOCK TICKS

7 7
8 RIDE THE ELEPHANT IN STATE
8 CLEAN THE GRATE

9 1'
9 9
10 . IIIMIN 10 ARE PIT -MEN
FEED THE BEAR IN HIS DEN

11 YT7777
11
12 € 12
WATCH THE LITTLE MOLES THAT DELVE FOR COAL THEY DELVE
Tomas 210 CORDO COLLO
 anandaalanumnasuaraatum
-MUSICAL
Count one, two, three ; then one, two, Uncle Jack said that next time he
three again ; and so on, till you come should learn a shorter way of writing all
to the last of them . How many times ))
the numbers, instead of having to spell
have you said “ One, two, three ” ? their names .
Four times . " So there are four threes . “ Now we can finish our rhymes ,”
Now count how many fours there are. said Charlie .
You will have to say “ One, two, three, “ Yes," said Uncle Jack .
four " how many times ? Three . So Seven , eight, ride the elephant in state .
there are three fours. But the number Nine, ten, feed the bear in his den.
of chickens is the same each time you Eleven, twelve, watch the little moles
that delve.
count, so we know now that four threes
are exactly the same as three fours. “ And I shall finish mine," said Fred.
In the same way you can count the Seven, eight , clean the grate .
owls, and find that three twos are Nine, ten, are pit-men .
exactly the same as two threes. Or the Eleven, twelve , for coal they delve.
chickens, again , will show that six twos “ Very good ,” said Uncle Jack. “I
are just the same as two sixes. will make a drawing of the rhymes ."
When Charlie could count up to And on the opposite page are the
twelve without making any mistake, pictures that Uncle Jack drew .
Các
9 MUSIC esco
ANOTHER GAME WITH THE PIANO FAIRIES
NCE upon a time, in a country far No one ever saw her, but her great
ONCaway, a very beautiful flower was beauty and goodness shone through the
found. It was so beautiful that all the flower and made a wonderful light,
people in the land which was so
wondered . But beautiful that all
there was in this who saw it were
country a little made glad .
girl who loved the Now , our seven
flowers very much, little fairies are
and when she very much like the
heard everyone good and beauti
talking about the ful princess , only
beauty of this instead of living
little blossom , she in a flower, they
thought she would live in our magic
like to go and talk kingdom , the
to it. Day after pianoforte; and
day the tiny girl instead of shed
bent over the ding a beautiful
flower, and in time light, they speak
she learned its to us through their
secret, which could sweet voices.
only be whispered Would it not be
into the ears of a delightful if you
loving little child. and I could know
The flower told each fairy voice
her she might tell so well, directly
this secret to all we thought of one
who wanted to of our seven little
learn about the friends, that we
beautiful , and this could sing her
is what it was. note ?
In the flower Well, there is
lived a fair and This little picture of the homes of the seven fairies wi.l only one thing to
help to remind you of the address of the fair you
noble princess. learned from the big picture which is on page 98. do . We must ask
retem 21 ) memur
 - THE CHILD'S BOOK OF SCHOOL LESSONS
the fairies to play another game. We sing to us if we go to her house, C ,and
will knock first at Fairy C's door. We press the door very gently and firmly .
will choose that house of hers which is When we have played as long as we
almost in the middle of the long like with Fairy C, we may go to her
white line, remembering that her houses next-door neighbour, Fairy D. Fairy
are always found on the left-hand side D's voice is not quite like Fairy C's,
of the group of two goblins' houses. is it ? We will press the door here ,
To knock at her door so that we too, and listen to the answer, and then
may really hear her voicein answer, we try and sing the same sound.
must press down the little white piece But we must not forget Fairy C's
very gently, very firmly. voice, so we will touch the door again
Listen ! Do you hear her ? It is gently, and listen . Now we will go back
Fairy C's voice. We will try if we can to Fairy D , to be quite sure that we
sing the same sound exactly . Try it a know each fairy's voice.
great many times , and then, when we But we must not forget that there
think we know it quite well, we will are more fairies, and so we go to Fairy
run away to the end of the room and E's house and learn her little “ note ,
sing it again , coming back very quickly and then to Fairy F and Fairy G , until
to our magic kingdom to see if we have we reach Fairy C's second little house.
remembered it rightly. If we have a fairy concert every day,
Fairy C likes to hear us say “ This is we shall soon come to know all the
Fairy C's voice,” and she will always beautiful fairy voices quite well.
SIRD DRAWING AB
HOW TO DRAW A PLAIN ENVELOPE
E must learn next how to use our in a corner . Put it in the middle and
WE pencil properly. We shall want leave a small margin round.
some more materials , and it is well to We will start with something very
have everything ready before we begin. easy this time, but be very careful about
First, get a large sheet of white car- the pencil you use and the way you
tridge paper, and pin it on to your hold it . If it is a new one, it is rather
drawing-board with drawing-pins. You long for little fingers. Ask someone to
will also need a twopenny drawing pen- cut it in two, and to sharpen one piece
cil, marked with a B next to the so that it has a flat point like the edge
maker's name. Do not get any india- of a chisel. The other one should be
rubber. See that your paint-box and sharpened in the ordinary way.
paint -brushes are quite clean, and that To begin with, there are two very im
the jar of water is ready, too. To-day portant things to remember. First, hold
you will want a penny sponge and a your pencil half-way down and use the
piece of clean white blotting-paper.. flat side of the point. Secondly, always
Though you will only want to use a begin a drawing on the left-hand side.
pencil for the first part of the lesson , Now get a large envelope. If its sides
it is well to have everything ready before are all equal, it is a square one ; but if
you sit down to work. it has two long sides and two short
Sometimes it is difficult to find chalk ones, it is an oblong one. It does not
or charcoal directly you want it , but you matter which shape you use , but you
can generally find a pencil and a piece must think how you will place it
of paper. But as we should always be the paper, as it is to be drawn six times
trying to draw the things we see around, over altogether.
it would be nice to have a drawing -book Put the envelope on the paper at the
that you can carry about ; this is better right-hand top corner, and, using the
thanthe large pieces of paper you use pencil with the ordinary point, make a
for your drawing -lesson. But remember line all round the edge. Take the en
not to make tiny sketches, but always velope away and therewillbe pencil lines
to draw as big as the paper will let like the shape of the envelope. But
you. Beforeyou begin , justthink where perhaps the four corners will not be
your drawing will look nicest on the finished nicely ; if so you must join them
page. Do not squeeze it up too much properly. Now put the envelope again
212
 DRAWING

Lay an envelope on your drawing -paper. At each After you have done that you should make the outline
corner mark the paper with a dot. Then draw a without having made any dots. Then , to make it look
straight line, without using a ruler, from dot to dot. like the back of an envelope, draw two lines across.
on the paper, in the left-hand corner this blotting -paper till it is not shiny at all.
time, and make four dots where the Now mix some cobalt blue with a
corners are . Take the envelope away good deal of water to make it pale.
and try and join the dots together,using Take a good brushful of colour and
the pencil with the chisel- point. Now , pass the brush quickly across the top
underneath the first drawing, try to line from left to right. Go back to the
make a copy of it without using any left again, and put on the colour with
dots. Do this three times, and the last short,downward strokes of the brush ,
two oughtto be good enough to paint. going towards the right and leaving
Choose the two best, and in the corner the stamp white.
of one draw a stamp ; on the other Repeat this till you have filled up the
draw lines across from corner to corner space, taking a fresh brushful of
to make it look like the back of the colour at the beginning of each row.
envelope. You can chalk or paint the You will find that you have a pool of
stamp red or green , and write the address wet colour lying along the bottom line
of someone you know on the envelope, when you reach it. Get your brush
and it will look quite real. Perhaps quite clean and nearly dry, drag it
you would like to paint the envelope through this pool, and it will take away
pale blue. This is difficult to do well. all the colour that you do not want.
First dip your sponge in water and This way of painting is called " put
damp the place you want to paint all ting on a flat wash .” It ought to look
over - it must not be too wet, only quite smooth and even, but it needs a
damp. Hold the paper level with your great deal of practice. The blue wash
eyes ; if it shines or glistens, it is too must be quite dry before you paint the
wet, and you must blot it with the clean stamp, or the edges will run together.

But to make the front look like a real envelope you Of course, the stamp in the corner must be
have to draw a small square for the stamp, and then coloured also ; and as you should not stick on a real
put a thin wash of blue over the rest of the surface. stamp, you will have tocolour the little square red.
213
 LITTLE PICTURE STORIES IN FRENCH
THIS story is continued from page 103. This part tells us of the arrival at the rail
THIS
way station . We must be sure to remember that the first line under the picture
is the French , the second gives the English word for the French word above it,
and the third line shows how we make up the words into our own language.
Nous voyons une machine automatique.
We see a machine automatic.
We see an automatic machine.

A la gare - At the station

Nous sommes maintenant à la gare.
We are now at the station.
We are now at the station.
Une machine automatique - An automatic machine
J'ai mis deux sous dans le trou .
I have put two halfpennies in the hole.
E

I have put a penny in the slot.

Papa et maman viennent nous chercher .
as

A
Papa and mamma come us to find .
Papa and mamma are coming to find us.
L'horloge-The clock

Il y a une grande horloge à la gare.

There is a big clock at the station .
There is a big clock in the station.
Il est dix heures et demie du matin.
It is ten hours and half of the morning.
It is half-past ten in the morning .

Les locomotives - The enginos

Ils nous font voir les trains.

They us make to see the trains.
They show us the trains.
J'aime les locomotives.
I like the engines.
Les malles — The trunks I like the engines.
L'employé emporte nos malles. Notre train est en vue. Il entre en gare.
The porter takes away our trunks. Our train is in sight. Itenters in station.
The porter is taking our trunks away. Our train is in sight. It is coming in the station.
214
 Nous montons dans le compartiment.
We mount in the carriage.
We get in the carriage.
On crie : “ En voiture !
>
Sumeone calls : In carriage !
Someone calls : “ Take your seats ! "

Le train -- The train

La fumée nous entre dans les yeux .
The smoke us enters in the eyes.
The smoke is getting in our eyes.

Un monsieur court - A gentleman runs

Un monsieur court de toutes ses forces.

27 A gentleman runs with all his might.
A gentleman is running with all his might.
Il manque de tomber. Que c'est drole !
He misses to fall. ñow it is funny !
He nearly falls. How funny it is !
Maman nousinstalle ,chacun dans un coin .
Mamma us settles, each in a corner .
Mamma settles us, each in a corner.
L'employé— The porter
L'employé met nos malles dans le train
The porter puts our trunks in the train.
The porter is putting our trunks in the train .

92
En routo - On the way
On ferme les portières.
Someone shuts the doors.
Un compartiment A carriage The doors are shut.
Papa choisit un compartiment Le train part. Nous sommes en route !
Papa chooses a carriage The train starts. We are on way !
Papa is choosing a carriage . The train starts . We are on the way.
The next School Lessons begin on page 335
215
PLANS FOR A ROW OF COTTAGES IN MODELTOWN
:BACK

COTTAGE
END
C
:X

OF
1? 451

१
mi
CD
1. Plan of the small chimney 2. Plan of the large chimney
To be made same size as this this
To be made same size as

CHIMNEY
COTTAGES
COTTAGES
FRONT

FRONT
COTTAGES

ROOF
FLOOR

ROOF
BACK
OF
OF

CHIMNEY
OF
0(

SPACE
FOR
IT
Inicio

:
11
BAC
! K

( O
END

3. Plan of body of the cottages scale : measurements to be taken with rule B

5. The cottages as they appear

before gluing and after the card
board has been cut and bent up

4. Design of the Modeltown cottages

INBB
7. Chimney before 8. Chimney after
gluing gluing
6. Cottages when gluing us nearly complete
The way to make a row of cottages from these plans is clearly described on page 219
mx 216
 THINGS TO MAKE
AND
THINGS TO DO

WHAT THESE PAGES TEACH US

"HOSE of us who are building the model town of cardboard will be able to set
THOS
to work in real earnest with the plans of a row of cottages given on the
opposite page, and will have the satisfaction, when they have finished, of seeing the
complete row of cottages shown on page 220. We are told here, also, how to
keep rabbits in a rabbit-hutch that we can make ourselves ; how to make the
queerest-looking dolls of corks and peanuts!; and how to make a girl's workbox.
We find here, also, more problems and games, and more magic and mystery.
CONTINUED FROM PAGE 116

PREPARING FOR MODELTOWN

How to Draw Angles and How to Make a Tray
BEFORE ,wefirst
begin in real the lines exact and clear. Use the compasses
up the buildin gs inearnest
Modelttoown,
set to make the half circles and your ruler to
whichis to grow into a place of great interest make the straight lines. It will do nicely if
as our busyfingers add to it from week to you make it the exact size of the picture,
week, we have to know the meaning of and put in the figures as shown in the illus
' drawing to scale,” and we have to make tration. You will find the work much easier
for ourselves a tray, on which to do our if you trace the picture, which is a very
work . We have already learnt how to use simple thing to do.
our tools, and we must now lose no time in Take a piece of tracing-paper, or strong
putting them into use. Drawing to scale is tissue-paper, and place it over the picture.
too difficult for young people to do withoutYou can see the lines of illustra the tion
help, so we have made specially for the through the tracing -paper. Now take a lead
CHILDREN'S ENCYCLOPÆDIA a very useful pencil with a good sharp point and draw on
set of rules all on one piece of card, the tracing-paper the picture beneath, going
given away with this number. With over each line carefully. When the drawing
the aid of this there should be no difficulty is complete,take the tracing -paper and put it
in carrying out our instructions. All will be on the cardboa rd which you are going to
as simple as A B C.” But, for all that, use to make the protractor. Nowgo over
every young worker must be careful the lines again with a sharp pencil, and this
to study the instructions before attempt- will make marks on the cardboard where
ing to use the rules. On the front of the the lines go. You had better go over these
scale rule everything that can be told about marks with ink, and when you have done
how to use these scale rules is clearly this you should have made on the card a
stated ; so the best thing to do is to study drawing similar to the picture on this page.
these particulars attentively, and then try to Then you can cut out the drawing neatly,
make a tray with the aid of the scale rules. and you will have a handy little pro
Another thing that architects, tractor, which you can use in
engineers, and others who making angles, .or slanting
have drawing to do use
in their work is the 50 55 65 70 80 85 | 85 8
0 70 65 for
5 draw the plans
5 50 40as3you
5lines,
Modeltown. We
instrument called a shall now see how to
50
55
40
|35

protractor. The use the protractor.

2205
510

purpose of this Suppose that we

1S to enable 90 75 60 45 30 wish to make
75
the user to 60 an angle of
a ke 30° from a
5

m
4

angles of 2 certain
any size point on
30
15

required a line .
easily Put the
and ac protrac -
SI

15
0

tor with
curately.
You can the
m a ke lower, or
your The angle measurer for making Modeltown : to be made in card the samesize as this straight,
own pro edge on
tractor if you follow the instructions given this line and with the centre point of the
and the illustration shown on this page. protractor - marked by a dot on the straight
Take a piece of cardboard and draw upon line-touching the point at which you wish
it the illustration shown above . Do this the angle to be. Make a slight mark
very exactly and make it neat, with all there. Now look at the outer edge of the

9 217
 2 INCHES WHOLE LENGTH 22 - INCHES
LENGTH
INCHES
WHOLE
15

TRAY
INCHES

: NCHES

68
u
Go
I2

The working tray for making Modeltown : to be made according to the sizes marked
protractor — to the right or left, according to
the direction in which you want the line-
and see where it is marked 30. Put a slight
mark on the card , or paper, on which you
are drawing, at the far end of the line
numbered 30. Remove the protractor. Now,
if you draw a line between the two marks
you have made, from where the centre
point touched to where the figure 30
touched, you will have made an angle
of 30°
Þegrees are
indicated by a
small circle 60 °
after the num 68160
ber, like this,
30°.
You will observe that the pro
tractor has two lines marked 30,
and that all the other numbers
given , except so , also appear in Corners for the tray : to
two different places. This is be be made 4 times this size
cause you may have to make an
angle to the right side or to the left side ; but
the position of the angle has nothing to do
with its size. This will show what is meant.
Each of these angles, or corners, is 30 °,
although they point to opposite directions.
The highest number on the protractor is oo.
An angle of 90 ° is called a right angle ; it is
one of the corners of a square. If it is more
than 90 ° it is more than a right angle, and is
called an ob angle. If it is than a
right angle it is called an acute angle .
218
68
Only one other thing is to be explained before
setting to work. In the plans we shall print
for making cardboard models and other
articles , three kinds of lines will be used. To be
quite clear, we give examples of them below :
Solid line means to cut through
Dotted line is to be half cut through
Chain line is not to be cut at all
The first is an
ordinary solid
black line, and
whenever we
find this line in
a plan it means
that the card
board is to be cut clean through
at that place, and any cardboard
detached by the cutting is to be
removed. The second is a dotted
line, and whenever that kind of
line is used in a plan it means that
the cardboard is to be cut halfthrough. We
have to cut half through the dotted lines
because we bend back the cardboard where
they are drawn , and if we did not make a
cut the cardboard would crack_in bending
and leave a rough , ugly edge. The other is
a dash - and -dot line ( it is called a chain line ) .
Where this line is drawn we do not cut the
cardboard at all. This chain line is only
intended to show us where the windows
and doors come and where the chimneys and
other things are to be fixed ; it is a guide
tothe places where other parts join on .
These are simple things to bear in
mind ; and having learned how to use our
tools, how to make angles, how to use the

A
ROW OF COTTAGES FOR MODELTOWN
scale rules, and what the three kinds of to be cut right through. Then at each of these
lines mean, we can set to work at once.
A work-tray is a good thing to try our
hand on, as it is made in the same way as the
cardboard houses, only, of course, it is much
easier to make. But it is also very useful .
The best kind of tray to make is one with
three of the sides turned up and the fourth
side left fiat, but with corners added to it, as
you will see shown quite clearly in the illus-
trations below. These corners and the
turned-up edges will prevent tools falling off
the tray, while the flat edge allows the
young worker freedom to build up his
models on the tray, and to sweep off frag-
ments and dust.
The plan of the tray which we print on page
218 is marked with the sizes to which you
d i 11
с.
d
These pictures show (a) a complete tray exactly as it should look if you make it according to the instructions,
(b) a tray before the corners have been added, (c) the corner to be glued on the right and (d) the left corner.
ought to make it, and if you follow these sizes
you will have no difficulty in making a
thoroughly strong and useful tray to work on.
The material we have to get for our tray is
called strawboard , and we shall require a
piece fifteen inches by twenty -two inches-
certainly not less than this, as that is the exact
size to which the tray is to be cut. Having
got the strawboard and cut it to this size, the
next step is to draw upon it in pencil exactly
the same plan as we give , and , of course,
leaving out the words and figures, which are
intended only as guides . On looking at the
plan you will notice that two inches along the
back and sides are allowed for the turned-up
edge. Notice, also, that at the two back
corners there are solid black lines, which have
A ROW OF COTTAGES FOR MODELTOWN
The Way to Make These Clearly Described
We shouldnow beinapositiontobeginin
real earnest the making of Modeltown.
Each worker may have his own idea as to
where the different buildings ought to go,
and for that reason we will not at present lay
down plans for the whole of the town, but
will rather proceed with the making of the
different buildings it ought to contain . The
day will come when we shall have to think
about setting up a town- hall, a church , and a
railway -station ; but before all these great
works can be undertaken we must suppose
that the population of the town is growing,
and houses must be provided for the people
whom we might suppose to be engaged in
putting up the principal buildings if Model-
town were in reality a town of bricks and
mortar inhabited by living people. A row of
cottages is very necessary, and the next thing
ought to be a schoolhouse, which might be
219
PEDRO
corners there are also dotted lines, and two
inches within the back and two inches within
the two sides there are again dotted lines. As
already explained, these dotted lines indicate
that the strawboard is to be cut half through
at these places and bent back from the cut.
The inner angles at the corners are 30 °—that
is to say, in order to make your plan exact
you should make the angle 30 °, as already
explained. Exactly in themiddle of the corner
, unning from the angle
a solid line is shown r
to the outer edge. This is to be cut through
entirely, and the strawboard here, where the
edges have been turned up, should be made
to overlap until the dotted lines have been
brought together, and then glued where one
edge goes beneath the other. To complete
12
b
the tray you have only to cut out from any
odd piece of strawboard the two corners, of
which diagrams are shown . Make these four
times the size of the drawings of them and
you will find that they will fit the front corners
of the tray - one on each side. That is to
say, in measuring the drawing you will
use scale rule D, and in making your lines on
the card you will use your full-sized rule.
Cut these pieces half-way through at the
dotted lines, and glue the pieces on, one end
under the tray and theother on the side of the
tray. These instructions, which should be
quite clear to you, will enable the young
worker to provide himself with a most useful
article for the task of modelling on which he
is about to engage.
used on Sundays for church service. This,
at any rate, is a very good start, and many a
great town has begun with just a few cottages
and a schoolhouse, so that Modeltown need
not be ashamed of this small beginning. As
Amm
the first concern everywhere is a house in
which to live, let us at once turn our attention
Toote
to this neat little row of cottages we are going
to erect for the working people of our town.
You will see on page 216 that our architect has
prepared for us an excellent set of plans, which
will enable us to put the building in hand
immediately. In picture 4 we have a row
of three cottages, two with doors in front
and one with its door at the side ; but
each has also a back door, which is not
shown in the same picture. Look carefully
at the picture on page 220, for it shows what the
result of our work will be like. While you
are making this row of cottages, you can
 --THINGS TO MAKE AND THINGS TO DO
compare the work with the picture, and, if see how uneven the bend is, and why we
you are not doing it quite right, you will per-
haps see where you have made a mistake
before you have gone too far. Remember
that in building houses, as in everything
else, a mistake should be put right as soon
as ever possible after it has been made.
Now look at the plan , as we call the large
picture which gives us all the sizes of the
card wemust cut. It is shown in picture 3. The
whole building, except the two chimneys, is
cut out of one piece of cardboard. The
piece of card that you use must be not
less than to inches wide and 11 inches long.
You will first draw the plan on the card,
making it twice as large as the drawing on
the page — that is to say, you will measure
the lines on the picture with scale rule
marked B (the half-scale rule ), and you
will make your drawing on the card with
your full-sized rule. You must remember,
also, the meaning of the three kinds of lines
-the lines that are black and continuous
must be cut quite through with the pen-
knife, the lines that are made of round dots
must be cut half through , and the chain lines
made up of dots and dashes must be
marked on the card only, and not cut at all.
You do not require to
write or print on the
card the words that are
in the picture. They
are intended merely to
serve as guides when you
come to fold up the card
after it is cut out, and to
give you an intelligent
interest in what you are
doing.
Make the plan on the
card complete before you
begin to cut it out. You
must be careful to make 9. The cottages finished and painted
the angles on the drawing exact, because a
very little error at the corner may make a before sticking them to the roof, they will
very big error at the other end of the line.
When you cut out the plan, do not use to the roof in the right places as marked on
scissors, as they would make uneven edges.
Do the cutting with a penknife, being up slips at the bottom of the chimneys. This
careful to have it sharp, so that you may completes our cottage unless you choose to
make clean cuts. Also , be careful not to
put your fingers in the way of the point
as you are using it. After you have
cut through all the black lines, cut the
dotted lines half-way through . You may
find this a little awkward at first, because
it is not easy to put upon the knife
just sufficient pressure to cut the card
through just ihe right distance ; but a
little practice will soon enable you to do
this part of the work properly .
Now let us suppose that we have got the
plan cut out and all the lines cut half
through that require to be treated so . The
next thing is to do the bending. The card
must be bent over at all the lines that
you have cut half-way through. Now you
see the reason for cutting half-way through
at places. It enables the bends to be
easily made and makes straight bends.
If you bend a piece of card without
having cut it half-way through , you will
novo
must help our bends with half-cuts.
As you bend up the card you will find
that it begins to have the shape shown in
picture 5 : You will find that the narrow
strip marked A goes behind the end wall C
of the cottages, that the slip marked B fits in
behind the back wall, and that D folds up with
in the other end wallmarked E. Now we begin
to use the glue. After you have prepared it
properly, as already explained, you put just a
touch on the different slips that fold behind
the walls and hold them a minute, until
" he slips stick fast to the walls which they
touch. Look at the next picture — that marked
6. It shows how our building will look just
before the roof has been glued down, and
with the end wall left open like a door. If
you like, you may leave one end unglued.
and thereby allow the end wall to hinge
open. This will enable you to look inside
the house when you want to, and will allow
you to put in furniture if you should desire
to do so at a future time.
All that remains now is to make the chim
neys and fit them on. Pictures 1 and 2 give
the plans of the two chimneys. They will be
very easy to make because the size in the
book is the actual size ;
you do not need to use
two rules in taking the
measurements , but one
only, the full -sized one.
Indeed, you may trace
them if you know how
to do this. Having
drawn the two chimneys
on card , you will cut
them out and then glue
them up, when the parts
marked X will be glued
to the other ends.
Before gluing they will
look like picture 7, and after gluing, and
look like picture 8. Then you will glue them
the plan, applying glue to all the four turned
decorate it with a little paint. Red paint on
the roof will give us a very neat representation
of a row of tiled cottages, or making red
walls and painting the roof with a mixture
of blue and grey will give us brick cottages
with aa slate roof. Having made one row of
cottages you may make as many more as you
like, and the number of cottages in Model
town will be limited only by your skill.
If you have painted your row of cottages
nicely to look like a real little model, it should
appear as seen in picture 9 , which is made
from an actualphotograph of a building made
as we have described from the plans and
instructions given above. It has what looks
like a rose tree growing up the side of the end
door. This was merely drawn and painted
green, but it adds very much to the general
effect. The windows also were painted blue
to resemble glass, and the roof was coloured
to look like tiles. In the next lesson we
shall see how to make a schoolhouse.
220
 JOHN CHINAMAN MADE OF PEANUTS
OHN CHINAMAN is one of the oddest- one side, and join half-way at the back ; then
looking men in the world, and we can join the two together and fasten to the doll at
make the oddest John Chinaman doll that the top of the legs.
you ever saw out of a simple bag of peanuts , The smock is made in the shape of a little
or monkey nuts . sack, simply drawn in at the neck. Two
The doll shown on this page is made from very wide sleeves are next made, each one
eleven peanuts threaded together. By look- like a small bag, sewn on the smock quite
ing at the first picture close to the neck .
you will see how the When choosing the
have been for these
materials isan
peanuts
chosen a large one for Chinaman dolls it
the head, two smaller is better to secure
and two larger ones for bright reds, blues,
the body, two more for and yellows, as these
the upper part of the give the prettiest
arms, with a larger one effects.
below each to complete The hat looks very
them , and two long, nice made out of two
curved nuts for lower round pieces of card
part of legs and feet. board , covered with
String them together silk, and joined to
with strong cotton , as gether with a little silk
shown in the picture ; cord overstitched all phanie a
then draw the face with round . It is kept in
a black lead pencil or place with a coloured
in ink, giving the eye glass - headed pin
lashes a slanting line to stuck right through
make them look like a the head .
Chinaman's. The black lines
The nuts strung together Take three pieces of seen on the smock
black wool, and plait them together ; this can either be made John Chinaman dressed
will form the pigtail, which you can stick by putting a little braid round the bottom
with glue at the top of the head, or fix by and at the edge of the sleeves, or by
means of the strong cotton used to thread working on it some fancy feather
the peanuts. To dress this doll , make a little stitching. If you will paint in the shoes
pair of trousers with two square pieces of with a little black paint or china ink it
bright-coloured material ; hem each piece on will give John a good “ finish .”

A LITTLE DUTCH FAMILY MADE OF CORK

The quaint little woman in the picture body by putting a piece ofmatchwood in
THE comes from Dutchland, and is made out the body and the head on the top. A pin will
of cork . I feel quite sure if you have answer the same purpose. Frayed string
ever heard the " pop " of a champagne bottle or silk will do for the hair, which is glued on
you never thought of asking for the cork ! the head.
Just see what we can do withit. A mark with a black pencil or a pen and ink
The whole body and cape of Mrs. Dutch- will make the eyelashes and nose. Use a blue
woman is one solid champagne cork, which pencil for the eyes and a red one for the nose
has just been carved out a little with a pen- and mouth. Two little pieces of matchwood
knife to form the stuck at the side
outline of the will do duty for
cape, this carving the hands, and
being often un two underneath
necessary, as the will make the
feet . These
lines are already
shaped by the should be stuck
wire which holds in a flat pickle
the champagne jar cork , which
cork to the bottle. makes a good
For the head stand for the
we must take a little Dutch
川

smaller cork : wonian , who

one out of a will look quite
medicine bottle charming with a
will do beauti muslin and lace
apron fixed on
fully.,
round Shape
with ita with two pins
penknife, and under the upper
stick it to the The little Dutch family made out of ordinary corks part of the cork .
221
 THINGS TO MAKE AND THINGS TO DO
The head is formed of a rounded medicine
The little basket which she holds in her left
hand is made out of a cobnut, neatly carved in bottle cork. A circular piece of cardboard
two semicircles to shape. The nut is, of course, is cut out for the brim of the hat, and the
taken out to leave the basket hollow. top of the head, which comes through the
Mr. Dutchman is made of exactly the same cardboard, is painted the same colour as the
material, the champagne cork being used hat, and has a tiny ribbon tied round to
upside down. The outlines of the coat make it look like the crown.
and waistcoat are shaped with a penknife. The stick is made from a coloured match
Buttons may be put on the waistcoat by from which the top has been cut off.
ordinary short pins pushed in the cork . The The baby boy is made from an ordinary
little arms are cut out in cork, or, what is wine bottle cork, put upside down. Two
more simple, made of the little twigs of a matches make the legs, which are stuck ona
tree, fixed on to the body with pins, being fat, circular piece of cork to make the little
thusmovable. The legs and wooden boots are boy stand. The two arms are also made
also cut out of cork, the head and face being from bent matches. The hat is made in
treated in the same way as the Dutchwoman's. the way that has already been described .

HOW TO MAKE A GIRL'S WORKBOX

H AVE . you ever thought of the joy it The workbox now stands, and is covered
brings to have aa real workbox of your and lined . Some cord sewn round the foot
own ? Let us try to learn to make a of the box will make a neat finish and
box like the one in the picture. slightly raise the box. Now the cover
Take a piece of cardboard thick enough to must be made, and this is the most
make aa firm foundation, and on this trace the interesting part of the work. Cut a piece
of cardboard to fit exactly the top of your
8 workbox ; then, before putting on the
cretonne as you have done on the other
part, put a layer of cotton -wool to form
padding , and cover it over with the ma
terial . Do this on both sides of the card
board, taking great care to turn the edges
in , as described for the other part of the
box, before gluing the cretonne down. A
strip of material is fixed on the inside of
the lid, and sewn at regular intervals, to
receive a thimble, a pair of_scissors
crochet needle, and other things. The cover
is then put on the box part by slipping two
small pieces of cretonne under both cover
and back of box, one on each side , to
form hinges. These are then sewn very
с firmly, so that the lid can be opened and
closed without getting torn or unstitched.
The pattern of the girl's workbox
lines above. Cut the cardboard all round the
outlines of the diagram. Bend the four pieces
which are intended to form the four sides.
Do this whilst following the lines carefully , so
that the bottom of the box will be quite even .
Straighten the cardboard again , and cut two
pieces of cretonne, each one covering entirely
the piece of cardboard which includes the
bottom and sides of the workbox. Cut the
material about a quarter of an inch bigger
all round than the cardboard , to allow for
turning in the edges, which otherwise would
fray and look untidy ; then glue the cretonne
on the cardboard, back and front. When
this is done, let it dry for one day.
The next thing to do is to bend your covered
cardboard again , just as you did before. This
will be quite easy now, for, although you
cannot see the lines, the cardboard will bend
naturally and without any difficulty in the same The workbox lined and ready for use
place. Join the corners A together by sewing
the cretonne on the two sides with over -and- A silk cord running all round the top will
over stitches, using a needle with strong hide the joining of the cretonne, back and
thread to securethe corners, top and bottom , front, and can be sewn with light, long stitches,
very firmly. The same thing must be tacking the cretonne on both sides, thus mak
' Tepeated in the corners marked B, C, D. ing the edge of the box quite firm and neat.
222
 THE MYSTERY OF TELEGRAPHING THOUGHT
We have all been baffled at times by the
wonderful way in which a lady sitting
on a platform at one end of a hall has been
able to tell what a gentleman at the other end
has in his hand, and this strange system of
“ thought-reading ” is really very simple.
The boy or girl who would learn to play this
magical duetmust practise diligently till each
is perfect in the part they have to play — that
is all.
Let us suppose that the duet is played by
a boy and his sister. When the eventful
night comes the boy introduces the lady as
his “ medium ." Being a medium, she
naturally possesses a certain amount of the
thought -reading faculty. To prove
this, if the company, during
her absence from the room ,
will touch or indicate any
article therein, she will,
on her return, declare
be “ Yes .” The same principle may be
carried a good deal further, as in the follow
ing capital trick. During the absence of the
medium a pack of cards is first well shuffled ;
a great point should be made of this, because
ithas nothing whatever to do with the trick.
Nine cards are then dealt face upwardson the
table in rows of three each. One of these is
" touched ” by one of the company. The
medium , on her return, after a little cogita
tion, names the card.
Here the row in which the card stands
is indicated by the manner in which the
performer holds the wand . If between the
forefinger and thumb only the card is in the
first row ; if encircled by two fingers, in the
second ; if grasped by the whole hand, in the
third. The number at which it stands in the
row is revealed by the position of the left
hand. If this grasps the lapel of the coat the
card is No. 1. If the thumb is in the vest

1 2 3
4:56
7 8 9
3
The methods of telegraphing thought with a magic wand and a pack of cards
which article it was. There are several pocket, No. 2. If the hand hangs down by
ways by which the performer may impart the side, No. 3.
the necessary information. One of the Another method of telegraphing is by the
simplest is to arrange that when he asks position of the performer's thumbon the back
for, say, the sixth time " Is it this ? ” the of the unused cards. For this purpose you
question is to be answered “ Yes. " For a must imagine the surface of the top card as
second attempt it may be arranged that the divided into nine portions, numbered as indi
eighth or ninth question shall furnish the clue. cated in picture 3. The performer indicates
Another plan is to agree that whenever the the card touched by holding the pack so that
performer's question refers to a four -legged his thumb shall rest on that part answering to
object, say, a chair or table, the one next it in position. Supposing it held as shown
following shall be in picture 4 ,
answered in the the medium
affirmative. The would know that
performer may re the card was
peat the trick the middle one
without speak in the first row .
OG

ing at all, using The trick may

a ruler or paper be repeated in
knife as wand a still more
or pointer, surprising
merely way.
touching or Suppose
indica the nine
ting various cards laid on
objects in the table as
succes . in picture 5.
sion. Where 5. Position of pack indicating which card has been touched A similar
he points group is
with a “ wand," as above, it may be imagined lying side by side with it, and the
agreed that, so long as the performer holds pack isleftby the performer in that position
the wand as shown in picture 1 , the medium which in the imaginary group corresponds
is to answer “ No ” to all his questions; but with the card touched. Thus the pack laid
if the forefinger is shifted so as to lie along as in picture 5 would indicate that the
the wand, as in picture 2, the answer is to middle card in the top row is the one.
223
THE BEST KINDS OF RABBITS TO KEEP

ir

Usk

41
1

ME

The three radpits together near the top are the Silver Grey (dark ), the Silver Cream (middle), and the
Polish. The big rabbit with the ears standing quite erect is the Flemish Giant, and the one next it, hiding
behind the tree, is a Patagonian. Next come thetwo black -and-white rabbits, which are Dutch. The big rabbit
with very long ears is a lop - eared rabbit, and the white one beside it is an Angora. The last is a Himalayan .
224
 DUT
RABBITS AND HOW TO
THERE are many kindsof pet rabbits, but
the brown kind that one sees running
wild in the country lanes and woods and
fields are very difficult to tame. The tame
rabbits you may buy in the shop do not really
belong to this country at all. They are
bigger and fatter than the rabbits you see in
the fields, but they are prettier, and they are
quite tame. They are of different colours.
A RABBIT IS JUDGED BY ITS EARS
Some rabbits are white, with fluffy hair,
long ears, and pink eyes ; others are black ,
with white tips on the feet, on the tail, or round
the nose ; some are brown and white, others
blue and white, “ mousy ” colour, and so on.
The pure black ones are rather scarce, and
dear to buy ; so are the “ all-whites.” They
are known as Angoras, Himalayans, Pata
gonians, and so forth, the names being taken
from thecountry or district from which the first
rabbits of theseparticularkinds werebrought given in the summer,but not too many of
them. They should have oats at least once
by travellers who had seen them in Angora (in
Asia Patagonia
Minor), or( inin South
the Himalayas
orin America ).(in Perhaps
India ), again. Fora change, a few bakedor steamed
the funniest thing about these rabbits is their
ears, and the best rabbits—that is to say,
the most expensive - have the longest ears.
So that when you buy rabbits take par
ticular notice of their ears. It is by the ears
you must always handle a rabbit. If you
catch them round the body you are liable
to hurt them , especially when they are
young, for the bones of their body are very
fragile. When choosing your rabbits, there
fore, observe whether the ears, instead of
drooping down, fall backwards. If so, they
should not be very dear. Fourpence or six
pence ought to be enough for a rabbit of that
description. If one ear falls outward Mr.
Rabbit is not of much account. Sometimes
the ears fall forward on each side of the head.
Then the rabbit is known as a “ hornlop ,”
while others called " earlops " have ears
spread out like the wings of a flying bird or
aman swimming. Then some have one ear
dropping while the other sticks out or falls
back ; but the very best kind have both ears
hanging down by the sides of the cheeks,
and the ears are so long that when the
rabbit is standing easy the tips are touching
the ground. The “ dewlop, a funny little
thing which hangs down beneath the chin
in some rabbits, is supposed to be a point of
beauty by those who know. Another mark
of distinction is what is known as “ smut.”
By this is meant a dark spot on the nose.
There are three kinds of “ smut ” -the single,
the double, and the butterfly “ smut.” The
last-named variety is a marking which looks
something like the shape of a butterfly with
wings outspread. The darker the colour of
the " smut," the more valuable the animal.
WHAT . RABBITS LIKE TO EAT
You should always buy your rabbits in
pairs - a male and a female. And they must
be over six weeks old, for it is not good for
them to leave their mothers before that age.
They will then be able to feed themselves.
225
KEEP THEM
Mix a little bran with some hot water or
hot milk if you can get it, adding a pinch of
salt to it, every three or four days, and give
it to them twice or three times a day. The
bran should be varied with a few vegetables
occasionally ; but if you want healthy rabbits
you must not give them too much vegetable
food. They are very fond of turnip -tops,
lettuces, cabbage leaves, parsnips, they
dandelion
leaves and roots , and carrots. As grow
older you might try them with a little oatmeal
and split-peas. A mixture of oatmeal and
tea-leaves is a dish many rabbits appreciate.
But the great thing to remember, especi
ally when they get to full size , which is when
they are six months old , is that they ought
to have more dry than moist food. When
they appear sickly, and do not seem to care
for their ordinary food, try them with aa little
bread soaked in warm milk. Carrots may be
a day. A little water should be given now and
potatoes will suit them very well. Clover,
meadow -grass, and tares are other things
which please them when all else fails.
The hutch must be kept in a dry, warm
place. In winter the feeding is more diffi
cult, because you ill not be able to get so
many fresh vegetables ; but dry hay, and any
spare greenstuff you can obtain , such as
cabbage blades and stumps and turnips, will
keep your pets well until spring comes.
RABBITS MUST HAVE EXERCISE
Then , of course, they must have exercise.
A run out of the hutch at least once a day is
necessary. In the summer they might be
allowed to run on the grass in the garden ,
on a quiet common , or in a neighbouring
field where there are no dogs about. In the
winter you would let them run about for
some time on any dry place you can find.
Remember also to guard against other dan
gers to your pets. Cats, rats , dogs, and foxes
are the natural enemies of all rabbits.
Perhaps after your rabbits have lived
together for some time you will notice one of
them pulling little handfuls of down from
her breast, and placing it in a corner of the
hutch . Then you will know you must not
disturb the little nest she is making among the
clean straw with which you mustalways keep
her supplied. She should not be disturbed
in any way, and should be handled as little
as possible.
Presently, when you look in the hutch
one morning, you may find in the nest
five or six young ones. You must not
touch the young ones, or allow anyone
else to do so ; indeed , Mrs. Rabbit may
scratch you if you try to meddle with her
family, and it will be better to take the
other big rabbit away altogether for two or
three weeks, in case he hurts some of the
brood, and quarrels with their mamma in
consequence. The young ones should be left
in the care of their mother for six weeks.
 AN EASY WAY TO MAKE A RABBIT-HUTCH
THE size and kind of rabbit-hutch you
require will depend upon the number
of rabbits you intend to keep, and the place
where you are going to put the hutch. If
you keep the rabbits indoors, and have only
one pair, a simple box, such as an empty
soap or sugar box, will do nicely. With
a little trouble you can make it look as shown
in the first picture.
Try to get a box one end of which is in
three pieces. Take out the middle piece and
nail two wooden slips at the side of the
opening. These will form guides within
which the middle piece may be made to
slide up and down and act as a door, and
will beas shownin the picture below.
It is even easier to make the door-part
hinge, making pieces of leather do
for hinges. The tongues cut out of
1. A simple rabbit-hutch made from an empty soap -box
old boots do very well for leather hinges,
which shouldbe put on the top of the door,
not on the side. Then you must cover over
the empty space where the lidneatly box was
with wire netting, nailingit of theround the
edge.
But the best way to keep rabbits is out of
doors, where they can enjoy the light and the
sunshine, and where they can sometimes eat
the growing grass. A rabbit finds a blade
of growing grass twice as sweet as the blades
which you have pulled for it and put into the
hutch beside it. We will therefore see
how to make a good rabbit-hutch in
which the rabbits will like to live, and
one which will be convenient for us when
we attend to them.
We will suppose that we have a garden
with a lawn or a grass plot where we can
put the hutch and keep the rabbits. We
will suppose also that we are going to
keep two pairs of rabbits, four in all,and
shall make the hutch large enough for
that. Of course , if we have a hutch large
enough for two pairs of rabbits, and keep
only one pair init, somuch the better for
the rabbits; they will have more room
to run about.
Remember that we must make our 2. The rabbit -butch as it should appear when completed
hutch as cheaply as possible, and if we can the two sides as seen in picture 4. Make
get some old boxes which we can cut up,
that is just what we want. Our rabbit-house
must have two compartments, which we shall
call the bed -room and the dining -room . The
bed -room in our hutch will be the inside
226
compartment, and will be dark ; the dining
room will be the outside compartment,with
plenty of light and air and sunshine. When
the rabbits are running wild in the woods
they sleep in the holes they have made in
the ground, and they come out to eat the
grass, so that our names of the two compart
ments are not ridiculous. First take two
pieces of wood 47 feet long - that is, 54 inches
long - two inches broad, and finch or inch
thick . See that these are of exactly the same
length, and, if they are not, make them so
with your saw . Now take some short pieces
27 inches long and nail them on to these long
pieces as we see done in picture 3. Do not
put these upright pieces right up to the edge
of the long pieces, either at the top or the
bottom . Leave of an inch space, as you
see in the picture, and keep them inch from
the end also. We shall understand the reason
for this later on. The upright pieces at one
side go along 24 inches from the end, and
this part makes a wall of the rabbits bed
room . There is one piece only — 2 inches
broad - almost at the other end, but | inch
from it, and this piece makes a corner of
the rabbits' dining -room . Put the ends of
this piece right to the top and bottom edges
of the longpiece. It must therefore be one
and a half inches longer than the pieces 1
you have already nailed on — that is, 281
inches long. In making all the pieces the
proper size, you will need to use the saw and
the plane, and perhaps the chisel, as we
saw how to do in the last part.
Now you have made one side of the
hutch. Make another exactly the same,
except thatthe order of nailing on the upright
pieces is reversed that is,the single pieceis
on the right-hand side, and all the other
pieces together, making a wooden wall 24
inches wide, are on the left-hand side.
The next thing is to put on the roof and 1
the floor of the bed -room . Do this by cutting
a number of pieces of wood to the length of
20 inches, and nailing them across between
them exact at each end. Their ends will fit
into the corners made by having the walls a
little way short of the sides of the long
pieces with which we started. Now, by
nailing some pieces together, make a
 -MAKING A RABBIT - HUTCH CARRO

partition that will be 281 inches high and of 11 inch mesh . The whole of it will
and 20 inches wide. Make it by nailing cost about a shilling. Also buy a penny
two pieces of wood 181 inches long across worth of small wire staples. Nail this netting
it. These pieces of wood we call straps. into position right around the roof, sides, and
Let one of them be inch from the top, and floor of the dining - room , inside the corner
let the bottom of the other be at least straps. It will make a good job if you cut
6 inches from the slips of wood and nail
bottom . Now cut them on at the corners
away a piece 6 inches inside the wire netting.
square near one of Thus the wire netting
the bottom corners , will be between the
as shown in picture corner pieces' and
8. Nail it to the box these slips, which will
you have already retain it in position.
made, or partlymade, The completed picture
not at the outside end, (2) makes this clear,
but at the inside end, Your rabbit -hutch is
as seen in picture 5. now finished . You
This is the wall that 3. One side of the rabbit - hutch nailed together can , if you like, have
will divide the bed - room from the dining- the second door you made -- that into the
room . The 6-inch space we have left is for dining -room - with wire netting in the middle
the rabbits to pass through when they wish instead of being solid . This is quite simple
to go from one room to the other. to do ; picture 2 will help you. The corners
At the other end of the bed-room, opposite of the frame to which you attach the netting
the dividing wall , nail two upright pieces, may give you a little trouble, but it is

4. How to put on the top 5. A rabbit- hutch with partition fixed

one at each side. Letthese pieces go right impossible to do anything worth while with
from top to bottom . The space between is out trouble. You must check them that is,
for the door. Make a door to fit. Take cut away half the thickness of each piece at
your measurements carefully from the space, the corners before nailing the pieces up.
and strengthen the door by nailing on two This will give you work for your chisel.
wooden straps inside, just as you did Now you can paint the hutch outside, but
with the partition. Now get a pair of leave it white inside. Green is a good
8 -inch hinges and screw -nails to fit. colour for the outside. You must paint it
Put the hinges twice-that is , give it two coats, the
on as shown in second after the first has dried.
picture 7. The You will notice
bed-room is ê. A corner one thing about
finished ,and we our rabbit
now turn our hutch which
attention to the you do not find
dining -room . in every hutch .
Begin at the The floor of the
far end, where dining-room is
you have al of wire netting,
ready put on the not of wood.
corner pieces. This makes it
Put right possible for the
across, both at rabbits to eat
top and bot. grass through
tom, a piece of 7. Door of the hutch 8. The partition 9. How to make the end the netting.
wood 2 inches wide and inch thick , as shown They can do so, of course , only if you put
in picture 9. Now make a door for that end the hutch where there is grass. Do so if
to the proper size, which you must get by possible ; and when the rabbits have eaten
measuring the place into which it is to go. all the grass under the netting , move the
You must now get some wire netting. hutch to where there is fresh grass. Then the
Buy three yards of netting, 30 inches wide grass will grow again where the hutch was.
227
 LO

ELECTRICITY MADE AT HOME

E LECTRICITY is perhaps the most powerful
and yet the most mysterious force in
the world. Yet the knowledge of it is almost
new. It is easy nowadays to push a button
or press a knob up or downand so light up
a room with electric light. Yet this has been
possible only during the last twenty or thirty
years. When our grandfathers were boys,
electric lighting, even in a palace, was quite
unknown .
The experiments which made the powers
of electricity known go back much further,
and it is about 150 years since Benjamin
Franklin began to find out something
about this mysterious power. Some of
the methods he used were very simple,
and any boy can try them
for himself.
Take a piece of ordinary
brown paper, and warm it
before the fire. When it is
hot, lay it on the table and
brush it briskly with a warm 0.000000
and dry clothes brush. You
then pick it up quicklyand
hold it to the wall. You
will find that the paper has
become electrified, and that
it will cling to the wall . It 1. The
clings because it is electri
fied and is attracting the wall to it. If
you warm the paper and brush it as
before, and then hold it over some
little bits of lighter paper, the small
pieces will fly up and cling to the
electrified brown paper.
It is even possible to get sparks
from electrified paper. Take a large
sheet of stout drawing paper, warm
it till it is thoroughly dry, lay it on
a dry wooden table, and rub it very
briskly with a piece of Aannel or
woollen material to electrify it. Then
put a piece of metal-a watch-chain
or a bunch of keys - in the middle
and lift the paper off the table by two
corners. Then, if someone else puts
his knuckle or finger to the metal, a
bright spark will pass between his
finger and the
metal , which ,
however , he
won't feel. If the
weather and the
pa per are
thoroughly dry,
you may get a
spark an inch
long.
But paper is not
the best thing to
try these experi
ments with . For
one reason , it will
not retain elec
tricity very long ,
and for another
it is not the most
3. The drunken man easy substance to
cut out electrify .
A piece of glass rod or tube is a better
exciter, as we call anything electrified by
rubbing. A solid rod is the better, and a
chemist can sell us a piece for a penny. . To
excite, or electrify, this, we must rub it
briskly with a piece of dry silk. Or wecan
take a stick of ordinary sealing -wax, which
must be rubbed with flannel. A third kind of
exciter, and a very good one too, is a piece
of vulcanite, rubbed with Aannel.
Vulcanite is hard rubber, and fountain-pens
are generally made of it . So if we can get
an old fountain -pen it will do first rate.
We take our glass rod , sealing-wax, or
fountain -pen, and excite it by rubbing with
the silk or flannel. Then we hold it near
some tiny scraps of paper or
bits of bran, and it will pick
them up as seen in picture 1 .
We must be careful that
everything is quite dry, and
the articles must be warmed
before the fire to make sure
they are dry . All experi
ments with this kind of
electricity will fail most dis
appointingly unless every
thing is warm and dry,
exciter picking up paper including the weather. We
shall find sometimes that
the rod will pick up the paper, and
afterwards will not attract the same
piece. This is because the little
bit of paper has received a charge
of electricity from the rod, and
when two electrified bodies come
together they repel one another, if
both are electrified with the same
sort of electricity.
If the bodies are charged with
opposite kinds of electricity they
will attract one another . These
two sorts of electricity are called
positive and negative electricity:
Glass rubbed with silk gives posi
tive electricity , and sealing -wax or
vulcanite rubbed with flannel gives
negative electricity.
Take a piece of thin paper - the
white edge off
a newspaper
will do — and
cut a strip , say ,
a bout four
inches long and
about an inch
wide. Double
it over and
bring the two
ends together.
Now draw a
man as shown
in picture 2 ,
and cut it out
to shape. Do
not cut the top ,
but leave it so
that the figure
will stand up 4. An easily -made
2. The drunken man as se en in stand

228
 -ELECTRICITY MADE AT HOME
picture 3. If you excite the glass rod, and we make a hole in the cork with a skewer
hold it near one side, the figure will rollover or a nail . The wire should be a little
towards it, and if you then hold the excited thicker than ordinary electric-bell wire. If
vulcanite or sealing-wax at the other side he we have to buy it we ask for No. 14, but
will roll back that way, and so you can any piece of fairly stiff copper wire
attract him all round the table. will do. When wehave put it through
Another experiment is to make a the cork, we bend one end-the one
tiny ball of pith out of the centre of an to go inside the bottle - into a small
elderberry stick. This pith is very hook -shape. The other end is to be
light when it is dry, and can easily be first bent round like a ring, and then
made into a small ball about as big as the ring is to be bent down at a right
a pea. Fix the ball to a thread of silk , angle . Then we shall have a piece
and the silk to the gas -bracket or some like picture 7.
thing where it can hang down. Now Now make two small pith-balls and
excite the rod by rubbing and hold it hang them each on a pieceof cotton,
near. The pith-ballwill Hy toward the both the same length. Tie the two
rod, but after touching it it flies away ends on to the hook in the wire and
again, and will keep off as long as the put them into the bottle and fix the
electricity remains in the rod. But if cork in. The pith -balls should then
you have used the glass rod and then be about two inches or three inches
bring the vulcanite or sealing-wax from the bottom of the bottle, as
near, the ball will fly to it. This shows shown in picture 8. Of course, we
the difference between the two kinds must not forget to see that the bottle
of electricity. Instead of the pith -ball 5. The doll acrobat and everything else is quite dry.
we can use a little piece of feather if Now, if we excite the rod and touch
we cannot get the pith, but pith is the better. the top of the wire with it, the two pith
Instead of hangingthe pith -ball from a gas- balls will become excited, and, as both will
bracket, we can easily make a stand as shown be charged with the same sort of electricity,
in picture 4. This is made they will stand out apart
of a bottle with a piece of from each other, and if we
copper wire stuck through bring anything which is elec
the cork . We bend the wire trified against the copper
over as shown, and make a wire we shall see the pith
loop or a hook in it to tie lig balls move.
the silk thread to. With the We can make electricity
pith -ball we can prove that on a larger scale than this.
when we rub the glass with Borrow a wooden lacquered
silk, or the vulcanite or the tray and cut out a piece of
sealing -wax with flannel, the 6. The acrobat ready for work thick brown paper (the sort
silk or tice flannel also of paper that large and heavy
become electrified. If we roll the silk or parcels from the stores are wrapped in ) the
flannel into a ball , and after rubbing the rod same size as the inside of the tray, so that it
with it hold it near the pith- ball , the effect lies flat on the bottom of the tray . Gum
will be the same as if we held the two slips of paper at each end of
rod near the ball. the sheet to serve as handles.
Take a piece of thewhite margin Have the tray supported on two
of a newspaper and draw a picture dry glass tumblers (to prevent the
on it like picture 5, about two inches 7. Cork and bent wire electricity leaking away), and
in height. Then cut it out to shape. warm the sheet of paper at the
Cut a small hole at the hands , but be careful to fire until it is thoroughly dry and hot.
cut it round and clean. Make it big enough Rubbing will help to dry it. Then put it
for the head of a pin to go through. Now we quickly on the table and brush it hard with a
take a piece of cotton thread and run warm and dry hard clothes brush .
one end through the hole in the paper 0 Put it on your tea -tray which is resting
acrobat. We now tie the ends of the on the tumblers , touch the tray with
cotton to two chairs or other objects, your finger, and lift away the sheet of
but we must see that the thread is paper by the handles you have fixed
drawn quite tight, as seen in picture6. to it. Then put your knuckle close to
Now, if we excite the rod we can make the tray and you will get a spark,
the paper acrobat swing round and which you can get half a dozen times
round after the rod. if you repeat the process of touching
The pith -ball electroscope is a con the tray, lifting away the brown paper,
trivance which will be very useful in and putting your knuckle to thetray.
many electrical experiments, and it is These experiments are the simplest
easily made. With the electroscope we that we can undertake, and it was by
can always test the presence of elec- 8. The simple simple experiments such as these that
tricity, and make a good estimate of electroscope great inventors came to understand the
its strength. We take a glass pickle mysterious powers of the force that
bottle with a big mouth , and clean and dry it makes possible the telephone and the tele
thoroughly. T we put a piece of copper graph, and the motors and dynamos that
wire through the cork . Wecan do this if drive railway trains and tram-cars.
229
 MORE GAMES TO
ON page 115of our bookare some
good games that can be played
while sitting by the fire. Here are
more games which we can play indoors.
WORD-MAKING
NEAR the topof a slip of paper each player
writes down a word given out by the
leader of the company . Then all start to make
a list below it of other words, spelt from the
letters it contains — and these letters only.
When the leader says that time is up (about
ten minutes should be allowed ) , the lists are
added up, and the player who has made the
largest number of words is the winner. It is
not necessary to choose a very long word, for
it is surprising how many words may be
made from the letters contained in any word
of ordinary length. For example, from the
word “ animal ” we can get : am , nail, main,
lain, and so on .
CONSEQUENCES
Eachplayerisprovided half a sheet of
with
notepaper and a pencil. The game begins
by writing at the head of the paper the name
of some friend, a man, and a verb to show
what he did . Thus : “ Mr. Smith met. ”
The written words are then folded over out
of sight, and the slip of paper is passed on to
the next neighbour, no player, of course,
knowing what another has written. Every-
one now writes the name of a lady, folds the
paper and passes it on again.
This time each writes down what they think
was said or done by the people whose names
are hidden, and, having folded the slip, pass it
on , when everyone adds the words, " and
the consequences were " -whatever they
like to write down. This being done, the
papers are collected and someone reads out
the slips. The consequences of these mixed-
up tales are generally very funny.
MAGIC ANSWERS
This is a game in whichtwo of the players
form a plan between themselves to puzzle
the rest. One of these two leaves the room ,
while his partner remains behind to choose
with the rest of the company some object to
be guessed. The one outside is then recalled
and questioned by his accomplice as to what
this object is. Several things are touched .
3
" Is it this ? ” “ Is it this ? " he is asked.
To every inquiry he answers “ No," until
something is mentioned that has four legs,
and as he and his friend have previously
arranged that such an article shall not be
referred to till just before the real object is
named , he knows that the next question may
be answered with a “ Yes. "
The secret can be made more difficult for
other players to find out by altering the plan,
and agreeing that a certain nuniber of ques
tions, let us say six, shall be asked aftermen-
tioning the four-legged article before the
chosen object is referred to. But several
little variations of this secret game will, no
doubt, suggest themselves to our readers.
230
PLAY BY THE FIRE
CLUMPS ,
The players divide into two parties. One
player from each party leavesthe room , and
between them they think of some article or
thing, let us say, “ The smallest window in St.
Paul's Cathedral.” While they are outside,
the rest form themselves into two circles, one
at each end of theroom. On returning, one
of the thinkers ” goes into each of these
circles, where he is plied rapidly with
questions, the answers to which must only be
« Yes or No. "
Each player takes it in turn to ask a ques
tion— " Is it animal ? " then “ Is it mineral ? "
“ Is it vegetable ? ”
)
“ Is it in England ? "
" Is it in this room ? " and so on , and the
side that guesses the object first claims both
thinkers, and so adds to its numbers, and
the game begins again. When the players
are tired, the biggest side has won.
SIMON SAYS
Simon stands up in front of the row and,
with a finger or thumb held up, cries :
“ Simon says, turn up !” All the rest must
immediately do as he does. Then he gives
the order : " Simon says, turn down !” And
each must point downward. He watches care
fully the while to see that no one disobeys
him. If presently he gives an order, omitting
the words “ Simon says ,” anyone who obeys
it must at once pay a forfeit. It is a trap that
a player easily falls into, and great care must
be taken not to do as Simon does unless the
command begins “ Simon says."
PROVERBS
Whileoneofthe players is out of the
room , the rest think of a proverb. It
should contain at least as many words as
there are players.
The boy or girl who has been sent out is
now called back, and begins the game by
asking the first in the rowa question. This
question may be of any kind, but the answer
to it must contain the first word of the pro
verb. The next is then questioned, and
replies with the second word, wrapped up ,
as it were, in the answer. The longer the
answer the more difficult it will be for the
questioner to pick out the word that helps
to make the proverb. But no answer should
contain more than a single sentence.
Supposing the proverb to be, “ It is never
too to mend," and the first question is,
" How many apples do you eat in a day ?"
the answer might be, “ As it is not wise to
eat too much of anything , there are some
days when I don't eat apples at all.” The
word “ it " is not easy to notice in this
sentence . But it would be more difficult
to hide the last word in the proverb.
Let us take as a question, for example,
" Are you fond of reading ? The answer
might be , “ Yes ; but I tore the pages ofmy
favourite book, and must mend them before
I can go on with the story ." If you wish to
puzzle the questioner you should not let your
word begin or end the sentence.

SCHOOLMISTRESS
Theandmistress standswithin front of the atclass
top of the form , she asks questions as
quickly as she can think of them. She begins
with the letter A , and forms her questions so
that the answers begin with this letter. For
example : “ The name of an English queen
beginning with A.” If the answer is not
given before she can count up to ten, she
goes to the next scholar, and the next, until
one is reached who replies. This scholar goes
to the top of the class, and another question is
asked on the letter B, and so on through the
alphabet. It is quickness more than anything
else that makes the fun in this game.
THROWING LIGHT
Two players secretly choose between them
a word that has two meanings, such as
" Ball " -a thing to play with, and “ Ball ”
-a dance. They then begin talking to one
another aloud, referring to the word without
using it. One will say : " I played with it
in the garden this morning.' “ Yes," says
the other, " and a friend of mine went to
one last night.”
Those listeners who think they have
guessed what the word is may join in the con
versation, but must pay a forfeit if mistaken.
SIXPENNY TELEGRAMS
ONEgram
of the players calls out that a tele guardian of the vacant seat looks round the
of twelve words has to be sent off
describing, let us say, the Boat Race, and
the words must begin with certain letters.
He mentions twelve letters of the alphabet
which he has chosen , and each player puts
them down on a slip of paper. Five minutes
are given for the writing of the telegrams,
and when the time is up they are all read out
aloud . Clever players sometimes make very
funny telegrams, and a great deal of fun can
be got out of the game. A prize can be
given for the best telegram.
THE GENTEEL LADY
Those who take part inthis game will
want very good memories. It is begun This
by the second player from the left-hand endtheispower
good practice
saying to her neighbour on the right : “ Good.
morning, genteel lady, always genteel. I, a
genteel lady, always genteel, come from that
genteel lady, always genteel (pointing to the
girl on her left), to tell you that she owns an
eagle with a golden beak .”
The neighbour receives this information
with a bow and repeats it to the girl on her
right, adding at the end the words “ and
silver claws." This third player then bows
and passes it on, adding to the sentence a
remark about the eagle's feathers. Each
player adds something of her own, and the
first girl who fails to repeat, word for word ,
the message she receives has a paper spill ,
called a horn, stuck in her hair. The player
sitting next then turns to her right-hand
neighbour and takes up the tale in these
words : “ Good -morning, genteellady, always
genteel. I, a genteel lady, always genteel ,
come from this one-horned lady, always one
orn to tell you ," etc. Every mistake
means a fresh horn , and the game often ends
by all “ genteel ladies " becoming “ one
231
>>
horned," or " two-horned,” or even " four
horned ,” because with every repetition the
words get more difficult to remember.
GENERAL POST
ALLthe playerssit roundthe room in a
large circle, and one, who is blindfold,
stands in the middle. Each player takes the
name of a town, and the leading player makes
a list of these, from which he calls out now
and then, thus : “ The Post is going from
Bristol to York , ” choosing towns on
opposite sides of the circle. “ Bristol ” and
“ York ” jump up and slip across to each
other's seat, the blindman doing his best to
catch one of them as they pass. When
several towns have changed places, and the
blindman has failed to make a prisoner, the
leader cries out “ General Post," when all
must jump up and cross over to opposite
sides. In the hurry and confusion the blind
man is sure to catch someone , who takes
his place while he becomes one of the towns.
WINKS
A CIRCLE is formed of chairs, one only of
which is unoccupied. Behind each chair,
including the vacant one, stands a player
whose duty it is to prevent the person sitting
in front from leaving his chair, though no
effort must be made to check him until he
shows some intention of escaping. The
ring and winks to someone to come and
occupy it. The player thus called must be
very alert, or the one behind the chair will
clutch him before he can get away. One
touch is enough. If successful, the chair left
becomes the vacant one, and the player
behind it must lose no time in trying to get
another tenant by a wink or a nod at some
one else. The faster the changes take place
the greater the fun, but the guardians behind
the chairs must, of course, be as quick as
they can to avoid losing their charges.
OBJECT GAME
forthe memoryand
of observation. Each member
ofthe party has a piece of paper and a pencil.
When all are ready, someone enters the
room carrying a tray with about twenty
small articles on it. The tray is placed
in full view of everybody and left there for
one minute, during which time no one must
touch pencil or paper, but must simply look
at the contents of the tray. At a given word
it is carried away, and the players must write
down the names as many of the articles as
they can remember having seen. Only a
certain time is allowed for this, and those
who remember the greatest number of
articles win the game. The objects chosen
should be of the simplest kind - a black pin,
a tiny piece of coal , some birds' seed, a
piece of fluff, a hair, and so on .
YOU MUSTN'T LAUGH !
sit in a rowround
ALLsolemn. the fire and look
Then the first player says :
“ Haw -haw !" which is repeated all down
the line, one after an Those who can
not do this without laughing afterwards are
declared out, and the game begins again.
 LITTLE PROBLEMS
'HESE problems are continued from
THES page 116, and below are answers to
the problems appearing on that page.
THE CLOCK STRIKES TWELVE
14. George and his sister stood under the
church tower and heard the clock strike six.
George looked at his watch while it did so , and
said to his sister : “ It took thirty seconds to
strike six ." His sister replied : " Then how
long would it take to strike twelve ? ” George
replied : “ Sixty seconds, of course ! " George
was wrong. What is the correct answer ?
HOW DID HE MEASURE THE MILK ?
15. Mrs. Thomson ordered four quarts of
milk from her milkman , who had eight quarts
in his can, but no measure by which he could
measure it. Mrs. Thomson had two jugs,
one able to hold five quarts and the other
three quarts. The milkman said that he
could not measure four quarts with these,
THE ANSWERS TO THE PROBLEMS ON PAGE 116
1. No ; George never sees the monkey's
back , which he clearly would do if he
walked round the monkey .
2. Mabel bought six apples, which cost
4d. , and six oranges at ad. each, making
3d . for the oranges and 7d. for the whole.
The simplest way to find this is to count what
she paid for three of each, which would be ad.
and 1 % d. , making 3 % d .; and 7d. is exactly
double 372d ., so that she would get twice
three of each for 7d.
3. Mary put the planks as shown in the
picture, and thus reached the
island.
4. Tom's uncle's sister was
Tom's mother.
5. This one is not so easy as
the others . Let us find first
how many stamps were left
when Jack had taken his share.
Seeing that Frank had one
more than half, Harry must
have had one less than half.
You know that Harry had
three, therefore four must
have been half the quantity
that Harry and Frank divided. How Mary got the eggs
Four is the half of eight, so
that Frank had five, which is one more that 17/2 canaries is 272 times as many as were
than half of eight. Now we must find how
many Jack had . Jack's share was one
more than half of the total quantity, and
therefore the quantity divided by Frank and
Harry must have been one fewer than half of
the total. Frank and Harry's share came to
eight, as we have seen ; and the half of the
total quantity, being one more than eight, was
nine. Jack had ten , which is one more than
half of the total quantity, and there were thus
eighteen stamps altogether.
6. To begin with , one piece of string was
izin. long and the other piece 24in . After
cutting bin . off each, the shorter piece was
6in. long and the longer piece 18in. long.
7. If a man says that he has no brothers
The next Things to Make and Things to Do begin on page 323
232
FOR CLEVER PEOPLE
but Mrs. Thomson's little boy, Charlie,
showed him how to do it. How did he do it ?
HOW MANY EGGS ?
16. If a hen and a half lays an egg anda half
in a day and a half, how many eggs will one
hen lay in six days ?
TWELVE EGGS IN BASIN
97. There are 12 boys, and on the table is a
basin with 12 eggs. Each boy took one
egg, and there remained one egg in the
basin . How was this ?
THE FARMER AND THE TRAMP
18. A tramp lies down for a nap at the side
of a haystack, and hears the farmer approach
ing. He runs round and round the stack,
chased by the farmer. They start from
opposite corners, the tramp taking forty
seconds to run completely round, and the
farmer thirty seconds. How often must the
farmer run round before catching the tramp ?
and sisters, his father would have only one
son - himself. Thus, if what he says is put in
simple language, it is : " That man's father is
myself." This means that the picture at
which he looked was that of his own son.
8. You have probably guessed that the
cork cost d ., which is wrong: Since the
bottle cost ad. more than the cork , if we take
away that ad. it leaves the other d . to be
divided equally between bottle and cork, which
is 4d. for each. The cork, then, cost 4d.
9. Suppose we first give each of the children
Is, each. This will use £2 Ios.
We have then Ios. left, which
is to be used in giving another
3d. each to the boys. Now,
there are 40 threepences in ios .,
so that there must be 40 boys.
Therefore there are so girls.
10. The messenger brought
2 % canaries, and 1/2 times as
many as there were left in the
cage. Counting those in the
cage, then , there were 22
times as many as were left,
But there
and 22 canaries.
were 20 altogether. Taking
away the 2/2canaries, we see
left in the cage. Or, what is the same thing,
35 canaries is 5 times as many as were left
in the cage. There were 7 left in the cage ;
and so there were 13 which flew away.
II . In fifteen minutes I had gone į mile,
and the horse 220 yards less than i mile. In
one hour the horse would walk 880 yards less
than 4 miles—that is, 372 miles in one hour.
12. The brick weighed 12lb. The weight
of each of two halves is the same, so that if
a brick weighs half its own weight and 61b. ,
the 6lb. must represent the other half.
13. She got 16 for a shilling, being nine
pence per dozen. Had there been 18 for a
shilling, the price would have been eight
pence per dozen .
|
7

E
TUN
NEP

URANUS

JUPI
TER

EART
H
W
E
E
N

THE SUN AND HIS FAMILY : THE GREAT WORL

The great worlds that spin round the sun in space travel faster than anyth
cannot show them moving, but our artist has represented them as motor -ca
FACE PAGE 233
 SATURN

MARS

MERCURY

VENUS

mu

108
Morrell
DR_DS THAT TRAVEL THROUGH SPACE FOR EVER
simhing we can conceive, a thousand times faster than an express train . We
orars to help us to imagine them on their ceaseless flight round the sun .
1
 The Child's Story of
THE EARTH

WHAT THIS STORY TELLS US

E know the earth spins through space like a ball, spinning round once in a
We day, and travelling round the sun once in a year. But the earth was not
always a great ball. Once it was a reat cloud, made of the stuff of which the earth
is made, and of which our bodies are made. The cloud was moving, spinning
round until it came together, shrinking into the shape of a globe, and at last be
coming solid. Spinning in space at the same time were other great clouds. We
call them planets, which means wanderers, because they wander through the sky.
They are the sun's family . One is so near to the sun that it goes round it in 88
days ; one is so far away that it has only been round the sun 12 times since Jesus
Christ was born . All round these planets are other worlds called moons, and
millions of strange and wonderful things which go through the universe spinning.

THE SUN AND HIS FAMILY

Tow we must take Now, of course ,
Nowup the story of CONTINUID FROM PAGE 120 when we talk of wan
the earth from the dering we think of a
beginning As we movement that is
know that the earth is not in the haphazard and does not quite
middle of the world , but that know where it is going. That is
it goes round the sun, we must not true of the planets , even
be very sure to find out all that though we call them wanderers.
we can as to what the sun is, and why We know now that these planets all
it makes the earth go round it. We move round the sun just as the earth
could not live without the sun , and we moves round the sun, and in just as
cannot know too much about it. orderly a way. That is why we may
Where, then, have the sun and the talk of the sun and his family. We
earth come from, and what were they must think of the sun as a great light
like at first ? and furnace in the centre of our part
We have seen that, as the earth spins
3 of the great world . Oo
00

round itself, it moves round the sun, Around him there travel, from one oo
0.
bo
and so we know that, so to speak , year's end to another, a wonderful OO

the sun is a neighbour of ours. Now family of planets. One of these is

we must find out whether we have
any other near neighbours, and we
find that we have . There is, for
instance , the wonderful moon, the
story of which is part of the story
of the earth . But also we see in the
sky a number of bright objects that
look like stars , but which, for several
reasons, we know are different from
the stars , that we also see when we
look upwards. These bright objects
are not stars because, for one thing,
they move about the sky, while the
real stars seem to be fixed, and for
ages past have been called the “ fixed
stars . ' Since they are always seen to
be moving, the men of long ago
called them the wanderers ; but, of
course , those men did not speak
English , but Greek , and we now use
the Greek word when we speak of
them . They are called planets. which
just means wanderers .
the earth . She is not the biggest ,
nor the smallest , nor the nearest
to the sun , nor the furthest from
it . They all go round the sun in
the same direction - they go the
same way ; but, of course, if a
planet is further away from the
sun than the earth is , it will have
much further to go before it can
get right round the sun and come
back again to the same place. This
takes it very much longer time,
then , and so from one year's end
to another would mean something
very different on that planet from
what it means to us. Our earth may
go round the sun more than a hundred
times whilst one of these other planets
that is much further away from the
sun goes round only once .
But all that does not matter at
present.
The great fact is that our
earth, which is so important for us ,

R 233
 THE CHILD'S STORY OF THE EARTHamman.com
is really just one of several planets now made, and the stuff which is before
that go round the sun. It is our sun you and which you call paper. All the
and their sun . Now, the Latin word stuff, or matter, as it is called , that now
for the sun is Sol, and so this great goes to make the solar system—the sun
system, made up of Sol—the sun-and and his family-was there in that great
all his planets is called the solar system . cloud. There was no system , however.
Plainly, then , we shall not be able to The cloud had no particular shape, and
tell the story of the earth unless we one part of it was just like another.
know the story of the solar system , for There was only this to be saidif
the earth is part of the solar system. we, and not merely the stuff of which
E TIME WHEN THERE WAS our bodies are made, had been there to
THENEITHER EARTH NOR SUN say it—and that is that all the little
You will remember that men used bits of which the cloud was made up
to think that the earth was flat and
were moving They were probably
still, with the sky above it , and therushing about in a very rough-and
fiery under -world below it ? How
different that is from what we know tumble sort of way. Nothing could have
been less like a system
now —that the earth is a ball, one of all happened so long ago of any kind. This
a number of balls that are always cannot think how long ago that we simply
it was, any
flying round the sun ! more than we can really think how big
Now at last we can begin at the the cloud was. But , as the ages went on ,
beginning of the story of the earth .
all the little bits of stuff that made up
We must go back to a time when there the cloud found themselves moving, not
was no earth at all , when there was no like a jumble, but in a more orderly
sun at all , and no planets at all . way . Indeed, so orderly was their
There was only , in those far-away movement, after a long time, that the
times we cannot say those far-away
whole great shapeless cloud slowly
days, for there could be no days when began to twist or spin on itself.
there was no sun or earth- there was
HEN THE SPINNING OF
only in those far-away times some great WHETHE EARTH BEGAN
cloud of stuff, so much bigger than any Now , that reminds you of the earth
cloud you ever saw, so much bigger
>
spinning on itself, and so it should, for
than anything we know, that not even the slow spinning of this great cloud
the wisest of wise men can really make was the beginning of the spinning that
a picture in his mind of how big that
cloud must have been. There it was, makes our night and day. The stuff
however. Enormous though it was, it that makes the earth was set spinning
was only a cloud. If we could have in that cloud, and it has been spinning
been there to see it we should not have ever since ; it is spinning now, and
in the same direction as when it first
found much to say of it , except simply
that it was there and that it was very began . But there was no earth yet ,
big. All parts of it were like all other nor sun, nor solar system ; there was
parts . It was just a cloud, and if you merely this spinning cloud.
had tried to draw a map of it you could As time went on it began to shrink .
only have drawn its edge all round, for This we can be quite sure of, for we
know that every speck of stuff in the
there was nothing else to draw in it. whole world tries to attract every other
STUFF THAT WE ARE MADE OF
THEAST IN THE GREATCLOUD speck of stuff in the world. That is
Some people think that it must have why a ball falls to the earth when you
been a very bright and even a very hot let it go, as we shall see later. Now, if
cloud, giving out light and heat from in this enormous cloud all the little parts
itself ; but most people think that this were pulling upon each other, of course
was not so, and that at first, at any it would shrink, for those on the outside
rate , this cloud was not bright or hot, would have all the others pulling them
but perhaps very cold . inwards and none pulling them outwards.
Now , I suppose , you guess what is We have made up our minds to try
coming. That great cloud was made of to find out where the sun and the earth
the stuff which now makes up the sun come from, and what they were like
and the planets, including our own earth , at first. But before we do that we
and even the stuff of which your body is must look for a little while at what we
234
 THE FIRE THAT FLIES THROUGH SPACE

Wemay often see lights like these shoot acrossthe sky in November and this is why we call them shooting
stars, but they are not stars. They are very little things, some as big as pebbles , some as big as cricket- balls,
which the earth has caught as she Aies through space, and sends spinning through the air so fast that they are
madehotand bright by their flight. Once a comet, a star with a tail of fire, disappeared, and in its place are now
many ofthese flying lights, which we call“ meteorites, " after a Greek word meaning something raised high above
the ground. The missing comet bas, no doubt, broken into pieces which have become meteorites. We see
them best in November because then the earth is in the path taken by many of these little wanderers.
235
 - THE CHILD'S STORY OF THE EARTH
may call the brothers and sisters of except a very few — were called fixed
the earth - heavenly bodies that began stars.
as the earth began, and that depend On the other hand, one or two bright
upon the sun in the same way. These stars could be seen , including even the
heavenly bodies, together with the brightest of all the stars, that were
sun and the earth , make up a little quite different in the way they behaved.
family which is complete in itself, They were not fixed , but moving, and
and is , in a way, independent of the their movement could be seen quite
rest of the world . This little family, easily from day to day or week to week.
since its centre is the sun , the Latin In one month you might see one of
name for which is Sol. is known as the these very bright stars seeming to lie
solar system . What , then , are the right inside the Great Bear ” or the
66
other bodies, not unlike the earth , that Plough ,” but in another month it
go to make up the family of the sun ? would not be there at all . Therefore,
Ages and ages ago , men who watched a special name was given to these
the face of the HOW THE EARTH HAS SHRUNK INTO ITSELF stars which moved
heavens found that or wandered about
amongst the stars the heavens, and
there were some few which were , there
which behaved quite fore, so very dif
differently from the ferent from the
rest . All the fixed stars . They
heavenly bodies , of were called planets,
course , seem to rise which is simply the
in the east and set Greek word mean
in the west ; but ing “ . wanderers.”
that , as we have Amongst them was,
seen , is simply be for instance , the
cause the earth , morning star, or
from which we be Venus, which out
hold them , is twist shines all the fixed
ing round the other stars ; another was
way. Apart from Jupiter ; and an
that movement , other because of
which is only appa its reddish colour,
rent and not a real was named after
movement , men Mars, the god of
found that all the war .
The earth was once a cloud moving in space. The cloud It was
heavenly bodies ex was made of the stuff of which the earth is made, and
a very
cepta very few
as it spun round, the great cloud began to twist or spin difficult matter for
were fixed in their on itself. It shrank
became until
like ait globe, asin the top ofthis the old students of
became the solid earth on the heavens to ex
positions. If we picture, and
which we live, which the dot in the picture represents.
take, for instance , plain the move
the stars that make up what the ments of these planets , or wanderers,
ancients called the “ Great Bear ”- and all sorts of curious ideas were
part of which we often call the suggested, but none of them quite
Plough ” —we find that , year after met the case. The truth was, of
year, they are always found in the course , that the old students were
same position. The brightest of the without the key to the whole diffi
stars had their place in the heavens culty. We know now that these planets
noted thousands of years ago , and , so are quite different in every way from
far as we can tell without very careful the fixed stars , and that from age to
study, they occupy just the same age they go on circling round the sun
places now . We have lately learnt that just as the earth does. The planets
really they are moving, but they are are not stars at all ; compared with
so far away that , to the ordinary eye, the fixed stars they are much smaller
nothing can be noticed even in the than a pin's head compared with the
course of many years. These stars , dome of St. Paul's Cathedral. They
then—that is to say, all the stars are so bright simply because they are
236
 THE SUN AND HIS FAMILY
so near us . All of them put together Now what about the moon, you will
and added to one of the fixed stars say. Well, there is no doubt at all
would make no difference that could that the moon goes round the earth
be noticed at all. More than that, just as the earth goes round the sun .
they do not even shine by light of their So, of course, the moon goes round the
own, but only by the light of the sun, sun , too, only instead of going straight
which strikes upon them , and then is round as the earth does, it has to keep
thrown back to us upon the earth , on circling round the earth all the way.
just as a ball is HOW THE MOON GOES ROUND THE SUN The moon, then , is
thrown back from a part of the solar sys
wall. Those planets Moon tem . Then we have
owe all their light to Earth to ask ourselves
the sun , and if we whether any of the
were upon one of them other planets have
we should see the earth moons, and the answer
shining in the sky very is that they have, so
brightly and behaving Sun that all these moons
like a planet . Indeed, must be included in
the earth is one of the the solar system .
planets, and shines by It is not very long
sunlight just as they ago since the first
do. Not only so, but of these moons were
the earth is one of the found. They were seen
smallest of them . by the great Italian
All the planets, then, The moon, like the earth, goes round the named Galileo, and
including the earth, sun, thebut earth ofgoing
instead does, the
straight round were almost the first
moon circles reward he had for
circle round the sun asround the earth all the way as shown here.
and make up the inventing the tele
family which we call the solar scope — the tube with glasses in it
system . This solar system is very through which men look at the sky.
much alone in the great world. The Galileo looked at the great planet
very nearest of the fixed stars is so called Jupiter, the biggest of all the
far away that the light by which we planets, and there, with the help of
see it has actually taken three years his telescope, he saw what no one had
to reach us, and light travels so fast ever seen till then-four tiny moons.
that it would go eight times round As he watched them from night to
the entire THE TINY MOONS GALILEO SAW THROUGH HIS TELESCOPE night, he could
earth in a see quite
second. One plainly that
of the most they were
wonderful going round
things that we Jupiter, just
have found as the moon
out lately is goes round the
that the solar earth . Sume
system is SO times one of
much alone them would
in the world ,
Seven worlds besides ours are for ever circling round the sun, and
disappear al
so far from round them circlemany moons. One of these worlds,which we call together be
everythin g planets,hassevenmoonscircling roundit.Jupiter'smoonswere almost cause it had
else . the first discoveries made through the telescope, and this picture got behind
All these shows the four moons seen by Galileo, the first man who saw them . Jupiter, and
planets move round the sun , but then it would turn up again on the
some of them are much nearer to other side from where it was last seen .
him than others are. Two of them . These moons went round Jupiter at
we know for certain, are nearer the different distances from him , just as
sun than the earth is. All the rest the planets go round the sun at different
move round the sun at distances distances from him ; but they all went
greater than that of the earth . round in the same direction.
237
 THE CLOUD OF WHICH THE EARTH IS MADE
DODOODOO
Ona

MO

The earth began, as far as we can tell, in a great shapeless cloud like this. All the matter of which the sun
and his family of worlds are made was in this cloud, which moved through space for millions of years, until
parts broke away. The parts shrunk into themselves and became globes, like the earth and the moon opposite.
28
THE EARTH AND THE MOON IN SPACE

This shows what the earth and the moon are like to- day. As the cloud opposite broke into pieces, the separate
parts began to shrink , and one part became the earth. Every speck of stuff in the world tries to draw every
other speck of stuff in the world , and the stuff in the centre of the cloud drew to it the stuff on the outside of the
cloud. Slowly the cloud grew smaller , shrinking into itself until it became the solid earth, and part of it broke
away and formed the moon. The moon should really be much farther from the earth than is shown here ; to show
them at their proper distance we should only have been able to make them the size shown at the bottoin.
239
 UZALEO
- THE CHILD'S STORY OF THE EARTH
The moons of Jupiter will always Neptune was at in the year 1742 , he
be specially interesting, not only be. would just have got back to it now
cause they were the first to be found, in 1907 . That is a long year, is it not ?
but also because they gave Galileo HºUNDREDS OF TINY PLANETS AND
“ STARS " WITH TAILS OF FIRE
a good argument. He was trying to per
suade people to believe that the earth But even this is not the whole of
and the other planets go round the sun, the sun's family, for we have lately
and it helped him to be able to say that found some very tiny little planets,
Jupiter, like the earth , had little moons far smaller than the moon , which
that went round him on his way. go round the sun between Mars and
Since that time moons have been Jupiter. All of them put together
discovered going round many of the and they are numbered by hundreds
other planets. So all these moons must would not be nearly as large as the
be included in the sun's family. The earth . At one time it used to be thought
two planets that are nearest the sun that all these tiny little bodies had been
have no moons ; then comes the earth , formed by the breaking up of some big
which , as we know , has one moon. planet ; but nowadays men are very
Some of the planets which go round far from sure that this “ shattered
the sun ar a greater distance than the planet ” ever existed. However, all
earth are better off. The wonderful these little bodies have to be included
planet called Saturn , for instance , has amongst the sun's family. They are
nine moons, and three more moons of all found, be it remembered , in one
Jupiter have been discovered since particular part of the solar system, and
Galileo's time, so that he is pretty well doubtless , if we could discover the
off with seven . The last two of these history of any one of them , that would
were only found about three years ago, also be the history of all the others.
and perhaps there may be more. again , the solar system includes
Yet,
IE WORLDS THAT FLY ROUND a number of strange and wonderful
THE
AND ROUND THE SUN objects which are utterly different from
Now, I think, we must have a list of any of those we have described ; they
the planets that make up the solar are called comets, from the Greek word
system, and we shall name them in for hair, because when we can see them
the order of their distance from the best they seem to have long, hairy
sun ; also we may put opposite each tails streaming out across the sky
planet its distance from the sun in behind them . These also travel round
miles , the time that it takes to go round the sun, and therefore belong to his
the sun, and the number of its moons. family ; but they do so in a very
Names of Miles from Length of No. of curious way. None of the planets go
Planets. the Sun. its Year. Moons . round the sun in circles , but always in
Mercury .. 35,000,000 88 days 0 paths like a circle that has been rather
Venus 66,000,000 224 days o
Earth 93,000,000 365/4 days I flattened in one direction.
Mars 140,000,000 686 days 2 THECBRIGHT LIGHTS
Jupiter 483,000,000 I2 years 7 ACROSS SKY THAT SHOOT
Saturn 870,000,000 29/2 years 9 In the case of the comets, however,
Uranus 1,754,000,000 S3 years 4
Neptune ... 2,750,000,000 165 years i this fattening is very extreme, so that
the path of a comet would be some
If you look at the second column you thing like the picture on page 242. At
will see that we have called it “ length one time in its history the comet is
of year.” Now, you understand that quite close to the sun , and just misses
what we mean by that is the length of running into him . Then , after passing
time the planet takes to go right round round the sun, it travels away from
the sun , and we measure that by the him , out and out , cutting across the
measures that we on the earth know paths of all the planets and passing
best. So, when we say that the length millions of miles beyond even Neptune,
of Neptune's year is 1.5 years, what we and then at last it will turn on its
mean is simply that whilst Neptune course and come back again. But still
goes round the sun once the earth has it is one of the sun's family.
gone round him 165 times. So , if Now , even this is not quite all. You
we had made a mark at the place must have heard of what are called
TOTULOY LOGY

240
 THE SUN AND HIS CHILDREN
Pathof Neptune ..NEPTUNE

NEPTUNE
and his Moon

Path of Uranus
URANUS
and his 4 Moons

URANUS

SATURN Path of Saturn

with his Rings
and 9 Moon's

iter
--- Path of Jup JUPITER
and his 7 Moons

Pat
hs f he
o t
Minor Planets

h of Mars
Pat
h Ea
Pat cf theV rth
h i e nus
Pat SATURN

SON

VENUS MERCURY
MOON
EARTH JUPITER

MARS Minor
and his 2 Moons
Sat t rn'
s Planets
Par ur Par ofSatu Path
t of n's Path
... MARS
EARTH
• VENUS
• MERCURY

SUN

The sun is like a great furnace of heat and light in the centre of our part of the aniverse. Around him travel
for ever a wonderful family of worlds, which we call planets. They all go round the sun in the same way, but
some members of the sun's fainily are so far away that it takes them many years to go round him . The earth goes
round the sun once in a year, but Neptune, the most distant planet, goes round only six times in 1,000 years. The
picture at the right shows the size of the planets compared with one another, and their distance from the sun.
241
 -THE CHILD'S STORY OF THE EARTH
shooting stars, and on any clear night small bodies like pebbles. There can
in November you will very likely see be little doubt that they are the remains
some-and also at other times of the of the broken comet.
year. A flash of light seems to come Now we have completed the strange
from nowhere, dart for a little distance list of the different kinds of things that
across the sky, and then disappear. make up the solar system : Sol, the sun
These, of course, are not stars at all, himself, in the centre, the planets round
but quite small things, perhaps the size him , the moons of the planets going
of a cricket-ball, which the earth has round them , the very small planets ſound
caught as she flies through space, and between Mars and Jupiter, the comets,
which, as they pass through POLE STAR & “ PLOUGH " and a host of little things
the air, are made very hot like pebbles. All these
and bright . What is left of make up one great family
them often may reach the ruled by the sun. So far
earth, and many of them as we can find out , they
are to be found in museums practically all move in the
nowadays. It seems that same direction round the
throughout the solar sys sun ; they twirl or twist on
tem there are countless themselves as the earth
numbers of these small does, also in that same
objects called meteors, from direction ; their moons go
the Greek word meaning round them in that same
raised high, some, perhaps, direction , and even the
no bigger than grains of sun himself is twisting in
sand, others as big as All stars move, but some so the same direction also .
bullets, pebbles, cricket. slowly_that they are called This solar system , of
balls, and sometimes a fixed. Thoseforming a " plough.” which , of course , from our
are fixed .
good deal larger . These help youto This picture will
find themin the point of view, the most
meteors also circle round sky. The top star is the important parts are the
the sun and belong to his bright Pole star, right overhead. sun and the earth , is very
family. In November the earth is apt, much alone, as we have said, in the
in her path , to cut across the path taken great world . But it does not stay in
by a very large number of these tiny one place. We know that the sun-and
wandering bodies, and that is why with him all the planets and moons — is
we are most apt to see shooting stars in moving through space at a great rate
November . of about twelve miles per second.
A very interesting fact is that a Though the solar system is very much
famous comet, the path of which was alone in space now , we have no reason
well known, disappeared some time to think that it was always so, or that
ago, and just in that same path we now it will always be so.
know that there are a number of these The next story of the earth is on page 393.
1
THE LONG AND LONELY JOURNEY OF A COMET , WITH ITS TAIL MILLIONS OF MILES LONG

Path of a Comet
Path of a P
lanet

This picture shows the path of a comet round the sun . At one time the comet comes quite close to the sun ,
and just misses running into it ; then , passing round the sun, it travels far beyond all the planets, millions of
miles into space, until it comes to the sun again . The circle shows how the earth goes round the sun,and it is when
a comet comes close to the earth's path that we see it A comet is expected to be next seen about 1911 .
242
 The Child's Book of
BIBLE STORIES

GREAT WOMEN OF THE BIBLE

ASS names
long as the world exists people will speak
and stories are contained in the Bible.
about two women whose
Their stories stand out in
the Bible as stars in the sky. We cannot think of life without them . One of
these women was Eve, the first woman, whom a great poet beautifully calls
" the fairest of her daughters. " The other was the mother of Jesus. One
of these women brought Despair into the world ; the other, Hope. We shall
read their stories in their proper place. The Bible tells us of many other
women, some wicked and some good ; and we shall read their stories, too.
Here we read of six great and brave women of the Old Testament, and in our
next Bible Stories we shall come to the real stories, of which the Bible is full.

HEROINES OF THE OLD TESTAMENT

EBORAH , whose
DEBO
name means CONTINUED FROM PAGE 126
a bee, ” is a woman
who reminds us of our great
British Queen Boadicea, or of
the wonderful French maid
Joan of Arc. She was a war
like patriot. She loved her people
with a divine enthusiasm. She went
with them even into battle . We are
told that she was married to a man
named Lapidoth, and it is very
interesting to hear that she lived
under a tree in Mount Ephraim , be
cause another Deborah, the nurse of
Rebekah, was buried under a tree,
known as “ the oak of weeping.”
The great and prophetic Deborah
was a woman who thought about
God , and prayed to Him and tried
to learn His wishes. She lived in
evil days for her people. Their
pitiful sins had brought them into
slavery , and this once proud nation
of Israel, the favoured race of
Almighty God, were now bitterly
oppressed by their masters, the
Canaanites . They were slaves . De-
borah prayed to God in the bitterness
of her heart , for she was shamed
by her people ; and God sent His
light into her heart, and she uttered
prophecies . Thoughtful men among
the poor Israelites came to consult
with her. They would sit under the
shade of the tree where she dwelt
with her husband , and they would
speak sadly of the disasters which
had overtaken their race ; and
Deborah would declare to them
the commandments of their great
God, the God of
Zoo their father Israel,
and bestir them to
act valiantly as became a
nation of heroes . At last they
made her a judge over them .
Such is the fame of
Deborah that even in these days ,
when a
great patriotic woman
67
arises , men say : She is a mother
in Israel.”
Not such a brave story, but a
more beautiful one, is the story of
Ruth. It is a perfectly -told story
of unselfish love. Ruth is a heroine.
This foreign girl loved her mother
in -law , and felt full of sorrow for
the poor, lonely widow ; and she
gave up the home of her own father,
and forsook the land in which she
had lived all the days of her life";
and , like a true heroine, made the
journey with her aged mother-in -law
into a strange country. Of what
befell the brave and tender -hearted
girl in that land we shall read when
we come to tell her story in full.
Hannah is a name which tells us
of a woman's highest courage. She
was brave in a very quiet and simple
way, but she well deserves the title
of heroine. She was a married
woman , who used to go to the Temple
and pray very earnestly that God
in His mercy would grant her a son.
The old priest Eli, sitting there,
beheld the woman and marked how
earnestly she prayed . He was a
grim and stately old man , who dwelt
very much alone in the Temple, and
sorrowed for the evil of the Hebrew

243
 HAGAR THE SLAVE GIRL, ESTHER THE QUEEN , AND RUTH

One of the saddest of all the stories in the Bible is that of Hagar, a poor slave whose life was filled
with a quiet heroism, very simple and beautiful. Driven into the wilderness with her son Ishmael,
this Egyptian slave girl left behind her for ever a noble example of patience and submission.

Ruth's is a story ofunselfish love. Sheloved hermother . Esther was a beautiful Jewess, who became the
in -law , and was full of sorrow for the lonely widow, for wife of a powerful king. Set high upon a queen's
whom she gave up her home and left her own land. throne, she risked her happiness to save her people.

244
 FOUR BEAUTIFUL FIGURES IN THE OLD TESTAMENT

This is a picture of Hannah and her little son Samuel. Hannah's story is one of a woman's courage and a
mother's sacrifice. Loving her child Samuel , she spared him to Eli and gave him up to serve God in the Temple.

This picture shows themeeting of Jacob and Rachel,whose story is known all over the world . Jacob loved
Rachel with a love so pure that he worked 14 years to win her for his wife, and the lesson of Rachel's
love is that a good woman may create in the heart of a man the nobles honour and the purest patience.

245
 -THE CHILD'S BOOK OF BIBLE STORIES
LECZENOA 2.0

people, and prophesied the wrath and Jewess , set upon a queen's throne ,
indignation of God against them . He risked luxury, happiness, power, riches,
spoke to Hannah , and she told him honour - yes , life itself , ' and stood
that she prayed to God, saying that if before the king , and saved her people .
He would give her a son she in her Perhaps there was as much courage in
turn would give the child to God . her act as in the deeds of brave soldiers
answered the old whose calm in the face of death sends
her
“ Goo ; in and the, God of Israel grant
peace a thrill through our blood.. Esther's
thee thy petition that thou hast asked story shows us how patriotism will
flourish even in the midst of luxury ,
of AHim .' was born to her, and she
child and even in the heart of a pleasure
calle d him
cording someel ,peop
to Samu leh, mea
whic ns,d ac-
"aske of A ngnam
lovi wome an.
almost eternal in tame is
" lent to God .” Hannah's that of Rachel , and yet her story tells
” morlies in this, that she kept her
herois
God little of herself, and is almost wholly
promise. It is the story of a mother's concerned with the man who loved her,
sacrifice . Loving her child , her only Jacob the wanderer . We only know
child , with a mother's sacred passion , of her through the faithful love of
and finding joy in watching him as hé Jacob, but we may be sure that
lay asleep or sat upon her knee gazing a woman who could inspire such a
out of infant eyes at the green world glorious devotion must have been her
stretching from before her door, yet self inspired by the glory of God . She
she fulfilled her promise -brought the is a heroine of the Bible, because she
shows us how a good woman may
child to Eli, and gave him up to serve create in the heart of her lover the
Shein was
God surelye.as noble a mother
the Templ noblest honour and the purest patience .
as Abraham was a noble father . And There is one other woman we must
mention . This is Hagar, a poor slave,
of soelgood
Samu
rded
ed hims
provand sweetelfa amother
worthy; and
y
son
h
whosee stor
whos storyy is
is full of a quiet heroism ,
full of
God rewa her in the glor whic very simple and beautiful --the heroism
of submission . Some are heroes by
came
had give up sol nobl
to n Israe throyugh
and this soncall
soheroi shey. conquering difficulties ; Hagar belongs
Another heroine of the Old Testa . to those others who are heroes by sub
ment , one whose story reads like a mitting themselves to bear all things.
Patient till the last, this Egyptian
roma nce from
Esther. This Arab ianwas
Esther fairya stori es, ul
beautif is slave-girl, who lived to see her son the
founder of a despised and wandering
Jewess , who lived with a poor cousin people, left behind for all ages an
king.ai Itin chan
powerfulMordec
named the ced
countr y of
that thisa example of patience and submission
great king became suddenly enraged which has helped thousands of men and
against his queen , and banished her women to bear the cruel slavery of
from his
went andce wide
far pala . Then
in his
searmess
ch of rs
engethe tyra nts r. is a very different heroine
Haga
from the warlike Deborah ; but there
most beautiful maiden in that land-for is far more need in the world for
the king's wife must have no rival in Hagars than for Deborahs, and poor
beauty . And one of these messengers Hagar , sheltering her despised son
came upon the little Esther, who was in the wilderness , is a picture of
surpassingly lovely , and he brought motherhood which reminds us of a
her
uponbefore the love
her and king.d her.
The king looked
He did not still greater motherhood in the Bible
-the beautiful motherhood of the
ask her if she were a Jew ; it was mother of our Lord . It is through
enough for him that she was a beautiful such women as these that men become
and pure girl . And he lifted her up nobler and life sweeter.
and set her at his side , and she became We shall never know , till God reveals
his queen; all secrets , how many men and women
It would have been easy for Queen have risen to honour and glory through
Esth er ymen
countr , butt Esther,
to forge her affli
this fellow
cted" beggar the example of poor Hagar.
on horseback ," this despised little The next Bible Stories are on page 355.

246
 The Child's Book of
chi
Its Own Life
WHAT THIS STORY TELLS US
E learn more and more here of the wonderful way in which plants help
WE to keep the world alive, and as we read we shall come to understand
the great mystery of the stuff that makes the grass green. Without this we
could not be alive. We know that all air contains carbonic acid gas, which is
poison to us and to all animals. But the plant has a secret which no man
knows of ; it can split up this gas and live on it, taking it into its own body
and building up food for us to live upon . To do this the plant uses the
greatest power in the world, the power of sunlight. The leaves of a plant are
flat and thin , so that they can drink in as much sunlight as possible, and the
power of the sun helps the green stuff to split up the carbonic acid gas into
two parts. One of these the plant eats itself, and the other it gives back to
the air quite pure. If it were not for the plant's power of doing this there
would be no life anywhere, and the world would be as dead as a stone.

A PLANT'S WONDERFUL SECRET

us now see air, and it is also
LET what we mean
CONTINUED FROM PAGE 130
found in water. If a
when we say that a 2009 living thing lives in
plant breathes. If air , it has to get its
we can understand this for a oxygen from the air. If it
plant, we shall understand it for lives in water, it has to get its
every living thing, including you oxygen from the water. The
and me . When we talk about first plants did this because
breathing, we usually think of the they lived in water, like many plants
way in which our chests move up of to-day, and like crabs and fishes
and down , as we draw the air into and many other animals. But later
our lungs when we are taking a breath, plants, like the flowering plants , moved
and then let it out again . out of the water on to the land, just as
Now, a plant has no chest or lungs , animals have done, and so they have
and many animals have neither chest to get their oxygen from the air, just
nor lungs, but yet they all breathe. as cats and horses and birds and
It is not necessary that a living thing men dio.
shall move up and down, or in any Breathing is an act that has two
other way, in order for it to breathe . parts , which go.on backwards and
We do so ; but that is because we forwards always ; and the first of
breathe so very quickly , and because
these two parts is taking in oxygen .
we ath
hav e lear nt a spec ial way of Every living thing does this, and
bre ing that is very easy and must die if it ceases to do it . But
successful. But all breathing is really what is the second half of this act
one and the same , whether it is done of breathing ? You may well ask.
by a plant or an oak -tree, or a fish Directly we think about it we shall
or a man . see that the oxygen which is taken
Wherever living things are to be in by breathing must go somewhere,
found, whether under the water or something must happen to it, and the
out of the water, there must always simple fact is that the second half
资

be a particular kind of stuff called of the process of breathing always

oxygen . This is a thing we may
have never seen or heard of, and yet,
whenever we see anything at all, we
see through oxygen - because it is
part, and the most important part, of
what we call air. Oxygen is found in
consists of giving back the oxgyen
to the air or to the water .
But if that were all, of course there
would be no sense in it ; it would not be
worth doing. But the point is, that
whilst the oxygen comes in alone, “ by

ति 然 。
247
 THE CHILD'S BOOK OF ITS OWN LIFE Kaune
itself,” it always comes out again with away all oxygen from an animal you
something else ; and it is that which suffocate it,, and it will die, and the
makes all thedifference. This something same is true of a plant. If it does not
else, though you couldhardly believeit, have enough oxygen, and have it all
is the same stuff as that which makes the time, day and night, any living
coal and diamonds and the writing part of thing, from a microbe up to a man ,
lead pencils, and its name is carbon . will die of suffocation .
When this carbon which the oxygen Just because this is true of every
has found in the body of the animal living thing, we must not forget it in
or the plant is joined to the oxygen , it the case of the plant ; but at the same
is turned into something which would time a plant needs far less oxygen than
look like oxygen itself if you could see an animal, because it breathes much
it ; but you cannot see it , however more slowly, and the curious thing, as
closely you look at anyone when he is we must now see , is that most plants
breathing. It mixes with the air, and are specially good at doing something
though you cannot see it , you see > which is just the opposite of breathing,
through it, just as you see through something which no animal can do,
oxygen itself. This new kind of stuff, and which every animal depends upon
like oxygen , and like the stuff which plants to do for it . The plants that do
this wonderful thing that
we are going to talkabout
are all green plants, or, at
any rate, if they are not
green, like grass, they are
brown , like seaweed . But
the little difference in
colour does not matter,
for the stuff that makes
the seaweed brown is
really the same as the
stuff that makes grass
green . This stuff is so
important that we must
think of all plants in the
world as divided into two
This picture shows the lungswith which a plantbreathes, great kinds — those which
Under the magnifying glass the little lungs of the leaf, called
stomata, are clearly seen, and it is through these that the have this green or brown
leafdrinks in food from the air. We knowa piantbreathes because if it is stuff, and those which
shut up from air it dies of suffocation . The little circle shows the lungs larger. have not . The first kind
comes through pipes into houses, and we shall call green plants, and we must
is burnt at the end of them, is a now talk about them very carefully.
kind of gas, and the special name for Very nearly all plants are green 1

it is carbonic acid gas. Every living plants, but we have already mentioned 1

thing, from its first moment of life
to its death, breathes in oxygen
and breathes out this stuff which
is made of carbon and oxygen , and
which is called carbonic acid gas.
Now,plants must do this because they speak.
are living things, and they cannot
live without it . But this breathing is not
one of the things that a plant is very
good at. Indeed , a plant breathes just
as little as it can in order to keep itself
alive. It is quite easy to prove that
a plant must breathe to some extent,
at any rate, because you can suffocate
a plant as easily and certainly as you
can suffocate an animal. If you keep
248
one or two that are not—such, for in
stance , as the mushroom. You never
found a green mushroom or a green
toadstool . The plants that have no
green stuff in them are peculiar, so to
We must think of them as if
they did not do what a plant ought to
do ; they have lost what is the most
striking and important power of plants,
and so for the present we can leave
them out of account .
The green stuff of all other plants is
really one and the same everywhere
even when it is brown, as in some sea
weeds. It is the same stuff in a cabbage,
a blade of grass, a leal of a tree, or the

1
 A PLANT'S WONDERFUL SECRET
scum of plants that forms on a still
pool of water. It has a long special
name , but here, I think, we need not
bother ourselves with that ; we may
just call it green stuff.
This green stuff is most important
because o what it enables the plant to
do, and that is what we must now talk
exist unless they were always serving
each other, as we saw a little while
ago, so the whole company of living
things depends upon the sun.
Company is a very good word, be
cause its real meaning, as you will learn
again some day, is “ the people who
feed together.” Com, means with, or
2

about. But we must begin at the be-
ginning - and that beginning is not the
green stuff itself, but the sun , the great
and glorious sun . By itself the green
stuff can do nothing ; it is of no use to
the plant, and is only a burden to
it . Indeed , if plants are cut off from
together, and pany really means bread.
Your companion is really the little boy
who eats bread with you. Now , all living
things do their feeding with each other,
with each other's help, and so we are
very right in calling them a company ;
but without the sun none of them could

These pictures show how a plant needs light . The first shows a plant withering in the dark. In the
second a plant is thriving in the sunlight. The leaves of a plant are flat and thin so that they can
drink in as much sunlight as possible, and the power of the sun helps the green stuff to split up the carbonic
acid gas into two parts. One of these the plant oats itself, and the other it gives back to the air quite pure.
sunlight altogether , they die at once, or , feed at all, and they would all die. In
at any rate, lose all the green stuff in deed, it is really the light and power of
them . It is the sun that makes the the sun that we all feed upon , and the
green stuff in the plant, and green wonderful thing about the green stuff
stuff's only use, after it is made, is to of the green plant is that, without the
help the plant to profit by the sun . green stuff, we could not use the sun
Now , this is just a tremendous fact, light. First of all, the sun makes the
and we should make a very great mis- green stuff in the green plant , and then
take if we went on to talk about what uses it to feed the green plant and all
the green stuft does without making other living things, including you and
quite sure that we understood what the me, for we get all our food either from
sun does . Without the sun in there the green plants or else from the bodies
would be no life at all upon the earth . of animals that live on green plants .
Just as all living things depend upon Without the sun there would be .
each other, and just as they could not liſe upon the carth ; or, to put it very
uruIUIU COUUUUUULGOZI
CITUOTT ILUUT ‫ דט דטציטט‬firu
249
S
 amma
THE CHILD'S BOOK OF ITS OWN LIFE
namun
shortly and plainly, in a way that I things which are flat and thin " leaves,"
think you ought to remember, No
Light, No life. I do not think it has
ever been put much more shortly than
that , and yet, short as that is—no light,
no life—it is absolutely true, and there
are no exceptions to it anywhere, and
never have been , and never will be .
F THE SUN WERE TO GO OUT EVERYTHING
IF IN THE WORLD WOULD DIE
The green stuff, then, though no life
can do without it, is only an instru-
ment , something the light uses to make
life . If the sun were to go out—though
there is no fear of that - all the
gieen stuff in the world would not
help us at all, and all the plants and
animals would soon die . There was
some excuse, you see, for the ignorant
and untaught men of long Whe ago who
used to worship the sun. n we
go out on a bright day and enjoy the
light and warmth of the sun, we must
remember that if it were not for this
light and warmth we should not be
here . This is true of us ; it is true
even of animals that live in the dark ;
it is true even of trees and fishes, and
seaweed and microbes. Some of these
creatures, like microbes, may be killed
by sunlight, and they have to keep
out of its way ; so may we be killed
by sunlight if it is too strong, and
gives us sunstroke. But even microbes
depend upon the sun for their life, for
without the sun none of the things upon
which microbes feed could possibly exist.
Now that we have learnt how
important the sun is , we are ready to
look at the green stuff of the green
plant with a new interest, since it is the
means by which light can produce life.
THEIS REASON WHY. A LEAF
FLAT AND THIN
You will remember that we have
already spoken of the tiny specks of
green stuff which give the leaf its colour.
Now, this green stuff is to be found in
other parts of plants besides the leaves.
We know that the stem , or stalk, of a
rose is green . But most of the green
stuff of plants is found in their leaves,
and it is for the sake of the green stuff
that leaves exist at all . The leaves of a
plant are its tools for using the green
stuff. Directly we think of a leaf we see
that it is made in a particular way . It is
flat, thin thing. So much are leaves
flat, thin things that we call other
250
though they are not parts of a plant at
all—the leaves of this book, for instance .
The first books were made of real leaves .
Now, there is a very good reason
why leaves should be flat and thin .
Leaves exist in order to expose as much
green stuff as possible to the light. If
a leaf were shaped like a ball, only the
green stuff on the outside of it, and,
indeed, only the green stuff on the side
of it which was turned to the sun, could
receive the sunlight. All the rest would
be in darkness , and that is as good as to
say that it would be quite useless . If you
like, you may try to think of some kind
of leaf that would expose its green matter
to the sun in a better way than the
leaves you know . But you will not suc
ceed. Perhaps you never asked yourself
before why a leaf is shaped like a leaf ;
but the question is worth asking, and the
answer is that no other shape can be even
thought of that would be so useful.
WHATTHE SUNLIGHT DOES WITH
GREEN
The object of a leaf is to expose as
much green stuff as possible to as much
sunlight as possible , and it does this per
fectly. Of course, a leaf must have two
sides, and if one side is exposed to the
sun, the other must be in the shade. But,
then, leaves are usually so very thin that
the sunlight can go right through, and
so none of the green stuff is wasted .
Sometimes, when leaves have to be
rather thicker, you will find that as little
green stuff as possible is wasted, for now
almost all the green stuff is packed
on to the upper side of the leaf, which
is dark green ; and if you turn it over
you will find that the under side is
hardly green at all. Green stuff is of
no use where it cannot get the sunlight.
But you see how well things fit in with
each other, for the green stuff is made
by the sunlight in the first place ; it is
made where the sunlight strikes the leaf,
and is made just where it can be useful .
And now we come to something rather
more difficult ; but it is not too difficult
for us , and it is very important , for it is
necessary to all life. We have agreed
that there is something which the green
stuff does by means of the sunlight, or,
better still, there is something which
the sunlight does by means of the green
stuff. Now, what is it ?
The next part of this begins on page 363.
 The Child's Book of
FAMILIAR THINGS
WHAT THESE PICTURES SHOW US
WE beginningin ofthesethe pages
E learn where the gas-light comes from . The very
gas -light goes back millions of years, to the days
when there were still growing the great forests which fell and were
buried and turned into coal. In that coal is the sunshine of ages past, and
the work of the gas-makers is to bring out the sunshine and send it
through pipes into our homes. We call it gas, but it is just as true
to say “ Turn on the sunshine "
as “ Turn on the gas.” In these
pages is the picture - story of one of the greatest wonders gas performs
-the sending up of a balloon, and we see, also, the making of baskets.
WHERE THE GAS-LIGHT COMES FROM
ow surprised we iso coal, being so very
How should be to -day CONTINUED FROM PAGE 176
hot,, partly melts, or
if the Queen of England dissolves — as a piece
sent for one of her great officers of sugar dissolves in a cup of
and said : tea, or as snow dissolves in the
“ Please cut off all the gas in the sun. To understand what happens,
palace ; I am afraid I shall be blown we may try a little trick .
up by it ! " Take a long clay pipe. Fill the
Every child knows that if we are bowl of it with tiny pieces of nice,
careful with gas there is no danger. bright coal. Then fix some clay
But seventy years ago people knew tightly into the top of the bowi,
so little about gas that the Queen covering up the coal. Now ask your
of England told the Duke of Welling. father to put the bowl of the pipe
ton to cut off the gas and stop up into the bright, red cinders of the fire,
all the pipes in Windsor Castle leaving the stem of the pipe sticking
because she was afraid of it. out towards you . If you watch for a
What happens when we light the moment or two you will see a thin
gas ? When we turn on the tap, stream of smoke come out of the stem
and the gas comes rushing out of of the pipe. That is gas. If a lighted
the pipe, we put a small flame to it match is put to it, the thin stream of
and the gas is lighted . Nothing could smoke will light.
be more easy than this ; but a great Now, that is what happens in the
deal of trouble has been taken to retorts. The gas escapes from the
make the gas ready and to bring it coal and goes out through a big pipe
along the pipes into our houses. at the top of the retort. It rushes
It is such a wonderful story that along a lot of other pipes. It goes
to get right at the beginning of it we through water and lime, along more
must read the story in this book about pipes, and through other things which
a piece of coal. That tells us how coal make it clear and healthy and pure,
was made. Here we can go on to see until at last it is ready to give a
what we do with this coal, which has bright flame without smell or smoke.
in it a great number of things that The gas at last reaches the gaso
clever men have learned to get out of meter, a thing we have all seen, like
it . Let us suppose we are at a gas- an ugly iron balloon. At the bottom
works. In comes the coal . Men of it is a well of water. The gas ,
put it into things which we call retorts. being lighter than air, floats in the
These are big, hollow tubes made air. When it rushes into the gasometer,
of iron or of clay, fixed into a it forces its way up. The gasometer,
great furnace with a fire under though it looks so heavy, is so nicely
neath them . The retorts are filled balanced by the water and air that it
with coal , and the fierce fires under- rises with the gas until it is full. As
neath bake the coal as if it were a pie. the gas leaves the gasometer to come
Then a strange thing happens. The to our houses, the gasometer sinks
ANA

251
 CEEOL
-THF CHILD'S BOOK OF FAMILIAR THINGS
slowly down again snug and cosy in
into the water . The the winter. It will
gasometer is al make the water
Wys gently press warm for your bath
ing down upon the in the morning, and
gas, and this helps it will burn brightly
to force the gas into all the night in the
the pipes. lamps in the streets.
These pipes are We must not play
made of iron , and with gas, or we shall
are placed deep find it as dangerous
down in the ground. as the Queen of Eng
They are very land once thought it
strong and carefully was . If we were to
fitted , end to end , or let it escape into the
Gas is made from coal . The coal is put into big iron
else the gas would or clay tubes, called "retorts ," where it is baked. room , and then
leak out and be Here we see the men putting coal-pie ” into the struck a light, it
wasted . The pipes retorts,where the heat drawsall the gas out of it and would blow the
have to be laid so drives the gas into pipes. The gas then passes house up. If we
through tanks of water and lime until it is made pure .
that they can easily 1 turned on the tap
be taken up to let without lighting it , it
out any water which would slowly kill us.
may get in . The Now that we see
pipes go in all direc what a wonderful
tions. Some go thing gas really is,
under water ; some we need not wonder
are laid along rail that a queen was
way bridges ; some afraid of it . There
go through tunnels . were many great
Wherever there are men living in those
gas -lamps, we may days who knew very
know that some . little more about it
where under our than she did . One
feet the big gas of them said : “ If
pipes have been you try to light Lon
From the tanks the gas passes into the gaso- don Bridge with gas
laid . When the pipe meter in the streets.
reaches the house, At the bottom of the gasometer "is "a lake of
smaller pipes must water, over which the gas floats. As the gas
everybody
poisoned ." willEven
be
be
canlaid, so all
reach thattheit itrushes
; wlienin,thethegasgasometer rises
goes out, the to makegoes
gasometer roomdownfor, Sir
whoHumphry
was a veryDavy,
great

rooms. They are laid and clever man ,

under the floors or said : “ Before you
inside the walls . can safely use а

Then all we have gasometer , you will

to do is to turn on have to put on the
the tap and light gasometer a weight
the gas , and the as big as Primrose
darkest room be Hill to keep the
comes as bright as gasometer down ."
day. And he thought that
The same gas will the men who said
warm the oven in that they could light
which your dinner the streets of Lon
is cooked. It will don by gas were
drive an engine, dreaming . But we
just as steam does . From the gasometer the gas comes into our houses know that these men
It will warm the Great pipes bring it usider the street, smaller pipes were right and the
bring it into the cellar, and from the cellar the gas great Sir Humphry
greenhouse , and , after its journey of many miles,into
keep the plants comes at last
our ownrooms, making them as light asday. Davy was wrong .
252
 SULLULLO

MAKING A BASKET OUT OF WILLOWS

Millions of baskets must be made everyyear topack for market Theosiersare then ready for use.. Some areused
the fruit that grows in the orchards. Most of these are made just as they are, but most of them must have the
from osiers, the long, thin willows that grow in wet and marshy bark stripped off. This is done by pulling
ground. Here we see osiers growing by a brook, and on the the osier through two iron edges as seenin this
right are bundles ofosiers cut and heaped up in the water to soak . picture, where the stripped bark is hanging down.

After the stripped osiers have been The thinner willows are plaited in
laid in the sun to dry, they are tied in and out of the upright ones, being
bundles, the thin osiers being sepa worked round and round until the
rated from the thicker and stronger sides are built up to the proper
ones. The worker begins by mak height. When the plaiting is
ing a bottom with the stronger high enough, the ends of the up
osiers, which he knits together. The right willows are bent down into
next thing he does is to fix to the the basket to make it stronger, and
bottom a number of upright willows. a border is worked around the top.
2

Baskets were made in this way in England before Jesus Christ was born, and the ancient Britons were very clever
at this work . When the Romans came to Britain they learned to make baskets, and began basket-making in Rome
on their return . The baskets in these pictures are made in a Kentish village, close to where the ancient Britons
made their last stand against the Romans, and where the Romans no doubt found basket -makers at work 2,000 years
ago. 60,000 baskets are made in this village every year , and are carried to the fruit - fields and farms in great loads,
UDALOZ 21011
LUULUuun2 -253 UD EXTOLIU COLLIDELE
 HOW ABALLOON SAILS IN THE SKY

There is no part of the world to which man cannot go. He digs pits down into the earth ; he tunnels through
the mountains; he drives ships across the sea ; and he sails his balloons in the great ocean of air round about
us. This picture shows the balloon packed up on its way to the Crystal Palace, where we shall see it ascend.

The balloon is unpacked and laid out in a great flat space where it is free to rise. As the silk is carefully
unfolded it looks very little like a balloon, and as we see it laid out it is difficult to imagine what it isto become.

Close by the place where the balloon is laid out the gas-pipe comes out of the ground, bringing the gas from
the works, where, on pages 251 and 252, we have seen it made. The gas flows through the pipes into the
Crystal Palace grounds, and a great indiarubber tube is fitted to the gas-pipe and fixed to the centre of the silk
DOEN

balloon , so thatthe gas, when it is turned on, will enter the balloon and slowly fill it, giving it power to rise.
254
 图

THE GAS RUSHES INTO THE BALLOON

It is the gas that makes the balloon go. Gas is lighter than air, so that it can sail in air. We live really in
a great ocean of air, just as the fishes live in a great ocean of water, and in this ocean ofair the balloon sails as
a ship sails on the sea. This picture shows theballoon ,as the gas enters it, with the sand-bagseholding it down,

The balloon goes on filling, the upper part of it rising into the air, so that we begin to see its proper
shape and understand how it is made. Notice the cords all around it, to which the sand-bags are fastened.
These bags of sand are fastened to the balloon to weigh it down so that it shall not rise before its time.
255
 monarcamaLAnna Auteur TELZUZAZI . Muruna4 24 ம்

THE BALLOON IS LIGHTER THAN AIR

The balloon is now nearly filled with gas, and is so light that all the weight of the sand-bags is required to
keep it on the ground. The car for the passengers is got ready, and the men prepare to remove the gas-pipe.

The balloon is full of gas. It has become lighter than the air around it , and struggles to get upward.
The gas is turned off and the indiarubber pipe removed : and preparations are now made to fix the car.
TROULETAXELELI UTURELLEUTLUX IT ZYRTITTITYTTIITTITTTTTTTTTTTTTTMm
256
 THE BALLOON RISES FROM THE GROUND

The balloon is pulling at the sand -bags, anxious to get away, but the sand-bags, by which it is fastened
EXILERLEYEREK

to the ground, hold it down. Now, as we see it raised a little from the ground, it looks at last like a balloon.
RRD
EUR
பயமையையமாயமா
XXU

The car, in which the passengers ride, like a huge wicker basket, is fixed to the bottom of the balloon,
tanging by the cords, and the balloon floats about in the wind. In a few minutes it will have left the earth.
257
 Damen CAVALLO VIA Toere

THE PASSENGERS ENTER THE CAR

The passengers are in the car, and the last preparations are made for the ascent. The workmen remove the
sand-bags. The ropes that will be wanted when the balloon descends are folded up and lung upon the basket.

The balloon is ready and begins to go, eager to rise into the skies. The men steady it as it rises, and the
bulloon carries with it still one or two bags of sand, which it can empty out if it is necessary to lighten the load.
DO
258
03
யாயைமக பகையன்

THE BALLOON IS IN THE CLOUDS

The balloon rises rapidly, above the people above the trees. high into the air, until we see it in all its beauty.
mumam

Higher and higher it rises, seeming to grow smaller and smaller, until we lose sight of the people in it, and
the balloon is like an apple in the sky. Higher than a bird it goes, sailing gracefully through space, and
filling our minds, as we look up at it, with wonder that man has made so beautiful a thing to carry bim in the skies.
The next Familiar Things begin on page 377 .
na

TABLOID ITUR WONOMI

259
PEEPS INTO THE BUSY WORKSHOPS OF OUR LAND

II

ONE OF THE GREATEST WORKSHOPS IN ENGLAND , THE ENGINEERING WORKS AT NEWCASTLE

9
19

A PEEP AT THE WORKERS IN A TOY FACTORY, MAKING CHILDREN'S MOTOR -CARS

All over our country men are busy making things. Some are making railways, others make food, or clothes, or
carriages, or hundreds of other things to wear, or to eat, or to enjoy. From morning till night nearly a hundred
thousand people are busy building ships ; and if we could go round all our workshops, we should find men and
women an1 children hard at work making every kind of thing we need, either for us or for our friends in other lands.
TTTT TUTKU
260
 The Child's Book of
ALL COUNTRIES

WHAT THIS STORY TELLS US

E have made our swift journeys over our homeland, learning what the face
WE of our country is like, and how the land is cultivated to produce the things
we need. Here we go, in fancy, through the great workshops of Great Britain
and Ireland. There is work of every kind, and workers of every kind to do it.
The labourer must till the earth to give us food ; the miner must go down into
the earth to fetch us coal ; the fisherman must go to sea to bring us fish ; the
builder must put up houses for us to live in ; the postman must carry our letters ;
the clerk must keep our books ; the policeman must keep the streets in order.
And so, day by day, the great work of the country is carried on, each man
doing his share in helping to make his own life happy and the nation prosperous.

THE WORKERS OF OUR LAND

We haveseenaswe
have travelled
in fancy about our home
land how many thousands
of workers are scattered all
over the country and hills and
along the rocky and sandy
coasts, and how we depend
upon their labour for that portion
ofhome
our produce
daily food which is called
) )
“ ."
Our rapid birdseye view of the
whole country, and our peep into the
nation's coal-cellars, have shown us
where to look for the other workers,
who supply the materials for our
O
CONTINUED FROM PAGE 100
the eye can see with
a great turmoil of
work, with a ceaseless
throbbing of the great en
gines, with the mighty hum
that goes up from a great
human hive of labour. The
bustle and weariness , the hope
and sadness of thousands of lives
passed in that hollow , are veiled from
us by the haze of the smoke pouring
from the tall chimneys of the cotton
towns of South Lancashire. These
are the towns that supply us with
the part of our wardrobe which we
need chiefly for summer wear.

0
clothes and the thousands of other
necessaries of present -day life .
Let us now stand on the flat.
topped hills round the Peak, at the
southern end of the Pennines . Im-
mediately below us is one of the
most beautiful districts of England.
Great cliffs, seamed with cracks filled
with ferns, form the hillsides . In
the valleys are rushing streams— can
you fancy yourself springing from
stone to stone across them ? -bor-
dered by lovely trees and all sorts of
wild growth , the home of numbers
of interesting birds and creatures .
Most exciting of all , there are won-
derful huge caves, like fairyland for
glittering beauty, and in one place
you can go in a boat for half a
mile on an underground river !
0 But it is the view from the
heights , looking westwards and north-
wards, that we have come to enjoy.
Manchester is the important centre
and market for the ring of great
towns, such as Bolton, Bury, Old
ham , all busy with some sort of
cotton-spinning or weaving ; and
since the ship canal has connected
it with the Mersey it has become
a port too, for the ships can now
steam there direct . Liverpool, the
great port facing the west, receives
cotton for the whole district . It is
so near to Manchester - a hundred
express trains a day travel the thirty
miles between them—and they have
so many interests in common, that
they have been called twin cities.
Both have nearly a million people
living in them ; and to them go
constantly the thousands of mill
owners and masters to do business
relating to their works in the towns
around .
Those wind - driven clouds we

We seem as if on the edge of an watched rolling over the great hollow

immense hollow , filled further than from the Peak like a curtain had

Cars A & BU
265
 -THE CHILD'S BOOK OF CUUNTRIES
trai alled faster over the broad And now think over the railway map
Atlantin than the ships that deliver for a little and note the thick web of
the bales of cotton at Liverpool lines going like rays in every direction
and Manchester. What the clouds --from Liverpool and Manchester,
give up when they approach the connecting the cluster of about thirty
high hills is rain - rain which not five cotton towns with the rest of the
only makes the grass grow so well in country. Realise the thousands of
the west , as we have seen, but rain mills full of whirring machinery , the
which makes the air moist . This hundreds of thousands of workers who
moisture is necessary for fine spinning, earn their living by attending to this
as the threads do not break in damp machinery and getting coal to feed
air as they would do in a dry climate. the engines. Perhaps you are thinking
HE CLATTERING OF THE CLOGS all this labour is needed to supply the
THEDOWN THE LANCASHIRE STREETS wants of our homeland alone ; there
You should hear those Lancashire are many millions in it who need cotton
workers clatter down the streets in sheets and towels, cotton clothing,
their wooden clogs very early in the curtains, and sewing -cotton. But if you
morning ! The rows and rows of small think this, a look at the cargoes of
houses are often empty throughout the some of the ships leaving Liverpool and
day, when father, mother, and the other ports can tell you how far you
bigger children all go to work at the are mistaken .
mills . When trade is good they are We send away to customers beyond
well off ; but sometimes the mills the sea, every year, cotton yarns and
have to be closed ; then there is no threads and cotton goods of every de.
money to be earned , and the times are scription to the value of nearly a hundred
very hard for everybody. millions of pounds ! Great Britain
Let us follow a stream of workers has fine stores of coal on the west
into one of the great spinning mills in slopes of the Pennines ; a moist climate,
Blackburn. The first thought is, How owing to the damp westerly winds,
can they bear the noise ? There is suitable for handling the cotton threads ;
such an overwhelming buzzing and good ports looking towards the country
humming going on, with constant which produces a great deal of the raw
sharper clanking thuds ; and the cotton ; also good workers , sailors,
wheels and bands connecting with the inventors ; and so she has built up the
steam power that sets the machinery largest cotton industry in the world.
Thenthere are the
going seem like thousands
monsters round.
flying oflittle WHERE MADE
OUR WOOLLEN CLOTHES
bobbins twirling and filling themselves Now for our winter clothes, carpets,
up with cotton as fast as they can, blankets, and everything else made of
" minded ” by pale-faced girls. It is wool . There is aa fine coalfield on the east
all so bewildering and dusty and close of the Pennines, also good grass on the
that when you get outside again you slopes for sheep, who spare us their
feel as if some of the bobbins were now old coats ; also there are many bright
going round inside your head . streams running from the hills , necessary
MILLS WHERE THE HUM OF THB
THECOTTON in the process of turning the old coats
MACHINES NEVER DIES into new ones . There is, besides , the
And this spinning of the cotton is fine port of Hull, on the Humber into
such a small part of the labour that which the rivers run . All these causes
lies between the fluffy white cotton- have led to the working of a great
gathered and packed by dusky hands woollen industry in a cluster of towns
in fields across the ocean - and the in Yorkshire, with Leeds for a centre .
finished yards of cotton goods, plain Among them are Huddersfield , Wake
white or with coloured patterns, which field, Halifax , where every sort of flannel,
buy in shops. The looms and other
we hin cloth , serge, blankets, carpets, and
mac ery of every size and description countless other woollen articles are made
in the model rooms of the Victoria and in mills as noisy as those in Lancashire,
eum
Albert e littl th Kensington h smo
d as muctra ke and hard work .
give somMus at Sou
e idea of the difficulties
amiThe con st between the old .
to be overcome in the process. fashioned spinning -wheel and hand
TITLANTIDIUTTEOTIDITY
262
 TEXTILET
COULDA. anu Emman.com
AnamariammXURXXXXcom LG ULO

TO
loom , still used in some
>

country cottages, and the

wonderful inventions now used THE WORKERS AT THE MILLS
in the mills, fill us with wonder.
Scotland , too , is famous for woollen goods, especially for Belfast,
tweeds , flannels , and cloths. A little thought will show us Barrow
where to look for woollen towns -near the coalfields of the to Belfast,
Clyde basin , where there are uplands good for feeding sheep Glasgow to
and streams of good water. Belfast - by
But Great Britain cannot supply all the raw wool all these
needed by the mills, and so the greater part now routes goes
comes from sheep that roam about the vast fields the greater part
of Australia and New Zealand on the other side of the coal used
of the world. The shepherds there have to ride in the mills where
on fast horses to keep them from straying the flax is spun or
away. woven into beautiful
Great Britain does not send away to damasks and fine linen,
other countries nearly so much value in for which Belfast and
woollen as in cotton goods — not one half ; the neighbouring towns
but it sends away a great deal of raw are famous.
wool. London is the great wool Belfast is a very handsome
market of the world, and many of town , and has been described
those ships we can see in the as looking as if it had money
docks of the Thames bring wool , in its pocket and roast beef
which is sent out again in for dinner. All round about the
every direction . district are grouped the long,
To see the district narrow factory buildings - so like
which supplies most of in shape to the houses in boxes of
our tablecloths, poc toys -where the yarn is dressed , and
ket . handkerchiefs , wound , and woven , and rolled, and
linen for pillow packed , after all the processes are finished.
cases, shirts , col . There are also many factories where
lars and cuffs , materials are made up, and washed and
we must cross irone all by the most wonderful machinery,
to Ireland . ready for use . Can you fancy a sewing
From machine that does over three thousand stitches
Liver . a minute, and a “ cutting -out " machine that can
pool cut out over two hundred shirts at once ?
to Some of the flax used grows in the fields in the
north-east of Ireland ; but most of it comes from
a distance .
Coarse,, strong goods are also made from
hemp, as well as from jute, which is brought from
India to Dundee, where it gives thousands of workers
plenty to do in spinning it , and making sailcloth and
wrapping, and ropes of all kinds, besides carpets and
materials. Good , strong sails and ropes are also made at
many other places round the coast to fit out the fishing
boats and yachts.
Important as is this linen industry in supplying the needs of the
honeland, it only sends away goods worth about a quarter as much
as hose sent out by the woollen mills.
You can find out where many of the other things we wear are made
by studying the map of industries in these pages. Many thousands of
Nova

people are employed making boots and shoes in Leicester and

26
?
 ENGLAN
:WHERE
IN
MADE
ARE
THINGS
INDUSTR
OF
MAP
CHILDRE
THE
GLASGOW MAP
KEY
EDINBURGH
PAISLEY !position
10
Showing
NOCA
Town
each
of
MAR
KIL
MAWIC
CLASGOW
Goods
Iron
aking
&Ships
MBuilding QUUNTRIES NEWCASTS
SENDERLORE
EPOE
SHARIE
EDINBURCH
PAISLEY Making
Paper
Thread
Making BAKE
YURRERA
IM

KBER MULA
H.BLACBRADORORL
EEDS
UODEASFIELD
PUNCHESTER
LIVEEPOOL SELFIELDO
PSZOT
DUT FOR
STOC
MALLSHIELD
BOSTON
,
KILMARNOCK HAWICK OTTICA
Iron ng
Worki Plaids
Wroulng Morront . т
W
&orsted Скаа WOWIN
PETER
104.
ALARE
BIRMINGHAM ROUE
ODER
COVERTY NORTHAMPd
.BOFORO
WORLISTER PSWICE
DUMFRIES SUCKINGHAM
TYNE
ON
NEWCASTLE •LUTON
Tweeds
Weaving TWorking
&ron
Mining
Coal ROWD
wolon
S*ENDO
Y eN
SWANSEA
CALLOWAY paHF
பாப்பம்
ndUL
angannya Κεντός
Granite
Querrying LADING U OR
ŞUNDERLAND LWI AM E
Building
Ships WOO TH ON
N( A D NG I
.
BARNSTOPLESILTON SOUTHAMPTON SITT
中 URL
VLOVIL
POOLEN
AROTIROU

D
ma OCYOPORT
But QURHAM
HARTLEPOOL
MGlass
aking
Mining
Coal
-Building like
shown
are
people
000
100
over
with
TOWNS
DAS
Ships like
shown
are
propa
000
100
under
with
TOWNS
TH CUMBERLAND
Mining
& ead
Iron
LCopper
Pencils
LMaking
, ead
Working
&Iron

I R E L A N D
BELFAST
Building
Ships Isle
Linen
Wequing of
|ਚਰ OTO
Man JU YORKSHIRE
OF
DISTRICT NORT
F & teel
SCoal
Tron
Working
Mining
-INURNESS
BARROW
Flax ute
&J& orking
WShips
Building

1 1 s 2009
))
)

S BRADFORD LEEDS
E A Talloring &Woollens
Linen
Weaving SA
HE
BT-. LACKBURN
PRESTON HULL
Ships
Making
Cotton
Spinning and
Rope

Isle LIVERPOOL MANCHESTER HUDDERSFIELD

of Ships
Building Spinning
Cotton Woollens
Fancy
Weaving
Anglesey
PRESCOT
Watches
Making
MACCLESFIELDSHEFFIELD
CARNARVON Goods
Silk
Making
STOCKPORT
MEMESHURE Knives
Slates
Quarrying Making
Salt
SFMaking
cissors
BOSTONMaking
,Sails
&Rorks
ope
Felt
Making Hats
T
POTTERIES
STAFFORDSHIRE
EMaking
& arthenware
China
DERBY
Silk
Weaving NOTTINGHAM
WALES
NORTH Lace
Making
Flannel
Making PETERBOROUGH
Making Tools
Agricultural
WALSALL NORWICH
WOLVERHAMPTON
Saddles
Making
.Tools
Locas
Making Mustard
Making
Harness
Seuns
Gas
W&ater LEICESTER
Making
Stockings ITA
BIRMINGHAM
Making
Machinery
Class NORTHAMPTON
, Boots
Making
PJButtons
ens
., ewellery
NPins
&eedles
IPSWICH
KIDDERMINSTER COVENTRY Agricultural
Making
Bicycles
&
Cars
Motor
Making Implements
HP Carpets
Making

NEL
CARDIGAN WORCESTER

N
LUTON
&
BEDFORD
Flannel
Making Making
Ching Hats
Straw
Making

WALES
SOUTH

CHA
Coal
Mining STROUD செட்
od Umbrellas
Making BUCKINGHAM

20
GARMACEU
HiningTHERN Goods
&
hen
Woo Making
Lace
Tron SWANSEA
&
Mining
Coal

E'S
Smelting
Copper

G
LONDON
WITNEY The
SHOP
GREAT
BRISTOL Making
Blankets
WYCOMBE THINGS
the
where
S
& weets
Sugar
Making Furniste
Moting o
the
sok
,ared WOOLWICH
1 made
13
MONEY Ba
Guns
Making
CHATHAM
a Warships
Building
READING

S : GEOR
SOMERSET WILTON Biscuits
Making
Stone
Bath
Quarryiny Carper's
Making
BARNSTAPLE SITTINGBOURNE
Making
Paper
Furniture
Making
&
Pollery
SOUTHAMPTON LAAIL
.
YEOVIL
PORTSMOUTH
,
Yachts
Building
Gloves
Making Building
Warships
POOLE Isle
of
EXETER Building Wight
Gloves
Muking Yachts

..Bg ya
CTE HSGT
EN CHANNEL
DEVONPORT
CORNWALL
Building
Warships
Tin
Mining
NORWICH
like
lellers
with
shown
are
TOWNS
CHESHIRE
like
lellers
with
shown
are
DISTRICTS
M
F, SARCLL
GEORGE
 -THE CHILD'S BOOK
Northampton ; flannel comes from
Wales ; Derby and Dublin make silk
and poplin ; Paisley produces sewing
cotton . We see how many of these
things are made in the child's BOOK
OF FAMILIAR THINGS .
But look now into the family work-
basket ; there are needles, and pins , and
scissors in it, as well as cotton , buttons ,
and tape. In the family tool-chast
are nails, and screws , and tools of all
kinds . All over the house are grates,
fire - irons and fenders, bars, pipes,
bedsteads - an endless number of things
made of iron and steel and other metals.
HE BLACK COUNTRY THAT LIES
THEUNDER A CLOUD OF SMOKE
In the middle of England there
is a district called the Black Country.
It lies on a coalfield twenty miles long,
and over it great clouds of smoke
hang constantly. Birmingham is the
chief of the large towns that all run so
near together that there seems little
but cinder- heaps and a few grimy
fields where nothing will grow between
them . If you run through the district
by night train on the London and North-
Western , the constant succession of
dazzling lights from the flames of the
iron furnaces make you think that you
must be passing through one huge
town. If you could stop and look about,
you would see that this is “ one great
workshop, above ground and below .”
In most coalfields iron is found near the
coal, together with the sort of stone
that needed to make it workable ;
but the local supply in the Black
Country is very small, so most of the
metal needed for the workshops has
to be sent from other coalfields.
THEHINGS ARETOWNS
MADE WHERE SMALL
You will notice that Birmingham
has many railway lines , as well as
canals , connecting it with the towns
both near and far, by which the metal
material can come , and the work of
the district be collected and distributed.
If you measure from Liverpool to
London, from Bristol to Hull, you will
see that Birmingham is about the same
distance from all these great ports.
Then , remembering that land -carriage
is expensive, we can easily under
stand what an advantage it is that
the goods made in the towns of the
Black Country are chiefly light and
ITO
266
OF COUNTRIES
easily packed into a small compass.
Now , Birmingham itself makes screws,
pens, and watch-springs , and many
other small articles. If you look at
your case of needles, it will probably
bear the name of Redditch , a town
that also makes fish -hooks . Broms
grove makes nails, and Walsall makes
locks. Many women and children help
the men-workers in the Black Country .
On your scissors and knives you
will generally find the name of Sheffield,
a large city on the South Yorkshire
coalfield . Near here are found fine
grindstones, and SO Sheffield has
become famous all over the world
for good cutlery.
It is here that great quantities of
iron are turned into steel by fierce heat
in furnaces, and from this steel are made
the steel plates for our armour- clad
ships, and most of the rails for the
railways. The chief lines have set up
works at some convenient spot , in
which they make the greater part of
their “ rolling stock ," as carriages,
engines, and trucks are cailed. For
instance , there is Crewe on the London
and North Western , Swindon on the
Great Western , also Doncaster, Horwich ,
Darlington - all connected with the lines
that serve the great industries on each
side of the Pennines and in the Mid
lands. Whole towns have sprung up
round the workshops of these places.
ROARING NOISE
THEGREAT RAILWAY
OF THE .
WORKSHOPS
If you are able to go over one of the
great locomotive works, you will be
almost overcome with the roaring
noise and incessant movement , and the
heat of the furnace and forging shop.
Perhaps most deafening of all is the
clang of the rivets being hammered
into the great boilers. It is wonderful
to see how hard metal can be softened
and flattened and cut to shape. The
models at the museum at South Ken
sington give an idea of the hundreds
of tubes inside a boiler, and of the
infinite trouble and work it requires
not only to make an engine, which
seems almost alive , but even the
smallest and simplest objects, such as
needles and pins . We learn how a pin
is made on page 176.
Naturally, the iron steeds are built
close by the places where they are needed,
just as the great steamers and ships
THE DAILY ARMY OF WORKERS ALL OVER OUR LAND
Every morning, if some fairy's wand could give us power to see our country at a glance, we should see these workers
setting out from their homes to do the work described in the CHILD'S BOOK OF COUNTRIES on page 250
FACE PAGE 267
 -THE WORKERS
are built beside the water into which
they will glide when the breathless
moment of the launch at length arrives.
There is a very black district of coal
and iron working in Northumberland
and Durham , where about a million
people work at engineering and ship-
building in towns that lie in groups
along a water street , as it were .
Newcastle, Sunderland, Darlington, and
Stockton are amongst them , and many
are the fine ships that start their lives
on the River Tees and the River Tyne.
To find more great shipbuilding
yards, let us take a sail up the Firth of
Clyde, past all the beautiful seaside
places, past the miles of docks at
Greenock and Port Glasgow , right up
to the wonderful docks and harbour of
Glasgow itself. Glasgow is the largest
city in Scotland , and the second
largest in the United Kingdom . The
hum of a million people goes up from
Glasgow , most of whom are working
in the docks and factories of many
kinds ; but especially are they to be
found in the shops where, amid deafen-
ing clang, great heat, and enormous
turmoil, themonster ships take shape.
THRHAMMERINGSHIPS
OF THE MEN WHO
It is well that for these tired folk
there are delightful excursions all round
the city, to the “ Bonnie , bonnie banks
of Loch Lomond ,” to the “ Banks and
braes of bonnie Doon ," and to many
another famous and lovely spot .
It is easy to take coal from the
Clyde coalfield to Belfast, where , besides
the linen factories, are great shipyards
and workshops, all resounding with
the hammering of the men who are
building huge sea vessels and engines
for warships. The warships themselves
are built in the Navy dockyards, such
as Chatham , Portsmouth, and Devon-
port .At Barrow -in -Furness, just oppo-
site Belfast, there are linen factories
and shipbuilding yards, where many
of the Navy's submarines start their
adventurous careers. In the neighbour
hood are found coal and very pure iron.
More smelting of iron and making of
rails and tin plates is carried on round
the great coalfield of South Wales , from
which comes the smokeless fuel greatly
used for the engines of the Navy and of
the fleets and mail steamers of the world .
Now , the result of all this coal and
267
OF OUR LAND ECCO LA LEGIO
iron working, of the days and nights
spent in stoking, the furnaces, in pre
paring the metal and making it into
the enormous number of forms used in
our homes and on the railways, is
briefly this : Not only are our own
country's wants supplied , but we are
able to export—that is, to send away
to other countries — metal goods in
every shape and form to the value of
about half that of the cotton goods
which leave our ports.
THEOMINERININ BLACK AND THE
We have not yet come to the end
of the different kinds of work done in
the British Isles. Our houses and
tables , for instance, would be very
incomplete without china and glass.
On a coalfield north of the Black
Country lie the Potteries, where a great
many breakable things are made. The
towns are so close together that they
stretch for miles, as if forming one
single town . In Stoke, Burslem, and
Hanley are many workers busy with
making up and baking the coarse clay
that is found in the district, and the
finer kind from Devon and Cornwall.
The contrast between the miners in
their black clothes and the potters in
their white ones is very striking as they
pass through the streets on their way
to work. Sometimes aa miner may live
just over the spot where he works far
below in the mine, but to reach it he
may have to walk two or more miles to
the pit's mouth , then as far back again
under the ground.
It is delightful to watch pots, cups,
saucers, and vases spring, as it were ,
from a lump of clay, rapidly turned
round and round under theclever fingers
of the workmen . The large ovens for
baking and hardening the ware make
one think of the biscuits at Reading.
Particularly interesting is it to watch
the paintings and stampings used to
ornament the finer kinds of china.
FACTOR IES, WHERE GLASS
RUNS
The Potteries find " water carriage
--that is , sending the goods by boat
instead of train - very useful, as it is
cheap and safe. They are well supplied
with it, as the Trent basin , in which
they lie, is connected by canals with
the Thames, the Severn, and the
Mersey, as well as with the Humber.
 CETEUTCTTOO KOOLALELLA
MAKING
A :MAP WE
LAND
THE IN
LIVELIVE
PAPER
ON
DRAW
TO
HOW 0

SUB USTIDER
TEXELDOM to

E
M
.
Gr

T ammes
O
N

en

,
A
WA
V

A
I

S
LI
M

WA
WI O

you
so
Aling

here
ot
he
sans r

this
am
draw
to
able
be
all
should
.IWe
country
our
inof
mountains
the
Fill
in
as
paper
your
rule
you
Tfhe
map
white
and
for
stand
lines
tiny ap
inside
them
of
top
the
represents
coast
.you dotted
out
rub
then
can
nd
,a-lsquares
picture
draw
to
help
will
he
tshow
sides
how
Tine
shaped
are
lines
little
he
pencil
,ulines
square
by
square
map
the
up
lines
the
inking
and
.oine
.ByouUfirst
down
slope uild
afterwards
fsing
,wafhills
pen
hich
se
stationer's
any
at
buy
can
TERMI
 LED
LA TOTEUTU LAZ
ACLEOD

head
air
ТІ DUMFRIES

CH
@ASIC

ON AN
OURHA
M SUHDEALAND
CARLISLE

MO NE
Skidow
Mt

L
rosso HARTL'UOL
WEST
NORTIT WHITEHAVEN
caly
Head
Bees
SL !?!
VO
Voll
Sna VofMOS

e.
Fel
Ma
Mi nlyc Yorkshire
CAREOROUGH

sm
Moors Yiamborough
Heart
JUOUGLAS
LANCASTERULO YORK SEA
SEA leurs
IR
II IS IRISH PRESTONE LEEOS HULL
e l
R
Ro.b Headn
Spur
SEA SE MANCHESTER n CRIMS87
1. A
of D o
LIVERPOOL p
Anglesey LINCOLN
Heach
Holy a SHEFFIE
DONWAY CHESTER The
Peak
CARNARVONLYSnondon S
UNA VOTTINCHA A
BOSTING
W CROMER
DEREN E
DR IM
SHREWSBUT RT
NORWICH
ipni
LEMESTERR
nd an
lure
Idris
Cader
Mt se lla
Plynlimmons
Mt pwe PETEREORG Youth OU
ve an M
rn NORTMAd NIPTION VAR
ABERYSTWIT BIRMINGHAM ELY

TETUR
CARDICAN
BAY STRATFORDS
WORCESTER DOLABI
AKUR IPSWICH
GLO
CARDIL
EET MLS
Black
UCE
STE
A M.माEThe
H

David
CH

COLCHESTERaze
OXFOS
rn

CARMARTEN WERTFORD
te

AP

MONMOUT
ve

LU
il

Ornonore NEWPORT Si LONDON

Ch

.
Th
OM
E
m

CARDIFE O READING ser Sheppe

of
e

V
SW
s

071STCL RA North
AN

Downs CANTERBURY
EAT
SE
A

Lundylo WHiritid RUSY

7995
9-gap lls Save CUILDFORD DOVEI
Per SALISBURY
Hollanat ea OLEWES R
QSOUTHAMPTON
VE
FLETERS HlBechy DO
BR

OMROPUO
I

TH

TOUT
OF
GH

Porllund Wigh VVENTROP

TO

IT
N

bil
TORQUAY RA
ST
NES Point
Siart NEL
CHAN CHAN
ENGLISH Head ard
BVLiz ENGLISH NCE
SayMGUPHE

FRA
sll
in
fill
.ANow
lines
by
,a
sea
to
run
rivers
round
seas
the
mark
we
ifnd
hown fini
We
filli
by
map
our
tow
in
nam
rive
:tthe
mou
.and ng
rs
ing
ns
sh
ains
.Find
flow
rivers
sea
which
into
understand
to
easier
make
will
it
coast
the littl
The
ring
mar
exac
plac
whe
tow
stan
,a
the
nam
mus
be ndns sdt
ek
e
tre
.Niver
sea
reaches
it
until
course
the
mark
and
each
of
arbeginning
that
near
begins
otice smal
in
mar
mou
shou
beit
toiver
.Rclos
and
prin
capi
lett ked
ntald
l s ins
eted
tal
ers
thicker
,here
mnd
a
it
join
streams
other
as
wider
becomes
and
be
should
line
the ountain W
hav
mad
acnow
Eng
of
map
Wal
.and omp
lett
alo
thei e
cour de e
rlet
es
lan
eers
ngse
UUTUUDE
UZ
TOT
CENTER
COLOZETOTT
TOTUOTT
 -THE CHILD'S
One reason for finding glass manu-
factories near Newcastle, Liverpool , and
Shrewsbury is that the salts required
in its making are to be found in those
districts. Perhaps you have seen glass-
making at one of the exhibitions, and
watched the liquid glass being drawn
out into threads like fine silk.
The salt -mines in Cheshire are a
very great contrast to the black coal-
mines we have seen in so many different
parts of the country. They are of
dazzling white where the light falls .
Sometimes, when a mine runs under
a village, and too much salt is taken
away, the earth sinks and the houses fall.
HE MAKING OF PAPER AND THE
THEPRINTING OF BOOKS to shops, offices, and posts of every
Now, nearly everybody in the country kind ; the doctors hurrying to their
wants something to read, as well as
things to eat, and wear, and use . So
we shall find that a great many people
are employed in making paper, on which
newspapers, magazines, and books can
be printed . Near Edinburgh are many
paper -mills, the material for which
comes chiefly across the North Sea,
from the forests of the country whose
coast is so like that of the west of
Ireland and Scotland - Norway. Wood
pulp comes , too, from the west across
the Atlantic, from the island of New-
foundland . Rags and straw are also
used. The paper is sent to the printing THE TRUE WEALTHWORK
works all over the country, especially
large ones being found in London,
Edinburgh, Dublin, Glasgow , and other only because it is in a good position for
important towi.s. Editors , artists ,
writers-all work hard to prepare the
matter for the printers to set up and
print with their wonderful machines.
The account of the quickness and
powers of these machines reads like
a fairy story of the doings of great
giants , but you have only to look
at the printing machines to prove
that the story is a true one, as you
watch miles of printed sheets being
folded up as papers, or ready to be
stitched together as books .
NINE O'CLOCK
OUR HOMEINLATHE
ND MORNING
Still we have not come to
end of the list the workers
of
whose help makes life in the British
Isles to -day what it is. But we have
perhaps seen enough, as we have
tra velled about the sweet open country,
and taken deep breaths of sea -air
10 DOIT
BOOK OF COUNTRIES
round the coasts, and wandered
through the crowded towns , to know
where many of them are to be found
and why they are there.
Now , as we go to school, to our
work , at nine o'clock in the morning,
we can think about this great army of
workers and what they may be doing
at that very moment.
There are the thousands of school
boys and girls setting out for school
from their homes all over the country,
from the Scotch hills to Land's End.
There are the thousands of teachers
who will meet them there . Then
there are the mothers busy at home,
the fathers and brothers hurrying off
patients, the merchants to their business.
Recall, too, the workers in the
fields, on the lonely hills, on the sea ,
in the docks ; the toilers in the grime
of the coal-mines, in the fierce heat
of the furnaces ; the “ hands ” at
work amid the deafening hammering
of metal, the bewildering buzz and
hum of the mills. Many have been at
work since five or six in the morning,
and now, at nine o'clock, there are
still three hours before the hooters will
sound the dinner -hour.
OF A COUNTRY
Our homeland is prosperous, not
trade-about the centre of the land
on the globe ; not only because the
sea which surrounds it keeps it healthy
to live in and safe from invaders, and
also gives easy and cheap carriage to
all parts of the world for goods going
out or coming in ; not only because it
has rich stores of coal and iron near
the sea, and good harbours looking
towards the markets of the east and
west. There is something more needed.
Robinson Crusoe might have had all
these advantages in his island, and
they would have been useless to him.
So would they also be useless in our
the island home if we had not the honest
work, day after day, year after year, of
all the helpers we have seen throughout
the country , for it is this work that
brings out the splendid value of the
natural possessions of our land.
The next story of our land is on page 345.
270
 * The Child's Story of
FAMOUS BOOKS
THE PLAYS OF SHAKESPEARE
INN stories,
our last readings of the stories from Shakespeare's plays we had chiefly sad
or tragedies ; so we turn now for a change to some happy tales or
comedies. There is both sorrow and joy in life, and in our reading we should
seek to vary the subject by choosing now tragedy and now comedy, and not always
to read one sort of tale, as that would give us a wrong idea of life. As we saw
in the story of “ Othello ” the unhappy ending of a hasty man's jealousy, we are
now to see how the same folly may end not unhappily , for “ A Winter's Tale ,” like
“ A Midsummer Night's Dream ,” is a delightful piece of fancy and imagination ;
just the sort of story that we love to tell at a winter fireside. “ Measure for
Measure" is also a fine comedy that teaches us useful lessons of conduct; while >

the charming comedy of “ Much Ado about Nothing,” like “ A Winter's Tale ,"
shows how foolish it is to pay any attention to the tongues of slanderers.

MEASURE FOR MEASURE

IN olden atimes there it was known what
was Duke of CONTINUED FROM 154 fortune her relatives
Vienna whose good would fix for her
natured treatment of dower. For this
his people had not been to the Claudio was condemned to death,
advantage of his state. The laws a sentence which was an outrage,
of the city not being strictly but Angelo was keen to exercise
enforced, as all laws should be, his new power, like all persons
people stood in no fear of them. " drest in a little brief authority."
The Duke saw that for his people's Claudio had a sister who, when this
good the laws would have to be kept, misfortune befell her brother, had but
but at the same time he did not wish newly entered a convent, and on news
to appear suddenly to change from of the impending execution of her
a kind ruler into a tyrant. He had , brother reaching her, retiring and
therefore, to think of some way to gentle though she was, she took cour
carry out his reform without appear- age to go forth and intercede with
ing to have lost his kindly interest Angelo herself on behalf of Claudio.
in his subjects . Although the Lord Deputy was a
Among the noblemen of Vienna was cold and cruel man, he was not in
one Angelo, a stern , severe , and cold- sensible to the winning beauty of
hearted man . The Duke, thinking Isabella, as Claudio's sister was
that Angelo would be just the man to named , and her appeal seemed to
enforce the laws, appointed him Lord soften him ; but that was only because
Deputy, and gave out a report that a selfish desire to possess the beautiful
he himself was leaving for a time to creature had been awakened in him .
visit another country. Instead of If she would consent to marry him , he
going away , however, he assumed the promised to pardon her brother, thus
habit of a monk, and, thus disguised, ready to add one injustice to another.
remained in Vienna tosee how Angelo The idea was horrible to a young lady
conducted himself. who had just given up the thought of
As chance would have it, the first marriage, and of all men Angelo would
case to call for Angelo's judgment was have been the last she could have
that of Claudio, a young gentleman cared for. So she indignantly refused
who had secretly married a young him , and when she visited her brother
lady named Juliet. In those days, approved of her
in prison, he, too,
and still in many parts of Europe, a refusal; but as he thought the more of
bride had to bring her husband a his impending doom, his courage failed
marriage dower, a gift of money or him and he begged her to submit.
land , presented by her parents or The talk between the brother and
relatives. Claudio and Juliet were sister in the prison had been overheard
keeping their marriage secret until by a monk , or friar, who was none
第四 be Acabel.THE
271
 THE CHILD'S STORY
other than the Duke in disguise , and
he was filled with anger to find that
Angelo was abusing his trust. In a
flash he thought of a clever way to
outwit Angelo and bring happiness
where so much sorrow threatened .
There was a lady, he told Isabella,
named Mariana, whom Angelo, five
years before , had vowed to marry, but
did not do so , as her marriage dower
was not forthcoming ; yet Mariana loved
him still. Isabella was to make pre-
tence of agreeing to Angelo's proposal
for the sake of her brother, but she had
to arrange with this Mariana that she
would take Isabella's place at the
wedding, wearing a veil , so that the
bridegroom would not discover the ruse
until it was too late. Mariana had also Angelo the fate which the latter had
to say to Angelo when she appeared
before him veiled : “ Remember now
my brother."
All this was carried out accordingly ;
but a pirate having died in prison,
whose hair and beard resembled those
of Claudio, the Duke managed to get
the head of this dead man sent to
Angelo with the intimation that it was
the head of Claudio ! Meanwhile,
Claudio himself had been, thanks to the
Duke, taken out of danger.
THE COMEDY OF “ • A WINTER'S TALE ”"
THEREwere two Kings who had been that he believed Polixenes and Her.
brought up together and grown to
like each other so well that they were
almost as brothers. The one was King
of Sicilia, his name being Leontes ;
and the other, who was called Polixenes,
reigned over the kingdom of Bohemia .
Once when Polixenes was on a visit to
Leontes , the latter had so enjoyed his
society that he begged his friend to
stay longer. But Polixenes seemed
bent on returning to Bohemia , until
Hermione , the tender and loving Queen
of Leontes , joined her entreaties to
those of her husband , when Polixenes
yielded to her gentle persuasion and
decided to prolong his visit .
Unhappily, Leontes, though in the
main a good and kind King, must
have been of a jealous nature, for
although he had asked his wife to urge
Polixenes to stay, when his friend did,
for her asking, what he had not seemed
ready to do for him , Leontes suddenly
became foolishly jealous of Polixenes .
In his folly he told his servant Camillo
272
OF FAMOUS BOOKS
Now was the moment for the Duke
to complete the discomfiture of his un
faithful deputy ; so, withdrawing from
the city, and dressing again in his
proper clothes , he sent forward news
that he was returning from Poland .
Angelo came to the city gate to meet
him, and the usual friendly speeches
were made , the Duke appearing ignorant
of all that had happened. Then came
forward Isabella, pretending to appeal
to the Duke to punish Angelo for
having murdered her brother. Angelo
was indeed dismayed when the veiled
lady he had but newly wedded also
came forward and disclosed herself as
his old sweetheart .
The Duke threatened to visit upon
designed for Claudio ; but both Isabella
and Mariana begged that he might be
pardoned, and this the Duke agreed to .
Nor did Isabella refuse the offer of the
kind -hearted Duke to make her his own
wife . And so the comedy ended , with
happiness for all. We can see why it
is called “ Measure for Measure," since
Angelo was made to feel himself in
very much the same position as he had
placed Claudio , and “ Tit for Tat "
would be a children's title for it.
mione had fallen in love, but Camillo
knew this was not true . He humoured
the jealous King, however, by promis
ing to poison Polixenes if what Leontes
said was true. But what he did was to
tell the King of Bohemia of the madness
that had come upon his old friend ,
and that night both Polixenes and
Camillo had fled from Sicilia .
Nothing would persuade Leontes of
his folly, and he accused his poor
Queen of acts and thoughts of which
she was entirely innocent . He even
refused to look upon their newly-born
daughter, Perdita, and ordered that
the child should be taken and left to
die in a desert place.
Naturally, Hermione denied the un
just charges brought against her, and
in this she was supported by the
famous oracle at Delphi. This oracle
was supposed to be the voice of the gods,
which in those pagan times could be
consulted on matters of difficulty
through the priestess in the great
 -THE COMEDY OF “ A WINTER'S TALE "
temple of Delphi. It was , of course ,
entirely superstition ; but the answer
that came from Delphi as to Her-
mione's conduct said she was entirely
innocent, whereas Leontes was a
jealous tyrant , who would not have an
heir to his throne “ if that which is
lost be not found .”
Soon the words of the oracle seeired
to be coming true , as the King's only
son, the young Prince Mamillus, died
of grief at his mother's woes ; and
Hermione herself became so ill that
it was said she , too, had died.
Too late, the jealous King realised
his folly ; and now that he believed
both his wife and son to be dead, he
declared he would visit their grave each
day and spend his years in mourning.
But Leontes did not know that,
while the officer who had taken the
little Perdita to a desert part of
Bohemia had himself been killed by a
bear, the child had been rescued by a
shepherd, who knew from certain jewels
and other things the officer had with
him that the child was of royal birth .
Still , the shepherd took no steps to
find out her parents , but brought her
up as his own daughter, and watched her
> When he did see it, so lifelike it seemed
with joy and delight as she grew into
the loveliest shepherdess that ever was.
Sixteen years had thus passed by, and
Perdita found herself beloved by aabrave
and handsome youth, who often came
to visit her as she tended her sheep ;
but whence he came she did not know .
After all these years, too , Camillo,
who had lived withPolixenes since they
But the King of Bohemia was loth to
let him go, as he wished that they
should go together in disguise to dis
cover why the young Prince Florizel
was so often absent from Court and
loved to spend his time in the country.
This Camillo agreed to, and their
discovery was indeed a surprise to
the King, as Florizel proved to be none
other than the sweetheart of Perdita,
the shepherdess, whom he wished to
marry. The King, of course, sternly
forbade him, and threatened to have
Perdita removed if she ever saw
Florizel again . But Camillo now carried
out his wish to return to his native land,
and took with him , in disguise, both
Florizel and the lovely shepherdess.
Leontes gave a warm welcome to
the son of his old friend, whom he had
so greatly wronged ; and the old
shepherd, having followed the run
aways into Sicilia, disclosed the parent
age of Perdita, to the joy of her father.
Then came the happiest event of all ,
when Paulina, a dear friend of Hermione,
and widow of the officer who had taken
Perdita away, invited Leontes to see a
beautiful new statue of Hermione.
that he could scarce forbear to touch
it ; and lo ! the figure descended from
the pedestal and laid her head upon
his breast. It was Hermione alive, for
she had never been dead !
Leontes, now happier than his former
folly gave him any right to be, was
friends again with Polixenes ; and, of
course, Florizel and Perdita were

fled from Sicilia together, had a great married in due course, thus uniting
longing to return to his native country. the fortunes of the two kingdoms.
MUCH ADO ABOUT NOTHING
WHENbattle,
he was returning from gentleman of Florence,namedClaudio, a
with some of his prin- great favourite of the Prince, because of
cipal followers, Don Pedro, Prince of the soldierlyservice he had rendered him.
Arragon , an ancient kingdom of Spain , Claudio was very happy in going
broke his journey at the town of to Messina, as he was in love with
Messina to rest for a time as the guest Hero, whom he had seen before , and
of its governor, Leonato . he now rejoiced that the Prince had
This Leonato had a daughter, as gentle promised to advance him as suitor for
and good as she was beautiful and that charming lady's hand .
clever. Her name was Hero, and she There was another gentleman of the
and her cousin Beatrice, who was witty Prince's train , named Benedick, a young
and merry , more lively, but not quite nobleman from Padua, who was also a
so even - tempered as Hero, made the favourite of Don Pedro's ; and he, too,
home of Leonato bright and happy. It was brave and manly, but more moody
so happened that in the train of Don than Claudio, sometimes liking to read
Pedro there was a young and brave a book rather than to make himself
273
 “ THE CHILD'S STORY OF FAMOUS BOOKS
...
agreeable to the ladies. All went Claudio and the unsuspecting Hero.
smoothly so far as Hero and Claudio ' Assuring the lover that Hero had
were concerned , for not only was it really given her heart to another gallant,
clear they loved one another, but, and inducing both Claudio and Don
Leonato having given his consent to Pedro to hide with him in the garden on
their marriage, preparations for that the eve of Hero's intended wedding day, a
happy event were soon in progress. lady wasseen by them at Hero's window
Meanwhile, every time that Beatrice bidding farewell to an unknown man .
and Benedick had met they found occa- This was merely one of Hero's lady
sion to quarrel, and , though they seemed companions saying good-night to her
to like each other's company, one might own sweetheart,a follower of Don John,
have thought, to hear them, that nothing but Claudio and the Prince were both
would ever induce either to marry . misled into thinking it was Hero herself.
Now, when a couple are engaged to be Claudio, mad with rage, swore to re
married they are usually so happy that nounce the innocent Hero at the altar
they like to see others happy also ; and next day. This cruel threat he actually
so it was with Hero and Cla dio . To- fulfilled, and the poor lady, utterly at a
gether with the Duke and Leonato, they loss to understand the cause, almost died
agreed upon a little plan to make Beat- of grief. Her cousin Beatrice, of course,
rice and Benedick cease their bickering would not believe her capable of any
and love each other. dishonourable action, and made Bene
One day, when Benedick had with dick, now really in love with herself,
drawn to a shady arbour in the garden, undertake to fight a duel with Claudio.
the Prince, Leonato, and Claudio seated In the meantime it was pretended that
themselves near to where he was and Hero had really died ; and Benedick had
began to talk, so that Benedick might challenged Claudio to the duel, just when
hear them in his arbour, about the way Dogberry and Verges, two comically
in which poor Beatrice was dying of love stupid officers of the watch, brought in
for him! They pretended that she was two of Don John's followers whom they
deeply in love with Benedick, and yet had arrested at night, scheming of some
Hero had said : “ Beatrice would die ere plot, as they believed. To save himself,
she made her love known ." one of the prisoners at once confessed
This, you will see, was the beginning that he had visited his sweetheart that
of their little scheme, and it is no wonder night , so that when she came to the
that Benedick, overhearing their re- window the watchers in the garden might
marks, began to think his behaviour to mistake her for Hero. This he had
Beatrice had been cruel and ungallant. done at the instigation of Don John .
Meanwhile, Hero had her part to play Claudio, on hearing this, was over
in this pretty comedy of love, and , send . whelmed with grief, and, believing the
ing one of her attendants to tell the un- innocent lady to have died, he was in
suspecting Beatrice that Hero and despair ; but Leonato told him his
another lady in the garden were talking brother had a daughter the very image
about her, it was not many minutes be- of the child he had lost, and if Claudio
fore that lively and inquisitive lady had would marry her he would forgive him
stolen out to overhear what they might the sorrow he had caused by his folly
have to say . Their talk was all about in listening to slanderous tongues.
Benedick being deeply in love with her. When this new bride came to meet her
They also spoke in so much praise of bridegroom , her features were masked ;
him that Beatrice forthwith became as but judge of Claudio's surprise when
tender in her thoughts towards him as she uncovered her face , and he looked
his had now become towards her. again into the dear eyes of Hero !
But into this happy comedy the figure The threatened duel between Claudio
of a mischief-maker now steps. This is and Benedick had now no excuse, for all
Don John, half-brother of the Prince, were friends again, and not only do we
whom he hates so much that he would see Hero and Claudio ready for their
do anything to annoy him. For the wedding, but Beatrice and Benedick also.
moment hecan think of nothing better Don John was imprisoned , and in due
than to stir up the feeling of jealousy time was punished for mischief-making.
between the Prince's young friend The next story of Famous Books is on 409.
274
 The Child's Book of
NATURE
00
THE ANIMALS WE READ ABOUT
"HIS story tells us of the life of the wild animals, and what happens in
THIS
those parts of the world where the lion and the tiger still roam about
and animals are the enemies of man . We have no gerous wild animals
left in England now, but there are still parts of the world where the lion is
king and where its roar is terrible in the forest. Slowly, however , man has
conquered the animal kingdom , and the great fight between animals and men
ends always, and must end always, with the triumph of man . But we learn
here that these animals are not useless in the world, for nothing ever created
is quite useless, and the world could not spare even its wild animals.
ANIMALS THAT WORK FOR NATURE
LION JAGUAR LYNX FERRET SABLE WOLF WILD DOG
TIGER PUMA POLECAT CIVET MONGOOSE FOX JACKAL
LEOPARD CHEETAH WEASEL PINE MARTEN BEARS BADGER HYENA

Thepeace
best idea of
in the
CONTINUED FROM PAGE 139
the bark of the big
trees and so killed
world is that which them . They de
we fancy we see when reading stroyed all the green growth
of the days to come, when the upon the mountain -sides, and
lion shall lie down with the left a wilderness in place of
lamb, and a child shall lead smiling plenty. By so doing
them . We know that , if a they caused the climate to
lamb lay down near a lion to-day, the become changed into one dry and
lion would quickly eat it . The lion unfavourable to the growth of
seems, therefore, a cruel creature. green things. Where there are
But the lion is doing only what it forests and green plains the air is
was intended by Nature to do. never so hot and dry as where all is
Suppose there had been no lions , or bare rock and sand . By destroying
tigers, or leopards, or other flesh- forests we ruin the climate.
eating beasts in wild countries. Had the deer and cattle and
There would have been all kinds sheep and goats all been allowed
of deer and cattle, sheep and goats, to increase as the goats in the
hares and rabbits, and other animals Mediterranean countries were, there
which live upon vegetable matter. would have been far greater
There would have been nothing to damage. The end of it would
keep their numbers in check . They have been that these animals would
would have multiplied to such an have died of starvation , for they
extent that the countries in which would have changed the beautiful
they lived could never have become places in which they lived into
the homes of men . dreary deserts, where nothing would
Nature never meant that any have been able to grow .
class of animals should become too If the numbers of lions and tigers
numerous, because that brings trouble and other savage creatures had
all round . It is said that the countries been allowed to increase without
lying near the Mediterranean Sea any check, these would in turn
lost their forests and vineyards have become a deadly peril to us
through goats being allowed to all. But man has become master
work havoc. The goats, having no of the lions and tigers . He is not
enemies to keep down their numbers, so strong as these monsters , but he
ate up everything they could. They is more clever, and has made
gnawed the vines, they nibbled off spears and guns with which he can
the young shoots of trees ; they ate kill them . Wherever the white man

275
 YOUNG
LION
THEIR
WITH
LIONESS
AND
:A
WORLD
ANIMAL
OF
KING
THE

276
2012
 ANIMALS THAT WORK FOR NATURELEERLINUXCOOKULU
makes his home, the lion and the flesh off an animal as we should strip
tiger have to leave. There is no need the peel from an orange. The force
now for lions and tigers to keep down with which these claws are driven in
the number of other wild creatures that is almost more than we can believe .
eat herbs, for man can do that him- We are told that the three strongest
self. He does not want big animals things the animal world are se :
which kill his cattle as freely as they ( 1 ) the blow from the tail of a whale,
kill the creatures of the forest . (2) the kick of a giraffe, and (3) the
WHEN THE LION CREEPS ABROAD blow from a lion's paw. The forearm
of the lion is worked by great muscles
The story of the war between men at the shoulder, and the blow which it
and the savage beasts is as old as the makes is really like the blow from a
history of men in the world ; but steam -hammer. No wonder that it can
victory always rests in the end with kill a man or a big animal with ease .
the man. To-day, in India, lions have The lion and the tiger are the largest
become so scarce that nobody is al- of the cat family. They are really
lowed to hunt them ; they are looked great fierce cats . Your pet kitten is
after and protected almost as deer are simply a young lion or tiger on a tiny
protected in this country. scale . Notice the kitten's claws:
There are lions in other parts of Asia they are made in the same way as the
as well as India, but Africa is now the lion's . Notice how rough its tongue
chief home of the lion . Where white is upon your hand . The lion's tongue
men have been living for aa long time it is is like that, only much more rough .
not very often seen, but when men are On its tongue little hard points, like
making their way into new parts, there fragments of horn, stick up, so that
the lion is a terrible enemy to them . with these the lion can tear pieces of
The deer flee away at the sight of man, meat from a bone just as if it were
and the lion, unless he follows the deer, using a file.
must have cattle, or even men, or
else he must starve. So he attacks the THEOWON'S ROAR
GETS
IN THE FOREST AND
horses, and mules, and cattle which Another thing in which the lion is
draw the white men's waggons , and even like the cat is that it cannot run fast
kills and eats the men themselves. for a long distance . It can spring a
He comes out of his home at night, long way , and it can bound along at
and , creeping very quietly up to his a great rate for a short time ; but , just
prey, springs with great force upon it , as a dog can race a cat , so a deer can
and ki it with his great strong teeth easily race a lion . So the lion has to
and paws. He can carry away a young be very cunning to catch swift animals
ox as easily as a cat can carry away a for its supper .
rat . The teeth of the lion are of huge When the lion goes out to a pool
size , and its jaws are as strong as a to drink at night, he knows that other
great steel trap. How does it get the animals will be coming to the same
great power which enables it to kill a spot. So he puts his great mouth to
horse or an ox at a single blow ? the ground and roars . There is no
THE THREE STRONGEST THINGS other sound in the animal world like
THEIN THE ANIMAL WORLD the roar of a lion . It is so loud , so deep
Let us fancy that we are looking at and so powerful, that it terrifies all
those terrible front paws with which it the animals which hear it . It seems to
strikes the blow. The leg, or forearm, as send them wild with terror. The
it is called, measures 19 inches round , lion knows this , and he keeps on roar
and is made up of the hardest of hard ing. The result is that the animals
bone, with muscle and tendonsas strong which hear it forget everything in their
as the strongest wire . The foot terror ; they rush madly to and fro,
measures 8 inches across . When this and one of them generally dashes
foot strikes an animal the lion shoots straight into the mouth of the lion .
out its terrible claws, which are hidden, That is one of his ways of catching a
when it walks, inside the joints of the supper. There is another way.
toes . These claws are like great hooks Suppose that there are deer right out
made of yellow horn. They tear the on the plain. It is of no use for the
TUTO

277
 THE CHILD'S BOOK OF
lion to go galloping out there, for the
deer would see him and rush far away.
There may be scattered rocks to enable
him silently to creep from one to
another, and so get near, ready to
jump out. But suppose that there
are no rocks ; then he cannot get near.
In that case two lions have to hunt
together. One lies down and hides .
The other lion goes quietly off in the
reeds and bushes at the edge of the
plain , until he can get round to the
back of where the deer are feeding ;
then he dashes out with a roar. The
deer rush away in terror, with the lion
after them . Though he cannot keep
up with them , he can keep near enough
to drive them towards where the
other lion is hiding. In an instant,
when the deer draw near, this lion
bounds forth, strikes right and left
with his great paws, and at each stroke
he kills à deer, and so gains a supper
for himself and his friends.
A LION THAT SAVED THE LIFE
OF A MAN
When caught young, lions can easily
be trained and taught to do tricks
with their trainers . We often see them
do this in menageries and circuses,
where men are foolish enough to risk
their lives to perform with wild beasts.
But though the lions will do as their
trainer wishes, they would kill anybody
else who went into their den . A terrible
thing happened in Paris a few years
ago through a stranger going into a
den of lions . A man had to perform
with nineteen lions. Six of them he
himself had trained, but the other
thirteen, although they had been him ; and so they used to go to sleep
trained, did not know him . The
moment he set his foot inside the great
cage he slipped. One of the strange
lions jumped at him and knocked him
down ; the other strange lions at once
rushed upon him and began to bite
him . It seemed as if he must be killed .
Then a strange thing happened. The perhaps, than the lion. It does not live
biggest lion of all the lot flew at
those which were biting the man, and
began to attack them with all its
strength . That was the trainer's own
favourite lion, and it was now fighting
to save his life. So bravely did it fight
that, although it was badly bitten, it
kept the others off until men could
open the door and drag its master out.
He was very much hurt, and was
278
NATURE
in aа hospital for nine months before
he could walk . The bite of the first
lion had broken his leg ; but in the end
he got better, and often performed
with the lion which had saved him .
THEA STORY OF AN OLD LION AND
Many lions are born in zoological
gardens. The Zoo at Dublin is famous
for its young lions. Most of those born
at the London Zoo die, but those born
in Dublin are nearly always strong and
healthy. One of the Dublin lionesses
lived there so many years that her
children numbered fifty. When she
grew very old she was not able to move
about as quickly as she had done. The
result was that horrid rats used to get
into her cage, and , finding that she was
no longer nimble, they used to bite her
feet . The poor old lioness was much
troubled in this way, so that her life
became a misery to her.
At last things became so bad that
her keeper put a brave little dog into
the cage. As soon as the dog went in,
the old lioness got up to kill it , but the
dog took no notice of her. He saw a
great ugly rat in a corner of the cage,
and he meant to have that out of the
way even if the lioness killed him the
next minute ; so he flew at the rat and
killed it . Then the old lioness sat down
and thought. This little dog, she saw,
had been sent not to annoy her, but
to be a good friend. So she showed him
that she meant to be friends with him .
And each night after that, before she
went to sleep, she used to call the little
dog to her and fold her great paws round
together, the dog's head resting on the
broad chest of the lioness. No rat dared
to go near her after that, and she
passed the rest of her days in peace.
SWORD - TOOTHED TIGER
THELIVED THAT
IN ENOLAND
The tiger is more to be feared,
in Africa, but is to be found nearly all
over Asia, and especially in India.
It is cunning and cruel ; it will kill
animals when it does not need food .
It has not the grand head and mane
of the lion, but it uses its strength just
as surely.
Ages ago we had tigers in England,
as shown on page 27 , more terrible
even than those living to -day. They
 ANIMALS THAT WORK FOR NATURE
had two teeth which the tiger of to- Lord Curzon was resting at a monastery
day has not got . These two teeth were
great blades which grew down from the
upper jaw. They were like sword-
blades , and the name given to that
tiger is the “ sabre -toothed ” tiger. It
had legs bigger and stronger and claws
more powerful than the tigers of te
day. With its great teeth and big
mouth it could break the backs of huge
beasts such as then lived .
Η HISTHE
Hºw TIGER
PREY
HUNTS
Animals are often coloured like the
scenes in which they live. The lion loves
the open ground , so its fur has become a
mixture between yellow and grey, like
the sand and rocks . The tiger hunts in
marshes or among long reeds and grass ,
so its coat is a fawn colour with stripes
of black , or a colour almost black . When
it crouches down among the reeds , or
tall grass , it looks like the ground, with
shadows of the reeds showing on it .
Although lions and tigers kill men
and men's cattle, they do not do this all
their lives . The lion likes deer and zebras
in Korea , where he was travelling, he
heard sounds about the passages, and in
the morning he found that a great tiger
had been prowling round , trying to
catch him for its supper.
There is not a more beautiful animal
in the Zoological Gardens than the
leopard ; neither is there an animal
more cruel. There is a leopard which
the Prince of Wales brought home from
India . It bit a man's arm off when it
was being taken on to the ship. Another
leopard at the Zoo plays with its keeper
when there is nobody else about. It
was born in India and tamed by a lady
when it was quite a tiny thing. It was
very fond of her, and used to romp with
her like a big kitten. But as it grew up
it got so strong that it used to tear her
dresses to pieces with its great claws
when playing with her, and there was
always the fear that some day it might
hurt her, taste blood , and kill her . So
she sent it to the Zoo, where it is now .
LEOPARDSHEIDEVIC
UPON TREES AND SPRING
VICTIMS

and giraffes. The tiger eats deer and wild Leopards are more like tigers than
pigs and pea -fowl. When the tigers get lions , for they have no manes , but they
old , or after they have been injured, it is are spotted, instead of striped, as the
less easy for them to catch wild prey, so tiger is. When wild , they are even
they creep nearer to the homes of men, more to be dreaded than the lion or the
and take their cattle. The tiger does this tiger --— for they climb trees, which lions
very often in India. The poor natives and tigers do not. They crouch down
who are set to guard the cattle are on a bough , and as a child or an animal
terribly frightened when they see aa passes underneath they spring down
tiger , which, twice in a week, will carry and kill it . A cat loves to play with a
off a cow. The man runs away, and so mouse before killing it , but the cruel
shows the lion or tiger that he is afraid. leopard seemsto love to kill simply for
When it sees this, the animal will not the sake of killing. One night two full
trouble to attack the cattle , but will grown leopards and three young ones
spring upon the man and take him . got into a sheepfold in South Africa, and
TIGER IN INDIA THAT TRIED TO killed nearly a hundred sheep. It is a
TheCATCH LORD CURZON most cunning animal. Though it will
Hundreds of people and thousands of not attack a man who has a gun, it will
cattle are killed by tigers every year in spring on a poor native who is unarmed.
India . The natives are not only afraid But women and children have most to
of the tigers because of what they do ; fear from it . A single leopard in India
they are afraid of them because they killed a hundred women and children
believe that men , after eating a certain as they came to draw water at a well .
root , die , and are turned into tigers. Some leopards can live where it is very
When they have once tasted human cold . These are called snow -leopards.
blood, lions and tigers become very bold, They live high up in the mountains,
and will visit men's dwellings at night where snow nearly always lies , and then
and carry off anybody who is not in his their fur is long, to keep them warm, and
house. One tiger in India killed 127 nearly white, so that they may steal un
people, and caused such fear that for seen over the snow upon their prey.
six weeks nobody dared to go near the When captured and brought into a
village against its home. Once, when warmer climate, where there is no
279
 THE CHILD'S BOOK OF NATURE
longer any snow about, the coat of the (
When we speak of anybody as
snow - leopard often becomes darker. lynx -eyed,” we mean someone who
The jaguar is a more terrible-looking has very good sight, who seldom fails
beast than the leopard . It has much to see anything which is to be seen.
thicker legs , its head is heavier, and the That name is taken from the lynx, an
spots upon its coat , instead of being animal which climbs trees and eats birds.
round rings, like those of the leopard, It also eats the skunk, an animal which
are shaped like rosettes. Like the leopard, has a horrid smell. The polecat is
it climbs trees, and pounces down upon another animal with an unpleasant
its victim. ' Its home is in America, scent. It can be trained to catch
where it attacks nearly every animal. rabbits if caught young ; but when wild
PUMA, THE ENEMY OF THE DOO it does much harm , by killing poultry
THEAND THE KIND MAN'S FRIEND and eating eggs . It belongs to the same
Another of the big cats like the leopard family as the stoat and weasel, which
is the puma, which people in America call rob nests and kill rabbits . These are to
the mountain lion . The puma can kill a be seen in nearly all English woods where
horse or an ox, but of all things it best birds and rabbits are to be found. )
The
loves the flesh of the dog. It can be ferret , which men use to ferret ” out
tamed, but you must not let it see a dog , rats , is a sort of tame polecat.
for that will tempt it too much. A tame The weasel family is a big one. It
one at a menagerie at the Nottingham includes the otter, which swims and
Goose Fair was taken outside to the front dives splendidly and catches fish ; the
of the show. All went well until it saw a glutton, which lives in the cold countries
dog in the crowd. Master Puma forgot and is a terrible foe to the beaver ; the
that he was tame . He bounced off the stoat , with its brown coat in summer
show into the middle of the crowd , send- and white coat in winter, and its ever
ing the people screaming in alldirections. lasting appetite ; and the weasel itself,
He killed the dog , then, seeing another, which eats rats and mice and birds . If
he raced on and killed that . Then he a stoat or a weasel gets into a poultry
went back to the menagerie, carrying run, no chickens will be left alive.
one of the dogs in his mouth . THE LITTLEWEASEL
SHARP- TOOTHED
There is this to be said of the puma : FAMILY MEMBERS
although he will fight the jaguar and The pine marten is another of these
the bear , and will kill cattle and horses, little animals with long, thin bodies.
he never attacks a man unless he is They are terrible little creatures ,
himself first attacked. People sleep though they are so handsome. Some
without any protection when they years ago a farmer in Ireland had
know that pumas are about, for they fourteen out of twenty -onelambs killed,
call him the kind man's friend . and the next night the other seven were
OW THE CHEETAH IS MADE TO served in the same way. When a
HOWHUNT THE ANTELOPE search was made it was found that the
One of the few savage animals which , whole of the damage had been done
after being caught, can be made to serve by two pine martens, which had made
man is the cheetah . If he is caught their home in the nest of a magpie in
wild , he can be taught to hunt for his the top of a pine tree in a gentle
master ; but he cannot be made to do man's park.
this if he has been born in captivity. The most famous of the weasel family
Princes in India keep many cheetahs, is the sable . This is a little animal
just as many men in England keep which has a brown coat in summer, but
packs of hounds for hunting foxes . turns white in winter when the snow
When it has been trained, the cheetah comes . Its fur is so precious that men
is taken near to where there are deer or go into the cold, frozen wastes of
antelopes. At first its head is covered Šiberia to catch it , and in seeking it
with a hood ; when this is taken off they have explored and made maps of
the animal creeps away to where it lands where civilised men had never
sees the deer, and , springing upon one, been before .
catches it for its master . It is like the Another animal with a scent is the
leopard , having a spotted coat , but it civet, which lives in Africa. The scent
cannot climb trees . of this one is not unpleasant , but is
280
 DU

THE LORDS OF THE WILD KINGDOM

The lion is the king ofbeasts, the lord of the forest. A blow from a lion's paw is one of the strongest things in
the world, like a blow from a steam-hammer. When he goes to drink at the pool at night, he puts his great
mouth to the ground and roars, filling the other animals with terror, and sending them rushing madly to and
fro until one of them dashes straight into the lion's mouth . That is how the lion gets his supper.

The tiger, which belongs to the same family as the lion and the cat, has not the grand head and mane of the
lion , but it uses its strength just as surely as the lion, and in countries like India hundreds of people
and thousands of cattle are killed by tigers every year. When they have once tasted human blood,
tigers become very bold, and they will prowl round houses at night and carry off anybody they can catch.
YITOTT MDCXXRVmr buruaren mmDT Aronx
281
 COCCURREKO

THE FOX , THE JACKAL, & THE WOLVES

The jackal runs like a shadow after the lion and
tiger, and picks up whatever they leave. He will
eat up anything the lion and tiger leave lying about.
ME
The fox is the only wild animal left in England which
It is handsome , cunning, and
is at all like the wolf.
bold , and destroys the farmer's fowls and ducks.

This picture shows us a pack ofwolves hunting for food. They hunt together in large numbers, and in the winter,
when the ground is under snow and food is hard to find, they run for miles, chasing horses and men. Sometimes
the driver has to let loose a horse to satisfy the wolves and enable him to get away with the others.
282
 VE

THE HYENA & THE BLACK & POLAR BEARS

The hyena is a fierce, ugly creature, which hunts in This is a big grizzly bear, which climbs trees and
packs at night and steals everything it can get. It is will catch and kill a horse or a man. These bears
a cowardly animal, with great power in its teeth. generally live in a cave and sleep through the winter.

The Polar bear lives near the North Pole , at the very top of the world , where it is all ice and snow. He lives

chiefly upon seals and walruses, but if he can he will kill and eat a man . In winter the female bear buries her
self in the snow and does not wake up until the spring, when she generally takes her husband a little baby bear.
TURTOUTUUDU CUZ TOZATXO TUTTOmir ux
283
 CLUD

MEMBERS OF THE GREAT CAT FAMILY

The wild leopard climbs trees , which lions and tigers The lynx climbs trees and eats birds. It has wonder
do not. The leopard crouches on a bough and lies in ful eyes , and whenever we speak of anybody who
wait to spring upon an animal passing underneath . seems to see everything we call him " lynx-eyed ."

The snow -leopard can live where it is very cold . It The puma , which people in America call the
has a coat of warm fur nearly white, so that it can ** American lion, ' kills cattle and horses, but never
steal unseen over the snow and pounce upon its prey. attacks a man unless the man attacks him first.

The cheetah is one of the few imals after The jaguar is a more terrible -looking beast than the
being caught wild , cap ve made to serve man , and in leopard, having much thicker legs and a heavier
India princes keep many cheetahs to hunt antelopes head. Like the leopard, it has a spotted coat.
284
 CITADELLE

LITTLE ANIMALS THAT WORK FOR NATURE

Our dogs were all wild, like these, once upon a time, This is a ferret, the ferocious little animal which men
and there are still wild wolf-like dogs in Ireland. keep for "ferreting" out rats. It is a kind of polecat.

This is a weasel, found in nearly all English woods This is a pine marten, which can twist and turn its
where birds and rabbits are. It likes to rob birds'nests. long, thin body like an eel. It kills and eats sheep.

This is a polecat, which does great harm when wild by This is a badger, a shy, handsome animal with long,
killing poultry and eating eggs. It has a horrid smell. fine hair. It has very terrible jaws for its size.

This is a civet, a little animal with sharp teeth, with a This is a mongoose, the little long -bodied animal which
valuable scent which men collect for making perfumes. men tame because it kills snakes, rats, and mice.
The picture of the pack of wolves is by Robt . Morley, R.B.A ,; the other illustrations are byGambier Bolton , H. Dixon & Sons, Lewis
Medland, C. Reid , Dando, G. Rankin , and Douglas English.
UULUULUU ILMU Duterenu LUTALOOLINAR TEXT
ELLE
285
 2XUCuma
THE CHILD'S BOOK OF NATUREmurden
valued , and the civet is kept tame, so
that men can always get a supply of the
scent . This is passed from the animal's
body, like wax or honey, into a little
pouch, from which it is removed by
men who sell it to be used for making
perfumes.
A little long -bodied animal which
is much prized is the mongoose. Men
tame it and have it about their
houses, because it kills snakes and rats
and mice. So long as it is kept under
control, all goes well ; but if it is not
controlled , then woe betide its master.
Many years ago the island of Jamaica
swarmed withrats . These creatures ate THEWOLVES THAT CHASEWILDERNESS
the sugar -canes and ruined the planters.
A number of mongooses were taken there
from India , and turned loose in the
fields. They quickly killed and ate the
rats, and then people would have been
glad to get rid of them . For they killed
all the useful little animals in the island,
and became as big a plague as the rats .
HE BEAR THAT LIVES IN A WORLD
TH EOF ICE AND SNOW
In the frozen Arctic regions the
animal which men most dread is the
Polar bear. It is not so fearful a bear
as the one which used to live in England.
That was called the cave bear , and was
so big that two cave bears would
have weighed more than three of the
biggest bears in the world of to- day.
The Polar bear lives chiefly upon scals
and walruses,and on the flesh of whales,
but if he can lie will kill and eat a man .
In winter the female bear goes some
distance away from the sea and lies
down and buries hersell in the snow .
Then she goes to sleep for the whole
winter, while her husband is out getting
food and keeping himself warm as best
he can . When she goes out in the
spring froin her snowy home, the she-
bear generally takes a baby bear with
her to show to her husband. The
Polar bear can swim , and can make his
way over smooth ice where no horse or
man could go , the reason being that his
great feet are covered with little hairs,
which prevent him from slipping.
The Polar bear would , perhaps, not
know what to do iſ he came to a tree ;
but the grizzly bear, or any other bear
which does not live in the Polar regions,
would know what to do. They would
climb the tree if there were a becs '
nest or a man at the top. Wherever
286
OUTLULULLLLLL
there is food they will go. They will
eat roots or berries ; they will cat
honey ; they will catch and kill a
horse or a man ; they will eat the
body of a man or an animal which has
died. Nearly all the bears go to sleep
in the winter. They get so fat in the
summer that, while they are sleeping in
the winter, they can live on the strength
which is stored up in their fat. They
are thin and hungry when they come
out of their hiding -places in the spring.
That hiding-place is generally a cave
or some other hole ; it may even be the
inside of a great hollow tree.
THE HORSES
The wolf is not so big an animal as
the bear, but he is more to be feared .
There are so many wolves, and they
travel so fast and so far. They hunt
together in large packs, and in the winter,
when snow is on the ground and food
is hard to find, they run for miles and
iniles to chase horses and men .
In Siberia and Russia , and other
cold countries, wolves hunt men who
are driving in sledges. No matter how
quickly the frightened horses gallop, the
wolf can keep up with them . Sometimes
the driver is compelled to cut the
harness of one of the horses and let it
go , so that the wolves may seize that,
and enable him to get safely away with
the other horses. But if there are
many wolves, some will still follow the
man , and in the end run him down. If,
while he is being chased , the man shoots a
wolf, some will stop and eat the one
which drops, but the others go on .
When hunting animals they are just as
determined. Two will hunt a decr as
the lion does, one lying in hiding while
the other drives the deer towards it.
Wolves are found in many parts of the
world , and used to live in such numbers
in England and Scotland that the
kings made the people pay taxes, not
in money, but in the skins of wolves.
That was a sure way of making people
hunt and kill the wolf.
THEHECUNNING FOX AND THE WAY IN WHICH
CHEATS HIS HUNTERS
The only wild animal which we have
in England now at all like a wolf is
the fox, the animal which men on
horseback hunt with hounds. It is a
handsome but cruel animal. Like the
leopard, it will kill all it possibly can.
Mont

ANIMALS THAT WORK FOR NATURE...
In one night it will kill scores of fowls,
though it needs but one or two.
The fox lives in a hole burrowed in
the ground, or in the root of an old tree .
Sometimes it will share a burrow with
a badger. The badger is a shy, hand-
some animal, with long, fine hair.
No other animal of its size has such
terrible jaws. The badger and the fox
do not fight, or it would be bad for the
fox. Sometimes they live together in
a burrow which has two little rooms
at the end . In one the mother fox
rears her babies, and in the other the
badger nurses hers . Although the fox
does not bite so hard as the badger, its
bite is dangerous, and men have gone
mad from a wound caused in this way.
The fox is as bold as it is cunning,
and , like the skunk , the fox has a strong
smell , and wherever it goes it leaves
traces of this smell. It is this which the
dogs are able to follow . They can chase
a HUNT IN
not look forthe animal ;they simply HOWACKE
keep their noses to the ground, and
BYENGHT
The power of its teeth is
follow wherever the scent leads them .
The fox knows all about this, and
does all he can to destroy the scent
he leaves. He will swim water as
readily as a Polar bear, and he will
make great leaps in the air as the hare
does to break the track of scent .
HE WILD DOGS , THE WOLVES , THE
THE
JACKAL, AND THE HYENA
Our dogs were all wild once upon a
time . The dogs and the wolves and the
foxes and the wild dogs still living in
places abroad all come from the same
father and mother, far back in the ages.
There are still to be seen in Achill
Island , off the West Coast of Ireland ,
dogs which are simply little wolves and
nothing else. We need not be surprised ,
then , that the ways of wild dogs and
wolves are alike . Wild dogs hunt
just as the wolves do. They will attack
any animal when they are hungry.
The wild dogs in places abroad keep
the streets clean . They come into the
towns at night and eat up all the refuse,
and so help to keep these places healthy.
The jackal does a similar thing in
India . The jackal is really a smaller kind
of wolf . He is a wretched creature, and
runs like a shadow after the lion and
the tiger. When the tiger has killed an
animal and eaten as much as it wants,
the jackals , which have been humbly
287
WACZE KELLE &ULELE . A
creeping round about, rush out from
their hiding-place and devour the rest
of the carcase. They eat up the filth
of the villages ; but they are great
thieves, and dogs have to be kept to
prevent them from doing still greater
damage. They have a nose which is
less pointed than that of the fox, but
sharper than that of the ordinary wolf ;
and they have a tail like the fox.
If there is a more unpleasant animal
than the jackal, it is the hyena. But,
ugly and horrid as they are, they are
important to the health of the
countries where they live. If wounded
animals get away and die in the forest,
or if animals be left only partly eaten ,
their flesh , if allowed to lie in the
sun, would become poisonous. But
where hyenas are about, this thing
never happens. They set out in packs
at night, and clear up whatever flesh
they can find, not even leaving the bones .
wonderful.
The thigh -bone of a great ox is cracked
by the hyenas as easily as if it were a
nut. When there is nothing else to
be found in the wilds the hyenas make
for the villages , and eat up all the
rubbish that can be found there. If
they did no more than this they would
be valuable ; but they steal everything
they can eat . They are such cowards
that they dare not attack an animal
which is standing still; but if they can
start it running they will fight . They
creep up to an OX or a horse, and
jump up suddenly in front of its nose
to frighten it . This will very likely
start the creature running away. That
is just what the hyenas want . They
rush after it , howling and biting at its
legs, to get it away from its companions.
When the poorthing is weary from
running and from loss of blood which
the many bites have caused , it sinks to
the ground. The hyenas then rush on
to it and tear it to pieces, and leave not
one unbroken bone of it by the inorning.
There are too many hunting animals
in the world for us to note each one by
name, but we have considered the most
important in the groups to which they
belong. All those whose habits we have
now studied are called carnivorous,
which means that they cat flesh .
The next animal stories are on page 367 .
 22 acromo
Anal LUI ( CAIAZZE Druga OILADIEDETZLEICETIZEZE.

THE TOWER THAT HAS LEANED FOR 800 YEARS

TITILOXIXerrer
ZUTEUZIDIZIWTEXEL

The great tower at Pisa, in Italy, has been leaning for 800 years, yet it is quite safe. It is safe because, when
the builders found that it was sinking on one side, they went on building it so that the weight of the tower fell in
the right direction ; and though the tower seems to be falling, it is perfectly balanced on all sides. It shows us
what is called the law of gravitation, which means that everything gravitates, or is drawn, to the earth. The
weight of the tower is drawn to the earth , and if the weight were on one side the tower would fall. But nothing
matters so long as the pressure of the tower is straight towards the earth, however dangerous it may look.
288
 The Child's Book of
WONDER

WHAT THE WISE MAN TELLS US

THE Wise Man tells us in these pages of one of the greatest laws of Nature,
THER the law that makes an apple fall to the ground. Nothing seems more
simple, yet no man knows why an apple falls from a tree to the gre nd, or
why a stone comes down again when we throw it into the air. What
we know about it the Wise Man tells us here. He tells us, too, how
the clever little spider spins its web, how the beautiful dewdrops are formed
which hang upon trees and grass when we awake in the morning, and of
many other things which must have puzzled our minds from time to time.

WHY DOES AN APPLE FALL ?

N°o one in the world
knows why an CONTINUED FROM PAGE 180
apple falls to the
ground, said the Wise Man,
when the children asked
this question. I mean that
though we know the earth and the
apple pull each other together-
the apple, being small, moving a
long way, and the earth, being
large, moving a very, very little way
-no one knows why they pull each
other. But everything in the whole
wide world pulls everything else in this
way , as was proved by Sir Isaac
Newton , when, as a boy, he lay under
an apple tree in his father's garden,
saw an apple fall, and thought. “ The have ruined it, it still stands, and the
earth pulls the moon and keeps it run-
ning round her, just as it pulls the
stone," he said . If the moon stopped
moving round, it would rush to the
earth as the apple does and as a stone
does . So he discovered the law of
universal gravitation .
Now, the more stuff there is in a
thing the stronger is its pull upon
everything else . So the earth should
pull a big weight more strongly than it
pulls a small one, and it does. Then
the big weight will fall quicker than
the small one, men thought. They
forgot that it takes a stronger pull to
pull a heavier weight; the heavier it
is , the stronger the pull , but the more
the pull has to do . Therefore, a heavy
weight and a small one fall at the same
rate. If you ask me the right question,
said the Wise man, I will tellyou the
story of the man who saw this, and
how he proved it .
The Wise Man had set them
problem , but one clever boy knew all
about it . In the town
of Pisa , in Italy, is a
famous leaning tower,
which has stood for hun
dreds of years How
does the leaning tower of Pisa
stand ? asked the clever boy
who had read of it ; and the Wise
Man said :
There is nothing in the whole world
quite like the leaning tower of Pisa.
Its building was begun more than 800
years ago, since the people who lived
in Pisa wanted to have a tower as fire
as the great bell tower of Venice .
Yet , though the tower of Pisa met
with a strange accident that might
tower at Venice fell down a few years
ago ! We know now that the tower
was not meant to lean , though it is
13 feet out of the straight line !
The tower was built on wooden
piles , driven into ground so soft that
when the tower was little more than
begun it began to sink on one side.
There is no other tower in the world
that leans so much as this at Pisa .
It is also very beautiful, the outside
of it being made of white marble. The
tower does not fall because , as they
went on building it, they made it in
such a way that if you dropped a
straight line down from a certain point
in the tower, called the centre of gravity,
which is equally balanced on all
sides , by the weight of the tower,
that line would touch the ground
within the foundations of the tower.
If the line reached the ground some
where outside the tower, it would fall .
a But the tower is very interesting for
another reason , said the Wise Man,

Х 289
 -THE CHILL'S BOOK OF WONDER
and the reason is that its peculiarity
was used by one of the greatest men
who ever lived , in order to make one
of the most famous experiments in the
book of knowledge . This man was the
grea : Italian astronomer Galileo, who,
rather more than 300 years ago , was a
professor in Pisa, and was thinking for
himself. The great Greek thinker
many great men before Galileo, and
has happened to many since. It hap
pens now . When you children grow up
to be men and women will you see that
it does not happen again ?
WHERE ARE THE STARS IN DAYTIME ?
Where are the stars in the daytime ?
a child asked, and the Wise Man said :
The stars in the daytime are just

Lanca
Aristotle, nearly 2,000 years before the where they are at night , and if some
time of Galileo, had declared that if you thing could be put over the sun we
took two balls of the same material , one should see them again . Something is
small and the other large , and dropped put over the sun sometimes, for the
them at the same moment, the large one moon comes in the way, so that for a
would reach the ground first. If it was time he cannot be seen , even though
ten times as heavy as the small one, he it is daytime and there are no clouds
said , it would fall ten times as quickly. in the sky. When that happens, one
Nowadays, when anyone says any. of the most wonderful things in the
thing like this, we always make the world is to see the stars come out
experiment at once, and let Nature again . ” They were there all the time,
decide. But in the old days very few shining as brightly as ever, but the
men thought about the authority of sun is so very much brighter to us
Nature ; they chose some great man , because he is so very much nearer to
and made him their authority . So for us-- that we could not see them .
nearly 2,000 years everyone believed When you are listening to thunder, or
and taught what Aristotle had said to a cannon , you do not hear the quiet
about falling weights, and in all that sound of your own breathing, although
time no one made the experiment to the thunder is far away and the breath
find out the truth. ing is near ; and just as the great noise
At last , however, came Galileo, and swallows up the little sound, so the
he was thinking for himself . He said great light of the sun swallows up the
that the two weights would fall in just the little light of the stars . There is another
same time, even though one was heavy way of cutting out the light of the sun
and the other light , and everybody so that the stars may be seen in the
laughed at him . It is always a hopeful daytime. Men who work at the bottom
sign when everyone laughs at you— of a pit or a well, and look up at the
at least , no one has ever done anything little bit of sky above them , see the
in the world who has not been laughed at. stars almost as brightly in the day as
“ Very well,” said Galileo, “ come and in the night.
watch me make the experiment." So one WHAT IS A DEWDROP ?
morning, before the assembled university, As night came on and the dew came,
professors and students, he ascended the great dewdrops hung upon a spider's
leaning tower, taking with him a ten web stretching across the trees , and a
pound shot and a one-pound shot. He child asked next : What is a dewdrop ?
let them go together. Together they fell , The Wise Man said :
and together they struck the ground. Those tiny beads of water look very
And so , you think, everyone praised simple, but it took wise men hundreds
Galileo for having found out a new truth , of years to find out what they are.
and hewasfamous ever afterwards. But Then they found that a dewdrop is
one of the terrible lessons we have to part of something very important in
learn is that that is not what men deed . There is in the air a great deal
usually do in cases like this . What of moisture, which cools the rays of
really happened was that everybody the sun so that we are not burnt on a hot
abused the young man for daring to summer's day. At night, when the
differ from Aristotle . earth passes out of the sunlight, the
They started hissing at Galileo's earth lets out the heat that it has
lectures, and in a very short time he had stored up by day, and the moisture
to leave Pisa - turned out for finding causes the heat to escape slowly . If it
a truth . The same thing happened to did not the earth would suddenly
290
 THE DEWDROP ON THE SPIDER'S WEB umur
become so cold that we should be frozen How does the spider spin its web ?
to death in a single summer's night . another child asked , and the Wise Man
Well, in the evening, when the told them the wonderful story of the
earth begins to give off its rays of little weaver who leaves his silk pat
heat, the moisture in the air drinks terns on the trees .
in the rays, so that the moisture HOW DOES A SPIDER SPIN ITS WEB ?
becomes warmer than the earth and Great men say that nothing is more
the grass and the flowers, from which wonderful than the cleverness of the
the heat rays have come. The The grass spider. The silk of which it makes its
and the flowers become very cold after web comes from its body through tiny
losing their heat, and as they grow tubes, like the finest hairs. Many of them
cold they chill the moisture near come out at the same time, but after
them.. The moisture ,, when it becomes leaving the spider's body they are all
HOW NATURE HANGS HER formed into one rope of silk ,
BEADS UPON A SPIDER'S WEB which is so thin that aa hundred
of them together are only as
thick as a hair. The end of
the silk is fastened to a twig
or a leaf or a piece of wood.
Sometimes the spider makes
the fastening itself, or it may
let the silk float from its body
for the wind to blow it
about until it touches some
thing and clings there.
When both ends have been
made fast, the spider is able to
run down it and fix several
more threads, perhaps twenty,
all fastened to different points,
but meeting in the middle.
These are the cross ropes of
the web . Then other lires
have to be woven round and
round these, making perhaps
twenty rings. All this beauti
ſul silk has come from the
spider's body. The spider
wor s hard and fast , and when
the web is begun the work is
finished in less than an hour.
The web is then so strong
that the wind cannot blow
it away and the rain cannot
break it.
The purpose of the spider's
web is to catch insects, so
This is a spider's web covered with dewdrops. The spider makes
its web with silk from its own body, which it spins into rings and the spider has still much work
threads until the web is complete. A web is made in about an hour, to do . Insects would not be
and is so strong that wind and rain do not break it. There is caught in a web if they could
nothing prettier than the spider's web with the hanging dew upon it. walk or fly out of it, and to
cold, turns to real water and falls prevent their escape the spider covers
towards the ground like rain, and all the web with stuff like glue, which
the blades of grass , or the leaves of sticks to anything entering the web
trees, or the spider's web, catch the and holds it fast . We cannot see this
drops as they fall, and the water, glue with our eyes , but there are thou
trying to keep itself together as much sands and thousands of tiny beads of
as it can, gathers into tiny beads. it dotted all over the spider's web.
These are the dewdrops. The next questions are
a
on page 417.
mm OTTO KETTI
201
 XXLLLLLLLLLLLLLLELLID QUIERO

THE REAL DISCOVERER OF AUSTRALIA

DIUTURE
mrt
TUTUSTUTAXT
trume
TELLI morum
nto

This picture shows Captain Cook landing in Tasmania . He

was a farm labourer's son, who ran away to sea and became
a good sailor. None of the men who had been to Australia
before him had realised the fruitfulness of the country ,
but Captain Cook found that there were in it fair and
beautiful lands , and he called the land he saw New
South Wales , and claimed it all for England. The little
pictures at the bottom show the kind of men and women
Captain Cook found in Tasmania when he landed there.
TUTTIYIZYTD mum TYTTTTTT

292
 SMAKE
The Child's Book of MIL
PEARE
O
MEN & WOMEN TON

WHAT THIS STORY TELLS US

THIS story of the discoverers tells us of Australia . Like the great continent
THIS
of Africa, Australia, the greatest island in the world, was unknown for

RUBENS
hundreds and thousands of years. When men began to sail round the world and
first saw the Australian coast, it looked such a terrible land that they dared
not enter it, and for years men knew only the coast and nothing at all of the
real country. We read here of the men who first explored the coast and made
known to the people the great and beautiful country which lies beyond. There
are no sadder stories anywhere than the stories of the sufferings of the men
who travelled through the great deserts to make Australia known to the world.

THE MEN WHO FOUND AUSTRALIA

NAP
OLE
Dº you remember CONTINUED FROM PAGE 146
ON . what Alice said
to herself as she
was falling down the
rabbit -hole in Wonderland ?
“ I wonder if I shall fall right
through the earth , ” she said. And
then she thought how funny it
would be to come out on the other
CRO
side of the world.
ELL
“ I shall have to ask what the
name of the country is,” she thought .
“ I shall have to say : Please, ma'am,
is this New Zealand or Australia ? "
Then she thought that people would
think her a stupid little girl for not
knowing.
So she hoped very much that if
she did fall right through the earth
to the other side she would see the
name of the country written up
somewhere .
If Alice had not been dreaming she
would never have thought such a
funny thing. Fancy seeing a sign-
post put up to say : * This is Aus-
STEPHENS
tree on the other
WE
side of it . LIN
GION
England and Scot.
land, and Wales and
Ireland, all seem big places, but ,
just think of it, if you joined
these countries together, and tried
to make them as big as Australia,
you would want twenty -five times as
much land as we have in the whole DAR )
WIN
of England, Scotland , Wales, and
Ireland. And yet for thousands and
thousands of years men never knew
that there was an Australia in the
world. Even to -day there are some
parts of it into which white men have
never been .
You see , we live on one side of
the world and Australia is on the
other side, and that is a very long
way. Men had not got steamships
then ; they had to go about the ocean
in sailing vessels . If the wind helped
them all the time they would get to
Australia in about seven months. If
the wind did not help them it would

tralia ! Countries do not put up take longer. So it was not until the
RIVIN
STONEG

signs like that . They have their
names on the maps ; that is all .
But Australia's name has not
been very long on the map. After
Columbus had discovered America ,
in 1492 , more than a hundred years
had to pass away before white men
knew that there was such a place
in the world as Australia. Is not
that a strange thing to think of
CLAD
STO
NE
to -day ? It seems as strange as if
you knew all about the grass on
one side of your garden, yet did not
know that there was a great apple
year 1522 that men from Europe first
saw Australia. These men were sailors
from Portugal . They saw a rocky
coast- the western coast it was — and
as they did not think it looked a nice
place they did not trouble to stay.
Dutch sailors in other ships after
wards saw what the Portuguese had
seen , and they sailed along the same
coast , trying to find better land . In
this way they got an idea of what the RUS
KIN
coasts were like on the west and on
the south and on the north of Aus
tralia . None of them liked it much

PJULIUS CÆSAR HERBERT SPENCCES

293
 ZOERSDOLOCONG TROCA OCEEA
-THE CHILD'S BOOK OF MEN AND WOMEN
)
Crusoe.” That made him wish to go made several journeys, and once
to sea, and he studied all about navi- travelled 800 miles, looking for the sea
gating and the making of charts, and which was not there. His friend, a
when at last he went to Australia he man named Cunningham , who was
set about exploring the coast. He was afterwards killed by the natives , found
able to show that Tasmania is not part a river, but nothing important was
of Australia, as was then supposed, but a done until Captain Charles Sturt set
separate island . He did more than that . out . He had convicts with him, but
He made quite sure that Australia they bravely went wherever he led,
itself is an island, the biggest island though they suffered greatly.
in the world ; for, little by little, he The heat was so terrible that the
sailed all round it . On his way home screws which held his boxes together
he was taken prisoner, and not allowed became loose and fell out ; his comb
to return to England for nearly seven was split into thin plates ; the lead of
years. The French who captured him his pencil dropped out, and his finger
stole the maps which nails were so baked
he had made and that they snapped
the papers he had like pieces of glass.
written , and printed But in spite of this
them, pretending he made some splen
that they were their did journeys. In
own and that they some years heavy
had made the dis rains make great
coveries . lakes and marshes
The worst part of on the plains of
the work in Aus Australia , " and in
tralia had still to be other years, when
done. This was the there is no rain ,
exploring of the land
itself. In some ways
it was harder work
than the explorers
of Africa had had
to do. There were
no savage
but there were sav
age
attacked

food for
and
men ,

the horses
bringing
the
plorers and set fire
to the grass and
beasts,

the his
who
ex
M
reeds, destroying the This picture shows Edward John Eyre and them .
servant
through ending a desert,
an Australian
these marshes are
burnt dry.

that it
Sturt
found the plains in a
dry year. The result
was that reeds which
had grown
forests — some of the
nettles are fifty feet
high — were so hard
was
possible for him to
force his way through
But
journey found a great river
exploringexhausted.
long almost
and called it the
men into great peril. But worse still Darling. Altogether he explored 2,000
like

im

he

were the great stony deserts and the miles of country. So great were his
want of water. It would take many sufferings that in the end he went blind .
Looks to tell how men toiled and died His faithful friend and follower was
to find their way about the interior of John McDouall Stuart, who , after he
Australia . Their sufferings were terrible . had been out with Sturt , made three
We can only study a few cases. yrand marches of his own. It took
We must remember that Australia him a long time, but in the end he
is a country of nearly 3,000,000 miles, marched right from the south of
and that , when the parties set out, they Australia to the north. . Starting from
did not know whether there were the shore of the sea in the south , he
rivers or lakes in the interior. They finished on the shore of the sea in the
hoped that they would find both , of north . He was the first man in the
course, and some believed that they world to do this . It was a very im
uld find a great inland sea like the portant work that he did , for, wherever
Mediterranean . Lieutenant Oxley he went, he made maps for others to
296
 -THE MEN WHO FOUND AUSTRALIA DICIELLO CULOATEICOTEKA

follow , and afterwards it was by the
very path that he took that the tele-
graph lines from one side of Australia
to the other were laid .
He and his men suffered from want
of food and more often from want of
water. Once, when they were nearly
dying of thirst , they came to a river
which flowed at the bottom of some
steep rocks. They rushed down to
drink, but when they reached the
water they found that it was salt as
the sea, and so were many of the lakes .
The water collects after the rain in
great hollows, where tons and tons of
salt lies . Some of the horses went mad
from thirst, and one nearly killed
Stuart . Another horse trod on him ,
breaking the bones of his right hand,
so that he was unable again to use it .
many sheep, and he was a magistrate,
but he gave up his home life to go into
the wilds .
He believed that men could go on
foot along the desert ways lying along
the coast of that very big bay called the
Great Australian Bight . If you look at
a map you will see Spencer Gulf, in
the south of South Australia . It was
from there that he started . Now run
your eye along to the west, almost to
the far edge of the south coast of West
Australia . Then you will see King
George Sound, where his journey ended .
The country was so bad all the way
that to travel so far and so long was
most heroic , and when people in England
heard about what Eyre had done they
gave him a splendid medal.
He explored inland, too, and dis

TOUTER
ITTICE
Matthew Flinders John Stuart Captain Sturt
These three men were among the earliest and bravest explorers of Australia. Matthew Flinders
sailed all round the continent, the biggest island in the world. Captain Sturt found the great
River Darling and explored 2,000 miles of country, suffering so greatly that he went blind. John
Stuart was the first man to march across Australia from south to north making maps all the way.

But with that broken hand he made
his greatest march .
Through want of food and water he
became very ill, and at one time his
mouth was so sore that he could not
swallow . Savages tried to kill him .
But in spite of everything he kept on
and on , until at last he came to the end
of his journey and saw the sea from
the land — the sea on the coast opposite
to that from which they had started.
They looked out at the sea from the
land upon which Dampier had looked
from the sea all those years before.
Before Sturt was ab e to complete his
work, Edward John Eyre made several
attempts to learn more about the
country He had a good farm and
297
Y
covered Lake Torrens. He thought it
was a great sea , because he found it in
a rainy year, when the lake reached far
and wide . Eyre made his greatest
journey, along the Bight, in 1841, and
lived for sixty years afterwards.
Many men were travelling now, and
sad was the fate of several of them .
Some have never been heard of since.
The most terrible story is that
of the Burke and Wills expedition .
These two men set out with camels and
men and provisions, with good hopes
But from the beginning
of success .
everything went wrong. In order to
move with more speed they divided up
the ty, so that the leaders could
fust find a way. Most of the camels
 CELLULOODATURES
-THE CHILD'S BOOK OF MEN AND WOMEN
and provisions were left, while eight
of the party went on . Then these
waited while a man was sent back to
fetch the others. The man sent back
was a long time away, so Burke said
he would go on without him . He
left all the spare provisions , and then
took Wills and two of the men , with
six camels and two horses, and
provisions for three months, and set
out again.
They reached the sea-shore , but had
to hurry back because their food was
running short. One of the men died,
and when the three got back to where
they had left the second party, nobody
was there .
They had gone to a better camping-
place far away, on the very day that
Burke and Wills returned .
Burke and Wills were too ill to
follow them , so they tried to get home
by another way, hoping that they
might find water on the march. Wills,
who had written an account of their
travels , buried his books at the camp
before leaving , but took with him one
book, in which to write the further
story of their doings. The man with being found buried according to the
them strayed away, and was rescued writing on a tree.
by some kind natives , but Burke and The next story of discoverers is on page 399.
THE LAST DAYS OF BURKE AND WILLS , LOST IN THE AUSTRALIAN DESERT
Wills wandered on and on , lost in the
dreadful desert . Their clothes were
worn to rags . They had nothing to
protect them from the heat of the
sun by day, nothing to keep off the
cold at night . All their food and water
were gone .
Wills wrote his last word in the
diary, saying that they were starving
and near death . There was no word
of complaint in his book. He lay
down in the desert when the time
came, and died like the brave man he
was . Burke died the next day.
The man who had been saved by
the natives was able in time to get
back to his home . Then people were
sent out far and near to seek the two
poor men in the wilderness . But it was
too late. Their bones were found , and
the people who had gone to find them
brought them back to their home and
buried them with honours, with a monu
ment over them , to tell what they
had done and suffered in exploring the
deserts of Australia . They brought
with them also the diary in which the
men had written their story, the book

TUTUR
TIT

The story of Burke and Wills is the saddest in the discovery of Australia. They were lost in the desert, their clothes
worn to rags, and with neither food nor water. They wrote the story of their sufferings in a diary, and lay down
and died. Notice the dying camels, and the writing on the tree, to show where their books and papers were buried.
This picture , by John Longstaff, has been bought by the Government of New South Wales, Australia .
menemu TOMMY OM DITT BIDV2177Tmo
298
 D3
GAM
The Child's Book of
GOLDEN DEEDS

WHAT THESE STORIES TELL US

UR Golden Deeds this time are of war as well as peace. We read of a
Ourbrave boy who saved the hamlet in which he lived by a daring adventure in
the night, and of a heroic Indian soldier who saved a city for England by losing
his own arms. They were both heroes. But not less heroic was Mary Jones,
the little girl who walked across the lonely mountains of Wales to buy a Bible ;
or little Jeanne, a French peasant's daughter, whose life, though lived in her
little cottage home, was as truly noble as any life lived in high places.

THE BOY WHO SAVED THE HAMLET

URING the
North At noon the next
DurAmerican Indian CONTINUED FROM 19 : day a fleet of war
War of 1855-56 , one canoes appeared , and
of the most daring acts a fierce battle began ;
was that of a boy named Good but though twenty times more
man, fifteen years old-so young than those in the fort, the Indians
and yet so brave that his name were beaten off at night and
is honoured by whites and even compelled to retire. They,
by the Indians themselves . however, had no idea of giving
He belonged to a family who, up the attempt. They retreated half
when the eastern states of America a mile away, beached their canoes,
became overcrowded, decided to go lit the camp-fires, and began their
west, and, enchanted by the beauty war-dance. Young Goodman then
of Paget Sound, settled upon its formed a daring plan. He resolved o

shores, north of California, on the to go alone to seize the enemy's

canoes , knowing that the Indians

:Wir
Pacific coast. Our hero was but nine
years old at that time, but he could could then do no further harm.
use his bow and arrow and his rifle as Leaving the fort after dark, he

well as many older than himself, and
could manage the paddle as well as
any Indian .
As time passed, many families
from other states flocked to this part
of the country, and the coming of
the people so alarmed the Indians
that they determined to drive out or
kill all the white folk . The white
folk knew nothing of this until men,
women , and children were suddenly
massacred , and the Indian tribe rose
as a body against the white people.
Warned of the coming danger,
Goodman sent his wife and his two
little girls to a village some miles
away, and remained with his son to
guard the home . Nor was this a
moment too soon , for the same night
the Indians came , giving them barely
time to escape and warn the hamlet.
The people set to work speedily to
build a fort and provision it , and all
who could handle a rifle or a gun
prepared for the defence, knowing
that a cruel death would befall them
if captured by the enemy.
1
stole through the woods to the camp .
The savages were so intent upon their
dancing, and became so tired and
sleepy, that they did not see the boy
as he approached, and Goodman set
to work to cut all the canoe ropes.
Then, as the tide rose , he pulled them
all afloat, and sent them out to sea .
Having cut all the canoes adrift,
he got into one of them , tied another
large one to it, and began to paddle
to the ſort . But hours were passing
away, and the day began to break.
As daylight dawned , the Indians
awoke , to find their canoes drifting
away. With aa wild shout they sprang
into the waves to seize them , but
Goodman opened fire upon them
with his rifle and drove them back.
Making his way to the fort , he
told his people what he had done,
and was wildly cheered for his heroic
work. The men went out and secured
the large canoes, and the Indians,
finding their fleet gone, beat a rapid
retreat through the woods , not daring
again to trouble the settlement .

299
 TUTULOK

THE NOBLE SIKH IN THE INDIAN MUTINY

URING the dreadful days of the Indian
DUR
Mutiny a body of British troops
and faithful Sikhs were gathered out-
side a city of the enemy, which had
withstood all their efforts to capture it .
As they lay before this city, studying
its mighty walls, over which could be
seen in the sunlight the white domes
of the temples and the crowded roofs
of the houses, they noticed a slight
movement near the enormous iron
gates , which cannon had failed to
shatter . Our men prepared suddenly
and secretly for attack . Then a waggon
was seen dashing towards the gates with
food for the mutineers. The gates
opened , and our gallant soldiers and
our faithful Sikhs rose with a shout and
raced with all their might for the gates .
The Sikh flew past his two rivals,
shot forward like an eagle, and , just as
the gates were rolling together, flung
himself upon them with the irresistible
fury of a tiger . Then , as if he were
striking at an enemy with his fist, he
shot out one of his arms and thrust it
between the closing gates.
The flesh and bone were crushed in
an instant , but while the broken arm
remained there the gates could not close .
He bore his pain without a cry, and
when the mutineers on the other side
of the gates began to hack and hew at
his arm , he waited till it was in peril of
being lopped quite off, and then , with a
smile of victory, thrust his other arm
into the space .
Just before the second arm was

The man driving the waggon lashed
his horses furiously. The British Army
watched those galloping horses, those
open gates, and ran like madmen .
Their whole hopes depended on reach-
hacked off, the army came roaring upon
the scene . The men flung themselves
with a yell upon the gates, and at the
first thud of that tremendous pressure
the huge iron doors shivered and gave.
66

ing the gates before they were tightly Push, boys , push ! ” The gates
closed . Every man knew this , and yielded an inch. “ Push , boys — put
every man longed to get there first. your backs into it ! "
Far ahead of our troops ran two white In the midst of the sweating, pushing,
men and a magnificent Sikh . The and shouting British was a Sikh with no
three were running a race, a great race , arms, smiling quietly. “ One more shove
each man bursting for the honour of does it !” With a shoutof joy our people
preventing the gates from being closed . burst open the gates and streamed into
The waggon reached the city, and the city, conquerors at last .
clattered in at a gallop. The gates at A young British officer found time
the same time began to close. to stop and smile proudly on the Sikh
On raced the gallant three, and behind wit no arms . “ You ran a good race,"
them came the roar of the army : he said . It was Frederick Roberts,
“ Quick - quick ! The gates are closing !” now Earl Roberts, V.C.

HOW MARY JONES GOT THE BIBLE

JONES
Nowadays,
TOWADAYS when for
can be bought a New Testament
a penny , and a
some of our old churches ; there are
some of them still left .
complete Bible for a few pence, we can A little more than a hundred years
hardly imagine the time when it was ago it was very difficult to get a
almost impossible to get a copy of Bible to take home and read for your
either. And yet that was the case not self. And if this was the case in Eng
very long ago, even in our own country . land , it was far worse in Wales , where
There were only a few Bibles in the people were poorer and lived so far
existence, and these were too large and apart. As most of the people spoke
cost too much for ordinary people to Welsh and could not speak English,
buy. They belonged either to kings and and as there was no Bible translated
princes , who perhaps did not read into Welsh at that time, it would not
them very much, or to churches , have been of much use if they had
from which , of course, they could not succeeded in getting a copy-- they
be taken away. Some of you may could not have read it . But the
have seen the big Bible chained by a Welsh people were longing to have
long iron chain to the reading-desk in Bibles of their own that they could
300
 -HOW MARY JONES GOT THE BIBLE SEKSI ILLION

read for themselves and study in desolate country - a journey that has
their own homes. ever since been famous in the history
Among those who were 'most anxious of Wales. Overcoming all difficulties
for a Bible was a young girl named she reached the little town of Bala ,
Mary Jones. She lived right up in which lies so snugly on the shores of
the hills, a long way from any town, the Bala Lake. There she secured the
and was very , very poor. But she great treasure upon which she had set
made up her mind that she would her heart, even though she had to part
save every penny that she earned, in the with every penny she possessed , for
hope that some day she might buy a the Bible cost a great deal then.
Bible for her very own. Slowly penny And when , after a long and toilsome
after penny was put away in the old journey back, she reached her home

VED
LOOD

This picture shows Lake Bala. Many years ago, when it wasvery hard to get a Bible, little Mary Jones,
living in a village in the hills of Wales, far from any town, saved up her pennies to buy a Bible of her own.
She set out on a long and lonely journey over the hills seen in this picture, across rough and dreary
country, and bought her Bible from a minister in the little town of Bala, which lies snugly on this lake.
stocking, but it seemed such a very again, we can imagine the joy and
long time. And then one day, when eagerness with she read the Book ,
the stocking was growing heavy, she for we value a thing according to the
heard that through the efforts of a trouble it has cost to get it.
great and good man, Thomas Charles, If you go to Bala, you will see a
à minister at Bala , there would soon statue put up to Thomas Charles, and
be copies of the Bible in Welsh ready as you look at it you will feel that
to be sold. Thereupon, this plucky one of the things that pleased him
girl made up her mind to walk all the most in all his busy life must have
way to Bala by herself, in order to be been the sight of the little girl from
one of the first to purchase a Bible. the country -side coming in with her
So she set out on that lonely journey, savings to buy the Book that is above
over mountains and across rough and all books .
DORTY
301
 JEANNE, THE BRAVE LITTLE MOTHER
THERE was once a peasant living in
THERE had gone three steps , Jeanne put down
France who had eight children, and
the chair and seated her in it . It
who found it so hard to provide food took them three- quarters of an hour to
for all these little ones that he was reach the church, which was only
obliged to send his daughter Jeanne five minutes'' distance from their home.
away from home to earn her own People told Jeanne that her mother
living as a servant . ought to go into the workhouse.
Jeanne naci better food in the house It breaks my heart to hear you say
of her mistress, and there was always so ," Jeanne answered. “ But, Jeanne,
a nice warm fire in winter , and plenty she would be well looked after." “ I
of thick blankets on her bed. But she know . She would be taken care of ;
loved the hut where her brothers and but-tenderness . Who would give
)

sisters played, and she often longed to her that ? ” That was Jeanne's secret
be home with the parents whom she tenderness. It was a saying of brave
loved very tenderly. Jeanne's : “ God leaves us our parents,
One day there came a message to her that we may take care of them.'
that the poor mother in the far-away She lived on the cheapest bread and
hut had been stricken down with a few turnips, and gave her mother
paralysis. The father sent word that she the white bread and the meat and the
must come home and take care of this milk that the village allowed them .
poor mother. So Jeanne went home, and If anyone gave her warm clothing
from that day never left her mother. to keep her from catching cold in the
We can imagine how her loving fields, Jeanne put it on her mother,
heart ached to see the dear mother, and altered it for her. “ Bless those
who had worked her fingers to the bone who have warmed my mother ! " she
for her children, lying helpless and would say.
hopeless on her bed . Jeanne comforted Her greatest sorrow came when her
this poor mother, and set herseli to poor mother grew so deaf that she could
act as mother to the rest of the family. hear neither the tender things said by
She rose early, got the breakfast, Jeanne nor the admiration expressed
tidied the cottage, and then went out by visitors for her mocher's freshness
to earn a few pence in the hayfields. and beauty. The old mother seemed to
She was never too tired to sit by her grow young and lovely, while the hard
mother's side, amusing her with stories. working daughter grew old and worn.
But worse was to happen . The old The cottage was always like a new pin ,
father became very ill, and in his bright and beautiful and cheerful.
terrible fits the poor man would bite People came to see it, and they all
Jeanne as she attended to him, until said that Jeanne had become the
her hands were sorely wounded. With mother and the mother had become
her poor wounded hands she did the her baby. Jeanne would laugh and
work of thehouse, waited on her mother, clap her hands at this . She was always
and hid her pain and the sight of her bright and happy in her tenderness.
wounds from both her parents. After twenty -five years of noble
For ten years she looked after her toil , Jeanne's story reached the ears
father and mother, and when her father of a good and rich man who had set
died she had to earn the family's bread . aside a large sum of money to reward
She learned to weave silk, and still the simple courage of the poor. She
made hay in the fieids , and supported won his prize for heroism , and all
her mother with the most loving cheer- France heard her story . Her name,
fulness. One day the mother said she Jeanne Parelle, became a glory through
would like to go to church, and Jeanne out France, and her story a blessing to
petted her like a chid and promised all her fellow -people. There are hundreds
that she should go How do you think of daughters all over France at this
she managed to get her paralysed moment who are striving to live as
mother to church ? She supported her nobly, assweetly,as tenderly, as bravely,
with one arm , and under the other she and as cheerfully as Jeanne .
carried an armchair . When the mother The next Golden Deeds are on page 433.

302
 The Child's Book of
STORIES

THE STORIES WE READ

THE "HERE are many kinds of stories in the world. So far we have been
reading the old, old stories that children have read for hundreds of years.
We shall go on reading these, because they are the finest stories in the world.
But we shall read other kinds of stories too - stories that are true, as well as
stories that are imagined .Many things have happened in the real history
of the world as wonderful as the happenings in fairyland or in giants'
castles, and we shall read of these. We shall read, too, tales of castles
and churches, towns and villages up and down our land, and many stories
so strange and so old that nobody can tell whether they are true or not.

LITTLE CLAUS AND BIG CLAUS

" poorCLAUS
L ITTLE was a
little man CONTINUED FROM PAGE 164
with only one horse ,
and Big Claus was a
rich big man with four horses.
They lived in the same village,
and every week Little Claus lent
Big Claus his one horse for five days,
and Big Claus lent Little Claus his
four horses for one day.
)
Gee-up, my five horses ! ” Little
Claus used then to say as he went
ploughing.
" Don't say that, ” said Big Claus.
Only one horse belongs to you .”
But Little Claus could not help say-
ing it again , and this made Big Claus
angry , and he got a great hammer and
killed the one horse belonging to Little
Claus.
Little Claus wept over the loss of
his horse, and then he skinned it and
put the skin in a sack , and went to
town to sell it . But at night he lost
his way, and settled down to sleep on
a haystack. From the haystack he
looked into a farm -house , where a
woman and a sexton sat drinking wine
and eating roast meat, fish , and pie.
Suddenly the farmer returned . Now,
the woman knew that the farmer hated
the sight of a sexton , so, before open-
ing the door, she put the wine away
in the larder , and the meat and fish
and pie away in the oven , and got the
sexton to hide himself in a great box.
Little Claus saw all this and laughed,
and the farmer heard him and invited
him to come and sup with him .
Little Claus and the farmer sat down
to supper, and the woman brought
them a dish of porridge. Little Claus
did not like porridge,
so he trod on his sack
which he had put
under the table and
made the horse's skin squeak.
“ What's that ? ” cried the farmer.
“ I have a conjurer in this sack ,
said Little Claus, “ and he says he has
conjured a good dinner for us into
the oven .”
Wonderful ! ” cried the farmer,
when he opened the oven and found
all the nice things that the woman
had hidden there .
Little Claus then trod again on his
sack and made the horse's skin squeak.
What does the conjurer say
now ? ” asked the farmer.
He says he has conjured some
wine for us into the pantry,” said
Little Claus.
Wonderful ! ” cried the farmer,
when he went to the pantry and
found the wine that the woman had
hidden there.
“ Now , could the conjurer conjure
up an evil spirit ? ” said the farmer,
when he had drunk the wine and
become very merry,
" Certainly," said Little Claus ,
treading again on the sack and making
the horse's skin squeak. “ He says
that if you will look in the great box
you will see an evil spirit there in the
shape of a sexton .
The farmer just peeped in the great
box, and saw the sexton, and closed
the lid in a fright.
“ What a wonder -worker your con
jurer is ! ” he said to Little Claus.
66
Will you sell him to me for a bushel
of gold , and take away the evil spirit

303
 ITETEVECCLA
-THE CHILD'S
in the great box and throw it into
the river ? ”
Little Claus agreed to this ; and the
farmer brought a barrow and placed on
it the great box and a bushel of gold ,
and Little Claus wheeled the barrow
along until he came to the river .
" Now ," he said , in a loud voice, “ I
must throw this box into the water. "
“ No, no ! ” cried the sexton. “ Let
me out, and I will also give you a bushel
of gold ."
Little Claus did so , and on returning
home with the two bushels of gold he
met Big Claus.
“ However did you get all that
money ? ” said Big Claus.
“ By selling my horse's skin ," said
Little Claus.
Big Claus at once killed his four
horses, and took the skins to the tanners ,
and when they asked him the price , he
said :
66
( 6
Two bushels of gold each .”
You can't make fools of us !” said
the tanners ; and, getting angry , they
beat Big Claus black and blue .
On returning home Big Claus seized
Little Claus and tied him up in a sack ,
saying :
You shall play no more tricks on
me . I am going to drown you.”
But the river was a long way off, and
Big Claus got tired of carrying the
sack . So he left it outside a tavern ,
and went in to refresh himself. An
aged drover came by with a great herd
of cattle , and heard Little Claus saying :
THE SEARCH FOR
'HERE was once a prince, and he
THERE
wanted to marry a real princess.
He travelled round the world in search
of one, but there was always something
princesses
not quite right about all theunmarried
he met . So he came home . There was something very hard in the
One stormy night a beautiful maiden
came to the castle, and said that
she was a real princess. But she did
not look like one, as she stood there
with her clothes streaming with rain .
The mother of the prince, however,
determined to try her . She went into
a bed -room , and laid a pea on the mat-
tress . Then she put twenty mattresses , So the prince married her in great joy,
on top of the pea , and twenty feather and the pea was carefully placed in the
beds on top of the twenty mattresses . royal museum , where it may still be
She then led the princess into the seen if nobody has stolen it .
BOOK OF STORIES
“ At last I am going to heaven . ”
“ I wish I were," said the aged
drover ; " for I am old and weary oflife .
66
Well, untie this sack and get in it
instead of me,” said Little Claus , “ and
you can go to heaven .”
The aged drover set Little Claus
free, and got into the sack , saying :
Tie me up , and you can have my
cattle . ”
Little Claus tied the aged drover up
in the sack , and set off home with the
great herd of cattle .
Soon afterwards Big Claus came out
of the tavern , and carried the sack
to the river and threw it in. Coming
back , he met Little Claus driving home
the great herd of cattle , and cried in
amazement :
“ Didn't I throw you into the river ? "
6
“ Yes,” said Little Claus , and I
thank you for doing so. I fell on the
soft grass growing in the river -bed,
and a fairy opened the sack for me,
and I found myself in a beautiful
land crowded with sea-cattle . I got
this herd together, and as soon as I
have taken it home I am going back
to get a larger herd."
Do you think I could get some
sea -cattle if I drowned myself ? " said
Big Claus.
Of course, you can try , " said Little
Claus.
Big Claus resolved to try, so he went
to the river and threw himself in . He
was , of course , drowned , and never came
out to trouble Little Claus any more.
THE REAL PRINCESS
bed- room , and in the morning she asked
her how she had slept.
“ Horribly ! ” said the princess .
“ Heaven knows what was in my bed .
I scarcely closed my eyes all the night.
mattress, and my whole body this morn . )
ing is black and blue with bruises."
The mother of the prince saw at once
that the beautiful maiden must be a real
princess. She had felt a pea through
twenty mattresses and twenty feather
beds ! Nobody but aa real princess
could have such a very sensitive skin .
4
TELTYR UYIDITET
304
 worden
LITTLE CLAUS AND BIG CLAUS

va inia
flashidd
Alinlg

rm
No
we
l
el

Unací11
BEBrock
//
3/1
Little Claus had only one horse and Big Claus had four. Every week Little Claus lent Big Claus his one
horse for five days, and Big Claus lent Little Claus his four horses for one day. “ Gee-up, my five horses ! "
Little Claus used to say as he went ploughing. “ Don't say that," said Big Claus. " Only one horse belongs
to you .” But Little Claus could not help saying it, and this made Big Claus angry , and he got a hammer
and killed the horse belonging to Little Claus. What happened to Little Claus is told in the story on page 303.
ro
305
 DICK WHITTINGTON
ICK
DickWHITTINGTON was alostpoorLanca
shire lad , who, having his father
and his mother, came to London to make
his fortune. His only friend in the world
was a cat which he had picked up and
fed when it was starving ; and a very
good friend it was to him , as we shall
see .
Dick used to think that the streets of
London were paved with gold , but he
found that they were covered with hard
stones , and on these stones he had to
sleep with his cat for many nights. At
last he got a place as a scullery -boy
in the house of a rich merchant.
happily, the cook was a wicked woman ,
and she beat him every day and made
him sleep in a garret overrun with rats
and mice. These, however, were soon
killed by Dick's cat , for the cat was an
excellent mouser .
The rich merchant in whose kitchen
Dick worked was a foreign trader. He
used to fill his ships with all kinds of
goods , and send them to far countries,
where the goods could be sold at a great
profit ; and, being a kind man , he allowed
all his servants to put in his ships any.
thing that they wished to sell. One day,
when he was about to send a ship to
trade with the Blackamoors, his young
and pretty daughter, Alice, came into
the scullery and said to Dick :
“ Now , what are you going to put in
for sale this time ? "
“ I've only my cat,” said Dick .
Well, put in your cat, ” said Alice.
And to please her he parted with the
only friend he had in the world .
But Dick soon began to miss his cat .
UTCOITTE
The rats and the mice crept back to his
garret and kept him awake at night, and
or
the cook beat him more than she had
Da
done before. So hard did Dick's life
become that one morning he tied all his
things up into a bundle and set out to
walk back to Lancashire.
He got as far as the village of Hollo-
way, and sat down on a stone to rest,
and Bow Bells began to chime, and the
sound travelled across the fields.
“ Turn a - gain, Whitt-ing -ton ,
Thrice Lord Mayor of London .”
That was what the ding- ding-dong of
Bow Bells seemed to say to him . Poor
Dick tried to laugh , and began to cry.
It seemed so impossible a thing ! But
UOLIT
AND HIS CAT
he turned, and went a little way along
the road to Finchley.
" Turn a-gain, Whitt-ing- ton,
Thrice Lord Mayor of London ,"
said Bow Bells, and he turned and went
a little way along the road to Enfield .
“ Turn a-gain, Whitt-ing-ton,
Thrice Lord Mayor of London,"
said Bow Bells .
6
“ After all,” said Dick, “ it's only the
cook who treats me harshly. How
kindly Alice spoke to me ! I will turn
again, as the bells say, and see what
happens."
Un- Something happened as soon as Dick
regained his master's house. The ship
in which he had put his cat returned
with the news that his cat had been sold
at a great price.
On arriving at the land of the Blacka
moors, the captain of the ship went to
the King of the country, and was invited
to dine at the palace . There he saw an
amazing sight. As soon as the dishes
were placed on the tables, a vast crowd
of rats and mice rushed out and de
voured all the food .
“ Oh dear ! ” cried the King of the
Blackamoors. “ I shall not get any
thing to eat again to-day.”
" Good gracious ! ” said the captain .
“ You ought to keep a cat in your palace
to kill all these rats and mice .”
“ A cat ? ” said the King. “ What's
that ? Is it a new kind of lion ? I
have bought hundreds of lions and tigers
of all sorts , but none of them would ever
kill a mouse for me."
The captain sent a sailor to the ship
to get Dick Whittington's cat . When
the King of the Blackamoors saw how
quickly it killed rat after rat, and mouse
after mouse, he clapped his hands and
shouted with joy, and said that he
would buy it even if it cost him half his
kingdom .
Will you take six sacks of gold for
this wonderful little animal ? ” he
asked .
The captain agreed , and the ship
came to London laden with the six sacks
of gold for Dick Whittington .
The wicked cook told the merchant
that Dick was only a poor scullery - boy,
without a friend in the world , and that
there was no need to give him the gold.
But the merchant was an honest man.
306
DICK WHITTINGTON LISTENING TO BOW BELLS. FROM THE PAINTING BY JAMES SANT, R.A.
Dick Whittington thought the streets of London were paved with gold, and came to London to make his fortune,
But he almost starved, and was walking home again when Bow Bells began to chime, and seemed to say : “ Turn
again, Whittington, thrice Lord Mayor of London . " He came back, made his fortune, and became Lord Mayor.
He gave Dick all the money , and had he was also knighted by King Henry V.
him brought up as if he were his own on his return from the battle of
son , and years after Dick married Alice . Agincourt. A great part of St.
He was made Lord Mayor of London Bartholomew's Hospital in Smithfield ,
three times, as Bow Bells had said , and was built by Sir Richard Whittington.
307
 LEGENDS OF THINGS AND PLACES
A legend means a very old story, often so old that we cannot tell whether it may
ever have been true. Perhaps most stories called legends may have some truth in
them, but as a rule they are to be read just as we read fairy tales. Histories are
stories of facts, legends are stories that may have been facts , but most likely were not.
THE LUCK OF EDENHALL THE FAIRY FOUNTAIN OF KILLARNEY

EDENHALLis
Musgrave the country
family . Itsseato f the In days
greatest
was covered
treasure is a strange drinking glass,
which came into its possession in a
wonderful way .
One midsummer night a troop of
fairies were holding their revels in the
grounds of Edenhall , when one of the
Musgraves disturbed them . They
hastened away, leaving behind them , on
the grass, one of their drinking cups.
Then, as the intruder stooped and
picked it up, the fairies said :
If this cup should break and fall,
Farewell the luck of Edenhall.
So the cup is called the Luck of
Edenhall," and great care is taken to
preserve it from all injury.
THE PITS OF WOOLPIT, IN SUFFOLK
UST outside the little village of
JustWoolpit, in Suffolk , there are some
curious pits, or trenches. One autumn,
when the reapers were gathering the
harvest in the fields close by, a boy and
a girl came up out of the pits. They
were wonderful children. Their bodies
were of a green colour, they were dressed
in a strange stuff, and they spoke in an
unknown tongue. Nobody could under
stand them , but a kind woman adopted
them and brought them up.
At firstthey would eat nothing but TheIsleof
beans, and the boy pined away and
island lying
died. The girl, however, grew hale and
handsome , and learned to speak English ,
and was married to a farmer.
She said that she came from the
country of St. Martin , which was a
Christian country,, and contained many
churches . No sun ever shone there, and
the people lived in a dim twilight ; but
across the river by which they dwelt they
could faintly see a region of sunshine .
“ One day, " the girl said, “ I and my
brother were tending our father's sheep
by the riverside, when we heard the
sound of bells, like the bells of Bury
St. Edmunds. Then all at once we
found ourselves in the pits of Woolpit.
No one has yet discovered the twi-
light land of St. Martin , and the pits
of Woolpit are now almost filled up.
308
gone by,the
withvalley
richof cornfields
Killarney
and pleasant pastures, and in the
middle of it was a fairy fountain .
This fairy fountain had to be sealed
down with a flagstone, to prevent the
water from rushing out ; and every
morning and evening the pretty
daughter of the farmer of Killarney
went with her serving -maids and took
the flagstone from the fountain. When
the maids had filled their pitchers, she
carefully put the stone back again .
One evening, just as the maids
departed with their pitchers , a
handsome knight rode up to the fairy
fountain , and began to make love to
the farmer's pretty daughter. She for
got all about the flagstone, and went
wandering with the knight on the hills,
amid the rocks and bushes. Suddenly
she remembered , and ran wildly down
the hill to seal up the fountain. But it
was too late. The valley was flooded
with water, and over the cornfields was
a calm and beautiful lake. Happily, no
one was drowned , and, as the knight
married the farmer's daughter, and took
them both to live in his castle, the farmer
was not troubled by the loss of his lands .
THE GIANTS AND THE ISLE OF MAN
Man isain large
the and
sea beautiful
between
England, Ireland, and Scotland . They
say it was made in a very strange way.
There was once a red -haired giant in
Scotland who was always boasting that
he was the strongest creature on earth ,
but a giant in Ireland challenged him ,
and they met at Lough Neagh to fight.
There was a terrific struggle, and the
Scottish giant got the worst of it , and
fled . As he leaped into the sea and
swam towards England, the conqueror
sent him a parting gift. Thrusting his
gigantic hands into the earth, he tore
up a vast mass of rock and clay, and
threw it at the Scottish giant. But he
missed him , and the vast mass sank
and became an island . King Man ,
father of King Lear, afterwards lived
there, so it was called the Isle of Man .
 CUSTO
OCTITE
Arnold

STORY OF THE WILLOW -PATTERN PLATE

in certain old china there is a paint
ON is letter inside the shell, dropped it into
ing in blue which is known as the the lake , and watched it sail across to
willow pattern , and willow -pattern plate where Koong-Shee sat watching.
is perhaps the most famous chinain the Koong-Shee read the letter and sent
world . And it really comes from China, back her answer. She said she would
or so did the first piate, for the story go if her lover were brave enough to
is Chinese. This is the story . come and fetch her. Chang went boldly
A beautiful Chinese girl, named up to the little house and took he
p her father's
Koong-Shee, fell in loveawith away. They had to cross the bridge to
secretary, Chang, whog g was a poor man. get out of the garden, and as they were
But the father ofnaKoong. half-way across Koong.
o to
Shee wanted pher IDD p op
Shee's father saw
marry a rich nman, opthem , and hurried
poshe
and because after them .
would not Koong - Shee
give up S
O
poS
went first
Chang a
with her
o
D o
O oo
Q oo
c
Ba

el
t
e
Te
JO
AQ g
Comin

QA
P PROD
QQ
3

a
DOT

QQ
QQ
QQ
Qp QUQU

op
a

CA
t
do

Chinese temple, here

Two pigeons flying high ,
Chinese vessel sailing by,
Weeping willow hanging o'er,
Bridge with three men , if not four.
her father sent her away to a little house distaff, Chang followed carrying her
at the end of the garden. Outside Koong-
Shee's window was a willow tree, and just
beyond a fruit tree , and Koong -Shee sat
all day watching it bloom . She was very
lonely and unhappy, until one day Chang
wrote and asked her to fly with him .
Chang dared not post the letter lest
it should fall into the hands of Koong-
Shee's father , but he found a cocoa- nut
shell, fixed a sail to it , and , putting
it stands,
Seem s to cover all the land,
ago Apple tree with apples on,
A pretty fence to end my song.
jewel-box, and behind them ran the
father with a whip. But the father
did not catch them , and they escaped
to a little house on the other side of the
lake, where they lived happily. But
the rich man who had wanted to marry
Koong-Shee was so angry that he
found out where she lived , and one day
he set fire to the pretty little house, and
Koong-Shee and Chang were killed .
309
 BETOG OO
THE BOY WHOM FRANCE FORGOT
A FRENCH general lay in the prison largeforceofsoldiersatMallet's service.
of La Force. His Emperor, the In the meantime, other chief officers
great Napoleon, against whom he had
plotted and so brought himself to a
prison cell, was far away from France,
fighting in the snows of Russia. The
soldier lay thinking in the silence and
the darkness of his cell .
He was a brave man, by name Claude
Mallet, and he wanted France to be a
Republic, not a Monarchy under Napo- before the doors of his old prison, La
leon. Hehated Napoleon's jumped-up Force, and commanded the governor
royalty. He wanted France to be free.
He also wanted himself to be free .
This was the result of his thinking :
He feigned to be ill, and was carried
out of the cell into a hospital. In the
hospital he had sufficient freedom to
lay his schemes and get friends
draw
to help
him . A document was n up
pretending that Napoleon was dead in
Russia, and nominating General Mallet
as Commandant of Paris ; it was
falsely sealed with the State seals, and
falsely signed by the President of the
Senate. A more impudent document
it is not possible to imagine, yet by this
false proclamation the prisoner thought
to take advantage of the Emperor's
absence, and make himself the chief
power in the empire.
Well , one night, at about ten o'clock,
rising from the table at which he had
been calmly playing cardscards,, Claude
Mallet quietly walked off, as if going to
his bed, and then disappeared into the
darkness . He had twelve francs in
his pocket (about ten shillings) , and
of the four conspirators who accom-
panied him one was a priest , and
another a corporal. Thus provisioned
and attended, this daring man set out
to make himself master of France.
He went to the lodgings of a priest Senate and the Order for the Day.
whom he had known in prison, and there
found, as he had arranged, his general's
uniform and his sword. At two o'clock ,
dressed as a general , with his sword
under his arm , and his forged proclama-
tion in his hand , this daring adventurer
presented himself at the bedside of the
real Commandant of Paris . The startled
old warrior read the proclamation , signed
by the President of the Senate, saw
that his Emperor was dead, and at once
proceeded to obey the commands con-
tained in the document . He put a
310
in Paris were being served with the
same proclamation , and the walls of
the city were being quickly placarded
with news of the Emperor's death and
the establishment of a Provisional
Government.
At six o'clock General Mallet ap
peared with a large body of soldiers
to release all his State prisoners .
The command was obeyed . Who could
disobey the orders of the Senate ?
The next impudent proceeding was
to arrest the Minister of Police and the
Prefect, thus making sure of the whole
police force. Then came the boldest
stroke of all. Mallet marched to the
headquarters of the military power in
Paris , and requested the commandant
to sign the Order for the Day that he
himself had prepared. The comman
dant firmly refused. Instantly Mallet
drew a pistol , and strode out, leaving
the commandant in a pool of blood. He
then marched to the National Bank and
took possession of all its money .
In brief, not to trouble you with all
the things done by this extraordinary
man just escaped from a prison, in a
very few hours he was at the head of a
great army, had seized the chief points
of the city, had made arrangements
for a new government , and was all but
master of France .
One thing was required to make
everything certain-he must get the
Adjutant-General to nominate him Chief
of the Military Forces in Paris. Mallet
appeared before this great man and
handed him the proclamation of the
The Adjutant-General read what was
written , and considered it, questioning
Mallet suspiciously. Would he have
yielded ? We can never tell. Just
at that moment in strode a soldier
named Laborde, who was an officer
at the prison of La Force.
Hello ! what the dickens ! Why,
this is my prisoner ! How did he
escape ? ” cried the amazed Laborde.
Mallet felt for his pistol . It was too
late . The two men sprang upon him
and made him their prisoner. In a few
 hours all the soldiers and all the
mayors knew that they had been
duped.
When Mallet was led out with the
other conspirators to be shot, he showed
the greatest courage. He refused to have
his eyes bandaged, and requested that
he himself should give the orders to
the party of soldiers drawn up to shoot
him . The other conspirators were in a
state of collapse. He gave the first order,
NAPOLEON'S SON, THE CHILD KING OF ROME, WHOM FRANCE FORGOT
and was dissatisfied by the way it was
carried out . (
“ Bad," he said, “ very bad ! Imagine
that you are before the enemy. Now
try again . Attention ! Present ! ”
He looked at the men like an officer on
parade. Better,” said Mallet, “ but
not perfect.” He then said : “ Now
listen . When I give the order ' Fire ! '
3II
all your muskets must go off like one.
It will be a good lesson for you to see
how brave men die. Now, once again.
Attention ! Present ! Fire ! '
Mallet reeled , but kept on his feet
after all the others had fallen . Then he
collapsed , rolled over, and was still.
When Napoleon heard of this con
spiracy, he exclaimed :
Gentlemen, we must no longer
)
disbelieve in miracles ! ”
Then he cried bitterly that those who
had thought him dead forgot that he
had left a son in Paris. This was his
hardest blow . It made him feel how
unsafe was his throne . The whole of
Paris forgot that Napoleon's son was
heir to the Crown of France, and, but for
a single officer, would have handed over
the empire to an escaped prisoner.
 SULA
THE STORY OF LITTLE RED SHOES
Karen was a poorlittleorphan,who
was very proud of a pair of red
dancing-shoes she had. So, when a lady
happened to see her, and took pity on
her, Karen said to herself :
" My shoes have brought me luck."
Next Sunday, instead of putting on
some black boots to go to church in ,
Karen wore her icd dancing-shoes . An
aged soldier stood at the church doors
and earned a few pence by dusting
people's boots for them ; but when
Karen put out her shoes he struck them.
“ Dancing -shoes ! May they stick to
1 )
your feet when you dance ! ” he said .
TOTT
B.Pearse . 08
KAREN DANCED INTO THE FOREST, WHERE SHE MET THE SOLDIER, WHO SAID : “ WHAT PRETTY RED SHOES ! "
All through the service Karen kept
thinking what pretty shoes they were.
)
“ Yes,” said the soldier, as she came)
out, " what pretty shoes they are ! "
Karen then began to dance, and
was onlyable to stop by taking off her
shoes . The next day she was invited
to a ball, but as the lady who had
adopted her suddenly became very
ill, she had to stay at home.
" Still, I might put on my red shoes,"
said Karen . She put them on, and the
shoes danced her out into the street , and
into a forest , where she saw the soldier.
“ What pretty dancing -shoes they
are ! ” he said , as she passed.
3T2
Karen pulled the shoes, but they
would not come off ; and away she
went, dancing night and day, over hills
and fields and marshes. But when
she tried to enter the church the
soldier appeared at the door and
said : “ What pretty dancing -shoes
)
they are !”
And away she went , dancing faster
and faster, through rain and wind and
darkness . One night she danced across
a moor to a headsman's hut , and tapped
on the window.
“ I cut off the heads of wicked
people,” said the headsman . 1
1
" Don't cut off my head ,” said
Karen, " cut off my feet."”
She told the headsman what she
had done, and persuaded him to cut
off her feet, and away they danced in
the red shoes across the moor.
The headsman made Karen a pair of
wooden feet, and she went to a parson
age, where she learned to be good .
One Sunday morning, when every
body else had gone to church , Karen
knelt down and prayed humbly for
forgiveness. Suddenly an angel came ,
and, taking poor little crippled Karen in
his arms, he carried her up to Heaven .
The next stories begin on page 423.
 The Child's Book of pas
POETRY

THE POEMS OF LONG AGO

WERE were poets in ancient Egypt thousands of years before Jesus was born .
the study of poetry does not take account of these very ancient times. The finest
poetry of Greece was composed more than two thousand years ago, and is read and
studied to this day in all parts of the world . We are not going back here so far
)
even as that. “ Long ago ” may mean thousands or hundreds of years. If wethink
of English poetry only, it cannot mean quite a thousand years, for the English
language is not so old as that ; and it is English poetry we are learning here.

THE EARLIEST ENGLISH POETRY

DAA

THEREwere and its teaching. But

kinds of many
poets CONTINUED FROM PAS
Cædmon's verses, and
and poetry before the
beginning of English poetry,
but Geoffrey Chaucer, who died
in the year 1400, is called the
" father of English poetry be
cause his was the first really fine
poetry to be written in the English sounds of the words that make them
language of his day - very different from
ours . We have heard about the bards
who in olden times sang songs of victory
after battles, or perhaps sang mournful
dirges of death and defeat. Their
poetry was never written , of course ;
but people had wonderful memories in
those far-off days before the art of
writing was known to them, and songs
of the old bards were remembered for
hundreds of years and written down
in later ages, and still later put into
3
modern words and printed .
The early bards in the British Isles
were Celts, a different people from the
mixed Teutonic race known as English,
coming later. There are still many
people descended from the Celts in
Wales, in the Scottish Highlands, and
in Ireland . They had two languages,
Gaelic and Cymric ; and both are still poets would not be understood, but
spoken, but they are not a bit like
English. So , you see, the old Celtic
poetry of the British Isles is not
English poetry at all. This old Celtic
poetry was full of fire and vigour and
love of fighting.
The coming of Christianity into
England had a great effect on men's
minds , and one of the earliest poets,
named Cædmon, who was a cowherd,
8 and lived in Yorkshire, where he died
about the year 680, wrote good poetry
to make people rejoice in the Bible
those of the English poets
for several hundred years
afterward , were not in the least
like modern poetry . They had no
regular movement of what we call
rhythm , which means the varying
we read .
like music in the mind as
They had no rhymes, no regular length
of lines, but just sought to express
the thought or vision in the poet's
mind as quickly and clearly as possible.
These very early poems, however, had
what we call'alliteration ,” which means
words beginning with the same letter.
In every line two or more words
began with the same letter and marked
a point of accent , which helped one to
remember the words . Alliteration has
often been used by poets, and a cele
brated writer spoke of " Apt allitera
tion's artful aid ,” which illustrates the
meaning of the word . Here is a line
from Milton showing its proper use :
Of man's first disobedience and the fruit
of that forbidden tree.
Examples from the early English
it is interesting to know that their
idea of how poetry should be written
was simply to use words at certain in
tervals beginning with the same letters.
For many centuries the chief scholars
in our country were the monks in the
monasteries, and as nearly all their
poetry was written in Latin , it does not
concern us here. Indeed , we shall not 80
say more about the writers of poetry
until, further on in our studies , we
begin , with Chaucer, to follow the work
of the great poets in their proper order.

‫عمل‬PASO
‫ ال‬: mana
313
 ama THE CHILD'S BOOK OF POETRY
THE ARAB'S FAREWELL TO HIS STEED
The Arab's devotion to his friend, the horse , is famous . But
wbo, indeed , that is not a brute can fail to love his faithful
borse, which serves him meekly and will always do its best for
its master ? The Hon . Mrs. Norton , one of ihe three lovely
granddaughters of Richard Brinsley Sheridan, the dramatist,
close a fine subject in this poem , and she treated it with
dramatic fitness and true feeling. It is a good poem to recite.
My beautiful !my beautiful! that standest
meekly by ,
With thy proudly-arched and glossy neck ,
and dark and fiery eye !
Fret not to roam the desert now with all thy
winged speed :
I may not mount on thee again — thou'rt sold,
my Arab steed !
fret not with that impatient hoof, snuff not
the breczy wind ,
The farther that thou fliest now , so far am
I behind.
The stranger bath thy bridle rein — thy
Fleetmaster
-limbedhath his gold ; farewell !—thou’rt
and beautiful,
sold , my steed , thou’rt sold.
Farewell ! Those free, untired limbs full
many a mile must roam ,
To reach the chill and wintry sky which
clouds the stranger's home.
Some other hand , less fond, must now thy
corn and bed prepare ;
The silky mane i braided once must be
another's care.
The morning sun shall dawn again , but never
more with thee
Shall I gallop o'er the desert paths, where
we were wont to be ;
Evening shall darken on the earth , and o'er
the sandy plain
Some other steed, with slower step , shall
bear me home again .
Yes , thou must go ! The wild , free breeze,
the brilliant sun and sky,
Thy master's home-- from all of these my When children are playing aloneon thegreer ,
Rturn !-alas, my Arab steed ! what shall
thy master do,
When thou , who wert his all of joy, hast
vanished from his view ?
When the dim distance cheats mine eye, and
through the gathering tears
Thy bright form , for a moment , like the false
mirage appears ?
Slow and unmuunted shall I roam , with
weary step alone,
Where with fleet step and joyous bound thou
oft hast borne me on ;
And , sitting down by that green well, 1 :1
pause and sadly think ,
“ ' Twas here he bowed his glossy neck who ?
last I saw him drink !
When last I saw thee drink ! -away ! The
fevered dream is o'er !
I could not live a day and know that we
should meet no more !
They tempted me, my beautiful ! for hunger's
power is strong
They tempted me , my beautiful ! but I have
loved too long.
Who
Who said that I had given thee up ?
said that thou wert sold ?
' Tis false ! — 'tis false ! my Arab steed ! I
Ring them back their gold !
Thus, thus, I leap upon thy back, and scour
the distant plains !
A way ! who overtakes us now may claim
thee for his pains !
THE UNSEEN PLAYMATE
Robert Louis Stevenson in this poem , which is reprinted
from " A Child's Garden of Verses " by permission of Messrs.
Longmans, Green & Co. , bas written a beautiful piece of
fancy. He almost makes us see this unseen playmate. He
means, of course, the gentle spirit of happiness and of
true childhood joy, which makes each little boy or girl
never feel lonely, as it should be present in each one . 1
1

exiled one must fly. In comes the playmate that never was
seen .
Thy proud dark eye will grow less proud,
thy step become less fleet , When children are happy and lonely and
good ,
And vainly shalt thou arch thy neck thy The Friend of the Children comes out of the
master's hand to meet .
wood .
Only in sleep shall I behold that dark eye
glancing bright ; Nobody heard him and nobody saw,
Only in sleep shall hear again that step so His is a picture you never could draw ;
firm and light ; But he's sure to be present, abroad or at
And when I raise my dreaming arm to check home,
or cheer thy speed , When children are happy and playing alcue.
Then must I, starting, wake to feel-thou'rt He lies in the laurels , he runs on the grass,
sold , my Arab steed . He sings when you tinkle to musical glass ;
Ah ! rudely then , unseen by me, some cruel Whene'er you are happy and cannot tell why :
hand may chide , The Friend of the Children is sure to be by !
Till foam -wreaths lie , like crested waves,
along thy panting side ; He loves to be little , he hates to be big ,
And the rich blood that's in thee swells in ' Tis he that inhabits the caves that you dig ;
thy indignant pain, ' Tis he , when you play with your soldiers of
Till careless eyes , which rest on thee, may tin
count each starting vein . That sides with the Frenchmen , and never cap
win .
Will they ill-use thee ? If I thought - but no ,
it cannot be , ' Tis he, wnen ut night you go off to your bed,
'Thou art so swift, yet easy curbed ; so gentle, Bids you go to your sleep and not trouble
yet so free ; your head ;
And yet, if haply , when thou’rt gone, this For wherever they're lying, in cupboard or
Jonely heart should yearn , shelf ,
Can the hand that casts thee from it now ' Tis he will take care of your playthings him
command thee to return ? self !

314
 THE ARAB'S FAREWELL TO HIS STEED

ull

My beautiful ! my beautiful! that standest meekly Fret not to roam the desert now with all thy winged
by, speed :
With thy proudly -arched and glossy neck, and dark I may not mount on thee again - tbou'rt sold, my
and fiery eye ! Arab steed !
This picture is drawn for the CHILDREN'S ENCYCLOPÆDIA by Mr. R. Caton Woodville, the famous datte painter
mommer RT TO
315
 -THE CHILD'S
A CHILD'S EVENING PRAYER
The great poet knows the moods and minds of all ages,
and can be as simple as a little child or as wise as the
wisest scholar . Samuel Taylor Coleridge was a great poet,
and bere we see him uttering the thoughts of a little
child in words which are beautiful in their simplicity.
RE on my bed my limbs I lay,
ERT
God grant me grace my prayers to say !
O God , preserve my mother dear
In health and strength for many a year.
And O preserve my father too,
And may I pay him reverence due ;
And may I my best thoughts employ
To be my parents' hope and joy !
And O perserve my brothers both
From evil doings and from sloth ,
And may we always love each other,
Our friends , our father, and our mother !
And still , O Lord , to me impart
An innocent and grateful heart ,
That after my last sleep I may
Awake to Thy eternal day. Amen .
THE FAIRIES
Written by William Allingham , who died in 1889, this is one
of the most beautiful poems about fairies. Grown -up people
used to believe in fairies, and in Ireland , not so very
long ago, grown-ups would talk about fairies just as
children do , so that Allingham , who, though his parents
were English , was born in Ireland , no doubt got to
know and love the “wee folk" by living in Ireland .
UP the airy mountain,
Down the rushy glen,
We daren't go a -hunting,
For fear of little men ;
Wee folk , good folk ,
Trooping all together ;
Green jacket, red cap,
And white owl's feather !
Down along the rocky shore
Some make their home ,
They live on crispy pancakes
Of yellow tide - foam ;
Some in the reeds
Of the black mountain -lake,
With frogs for their watch-dogs,
All night awake.
High on the hill-top
The old King sits ;
He is now so old and gray,
He's nigh lost his wits.
With a bridge of white mist
Columbkill he crosses,
On his stately journeys
From Slieveleague to Rosses ;
Or going up with music
On cold starry nights,
To sup with the Queen
Of the gay Northern Lights.
They stole little Bridget
For seven years long ;
When she came down again ,
Her friends were all gone.
They took her lightly back,
Between the night and morrow ,
They thought that she was fast asleep,
But she was dead with sorrow ,
They have kept her ever since
Deep within the lake,
On a bed of flag -leaves,
Watching till she wake .
BOOK OF POETRY
By the craggy hill-side,
Through the mosses bare,
They have planted thorn-trees
For pleasure here and there.
Is any man so daring
As dig them up in spite ,
He shall find their sharpest thorns
In his bed at night.
Up the airy mountain,
Down the rushy glen ,
We daren't go a -hunting,
For fear of little men ;
Wee folk , good folk ,
Trooping all together ;
Green jacket, red cap,
And white owl's feather !
THE VOICE OF SPRING
Mary Howitt and her husband, William Howitt , were both
well known in their day as authors and poets. They did not
write any great books or great poems. But both wrote many
useful books and good poems, especially for children. Mary
Howitt died in 1888 , at the age of 89. “ The Voice of Spring "
is a sweet and pretty poem , and it we will only look around
us when the spring days are here we shall see those
signs of the coming summer which , as the poet puts it ,
is the voice of Spring telling us of the good day's coming.
60
NG , wher
SPRIWhy e are you tarrying now ?
are you so long unfelt ?
Winter went a month ago,
When the snows began to melt. "
“ I am coming , little maiden ,
With the pleasant sunshine laden ;
With the honey for the bee,
With the blossom for the tree ,
With the flower, and with the leaf ;
Till I come, the time is brief.
“ I am coming , I am coming !
Hark ! the little bee is humming ;
See ! the lark is soaring high
In the bright and sunny sky :
And the gnats are on the wing ;
Little maiden , now is Spring !
" See ! the yellow catkins cover
All the slender willows over ;
And on mossy banks so green,
Starlike primroses are seen ;
And their clustering leaves below ,
White and purple violets grow.
“ Hark ! the little lambs are bleating ,
And the cawing rooks are meeting
In theelms, a noisy crowd ;
And all birds are singing loud ;
And the first white butterfly
In the sun goes flitting by .
“ Little maiden , look around thee !
Green and flowery fields surround thee ;
Every little stream is bright,
All the orchard trees are white,
And each small and waving shoot.
Has for thee sweet flower or fruit
“ Turn thy eyes to earth and heaven !
God for thee the Spring hath given ;
Taught the birds their melodies ,
Clothed the earth and cleared the skies
For thy pleasure or thy food ;
Pour thy soul in gratitude !
So may'st thou ' mid blessings dwell :
Little maiden , fare thee well ! ”
316
 " OH , I'M THE CHIEF OF ULVA'S ISLE, AND THIS, LORD ULLIN'S DAUGHTER ! "

JAWATAN

LORD ULLIN'S DAUGHTER By this the storm grew loud apace,

This is one of the most famous of Thomas Campbell's poems, The water-wraith was shrieking ;
in which an old Highland story is told in the simple, straight. And in the scowl of heaven each face
forward style of the ballad. A ballad is usually a romantic Grew dark as they were speaking.
story in verse, but it may be humorous. This one is tragic
in the highest sense , and gives a stirring picture of a But still as wilder blew the wind,
Scottish loch, or lake, during aa great storm. in olden days And as the night grew drearer,
people thought evil spirits lived in the lakes, and the Adown the glen rode arméd men ,
scream of the storm was the evil spirit, or 66 water.wraith ,"
mentioned in the seventh verse, delighting in its work . Their trampling sounded nearer.
A CHIEFTAIN to the Highlands bound “ Oh , haste thee, haste ! ” the lady cries,
Cries : " Boatman , do not tarry ! “ Though tempests round us gather ;
And I'll give thee a silver pound I'll meet the raging of the skies,
To row us o'er the ferry ! " But not an angry father.”
“ Now who be ye, would cross Lochgyle , The boat has left a stormy land ,
This dark and stormy water ? ” A stormy sea before her
“ Oh, I'm the chief of Ulva's isle, When, oh, too strong for human hand
And this, Lord Ullin's daughter ! The tempest gathered o'er her !
“ And fast before her father's men And still they rowed amidst the roar
Three days we've fled together, Of waters fast prevailing :
For should he find us in the glen Lord Ullin reached that fatal shore
My blood would stain the heather. His wrath was changed to wailing :
“ His horsemen hard behind us ride For, sore dismayed, through storm and
Should they our steps discover, His child he did discover ; [ shade
Then who will cheer my bonnie bride One lovely hand she stretched for aid,
When they have slain her lover ? " And one was round her lover.
.

Out spoke the hardy Highland wight, “ Come back ! come back ! ” he cried in
I'll go, my chief, I'm ready ! “ Across this stormy water ; [grief,
It is not for your silver bright, And I'll forgive your Highland chief
But for your winsome lady : My daughter - O my daughter ! ”
And , by my word, the bonny bird ' Twas vain : the loud waves lashed the
In danger shall not tarry ; Return or aid preventing : ( shore,
So though the waves are raging white, The waters wild went o'er his child,
I'll row you o'er the ferry .” And he was left lamenting.
TOTUOTTEET
317
 -THE CHILD'S BOOK OF POETRY acusa tuwin
THE STARS At break of day, as heavenward
In the poem about " The Star, " printed on page 196 , we have The pious monks of Saint Bernard
verses written specially for children . But Barry Cornwall, Uttered the oft-repeated prayer ,
whose real name was Bryan Walter Proctor, wrote this little A voice cried through the startled air :
poem of " The Stars" for all readers, young or old. In it he has Excelsior !
caught the quiet beauty of the night, and you will notice that
instead of expressing wonder as to what the stars may be, he
is content tothink of them as among the glories of God's
world , that fill our souls with reverence and peaceful joy. A traveller, by the faithful hound
Half buried in the snow , was found ,
They glideupontheirendlessway.

|
For ever calm , for ever bright, Still grasping in his hand of ice
No blind hurry, no delay, Thatbanner, with the strange device :
Excelsior !
Mark the Daughters of the Night ;

***
They follow in the track of Day ,
In divine delight . There, in the twilight cold and grey ,
And oh ! how still beneath the stars
Lifeless, but beautiful, he lay,
And from the sky, serene and far,
The once wild , ncisy Earth doth lie ; A voice fell, like a falling star :
As though she now forsool her jars, Excelsior 1
And caught the quiet of the sky.
Pride sleeps ; and Love (with all his scars )
In smiling dreams doth lie.
YE MARINERS OF ENGLAND
Shine on, sweet orbed souls, for aye, When Thomas Campbell wrote this famous song , perhaps
For ever calm , for ever bright : the finest patriotic song in our language, our warships were
We ask not whither lies your way, still made of wood - England's “ wooden walls"" they were
called — but though they are now built of massive steel
Nor whence ye came, nor what your light. plates, the feeling that inspires our brave sailors is still the
Be, still-a dream throughout the day, same as in the days of Nelson, who won the great battle of
Trafalgar when the poet Campbell was 28 years of age.
A blessing through the night !
mariners of England,
EXCELSIOR YEE That guard our native seas ;
Written by the fainous American poet, Henry Wadsworth Whose flag has braved , a thousand years ,
Longfellow, this poem may seem strange at first reading. The battle and the breeze !
We must know that the word " excelsior comes from a
Latin word meaning " ever upward ; " then the poem is quite Your glorious standard launch again ,
clear. The youth wished to excel, and he heeded no warnings, To match another foe !
no inducements to remain in comfort and safety, but went And sweep through the deep,
striving upward and at last suffered death in the snowstorm . While the stormy winds do blow ;
But to the end he stood by his motto, which is a noble one ,
and, whether we fail or succeed, it is always a noble thing While the battle rages loud and long,
to try to excel. That is the real meaning of the poem. And the stormy winds do blow.
The shades of night were falling fast,
As through an Alpine village passed The spirit of your fathers
A youth, who bore, 'mid snow and ice, Shall start from every wave !-
A banner with the strange device : For the deck it was their field of fame ,
Excelsior !
And ocean was their grave :
His brow was sad ; his eye beneath Where Blake and mighty Nelson fell ,
Flashed like a falchion from its sheath, Your manly hearts shall glow ,
And like a silver clarion rung As ye sweep through the deep,
The accents of that unknown tongue : While the stormy winds do blow ;
Excelsior ! While the battle rages loud and long,
And the stormy winds do blow.
In happy homes he saw the light
Of household fires gleam warm and bright ; Britannia needs no bulwarks ,
Above, the spectral glaciers shone, No towers along the steep ;
And from his lips escaped a groan : Her march is o'er the mountain waves ,
Excelsior ! Her home is on the deep .
With thunders from her native oak
" Try not the pass ! " the old man said , She quells the floods below,
“ Dark lowersthe tempest overhead, As they roar on the shore,
The roaring torrent is deep and wide I " When the stormy winds do blow ;
And loud the clarion voice replied : When the battle rages loud and long,
Excelsior !
And the stormy winds do blow.
“ O stay ! " the maiden said , " and rest
Thy weary head upon this breast ! " The meteor flag of England
A tear stood in his bright blue eye, Shall yet terrific burn ;
But still he answered with a sigh : Till danger's troubled night depart,
Excelsior ! And the star of peace return.
Then , then, ye ocean warriors,
“ Beware the pine- tree's withered branch ! Our song and feast shall flow
Beware the awful avalanche ! " To the fame of your name,
This was the peasant's last good -night ! When the storm has ceased to blow ;
A voice replied , far up the height: When the fiery fight is heard no more,
Excelsior And the storm has ceased to blow ,

318
 LITTLE VERSES FOR VERY LITTLE PEOPLE
CO
Mielly
onde
WHO KILLED , COCK
WhoI ,killed CockRobin ?
said the Sparrow,
With my bow and arrow ,
I killed Cock Robin .
Who saw him die ?
I , said the Magpie ,
With my little eye,
I saw him die.
Who caught his blood ?
I , said the Fish ,
With my little dish,
I caught his blood .
Who made his shroud ?
1 , said the Eagle,
With my thread and needle.
I made his shroud.
Who'll dig his grave ?
· The Owl, with aid
Of mattock and spade,
Will dig Robin’s grave .
TUP 12
111
ROBIN ?
Who'll bear his pall ?
We, said the Wren,
Both the cock and the hen ,
Who'll be the parson ? We'll bear the pall .
I , said the Rook,
With my little book, Who'll toll the bell ?
I'll be the parson . 1 , said the Bull ,
Because I can pull,
Who'll be the clerk ? And I'll toll the bell .
1 , said the Lark,
If not in the dark ,
Who'll lead the way ?
I , said the Martin ,
I'll be the clerk.
When ready for starting,
And I'll lead the way .
Who'll carry him to the
grave ? All the birds in the air
I , said the Kite, Began sighing and sobbing
If not in the night, When they heard the bell toll
I'll carry him to the grave. For poor Cock Robin.
Who'll be chief mourner ? To all it concerns,
I , said the Swan , This notice apprises,
I'm sorry he's gone, The Sparrow's for trial
l'll be chief mourner . At next bird assizes.
319
 TOM , TOM , THE PIPER'S SON
As Dolly was

milking her
cow'one day,
Tom took out his
pipe and began
for to play ;
So Dolly and the
cow danced
The Cheshire
round ,”
Pas
o Till the pail was
24 % broke and the
milk ran on the
ground.
'Om he was the piper's son, He met old Dame Trot with a basket
TOM He learn’d to play when he was of eggs.
young , He used his pipe
But the only tune that he could play and she used
Was, " Over the hills and far away." her legs ;
She danced about
Now Tom with till the eggs
his pipe made were all broke ,
such a noise, She began for to
That he pleased fret, but he
both the girls laughed at the
and the boys , joke .
And they stopp'd
to hear him He saw a cross fellow was beating an
ass ,
(0
play, ) Heavy laden with
“ Over the hills and far away.”
pots , pans ,
Tom with his pipe dishes, and
did play with glass ;
such skill, He took out his
That those who pipe and played them a tune ,
heard him could And the jackass's load was lightened
never keep still; full soon.
Whenever they
heard they be
gan for to dance,
Even pigs on their hind legs would See
after him prance . Man

SOLOMON GRUNDY, Pussy ecat, pussy cat,

Born on a Monday,
Christened on Tuesday,
Married on Wednesday ,
Took ill on Thursday,
Worse on Friday,
Died on Saturday,
Buried on Sunday,
This is the end of
Solomon Grundy.
wher have you been ?
I've been to London to
look at the Queen .
Pussy cat, pussy cat,
what did you there ?
I frightened a little mouse
under the chair.

In Mumarcom DOOUTTON DOOLEDO

320
 SING A SONG OF SIXPENCE
a
song ofsixpence,
SINGA apocket full of rye ;
The king was in his counting -house,
Counting out his money ;
Four-and-twenty blackbirds The queen was in the parlour,
Bak'd in a pie ; Eating bread and honey ;
When the pie was open'd, The maid was in the garden
The birds began to sing ; Hanging out the clothes,
Was not that a dainty dish Down canie a blackbird
To set before a king ? And snapped off her nose.

e
Sing a song of six pence , A pock -et full of rye ;
2

2
Four-and - twen- ty black - birds Bak'd a
pie ;
을

When the pie was op · en’d, The birds be - gan to sing ;

0.
9

Was not that a dain - ty dish To set be- fore a king ?

CF /

th The next verses and rhymes begin on page 387 .

TXT UUDUTU DUTEIKUUTTUNUTDOC
321
PLANS FOR THE SCHOOL OF MODELTOWN

d d
BACK
BACK
6.

G
.
TO OPEN SI E OF HALL 1. Plan of chimney : to be made this size
FLOOR

SPACE FOR

FRONT
с FLOOR OF SCHOOL OF
HALL

PORCH ó

SIDE OF
HALL AND SCHOOL

09
C
SIDE

SPACE FOR CHIMILEY

BACK ROOF
FRONT
ROOF

FRONT ROOF

1. Design for the school

OS

2. Plan of schoo !house - scale

Measurements to be inade with rule B
SIDE

3. Plan of porch 6. Chimney & Porch 7. The school nearing completion

To be made this size
322
 THINGSAND
TO MAKE
THINGS TO DO
WHAT THESE PAGES TEACH US
, ,
and we learn this time how to build the little school. We learn, too, how to
make paper boxes, bookshelves of wood, and a mysterious ball that seems to answer
questions. We begin, also, to learn how to look after our own little garden , which
will bring us great enjoyment. Simple needlework also begins in these pages ;
and we shall continue these things from time to time. It willhelp you to find the
articles in this part of our book if you will remember that the page on which the
last THINGS TO MAKE AND THINGS TO DO stopped is always given below this para
graph, and that the page on which the next THINGS TO MAKE AND THINGS TO DO
begin is always given at the end, at the bottom of the last page in this part of our bɔok.
CONTINUED FROM PAGE 232

A SCHOOL FOR MODELTOWN

the families
In there who will live in our cottages marked G to the end behind which it goes,
are sure to be children , and the and after it has become fixed in this position
education of the children must be attended it is ready to be attached to the wall of
to. If it were not, they would grow up quite the school. You will find a place in the 00:
unable to read the child's ENCYCLOPÆDIA , plan of the building where the chimney is to
as you are doing , and that we can never be put. Attach it with glue and hold it for
allow . So we shall build a school. a minute while the glue is setting hard.
Look at picture 4, on the opposite page, Then it will remain in position securely .
and youwill see the sort of school we shall There remains only the porch to be made :
build . It will be small, just large enough and attached. The plan of it is also inade
to suit a small village ; and as the village full size in picture 3. Draw it on the card,
grows we may, perhaps, build a larger cut it out and glue it into shape, all in
school, with many class -rooms. The first the manner you have already followed with
step is to make the plan of the school, the chimney. You will find that the
as shown in picture 2. This plan is made front is made to hang down a little from the
half-size, so that in top, and the ends of
drawing it on your the front, where they
card you must make are marked ff on the
it twice the size of the plan , go within the
plan—that is, take the sides of the porch and
sizes with rule B and must be glued to it.
draw them with the Picture 6 shows the
full - sized rule. You porch before the
know all about what gluing has been done,
the different kinds of and its position after
lines mean by this gluing it together and
time, so that we need gluing it to the front
not tell you here. Ti of the school is shown
you have forgotten, in picture 4 .
look back to the last Our school is now
lesson, and you will finished, except for
find what they mean. any little painting thal
The piece of card you we may care to give
use must be at least it. We may make the
11 inches long and Photograph of Modeltown School when finished roof red to imitate
8: inches wide . tiles, and we might
After you have drawn and cut out the paint the walls with hot glue and put on
plan on your card, bend it up at the dotted some clean, dry sand at once, before the glue
lines and glue the edges into position. has become hard. Then we shall have a neat
Then draw and cut out the chimney, which is little model of a granite village school. The
one of the long, old - fashioned sort thatgo picture on this page is from a photograph of
right from the ground to the roof. The plan a tiny school made from these plans and after
of the chimney is made in picture 1 full size, wards carefully painted soas to be as neat
so that you use only the full-sized rule both for and realistic as possible. There is no reason
measuring the picture and for making the why we should not all make such neat little
drawing. When it has been cut out and the buildings as these. It is well to glue little
half-cuts made at all the dotted lines, bend pieces of cardboard on for window -sills and
it round, and the side marked G will go behind for the edges of the chimney, as was done
the other side , thereby making a chimney in the school on this page and in all the
almost square, but a little broader than it is buildingsphotographed for this book.
deep from back to front. Glue the side We shall make a row of shops next.

.
323
 HOW TO KEEP A SECRET IN WRITING
T is a wise and
I keep a secretsafe rule that if you want to
you must never write it
down ; but it is easy to write a secret
so that nobody but yourself or your friend
can read it .
Not many years ago, when a terrible thing
happened in Russia , the Russian Government
did not want the news of it to reach other coun-
tries , and they stopped all telegrams about it.
But a clever journalist knew how to beat the
Government, and he sent long telegrams to
a merchant in Liverpool all about corn . It
seemed very uninteresting and unimportant to
the telegraph clerks in Russia, but when the
merchant received the telegrams in Liverpool
he knew that the Emperor of Russia was dead.
The journalist had written his telegrams in a
mystery -language which he and the merchant
understood. You may make a mystery .
language of your own. You have read of
codes , and messages , and secret ciphers in
times of war. A cipher is a way of writing, in
any language, in such a way that even those
who know the language cannot understand
the writing unless they have the key which
makes it clear. There are many simple
‫ مال‬: ‫ ال‬: . ‫ ننا‬: ‫ ناما‬..
‫ا‬. . ‫ا‬. ‫ لا تاتا‬.. ‫نا‬
. ‫ نا‬: ‫ لمال‬.. ‫ انا‬::
‫لنا لنا‬20. . ‫الا‬
. ‫ لال‬. ‫ له‬. ‫ " كات‬: ‫ تاكا‬، ‫نسااناتاك‬
‫ ناتالان‬. ‫ ا‬. ‫ ا‬.. ‫ ناشاد‬. ‫ نسانا‬:: . ‫ا‬.‫ملنا جلنا‬
MEL : 7700.L0.711.7.177,477.57.10-1.7.
907.7uwanWar.wideodw. ALW0 . Jend.FOR
‫ اتا مساج‬، .. ‫ كلنا‬. - ?.. ‫وكانابا‬. ‫لا‬:
JoLLn. Oude anded
‫نا‬.. ‫ كلمة‬.. ‫م‬. ‫م‬. ‫ا ولالانا ع‬
nu 17. JOMU .
ciphers which we can quickly learn ; those used
in timeof war are, of course, very difficult.
This sentence would puzzle some boys and
girls if they saw it in a book : “ Ihopeyoucan
readthis,” but it is really only six words joined
together.
That is the simplest kind of cipher
you can have, and not really a cipher at all.
Here are some others, three letters written
in different ciphers. The first looks like a
Chinese puzzle, but the key will show you
how easy it is.
Extraordinary as this seems, it is really very
simple when you have the key to the cipher
in which the letter is written . The alphabet
is divided up so that it is possible to indicate
the position of any one letter by a dot , as is
seen here :
a b c d e f g h i
j k l m n o p q r
s t u V W X y Z
YTYTYTUTIITETTIINUMETNOM
You will notice that there are three letters
of the alphabet in each space, except the last .
To write the key, begin with the first letter in
the first space, then write the alphabet across
the rows of spaces. Next you must notice
the position of each letter in each space ; for
instance, a is the first letter in the space
marked by the lines 1. Thus, instead of
writing a, you write . T, being careful to place
the dot in the first position in the space. In
the same way b is written . ), where the dot
is in the second position. The letter d is the
first dot in the second space, thus : 1.1,
e is . I , and so on for the remainder of the
letters . Instead of using dots the figures ! , 2,
3 may mark positions, so that a would be
I 1,6_2_ ), c 31, and so on ; but the dot
system is better and more puzzling. When
writing a letter in this way, remember to put
a full stop after each word and three stops
at the end of each sentence. Always take care
that these stops come outside the space. The
comma and other marks may be used as usual.
Now that you have the key you will be
able to read the cipher letter which says :
.‫ الن‬.
:‫ا‬
Ling2. EDOF , JOH .
WOOD .
LA ...
Dear Elsie,
I hope you can read this. Have ; 0.1
ever had a letter like it before ? It is the
first I have written in this way, but it
does not seem very hard. When are you
coming to see us ? Father has bought me
a beautiful pony , and I want you to ride
him . With love from Eva.
Here is another cipher - a letter in figures :
13.2.1.43— 2.51.1-
45.23.2- 21.3.43.44.45–41.1.43.45
4.21-- 54.4.5.43 -- 33.2.45.45.2.43
45.4.4.32- 34.2— 1-- 33.4.35.22–
45.3.34.2- 45.4- 43.2.1.13, 11.5.45-3-
44.4.4.35— 11.2.22.1.35- 45.4–
32.35.4.52— 45.23.2- 33.2.45.45.2.43.444
52.3.45.23.4.5.45- 5.44.3.35.22—
45.23.2- 32.2.54... 3-1.34
12.4.34.3.35.22- 45.4– 44.2.2- 54.4.5
3.35- 45.23.2- 23.4.33.3.13.1.54.44
3.21 - 3- 12.1.35 ...
52.3.45.23- 33.4.51.2- 21.43.4.34
2.33.44.3.2.
324
 nova me HOW TO
WRITE A SECRETARIA
To get the key of this cipher write out the DeeeeAYARE EEELLESSEYeee,
alphabet in this way, numbering the five
vowels in order :
abcdefghjjklmnopqrstu
7 v w x y z.
Thus, a is 1" ; e is 2 ; i is 3 ; o is 4 ; u is 5.
To find any other letter, we must get first
the number of the vowel before it, then count
the number of letters after the vowel until we
reach the letter we want. Thus, 6 comes
after the first vowel, and is the first letter
after it ; and instead of 6 we write 11 —the
first figure for the number of the vowel, the
second for the number of the letter past the
vowel. In the same way, c is 12 — that is, the
second letter past the first vowel ; f is 21
that is, the first letter after the second vowel .
We must be very careful, of course, to put
the number of the vowel in its proper place:
We can now write the whole alphabet in
figures according to our cipher :
a, I e, 2 i, 3 m, 34 9,42 u , 5 x , 53
b, ii f, 21 j , 31 n , 35 r, 43 V, 51 y, 54
C, 12 g, 22 k , 32 0, 4 S , 44 W , 52 2 , 55
d , 13 h , 23 I , 33 P, 41 t, 45
In writing this cipher , put a full stop after
word letter,
each . Finishand
a sent enceline
a short the eend
withatthre
of each
full stops ;
use commas and other stops as usual. You
will now be able to read the figure -letter in
ordinary writing . Here it is :
DEAR Eva,
The first part of your letter took me a
long time to read, but I soon began to
know the letters without using the key.
I am coming to see you in the holidays
if I can. With love from ELSIE ,
The third cipher may seem more puzzling
still at first sight, though it has a great draw-
back which may often destroy its value.
NAME-PICTURES AND HOW TO MAKE THEM
name-pictures, or “ smudge-
M AKING
graphs,,"" is a very pretty amusement.
We want some paper, pens, and ink ,
and must sit up to the table. Dip the pen in
the ink and scribble quickly a fairly thick zig-
zagline on the paper ; then, before it getsdry,
fold the paper over at the side of the scribbled
line, and rub it down with the thumbnail . On
opening it again , a pretty outline will be seen.
X
PICTURES MADE BY FOLDING OVER SMUDGES, ZIGZAG LINES , CROSSES, AND NAMES
325
Doubleyouee aitchaydee essyousea
aitch effyouen ohveeeeare teaaitchee
elleeteateaeeare wyohyou esseeentea.
Jayayseakay teaaitcheyeenkayess
wyohyouare seaeyepeaaitcheeare eyeess
veceearewy geeohohdee. Eye ayem
jayyouesstea geeoheyeengee ohyoutea
ohen emwy peaohenwy, essoh
geeohohdee -bewyee.
Doubleyoueyeteaaitch ellohveeee
effareohem EEVEEAY.
If you will read this letter aloud, the
mystery will become clear to you. The
secret of itis that every letter is spelt. Some
letters of the alphabet can be spelt in more
than one way, but it does not matter which
we choose if we keep the same throughout
our letter.
The key to our spelling here is :
a, ay h , aitch o, oh u , you
b, be i , eye р, реа V, vee
C, sea j , jay 9 , cue w , doubleyou
d , dee k , kay r , are x , ex
e , ee 1, ell s , ess y, wy
f, eff m , em t , tea z, zed
g, gee n , en
In ordinary writing, the letter reads :
Dear Elsie,
We had such fun over the letter you
sent. Jack thinks your cipher is very
good. I am just going out on my pony,
so good -bye .' With love from EVA .
These examples of mystery-writing will give
you great amusement if you practise them,
and you will find that to invent new ciphers
for yourself is very simple now that you
have learned to understand these.
Names or words may be written instead,
and the paper folded just at the base of the
letters. Quite pretty ornamentations can be
made like this, even by people who are not
able to draw . Fold the paper first and use
the fold to write against , as you use the lines
in exercise books. Sometimes better effects
are got by folding the paper through the
middle of the word instead of by the side of it .
 LITTLE PROBLEMS FOR CLEVER PEOPLE
The problems before these are on
THE
pages 116 and 232 , and the answers
below refer to those on page 232.
WHEN DID ALFRED REACH SCHOOL ?
19. Alfred had a fairly long walk to school
every morning. When he got as far as the
church he had walked one quarter of the
way, and it was usually half-past eight on the
church clock when he passed it. When at
the railway -station he had walked one-third
of the way, and it was usually twenty -five
minutes to nine on the station clock when he
passed it .
At what time did he usually reach school ?
WHEN WAS THE WATCH RIGHT ?
20. At noon on Monday Herbert asked his
father what o'clock it was . His father told
him that it was noon , and said that his watch
was two minutes fast. On Wednesday
morning Herbert again asked the time, and
his father replied that the exact time was
eight o'clock , but added that his watch was
one minute slow . Herbert then told his
father at what time his watch had been
exactly right. Could you have done it ?
WHAT VEHICLES WERE SENT ?
21. An order had been received at the livery
stables for carriages for a party of fifty -nine.
The manager had wagonettes to seat nine
and cabs to hold four, and he sent some
of each , so that everyone had a seat and
there was no seat vacant.
How did he do it ?
THE HARE AND THE HOUND.
22. A hare was sixty of her own leaps in
front of a greyhound , and took three leaps
while the hound took two ; but the hound
went as far in three leaps as the hare did in
seven . In how many leaps did the greyhound
catch the hare ?
HOW WAS THE FRUIT DIVIDED ?
23. " Cocoa -nuts are fourpence each, oranges
a halfpenny, and apples a farthing," said the
fruiterer. “ I have just twenty pence,” said
THE ANSWERS TO THE PROBLEMS ON PAGE 232
14. The clock would take sixty -six seconds
to strike twelve. Between the first stroke
and the sixth stroke there were five intervals
of time, each interval being six seconds.
Between the first and the twelfth stroke there
were eleven intervals of time, each of six
seconds, so that the clock would take sixty-
six seconds to strike twelve.
15. He filled the three -quart jug from the
milkman's can , and then poured it into the
five -quart jug. He filled the three-quart
jug again from the milkman's can , and from
it filled up the five- quart jug, leaving one
quart in the three -quart jug. Now he
emptied the five- quart jug back into the milk-
man's can , and poured the one quart in the
three -quart jug into the five-quart jug. Then ,
by filling up the three -quart jug from the
326
the customer , " please make me up twenty . "
How many of each did she get ?
HOW DID THE SHEEP STAND ?
24. “ I saw an odd sight the other day,”
said Brown. “ Two sheep were standing in a
field, one looking due north and the other
due south . How do you think that each
could see the other without turning round ? "
Can you give the answer ?
HOW MANY SEATS IN THE HALL ?
25. “ Is there a good audience ? ” asked
the lecturer. " Only one-third ofthe seats are
filled ,” he was told ; “ but I think we should
have filled the hall if the tickets had been
sixpence instead of a shilling, and in that
case we should have had five pounds more. "
How many seats were there ?
WHAT WAS THE MIXTURE ?
Coffee
26. “ and shilling and
is onefourpence fourpence
pound chicory a pound,” saida
the grocer . · Then mix me a pound for
elevenpence-halfpenny,” said the lady. In
what proportion did the grocer mix the two ?
HOW LONG DID HE WAIT ?
27. “ You have missed the train by a
minute," said the stationmaster, but there is
there were
a train every few minutes. " If
three more trains an hour, " said the traveller ,
" and I had just lost a train by a minute,
I should have a minute less to wait for the
next." How long had he to wait ?
HOW MANY WORDS WERE SENT ?
28. “ This is cheap," said Mr. Jones, as he
paid for a telegram from London to Glasgow ;
it is three times as long as the telegram I
sent yesterday and it costs only twice as
much." How long was the telegram ?
HOW WAS THE FERRY CROSSED ?
29. Fred and Albert, with their father and
the village postman,stood at the ferry, waiting
to cross. Fred and Albert each weighed 8 st.
and their father and the postman each
weighed 16 st. But the boat could carry
only 16 st. at once .
How did they cross ?
milkman's can again, and adding it to the one
quart in the five-quart jug, he had the four
quarts required.
16. Four eggs. One hen would lay one
egg in a day and a half - that is, two eggs in
three days, or four eggo six days.
17. The last boy took the basin as well as
the egg that it contained.
18. As the tramp runs round the stack in
forty seconds, and the farmer in thirty
seconds, the farmer can run round four times
in the same time that the tramp takes to run
round three times . This means that in four
rounds run by the farmer he would gain one
round upon the tramp; but, as the tramp
had a start of only half a round, the farmer
would overtake him after running only two
rounds, which is the answer .
 WHAT TO DO WITH A GIRL'S WORK-BASKET
1.
How to Use the Needle
Now that we canmake a work-boxof our see in the next picture [2] , the stitches being
own - as we learned on page 222 —-we done from right to left in a slanting position .
must find out how to use it. We are going
to dress a doll . We shall cut out the
clothes all by ourselves, and make them
as our own clothes are made. First we
shall make the little underclothes, one by
one, and then the frock. But before we can
do anything at all we must know how the
different stitches holding the pieces together
are made.
We all think that it is the easiest thing in
the world to thread a needle, but the right
way to do it is to thread it by the end just
cut off the reel, making a tiny knot at the
other end . If the cotton is put through the
needle at the opposite end all the gloss goes
1. How to hold the material for stitching
out, the cotton becomes'woolly, knots, and
breaks off very easily. Always choose a
needle that is just a little thicker than the
cotton . This will open the material enough
for the cotton to come through without any
unnecessary pulling and tugging.
Now, if you want to know exactly how to
hold the hands to do somegood work, look
at the picture ( 1 ) . You will see that the left
hand holds the piece of material between the
thumb and first finger, letting it fall loosely
over the back of the hand, the little finger
just holding it in place. The right hand
holds the needle and pushes it in and out of
the material, a thimble on the third finger
helping to push the needle through. The
picture shows the hands in position when
doing a hem — which is, as we all know, a
double fold of material, turned down and
folded over to protect a raw edge. The
width of the first fold of a hem should be
about one-third the width of the hem
required, but in very narrow hems the first
fold is the same width as the second. Ji,
however, you intend to sew very fine material ,
such as muslin, the fold must be the same
size as the hem, otherwise the rough edge
will show through.
When you have decided what the size of
the hem should be, turn the double fold
and press it down firmly with your nail, then
tack it, with long, even stitches. This will
save a lot of time, for the hem will keep
pressed down in position, and it will help to
get the work straight and even. The needle
is then put in thematerial,as you can plainly
327
There are many different kinds of stitches,
but for our present purpose it is only neces
sary to know a few of them . The running
stitch [3] , is one of themost useful to learn ,
for it is with this stitch that seams are made
and materials gathered.
If you are anxious to learn how to do really
beautiful sewing, try first on fine canvas, or
on any other very coarse material, where the
threads can be easily seen, taking two threads
on the needle and going over two. You will
be surprised to find how easily the hand and
eyes will be trained to work evenly and
regularly , until you can work quite pretty
little stitches on any material without count.
ingthe threads, which is always a slow and
tedious method of working.
When you can do the hemming and run.
ning stitches quite evenly, you have mastered
the most difficult part of sewing, for all the
other stitches are more or less made from
these two.
If you look at picture 4, for example,
you will see a little pattern of running and
felling, which always looks full of difficulties
to little girls, although it is simply running
and hemming. Two pieces of material are
put close together, the back piece slightly
overlapping at the top toallow for the folding
over of the raw edge , and joined together, on
the wrong side, by running stitches. The
material is then opened under the seam, laid
fat, and the two edges folded over like an
ordinary hem.
A glance at the picture will show the work
far better than it can be explained.
The easiestway for littlegirls to do running
and felling is by French seams. It will
probably be the most popular way of doing
the seams in dolly's underclothes. If you
look at the picture [5] you will see that this
kind of seam is simply a double row of
running stitches. The first row is done in
the ordinary way, then the raw edges are cut
as short as possible, and the seam turned
These sketches show you how to make the different
kinds of stitches . 2 is a hemming stitch , 3 run
ning, 4 running and felling, and s a French seam .
inside out, a second row of stitching giving
perfect neatness in the finished work . You
must, however, remember when doing these
 -THINGS TO MAKE AND THINGS TO DO
seams that the first row of running, instead of
being done on the wrong side, as for running
and felling, is always done on the right side,
the secondrow putting the first one outof sight.
Gathering is done with the same stitches
as running , except that you should take up
only half the threads that you
miss. The thread is pulled to
gather the fulness. No knots
or joins must be allowed in the
thread, or it will not come
through the material to form
the gathers. Measure the piece
of stuff you want to gather, and
take a long enough piece of
thread to leave two or three
inches to take hold of when you
want to draw it. It is always 6. Buttonhole stitches
better to do two or three rows
of gathers in case one should break, besides
giving more evenness and regularity to the
gathers.
If the gathers are done on calico, or any
other fine material for underclothes when
GENERAL WAXVESTAS AND HIS FAMILY
The generalandhis children in the illustra-
tion below are simply made of wax
matches which have had their tops burnt off.
Let us look at the general first. A glance at
the picture [3] will show how he is made.
Thematch which forms the body has been
pulled apart at the top to form the hair. The
head is made of a little ball of sealing-wax.
Two more matches are warmed at the ends
( tomake the wax sticky) and stuck on the
body for the arms, and another one is fixed to
the end of one arm to form the sword . The
legs are fastened in the same way, but they
are bent a little at the knees, and the scabbard
is also fixed on by warming the wax. If this
is well done and properly arranged , it will
make a support for the little man, who will
then stand by himself. The eyes, nose, and
mouth must be drawn in with a pen .
The little girl who is running away from the
fierce-looking general is made inthe same
way, but, of course, the matches have to be
bent differently; thepicture [2] shows us how.
Here one bentmatch does duty for both arms,
1 2
General Waxvestas and his family, made of wax matches and sealing -wax
Car
328
the thread has been drawn, a thick needle
should be used to stroke down the material
between each gather.
Buttonhole stitches come next, and
these are by no means too difficult to be
attempted. They are really quite easy
when you know the way.
Try first on a piece of can.
vas or coarse flannel, and
make very even and regular
stitches quite close to each
other. The picture [6]
shows just how the stitches
are made. Let the cotton go
under the point of the needle
and pull the needle down
gently, letting the thread
cross over itself where the
needle came out. If you
follow those directions, and look at the
picture, you will really be surprised how
easy the stitch is. It is not only useful for
buttonholes, but for embroidering Aannel
petticoats, as we shall see later.
but to make them look alike the tops must be
cut off. To make the skirt, make some red
sealing-wax warm and stick it to the wax
matches, bending it with the fingers to make
the shape. The umbrella shown in the picture
is also made of sealing-wax, made warm ,
shaped and stuck on the wooden match,
which has been cut in half and pointed at one
end. Fix the umbrella to the girl's hand by
warming the wax match which makes the
arm, and sticking the two together.
The little girl's brother, who also seems
afraid of the general, is very easy to make,
and a glance at the picture (1 ) shows how to
bend the matches . A wooden match , cut in
half, and pointed at one end, forms the walk
ing-stick.
The heads must be very carefully modelled .
Make them as you made the general's, with
a little ball of sealing-wax, but in this case ,
as you have a side view of them , the wax
must be pinched with the fingers and nail to
make the nose, mouth , and chin . With a
little practice this becomes quite easy.
3
 COLTELLWELLIES

MAKING A SET OF BOOKSHELVES

In proceeding with our carpentry work,we also see that the two sides are exactly alike.
must not proceed too rapidly. We shall Having cut our two pieces, we must finish
do better work if we make very simple things them carefully with the plane so as to have
at first. Another point to keep in mind is the them true and smooth, afterwards rubbing
utility of the articles we set ourselves to make. them well with sand - paper, or glass -paper,
Here we shall see how to make an exceed- these being two names for the same material.
ingly useful article-a set of hanging book- We should use No. i sand -paper first, rubbing
shelves - which we can attach to the wall. the surface and edges careiully until they are
Everyone can use an article of this kind, as uniformly smooth as the sand -paper can
and everyone with ordinary intelligence and make them , and then we use No. o sand
the necessary tools can make one. The sizes paper, which will give them the final touches.
given in the sketches are good useful sizes, It is more important to have the sides smooth
but the best sizes for the article to be made than it is to have the shelves smooth , because
depend upon the space available for its the former are more exposed to view.
accommodation. Thus everyone who makes Having made the sides, we turn our atten
the bookshelves from these sketches must tion to the shelves, of which we shall make
first decide if three . We
these sizes shall make
are the best
in his indi
vidual case ,
தி them all alike,
and thereby
simplify
and if they matters .
are not he Picture 2
must modify shows the
the sizes shape and the
given to suit sizes to which
his own case. we should
25
We have make them .
first to decide 7
The thick
what kind of ness of these
wood weshall pieces when
use . We ! finished
could use should not be
oak , beech , or 29 25 less than 34
birch – per 1 204 30 inch and pre
K. 7
haps oak iera bly
looks better 1
18 inch , so
than the that the
other two wood, when
for the pur we begin ,
pose - but all should be
these are thicker than
hard woods , thuis , to allow
and it will be us to have
much easier this thickness
for us to use 3. Plan of When our
a soft wood , back piece planing and
such as pine. sand - paper
Hard woods ing a re
are much finished .
more difficult Having made
to work . We 1. Plan of sides 2. Plan of shelves 4. Dowel the shelves,
can use soft we fit them
wood , and after the shelves are made we can into the sides so that the ends go through the
stain them to imitate any of the harder and holes we made in the sides, and if they do
more expensive woods. not quite fit we must make them fit . We
In picture i we show one side of our hang- shall want twelve taper pins, or dowels, for
the holes in the ends of the shelves to cause
ing bookshelves with all the sizes marked on
it. We first cut out two pieces of the wood we them to retain their position in the sides, and
are using - pine, for instance - to this shape. these pins we can easily make. It will be much
They must be fairly strong, and we should better if they are of hard wood - say, oak,
make them so that the finished thickness beechi, birch, mahogany, or walnut- even if
shall be not less than one inch , so we had the sides and shelves are of soft wood. There
better use wood 18 inch thick and reduce it is more strain upon the dowels than upon the
to one inch by planing it. The holes in the other parts, and as they are smaller, strength
sides we can make with our chisel, and we is necessary. The shape and size of dowel
must be particularly careful that each pair of necessary are given in picture 4 .
holes is exactly in the same horizontal line, so The shelves would do as they now are,
that the shelves may be quite fat. We must but would be liable to twist unless we
TITZrmUTETIKUUTTUU
329
IA
 -THINGS TO MAKE AND THINGS TO DO .

strengthened them , and we shall do this by walnut, or ebony. We purchase any of

two back pieces, one above the top shelf and these stains in threepenny or sixpenny
another below the bottom shelf. Picture 3 bottles, and apply it with a brush. Then
shows the sizes for these pieces, both of we can put on some French polish if we wish
which are alike. Having cut them out and to give the article an extra fine finish and
finished them , we nail can afford the modest ex
them on , one above the pense. There are several
top shelf and one under other ways in which we
the bottom shelf. Our so can ornament the book
set of shelves is now com 1 can
shelves. We may, if we
plete as far as carpentry like, make the top and
goes. If we purchase at the bottom pieces em
ironmonger's four mirror battled ” or “ dentilated,"
plates, we can attach as it is called , by cutting
the shelves to the wall by out pieces and leaving
their means. We must teeth - like projectors as
attach these mirror plates shown in picture 5. We
to the sides and not to can carve the sides, or we
the shelves. We put two can stain them with a
at each side, as seen in pattern , using stencils , or
picture 5. These would do we can burn some orna
well enough if they were mentation, using a hot
put on to stick outwards, ரபபாடமம் iron , or, finally, we can , if
but in that case they would we wish , put some orna
be seen when the shelves 5. The completed bookshelves mental or imitation leather
are attached to the wall.
By putting them on as indicated in picture 5, front of the shelves.
shelf - edging along the
Whether we decide
the shelves will look much better when they to decorate in any of these ways or not,
are fixed in the place they are to occupy . we shall have an article of wall furniture
If we have used pine or other soft wood, which we shall find very convenient, and
we can stain the shelves any colour we of which we shall feel very proud, because
prefer, and can imitate mahogany, rosewood , we have made it ourselves.

THE MYSTERIOUS CHINESE BAT

Thisis aa miniature cricket-bat,6 in.long,as
illustrated in the picture. In a row down
its centre, about half an inch apart, are three
small holes, visible on each side , and bored ,
apparently, right through it. But things are
not always what they seem , especially in con
juring. A comparision of picture 1 ,
representing a front view , and
picture 2 , representing a back view
of the bat , will show how, in this
case, the reality differs from the
appearance. Of the three holes, A , B,
and c, shown in the front view , only
B and c are genuine, so to speak, A
being a mere make-believe, going
only half-way through the wood.
On the other side of the bat, in a
line with B and c, but half an inch
nearer the lower end, is another
dummy hole, D.
With the bat is used a little peg
of wood , bone, or ivory, in length id
about three times the thickness of
the bat, and just fitting comfortably
into either of the holes B and c.
To show the trick , we, in the first
place, call attention to the bat, asking
the company to notice that there are
three holes through it, as appears to 1. Front view
be the case. We likewise exhibit the
The mysterious bat
peg , which we may introduce with
the remark that some of the company have no
doubt seen the curious “ jumping beans
which have been such a puzzle to naturalists,
and that this little peg is a " jumping peg .
Whether the motive power is the same in both
cases you must leave the audience to decide.
TOYOX
We may here remark that whenever a con
jurer can introduce in his “ talkee-talkee "
of a trick some little scientific fact having a
resemblance, however remote, to the effect
he is about to produce , he should not fail to
clo so . If we can start people on a wrong
scent, they are all the less likely to
hit upon the true one.
But to return to our jumping peg.
The performer puts it, from thefront,
into the hole B in such a manner that
it shall project equally on each side.
Holding the bat upright, he asks
everybody to take notice that he has
put it in the centre hole. He then
lowers the bat as if to show the
opposite face of it, but, as he does so,
gives the handle a half - turn between
his fingers. The effect of this is that
the same side is still visible .
6b
с Oc “ Now ," he says, “ I shall com
mand the peg to jump out of the
middle hole and into the top hole.”
Under cover of a wave of the arm ,
he gives the bat another half-turn ,
thereby bringing the reverse side
into view . On this side is the top
hole ; and the peg appears to have
2. Back view jumped accordingly.
Once more,” he says, “ we will
place the peg in the middle hole."
He then transfers it to c, which on the side
now visible is the middle hole. Again he
shows, apparently, both sides of the bat, then
commands the peg to jump, and makes the
final half-turn as before, when the peg is seen
to have jumped into the lowermost hole.
Dr ILMU
330
 aan BILETELEZZETEKODUCATOLICOXTON ROIGNOITVOEGDE XUCTERIU

A LITTLE GARDEN MONTH BY MONTH

WHAT TO DO IN THE MIDDLE OF APRIL
Thespring is a capital timeinwhich to start The first work in the garden plot will be to
a dig it as deeply as you possibly can—that is
the better, but the middle of April will do if one of the reasons why it is necessary to
we have not thought of it before. have a spade that really can do some good
Gardening is a splendid hobby, because it work, because deep digging is of the utmost
gives us plenty to do and plenty to think importance. You can understand that the
about, and plenty of wonderfully interesting deeper you work the soil the better it is for
things to find out. When we make a garden the roots of your plants, and in well-worked
and plant it, we set ourselves the task - and soil these go creeping out in all directions to
it is a very pleasant one - oflooking after the find food and drink wherewith to build up
welfare and health and comfort of all sorts of and sustain healthy and sturdy leaves and
plants, many of which have different tastes stems and flowers.
and requirements ; and it is one of the The middle of April is not too late to sow
experiments we must always be making to seeds of many plants that will flower during
see if we are giving each plant just what it the summer and autumn . Plants that flower
most wants. Some like a great deal of sun- so quickly as this are called annuals. They
shine, some like the shady places ; some like do not come up year after year in the garden,
a dry position , some a as some plants do , and
moist one ; some like to live for many seasons.
grow among the stones, No ; annuals are the
some stretch up, and need shortest lived of all
arches or posts to support plants, and you must sow
them. seeds afresh each year.
After we have acquired But an annual accom
our plot of ground, we plishes a great deal in its
need a supply of tools little life. You Sow the
before we can transform seed ; the seedling ap
it into a beautiful garden ; pears, grows quickly into
and we ought to get tools a little plant; the buds
as large as we can com Small fork Trowel appear, and open out into
fortably handle . This beautiful flowers. Then
applies especially to such they fade , and the seed
an important tool as the vessels grow ; and when
spade. Other tools that the seed has fully ripened
will be needed will be a the plant dies. And all
hoe ; and many people within the year !
find what is called a Among the prettiest
“ Dutch ” hoe the most and brightest of annuals
convenient to use for are larkspurs, poppies,
weeding nasturtiums, scarlet
A rake will be necessary LA PEDALTA linums, and dwarf con
to smooth the surface and Watering can volvulus . The sweetest
Dutch
to clear up the rubbish. Large fork hoe smelling is, perhaps, the
Something smaller than THE LITTLE GARDENER'S TOOLS mignonette, and onethat
the spade will be needed is interesting for its quaint
for planting, and for this purpose a trowel is seed - vessels is known as love-in -a -mist.
useful; but where it is a question of digging The great point to remember in seed sowing
holes in ground where many bulbs may lie is to sow as thinly as possible, and however
hidden, a trowel may damage them , so that a thinly we sow we shall have to draw out many
little four-pronged fork in a handle of the of the seedling plants when they appear, but
same length as that of the trowel is very we can think about that later on ; though
useful ; and, if we cannot have both , the little any boy or girl who already has a garden,
fork will do all that the trowel does, and and has reared his seedlings, may at once set
should be the one we should choose. about thinning them , as it cannot well be
A large fork set in a handle the same length done too soon.
as the spade is a most useful tool, and can often Some of the seeds may be sown in lines,
be used for digging, especially round about especially where we need a row to serve as
plants already established, as it is not so an edging ; or, again, they may be sown in
likely to injure their roots as the spade. A circles. These, when they grow up , make
watering-can is necessary, and one the rose of nice patches. There are a few rules always
which takes off and on should be bought, as to be borne in mind when sowing seeds in
quite as often we need to water through the the open ground. The soil must notbe so
spout asto sprinkle the water through the rose . wet that it is sticky and hangs together in
A wheelbarrow is useful to have, either to bring lumps, neither should it be so dry that it is
soil or to cart away weeds, leaves, and other like powder. Secondly, the seed must not
rubbish ; or, failing that , a strong basket will be buried too deeply ; and thirdly, as already
take its place. mentioned, it must be sown thinly.
termometer UTVUMINIUM
331
 Ruum THINGS TO MAKE AND THINGS
If the soil is too wet , we must wait for a few
days until wind and sun have partially dried
it , and if it is too dry it must be watered . It
will be in splendid condition if it has a good
watering the day before the seed is sown,
where it has become dry and parched , as
often it is on the surface during April. It is
very interesting to have an especial flower for
each month , and there is no doubt that the
flower of April is the primrose. There are
many different sorts of primroses , and they
are known in catalogues as primulas. The
primrose does not need a very sunny position ,
so if there be a shady bit in your garden the
collection of primroses will flourish there. It
is a good plan to add one new kind every year.
TO DO -REK
April is the month when we must remem
ber to re -pot the plants we grow in the house,
if they happen to need it. °Ferns should be
re -potted now, and great care must be taken
not to injure the roots. If the plant does not
leave the pot easily, then the pot must be
gently tapped all round. Fresh soil should
be used, and plenty of crocks or broken bits
of pots should be put over the drainage hole.
This is important,as it helps the water to get
away, and not remain to make the soil sour.
We may, perhaps, spare a small portion of
our garden for vegetables, and at the same
timethat we sow our seeds of annuals we may
also sow a line of cress. The drill should be
carefully made, and the seed sown thickly.

HOW TO MAKE AA PAPER BOX

ANYclever boy or girlcanmake a neat creases cross . Fold the corner A over to
paper box. First, take a piece of paper, the spot ) , as seen in this illustration.
which should not be too thin or too soft. A That will make
piece the size of this page or a little smaller another crease . Now
will do nicely. Now make the paper exactly make another crease
square. You can do so easily by folding it over by folding the corner
as shown here. B over to H ; another
Cut off the part by folding the corner C
where the folded over to F ; and another
upper piece does by folding the corner
not cover the D over to G.
lower piece, and We still want four
what remains more creases . Make
will be exactly them by folding A over to F, B over to G , C
square. over to ) , and D over to H. The paper is now
You have al creased as shown here .
ready folded the paper diagonally — that is , Every one of these
from corner to corner. Make a good crease creases is necessary to
by pressing it with the fingers at the fold , then make the final box,
open it out and fold it diagonally from the although, as the paper
other corners, and press the fold well down is now , it is not easy to
with the fingers. The paper will now be see why all these marks
square and creased as are wanted But we
B ) in this picture. shall see presently the
Notice the letters on use of all the creases.
the picture, so that you Now you must use
can understand easily scissors. Cut along
what to do . So that we where there are black
may understand what lines instead of dotted
follow's more easily , we lines in the next picture.
shall call the four cor You now have a paper
ners A , B , C , and D , and which does not look
the centre will be E. very like a box . But
Now fold all the corners you have only to fold it
in carefully so as to touch up in the proper way,
the centre, and make the and you will see that it
paper as here shown. is. Fold over the corner at D like this :
The paper will now be and slip it into the slit near B.
in the form of a square , Now fold in the flaps at the side, and
but a much smaller square you have it like this :
than formerly . Having
folded it like this, press
it down well at the folds
so as to crease it plainly.
You will now have
four more creases, and
when you open out
the paper again it will Fold over the corner at C ,
be creased where the and slip it into the slit at
dotted line , are in the A , and the box is now
next illustration. The finished. If you have made
other letters - F , G, H , it properly, it will be very
J - mark where the neat and perfectly regular.
TUTTE
332
 uratrtraitart
GAMES TO BE PLAYED IN THE NURSERY
Big boys and girls will not want to
come with us now, for we
going to the nursery to have fine fun
and frolic with the very little people.
HUNT THE SLIPPER
ALL LL the players but one- “ cobblers," as
they are called-sit on the floor in a circle
a few inches apart . Then the customer comes
and says :
Please, I want this old slipper
mended . I will call for it in ten minutes.
She hands one of the cobblers an old
slipper , and turns away. When she has
counted up to ten , she comes back , but is
toldthe slipper is not ready.
“ I must have it,” says the customer.
" Then you must find it.” all the cobblers
reply.
Each cobbler
At that the search begins.
passes the slipper on to his or her neighbour,
hiding it from sight as much as possible ;
but should the seeker spy it and call out the
name of the cobbler who has got it, that
cobbler must take her place, and bring it to
be mended again. The slipper must not
stop in one place, but must keep passing
round the circle, either one way or the other.
THE GARDEN GATE
garden fence is made by all the
Theplayers,except
one, holding each other's
hands, standing in a big ring. In the middle
stands the single player, while the rest dance
round her three times. Then they stand still
while she sings :
“ Open wide the garden gate , the garden
gate, the garden gate,
Open wide the garden gate and let me
through .'
But the “ fence,” as the ring is called ,
only answers, as it dances round again :
Get the key of the garden gate , the garden
gate, the garden gate ,
Get the key of the garden gate and let your-
self through .”
Then the poor prisoner cries :
“ I've lost the key of the garden gate, so
1)
what am I to do ? "
Still dancing, the others sing :
“ Then you may stop, may stop all night
within the gate,
Until you're strong enough , you know ,
break a way through .'
At this the prisoner runs between two of
the boys and girls - the “ palings " of the
fence — and if, by pushing, she can make them
unclasp hands, one of them takes her place
in the middle, and the game begins again.
HUNT THE RING
This gameis played by all the boys and girls
standing up in a circle, with the seeker
inside. The ring is slipped on a long piece
of thin cord or twine, the ends of which are
then tied together. Each one in the circle
holds this cord with one hand and passes the
ring along it with the other. The game is to
2XURIOZIT RITUEIXURIERZE
ம்பா untrarature
pass the ring along while the seeker is look
are ing another way. The ring may be hidden
by holding the hand over it till there is a
chance to pass it on . The ring must not stay
in one place, and when it has been found the
one who held it must take the place of the
seeker.
HOLD FAST ! LET GO !
Yougame, listen
mustand to what is said in this
be careful to do exactly the
opposite. Four players stand up, and each
takes hold of one corner of a square sheet
of paper or a handkerchief. A fifth player
calls out : “ Hold fast ! ” and anyone who
does not let go will be out ; while , if the
order is “ Let go ! ” those who fail to hold
fast will be out. The orders must be given
rapidly, one after the other, and someone is
sure to make a mistake, but the last to do so,
of course, is the winner.
PUSS IN THE CORNER
IN this game all the children pretend to be
mice, except one, who isthe puss. “ Puss "
stands in the middle of the room. Each
mouse stands in a corner . While there
Puss cannot touch them , but when they
run across the room to change corners with
one another she may capture any she can .
No mouse should venture from a corner until
she has made signs to another mouse with
whom she would like to change houses, or
she may find herself half- way across the
room with no corner to run to .The mouse
that is caught must take the place of Puss.
DUCK UNDER THE WATER
THERE should be a good many players for
this game. Choose partners, and form
two lines a little apart, each couple standing
one behind another. The front or leading
couple then form an arch by joining hands,
and the last two of the line skip together
down the alley of players, pass under the
arch, and, stopping immediately on the other
side, make a second arch . Then the next
couple from the end do the same, and the
next, and so on until a long tunnel is formed
of lifted hands. The tunnel may be taken
down by the first partners who began it
to lowering their arch andpassing through. The
next two follow , until the last arch falls, and
the builders are ready for another game.
BLINDMAN'S BUFF
THOSE whowant tomake agreatnoise will
have a chance now . One player is taken
into the middle of the room , where a hand
kerchief is tied over his eyes. He is then
turned round three times and told to catch
whom he can . The other players run to and
fro , passing as near to him as they dare,
while the blindman rushes in all directions,
clutching at those who seem nearest. When
he succeeds in catching someone, he must
guess who it is , and, if correct, the person
333
 -THINGS TO MAKE
caught must be blindfolded in his place. If
he cannot guess, he must leave go and
try again.
WOLF
THEone“ Wolf” isa player who creeps away to
side of the nursery, and hides behind
chairs and tables or boxes. The “ sheep "
all huddle up al one end of the room , and
the calls
shepherd stands at the other. Presently
he out to the sheep to come home,
for the night is falling .
“ We are afraid of the wolf," answer the
sheep
“ The wolf is away ! ” cries the shepherd .
Then the sheep all run across. Out jumps
the wolf and catches whom he can . The game
lasts till there are no sheep left to be caught.
BINGO
Theplayersjoin
their number, hands
who is in a ring,thewithoneof
called “ miller,"
in the centre. Then all , still holding hands,
dance round and sing :
“ The miller's mill dog lay at the mill door,
And his name was little Bingo :
B with an I, I with an N, N with a G, G
with an o,
And his name was little Bingo."
Then as they stand still again the miller
cries out “ B ” and points at one of the
players in the ring, who must say “ I," the
next to her “ N ," and so on , until the little
dog's name is spelt. The first player to say
the wrong letter has to change places with
the miller.
FEATHER AND FANS
A FLUFFY feather out ofany cushion willdo
for this game, and if there are not enough
fans to go round, stiff pieces of paper or thin
card will do quite as well . Draw a line across
the nursery floor, and let half the number of
players be on oneside,and halfthe
on the other ready, number
feather into the air and keep it up with the
fans. No players must leave their side of the
line, but should do their best to stop the feather
sailing across it. Those in whose country
it falls at last lose the game. Of course, the
feather, while in fight, must not be touched .
A GOOSE MARCH
ALL LL the players but one (who is the officer)
form in a line, one behind the other, but
a little way apart. When ready, the officer
cries : “ March ! ” Away go the soldiers at
a rapid step, till suddenly the officer calls
out : “ Halt ! ” Anyone who bumps against his
companion in front, or has Loth feet on the
ground, is sent to the back of the line with a
bad mark . The order to “ March !” or
“ Halt ! ” is given as many times as there
are “ soldiers, and in the end the bad marks
are counted, the one with the smallest
number being the winner.
BRIDGE- BOARD
A BRIDGE-BOARD is a long, thick piece of
wood with a number of arches cut in it.
If we have not one, we can build a very good
board from a box of bricks, or even by standing
our smaller books in a row , and placing
334
AND THINGS TO DO..mimit
others across the tops . Each arch or open
ing of the bridge should be marked with a
separate number, and one of the players,
called the " keeper,” should stand by it at one
end of the room , while the rest go to the
other end with marbles. Turns are then
taken to roll the marbles through the bridge,
the one who sends them under the arches
with the highest number winning the game.
When we build our bridge we can make
the arches whatever size we like, They
should be large if we choose to roll the
marble from a distance, and small if we are
going to stand near.
A HOUSE PAPER-CHASE
FOR this game we shall want a large number
of pieces of square paper about the
size of a playing-card. On each slip a figure
should be marked plainly - thus, 1 , 2, 3, and
so on , up to 20 or 30. These slips are given
6
to the boy who is the hare ," with per
mission to drop them one by one, in the
order of the figures, anywhere he likes in
the house, but always where it will not be
very difficult to see them . After waiting a
minute or two, the hounds start in pursuit ,
but must follow him only by finding the scraps
of paper in their proper order. The hare
does all he can to avoid being seen until he
is safe back in the nursery, but even if seen
he cannot be caught unless the hounds can
produce all the slips of paper that he has
scattered. If they make a prisoner of him ,
and he can show that there are numbers
missing between those he still has and those
in the handsof his captors, he must be set free
again . If there are only one or two thus
missing the chase becomes exciting, because
he must not return to the nursery till all his
slips are parted with.
TIT TAT TOE
Draw a large in circle ona, slate
small then with a very
the other draw lines like the spokes of a wheel,
and put a number in every space between the
spokes from i upwards. The more spokes
and spaces the better. In the small inner
circle 100 is written. The first player then
begins by holding a slate pencil upright with
its point in the space marked 1. Closing her
eyes , she shifts the pencil round the wheel
step by step, repeating these words :
“ Tit, tat, toe, my first go,
Three jolly butcher boys all in a row .
Stick one up, stick one down, 1
Stick one in the old man's crown."
With the last word she opens her eyes, and
writes down the number of the space in
which the pencil is resting. The next player
then takes the pencil and begins " tit, tat,
toeing," and when all have had a turn the
scores are counted up , the one who has the
highest number winning.. Any player who
puts the pencil into the inner circle scores
100, and wins at once , while those who let it
rest on a line or spoke must pass it on to the
next without counting anything.
The next Things to Make and Things to
Do begin on page 444 .
 The Child's Book of
SCHOOL LESSONS
WHAT OUR LESSONS TEACH US
ERE are some more pictures to help us to learn to read words of four
HEletters. In the writing lesson we see how the pothooks and hangers we
made before can be turned into more letters . If we are learning arithmetic we
learn to write figures by signs instead of spelling them . In the music lesson
we read about the roads that the fairies travel on, and our drawing lesson
teaches us to draw twigs and flowers, and to paint them to look like real ones.
CONTINUED FROM PAGE 215

ĐỘREADING I
LITTLE WORDS OF FOUR LETTERS
Perhaps by this time you feel that you can spell a good many words of two
and three letters. If so, you will be wanting to get on to longer words
words with four letters in them. Although these look rather hard and long,
they are not really so very bad, and you will soon read them if you try.
I am sure that you can now tell me that ILL spells ILL. So, if you re
member that, you will easily spell the next three words underneath the pictures.

60
..0'55084
00
AT
BILL HILL MILL
Then again, A IL spells AIL, and out of this you can make many words of four
letters each, such as FAIL. HAIL, PAIL, and those given with pictures below.

NAIL SAIL TAIL

You will be able to make many other words from four letters. Perhaps you
can make the next words out by yourselves.

COCK LOCK ROCK

335
 -THE CHILD'S BOOK OF SCHOOL LESSONS.

O9001

BACK
ICO
RACK
21 SACK

CAKE LAKE RAKE

Now, will it help you if I ask you some
questions , and give you the answer in a
picture ? Here are the questions, and
you will all know the answers , I am sure .
What did the COW
mr
If you would like some little rhymes,
here are a few. I am very fond of them
myself, and I hope you like them , too.
Has Santa Claus come yet , I wonder ?
I must run to my stocking and look.
On top is a ball, and just under

jump over ? There is something that feels like a

BOOK .
mm

Perhaps
MOON further
PLUM What did Little Jack down is a
Horner pull out of his Christmas pie ? doily,
And some chocolates also , I hope ;
What did Old Mother Oh, mother, this really is jolly,
Hubbard look for in the And here is a new skipping ROPE !
cupboard ? BONE

What was Little Boy

Blue asked to blow ?
If when we walk along a lake
Or near a marsh or bog,
We hear a noise , we can't
mistake
The croak
HORN
ing of a
BOWL FROG.
What did the Wise
Men of Gotham go to sea in ?
544(4

Now for some fun, here

comes the sun,
Where did the old The wind is exactly night :
woman live who had We let out the string,
so many children And with good hearty fling
that she did not know We send up our beautiful
SHOE what to do ? KITE .
UMTOTT சபாசாகரணommE
336
 ASWRITING
TOM AND NORA MAKE MORE LETTERS
we are going to write some-
“ TO-DAY
thing you know quite well,” said
the children's mother, as they watched
her rule lines for them . “ Nora , bring
me your straw hat - the sailor one. "
When Nora brought it she found
that Tom had fetched aa little dish from
the kitchen . Both were put on the
table before them , and their mother
asked in what way they were alike.
Tom looked a moment, and then said :
Well, mother, one is china and the
other straw. The only way they are
alike is in their roundness."
“ Yes, Tom ," said his mother ; " but
are they really round like a ball, or a
hoop, or that marble in your pocket ? "
Tom put the marble on the table, and
both he and Nora exclaimed :
“ The marble is rounder.”
Their mother told them the marble
was round , the dish and the hat were
oval, and that they were going to make
a letter like the dish and the hat.
“ The letter is 0 ," she said, “ and
1)
I want you to make it oval , not round,
and to start on the right of the curve
at the top, like this :
() () oo
“ Notice how my pencil presses heavily
on the down curve and lightly on the
up curve. "
After watching their mother, Tom
and Nora took their pencils and wrote
a line of o's .
“ O's seem easy to make," said
Nora, looking at her row , "“ but it is
I)
to make them all alike.”
not easy
Tom was finding this out too. Some
of his o's jostled against one another.
Some looked as though they had quar
relled and would not make friends . But
the next rows Nora and Tom made were
much better, and their mother said that
after a little practice they would write
them well .
What is the third letter of the
alphabet, Tom ? " their mother asked.
C ," said Tom promptly.
Their mother said that now they
knew how to make o, there would
be no trouble about c .
Look ," she d, is very much
like o in shape, but I begin with a
CERITUOTTEET
337
& 2.&rlike
dot , curve up and round to the left ,
then down , round, and down to the
right, and then , instead of taking the
pencil up to meet the dot I started with ,
I pass it up and out to the right."”
Yes ," said Nora, “ I see, and
you make the curve at the bottom
of the line bigger than that at the top."
This is how the c's were made :
CC C C C
While Tom was writing his row of c's,
he said it seemed to him as though the
two ends had joined once, but the join
had snapped, and the upper part had
sprung back and coiled into a dot.
Like the spring father showed me
in his watch ," he added.
“ C stands for cousin ," their mother
said . C-o-u-s-i-n. Why, you can make
all the letters in cousin except s. The
next letter to make is the first in the
alphabet, and you can nearly make it
already. Let us see what it is like.”
As their mother wrote rows of a's
for Tom and Nora, they watched her
closely, and before she had made many
Nora exclaimed :
' Why, mother, you are making o ! ”
Yes,” she replied , " andwhat else ? ”
“ A pot-hanger ,” exclaimed Tom. (
So it is , ” said Nora, and the two
are joined up close together .”
Their mother showed them how, after
making the o, she kept the pencil
on the paper , and made the pot-hanger
down the side of the o without
lifting the pencil, like this :
a(І. (a 0, a
a a
a
There is one other sister-letter to
o, c, and a yet to make , something
like c ; it is e.”
Then they were shown how e, instead
of beginning with a dot, made a loop ,
starting outside and below the middle
of the curve on the left . lile this :
le (, ( ) le
Tom said that e was like c, with the
curled -up dot pulled out and put round
behind its back .
“ Next time,” said his mother, “ we
will make r , v , w, x , and s.”
ZUUTIOI URCATUD
 ARITHMETIC

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
TO-DAY we are going to learn the Two keys and three keys make how
figures which stand for thenumbers. many keys altogether ?
We will count how many children there
are in each line ; then , at the end of
every line , we will write the name of
the number, and after that the figure
which we can use instead of the name.
11 111
2 and 3 make how many ? 5
One I Tom had four pennies, and his father
gave him two more ; how many had he
then ?
.. Two 2

.. Three .. 3 4 and 2 make how many ?

There are nine books on a book
Four 4
shelf, and we take three of them away ;
how many will be left ?
.. Five .. 5 1 | 2 | 3 |4 |56
CmCG

.. Six 6
3 taken from 9 leaves how many ?
If I take away another three of the
Seven 7 books, how many will be left then ?
3 taken from 6 leave how many ?
How many threes, then, make nine ?
Eight 8 Seven jugs were standing on the
table ; if three get knocked over, how
many are left standing ?
Nine 9

When there are no children at all ,

D
DI DD
DD I Cal Cancel
the number is called nought, and the 3 taken from 7 leave how many ?
figure which stands for it is o. How many more jugs must be knocked
You know we have learned to count as over to make seven altogether ?
far as twelve, and we shall soon go on to How many added to 3 will make 7 ?
much bigger numbers than that. But you A boy has seven marbles ; how many
must notbe afraid that we shall have to more must he win to make eleven
learn a new figure for every new number. altogether ?
We should never manage to do that .
As we go on we shall find that those
ten figures, 0, 1 , 2 , 3 , 4, 5, 6,7 , 8 , 9 , How many added to 7 will make II ?
will be all we shall need. We shall John had ten apples, and gave five
see that the I and the o, written away ; how many had he left ?
close together like this, 10, stand for
ten , and that it stands for eleven , and
12 for twelve. But it will perhaps take 5 taken from 1o leave how many ?
us a little time to understand why So, how many fives make ten ?
the figures are written that way for ten, Next time we shall begin to learn
eleven , and twelve. something about the numbers bigger
Before we talk any more about than twelve. We can learn a lot by
that , let us do a little more counting, counting the cards which we use for
and use figures for writing down the playing “ Snap ,” or any other game of
answers, instead of having to spell that sort . Or, if we have not any cards,
the names of the different numbers. we can count pencils or marbles.
33 8
 MUSIC C
THE ROADS THE FAIRIES TRAVEL ON
n the days of long ago the fairies said, they let us know which of these
had much to sing about – beautiful· two roads weareto find, and which house
stories for the men and women , boys and
girls,who live in this bright, happy world.
When a fairy has told someone of her
beautiful secrets, she likes it to be
told again and again, because the
fairies like us to make one another
happy, and if they told you and me
a lovely story, they would expect us
to take that story to someone else.
Now, it is one thing to
hear a tale, and quite
another thing to be able to
tell other people about it .
First of all , we are living
in quite a big world , which
contains many countries,
and each country has a great
many people in it, speaking
different languages, and it
would be quite impossible
for a little boy or girl, or even
for a grown-up person, to
whisper the fairies' secret ir
everyone's ear. Happily for
us, long, long years ago a
The Fairies'
Treble Road
great discovery was made — the Fairies'
Map was found, and everybody set to
work to understand it . That is what
you and I are going to do , because we
want to know all the beautiful
stories the fairies have told , as
well as the many new tales they
may have in store for us .
We will begin by taking
another look at our magic
kingdom - the piano, and
we will go at once to
Fairy C's house, which is
in the middle of the long
black and white line. We
shall find she is at home,
waiting for us, because she
has something very impor
tant to tell.. She says that
this house of hers is the
meeting -point of two roads.
That part of the black and
white line on her left- hand The Fairies' little
side is called the Bass Road, Bass Road
and the part of the black and white
line on her right-hand side bears the
name Treble Road. We must try
to remember these names , because when
we want to know what the fairies have
339
28
in that particular road we are to visit .
First, they draw five straight lines,
just like this :
These are the fairy motor
lines for the fairy motor
cars , and both fairies and
goblins have a very special
name for them . They call them a
stave, and each road has its own stave.
The fairies know we might easily
lose our way, SO as they are kind
little people they have sent us two
small guides — one is a little fairy girl
and the other a little fairy boy. The
fairy girl is Fairy G's godchild, and
the fairy boy has Fairy F for a
godmother. Fairy G's little god
daughter carries a banner of curious
design , just like this : and Fairy F
6
has given her godson a banner with
this strange device :
Directly the little guides are called ,
they come and take up their position
at the entrance of their own " stave,”
so that they may show us
the way. Fairy G calls her
little helper Treble Clef, and
she has to stand at the
entrance of the road which bears her
name. Look at the picture above.
Fairy F's little helper is called Bass
Clef, and he is on duty in the road which
is named after him. There is a picture
of him on this page.
To-day we just want to amuse our
selves with the fairy motor -lines,
and I think we shall like drawing them .
We must also remember the two
roads in our fairy kingdom. First ,
the road running to theright of Fairy C's
central house, called the Treble, because
“ Treble Clef ” stands at the
entrance to guide us . Second, the road
which lies to the left ofFairy C's central
house, and is called the Bass, because
little · Bass Clef” is waiting at the
entrance . Next time we will find out
where each fairy stops her motor-car .
 DRAWING (AD )
PICTURES OF LEAVES AND TWIGS
AVE you ever noticed that the trees ask someone to tell you. Now put the
НАbegin to alter and look spring -like in twig beside you on the table, on the left
the early days of the year,long before hand sideof your board, and if you can
the green leaves come ? Every little sit with thelight coming from a window
twig bears a bud that grows bigger on the left-hand side too, it will be
every day, and the twigs and buds on much better for you than having the
each kind of tree are quite different light come from the front or from the
from one another. We should be able right-hand side.
to draw these twigs and buds so well Take a good look at the twig ;
that people will see at once whether notice how it curves or turns, first to
we are drawing an oak twig, or a chest- one side , then to the other. Take your
nut twig, or whatever twig we have black chalk and draw the longest piece
chosen . first. It is thickest at the end where
Can you get some from different it was broken off from the tree . Draw
trees to -day and try ? If you cannot the twigs branching from it next-if
manage to find any twigs, perhaps you there are any -- and then the buds.
can get some flowers and leaves - snow- One thing is very important, and we
drops and ivy leaves. We will learn how must show it on our drawing. It is
to draw each of these things, beginning this : the stem grows thicker wherever
with the a smaller
twigs. branch or
Have your bud starts
paint - box from it . This
and brushes is because
ready, quite the food on
clean , and a which the
jar of clean buds feed all
water. Pin a the winter is
sheet of stored there .
brown paper Without
on your that little
board, and storehouse
have a sheet they could
of white not grow , so
paper near , be careful to
as you will thicken your
want it after twigs in the
wards . We proper places.
shall want If you find
black and it very diffi.
white chalk , cult to get all
and two pen the little
cils , one with branches
a fine point right at first,
and Cone you may put
sharpened the twig on
flat, like the the paper ,
edge of a and mark ,
chisel. with a little
If you do dot, the place
not know the where " each
name of the one comes .
tree from But we
which you Look closely at a twig of a tree, Notice how the stem grows thicker should not do
have taken and draw on brown paper, with wherever a branch starts from it, this often , as
black chalk, first the stem and then and show this in the drawing by
your twig, the littlepiecesbranching offfrom it. thickening the line in these places. it is rather
340
 LAZERELLAXOCOLDUZURAG
XXX Mx Mom
RYXERTION
TERRY

If you find it difficult to get the Draw the little branches , beginning Paint the twig at once this time,
branches in the right places, put at the stem and ending at the point without any outline. Make the stem
little marks where they should begin where the bud is. Now we are ready brown and then paint in the buds,
and end, before you start to draw . for our white paper and paints. remembering to paint downwards.
a baby way. I hope the drawing is large you must get the exact colour of the
enough . Measure it and see buds and put them in .
by putting the twig you have Paint straight away with
copied on the top of your the brush , holding it rather
drawing. Do it again if it is upright, but do not make a
too small, for it is a very bad pencil outline first. Always
fault to draw things too small. paint downwards, not up
Now get the white paper, and wards. If you have snowdrops
mix some colours tomatch the instead of twigs, use white
shade of the stem ; the buds chalk on brown paper for the
will want a different colour. flowers and black chalk for
If the stem is grey, mix the stalks . If you have
together light red, cobalt blue . leaves, put the shapes in in
and yellow ochre. A bluish black chalk, without making
grey will want most blue an outline first.
paint ; a greenish grey will The snowdrops must be
only want a little red . Do painted with Chinese white on
not put out too much colour if brown paper. Paint flower and
you have tube paints, as you Stalk in white first ; then , when
will only want a little 1
the paint is dry, paint the
If the stein is brown , use snowdrops
stalk green , over the white.
sepia or Vandyke brown. Try white chalk for the lowers Lemon yellow and cobalt blue,
your paints carefully till you and black for the stalks. with a very little light red ,
get the exact shade, and after Paint
Chinese flower and stalk make a good green . The ivy
the white,
you have painted the stalk paint in the stalk green. leaf must be painted in green
TYUTERTE
341
 -THE CHILD'S BOOK OF SCHOOL LESSONS.......
from them ; but if you have drawn flowers
or leaves, draw it separately in the corner of
the paper, the long lines first meeting in a
dot in the centre , and then the little short
lines going round. Use the chisel-pointed
pencil for the long lines and the other
pencil for the short ones.
Remember that it is better to take another
sheet of paper and make a fresh drawing if
you do not like your work the first time
you do it . If you use indiarubber the paper
soon gets worn away, and the pencil lines
never look well afterwards. Very often, too,
the drawing looks dirty where the india
rubber has been used. So try to get the
lines right the first time, and if you cannot
manage this, try again, making a new line
altogether. It is a very bad plan to think
it doesn't matter to draw a line carelessly
because it is so easy to rub it out . This is
really a waste of time. Next time we are
going to learn how to draw a jam -jar.

Paint the ivy leaf on white

paper with green paint. Make
the paper damp and paint
downwards, putting on the
colour quite flat and smooth.

on white paper. No
outline must be made
first. Ivy leaves are
sometimes dark green
and sometimes bright
green .
Use Prussian blue ,
gamboge, and a little
light red for bright
green . Put Vandyke
brown with the blue
and gamboge, instead
of red, for dark green .
Let the paper be damp
—not too wet-see that
it slants a little , and
paint downwards. Do
not try to shade the
leaves ; put the colour
on quite flat and
smooth .
When you have done
this, you can , if you
like , practise your pen
cil work by drawing a
cobweb like the one you
see in the picture. If
you have drawn twigs ,
you can make it hang Here is a cobweb between two twigs. Draw these in in pencil.
Umum pum
342
 LITTLE PICTURE-STORIES IN FRENCH
This story is continued from page 215. This part tells us of the arrival of the party
at Dover. We must be sure to remember that the first line under the picture
is the French , the second gives the English word for the French word above it,
and the third line shows how we make up the words into our own language.
Enfin nous sommes en route. Bébé pleure et fait le méchant .
At last we are on way . Baby cries and makes the naughty child.
At last we are on the way. Baby cries and is tiresome.

Iv
y

I1 veut être le papa

He wants to be the papa.
He wants to be papa.

Papa et maman lisent les journaux.
Papa and mamma read the papers.
Papa and mamma are reading their papers.
Je lui dis qu'il est trop petit
I him tell that he is too little.
I tell him that he is too little.
Jeannette le console.
Jenny him comforts.
Jenny comforts him .

Nous jouons à la poupée.

We play at the doll.
We play with the doll. Nous sommes fatigués de jouer.
Je suis le papa. Jeannette est la maman . We are tired of to play.
We are tired of playing.
I am the papa. Jenny is the mamma.
I am papa . Jenny is mamma. Bébé dit qu'il a faim .
Bébé et la poupée sont nos enfants . Baby says that he has hunger.
Baby and the doll are our children . Baby says he is hungry.
Baby and the doll are our children .
Nous les aimons beaucoup . Nous avons tous faim .
We them very much . We have all hunger.
We love them very much . | We are all hungry.
343
 AZAL Lase OLULU

Maman nous donne des pommes .

Mamma us gives some apples.
Mamma gives us some apples.
Toutes les pommes sont rouges .
All the apples are
All the apples are red .
Elles viennent de notre jardin.
They come from our garden .
They grew in our garden
red. Papa donne la pomme à bébé.
Papa gives the apple to baby.
Papa gives the apple to baby.
Le train s'arrête .
The train itself stops .
The train stops.

ond
Papa perd ses lunettes.
Papa loses his spectacles.
Papa loses his spectacles.
Maman les ramasse .
Mamma them picks up.
Mamma picks them up.

Bébé laisse tomber la sienne.

Baby lets fall his.
Baby lets his fall.

Il recommence à pleurer.
He begins again to cry .
He begins to cry again.

Nous sommes à Douvres.

We are at Dover.
We are at Dover.

Nous descendons du train .

Papa se baisse pour la chercher .
Papa himself stoops in order it to find. We get down from the train.
Papa stoops in order to find it . We get out of the train .
The next School Lessons begin on page 435 .
344
 HOW THE GREAT COMMERCE OF ENGLAND BEGAN
When England was still a little-known island , inhabited by rude, unlearned people, there were prosperous empires across
the sea , and there can be no doubt that even then travellers from other countries landed on the shores of England, offering
goods for sale. In this picture Lord Leighton has painted a company of travellers from Phoenicia,an ancient empire in Asia.
ofiering silks and ornaments in exchange for the skins of beasts, that were almost the only things the poor British had to give.
 The Child's Book of
ALL COUNTRIES

THE HISTORY OF OUR LAND

E have seen what our country is like and have travelled in imagination over
WE all parts of it. But our country has not always been as it is to -day. We
read here what England and Scotland and Ireland and Wales were like when our
grandfathers and grandmothers were children ; when there was not a single mile
of railway in all the land, and only sailing ships at sea ; when there were no
trams, no telegrams, no electric light, and even gas was only just beginning. It
would be strange now to go back to those old times , and we should hardly know
our country if we could see it as it was when the world was seventy years
younger. But farther back still, hundreds of years, a thousand years, and
even farther back , there were people living in these islands. Who were
they ? How did they come here ? What did they do ? The story of these
things is the history of our homeland , which we are now beginning.

ENGLAND IN THE LONG AGO

E
THERstories are some

of which
CONTINUED FROM PAGE 270
we never tire , and
among them are those
that we like to hear when we
sit round the hearth, and the
dancing firelight plays on the
faces of those who are our
home- makers .
“ Tell us again what you did when
you were young, or just one story
more about what granny did when
1 )
she was a little girl," is the eager cry:
As the stories flow on—for father and
-
mother love to tell as much as you
love to hear — the life of the busy
homeland of to -day, with the hum of
its millions of workers, the clang and
roar of its workshops and mills, all
seems to be forgotten, as we step for a
while into the quiet land ofyesterday.
You know the stories ? How grand-
mother, in a large beaver bonnet and
silk pelisse,, went, when a child, to
Ramsgate in a stage- coach ; how she
slept at Canterbury, because the
journey which you now do in two
hours took two days. How she and
grandfather used to enjoy walking bicycles, no railways, no penny post,
about the sweet green fields and no gas. As we listen to the stories of
woods, and resting in strawberry life without all these things,, and how
gardens near the Crystal Palace or
Primrose Hill, where now you see
nothing but rows of houses and shops.
How grandfather took a whole week
in a sailing -boat in rough weather to
travel from London home to Berwick .
If you have a great grandmother who
IB
lived long ago near
any of those large
manufacturing towns
or ports that we
have visited , such as Glasgow ,
Liverpool , Manchester, she can
tell you stories of how rivers
were deepened and widened ,
and docks built ; how villages
grew quickly to be large towns ; how
quiet country lanes became one wide
stretch of factories and cinder -heaps,
crossed and crossed by railway lines
These stories are as wonderful as
those of the magic of the genii who
made palaces appear at will. Our
genii are coal, steam , and machinery.
We are so accustomed to all the
comforts and conveniences in the life
of to -day, with our well -paved, well
kept,, and well-lighted streets,, cheap
and quick means of getting from place
to place and sending messages, that
perhaps we are apt to take them not
all
as a matter of course . But it is
so long ago when there were no tele
phones, no motors, no tubes, no lifts,
no telegrams, no electric light, no
they all came to be, we realise how
times change, and what a contrast
there is between our wonderful world
to - day and the yesterday which
ushered it in .
And what about the times before
this yesterday ? What happened in
6
345
 LOC
-THE CHILD'S BOOK OF COUNTRIES
them ? We can fancy the tide round look across, filled as they are with
our shores rising and falling day after stirring deeds and great changes. But
day, year after year , the wind passing if you wish to peer further back , and
for ever over the tree-tops, now gently, ask who were the very first men who
now roughly ; the sun shining on and lived in the country that is now ours,
on, century after century, lighting up we
must go back through ages of
the waters of rivers and lakes and unknown length to seek them .
colouring
about thethepeople
country
of-the
sides. But? what
past We WHENLKEDDEMEN AND WILD ANIMALS
FROM INTO
know , in x way, that life has been going Perhaps you have noticed how cliffs
on in these British Isles for many have been worn away by the sea, a few
years ; most likely some great names feet in a year, or you have heard of
belonging to them stand out for us. earthquakes in other parts of the world,
We realise, too, as we look about us raising or lowering whole districts ; so
or study pictures, that buildings such you can understand that change is al
as Westminster Abbey, the great ways going on in the shape of the land
cathedrals, the Tower, and many now that rises above the sea. Now, the very
ruined castles and churches scattered oldest things found in this country
all over the country were the work of are some roughly chipped stone tools ,
the men of bygone days. which dropped from the hands of the
We can piece together the story of men who made and used them when this
these days which are beyond the island home of ours was not an island ,
memory of living men by looking care- but was part of the continent now called
fully at the work and relics that have Europe. Wild animals, as well as wild
come down to us from them , and by men, could therefore roam about as they
reading in books and letters the de. pleased , with neither English Channel
scriptions of the times in which their nor Irish Sea , as they are now called , to
writers lived. Often these writers have stop them . The white cliffs we see at
copied into their books extracts from Dover were joined to those at Calais,
the writings of others who lived and and the western parts of what are now
wrote long before themselves. the countries of France and Ireland
WAS HAPPENING IN OUR showed an unbroken front to the great
WHAT
HOMELAND 2,000 YEARS AGO ? western ocean . You can judge of the
By these means we can follow a size and strength of the wild animals
written history of this country of ours who left their bones among us by visit
back and back for nearly two thousand ing the Natural History Museum , where
years ; and it is by this written history you can find those of the huge woolly
that we know what happened through mammoth elephants, of tigers - one of
the centuries which we mark A.D. These whom has left the mark of his sabre
letters stand for Anno Domini, the tooth on the bones he gnawed - of
year of the Lord ; we count our years , bears , lions, reindeer.
as they pass, from the date of the E FIRST TOOLS THAT THE
birth of Christ, 1908 years ago. THEFIRST WORKMEN USED
The years before His birth we mark The poor, rough tools, shaped like a
B.C. , before Christ. Now, if you ask pear, found in the gravel beds or drift
how many centuries there were before of old rivers , are ranged in numbers
Christ, this is what no one can tell round the upper shelves in the Prehis
you . The great earth - ball on which toric Room in the British Museum ; it
we live has been journeying round the is called prehistoric because the times
sun --once round makes one year ; a to which they belong were before written
hundred times round makes one hundred history began. The owners of these tools
years, or a century - for thousands of looked out on a Thames stretching from
centuries. No one can say how many, the heights of Hampstead and Highgate
for no one knows when the earth first to those of South London . What became
started on the yearly journey, nor of the Drift men , or the Cave men , who
when men first appeared on its surface. followed , we do not know. The Cave
Perhaps you may think the twenty men's tools are better made and in
centuries which hold our country's greater variety ; there are harpoons to
written history a long enough time to catch fish , arrow -heads to shoot birds,
346
 WHEN GRANDMOTHER WAS A LITTLE GIRL

FUNCH AND JUDY IN THE STREET OF AN ENGLISH VILLAGE IN THE DAYS OF LONG AGO

A COACH IN THE FLOODS, SHOWING THE DIFFICULTY OF TRAVELLING SIXTY YEARS AGO

If
THE KIND OF SCHOOL GRANDMOTHER WENT TO . DRAWN BY THOMAS WEBSTER, R.A.
When grandmother was a little girl there were no railway trains in England, and people travelled in great
coaches drawn by horses. It took some days to get irom York to London, and travelling was not only slow , but
tincomfortable. The middle picture shows how difficult travel was in times of flood . The bottom picture shows
us the kind of school grandmother went to in the days when there were no fine schools such as now. The
cop picture shows the happy side of village life in grandmother's early days, when Punch and Judy came
round, and old and young people came out together to see the show which brought them such good fun,
347
 THE CHILD'S BOOK OF COUNTRIES
and bone needles to sew skins
together, besides the sharp pear- shaped
weapons for defence or for hunting .
The most interesting things the Cave
men left behind are their drawings and
carvings of the animals they saw before
them ; the great long-haired mammoth
ing, the oxen feeding, are allsketched , T SHINE ON THESE "Times
from nature. Many specimens of these
earliest drawings are found in the caves
of England and France.
The earth-ball rolled steadily on
through space year after year, century
after century, and at last , as the ground
sank in some places and rose in others,
the sea rushed in over the lower levels
and formed what is now called the North
Sea, the English Channel, and the Irish
Sea, and Father Thames shrank to a mere
shadow of his former great size . After
this men appeared again in this country
from over the sea now that it was an
island ; many different tribes followed
each other, the new - comers pushing
the others northwards and westwards,
even across to Ireland and to Scotland .
NECKLACES THAT WERE WORN IN ENG- the lands of Europe and Africa. The
LAND THOUSANDS OF YEARS AGO
As we look back to the far - off times
of these settlers we find them very dark .
They have left us no names , no writing.
Perhaps the great stones set up at Stone-
henge were used by them as a temple ;
perhaps they were set up about seven-
teen centuries before Christ . Seventeen
centuries B.C. and twenty centuries A.D.
makes thirty-seven centuries - 3,700
years- ago !
The long and round grave-mounds,
called barrows, still to be seen in many
parts of the country are also believed
to belong to the peoples of these times .
In them are found skeletons and burnt
bones, together with the rougher cups
and vessels you can see in the museum
below the Drift and Cave men's tools .
They are headed “ Contents of British
barrows. ” Sometimes a little child had a
whole barrow to itself ; sometimes many
people are buried together. The orna
ments , brooches, and necklaces found in
them will interest us ; also the tools of
bronze found often in spots where they
are supposed to have been made. In
these early metal factories lumps of
copper and tin , of which the bronze is
made , often lie side by side with old
tools to be remelted and made into new
TORTTITO
348
ones . Then there are iron tools which
came into use as time went on and fresh
people came to settle in various parts.
We get a few scattered beams of light
on these times from the visits of some
travellers , who came chiefly to look after
the tin found in Cornwall and elsewhere .
e GREAT LIGHT THAT BEGAN TO
When they reached home they did
what many travellers do to -day : they
wrote books about what they had seen.
These were copied into other books, and
in this way we hear of the barns in which
corn was stored , the rich , sweet drink
that the natives offered them , and so on .
A few centuries later, in the first century
B.C. , a great light suddenly lit up the
country in which we have been groping.
By its help we can now see plainly the
people who lived in it. They were the
children's children of the tribes who
settled there from time to time. We call
them Britons, and their country is called
Britain . Now, whence came the light ?
Let us take our map and find the
Mediterranean Sea — the sea between
s nations who lived on the shores of this
great sea were very different from the
Britons and other tribes living in the
islands set in the wild Atlantic. They
traded with each other ; some were very
learned ; some produced the most beau
tiful temples and sculpture, as well as
the bravest men , the world has ever
seen . They all believed , however, that
the part of the world on which they
lived round the great sea was the whole
of the world . They did not know that
the earth is a ball , on which are the great
continents of the Old World, as well as
those of North and South America in the
New. As we have read in the CHILD'S
STORY OF THE EARTH, on page 8, they
imagined the earth to be fat, with
a great river running round it , and ex
traordinary were the tales they told of
the wild and savage people who lived on
the " edge.”
" HE GREAT
THE ROMAN SOLDIERS WHO
BROUGHT THE LIGHT TO ENGLAND
These tales they generally made
up ; but soʻnetimes, as we have seen,
travellers went to see for themselves.
Their tales were often wonderful, too !
Now , in the century just before the
birth of Christ, one of these Mediter
ranean nations had succeeded in
 sun !

THE COMING OF THE ROMANS INTO ENGLAND

TERZODULODODO
MEUME
DOUTUUDEENOORZITETE
um

THE LANDING OF THE ROMAN SOLDIERS ON THE COAST OF KENT, 1 800 YEARS AGO

A KENTISH HILL WHERE THE ANCIENT BRITONS MADE A LAST STAND AGAINST THE ROMANS,
Julius Cæsar, the great founder of the power of Rome, came to England 56 years before Jesus Christ was born.
He did not conquer England ; he visited it with his army and described it in books when he got back to Rome. A
hundred years later theRomans sent an army to take England, and the Ancient Britons, after driving them back, at
last yielded, in a battle which took place on the hill shown in the bottom picture, at Hextable, in Kent, and, little by
little, they gained ground, until they settled down and ruled in Britain . Three hundred years later, when the great
power of Rome passed away, the Roman soldiers were called back, and Britons ruled their own land once again.
TY

349
 THE CHILD'S BOOK OF COUNTRIEScouturistica
conquering all the others. so that it Some helped the soldiers to drain the
was master of the whole of the then
known world .
This was the Roman nation , and a
great Roman soldier and ruler who
stands out in this first century B.C.
was the light -bearer.
As we study the calm , determined
face of Julius Cæsar - his is the first bust
in the gallery of Roman portraits
in the British Museum - we shall find
out by degrees what made him so
strong and so powerful. He could make
himself do what he believed to be best,
as well as he could control others.
He was always at work, conquering
and settling his conquests, looking after
his soldiers, and yet he found time to
write books about his travels, which
our schoolboys read now when they
begin Latin . He gives many particulars
about the Britons and their relations ,
the Gauls , whom he had just conquered.
He did not conquer Britain ; he visited
it with his army two summers running,
and described it to the civilised Roman
world , who kept it in mind till a hundred
years later . Then they were able to
send enough soldiers to meet the warriors
with faces stained blue to terrify them ,
to disperse the chariots with scythes
on their axles , to take the hill-camps
fortified with stakes and logs of wood,
and in time to subdue all the country
of the plains.
WHEN BRITONS ANDSIDE
ROMANS
Little by little , as the soldiers, who
had better arms and had been better
trained, gained ground, many of the
Britons were swept further and further
west to the high moors of Cornwall,
to the mountains of Wales and Cum-
berland . It is to these parts we turn ,
especially to Wales, to find the people
whose forefathers were mainly Ancient
Britons, and to find echoes of the lan
guage spoken by them . It was here, too,
that the old religion of the Britons, with
the white -robed Druids, lasted longest .
Scattered all over the country, but
chiefly in Wales,, we find place-names
that come from British words meaning
a wood, a rock, a plain , an island, a
waterfall , and many others more or
less connected with the soil . Numbers
of the Britons settled down , as time
went on , among their Roman masters .
from whom they learnt many things.
350
marshes and cut down trees, and to
make the fine roads which crossed
the country, and are still a pleasure to
use, so well and straight are they laid.
CEA: QUEEN OF ENGLAND,
BOADI
AND THE BRAVE CHIEF CARACTACUS
Two great British names stand out
in this first century A.D. Perhaps
you know the statue of Boadicea ,
queen of one of the British tribes, which
stands on the Embankment, by West
minster Bridge ? She resisted the
Romans , who had treated her very
cruelly, with all her might, and our
picture shows her well in her war car,
urging on her soldiers to fight .
Caractacus was another great British
chief. He not only lost everything, in
spite of his brave resistance, but was
also taken prisoner to Rome with his
wife and children . He did not behave
at all as a frightened captive, but
proudly, as a free-born king, said to
& 6
the Roman emperor : “ You fight to
gain the whole world , and to make
everybody your slaves. I fought to
keep my own land, and for freedom .”
For nearly four hundred years Britain
was part of the Roman Empire. Great
generals like Agricola came to push the
conquests even further : he built a
line of forts between the Forth and the
Clyde to keep out the wild mountaineers
of the north. Are you thinking of that
deep, wide valley as it is to -day, with
coal and iron mines, factories and ports,
fine farms, and thousands of workers ?
Emperors came and went ; you can
see their faces in the Roman Portrait
Gallery in the British Museum , and
may read their stories of where they
stayed, and how they built walls to
keep out the fierce Picts and Scots
from Scotland and Ireland,
MEMORIES OF THE TIME WHEN
THE ROMANS RULED OUR LAND
The remains of the wall between the
Solway and the Tyne are still to be seen ;
a railway runs in that direction now,
and the name is still before us when we
speak of Wallsend coal, found at the
end of the Roman “ vallum ." Other
Roman names on our maps still show
66
where the cæstra,” or camps, were
raised ta house the soldiers at Chester,
Lancaster, Leicester. A “ colony
was settled in Lincoln , and many
places are called Street, from their
TWO BRAVE CHIEFS OF THE EARLY BRITONS

bi G
Boadicea was one of the first queens of the English people. She fought the Romans in the first century and
led her people in battle ; but the brave queen was defeated, and it is said that rather than be taken prisoner she
slew herself. This statue of her stands at the foot of Westminster Bridge, facing the Houses of Parliament, in
London, and on it are the fine lines “ Regions Cæsar never knew , Thy posterity shall sway " ; meaning that
Boadicea's country should grow greater than Rome This has come true foi Britain is now greater than Rome.

Caractacus was a great British chief living in the first century after Christ - about 1,800 years ago. He lost
everything in fighting to drive out the Romans, and was taken prisoner to Rome with his wife and children.
There he was broug before the Roman emperor, as shown in this picture, but he was not afraid . “ You fight
to make everybody your slaves, " he told the emperor who ruled almost all the world ; " but I fight for freedom ."
351
 Cara MALLORCULES
-THE CHILD'S BOOK OF COUNTRIESSaataristaurant
>)
position on ornear the great " strata , ”
or roads:
Stratford is an example of
this .
The thousands of soldiers who came
during these centuries from every part
of the empire—the British lads were
sent just as far away_left many
remains on the soil of the country in really an island.
which they worked so hard. Many of PIRAT ES FROM OVERTHE
these remains are now in the great TO
museums of the country , especially Some time, perhaps, in the third century
in the cities founded by the Romans-
in London, York , Colchester, Win- give up worshippingd the the gods of their
chester, and Bath . There are the altars fathers, and listene to
they set up to their gods ; their weapons
and armour ; the tablets to show
long and faithful service, which gave
them their discharge from the army ;
the memorial stones put up to honour
their memories .
Many treasures of money and
jewellery, perhaps buried in a hurry
when danger arose , and never re
claimed, have been found among the
foundations of cities, along the line
of the walls, and on the sites of the
beautiful country villas. These were
built in the sunniest and healthiest posi-
tions, generally with a fine view, amidst
gardens with fountains and statues
IFE IN THE CITY THAT LIES
L ' BENEATH OUR FEET
We can well picture the life in
these villas, as we look at the fine
pavements , the shoes of the ladies
lamps, writing
and children, the lamps,
materials, mirrors, and other treasures
found buried amongst their ruins.
Some of the pottery and glass were made
in Britain , for the Britons were quick
to learn, but most of the finest came
through London .
London rose to be an important city
in Roman times . Some twenty feet
below the pavements of the City of
to-day, so thronged with busy feet, we
find the remains of its greatness. The
strong walls built for its protection ran ,
to some extent , on the lines of our
Underground Railway . Perhaps you
have noticed how many stations on >)
it have the word “ gate ” in their
names-Aldgate, Moorgate, and so on ,
and from these gates in the walls
started the great roads which passed
over the country-something like the
great main lines of railways at the pre-
sent time—to connect the City with
their stations at Lincoln , York ,Chester,
352
Bath, Chichester, and many others..
Traders , therefore, found it аa convenient
spot to bring the goods they had for
sale, especially as there was then, and
for many years after, a short cut for
their ships from the Channel by the
streams that made the Isle of Thanet
SEA CAME
IN
>
Romans, as well as Britons, began to
preaching
of Christian missionaries ; So there
presently arose British churches and
bishops. The country improved in
many ways — more corn was grown,
trade increased, and it seemed as if
Roman law and order, and the liking
for fine and comfortable lives , had all
come to stay.
But this was not to be . In Britain
itself troubles thickened as the Picts
and Scots became more and more
daring, and pirates from over the sea
landed on the east and south coasts .
Year by year , as the spring came round ,
fresh boatloads landed on the most
desirable spots they could find, and
took by force whatever they needed.
In other parts of the great empire
troubles thickened too, as fierce tribes
poured over its distant borders and
made their way towards the beautiful
and wonderful capital itself. The only
thing to be done, as the empire grew
weaker and weaker, was to give up the
most distant provinces and recall the
soldiers who held them to defend those
nearer its mighty heart.
THLEETHE
ROMANS LOST THEIR POWER & LEFI
BRITONS TO RULE THEMSELVES
So they had to leave the walls
they had built , the cities and camps,
with the theatres and baths, the
castles—such as those at Richborough
and Reculvers, which guarded the
way to London when Thanet was
full isled .” There must have been
niany a sad good -bye, for often
Romans had British wives and rela
tions , and the departure of those
who had helped to make the country
so prosperous must have sown despair
in the hearts of those left behind to cope
with the difficulties and dangers as best
they might . They had so long been
taken care of that they had forgotten
LUDUR DOUX
 CERAMAXICA

Olsen
ROMANS BUILDING A WALL ACROSS ENGLAND

Mooncommimo
TEXTIL

LAGI
con

THE ROMANS AT WORK ON THE WALL THAT KEPT TH PICTS AND SCOTS OUT OF ENGLAND

THE REMAINS OF THE ROMAN WALL ACROSS ENGLAND AS SEEN TO -DAY IN CUMBERLAND
The Romans, when they ruled in England, 1,800 years ago, built two great walls in England and Scotland to
keep out the men who were always fighting with them, and the walls are still to be seen in parts of the North of
England. The wall across the North of England stretched 70 miles, from the mouth of the River Tyne to the mouth
of the River Solway ; the wall in Scotland was smaller, reaching from the Firth of Clyde to the Firth of Forth.
EV 353
 THE CHILD'S BOOK OF COUNTRIES.comarca
how to make plans for themselves and of the heathen new-comers, if they
fight altogether. could not manage to stay on in their
Listen to a letter they sent to Rome, farms as owners .
asking for soldiers to come back and We want to find out all we can about
help them ; it is so sad that it is called these new -comers, for it is they who
the groans of the Britons.” “ The are the forefathers of our race. Great
barbarians drive us to the sea ; the sea changes have taken place, as many
drives us back to the barbarians . We generations have been born, have lived
are either slain or drowned.” Many and died , during the fifteen centuries
sad relics of this time are found in the between their time and ours . But still ,
caves, where families took refuge when as a nation, we keep up a family like
their homes were destroyed. Thus it ness , and in many ways take after our
was that the light shed over Britain great-great-grandfathers. Many of us
by the presence of the civilised Romans are as fair -haired and blue- eyed as they
went out as the last boats carried away were ; we love the sea and adventure,
the last soldiers across the Channel . though in a quieter way, as much as
THE RUINED HOUSE OF A ROMAN GOVERNOR , HIDDEN UNDER A PLOUGHED FIELD IN KENT
nom

OT

Under our feet lie the remains of Roman England. We see in the museums parts of beautiful floors that have
been dug up from the ruins of houses in which the Romans lived in England nearly 2,000 years ago. This
picture shows the ruins of a Roman governor's house buried in a field on the banks of the River Darenth , in Kent.
The wild Picts and Scots burst over they did . Half the words in our lan
the now undefended wall , and burnt guage - all the everyday words - come
what they could not carry away back from the speech in which they shouted
to the hills ; the sea-rovers , who had directions to each other as they shipped
been coming year after year to settle their oars and grounded their boats on
and stay, came ever thicker and faster. these shores .
They burnt the villas and towns, Besides all this, and much more,
destroyed the camps, starved London most of our laws , our ways of
to death because trade was stopped, and governing, our customs , have grown,
provisions could no longer come in by through the centuries , from those they
the land and water -gates from the brought with them , together with the
roads and the river . passionate love of freedom which we
Once more Britons had to flee to the inherit from their old homes across the
mountains in the west , and those who North Sea .
were left behind became the servants The next story of our country is on 509.
354
 The Child's Book of
BIBLE STORIES

THE BOOK OF GENESIS

HERE is one thing which interests everybody : How was the world made ?
THEWhat was the beginning of this wonderful earth ? The Bible answers this
question in a beautiful story which is more full of mystery and beauty than any
other story in the world. The Book of Genesis is one of the oldest complete
books in the world, and its story of the creation of the universe is the first
story of the Creation that we have got. Genesis is a book which scholars in
every nation read with reverence and wonder – because of its great age,
because of its great beauty , and because it is the first book which tells us about
God . You must remember that before this book was written other nations
believed in gods and goddesses, in monsters and demons, and did not understand
that there is only one God, who is the loving Father of us all. We read here, also ,
the story of Cain and Abel and the story of Noah's Ark. It is in Genesis
that we read the story of the great Flood, and why it came upon the earth .

THE BIBLE STORY OF CREATION

Thethat
THE Biblein tells
the be
us CONTINUED FROM PAGE 246
ginning there was a
great darkness, and that there
was ' nothing which had any
shape or form. Try to think
of this black darkness and this
dreadful emptiness ; everywhere,
darkness · and nothingness. There
were no stars, no lovely sun , no wind
blowing through trees, no waves
breaking into foam at the foot of
the cliffs. There was no earth , no
heaven , no light, no heat and cold-
only darkness, silence , and emptiness
everywhere .
But God was there, and the Bible
tells us that the Spirit of God moved
upon the face of the waters which
filled the whole of the shapeless uni-
verse, like the ether , the mysterious
stuff that is in all space. Out of this
strange element God created
heavens and the earth .
The first words breathed by God ,
the Bible tells us , were those won-
derful words
“ Let there be light.”
The first thing God wished to do was
to send away the great blackness . So
God spoke , and in speaking He did
two things. He broke the awful
silence that reigned throughout the
world , and He created Light.
Then the Bible tells us that God
called the light Day, and the dark-
ness , which visits the earth when
the earth turns her face away from
the sun , He called
Night. This was the
beginning of the acts
of creation . Then the Bible
tells that God divided the
waters which filled the great
universe, setting Heaven in the
midst of it . Then the water which was
under heaven He gathered into one
place and called them the Seas of
the Earth , and the dry land appeared
shining and glad out of the midst
of the seas, and God called the dry
land Earth .
Then came the grass springing out
of the dry land, and many strange
and lovely herbs , and trees throwing
their shadows on the grass. God
made the herb and the fruit tree ,
each with its own seed, so that
they could sow themselves and
gradually cover the earth with beauty
the and joy.
Then God filled the sky above the
earth with stars , and He gave the
sun power to rule the day and the
moon power to rule the night.
And now , this story of creation
tells us, came a greater wonder still .
Out of the deep waters upon the
earth God called forth Life. He spoke,
and from the water issued living
things that could move and utter
sound, and swim and fly - tiny and
unseen things, millions of them ; huge
and mighty things,thousands of them ;
so that the whole earth , the water, the
land , and the air became filled with life.
o
355
 THE CHILD'S BOOK OF BIBLE STORIES...ORDEREDAGER
And then , finally, we read in this of a serpent and glided into the
Bible story of creation, God said : Garden of Eden , and sought out Eve
“ Let us make man in our image, while she was away from her husband's
after our likeness ; and let him have side , and suggested to her that she
dominion over the fish of the sea , should eat of the fruit . . And, although
and over the fowl of the air , and Eve did not at once obey the Evil One,
over the cattle, and over all the she argued with him , instead of driving
earth, and over every creeping thing )
him from her. So the temptation to
that creepeth upon the earth. ' eat the fruit stayed in her mind ;
FIRST SIN COMMITTED BY MAN she allowed herself to think about
THEAGAINST GOD
it ; and at last the temptation was too
Then came forth Man and great for her. She ate the fruit , and
Woman , whom God created in His took it to Adam , her husband , and
own likeness , and into whose nostrils persuaded him also to do this for
He had breathed the hreath of life . bidden thing.
And God set this man , whom we Then the Bible tells us Adam and
call Adam , and this woman , whom Eve heard the voice of the Lord God
we call Eve , in dominion over all the " walking in the garden in the cool of
earth , to rule it , to conquer it , and to the day," and they were afraid and
enjoy it . hid themselves in the trees . And God
How beautiful is this picture of God said because they had done evil they
making the wonderful earth for Adam must suffer. But the punishment God
and Eve and their children to enjoy sent them was not a cruel punishment.
in happiness and peace ! The animals He made them go out into the world
came to them when they were called ; to toil for their existence .
the birds sang over their heads as OD HAS GIVEN MAN AN OPPORTUNITY
they walked ; and the fishes came to Gº!
TO GROW BETTER AND PURER
the side of the lake to watch them as Now, though work is hard, it is yet
they stood in the sunlight. Do we not far better than idleness ; and in setting
feel that we should like to live in such a
happy world for ever and ever ? man to till the earth , God has provided
him with the opportunity of making
But the Bible tells us that this happy himself better and kinder and purer.
Paradise did not last. It tells us a
So that when we see pictures of Adam
strange story which fills our eyes with and Eve going out with tears and
tears that man should have been so
foolish and so ungrateful to God . And
shame from their beautiful garden of
Innocence, we must remember that
this is that strange story which the over them the face of God is smiling
Bible tells us .
with love and pity, knowing that His
God had given man everything on children shall one day return to their
the earth except one thing. There Garden and to Him .
was one thing which man was not
to do. If man did this one thing he THE SEVEN DAYS.
would lose all his happiness and all his The first day God created light
peace . And man did do this very thing. And made the day and made the night.
HOWMAN FELL INTO TEMPTATION IN
THE GARDEN The second day of His intent
The Bible tells us that this one thing He made the heavenly firmament.
man was not to do was to eat of the The third day came both land and sea,
fruit growing on a certain tree in the And grass, and herbs, and bush, and tree .
Garden of Eden . There were a thousand
other fruits of which man might eat, The fourth day sun and moon had birth ,
but this one was forbidden . It was And stars that twinkle over earth .
God's test of man's love . If man
The fifth day, from the waves of strife,
loved God he would not eat of this God called great creatures into life.
tree ; if he did not love God he would
disobey. So , you see, this was God's And in the sixth day of His plan
test of man's love . In His own image God made man .
Well, we read how the wicked Then when His work the Lord had blest
Tempter, the Evil One , took the form The seventh day He gave to rest.
356
 THE STORY OF CAIN AND ABEL
wo sons were born to Adam and Eve . talk becamean argument. In the midst
TwoThe first was named Cain ; the of the argument, rage suddenly seized
second , Abel . Cain was a gardener ; upon Cain. He felt his brother to be a
Abel was a shepherd. better man than he. He knew that he
The two brothers heard from their himself was inferior . The thought was
father and mother about God, and they more than his wicked temper could bear.
felt how good it was to worship the great with aa wild anddesperatefury he sprang
Creator of the earth. But there was a upon his brother , struck him , and
difference between the characters of killed him .
these two brothers. Cain , as he dug the In an instant the voice of God sounded
soil and tended his plants, thought of in his soul :
God as a great and terrible King. “ Where is Abel, thy brother ? ”
Abel, as he wandered through the valley “ I know not,” he cried back . Am
with his flocks, thought of God as I my brother's keeper ?
kind Father. Cain was half afraid of But the Voice in his soul continued :
God ; Abel loved his Maker. “ What hast thou done ? "
IE WAY IN WHICH CAIN BEGAN TO And Cain knew that he had done
THE HATE HIS BROTHER murder. The Voice spoke again , and
Now , the way these two men wor- spoke of another voice which Cain him
shipped God was by sacrifice. That is self could hear.
to say, they gave up something which The voice of thy brother's blood
was theirs, and offered it to God . In crieth unto Me from the ground.”
our day people give up money for God, Cain knew then the horror of his crime .
or proud positions, or pleasures, and He had done something which could not
serve Him humbly by helping the sick , be undone. A moment before Abel had
the sorrowful, and the needy. Cain gave been a living man ; now he lay dead and
up some of his fruits and Abel gave up still . Cain could never restore him .
some of his flocks. With a bitter cry of agony he called
But Cain's sacrifice was made grudg- upon God :
66

ingly. It was a sulky gift . He gave My punishment is greater than I

because he was afraid not to give. can bear.”
Abel , with purer heart and nobler soul, CRIME TOLD
THE FIRSTOUT IN THE BIBLE
gave of his very best to God , and gave SELFISHNESS
cheerfully, because he loved . He went forth a fugitive. Henceforth
And when Cain Saw that Abel's there could be no rest for him ; no hours
sacrifice was better than his, instead of peace and contentment ; no days of
of making his own like to it , he hated happiness and joy. On his soul was the
Abel. He became what we call jealous, mark of murder . In his mind was the
or envious. voice of his brother's blood . In his heart
He would think bitterly of Abel as he was despair.
dug in his garden or walked home We are not told whether Cain ever
through the fields at sunset . He would recovered peace of mind . He was sorry
hate him for being better than himself . for his sin . Whether he stopped at being
SINFULNESS OF CAIN AND THE sorry, or whether from that moment
THEDEATH OF ABEL he strove to become loving , tender, and
And so long did he dwell on this angry unselfish , we do not know. But enough
thought that at last he could think of of his story is told for us to see that
nothing else. Directly he thought of envy is one of the most dangerous
his herbs , his thoughts flew to Abel ; and horrid of all wicked moods.
directly he thought of God, his thoughts The first crime recorded in God's Word
flew to Abel . Eating and working, is the awful crime of murder, and that
resting and sleeping, his thoughts crime was caused by exactly the same
fastened themselves like a swarm of spirit which makes people to-day wish
angry wasps on the beautiful and noble to be richer, grander, cleverer, and
character of his brother Abel. prouder than their neighbours. God's
One day they met in the fields. The law is that we shall be unselfish . Envy
two brothers fell into talk . Soon the is selfishness .
357
 EA
OF RT
E H
CE
FA
THE
TH
OV ER RER
W
A
, AN
CA
OF INDE
PU
TH NI
E SHMEN

358
TODOX

.2
 ALOT

OF
END
THE :
FLOOD · RETURNED
THAT
DOVE
THE
RECEIVING
NOAH

359
Messrs
&
Brion
C,.Bthe
by
is
Louvre
from o.
raun
lément
photograph
nd
aGustave
Paris
at
bin
painting
yow
nThis
reproduced
picture
 OCERCUT

THE BIBLE STORY OF NOAH'S

NOAH'S ARK
It issad to read in the Biblethat in, God Himself closed the great door
and women became so wicked men
that upon them .
God was sorry He had made the earth . Then the springs of the earth and
The Bible tells us that God looked the fountains of the sea burst their
at the way in which men and women bounds , the windows of the heavens
were living, and determined to punish were opened , and the water covered the
them by sending a highest mountains.
great food . But And in the flood the
God remembered wicked perished.
that on earth there But God remem
was one noble and bered Noah. The
saintly man , named rain ceased, the
Noah . Noah , we waters passed away,
are told, was just and the sunlight
and perfect, and the entered the ark .
Bible says that , for Then Noah let a
the sake of this one raven fly loose from
upright man , God the window of the
saved the earth from ark, and it did
destruction . not come back to
He called Noah , him . Noah then
we are told, and sent out a dove ,
bade him build a but the dove flew
great ark out of terrified above the
gopher wood, with waters , and re
rooms in it for his turned to the win
wife and his sons , dow of the ark .
and his sons' wives , After seven days
and with one great more Noah sent
window in it , and the dove out again ,
with a mighty door and this time it
in the side . This returned bearing in
great ark was to be its beak a leaf of
covered with pitch olive . Noah then
inside and outside , knew that the earth
and was to be built was dry, and when
so well that it he again sent the
should have room dove forth it did
for two of every not return .
living thing upon Then with great
the earth , with food joy Noah came out
for the animals and from the ark with his
for Noah and his family. They led
family . the animals down
Noah obeyed God, from the ark on to
and when the warn the dry land, and
ing came he called set the birds free,
to the ark two of and on an altar of
every living thing stones they offered
upon the earth- THE DOVE THAT RETURNED NOT AGAIN thanks to God. So
animals, birds , and From the painting by G. F. Watts, R.A. God was pleased
insects ; and, laying Photographedby F. Hollyer with Noah , and set
in a great quantity of food , he him a bow of light in the sky after the
self, and his wife and his children, rain . That was the first rainbow , and
with all these other living things, it is beautiful to think that God set it
entered the ark . The Bible tells in its in the sky to tell the world that He
story that , when they were all entered would never again destroy the earth .
Unfun
360
 TODOLORE
THE FIRST DAYS
* HE Ark rested in a place where it was
THE easy for the sons of Noah to spread
themselves over the earth. This was
the intention of God. He wanted men
to cultivate the whole earth , and so He
brought the Ark to anchor at a spot
where they could most easily cross
into all lands. But the sons of Noah
settled down in one place, and they
built a great city, and in the midst of
the city they erected a vast tower.
THE BUILDING OF THE TOWER OF BABEL
TheAND THE CONFUSION OF TONGUES
Then God saw that they were deter-
mined to disobey Him , and so He
visited the foolish city, and caused the
people to speak in different languages, so
that no one could understand the other.
U
So the Lord scattered them abroad from
thence upon the face of all the earth : and
they left off to build the city. Therefore is
the name of it called Babel , because the Lord
did there confound the language of all the
earth ; and from thence did the Lord scatter
them abroad upon the face of all the earth .”
But even after God had made a
mock of this foolish Tower of Babel,
men continued to stumble and fail, and
behave like infants learning to walk.
They fell into what we call “ idolatry.”
Instead of praying to God, they made
images of many gods and prayed to
them. They prayed to the sun because
it warmed them . They prayed to fire
because they were afraid of it .
God wished them to understand that
everything they saw with their eyes
the sun, fire, animals, and the whole
world — was the work of His hands.
He wanted them to understand that
the sun only warmed them and made
the earth beautiful because He had
ordained it. More than everything else,
He wanted man not to be a coward,
but a strong, intelligent creature, trust-
ing in the power of the great Creator,
and setting himself to get dominion
over the earth .
NIMR OD, THE MIGHTY HUNTER, WHO
WENT FORTH TO CONQUER THE WORLD
At this time there lived in the world
a mighty man named Nimrod, who
obeyed God in going forth to conquer
the world . He was a great hunter, and
men feared him and obeyed him.
He gathered people about him , and
went across the world founding cities,
361
IC
OF EVIL
and he is the first monarch that ever
existed, for men made him their king.
But Nimrod's empire was poisoned
by idolatry ; for, although he built
mighty cities, the people who dwelt
in them were weak and cowardly. They
made images and prayed to them.
They were superstitious and worshipped
certain animals.
God could not be pleased with such
a wicked people. He had ordained
that men should have dominion over
the earth. He had purposed that men
should count the stars, weigh the suns,
harness the great waters to their
service, and should control the mighty
forces of steam and electricity. How
could He hope for great engineers , great
physicians, great astronomers, and great
explorers from a people who trembled
at a shadow, grovelled in the dust before
images, and even worshipped animals ?
All men at that time were not so
sunken in folly and wickedness . There
was one, at least, who had the soul of a
hero. This was that great and splendid
spirit called Job. Job's story is told
late in the Old Testament, but it is
possible that he lived in the evil
time between the Flood and the call
of Abraham .
"HE HAPPY
THEOF MEN
DAYS OF JOB, A GREAT LORD
AND OF LANDS
Job was a rich man. He was a great
lord, the master of servants, the owner
of much land, the farmer of many
flocks and herds. In addition, he was a
happy man , living cheerfully in the
midst of his family, enjoying life with
a good appetite, and praising God , who
had blessed him with so much happi
ness and comfort .
There were, no doubt, many who said :
“ It is easy for this great lord to believe
in God , but how would it be with him
if he became poor and miserable like
us ? Where would his faith be then ?
It is easy enough to be good when you
are rich ." This is one of the oldest and
most foolish sneers.
But God tried Job. A storm arose
from the desert, and sweeping down
a house in which Job's children were
assembled, crushed them to death.
Then a storm destroyed his flocks ;
robbers made away with his camels,
his oxen, and his asses ; and upon
 -THE CHILD'S BOOK OF BIBLE STORIES
himself there fell the terrible and aw-
ful doom of leprosy. His wife hastened
from him ; his friends withdrew them
selves ; the poor, stricken man was left
alone, deserted and cursed , smitten
with sores from the sole of his foot even
unto his crown , and childless . In
this appalling ruin Job uttered words
which we sayto this day when we bury
our dead : The Lord gave , and the
Lord hath taken away ; blessed be
the Name of the Lord .”
' S COMFORTERS, WHO CAME TO see
JOHN
HIM FROM FAR COUNTRIES
But Job was not perfect , and when
three of his old friends journeyed to
see him from far countries , and com-
forted him by saying he must have
sinned to bring this calamity upon his
head (such are called Job's comforters ),
he suddenly rebelled against his doom ,
and cursed the day that he was born .
In the midst of the argument which
followed between Job and his com-
forters, the poor, smitten man re-
gained some of his faith , and uttered
many noble words concerning the pro-
vidence of God . But finally God showed
Job the whole truth of the matter .
He showed that no man can judge God ;
first, because no man existed when God
created the heavens and the earth,
and therefore does not know His pur.
poses, and, secondly, because no man
has passed through the gates of Death,
and therefore does not know what
God has prepared for us in the endless
eges of eternity. A man can only judge
a tiny part of a great whole.
MIGHTY WORDS OF COMFORT THAT
THECAME TO THE PATIENT MAN
These are in
some stones ; they were afraid of dead bodies;
unequalled allofthe
the mighty
books words
of the, they actually made gods of animals:.
world, which came to Job from God :
“ Who is this that darkeneth counsel by
words without knowledge ?
66
Where wast thou when I laid the founda
when the morn .
tions of the earth ? .
ing stars sang together, and all the sons of
God shouted for joy ?
“ Have the gates of death been opened
unto thee ? Or hast thou seen the doors of
the shadow of death ?
“ Canst thou bind the sweet influences of
Pleiades, or loose the bands of Orion ?
“ Knowest thou the ordinances of heaven ?
Canst thou set the dominion thereof in the
earth ?
362
10
Hast thou given the horse strength ?
Hast thou clothed his neck with thunder ?
“ Doth the hawk fly by thy wisdom ?
Doth the eagle mount up at thy command ?
Shall he that contendeth with the
Almighty instruct Him ? He that reproveth
God , let him answer it ! " 1
Then Job answered, and said :
“ Behold , I am vile : what shall I answer
Thee ? I will lay mine hand upon mymouth .”
So when God had tried Job, and had
made him humble and obedient, He
blessed him again, and Job lived in
honour and health, praising God all
his days.
Not only is the story of Job one of
the greatest in the world , but it is the
story of the first faithful man in the
history of the race . Very probably
Job lived in the dark and evil days
after the Flood . He lived at a time when
men were cowardly , superstitious, dis
obedient , and foolish . He lived at
a mankind were likely
time when
to perish through sin and ignorance,
and he is a great hero. But he
was not the man chosen by God to
raise the human race from the slough
of sin, and help it forward once more on
its path of clean and healthy progress.
HE FOUNDER OF A GREAT NATION AND
There was another and a greater man ,
a man whose title is sublime, for he is
called “ The Friend of God ," and his
story we shall read at another time.
But we should pause here a moment
to consider those early days of our
history . God wanted men to advance
and develop their reason. They dis
obeyed, and lived wicked lives of
pleasure. They prayed to stocks and
There are people still in the world ,
after all these thousands of years,
doing exactly the same thing. Then God
chose a man who trusted in Him-a man
who worshipped, loved, and trusted
the invisible Creator of the visible
world , and God said :
" I will make of thee a great nation , and
make thy name great , and in thee shall all the
families of the earth be blessed. "
It is from this man , the friend of God ,
that we ourselves are descended , we
and all those nations who advance
reverently in knowledge and faith.
The next Bible Stories begin on page 471 .
 The Child's Book of
Its Own Life
WHAT THIS STORY TELLS US

ca
THIS story tells us still more of the way in which a plant lives upon air.
THIS None of us could live without air, but all that we do is to breathe air.
The great secret of the plant is that it can eat air and live upon it. The green
stuff in the plant is made by the sunlight ; it is made where the sunlight strikes
the leaf; and when it is made the green stuff uses the sunlight to do a remarkable
thing. It takes the carbonic acid gas that is in the air and splits it up into two
things - carbon and oxygen. The carbonic acid gas is poison, but the plant splits
it up and makes it into food, not only for itself, but for us. That is what a plant
does with the sunlight, and it is, perhaps, the most perfect use of power in the world .

HOW THE PLANT LIVES ON AIR

IFF wewegosaid
back to what
about the CONTINUED FROM PAGE 250
the plant, there would
be no risk of it poi
plant's breathing, we soning animals, for
shall remember that there would be no
the plant is surrounded by air. 1 animals for it to poison . That
We have seen that this air is the way in which living
contains oxygen, which is a gas, things depend upon each other.
but it also contains many other Now, the great question is : How
gases, for the air we breathe is nothing does the plant manage to make food
else than a mixture of gases. Now for itself out of this carbonic acid
plants, as well as animals, breathe air, gas ? The gas itself is of no use to
but all green plants do also what no the plant , any more than it is to us.
animal can do—they eat air. The We have already seen that the plant
gas in the air which plants eat, or gets rid of it when it breathes, just as
feed upon , is, curiously enough, the we do , and to take it back again as it
same gas as that which the plant is would doubtless kill the plant, just
gives out whilst breathing - carbonic as we should be killed if we went on
acid gas. We have already seen that breathing our own breath --or other
this carbonic acid gas is made up of people's - over and over again.
two parts-carbon and oxygen. Carbon The only way in which the plant
is important not merely because it can get food out of the carbonic acid
makes diamonds and coal and lead gas is to split it up into the two things
pencils, but because it is one of the of which it is made-carbon and
things that are always necessary as part oxygen , to keep the carbon, which is
of the food of living creatures, animal good food, and to give back the oxygen
or vegetable. to the air. This,you see, is exactly
All air contains a small quantity of the opposite of what the plant does
carbonic acid gas, which is partly when it is breathing. Now , the plant
made up of carbon. So far as animals only does this in daylight, because it
are concerned , this gas is a poison. depends upon the sun for its power
If there is any more than only a to do it ; but though it only does
very little in the air, we die, so far this in daylight, whilst it breathes all
are we from being able to make any the time, day and night , yet it breathes
kind of use of it . One of the difficul. so slowly and it does this so quickly,
ties of our life in houses is to keep the when it does do it, that in the long
air fresh — that is to say, to prevent run it takes from the air far more
it from having too much carbonic acid carbon than it gives to the air, and
gas in it . builds up this carbon into its own
But this stuff, which is poison for us body. That is why it grows and how
and for all animals, is food for the it grows ; and a plant goes on growing
plant ; and, if it were not food for all its life, whilst little boys and girls,

2.8
363
 -THE CHILD'S BOOK OF ITS OWN LIFE:
as we all know, only go on growing of carbon and oxygen , and these
for a few years, and then never grow
any more.
That is really one of the greatest
differences in the world between
animals and plants , and it entirely
depends upon this great power that
the plant has of taking carbonic acid
from the air, splitting it up into its
carbon and oxygen, giving back the
oxygen to the air , and building up the
carbon into its own body. Every green
plant does this all its life for so much
of every twenty -four hours as there is
sufficient light in the sky. As it is
building the carbon up into its own
body, it fixes the carbon on to other
kinds of stuff in such a way as to make
things which animals, including our .
selves, can eat.
THE MOST IMPORTANT THING we
All animals, like all plants, require gas. But if you are a green leaf it is
carbon, but if we were left with nothing
but the carbonic acid in air to get our
carbon from , in a coal-mine, with tons
of carbon all round us and tons of lead
pencils and millions of pounds worth
of diamonds, we should die of starva-
tion in a day or two. There would be
enough carbon around us to keep I
do not know how many thousands of
animals alive, if only it could be used.
But we should be like the foolish king
in the story who wished everything
turned into gold, and then found that The plant knows this, and men know
though everything was gold and worth
a great deal it was worth nothing to
him, for you cannot live by eating and use the power of sunlight in order to
drinking gold. Just in the same way
animals — which must have carbon or
die-cannot live on diamonds or even
the carbonic acid in the air, and the
most important fact about green plants
is that they can take the carbon from
the carbonic acid in the air, can live
on it , and turn it into their own bodies,
and then give those bodies as the
food without which the whole animal
world, including even ourselves, must
surely die .
e WONDERFUL WORK THAT
THETHE GREEN STUFF DOES
What about the green stuff, then ?
What does it do ? Well, the answer is
that without it none of this could be
done. Let us see what it is exactly
that happens. Carbonic acid gas ,
as we have seen , is made up
364
two things are joined very power .
fully together. Unless you are a
green plant, it is one of the most
difficult things in the world to separate
the carbon and oxygen of carbonic
acid gas from each other. They are
so powerfully joined that it needs very
great power, used in just the right
way and at just the right moment,
to separate them , and then , if you are
not very careful and clever, they will }
join together again before you know
where you are. All this is supposing
that you are not a green plant. It is 1
only quite lately , even since little boys
and girls were born , that men have
learnt, with great difficulty and expense,
and long preparation and a great deal
of danger, to separate carbon and
oxygen from each other when once
they have joined to form carbonic acid
quite different.
The green stuff in the green leaf has
no power of itself, and you understand
that it is power which is wanted in
order to separate things which are
powerfully joined together. The more
tightly a nail is stuck in a wall the
harder you must pull to get it out.
How THE PLANT USES THE STRONGEST
POWER IN THE WORLD
Now, there is no power in the world
stronger than the power of sunlight.
it , too. So, when they try to separate
carbon from oxygen, men naturally
overcome the power with which the
carbon and oxygen are holding on to
each other ; and, of course, men can
help themselves to sunlight just as
well as the leaf can -and much better.
They can store it up and turn it into
other shapes, and then let it loose, so
to speak, in far greater power than the
leaf ever has any chance of using
that is to say, men can use far more
sunlight at a given moment than the
leaf ever gets a chance of using at a
given moment . Between two ticks of
à watch the leaf only gets certain
small amount of sunlight, even on the
brightest day in summer in the hottest
part of the world, where the sun is
shining straight down upon it. Now,
men can store up sunlight in hundreds
of different ways, so that between
 HOW THE PLANT LIVES ON AIR LOCO

two ticks of a watch they can use , if the happiness of countless millions
they like, millions of times more than more, and died wretched and in prison .
the leaf would receive in the whole of That is the difference between having
its lifetime. power and knowing how to use it.
THE DIFFERENCE BETWEEN HAVING Now let us go back to thegreen leaf
POWER AND USING POWER PROPERLY we were talking about. The sun
But it is not enough to have plenty light which pours down upon it is power.
of power — you must know how to use Clever men all gathered together, aſter
it, or how to apply it, or how to direct making long preparations, can help
it . If the power in a steam-engine is themselves to far more power than
properly used , it will draw a train or the green leaf can get, but they cannot
take a great boat across the ocean ; apply it , and so they can scarcely
but if it is not properly applied or do what the green leaf does. The
directed, it will go its own way and green stuff in the green leaf makes
may kill thousands of people . This it able to apply all the sunlight it gets
difference between having power and to the business in hand, which is to
using it properly is HOW THE LEAVES DRINK IN THE SUNLIGHT split up the carbonic
true of everything acid gas of the air
green leaves and into its carbon and
steam - engines and oxygen , and to keep
everything else — and the carbon for the
a whole library of use of the plant.
books might be This is done without
written on just this any noise , without
one little truth. It any fuss , without any
is really one of the machinery, without
greatest truths in the great heat , without
whole world. any waste at all , and
Money is power , without any wear
and great things may and tear of anything.
be done with it . In the whole won
With enough money derful world I know
a man might save of nothing to beat
millions of lives this for the perfect
every year ; but we way in which power
all know that it is is put to use. It is
not enough to have not merely the best,
money in order to it is perfect, and
profit by it. You without it this
must know how to glorious earth , with
use it , how to apply The leaves of atreeare fat and thin,so thatthey
. The all its wonders of
it, how to direct it. white leaves areleaves on whichthe sun is shining life - trees and fish
and birds and men
Many people nowa
days have plenty of money, and all they —would be as dead as a pebble. So if
do with it is to destroy themselves and you are a little boy you might do worse,
destroy or make miserable thousands when next you run out into the
of other people. Then, again, to be garden, than take off your hat to the
clever is power ; but that power is sun above you and the grass upon
worth nothing unless it is properly which you tread.
used, applied , or directed. One of the
cleverest men who ever lived was called WHYOFFA BOY MIGHT LO WORSE THAN TAKE
HIS HAT TO THE SUN

Napoleon . His cleverness was so power,
ful that if it had been properly applied
it might have made the world into a
better and happier place for all ages
to come ; but he did not know how to
use his cleverness or power , and so he
caused the death of at least eight million
men , women, and children , destroyed
365
Though you are, beyond words ,
more wonderful and greater than either
of them , and though they are so wonder
ful themselves just because they make
little boys possible, yet who will dare to
deny that even little boys owe them
wonder and awe and love ?
The next part of this is on page 545.
THE LARGEST WILD ANIMALS IN BRITAIN

This is the famous picture of wild cattle by Sir Edwin Landseer, the celebrated painter of animals. We still
have in England some of the old wild cattle. They are as wild and as savage as the cattle of thousands of
years ago were. They hide among the trees during the daytime and come out to feed at night. If you go near
they will either run away or attack you. They now only live in about five places, where they are kept in parks.
Camera
366
 The Child's Book of
NATURE
WHAT THIS STORY TELLS US
OST animals are useful in one way or another, as we shall learn presently ,
Mosbut there are some that are so useful that we could hardly live at all
without them. The milk in our tea , the meat on the dinner-table, most of the
clothes that we wear, all come from animals. So that it is quite true that
animals feed and clothe us. In this part of our story we read about the
cows and sheep in the meadows, the pigs in the styes, the goats on the
mountains, the deer in the forests, and the little rabbits in their burrows
underground Some of these animals are more useful to us than others, but
each one lives and works for us, and we could not spare them without
suffering the greatest inconvenience. We should always remember that these
animals were made for our comfort and use, and serve a great purpose in the world.

ANIMALS THAT FEED AND CLOTHE US

OX GOAT ANTELOPE HARE
SHEEP DEER PIG RABBIT

a man was their teeth, and then

ONCEriding in a train
which was going very,
very slowly. The man began
to make fun of the slow old
train. He called to the guard .
You had better take that
COw -catcher off the front of
the engine,") he said. The COW
catcher is the railing placed in front
of the engine to push out of the
way anything which happens to be
on the line, and so prevent it from
( 6
being run over. What do you wish
to do with the cow-catcher, sir ? "
asked the guard.
Well, it is of no use there,” said
60
the man ; we are going too slowly to
catch up a cow . You had better fix
it on behind the train, for there is
nothing to stop a cow from catching us
and coming in to bite the passengers . '
Of course, that was only his fun.
Cows cannot bite us . Their teeth
are not made or such a thing. Their
teeth are made to eat grass and
herbs, and to grind up the oil -cake
which their masters give them .
There are many sorts of cattle, but
in all of them the teeth are alike . We
have about twelve different types of
cattle in England ; but though some
are big and some are little, though
some have long horns, and some have
short horns, and some have no horns
at all, their teeth are alike. They
use their tongue almost as much as
their teeth in gnawing off the grass
in the field . They curl the tongue
round the grass, and press it against
CONTINUED FROM
PAGE 287
pull the top off the
grass — they do not
bite it off close to the ground
as a horse or a sheep does.
At one time all the cattle
were wild . Some of them were
very big creatures indeed , bigger
than any that are now living. By
and by men began to tame those
that were not too fierce, and for
thousands of years cattle have been
the good friends of men.
Those that were not tamed roamed
the forests, or lived in the hills.
They could not live wild near the
homes of men . Their pastures were
wanted for the tame cattle, and
they were either killed or gradually
died of starvation . We still have
in England some of the old wi d
cattle . At Chillingham Castle Lord
Tankerville has a herd of them in
his park. They are as wild and as
savage as the cattle of thousands
of years ago were .:
They hide among the trees during
the daytime, and come out to feed at
night. If you go near them they will
either run away or rush out and attack
you. There are some others like them
in a park in Scotland, and another
herd at Chartley, in Staffordshire, all
shy or savage, just as the wild ones
used to be .
In Ireland they have some more
descendants of another type of wild
cattle . These are small , and black,
and tame, because for a very long
time they have been taken care of

ನಾ
367
 ILCAXUCATOLA
-THE CHILD'S BOOK OF NATURE
by men , and they know that men
are their masters and friends . We
could not manage at all without cattle.
XUTDOKTrommet
China is the only civilised country
in the world where milk is not used.
Everywhere else people use the milk
of cows, or of reindeers, or of camels,
or of some other tame animal . China is
the one country where the people do not
understand the use and value of milk .
THEOF LIFE AND USEFULNESS
THE
We need milk from the cow for
our tea , we need it for puddings and
custards , and many other things. We
could not have butter or cheese without
milk . The shorthorn cows and the
Jersey cows give the most milk.
A good Jersey cow gives as much
as from ten pints to fifteen pints of
milk a day. That is enough to make
nearly a pound of butter, and the cow
gives it all through the year.
Most COWS are gentle and allow
girls to milk them . In Italy they do not
go out into the fields to feed, but live
in stables. In most places they sleep in
stables , or byres , as they are called,
and go out into the fields for the day.
When they want to be milked, they
make their loud “ mooing," or bellow-
ing, which is to call the man or the
milkmaid to fetch them home. When
they get back to their stable they have
a feed of nice cow-cake, or hay , or clover.
There is something quite wonderful about curled it makes mattresses. The bones
the feeding of a cow . The animal has four
stomachs . We remember how the camel things, and chessmen and ornaments,
can carry water in its stomach to be used
when it is thirsty. The cow carries its
food in something like the same way.
SOMETHING WONDERFUL ABOUT
THE FEEDING OF A COW
If you watch a cow grazing you
will see that , when she has eaten
as much as she wants , she lies down.
Look now at her throat, and you will
see a little round ball of something
making its way quickly along inside her
neck to her mouth. This is the reason :
While she is eating, the cow swallows
the grass into the first stomach, which
is simply a large pouch, where the food
is stored for a time . The food is not yet
digested , for herbs require a good deal of
digesting. Soon the food passes into
the second stomach . This one is full of
little cells , like the honeycomb which a
bee makes . The cells cause the food
368
to roll up into many small balls , and
>
these return , one at a time, to the mouth
of the cow as she wants them . Then she
thoroughly bites this food, as good
children bite theirs, and, having done so,
swallows the grass again . That biting
up of the food is what we call “ chewing
the cud.” Well , this time the food goes
down into the third stomach, which is
made up of many thin sheets of muscles.
These prepare the food for the fourth
stomach, where the work of digestion
is finished .
When cattle were wild they had many
enemies . Men and animals would chase
them , so they would often have to gobble
down their food and run for miles before
it had time to digest . Unless they could
go through the process of chewing the
cud , this food would not give them
strength , for food which has not been
digested is of no good to anything.
Therefore the four stomachs were just
what the poor cow, amid the enemies
who hunted her, ought to have. So
nature gave them to her .
From the hide of cattle we get leather,
which makes boots , harness , parts of
furniture, and all sorts of other things .
The flesh forms food for man.
IE MANY STRANGE USES TO
THEWHICH CATTLE ARE PUT
But that is not nearly all the uses
to which cattle are put . The hair makes
bristles for brushes , and when it is
make handles for knives and other
and millions and millions of buttons .
Some parts make soap and glue ; other
parts make gelatine for jellies ; while
others are turned to use as medicines,
or as food for poultry. Even the bones,
which cannot be used for anything
else, are of value, for they are ground
up and spread over the fields to make
corn and fruit grow . The powdered
bones make the strawberries big and
red and sweet , and cause the tomatoes
to swell and ripen. Strangest of all,
some parts , when treated by the
chemist, make deadly poison, which,
though it would kill us if we took it
into our mouths, is valuable to the
manufacturers.
In some parts of England, but in
still more places abroad, cattle drew
ploughs and carts . In India great
strong oxen draw the soldiers ' heavy
DOUT
 CamTITLE anananna

SHEEP AND CATTLE , TWO OF MAN'S BEST ANIMAL FRIENDS

Here are three curious sheep. On the left is the fat -tailed sheep from Asia, which often has a little sledge
or a trolley with wheels to carry its big tail. In the middle is a merino sheep, which has a thick fleece, and
on the right is a mouflon sheep with huge horns. Wild sheep often fight furiously , and kill one another.

There are about twelve different types of cattle in England ; some have long horns, some have short horns, and
some have none at all. The shorthorn cows and the Jersey cows give the most milk . Most cows are gentle
and allow girls to milk them. Cows not only give us milk and meat, but supply many other useful things.

1144
The musk-ox lives in the frozen regions of North The Indian cattle have a hump on their shoulders,
America , and is hunted by the poor Eskimos for food. and are trained to plough and to draw carts like this.
voor ZITDUI CommX MrUrXDUITECTO DOLCULATIE
369
 EXIL.CATALOG
-THE CHILD'S BOOK OF NATURE- ma

guns when they are marching to war. It is supposed that all the sheep
All over India cattle plough the land were once giants like these ; that those
and draw the carts . The Indian cattle which we now know have gradually
have a hump on their shoulders ; and changed their shape and their size and
millions of Indian people think the the nature of their wool through being
cow is a sacred animal, and decorate for so long tamed and kept and fed by
it with costly ornaments, just as some man. The sheep was probably the first
women in this country decorate dogs . animal , after the dog, which savage
THE STRANGEBRITAIN
OX THAT USED TO Live men of old time made tame ; and the
work of weaving the wool into cloth
The most curious ox is the musk-ox, was one of the first things that they
which lives in the frozen regions of ever learned to do .
North America . It has very wide horns, Goats and sheep all belonged to the
long yellowish -brown hair, and is same family, once upon a time, but see
terribly fierce. Its flesh tastes like how different they are now . The goat
musk , and that is how it gets its name . is covered with hair instead of wool .
The musk -ox is hunted by the poor Well, if sheep are long neglected and
Eskimos for food. The Duke of Bedford allowed to run wild , even now they lose
had one alive not long ago in his park at their fine long wool and grow hair
Woburn , in Bedfordshire. The musk -ox instead. In places abroad, where sheep
used to run wild in England before men run about a great deal in the mountains
lived here, but now it is to be found by themselves, they have a covering of
wowhere outside the frozen lands . It is woolly, but
hair in the winter .
This one which the Duke of Bedford real hair ; and the proper wool is
had was quite healthy for several underneath, like our warm clothes
years, though it must have thought underneath our outer garments .
our weather very hot . He MERINO SHEEP IN SPAIN,
AND
If you have ever seen a pet lamb, THEITS WONDERFUL FLEECE
you will remember what a gentle little There are dozens of different kinds
creature it was . But when that lamb of sheep. They all have horns when
grows up and becomes a fine strong wild , but many of the tame sorts have
sheep, and goes to live with a flock of no horns. Some have very long wool.
other sheep , you would soon learn that With others the wool is short , thick,
IMI

it is no longer timid and frightened. and curly. The sheep with the longest
There is no other animal more ready to wool is the merino . The wool of this
TXTI

fight than a male sheep. They will
rush out and butt at a strange dog while the wool of the average English
or
a strange man ; they will fight
bravely if a wolf comes to attack their
friends ; and they are so strong, and
rush at an enemy with such force
with their hard, tough heads, that
they can knock a bullock down . When
they are wild they fight so fiercely that
they break off each other's horns .
1E HORN OF À MOUNTAIN SHEEP
THEMAKES A BEDROOM FOR THE FOX
The horns of the great mountain sheep,
called the argali , are so big that when
one has been knocked off in this way
a mountain fox or other small animal
can make a home inside the horn . But
the argali is one of the biggest of all
sheep . It is four feet high at the
shoulder. The mouflon is another of
the giant sheep. Their horns are so
long that, if you could straighten out
the curves , they would be found to
measure from four to six feet in length.
rum IITTI TITMmm
370
one weighs as much as thirty pounds,
sheep weighs from three to six pounds.
The merino sheep has its home in Spain,
where it is guarded in flocks of thou
sands by shepherds and dogs . In the
summer it is taken up the mountains ,
but when the winter draws near it is
brought down into sheltered pastures.
Many of this kind of sheep have been
taken to Australia. In Australia the
farmers have millions of sheep , and
we get most of our wool from that great
colony. There are so many sheep in
Australia that the people cannot eat
all the flesh , so they put it into ships
which have rooms so cold that the
flesh is frozen all the time it is there .
Then it is sent to England and other
countries . At the end of the voyage
it is brought out of the ship hard as
ice , but quite fresh and good to eat .
The funniest sheep in the world is
the fat tailed sheep. This sheep has a
 XXX TUTTLEILDLANACAKLLALELEIDELOS ELECTRICIDITETO KOLOXEALOEZIECARILEOLILEO ILLUDO LEOTIDIEL

SHEEP AND GOATS, ANIMALS THAT LIVE ON THE ROCKS

MUTTU
TUTTU
MITTEENOTTE
TORREMEX

It is supposed that all the sheep were once giants like the wild sheep of the mountains, but those living in
the fields have changed their shape and their size and the nature of their wool, through being so long tamed
and kept and fed by man. But, like their wild ancestors, sheep always love to climb about the rocks and hills.

It is аa good thing for the wild goat that it is able to climb rocks where hardly anything else can go, for it has
roman

many enemies. Although it can live on very little indeed, yet where there is plenty it eats everything before it.
The photograph of the musk.ox on page 369 has been kingly lent by the Duchess of Bedford, and
the other photographs in this section are by Chas. Reid, Lewis Medland, and Gambier Bolton.
muomm momemtoamTXTZ OXITY
371
 -THE CHILD'S BOOK OF NATURE
tail which weighs as much as a small-
sized boy or girl. Some of the tails ,
without anything else, weigh as much
as seventy or eighty pounds.
HE SHEEP WITH A CARRIAGE
THE
FOR ITS TAIL
The people who have this sheep live
in Asia and in Barbary and in Cape
Colony. They think the tail so valuable
that they will not let the sheep run
the risk of injuring it . They make
little sledges , and even little trollies
with wheels, and tie these under the
tail , so that , as the sheep walks, the
tail is carried along without being enemies. A great man once said that
hurt . The flesh of this tail is very Satan created the goat. That, of
fat and much liked .
Our English sheep are many in
number and in name . The most
interesting are the black-faced moun-
tain sheep. They have good wool and
good flesh,, yet the sheep itself lives
on little food, and that of the coarsest
kind which grows upon the rugged everything before it. It destroys shrubs
hills. Once some of these sheep were
buried in snow for five weeks on the
mountain -side, yet when dug out they vineyard. In olden times the heathen
were still alive .
The mountain sheep are clever at
climbing the hills and rough rocks.
If you are spending a holiday in Wales
among the hills you have tobe careful
that the sheep high up the mountain-
side do not loosen a big stone andsend
it rattling down on to your head . Once,
when some people were climbing a
hill in the Lakes, they heard stones
rattling, and a funny shuffling noise.
When they got higher up they found
that there were some dear little moun-
tain lambs playing hide-and-seek among
the great rocks. There was plenty of
grass for them to make merry on,
but there they were galloping up and
down the rocks, and skipping and
bounding like children let out to play .
King David wrote about the lambs
skipping at their play, so we see that
this is not a new habit of the lamb.
THERSTRINOS OF THE VIOLIN COME
FROM
The best mutton is that of the Welsh
mountain sheep and the sheep which
are called Southdown sheep. The
Southdown sheep eat the sweet, short
grass of the South Downs of England ,
and in the grass there are millions of
tiny little snails, very clean and healthy ,
of course, but still real snails. And
372
the sheep eat them as they nibble
the grass.
Besides wool we get fine leather from
the sheep for gloves and for the covers
of books . The strings of the violin ,
which makes the loveliest music in
the world, are made from the insid of
the sheep. It is called catgut. The
best is made in Italy, and in this
country we pay Italian makers of it
£ 3,000 a year for catgut.
It is a good thing for the goat that
it is able to climb rocks where hardly
anything else can go , for it has many
course , was silly, because the goat is
descended from the same sort of animals
from which, ages and ages ago, the
sheep descended. But it is a wicked
little rascal when allowed to run wild .
Although it can live on very little
indeed, where there is plenty it eats
and young trees and vines, so that in
time it will ruin a whole forest or
used to sacrifice goats to the god of
wine. Still, it is a splendid creature
when it behaves itself.
GREAT GOAT THAT LIVES ON
THEHERHALLSOF ITALY
The best of all the goats is the ibex,
which lives in the great mountains
of Italy. It has huge horns, and, if
it cannot run away when attacked,
it will bravely rush at its enemy
and , if it can, knock him down the
side of the mountain . There is no
place too steep for it to climb. It
can leap from crag to crag with mar
vellous power and sureness . But men
cruelly hunted it so much with guns
that the ibexes were nearly all killed .
It was only when the King of Italy
said that no more should be killed
that any were saved. The Cashmere
goat and the Angora goat give beautiful
woolly hair, from which shawls and
other things to wear are made. The
wigs of judges and barristers are made
from hair which comes from white goats.
The tame goats give splendid milk.
It was the milk of the goat that the
men and women in the Bible used to
drink. The goat can be trained to do
tricks , and is a merry playmate. It
is rather apt to toss you in play, but
if you can catch hold of the little beard
!
 nhưnana

HANDSOME DEER & ANTELOPES WITH BEAUTIFUL HORNS

moO

The ibex is one ofthebiggest of the goats, The wapiti is a handsome though savage deer, which feeds boldly
and has huge horns. It can leap safely in the daytime, and, if attacked and wounded, rushes at its enemy
from crag to crag on the mountains. with its long, sharp antlers lowered and quickly gores him to death.

These are both antelopes, though one is very tiny and the other very large. The pigmy antelope, on the left, is
only a few inches high, but the eland, on the right, is as large as an ox. It stands six feet high at the shoulder.

The red deer in Scotland are allowed to roam about forests that are
made for them. They are much more wild and savage than the park
deer in England, and they are larger and have handsomer antlers.
CULTURE
373
the chamois lives in the highest parts of
the Alps, and is very difficult to catch
or shoot owing to its great fleetness.
 -THE CHILD'S BOOK OF NATURE
under its chin it will be as good as a though there are fifteen sorts living
lamb. Goats draw little carriages, in in Asia. In the wilder parts of Africa
which children ride . In some countries there are vast herds of antelopes, and
butter and cheese are made from its when the plains become dried up for
milk, while its skin makes gloves and want of water, the animals go into
the best kind of boots . the parts inhabited by men and eat
up all their crops. Their flesh is good
THMATE THEIRKINDS
HOMEOFIN ENGLAND for food , and their hair and hide are
In nearly all lands there are deer of much use in the service of man.
of some sort. There are not so many Deer are not allowed to roam free
kinds of deer as there were ; but there and wild in Britain now like they used
are still a large number. In this country to roam in the days when stupid kings
we have the red deer and the fallow of England thought it was more im
deer, and the handsome little roebuck. portant to have forests full of wild
In olden times we had reindeer and deer and wild boars than lands filled
gigantic elks . The great Irish elk was with houses and gardens for men and
bigger than any deer now living. From women and children. Some people
the ground to the tip of its antlers , or have many beautiful deer in their
horns, it measured over ten feet . The parks, and these deer are tame with
elks of to- day are still very large, the those they know, although savage at
biggest measuring seven feet in height, some parts of the year.
which is the size of some elephants. The biggest deer forests are in Scot
It lives in America and some parts of land. There the deer are allowed to
Europe, and eats the herbage of roam about forests which are made for
shrubs and low trees, not grass like them . Men fence in miles and miles of
other deer. ground and plant millions of trees , so
When it is pursued it runs swiftly as to make the deer feel that they
through the forest, and, so that it shall are living in wild forests like their
not be caught in the trees, it holds ancestors did . These are more wild and
its head up and lays its great horns savage than the park deer in England .
flat down on its back . It can swim The red deer and the roebuck are
splendidly, and, like the crocodile, it the most numerous in the hills of
loves to rest in the water of a pool on Scotland . The fallow deer are more
a hot day with only just the tip of its often seen in English parks.
nose in the air.
THE LOSES
The nextlargest of the deer family HHORNE INREER ITS
SPRING
is the wapiti, a handsome though Whenever you see a picture of a stag,
savage deer, which feeds boldly in the you always notice what fine horns it
daytime, and, if attacked and wounded, has . It looks so proud of them. Do
rushes at its enemy and gores him to you know that those horns drop off
death with its sharp, strong horns . every year, just as the bright feathers
The elk, as it is also called, has come out of the peacock's tail ?
sometimes been tamed and taught Although the horns get bigger and bigger
to draw a sledge, but the wapiti is each year, they are new every season.
always free in the forests and swamps When a herd is being made up by the
of North America. stags and does, the males fight dread
ANTELOPES AS SMALL AS A DOG fully with their horns.. Once the fight.
ing is over, there is little need for the
The antelopes are very much like antlers, so they drop off. Then, at
deer. There are many varieties of the beginning of another year, the
them . One antelope, called the guevi horns begin to grow again.
or pigmy antelope , is only eight or At first the bone is covered with
nine inches high . Others, like the a soft skin, which is called velvet .
beautiful chamois , which lives in the This protects the bone until it is big
mountains, are bigger and stronger. and hard . Then , when the antlers are
The biggest of all the antelopes, getting well grown, the stag rubs them
such as the eland, are six feet high at against the trees to wear off this velvet,
the shoulders-- as tall as a tall man . and by the time a new herd is to be
Most of the antelopes live in Africa, made up there are the new antlers,
374
 THE HARE AND THE RABBIT, WITH TAME AND WILD PIGS

The wart -hog is a very ugly wild pig,
with big tusks and great knobs on its
face. It lives in a hole in the ground.
TOMTOM
ALombo
The wild boar, which has strong tusks, will attack a man or
a horse, or even a lion or tiger, and it is so strong that it is
very often victorious. In India officers often hunt the boar.

Hares and rabbits are good to eat, and their soft fur is used for making The peccary is a little wild
clothing. The animal on the left is a hare, which lives out in the fields. American pig, and is very
Rabbits make holes in the ground, where numbers of them live together. clever. Peccaries go in armies.
UMUTODYTI
காபகாவல
GT னாகாக

The flesh of the pig, when salted, makes bacon and ham ; its fat
makes lard ; its skin makes the leather used for saddles, and its
hair makes bristles for brushes. So it is one of our friends.
artesanm menmormon
375
The babyroussa is a curious wild pig,
with tusks that grow right round in a
ring and often pierce the forehead.
Rou பாயசணவை
 THE CHILD'S BOOK OF NATURE
handsome and strong, and ready for
battle if they are needed .
We are not quite fair to the pig . pigs have tusks, with which they can
We speak of it as if it were the dirtiest
and most stupid animal in the world.
The truth is that it is not more dirty
than the rhinoceros and other great
beasts which live in marshy places.
It likes to cool itself , so stupid men think
it likes to live in a filthy sty. They
make the pig dirty by keeping it in
such places.
THEEYILGREAT
DE PIGSARMIES OF LITTLE
It is true that the pig will eat almost
anything - it loves a feed of coal, for
example. But it is a hungry animal ,
and must be nearly always eating when
not asleep ; so if it cannot get clean
things to eat in its sty, it gets used
to eating nasty things, which make its
flesh bad for food.
Wild pigs are not dirty or stupid.
The little wild American pigs, called
peccaries, are very clever. They live
together in great armies , and have their
leaders and sentries , and if an enemy
comes in sight they all attack him
together and destroy him . There is
nothing more brave than the poor pig.
The wild boar , which has strong tusks ,
will attack a man or a horse , or even a
lion or tiger , and is so strong, and has
such a tough, bristly skin, that it is
very often victorious . Once a hunter
found a tiger and a wild boar which
had been fighting. They had fought
till they could fight no more, and had
lain down side by side and died .
One wild pig, called the wart-hog,
has a trick which no other animal
knows how to do . It lives in a hole in
the ground. Now , if an enemy comes
to catch the wart-hog, he will be sure
to stand at the hole, to be ready to
strike as soon as the pig comes out.
WILD PIG THAT TURNS HEAD OVER
A HEELS TO SURPRISE ITS ENEMY does sad damage, for it not only takes
The wart-hog knows this , so he what it wants to eat , but it bites off
does not rush straight out . He runs
to the mouth of his burrow , then he
gives a great spring and turns head
over heels, and comes down on the top
side of the hole . This takes the enemy
by surprise, and enables the wart-hog
to charge first.
The wart-hog gets its name from
the fact that on its snout are large
horny points, like great warts . The
DITUTO
376
peccary has short tusks , but they are
as sharp as knives. Some of the tame
inflict bad wounds when they are
angry. The most curious wild pig is
called the babyroussa . It has legs
rather like a deer's . It has a smoother
skin than other pigs , and four tusks ;
two curve up from the lower jaw, and
two more grow out of the upper jaw
and bend back towards the forehead.
In the East people do not eat the
flesh of the pig, neither do the Jews. In
Africa natives who will not eat tame
pigs enjoy the flesh of the wild ones.
The flesh of the pig, when salted,
makes bacon and ham ; its fat makes
lard ; its skin makes the leather used
for saddles , and its hair makes bristles.
There are many other animals which
help to feed and clothe us . The hare
and the rabbit we all know, for their
flesh is good to eat, and their soft fur
is much used for making clothing ,
though it is often dishonestly called a
fur of another name . The hare is not
“ mad ” ; it is really a clever little
animal. It lives out in the ploughed
fields, and has many foes.
HOOW THE HARE DODGES
WTHAT PURSUE IT
THE ENEMIES
To escape these, it runs very swiftly
over rough fields, upon which others
cannot run quickly . If hard pressed ,
it turns back like lightning , and,
jumping far aside, will hide until the
dog, or whatever it may be, has gone
past . Soinetimes it will swim in a
river or in the sea to escape . 1
The rabbit is one of the commonest
wild animals in England. It makes
a hole in the ground near a wood or on
a hillside, or among ferns , and lives a
happy life. If there is plenty of grass
and other herbage, it will be content
where it is . If there is none, it goes
to look for food in gardens, and then
and kills many other things in its play.
In Australia they have more rabbits
than anything else. Once there were
no rabbits there ; but men took some ,
and they have so increased in numbers
that they ruin the farmers by eating
the crops . No farmer can hope to
succeed in his work until he has fenced
in all his land with high netting.
The next animal stories are on page 495 .
 The Child's Book of
FAMILIAR THINGS
WHAT THESE PICTURES SHOW US
JHEN you write letters to your little friends, have you thought how wonderful
WHE it isthat all you have to do is to put a stamp on the letter and drop it into a
box ? The little red pillar- boxes in the streets are like fairies ' houses : if you post
your letter in them you may be quite certain that it will find your friend . It does not
matter where your friend lives — whether across the sea in aa far -off country, in a little
village, or in a great town. If the magic stamp is on the letter, the letter will find its
way to the right place. The postman is one of the real fairies of the world, and we
read here the way in which he sends our letters on their journeys through the world .
We see here also the building of a house, from the drawing of the plans to the end.

HOW OUR LETTERS COME TO US

THEN you go in to CONTINUED FRON l'AC1298
WHE breakfast some
morning you may hear
that a letter has come from your
uncle or your big brother across
the sea .
Let us say that it is from New
Zealand . The distance is more than
thirteen thousand miles from London .
It will have cost a penny to send
that letter all those thousands of
miles. It will have been posted in
some little post office in New Zealand
with a penny stamp on it . It will
have been put into a bag, and taken
to the General Post Office there .
Then it will have been put in another
bag containing many more letters
for London . After that it will have
been carried on to a great ship,
and brought right from the other side
of the world to England , put in a
train , and sent to London . There
the bag will have been opened , and
your letter taken out and given to a
postman to bring to your house.
Now let us see what happens when
we send that letter away for other
friends to read . Let us suppose that
they live in Scotland . We put the
letter into an envelope, write the
address on the envelope, put on a
hundreds and thou
sands of letters, going
to all parts of the
world . They are emptied out
of their sacks and given to men
who have a little machine which
marks all the stamps on the letters.
This machine prints the name of the
office, the date, and the time at
which the letters are received . It
works so quickly that if you gave one
man six hundred letters his machine
would print them in one minute.
Then off go the letters to another man.
He looks quickly at them . Some are
for London, some for big cities, some
for little places in the country. He
collects them into lots , and there are
bags for each lot . Your letter is for
Scotland , so let us follow it .
Into the bag it goes , with hundreds
of others ; then off to the railway
station to catch the train which carries
the mails . There is a proper little
post-office on this train , and while it
is going the men set to work , as if
they were at a post -office in London .
They open the bags and begin to sort
them again . They take out the letters
which are to go to places in England.
These they get ready in bags of their
own .
Then, just as they know they
SO

penny stamp, and drop the letter into
the red pillar- box at the end of the
street . Soon there comes a postman ,
who unlocks the pillar-box with his
keys , takes out the letter with all
the others, pops them into his
bag , then hurries off with them to
the General Post Office, which is
called St. Martin's -le -Grand. Many
other bags of letters are there ,
ACT
are rushing through a town for which
they have some letters, they take the
bag, and fix it on a sort of big, strong
fishing net outside their van .
Presently they come to a framework
on the side of the line, like a signal
post , and on this post is a net ready
to receive the mail-bag. The bag is
snatched from the net on the van to
the net on the post , and men take it

I D 377
THE STORY OF THE LITTLE RED PILLAR - BOX 1

TM
W .en you post a letter to your friend in this pillar-box
you need have no fear. The letter will find its way
safely to any part of the world if you put a stamp on it.
Nobody but the postman can touch the letter after
you have posted it. The postman clears the box,
and carries the letters in his bag to the post - office.

DOLIDOCO

At the General Post Office the letters are all put in a heap and carefully arranged . All the letters for London
are put together, and all the letters for Scotland, Ireland, Wales and other countries are put together. They
are then placed in bags and labelled for the towns they are to go to ; and the bags are taken to the station .
378
 DODOCOLORcco

HOW YOUR LETTER TRAVELS BY TRAIN

The letters are taken to the station in the little red vans we see in the streets. At the station they may
be put into the train and carried as luggage, or, if it is a long -distance train , it may have a post-office
compartment as shown in this picture. As soon as the train starts, the men in this travelling post-office begin
to go through the letters, and when the train passes through a large town the letters for that town are ready.

This is how a train picks up letters and drops them as it goes. A bag hangs on a bar outside the carriage, and,
as the train reaches the station, this bag touches a net fixed on the ground . The bag falls into the net .
Another bag of letters hangs from a post in the ground , and, as the train passes , the bag strikes a net fixed on the
train and falls into it. The second picture shows what has happened when the train has passed. The bag of letter
for the town has fallen into the net on the ground, and the bag from the town has fallen into the net on the train.
379 .
20
 TOOLDATUCOAT KLEBEOGRUA VETOZOOTOPIA RECERCON

away, and HOW A SHIP DELIVERS LETTERS WITHOUT STOPPING for five years
the train without ever
never stops . having a let
But there is ter, and there
another net on are parts of
the post and Africa still
another net on where it is
the van , and very hard to
the net on the get letters .
post has a When they are
m a il- bag taken off the
ready, which ship , they are
it flings into sent up the
the net on the country by
train. In this - rail , as far as
way, while the the trains run .
train is racing Then they are
along at a mile made up into
a minute, one bundles, and
bag of letters men carry
is left at a them on their
No time is lost in taking letters on their journey . This shows
town and an- how a ship delivers letters without stopping. The big ship
heads through
other bag is has brought bags of letters from China, and as it passes the the swamps
taken up : If great seaport towns it slows down while a little ship sails by and the
you have the side of it and receives the bags. Both these ships are moving. jungles , where
written a letter to the town, it is dropped snakes and wild animals are. In some
into the net as the train passes by ; parts of Africa the mails are carried on
if you have a friend there who has the backs of camels. Not long ago a
written to you , the letter is picked up camel broke away in the night. It
by the train-net as it passes the post . ran away and died in the desert, and
By the time that the train reaches could not be found . It carried on its
Scotland, your back a bag of let.
letter has been ters for people far
made ready to be away in the wild
delivered . country , who
All this has cost would be very sad
you only a penny. when the man
If you wanted to arrived to tell
sendonly one letter them that their
across the sea , and letters were lost .
had to get a ship There are little
specially to carry islands where the
it , it would cost ships call perhaps
you thousands of only once a year.
pounds. But it is One of them is
as easy to take a Tristan d'Acunha,
thousand letters in the Indian
across the sea as Ocean , where
to take only one, letters are only de
and so the Post livered about once
Office gets thou a year . A copy
sands of pennies of the CHILDREN'S
for one journey. ENCYCLOPÆDIA
There are places has been posted
where it is very to the youngest
hard to get a child on this
letter. Dr. Living. At last we hear the postman's knock , and our little island , who will
stone, the great friend receives her letter. It has come safely home probably not get
after many exciting adventures by land and sea, and
traveller, lived we may be sure that it is opened with great delight. it for six months.
380
 ALGE
జంఘ aaraamaraamaaraacharcoaaramacaramcmaananammamacarone 2

THE BUILDING OF A HOUSE

The first thing that must be done in the building of a house
is the plan of it. First of all the architect must draw a
picture of the house, with plans of every part, showing
the house as it is to look when the builders have finished.
LEREZZELULETTIMET
Not only must the architect draw a finished
house, but he must make plans like this,
showing how the house would look if it were
cut in two with a knife. This is called a section.

The builder hands the plans to the foreman in charge of the works, who engages men to prepare the ground.
In this picture we see the workmen digging trenchesin which the bottoms of the walls are to be built. In these
trenches the foundations of the walls can be made strong and sure ; if there were no trenches like these for the
bottom of the walls the house might be blown over in a storm. The plan of the house is here seen in the ground.

Bintan
WOXUML

These men are mixing sand , linie, and water to make mortar - the cement which holds together the stones or bricks
of the house. Mortar sticks so fast that walls which it has held together for thousands of years still stand.
TTTTTTTTTT ITINIMmmmm morir EDULED TO UKULECOM
381
 THE WALLS OF THE HOUSE BEGIN TO RISE

When the trenches have been prepared and the mortar is ready, the men begin to lay the foundations of the
walls in the trenches. This is the real beginning of the house. The bricks are seen piled up in huge stacks close by.

When the walls have been built a few feet high, the carpenters are ready with the strong wooden beams to which
the great planks for the floor are tobe nailed. Notice that the beams are not laid flat, buton their edges. They are
much stronger this way, and it would never do to lay them any other way ; if they were laid Aat the floor would bend

The walls are beginning to rise, and the carpenters are here fixing the wooden frames for the doors and the
windows. . As soon as the brickwork reaches a place where a door window is marked on the plans, the
bricklayer must let the carpenter know , and the carpenter must be ready to fix his door and window -frames.
382
arunca OCCO ammmaa.com

THE HOUSE HAS REACHED THE FIRST FLOOR

The first storey of the house is nearly finished , and the workmen are fixing the wooden beams which make
the ceilings ofthe rooms downstairs and the floors of the rooms above. As the walls rise, the builders must,
of course , have aa higher place to stand on , and we see the scaffolding erected on the scaffold -poles around.

Thecarpenter has now reached the roof, and the wooden beams which are to be covered with tiles are being
put into their places. The beams are put in a sloping position, so that the rain will run off the roof easily.
COUTI DOO Im mu om Mona LOMCErroman
383
 . LOOKS
HOUSE
THE
WHAT IT
WHEN
INSIDE
LIKE
LOOKS
HOUSE
THE WHEN
BEING
IS
IT BUILT
BEING
IS

scocamanecaLa
304
inside
looks
a
h ouse
how
of
idea
an
us
gives
picture
This planks
are
.T
floor
he
carpenters
the
laying
Here they
--
upstairs
way
their
on
The
now
are
carpenters
.very
home
like
much
It
built
being
it
while
yet
not
is .T
beams
hey
the
to
nailed
proper
and
length
sawn house
step
anvery
stairs
.Eof
first
toew
the
up
go
always
.
rooms
between
walls
the
on
work
at
is
carpenter
The .
through
come
can
nothing
that
so
tightly
fitted
be
must great
weight
.to
,fastened
wood
bear
pieces
two
of
made
is
mm
TUTORETZUETT
 ROOMS
HOUSE
OF
WALLS
THE
DIVIDE
THAT
INSIDE
BUILDING

VAXT DOUTRITI
385
.
rooms
between
walls
the
finishing
here
is
workman
The must
pipes
water
and
gas
finished
are
walls
the
Before The
completing
and
laths
the
covering
her
is
plasterer
,These
walls
outer
the
as
thick
and
strong
so
be
not
need ,here
places
their
in
put
abe
fixing
plumber
the
see
wend of
coats
taree
.the
inside
Twalls
have
generally
wal.s
he
wood
pieces
thin
with
beams
upright
of
made
are
and pipes
.T
water
hot
for
cistern
,w
kitchen
the
to
gohere
he coarse
,a
the
nd
the
plaster
being
coats
second
and
first
These
across
nailed
laths
.called
plaster
with
covered
are .
cistern
into
way
its
on
water
heats
fire
the white
ah
of
.ceiling
ouse
,such
smooth
third
the
on
see
we
as
UTEUZXXO ATTITUOTTUM
 THE COMPLETION OF THE HOUSE
AWAL

While the house is The slater is laying

rising the plumbers slates. He must
are busy digging begin at the bottom ;
trenches outside and if he began at the
laying pipes for gas top he could only
and water and lay the tiles so that
drains, the trenches rain would go under
being afterwards them into the house
filled with earth. instead ofover them .

Almost the lastworkin a house is thewindow -fixing and the painting. You have often seen windows in a new
house daubed with white paint. This is to keep the builders from jumping through. Workmen often jump through
windows beore the glass is fixed,and the white paintwarns them that the glass is in . The painting of a house is very
important, not only because it makes the house look fine, butbecause paint protects the woodwork from wind and rain.
Familiar Things begin page
The next on 457.
TXTYRAT
386
 The Child's Book of
POETRY

THE USES OF POETRY

T is a curious thing that so many people seem to think it is not worth
IT their while to read poetry. They tell us that they “ cannot ” read it.
That is because they have never tried seriously. But it is well worth the
trying ; and as we should grow up with a real love for poetry , we state
here very briefly what are its chief uses. Poetry stirs our feelings and fills
our minds with beautiful pictures, so that if we do not learn to love and
understand it we are missing something that adds greatly to the pleasure of life.

WHY SHOULD WE READ POETRY?

WEE ask
might as well
why birds
CONTINUED FROM PAGE 321
should sing as why we
should read poetry . It is
natural that all people with any
feeling for music should love to
read poetry. When children, we
are more natural in our tastes
than later in life , and the taste for
poetry is as natural as the liking
for sweet sounds, the scent of flowers,
and the colours of the sunset .
Poetry expresses all these delights
of nature better than any other means
we have for expressing them . It is
splendid to see a grand sunset ; it
is fine to be able to look on a great
artist's picture of a sunset ; but it is
better - far better-to be able to
remember all our lives the glorious
words of some great poet who has
described a sunset. Merely by re-
calling his magic words the joy we
first felt in looking on this beautiful
effect of nature arises in us as fresh
as ever - it is ours for ever !
Surely this is a great thing that
poetry can do. And people who do
not keep the love of poetry in their
hearts as they grow up lose one of
the truest pleasures of life.
The writers of good poetry are few,
and nothing is more foolish than to
think, because we can make words
rhyme with others , we can write verse.
But everybody is capable of reading,
enjoying,and profiting by good poetry.
Therefore, we should not lose the taste
for reading verses, which most of us
have when we are young, but ought
the music of words ;
but it is more than
that . It is the music of
the universe . In the whole
vast and wondrous world of
created things there is a harrnony
of beauty that is felt by the true
poet, and by him conveyed to the
ordinary man .
A poet once said of great poets that
they had “ mountain minds," and
their heads were sunned before the
rest of men. If we saw a range of
mountains very early in the morning,
as the sun was rising, we should see
the taller peaks shining first in the
sunlight. So is it with the great
poets. Hence, when the great poets
write their poems for us, they are
enabling us to see into the heart of
nature with something of their own
keen insight. They lend us their eyes,
so to speak. But they lend us their
hearts also , for their poems express the
feelings of their hearts far more warmly
and clearly than these could ever be
expressed in ordinary prose writing.
There is no better education than to
share with the greatest minds that
have lived in this world of ours their
feelings, their hopes and sorrows , their
joys; and poetry enables us to do this.
Yes, blessings many times on all the
sweet souls who have expressed them
selves in poetry, and so may be said
to live for ever as the companions of
our peaceful hours. They are our best
friends, iſ we but turn to them ; be
it for noble words to refresh us in our O
hours of doubt and darkness ; for fine 00

carefully to improve and strengthen pictures of the glories of the world to

that taste by reading as regularly as enlarge our love of its Creator ; or for
possible the works of the poets . inspiring thoughts that urge us for
We have already said that poetry is ward in the battle of life .

om RAR
387
 THE CHILD'S BOOK OF POETRYTOXUxas
SWEET AND LOW
HOME
Story -tellers often , SWE
invent ET, butHO
sad tales MEall , no tales
, after A lullaby is a baby song that can be sung to the
are so sad or strange as those of real life . Wherever the rocking of the cradle, and ought to have in it something
of the music of the "6 rock-a -bye " movement of the
English language is spoken , the famous song of “ Home, craille . How full of this gentle and soothing music
Sweet Home " has been sung for over eighty years. It is, is this beautiful cradle -song by Lord Tennyson , the great
perhaps, the favourite song sin our language, expressing as English poet ! It is a perfect gem of simple beauty.
h
it does the Englis people' love of home. Yet it was
written by an American named John Howard Payne , who
never knew what it was to have a home . He was born in
Swee t and low, sweet and low, ·
Wind of the western sea,
a1792 , and
short died
time Tunis
he inwas in 1843actor
a popular strange career.
, afterinaLondon, and wroteFora Low , low , breathe and blow
very successful opera in 1823, called " Clari ; or, the Maid Wind of the western sea !
of Milan ," in which this beautiful song was first sung . But Over the rolling waters go,
most
withoutof his
a lodging a failure
life was for a time, and hadwas
afterhe heeven a wanderer
written his im . Come from the dying moon and blow,
mortal song. One cold winter's night , when he was homeless Blow him again to me ;
in New York , he heard it being sung in a cosy house as he was While my little one, while my pretty one,
passing by. And he died in Africa “ an exile from home . "
sleeps.
ID pleasures and palaces though we may Sleep and rest , sleep and rest ,
'MID roam
Be it ever so , humble, there's no place like
Father will come to thee soon ;
Rest , rest , on mother's breast ,
Father will come to thee soon ;
A home !from the skies seems to hallow us
charm Father will come to his babe in the nest ,
Silver sails all out of the west
Whicthere ,
h, seek through the world , is ne'er met Under the silver moon :
with elsewhere . Sleep , my little one, sleep, my pretty one,
Home, home, sweet , sweet home ! sleep .
There's no place like home ! BOADICEA
An exile from home, splendour dazzles in We know what an ode is, having read about it on page 105.
This is a fine poem of thatclass, written by William Cowper,
! my lowly thatched cottage again !
vain me
Oh, give one of the great English poets , who died in the year 180o.
The birds singing gaily that came at my call- It is a song in praise of Boadicea , the patriot queen who
roused the people of England in revolt against their Roman
oppressors, at tirst with victory, but later to suffer defeat froin
Give me them !-and the peace of mind , the veteran soldiers of Rome. She died in the year 62. See
dear er than all ! page 351 for Boadicea in her war chariot. What we
Home, home, sweet , sweet home ! have learned about the old bards of Celtic England i
now very useful in helping us to understand this poen .
There's no place like home ! WhenBleed
theBrit ish warri or queen ,
ing from the Roma n rods,

TOR
Sought, with an indignant mien,
THE SANDS OF DEE Counsel of her country's gods,
Charles Kingsley, who wrote this fine ballad , was a master
Sage bencath the spreading oak

TE
of this form of poetry. How much he can tell in so little
space ! Notice how the weird picture of the cruel sea that Sat the Druid , hoary chief ;

CU
drowned
repetitionpoor Mary is words
of certain broughtin before ourthree
the first mind'slines
eye by the
of the Every burning word he spoke
second and fourth verses. It is a legend that the voice of Full of rage, and full of grief.
the drowned maiden can be heard still calling the cattle
home. This, of course , is one of those fancies that come to Princess ! if our aged eyes
our minds in listening to the strange noises of the sea. Veep upon thy matchless wrongs,
MARY and cail the cattle home, ' Tis because resentment ties
, gocall the cattle
" O And home, All the terrors of our tongues.
And call the cattle home,
Across the sands of Dee. ” Rome shall perish - write that word
The western wind was wild and dank with In the blood that she has spilt ;
foam , Perish , hopeless and abhorr’d ,
And all alone went she. Deep in ruin as in guilt.
The western tide crept up along the sand , Rome , for empire far renown'd ,
And o'er and o'er the sand , Tramples on a thousand states ;
And round and round the sand ,
Soon her pride shall kiss the ground
As far as eve could see. Hark ! the Gaul is at her gutes !
The rolling mist came down and hid the land ;
And never home came she. Other Romans shall arise ,
Oh ! is it weed , or fish , or floating hair -- Heedless of a soldier's name ;
A tress of golden hair , Sounds, not arms, shall win the prize,
A drowned maiden's hair Harmony the path to fame.
Above the nets at sea ? "
Was never salmon yet that shone so fair Then the progeny that springs
Among the stakes on Dee . From the forests of our land ,
Arm’d with thunder, clad with wings,
They rowed her in across the rolling foam Shall a wider world command .
The cruel, crawling foam ,
The cruel , hungry foam , Regions Cæsar never knew
To her grave beside the sea. Thy posterity shall sway :
But still the boatmen hear her call the cattle Where his eagles never flew,
home None invincible as they.
Across the sands of Dee.
UTLET
DITUTUY

388
 -THE CHILD'S
Such the bard's prophetic words.
Pregnant with celestial fire,
Bending as he swept the chords
Of his sweet but awful lyre.
She, with all a monarch's pride,
Felt them in her bosom glow ;
Rush'd to battle , fought , and died ;
Dying hurl'd them at the foe ;
Ruffians, pitiless and proud ,
Heaven awards the vengeance due ;
Empire is on us bestowed ,
Shame and ruin wait on you.
ALL THINGS SHALL PASS AWAY
This poem was written by an American poet named
Theodore Tilton . If you read it carefully you will find
that it is written with great skill and effect. For the poet
begins hy making us feel, with the Persian king , how
vain are the pleasures and beauties of this world , since
Death will claim them all ; but at the end he restores us
to hope by reminding us that Death itself will pass a way,
and ihe new life beyond this life of ours will then begin
Once in Persia ruled a King,
Who upon his signet ring
'Graved a motto true and wise,
Which , when held before his eyes,
Gave him counsel at a glance
Fit for any change or chance.
Solemn words , and these were they :
“ Even this shall pass away .”
Trains of camel through the sand
Brought him gems from Samarcand ;
Fleets of galleys through the seas
Brought him pearls to rival these.
Yet he counted little gain
Treasures of the mine or main .'
CG
· Wealth may come, but not to stay :
Even this shall pass away.”
'Mid the revels of his court,
In the zenith of his sport,
When the palms of all his guests
Burned with clapping at his jests,
He , amid his figs and wine,
Cried : Oh, precious friends of mine,
Pleasures come, but not to stay
Even this shall pass away.”
Fighting in a furious field ,
Once a javelin pierced his shield ,
Soldiers with a loud lament
Bore him bleeding to his tent.
Groaning from his wounded side,
“ Pain is hard to bear ! he cried .
“ But with patience , day by day ,
Even this shall pass away.”
Towering in the public square,
Twenty cubits in the air,
Rose his statue grand in stone ;
And the King, disguised, unknown,
Gazing on his sculptured name,
Asked himself : “ And what is fame ?
Fame is but a slow decay
Even this shall pass away.”
Struck with palsy, sere and old .
Standing at the gates of gold ,
Spoke he thus in dying breath :
Life is done , and what is death ? ”
Then , in answer to the King,
Fell a sunbeam on the ring ,
Answering, with its heavenly ray :
Even death shall pass away.”
389
BOOK OF POETRY
THE BEECH TREE'S PETITION
There is a well -known song beginning " Woodman , spare
that tree," written by an American named George P. Morris.
Poets often have the same idea without copying each
other, and perhaps Morris may not have taken the idea of
his song from this earlier poem by Thomas Campbell,
in which the beech tree itself is supposed to beg for life .
O LEAVE this barren spot to me !
DOBA
Spare , woodman , spare the beechen tree !
Though bush or floweret never grow
My dark unwarming shade below ;
Nor summer bud perfume the dew
Of rosy blush , or yellow hue ;
Nor fruits of autumn, blossom -born ,
My green and glossy leaves adorn ;
Nor murmuring tribes from me derive
Th ' ambrosial amber of the hive ;
Yet leave this barren spot to me ;
Spare, woodman , spare the beechen tree !
Thrice twenty summers I have seen
The sky grow bright, the forest green ;
And many a wintry wind have stood
In bloomless , fruitless solitude,
Since childhood in my pleasant bower
First spent its sweet and sportive hour,
Since youthful lovers in my shade
Their vows of truth and rapture made ;
And on my trunk's surviving frame
Carved many a long - forgotten name.
Oh ! by the sighs of gentle sound ,
First breathed upon this sacred ground ;
By all that Love has whispered here,
Or Beauty heard with ravished ear ;
As Love's own altar honour me :
Spare, woodman , spare the beechen tree !
THE MONTHS
Sara Coleridge was the daughter of the great poet
who wrote “ The Ancient Mariner,” and she, too, was a
very good writer of simple poems. It would be difficult
to put better in plain words the whole changes of the
twelve months of the year than she does in this set of
couplets, a couplet being a verse of two rhymed lines.
ANUARY brings the snow,
A our feet and fingers glow.
JANUMakes
February brings the rain ,
Thaws the frozen lake again.
March brings breezes sharp and chill,
Shakes the dancing daffodil.
April brings the primrose sweet,
Scatters daisies at our feet .
May brings flocks of pretty lambs,
Sporting round their fleecy dams.
June brings tulips, lilies , roses,
Fills the children's hands with posies.
Hot July brings thunder- showers,
Apricots, and gilly -flowers.
August brings the sheaves of corn ;
Then the harvest home is borne.
Warm September brings the fruit ;
Sportsmen then begin to shoot.
Brown October brings the pheasant,
Then to gather nuts is pleasant.
Dull November brings the blast
Hark ! the leaves are whirling fast.
Cold December brings the sleet ,
Blazing fire, and Christmas treat .
 WorcesTHE CHILD'S
ANSWER TO A CHILD'S QUESTION
Here again we have a great poet, who has thrilled many
men and women with his powerful verse , writing the simplest
strains for boys and girls. Samuel Taylor Coleridge,
author of that wonderful poem “ The Ancient Mariner,
is the writer of these lines, which tell us in sweet , simple
language that the song of birds is a song of love and joy.
The
Dº sparrow
you know what
, the the birds say ?
dove,
The linnet
love ! and thrush say : " I love and I GOODFor-BYE,good
summer's-bye to summer
In the winter they're silent - the wind is so
strong ;
What it says I don't know , but it sings a
lo ud song :
But green leaves, and blossoms, and sunny
warm weather,
And singing, and loving - all come back
together
But the lark is so brimful of gladness and
love ,
The green fields below him , the blue sky
above,
That he sings, and he sings, and for ever
sings he
“ I love my love, and my love loves me ! "
THE LOSS OF THE ROYAL GEORGE
This poem was written by William Cowper when the
news arrived, in September, 1782, that the great warship ,
the Royal George, had foundered off Spithead on August
20th of that year . Richard Kempenfelt was a brave
English admiral, although his ancestors were Swedish .
There is the mournful music of a funeral knell in the
verses , the whole poem being solemn and dignified .
TOLLTheforbrave
the brave !
that are no more I
All sunk beneath the wave ,
Fast by their native shore !
Eight hundred of the brave,
Whose courage well was tried.
Had made the vessel hecl ,
And laid her on her side .
A land breeze shook the shrouds,
And she was overset ;
Down went the Royal George
With all her crew complete.
Toll for the brave !
Brave Kempenfeit is gone ;
His last sea fight is fought,
His work of glory done.
It was not in the battle,
No tempest gave the shock ;
She sprang no fatal leak ,
She ran upon no rock .
His sword was in its sheath ,
His fingers held the pen ,
When Kempenfelt went down,
With twice four hundred men .
Weigh the vessel up,
Once dreaded by our foes !
And mingie with our cup
The tear that England owes.
Her timbers yet are sound ,
And she may float again
Full charged with England's thunder,
And plough the distant main.
But Kempenfelt is gone,
His victories are o'er ;
And he and his eight hundred
Shall plough the wave no m
POETRY
BOOK OF DABRO.ES
ROBIN REDBREAST
TOITLUX
One thing always to remember about poetry is that it can
DU
express the feelings of the heart far better than prose.
You will feel this when you read this beautiful poem
about Robin Redbreast and the coming of winter, by
William Allingham , whose “ Fairies" is printed on page 316 .
How surely the poet expresses in warm and friendly words
his love for dear Robin Redbreast ! So much feeling could
not be put into so few words out for the power of poetry .
nearly done ; i
The garden smiling faintly,
Cool breezes in the sun ;
Our thrushes now are silent,
Our swallows flown away , –
But Robin's here, in coat of brown ,
With ruddy breast -knot gay.
Robin , Robin Redbreast,
0 Robin dear !
Robin singing sweetly
In the falling of the year.
Bright yellow, red , and orange,
The leaves comedown in hosts ;
.
The trees are Indian princes,
But soon they'll turn to ghosts ;
The scanty pears and apples
Hang russet on the bough ;
It's autumn, autumn , autumn late,
' Twill soon be winter now.
Robin, Robin Redbreast,
O Robin dear !
And welaway ! my Robin , Robin,
For pinching days are near.
The fireside for the cricket,
The wheat -stack for the mouse ,
When trembling night-winds whistle
And moan all round the house ;
The frosty ways like iron ,
The branches plumed with snow
Alas ! in winter, dead and dark ,
Were can poor Robin go ?
Robin , Robin Redbreast,
O Robin dear !
And a crumb of bread for Robin,
His little heart to cbeer.
GOOD- NIGHT
These simpie verses, which have often been sung by mothers
to their children, were written by Jane Taylor, who wrote the
verses beginning “ Twinkle, twinkle , little star, " on page 196.
BABY, baby, lay your head
On your pretty cradle bed ;
Shut your eye-peeps, now the day
And the light are gone away ;
All the clothes are tuck'd in tight ;
Little baby, dear, good- night .
Yes , my darling , well I know
How the bitter wind doth blow ;
And the winter's snow and rain
Patter on the window -pane ;
But they cannot come in here
To my little baby dear.
For the window shutteth fast ,
Till the stormy night is past ,
And the curtains warm are spread
Round about her cradle bed ;
So till morning shineth bright,
Little baby , dear, good -night.
390
 LITTLE VERSES FOR VERY LITTLE PEOPLE

Hi!!chieddet diddle,
and the fiddle,, g lamlambs
YounYoung bs to sel l!
to sell !
The cow jumped over the moon ; If I'd as much money as I could tell,
The little dog laughed I never would cry-Young lambs to sell !
To see such sport ,
While the dish ran after the spoon. LITTLE Nanny Etticoat ,
In a white petticoat,
And a red nose ;
SixG,sing, what shallI sing?
The cat has eaten the pudding -string !
The longer she stands
The shorter she grows.
Do , do, what shall I do ?
The cat has bitten it quite in two. ETERR PIPER picked a peck of pickled
PETEpepper ;
A peck of pickled pepper Peter Piper
WhoAcomes here ?
grenadier. picked ;
What do you want ?
If Peter Piper picked a peck of pickled
A pot of beer . pepper,
Where is your money ? Where's the peck of pickled pepper
I have none . Peter Piper picked ?
Then , grenadier, YE, Baby Bunting ,
Get you gone . Bye,
Daddy's gone a -hunting
To get a little rabbit -skin
THIRT Y days hath September, To wrap a Baby Bunting in.
April, June, and November ;
February has twenty-eight alone.
All the rest have thirty -one ;
Excepting leap -year, that's the time
When February's days are twenty -nine.

LITTLE Tom Tucker

Sings for his supper ;
What shall he eat ?
White bread and butter.
How shall he cut it EE - SAW , Margery Daw,
Without a knife ?
,
Baby shall lrave a new master ;
How can he marry She shall have but a penny a day,
Without a wife ? Because she can't work any faster.

SEE -SAW, MARGERY DAW

6

mas ter ;
See saw , Mar -ge - ry Daw , Ba - by shall have a new

2:26.

: 10 il |
She shall have but a pen - ny a day, Be-cause she can't work an-y fast er.

391 sm
 mwox.LITTLE VERSES FOR VERY LITTLE PEOPLE.CO.
HAD a little pony, WHATarelittleboys madeof,madeof,
His name was Dapple Gray, What are little boys made of ?
I sent him to a lady, Snaps and snails , and puppy-dogs' tails ;
To ride a mile away . And that's what little boys are made
of, made of.
She whipped him , she slashed him ,
She rode him through the mire ;
I would not lend my pony now
For the lady's hire.

PoorPooroldRobin son Crusoe !

old Robinson Crusoe !
They made him a coat
Of an old nanny goat,
I wonder how they could do so !
With a ring a ting tang,
And a ring a ting tang,
Poor old Robinson Crusoe ! What are little girls made of, made of,
What are little girls made of ?
Sugar and spice, and all that's nice :
And that's what little girls are made
of, made of.

'HERE
THE RE was an old woman , and what
do you think ?
She lived upon nothing but victuals
and drink :
Victuals and drink were the chief of her
diet ;
This tiresome old woman could never
be quiet.
She went to the baker to buy her some
bread,
And when she came home her old hus
THREE wise men of Gotham band was dead ;
THE Went to sea in a bowl : She went to the clerk to toll the bell,
And if the bowl had been stronger And when she came back her old hus
My song would have been longer. band was well.

' LL tell you a story,

I'll About Jack a Nory
And now my story's begun :
I'll tell you another
About Jack and his brother
And now my story's done.

PUSSY -CAT MOLE

Pussy
Jumped over a coal ,
And in her best petticoat burnt a great
hole .
Poormore y's,weeping -- she'll have no Mary
Pussmilk How y , qui
,Mardoes yourte con , ?
trarygrow
garden
Until her best petticoat's mended with With cockle -shells and silver bells
silk . And columbines all of a row .
The next Verses and Rhymes begin on page 531 .
uuurr UTE RED
392
 The Kwave of Hearts
TARTS

1.

The Queen of Hearts

She made some tarts
All on a summer's day ;

2.

The Knave of Hearts

He stole those tarts
And took them right
away

3.

The King of Hearts

Called for those tarts
And beat the
Knave full sore :
กง5

4.

The Knave of Hearts

Gave back the tarts
And vowed he'd steal
no more .

ACE PAGE 397

 EARTH
THE
BECAM
AND
DOWN
COOLE
THAT
FIRE
OF
BALL
GREAT

over
rolled
tirered
waves
space
. all
-h,aof ot
nd
like
travelled
was bthrough
it
made
being
earth
the
When probably
the
thrown
,amood
off
these
nd
hformed
were
stuff
- ot
red
this
of
Parts
FACF PAGE
 ‫هنر‬
The Child's Story of
THE EARTH
WHAT THIS STORY TELLS US
THIS story tells us of the time when the sun and his family of worlds were all
THIS
one—a great fiery cloud, which at last broke into smaller clouds. One of
these was the cloud that formed the earth , which became at last a glowing globe of
gas, hot at the centre and cooler at the surface . Slowly the gasbecame liquid-
like water, but red hot. There was then no living thing on the earth , which was
like a red -hot ocean . As the earth spun round in space an extraordinary thing
happened : part of the red -hot stuff fell away, like drops from a wet umbrella , and
formed the moon. Slowly the globe cooled down and the hard surface of the earth
was formed — the great ball of earth, still glowing inside perhaps, on which we live.

HOW THE EARTH WAS MADE

ANDnow wemust glowing clouds of
CONTINUED FROM PAGE 242 QUN
ourselves matter. Perhaps you
again the great ques can get the best idea
tion : Where have the of what a nebula is
sun and the earth come from, like by using the name which
and what were they like at first ? the poets often call it by, and
For a long time men used to that is fire-mist. A nebula is
think that the solar system , in like a great mist of fire.
cluding the sun and the earth, had Those we see in the heavens are of
been, from the first, as they are now. different shapes and sizes. Many of
No one now thin that , however. We them are far bigger, hundreds or thou
believe that they have grown , so to sands of times bigger, than the whole
speak, to be what they are, and we space occupied by the solar system .
have a fairly good idea of the way in A great many of them, probably
which they have grown . Now, in about half, have a shape very like
order to see what the solar system the kind of firework called a St.
was like at first, we have only to take Catherine's wheel - flattened and
a telescope and look up at the sky, coiled up. They are called spiral
and there we shall see scores of nebulæ. You know what a spiral
thousands of wonderful bodies which staircase is. The spiral nebulæ, how
are still at the stage the solar system ever, ought never to have had
was at long ages ago. These bodies that name, because they are not at all
are called nebulæ , and one of them like a spiral staircase ; they are quite
would be called a nebula, which is flat, thin things , much more like a
simply the Latin word for a cloud. St. Catherine's wheel in shape.
They look like the tiniest little bright, If we look at some of these spiral
fleecy clouds in the sky. Some of nebulæ we see bright points in them
them can be seen with the naked eye, here and there, which suggest to us
and then they look like stars, but they that the fire-mist has become thicker
are quite different from stars. at certain places than at others. Often
You can understand that if a great these bright points are so large and
number of stars were clustered to- bright that they look like stars, and,
gether , very far from the earth, they indeed,probably they are stars . Pro
might look to us like a little bright bably all stars are made out of nebulæ.
cloud, or nebula, and then, if we got Now let us come back to our solar
a strong telescope, we might find that system.
they were really only a cluster of stars. If you could look at the solar
However, we now know for certain, system from a great distance away
by examining the kind of light that you would notice many remarkable
they send to us, that the sky contains, facts about it . In the first place, you
at the very least, 120,000 real nebulæ . . would notice that all the twistings and
They are not star-clusters åt all, but movements are in one direction, as

za

I E 393
 -THE CHILD'S STORY OF THE EARTH-
we have already said1 ; then you would
notice that the solar system is a flat
thing. The picture of it that we saw
on page 241 is not far wrong in its
suggestion of the shape of the solar
system. All the planets, so to speak,
go round the sun at much the same
level . You know that if you took
two hoops you might put one inside
the other, so that whilst the one
hoop was upright on the pavement in a nebula - such changes as we believe
the other lay across it ; then any-
thing travelling along the rim of the which the solar system was formed.
one hoop would be travellingroundand WHAT HAPPENEDWHEN SIR ISAACA NEW .
round, and anything travelling along
the rim of the other hoop would be
travelling up and down. Now , that is simply means that every tiniest piece
just what we do not find in the case of
the solar system . It is a flat thing like
a system of hoops of many sizes , all laid
on the ground inside one another ; and
the spiral nebulæ are also fat.
Now, there is another curious fact,
and this is that the kind of stuff the sun
is made of is the same as the kind of
stuff that the various planets are made
of. It almost looks - does it not ?—as if
our little earth and all the planets were
once a part of the sun.
THE SUN IS MADE OF THE SAME
STUFF AS THE EARTH
And so men guessed that perhaps the
pieces of stuff that now make the
planets have been somehow brushed off
from the sun, and that as they cooled
down they had become solid and however, but thinking ; and he saw
started travelling round and round
him . We are sure now that that is not
what happened, but we are also sure
that the idea underneath that notion
was right. The sun and all his planets
were once one .
Indeed, we believe that in its first
stage the solar system was nothing
else than a nebula ,like one of the very
smallest of the thousands of nebulæ
that we now see in the sky. No
one who has studied the subject now
doubts that ; how
as to exactly we are
still,such not certain
a nebula would
gradually become changed into the solar
system that we know . It seems to be
certain, at any rate, that a nebula is
apt to become flattened and also to
take on the shape of a St. Catherine's
wheel. Far too many of the nebulæ are
of that shape for us to imagine that
there is not some good reason why
they should be so, and I have little
NUO
394
doubt that if we could live long enough
to watch the nebulæ that are not spiral
we should see them gradually becomeso.
Now , there is one great fact that
must always be true of a nebula like
this . It is a fact which is true every
where ; and though it has rather a long
name, it is not difficult to describe.
We are certain that in the course of
time this fact must work great changes
to have been worked in the nebula from
This fact is called gravitation , and it
of matter, or stuff, in the whole world
has a natural tendency to attract and
be attracted by all the other matter
in the world . Gravitation is, perhaps,
the most familiar of all facts in our
daily lives. When you let go of a
ball it drops to the earth, and that is
simply because the earth and the ball
have attracted each other. The ball
is so small that it moves the earth to
itself only a very little distance, and
what we see is simply that the ball
falls to the earth. One of the greatest
men who ever lived , an Englishman
called Isaac Newton , was lying on his
back, under the shade of an apple
tree in his father's garden . He was
not just dreaming his time away ,:
what thousands of people had seen
before him , but never troubled to
think about - an apple falling from the
tree to the ground. The result of his
thinking about this was that he dis
covered this law of attraction, which
is true throughout the whole wide
. world, not only of the earth and a ball
or the earth and an apple, but also
of the earth and the moon , the earth
and the sun , and also of all the little
pieces of stuff, or matter, in a nebula .
HOOGEELGR EAT CLOUD BEGAN TO come
TOGETHER AND FORM THE EARTH
From the first moment that a nebula
was formed, then -- probably by a
collision between two stars or more
there would begin to act upon all its
parts the same force of gravitation
which acts upon you if you miss your
footing and tumble downstairs. And
this is a force that goes on acting all
the time, never ceasing and never
 -HOW THE EARTH
getting tired. So, some years after
the great work of Newton , several men
began to apply his ideas to the nebulæ
(remember that when the word is spelt
like this it means not only one nebula, but
many) and to ask what musthappen in
the course of ages when this force of
attraction acts upon such a nebula.
HERSSHEL, THE MAN WHO MADE A
GREAT
One of the greatest of these followers
of Newton was Herschel , who made
finer telescopes than anyone had used
before, and who spent all his life
studying the stars and the nebulæ.
He was the first man who ever made a
list of nebulæ, and he it was who first
saw that they may be arranged in
classes, from those which look just like
little milky clouds and nothing more, to
those which are really stars with a sort
of cloudy substance round them.
So it seemed to him that some
clustering power ” must be at work
turning these scattered and milky
nebulæ into brighter and smaller objects
which would some day become stars or
suns and solar systems. Herschel com-
pared the heavens to a rich garden thing else , or is partly stopped by it, its
containing plants in all stages of their
lives. This gives us the advantage, he
says, that at one and the same time we
can see all the different stages in the
history of plants — from their birth to
their death ; so also in the heavens we
can see all the different stages from a
anebula a star . Then
greattoFrenchman who there followed
saw thatthe
" clustering power " must be gravita-
tion, and who worked out exactly what
must happen in such a case, since we
know exactly the force with which
gravitation acts.
WHAT PROBABLY HAPPENED WHEN
Now , in order to fill in the history
of the solar system we have to reckon
with two facts . We have already seen
that the sun and his family are not
still in space , butare moving all together
through it . We cannot , indeed , believe
that there is stillness anywhere ; every-
thing is moving. Now , for a long time
this movement of the nebula from which
the solar system was formed did not
seem to be very important ; at any rate
there seemed no reason why it should
help us to understand how the solar
system was formed . Men used to think
Interior para 395
WAS MADE
that space outside it was quite empty
as far as the nearest of the fixed stars .
But we are now learning that space is
very far from empty. On the contrary,
what we used to think was empty space
is simply swarming with those little
bodies like grains of sand or pebbles, or
even larger bodies still , which we have
already described as being found within
the solar system . It is quite reasonable
to suppose , then, that as the nebula went
through space, gradually becoming
smaller and denser by the force of
gravitation causing it to shrink, it would
come across millions and millions of
these grains and pebbles, which, of
course, are also rapidly moving.
Many interesting consequences would
follow . If the nebula ran across a great
swarm of meteorites , like those the path
of which the earth crosses in November,
then there might be the beginnings of a
planet . But , even apart froin such a
swarm , there would be marked results
from the millions of little collisions that
would be constantly happening. For one
thing, the nebula would be made hotter,
for when anything in moving strikes any.
motion is turned into heat, which is
itself a kind of motion . We use this
fact every time we strike aa match . We
put the match in motion and then partly
arrest the motion by whatever we rub
it against ; so there is enough heat
produced to set the match on fire.
T SHEARTH,MLIKE
AY ONCE
A
Have been
That, then, is all that we can tell at
present about the origin of the sun
and his family. Men who work at
these things are constantly filling in
little details , explaining the small
difficulties and helping us to gain a
complete picture. But everyone is
agreed that something like what we
have described is what really happened .
Now let us try to imagine what our
own earth must have been like in its
beginnings . The most important facts
we can be quite sure of, even though
we are not quite sure about every step
in the way in which the earth first came
to be separated from all the rest of the
family to which it belongs. We cannot
be quite certain as to the shape of the
earth at first, though some men who
are studying this matter in Oxford
just now think that it may have
གསལ
 -THE CHILD'S STORY OF THE EARTH 6
been shaped like a pear instead of like was part of the earth ; for the earth
a flattened orange , as it is now . But , then , we must learn , did not consist
at any rate , whatever its exact shape of anything at all like what we call
was, it was so utterly different from " earth ,” but it consisted altogether of
the earth we know that we can scarcely gases like those of which the air is
imagine it. Really , the earth of long made to-day . If you take anything you
ago must have been far more like what please and make it hot enough , you
the sun is now - only, of course , quite will be able to turn it into a gas ; and
the earth in its ff
t
beginnings was so
tiny compared with the sun. hot tha all the stu in it was in the
AIR IS PART OF THE EARTH form of gas. Even the stuff that now
TH Th MOth
EANeDear VE, SasWIT IT nk of it now , is
weH thi makes the hardest rocks and stones ,
something that stops suddenly at the not to mention every drop of water in
sur t eis,- at
Thafac everlev
howthe , byel no
of me
theangro und
theWhsea,
s qui te. at wa
wes the
now n gas.
call the earth was at
correct . Even now the earth does not first nothing more or less than a great
In that hot,
stop sharply all round as an orange globe of glowing gas.
does . We must not imagine that the twisting , glowing globe there were
earth stops at the level of the ground contained all the tiny little portions
or at the level of the water, and that of. matter, or atoms, as they are called ,
we are really walking outside the earth . which now make up the water of the
Not at all . Above both the ground sea, the soil , the rocks ,the bodies even
and the water there is something which of all living things , and also , of course ,
is really part of the earth , though we the air, or mixture of gases, that still
remains covering the whole earth like
cannot see it . It moves with the
th nd d stwi a warm blanket.
ear rou the sun
with the eart as it, an
h spin . sts
Therou ndf
stuf LIVE AT THE BOTTOM OF

h dit in
icge lythbein
is recoctnsiotansntwi
of whan
exch is ma de di
both
water of the sea and the stuff of which
the dry ground is made . In short,
the air is part ofr the earth , and if we
lived on anothe planet , and looked
at the earth from afar, we should never
question this for a moment . The air
as it is at present probably extends
upwards from the surface of the solid
and eliquid part of the earth to a dis-
tanc of about 100 miles . As we pass
upwards through the air in a balloon
we find the air becoming more and
more thin , or, to use the proper word ,
more and more rare ; and though we
cannot go very far in a balloon , we
are quite sure that this rareness goes
on increasing until there is no air to be
found at all.
WHEN en
THE EARTH WAS A GR EAT
So ev nowGL OF the earth does
OBuE see,
, yo
not really stop short sharply anywhere,
but its stuff is spread out all round it
in a layer , which gradually becomes
rarer and rarer , until at last it stops
Now , that was certainly true of the
al
ear geth
toth erg. ago, and no one who could
lon
have seen the earth then would have
: had any doubt at all that the air
WeANr OCEe AN OF AIR
thge So fa ar we from being really on the
surface of the earth that the whole
earth , sea and land together, is really
covered with a great sea or ocean of
air . We crawl about at the bottom of this
ocean , and the thing we are puzzling our
heads about just now is how to learn to
jump off the bottom and swim in it , as
birds have been able to do for ages
without troubling their heads at all .
In the course of time we know that
great changes had to happen in this
glowing globe of gas. It was doubtless
then giving out light and heat like a
little sun , but in doing so it would
gradually become cooler. If you make
a poker red hot, and then take it out
of the fire , it will give out light and heat
for some time ; then it will give out
heat only, but no light—which is to
say , that it is still hot, but will have
become dark ; and lastly , it will become
quite cold . It cannot give out light and
heat without becoming cooler itself ,
for it does not make them out of
nothing . The case was the same with
the earth , and in the course of long
ages she had gradually to become cooler.
At last she would have to become so
cool that part of the stuff of which she
was made would no longer be a gas ,

396
 antamaata)HOW THE EARTH
but would become liquid, like water.
This is a perfectly simple thing which
you have seen for yourself a hundred
times — whenever you look out of a
railway carriage, for instance. As you
breathe, a great deal of water comes out
of your mouth and nose. This water ,
having come from the inside of your
warm body, is itself so warm that
>
it is in the form of a gas ; but when
this warm gas strikes the cold glass of
the window -pane it is cooled so much
that it is turned into a liquid , and will
run down the pane in little drops; HOW THEROMOOTHE SPINNING EARTH
especially if you help it by rubbing it
together. If you cool any gas sufficiently,
it must become liquid.
Now, that part of the earth which
would soonest become cooled would not ,
of course, be the hot inside — which is
believed to consist of a gas at this
very moment — but would be the part
next the surface . All the kinds of stuff
that were most apt to become liquid
would do so, and , being heavier, would
fall towards the centre ; whilst the kind
of stuff, like the air of to-day, which
is not so apt to become liquid would
stay where it was .
THERED.HOVER
OTTIDES THAT
ROLLED THE EARTH LONG AGO
So you can imagine an earth with a core
of hot gas and a layer of liquid outside
that , and then a layer of cool gas , or air ,
outside that. But soon even part of the
stuff that had become liquid would be-
come solid, or perhaps like a very thickoil .
Now, it must be remembered that all
this time the earth was twisting round
and round like a top, as it has done ever
since, and as it is doing to -day. Also
it must be remembered that the great
sun is all this time pulling as hard as
it can upon the earth by means of
gravitation. You can imagine, then ,
that the liquid stuff next the sun at
any
pulledgiven moment would
out towards the sunbe oraptheaped
to be
up at the surface of the earth . But ,
of course, since one point of the earth
is never opposite the sun for long, this
heaping up of the liquid on the surface
would be like a wave travelling over
the surface of the earth . Now, this
great travelling wave is nothing else
than a tide, and every child who has
ever been to the sea has seen its
consequences. Only the first tides that
were raised by the sun upon the earth
397
WAS MADE COOLCORO
were not tides of cold water, for I am
quite sure that there was no liquid
water upon the earth at that time at all.
The earth was too hot for that, and all
the water in it was in the form of a gas
in the air, just like the water in your
warm breath before it strikes the cold
window- pane. The first tides that
rolled upon the earth must have been
terrible tides made of stuff like red - hot
lava — the red-hot stuff that comes out
of a volcano and runs down in fiery
streams until it turns cold and solid.
Now, it is much more than probable
that a very remarkable thing happened
somewhere about this time. The men
who have studied this subject believe
that one day , whilst these tides of lava
were rolling round the earth as she
spun , part of the stuff was whisked off
like drops from a wet umbrella when
you spin it. It is even possible that
two great lumps of stuff were whisked
off at about the same time-one from
one side of the earth and one from the
other. Perhaps at this time the surface
of the earth had become cool enough
for the great gaps left by this loss to
remain more or less fixed , and some
people have supposed that those gaps are
now the great bites into the surface of the
earth which have since been filled by
the seas. They would not be filled with
water then , because the earth was doubt
less still so hot that all the water still
remained in the form of a gas in the air.
But what became of the stuff that
was so whisked off from the surface of
the earth ? I wonder whether you can
guess . Its shape at first, of course,
would be very irregular, but as it went
on moving and became cooler, and as
its parts acted upon one another by
gravitation, it would become round.
THE ARETANCE OF THE MOON:
NEIGHBOUR , OUR
THE EARTH
Now , surely, with all these hints,
you do not need me to tell you that it
is the moon which men believe to have
been formed from the earth in this
wonderful way: At first she was very
near the earth, and for a long time
afterwards she went gradually farther
and farther away . But even now the
moon is really close to the earth, not so
far off as ten times round the earth .
The next story of the earth begins on 475.
THE FLIGHT OF POMPEY FROM THE BATTLEFIELD

In the time when Rome was building up its power, Julius Cæsar went to the wars and Pompey stayed in
Rome, and the news of Cæsar's victories made Pompey fear that Cæsar would become the head of the
state . So he plotted against Cæsar, and in the war that followed between them Pompey was defeated.
We see him Aying to Egypt; but as he landed there a murderer stabbed him in the back and
Cæsar wept when he learned of Pompey's fate, and put the murderer to death
sent his head to Casar.
398
 SMAKes
The Child's Book of MIL
PEARS MEN E WOMEN N

THE MEN OF THE ETERNAL CITY

N ancient times, hundreds of years before the first Christmas Day, there was
IN already standing on the banks of the River Tiber, in Italy, the city of
Rome. And, as time passed, this “ city of the seven hills ” became the

RUBENS
mistress of almost the whole of the world that was known to her people.
After a time Rome's lordship was taken away, and new empires arose ;
but Rome herself, when the influence of Christianity came into the world,
won a new dominion over the minds of men , the head of the Christian
Church in Rome being looked upon as the head of the Christian Church
everywhere. And though once more that dominion, too, was shaken off
by the countries which became Protestant, there are still Christians in all
nations looking upon the Pope of Rome as their head ; and still Rome
stands upon the banks of the Tiber, so that men call her “ The Eternal City. "
We read here of some of the great men who built up her power.
NAP
OLE
ON
THE FIRST GREAT MEN OF ROME
Romans
THEthat said
their city CONTINUED FROM PAGB 298
future . And when
they had asked the
was founded by a questions as the
king named Romu king had told them, ( 2)
lus, and that after him there then the sons of Tarquin asked
CRO reigned six more kings. Five the Oracle : “ Which of us DAD
WIN
of those six helped to make shall rule in Rome here
Rome great, either because after ? " And the Oracle
they were skilful warriors, or answered : “ He that shall first kiss
because they made wise laws. his mother ." As they left the
But the seventh king was called temple, the stupid Brutus tripped
Tarquin the Proud, because in all and fell ; but he had done this on
things he sought his own wealth and purpose, so that he might kiss the
pleasure, trampling uponthe people, earth, which is the mother of all
instead of making it his aim to men . The rule of Tarquin grew
secure their welfare like the wise worse and worse ; and nobles and
kings before him . And his sons were people groaned under his tyranny,
like him . till their anger was ready to break
There was a young man among out in fierce flame. And then a son
the nobles whose name was Lucius of Tarquin, named Sextus, did wrong
Junius ; and he was also called to Lucretia, the wife, of one of the
Brutus, which means “ blockhead .” nobles — wrong so deep and bitter
But, in truth , he was keen -witted , that when she had told her story to
and only made a pretence of dulness. her husband, in the presence of her
AS
DNIOL

For he saw that Tarquin the Proud father and Brutus and another
EN

feared clever men, and sought to noble, named Publius Valerius, she
destroy them , lest they should slew herself with a dagger.
become powerful and overthrow Thereupon Brtitus dropped his
him. Yet , though Tarquin did not pretence of stupidity ; he snatched
know it, there was no one in Rome the dagger from her heart, and
whom he had more cause to fear called on all present to pledge
than this Brutus. themselves to rid Rome of the
There is a story that the king tyrant Tarquin and his evil sons. RUS
once sent two of his sons, and Then they went out and told the KIN

Brutus with them , to consult the people in Rome what had befallen ;
Oracle ofthe temple at Delphi,which for Tarquin was away at the head
men believed could foretell the of an army. Brutus made haste
RJULIUS CÆSAR HER SPENCCA
avoBER
ns T

399
 -THE CHILD'S BOOK OF MEN AND WOMEN :
to the camp, and there he called upon of the city was defending the walls,
the soldiers to rise up against Tarquin.
And Tarquin and his sons had to fly to
another city, nor could they ever win
back their power in Rome. But the
Romans made oath that they would
never again have a king in Rome,
and instead of a king they set two
consuls at the head of the state . One
of them was Brutus .
BRUTUS WHO DROVE THE TYRANT FROM
ROME AND CONDEMNED HIS OWN SONS
So the name of Brutus was ever
held in high honour in Rome, as the
man who had driven the tyrant forth
from her gates and made her a free
Commonwealth . Moreover , it is told
of Brutus that he set to all men an
example of stern justice, even when it
must have almost broken his own
heart . For it befell that his own sons
were drawn into a plot to restore the
Tarquins ; and when Brutus learnt
the truth he did not use his power to
spare his own flesh and blood , but
spoke the doom of the traitors with
his own lips. Reckoning his duty to
his country more highly than his love
for his family, he condemned his sons
to death.
For many a long year the Romans
had constant wars with one or another
of the neighbouring cities , and many
-troubles within between the nobles,
who were called Patricians , and the
commons, who were called Plebeians.
For the nobles held the rule and were
often oppressors. And slowly the
commons gained more and more share
in the government . A time came
when the power of Rome was in danger
from the victory of the city of Veii.
The Romans sent out armies and be-
sieged Veii , but could not take it until
they placed their forces under the
command of a noble named Marcus
Furius Camillus .
AND
CAMILLUS
BADE THE FLOGFIGHTS
WON GREAT
WHOCHILDREN A TRAITOR
Now, Camillus found that he could
make a hidden passage underground,
called a mine ; and , unknown to the
people of Veii , he made a mine under
the wall of Veii , and dug it so that his
soldiers could burst their way out into
the temple of Juno. Then he ordered
a great attack to be made on the walls,
so that all the people of Veii gathered
to defend them . Then , when the whole
EXTERRUXLUX VOITURUL
400
CREC
Camillus himself led a troop into the
mine, and they broke out and opened
the gates of the city, so that its people
were utterly conquered.
It is told of Camillus that in one of
the wars , when he was besieging another
town , he won honour for the Romans
by a generous action . For there was
a schoolmaster who thought to win
favour with the Romans, and by a
trick managed to take the school
children out of the town and bring them
to the Roman camp , so that the
people of the town would agree to any
thing to get the children back. But
Camillus bound the traitor's hands,
and bade the children flog him back to
the city. Some say that afterwards,
when the Gauls sacked Rome , Camillus ,
who was in exile, returned and defeated
them . Some say that his last public
act was to persuade the leaders of the
nobles and commons to agree together
and be at peace. But, at any rate, his
memory was honoured as of one who ,
all his life, did good service to his
country .
REEGULUS , WHO GAVE UP
THE SAKE OF ROME
HIS LIFE FOR
The next famous man of whom we
have to tell won no great victories for
Rome. For he was in command of the
Roman army when it was warring
against the city of Carthage, in Africa ;
and the men of Carthage defeated the
Romans and took many prisoners.
Among the prisoners was the general
Regulus. The victors held Regulus
captive; but when some Carthaginian
nobles were captured in another battle
with the Romans they sent messengers
to Rome, and Regulus with them , offer
ing to set Regulus and other prisoners
free if their own men were set free . But
Regulus, instead of begging the Romans
to agree , so that he might come home
again , told them that it would be wiser
to refuse, since they had less need of
him than the Carthaginians had of their
men . So it was that Regulus returned
to captivity in Carthage, rather than let
Rome suffer even a little for his sake .
And for this he deserved the higher
honour, because he knew that the Car .
thaginians would be wrath with him .
and put him to a painful death .
In that war the Romans defeated the
Carthaginians in the end,butthe power
 Paramarimatamatamaindiramanaidunan Licentaziacenadnieniateacherkesin

BRUTUS . CONDEMNING HIS SONS TO - DEATH

THE TRAITOR SONS OF BRUTUS APPÉALING TO THEIR FATHER FOR FORGIVENESS

THE GRIEF IN THE HOME OF BRUTUS WHEN THE BODIES WERE BROUGHT IN
In the early days of Rome, when Tarquin the Proud was king, the king and his sons were so cruet
that the people groaned under them, and a young nobleman named Brutus called upon the people
to drive the Tarquins out of Rome . They were driven out , and afterwards some false Romans plotted
to bring them back. Among the traitors were Brutus's own sons ; and it was then that Brutus set to all
men an example of stern justice. He condemned the traitors to death, though they were his own sons.
401
 S THE CHILD'S BOOK OF MEN AND WOMEN
of Carthage was not destroyed ; and and wary, and one who held with
some of her people went to Spain and firm doggedness to every purpose he
there made a new power, drawing the set before himsclf and to every rule
peoples of Spain under their rule or into of life he laid down . Moreover, he
company with them . They built a city scorned all manner of easy living, and
which they called New Carthage, and would have had all men to live as care
they did this because they thought that , fully as himself. But Cato was hard
possessing Spain, they would again be and harsh , not fearing pain himself, and
able to make war successfully against careless whether others suffered , re !

the Romans . garding only the things that he con

LO, Th
SCIPSPAIN e YOUNG HERO WHO WON
AND AFRICA FOR ROME
It was in one of those battles with
Carthage that Cornelius Scipio first
fought, being then but a boy. They
say that Scipio saved his own father's
life. After that his father was sent
to Spain , to fight the Carthaginians who
were there , and was killed . Then
none of the Roman generals were willing
to go to Spain, knowing how hard a task
was before them ; but Scipio, though
yet very young , offered to undertake it.
For he felt sure in his heart that he could
conquer Spain for Rome .
Moreover, the people were so moved
by his noble bearing and his persuasive
speech , and by the courage he had
shown, that they gave him the command.
When Scipio was come to Spain the
soldiers took heart ; for they had loved
his father, and now they followed the
son with fearless devotion .
First of all, they captured the enemy's
city of New Carthage, and then defeated
them in other battles, until their power
in Spain was broken altogether. Then
he returned to Rome, and persuaded
the Romans to send him with an army
across the sea against Carthage itself.
The power of Carthage was laid low,
and Scipio was called Africanus , be-
cause he conquered the land of Africa.
At last there came a time when he saw
that some men envied him, and others
distrusted him for the tales that were
told of him by his enemies, and then he
ceased to take part in public affairs,
scorning to defend himself against
charges of baseness. So Scipio passed
the end of his days as a private citizen.
CAFOR THECENSOR WHOUPAS
VIRTUES PAMOUS
Among these enemies of his was
Marcus Porcius Cato, called the Censor.
Cato was a man who was famous for
what men call the old Roman vir .
tues, for he proved himself a warrior
reckless of his own danger, yet shrewd
402
sidered useful , and despising the things
that make life lovely and gracious as
well as the things that are merely plea
sant and the things that are harmful.
And so, because Scipio was not of a like
ungracious temper, Cato was very ready
to think ill of him.
Cato's name of Censor was given to
him because at Rome Censor was the
title of a great officer of State who was
guardian of public morals ; and when
Cato was himself appointed to this office
he was very rigidin punishing whatever
he thought foolish or unseemly, fearing
the great and powerful no more than
the humble and mean , so that his rule
as Censor remained in men's memory.
THREORACC HI,WHO STROVE , FOR THE
PEOPLE
The daughter of Scipio, who was
called Cornelia, was wedded to a certain
Tiberius Sempronius Gracchus ; and
they had two sons, named Tiberius and
Gaius, whose mother cared nothing to
make a show of jewels, although she was
wealthy, but would point to her two
boys and
and say
say :: " These are my jewels."
Now, after the Romans had over
thrown Carthage, their armies van
quished many foreign foes, and the
power of Rome became very great.
But in Rome and in Italy the people
suffered grievously. For since the old
nobility had ceased to have all the
power, a new order of nobles had sprung
up out of those families whose members
had held high office, and these new
nobles tried, like the old patricians, to
keep the power all in their own hands.
These senatorial families had managed
to get possession of the new lands that
Rome had won, so that everywhere
were great estates tilled by the slaves
of these nobles, and the oid free yeomen
farmers of Italy seemed likely to dis
appear altogether. But when Tiberius
Gracchus was grown up he tried to make
things better for the common folk, and
to make the landowners give up to
 sonrisauanication.I HE FIRST GREAT MEN OF ROME amamalai
them the lands to which he said they brothers, whom we know now as the
really had no right . Still, though he
wished that they should be fairly paid for
what they lost, the nobles were very
angry, and said that Tiberius was
going about to win the favour of the
commons and to make himself king.
The nobles and their followers then
fell upon the followers of Tiberius, and
Tiberius himself was struck down and
murdered in the fray. But Gaius , the
younger brother, waited his time, and
after some j'ears he, in turn, came
forward as the people's champion,
seeking also to give power to other
Italians by making them citizens of
REGULUS GOING BACK TỰ CARTHAGE TO DIE A CAPTIVE FOR THE SAKE OF ROME
Rome. But most of all Gaius desired
to humble the nobles who had done
his brother to death, and by his elo.
quence and boldness he came near to
gaining his end . Yet , when they saw
that the nobles were better prepared to
fight, his supporters were afraid , and
again the nobles and their followers fell
upon them and slew many . And when
Gaius saw how fickle the people were,
and that they were willing, as he said, to
remain slaves, he bade his faithful ser
vant to thrust his sword into his heart ,
and so the servant slew him, and then ,
for the love of his dead master, slew him
self by his side . But in after time the
people honoured the memory of these
OCCULLO00
403
Gracchi, and set up a statue of their
mother, Cornelia , writing thereon not
that she was the daughter of the great
Scipio, but that she was “ the mother of
)
the Gracchi.”
Now you can see how the Roman
state became divided between a Senate
party and a popular party ; and while
the foreign wars went on, it came about
that whenever a successful general won
the favour of his soldiers he could use
his army to give his own party power.
Thus the popular party triumphed under
Gaius Marius , and again the Senate's
party seemed to have crushed them
under the merciless leader Sulla. The
blood of both parties was spilt like
water, and instead of seeking the
common weal , it seemed that every man
cared only for his own gain, or, at best,
for the gain of his party, so that some
began to see that there would be no
settled order in Rome, but endless strife,
until there should arise some one man
strong enough and wise enough to crush
all quarrelling parties , and to take the
government into his own hands and rule
with the good of the whole state as his aim.
Among the Senate party, their great
captain Sulla saw signs of great talent
in a very young man whom we call
Pompey. Therefore, Sulla raised him
uora.com maan maniramineni.pavammam
JULIUS CÆSAR, THE FOREMOST MAN OF ROME

OLIMIZTUE
DOTME
19
90

JULIUS CÆSAR CONDEMNING VERCINGETORIX, A REBEL CHIEFTAIN IN GAUL, NOW FRANCE

THE DEATH OF JULIUS CÆSAR IN THE SENATE- HOUSE IN ROME, STABBED BY HIS FRIENDS
Julius Cæsar became the foremost man in all the world. He set himself to rule the Roman Empire and to
make wise laws. But there were some who thought he wanted to be crowned king, a thing hateful to all
Romans, and for this ambition that Cæsar was supposed to have, although he thrice refused the crown ,
they killed him in the Senate House at the foot of the statue of Pompey, his dead rival. But Cæsar's
power was well founded, and his adopted son, Octavian , became the first of a long line of emperors.
104
 ESO TOTAL ELEMEU und

THE GREAT ELOQUENCE & SAD DEATH OF CICERO

ITO
om

TUTTO
CICERO DELIVERING ONE OF HIS GREAT ORATIONS IN THE ROMAN SENATE

ORNELIDO
TUTTI

84991(

CICERO ABOUT TO DIE AT THEHANDS OF MARK ANTONY'S TROOPS

Cicero was the great orator of Rome in the days of Pompey and Julius Cæsar, and his speeches are looked
upon even now as models for orators. The top picture shows Cicero denouncing the treachery of a senator,
whom we see sitting, listening anxiously, at the end of the seat on the right. After the murder of
Julius Cæsar, however, Cicero took the side of his murderers, which made Mark Antony so angry that
he bad him put to death. Cicero Aed frcz Rome, but Antony's friends caught him and put him to death.
momma i som mmmmmmm LULUIDELIUXUmoor
405
 -THE CHILD'S BOOK OF MEN AND WOMEN
to high command, while other people
sneered at him as a boy. But the boy
led armies with great success, and when
he returned from Africa, where he
overthrew Sulla's enemies, Sulla hailed
him by the title “ Magnus,” which
means great." But, after all, he did
not prove to be really a very great
man , though for a long time it seemed
that he might possibly become the
saviour of the Roman state . For he
was a skilful soldier, and , besides that,
he was kind -hearted , and had a way
that made him popular.
Then, while he was still a young man conquer it, so he went back to Gaul.
away
he brokeme the Senate party,
the chief of the people's HOCÆSAR STRIFE ,GREW UP BETWEEN
from
and
party , and almost the chief man in the
state. Soon after this he was appointed
to destroy thebands of pirates who sailed party. The news of Cæsar's victories
over the Mediterranean Sea, and then he
went to take command of the Roman
armies in Asia, where there was a war
going on against a barbarian monarch.
It was some years before Pompey
finished that war successfully, and
during the war there was in the city
another man who was laying his own
plans to become master of the Romans.
This was the most famous of all Romans ,
Julius Cæsar.
ÆSAR AND POMPEY, THE FOREMOST
C4MEN IN ROME
Cæsar had always belonged to the
popular party , though he himself be
longed to a noble family. He saw that
if he wished to win power he must make
himself a favourite with the people ;
and he saw, too, that the next thing
would be to make Pompey feel that if
rule together
two joinedworld
they theRoman ; although could THBEATA.STAROF POMPEY AND HISSAD
they there
was a third , Crassus, who, because of
his vast wealth, was a sort of rival to
Pompey. When Pompey came back
from the war with Mithridates, Cæsar
managed so that the three agreed to
act together; and no doubt Pompey
thought he was himself going to be
the chief of the three, seeing that Cæsar
was as yet without practice in the wars ,
though famous as an orator. Yet it
was Cæsar who devised measures that
pleased the people.
Now , Cæsar knew very well that the
time would come when there would be
open strife, whether he or Pompey
should be the head of the state,, and Pompey's head was brought to him ,
he got himself appointed to be governor
406
of the province of Gaul, which means
France . But as there were many war
like tribes in Gaul he required an army
to bring them into subjection, and with
this army he very soon showed that
he was one of the most skilful soldiers
who ever lived , with a wonderful power
over his followers. Cæsar wrote a book
of his wars in Gaul, which is a model
of what such a book ought to be.
While he was there he crossed the
British Channel and fought the Ancient
Britons ; but he only wished to see
what the country was like, not to
But Pompey stayed at Rome, and
made friends again with the Senate
in Gaul made him afraid that his rival
would come back to Rome with his
army and seize the chief power in
the state ; and Pompey thought that
by staying at Rome he could best make
sure of being strong enough to check
Cæsar. And when Cæsar saw that the
time had come when he must either
march to Rome at the head of an army
or be thrust from power altogether,
he led his troops across the River
Rubicon, which was the boundary of
his province. But since no governor
might lead armies except in his own
province, this was as much as to declare
war upon the Roman Government.
So now,, when people do something
which binds them to go on , and makes
any turning back impossible, they are
said to have crossed the Rubicon ."
, AND CÆSAR'S
Then Pompey found that his own war
like prowess was forgotten, whereas
the deeds of Cæsar were fresh in men's
minds ; and the soldiers everywhere
declared in Cæsar's favour, so that
Pompey had to fly from Italy. But
afterwards he gathered a great army in
Greece , and to Greece at last came
Cæsar to fight him. At the battle of
Pharsalia, Pompey was overthrown
and forced to fly from there to Egypt ;
but as he was landing a murderer
stabbed him in the back, and the head
was hewn from his dead body . But
when Cæsar also came thither, and
he shed tears, and put the murderer
 -THE FIRST GREAT
to death . For this was notable in
Cæsar, that he was, like Scipio, of a
merciful mind, ready to take into favour
those who had fought against him.
TOTTE
WHAPL CÆDSARTO DITAD,KEANHIS
D WHY
LIFE
THEY
And having thus come to be the
foremost man in all the world , Cæsar set
himself to put the ruling of the great
domains of Rome in order, and to make
wise laws. But there were some who
thought he would like to be crowned
king, a thing hateful to all Romans ;
andsome who wanted toget the power
back into the hands of the Senate ;
and others who had private grudges
against Cæsar , counting among their
number not a few of the most powerful
men in the state .
So they plotted to take Cæsar's life,
and one day, as he stood near the
statue of his dead rival, Pompey, they
came to him , pretending to make a
petition, and thereupon drew their
swords and stabbed him to death,
sending out through the city crying
that Rome was freed from the tyrant.
They forgot that , though Cæsar fell,
either some other must take his place
or the empire of Rome must be rent in
pieces . For Cæsar had found and
shown the only way, and his adopted
son , Octavian, was destined to become
the first of the Roman emperors , Cæsar
Augustus. But the young Octavian was
only eighteen , and none thought he
would take the place of the great Julius.
, MARK
НомPEOPLE ANTONY STIRRED UP THE
But one Marcus Antonius, whom we
commonly call Antony, who was a
clever man and a friend of the murdered
Cæsar, got leave by fair words to speak
to the people, whom he stirred up to a
great fury against those who had
slain him . And after that none knew
for a long time who would get the
upper hand . But the young Cæsar
made common cause with Antony,
and presently those who had slain
Cæsar and those who would avenge him
were at war . Antony and Octavian
overthrew the other party, of whom the
most famous now is Marcus Brutus,
by reason of the play of Julius
Cæsar which our Shakespeare wrote.
This Marcus Brutus was one of those
who had taken the side of Pompey in
the war with Cæsar, and yet had been
407
MEN OF ROME
* XXX
treated with great favour by Cæsar
afterwards. But he was so full of the
belief that the rule of one man in Rome
must be bad for the state - perhaps
because he remembered that the first
Brutus was called great because he drove
out the Tarquins -- that he joined the
conspiracy againsthis own friend. And
it is said that when Cæsar saw him
with his sword drawn he did not care
to defend himself, but only said : “ You,
)
too, Brutus ? " and so fell, pierced by
his friend's sword .
There was another famous Roman of
those days whose name is known to
everyone, the orator Cicero. He,, too,,
was among those who took Pompey's
side, but was afterwards treated by
Cæsar with favour. It is said that the
reason why the conspirators did not ask
him to join them was , that they thought
he would expect them to pay too much
regard to his opinion, although they did
not really think him a wise man.
C'SELDIERTOCTAVIAN THE EMPERORTHE
However, after the murder, Cicero
made many famous speeches on their side
in opposition to Antony. Then Antony
was so angry that Cicero was one of the
people whom he specially named to be
put to death ; and when some of Antony's
friends caught Cicero, they cut off his
head and his hands and sent them to
Antony . Besides being a great orator,
so that his speeches are looked upon as
models even now, Cicero wrote books
which tell us more about those times
than any other writings we have.
After the death of Cæsar it seemed at
first that Octavian and Antony would
divide the world between them ; but
then they also came to wars , since both
wished to rule . And though Antony
was the elder, and a practised soldier,
yet he was vanquished by Octavian ;
because he loved Cleopatra, the Queen
of Egypt, and she loved him ; ard she
persuaded him to remain in Egypt with
her when he should have been making
ready for his strife with Cæsar.
So, by land and sea , Antony was
defeated, and when he saw that all
hope of victory was gone he slew him
self ; and there was none left to stand
between Octavian and the lordship of
the Roman world .
The next stories of great Romans begin
on page 523 .
 GEKOMMER
DOOR
CELIA
&
ROSALIN
W
,R
JESTER
TOUCHST
ARDEN
OF
FOREST
THE
IN
ESTING
ITH

408
路 。 The Child's Story of
FAMOUS BOOKS

THE PLAYS OF SHAKESPEARE

speare. “,As You Like It " is,one andof his finest comedies. The title has very
little to do with the play, but “ the play's the thing." The story is one that Shake
speare got from an earlier work than his own, butvery few personshave read that
work , while millions have delighted in this charming comedy. “ The Comedy of
Errors " is one of the less important plays of Shakespeare, and was probably an
early work. Nor does the “Two Gentlemen of Verona" rank among his great
plays. But “ King Lear " is perhaps the grandest of all his great dramas written
for the stage. It is a noble tragedy, founded on an old English legend or tradition.
“ The Taming of the Shrew " is a very amusing comedy based upon an earlier story
of the same name, and probably Shakespeare did not write the whole of it.

AS YOU LIKE IT
'HERE was a kind man was to fight the
THERE
and peace -loving CONTINUED FROM 274 champion wrestler, she
duke , against whom begged of him to re
his brother Frederick fuse . Orlando, how
successfully rebelled, usurping ever, was not afraid ; and , to the
his dominions. Withdrawing surprise of all , he overthrew the
into the great and wild Forest champion .
of Arden , this duke, with a num Frederick, who witnessed the
ber of faithful followers, lived combat, was about to congratu
in his exile a happy and peaceful life. late the victor,, when he heard that he
One of his old friends had been Sir was the son of his old enemy, and the
Rowland de Bois , who died , leaving praise on his lips changed to anger.
three sons, Oliver, Orlando, and Jaques. But Rosalind, in admiration of Or
To the first named, who was the lando's bravery , gave him a chain she
eldest, he left all his money and estates, was wearing. This action so annoyed
except one thousand crowns for Frederick that he now banished her
Orlando. Oliver was charged to give from the palace. Perhaps he had been
the brothers a good upbringing, but waiting for the excuse, as Rosalind was
though he provided Jaques with ample so beautiful in person, and so witty in
schooling, he had a hatred of Orlando, mind, that his own daughter, Celia,
whom he kept idly at home . As though comely and pleasant, suffered
contrast with the bewitching
Orlando grew up, hecould not endure by contrast
his idle life, and at length demanded daughter of the banished duke.
the money which his father had left Celia dearly loved her cousin Rosa
him , so that he might go away from lind, and had not the least jealousy of
his brother's house . her charms, so that when her companion
Oliver, wishing to keep the money, was banished from the palace she did
arranged with a great wrestler, who not hesitate to share her fate ,and they
was a servant of Frederick, the usurper, went away together, taking with them
to challenge Orlando to a match, the witty jester, Touchstone, whose
believing that his brother might be comic sayings would cheer them on
killed if he fought the wrestler. their way;
The diatch was duly arranged, and They did not go, of course, in the
among the spectators were Frederick's rich dresses they wore in the palace.
daughter, Celia, and her fair cousin, Rosalind, who was "more than common
) )

Rosalind, whom Frederick allowed to tall,” dressed herself like a shepherd,

live at the palace, although she was while Celia put on the clothes of a
the daughter of the exiled duke, the shepherdess. Their destination was

two girls being inseparable friends. the Forest of Arden, where the banished
When Rosalind saw that so young a duke held his rustic court .
, BRIDE
IF 409
 „ THE CHILD'S STORY OF FAMOUS BOOKS- anan
Now, when Orlando was returning not Orlando rescued him at the cost
fo the house of his brother, he was met of injury to himself.
by an old servant of the family named This noble action so shamed Oliver
Adam , who loved the youth so much that he took his brother to his heart ;
that , knowing Oliver meant to kill and since Orlando, being injured, could
him , he had brought all the savings of not visit Rosalind's cottage as usual,
his life , some five hundred crowns , and Oliver went there to explain his absence ,
urged Orlando to go away with him. and, seeing Celia dressed as a shep
They, too, set out for the safe seclusion herdess, fell in love with her forthwith.
of the famous forest . It was arranged that the wedding of
Rosalind and Celia in due time gained Oliver and Celia should take place at
the shelter of the forest , where at length the duke's encampment , and as Or
they found a lodging in a little cottage ; lando protested that he still loved the
but what perplexed them greatly was lady who gave him the chain , Rosalind
to discoverlittle verses written on paper promised she would bring her to him at
and placed in the trunks of trees, ex- the wedding of Celia ; which she did,
pressing great love for Rosalind. Who of course, by putting off her disguise
could the unknown rhymer be ? Celia and appearing there as her own delight
undertook to find out, and traced him ful self, not only to the joy of Orlando ,
at length to Orlando, whom Rosalind , but also of her father, the duke.
still pretending to be a man, promised to Oliver was now so happy that he
cure of his love if he would come each promised to give Orlando his estates ;
day to the cottage and make love to her but presently news came that Frederick
in the name of Rosalind . himself was on the way to kill his
The flight of the two ladies from the brother, the banished duke. By a
palace had led Frederick, the usurper, to strange chance, however, he met a good
accuse Oliver of sheltering them nd old man who spoke to him of the evil
Orlando , little knowing how Oliver had life he was leading, and so changed his
tried to rid himself of his younger mind that he determined for the future
brother. So Oliver, too, was banished to give his thoughts to religion , and
from court, and, in common with the surrendered to the duke the dominions
other exiles, made for the forest , where which he had unlawfully usurped .
he would have been killed by a lion had Thus happiness was restored to all.
THE COMEDY OF ERRORS
HERE was a rich merchant of Syra-
THER set out to search for their brothers, but
cuse, named Ægeon, who had twin Ægeon, thinking the searchers lost , as
boys, and these he christened with the they had not returned after some years,
one name Antipholus. It so happened himself went forth to seek for them . At
that at the same place there were two length Ægeon, his money all spent,
other twin boys , whose mother was very found himself in Ephesus, where, ad
poor, and Ægeon conceived the idea of mitting that he was a merchant of
buying these poor children , who had both Syracuse, he was thrown into prison by
been named Dromio , to bring them up as the Duke of Ephesus, because the Duke
servants to his own twins. But when of Syracuse had recently killed a mer
returning to his home by sea a great chant of Ephesus who had been unable
storm arose, and the merchant himself, to ransom himself.
together with one of his own children Now , we must know that the son
and one of the Dromios, was rescued and whom Ægeon had lost in the shipwreck,
taken to Syracuse, while, unknown to together with the other Dromio, had
him , his wife, Æmilia, and the other two lived all this time in the town of Ephesus,
children were rescued and taken to while his wife, Æmilia , had become the
Ephesus, Æmilia, however, being separ- head ofa priory. Antipholus of Ephesus
ated from the children. was a favourite of the duke. We can
Time went past, and the twin children therefore see how the errors would begin
grew to manhood without ever hearing when Antipholus of Syracuse , of whom
of each other . When Antipholus of Ægeon was in search, together with his
Syracuse and his attendant Dromio particular Dromio, also arrived in
were nearly twenty years of age, they Ephesus. As Antipholus of Ephesus
nur BURYUUTOLIU
410
 GORILA
THE COMEDY
had married a charming lady of that
town , and his Dromio had married also,
while both their brothers were still un-
married and knew nothing of each other,
the new - comers to Ephesus had not been
there long before everything was in a
muddle. The one Antipholus mistook
the other's Dromio for his own servant .
Dromio of Ephesus mistook Antipholus
of Syracuse for his master ; while the
latter was mistaken by his brother's
wife for her own husband. And so on ,
until none of them knew whether they
stood on their head or their heels.
Out of the last “ error " came the
explanation, which put all things straight
again . For Antipholus of Syracuse,
naturally denying to Adriana, the wife
of his brother, that he was her husband,
and behaving so strangely—as she
thought - had to take refuge from her
and her friends , who would have had
him bound as a madman, by running into The tangle was soon made straight
the priory of which , unknown to him , after this explanation ; old Ægeon was
his own mother was the prioress. released , and the family united after so
Adriana appealed to the duke, who many years and so many “ errors.” The
was passing the priory at the time, and bond of friendship , too, was strength
he was asking for an explanation, when
her own husband and his attendant
came up to complain of a jeweller who
THE TWO GENTLEMEN
HERE were two gentlemen in the
THER
town of Verona , named Valentine
and Proteus , who were friends and
close companions, until one of them fell
in love with a lady of Verona named
Julia. It was Proteus who had fallen
in love, and that was quite a good reason
for his refusing to accompany Valentine
on his travels, though perhaps not so
good a reason for Valentine to make fun
of him . So Valentine set out on his
travels alone, going first to Milan .
Meanwhile, thanks to an uncle of
Proteus , the father of that young gentle.
man had been urged to send his son
away, so that, when he grew old, Proteus
might have no reason to regret that in
his youth he had been a stay-at-home,
and had neglected to see the world. His
father, Antonio, therefore sent his son
after Valentine to Milan , that he might
have the company of his friend, which
he had before refused .
When Proteus got to Milan the
comedy had begun , for, behold Valen-
tine, who had scoffed at his friend for
411
OF ERRORSamnanunuoma ...?
was charging him for a debt which he
had not incurred, the debtor really being
the Antipholus who was inside the
priory.
Atthis very moment Ægeon, too, was
being taken round the town as a prisoner
held at ransom, and when he saw Anti
pholus and Dromio of Ephesus he
thought they were the son and attendant
of whom he was in search , though they ,
of course, denied all knowledge of him ;
but when Æmilia herself appeared she
asked the aged prisoner if he was indeed
the father of the twins named Anti
pholus. This he acknowledged, and she
then told him that she was their mother
and his wife , but, being parted from the
children by some fishermen of Corinth
after they were rescued , and believing
herself alone in the world , she had
entered this priory, of which she was
now the head .
ened when Antipholus of Syracuse
became the husband of Luciana, sister
of Adriana, his brother's wife .
OF VERONA
being in love with Julia, now himself
deeply in love with Silvia, the bewitch
ing daughter of the Duke of Milan . And
his case was worse, for, being poor, he
could not hope that the duke would let
him marry his daughter ; whereas
Proteus was at least in love with a lady
of his own station in life. Like Romeo
with his Juliet, Valentine's only plan
was to marry his Silvia without her
father's consent, and he had quite made
up his mind to climb to her window
and carry her away, when Proteus
overtook him in Milan .
Valentine's scheme was quickly up
set, for no sooner had he disclosed it to
his friend than the latter, on seeing the
lovely Silvia, also fell in love with her,
and began to forget his Julia left in
Verona . Nay, worse ; he betrayed
Valentine's intentions to the duke.
The duke now wished to convict
Valentine of his intention to abduct
Silvia, without disclosing to him how he
had come by the knowledge of the plan .
So, pretending that he himself was in
 -THE CHILD'S STORY
love with a widow of Milan, he asked
Valentine what he would advise him to
do - rather a foolish question, one might
think, for aa duke who had already been
married to ask a young man who was
still unwedded . But the wisdom of the
duke lay in the fact that he knew none
to be so foolish as a young man in love.
Judge if the duke was wise or foolish,
when Valentine innocently advised him
to do exactly what he had himself pur-
posed doing — to carry away the lady.
He even lent the duke his own coat
as a disguise , and in the pocket of the
coat the duke found , a letter from
Valentine addressed to his own daughter.
This discovery, gave the duke an
excuse for banishing Valentine from
Milan , and he now set about his own
plans to marry Silvia with all speed to
a
foolish young nobleman named his life on his promising to become their
Thurio ; but he enlisted the services of
Proteus to help forward the match,
little thinking that Valentine's friend
was himself in love with Silvia.
Proteus was expected to give so poor
an account of Valentine to Silvia, and
so glowing an account of Thurio, that suit, Julia going with the party as page
the maiden could not but decide to to Proteus ; and they, too, were
forget Valentine in favour of the foolish
nobleman . But , of course, Proteus did
nothing of the kind. He made his own
suit to the lady, and plainly showed her
that he was in love with her.
One night Proteus, with Thurio and
some musicians , came beneath the lattice
window of Silvia in the court of the
palace, and sang a love-song to her.
But Silvia was not the only lady who
heard this love-song. Julia , no longer
able to endure the absence of her lover,
had left Verona disguised as a page,
and, following Proteus to Milan, she
had overheard this song.
When Proteus thinks himself alone ,
he declares his love to Silvia, who comes
to the window, but she chides him for
his faithlessness to his friend Valentine, her to Valentine, who took the oppor
to whom she declares herself betrothed ; tunity of securing a free pardon for his
and he tells her that both the lady he
loved at Verona and Valentine are dead,
and pleads to have Silvia's portrait. This
she promises him, saying that she is loth
to be worshipped by him , but since she
believes him false, he is the better fitted
" to worship shadows and adore false
shapes," meaning that he can admire
her portrait, but need not admire her.
self, as she does not care for him . All
412
OF FAMOUS BOOKS
this is overheard by Julia, who is
hidden in the shadow .
Next day Proteus sends Julia - who,
disguised as a boy, has applied to him
to be employed as his page — for the
portrait, and gives her a ring to take to
Silvia, the very ring Julia herself had
given him before he left Verona. She
is comforted to find that Silvia rejects
his suit, and that she is displeased with
him for his faithlessness.
Silvia, true to Valentine, has deter
mined to escape from Milan, and by the
aid of a courtier named Eglamour she
sets off towards Mantua, but in a forest
they are set upon by outlaws, and Silvia
is captured
Happily, when Valentine had been
banished from Milan , he, too, had fallen
in with these very outlaws, who spared
leader, as they would be honoured by
having a nobleman for their chief.
So Silvia had fallen into the hands of
her own true love !
Her escape from Milan led to the
duke and the others following in pur
set
upon by the outlaws, the duke and
Thurio being captured and brought
before Valentine . There they saw
Silvia, and the foolish Thurio ex
claimed : “ Yonder is Silvia, and Sil
via's mine.” But Valentine dared him
but to breathe her name , and the
cowardly Thurio, seeing the bold lover
angry, and knowing his own life was in
danger, forthwith changed his tune to :
Sir Valentine , I care not for her, I ;
I hold him but a fool that will endanger
His body for a girl that loves him not ;
I claim her not , and therefore she is thine.
The duke, admiring the boldness of
Valentine as greatly as he detested the
cowardliness of Thurio , was at once won
over to his daughter's side, and gave
fellow outlaws , while Julia had mean
while disclosed to Proteus how her love
for him had brought her after him from
Verona, and he was once more at her feet.
So the return to Milan meant happi.
ness for all ; even for the foolish Thurio,
for if he had lost the duke's daughter
he had saved his own cowardly neck,
which he valued more highly, if we
may judge by his ungallant conduct.
LUXURIU
Lear, the aged King of Britain, in his foolish old age gave up his possessions to two of his daughters
who did not love him , while he gave nothing to his daughter Cordelia , who married the King of France.
When the French invaded Britain , the old king was sheltered by Cordelia, but she and her father
were taken prisoners by the British soldiers. This picture of Lear and Cordelia is painted by Mr. Joy.

THE TRAGEDY OF “ KING LEAR '

L ONG ago there was a King of Britain
whose name was Lear. He was over
eighty years of age at the time of the
story. So, old and worn with the cares
of his kingdom , he decided that the
time had come to give up his crown and
his possessions, and spend his few
remaining years in peace.
But King Lear had no son to succeed
him ; he had only three daughters. The
eldest of these was Goneril, wife of the
Duke of Albany ; the second was named
Regan , who was married to the Duke of
Cornwall ; and the youngest and most
beautiful , Cordelia, was still unmarried .
Between his three daughters the aged
king determined to divide his kingdom,
so he called them together to tell them
of his purpose, saying that he would
give the largest share to the one that
loved him most .
Goneril , a selfish , cold-hearted woman,
pretended that she loved him more than
her eyesight, grace , health, beauty,
honour - more than life itself. Regan,
who was like her elder sister in
413
character, protested that even the
extravagant declaration of Goneril's love
for her father was not strong enough
for her. All her joy, she said, was in
finding favour with her father.
Carried away by the loving words of
these two false, selfish women , the old
king gave each a third of his kingdom ;
but when the kind-hearted Cordelia,
who did truly love her father,would not
exaggerate the terms of her love beyond
those which a dutiful daughter should
employ, Lear was enraged at her, and
gave her nothing, dividing her share
of his kingdom between her two sisters.
Cordelia, however, was not without
consolation, as the King of France,
who loved her for her sweet and gentle
nature, made her his queen. So in
sensible to reason had the old king
grown, that the faithful Earl of Kent
was banished because he had ventured
to plead with Lear on behalf of Cor
delia. The kingdom of Britain was now
divided between Goneril and Regan ,
whose husbands, the Duke of Albany
 THE CHILD'S STORY
and the Duke of Cornwall, thus shared
the power of the old ruler. Lear
fondly hoped to spend hisdays between Lear and the jester, but Kent and his
the homes of his two children, attended
by a retinue of one hundred followers .
But he had not been long in Goneril's
palace before he discovered that her warriors of the country were gathering
love for him was all a sham . His to meet the French, with whom was
daughter did everything she could to
make his life unhappy, so that the old
man was forced to leave with all his
followers .
He went to the castle of the Earl of
Gloster, an old friend of his , who had
acted in regard to his own two sons
almost as foolishly as Lear had done to
his own daughters. Gloster's son
Edmund, an evil-minded, selfish , and
unscrupulous man, was his favourite,
while Edgar, his proper heir, a brave
and honest son, had unjustly been forced
by Edmund's scheming to leave the
home of his father.
At Gloster's castle more sorrow was
in store for Lear, as there he met his
daughter Regan, who had come to
plan with Edmund how she might
escape the nuisance of her father and
his followers . Goneril herself came to
the castle, and the two daughters did
all they could to make the poor old
king unhappy, declaring finally that
he needed no servants at all.
Utterly broken -hearted , Lear now
wandered away , accompanied only by
his jester, but followed soon after by
the faithful Earl of Kent , who had
disguised himself in order to be of
service to his old king. On a wild and
lonely heath , and in the midst of a great
storm , they came upon a hovel inhabited
by one who seemed to be a madman,
but was really Edgar, the banished
son of Gloster, feigning madness.
Now , the Earl of Gloster would gladly
have stood by Lear in his trouble, though
he had been warned against rendering
him assistance. Gloster, however, told
his false son , Edmund, that he meant
to help King Lear in secret, and also
showed him a letter just received which
brought the news that a French army
was coming to attack the British.
Here was Edmund's chance . He
straightway bore the letter to the Duke
of Cornwall, and also told him of his
father's intentions to succour the un-
happy king. For this service his father's
earldom was given to Edmund .
414
OF FAMOUS BOOKS * EXECILEGALAN
In the meantime Gloster had housed
in a farm near his castle , not only
own son, Edgar, both of whom were, of
course , disguised. He then had the
king sent on to Dover, where the
Lear's faithful daughter, Cordelia .
The Duke of Cornwall was quickly
on the track of Gloster, whom he had
arrested, and in his anger at the earl's
efforts to save the king he blinded
him , but was mortally wounded himself
by one of his own followers, enraged at
his cowardly brutality .
The tragedy was reaching its height,
for, the sightless ( arl was now led to
Dover by none other than his own son ,
Edgar, and , nearing the town, he came
upon King Lear, gone out of his mind ,
fantastically decked with flowers. A
follower of Goneril , meeting them ,
sought to kill the Earl of Gloster, but
Edgar fought and slew the man, and
discovered that he was the bearer of
a love -letter from the faithless Goneril
to his own stepbrother, Edmund .
Lear was now brought to the French
camp at Dover, where his daughter
Cordelia, who had never ceased to
love the father who had wronged her
so much , received him tenderly and
tried to console the aged king, now as
feeble in mind as in body.
But the war between France and
Britain was not so fierce as that which
now raged between Goneril and Regan .
These two faithless sisters had both
fallen in love with the villain Edmund .
When Edgar gave Goneril's letter to
the Duke of Albany, the duke
challenged Edmund to a duel, just after
a battle had been fought in which
King Lear and Cordelia had been
taken prisoners.
Edmund was fatally wounded by
the duke ; but meanwhile the two
unhappy women who had been the
cause of all this sad tragedy had settled
matters in a drastic way . Goneril
had contrived to poison her sister
Regan , out of jealousy at her love for
Edmund, and she, when her own
guilty secret was laid bare by the
discovery of her love -letter, stabbed
herself and died .
All too late , Edmund, now dying of
his wound , and repenting of his evil
 OL
TXELENTETT KING LEAR ZEIN

conduct, asked that the life of Cordelia Lear, despite the evil influence of his
might be spared ; but, at the very wife , would now have had the aged
moment when he was breathing his king resume his power, but that was
last, the weird figure of the old king hopeless ; his heart was broken and
carrying the dead body of Cordelia · death was upon him .
appeared. The last blow in the great The duke , however, showed his feeling
tragedy had been struck . for Lear by rewarding both Edgar and
The Duke of Albany, who had Kent for the services they had rendered
always been friendly towards King to the poor old king in his hour of need.

Petruchio was
w
a lively gentleman who undertook to “ tame" Katharina, a very hot-tempered lady whom he
married. His plan was to pretend he was always in a temper himself. He dressed absurdly, and when proper
clothes were brought in he threw them on the floor and behaved so badly that at last Katharina saw it was best
to obey her husband for the sake of peace. His plan succeeded, as we learn in “ The Taming of the Shrew ."

THE TAMING OF THE SHREW

A “ SHREW ” means a woman whose
temper is fiery ; who is never
satisfied with things; nagging, peevish,
always finding fault.
We are to suppose, then, that Katha-
rina, the elder daughter of Baptista,
a rich gentleman of Padua, in Italy,
was so ill-tempered that she could be
described as a shrew . Perhaps at heart
she was neither selfish nor ill-feeling ;
but possibly , being spoiled by her
parents as a child, she had grown into
these unfortunate habits, which made
her so unpleasant a companion that
there seemed little likelihood of anyone
marrying her, although it was known
that she would receive great wealth
from her father
TYTTYY
Quite the opposite to Katharina was
Charming
her younger sister , Bianca.
to look upon, gentle and winsome in
her character, and beloved by all,
we may be sure there was no lack of
gallant gentlemen who would willingly
have married Bianca. To some of her
suitors Baptista announced that he
would not allow Bianca to be married
until her elder sister had found a hus
band. In the meantime, he intended
that the young ladies should have the
best possible teaching in the accom
plishments of the time, and asked that
any good tutors might be recommended
to him .
At this time there had come to Padua ,
which was famous for its colleges , a

415
 THE CHILD'S STORY OF
young gentleman of Pisa named
Lucentio , son of a rich noble of that walk, owing to their horses taking flight
town. His purpose in Padua was to when Petruchio was thrashing his
study, but he had no sooner set eyes on
Bianca than he fell in love with her, and
thoughts of study were soon dismissed.
On learning that Baptista wished
to engage tutors for his daughters,
Lucentio planned with one of his own
servants, Tranio, that the latter should
impersonate him as a rich gentleman
come to Padua to pay court to Bianca ,
while he himself would contrive to be
engaged as tutor to the two ladies .
It was so arranged, and before long
Bianca was in love with her handsome
and agreeable instructor.
But in the meantime one of Bianca's
other suitors, a gentleman named Hor-
tensio, had enlisted the aid of a merry
friend from Verona, who undertook no
less a task than to marry Katharina, and
thus leave Bianca free to marry Hor-
tensio. This was Petruchio , who was promised Bianca would be wedded to
at once clever, masterful, high-spirited.
Petruchio began his love-making to
Katharina by addressing her as " Kate,"
in order to annoy her ; when she scolded
he pretended to find her “ passing
passing
gentle " ; and, finally, when she struck impersonate the father of Lucentio,
him he promised her as good as he had and got him to give his consent to the
got ,assuring her that, whether she cared wedding, inviting Baptista to his house
for him or not , he meant to marry her.
When her father came upon the scene,
the dashing Petruchio calmly informed
him that they had arranged for the
wedding to take place next Sunday.
When Sunday came, and Petruchio
arrived for the wedding, he presented
an extraordinary figure, wearing a new
hat, an old coat, shoes that were not
neighbours, a rusty sword, and mounted
upon a horse so old and skinny that it
was of no more value than the rubbishy
harness it wore . His servant was no less
strangely attired .
Baptista was thoroughly ashamed of
the bridegroom , but Petruchio refused
to change his clothes, as this was a part
of his scheme for “ taming the shrew .”
In the church he behaved quite
scandalously, insulting the priest, and
kissing Katharina so loudly that the
building echoed with the sound. Nor
would he wait for the wedding feast, but
set out at once with his wife for Verona .
Their journey was one series of mis-
fortunes, and the bridegroom behaved
as if he cared nothing for his bride .
FAMOUS BOOKSmumana.
The last part of the way they had to
servant, and they arrived, footsore and
weary, at his residence, where he made
matters worse by complaining about
everything, throwing the food on the
floor and beating his attendants.
In this way Petruchio behaved for a
time, and was always in so bad a temper
that Katharina had no chance to show
how bad her own temper was. Hor
tensio came to see them , and Petruchio
decided they would return with him to
Padua, promising that they should both
go there dressed according to their
rank . But when costumes for Katha.
rina and himself were brought in to
choose , he declared them all unsuitable ,
throwing them on the floor,and when
they did set out he was still wearing
his dress of odd clothes .
At Padua, meanwhile, Baptista had
her richest suitor, and this was Tranio,
who was playing the part of Lucentio,
while the latter pretended to be merely
the teacher of Greek and Latin . Tranio
arranged with an elderly man to
to arrange the matter, while Bianca
was to follow with aa servant .
Bianca did follow , but with the pre
tended tutor, Lucentio, who took her
to church on the way and married her.
When Lucentio arrived at his own house
at Padua, his real father from Pisa had
just come to visit him, so that Lucentio
was in time to kneel at his feet and ask
at once his pardon and his blessing,
The journey of Petruchio and Katha
rina back to Padua was conducted in
the strangest way, Petruchio insisting
on his wife agreeing to his most ridicu
lous statements, and making her kiss
him publicly in the street under threat
that they would return to Verona
if she were ashamed to do so .
Indeed , by the time they reached
Lucentio's house there was no more
obedient wife in all Italy. Katharina
was actually so “ tamed ” that she even
made a little speech to the other ladies
present on the virtue of a wife's
obedience to her husband .
The next Stories of Famous Books begin on
page 539.

416
 The Child's Book of
0 WONDER

WHAT THE WISE MAN TELLS US

CHE questions grow more puzzling than ever as the children find the Wise
THE Man able to answer them , and the questions that come into these pages
are just those questions that boys and girls have asked since time began. All
of us have wondered why we go to sleep and where we go in our sleep ; what
dreams are and why they come ; why we laugh when we are pleased and cry
when we are hurt ; and where the tears come from . Here the Wise Man tells us
of all these things ; and he tells us, too, of the falling leaves and the dying flowers ;
of the wonderful heat of the sun and how it keeps alight ; and of the beauty of
the sky. The pictures show us the wonder of a buried city dug out of the earth .

WHY DO WE GO TO SLEEP ?
anywhere. We are
N°To one is quite sure
why we go to CONTINUED FROM PAGE 291 still there, only we
sleep, said the Wise are not awake. That
Man , when the children means that we are not
asked this question, but I awake to what is around
think the real reason is that , us; but though we take no notice
while we are awake, we make of what is around us, we are still
something in our bodies which the there , and even while we are
blood carries to the brain, so as to fast asleep we are often doing
put it to sleep, just as medicine will all sorts of things, or, rather, we
put you to sleep ; and the best kind think we are .
of medicine is the kind that is most This is so every time we have a
like the stuff that we make in our own dream , and we have far more dreams
bodies for this purpose . This is not than we remember when we wake .
the wholeof the answer to your ques . Long ago savages used to think that
tion, but I think it is most of it. men merely went away somewhere
WHAT GOOD DO WE GET BY SLEEP ? when they slept, and dreaming was
If you put the question in that way, one of the reasons that made them
said the Wise Man , the answer is that think so ; but I am sure that that
we go to sleep so as to rest . The whole was a mistake .
body rests when asleep, more or less- Dreams do people all sorts of
the brain, the heart , the lungs, the harm if they are not sensible about
muscles, stomach and all. Children them ; but we must be sensible , and
want a lot of sleep because children then they will not hurt us or make
have to grow , and they do most of their us think that terrible things are
growing during sleep , so if they will going to happen. Dreams show that
not go to bed they will not grow we have really not gone away, be
properly. Sleep is more important cause they are almost always due
for children than for anyone else, just to something disturbing, us, and
for this reason, though no one can get nothing could disturb us if we were
on without it. Many ofthe people who not there, could it ?
grow up too small or weak , or poor in So slight a thing as the wind in the
their minds, are people who did not chimney, or a leaf tapping on the
sleep enough when they were children. window -pane, may make us dream .
Time was whenolder people were care. But the ccmmonest thing that dis
less about children's sleep, but one of turbs us is our stomach. If we eat
the happiest and best things for chil- too much before we go to sleep, and
dren nowadays is that their sleep is especially if we eat things that do
looked after. not agree with us, then in the night
WHERE DO WE 60 IN OUR SLEEP ? they disturb the brain, and make
Ah , said the Wise Man , that is part of it wake up, though not so
a question indeed ! At any rate, I much as to make us know where
am quite sure that we do not go we are . So, also , noises often make

417
 -THE CHILD'S BOOK OF WONDER
us dream because they disturb the we tell the lower part of the brain that
brain . But sounds could not disturb it must not do as it feels inclined to do,
the brain if we were not still there to and so we stop crying.
hear them .
WHY DO THE TEARS COME ?
WHY DO I LAUGH WHEN I AM OLAD ? There is no good reason why tears
What hard questions you ask, the should come when you cry, but there
Wise Man said . Will you be content is a very good and beautiful reason for
if I answer that you laugh because you the tears which we are really making
are “ made that way ” ? all the time that we are awake, though
Yet , though perhaps you do not we know nothing about it. You know
think much of it, that is the real quite well that every few seconds you
answer . It depends upon the way in wink both your eyelids at once. You
which your brain and body are built. do not do it on purpose, but you do it
After all , you laugh when you are all the same. If you purposely stop
tickled , even though you may not doing it , as little boys and girls often
be pleased, and that is really easier do when they stare at each other, your
to explain . If aa bright light suddenly eye becomes very uncomfortable, and
strikes your eye, you shut it because if you did not wink at all your eye
your brain is made so as to make you would soon cease to work properly.
reply in that way. Now I will tell you what winking does
That is a simple way of replying for the eye. When the eye is open, the
And laughing when you are tickled front of it is exposed to dust and dirt,
is really the same, only that instead and also the front of it is apt to get dry,
of doing just one thing, you do a and if it got dry we could not see pro
number of things all at once. You move perly. Yet how is it that , though we
many muscles of your face instead never wash the front of our eyes, they
of merely moving the muscles of your are always clean ? It is because we
evelids. You also move the muscles wash them every time we wink. Up
that you breathe with , in an unusual above each eye, rather to the outer
way, and also the muscles that you make side, there is a tiny little thing called
sounds with . It is this particular the tear -gland, and all the time we are
movement of all these muscles together . awake this is slowly making tears.
that we call laughter, and it is really Then , when the front of the eye feels
a reply to the tickling, just as drawing itself becoming rather too dry, and
away your foot is a reply when some- perhaps even a little dusty, it tells the
one tickles the sole of it . brain, and down comes the eyelid
WHY DO I CRY WHEN I AM HURT ? for a second, with a tear inside it, and
The best answer I can give to this, said so washes clean the front of the eye.
the Wise Man , is the answer that I gave It is the most gentle and perfect wash
to the last question : You cry because ing in the world.
your brain is so made as to act that way. WHERE DO THE TEARS GO ?
We do not know why your brain should Well , if you look at the inner corner
be so made, for though there is much use of your lower eyelid you will see a tiny
in tears when we are not crying, as I little hole. The tear runs down this and
shall tell you in a minute, yet there is finds itself - where do you think ? Now ,
no real use in crying when we are hurt. I will give you a hint before I tell you.
When people grow older they find When you have been crying a great deal,
this out, and usually they do not cry do you not have to blow your nose ?
when they are hurt. The highest part The reason is that the tears, as many
of the brain - where people themselves of them as carı, run down into the nose.
really live - is the master of the lower All the time we are awake and not
part of the brain , and can order it to crying, this goes on , keeping our eyes
do things, and forbid it to do things, moist and perfectly clean, and costing
as it likes . trouble. But when
us no we cry we
Now, it is the lower part of the brain make far more tears than we need.
that replies by crying when we are Indeed, we make so many that they
hurt, so that even the tiniest baby can cannot even all run down into the nose,
cry perfectly. But when we grow older though many of them do. So, as there
TOTTUNUT
418
 4.722 14 TI ... 20 CATEU IUTEGRIEG ZIGN

A CITY THAT WAS LOST FOR 1,500 YEARS

TTTTTTTTTTTTTTT

Pompeii was an old Roman city in Italy that existed 500 years before Christ was born . Close by was an old
volcano called Vesuvius, which had been harmless many centuries . But in the year 79 A. D. the volcano suddenly
burst into eruption, and in one day Pompeii was buried in the ashes from the burning mountain, and about 2,000
people were killed.' The city remained buried for about 1,700 years. Then men began to dig in the place where
the city had been, and the ruins of Pompeii have now been dug out , so that we can walk through the
streets that lay underground, and see the houses and shops in which the people of Pompeii lived so long ago.
These photographs are taken by the famous photographers in Italy, Alinari Brothers,
TUTTI TUTTO TOUTTOUT UT DOINUATU IZTUELLTOODEXTROLOZI
419
 - THE CHILD'S BOOK OF WONDER
is nowhere else for them to go , and the plenty of light and warmth . When
eye itself cannot hold them all as they the summer goes they die. You know
come pouring into it , they get spilt how the roses on a rose- bush die , but
over the edge of the lower eyelid, and you know also that the rose-bush itself
run down our cheeks . does not die .
But , as I have said, though the tears, In just the same way the leaves of most
when we are not crying, are so useful trees die at the end of the summer, but
that we could not do without them , the trees go on living. Now, I want you
and though the way they are made and to understand, what very few grown-up
used by the upper eyelid when we wink people understand, that when the flowers
is one of the most beautiful things in and the leaves die and fall , their death
the body, yet it is no use to make too and fall is really a sign of life in the plant ,
many of them. Indeed, though the or bush , or tree that bears them. If the
real use of tears is to make us see whole bough of a tree is killed by some
properly, you know very well that when thing in the summer, the leaves will
you cry you make so many tears that remain on it when the leaves of all the
you cannot see clearly at all . living boughs have fallen . There is
WHAT WAKES ME UP IN THE MORNING really no waste or loss to a plant or a
tree when its leaves and flowers die .
In order to answer this, said the Before a leaf falls it changes its
Wise Man, I must tell you that we colour, as we know , because the plant
do not sleep in just the same way or tree is taking out of the leaf all
the usefulthings that it needs for
all through the night. To begin with,
we sleep deeply . Now , it is good its own life. Then , at the base of
to sleep deeply. It makes us look the leaf, it forms a thin layer of some
well and beautiful, and peopleseem thing rather like cork, so that, after soine
to have noticed this, since they call of the useful things have been taken
the first hours of sleep “ the beauty out of it, the leaf is left to die. There
sleep.” But for some hours after this are still some useful things in the leaf,
we sleep less and less deeply. We can however , only they need something to
easily find this out by noticing exactly be done to them before the plant can
how loud a noise is required to wake use theni .
anybody up at various times in his WHAT HAPPENS WHEN A LEAF FALLS ?
sleep. And we find that when he has had We have seen the changes that take
nearlyenough sleep he will be wakened place in the leaf as the summer goes
by a little noise which, a few hours away, said the Wise Man . When the
before, he would not have noticed at all . leaf falls to the ground , there
Now, that is the sort of thing that
happens when we wake. We have are waiting for it many tiny living
been sleeping less and less deeply for creatures called it
we say, make microbes,
decay. which
But ,this
as
some time, and our brain has almost really means that the stuff ofthe leaf
awakened of itself, I think. Thenthere is changed in such a way that it can be
comes a sound or a light, or perhaps we taken up by the plant from the soil and
move in bed and feel ourselves moving, built up again into the plant when the
and since we are already very nearly spring comes . This is one of the most
awake, the sound or the light or the beautiful and wonderful things in
feeling wakes us up. Of course , we live Nature , and there is no greater lesson
in a way that we have made for our we can
selves ; but if we lived out of doors, as like uselessurndeath
than that what looks
and decay and
men did long ago, and as birds do now , waste is really nothing of the sort,
it would naturally be light that woke us but a living process that makes for
up at last . That is what wakes the more life.
s
bird up now. When the sun rises , and
You and
the light gets stronger , it wakes them leaves will flowers
say, Why should not the
live on all the year
up, though we are awakened by a noise. round, as they do in some plants for
WHERE DO THE FLOWERS GO IN WINTER ? special reasons ? But the leaf is made
The flowers of most plants, said the in order to use the sunlight, and in the
Wise Man , can only live and be useful winter there is not enough sunlight, and
for part of one year, when there is so the leaf would be wasting its time.
420
 LIZARTERA -THE CHILD'S BOOK OF WONDER-med
So the plant takes what it can use
from the leaf and the rest of the leaf
is changed, so that the plant can use
that, too , when the summer is coming,
and there is a use for new leaves .
WHAT KEEPS THE SUN ALIGHTP
You would think that the sun is
alight because it is burning - that it is
an enormous fire , said the Wise Man , in
answering this question . But when a
thing burns, the stuff of which it is made
joins with the oxygen of the air in which
it burns. The sun, however, is actually
so hot that nothing can join with any-
thing else in it ; nothing could burn in
the sun . There are plenty of burnable
things there, and plenty of oxygen to
burn them with , but they are kept sky, but, in order to reach our eyes, it
apart by the heat. Also , even if things has to pass through a long layer of air,,
could burn in the sun, that would not
keep it alight , but it would have burnt
out ages ago, and we should not be here.
Last century we found out what
the sun owes its heat and light the orange it has a long journey through
to. They come mainly because the
sun is shrinking. It shrinks, or con-
tracts , by gravitation—the power which
makes every piece of stuff in the
world attract all other stuff to itself.
The sun has been shrinking for many light, and throw out what they do not
ages,just as the earth has been shrinking.
Indeed, long before the earth was
formed, the sun was stretched out as
far as the earth's present distance, and
even as far as the earth's furthest
brother, the planet Neptune. As the
sun shrinks its parts strike each other,
and their motion is stopped, and heat
and light are produced , just as when one
piece of flint is struck by another.
So it is gravitation that really gives
us the heat and light which keep us
alive. Probably the sun is also kept
warm , as the earth, we know, is kept
warm, by having in it some of the
wonderful element radium , which pro-
duces heat from within itseli.
WHY IS THE SKY BLUE ?
This was found out last century , the
Wise Man told the children , by John
Tyndall. You would never guess the
reason . The sky gets its light from
the sun . When the sun is away, the
sky is dark . Therefore , the blue of
the sky must be somehow thrown to
our eyes from something in the sky
which keeps all the other colours in the
white light of the sun, and throws back
the blue, and that is what happens.
421
The sky is filled with countless tiny
specks of what we may call dust
specks of solid stuff hanging in the air.
These are of just such a size that they
catch the bigger waves of light, which
make the other colours, but throw to
our eyes the shorter waves of light,
which make blue. If you could do
away with all the solid stuff in the air,
the sky would be dark, and all the light
of the daytime would come directly
from the sun. Skylight is reflected sun
light, but only the blue part of it.
WHAT MAKES THE COLOURS OF THE SUNSET ?
Now , when the sun is setting, its light
>
does not come so straight down upon
us as it does when the sun is high in the
just as if you stick a needle straight
into an orange it does not have to go
far through the peel before it gets
inside, but if you stick it sideways in
the peel before it gets inside. So the
lightfrom the setting sun passes through
so much air, and all the dust and smoke,
and so on, that is in the air ; and all
these take something out of the white
take. The things floating in the air
are of all sizes , and so we get many
different colours in sunset. So it comes
about that sunsets are often finer and
more rich when the air is not pure , but
has much dust in it .
EN
WHYWEDOES LIGHT
SHUT OUR
SEEM Red W
EYES ?
That, said the Wise Man, is a curious
question. Eyelids cannot stop all light
from coming through to the eyes --that
is to say, they are, in a small degree,
transparent, and enough so for the sun.
rise to wake the birds , even though their
eyes are shut. Yet , when you look at
the window with your eyes shut, what
you see -- very faintly, but still you see
it-is a red colour. I wonder if you
can guess why this is ? It is because
the light that is able to pass through
your eyelids has to pass through the
red blood which , of course, is always in
your eyelid . Now, this red blood keeps
all theother colours that go to make up
the white light, but lets the red colour
come through it, and that is why we see
red with oureyes shut in the light. If our
blood were green, we should see green .
The next questions begin on page 5054
 THE KINGS LEAD THE HERMIT FROM THE HILLS
TUTKIRITUUTTU
IntemTOMO

Anumz
Lancar
AIELLELEG
TULUMTI

Tomar

\ 5 MAYBANK
THOI
In the days when it was the proudest thing in the world to be Pope of Rome , Peter the
Hermit , an old man of the mountains, was called upon to be Pope . But Peter would not, and it
not until two ki went barefooted to fetch him that Peter would come to Rome. In his
palace the hermit Pope was miserable, and one day he ran away. He took a boat and left
Italy ; but his boat was wrecked in a storm , and he was captured and put into prison until he died.
422
 The Child's Book of
STORIES

THE STORIES WE READ

the
MOR E of a wise slave come into these pages. We must ago, and that
ORE stories from real history, more legends from the long remember
fables
the world is full of all kinds of stories, and that sometimes stories of things
that really happen are more interesting than stories that are made up . The
wonderful doings of fairyland, and the strange legends of things and places that
have grown up in some mysterious way, are not more wonderful than the true story
of the good Pope who ran away , which is told in these pages. We should read
these true stories, because they not only stir our imagination as fairy stories do, but
help us to understand the actual story of the world in which we live. The fables
which begin in these pages are little stories that help us to understand great
truths, and we cannot read them too often or learn their lessons too well .

THE POPE WHO RAN AWAY

a CONTINUED
poor was
CHERE oncet in
peasan
PAGE 312
Italy who had twelve
sons . The youngest but one
of this large family was named
Peter. He was a quiet, thoughtful
boy, who cared more about the
mystery of life than about the games
and adventures of his brothers . When
he was twenty years of age he said to
his father that he would like to go
away and be a monk , and his father
blessed him and let him go, and away
started Peter for a distant monastery.
Here he remained , shut off from the
world , for five years .
After these five years he took a
journey to a range of mountains in
Apulia, and there, in the silence and
savage grandeur of a vast forest, he
gathered a few quiet souls around him
and began the life of a hermit. You
must not think he was a coward who
ran away from the troubles and sorrows
of the world. He believed that noth
ing could help the woes of men so
much as prayer ; and he retired from
the world because a hermit can pray
more earnestly than one whose
thoughts are taken up with the worries
and excitements of daily life.
Here, in the wild forests on the
mountain -side, far away from cities
and villages, lived Peter of Moron
till he was an old man . His followers
loved to sit round him and listen to
his conversation. He made God so
real to them . When they listened to
him they felt that the earth was a
mere dream , and that soon it would
FROM melt away, and their
eyes would behold
legions of bright
angels. Peter was one of those
holy and simple men we call saints .
One day, when Peter was an old
man, as he sat thinking of God in
his mountain cell , there came to him
great archbishops of the Church, and
asked him to come away with them
and be the Pope . Peter was even more
horrified than surprised . He to be
Pope ! He , a poor hermit, to be the
head of Christ's Church on earth ! He
shrank in fear from such a thought .
He felt that he was not holy
enough and pure enough . But more
people came to his cell - barons and
cardinals and statesmen. And among
these crowds of people were two great
kings .
( 6
The kings knelt before him .
Come and be the Pope,” they cried.
“ For two years the Church has been
without a Pope , and no one can agree
who should wear the crown ; but your
fame as a pure saint has travelled into
the world, and if you come with us all
the nationswill havepeace , for all men
wish you to be Pope. '
It was with tears in his eyes that
the hermit implored the great kings to
leave him to his mountain cell . But
they would not be denied, and at last ,
very sorrowfully, Peter had to yield .
And then the hermit set out for the
great city to be crowned Pope. He
rode upon the back of an ass . The
two kings, both of them barefoot,
walked on either side of him holding
the bridle . Behind him came a great

423
 -THE CHILD'S
shining host of cardinals and noblemen.
The news spread far and wide of his
coming, and crowds of peasants came
streaming over the mountains to see the
wonderful sight .
Soon Peter was surrounded by a vast
multitude . And thus he entered the
city-two barefoot kings leading his
donkey, a cavalcade of princes and
noblemen surrounding him , and a great
army of people following with shouts
and hymns. What a triumph for the
eleventh son of a poor peasant !
But Peter was miserable and un-
happy in his palace. He found himself
-a pious,simple man who knew nothing
but his Bible - surrounded by clever
cardinals scheming and plotting. He
was sad and lonely amongst these
brilliant schemers , and sighed for his
mountain cell . He wanted to talk
not about kings and revenues, but
about God and His love .
Now, one of the cardinals desired to
be made Pope himself, and he plotted
to drive the simple Peter from the
throne. He arranged secretly that
trumpets should be sounded near the
Pope's bed at night, and that voices
should be heard as poor Peter awoke
from sleep telling him that he must lay
down his power and go back to his
hermit cell. Peter believed these
voices came from heaven, and, bitterly peasant, who became a Pope, and ran
reproaching himself for ever having
CUNNY RABBIT
CUNNY Rabbitwas a little creature,
but he was very shrewd . Even the
lion was not a match for him . The
lion stole a fawn from a gentle doe, and
would not give it back. The doe ap-
pealed to all the great beasts for help,
but they were afraid of the lion . Then
she came to Cunny Rabbit, and Cunny
Rabbit said :
“ Tell all the animals to meet in
council to -morrow at my burrow to
settle the dispute."
In the meantime Cunny Rabbit dug
a long underground passage from his
burrow to an outlet behind a distant
bush. The animals met in council and
listened to the case , and they decided
that the fawn was the child of the lion .
None of them dared to speak the truth ,
because they saw that the lion was
CU
424
BOOK OF STORIES
dreamed that God could have meant
so poor and humble a hermit to be
Pope , he gave up his throne and secretly
made his escape from the palace.
But the plotting cardinal , directly
he was made Pope, found the trouble
that arose more than he could control .
The Church had two Popes ! What
could be done ? He sent out to catch
and bring back the escaping hermit .
But Peter had travelled fast. He
made his way through the forests till
he came to the sea, and there , getting
into a little boat, steered for a neigh
bouring coast. A storm arose , the
frail barque was thrown up against
another shore, and Peter was recog.
nised, captured, and taken to a
castle .
Here he was placed in a miserable and
very unhealthy cell,and in his prison he
lived for ten dreadful months , dying
at the age of eighty-one, very glad
indeed to be free of a troublesome and
quarrelsome world , and still more glad
to be going into heaven to ask God's
mercy and forgiveness for what he
deemed his sin .
If you ever go to Italy, and visit the
Celestinian Convent in the town of
Aquila, you will find there the tomb of
Pope Celestine V. This is the tomb of
our poor Peter, the eleventh son of a
away from his throne.
AND THE LION
watching them with angry eyes. But
Cunny Rabbit peeped out of his burrow,
and boldly cried out in a loud voice
against the lion.
“ Nonsense ! The fawn belongs to
the doe . The lion is a wicked thief ! ”
cried the rabbit .
The lion sprang at him , but Cunny
Rabbit darted down his passage and
came out behind the bush, and escaped .
“ I'll starve him out ! ” roared the
lion. He waited and waited by the
burrow for Cunny Rabbit to appear .
He grew thin and feeble, but still he
would not give in , for he thought that
if he went in search of food Cunny
Rabbit would get away . So there he
stayed until he starved to death, and
the doe was then able to recover her
dear little fawn.
XUEUXUITOSTYLE
 THE FABLES OF ÆSOP THE SLAVE
A fable is a story told with a purpose, and the purpose is to illustrate a truth .
Thus the fable of the hare and the tortoise illustrates the truth that slow, steady
progress is better than occasional jumps. The truth illustrated , or the " moral" of
each fable, is put in different type at the end of the story. Fables are very old, ani:
the best we know were written by a slave named Æsop, who lived 600 years before
Jesus Christ . Many millions of boys and girls since then have read Æsop's fables, and
we can never read these little stories without learning great truths of life from them .
THE FROGS WHO WANTED A KING
n the days of old , when the frogs were
all at liberty in the lakes, and had
grown quite weary of doing every one
as he pleased, they assembled one day
together, and, with no little clamour,
petitioned Jupiter to let them have a
king to keep them in better order and
make them lead honester lives.
Jupiter, knowing the vanity of their
hearts, smiled at their request , and OROLTFEATH . AL
threw down a log into the lake , which,
by the splash and commotion it made, Jupiter replied that they were only
sent the whole of the frogs into the suffering the punishment due to their
greatest terror and amazement . They folly, and that another time they
rushed under the water and into the must learn to let well alone, and not be
mud , and dared not come within ten dissatisfied with their natural condition .
leaps ' length of where it lay. Let well alone.
THE HARE AND THE TORTOISE
AHARE jeered at a tortoise for the slow.
ness of his pace. But he laughed,
and said that he would run against
her and beat her any day she should
name .
“ Come on ," said the hare ; you
shall soon see what my feet are like.”
So it was agreed that they should
start at once . The tortoise went off,
jogging along, without a moment's
At length one frog, bolder than the stopping, at his usual steady pace.
rest, ventured to pop his head above The hare, treating the whole matter
the water, and take a survey of their very lightly, said she would first take
new king at a respectful distance. a little nap, and that she would soon
Presently, when they saw that the log overtake the tortoise. Meanwhile, the
lay quite still , others began to swim up tortoise plodded on, and the hare woke,
to it and around it , till, growing bolder,
2 only to see that the tortoise had won.
they at last leaped upon it , and treated Slow and steady wins the race.
it with the greatest contempt .
Dissatisfied with so tame a ruler, they
petitioned Jupiter for another king,
upon which he sent them a stork, who
no sooner arrived among them than he
began laying hold of them and devour
ing them, one by one, as fast as he could ,
2

and it was in vain that they endea

voured to escape him. Then they sent
Mercury with a private message to
Jupiter, beseeching him that he would
OVÁLLT REAR
take pity on them once more ; but
TI XBOX
425
IG
 THE FOX AND THE CROW
A HU NGRY fox “ HELPsaid
! Help !"
saw a crow
one day sitting on a
tree with a piece of
cheese in her beak .
You are the
prettiest crow
ever saw, ” said the
fox . “ I wish you
would sing a song.
A bird with lovely
feathers always has a sweet
voice, and it is a very long
time since I heard any fine
music.”
USTELLEELELI
The silly crow was so proud on
being asked to sing that she
opened her mouth to caw , and let
the piece of cheese fall to the
ground. The cunning fox snapped
it up, and said to himself, as he
trotted away :
" I said that she was beautiful, >>
but I did not say that she was wise."
If we are vain and love to be flattered
we shall become foolish .
THE WOLF IN SHEEP'S CLOTHING
A WOLF once dressed
himself in a sheep's
skin, and got shut up at
night with somesheep.
Before any of the pretty
lambs were hurt , a shep-
herd came to the fold to
get the fattest sheep in
the flock . In touching
them to see which was
the best, he found an
animal with hairy ears
and a woolly back. It
was the wolf lying down
with the sheep to wai .
for an opportunity 01
carrying off his prey.
“ This is a strange
kind of sheep ," the shep-
herd said , and, putting a
rope about its neck, he
strung the animal high up
on a tree .
Are you hanging a harmless
sheep ? ” asked a passer -by.
6
" No," said the shepherd , “ I
am only killing a wolf in sheep's
clothing . "
Do not pretend to be good : be
really good.
TUTUSTEIZYTETYTTURY
THE FOX IN THE WELL
a fox
who had fallen
down a well.
A wolf ran to
the edge of the
I well and saw the
fox struggling hard
to keep his head
above water .
My poor, dear
friend, ” said the
wolf , you are
indeed in great danger of
losing your life. Believe me.
I am very, very sorry for you ,
How long have you been down
there ?
The fox replied :
“ If you wish to help me, waste
no time in talking, but get a rope
and pull me up. I cannot struggle
any longer, and I shall drown.
The wolf sighed very sadly and
walked away, and the fox sank into the
water and was drowned .
An ounce of help is worth a pound oj
pily .
BELLING THE CAT
SOOME
mice
lived in
a house
in which
there
a 1 s 0
lived a
great, fierce cat .
Even in the dark night
they could not stir from their
holes without being pounced upon ,
and it was a hard thing for them to
get anything to eat . One day they
al' met together to find out a way
to escape from their terrible foe.
“ I will tell you what to do,” said a
young mouse . “ It is quite easy. Tie
a bell about the cat's neck . As the cat
walks the bell will ring, and we shall
know where he is .”
At this speech the mice squeaked for
joy, until an old mouse asked :
66
But who will go out and bell the
cat ? "
None of the mice dared do this .
Some things seem very easy at first,
but they are easier said than done.
I IUDUITITUTIMILTM2
426
 THE WITCH'S
A MILLERallof Mayfield hadthree sons,
girl. Her name was Marjorie, and she
was the daughter of a farmer at
Rotherfield , and the prettiest maiden in
Sussex . But a rich old miser who lived
in the village began to court her, and
the farmer favoured his suit , and kept
the miller's sons away .
At last Richard , the oldest son,
determined to propose to Marjorie
before the miser won her. On his way
to the farm he met Mad Moliy. She
was an old , feeble woman , suspected of closed his eyes. Just then the miser
being a witch .
9)
" Good -day, my son," said Mad Molly. finger.
" Where are you going this morning ?
Richard hurried on without replying.
On reaching the farm he blurted out
und
CHARLES
FOLKARDI
“ Something is stinging me!" cried the miser. “ My nose is swelling frightfully 1"
a proposal of marriage, but Marjorie
only laughed at him.
Rowland, the second son, then tried
his luck . He also met Mad Molly, and
hurried on without answering her,
and he also returned in a downcast
mood. Then Robin , the youngest boy,
went to the farm . But he set out with-
out hope. He was a strong, clever,
and gentle lad, but he had a very long
nose, and this, as he knew, made him
look ridiculous. When Mad Molly asked
him where he was going, he said :
" On a hopeless errand, granny.
I am about to call on Marjorie and ask
her to be my wife .”
And your wife she shall be," said
Mad Molly. “ Look at this ring, my
son . Now put it on your finger and
say * Bless it ! ' "
Robin did so, and his nosc grew
TYTUT UNTERZIU DOTT
+27
RING
half an inch shorter, and he became
very hand) some.
" Now ," said Mad Molly , " if Marjorie
refuses you, give her the ring to wear.
Then every time you say ‘ Drat it ! ' her
pretty nose will grow half an inch
longer, and she will become ugly, and
be very glad to marry you. Then you
have only to say ' Bless it ! ' and her
nose will grow shorter and she will
recover her beauty.”
Robin ran to the farmhouse, and , as
Marjorie was out, he sat in a chair and
entered , and saw the ring on his
)
“ An engagement ring ! ” he said .
“ I'll keep that.”
He pulled it off Robin's finger and
put it on his own. But Robin was
awake, and he began to whisper
“ Drat it ! Drat it ! " and the miser's
nose grew longer and longer.
Something is stinging me! ” cried
the miser, running off to a doctor. My
nose is swelling frightfully !"
Happily, Robin did not want his
ring any more. Marjorie was surprised
to see how handsome he looked . She
had always liked him for his gentleness ,
and she now fell quite in love with
him, and agreed to marry him as soon
as he got a farm .
“Return my ring and I'll cure you
for one thousand pounds," said Robin
to the miser.
The miser at last did so, and Robin
and Marjorie then married and bought
a farm , and lived there very happily
together.
onn.
น.
THE UNHAPPY
THERE was once a King of Persia
who was very unhappy. He was
a great conqueror, and he was very rich
and famous ; but he had no children,
and this made him sorrowful . He built
luimself a glorious palace on a lonely
island in the sea, and lived there.
But one day a merchant came to the
palace and brought the King a very
beautiful slave-woman . As soon as the
King saw the slave-woman he fell in
love with her, and married her in great
joy. He arrayed her in costly dresses,
and he gave her the best rooms in the
palace, with all the windows overlooking
the sea, and he appointed a hundred
attendants to wait upon her. But ,
strange to say, the slave-woman never
spoke to him. She never spoke to any.
one. Day after day she sat by a window
and gazed at the sea.
In this manner a year passed by,
and then a charming little son was
born to the King and Queen. The King
went wild with delight when he knew
that a son and heir had been born,
and he threw himself at the feet of the
slave -woman and said to her :
" Oh , iny beloved Queen, why do
you never speak to me ? Nothing is
wanting to complete my happiness
except a single word from your lips.”
The slave-woman smiled, and then
at last she spoke.
“ Ah, my King,” she said, “ how kindly
and tenderly you have treated me since I
was dragged as a slave to your paiace !
But think how a royalprincess must feel
when she has been sold as a slave ! "
What , you are a princess ? » cried
the King .
“ I am the Rose of the Sea,” said the
Queen proudly, “" and my brother, King
Selah, rules over the richest kingdom in
the depths of the ocean. Unhappily, we
lrave quarrelled . Last year our country
was invaded and our palace destroyed,
and, fearing that I might fall into the
hands of the enemy, Selah wanted to
wed me to some prince of the earth.
“ This vexed me, and I sprang from
the bottom of the sea and landed on the
shore of your island . There I was found
by a merchant, and he at once brought
me to you and sold me as a slave. '
' But I have not treated you as a
slave, dearest,” said the King .
428
KING OF PERSIA
“ No," said Rose of the Sea , very
gently ; "and because you have made
me your Queen and loved me very
dearly, I have not cast myself into the
sea and gone back to my brother, as
I intended to do. Now that I have a
son, I must call Selah up to see him ."
Rose of the sea bade an attendant
bring in a brazier of burning coal , and
then she took a piece of aloe from a
little box and threw it on the fire.
As the smoke rose up and drifted out
of the window, she said some words in
a strange tongue.
The sea began to heave up, and the
waves parted, and out of the waves
rose a tall and handsome young man in
splendid garments, and with a crown on
9
his head. He was surrounded by a com
pany of brilliant ladies and courtiers.
The King of the Sea and his people came
to the island and entered the palace.
“ Ah , my dear Rose of the Sea,”
he said , as he saw his sister, “ I have
conquered all our enemies, and you
can now return and marry some prince
1 )
of the sea !
“ I am already married , my dear
Selah ," said Queen Rose of the Sea.
“ This is my husband, the King of
Persia , and this is our little boy..
Selah took the baby in his arms, and
then, to the horror of the King of Persia ,
he sprang out of the window and
leapt down into the sea with it .
Don't be afraid ,” said Queen Rose
of the Sea . Selah has only done what
I meant to do . He wishes to see whether
our baby can live under the water,
as all the people of the sea can do."
So it was . In a few minutes Selah
returned, bearing in his arms the little
Prince, who was crowing with joy.
He had breathed the salt water as
easily as he breathed the air, and not
a bit of his clothing was wet .
What a day of wonders this is ! "
said the King of Persia. “ If I had not
seen it all with my own eyes, I should
1
never have believed it .”
He was at first much disappointed
to find that he could not spring down
to the bottom of the ocean and visit
the marvellous kingdoms lying beneath
the sea ; but his son and his wife told
him wonderful stories of the strange
things that went on beneath the ocean .
A KING AND HIS COURT ROSE OUT OF THE SEA

MILLADA 1908
Out of the waves rose a tall and handsome young man in splendid garments, and with a crown on his
head. He was surrounded by a company of brilliant ladies and courtiers. The King of the Sea and his
people came to the island and entered the palace. “Ah, my dear Rose of the Sea , ” he said, as he saw his
sister, “ I have conquered all our enemies, and you can now return and marry some prince of the sea ! "
TEOROUTEUTZRECitortorum ETTI
429
 THE STEADFAST TIN
NE day a little boy in Copenhagen
ONE
was given twenty - five tin soldiers .
Twenty-four were made exactly alike,
from the same tin spoon ; but the
twenty- fifth was made with only one
leg, as there was not enough tin left
to finish him . Still , he was able to
stand as steadfastly as his companions,
and the little boy had a liking for him ,
and put him on a table close to a
delightful paper castle. By the gate
of the castle stood a dancing -girl, made
out of paper, and she was so bewitch-
ingly pretty that the tin soldier fell in
love with her .
At midnight, when everybody in the
house was fast asleep, all the toys soldier fell through the water a great
woke up and began to play. The only
two who did not move were the soldier
and the dancing-girl. As he stood
looking at her shyly, with loving eyes,
an ugly Jack - in -the - box came and
said :
" Keep your eyes to yourself, or
you'll regret it to -morrow morning !
The soldier made no reply ; but in
the morning, when he and the Jack-in-
the -box were set by the open window,
the soldier fell out. No doubt Jack-
in -the -box pushed him . He landed
head foremost in the street, but saved
himself from being flattened out by
driving his bayonet between two paving-
stones. Two boys saw him , and said :
“ Let us send this soldier for a sail."
It was raining heavily, and they
made a paper boat, and put the soldier
THE SNOW GIRL
PROVENCE is a sunny land, where
Pro
scarcely any snow ever falls. But
one winter night a snow -storm raged
there, and a farmer and his wife wokeup
early and found their house almost
snowed up. They were an aged couple , used to run away from it , and hide in
and , having no children , they were the shady depths of the forest .
rather sad and lonely.
“ I will make a child out of this snow ,”
said the wife . She moulded some snow
by the gate into the figure of a little
girl , and then , to her amazement, the
figure followed her indoors and spoke.
" Mother," she said , " don't make
a great fire in the roym ; I can't bear
the heat. ”
The people for miles around came to boys who held her there remained only
see the Snow Girl. And as she was
ROTYCZY
430
SOLDIER
in it, and as he sailed along the gutter
the boys ran by the side , clapping their
hands. Suddenly the boat entered a
dark tunnel, and began to rock dread
fully. A shudder ran through the tin
soldier, but he stood steadfast, with his
gun placed against his shoulder. A rat
swam up and tried to seize him , but
the current whirled the boat out of the
tunnel into a canal. There it twisted
round and round , and began to sink.
“ Oh, this is the fault of that ugly
Jack -in -the-box ! ” cried the soldier.
But if only I had my little dancing
girl beside me I would not mind.”
The paper boat sank, and as the
fish gobbled him up. How long he
remained inside the fish he could not
tell ; but one day the light flashed upon
him , and someone said:
“ Why, this is my little tin soldier ! "
It was the boy. He was watching
the cook clean the fish which had been
caught in the canal . The soldier was
again placed beside the pretty dancing.
girl, but before he could say a word
the Jack -in -the - box pushed him down
on the floor.
“ Oh, this thing will never stand up
straight ! " said the boy.
And he threw the soldier into the
fire. A breeze was blowing in from the
street, and the dancing-girl swiftly rose
up on it , and danced into the flames,
and clasped the soldier lovingly, and
perished with him .
OF SUNNY LAND
pretty and gentle the children liked her,
and wanted her to play with them . Dur
ing the winter she was very merry, but in
the spring she became rather mournful.
She did not like the sunshine, and she
And
what grieved her mother most was that
she was always weeping. One summer
evening her playmates made a bonfire,
and danced round it, and as she did not
join them they fetched her. At first
the Snow Girl leaped about the fire as
gaily as her companions, but when they
tried to jump across the flames she
vanished , and in the hands of the two
a drop of water.
torturuarUYTY LATYRAUDITIMOTRENE
 .
re

।
SZENZO

THE COURT OF FAIRYLAND

We have been o'er land and sea And before thy sleeping eyes During slumber's magic reign
Seeking lovely dreams for thee. Shall come glorious pageantries; Other timesshall live again
Where is there we have not been Palaces of gems and gold, First thou shalt be young and free
Gathering gifts for our sweet queen ? Such as dazzle to behold ; In thy days of liberty ;
We are come with sound and sight , Gardens, in which every tree Then again be woo'd and won
Fit for fairy's sieep to-night. Seems a world of bloom to be. By thy stately Oberon ,
 CISTELEEEEE
LEGENDS OF THINGS
A legend means a very old story, so old often that we cannot tell whether it may
ever have been true. Perhaps most stories called legends may have some truth in
them , but as a rule they are stories that may have been facts , but most likely were not.
THE MERMAID'S POOL
EAARLY one morning in the eighteenth
century, a Derbyshire countryman
was walking from Hayfield over the
Scout, and he saw a lady of ravishing
beauty come out of a cave and go down
to the river to bathe. The lovely bather
was the fairy of Mermaid's Pool , and the
happy mortal who sees her becomes im
mortal.
gift The fairy at once the
of immortalityupon bestowed the
traveller,
and he fell in love with her, and she
fell in love with him . They entered the
enchanted cave by the side of the Scout ,
and there, it is said , they still live
merrily together, never growing old or
sad , or weary of each other's company.
Nobody has ever seen the fairy since .
THE WHITE LADY OF LONGNOR
THEWhiteLady Pooldwellsin
Longnor
the bottomlessofBlack , by the
side of the road to Leebotwood , in Shrop .
shire. One moonlight summer night some
lads and lasses were singing and dancing
merrily in a field close by, and the White
Lady came out and joined them .
“ Oh , what a lovely creature ! "
said one of the lads .
The White Lady danced with him ,
and slowly led him , in a sprightly
manner, to the edge of the Black
Pool. Happily, he just drew back in
time to save himself from being danced
into the gloomy abyss. The White
Lady is a sort of fairy ; but though
she is very beautiful, she does not seem
to be kind and gentle , does she ?
SIMMERDALE WATER
OME time ago a hungry witch came
SOMEto the village of Simmerdale, in the
North Riding of Yorkshire, and begged
for food from door to door. But no
sudden
body would give her anything. Just at
the end of Simmerdale, however, there
lived a kind Quaker woman, and she
welcomed the witch into her cottage , and
gave her some bread and meat and ale .
The witch made a good meal, and
then, as she departed, she waved an ash
twig over Simmerdale, and said :
Simmerdale , Simmerdale ,Simmerdale,
sink .
Save the house of the woman who gave
me to drink . "
431
AND PLACES
And a great flood then rushed up
and drowned everybody in the place
except the Quaker woman.
The spot is now called Simmer Water,
and it is said that on a fine, clear day
you can see the ruins of the church and
the village lying far down at the
bottom of the lake.
THE GIANT OF DALTON MILL
The
THE old millat Dalton was builtby a
one-eyed giant. He used it to grind
men's bones into flour for his bread ,
and he kept a little Pilmoor lad, named
Jack, to look after it . Jack was never
allowed to leave the mill. But on
Topcliffe fair day he resolved to get
out and have a dance with the Topcliffe
girls.
When the giant was sleeping after
dinner, Jack seized his knife and
drove it into his one eye, and blinded
him. Then Jack killed the fierce mastiff
which guarded the door, and wrapped
himself in the skin , and crept between
the giant's legs away to Topcliffe.
As the monster was now unable to see
anybody to kill, he soon died of hunger.
You will find by the mill the vast grave
in which he was buried, and if you ask
kindly the miller will perhaps show you
the great, long knife with which Jack
blinded the giant.
THE ELVES OF SNOWDON
Two
'wo badger-catchers went out one
afternoon on Snowdon , and they
found two badger -holes there, and netted
them with sacks with running nooses.
When they returned at night, both the
nooses were tightly drawn up, and there
was something wriggling within . So
they shouldered their catches and
trotted down the mountain . All of a
voice in one sack sang out :
“ Here am I ,
Warm and dry ;
Where's my brother got to ? "
And a voice replied in the other sack :
“ In a sack ,
On a back ,
Riding at a trot too !”
The badger -catchers dropped their
burdens in terror, and out skipped two
merry little elves in red coats, and
laughed at them .
The next Stories begin on page 485.
THE LAST HEROISM OF SIR PHILIP SIDNEY

Sir Philip Sidney lay on the field of battle, in great pain and in aa raging fever. He called for a cup of
water, and with great trouble water was brought to him. He was about to place it to his lips, when
his eye caught the gaze of a wounded comrade, dying of thirst. Sir Philip Sidney stretched out his
arm and gave the water to the dying man, saying : " Soldier, thy need is greater than mine. "
καινα ανατικακινηκαταπιωωτισττττπτταιαιαιααττεπιπιανει LITTERATURE EXTREME
432
 ‫صبر‬ The Child's Book of s3°
ఆ ఆ GOLDEN DEEDS Caves
WHAT THESE STORIES TELL US

FIFIVE golden deeds come into these pages. Standing out nobly in the story of our
VEEnglish heroes is the great Sir Philip Sidney, who, when dying of thirst,
gave his cup of water to a wounded soldier beside him ; and many times the
battlefield has brought out such pure heroism as that. And we read, too, of the
heroic life of a doctor in Ireland, reminding us that we owe to our doctors a debt
that we can never pay. A sister's devotion to her brother, a doctor's devotion to
his patients, a soldier's devotion to his comrades — all these examples of true
heroism come into these pages ; and they are all true stories, taken from real life.

THREE CUPS OF COLD WATER

THEREis asaying of
Jesus which has
er
woven itself into all
the history of humanity, into the
periods of famine, the days of
battle , and the hours of death .
It is the saying that we do
Christ service even when we give
only a cup of cold water to those
who thirst.
Seldom can the heart be lonely,
If it seek a lonelier still ,
Self- forgetting, seeking only
Emptier cups of love to fill.
Our brave English soldier, Sir Philip
Sidney, who lived at Penshurst, in
de
CONTINUED FROM PAGE 302
When he was in the
camp he called for a
cup of water. The day
was excessively hot ; he was in
a raging fever ; the agony of his
wound was indescribable .
With great trouble a little
water was brought to him . He
lifted himself up, took the bottle,
and was about to place it to his
lips, when his gaze caught the eyes
of a poor wounded soldier fixed upon
the water.
The look in the man's eyes made
Sidney forget his pain . With a noble
Smilehe stretched out his arm, handed
the bottle to the dying man, and ex

Kent, and wrote tender poems under claimed :

the noble oaks which you may still
оо
see spreading their wide arms over
Penshurst Park , was one of those who
have lived Christ's words,
Sir Philip Sidney was called by
om
“ Soldier, thy need is greater than
mine !
Such was the glory of Sidney that
the epitaph of one of his friends was in
these words :

Queen Elizabeth " the jewel of her Fulke Greville ,

times . He was a great scholar and
traveller, a poet and musician , an Servant to Queen Elizabeth ,
athlete and horseman - above every. Counsellor to King James,
thing else, a great gentleman. The Friend to Sir Philip Sidney.
nobility of his nature, the bravery of Another hero is famous for a deed
his spirit, and the graciousness of his somewhat similar. This is the generous
manner rendered him the most not. Rudolf of Hapsburg, whose descen
able and romantic figure of his age. dants still rule over Austria , a kingdom
In a great battle at a place called made by his power. On one occasion
Zutphen this noble gentleman was Rudolf .was with his army in a
mortally wounded . He had fought place where everyone was afflicted by
like a hero. Two horses haố been terrible thirst . Somebody was able o

killed under him , and still he led his
soldiers with a dauntless courage into
the thick of the fight. But at last a
bullet struck this chivalrous man, and
as he reeled in the saddle his horse
turned and bolted with him from
the field .
to find a cupful of water, which was
brought to Rudolf as a great and
priceless treasure. He took the prized
cup in his hands and exclaimed : “ I
cannot drink alone . All cannot share
this little draught. I thirst not for
myself, but for my whole army. " And,

433
 a THE CHILD'S BOOK OF GOLDEN DEEDS
so saying , he tipped up the cup and
emptied the water upon the ground.
One more we may include under our
title of " Cups of Cold Water ," because
it shows the Christianlike spirit, although
in a new and startling manner.
During the seventeenth century wars
between Denmark and Sweden ,
wounded Dane was about to raise a
wooden bottle of water to his lips ,
when a cry reached him from
wounded Swede stretched on
ground at a little distance.
The good Dane, using the words of
nur own Sidney, stumbled to the side
of his enemy, and, saying, “ Thy need is
greater than mine," kneeled down and
offered the water to his lips. But the
Swede, suddenly raising a pistol, fired, other, Pobyneices, that he might reign
and wounded the Dane in the shoulder.
“ Rascal ! ” cried the twice -wounded
soldier of Denmark . “ I would have
befriended you, and you would murder
me in return ! Now will I punish you . I
would have given you the whole bottle ,
but now you shall have only half.”
He then raised the bottle to his lips ,
drank of it , and afterwards gave it into
the hand that had attempted to kill him .
THE DOCTOR OF BURTON PORT
Doctor WILLIAM SMYTH lived in the splendid funeral procession , but that
far north-west of Ireland, at Burton the body of the other brother was to be
Port, a little coast village in county
Donegal, twenty miles from a railway,
and in the midst of poor fisherfolk,
whom he attended for a small fee.
Four miles from the mainland was the
island of Inishmore, where a few
families managed to exist by fishing.
In the end of the year 1901 an
epidemic broke out in the island.
Dr. Smyth rowed over the four miles of
rough sea daily, taking with him such
things as the sick folk needed. They
lived in squalid hovels, and he had to be
doctor and nurse too, for there was
none to give him a helping hand.
At last he decided that, to save the
people, they must be got across to the
mainland, to have better care and
nursing. But the fishermen of Burton
Port feared to land their boats, lest
they should catch the fever, and only
one leaky vessel could be found. An
officer of the Local Government Board
came to the doctor's help, and together messengers arrived to find that she
they rowed over to the island, carrying
the poor sufferers, one by one, into the
DOOZYT
LEOLIEDER
boat , and set off for Burton Port . But
the crowded boat proved to be more
leaky than the doctor thought, and,
as the doctor rowed , the officer baled the
water out. Thus , after terrible exhaus
tion , they brought the boat to port , and
the last patient was barely landed when
a the boat sank. But all in the boat
were safely landed, and the doctor went
home. He went to bed , and in a week
a he died of fever. He had saved the
the
lives of many by giving up his own .
THE SACRIFICE OF A KING'S SISTER
THERE was trouble and confusion in
THEEThebes . The two brothers who
ruled the city had quarrelled , and one
brother, Eteocles , had driven out the
as king alone. But the brother who
had been driven away gathered an
army with all speed, and came back
to attack the city . Eteocles and his
soldiers marched out to meet him , and
the brothers fought and killed each
other. The besieging army, having
lost its leader, turned and ran away.
The new king was Creon , the uncle
of the brothers, and he issued an order
that the body of Eteocles was to be
buried with great honour and a
left lying on the plain outside the walls
of Thebes for the birds to devour.
It was thought a terrible thing in 1
those days to leave a body unburied ,
and was considered to be a great
insult to the man who had died . So
Antigone, the sister of Pobyneices,
determined to bury her brother, though
the king said that anyone who buried or
shut up
honoured the body should be to
in a rock tomb and left there die .
Antigone went forth secretly from
the city , and, finding that she could not
carry the body, scattered dust over it
to honour it , thus taking away all
the disgrace. The king heard of this ,
and ordered her to be buried alive in
the rock tomb. As they led her away,
so young and fair, all who saw her were
moved to tears . Even the king himself
repented of what he had done, and at
length he sent to fetch her from the
tomb. But he was too late . His
had died.
The next Golden Deeds begin on page 519
434
 The Child's Book of
SCHOOL LESSONS

WHAT OUR LESSONS TEACH US

IN our Reading lesson this time we have a story which, by the help of pic
IN tures, we shall be able to read almost by ourselves. In the Writing lesson
we learn five new letters, and our Arithmetic lesson explains how to write
numbers from 10 to 100 . The Drawing lesson tells us how we can draw a
jam -jar, and the Music lesson tells the story of the Procession in Treble Road ;
while our picture-story in French shows us the party safely on board the boat.
CONTINUED FROM PAGB 344

READING CRAB
STORY QUESTIONS & PICTURE ANSWERS
EFORE we go on to longer words, we should be sure that we can read all
BEFO
PG

kinds of short , easy words. So in this lesson we will have a few more
to words of three or four letters each, and then next time we shall be able to go
on to something better. I think we really are getting quite clever by now.
Isn't it nice to be able to read a little, and to find out some of the interesting
things that books can tell us ?
Now shall we have some more questions with picture answers ? And this
time we will take them from Bible stories which we all know quite well :
What did Noah What did
build to save Joseph's
himself, and his brothers go
family , and the down into
animals from Egypt to buy ? CORN
ARK the flood ?
What did Joseph's
youngest brother, Benja
Ummo

What bird did he send 000 min, find in his sack ?

out after the raven ? CUP

On what musical instru

DOVE ment did David play to
comfort Saul ?
What did the dove HARP
bring back in its What wild
LEAF mouth ?
beasts did
David kill
What did Jacob make while he was
for his little son Joseph ? watching
LION BEAR father's flockshis?

O
COAT When David
Into what grew up , what
Hou did Joseph's did he become ?
brothers
PIT throw him ? KING

435
 THE CHILD'S BOOK OF SCHOOL LESSONS
We all like having stories told us , any help. We must ask someone to
so here are one or two ; but we must read the words to us that we cannot
all do our best to make out the words make out , and we shall soon find
that have pictures over them without that we are getting on capitally.

ONCEa upon
time
Suddenly in
the Prophet
Mahomet a full
hid from his
enemies in a
CAVE TREE LEAF

in the
grew at the lt
TREE, and mu
entrance of built its a spider
the CAVE . A spun its

BIRD NEST WEB

between the TREE and CAVE. When his enemies saw this, they felt sure that no
one could have gone into the CAVE recently, so they went on without looking in.

Once, when
Alfred was he had to
beaten by hide from One day he
the Danes , them in a was sitting
who ca me farmer's
by the
on board cottage, or

SHIP HUT FIRE

which were
thinking , scolded him being baked .
and , not for being But he forgot
idle. She
knowing them , and
who he told him they were
the to watch
was, burnt as
farmer's the bits of black as
WIFE CAKE COAL
The farmer's WIFE was very angry and boxed his ears, but when she found
out who he was she was very surprised and sorry .
This is nearly enough for one lesson , midnight in countries that are exactly
but we have just t'me for one or two on the opposite side of the earth to us,
more things. You know that when it such as Australia and New Zealand . So
is midday with us in this country it is you might learn these two little verses :

When here the sun is How strange to think While I am playing In those far lands
shining bright it's dead of night with my toys, the girls and boys
At twelve o'clock In countries far Or having school Are fast asleep in
midday, away. instead , bed .

436 onderLEDLY RECOTOUZEUZITUENCTIONTEIN

 ASWRITING
FIVE NEW
After practising o, c,a , and e until
they wrote them quite well, Tom
and Nora were ready to write r. As
their mother was ruling the lines as
usual , Tom exclaimed :
6
“ Mother, do let me rule my lines.”
“ Of course you shall, Tom . You
)
have often seen me do it."
Tom took the flat ruler, and placed
one end of it even with the side of the
paper, then pressed the left hand down
on the middle of the ruler to steady it ,
and drew his pencil along the upper edge.
“ Very good ,” said his mother.
Nora ruled lines for herself, too, and
their mother was pleased that they could
do them so well .
“ The first letter to write to- day is
r,” she said , as she set them some to
66
copy. How am I making r ? ”
rrrr
“ It begins like n ,” said Nora , but
ends in aa little tail at the top instead of that of v. Then they set about writing
in a second pot-hook and pot-hanger ." it, and did it so quickly and nicely
“ There is one thing to be careful that their
about,” their mother said. “ In the
second part let your pencil move up-
wards along the down-stroke again ,
until it nearly reaches the upper line.
You will see why presently . There is
another way of making r, and you
shall learn about it some day.”
When even rows of r's had been
written by Tom and Nora, and they
had ruled more lines , their mother said
they should next write v ; so she made
somev's for them to copy, and asked how
v is like r, and how it differs from it.
vV v vv vV
Nora looked at the r's carefully and
then said :
I think the first part of v is like the
first part of r ; but the up-stroke does
not go up again over it , but turns round
and becomes a pot -hanger, and then
ends in a little curly tail like r."
))
" Quite right,," said her mother,
' and you can see now why r has its
up -stroke carefully made. If the up-
stroke separates from the rest, the
letter might be taken for a v."
437
TABLES
LETTERS
" V is a pretty letter ," said Tom ,
" and so easy -- a pot-hook, a pot -hanger,
and a curly tail.”
Nora liked making it , too, and when
she had written some really good ones
her mother said :
“ We all like writing v because it
has such pretty curves in it , and is no
trouble at all . The next letter will
take longer to write. "
“ What is that ? ” asked Tom .
W ,” was the reply.
" I wonder," said Nora, whether w
is really two u's , like this — uu . Is it ,
mother ? ”
But their mother shook her head, and ,
saying it was much more like one
u than two u's , she made them some to
copy, like this :
WW WW
Tom and Nora exclaimed that it was
just like u with a little curly tail like
mother said :
Capital ! Now I am sure you will
always know the difference between r, v,
and w .”
“ R , v , and w, three little letters with
little curly tails,” said Nora.
Thin their mother said they had done
so well that there was time for two more
letters -x ands . So the children ruled
more lines and their mother wrote x for
them to copy, like this :
X X X. X
Why, mother, look !” exclaimed
Tom. " One c has turned another upside
down, and is pushing it backwards ! "
They all laughed at Tom's idea , and
Nora said the c upside down did not
look very much hurt .
Of course, the second part of x was
nothing new to learn , only the first part.
The upside-down c had to be carefully
made, because it was something quite
new to make the down-stroke of a pot
hook turn round to the left . But Tom
and Nora tried very hard until they
made the c's lean up against each other
in quite a friendly way.
MU
 THE CHILD'S BOOK OF SCHOOL LESSONS
When Tcm and Xora had made some
really good x's, their mother said they
should learn another letter.
S
ssss
looked easy , but it wanted
“ What are we going to write now ? ”
asked Tom . a good deal of practice, just as O
" You are going to learn s,” said had done, and Tom especially had to
their mother, “ S has a long, light up- try again and again before he could
stroke, and then curves down and make a nice row , with each letter like
round to the left , as the first part the one before it.
of x does : but be very careful to In our next lesson we shall see how
make the dot curl round right on the Tom and Nora learned to make letters
light up-stroke, just as I make it here." that go outside the lines .
0.0
3 ARITHMETIC
HOW WE COUNT FROM 10 TO 99
ATtwe
the end of the last lesson we said
were going to count a big number
bundles of ten, we found two bundles
and two loose pencils, so that the
of cards, or pencils - a number bigger figures on the boxes were 2 2 .
than twelve . To learn how to do this,
let us count ten of the pencils in the rubTake the pencils
out the figures,outandof let
the boxes,
us try
picture, and tie them into a bundle. another number.
When we have done this we will count For our next attempt we need not
another ten and make another bundle . have a picture of the pencils ; straight
After that, you see there are only two strokes will do instead .
pencils left. Here are the pencils : II |||||| II 11111
Count ten of them , and make a

They made two bundles, and left

IO bundle . Count ten more, and make a
second bundle . Ten more yet will
make aa third bundle ; and then we have
one two three four – five loose
two pencils over. strokes left . So we have three bundles
Now, we must not get
the odd pencils mixed up to put into the left - hand box, and five
loose strokes to put into the right-hand
6 6 10 with the bundles , so let
us have two boxes .
one box we will put the
bundles, and in the other we will
In box . The numbers on the boxes will
look like this : ( 3 5 .
Suppose, now , somebody else had
put the pencils which were left over. been counting pancils in the way we
But we will always be careful of one have just been doing, and that they
other thing -- always to put the box had made a figure 9 on the left-hand
for the bundles on the left-hand side, box and a figure 7 on the right-hand box
and the box for the separate pencils 9 9177 How many pencils would
on the right-hand side. Then , too, we that mean ? It would mean there were
put a figure on each box to tell us how 9 bundles with ten in each bundle, and
many bundles are in the left-hand box, 7 loose pencils besides. Or, again , if
and how many loose pencils in the right. they had put a figure 4 on the left-hand
hand box . box and a figure o on the right-hand ?
410 It would mean 4 bundles in
the left-hand box and no pencils at all
in the right-hand.
2 2 Now that we have got so far, perhaps
we can manage without the boxes at
Box for the bundles Box for the loose pencils all, and simply remember that we
We will try to remember , then , that write the figure for the bundles on the
when we counted the pencils in the left-hand side and the figure for the
first picture, tying them up into loose pencils on the right-hand side.
OTTOTT KOKUREUZITUZTUZTERETTE
438
 KAIMANUGIMCATAMOROUSAscanu MUSIC
The first lot of pencils we counted will
have the figures written like this : 22 .
The second lot will be 35 .
they OD
And they mean just the same asWhen
did when the boxes were there .
DI000000 DO
These make a bundle of ten , and
we write 22 , the 2 on the left means
2 bundles of ten, and the 2 on the
right means 2 loose pencils. When we
write 35, the 3 means 3 bundles of ten
(because it is the left-hand figure ), and
the 5 means 5 loose pencils.
Perhaps you are thinking by this
time that we still have not learned the
names of any numbers bigger than
twelve. Never mind ; we are getting
near it now. Suppose you have six
of the cards which you use for playing
“ Snap , " and you then get six more
given you. How many have you
altogether ?
000000 200000
Six you have at first.
Six you have given you .
Of course, you know that at once.
Twelve cards. It is the same thing as
counting the crows and owls ; six
crows and six owls made twelve birds
altogether. Now we will count the
RJ MUSIC Casa
THE PROCESSION
UR little fairy guide, Treble Clef, has
OUR
a very busy day before her. The
fairies are going to have a procession.
They are coming in their little motor-
cars down the Treble Road, and Treble
Clef, nolding her
flag, is to stand at
the entrance to her
road, and tell us
just what is hap-
pening
When our fairies
go out they are
such delicate little
beings that they
have to shut them
Torxa TITUIT Erre
439
cards in the same way that we
counted the pencils.
leave two loose cards .
You see, we can make one bundle
of ten cards, and we have two loose
cards left. The figures to put on the
boxes would be 0I 2 ],or, since we
said we could do without the boxes at
all, we have only to write 12 .
Now we understand why we said
in Lesson 3 that we should find 12
stood for twelve. It is because the i ,
the left-hand figure, means one bundle
of ten things , and the 2, the right.
hand figure, means two more things.
In the same way, if you have eleven
cards, you get one bundle of ten and
one card left , so that the figures to
put on the boxes are 1 and 1 , and thus
II stands for eleven .
If you have only ten cards, there
are no cards left to put into the right
hand box ; which tells us that the
figures which stand for ten are 10.
Next time we shall learn the name ames
of the figures after twelve.
IN TREBLE ROAD
selves safely in their wee motors, so
that the sun shall not scorch them or
the wind blow them away . And so we
see the cars , but not our fairies.
The fairies have different sorts of
LEEDKLED
cars for the different paces at which
they wish to drive. Sometimes they
want to go slowly , sometimes they
want to go quickly . To-day they are
to have quite a stately procession, and
this is the shape of their cars o
In such a grand procession as we are
going to watch, each fairy has her own
special stopping-place, and Treble Clef
will name each fairy as she drives up
in her pretty little motor. We shall
Dom URTTYxunum umuti onun
 mu -THE CHILD'S BOOK OF SCHOOL LESSONS.
see where each one stops . We found She goes on till she reaches the third
there were five motor -lines, did we not ? line :
Just like this :

This is Fairy B's motor

The five motor-lines
Treble Clef tells us to go to the
which the fairies call a stave, and these piano and find Fairy B's house, next
are the lines our fairies are using to-day. door but one to Fairy G. Press this
There is a little movement , quite a door , and hear Fairy B answer :
gentle stir, for fairies tread daintily, ' Tis quite the right door, how clever you are !
and Treble Clef is in her place , looking On line number three stops Fairy B's car.
very important , and beckoning to you Tinkle , tinkle, tinkle ! Another fairy
and to me to watch very carefully so has arrived .
that we may see everything that is “ Fairy D is coming to take her place
going to happen. on the fourth line,” says Treble Clef in
her gentle whisper.
6 Treble Road
Off we run to the piano and find
Fairy D's house , the next door but one to
where we heard Fairy B speak . Directly
Hark ! A gentle , buzzing noise , like we press the door, Fairy D sings :
the whirr of insects ' wings, tells us the When Fairy D's coach stops at line number
first fairy car has arrived . four,
You may rest content that this is her door.

This is Fairy E's motor

Trebl Clecannot talk loudly to This is Fairy D's motor
us now , because she is on duty ; but, Again there is a rustle, gentle as a
in a whisper which we hear quite butterfly's kiss, and Treble Clef's voice
clearly , she says : again is heard. “ Here comes Fairy
“ This is Fairy E's car. She is inside , F's motor, to take her place on the
and now she has stopped on the first fifth line. '
motor-line. We must go to the piano, Once more we must go to the piano,
and find that house of hers which find Fairy F's house, the next door
is very near the middle of the black but one to where we have just found
and white line . It is the second white Fairy D, and, pressing the door very
door from Fairy C's middle house. gently, we hear Fairy F's sweet song :
Press the door very gently, and you In the wide , wide world I never need roam ,
will hear Fairy E sing : For line number five is Fairy F's home.
Fairy E's motor on first line does stay,
So this is where you find her to -day.
Another little flutter, and a second This is Fairy F's motor
motor-car arrives and stops on the Then the birds sing, the bluebells
second line : ring, the trees shimmer in the breeze ,
all for pure gladness of heart , for, now
a fairy car has stopped on each line of
This is Fairy G's motor the Treble Road , birds, flowers, and
)
trees know the fairies will sing a merry
“ Behold Fairy G's car ! " whispers rhyme for boys and girls to remember :
Treble Clef. Go to the piano, and "
Five little fairies bright as the day,
find her house, next door but one to What do we want but a game of play ?
where we have just found fairy E. Five little fairies in motor - cars ,
Press the door very gently, and listen Five little motors, five little bars.
E on the first line, G number two,
to Fairy G's voice : B on the third line, going so true.
The sun is bright, the weather fine , D on the fourth line, F number five,
G's motor stops on the second line. Dear little fairies , bright and alive.
Still another rustle, like a murmuring Next time we shall hear about the
breeze , and Fairy B’s car arrives. meeting on Bass Road.
440
 DRAWINGO
HOW TO DRAW A JAM - JAR
To'O but
-DAY we are going to draw a jam - jar,,
before we begin we shall want a
eye. You will see that it seems to get
narrower, as the penny did, till it looks
penny. When you have it , only like a white line. Get
put it on the back of your someone to hold the sheet of
hand, laying the hand flat on paper and raise it for you if
the table. The penny looks you can . It is better held a
quite round, does it not ? little way off. Practise draw
Raise your hand slowly till ing the ovals by themselves,
it is level with your eyes, and using the side of the white
notice that the penny seems chalk and rubbing it on the
to get narrower and narrower, brown paper. Make the best
till at last you can see only circle you can , and then do
the edge, and neither the one different widths of ovals.
side nor the other. When you have practised
If your hand were made of these a little, pin the other
glass, and you raised it still sheet of brown paper on the
higher, you would see the board , and put the jar a little
underneath side of the penny way off in front of you on the
through it, and it would look table . You can see inside it
wider and wider, till at last, because it is below the eye.
when it was right above your Can you see a dark shadow
eye, it would look quite round Thesethree pictures show and a white light ? Put the
again . And so we see how how the circle and ovals 'shadow in with black chalk ,
things seem to alter in shape should be drawn in chalk . then use white chalk thinly,
as we move them about . and then white chalk thickly,
Quite big things look tiny as you see in the picture, till
if we see them at a distance. you have made the oval the
Now we must get our draw proper shape ; it should be
ing things. We want two more curved in front than
sheets of brown paper, one at the back . Now make
sheet of white paper, a pair the lightest side with white
of scissors, some white and chalk , the darkest side with
some black chalk , and a clean , black chalk , and join them
white jam-jar. Pin a sheet of by using white chalk thinly.
brown paper on your board , Notice the curve at the bot
put the white jar on the white tom . Is it rounder than the
paper, and draw round it with top curve or less round ?
a piece of black chalk very More round, of course ; the
carefully, so as to make a jam
This-jardrawing
a little shows the curves get lessround the nearer
below the
circle on the paper. Cut this levelof theeye, so that they are to the level of the
circle out with the scissors, you can see inside it. eye . You never see the top
draw a straight black line of the jar quite round unless
across the middle of it , it is underneath your eye. A
and put it on the other wasp sees it quite round
sheet of brown paper in front when he is flying downwards
of you, and move the sheet PRICOTJAM into it to look for jam ; but
gradually further and fur when he is crawling towards
ther away. You will see that it on the table he cannot see
it looks narrower and nar inside it at all, because it is
rower . By putting the above his eye . It looks like
black line across you get the drawing on this page. If
two semicircles ; the one This picture shows how it were a glass jar he could
furthest away looks narrower the wasp might see the see the curve of the top
curves .
than the other. Keep the through the sides, ' Get a
white circle still on the paper, glass jar or a tumbler and
and hold the paper at each side, and hold it above the level of the eye,
raise it gradually to the level of your and you will see what is meant.
441
I H
 LITTLE PICTURE--STORIES IN FRENCH
UR story this time, which is continued from page 344 , tells us how the party
OUR
make their way to the boat. Remember that the first line under each picture
is the French, the second gives the English word for the French word above it,
and the third line shows how we make up the words into our own language.
Il est presque une heure. On crie : Monsieur Hawes ! ”
It is nearly one hour. One cries : Mr. Hewes ! ”
It is nearly one o'clock . Someone calls : " Mr. Hawes ! "
Le bateau va bientôt partir.
The boat goes Soon to start.
The boat will soon start .

C'est un télégramme pour papa.

It is a telegram for papa.
It is a telegram for papa .
Papa l'ouvre ; c'est de notre oncle.
Il y a beaucoup de voyageurs. Papa it opens ; it is from our uncle .
There are many of travellers . Papa opens it ; it is from our uncle.
There are many travellers .
Il nous souhaite bon voyage .
Tout le monde se dépêche. He us wishes good journey.
All the world itself hurries He wishes us a good journey.
Everyone is hurrying .
Nous courons vers le bateau .
We run towards the boat.
We run towards the boat.

Nous sommes enfin sur le bateau .

We are at last on the boat.
At last we are on the boat
442
C'est un grand bateau à vapeur.
It is a large steamer .
It is a large steamer .

Le pont est rempli de bagages.

The deck is covered with luggage.
CA
La dame est enchantée.
The lady is delighted.
The lady is delighted.
C'est un bruit épouvantable !
It is a noise frightful!
There is a frightful noise !
The deck is covered with luggage.
Papa s'occupe des nôtres .
Papa himself busies of ours.
Papa looks after ours.
Une vieille dame nous fait rire .
An old lady us makes to laugh.
An old lady makes us laugh.
Elle a perdu son perroquet.
She has lost her parrot.
She has lost her parrot.
La cloche sonne . Nous ailons partir.
The bell rings . We go to start.
The bell rings. We are going to start.
Nous nous asseyons sur le pont .
We ourselves sit on the deck.
We sit on the deck.

La bonne aperçoit la cage.

The nurse sees the cage .
Nurse sees the cage.
The next School Lessons begin on page 549 .
443
 PLANS FOR THE SHOPS OF MODELTOWN

ROOF
KvKX

1. Corner shop for Modeltown

DAT
Coor
DOLO

SIDE
EEN

WALL
х
X

X
7. Plan of chimney
To be made same size
2. Plan of first - floor 3. Plan of shop
partition partition
These are half-with
scale. rule
Take measurements
B
FLOOR
FRONT
SHOP

SHOP

c
OF

OF

o C
SIDE
SHO

8. Folding up the shop

OF
!

LI
BACK
SHOP
OF

O
4. Plan for Modeltown shop - half-scale
FLOOR

FLOOR

Take measurements with rule B

SECOND
FIRST

6. Plan of first floor 6. Plan of second floor

Take measurements of 5 & 6 with rule B 9. The shop with the partition walls

444
 THINGS TO MAKE
AND
THINGS TO DO
WN
WHAT THESE PAGES TEACH US
"HE building of Modeltown advances a step further in these pages, where we
THE learn how to make our first shop . We learn what to do in the garden at
the end of April. In our needlework we learn to make the doll's first little garment,
and we begin, also, another interesting occupation with our needle and thread and
scraps of material that can easily be spared, perhaps, from mother's work -basket. This
is the making of the cloth animals described on page 449. If we follow these instructions
we shall soon have quite a little Zoo of our own . These animals are not only easy
but very cheap to make, and they are not only a source of great amusement, but teach
us one of the great lessons worth learning - how to make use of waste. Many more
things we learn, also, thatare both useful and entertaining, and while our games are, this
time, to be played out of doors, our problems give us more interest as wesit by the fire.
CONTINUED FROM PAGE 334

MAKING SHOPS FOR MODELTOWN

Thefirst sortofshop ina. smalltownis
thought why this is ? Perhaps you have
never thought about it at all . The reason is
that people buy things to eat every day and
sometimes several times a day. We do not
buy a pair of boots or a hat very often, so
that if we live away from the shops where
such things are sold it does not matter much.
But it would be very inconvenient if we had
to go far for the sugar, tea, and four that we
need every day. That is
the reason the grocer's
shop is always the first
shop to be opened in a
village.
So that we will first make
the grocer's shop . By this
time we are familiar with
the method of making the
plans on the cardboard and
of cutting out the shape and
gluing the pieces together,
and we need not, therefore,
be told how to do every
little thing as we were in
the earlier lessons. We
have now learned to think
things out for ourselves,
and to be able to see what
to do from the plans and
pictures without all the
simple explanations.
The first picture ( 1 )
shows us whatthe grocer's
shop will be like when it is
finished. Notice that it is
a corner shop, with two A buished shop for Modeltown
windows on the ground
floor and with two doors. The two windows
look into different streets, and that is why
a corner shop is always thought to be better
than a shop with two windows looking into
the same street. A corner shop is always
better seen than a shop with a front in only
one street, and every shopkeeper, whether he
is a grocer or not, wants his shop to be well
seen. One of the doors in the grocer's shop
front is the shop door. The other door leads
to the house above, where the grocer lives.
Having an idea of what we are going to
make, let us now begin to make it. The
big plan, which is marked 4, must be very
carefully drawn on card twice the size of the
plan in the book . This is to say , we use rule
B to take our measurements with , and the
full - sized rule to mark the sizes on the card .
This will need patience and care , and must
be done exactly. We must remember, of
course, the meaning of the three different
kinds of lines in the drawing, which were
explained on page 218. But
one thing more must be
explained. There are a
number of half circles in
the plan, which may seem
difficult at first, but which
we can easily make the
proper size in our drawing
by placing a sixpence on
the card in the proper place
and drawing round it with
our pencil.
There are a few places
PE in the plan where crosses
like this x are marked.
Make these crosses on the
model and pierce the centre
of the cross with a pin or
a needle. These are the
places where the inside
Hoors are to be put, as we
shall see presently.
Having made the large
plan, cut out the card, as
we now know how to do,
bending it over at the
dotted lines-not at the
chain lines, remember
and fold it up to make the frame of the build
ing. It is easy to see where the edges should
be glued together, so that we need not go
over all these one by one. We must make
the back of the shop toopen, so as to enable
us to put in the inside foors and walls after
wards. Picture 8 shows how the frame of
the building is bent up in the proper way,
and will guide us if we have any difficulty
in doing this. Now we glue to the inside
walls, just above the holes we made in the

445
 ELMLAW THINGS TO MAKE AND THINGS TO DO
Centre of the crosses, some small slips of resemble ules , and the windows were
wood, such as matches without heads. When
these are firmly in place, we make and cut
out the cards to form the floors as shown in
pictures 5 and 6, making them to double scale.
Now we make and put in the two partitions
shown in pictures 2 and 3, making those aiso
to double scale . The bottom picture (9) shows
where the partitions shouldgo, andon the
ground floor and the first floor in the plan
is a dotted line also showing where the
partitions should be placed. We finally make
and cut out the chimney, the plan of which
is given in picture 7, making it the same
sizeas in the picture, and glue it into its place.
The whole building should now look like
picture 9, with the floors and partitions in
their places and with the back wall opening.
If we have cut the doors properly we shall
find that they can be opened and closed, the
side at the dotted line forming the hinge. The
two shop windows are cut in a peculiar way.
Fold the under parts back into theshop , and
these will form the two window -sills. Now
bend the top parts outwards, and they will
represent sunshades, protecting the things in
the window from the heat of the sun .
The building is complete, and now we
have only to colour it to take away, its
cardboard appearance. On the page before
this there is a picture of a little shop made
from the particulars given and afterwards
photographed. The blinds were painted
with red lines, the roof was painted with dark
brown lines filled in with lighter brown to
A LITTLE GARDEN MONTH BY MONTH
WHAT TO DO AT THE END OF APRIL
WHERE a boy or girl has agarden that has not throw away the young shoots we remove.
been made and planted for some long,
time, there will be, besides the small plants of
annuals that have come up
from recent seed-sowing, some
plants that live year after year.
Some of these remain green
all through winter, butsome
of them die down completely,
so that nothing is seen above
ground. But with the first
breath of spring, and often as
early as February, we see
them peeping through the soil.
Among these are such
favourite plants as perennial
larkspurs,
this,
a few
of
perennial
flowers, Michaelmas daisies,
phloxes, and bleeding heart.
Where they have grown un
andwewould
remarkably
flower
rather
sun
disturbed for several seasons,
it is possible they will send
up too many young shoots. If
the phloxes, for instance, do
fine hheads
翠 of water.
ave the periwinkle, a capital plant to only lately been made as well
than a quantityof grow under the shade of trees as in those
smaller ones, we must reduce the number of
these growths to five or six at the most. But
if we would like to have a supply of nice
young plants for autumn planting we need
446
coloured dark blue. Around the door, pillars
were drawn and also coloured brown, and
the semicircular space above the door was
made to look like a window .
Now we have made our first shop. From
the same plans we may make a few more,
and erect a little row of them . We must
make the others without the side windows,
as they will have one front only , and cannot
face into two streets . This will not be
difficult if we are the least bit clever.
The next thing to do , however, will not be
so easy. Suppose we make a corner shop for
the other end of the little street, just like the
corner shop we have already made, but make
it the opposite way — that is to say, with the
side windows and the door atthe right side
instead of at the left side. This is a task that
will show if we can think things out for our
selves as well as follow plans and instructions
given.
We can make asmany shops, of course, as
we vant in our little town ; perhaps we
migh make seven altogether - one for the
grocer, and one each for the butcher, the
baker, the shoemaker, the draper, the iron
monger, and the chemist. That will be
enough for a small town. But when all the
smallershops are doing a good business,
very often a large store comes along and
opens a much bigger shop, selling nearly all
the things that all the other shops sell.
Our next task will be the erection of a
larger shop than that we have just made.
We may cut them to about 5 inches in length
and plant them in the ground in some rather
cool position, and these cut
tings will strike root. They
should be planted firmly, and
a little more than half their
length should be under the soil .
This rearing of plants from
cuttings is very interesting, and
gives us much pleasant work ,
as all the summer we shall
have to think of them , and see
that they do not suffer for want
It is rather late to
put in the cuttings of phloxes
and other perennial plants, but
it is not too late if they are
planted in a position thatdoes
not get the sun.
The present is a good time
to plant new things in our
gardens, and this should be
done in the garden that has
that are not new .
If we have no pansies, by all
means let us obtain some at once, for they
are as good as anything we can have for the
front edge. We may plant them by them
selves or in turn with other dwarf things,
 DOLCELER
A LITTLE GARDEN MONTH BY MONTH
and this, perhaps, is to be recommended in leave room now for all this ample growth .
akinds
small plot , as it allows of more different Perhaps you have a few pots of geraniums
of plants being grown. We must and fuchsias that you have been wintering
remember, too, that pansies are charming indoors, and hope to plant out in your
as cut flowers if we want to fill small vases. gardens for the summer. At present it is too
Among the tali plants we certainlyought to early to do this, but the time has come when
put in a few early-flowering Japanese we must prepare them for an out-of-door life
chrysanthemums. In gardening we must and harden them . They can be stood
always be looking ahead, and seeing to it out of doors s in their pots in some sunny
that we provide plants place, but, if at night
due to flower many it seems inclined to
months ahead. The be frosty, either they
pansies will flower must be put under
most of the summer, cover, or a bit of calico
and these crysanthe tied to four small
mums will flower right posts spread like a
away through the tent above them, and
autumn until the sharp removed next morn
frosts come. ing. Frost strikes
There is a right way straight down ; and
to plant and also a this is sufficient pro
wrong way. The right tection at this season
way is to dig a hole unless accompanied
large enough to take by a keen wind. But
all the rootsand allow it is always safer to
them to be spread out A newly planted corner of hardy ferns take them indoors, or
on all sides, and , hay to put them in a shed ,
ing arranged the roots, then to cover the as keen winds sometimes rise unexpectedly
plant to what is called the collar. We can during the night.
generally see how far it has been in the Asflowerswhich grow on plants that have
soil previously by the appearance of the a bulb root fade and die, you will notice
stem , and can be guided by this. Young that the leaves either of snowdrops or
gardeners often plant too deeply. daffodils, or whatever they may be, grow
If you want to have ferns in your garden , very fast; they become much longer, and
this is the time of the year to plant them. they grow very untidy. You want to
Weeds grow apace at this season , so cut off these leaves, perhaps, because you
that it is a busy time for the hoe. But think they are no use now the flowers
where weeds are growing close up to young have faded. But by no means must you
plants, or the tender siroots of old ones, touch these leaves. Their growth at this
the hoe may become a dangerous tool, time is of the greatest importance. They
and it is far better to put it aside and take are storing up nourishment, which is con
to “ hand - weeding." veyed to the bulb that
Now comes the ques it may have strength
tion : What shall we to produce its flowers
do with the uprooted next year. Thus, you
weeds ? Listen to what see, it will never do to
Mr. Robinson says on cut off these leaves. We
this matter in his book must just leave them,
on the English flower and before long they
garden : " Let us not will die away com
cart them away, with pletely. Some of these
the best of the surface leaves are brittle ; but
at the same time , but the crocus leaves are
bury them where they rather tough, so that we
are ,or place them over may, if we like, tie
the roots of trees and them in a loose knot,
shrubs." You see , and prevent them , in
decaying weeds help this way, from taking
to enrich the soil. up so much room.
The thinning of little Lettuce seed may be
seedling annuals, or sown . Indeed, three
other plants, must be The pansy, a very useful plant for a small garden or four sowings at
attended to , and if a different times is re
first thinning does not leave them far enough commended to keep up a good supply: The
apart, then a second and even a third must be ground should have been very deeply dug
made. For small dwarf plants, 6 inches from before this seed is sown, and it should be put
plant to plant is sufficient, but for larger ones in very thinly. Many seedling plants we can
9 inches or a foot, or more, will not be too far. transplant if we wish to do so, but it is im
We must not consider them in their present portant to remember never to transplant young
stage, but we must picture them fine grown- lettuce plants, for plants that are never moved
up bushy plants, branching out on allsides, will not run away to seed nearly so fast as
and laden with flowers, and we must transplanted ones .
447
 GAMES TO BE PLAYED OUT OF DOORS
OUUR games this time are to be played
Rout of doors, and they have this
great advantage — that nobody need
standstill,
take part butthat all the
in them at playerstime.
the same can
ROUND TAG
In this game,which is sometimes called
“ Tierce," " stations ” or “ homes " should
be marked out seven or eight paces apart,
but in such a way as to form one large circle .
At one of these stations three players stand ,
one in front of the other , while at all the
rest only two stand, also one in front of the
other . Thus, if there are fourteen players ,
there will be only six stations -one occupied
by three players, five by two, the remaining
player taking the part of “ he."
To begin the game, " he " must stand at
the opposite side of the circle to that at which
the three are stationed. Then he runs toward
theni, his object being to touch the outside
boy. This boy at once tries to escape, but
is only safe from being touched when he suc-
ceeds in placing himself in front of any other
couple in the circle. Directly this is done,
of course it makes three at that station , and
the player at the back must escape in turn oi
he will be touched , in which case he has to
be “ he," and the game starts again.
I SPY
Theparty
players divide into twoparties. One
goes away and hides, the other
stays “ at home" with closed eyes. Presently
they call out : “ Coming once , coming twice,
coming thrice," and if no one answers “ Not
ready " they begin their search . When any
searcher catches a glimpse of a hider, he or
she calls out : “ I spy ;" givingthe Alineisdrawn
name of the person found and the place of
hiding. At the cry the one discovered leaves " home " and safe. Presently, with both hands
his place, and does his best to touch the clasped in frontofhim, he calls out : “ Warn
seeker before he can get “ home. Onlying ! Warning !"and, still with clasped hands,
seekers who succeed in getting safely back
may go out again to look . Keen eyes and
swift feet are necessary for all searchers,
or they will have little chance of spying a
hiderofand
out den . If" home"
hisreaching the hiders failhetobounds
before catch
half the number of those who seek them
they must take their turn in “ home.” This
is aa livelier game than hide and seek , though
it is something like it .
TOUCH
One" , player
' is counted
The out from
othersthen the rest
scatter aboutas
the field , while “ he " does his best to touch
them. The one touched takes his place.
Sometimes " touchwood ” is allowed, and
that means that any player who has his or her
hand against wood, such as a tree, a fence, or
a gate, cannot be touched until the hand is
taken off again. It is a useful part of the
game when we get out of breath for a minute.
In “ crosstouch ” any player who runs
between “ he " and the person he is chasing
makes that person free, and the offending
Tex
448
player must be chased instead . The oftener
this is repeated the livelier the game will be.
FLAGS
A LONG straightline
grass, and is players
the party of chalkedis divided
on the
into two equal numbers, or sides. Each side
then goes into its own “ country, ” the line
stretching between them . Every playermust
lay down on the grass, a few yards inside his
line, a handkerchief, a cap, or a scarf
These are the “ flags.” At a given signa;
one side rushes across the line to try tol
capture the enemy's flags. Those who
succeed must be allowed to return to their
country , but any caught before securing a
flag are prisoners. It is then the other side's
turn to cross the line, and their prisoners (if
any) must help to capture the lost flags and
those belonging to the enemy. No player
must take more than one flag at each attack ,
and the side that is first to lose its flags is
defeated.
FILLING THE GAP
In thisgameall the players butone form a
circle by holding hands, and the larger
the circle is the beiter the fun. The player
left out walks round and round the outside of
the circle, and presently touches someone on
the back . Directly he has done this he starts
to run round the circle, while the boy he has
touched does the same, only he runs in the
opposite direction, thus leaving a gap, of
course, where he stood . The game is to see
who can reach this gap first, and the one
who does so fills it. The other walks round
and touches someone else , and so the game
goes on.
WARNING
acrossthe grass,and aplayer
takes his place behind it, where he is at
jumps across the line and chases the other
players. If he can touch one of them , the one
touched runs back to “ home ” with him , and
they start out again together, hand in hand .
The game becomes more exciting as more
players are touched, for each one adds to the
chain that comes out from “ home " to make
prisoners. But on no account must those
who form this chain unclasp their hands, or
they can be caught and made to release their
captive.
FOLLOW MY LEADER
“ M Y LEADER " must be daring, or there
will not be much fun in following
him . The players take places one behind
the other, the more the merrier . Away goes
the leader through the most difficult places
he can think of , jumping over ditches,
climbing steep banks, and running over
rough ground. If any follower fails to do
the task set by the leader he must retire to
the back of the row , and when the fun is over
it is sometimes found that the one who
started last has worked his way to the second
place, and thus comes next to the leader.
WUNDO
 HOW TO MAKE
A LITTLE while ago mostof the creatures
in our Home Zoo were lying together
all in a heap at the bottom of some-
body's piece-bag. They did not look much
like animals then , but that was before they
weretouched and brought into shape by the
wonderful fairies Needle and Thread . Our
kitten was just a bit of black plush left
over from the trimming of a cloak ; our
fierce lion was a corner of fawn -coloured,
smooth -faced cloth from a tailor-made suit ;
our fat pig and dear little white bunny were
OUR OWN ZOO
66
pile, or nap,' goes, and take care to place
the pattern so that it will stroke from the head
to the tail, as in nature.
3. All the patterns are cut out in halves,
so that you will have to double the material .
We shall understand this better later . But be
very careful to see that the two halves face
each other, and cut out with neatness and
exactness, making the pieces all fit one
another precisely .
4. Stitch up as closely and neatly as you
can , with the sewing -machine if possible,

Animals to make at home Some members of our Zoo

odds and ends of a but remember that
warm swansdown very firm , close
calico shirt ; and seams are most
our curly dog was important.
a scrap of imitation 5. All animals
astrachan from have their princi
somebody's winter pal seams sewn on
M.

jacket. But we just the wrong side ; but

Are

cut them out, and if the cloth is thick

sewed them together, and firm , with a good
and fed them well on wad nap , some parts — such as
ding, and here they are - all the holes where the legs are
that you see in the picture, and fastened in , and sometimes
many more. Making one's own Zoo is great the legs themselves --may be sewn raw
fun. It is so nice to have the animals to playdged on the right side, and the nap at the
with. They will all stand up ; and if their n.argin pulled over the stitches to hide them.
feet are glued to a small stand, with wheels Thinner cloth must be turned in where neces
-such as any boy can make - little children sary to sew or hem over on the right side.
will be delighted to draw them about. If 6. Stuff always with unbleached wadding,
they are very nicely made at 2 /2d. a yard. A yard
they are quite pretty will fill three or four
models, and will readily animals of 7 in. or 8 in.
sell at a bazaar. long and 4 in. or 5 in. in
But, before we start to height. Never use cut-up
make them , there are a Aannel or any other odds
few things which we must and ends if you want to
always remember if we get a good effect. Put the
want really to succeed. If wadding in a little at a
we number them it will time, pushing it well home
help us to remember. with your finger or the
The best materials point of a pair of scissors,
are tightly woven stuffs and pack as tightly as ever
that areplain on one side you can. This is important.
and Auffy or shaggy on The cat made as described on this page Now we may start on
the other. Thin and loose our first animal — the cat.
cloths that easily fray are troublesom . Grey velveteen or plush makes the prettiest
Beaver cloth , all imitation furs — if they are cat, but black will do. The cat, when cut
not too thick-swansdown calico, plush , out, is in eleven pieces - namely, two upper
and velveteen, all make up splendidly. halves, two under halves, two pieces, upper
2. In cutting out, first note which way the and under , for each of the ears, the upper
449
 OROK THINGS TO MAKE AND THINGS TO DO LIBRE
and under halves of the tail , and a lemon- stitch up the tail, turn it, and stuff it. Stitch
shaped piece on the top of the head. We on the lemon -shaped piece to the top of the
cut out the pieces to the shapes shown in the head in the position shown in the pattern.
plans, which we can trace on thin paper. Let Sew up the upper animal, beginning at the
us begin with the side half of body which is throat and going over head and back, and
marked 1. We cut out two pieces this shape, ending at the tail. Be careful to keep the
making them exactly halves in proper position.
alike. Wecut out two na Now turn the cat and her four paws,
pieces of the under and begin to stuff her - first the head,
half of body marked Place to stitch then the paws, then the body. When
2 in the picture, then X on EAR she seems nearly fat enough, begin to
one piece for the top Place to sew up at the tail , and work along,
of head, marked 3 , stitch on EYE poking in more stuffing as you see it
is needed, until you finish up under
the chin . The two front legs will
probably have to be caught together
with strong thread to make pussy sit
up properly, and her tail , hemmed at
the base, should be curled round her
toes, so as to give a natural rosition .
The ears must be made
and turned, after being

Bre f
VVVVV

Fro
SIDE HALF OF BODY ΑΛΛΑ fastened neatly in the right

ast
ot
n
1 position, and the two outer
edges folded over to meet
in the middle. Then you
will have a pretty
little ear to sew on
UNDER HALF
X OF BODY
X X
2 X
X X
XX

x xxx X X X X

TOP OF HEAD
M
UPP 3
ER L EAR
TAI
HALF CF v
W w
4 THE WAY TO
SKAPE EAR
V

R TAIL
m LOWE HALF OF 1
5
VVVV 1

Plans for making the cat

shown on the previous page

one tail piece marked 4, and another tail
piece marked 5, and, finally, two ears to
the shape given in the picture.
remember to make every piece the size
given in the pictures.
Now we are ready to sew the pieces to-
gether. The pictures are marked with V's
and X's, and these show what pieces areto be
sewn together. The piece marked VV is to
be sewn to the other piece marked VV, and
SO on . We begin by stitching the under
halves on to the upper ones, being careful to
stitch very closely round the toes. Next
in position. Beads or sequins make bright
eyes ; but, if the cat is to be a toy for a young
We must baby, black worsted eyes, juststitched,
are safer. A nose and mouth may
be also marked in worsted , as here
shown , and bunches of white thread
can be sewn on for eyebrows and whiskers.
If you finish up by marking the " tabby
pattern in ink, copying from a real cat, and
brush the stiffness out when dry, you will
find you have made a very charming cat.
The next animals we shall learn to make
for our Zoo will be a lion and a tiger.
450
WHAT TO DO WITH A GIRL'S WORK-BASKET
2. The Doll's First Little Garment
We have learned howto do the different
stitches that are needed to make dolls'
clothes, so now we should be able to under-
take the fine stitching for the garments that
we are going to make.
We will start with the little chemise. If
you look at the picture ( 1 ) you will see that
the pattern is quite simple, and very easy to
cut out if you read this article carefully.
Draw the pattern to fit the size of your dollon
a piece ofpaper, and mark itA, B, C , D , E, F,
like the sketch. Then take a piece of fine,
soft calico, or, better still, nainsook, twice
the length and twice the width that you want
the little chemise to be, allowing enough over
for seams and hem. Now fold the material
in half, and
then fold it in с tween C and
half again .
When you
Take off the pattern and unfold the
material. The two sides of the little garment
are now shaped and held together by the
uncut folds of the shoulder. If you look at
your own little chemise you will find that the
front of the neck is cut lower than the back,
but in the doll's pattern both back and front
are alike, are they not ? Now turn to the
picture ( 2 ) again, and you will see that there
is a dotted line below the one between A and
B. The line between A and B represents
half the back of the neck, and the dotted line
half the front. So to get the front, take your
scissors and cut out the material a little,
being careful to slope out more at the centre
than at the sides. Then slope out each little
sleeve (be
F) in the same
MATERIAL
way . Just now
DOUBLE

have done this we spoke of

A
FOLO

the shape of half the pat

FRE
OF

the material tern . Nearly

SEA H
NC
should be as all patterns

M
it was before, are cut out in
only smaller halves - that
You have now means that
in your hand nearly all gar
four folds of ments have, of
material, course, two
which are sides, or two
longer than parts , which
they arebroad . are exactly
Before going E alike, and it is
any further we E far easier to
should be sure
0
get these
that the two 1. How to cut out the pattern D exact if we
single folds of 2. Laying pattern on the material double the
our material material, lay
are at the top, the pattern on
and the double it, and cut
fold at the them both at
side, for this is once. This
very import is why we
always, or
ant, as
shall see.If
this is not
quite clear to
you , look at
picture
which
we

shows
2, 3. Buttonhole scallops
the material folded . Lay this down on the
table in the position shown in the picture ,
and lay the pattern on it. Pin the pattern
to the material before it can slip out of
place, put one pin at the top, another at
each side, and one at the bottom ; then
take a pair of scissors and cut all round
the outlines of the pattern , except the parts
between B and C ( this is the shoulders), and
between A and D ( this is the middle of the
chemise, as you will see when you open the
material out after it has been cut).
When you are cutting, you must remember
to leave half an inch for the double seam
under each arm, and an inch and a quarter for
' the hem at the bottom .
451
여
4. The whipping stitch
nearly always,
speak of a pat
tern as being
half thebackor
half the front,
and so on.
Now these points are quite clear we must
begin to sew our chemise together. Before
starting the sewing we must be sure that
our hands are spotlessly clean, for on its
neatness and cleanliness depends the success
of our work. To look well, needlework
must be kept quite fresh , or its charm will
be gone, however neat the work may be.
Thread aa short needle and begin with the
seams on each side, joining them either by
running and felling them , or by a French
seam. If we have forgotten how to do this,
wemust turn to page 327 of our book .
The next thing to do is the hem at the
bottom . Turn up the material about 14 in .
You will remember that we allowed an inch
 DANE THINGS TO MAKE AND
and a quarter when we cut the material.
The quarter of an inch is for the first little fold ,
and the inch will be the width of the hem .
Measure an inch and a quarter all round,
turn this down and tack it to keep it in place.
A good way to measure the hem and to be
certain that it is quite even is to get a piece
of stiff paper - or a visiting card
is better - measure an inch on it,
snip it with the scissors to mark
it, and use it as you would use a
tape measure . When your hem
is even , fold the rough edge
under a quarter of an inch, and
tack it again , and then hem it
round with tiny , neat little
stitches.
Now what are we going to do
with the top and the sleeves? If
we have been practising all the
stitches which we learned the
other day, we shall be able to do 6. The finished garment
some small buttonhole scallops
round the neck and sleeves, in which case we stitches, just as you " whipped ” the lace.
shall have the daintiest little ornament
that one could wish for, If you look at
picture 3 you will see how the material is cut them together as you would sew together
out in large scallops all round for the button-
hole stitches to be worked on. The picture
shows how the stitches should be narrow at
the top of each scallop, and get wider in the
ARRANGING FLOWERS FOR THE HOUSE
world compliment.
Thecharming haspaidevery woman a
It has credited
all of us with the ability to make our sur-
roundings beautiful. Have you not read in
many books that the heroine possessed a
magic touch ? When she had been there the
room seemed to show an extra daintiness, the
place wore an added charm, an air of comfort
and cosiness
that it did not
possess before.
But, unfortu
nately , the novel
gave no precise
direction as to
how she did it.
These things
are not arrived
at by instinct.
The good fairy
who deals out
the birth -gifts is
not so lavish as
we are led to
suppose, and
seldom gives to This shows the right and the wrong way to arrange violets and of leaves, ` be
anyone so big flowers should
like them. They
a gift that there and not cramped up in a high vase where they can hardly be seen. point applies to
is nothing left to learn . She just gives
a little bit - just enough to show it is there
and one has to learn the rest.
We shall not be able to learn here every-
thing that our favourite heroines are supposed
to know , but only a few things about one
simple part of the subject - how to arrange
flowers .
I wonder if you have ever thought that the
size, shape and colour of the vase is a most
THINGS TO DO
middle. If you cannot get this quite even,
draw a faint line, like you will see in the
picture, and work over it.
But if this is too difficult we can make a
little hem and sew on the end of it a piece of
pretty Valenciennes lace. As the neck is
round, and not straight, it will not be very
easy to fold the hem in the usual
way ; but if you try to roll the
edges and make only a tiny hem ,
you will find it will not be nearly
so difficult.
Now for the lace. This should
be first gathered in a way that is
called " whipping ' -- that is, we
turn the edge in a little and make
little over-and-over stitches like
we can see in picture 4, and
then pull it up, so that it makes
a little frill . When the face is
pulled up full enough -do not
let it be too full -sew it on to
the edge of the hem with tiny
In sewing the lace to the chemise, do not put
the two back to back and then sew, but draw
the two edges of a hole in a glove. This is
the only way to get the lace to set quite flat.
And now your little chemise should look
just like the one shown in picture 5.
important point ? For instance, daffodils,
which are heavy flowers, should always
stand in strong china - for preference, green
glazed ware. There is something so strong
and sturdy about their growth that they need
a good support and plenty of water ; so don't
put them into frail china vases that will topple
over with a breath of wind because they are
top heavy.
Also remem
ber how the
daffodil grows.
How many
leaves go toone
daffodil ? Hun
dreds ! Well,
you cannot get
hundreds into a
vase, but you
can get a good
many, and you
will find the
flowers look far
finer with a
plentiful supply
loosely arranged
be in a low vase, cause -- and this
every kind of blossom -they grow like that.
Suppose you had a lovely jarful of arum
lilies, but no leaves, you would not think
of putting in some thistles, would you ?
And yet many people who try to arrange
flowers do things that are just as absurd and
wrong as this. Be careful how you mix
blooms; be quite sure they go well together,
or it ismuchbetter to put them in separate
jars. It does not always happen that all
452
 -THE EASIEST WAY TO MULTIPLY BY NINETY -NINE
varieties of one kind of flower look well beautiful in a big low jar. But they should
together. Two geraniums, one a vivid be stood in the sun, for half their charm lies
scarlet and the other a magenta pink, would in te glossy shine on their petals, and this
give a terrible effect if they were put in one is best szen when the sun is on them.
vase. After all, most flowers do look best Some people gather a few buttercups, put
by themselves - although one often has to them in a tall , thin vase, and stand them in
make use of those one has. a dark corner, and then they wonder why
It is a good rule to keep to one colour they look so dreary. It is only because
and white , or only to use several shades of they went the wrong way to work , and
one colour. In each did not think .
case have plenty of Have you noticed
green . Also remember how very beautiful some
that the green leaf of of the seed- pods are ?
the plant itself always Use sone occasionally
suits the blossom best, among your blossoms.
Nasturtiums , sweet
so that if you cannot peas, and roses have
getthat, usesome other
leaf as much like it as the right sort for
possible in colour and decoration. They give
size. a variety and uncom
Another important monness to quite an
point to remember is ordinary bunch , and
the position of the in the autumn they can
flowers. Some flowers often be made into a
were made to look decoration by them
down upon , while Marguerites, carelessly arranged in a wide bowl. selves. Think how
others are more charm charming a large bunch
ing when one has to of red rose -berries
look up at them . So, can be, and honesty,
when placing them , try you know, is a seed
to think which is the pod too .
better position . Now we come to the
If you have an azalea question of bowls. Big
plant in bloom don't bowls of flowers have
put it on a high table, a charm which a mere
but stand it on some vase can never possess.
thing very low or on Think how often our
the floor, so that you artists put a bowl of
can see down on to flowers in a picture !
the lovely masses of Not everyone can
Aower, and not only get manage to get the
a view of the stalks and blooms to stand up
backs. Flowers like This is the same bowl as above,
s
with ajam -jar inside properly ;
e
they have
it, hidden by the flower and foliag , which
bluebells which droo p holds thestemstogether and gives a prettiereffect. an ng toying
fallianno trick and
the edge of
their heads will look
better up high, say, on the mantelpiece, leaving a hole in the middle. This will not
because ihen one can see the beauty they happen if you put a little jam -jar in the
seem to be shyly hiding . centre of the bowl first, and then fill both
Don't despise wild flowers. They can be with water ; but be sure your jar is not
made to look lovely in the house. Select higher than the bowl,no or woma
it will show.
n who is
the best blossoms and keep one kind Remember that
together, and have them always in big really refined allows · ugliness near her.
bunches . Buttercups , with a few strands of These little things take such aa short time to
green wild oats rising above them , look do, and really give a great deal of pleasure .

THE EASIEST WAY TO MULTIPLY BY NINETY -NINE

Some of the numbers in the multiplication when we multiply by to and then subtract the
table are easy and some are difficult. number itself once we are really multiplying
Perhaps you think that the figure 9 should by 9. This way saves more time if we are
not have been in it at all . But there is a multiplying by 99 or999,or 987,654,300
very easy way of multiplying by 9. any number of nines. Suppose 9,876,543
9. Wellthat
bySuppose you want to multiply 34,875,695 we have to multiply 9,876,543
, the easy way is to put o after it by 99, this is how we do it : 977,777,757
and then put the same figures 348,756,950 We simply add oo, which is the same as
below, without o added, and do multiplying by 100, and then take away the
34,875,695 number once. In multiplying by three nines
it as a subtraction sum . This is
how it is done : 313,881,255 (999) in this way we add three noughts ( 000 ),
When we add o to a number we really and so on with any number of nines, always
multiply the number by 10. The number 9 subtracting the original number once after
is, of course, one less than 10, so that adding the noughts.
453
 THE MAGIC OF A GLASS OF WATER
Forevery mystery there is an explanation. You have made what is called a syphon - not
We are sometimes a very long time find- the kind that holds soda water, for this is
ing the explanation, but the more we know not a true syphon, but what men of science
about the true meaning and the properties of and engineers call a syphon.
things the more mysteries we are able to Can you explain what has happene
explain ; and as soon as we can explain a Suppose you take a string , tying to one end
mystery, it ceases to be one. a large stone or weight and to the other end
Look at your face in a mirror. Why does a small stone orweight, and suppose that you
the mirror show everything in front of it ? put the middle of the string over a wheel or a
Because it has the property of reflection. smooth rail. You know
Throw this book into the air and see what will happen : the
what happens. It falls downwards. heavy stone or weightwill
Why not upwards ? Why not sideways ? fall and pull up the little
It falls downwards because of what we weight until it follows it
call gravitation. down the other side of the
Now we will try a curious experiment, wheel or rail .
which you will understand if you under The water in the long leg
stand what gravitation is. All you need of the tube is like the heavy
are two tumblers, or weight, and the water in the
cups, a little water, and a short one is like the
short piece of indiarubber small weight. But
tubing. Any sort of tub you say that the two
ing would do, but it weights would be tied
should be small and thin together, while water
like the tubing is not tied to water.
of the old -fashioned That is true ; but un
feeding -bottle. Put less air gets into the
a tumbler of water tube of your syphon
on a box or some the effect is just as if
books on aa table the heavy column of
on anything that will the water were tied to
cause it to stand a the light column of
few inches higher water . Perhaps it
than it would stand 1. A simple syphon showing how water will How upwards would make it clearer
if you were to put it on the table. if I were to say that the heavy column of water
Now put an empty tumbler on the table falls down and sucks up the lighter column.
near the high tumbler. The tumbler holding The light column of water then becomes the
water will now be higher than the empty heavy column,and sucks up more water, and
tumbler. Put the end of the rubber tubing so on until all the water possible has been
into the glass with water. Let it go down sucked up and flowed down the tube.
in the water. Now put the other We shall try another experi
end ofthe tubing into yourmouth, ment - how to make a penny rise
and suck some of the water up. up in water. It will not really
When the tubing is full of water, rise up, but it will seen
squeeze the end of the tube to do so, and the experiment is
which you have in your a very curious one. It shows
mouth . Take it be 2 Penny in saucer that we do not see through
tween your finger and water quite in the same way
thumb, holding it as we see through air .

ESORES
tightly, and put this Put a saucer on a table
end into or over the
empty tumbler, still
----- or on a sideboard, and put a
penny in the middle of it.
keeping the other end 3. Penny hidden from view It will then look as shown
of the tubing below the in picture 2.
surface of the water in Now get some
the high tumbler. The one to look at it.
part of the tubing Ask him to sit a
dangling over the side little lower until
of the full tumbler the penny is just
should be longer than hidden by the rim
the part inside the full of the saucer. He
tumbler, will then see the
4. How we see through alr and water
Now if you take saucer, but not the
away your fingers, thereby letting the lower penny. It will be like picture 3.
end of the tubing open, the water will begin Now , while your friend sits still," pour
to flow , and will continue to flow until the water into the saucer. Do it very steadily
high tumbler is empty, or until the water in so as not to spill the water. The penny
the high tumbler is below the end of the will come into sight. It does not really into
tubing up which the water has been flowing. rise. It is the water that makes it seem hav
454
 -THE BALL THAT ANSWERS QUESTIONS
to do so . This is because, when you look keep its shape. Now put a thin pieceof string
through air, you see in a straight line. When around the parts of the two pins inside the box,
vou look through air and water you see along and hang up the paper box to something, or
two lines, as hold it in your
shown in hand, as shown
picture 4 . in picture 7.
This cur Pour some
ious pro water into the
perty of paper box until
water is called re it is almost full.
fraction . You will Do it very gently,
know more about this so as notto break
property of water the paper box. Put
when you begin to ITT a lamp, a candle, or
study the subject a gas-flame under 6.The box
6. Making the box
which we call physics. the box. The paper finished
Another experiment shows yet another will not burn , as we might ex
curious thing . To talk about a paper pect, but the water will get
saucepan seems absurd , but it is not hotter and hotter until it
so ridiculous as it sounds. We can boils. This result, which
really make water boil in a paper seems strange, is caused by
saucepan without much difficulty. the water, which will not
First, we must make the saucepan . allow the paper to retain the
Take apaper
piecewill paperFold
of do.' - ordinary heat, but draws it to itself.
writing it over 7. Boiling water in the box Thiseffect is due to what is
something of square or oblong shape, as seen called radiation. Instead of getting hotter and
in picture 5. Put a pin through thefolds at the hotter until it burns, the paper gives its heat
sides, as seen in picture 6, to make the box to the water, which gets hotter and hotter.

THE BALL THAT ANSWERS QUESTIONS

One of the most interesting toysisaball
that seems to count and answer questions.
To people who do not know the
secret of its manufacture it is very
mysterious ; and any boy can derive
much amusement by making one,
and showing it to his friends
after he has practised with it a
few times and become expert
in its use.
First , we get a wooden
ball, of any size we like,
but not too tiny. A
croquet-ball will do nicely,
or oneabout the size of a
golf-ball ; but, whatever size
it may be, it had better be
of wood .
The first thing to do is tomark
upon the outside of the ball two
points, exactly opposite each
other. In most wooden balls we find
two centre -points, that the wood
turner has used when making the
ball. Then we use a gimlet , and
make a hole in the ball, but not in a
straight line towards the other point.
The first illustration ( 1) shows how
the hole is made ;it is not through the
centre of the ball, but to one side.
The hole is not made to go right
through the ball, but it must go
more than half-way.
Now we bore another hole from
the opposite point. This is the only
difficult part, for the second hole
must be made so that it goes right 4. Holding the ball the ball can always answer them if
into the first hole, and the result is that we we are allowed to hold it up by the string. A
have a continuous hole right through the little practice will enable us to move the ball
ball, but not in a straight line. The next two
pictures
look if we(2were
and 3) showthehowballtheright
to cut holethrough
would
the middle. But, of course , we
are not going to cut the ball through ;
the pictures are only to help us to
make the hole properly.
Now we put a string through
the hole from side to side, and
after doing so we had better
put something - say, а
button - on each end of
the string, to prevent it
from slipping out of the
hole. Now, if we hold
up the ball as the boy in
the fourth picture is doing,
pulling the string tightly
as wedo so, we find that
How to make the ball remains fast at any part
the hole through of the string we like. Let the
the magic ball string loose just a little, and the
ball begins to slip down. Again
pull it tight, and again the ball rests.
Now we can ask the ball questions.
Hold the string tightly, with the ball
at top of it. Ball ,'how many do
two and three make ? " we ask ;
and, for reply, the ball takes five
short steps down the string. Of
course, we are making it do so, by
making it tight and loose as we
wish . Then we say : “ Ball, I am
going to ask you some questions.
If you mean yes, move once ; if
you mean no, move twice.” We
can ask any questions we like, and
without anyone detecting how we do it. -
455
 LITTLE PROBLEMS FOR CLEVER PEOPLE
"HESE problems are continued from
THEpage 326, and the answers to the
problems on that page are given below.
HOW LONG WAS THE TRAIN ?
30. As I was waiting at the station , a train
took 9 seconds to pass me ; and to go through
the station, which is 88 yards long, it took
21 seconds. How long was the train ?
HOW OLD IS TOMMY ?
31. In another three years Tommy will be
three times as old as he was three years ago.
How old is he now ?
HOW FAST IS THE CURRENT ?
32. Duncan rowed three-quarters of a
mile up- stream half an hour. If there
had been no current he would have taken
only a quarter of an hour. What is the
speed of the current ?
THE ANSWERS TO THE PROBLEMS ON PAGE 326
19. By 8.30 Alfred has walked one - fourth
of the way , and in another 5 minutes he has
walked one -third of the way . The difference
between one-third and one- fourth is one-
twelfth , so that he walks one-twelfth of the
distance in 5 minutes. At 8.30 he still has
three -fourths, or nine-twelfths, of the distance
to go, and this will take him 9 times 5 minutes,
or three -fourths of an hour. He therefore
arrives at school at 9.15.
20. From noon on Monday to 8 o'clock on
Wednesday morning is 44 hours. His father's
watch, therefore, lost 3 minutes in 44 hours.
But it was right when it had lost only
2 minutes, which it would do in two - thirds of
44 hours — that is, in 29 hours 20 minutes.
This number of hours from noon on Monday
would make it 5.20 on Tuesday afternoon.
21. Try one wagonette first. This will
seat 9, and leave 50. There is not an exact
number of 4's in 50, so that they could not be
seated in cabs. Next try 2 wagonettes.
These will seat 18 , and leave 41 , which, again ,
cannot be seated in cabs. Next, 3 wagonettes
will seat 27, and leave 32. Now , 8 cabs will
seat exactly 32 , so that the manager must
have sent 3 wagonettes and 8 cabs.
22 . The hare makes 3 leaps while the
hound makes 2, so that she makes 9 while
the hound makes 6. But the hound goes as
far in these 6 leaps as the hare does in 14 , so
that the hare loses a distance equal to 5 of
her own leaps in every 6 leaps the hound
takes . She will therefore lose 60 leaps
while the hound takes 72—that is, the hound
catches her when he has made 72 leaps.
23. The customer received 3 cocoa-nuts
(worth is. ) , 15 oranges (worth 7 % d .), and 2
apples (worth yd.), making 20 in all for
20 pence .
24. This is what is usually known as a
" catch ” ; and the answer is that , as they
stood , they faced each other, one looking with the boat.
north and the other south . together ; and Fred brought back the boat in
25. One-third of the seats were filled at . which the postman crossed alone. Albert
each . At 6d . each two - thirds would have then rowed across to the starting shore, and
yielded the same amount. Therefore, had brought back his brother.
The next THINGS TO MAKE AND THINGS TO DO begin on page 559
456
WHAT WERE THE DISTANCES ?
33. A farmer drove to Chester at 8 miles an
hour, and returned home by a road 2 miles
longer at 10 miles an hour. He found that
the return journey took 12 minutes less than
the outward journey. How long was each
road ?
WHAT WERE THE COINS ?
34. A man asked his friend for change for a
half-sovereign. The latter replied : "I have
five pounds in silver, but I cannot do it."
Explain how this could be .
HOW MANY MEN WERE LOST ?
35. Nine men, lost in the mountains, had
food for five days. Next day they met other
lost men without food , and it was found that
the food divided among the entire company
would last for three days only. How many
lost men were in the second party ?
the hall been filled , the remaining third
would have yielded £5 , so that there were
200 in that third , or 600 seats in the hall
altogether.
26. If the grocer had put in 1 oz. of
chicory and 15 oz. of coffee, the price would
have been is. 3 % d . - 15. 3d. for the coffee
and x d . for the chicory. Thus every ounce
of chicory in the pound of the mixture
lowered the price 4 d . below is. 4d. 11 % d.
is 4 % d. less than is, 4d. , and there are 6
times *.d. in 4 % d. Thus there were 6 ods.
of chicory in the pound of the mixture, and
there must have been 10 Ozs. of coffee.
27. If we divide 60 minutes by the number
of trains an hour, we get the number of
minutes between each train . If there were
3 more trains per hour, there would be i
minute less between each train. We there
fore have to find two numbers whose
difference is 3 , and which , when divided into
60 , give results which differ by 1. The
numbers which divide 60 are 2 , 3 , 4 , 5, 6, 10,
12 , 15, 20, 30. First, those which differ by 3
are 2, 5 ; 3, 6 ; and 12, 15 . Of these, the
pair which gives results differing by i when
divided into 60 is 12, 15. Hence there were
12 trains an hour, which is a train every
5 minutes. The passenger waited 4 minutes.
28. If there are more words than 12 in a
telegram, the cost is d. a word , so that if
one contained three times as many words
as the other it would cost three times as
much . It is clear, then, that the first tele
gram did not have more than 12 words.
Therefore it cost 6d. The second must
have cost is. , and would contain 24 words.
Thus the telegram of the day before had
8 words.
29. Fred and Albert crossed the ferry
first, and Fred brought back the boat. Then
the father crossed alone, and Albert returned
The boys again crossed
 THE MEN ON THE ENGINE BY NIGHT

f
2

S
st
5
ad

Ty
•

en

ed
ed
11
ort As we sit in our carriage, looking out of the window or reading our book , a railway train is almost as comfortable as home
od for us. But the men on the engine cannot sit at ease . They must be alert and watchful; they must keep up the heat of the
fire and the speed of the train ; they must see that the line is clear, that everything is working properly . They must not
lose control of the engine for a single moment, and the strain of driving it is something that only a strong man can stand.
II 457
 MAKES
WHAT
THE
ENG
GO INE
?
Ifthe
outside
of
engine
an
removed
be
could
the
as
full
at
us
passed
engine
what
,w
steam
see
should
e
pictures
these
us
.show
picture
first
The
shows
us
we
as
engine
;ithe
it
seen
second
the
we the
see
and
boiler
the
in
water
fire
in
the
furnace
fills
water
The
boiler
the
pipes
the
and
run
througla
,cthe
it
along
heatarrying
the
keeping
and
at
water
pboiling
oint
.-The
heat
smoke
and
pass
through
the
pipes
,the
passing
smoke
chimney
the
of
out
heat
,the
THESE
PICTURES
SHOW
ENGINE
AND
SHOULD
WE
AS
SEE
COVER
THE
IF
IT
OFF
WERE itself
using
turning
up
in
water
the
steam
.into
T he
,ssomewhere
steam
eeking
go
to
dome
the
into
,rises
boiler
of
top
the
at
,and
the
down
furiously
rushes
at pipe
valve
the
,through
end
the
,cylinder
.into
steam
the
follow
you
If
steam
the
this
-pdown
inipe
able
will
,ybe
ou
picture
the
into
way
its
trace
to
drives
it
cylinder
,w here
forward
the
fixed
piston
by
driving
the
arod
.-wtoheel
the
drives
steam
The
great
with
forward
piston
piston
,aforce
the
;-rodsnd
fixed
is
the
great
wheel
,to
goes
wheel
the
.
round
the
see
We
enter
steam
ing
push
and
cylinder
the
the
ing
forward
.piston
happen
will
What
the
when
of
end
the
reaches
piston
cylinder
the
I? f
steam
 1

continue
were
press
to
into
same
in
cylinder
the
,tpiston
way
stop
would
he
wheel
the
and
must
stop
;bclever
avtoo
thing
ut
ery
A
happens
the
pis
.now s
end
the
reaches
ton
,the
first
opening
the
into
closed
is
cylinder
,apipe
used
let
to
opens
steam
-up
cylinder
the
of
out
into
another
,and
chimney
the
cylinder
is
the
into
opening
made
allow
to
end
the
at
there
in
pour
to
steam
the
.
back
piston
the
drive
and
the
of
end
each
At
cylinder
wdoor
,is hich
alittle
first
T
. he
shuts
and
opens
steam
the
admits
door
to
forward
piston
the
drive
;it
itself
the
,and
shuts
then
door
at
back
opens
,the
to
steam
the
admitting
HOW
SHOW
PICTURES
TWO
THESE
PISTON
STEAM
THE
DRIVES
AND
WHEEL .
back
piston
the
drive
the
show
pictures
The
shuts
and
opens
which
rod
;tshow
doors
these
hey
the
reaches
smoke
how
,
pipes
the
through
chimney
,when
how
and
is
there
much
steam
escapes
,itoo
t
through
steam
extra
an
the
through
passing
pipe
.But
chimney
is
it
not
whole
the
show
possible
to
en
an
of
machinery
the
gdeal
is
, reat
gine
a nd
the
see
us
help
to
out
left
-how
thing
main
steam
the
its
does
it
how
and
made
is
work
picture
.The
page
on
vast
a
what
us
shows
470
number
of
engine
an
parts
how
,and
has
things
many
when
attend
to
are
there
wheels
the
round
going
.are
HOW
AND
FIRE
TURN
WATER
G.EMORREL WHEELS
THE
F
TLIES
FURNACE
BLAZING
,PAST
TOWN
SLEEPING
HROUGH
TRAIN
THE

GEMORREL
countryside
goes
train
On
which
tquiet
night
hour
late
this
at
furnaces
,aetowns
.T hrough
ven
asleep
all
never
re
he
-wgreat
iron
the
oforking
fierce
throw
sight
,towns
sky
across
awglare
is
it
come
train
watch
stand
light
into
darkness
the
of
out
again
in
disappear
and
.to onderful
nd
 The Child's Book of
FAMILIAR THINGS
WHATTHESE PICTURES SHOW US
E read about the men who made the railways in another part of our book.
WE In these pages we see the pictures of аa railway train, and we can imagine
ourselves on a railway ride through England. We see the train leave the station
in the dark hours of the night. We see the brave men in charge of the train,
whose business it is to take us safely on our journey, and to time the speed so well
that, even though we travel many hundred miles, the train shall not be late. We
see how many men must be watchful at their posts if our train is to carry us safely .

THE GREAT WONDER OF A TRAIN

Youstoodmust have
some day
COXIIVED FROM PAGI 304 signal - boxes must
attend to the signals.
in a country lane , The plate-layersmust
perhaps in a quiet place far from see that the line is safe. The
any town , and watched a train man at the level crossing must
rush past. There is really nothing see that the gates are open. The
in the world more thrilling to see man at the points where the lines
than that, especially if it is dark, join must see that the points are in the
and the train fies past in a flood of right position. The man who makes
light , like a giant who possesses the the time- tables must see that two
earth . That train started from a trains are not at the same place at the
great town ; it flies through towns same time . The men in the station
and villages, past fiery furnaces and must be ready for the train when it
smoky factories, through quiet fields stops. Somebody must see that the
where cattle are grazing and birds tunnels are free, that the bridges are
are singing, on into another busy safe , that there is water for the engine
town that lies ahead . when it is wanted. Every bit of every
This wonder of the world, the rail. railway must be examined every day.
way train, is one of the greatest And so hundreds of thousands of
triumphs of man . It began with a men are kept busy all day long,
kettle steaming on the lob -- with a watchful every moment , listening,
man who started thinking for himself thinking, writing, telephoning, run
about the steam . and wondering what ning, shouting, working at a hundred
could be done with it . That thinking things, in order that we may ride
man has changed the world for you comfortably in the train .
and me , and when we go to the sea- A hundred years ago there was not
side for our holiday, or come to Lon- a single train in England, and there
don to see the shops, or go from are still many old people who have
town to town to see our friends, we never been in a train . There are some
owe our pleasure very largely to a man people who have never seen a train .
who sat by the fire a hundred years The railway is yet young , but it
ago watching a kettle steam . has grown quickly because it is the
Perhaps you have not thought, first thing that men need when a
when quietly sitting in a railway country begins to grow . Thousands
SD

carriage, that you can be safe and
happy at such a time only because
thousands of men are wide awake and
looking after you. It is not enough for power which drives them is the same
the driver to be always looking out ;
it is not enough for the fireman to
keep the fires burning . If nobody did
anything else than that, we should
never get anywhere at all,and no rail-
way would be safe . The men in the
QAN
of trains are always running, carrying
thousands of people to and fro, and it
is a wonderful thing to think that the
power that makes a violet grow. If
there were no sun there would be no
trains, because there would be no fuel ;
and if there were no ſuel there would
be no steam to drive the giant
engines on their way.

Dod
451
THE TRAIN LEAVES LONDON BY NIGHT

This is the picture of a train starting at midnight on a long journey of hundreds of miles. Many trains leave
London at this late nour so tnat passengers can arrive in Scotland in time for breakfast, sleeping on the way.

This picture gives us another glimpse of the men on the engine. That on the left shows the firemen putting
coal on the fire, and we see hiin here as we should see him if we were watching the train pass in the darkness.
On tlie right the driver is seen looking out, as he must continually do , to see that the way is clear.

MIGHT TIME ON ІНЕ RAILWAY : THE GREAT NETWORK OF LINES AT A JUNCTION

FOXTurTTUU
462
UNDER THE HILLS AND BETWEEN THE HILLS

It is not easy to lay a railway. It would be much easier if the earth were smooth and level like a table. But the
train must go through tunnels under the earth , through cuttings in the earth , and across great bridges. It must
have thrilled us all sometimes to have seen a train run into a hole in the earth , which is exactly what it
does when it enters a tunnel. This picture shows the train coming out of the tunnel into the light again .

Sometimes an open way is cut through great hills instead of a tunnel, and in this picture we see how the
train passes between cliffs rising to a great height on both sides. Here the earth has been cut away
for the lines to be laid, and hundreds of miles of railway in England lie in deep cuttings such as this.
403
 OVER THE WATER AND ACROSS THE VALLEY

TAL

How is a train to cross a river ? That question troubled the railway builders once , but it troubles them no
longer now . This bridge across the River Tay , in Scotland , shows us how the railway stretches across
the river . Over water on bridges , and under water in tunnels , our trains go , as safely as on the land.

Bridges must be thrown across velleys as well as across rivers . It would not do for a train to come suddenly
down a steep hill, so , to keep the railway level , huge viaducts, or bridges over land, must be built . This
picture shows us a wonderful curved bridge in one of the loveliest parts of England , and shows us not only
a remarkable piece of railway , but a beautiful stretch of country as it is to be seen from a railway carriage.

1
464
17
THE TRAIN'S FIGHT WITH : THE WEATHER

This shows us a train snowed up. In very bad winters, when snow lies deep upon the ground, the railway
lines must be cleared before the trains can pass, and thousands of men are kept busy clearing the snow away.
Sometimes snow falls as fast as it is swept away, and in such times two or three engines must be put on one
train ; though even then the great depth of snow often defies the power of steam, and the train is blocked.

Water, like snow , may bury the railway, though great floods, like great snowstorms, are, fortunately, rare
in our land. But scenes like this take place sometimes, when the engine must fight its way through
the floods, travelling along lines which the driver cannot see. In many parts of the world these things
happen often . In our own country they happen only very rarely. But in Scotland, a few years ago,
a train full of people was snowed up and kept through a long winter's night in the lonely countryside.
TUTU DUTE TRITOLUOTOILUTUOLIT MONTUOTIINTITY
465
IK
 OUTRAS

HOW THE ENGINE DRIVER FINDS HIS WAY

How does the driver find his way ? How is it that trains do not meet and crash into each other ? These pictures
help us to understand. There are up lines and down lines. On the up lines trains go up to London ; on the down
lines trains go down from London . Only in places where there is little traffic are trains allowed to go both ways on ,
a single line. And all along the lines are the signal-boxes, wheremen set the signals which the driver follows.

When a signal is down the driver can go ; when it is up he must stop. The signalman in one box can telegraph
to the man in the next box, so that each signalman krows whether the line is clear. He cannot, ofcourse, speak to
the engine- driver as the train passes the box, but he sets the signal for the driver to see, which serves the same
purpose . At night the signals are set by lights ofdifferent colours. The top picture shows one of thebiggest signal
boxes in the world, at Waterloo Station, London. The bottom picture shows the inside of another enormous box .
MODO DITUZTE mrt22.11n arumanam வானைாைகசைனை
466
 Z DUEL

AT HOME IN THE TRAIN BY NIGHT AND DAY

mm

We can live almost as comfortably on a train as at home, and it is one ofthe great wonders of men's power that
they have made it possible to live while we are travelling a mile a minute in much the same way as if we were
standing still. Nothing could be finer than the fine trains of the Great Northern and Great Central Railways
shown in these pictures, with the kitchens in which the cook prepares our meals, aa saloon like a drawing -room , a
bed to sleep in,electric light to read by, hot water to wash in, a corridor to walk in. With a book or a paper,
or even without a book or a paper if we are wise enough to use our eyes, no longjourney by train need ever be dall.
20. OYO
467 mm TODO
at

A TRAIN AT FULL SPEED - TAKES IN WATER

Engines, like boys and girls, must be fed. In England enough coal can usually be taken on the engine. But
as the water turns to steam and is used up, more water must be taken in , and clever men have made it possible
for trains to take in water without stopping. This picture shows a long pool of water between the lines.
When the traio reaches this the driver lets down a curious little scoop, which draws up the water into a tank .
USD

ENOWAR
At last the train arrives. It has come out of darkness into light, through tunnels and cuttings, across rivers
and valleys, along hundreds of miles of shining rails of steel. It has come through scores of villages and
towns, past hundreds of signals. Yet it reaches its journey's end at the very minute fixed months before by some
men sitting round a table. It is one of the finest examples in the world of what men can do when they work togetfor.
168
 DELICETLOGO CUOTER

THE IRON GIANT THAT CARRIES US ABOUT

292 C

ONE OF THE POWERFUL ENGINES OF THE GREAT NORTHERN RAILWAY WEIGHING 100 TONS
ICTED
an

OILING THE ENGINE WHILE STANDING STILL AND WHILE GOING AT A MILE A MINUTE
MOTOCULTOUUUU

N : 1298

The railway engine is one of the best-made things in the world. The coming loose of a screw or of a bolt might
wreck the train. In the South Kensington Museum is a curious little engine — the first railway engine ever made
- George Stephenson's Rocket. There is a model of it at Euston Station, London, and a picture on another page
of this book. ( See index .) As we look at this we realise the enormous change that has taken place since it was
made. The Rocket weighed only 41 tons, but the engines seen in these tures weigh over 100 tons. An engin
takes hupdreds of men many months to make, and thousands of buckets of water are needed to fill the boiler.
Torunuz TOULUTTENDE TUTTE TUTTI TUTTE TEOLITOTUOTTEET
469
 THE GREAT MARVEL OF A STEAM-ENGINE

TA

pe
வயலாகூணைபM

In front and on each side of the engine -driver, as he stands at his post of duty, is a wonderful array of handles
and levers, screws and taps. Each of these has a purpose, and by using them at the proper time the driver is
able to start or to stop the train, to go faster or more slowly , to put on the brake, to let off steam, to put more
water into the boiler, to blow the whistle, to go backwards or forwards. It is possible that before long the
driver of an engine may be able to telephone from his engine to the signal-box. A thorough knowledge of the
engine and a long experience in working it are necessary before a driver can be entrusted with such a serious post.
Some of the photographs in these pages are by H. G. Archer, Photochrome Co., Reginald Haines, A. G. Pethrick, and T. Urquhart.
Dominion It mon mnOXY
470
 The Child's Book of
BIBLE STORIES

WHAT THIS STORY TELLS US

FTER the Flood, the Bible tells us, men grew foolish and idolatrous, and
A began to sin against God, so that the human race was in peril of becoming
almost like animals. In order to make a greater and a stronger people, God
chose a man named Abraham to be the father of a mighty race , and the
Bible story tells us how Abraham was guided by God to his great destiny.
We read here how faithfully Abraham served God, even when the right way
seemed cruel and hard ; we read the sad story of Hagar and Ishmael,
who went out into the wilderness ; and we learn the great lesson of the
calm peace that comes from trust in God. We call this story by the proud
name which has been given to the faithful Abraham - The Friend of God.

ABRAHAM , THE FRIEND OF GOD

In histor
theearly days of
CONTINUED FROM PAGE 362
y a proces
sion of men and
camels was seen crossing the
vast Syrian desert from the direc
tion of Mesopotamia. Among
the men was a tall and noble
chieftain , named Abraham , whose eyes
often gazed across the terrible desert ,
as though in quest of some end to
his journey. By his side went a
younger man, his nephew , named Lot.
It was a sad journey they were
making, and only the iron will of
Abraham kept the others to their
duty. For this cavalcade was moving
away from their homes , from their
friends, from people who spoke their
own language, and whose customs
were the same as their own ; and
they were journeying to discover a
new country, where everything would
be strange to them , and where, per
haps, they might encounter enemies
and treachery, and meet with slavery
and death .
We can understand how Abraham's
wife , the beautiful Sarah, listened on
her camel's back to the murmurs of
left behind , the young
Lot would, we can
imagine, look towards
his uncle, and feel rebellious
in his heart .
But no one dared to withstand
this splendid king of men. He
had seen a vision. God had spoken to
him in a dream . He was following
his dream . How the men and women
must have looked across the dark of
the encampment towards this old ,
stern man , with the firelight on his
rugged face and sweeping beard of
snow — this old man who declared
that the God of heaven had spoken
to him—this old man who was follow
ing his dream across the desert !
These were the words Abraham
declared God had addressed to him :
“ Get thee out of thy country, and from
thy kindred, and from thy father's house,
unto a land that I will shew thee . And I
will make of thee a great nation, and I will
bless thee, and make thy name great, and
thou shalt be a blessing. And I will bless
them that bless thee, and curse him that
curseth thee ; and in thee shall all families
of the earth be blessed.”
9

her women , and sometimes shared

their terrors, and sometimes even
questioned the wisdom of her husband.
When , at each day's end , the tents
were erected and the camels knelt
down to rest in the sand , when
darkness fell across the great round
circle of the desert , and under the
shining stars men and women sat
silently round the fires thinking of
the comfortable homes they
It was this command, this magni
ficent promise, which kept Abraham
upon his way. The end of the long
journey came at last, and Abraham
found himself in Palestine, a lovely
and a fertile country, beautiful to the
eye and comfortable to the heart.
Glad and grateful were the hearts of
his company as they gazed upon this
had gracious country.

E
471
 CATEICOTIE LLUOX4
THE CHILD'S BOOK OF BIBLE STORIES
Here he dwelt , he and all his people ;
and they grew very rich,, and fortune
Smiled upon them. But so rich and
powerful did they become that jealousy
crept in between the shepherds and herd-
men of Abraham and the shepherds and
herdmen of Lot , his nephew .
HOWABRAHAM PARTED FROM LOT, HIS
NEPHEW , AND BEFRIENDED HIM
Then Abraham said to his nephew :
“ Let there be no strife , I pray thee,
between me and thee, and between my herd
men and thy herdmen , for we are brethren .
Is not the whole land before thee ? Separate
thyself, I pray thee, from me. If thou wilt
take the left hand, then I will go to the right ;
or if thou depart to the right hand, then I
will go to the left."
These gracious words were spoken on
a high tableland ; and Lot , turning
from his uncle , looked down to the
beautiful valley south of the Jordan,
stretching far away in richness and
loveliness, and promising great happi
ness and wealth . This was his choice,
and Abrahampartedfrom his nephew spoken inall languages,inall countries;
with love and kindness.
Afterwards, when he heard that his
nephew had been involved in a great
war, and had been carried away a
prisoner, Abraham did not forget him ,
but armed his servants and went in
pursuit of the captors . And Abraham
prevailed against them , and the kings
who rejoiced in his victory would have
given him gifts ; but Abraham refused,
saying that he would take nothing,
from a thread even to a shoelatchet."
He sought nothing but to do his duty
and wait upon the will of God.
So he returned to his pastoral life,
and again God visited him in visions,
with the assurance that his children
should inherit the earth .
ABRAHAM'S WIFE AND HAGAR , THE
LITTLE EGYPTIAN MAID
In the midst of this peaceful and
pleasant existence, Sarah, the wife of
Abraham , had many sad and tragic
thoughts. She was, as we shall see,
a strange mixture of strength and
weakness, kindness and unkindness .
We know that she was exceedingly
beautiful, for a king of Egypt had
greatly desired her for his wife, and we
know that Abraham was devotedly in
love with her. She must have thought,
many times, of God's promise that
472
Abraham's children should inherit the
earth ; and as the days went by, and
no son came , she began at last to fear
that she was unworthy of Abraham .
In those days men married more than
one wife, and Sarah went one day to
Abraham , and persuaded him to take
for a second wife a little Egyptian maid
in her service , named Hagar .
She said to Abraham , “ Marry my
slave -girl, and perhaps she will give us a
>
son for our home. ” So Abraham did
what his wife said . When poor Hagar
found herself so honoured, she was at
first a little proud, and her pride made
Sarah angry. Sarah drove her out with
angry words, and the poor little slave
girl , who had been so proud and con
ceited , found herself suddenly an outcast
in the wilderness. While she was weeping
there , God sent a messsenger to tell
FINSKE
URE
her that she must return to Sarah .
* Return to thy mistress, and submit
thyself under her hands. ” And the
poor, frightened slave-girl exclaimed
in words that ever since have been
Thou God seest me. " She went
back obediently and submitted herself
to the harshness of Sarah .
THREE MYSTERIOUS STRANGERS WHO
THEAPPEARED TO ABRAHAM
One day, as Abraham sat in the door
of his tent , when the sun was at its
highest,, and the land lay dazed in an
Eastern noon , there suddenly appeared
before him three strangers. Abraham
rose, struck by their wondrous appear
ance , and received them with the
highest honour. While he was enter
taining these visitors , one of them fore
told that Sarah should have a son .
We can imagine the joy of the old
father and the old mother. The pre
parations made by the rejoicing parents
for the feast when the child Isaac was
born passed everything they had ever
done in splendour and magnificence.
Sarah was just as excited as Abraham ,
and she laughed often in her joy , and
gave herself up to the glory of the feast .
And Ishmael, Hagar's son, the lad who
hitherto had been everything to Abra
ham , looked on at all this, and laughed
mockingly, so that Sarah , in an out
burst of rage , called to Abraham ,
Cast out this bondwoman and her
son ; for the son of this bondwoman
>
shall not be heir with my son . "
DIDIKTU ITD .
 -ABRAHAM , THE FRIEND OF GOD
Abraham grieved because of his dream, aa thing he should put out of
son Ishmael ; but a Voice comforted his mind and forget all about. But
him , saying, “ Let it not be grievous
in thy sight because of the lad, and
because of thy bondwoman ; in all
that Sarah hath said untothee,hearken THETERRIBLE TRIAL THAT CAME TO
unto her voice ; for in Isaac shall thy
seed be called . And also of the son of
the bondwoman will I make a nation ,
because he is thy seed .”
Abraham listened to this Voice in his
soul , and he trusted it . He brought
himself to the great agony of parting
with his son , the gay and spirited place appointed by God for the sacrifice.
young Ishmael.. There is something And Abraham said unto his young men ,
very touching in the brief story of this Abide ye here with the ass , and I and
parting. Abraham rose up " early in
the morning,” evidently before his angry
wife was stirring, and, providing poor
Hagar and his son with food and
water, took a loving farewell of them ,
telling them , we may be sure, of God's
promise, and watching them through
tears in his eyes as they departed .
GREAT
THEISHMAEL GRIEF OF HAGAR AND
IN THE WILDERNESS
Alas ! for poor Hagar. She set out
very sorrowfully, making no protest,
but quietly submitting to her hard fate .
And when her food and water came to
an end , and they could go no further,
she laid her son down and went a good
way off from him , saying, “ Let me not
see the death of the child.” And she wept.
And God heard the voice of the lad ; and
the angel of God called to Hagar outof
heaven, and said unto her, What aileth thee,
Hagar ? Fear not, for God hath heard the
voice of the lad where he is .
Arise, lift up the lad, and hold him in thine
hand ; for I will make him a great nation.
And God opened her eyes, and she saw a
well of water ; and she went and filled the
bottle with water, and gave the lad drink.
And God was with the lad ; and he grew ,
and dwelt in the wilderness, and became an
archer.
And he dwelt in the wilderness of Paran ;
and his mother took him a wife out of the
land of Egypt.
But another and a greater sacrifice lay
before Abraham . A vision came to
him , and the Voice to which he had
always listened obediently seemed to
tell him to take his son Isaac and offer
him as a burnt offering on the mountains.
What a frightful command ! And how
Abraham must have shrunk from it !
We can imagine how he tried to per-
suade himself that it was not God who
had spoken to him , that it was only a
473
IL
Abraham's glory was this — he trusted in
God, and he felt the Voice to be from
God .
So he rose up early in the morning,
and saddled an ass, and split wood for
the fire, and took with him Isaac and
two young men, and started out upon
his journey of death . At the end of
three days in the mountains he saw the
the lad will go yonder and worship, and
>
come again to you .” Then Isaac said
suddenly, " My father! Behold the
fire and the wood ; but where is the
lamb for a burnt offering ? ” And
Abraham , in great trouble, answered ,
66
My son, God will provide Himself a
lamb for a burnt offering ."
Then Abraham made an altar, laid
the wood upon it , and took Isaac into
his arms , and laid him for a lamb upon
the altar. But just as he was about to
slay this beautiful victim, a Voice
sounded to him from heaven. He looked
up from the angry mountains to the
rolling clouds of dawn , and the Voice
said , “ Lay not thine hand upon the
lad, neither do thou anything unto him :
for now I know that thou fearest God ,
seeing thou hast not withheld thy son,
thine only son, from Me."
This was the last trial of Abraham's
splendid and almost terrible faith. He
did not know, as we know now, that
God is a loving Father. He thought
of God simply as great and powerful.
CALM END
THEABRAHAM'SAND
LIFE
BEAUTIFUL OF
The rest of Abraham's life was calm
and beautiful. He lived to see his son
Isaac married to one of his kindred, the
beautiful Rebekah ; and when he died
he was laid by the side of his beloved
wife, in the cave of Machpelah .
He did not know at the end of his
life how the nations of the earth were
to be blessed through Isaac ; but it is
quite certain that he was not curious
about this, and contented himself with
the knowledge that God would fulfil His
promises. How those promises were
wonderfully fulfilled we shall see.
next Bil Stories are on page 629.
N
 TODGE

HOW THE WATERS CARVE THE EARTH

This picture of the great Yellowstone Park in America shows how water carves great valleys out of the earth.
Water is always moving. It has been moving ever since the earth became cool enough to have liquid water
upon it at all, and in its endless round it has been ceaselessly making and remaking the face of the earth .
Water has dissolved and washed away all the land that once filled up the great valleys in this picture.

ACCUEILDXILOTUTXUX

This arch of rock shows how water wears away the earth . When the tide is high and the waves bea :
fast, the water melts the rock as hot tea melts sugar, though much more slowly. Some day the sea may wear
away the rock completely, and this beautiful picture of the sea through a natural arch will no longer be seen .
TomTom
474

1
 The Child's Story of
-THE EARTH

WHAT THIS STORY TELLS US

WEcomeinthesepages to the actualshaping of the earth.We haveseen how

a fiery cloud became the great earth -ball on which we live. But the earth is
not even and smooth like a ball. There are great hollows in it filled by the seas,
and great mountains rising into the clouds. What made these ocean beds ? How
were the mountains formed ? It was thought at one time that the earth had been
shaped by great storms and explosions, and shocks of many kinds ; but we
k ow now that the mountains and valleys and ocean beds, the precipices and
gorges and caves, have all been made by slow influences working from the
beginning and working now. We read here how the shape of the earth
is always changing, and how the sea and the land are always changing places.

THE SHAPING OF THE EARTH

FTER the making stranded high and
AF of the moon ,
CONTINUED FROM PAGE 397
dry, which were

the cooling of the once fourishing

earth would still continue , as
indee 1 it is continuing at this
very moment. At last there
would be formed what men call
the crust of the earth ; and since
this would really be hard and dry, it
might quite properly be called a crust.
This goes right round the earth, and
we must not imagine that it has
breaks in it where the oceans are .
Doubtless it is thinner there just in
propɔrtion as the oceans are deep,
but the crust of the earth still forms
ports beside the sea .
Now, though the subject is
rather difficult, we must inquire
at least a little into the various
kinds of forces that have been
moulding and changing the surface of
the earth from age to age ; and , first of
all, let us get into our heads and keep
there a fact which men long denied .
This fact is simply that the history
of the crust of the earth, though it
has been a history of constant Oo
change , has been , on the whole , a 00

the bed of the ocean ; and so all the peaceful history. It used to be do
oo

10800
lands are really one under the sea. thought that the history of the
O

DO
Now, the crust of the earth is not
even and smooth . You might
O imagine that if the earth , covered
with melted rock, gradually and
evenly cooled , the surface might be
quite smooth and regular. But you
must remember that whilst
cooling is going on there are many
other things at work which
carving, the face of the earth .
one age the most important in-
strument of this carving might be
the flowing of water, and in another
it might be the action of heat . But
in any case , the face of the earth is
not a constant thing, but has always
been changing, and is even now
changing from hour to hour. Even
within the memory of living man , the
sea has broken down and destroyed
a great deal of the east coast of
England , and there are places near
the south coast of England , now
earth had been made by a number
of great disasters , each of them
making a new state of things which
stayed unchanged until a fresh dis
aster occurred . Now, very possibly ,
there have been some big disasters
this in the earth's history . It was some
very great force, perhaps , that threw
are up the Himalaya mountains .
In Even nowadays, when the earth
is getting cool , there remain some
active volcanoes , and small earth
quakes are quite common . But,
nevertheless, we may be sure that
sudden and great disasters like these
have not played a very great part
in the earth's history. Change has
been slowly butalways going .
on . The
poet tells us that Constant drop
ping weareth away a stone ” ; and
that is the kind of force which has
for so many ages been carving the
face of the earth . Not a great

475
 -THE CHILD'S STURY OF THE EARTH
disaster one day, and then no change Now, just as the surface of the earth
for a thousand years, but constant will sink in one place , so it may become
dropping every day and all day. This pushed up in another. One of the ways
idea of the quiet but never ceasing in which this may happen is by the fold
way in which the history of the ing. Therefore, just as what was once
earth's crust has been worked is one dry land may become the bottom of the
of the most important ideas that sea, so also the very bottom of the sea
we must have on this subject. may be gradually raised up until the
It is true , not only of this subject , water runs away from it , and it becomes
but of Nature's story generally. The dry land. All England has been at the
old Romans knew this when they said : bottom of the sea, not once , but many
" Nature does nothing by jumps.”
jumps. times. It is hard -is it not ? -to think
Her way is slow and sure; though that more than half of Europe and
she rarely does anything startling, yet America were once covered with ice ;
she never takes a rest . And that is to believe that Broadway and the
the way to succeed. crowded Strand , Himalayan and Cor
Well, then, amongst the forces which dilleran summits even , were once the
have moulded the crust of the earth we floor of the ocean . In his greatest poem
must count, first of all , the force of Tennyson has expressed these facts, and
gravitation itself, for remember that done so in such simple and clear lan
HOW THE SEA IS WASHING AWAY THE SHORES OF ENGLAND guage that we may
quote his words :
There rolls the deep ,
where grew the tree.
O earth w
, hat changes
பாபா

thou hast seen !

படர

There, where the long

street roars , has been
The stillness of the
central sea.
The hills are shadows,
and they flow
From form to form ,
and nothing stands ;
They melt like mists,
the solid lands ,
Like clouds they shape
themselves and go.
The coast of England is being slowly worn away by the sea . In many places Another of the
houses have been swallowed up. Here we see the breaking away of the coastgreat forces that
at Holderness, where the sea- front looked like this one day after a gale. have made the sur
all the while this earth is shrinking , face of the earth whit it is to-day
shrinking , shrinking. As the interior has been heat , or fire. We are quite
shrinks , you will understand that the sure even now that the inside of the
outside will become too big for it , and 9 earth is very hot. If we dig into the
will not be sufficiently supported under- ground we find that it becomes hotter
neath. So a great many things would and hotter as we go down, and every
be apt to happen. time that a volcano spouts out liquid
For instance, quite a large part of lava it reminds us of the terrible heat
the earth's surface may begin to that is beneath us. We live , then , on
collapse, subside , or sink. Then , of a crust that spans a glowing lake of
course , if it goes on doing this long fire, and on a crust that is very thin.
enough , the water will rush in upon it, If we paste a sheet of paper over
and what was once dry land may become the surface of a good-sized melon , we
the bottom of the sea. Then , again , as should have the relative proportions.
the surface of the earth shrinks , and finds Men who study the rocks are able,
itself not sufficiently supported from without much difficulty, to tell which
below , it may shrivel — that is to say , kinds of rocks have been formed under
it may become folded. And do you the influence of heat or fire. The Latin
not see that one of these folds might werd for fire is ignis , and so these rocks
make a long range of mountains ? which are amongst the deepest layers
476
STRANGE PILLARS OF ROCK AND ICICLES OF STONE

These cliffs in the Isle of Staffa , off the coast of Scotland, are made of wonderful pillars of black
rock called basalt, formed long ages ago by the action of fire. There are many thousands of them .

In some parts of England are caves with wonderful things like icicles hanging from the roof, and other things
made of the same stuff rising from the floor. Those shown here are in a cave at Cheddar. They have been made
by water trickling through the rocks. As it trickled through, the water dissolved the rock as tea dissolves sugar,
and on reaching the air again the " rock " in the water became soparated and formed the curious things we see.
477
 THE CHILD'S STORY OF THE EARTH
of the earth's crust that we know are exposed you will find that after a
called igneous rocks. This word quite time it has all gone, and if you put it
well contrasts them with those parts in full sunlight it will go very much
of the earth's crust which have been more quickly. Now, if it is sea -water
formed under the influence of water. that you have put into the saucer ,
The Latin word for water is aqua , and you will find that the salt is left behind,
so we call these parts of the earth's and makes a little crust which the sun
crust aqueous. cannot draw into the air .
The action of water , then , is one of
the great forces that have made and
HOW THE
TOUTCLOUDS
OFTHE ARE
SEA DRAWN
are still making the surface of the earth. Well, the water is drawn up into the
In our own days it is by far the most air by the sun in this fashion , and
important. In the first place, remember there , if there is a great deal of it ,
what happens to a lump of sugar if you perhaps it will form clouds. Since
put it into a glass of water. The sugar the air is always more or less in motion ,
is melted, or dissolved , and this happens these clouds will be moved by the
all the more quickly if you stir the water. wind in one direction or another , and
Now, water is always moving, and very often , of course, they will be
what with its power of dissolving moved so as to lie over the dry land.
things, and what with the help this Enormous quantities of water from
power gets from the movement of the the Atlantic Ocean are thus carried
water, you may guess that every eastwards in the air until they reach
river, for instance, helps to change the Ireland and the west coast of England
surface of the earth . Then , also , of and Scotland. Now , those are very
course, water can carry solid things rainy places, you may know ; and the
along with it as it moves, even without reason is that when the water in the
dissolving them , and then perhaps, when
3 air has been carried so far, it is very
the water comes to some place where often cooled , so that it forms drops
it moves more slowly, this solid stuff which the air cannot hold up . These
that has been whirled along may drop drops then fall upon us, and, of
and become heaped up at the bottom . course, we call them rain . Now, rain .
OVING WATER IS ALWAYS REMAKING water is fresh water, and yet it was
Mº THE SURFACE OF THE EARTH once sea-water, you understand.
That is another way in which water When the rain-water falls upon the
has changed and is changing the earth, it does so, you know , for the
surface of the earth . Indeed, we same reason as the ball that falls from
cannot better now than to
do your hand ; but even when it has
describe the way in which water reached the ground it must still go
moves about on the earth . It has on obeying the law of gravitation.
been doing this ever since the time It must run to as low a level upon the
when the earth first became cool earth as it can .It is simply because
enough to have liquid water upon it of the law of gravitation that water
at all ; and in the course of this cease- always tries to find its own level,"
less round that water runs it has been as we say. So the rain makes little
endlessly making and remaking the streams , and these join and make
face of the earth . Let us begin with rivers which run into the sea . “ Even
the water of the sea. This , as you the weariest river," says a poet ,
know , is very salt water, which simply " winds somewhere safe to sea .”
meansthat it has a lot. of salt-tasting THE REASON WHYTHE
FULL SEA IS
Perhaps you will want to know where Long ago this was noticed by the
that comes from . Now, let me see-in writer of the Book of Ecclesiastes . He
a minute - whether I can tell you . The said : “ All the rivers run into the
sun has the power of sucking up into the sea, yet the sea is not full ; unto the
air a great deal of water from the sea . place from whence the rivers come,
What it sucks up , however, is only the thither they return again ..” He was
water and not the salt stuff which has quite right . The reason why the sea
been melted in it. If you pour a is never filled , though all the rivers
little wąter into a saucer and leave it run into it, is that the sun is
478
 -THE SHAPING OF THE EARTH
constantly drawing water out of the since then they have been becoming
sea , so that there is a continual circu- more and more salt .
lation, or going round and round, of Men who study these subjects have
the water of the earth . used the saltness of the sea as a means
We said that we should soon find of helping them to find out how old
out where the salt of the sea comes the earth is. They can measure the
from . The answer is that it comes amount of salt which rivers carry down
from the rivers. As the water flows to the sea , and they can make a pretty
over the land to the sea it good guess of the amount
carries down with it a of salt that is in the sea ;
great deal of solid matter and so from these pieces
which it is apt to drop of information they can
at one place or another find out for how many
where the current becomes years, probably, the rivers
slower . Much more im have been flowing. It is
portant , however, is the interesting that the guesses
fact that as it goes it also as to the age of the eartli's
dissolves, or melts , all the crust which have been
kinds of solid matter that made by this means do not
can be dissolved or melted differ very greatly from the
This shows a shrunken
apple.
that it finds on its way. The earth shrank in the same guesses which have been
If this goes on for some way when it wascooling down; made in quite other ways.
Water is also to be
time the river will be able and so the great hills and valleys
to eat a great gorge in the and ocean depths were formed. reckoned with as the
land , and these gorges may be seen in maker of a very large number of
all parts of the world . the rocks and other kinds of uff
But now you will see that though which we find on the crust of the
there is a going round and round of the earth. Many of these have been made
water, there is no going round and merely by the movement of the water.
round, or circulation , of the salts that You readily understand, for instance,that
the water dissolves, nor of the solid the sea and the tides make sand , and ,
matter which it carries down with it . of course , if this sand be pressed together
These are not sucked up again by and held together, we shall have sand
THREE VIEWS OF THE EARTH , SHOWING HOW THE GREAT MOUNTAIN RANGES WERE FORMED

BOC
In the days when the hard crust of the earth was forming, before it had cooled down, the mountains were not
yet made. These came when the earth began to shrink, like the apple at the top of this page, crumpling up
and forcing up parts very high, as shown by these black lines, which mark the world's great mountain chains.
the sun. The consequence is that stone . You know what shingle is , too ;
from age to age all the rivers on the and shingle, like sand , has been made,
earth are washing part of the land and is constantly being made, by the
into the sea , and, indeed , the sea is action of water. Ordinary clay and
yearly becoming more and more salt. gravel , too, have been made in this
When the seas were first made by way. Then there are a great many
the falling of the water from the sky kirds of rock -- suc as chalk , which we
into the deeper parts of the earth , they see at Dover - that are really made
must have been quite fresh, and ever from the remains of living creatures
479
WHAT THE FACE OF THE EARTH IS . LIKE
The earth is not a smooth , plain place. It is made up of hills and valleys and mountains, and of deep places
so big that a mountain could be lost in them. There are mountains covering hundreds ofmiles; there are great
deserts of sand where no people live ; and great parts of the world are all ice and snow, where nothing ever grows.

This is a stream , or a small river, Aowing in a valley This is a valiey, a strip of ievei land iying among hilis.
between high hills covered with a forest of trees. People living in valleys are protected from the wind .

This is a volcano, a mountain with a hole in it, This is a precipice, the sharp side of a high rock , verv
out of which fire comes from deep down in the earth. high and steep , made like this by the wind and rain .

This is a desert, a great stretch ofsand for hundreds of This is a forest, a place thickly covered with trees. Many
miles, across which patient camels carry their burdens. forests are so big that men can travel in them fot weeks.
480
 HOW THE WATERS CREEP OVER THE EARTH
Nearly three-quarters of the earth is water. If you take a ball and cover three -quarters of it in a basin of
water, the dry part will represent the dry land of the earth . Water covers all the rest. The
water and land are slowly changing places, so slowly that we can hardly tell they are changing at all.

The Alps,great mountains covered with snow, are so Rivers of ice, called glaciers,moving only a few inches
high that a man must climb very far to reach the top. in a year. are made by snow slipping down the Alps.
I

This is a lake, like a basin of water among the hills. There are lakes
so big that a ship in the midd!e of them cannot be seen from the banks.

Rain falling on the hills always finds

its way back to the sea , and where the This is a river, a long channel of water on its way to the sea. All
land is high we often find waterfalls. rivers run into the sea, and some of them run for thousands of miles.

The sea goes on moving for ever and ever. The rain that comesdown from the sky is water that rises up
from the sea, and when it falls as rain it trickles into the rivers and is carried back to the sea again. Thou
ainm

sands of ships are always on the sea, which has more life in it than the earth itself, and is thousands of miles across .
The photographs in these pages were taken by Frith & Co , Photochrome Co., Keystone View Co., Valentine, and Underwood & Underwood,
481
 -THE CHILD'S STORY OF THE EARTH
that existed long ago. Chalk cliffs granite because it is not made of
consist of the chalky part of the bodies crystals, and I mention it because per
of millions of these tiny creatures all haps you use it in order to take ink
pressed together. fingers.
stains off your It is called
Water has played a great part in pumice-stone. The next time that you
making rocks of this kind. Besides these use a piece of this try to remember that
and a host of others, there are the kinds it was made by the action of tremendous
of rocks which water has made in other heat, ages and ages ago , long before
ways-neither by the action of its there were any living creatures upon the
movement nor by acting upon the re- earth at all .
mains of living creatures. In many parts THETWO ABOUT
of the world there are caves which have EARTH THAT WE
AREATESTE FACT
wonderful things rather like icicles hang- Now, this earth of ours is so very im
ing from the roof, and also other things portant that we must learn the main
made of the same kind of stuff, rising facts about it . The main facts , indeed ,
up from the floor to meet them. These we have already learnt, though they
have very long names, which do not were utterly unknown to the wisest men
matter to us just now . They also, like of not so many ages ago. It is a more or
many others, have been made by water less round ball, with a cold crust and a
in a rather different way. The water has hot interior, and it moves round the
first of all melted , or dissolved , the stuff sun . Those, of course, are the two
of which these things are made , and greatest facts about the earth, though
then, when the water has been gradually anyone who had said such things 2,000
exposed , drop by drop, to the air, a years ago would have been thought
change has taken place in the stuff quite mad, and only 300 years ago
inside it , so that the water has no longer one of the greatest men that ever lived
been able to keep it dissolved: was put in prison for saying so, and
THE MAKING OF THE WONDERFUL another was burnt alive in Rome on a
STONE ICICLES IN THE CAVES
spot where men have now put a statue
So it is easy to understand how one of him .
of these long -pointed things that hang First, then, as to the shape of the
from the roof of a cave has been made. earth . It is not perfectly round, but a
Perhaps there has been a little crack in little bit flattened at the North Pole
the roof of the cave, and some water and the South Pole, whilst it bulges a
has oozed through drop by drop. little bit all round its middle. The line
Each drop as it fell left behind it a that divides the earth equally into a
little speck of solid matter, and this has north half an a south half is called the
been added to by those that came after Equator. One of the ways of eating an
it . The same thing has happened at the orange, you know , is to cut it through
spot where the drops fell upon the floor, its equator, and most oranges are
and very often the thing growing from shaped rather like the earth - only they
the roofhas met the thing growing from exaggerate the bulging at the Equator
the floor, and so they have formed a pil- and the flattening at the Poles .
lar, veryt
thick at the top and the bottom , W THE EARTH'S SPINNING MAKES
and very thin in the middle , but gradu HOYIT BULGE IN THE MIDDLE
ally becoming thicker and thicker year We know why the earth bulges at
after year as water, containing the stuff the Equator - it is because it is
from which the pillar has been made, spinning ; and as it spins, the stuff of
trickles down its sides . which it is made tends rather to fly
You would perhaps like to know outwards, just like the drops on aa
of something that has been made by spinning umbrella. That is why the
the action of fire, and I will name to earth bulges at the Equator. But really
you two kinds of rock very different it bulges only very little, for if you went
indeed from chalk or shingle. One of through the earth from side to side,
these is granite - a beautiful igneous starting at some point on the Equator
rock, which is really made up of tiny and coming out at the point opposite
crystals, like the crystals of which it , you would have to go only about
sugar and snow are made . Another twenty-seven miles further than if you
kind of igneous rock is different from went through the earth from the North
482
 -THE SHAPING OF THE EARTH
Pole to the South Pole. The distance winter. Our winter, also , is the summer
you would have to travel would be for the Australians, and when we have
jather less than 8,000 miles ; and that summer they have winter . So the dis
is what is called the diameter of the tance of the earth from the sun has
earth . Diameter is rather a long word, nothing to do with the seasons, and
but all that it means is measure across. they are due, as we have said, entirely
If you went round the earth instead of to the fact that the earth is tilted.
through it , you would have to travel Now, there is another very interesting
nearly 25,000 miles, and that is called fact about the tilting of the earth. It
its circumference. Now, the earth twists is that the earth is not always tilted to
right round itself in a day of twenty- just the same amount , but for thousands
four hours, and so it follows that anyone of years it becomes rather more tilted
standing on the Equator is moving at than it was, and then for thousands of
the rate of about 1,000 miles an hour. years rather less tilted . The earth
If the earth went round very much wobbles rather as it spins, just as a
more quickly than it does—if, for top will wobble if it is prevented from
instance, it twisted right round in one spinning
NORT POLE
upright , and for rather the
hour instead of in H same reason . This
twenty-four –- any.• wobbling of the
one standing at the earth is a very slow
Equator would be affair . Indeed , one
thrown off instantly wobble takes about
like the drop of 20,000 years . Now,
D
RIOLUENS

H
OUG
25,000

water from the if we remember

THR
M

twisted umbrella . that the seasons

If you have a EQUA
TOR 25.000 MILES ROUND
are due to the tilt .
R

globe you must ing of the earth, we

TE

MIL 0
E
3.00

have noticed that

IN

may understand
it is not set squarely how it is that at
in its frame. The one part of the
North Pole is not wobble the earth
at the very top may be so niuch
and the South tilted that the
Pole at the bottom , SOU
winter,for instance,
TH PO
but the globe is LE in its northern half
rather tilted . The will be very long
picture on this page The earth is not a perfect ball, nor is it quite straight as and cold. It is by
through space. It is flattened at the top, which
shows you what I itwespins
call the North Pole, and at the bottom , which we call means of studying
mean . This tilting the South Pole. It bulges out a little all round the this wobbling of the
of the earth as it middle, at what we call the Equator. Instead of spinning earth that we are
goes round the sun Straight earth is slightly
makes the difference between tilted,
summer thiswinting. helped to explain
andand
is very important the times in her
indeed, for it is responsible for the past when, as we know, all the northern
seasons . It means that the northern part of the earth was covered with ice.
half of the earth will get the sun's rays Next we must go on to the way in
pouring very directly down upon it which the earth moves round the sun.
during one part of the year, which we .. It moves not in a circle, but in a sort of
call summer, but not so directly during flattened circle. This is why it is some.
the other part of the year, the winter. times nearer the sun and sometimes
That is why summer is hot and winter farther away. It does not move at
cold. In a little while we shall be talk the same speed always, but moves most
ing about the way in which the earth quickly when it is near the sun . If the
goes round the sun , and we shall find earth moved no quicker when it is
that at some times it is nearer to the nearer the sun than when it is farther
sun than it is at other times . You away, it would be drawn into him ; and
might think that when the earth was if it moved as quickiy when it is
nearer the sun this would make farther away as it does when it is near,
summer; but , as a matter of fact , the it would fly away from him altogether.
earth is nearer to the sun during our The next story of the earth is on page 601.
483
THE GIGANTIC BIRD IN THE VALLEY OF DIAMONDS

IL
n
m

Diver

-C
Lanceld Speed
When Sindbad's ship was returning from the Valley of Diamonds, he was pursued by a gigantic bird called the
roc, whose egg one of the sailors had broken . The bird dropped a huge block of granite, which sank the ship.
Sindbad escaped by swimming to the shore of an island near by, where he met with the Old Man of the Sea.
484
 The Child's Book of
STORIES
BAGDAD , THE CITY WHERE SINDBAD THE SAILOR LIVED
SINDBAD
As Sindbadthe Sailor
was sitting in the CONTINUED FROM PAGE 431
mansion which he had
built in the city of
Bagdad , he heard a poor porter
in the street say :
" Men are not rewarded according
to their merit . I have worked
harder than Sindbad, and yet he lives
in splendour and I live in misery."
Sindbad was moved by the porter's
complaint , and he invited him to come
in and listen to the story of his ad-
ventures .
“ Perhaps when you have learned by
what sufferings I won my wealth ,
said Sindbad, “ you will be more con-
tented with your own lot in life .
“ Look at my white hair and worn
face ! I seem an old man . But how
young and strong I was when I sailed
away to make my fortune by trading
in strange countries ! Soon after we
departed our ship was becalmed near a
little island, and we got out to look at
the place. But what we had taken for
an island was only the green back
of a great whale
As soon as we landed it began to
sway to and fro , and then it plunged
beneath the waves and left us struggling
in the sea. Clinging to a large piece
of wood , I was washed ashore on a
desert island .
“ Here I thought I should have
starved . But on wandering about I
found a clump of fruit-trees , and hidden
among these was a great white ball
about fifty feet in size. After eating
some of the fruit I crept beneath the
great white ball and lay down to sleep.
Just as I was closing my eyes I looked
THE SAILOR
up, and saw that the
sky was darkened by
the wings of a gigantic
bird .
" Good heavens ! ' I exclaimed .
This great white ball is the egg
of that monistrous kind of bird
(
that sailors call a roc . '
And so it was. The roc settled on
the egg under which I was lying, and
one of its claws, which was as big as
the trunk of a tree , stuck in my dress .
“ At daybreak the roc flew up into
the air , and carried me to such a height
that I could not see the earth . Then
it descended with such speed that I
nearly lost my senses. As it alighted I
freed my dress from its claw , and found
myself in a deep valley cut off from
the world by a circle of high , steep
mountains .
“ It was the Valley of Diamonds !
The ground was covered with precious
stones. Full of joy , I began to fill my
pockets with them , but my joy was
soon turned to terror . The valley was
haunted by great serpents, and I
could find no means of escape .
“ I crept into a cave and blocked
up the opening with a large stone , but
all night I was kept awake by the hiss
ing of the serpents. At daybreak they
retired, as they were afraid of the roc
that used then to visit the valley in
search of food. So I stole out of the
cave, and I was then knocked over
by something that came tumbling down
the mountains . It was a great piece of
fresh meat. As it rolled along, the
diamonds on the ground stuck to it.
Looking up , I saw on the mountains a
band of men , who were preparing to
485
 - THE CHILD'S BOOK
roll another piece of meat down into
the valley.
“ I have heard of this means of
getting diamonds,' I said to myself.
It strikes me that it is also a good
means of getting away.'
( 6
“ I then tied myself to the piece of
meat , and hid beneath it, and pre-
sently an eagle swooped down and
seized the meat and carried it to its
nest on the top of the mountains. The
band of men drove the eagle away,
and turned the meat over to pick off
the diamonds that had stuck to it ,
and found me tied to it .
When they had got the diamonds
they needed , we all sailed for home.
But on passing the desert island my
companions landed with an axe and
broke open the great white ball . A
terrible scream rang through the sky.
The roc had seen them ! They rushed
back to the ship, and we quickly sailed person that has escaped from being
away ; but the roc followed us, bearing at last strangled by him. '
in its claws a vast piece of granite.
This it dropped on our ship, and down
we all went into the sea . Holding on
to a fragment of wreckage with one
hand, and swimming with the other, I
managed to reach another island .
" It was a delicious spot ! Sparkling
streams ran between vineyards full
HOW NAPOLEON
He stoodin manoldin veterans,
bowedof his
a little front a grey great cried,So,
they Napoleon, thehemighty
riding-cloak , long boots , and a cocked
hat, with his lips pressed against the
splendid banner of France.
He was bidding farewell to his soldiers.
The great Emperor, the man who had
shaken the earth to its foundations, was
the man who had begun life as a poor
lieutenant, and in a few years had ex-
celled all the conquests of Cæsar , Alex-
ander, and Hannibal , and had seated
himself upon a throne, and placed a
crown upon his head - this man, the
great Napoleon, was beaten at last, and
was now going into exile , hated and
scorned by the human race .
On his way to the coast where the ship
waited to carry him far from France , he
was cursed by the people. They ran
beside his carriage and hurled stones at
him . He had to put off his familiar
clothes and don a disguise to escape
murder. “ Down with the tyrant! "
OF STORIES
of grapes and orchards full of fruit.
There I met a strange old man, who
made signs to me to carry him over
one of the streams . As soon as I hoisted
him on my back, the old man threw
his legs over my neck and squeezed
my throat so that I fainted . - When I
came to, he was still fixed on my
shoulders . There he remained all day and
all night , and when I awoke next morn
ing there he was still . He never got off.
He made me his slave . When, in
order to keep up my strength , I made
some wine out of the grapes, he took
it from me and drank it all up. Happily ,
it was too strong for him, and, releasing
his hold of my neck , he fell to the
ground, and I killed him .
( 6
“ By the shore I met some sailors,
with whom I returned to Bagdad .
" ' That was the Old Man of the Sea, '
they said to me. " You are the first
" Now don't you think,” said Sindbad
to the porter , that I have earned all
the riches that I brought away from
the Valley of Diamonds ? ”
The porter agreed that he had, and
Sindbad then gave him a handsome
present, and he went home more con
tented with his own lot in life .
CAME FROM ELBA
. away —- the
went Emperor
away from France, away to a little
island named Elba , which had been
thrown to him like a scornful toy by the
kings of the earth who had conquered
him at last .
Why had he fallen ? They say his
brilliant mind had become clouded . In
the days of his victory he had been lean
and quick, a little slim , fleshless man
with flashing eyes , who rapped out
words like shots from a gun . This was
before he called himself Emperor. Now
he was heavy, corpulent , slow of move
ment, slow of speech . The mind was
failing. The great brain was giving
way .
But at Elba that great brain flickered
up once more like a spluttering candle,
and the lurid glare of that dying flicker
dazzled the world like a flash of light
ning. It will sound to you like a
fabulous story. You will think that no
486
 --HOW NAPOLEON CAME FROM ELBA
such man ever lived. You will forget world was against Napoleon. One of
that you are reading of one who died these French ships came close, and,
only some eighty years ago. seeing that the vessel was from Elba,
This is the story. While Napoleon called_out laughingly, “ How is the
lived on the distant island of Elba , he little Emperor ? ”
6
heard that France was unhappy under " Marvellously well ! ” was Napo
its new King. He, who had been turned leon's answer, who had made all his
away and stoned out of France, no soldiers hide .
sooner heard this than he determined to Presently there came a calm, and the
return . His brain conceived the idea few scattered ships of the returning
of winning back every fragment of his Emperor lay like logs upor. the water.
lost glory. Once again the eyes flashed, A single cannon-shot would have finished
the words came quickly, the whole man the adventure. Napoleon did not lose
quivered and thrilled with energy. This heart. He composed impassioned
NAPOLEON'S TRIUMPH OVER HOSTILE TROOPS ON HIS WAY FROM ELBA TO PARIS

Napoleon was beaten at last . He who had held the world in terror was driven into exile on the island of
Elba. But his brain flickered up once more, and he marched to Paris. At Grenoble he was stopped by
a regiment of his old troops, pointing their rifles against him . He walked up to them alone , and asked ,
“ Where is the man who would shoot his Emperor ? " The men dropped their rifles and went with him to
Paris. For 100 days he ruled again, and then, after his defeat at Waterloo, France threw him off for ever.
despised and beaten exile would go addresses to his old army in France ,
back , and be Emperor once more. He and every soldier on board who could
would conquer France. He would defy write set about copying these patriotic
the world . appeals of the Emperor.
So , while all the nations thought that “ I shall take Paris without a shot
this mighty hero was brooding like a being fired," he cried gaily, and every
wounded eagle on the rocks of Elba , he one felt the magic of his dauntless soul .
and his few soldiers were stepping on Here was a man whom only death could
board ship at night , and sailing in the crush. He trusted to those words
direction of France. It seemed the copied by the soldiers on shipboard to
adventure of a madman. The sea was bring France to his feet . And while he
crowded by the French King's ships was dictating the words he was sur
and by the English ships—and all the rounded by ships of war.
oora
487
 -THE CHILD'S BOOK OF STORIES
At last a favourable wind came, and to oppose Napoleon. All the peasants ,
his little fleet arrived at their destina- who had heard of Napoleon's coming,
tion. Napoleon stepped upon French crowded to see the sight.
soil . The wounded eagle had returned.
And slowly through the dust of the
Not one of the big warships at sea mountains came Napoleon and his
guessed who had passed them in the gallant handful. When he saw the
tiny fleet. 6,000 soldiers drawn up to dispute his
NA PALEONS WONDROUSMARCH path, he halted his people and went on
THE MOUNTAINS OF FRANCE THROUGH with a few horsemen . A hundred paces
Then began the wondrous march . from the line of bayonets, he dis
With his handful of soldiers , on a bright mounted and advanced alone .
moonlight night he set out for the long The order rang out for the troops
journey to Paris , a journey that ran to fire. Every musket was at the
near to the very towns which had hurled shoulder . Not a bullet came .
their stones at him but a few months Napoleon strode on, without a sign
ago, a journey through a mountainous of fear, and, throwing open his
country held by the soldiers of the new cloak,
asked, “ Where is the man >>

King, a journey which a body of police who would shoot his Emperor ?
might easily have stopped , and a magis. Then the muskets were lowered, and
trate have ended by hanging Napoleon. a great shout of Emperor ! Em
Was it not wonderful confidence and peror ! ” went to the sky. He had
courage that held this beaten man conquered .
upon his march ? For he trusted to After that, we are told, the march of
no weapons. He trusted to the magic the exile was like the spread of a
of his name . He trusted to the fame resist
mighty influence which nothing can
and power of his soul. . Regiment after regiment
Well , he set out with his soldiers , hastened to meet him , the lilies of the
sending his proclamations before him ,, new King were torn down and trampled
which called upon all those who loved in the dust, and Napoleon's eagle was
France to rally to their Emperor. came
Soon he was joined by peasants who
everywhere set up . City after city
out to meet him .
adored his name. It was like a visit " HE MAGIC NAME THAT BROUGHT
from the tomb. People thronged to him , TH ETHE NATION TO HIS FEET
amazed at the sight they saw. Napo- Your riding -whip will scatter all
leon's poor soldiers, few of whom had resistance," they told him . And sure
horses, carried their saddles on their enough , without a shot being fired ,
shoulders and their arms in their with his enemies and the new King
hands, and tramped thus burdened and the new princes fleeing before him ,
through the mountains, saying nothing
but
this poor exile arrived in Paris , his
Long live the Emperor ! eagle , as he said, having flown from
As they approached the town of Gap, steeple to steeple with the national
Napoleon spurred forward with only a flag, and lighted on the towers of
few men, and boldly entered the city. Notre Dame, the great cathedral
He claimed the love of the people. of Paris . The magic of his name
Men and women flocked to him , kissed had brought a whole nation to his
his hand , and vowed to die for him . feet. France had but one language :
NAPOLEON WALKED TOWARDS SIX Napoleon !
THOUSAND LOADED RIFLES , ALONE So he returned. But this flash of
He might have been a victorious con- genius was the last flicker of his mind,
queror instead of a poor exile hated by and in a hundred days he was once
mankind. Here he rejoiced with the more trampled in the dust. But that
people a few hours, printed his pro- bloodless march from Elba will live in
clamations, and hurried on again. The history as one of the most marvellous
whole city appeared to follow in his triumphs of men in all the history of the
train . world . One can almost see the war
Then they came to the greater city scarred veterans kneeling in the dust
of Grenoble. The general in com- at the feet of their returning Emperor,
mand of the King's troops , with almost hear their sobs as they ask for
6,000 armed men, issued from the city his forgiveness.
488
 ODGOVOR

THE RAID OF THE WITCHES

LE old witches who hide in lonely
THE and break his neck. So he rode on
caves among the Grampian moun- in silence among the witches. They
tains in Scotland do not now disturb the swiftly passed out of Scotland, and
people there as much as they used to. crossed the sea, and arrived at Norway.
And Aleck Stewart knows why, though Then they swept northward and came
he does not care to tell everybody. to Lapland, and flew through the gate
Aleck is a young herdsman, and he is of a castle.
as sprightly and daring a lad as you “ Hey ! ” cried the man at the gate
will find in the Highlands. One cloudy as the witches swirled by him unseen .
summer night he was coming home Hey ! There's a wild wind blow
across the mountains from a wedding ingThe
feast , and he passed by a cave and
in to-night.”
swarm of
. witches then rushed
heard the sound down the corridors
of voices. of the castle full
What can any against the closed
one be doing here door of a cellar .
this time of night?" Aleck shut his eyes ,
said Aleck to him expecting to be
self. hurled against the
There was a tree cellar door. But
growing by the somee how he
cave , and Aleck whiffled through
hid behind it and the keyhole , and
listened. Suddenly when he recovered
a swarm of witches himself , there he
came out with was, sitting in the
broomsticks in cellar with the
their hands, and witches, and drink
said : ing the wine as
“ By yarrow and yew gaily as if it had
And my broom
stick too , been honestly come
Leap over to Lap by.
60
land ! ” Now ye ken ,
And away they Aleck ," said the
went on their witches , " why
broomsticks up the we never trouble
clouds . As the last anybody in the
old witch came Grampians when
out, Aleck thought we need anything:
to himself : There's always stuff
“ I'll be in this as guid , ay, and
and )chance what better to be gat
falls . " In a twinkling Aleck found himself rushingthrough the
And he snatched air with the witches, riding broomsticks into the clouds.
fraeAleck
foreigners.
”
laughed so
the broomstick from the witch, and loudly that a servant opened the cellar
got astride of it, and said : door to see who was within.
“ By yarrow and yew , “ By yarrow and yew,
And my broomstick too, And my broomstick too,
Leap over to Lapland ! Skip over to Scotland ! ”
In the twinkling of an eye he found said the witches ; and so said Aleck,
himself rushing through the air with getting on his broomstick . And he
the witches, and one of them said : remembered no more till he found
"“ However did ye get up here, himself waking up outside the cave in
Aleck ? " the Grampians, just as the summer
But Aleck knew something about dawn was breaking. He looked into
witchcraft . He knew tha he uttered the cave . was nobody there .
a word he would fall off his broomstick At least, he could not see anybody .
489
IN
 CINDERELLA AND THE GLASS SLIPPER
IN the days of the fairies there was a
little girl named Cinderella. She
had no mother, but she lived in a great
house with her father, and was the hap-
piest little girl in the world.
One day a strange lady came to the
house with her two daughters ; they
were so finely dressed and so proud-
looking that Cinderella felt very shy.
But when her father told her that the
strange lady was her new mother-her
stepmother—and that the proud -look-
ing young ladies were her new sisters,
Cinderella was very glad , because she
thought that they would be kind to her.
But the new sisters were not kind at
all. They took her toys away, and gave
her all the hard work to do . She had to
wash up the cups and saucers and sweep
the foors . Sometimes, when she had
done her work and was very tired and
lonely, she would sit and watch the fire-
fairies play among the cinders ; and that
is why they called her Cinderella .
One day Cinderella heard that the
King was to give a very grand ball.
The Prince was to be there, and all the
great people were to dance with him . The
proud sisters were going ; but nobody
thought of taking little Cinderella.
And Cinderella was very sad.
“ I should like to go,” she sobbed,
when she saw her sisters' lovely dresses .
“ Oh, I should like to go to the ball ! ”
But when the carriage cameand took
the sisters to the palace , poor little Cin-
derella was left all alone. She sat down
on her little stool and cried till the big
tears splashed down on her little brown
frock, and Cinderella said to herself
again and again :
' I do want to go - I do want to go
to the ball.”
Then suddenly came a voice.
(6
“ And you shall go,” said somebody.
Cinderella looked up and there,
standing at her side, was a fairy.
“ I am your fairy godmother,” she
said . “ Now , if you do just as I tell you ,
3 Cinderella enjoyed dancing with the
and ask no questions, you shall see what
I can do."
She kissed Cinderella and wiped
away her tears .
" First of all, you must fetch me a
pumpkin ,” she said .
Cinderella ran into the garden , and
brought the largest pumpkin she could
490
find. The fairy godmother bent down
and touched it with her wand , and
suddenly, as quick as lightning, the
pumpkin was turned into the grandest
coach Cinderella had ever seen , with
blue velvet seats and silver doors.
“ Now I want a mouse-trap," said
her godmother.
Away ran Cinderella, and when she
brought the mouse-trap, with six mice
in it, the fairy touched that, too . Sud
denly, in a minute, the six wee little
mice that were squeaking inside were
changed into six lovely white horses.
“ And now ," said the fairy , “ bring
me the rat- trap and two lizards.”
Cinderella brought them , and the fairy
turned them into a coachman and two
great footmen .
Cinderella clapped her hands for joy,
and did not know what to do because
she was so happy.
“ Shut your eyes !” cried the fairy.
Cinderella shut her eyes tight, and
when she opened them again she found
that she had on a beautiful frock ,
grander than any she had ever seen,
and on her feet were two little glass
slippers. The fairy opened the coach
door.
“ Jump in ,” she cried, “ and drive
away to the ball ! But remember one
thing. Remember that you must be
home before the clock strikes twelve.
Promise me that you will obey me.
Promise that you will do exactly as I
say.”
Cinderella promised , and drove off
to the ball . When she got to the
palace, who should come to meet her but
the Prince himself. His coat was of blue
satin , and at his side hung a beautiful
sword with sparkling handle. He took
Cinderella's hand and led her into the
ball-room . Everybody left off dancing
to look at the Prince and the beauti
ful maiden whose name nobody could
guess .
Prince so much that she forgot all about
the time, and about her fairy godmother,
until she caught sight of the clock. It
was just going to strike twelve, and
Cinderella became so frightened that she
jumped up quickly and ran out of the
ball- room as fast as she could go - SO
fast that one of her slippers came off.
 SB Pearse

CINDERELLA SAT AND WATCHED THE FIRE- FAIRIES PLAY AMONG THE CINDERS
The fairy is seen here touching the pumpkin with her wand and bringing out the wonderful coach. Cinderella is running
downstairs as the clock strikes, losing her slipper, and the last picture shows her a kitchen -maid again , fitting on
the slipper brought by the Prince's messenger who leads her to the palace where the Prince makes her his bride.
491
 -THE CHILD'S BOOK OF STORIES
But she could not wait to pick it up. the house where Cinderella lived . The
On she ran , through the ball-room and
down the stairs, past the tall tootmen ,
and as she reached the door the clock
struck twelve.
Cinderella trembled and ran out into
the street , but , alas ! the coach and horses
had vanished . She looked at herself and
found that her pretty dress had vanished
too, and the little brown frock was there
instead.
Poor little heart -broken Cinderella
cried all the way home, and when the
sisters came back from the ball they
found her sobbing among the cinders.
The next day the King's messenger
went round the city blowing a silver
trumpet , and all the people came out
to listen . He said the Prince had found
a glass slipper which belonged to aa beau-
tiful lady he had danced with at the ball.
No one knew who she was , but she
was so gentle and sweet that the Prince
had fallen in love with her, and he said
that if only they could find her he
would marry the lady who could wear
the glass slipper.
All the ladies of the land came to try
on this wonderful glass slipper, but it
was so tiny that none of them could
wear it. At last the messenger came to
THE LEGEND OF THE WANDERING JEW
Thestoryis told that, as our Lord was And on and on he still goes at the
carrying the cross up to Calvary,
He stayed for a moment to rest by the
house of a shoemaker, but the shoe-
maker drove our Lord away, saying :
“ Go on ! Go on ! You shall not
rest here."
And our Lord took up the cross , and
said, “ I am going to my rest , and
you must wander until I return ."
So the shoemaker was turned into
the Wandering Jew, who will never
find rest until our Lord comes again on
earth at the Day of Judgment. The
mark of a red cross appeared on his
forehead, and he left his wife and
children , and followed our Lord to
Calvary, and then he turned away
from Jerusalem, and began his long,
strange pilgrimage.
On and on he went , a barefooted , tall
old man , with his hair hanging about
his shoulders, and a black bandage
round his forehead to conceal the
mark of the red cross there .
492
LEOS
stepsisters became so excited , and were
so anxious to try on the slipper, that
they could hardly wait to linfasten their
shoes, and had to call Cinderella to help
them . But when Cinderella saw the
slipper she knew it at once. It was her
shoe , which had slipped off at the ball
when the clock struck twelve .
The two sisters tried and tried, but
the shoe would not go on.
Please do let me try it on," said
Cinderella .
“ You, indeed ! ” cried the sisters,
pushing her away. " As if a kitchen
maid could wear such a shoe ! ”
But the messenger put out his hand
and helped Cinderella into the chair.
She took off her old shoe and put out
her foot, and in a minute the wonderful
slipper was on . It fitted perfectly. 1
Suddenly there was a sound like a
rushing wind, and in a moment the
fairy godmother was at Cinderella's
side, and Cinderella was a grand lady
again .
Cinderella stepped into the coach
which was waiting for her at the door
and drove away with the messenger
to the palace, where the Prince met
her and made her his bride .
same striding pace, over mountains and 1
across deserts, and down all the long,
white roads of the world . But a little
rest is sometimes allowed to him . If
he happens to be passing by a Christian
church on Sunday morning, just as the
service is beginning, he can enter and
stand there and listen to the sermon .
In 1505 a weaver in Bohemia, whose
name was Kokot , was trying to discover
some treasure which his grandfather
had hidden in the Royal palace . And
as hewas vainly digging here and there
the Wandering Jew passed by.
Your grandfather was burying the
treasure the last time I came by here , '
said the Wandering Jew, “ and, if I
remember rightly, he was burying it
beneath that wall there."
Kokot at once dug beneath the wall,
and there he found the treasure. But
before he could thank the Wandering
Jew the strange pilgrim had passed
out of sight.
 LITTLE STORIES ABOUT FLOWERS
Almost every flower has a story, just as almost every place has a legend, and
many fowers have many stories. They are made-up," perhaps, as the legends
are, but they are often very beautiful, and it is interesting to know the stories that
have been told for hundredsof years about the flowers that bloom in our gardens still .
THE PANSY reflect the exquisite colour of heaven,
HE charming name which many are the Children of the Sky.”
THElittle English country maidens have So the angel and his bride wandered
given to the pansy is Three-Pretty hand in hand over the earth, and
Faces - Under - One - Hood. The little planted forget-me-nots in every country.
French country maidens, however, Then, when their task was ended, the
called it Trinity Herb. At first, they angel took his bride in his arms, and
say, the pansy had a sweeter and more carried her up to the gate of heaven.
delicious scent than its little sister,
THE ROSE
the March violet
fields, and it was. much beloved wheat IN the days of theancient gods, there
It grew in thebecause
lived in the Greek town of Corinth a
of its union of beautiful colours and ex lady whose was
Rhodanthe name was Rhodanthe.
ravishingly beautiful,
quisite fragrance, and everybody used
to trample down the wheat to get it . and her house was besieged by kings and
The result was, that when harvest
time came there was no food for the lords, who were eager to win her love .
loversto escape from the throng
people. This grieved Three - Pretty- herorder
of In ,Rhodanthe fled for refuge
Faces - Under - One - Hood, and cne
.

springtime she prayed to the Trin'ty into the temple of the white andButlovely
that she might be deprived of her sweet , . her

scent, so that nobody would destroy the Corinth helped them to break people
lovers followed her, and the
open
of
the
growing wheat for her sake. Herprayer gates ofthesacred
was granted, and her scent taken
temple Artemis .
away.
From that time Three-Pretty - Faces was angered by the outrage, and she
Under-One-Hood
Under has beencalled
-One-Hood has Trinity changed
been called Trinity Rhodanthe
which is still into the with
deeply coloured red rose,
the
Herbby thelittle French countrymaids . blush which spread on Rhodanthe's
THE FORGET- ME- NOT cheeks when her beautiful
face was
N the morning of the world , an exposed to the gaze of her lovers. The
angel was senton a message to a holy breakers of the temple ,on the other
Persia. hand,were changed into the thornswhich
man dwelling in a desert in through
But as the angel was flying
now guard the loveliness of Rhodanthe.
the air he saw a beautiful Persian girl
sitting by a well-side, and braiding her THE ANEMONE

lovely
He camehairwith
down andblue forget-me-nots.
made love to her, THERE wasname
whose once aSpirit oftheFlowers
was Chloris , and the
and for a while they lived very happily Spirit of the West Wind used to como
together. Suddenly the angel re- into her garden and make love to her.
membered that he had not delivered The Spirit of the Flowers had many
the message. He flew back to heaven pretty nymphs in her garden , and among
to ask pardon, but he found that the them was a little maiden who was
gate of heaven was closed to him . called Anemone.
For a long time he stood by the One day the Spirit of the West Wind
closed gate weeping, and then the turned away from Chloris and began to
Archangel Gabriel appeared, and said : make love to Anemone . This made
“ It is ordered that you must people Chloris very angry, and she drove
the earth with the Children of the Sky Anemone out of her garden, and left her
before you can bring a daughter of to perish in the wild woods.
the earth into leaven .' Happily, the Spirit of the West Wind
The angel did not understand what passed through the woods, and he found
this meant, and asked his beautiful Anemone, just as she was dying, and
bride if she could explain it. turned her into the little , white, tender,
“ Yes,” she replied, taking some of and graceful flower which now grows
the flowers from her hair. “ These beneath the trees in early spring.
lovely blue forget- me-nots, which The next stories begin on page 605.
493
 THE BRAVE ST. BERNARD AND NEWFOUNDLAND DOGS

The great Newfoundland dog, O. which all lovers of animals are so proud, is simply a beast of
burden in its native land. It has to draw heavy loads and gets very little food, of the poorest kind.
But in England this noble animal is kept as a pet and treated as a friend. It makes a splendid watch -dog
for the house. The dog in this picture is painted by Sir Edwin Landseer, the famous animal artist.

The most famous dogs abroad are the St. Bernards, the powerful creatures which live in the Alps and are
trained by the monks at the monastery of St. Bernard. When a snowstorm occurs in the mountains these
dogs go out, with a little flask round their necks, and seek poor travellers who have fallen in the snow .
The photographs in these pages are by Chas. Reid , Lewis Medland, and Ernest Landor.
ARROW TOOBER
gsegob 494
 The Child's Book of
NATURE
WHAT THIS STORY TELLS US
ERE we read about some of the animals that have become so tame that
HE they live with us as pets. Everybody loves dogs, from the great
Newfoundland, that draws carts in its own country, and the St. Bernard, that
rescues frozen travellers in the Alps, down to the playful little dogs that we nurse
in our laps. Here, too, we read about the cats that live with us in our homes,
and their cousins, the savage wild cats that roam in the forests of Scotland.
Into these pages also come our rabbit and guinea -pig friends, with two
stranger animals that may be kept as pets — the hedgehog, that rolls himself
up into aa ball of prickles, and the tortoise, that can live for a hundred years.

DOG
OUR CAT
ANIMAL FRIENDS
RABBIT GUINEA -PIG TORTOISE HEDGEHOG

As you read the CONTINUED FROM PAGE 376

story of Robin
son Crusoe, do you
notfeel that you could crystaand
Hurrah ! ” when he saves the
he was very wretched.
But one day, out of a corner
dog and the two cats from the
wreck of the ship ?
" That is splendid ! " you say
to yourself . " The poor man has
got no friends or relations there, but
at least he has got some pets. They
will be his friends, and they will be
of service to him on the desert island .
The dog will help him to hunt , and
the cats will keep the great, hungry
rats and the little mice from eating
his little stock of food .”
He must be a strange creature who
does not love some pet. The boy or
girl who has never known the
pleasure of keeping a dog or cat , or
rabbit or guinea- pig, or some other
little friend of the animal world ,
does not know how jolly life can be.
The great thing to remember is
that we must not make prisoners of
animals and birds which ought to
live in freedom . The man whocages
the sweet-singing lark or nightin-
gale may not mean to be cruel , but
he is cruel . It is dreadful to see a
dear little squirrel, which is so hand-
some and merry among the trees,
shut up in a horrid little cage , only
able to get exercise by turning a
wheel round and round , until his
poor little head is swimming with
the continual motion .
Once a poor man who had done
wrong was in prison . He had no
friends to visit him in his cell or to
say a kind word to
him . His life was
black and gloomy,
in his cell , there popped a little
mouse. It was very shy, and
ran away as soon as he moved.
But by-and-by it came back , and he
threw it a crumb from his poor
dinner. After that the little mouse
visited him every day.
It became quite tame, and when
he had his meals it would sit by him
and take the crumbs which he gave
it. The mouse would frisk and frolic
about the cell as though it were the
happiest little creature on earth, and
the poor convict got to love it very
dearly. It was the only little friend
he had in all the world. This mouse
was not afraid of him . It did not
mind his gloomy thoughts , it did
not fear that he would do it harm .
It would nestle about his neck and
play about his hands. They were
very great friends, and his cell dever
seemed quite so dismal when the
tiny mouse crept in.
One day, while the warder was in
the cell , the mouse came in and ran
up to the prisoner. The warder,
who was a hard, cruel man, asked
what this meant . The poor man
explained that the little mouse was
his friend, and came to see him every
day. The warder said that such
things could not be allowed , and,
so saying, he killed the prisoner's
little friend. The poor man gazed
for a moment at the little crushed

BE n
495
 THE CHILD'S BOOK OF NATURE
form, then he gave a g'eat cry of race, all the tame dogs would go wild again
a

and struck down the man who had done if left to themselves. Some tame dogs
the cruel and thoughtl..ss deed . were left on Robinson Crusoe's island,
It is good for young people to have and nobody went there for thirty years .
pets, because it teaches them to have The dogs had become quite wild. They
thought and kindness for others. It is hunted just like wolves, and they had
of no use their having pets if they leave forgotten how to bark. Wild dogs rarely
the care of them to other people. That bark — they howl. These dogs now did
is only pretending to love our animals. the same, and it was not until they
HE WONDERFUL THINGS A DOG WILL
THEDO got used to men that they remembered
FOR ITS MASTER
that they ought to bark.
If we have dogs or cats, or pigeons , they A few years ago two dogs at Notting.
must look to us for their food and proper ham lost their owners, so they made
treatment. The little trouble they give homes for themselves in a field outside
us is well repaid by the love they show the town. They hunted sheep and
us and the faithful way in which they lambs in the neighbourhood , and did
serve us and take care of us. great damage, just as the wild dogs
What a splendid companion a dog is ! in India and Africa and Australia do .
He will guard your life if you are at They hadesto be shot. They looked just
tacked He will hunt for you. He
. like wolv , so much had they changed
9

during the few months in which they

will run errands for you if you train him .
He will swim rivers to get to you . He had lived the life of wild dogs. Each
will play with you . He will do anything country has its own type of dog, but in
but speak to you. Even that he tries England we get them all. For this is
his best to do, and you can get to under-
stand one another quite well by prac
tice . It is good for you to have a dog
about the house, and it is good for the
dog to be there.
All the dogs were wild once . They
belonged to the same family as the
wolf and the fox and jackal, as we have
already seen . And the funny thing
is that if we left the dogs to themselves
they would become wild animals again .
As we have already seen, there are dogs
on an island off the coast of Ireland
which are really little wolves .
An Eskimo dog which draws a sledge
to-day probably had a wolf for its father.
Some of the American Indians have
dogs which are related in this way to the
prairie wolves. The dogs used in India
for hunting are, as a rule, the wild dogs
made tame. Australia has thousands
and thousands of wild dogs, called din-
goes, just as it had long before white
men first saw the land .
GO WILD IF LEFT TO THEMSELVES
It is wonderful to think that the
great St. Bernard and the Newfound-
land and the mastiff, and the tiny pug
and poodle, come from dogs which were
once wild as wolves. Yet it is so , and
to -day you can hardly tell the difference
between the strongHungarian sheep -dog
and the wild wolf from which he is de-
scended . And, as we have been saying,
MAXON
496
the best country in the world for dogs.
DOOS HELP TO CARRY ON
W THE
Hºw
WORK OF OTHER COUNTRIES
The great Newfoundland, of which
we are so proud, is simply a beast of
burden in its native land. It has to
draw heavy loads , and gets very little
food, and that of the poorest sort. The
Eskimo dog , which some people have
as pets in this country, is another
which is a hard worker in the frozen
North. It draws heavy sledges over
the snow and ice , and has to live through
the winter on such poor food as its
master cannot eat . In some European
countries, too, dogs have to work.
In Holland and Belgium they draw
carts containing milk and vegetables.
When they are well treated they seem
to like the life , but when you see them
lying down in the street while fastened
to their carts you feel that they must
be very tired. They used to draw
carts in England not very long ago,
but now the law does not allow it.
The most famous of the dogs abroad
are the St. Bernards. These are great
powerful creatures which live up in
the Alps. They are kept and trained
by monks at the monastery of St.
Bernard . When a snowstorm occurs
in the mountains, these fine dogs go
out, with a little flask round their
necks , and seek poor travellers who
have fallen frozen in the snow. They
DOUTOOX
 " 13
TWO STRONG AND BRAVE DOGS THAT HUNT WITH MEN

The retriever is one of our most useful dogs. It was the skill of this dog that led men to tame it.
It is generally very clever at fetching and carrying things for its master. The writer of this story
once had one of these dogs, which used to come and meet him. If his master were not going home he
would place a note in the dog's mouth, and the animal would then run home and deliver the note safely .
memert

The bloodhound was formerly used for tracking game which had been wounded . It has a very keen nose,
and can follow a scent for miles. Its keenness is made use of for tracking men who have committed
crimes, and to-day the police sometimes use it to help them in finding criminals who have run away .
497

THE CHILD'S BOOK
scratch away the snow , and, if they can, find it and bring it back to the rest.
rouse the poor man, so that he can drink They can tell the sheep of their own
from the flask. All the time they bark flock from any others, though there
loudly. In the silence of the great
mountains their bark can be heard for
miles, and the good, kind monks go
where they hear the sound, and help
the traveller to the warmth and shelteryear. But the dog of the shepherd
of the monastery . Other big dogs in who had lost sheep knew his friends
this country will seek those they love again. He dashed into one of the flocks,
who are lost, but the St. Bernard is
the only one who does this in the snowy
mountains of Switzerland .
A DOG THAT USED TO DELIVER A LETTER
FOR ITS MASTER
The retriever is very clever at fetching
and carrying things for its master. The
writer of this once had a retriever
which used to come to meet him .
his master were not going home, but
wished the dog to return, he would
place a paper in its mouth and tell it
to go home, and it would race off and
safely deliver the paper ; then, if
allowed to do so, it would return for
its master.
It was this great skill of the dog
which first made men tame it . Ever
since it has helped him in hunting.
To-day there are dogs kept for nothing
else but the hunt . We have read about
those which hunt the fox. Others,
called pointers and setters , seek out
game for their masters. When they
find a bird , or other game, they stand
perfectly still until their masters come
up to shootwhat they have found . The
bloodhound used to be set to work to
track game which had been wounded .
It has a very keen nose, and can follow
a scent for miles. Its keenness was
made use of for tracking men who
had committed crimes , and even in
our own day the police have sometimes
been glad of its help .
THEN CLEVER LITTLE SHEPHERD
ON THE LONELY HILLS
DOG
The most useful of all our dogs is,
perhaps , the shepherd's dog. In
Scotland this is the Scotch collie. In
England it may be either a collie with
a smooth coat, or that jolly -looking
dog with shaggy hair and no tail. They
all do the same sort of work , and no
shepherd could get on without them .
Up in the lonely hills the dogs are the
friends and only helpers of the lonely
shepherds . The dogs keep the flocks of
sheep together. If one gets lost , they
DERUDITORUUUITZETTOLAYDIN
A UENNO
OF NATURE
are hundreds of them.
In a great storm several flocks got
mixed up , and the shepherds went
away and did not see each other for a
and barked and yelped till he had driven
out sheep after sheep belonging to his
master's flock . When they came to
examine those which the dog had thus
found , they saw that each bore the
mark of the shepherd to whom they
were thus restored, though he had been
unable at first to recognise them.
If There are scores and scores of different
sorts of dogs, but they are all alike in
this respect : that they love their masters
and mistresses , old or young, and
deserve to be loved themselves. They
do such funny things sometimes. When
you see a dog pick up a piece of stick,
run away with it , then sit down and
wait till you get nearly up to it , then
bound off again, you see the nearest
thing to the fun of human beings which
an animal can do .
D CATS AND TAME
WILCAT CATS, AND A
THAT KILLED A MAN
You can make great friends of cats,
but they are never quite so free and lov
ing as dogs. They are always a little
more shy, a little more independent.
They retain a little more of their wild
nature than a dog does .
Some cats never have been tamed .
We used to have great numbers of
wild cats in this country, and there
are just a few left even now , right
away in the far north of Scotland .
They are very savage , and live amid
deer and eagles and other creatures
such as we never see in England .
They are bigger and stronger than
the tame cats . They make their homes
in hollow trees or in tiny caves . They
are the most savage animals now living
in Britain . One of them attacked a man
near Barnborough. He fought it and
beat it,, and tried to get away ; but
it followed , fighting him all the way.
Both were so badly hurt that they fell
down and died side by side in the porch
of Barnborough Church .
We have nothing like that to fear
from the ordinary house cat , which is
498 woon
THREE BEAUTIFUL SMALL DOGS THAT WORK FOR MEN

The Eskimo dog is a hard worker in the frozen This is a happy - looking sheep - dog , with shaggy hair
North . It draws heavy sledges over the ice and and no tail. The shepherd could hardly get along
snow, and can live on any poor food that it can get. without it. These dogs keep the sheep together.

The pointer is used to seek game for its master. When it finds a bird or other game, it stands perfec lz
still, as we see in the picture, till its master comes up to shoot what it has found. It would be almost
impossible to catch some kinds of game birds without its help, as they cannot be seen in the heather.
ZETOODUDIT MIT LILLLULUC000 SENTULTURAFTTEE TITETUTXU utorrenun
499
 -THE CHILD'S BOOK OF NATURE

a very different animal, though, if The dog could not understand it. He
it is badly treated, it can be a terrible ran about after her, not teasing, but
enemy with its sharp teeth and strong anxious to know what made her sad.
claws. Our house cats were probably At last he seemed to understand. He
first tamed in Egypt . There are many rushed into the garden , scratched up
sorts to -day - white cats , black cats, some soil , and found the place where the
blue cats, grey cats , sandy cats, kittens were buried . He carried these
tortoiseshell cats, cats with long fur, into the house and laid them down
cats with long tails, cats with bushy before the cat. She saw then that they
tails, cats with no tails at all . These really were dead, and she saw that the
latter come from the Isle of Man, and dog was sorry for her. She ceased to
are called Manx cats . fret for the kittens , but then and there
THEPLATS THAT KILL THE RATS THAT made friends with the dog ; and, after
PLAGUE that, wherever the one went there the
If left all to itself , the cat would go other was sure to go.
wild in the woods , where it can catch Some cats can ring bells and open
birds and mice ad rabbits . It is the latch of a door. One cat could not
useful , as we have already learnt , reach the bell of the house at which
in killing field mice, which destroy the it lived, so as a lady was passing it
nest ofthe humble bees . It is impor- seized her skirt and gently pulled
tant, too , in killing the great ugly her towards the door, and waited until
rat. So important is this part of its she had rung the bell. Then puss said
work that men now send large numbers a little " thank you " with her mewing,
of cats from England to India to kill as well as she could , and passed with
the rats which spread the disease called dignity into the house, as though this
the plague there. were all just as it should be.
can yet
Catsare,
dogs they
never be trained quite as Hº". DIN
have wonderful THE FIRST RABBIT COME
TO ENGLAND
brains and loving natures . There One of man's oldest pets is the rabbit .
was one which lived in a house where A great man of China,named Confucius,
a dog was kept . The cat did not like wrote about the rabbit more than five
the dog, until a cruel man struck the hundred years before Jesus was born ,
dog and injured its eyes. Then the so it must have been known in China
poor dog could not see at all well . then. How rabbits first got to England
As it returned to the house it would nobody quite knows. Some people
sometimes run against the doorpost think that the Romans brought them,
and hurt itself. The cat watched this but we find remains of rabbits which
several times, then it used to go out were buried by mud and became
into the garden after the dog and guide rocks long before the Romans ever
it back in safety. The two would trot saw England. It is supposed that the
back to the house together, side by first rabbits lived in North America,
side, and they never quarrelled again and that they wandered away into
as long as they lived . Europe and into England when there
TS AND DOGS THAT LIVE TOGETHER was dry land where the North Atlantic
CATS
AND BECOME GREAT FRIENDS Ocean now is . Anyhow , they have
When we talk of a cat-and-dog ” been tamed here for hundreds of years,
life , we mean the lives of people who and the result is that we see all sorts of
are always quarrelling. But cats and pretty rabbits_brown , grey, black ,
dogs do not always quarrel . When they white, silver, and so on .
live together they generally become It seems hard to believe that the
the best of friends. great lop -eared rabbits can be related
There was a naughty little puppy to the little wild rabbits , whose ears
which used to tease a big, stately cat . are short and bodies small . But they
Puss was too full of dignity to hurt the are . The change is the result of ages
puppy, but you could see that she was of care and feeding and selection.
cross . Well , this cat's kittens all died, Some of these lop -eared rabbits have
and her grief was dreadful. She ears which measure over twenty-three
mourned and went about the house as inches from tip to tip, and more than
if she would never be happy any more . five inches across each ear. A rabbit ?

500
 SOME TAME CATS AND THEIR WILD COUSINS
Omrumunomodo

Here are seven little kittens sitting in a row to have their photograph taken. They were wonderfully well
behaved, though one was unruly and lay down. We do not often see such a large family of kittens as this.

We can make great friends of cats, but they are never quite so free and loving as dogs. They are
always a little more shy and independent. They retain a little more of their wild nature than a dog does.
Our house cats were probably first tamed in Egypt. On the left we have a picture of a Manx cat, which
has no tail. The cat on the right is a long -haired Persian, a kind that most people are very fond of.

There are a few wild cats left now up in the north of Scotland. They are very savage, and live among the
deer and eagles. Thoy are bigger and stronger than the tame cats. They make their homes in hollow
trees and tiny caves. They are the most savage animals now living in Great Britain, and are never tamed.
MYTYYDYTTIMOVERYTUTTON
501
 CRU
THE CHILD'S BOOK OF NATURE -
like this may weigh as much as eighteen
pounds, which is nearly as much as six
ordinary wild rabbits weigh . Of
course, as his body is so much bigger,
the rabbit has bigger bones to carry it.
His legs are thicker than the wild
rabbit's, and the weight of liis ears has
made his head longer than the wild
one's . But though he looks so big
and strong, and though, if you make
him angry , he can give you a bad blow
with his hind legs, he is not so clever
as the wild one . The rabbit which has
to live by his wits has a better brain
than the rabbit which idles in a hutch
and gets fed without any trouble.
The guinea-pig is a timid little
creature until he gets to know you.
Big boys and girls say to little boys and
girls, " If you hold him up by the tail
his eyes will drop out.” Of course ,
he has got no tail ; but if he has not
got a tail , he has got a squeak which
sounds almost like a shrill whistle.
THETHAT
TIMID GUINEA - PIG AND THE TORTOISE
MAY LIVE A HUNDRED YEARS
When he gets to know you, he is as
tame as a rabbit, and a jolly little friend .
There are several sorts , and some cost
a great deal of money . Some have
long hair like silk ; some have their
hair in rosettes ; and then there are
the tortoiseshells, and the reds and
blacks and browns and whites. The
agouti guinea -pig looks a sort of reddish-
brown, butif you turn back his fur you
will see that each hair is coloured just
like the quill of a porcupine.
There is no prettier pet than a baby
guinea- pig. Rabbits are born without
fur, and have their eyes closed, but the
baby guinea- pig has fur and teeth ,
and looks like a lovely little humble
bee . He can squeeze through almost
any wire , for where he can make his
tiny thin head go, his elastic little body
will follow . So, where there are baby
guinea -pigs , extra fine wire must be
put over the old wire. Dogs , cats,
rabbits, guinea -pigs -- what other pet
shall we have ? We must not think
about birds now , for they come in
later. Let us have a tortoise . You see
them sold by men in the street , who
say, “ Have a tortoise to eat up the
beetles.” Nearly everybody thinks
that tortoises eat beetles , but tortoises
cannot bear beetles. They like nice ,
fresh , juicy lettuce, and they will eat
502
RR.
young cabbage -leaf if they cannot get
lettuce. But you must not be sur
prised, when you get your tortoise, if it
does not eat for a week or so. These
creatures may live hundreds of years,
and can go a long time without food .
HE TORTOISE THAT SLEPT IN
THE
BASKET
AND WOKE UP BY MISTAKE
If left out in the garden, the tortoise
will bury himself in leaves or mould
for the winter, and sleep while the cold
weather lasts ; but if he is kept in a
warm conservatory, and given plenty of
food , he will keep awake all the winter.
Once a tortoise was wrapped up and
put into a basket to sleep through the
winter. When he had been asleep some
weeks a cat went to sleep in the basket
and made the tortoise very warm. The
tortoise thought the summer had come,
and woke up, just as the bees think the
day has come if you turn an electric
light on their hive in the night.
It is interesting to see him feed .
His mouth is like that of a lizard or a
bird . It has no teeth , but two sharp),
horny jaws. With these he can bite
a piece out of the lettuce, then swallow
it down without any further trouble.
To see the biggest tortoises, one must
go to the Zoo, where there are some
as big as coal-scuttles on legs. Queen
Victoria had one which was so big that
she sent for Sir Richard Owen to
measure it. While he was sitting on
its back , it calmly walked off with him .
That one measured twelve feet round,
and was nearly two hundred years old.
But now we must have another look
in the garden. We must have a
hedgehog - and keep him if we can.
He is a capital little fellow, because he
eats beetles and snakes. He gets quite
tame, and, where there is plenty of food,
is as happy about a garden as in the
woods, so it is not cruel to keep one.
WHEN THE HEDGEHOG IS ROLLED UP HE
WHEIS SAFE FROM ALL HIS FOES
He is the most interesting little animal
of the sort we have . From his head to
his tail he is covered with sharp, strong
quills , but under his body there is
soft, warm fur. So, when he is alarmed,
he curls himself up, with his head
underneath , and there he is, simply a
ball of sharp , brown spikes , ready to
hurt the hand of man or the mouth of
animal which tries to do him harm .
The next animal stories are on page 579.
 manammanammanammanamanammanamam

THE HEDGEHOG, THE TORTOISE , & A GUINEA-PIG FAMILY

P)
Here is quite a family of guinea -pigs. They are timid little creatures till they get to know us. Then
they are as tame as rabbits, and make happy little friends. But they must be handled very gently, as they
are so easily frightened. Guinea-pigs make a sound like a very short, shrill whistle. They have no tails.

There are several sorts of guinea- pigs, and some cost a great deal of money. Some have long hair like silk , as
you see in this picture, some have their hair in rosettes, and there are the tortoiseshells, the reds and blacks
and the browns and whites. The baby guinea-pig, with his elastic body, can squeeze through almost any space.

The hedgehog is the most interesting animal of its kind A tortoise makes an interesting pet. It likes fresh
that we have . He is covered with sharp, strong quills, leaves of lettuce, but will eat cabbage if it cannot
but has soft fur underneath . He can roll himself into a get lettuce. These creatures sometimes live for hun
prickly ball, and so make himself safe from his enemies. dreds of years and can go without food for a long time.
503
THE WONDERFUL FLIGHT OF THE BIRDS

One of the great wonders of the world is the annual flight of the birds over the sea when our summer ends.
We have all seen the flight of the swallows, the great clustering of the birds on the telegraph wires of our
country lanes, or by the water-side, or on the eaves of the houses. This flocking is the beginning of the leave
taking. What is it that tells the birds that winter is coming, that their food supply is at an end ? What is it
that guides them on their way ? Perhaps they have a wonderful sense of direction. Some people can never
find their way ; they have no sense of direction . But the birds never fail. They fly from England to Afr.ca
so quickly that a bird waking in England in the morning may sleep in Africa at night. (See page 507. ]
504
bna
SO 002 SO
 Doo Child's Book
The WONDE R
of
THE CHILDREN'S QUESTION BOOK
THE
THE children's questions came faster and faster, and though the Wise Man
did his best to answer them , he could not answer them nearly fast enough.
At last the children had to go away, and slowly the vast multitude of boys
and girls broke up. One by one the children went back home again , some to
school, some to work --for even in happy England boys and girls are sometimes
made to work long before they should have finished asking questions. And
to each of them, as they went away, the Wise Man made a promise that if
they would write to him about anything he would tell them all he knew . And
so from now we are to have real questions from the real boys and girls who read
this book . They should be sent on postcards to the Editor of the CHILDREN'S
ENCYCLOPÆDIA, who will give the best of them to the Wise Man to answer.

WHERE DOES MUSIC COME FROM ?

WellWise
, said the
Man , I CONTINUED FROM PAGE 421
think you should
have asked me first
where does sound come from ? --
for music , after all, is simply a
special kind of sound. I do not
think you need me to tell you
what other kinds of sounds
there are besides music. We call
these other kinds of sounds noise.
A sound, then, may be musical or jerky and not regular, but just comes
it may be just a noise, and I can tell
you quite well what the difference is.
All kinds of sound are really the
same, and they simply consist of
waves in the air.
CAN SOUND BE SEEN AND FELT ?
If you say you can scarcely believe
this, because you have never seen
them , I reply that they are not
meant to be seen but to be
heard , and you have certainly heard
them . These waves in air that we
hear, though we cannot see them ,
are really wonderfully like waves in
water, which we can see, though we
cannot hear them . The air, after all ,
is not so very different from a great
o ean of water. If there were two
fishes living in the sea or in a lake,
you can understand that if one of
them flapped his tail he would make
a wave of water which the other fish
might feel .
When we speak or sing, or clap our
hai . is, we make a wave of air very
like that wave of water , and other thing moves backwards and forwards
people feel it in a particular kind of like this, we say that it is vibrating,
way, which we call
hearing. After all ,
hearing is just feeling
with our ears. These
waves in the air move very
quickly, and are very tiny, but
they are of many different sizes,
even though they are all very
small . The different kinds of
waves make different kinds of sounds.
If you make a wave in the air which is
along “ anyhow ," then the ear, when it
feels or hears that wave , does not
like it , and that is the kind of wave
that makes a noise. But if someone
is singing, or if you strike a note on
the piano , then the wave that is
made is a regular and even one, and
the ear likes it , and calls this a
musical sound .
HOW DOES THE PIANO PLAY ?
The simplest way of understanding
all this is really to take a piece of
string and stretch it tight at its two
ends. This piece of string is just like
the wire inside a piano,which you hit
when you strike a note ; and the wire
is stretched just as the string is
stretched . When the piano- tuner
comes, he goes over all the wires
inside the piano to see that they
are stretched just as much as they
ought to be. Well, now, if you take
this string and twang it , you can see
it moving backwards and forwards,
and can hear a low sound. When any.

IN 505
 -THE CHILD'S BOOK OF WONDER
which simply means trembling. Every
time it moves it makes a little wave
in the air. If you make the string
shorter, or if you stretch it tighter, it
vibrates more quickly, and the musical
note it gives out is a higher note, more
like the treble of the piano. When we
speak or sing , we make two cords in our
throats, called the vocal cords, vibrate,
or tremble, just like this cord or string
that we can see vibrate for ourselves.
CAN WE SEE EVERYTHINO ?
I think we may almost say that there
are just two sorts of people in the
world - the foolish , who think they see
all there is to see , and the wise, who
know that they don't. This applies to
seeing with the eyes of our heads, and
to seeing with the eyes of our minds-
which you mean when someone ex-
plains something to you , and you say :
77
" Oh, I see now !
One of the greatest and wisest men
who ever lived said that the highest
knowledge a man could have was to
know that he knew nothing - nothing,
that is, compared with all that there
is to know. For this, and other great
sayings, this wisest of men , his name
was Socrates—was murdered by his
fellow- citizens over 2,000 years ago.
Even with actual seeing, and the
best and brightest eyes, we see only a
little of what is there , and usually see
only its surface . That is why insight
is such a good word for wisdom : it :
means that the eyes of a man's mind
see into a thing. Then our eyes only
see certain kinds of light . There are
other kinds, which are darkness to us,
yet we know that they can be seen
by the eyes of ants, and also they
can be seen by the lifeless eye of
the camera, which has seen for us
hundreds of thousands of stars that
our eyes have never seen , and never
can see .
DO WE SEE WHAT IS NOT THERE ?
Indeed we do , said the Wise Man .
Besides not seeing most of what is
there , ” our eyes often see — or think
they see — what is not there . Some of the
most remarkable events in history have
been due to mistakes of this kind.
Animals also make these mistakes ;
but you know that one of the great
differences between us and the animals is
that we have reason . One of the great
duties of the reason is to judge of what
506
the senses, like eyes and ears, tell ,
us, so
that we shall not be deceived, or so that
we shall learn all the more from our
mistakes.
Too many people, however, let their
reason rust, and are at the mercy of
whatever their senses report to them ,
without being able to judge and dis
tinguish between mere appearances and
what is real . It is less trouble just to
take things at their surface value,”
as we say, than to ask questions and
try to pierce to the heart of them .
That is the reason why so many people
stop thinking, and why there are so
few thinking people ,” or people who
use their reason—as we are meant to do .
DO OUR EYES DECEIVE US ?
You know that the answer to this
question is Yes, said the Wise Man.
But I said that sometimes we can learn
from the deception of our senses , and I
will give you an instance — which , in
deed, you know already. Our eyes see
things for a tiny fraction of a second
after they are gone. For instance, if
you spin the little black and white disc
given with this part of our book, you
see circles instead of little bits of
circles . That is because the eye goes
on seeing even when the lines are not
there , and sees until they come round
again . So if you take a card with a
gate drawn on one side , and a man on
a horse on the other side, and spin it ,
you seem to see the horse jumping the
gate . It is this trick of the eye that
is used in the biograph or cinemato
graph, which you have probably seen
for amusement , but which is now being
made useful also.
WHAT IS THE CINEMATOGRAPH ?
Cinematograph simply means “ mov
ing picture. You take a camera , and
run through a number of films one after
the other, perhaps at the rate of forty or
so in a second. Perhaps the camera is
looking at the sea, of at the Lord
Mayor's Show, or at a game of foot.
ball. Then, if you take a magic -lantern ,
and run the film through it at the
same rate as you ran it through the
camera in the first place, you can throw
a moving picture upon a screen . The
eye remembers each separate pirture
after it has gone just long enough to
blend it in your brain — where your real
eyes are, at the back of your head
with the next picture that comes along :
 -THE CHILD'S BOOK OF WONDER
and so you see the waves or the proces and tire us, and would not give us
sion as if you were looking at the real the effect of reality at all . Now , too
thing. That is the way in which the often the cinematograph was used for
cinematograph makes pictures live . silly purposes. But some wise people
WHY DO SPINNING LIGHTS MAKE RINGS ? are teaching us by it . For instance ,
When black and white have an equal students can learn how a great surgeon
chance, the white conque s the black, performs an operation a thousand miles
be ause the white is something and the away by seeing a living picture of him
black is nothing ; black is simply no light. at work. And men have taken living
With this book there is given away a pictures of wild birds flying home to
black and white top which shows exactly their nests over the water, the parent
what happens when you spinalightround, birds feeding their young ones, the
as boys do often , to make a circle of fire. young ones learning to fly, and so on .
The disc of this top looks all white when Other men have taken pictures of
you spin it under a bright light, because horrible things which we ought to
your eye remembers the white when the know about, so that we can stop
black comes round , and remembers it them , like little babies being carried
till the white comes round again ! And into public -houses to be poisoned .
the black lines make black circles Yet other men have made living
because they catch the eye and the eye pictures of the blood running through
remembers them in the same way . the little tubes in the web of a frog's
It is the eye's way to see a thing for foot , so that thousands of people
about one -fortieth part of a second at once can see with their own eyes
after it has gone! If you spun the disc what the circulation of the blood is,
in the dark as fast as ever you pleased , and how the little blood -cells tumble
and then had a sudden light that came over each other as they scurry through
and went very quickly, you would see these tubes, carrying oxygen from the
the spinning disc exactly as if it were frog's lungs to every part of its body
still — half white, half black , and just as our blood does for us . Before
with bits of circles instead of whole very long, I believe, the cinematograph
ones .In some lights, too, we see colours, will be used all over the world for
probably because the eye gets confused teaching, as the blackboard is to- day !
and invents them . HOW DO THE BIRDS FIND THEIR WAY ?
I have seen a whole roomful of We know that many birds fly away
people astonished at this experiment. home over the sea to warmer countries
The eye sees what is really there, and when our summer ends, and return
then the light goes out, and so, though when it begins again . This flight across
the eye goes on seeing for a little after the seas is called migration, and is
the light goes, it gets no chance to have indeed one of the wonders of the world .
another look , and so do what it does Look at the picture on page 504 . We
when the light stays on. This proves say that instinct guides them ; but
that noihing happens at all to the disc this does not teil us how instinct is able
to make the change when it is spun . It to do so marvellous a thing. When we
is the way the eye sees that deceives us. cross the seas we are guided by those
The eye does the same with colours when who have been that way before . We
they are spun , as we saw in the have charts and pilots and compasses,
colour-disc given with the first part and even then we sometimes make
of our book . The eye goes on seeing terrible mistakes.
one colour even when another has come ; But the birds have none of these
it mixes them and then we see a new things . They do not even take pro
colour made of the mixture ! visions with them ; and we know that
WHAT DOES THE CINEMATOGRAPH TEACH ? some of them become exhausted with
Now I want to show you that I was their long flight , unsupported by food,
right in saying that we can learn from and are drowned ; whilst not a few,
our senses even when they deceive us . when they reach land, are nearly dead .
If the eye did not deceive us so as to Yet , though this is so , the wonder oftheir
make us think we see things for a tiny flight, and their guidance, remains.
part of a second after they are gone, the If I pretend to answer this question ,
cinematograph would merely perplex I should have to pretend to be wiser
507
 -THE CHILD'S BOOK OF
than anyone who has ever lived . We
can only guess that perhaps the older
birds teach the younger ones, as happens
with ourselves , and if anyone finds it
hard to believe how they can remember,
all we can say is that birds have wonder-
ful memories for these things . I think,
also, that birds have a wonderful sense
of direction .
We know that some people can never
find their way. They turn to the left
when they should turn to the right,
and so on. Other people scarcely ever
make a mistake, even though they have
only been once in a place before.
Probably birds and many other
animals are even cleverer than the
cleverest human beings in this respect.
Perhaps, if you bandaged a bird and
turned him round three times ” —as
when you play games—he would remem-
ber just how far and often he had gone
round . But when they turn you round ,
you don't know whether you are facing
the fireplace or the window. Your
brain can't remember the turnings as
the bird's brain does .
WHAT MAKES THE WATER BOIL ?
I cannot answer this question , said
the Wise Man , until you know what it is
that forms the bubbles when water
boils. I wonder whether you know that
they are bubbles of water. If you hold a
cold plate over boiling water you will
find drops of wet water form upon it ,
though you can see no water passing
upwards between the surface of the
boiling water and the plate.
The truth is that , though we always
think of water as something liquid and
wet, just as we think of air as something
that is always a gas, we have no right
to do so. Air and water , and every-
thing else , can exist in three different
forms, either solid, or liquid , or in the
form of a gas . Air, for instance, is
usually a gas, but it is not very difficult
to make air liquid , so that it looks just
like water, or to make it solid, so that
it looks just like ice . Water happens to
be usually fluid, but we all know that make the water hot enough to make
when it is cold it becomes solid , ice the egg hard. The water simply floats
being simply solid water ; and we
must now learn that, when it is hot
enough, water becomes a gas just like
air. Indeed, the air contains a quantity
of water-gas, or water- vapour, as it is
usually called, and when we find the
weather close and “ muggy ," as we say,
500
WONDER***
it is usually because there is more of
this water-vapour in the air than we
like. When water boils, then , the
bubbles are bubbles of water -gas or
water- vapour, and if this vapour strikes
a cold surface like a cold plate, it be
comes liquid or wet again .
One of the things that decides whether
anything shall be solid or liquid , or a
gas, is heat ; and so, of course, the
simple answer to the question , “ What
makes the water boil ? ” is heat. We
apply heat to water , and it begins to
turn into gas, which makes the bubbles .
WHERE DOES WATER BOIL AWAY TO ?
If we go on boiling the water,
of course we boil it all away as
gas, until there is none left . In an
ordinary way water always begins to
boil when it is at a certain tempera
>
ture, or hotness," and this is called
the boiling point of water. It is not
possible in an ordinary way to have
wet water any hotter than this point,
no matter how much heat you apply to
it . The result will be not to make it
any hotter, but simply to turn it into
gas until it is all gone.
I said " in an ordinary way," be
cause it is not difficult to make water
boil without being nearly as hot as
boiling water usually is . One of the
things that decides the boiling point is
the pressure of the air , at the bottom of
which we live. Now , if you take some
water up to the top of a high mountain ,
the pressure of air is much less, because
there is not so much air above you. If
now you heat the water, it begins to
boil when it is nothing like so hot as it
needs to be made before it will boil at
the bottom of the mountain : because
on the mountain there is less pressure of
air squeezing the water, and so it can
more easily expand into bubbles of gas.
So if you put an egg in the water at the
top of this mountain , you may boil and
boil as long as you please, but you will
never boil the egg hard, simply because ,
however long you boil , you can never
away as gas long before you can do so,
and you must eat your egg nearly raw ,
though it may have been in boiling
water for an hour ! You might almost
drink boiling water if you were on a
very high mountain.
The next questions begin on page 619.
 The Child's Book of
ALL COUNTRIES

THE HISTORY OF OUR LAND

e read here of the beginnings of our nation . After the Romans had gone,
Wethere came to England many tribes from across the North Sea, dividing
the country into little kingdoms, and there was much fighting. The fierce Danes, too,
came down upon the land, plundering and burning. In the midst of these troubles
rose up Alfred the Great, who began our navy , encouraged learning, and set the
country in order. But after his death the Danes obtained power, and three
Danish kings ruled in England. The English king was driven out, and his son
Edward was brought up in Normandy. But the people threw off the Danes, and
Edward came home. When he died, Harold was chosen king. Duke William of
Normandy was angry when he heard of this, because Edward and Harold, he said ,
had promised him the crown. He came over and defeated Harold at Hastings,
and with this coming of the Normans the building up of our nation began.

THE FOUNDING OF THE NATION

THERE, were long,
cold winter s on
those flat and sandy shores
round the south - east corner
of the North Sea, from where
the new -comers into England
came . The meadows by the
marshes , the dark woods behind
them, could not afford enough food
for the people who lived in the home-
steads around ; for, as time went on,
more and more tribes of the same
family of nations pushed nearer to
the sea, till all were overcrowded .
CONTINUED FROM PAGE 354
their ton, or town , as
at Clapham and
Alfreton, Billingham and
Harlington . We can, by
names such as these and many
others — such as wick, meaning
a village ; staple, a store
trace their settlements along
the shore , up the courses of the rivers,
and across the fertile plains. These
names are still on our lips, and are
written on our maps to-day.
Our maps also still show us, to
some extent , where the different tribes

0
66So it came to pass each spring, of new - comers settled . Although they
when the birds began to twitter in belonged to the same great family,
the sunshine, and the brooks and they bore different names. The Jutes
rivers ran gaily singing to the sea ," settled in the Isle of Wight and in
that some of the youngest and Kent, which still keeps its name from
strongest of the people set out to an old British tribe . Branches of the
find new and more roomy homes, Saxons, the South , Easy, and Middle
where they could hunt, and fish , and Saxons, made their homes in Sussex,
grow corn to feed their families. Essex, Middlesex . There was also
Truly a desperate sight it must have Wessex of the West Saxons. The
been for the poor “ guardian of the Angles took up their abode in East
shore ” in Kent or elsewhere, when Anglia , the country of the North and
the long, narrow boats, with imposing South folk — Norfolk and Suffolk ; and
figureheads, came swiftly towards him . in Lincolnshire. It was the Angles
In most cases resistance was useless . who in the end gave their name to
The tall, strong men, with flowing hair the whole country, which became
and bronzed faces, glittering swords Angleland , or England.
and shields, leaped ashore one after the The settlement fighting went on for
other, and before long were masters a long time, but gradually the families
of some desirable piece of land, if began to feel at homein their hams
possible near the mouth of a river or and their allotments - for which they
in a sheltered bay. Then and there really cast“ lots.” In the commons of
chiefs, such as Alfred or Clapa, or to-day, so glorious with golden furze
families like the Billings or the and old white -thorn trees , we can
Farlings, set up their ham , or home, tread, as they did, the piece of land
COCO
509

THE CHILD'S BOOK OF COUNTRIES
left open and “ common to those or Ethel, for these names, as well as
settled near it . They had “ common the boys' names of Edgar, Edwin, and
rights," as people have now, to gather
wood and bracken , and let their
animals roam about .
E BERE:RESTHE FIRST OF THE FIFTY
RULERS OF ENGLAND
For some years the country was
divided up into several kingdoms,
such as Kent , Wessex, Mercia, North-
umbria . Often they were bitter
enemies ; but at last, at the beginning
of the ninth century, they all acknow-
ledged one overlord, Egbert. He has
been called the first King of England.
There have been more than fifty
rulers since then.
The shires, or divisions into which
the country is cut up, so that each
part can govern its own affairs, were
formed by degrees in these old times .
The word shire comes from a word
like shears, meaning cut off. Sometimes
the shire was one of the old kingdoms,
or a part of one . Sometimes it was
named after a town of importance,
such as Derby- shire.
Our family treasures, as we can see
in the Anglo -Saxon Room at the British
Museum , are dug up from all parts of
these shires. In Lincolnshire a rail-
way cutting goes right through a large
cemetery. On the breezy downs of
the Isle of Wight many warriors were
laid to rest , with their weapons and
ornaments beside them . Numbers
come from Kent . How beautiful those
swords and knives must have looked
when they were new and bright! It
was the mother who gave the weapons
to the lad when the time came for him
to follow his father to battle or the
chase, bidding him keep them till
death took them from him.
E JEWELS OF MOTHERS , NAMES OF
THE CHILDREN , AND HYMNS OF PREACHERS
Those fine necklaces, brooches , rings ,
gold thread and precious stones from
old embroidery , bring to mind those
English mothers of long ago. One of
them , in an old story told round the
hearth , as we tell stories now, earned
the title of “ faithful peace-weaver.”
Could anything be better ? The beauti-
ful drinking-horns and glasses without
stands carry us to the halls where
the families rejoiced. The names of
the children who wore those small
bracelets may well have been Edith
510
TERLALUEELER
Edward, have come down from these
times .
The sculptured stone cross reminds
us that missionaries came over from
Ireland to preach to the wild north ;
others came from Rome to the south to
persuade men to give up the gods of
their forefathers and become Christians.
There was a long, fierce struggle before
they succeeded . Woden, the god of
war ; Thor, the god of thunder ;
Freya, the goddess of peace and plenty,
are still recalled as we speak of Wednes
day, Thurs-day, Fri-day.
>
A fine cross was put up a few years
ago near Minster, in the Isle of Thanet,
to mark the spot where Augustine, the
Roman missionary, landed towards the
end of the sixth century. Headed by a
painted cross and waving banners, he
and his clergy set out for Canterbury
from here, chanting hymns and prayers
as they went. This stone cross is copied
from the old ones , some much larger
than the one in the museum , set up in
Ireland and the north by the mission
aries of old to remind their hearers of
the Gospel story after they had passed
away. Many of these are still to be seen .
EDWIN, THE GREAT KING WHO FOUNDED
EDINBURGH , OR EDWIN'S TOWN
The pillow-stones , which were found
under the heads of nuns , make one think
of the numbers of women, as well as
men, who were often thankful to retire,
in those rough times , to the quiet of a
religious house, to read and write, to
think and pray.
Edwin was one of the greatest of the
first Christian kings . It was he who
founded Edinburgh - Edwin's "“ burgh ,"
,
or town . He needed a strong fort to pro
tect the fertile lands to the south of the
Forth - our Lothians of to-day — and to
hold the roads from the north . The
castle rock between the hills and the sea
gave the needed protection to the town
which grew up round its base .
About this time arose the first English
poet , from a religious house or monas
tery on the cliffs above Whitby, in
Yorkshire, to which he had retired when
his great gift of song was discovered .
On the same coast , a little further
north , where now is heard the great
noise of iron shipbuilding, there lived
and died the great scholar and writer
 THE BEGINNING OF CHRISTIANITY IN - ENGLAND

ST. AUGUSTINE INTRODUCING CHRISTIANITY TO ETHELBERT, KING OF ENGLAND

ST . AUGUSTINE BAPTISING THE EARLY ENGLISH

The English people knew nothing about Christianity until long after Christ was born. About t'ne year 600 A.D. a
munk , struckby the sad sight of some English boys being sold for slaves in the market-place ofRome, set himself to
22mm

think out a plan for sending the news of Christianity into the boys' country . He became Pope Gregory the Great,
and there are still to be seen in Rome the steps from which he sent Augustine to preach Christianity to the English .
511
 -THE CHILD'S BOOK OF COUNTRIES

Bede , often called the Venerable Bede. of the Northmen, good Lord deliver
He spent his whole life learning and us !” was the prayer of the Christians
teaching, and translating and writing they attacked . All the Northmen par
books for the pupils who gathered round ticularly hated and despised the religion
him. His chief work, perhaps , is the which had taken the place of the old
history of the Church of the country, one to which they fiercely clung. So over
which has gained him the title of the the stricken land flames went up from
first English historian. the monasteries and churches, and those
THEBOOK OF THE OLDSCHOLAR, Bede, who had sought refuge in them were
slain. Think of it ! Caedmon's haven
There is still a copy of Bede's book of rest at Whitby was not spared, nor
to be seen , written in Latin , in one Bede's at Jarrow , nor the beautiful
of the most precious cases in the abbey on the little island of Lindisfarne,
British Museum - the eight-sided one, where Columba and Aidan, missionaries
which contains the manuscripts from from the West, had lived. London was
which we learn the earliest English burnt, and the whole country plundered.
history. Bede's book is open at the In the midst of all this, towards the
page which tells the old story of how end of the ninth century, there uprose
Augustine came to be sent to preach to one of the noblest of the English kings,
the English . The handsome, fair, blue- Alfred the Great , the Truth - teller, the
eyed boys, being sold for slaves in Wise. His titles and the very stories
the market at Rome, attracted the pity about his good nature, bravery, and
of a young monk , afterwards Pope industry which have been handed down
Gregory. He made a joke on their to our times show how beloved he was
name when it was told him . “ Not by his subjects — a thousand years ago.
Angles , but Angels," he said, “ they are When he first became king the Danes
so beautiful.” As soon as he had the were quiet for a while, and he made good
power he sent Augustine and a band use of this peaceful time to build ships
of missionaries to carry Christianity to prevent the sea-rovers landing. This
into the boys ' country. was the beginning of our Navy. He also
Many another story does Bede tell. did his bestto get the country into order,
He sent all over the country to gather and soldiers trained to fight.
all the information he could , and as one THE STORY OF THE TROUBLED LIFE
reads the account of his gentle ways and OF KING ALFRED THE GREAT
his hard work to the very end of his life, For a time after the return of the
one feels a great love for the saintly man. Danes things went against Alfred, and
But once more dark and bitter times he had to hide. He hid one day in a
fell upon the land , and learning and swineherd's cottage where the swine
peace were again destroyed. Hardly had herd's wife was making cakes. Not
Egbert of Wessex madehimself overlord knowing the king, she let him sit by
of the country from the Forth to the the hearth mending his bow and arrow
Channel, at the beginning of the ninth if he would promise to see that the
century, when sea -rovers poured into it. cakes did not burn while she was out .
Hºw W THE FURIOUS DANES CAME DOWN By the blazing red fire on the hearth
UPON ENGLAND
sat the young king, deep in anxious
They were even more fierce and thought - so deep in thought that he
wild than the English tribes had been did not notice the strong smell of the
three centuries before . They, too, cakes as they burnt to cinders. It was
came in fine boats , often blazing with rather provoking for the housewife, and,
colour, sometimes black as night, with not knowing to whom she was speaking,
high, carved figureheads, and the she scolded the king severely for letting
dreaded Raven banner at the mast . her cakes burn.
They came across the North Sea , like Another story from this time is of his
the Jutes , and Saxons, and Angles. Their venturing alone, disguised as a singer,
homes were in the lowlands of Denmark , into the Danish camp night after night,
in Sweden, and along the jagged coast of to find out their plans. Soon after this
Norway. All were of the same stock- he won a great victory, and the treaty
Danes ; North , or Norse , men ; Vikings, or arrangements which followed gave
or men of the cr ks . “ From the fury peace for many years. In his wisdom
512
THE FIERCE SEA- ROVERS WHO PLUNDERED ENGLAND

In the dark and bitter times which fell upon our land a thousand years ago, fierce and wild tribes of men
poured down upon our shores, destroying the peace of the English people, setting fire to their monasteries
and churches, ar plundering their cities. They were the Danes, hardy sailors whose homes were in
the lowlands of Denmark and Sweden and along the coast of Norway. This picture shows how the
Danes, the fierce sea-rovers of the ninth century, swept down upon other lands and took possession of them
UKRADE 513
 -THE CHILD'S BOOK OF COUNTRIES Rumi
he saw that the country would be settle down as part of the English
ruined unless fighting could be nation without further trouble . We can
stopped ; and though he was quite a to-day see on our map where they
young man , he gave up any hopes he settled by the place-names. Where the
may well have had of getting all the English said tun or ton for town, the
country for himself, and arranged to Danes said by, and so we get Whitby,
share it with the Danes. The part Derby, and Appleby. Many other parts
which the Danes had was called the of names are Danish too, such as toft,
Dane law, because there the people lived meaning an enclosure , as in Lowestoft ;
under Danish , not Saxon, laws. Part of scar, a cliff, as in Scarborough . The
the boundary was the old Roman road long Danish swords in the Anglo -Saxon
which ran through London to Chester , Room remind us of the way in which
called Watling Street. they swung them round in battle ; and
ALFRED HELPED THE PEOPLE TO
HOWREE RHE NATION GREAT the combs recall the flowing hair for
which they were so famous.
It was not long before Alfred made In a corner of the Anglo-Saxon Room
his half kingdom stronger than the at the British Museum are some relics
whole one had been before his time . which take us across the Irish Channel ,
He improved his army and built up to the land of those missionaries we saw
forts . Then he turned his mind to preaching in the North of England. As
making good laws with the advice of the we have already seen, when Christianity
assembly of wise men who helped him was preached to the Britons in the time
to rule thecountry, somewhat inthe way of the Romans , the new faith spread to
that our Parliament helps our sovereigns Ireland, and Aourished there exceed.
to rule now. Next he did all he could to ingly when the heathen Angles and
teach his people. Since the Danes had Saxons had stamped it out in Britain.
destroyed the monasteries there was Churches and monasteries were built 1
great 'ignorance everywhere, for the everywhere—as the number of beautiful
monasteries had been really schools ruins in Ireland testify to this day
in which people learned to read and and many people crowded into the only
write English and Latin , which was refuges there were in those rough times.
so necessary in those times . 'HE PATIENT WORK OF THE MONKS AND
So Alfred called together learned THITHE MISSIONARIES
men from other countries — they all The country was divided into separate
understood Latin—and they wrote kingdoms, as it was in England before
and translated and taught as hard as Egbert . Fierce fighting went on among
they could. Alfred himself worked them for many a long day. What a
with them . He won a beautiful book contrast there is between this state of
as a prize for learning to read quickly, things and the peace of the monasteries,
and he continued to study all his life. in which were gathered learned men
Some think that it was he who started from all parts ! The fame of the beauti
the first history of England in English,, fully painted manuscripts from these
called the Anglo-Saxon or English monasteries spread abroad, and other
Chronicle. There is a copy of it in the arts that filled up the long days were
British Museum, where there is also a working in metal and ivory and stone.
famous jewel , with the words written on The missionaries who poured over
it “ Alfred had me made.") He had all the narrow straits near the Giants '
the information collected that could be Causeway, as the wild tribes of the
found about older times than his, and Scots had done before them, found as
then added the story of his reign. beautiful a country as the one they had
left in the Western Highlands, but it
ENGLANDPAETEROFALEREDSSIADEATH,
CHRISTIANITY AND was wild and waste land they had often
After his death more was added to to pass over in Northumbria.
this, giving the history of the years as You will remember that Roinan
they passed for nearly three centuries. Britain stretched as far north as
Alfred's work was carried on by his Agricola's forts between the firths of
son and a very brave daughter and the Forth and Clyde , and that later
three grandsons, and for a time it the kingdom of Northumbria , under
seemed as if the Danes were going to Edwin, the founder of Edinburgh ,
514
 DER கைவண naanaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa ணைகணக

ALFREP LEADS HIS PEOPLE & HIDES FROM HIS FOES

ALFRED APPEALING TO THE PEOPLF TO DRIVE THE DANES OUT OF ENGLAND

o
OTTO

THE ANGRY HOUSEWIFE SCOLDING THE UNKNOWN KING FOR LETTING HER CAKES BURN
In the midst of the misery and trouble of the English people caused by the fighting Danes, there uprose one of
the noblest of our English kings, Alfred the Great. But he had a troubled life, and at times had to hide from his
enemies, once in a swineherd's cottage. The housewife let him mend his bow by the fire if he would promise to
see that her cakes did not burn. But Alfred was too deep in thought to notice the cakes , an I was scolded
severely by the housewife, not knowing to whom she was speaking, when she came back to find them like cinders.
mummo MUO
515
 THE CHILD'S BOOK OF COUNTRIES
also reached as far. The tribes that for Normandy, the land of the Northmen .
long had fought together north of this They very soon left off speaking their
were united at last under a king called own language, and learnt that of the
Kenneth, in the first part of the tenth Franks , which we call Norman-French.
century. These men were bold and very fierce,
Scotland, too , in his time, also before and they determined to take and keep
and after, suffered much from the all that came in their way. Their rulers
Northmen, who poured out of their were called Dukes. Emma, the wife of
creeks, called fiords, to the creeks or Ethelred the Unready, was the daughter
firths of Scotland. Right round the of one called Richard the Fearless.
coast they went , taking the Shetlands, the Her son , Edward, was brought up in
Orkneys, and Hebrides, the rocky head Normandy,, after the family fled from
of Scotland north of Glenmore, on their England on account of the Danes, and
way down to the Isle of Man. Many as he grew up in a monastery he cared
traces of their rule remain to this day. more for a quiet, learned life, and for
in church, than for
attending services after
THE UNREADY , AND CANUTE THE DANE fighting or looking business.
The name of Edgar stands out in So when the English had had enough
the same century as Kenneth's. He of Danish kings — there were only
was called the Peaceful King, which three of them — and Edward was called
back to be king, he was not at all fitted
shows that he lived on good terms with
to take part in the stirring, anxious
his neighbours, even if the story is not
true about six kings rowing him on times in his fatherland, and caused |
the River Dee. much discontent by favouring the
In the time of his son, Ethelred , Normans he brought with him.
called the Unready, because he would DWARD THE CONFESSOR, THE GENTLE
take no man's " rede," or counsel,
fresh bands of Danes appeared in Eng. A very strong English nobleman ,
land. Ethelred, at his wits' end, paid Earl Godwin, kept him for a time in
them money to go away, which they some measure to his duty. Edward's
did ; but they soon came back again greatest pleasure was in building
for more . Matters became worse and churches, and the most beautiful one of
worse , and so Ethelred fled away all was that of the Abbey at West 1
over the Channel to Normandy to his minster, built after the pattern of those
wife's relations. And so Canute, the he knew and loved so well in Normandy,
Danish king, who also ruled Norway, with rounded windows and arches. This
added England to his empire. abbey church at Westminster has been
Canute was a good king in the end, entirely rebuilt by later kings.
and the country settled down for aa time It is said that Edward promised
in peace. It was he who gave up to his cousin , William of Normandy,
the Scottish king the land between the that he should be King of England at
Forth and the Cheviots . For many his death ; in any case William deter
centuries these hills remained the border mined that King of England he would
between the two countries, with a wide be. The gentle, white-haired, rosy - faced
road on the east by Berwick -on -Tweed, king — the Confessor, as he was after
and a narrow one on the west by the wards called - died in January, 1066 .
marshy ground near Carlisle . Along He was buried in his fine new church ,
these roads the east and west railway finished only a few days before. Later,
routes to the north pass to-day. a beautiful tomb was raised over him ,
THE SMALL BEGINNINGS OF NORMAN which we can see to-day in its present
INFLUENCE IN ENGLAND
place in the heart of the Abbey.
Now, when bands of Northmen were Now, the year 1066, which opened
plundering and wasting England and thus, was an important year for England,
Scotland, others went to the northern full of stirring history . The dayafter
shores of what is now France , then the the weeping people had crowded the
land of the Franks—formerly Cæsar's Abbey to see the funeral of Edward,
Gaul - and settled there in the reign of they came back again to crown the
Alfred. They gained the whole of the successor whom they had chosen
beautiful province called after them- Harold, the son of EarlGodwin , whom
OTELUEE

516
 OODACOWOK TOK

THE COMING
COMING OF WILLIAM THE CONQUEROR

THE FIRST MEETING OF HAROLD AND DUKE WILLIAM OF NORMANDY

elolaa

HAROLD PROMISES THE CROWN TO WILLIAM , SWEARING TO BE TRUE TO HIM

THE CROWNING OF HAROLD AS KING, AFTER THE DEATH OF EDWARD THE CONFESSOR

DUKE WILLIAM OF NORMANDY , WHILE HUNTING , RECEIVES NEWS OF HAROLD'S CORONATION

When Edward the Confessor died, in January , 1066, and was buried in the beautiful Westminster Abbey which
he built, Harold was chosen King of England. When Duke William of Normandy heard this, as he was
hunting at Rouen, he was angry, and said that both Edward and Harold had promised him the kingdom- which
nobody could really promise, because it was the people's right to choose their king. William came over to
England with an army and a fleet , and a great battle was fought at Hastings, where Harold was killed and the
TOUT

bravest men of England fell around him . William had conquered, and from that day began new times for England.
OUTOUTEDOCILOUT TUITECTOR Correurre
517
 -THE CHILD'S BOOK OF COUNTRIES
they knew to be brave and wise, and to be your king ? ” there was but a
a hater of the Normans. sullen mutter ; they had to say “ Yes."
And so , on that bright sunny William was almost alone on this
day, in the keen north wind of January , great day.
the roof rang again with joyful shouts of Freedom for England was gone.
" Yea !” when the old archbishop asked The knightswere killed ,the poor were in
if they would have Harold for king. utter misery. William gave much land
TO and goods to his Norman followers ,
d
ENGLAND GREAT TEMPER
IN A and, instea of paying rent in money,
When William heard that Harold they had to promise to supply him
had become king after Edward , he was with fighting men when he went to
furious , and at once set to work to war. They made the men to whom
get an army and a fleet together to they let land promise to do the same.
invade England and secure the crown This feudal system, as it was called,
he longed for. He said Harold had lasted for many years in England .
promised him the kingdom as well as So that there should be no doubt how
Edward ; but no one could really much land everyone had, and how
promise this, because it was the people's many soldiers it was worth , William
right to choose whom they would have. had a great book prepared , Domesday
When William landed near Hastings, Book , in which is a description of all the
on the south coast, in the bright Sep- great houses and estates in the king
tember weather, Harold was at York. dom . That book is still of great use.
He marched his army down south by " HE WORK THAT THE CONQUEROR
the great Roman road to London in nine THEDID FOR ENGLAND
days, and very quick that was, when so Another work of William's which
many had to go on foot. lasts to this day was the making of the
The battle that followed at Hastings is New Forest, in Hampshire. William
one of the great battles of history. made it to hunt in , and sorely dis
The Normans were led out by a tressed the poor folk who were turned
singer on a fine prancing horse, and the out of their homes for his pleasure.
whole army caught up his song about Some of the great castles William
the great hero of France andhow he built to keep the English in order
fought and won . The English did their are still standing. Chief among them
best, but the Normans were too strong is the old part ofthe Tower of London,
for them. Harold was killed, and the in which is a most perfect Norman
bravest and best men of England fell chapel . It is said that from the gallery
fighting around him . This was on
of this chapel William the Conqueror
Saturday, October 15th, 1066. and his family looked down on the
THETHELONELY CROWNING
CONQUEROR
OF WILLIAM
service going on below.
William spent a good deal of his
By December William had forced time in Normandy, and at last died
the people of the south to own him as there. His sons behaved very badly to
king, and he was crowned in West- him , and he was alone in his death as
minster Abbey on Christmas Day. he was at his coronation, when all
No shouts of welcome , no bright faces , but a few priests rushed out to join in
and when the question was asked , the tumult going on outside the Abbey.
“ Do you take William of Normandy The next story of our country is on page 569.

WILLIAM THE CONQUEROR AND HIS MEN MARCHING TO BATTLE AT HASTINGS

518
Goer The Child's Book of
GOLDEN
THE CHURCH AND MISSION STATION OF FATHER DAMIEN IN THE SOUTH SEA ISLANDS
THE SACRIFICE
TwoBelgbrium rs in
othewere
in CONTINUED FROX 434
the same college pre
paring to become
priests. The elder brother was
soon to become a missionary,
and go away to the South Sea
Islands. His eyes used to sparkle,
and he would rub the palms of
his hands together, smiling and show-
ing all his teeth, whenever he spoke of
the work that waited for him across
the sea .
One day , however, he was taken
seriously ill , and was carried to his
bed . Fever wasted him . He fretted
and grew pale and melancholy. His
younger brother came to his bedside
and said softly, “ Would it make
you happier if I took your place as
missionary ? ” The eyes of the sick
man lighted up for a moment , and he
squeezed his brother's hands, smiling.
Then the younger brother wrote
secretly to the authorities, begging
that he might go in place of his brother.
As he sat at his books one day, the
superior of the college came and told
him that he was to go. The boy
sprang up, rushed out of the room ,
and careered about the playground
o
like a wild animal .
" Is he crazy ? ” asked the other
students .
And why should Joseph Damien
have been so glad to go into exile ?
Why should he wish to forsake the
happy land where people spoke his
language , and where all the customs
OF FATHER DAMIEN
and habits were SO
familiar to him ? Why
want to go and work
among savages , far
away out across the wild seas,
unseen and forgotten by his
friends ?
Well , he had already given up
the world to become a priest , and
so it was clear that he was glad to
become a far-away and forgotten mis
sionary because he loved, more than
the pomp of the world, more than the
happiness of home, more than the
love of father and mother, the Saviour
who went about doing good, and who
called upon all who loved Him to
take up their cross and follow Him.
Joseph Damien, bubbling over with
the excitement of a boy, started out
for the South Sea Islands and became
a missionary. He worked nobly and
well till he was thirty- three. Then,
while he was working among the people,
he one day heard the good bishop say
that, alas ! he had no one to send to
the poor lepers in Molokai , and that
these poor, stricken creatures were
abandoned to this most dreadful
disease and to the most dreadful
sins.
Joseph Damien , whose heart had
often grieved at stories he heard of the
lepers , begged the bishop to send him,
and the bishop accepted his offer.
So here was another " giving-up,"
for to go from the savages to the lepers
was a far greater sacrifice than going
from Belgium to the savages. The lepers
519
 -THE CHILD'S BOOK OF GOLDEN DEEDSamemca
lived all by themselves, separated helned him. In England his name
from healthy people, shunned by all became a power for good.
mankind. They were outcasts. The One day the warning came. He
dreadful misery oi their bodies made harnened to spill some boiling water,
them evil in their souls. Their hovels which splashed upon his foot. He was
were like pigsties; they lived no better surprised to find that it did not hurt
than beasts ; they were horrible to him. lle went to a doctor. “ Have I
look at and viler to know . You cannot got leprosy ? ” he asked . “ I hate to
)
imagine the horrors of Molokai. If I tell you," said the doctor; “ but, yes,
were to tell you a quarter of them, you are a leper .” From that moment
it would make you ill. Father Damien said in his sermons, not
But Father Damien came to these my brethren ,” but “ we lepers ."
outcasts with the simple message that He was perfectly happy. He said
God loved them ; that if he
and his cheerfui could be cured
face, his caress by forsaking the
ing voice, his island he would
loving eyes, and, not desert the
above all else , lepers. So he
the living faith worked on as a
that was in his leper, with death
words, changed creeping swiftly
them from beasts and fiercely
to men,and pre through his body.
sently from men When he was
to children of carried to his
MMODO

God . They be bed, he thanked

gan to be God for all the
ashamed of their blessings and
Room

sins; they began comforts he re

to feel that per ceived. Two
haps God did priests and
really love them Sisters of Charity
after all . One knelt at his
thing was true. bed .
Father Damien When you
loved them. are in heaven ,
For sixteen Father," said one
years this holy of the priests,
and devoted man you will not
lived among the forget those you
lepers. He built FATHER DAMIEN , WHO GAVE UP HIS LIFE leave orphans
them a church, He went out from Belgium to help the lepers in the South Sea behind you ? ”
which they Islands. He left his own country and became a leper, giving “ Ah, no ! "
loved, he built his wholestrengthandat last hislife to these afflicted people. smiled the good
This portrait is by Edward Clifford, photographed by F. Hollyer.
them better Father. " If I
houses, he gave them a proper have credit with God, I will pray for all
water supply, he nursed them, he in the Leproserie.”
6
dressed their frightful wounds, he “ And will you," whispered the
comforted them when dying, and kneeling priest, “ like Elijah , leave me
1 ) 1
he dug their graves for them when your mantle, my Father ? ” 1
they were dead. And people in the “ Why, what would you do with it ? "
great world outside heard of this asked Father Damien. And then he )
lonely priest toiling among the lepers. added slowly , “ It is full of leprosy .”
People wrote to him, sent him cases of What a fine coat to put off after one's
comforts for his people, and some even life's work ! No king ever wore a finer.
came out to see him and help him . And soon the soul of Father Damien
You will be glad to know that England was received by the angels. His whole
honoured this Belgian priest, and life had been a golden deed .
520
HOW MARGARET WILSON GAVE UP HER LIFE
Thename of Margaret
THEnever be forgotten Wilson will
in Scotland. She happened to herstood
crowd of people companion.
by. A large
was the daughter of a Scottish farmer Slowly the tide came in , and soon
who lived about 250 years ago. At the older woman was drowning. The
that time there was a great persecution last sounds she heard in life were the
going on in Scotland , and all people strains of the twenty - fifth Psalm being
who would not worship God in the sung by her companion higher up the
way that the law ordered were put in bank . The soldiers thought that
prison and often killed Margaret Wilson would give up her reli
Margaret Wilson felt that she could gion when she saw that the other
not obey the Margaret was
law , as her dead, but they
conscience told were wrong .
her she ought to Calmly, as the
worship God in water rose
some other way. higher and
So she was put higher about
in prison, though her, she opened
quite a young her Bible and
girl ,with an read in a loud
older woman , voice of triumph
Margaret Mc the eighth
Lauchlan . Soon chapter of
afterwards she Romans: “ Who
was sentenced to shall separate
death , but her us from the
father went to love ofChrist ? "
Edinburgh and Then she bent
persuaded the her head and
council to par prayed , and
don her . The while her eyes
pardon , how were thus
ever , had to be closed the water
sent to London swept over her .
first to be signed, ' Give her one
and the council last chance ! ”
never intended shouted the
that she should people, so they
be really par HOW MARGARET WILSON GAVE UP HER LIFE drew her up
doned . For, Margaret Wilson's name will never be forgotten in Scotland, and asked her :
6
eleven days where, 250 years ago, this farmer's daughter was tied to a “ Will you
stake in the river and drowned because she refused to give obey the law,
after they had up worshipping God in the way that she thought right. and worship
sent the pardon
to London , they ordered the two God as the law orders ?
Margarets to be put to death , as the “ No,” was her reply , “ I cannot. I
pardon had not come back. But it am one of Christ's children . Let me
took more than a fortnight in those
to
go .”
days to get from Edinburgh So they let her down again .
London and back , so it was impossible When it was all over, and the tide
for the pardon to be back in eleven had gone back, their friends cut the
days. So on May 11th , 1685 , the two cords and carried away the bodies.
Margarets were tied to two stakes They buried them together in the
driven into the bed of the river at low quiet graveyard at Wigtown, and to
tide . The stake to which Margaret day, on the top of a hill near by,
Wilson was fastened was higher up stands a handsome monument in
the bank than the other, and just memory of their brave lives .
behind it , so that she could see all that The next Golden Deeds are on page 627 .
521
T ()
 KKIUTUCUNEOULDER
LEVEL

CONSTANTINE LEADING HIS TROOPS IN BATTLE

When Diocletian gave up his throne there was great strife in Rome as to who should be emperor, and the
victor was Constantine the Great Constantine is famous in the world for many things. He was the first
emperor to accept Christianity. Diocletian had tried to destroy it ; Constantine made it the State religion
of the empire. He built Constantinople and here was built up a new empire, which took to itself the
ART

power of Rome when Rome's greatness passed away. Constantine lived in England as a Roman soldier
before he came to the throne, and it is said that he married the daughter of an innkeeper near York ,
who now lies in a beauti'ul tomb among the glorious sculptures and paintings in the palace of the Pope.
myrer
mm TTTTTTTT MITTITUDE Meru
522
 SHAKE
The Child's Book of
PEARE
O
MEN E WOMEN ton

WHAT THIS STORY TELLS US

00 years
FOR4world, after thebirth of ChristRomeruled almost alltheknown
and a long line of emperors, founded by Julius Cæsar, continued
until the power of Rome passed away. Never before, or since, has the world
known such remarkable rulers as the men we call the Cæsars. It was in the

BENS
reign of the first Cæsar that Christ was born, and the Roman emperors lived
through the most tremendous period of human history, when Christianity was
slowly making its way among the people. It is strange that at that great
time the world was under the sway of the wickedest rulers who have ever
lived ; but it is fine to think that the beautiful influence of Christianity spread
through the earth until it became stronger than the empire of the Cæsars,
which fell to nothing, while Christianity took possession of the world.

NAP
OLE
THE EMPERORS OF ROME WEL
ON IN
GOR
THEJulius Cæsarwhom
son

had CONTINUED FROM PAGE 407

foundations of the
Roman Empire so
adopted was some firmly that the evil
tiines called Cæsar rule of some of his
and sometimes Octavian, because successors, and civil wars , and
his real father's name was
foreign foes, could not for
Octavius . After the slaying of centuries prevail to break it in
CRO
MW the great Julius, there was long pieces ; and men lived under DAB
WIN
ELL
strife between the young Octavian the Roman rule secure from violence,
and Mark Antony, since one or other as they had lived under no other rule
might rule over the vast dominions in the past .
of Rome, but not both . Rome was a republic, and the
And when at last Octavian got people still hated the idea of a king ;
the better of Antony, who slew yet it was necessary that one man
himself, a Cæsar was once more should be the real ruler. The diffi
FARA

lord of the world , as we may say ; culty was got over by giving the
for by this time the rule of Rome one man a number of different offices
DAY
(

had spread over all the lands whose
coasts are washed by the Mediterra-
nean Sea ; and kings far away in
Asia , even if they did not call them-
selves subjects of Rome, still knew
that they must obey her.
STEPHENS
and titles. Octavian was called
Augustus, the name by which he is
generally known, as a compliment,
very much as we say “ His Majesty.”
It was as if he had been made
President, or Speaker, of Parlia

Now , would this Cæsar face the
mighty task of planning ways by Commander - in - Chief, and Arch
which that great empire might be bishop of Canterbury, and Lord
ruled so that order and justice should
prevail , and of carrying out the plans;
or would he, like many another, be
satisfied to make just all he could out
of it for his own enjoyment and for
the pleasing of his own whims and
fancies ?
He had been merciless, cruel ,
CLAD
selfish . But now a change came.
STO
NE
He took up the task ; he set aside
selfish aims ; he learnt to curb his
fierce temper ; and, with the aid
of wise counsellors, he laid the
PJULIUS CAESAR
Ros
523
ment , and Lord Chancellor, and
High Admiral all at once ; so that
he had in himself the authority of
each of the chief offices of State
given to him for life, though, of
course, a great deal of the real work
had to be done by others whom he
appointed . Still , he could see that the
work was properly done. But because
the most necessary power of all was
the control of the army, the title of RUS
KIN
Imperator, which has turned into
the word Emperor, is the one which
gradually became the most familiar.
HERBERT SPENCER
 mama -THE CHILD'S BOOK OF MEN AND WOMEN
So Augustus gave peace and order to the
Roman world , and prosperity followed ; and
in his day Rome became a very splendid city,
so that it was said of him that he found it
built of brick, and left it built of marble .
He showed favour to great poets, such
as Virgil and Horace, and other great writers ;
so that in other countries the time when art
and literature are supposed to have flourished
most is called the Augustan Age. And there
happened in his reign something of which
he never heard , which yet changed the
world more than all the statesmanship of
Augustus ; and that was the birth of our
Lord in a far-away province .
HE DEATH OF THE EMPEROR AUGUSTUS

For five -and -forty years Augustus ruled,

and the Roman world was well accustomed
to the new order of things before he died ,
old and weary ; for all his greatness did not
6
bring him happiness in his home. “ Have I
played my part well in the comedy ? ” he
said , as he lay dying. " Then clap your hands,
and so farewell.” No one doubted that
Augustus,the first Emperor ofRome,gave peace another emperor must succeed him,or that
and order to the Roman world . It was he who
ordered a census to be taken, and it waswhile the successor must be his stepson, Tiberius.
she was going up to Jerusalem for this counting Now, Tiberius was not young ; he was
of the people thatMary gave birth to our Lord. gloomy and morose. Yet he had served the
state well, commanding great armies in distant
lands where other generais had met with
disasters. The old emperor had respected
him , but no one loved him ; and it is unlucky
for him that the great Roman historian
Tacitus has told the story of his reign in such
a way that his name has become odious to all
men . Yet some people say that this is not
just , and that away from Rome people could
see and feel that his government was firm
and wise .
But in Rome itself, and, above all, among
all those people who had to do with the
e nperor's court, his reign was grievous. For,
knowing that men did not love him , Tiberius
listened readily ' to tale- bearers, and there
grew up a foul brood of “ informers ” who
were ready to lie away men's lives that
they themselves might get rewards for their
seeming loyalty. And the better a man was,
he more likely was he to have wicked enemies
who would charge him with plotting against
the emperor ; so that no man's life was safe .
UNHAPPY TIBERIUS AND HIS YOUNG
THENEPHEW GERMANICUS
Tiberius succeeded Augustus, whose stepson he With fair words crafty and evil men per
was. He was gloomy and morose, and made his suaded Tiberius to put his trust in them, and
life miserable by listening to tale -bearers until most of all a certain Sejanus, who became the
he dared trust no man , even in his own house ;
and hedied , it may be, at the hands of those captain of the guarit. But a day came when
about his sick -bed,whoprobably smothered him . certain proof was brought to Tiberius that
DELICITY
524
 -THE EMPERORS OF ROME
Sejanus himself was plotting his murder,
and Sejanus in one day was smitten down from
his high estate and put to a shameful death .
Yet after that Tiberius durst trust no man
at all , and the victims of his fears multi
plied, until he, too, died, it may be of disease,
or it may be by the hands of those about
his sick -bed , who, as men believed, smothered
him with pillows.
He had no son ; but there had been a
nephew of his who was called Germanicus
for the fame he had won in the wars with the
German barbarians. Germanicus died while 1
quite a young man , and some fancied that
he was poisoned by the emperor's device,
since Tiberius feared any man who was a
general favourite like Germanicus, and ,
above all, beloved by the soldiers .
MADNESS AND WICKEDNESS OF “ LITTLE
THEBOOTS , " THE EMPEROR CALIGULA
However, he left a young son , whose name
was Gaius; but he was called by the soldiers
Caligula, which means " little boots," because
when he was a tiny boy in his father's camp
he used to wear little boots just like those
the soldiers wore. Now Caligula, being Caligula succeeded Tiberius,whose great nephew
almost a boy, was made emperor for the he was. Hebecame emperor when quiteyoung,
sake of the memory of his father, Germanicus . and after an illness he went mad. He lived a cruel
But very soon after he had a serious life, and all Rome was glad when he was slain.
illness, and after his illness he became quite
mad, though he was still clever, so that
people did not see at first that he was really

KE
mad . In his madness he thought that
he was a god, and, moreover, he had a
horrible delight in killing people, among
many other wild fancies; so that one day he
said he wished all the people in Rome had
only one neck between them , so that he
might cut off all their heads at once .
Thus it seemed that in a few months Caligula
would shed more innocent blood than ever
Tiberius had spilled in his long reign, and
therefore certain officers, ſearing for their
own lives, banded together and slew him .
Since this deed was done without warning,
none knew who should now be made emperor ,
or whether there would be a new emperor ;
and it seemed that for a time all law and
order were over ; hut the soldiers of the
guard resolved to show their own power, and
began to pillage the palace.
THE TREMBLING CLAUDIUS HID
How
BEHIND A CURTAIN IN THE PALACE
While they were pillaging , one saw the feet
of a man who was hiding behind a curtain . After Caligula'sdeath, someone saw aman hiding
The soldiers pulled him out, and when they behind a curtain, and the soldiers pulled him out
saw that it was one Claudius , the uncle of and found that it was Claudius. They carried
him off and made him emperor. He was a great
Caligula , but aa feeble man and of no account , coward and half mad,and Shakespeare is said
they cried out , mocking, that he should be to have studied him when writing “ Hamlet.”
TOP

525
 THE CHILD'S BOOK OF MEN AND WOMEN
the new emperor, and carried him off
to the camp. And since none could
command the guard, Claudius was
proclaimed emperor.
Now, he was not bloodthirsty like
Caligula, loving rather books and learn-
ing of a kind that active men often
despise ; but Rome was ruled by his
servants, and by his evil wife, Messalina.
She was so wicked when
that
Claudius found out her wickedness he
put her to death ; yet he married
another wife, Agrippina, the sister of
Caligula, who was no less wicked,
and she ruled in place of Messalina.
So that all through his reign Claudius ,
without meaning to do evil, was per-
suaded by his bad counsellors to shed
NERO'S WIFE THE CRUEL EMPEROR NERO
and music till he came to fancyhimself
a wonderful artist and musician . But
presently he was not contented with
that, and showed himself the most cruel
and bloodthirsty of all the emperors, so
that his name is a by-word to this day.
First of all he had his own mother
murdered, but that vile crime was
forgiven him because she had been so
evil a woman. There was a great fire
which burnt down half the city of Rome,
and men said that this was his own
doing, and that while the flames raged
he sang and played upon his harp the
song of the burning of Troy. But, fear
ing the rage of the people, he pretended
that it was the Christians who had
done this thing, and many of them were
NERO'S MOTHER

Nero succeeded Claudius, whose stepson he was. Claudius was poisoned by his wife to make room for
Nero , and Nero poisoned her, his own mother. Nero is shown here twice, with his mother on one side
and his wife on the other. He murdered them both . He built himself a house of gold, and it is said
that he set Rome on fire and harped while it burned. At last he fled from Rome in terror, and slew himself.
nearly as much innocent blood as hunted out and burnt to death or flung
those who had gone before him . But to tbe lions in the great amphitheatre
this we may remember, that it was in to amuse the populace. Yet the world
his time that the Romans really con- was less shocked by his cruelties than
quered our island of Britain, and made by what it deemed the shame of the
it a part of the Roman Empire. At Roman emperor appearing on the stage.
.
last, however, his wife , Agrippina, So many such deeds he wrought , so
poisoned him , that she might make her many noble men and women were his
son, Nero, emperor in his place, for she victims, that they cannot be recounted ;
had been married and had a son before but at last news came that a general
she became the wife of Claudius . named Galba, in Spain, had revolted .
There was no one whom the soldiers And when men knew that someone
cared to make emperor except Nero, had ventured to rise up against him,
so it was he who followed Claudius ; there were none who would stand by
and at first, while he was quite young, he the cruel tyrant ; the guards themselves
allowed his tutor, the wise Seneca , deserted the emperor. In terror he fled ;
and the grave Burrhus, the captain of but when he knew that his hiding - place
the guard, to rule well enough ; while was found , he dared rather to die by
he spent his own time in studying art his own hand than to fall into the
MUUTTY TUTTI
526 TITUTE
 CLOTURER
THE EMPERORS OF ROME
SILO TOXICCI IIMTEC a .

hands of his foes -pitied by none conquered it he dealt with it very

save himself. His last thought and mercilessly , laying it in ruins, and carry
his last words were that the world ing away the treasures of the Temple
was losing a wonderful artist . to Rome. But when he became emperor
Now in quick succession three men he was resolved to win fame for kindness
claimed the empire. First the old sol- and mercy, so that when a day passed
dier Galba, with his legions from Spain ; on which he had set no wrong right
then a young man named Otho, chosen and relieved no distress, he said to
by the guard at Rome, who overthrew those about him, “ My friends, I
Galba ; then the glutton Vitellius, have lost a day.” This was so
chosen by the armies in Germany , whose unlike what people had expected of
troops overthrew Otho . But then there him that some think that if he had
came one stronger than any of these , the not died young he would again have
skilled general Vespasian , who com- shown the cruelty of his earlier life .
manded the Roman armies in the East . That is what his brother Domitian ,
For it was clear who succeeded him ,
enough that none but did . He began his
a conquering soldier reign well enough,
could now grasp the but presently turned
MUMKIIRY

imperial sceptre. to evil ways after the

Vespasian and the manner of Tiberius,
two sons who ruled persecuting the
after him are called Christians amongst
the Flavian em his other ill-deeds ;
TIM

perors, because the nor can good be said

family name was of his rule , except
Flavius. Vespasian that in Britain the
was of no high birth ; famous Agricola won
but he gave Rome much honour by his
what she most just government.
needed at the time Thus it was that
a chief who meant wher Domitian, in his
to restore order and turn , was murdered ,
good government, there was none to
who had no thirst mourn for him .
for blood, and did For more than a
not care to waste on hundred years after
display and luxury Vespasian made
the money that was Vespasian made himself emperor and ruled the himself emperor,
needed for more use- empire well for ten years, following three short Domitian was the
ful things. So when reigns after Nero's death. He was a skilled warrior. only one of all the
once he had crushed resistance to his rule , emperors who was not counted among the
there was no more violenceand bloodshed . good princes ; and the five who came next
The soldiers were glad enough to have a after Domitian are often called the “ five
)
real soldier at the head of affairs again, good emperors." The first, indeed, whose
and though men laughed at his manners, name was Nerva, hardly counts. He
which were homely and even vulgar, he was an old man already when the Senate
cared nothing about that, nor for jrsts at offered him the throne — the soldiers
his eagerness to get money. Themoney made no disturbance— and his rule was
was needed, and if he got it by sordid very short. But just as Julius Cæsar
and unsavoury means, he met reproaches adopted the young Octavian as his son,
by saying that “ the coins smelt well so Nerva adopted as his son a great
enough " ; and it was well spent. So the soldier, Trajan, who was trusted by the
ten years ofhis rule were good for Rome. army; and thus it was made certain that
After him his son Titus reigned only Trajan would be emperor after him .
for a short time. He had won fame Trajan was one of the very best - a man
before as a soldier, during his father's who sought, above all things , to spread
rule, by the great siege of Jerusalem , justice among his subjects. Moreover,
which had rebelled ; and when he Trajan was a great warrior, more at
TIZIMI TUTTTTTTUIT 00ROLOZI
527
 THE CHILD'S BOOK OF MEN AND WOMEN OMWARE
home in the camp than in the court, and
waged successful wars with the barbarian tribes
in Dacia beyond the River Danube , which
wars were recorded upon a great column
that was set up in Rome, and was called
Trajan's column
W TRAJAN ENLARGED THE EMPIRE

Now, there was one thing Trajan did which

was not wise , for he sought to enlarge the
borders of the Roman Empire, and to carry
its sway as far into Asia as Alexander the
Great had gone . Yet the empire was already
so vast that it was hard enough to keep
armies in all its borders and hold in check
the barbarians who lived beyond. So ,
although Trajan went to the East, and
defeated the armies which met him in battle ,
the wars which ended his reign were a failure,
and when he died there were dangerous foes
rising up against the empire on every side.
However, he had made choice of a wise and
able general and statesman to succeed him as
emperor. No one opposed the accession of
Hadrian , who , at the time, was in command of
Vespasian, whose son he was. the army in the East. But he had already
ItTitus
was succeeded
hewhodestroyed Jerusalem . But whenhe seen themistake Trajan was making at the end
became emperor he was kind and merciful, and of his reign . So the first thing he did was to
whenever a daypassed without a good deed done make peace with the border nations, fixing
Titus would say, " Myfriends,I have losta day." the bounds of the empire where they had been
before, though he took care to let everyone see
that his armies were going to be just as strong
as before. Then he went back to Italy, and
devoted himself to making the good arrange
ments for government which Trajan had
made still better.
HADRIANEMPIRE
: WHO TRAVELLED
CAME THROUGHOUT
But the most remarkable thing he did was
that, although travelling was no easy matter
in those days, when men had to go from place
to place either on foot or on horseback, or
perhaps carried in a litter, he travelled over
the Roman Empire, and saw with his own
eyes how each part of it was governed ; and
he even went to Britain , and built there a
famous rampart between England and
Scotland, which is called Hadrian's Wall to
this day . It is a pity that at the end of his
life he suffered from a disease which often
made him lose his self-control and do cruel
things. For there are many people who think
that there was no emperor who did so much
as he to establish the security and the
strength of the empire, and the justice of
the Roman rule.
Trajan enlarged the empire until Romecould not
keep order within it ; so that, although Trajan won
Though Hadrian made the task of ruling
great victories, the wars which endedhisreign easier for his successors, yet the task could
were a failure, and he died amid foes on every side. never be a light one ; and it was well that
MYY
528
 LEGALEGOS
-THE EMPERORS OF ROMESUCRUELLEILI LILILOUILLE

the two who followed him were both wise

and resolute , for they were also both of
them men who would rather have chosen to
live virtuous and untroubled lives as private
citizens than to bear the burden of rule. The
first was Titus Aurelius Antoninus, surnamed
Pius for his virtue, whom Hadrian had
chosen. In his reign the Roman governor
ruled over a part of Scotland as well as
England , and a new rampart was raised
across Scotland which is called the Wall of
Antonine. He adopted as a son , to help
him and afterwards to succeed hiin , the
famous Marcus Aurelius.
EMPEROR
MARCHSTEAU
WROTE ARELIUS: THEWE CAN
BOOK THAT BUY TO- DAY
WHO

These two great Antonines are reckoned for

all time as the type of noble princes, since
their care was altogether for the people over
whom they ruled, and not at all for them
selves. This is true , although Marcus Aurelius
dealt hardly with the Christians and perse
cuted them, because it seemed to him , having
no knowledge of the truth of their doctrine ,
that they were teaching men to defy the law
and to be impious.
66 )
Yet he wrote a book of
Meditations which people love and Hadrian, who succeeded Trajan, broughtback the
treasure even now, being so full of wise peace that Trajan took away. He travelled over
thoughts and noble counsel, although he knew the Roman Empire and saw how itwasgoverned,
and he even came to Britain, which the Romans
nothing of the hopes of the Christian Faith. ruled then, and built a wall across England ,
It is strange , too, to think that he wrote some remains of which can be seen to this day.
much of this wise book while he was in
camp at the head of armies in wild regions,
whose fierce border tribes were again rising
up to do battle against the might of Rome ;
for though Marcus Aurelius loved peace, he
showed himself a skilled leader in war. And
when he died all men mourned for him . Yet
he , too, made one unhappy blunder, for he
named to succeed him his son Commodus,
who was almost as bad as his father was good.
THE TYRANT DIOCLETSAN,WHO
CHRISTIANITY TRIED
Now , during the next hundred years thert
were a great many emperors, some of whom
reigned for no more than a few months or
even weeks. Only two or three reigned for
so long as ten years . For whenever an
emperor died-and a good many were mur
dered — two or three generals were usually
proclaimed emperor by the troops in that
part of the empire where they were in com
mand. But at the end of a century a soldier
named Diocles, who changed his name to
Diocletian , succeeded in making himself
emperor, and from his time there was no
more pretence that the government of Rome
was really aa republic in which a man happened Antoninus Pius succeeded Hadrian, who chose
to hold a number of important offices all at him to rule over Rome. He was a good ruler.
522
 THE CHILD'S BOOK OF MEN AND WOMEN
once, but it might almost be said that Bridge was also the victory of Chris
the emperor's will was law . Now
Now,, Dio
Dio-. ' tianity. For Constantine had already
cletian is also famous for this — that he shown goodwill to the Christians ; and
was the last of the emperors who tried before the battle, as he related him
hard to destroy Christianity, because self, he thought he saw a vision—the
by this time the Christian com- vision of the Cross , and over the Cross
munity had be words which
come large and mean : “ Under
powerful enough this standard thou
to sway the minds shalt be victor
of men ; so that the ious." From that
persecution under day he took the
Diocletian was the Cross for his
worst the Chris standard ; and ,
tiansever endured. having become
Yet he could in no emperor, he gave
wise crush them . honour to the
Now , when Dio Christian Faith ,
cletian thought and made it the
that his work for State religion of
Rome was com the Roman Em
pleted he resigned pire, so that the
his power ; but State was no longer
he had not taken hostile to the
steps to make sure Christian Church .
that his successor And this also
wouldbe fittedto Marcus Aurelius was we can
Emperors of Rome, and one of the
buy wisest to. Consta
and gentiest
in any bookshop
ntine did
rule . And so there day a book of wise thoughts that hewrote while in camp he made the city
was strife again at the headof armies doing battle against Rome's foes. of Byzantium the
between the great governors of the four chief city of the empire in place of Rome,
quarters of the empire, each fearing that and gave it the name of Constantinople.
unless he made himself chief of all he After his time it was the Byzantine
would lose his own rulership. And in Empire that ruled what we call the
this strife the victor was he whom we Roman world , till the West broke from
call Constantine the Great; and the the East ; and thenceforth the might of
battle in which he overthrew his chief Rome was not the might of the State,
rival is called the battle of the Milvian but the might of the Church .
Bridge, and the victory of the Milvian The next story ofmen and women is on 587

wand

Diocletian
He gave up
was the last of the emperors who tried to destroy Christianity , which was becoming a great power.
throne and built himself the greatest palace the world, part of which seen here. Its walls
still stand,and within them stands the townofSpalato, on the coastofDalmatia. It iswonderful to walk
abont the streets of this old town and think that 1,50 ) years ago it was the private house of a private man .
TUZTEXTITITTTT TULITE TTTTTTTTTTTT TTTTTTITYTTYTYYTY ZITIETTYYTTET TIITTITYTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTT
530
 The Child's Book of
POETRY
THE LOVE OF POETRY
course poetry is too big a subject for us to master in a short time; we can
OF only hope just now to get into the way of liking to read and study
it. But that is in itself a great thing to do, as youth is the time to form all
good habits, and this is clearly a good one. We have already made some
little progress towards becoming real lovers of poetry, and we are now to see
why it is that we cannot read poetry in quite the same way as we read prose.

HOW TO READ POETRY

Ust as poetry has a
Justdifferent purpose ce CONTINUED FROM PAGE 392
from prose, is a dif
ferent thing, in fact , so
must we read it differently. We do
not read prose, as a rule, in order
to remember every word of every
sentence . The reason is that in prose
the story told by the words, the thought pause in the middle of the first line
expressed, is what we wish to remember,
rather than the words themselves.
With poetry it is not quite so, though
even the story or the thought is still
of first importance. No matter how
strange, no matter how beautiful.
merry or sad, the story the poet has to
tell us , it must be told in words which
are themselves so chosen and arranged
that we can remember them and read
them over again for their own charm .
Many phrases are full of poetry, by
which we mean that the very words
give wings to our imagination and seem
to carry our thoughts into Wonderland .
Tennyson, the great poet , when he was
a little boy, used to be fond of repeating
those simple words from one of our
popular hymns, “ Far, far away .” They
filled his mind with strange dreams of
wonder, these simple little words.
If we read such a charming poem
as " The Pied Piper of Hamelin ,"
printed on pages 533-536, we shall
see what is meant by the value of
words in poetry. This is only a tiny
story that could all be told in a
hundred words. The poet takes 303
lines to tell it ; yet we would not
wish it shorter . We are so pleased
with the quaint words and merry
phrases themselves. Here , then , is
something quite different from ordinary
rhythm . This means
the movement of the
verses, the pauses,
stops, the rise and fall of
emphasis, the quickening or the
slowing of the lines. If we look
at the second verse of “ The Pied
Piper, ” we shall find we have to
and at the end of it , and again at the
end of the second and third lines ; but
only slightly at the end of the fourth ,
and not at all at the end of any of the
other lines in the verse , except the last.
This is how the poet contrives to quicken
the movement of his story.
Think of the grand sounds that can
be made by an orchestra. Well, the
great poets can make us hear in imagina
tion just such wonderful music.
We have, therefore, in reading poetry
to think the sound of the verses, as well
as the meaning of them, for the sound
is part of the sense. If we altered
the words we should lose something of
the poet's meaning, just as we would
destroy a painter's picture by putting
a touch of yellow where he had put a
touch of red . In prose we might alter
words and phrases without injuring or
destroying the writer's story.
Let us, then, try always, by giving
to each word, each line and verse , its
due sound and emphasis, to reproduce
in our own minds the rhythm which
the poet has intended to run through
his poem like a thread of gold on
which his thoughts are strung like
beads. In a word, we must not scamp
the reading of poetry, but read it
slowly at first, with care, to get at
the value of each phrase, its meaning , 00

prose, and we must read it differently .
The chief difference is not so much in
the actual words, though they are very
important, but in what we call the
531
and then again more quickly to get
the effect of the whole, and so many
times over, for all good poetry is meant
not merely to be read , but to be re- read .
GLPR38.2

-THE CHILD'S BOOK
THE LAMB
William Blake, the writer of this curiously beautiful little
poem , was born in 1757 and died in 1827. He wrote many
poems full of simple beauty, but he is admired chiefly on
account of his weird poems about the spiritual world ,
for which he himself drew many strange pictures,
L ITTLE lamb, who made thee ?
Dost thou know whomade thee ?
Gave thee life, and bade thee feed
By the stream and o'er the mead ;
Gave thee clothing of delight,
Softest clothing, woolly , bright ;
Gave thee such a tender voice ,
Making all the vales rejoice ?
Little lamb, who made thee ?
Dost thou know who made thee ?
Little lamb, I'll tell thee ;
Little lamb, I'll tell thee ;
He is called by thy name,
For He calls himself a lamb.
He is meck and He is mild ,
He became a little child .
I a child , and thou a lamb,
We are called by His name.
Little lamb, God bless thee !
Little lamb , God bless thee !
LUCY
In reading poetry we should always try to be in the
mood of the poet. If it is clear that he is serious, let us
fun of.
to make Words
read him seriously . For it is very easy William
serious thoughts if we care to do so.
worth was clearly serious in the following little poem ,
the first two verses of which are very fine ; but the simple
pathos of the last. verse is very easily turned into parody
by writers who like to make fun of the serious poets.
welt amongthe untrodden ways
ShedBeside
the springs of Dove,
A maid whom there were none to praise,
And very few to love :
A violet by a mossy stone
Half-hidden from the eye !
Fair as a star, when only one
Is shining in the sky.
She lived unknown, and few could know
When Lucy ceased to be ;
But she is in her grave , and, oh !
The difference to me !
FAIRY SONG
There is nothing so difficult to catch as a fairy ! Wło,
indeed , did ever manage that ? Nor is it easy to catch the
meaning of this fairy song by John Keats, one of our great
English poets. It has this lesson for us, however : not to
be sad at the waning year, the withering flower, for in the
heart of the tree is the sap that will feed the new buds of
the next spring, and even in the winter these are already
being slowly born. It is a song of hope and cheerfulness.
Shep no tear! o; shed no tear !
The flower will bloom another year.
Weep no more ! O , weep no more !
Young buds sleep in the root's white core.
Dry your eyes ! Oh ! dry your eyes !
For I was taught in Paradise
To ease my breast of melodies
Shed no tear.
Overhead ! ' look overhead !
'Mong the blossoms white and red
Look up , look up . I flutter now
On this flush pomegranate bough.
See me ! ' tis this silvery bell
Ever cures the good man's ill .
Shed no tear ! O , shed no tear !
The flowers will bloom another year.
Adieu, adieu - I flv , adieu ,
I vanish in the heaven's blue
Adieu , adieu !
Tummy TYTUTTET
532
LELAXGLEELEVER
OF POETRY
THE SLUGGARD
Isaac Watts, who was born in 1674 and died in 1748, was a
famous minister of the Gospel , who wrote many fine hymns
and many very pour ones . As a poet he does not take a high
rank ; but he was very earnest, and always sought in his
rhymes to teach good lessons. There is good teaching and
a touch of humour as well in these familiar verses by him .
'Tis complain
the yoice, of a sluggard ; I heard him
“ You have waked me too soon ; I must
slumber again ;
As the door on its hinges, so he on his bed
Turns his sides, and his shoulders, and his
heavy head .
“ A little more sleep and a little more slum
ber ;
Thus he wastes half his days, and his hours
without number.
And when he gets up he sits folding his hands,
Or walks about saunt'ring, or trifling he
stands.
I pass'd by his garden , and saw the wild brier ,
The thorn and the thistle grow broader and
higher ; (rags,
The clothes that hang on him are turning to
And his money still wastes till he starves or
he begs.
Imade him a visit, still hoping to find
That he took better care for improving his
mind ;
He told me his dreams, talk'd of eating and
drinking,
But he scarce reads his Bible, and never loves
thinking.
Said I then to my heart : " Here's aa lesson for
me, ”
That man's but a picture of what I might be ;
But thanks to my friends for their care in my
breeding,
Who taught me betimes to love working and
reading
THE NIGHTINGALE & GLOW-WORM
William Cowper was a great lover of animals,like all people
of gentle nature. In this pretty little poem he tells us of a
fancy that we could wish might be true , and though it is
only a fancy, we are the better for having our minds thus
engaged with tender thoughts for the lower animals. "
A NIGHTINGALE, that all daywith
Had cheered the village longhis song,
Nor yet at eve his note suspended,
Nor yet when eventide was ended ,
Began to feel, as well he might
The keen demands of appetite.
When , looking eagerly around,
He spied far off, upon the ground,
A something shining in the dark ,
And knew the glow -worm by his spark ;
So, stooping down from hawthorn top,
He thought to put him in his crop.
The worm , aware of his intent,
Harangued him thus, right eloquent
“ Did you admire my lamp," quoth he,
“ As much as I your minstrelsy,
You would abhor to do me wrong
As much as I to spoil your song .
For ' twas the self-same power divine,
Taught you to sing, and me to shine ;
That you with music, I with light,
Might beautify and cheer the night."
The songster heard his short oration,
And warbling out his approbation ,
Released him , as my story tells,
And found a supper somewhere else.
 COLOUROS DELEUZELE SEE
THE-PIED PIPERGLOØF
E HAMELIN By ROBERT BROWNING
THEREis
its rats a realtown
away, in Germany
in the summer calledHameln,
of the
year 1281. But legend said
because the Mayor and townsmen did not keep their promise to pay him . This old, old story was put
into verse by the great poet Robert Browning, and surely no finer children's poem was ever written.
1.
НАAMELIN Town's in Brunswick ,
By famous Hanover citv ;
The river Weser, deep and wide ,
Washes its walls on the southern side.
A pleasanter spot you never spied ,
But, when begins my ditty ,
Almost five hundred years ago,
To see the townsfolk suffer so
From vermin , was a pity.
2.
Rats !
They fought the dogs , and killed the cats,
And bit the babies in the cradles,
And ate the cheese out of the vats ,
And licked the soup from the cook's own
ladles,
Split open the kegs of salted sprats,
Made nests inside men's Sunday hats,
And even spoiled the women's chats,
By drowning their speaking
With shrieking and squeaking
In fifty different sharps and flats.
3.
At last the people in a body
To the Town Hall came flocking :
06
“ ' Tis clear," cried they, our Mayor's a
noddy ;
And as for our Corporation-shocking
To think we buy gowns lined with ermine
For dolts who can't or won't determine
What's best to rid us of our vermin !
You hope, because you're old and obese,
To find in the furry civic robe ease ?
Rouse up, sirs ! Give your brains a racking
To find the remedy we're lacking ,
Or , sure as fate, we'll send you packing ! ”
At this the Mayor and Corporation
Quaked with a mighty consternation.
4.
An hour they sat in council ;
At length the Mayor broke silence :
“ For a guilder I'd my ermine gown sell ;
I wish I were a mile hence !
It's easy to bid one rack one's brain
I'm sure my poor head aches again ,
I've scratched it so, and all in vain .
Oh , for a trap, a trap, a trap !” .
Just as he said this, what should hap
At the chamber door but a gentle tap ?
“ Bless us ! ” cried the Mayor, “ what's that ? "
( With the Corporation as he sat,
Looking little though wondrous fat ;
Nor brighter was his eye, nor moister
Than a too-long -opened oyster,
Save when at noon his paunch grew mutinous
For a plate of turtle green and glutinous ).
Only a scraping of shoes on the mat ?
Anything like the sound of a rat
Makes my heart go pit-a -pat ! "
GXGRILLEX uma EUAUTOR con
OTVOM
and itis
alsothata strange
says he mantheonce
charmed charmed
children all
away
5.
" Come in ! " the Mayor cried , looking bigger :
And in did come the strangest figure !
His queer long coat from heel to head
Was half of yellow, and half of red ;
And he himself was tall and thin ,
With sharp blue eyes, each like a pin ,
And light, loose hair, yet swarthy skin ,
No tuft on cheek nor beard on chin ,
But lips where smiles went out and in ;
There was no guessing his kith and kin :
And nobody could enough admire
The tall man and his quaint attire.
Quoth one : “ It's as my great-grandsire,
ORXDU
Starting up at the Trump of Doom's tone,
Had walked this way from his painted tomb
stone ! ”
6.
He advanced to the council - table :
And , “ Please your honours,” said he, of I'm
able,
By means of a secret charm , to draw
All creatures living beneath the sun,
That creep or swim or fly or run,
And after me so as you never saw !
And I chiefly use my charm
On creatures that do people harm ,
The mole and toad and newt and viper ;
DONUZ
And people call me the Pied Piper."
( And here they noticed round his neck
A scarf of red and yellow stripe,
To match with his coat of the seli-same check ;
And at the scarf's end hung a pipe,
And his fingers, they noticed , were ever
straying
As if impatient to be playing
Upon this pipe as low it dangled
Over his vesture so old - fangled .)
“ Yet," said he, “ poor piper as I am ,
In Tartary I freed the Cham
Last June, from his huge swarm of gnats ;
I eased in Asia the Nizam
Of a monstrous brood of vampyre-bats :
And , as for what your brain bewilders,
If I can rid your town of rats , )
Will you give me a thousand guilders ? "
“ One ? Fiſty thousand ! " was the exclama
tion
of the astonished Mayor and Corporation.
the streets
IntoSmiling the Piper stept,
first a little smile ,
As if he knew what magic slept
In his quiet pipe the while ;
Then , like a musical adept,
To blow the pipe his lips he wrinkled ,
And green and blue his sharp eyes twinkled
Like a candle flame where salt is sprinkled ;
And ere three shrill notes the pipe uttered ,
You heard as if an army muttered ;
And the muttering grew to a grumbling :
533

ARU
From street to street he piped advancing,
And step for step they followed dancing,
And the grumbling grew to a mighty rumbling,
As out of the houses the rats came tumbling.
Great rats, small rats, lean rats, brawny rats,
Brown rats, black rats , grey rats , tawny rats,
Grave old plodders, gay young friskers,
Fathers, mothers, uncles, cousins,
Cocking tails and pricking whiskers,
Families by tens and dozens ,
Brothers, sisters, husbands , wives -
Followed the piper for their lives .
From street to street he piped advancing,
And step for step they followed dancing ,
Until they came to the river Weser,
Wherein all plunged and perished -
Save one who, stout as Julius Cæsar,
Swam across and lived to carry
(As the manuscript he cherished )
To Rat -land home his commentary :
Which was, At the first shrill notes of the
pipe,
I heard a sound as of scraping tripe,
And putting apples , wondrous ripe,
into a cider-press's gripe :
And a moving away of pickle-tub boards,
And a leaving ajar of conserve-cupboards,
And a drawing the corks of train -oil flasks,
And a breaking the hoops of butter-casks :
a
And it seemed as if a voice
( Sweeter far than by harp or by psaltery
Is breathed ) called out, ‘ Oh rats, rejoice !
The world is grown to one vast drysaltery !
So munch on, crunch on , take your nuncheon,
Breakfast , supper , dinner, luncheon ! '
And just as a bulky sugar-puncheon,
All ready staved , like a great sun shone
Glorious scarce an inch before me,
Just as methought it said , ' Come bore me ! '
– I found the Weser rolling o'er me. ”
8.
You should have heard the Hamelin people
Ringing the bells till they rocked the steeple ;
( 6
“ Go ," cried the Mayor, “ and get long poles !
DIUTIUTEXTIE
534
LACTAILKSLLLLLLC
EECHIKಮಖ.4
Until they came to the river Weser,
Wherein all plunged and perished .
Poke out the nests and block up the holes !
Consult with carpenters and builders ,
And leave in our town not even a trace
Of the rats ! ” — when suddenly, up the face
Ofthe Piper perked in the market-place,
With a " First, if you please, my thousand
guilders !
A thousand guilders ! The Mayor locked
blue ;
So did the Corporation too.
For Council dinners made rare havoc
With claret , moselle, vin -de-grave, hock ;
And half the money would replenish
Their cellar's biggest butt with Rhenish .
To pay this sum to a wandering fellow
With a gipsy coat of red and yellow !
“ Beside," quoth the Mayor, with a knowing
wink ,
“ Our business was done at the river's brink .
We saw with our eyes the vermin sink,
And what's dead can't come to life, I think.
So, friend, we're not the folks to shrink
From the duty of giving you something to
drink ,
And a matter of money to put in your poke ;
But , as for the guilders, what we spoke
Of them , as you very well know , was in joke .
Beside, our losses have made us thrifty .
A thousand guilders ! Come, take fifty !"
IO.
The Piper's face fell , and he cried :
No trifling ! I can't wait , beside !
l've proinised to visit by dinner -time
Bagdad, and accept the prime
of the head cook's pottage, all he's rich in ,
For having left, in the Caliph's kitchen ,
Of a nest of scorpions no survivor :
With him I proved no bargain -driver,
With you , don't think I'll bate a stiver !
And folks who put me in a passion
TTTTTTTM MITETIT TOOK
 -THE PIED PIPER OF HAMELIN
May find me pipe after another fashion .”
!
The wonderful music with shouting and
“ How ? " cried the Mayor, “ d’ye think I'll
brook
Being worse treated than a cook ?
Insulted by a lazy ribald
With idle pipe and vesture piebald ?
You threaten us , fellow ? Do your worst,
Blow your pipe there till you burst ! ”
II .
Once more he stept into the street
And to his lips again
Laid his long pipe of smooth straight cane ;
And ere he blew three notes ( such sweet
Soft notes as yet musician's cunning
Never gave the enraptured air )
There was a rustling that seemed like a
bustling
Of merry crowds justling at pitching and
hustling,
Small feet were pattering, wooden shoes
clattering ,
Little hands clapping, and little tongues
chattering :
And , like fowls in a farmyard when barley is
scattering ,
Out came the children running.
All the little boys and girls ,
With rosy cheeks and faxen curls,
And sparkling eyes and teeth like pearls,
Tripping and skipping, ran merrily after
Out came the little children running
All the little boys and girls ,
With rosy cheeks and flaxen curls,
TUNITIE
laughter.
I 2.
The Mayor was dumb, and the Council stood
As if they were changed into blocks of wood ,
Unable to move a step or cry
To the children merrily skipping by,
Could only follow with the eye
That joyous crowd at the piper's back .
But how the Mayor was on the rack ,
And the wretched Council's bosoms beat ,
As the piper turned from the High Street
To where the Weser rolled its waters
Right in the way of their sons and daughters !
However, he turned from South to West,
And to Koppelburg Hill his steps addressed ,
And after him the children pressed :
Great was the joy in every breast.
“ He can never cross that mighty top !
He's forced to let the piping drop, ) )
And we shall see our children stop !
When , lo, as they reached the mountain
side,
A wondrous portal opened wide,
As iſ a cavern was suddenly hollowed ;
And the piper advanced and the children
followed .
And when all were in to the very last ,
The door in the mountain - side shut fast.
Did I say all ? No ! One was lame,
And sparkling eyes and teeth like pearls,
Tripping and skipping, ran merrily after
The wonderful music with shouting and laughter.
5.35

THE CHILD'S BOOK
And could not dance the whole of the way ;
And in after years, if you would blame
His sadness, he was used to say :
" It's dull in our town since my playmates left.
I can't forget that I'm bereft
Of all the pleasant sights they see ,
Which the piper also promised me .
For he led us , he said , to a joyous land,
Joining the town and just at hand,
Where waters gushed and fruit - trees grew,
And flowers put forth a fairer hue,
And everything was strange and new.
The sparrows were brighter than peacocks
here ,
And their dogs outran our fallow deer,
And honey-bees had lost their stings,
And horses were born with eagles' wings :
And just as I became assured
My lame foot would be speedily cured ,
The music stopped and I stood still,
And found myscif outside the hill ,
Left alone against my will ,
To go now limping as before ,
And never hear of that country more ! "
13
Alas, alas for Hamelin !
There came into many a burgher's pate
A text which says , that heaven's gate
Opes to the rich at as easy rate
As the needle's eye takes a camel in !
The Mayor sent East , West, North , and
South ,
To offer the Piper, by word of mouth ,
Wherever it was men's lot to find him ,
Silver and gold to his heart's content,
If he'd only return the way he went,
And bring the children behind him .
But when they saw ' twas a lost endeavour,
And Piper and dancers were gone for ever,
THE VILLAGE
Few poems have had greater popularity than this fine, manly description of simple village life, by Henry
Wadsworth Longfellow , thegreat American poet. The life of a ruralvillage is much the same in all civilised coun
tries, but in America, in the old days, the New England villages were just copies of our
chestnuttree
The avillage
UNDER spreading,
smithy stands ;
The smith , a mighty man is he,
With large and sinewy hands ;
And the muscles of his brawny arms
Are strong as iron bands.
His hair is crisp , and black, and long,
His face is like the tan ;
His brow is wet with honest sweat,
He earns whate'er he can ;
And looks the whole world in the face ,
for he owes not any man .
Week in , week out , from morn till night,
You can hear his bellows blow ;
You can hear him swing his heavy sledge,
With measured beat and slow ,
Like a sexton ringing the village bell ,
When the evening sun is low .
And children coming home from school
Look in at the open door ;
They love to see the flaming forge,
And hear the bellows roar,
And catch the burning sparks that fly
Like chaff from a threshing -floor.
TUM
536
1
LAXLENICE
OF POETRY
They made a decree that lawyers never
Should think their records dated duly
If, after the day of the month and year,
These words did not as well appear :
“ And so long after what happened here
On the twenty - second of July,
Thirteen hundred and seventy -six ; '
And the better in memory to fix
The place of the children's last retreat ,
They called it the Pied Piper's Street
Where any one plaving on pipe or tabor
Was sure for the future to lose his labour.
Nor suffered they hostelry or tavern
To shock with mirth a street so solemn ,
But opposite the place of the cavern
They wrote the story on a column,
And on the great church window painted
The same, to make the world acquainted
How their children were stolen away ;
And there it stands to this very day .
And I must not omit to say
That in Transvlvania there's a tribe
Of alien people who ascribe
The ontlandish ways and dress
On which their neighbours lay such stress,
To their fathers and mothers having risen
Out of some subterranean prison
Into which they were trepanned
Long time ago in a mighty band
Out of Hamelin town in Brunswick land ,
But how or why, they don't understand .
14 .
So , Willy, let you and me be wipers i
Of scores out with all men - especially
pipers ;
And , whether they pipe us free from rats
or from mice ,
If we've promised them aught, let us keep our
promise !
BLACKSMITH
own old English villages.
He goes on Sunday to the church ,
And sits among his boys ;
He hears the parson pray and preach,
He hears his daughter's voice
Singing in the village choir,
And it makes his heart rejoice.
It sounds to him like her mother's voice,
Singing in Paradise !
He needs must think of her once more,
How in the grave she lies ;
And with his hard, rough hand he wipes
A tear out of his eyes.
Toiling - rejoicing - sorrowing,
Onward through life he goes ;
Each morning sees some task begun,
Each evening sees its close ;
Something attempted, something done,
Has earned a night's repose.
Thanks, thanks to thee , my worthy friend,
For the lesson thou hast taught !
Thus at the flaming forge of Life
Our fortunes must be wrought ;
Thus on its sounding anvil shaped
Each burning deed and thought !
 LITTLE VERSES FOR VERY LITTLE PEOPLE
U
C
ol IGP
OLD
LD Mother Goose, when Jack found one morning ,
OLD
She wanted to wander,
Would ride through the air
On a very fine gander.
Mother Goose had a house ,
'Twas built in a wood ,
Where an owl at the door
For sentinel stood .
This is her son Jack,
A plain -looking lad,
He is not very good,
Nor yet very bad.
She sent him to market,
A live goose he bought ;
“ Here, mother, " says he,
“ It will not go for nought.”
Jack's goose and her gander The Jew and the Squire
Grew very fond ;
They'd both eat together,
Or swim in the pond.
IP
...in
MOTHER
As I have been told,
His goose had laid him
An egg of pure gold.
Jack rode to his mother,
The news for to tell ;
She call'd him a good boy,
And said it was well.
Jack sold his gold egg
To a rogue of a Jew,
Who cheated him out of
The half of his due.
Then Jack went a-courting
A lady so gay,
As fair as the lily,
As sweet as the May.
Came behind his back,
And began to belabour
The sides of poor Jack.
cromozoom
537
GOOSE
Then Old Mother Goose
That instant came in,
And turned her son Jack
Into fam'd Harlequin .
She then with her wand
Touch'd the lady so fine,
And turned her at once
Into sweet Columbine.
The gold egg into the sea
Was thrown then :
When Jack jumped in,
And got the egg back again.
The Jew got the goose,
Which he vow'd he would
kill ,
Resolving at once
His pockets to fill.
Jack's mother came in,
And caught the goose soon ,
And, mounting its back,
Flew up to the moon.
O DEAR, WHAT CAN THE MATTER BE ?

dear, wbat can the mat-ter be ? dear, what can the mat- ter be ?

ofi

dear, what can the matter be ? John -nie's so long at the fair . He

店
고
prom -ised to buy me a bunch of blue rib -bon . He prom -ised to buy me a bunch of blue rib -bon , He

prom - ised to buy me a bunch of blue ribbon, To tie up my bon · nie brown hair.

O dear, what can the matter be ?

O dear, what can the matter be ?
O dear, what can the matter be ?
Johnnie's so long at the fair.
He promised to buy me a bunch of blue
ribbon ,
He promised to buy me a bunch of blue
ribbon ,
He promised to buy me a bunch of blue
ribbon ,
To tie up my bonnie brown hair.
O dear, what can the matter be ?
O dear, what can the matter be ?
O dear, what can the matter be ?
Johnnie's so long at the fair.
He promised to bring me a basket of
posies,
A garland of lilies, a garland of roses ,
A little straw hat, to set off the blue
ribbons
That tie up my bonnie brown hair.

stay at home, If they fly away,

IF bees
Rain will soon come. Fine will be the day.
The next Verses and Rhymes begin on page 640
538
 The Child's Story of
FAMOUS BOOKS
TEE FIRST GREAT BOOKS

speare, we are not to suppose that his are among the world's oldest books.
Indeed, they are like stories of yesterday compares with others that exist in
the world's great library . The oldest story that we know of is called “ The
"
Shipwrecked Sailor," and was written in Egypt 2,500 years before the birth of
Jesus. The idea of Sindbad the Sailor may have been taken from it. But the
oldest real books are the “ Iliad ” and the “ Odyssey," supposed to have been
composed by a Greek poet named Homer between 800 and 1,000 years before the
Christian era. Perhaps he brought together the work of other poets as well as his
own ; certainly the great poems that bear his name were not all by one poet. The
greatest Roman poet, Virgil, was born just 70 years before Christ, and his most
famous work is the “ Æneid ." These three may be called the first famous books.

THE WAR FOR A STOLEN QUEEN

The Story of the “ Iliad "
E should know
We the meaning of
the word “ Iliad
before we can listen to
the story. It is the English
form of a Greek word that
1)
means “about Ilium ,"
Ilium was the name of a town
that stood on the coast of Asia
Minor. It_is usually referred to in
English asTroy, and it was the capital
city of Troja ; but it was known to the
Greeks as Ilium. Its inhabitants were
called Trojans. The “ Iliad , ” which
was composed by Homer,
a Greek poet , nearly three
thousand years ago , tells of
a great war carried on by
the Greeks against the
Trojans, but what is true
in it and what is the fancy
of the poet we cannot very
well say, as fact and fiction
are mingled together.
The King of Troy was
named Priam , and the
name of his wife was
Hecuba. Of their many
sons, Hector was famed for
his bravery and Paris for
his good looks. It hap
pened that Paris was sent
on an embassy to Menelaus,
King of Sparta, in Greece.
This king was married to
Helen, a woman so fair that
she was thought to be the
most beautiful woman in
all Greece. When Paris
STEAIA
. arrived in Sparta, the
CONTINUED FROM 46
king was away, and
Paris was false to him.
He made Helen a cap
HITI tive and carried her off to Troy.
Greece, which is a land of
and many islands, was not then
united under one king, but had
many independent rulers and
princes. So when the King of Sparta
found that his queen had been stolen
away, he called together a great meet
ing of the princes, and his own brother
(0
Agamemnon was elected “sovereign
lord of all the Greeks ” to
lead them in a war against
the Trojans for the recovery
of Helen. At the marriage
of Helen and Menelaus the
Greek princes had promised
to defend the beautiful
Helen if any need arose.
The story then goes on
to tell us how the Greeks
made preparations for the
war, how the army was re
viewed, and how the boats
for carrying the soldiers
were got ready.
It tells also of the many
famous warriors who were
to take part in the war.
Chief among these was
Achilles, the bravest of the
Greeks; then there was
Homer Ulysses, the wisest ; while
The blind Greek poet who
Nestor was the oldest and
lived nearly 3,000 years ago most experienced of them
and composed the “ Iliad." all. When all was ready, the
AUDI TEL MADUREI
539
 WATC THE CHILD'S STORY OF FAMOUS BOOKS

mighty army set sail for Troy, and, Arrayed in a new armour made for him '
landing on the shore, soon laid siege to by Vulcan, he goes forth to avenge
the city. For ten long years the siege Patroclus, and is met by Hector, the
continued, battle after battle was fought finest fighter of all Troy. Now takes
and also single combats place the greatest battle of
between the leaders, but no the long war, Hector soon
decisive victory was won. falls before Achilles in his
Thus nine of the years had wrath, and the body of the
worn away when trouble be Trojan prince is dragged
gan among the Greeks them three times around the
selves . A great quarrel city at the chariot of
arose between Agamemnon his conqueror before it is
and Achilles over a very given to Hector's father,
little matter — a slave who Priam , who bears it back
had been given to Achilles within the walls of Troy,
having been taken away by where the dead hero is
Agamemnon . As a result mourned by Hecuba, his
of this quarrel, Achilles with mother ; by Andromache,
drew to his tent, and would his wife ; by the captive
not support Agamemnon in Achilleswasthe bravestof Helen, and by all the Trojans.
any of the next skirmishes theGreek soldiers who fought A great funeral is given to
that took place between the the hero of Troy :
Trojans and the Greeks. Growing “ Perform , ye Trojans ! what the rites
bold , because the mighty Achilles require,
And fell the forests for a funeral pyre ;
fought no more, the Trojansnowbegan Twelve days, nor foes nor secret ambush
to press the besiegers. Fearing that dread ;
the Trojans might even score a victory, Achilles grants these honours to the dead."
the noble Greek, Patroclus, the dearest Thus commands Priam , the king, and
friend of Achilles, dressed himself in the with a short description of the final
armour of that powerful warrior,and led honours paid to the dead hero the
the Greeks once more against the Trojans. story ends . But this, of course, was
He drove them back into thei r city, but not the end of the war. The chief
fell, mortally wounded . purpose of Homer's great and lengthy
Achilles had now more reason than poem is to show what Achilles did
before to make war against the enemy during the siege of Troy, and not to
that had killed his well -loved friend . give a complete account of the war.
THE STRANGE ADVENTURES OF ULYSSES
The Story of the “ Odyssey "
FTER the Trojan War the Greeks re- winds drove his ships far from the isles of
A turned home, but Ulysses was fated Greece. At home his wife, Penelope, and
to wander for many years before he his son, Telemachus, were waiting for
regained his native land, and the him, but they had to waitfor ten long
" Odyssey ” contains the years after the Trojan War,
stories of his adventures and during those years the
during those years. The wanderer had twenty adven
Greek name for Ulysses was tures. We can only menº
Odysseus, and so the word tion a few here.
" Odyssey ” means about Instead of being carried
Odysseus."9 . towards Greece, the ships of
When the Greeks set sail Ulysses were blown along the
from the coast of Asia Minor coast of Asia Minor, and,
to return to their own beauti being sore pressed by hunger,
ful homes, none of the he and his men at length
princes was more anxious to were forced to land and
regain his native land than Ulysses was a princely sol
attack the inhabitants of a
thewise and brave Ulysses. dier ofGreece,who wandered small town , who fled before
But , in spite of all that his by sea and land for many them . The Greeks, with
sailors could do, adverse years after the Trojan War. plenty to eat and drink,
540
 THE STRANGE ADVENTURES OĖ ULYSSES
gave themselves up to merry -making. him his name ; but theprince is too wise
Meanwhile, the inhabitants came back to let him know who he is, so he replies :
and attacked them, slaying more than “ No -man is myname.
who had landed.
half of the sailors narrow By that distinguish?d from my tender years ,
' Tis what my parents call me,
The others had a
and my peers .'
escape in returning to their The giant then : " Our
ships. promis'd grace receive,
Ulysses and his men who The hospitable boon we
thus escaped landed after mean to give :
wards on the island which When all thy wretched crew
have felt my power,
we now call Sicily, and here No-man shall be the last I
they wandered about until will devour."
they came to a great cave. Six days of terror pass
In this cave were huge by, and the giant each
pans of milk , and the place evening reduces the fol
showed other signs of being By tying each of his men below lowers of Ulysses by two
inhabited . It was, indeed, a giant sheep, after he had before the wise prince hits
the home of one of the blinded the giant, Ulysses and upon a way of escape.
fabulous giants who, like his followers thus escaped from On the seventh night ,
the cave when the blind giant
all the gods and goddesses drove the sheep out in the morning. while Polyphemus lies
of these ancient stories, stretched upon the floor
existed only in the imagination of the asleep, Ulysses sharpens a great stake
people of that time. The giant was of wood , and, assisted by his men, this
named Polyphemus, and an uglier or is run into the eye of the giant, whose
more cruel giant it would be difficult to roars of pain awaken others of the fabu
imagine. He had only one eye, and it lous inhabitants of the island, but they
was set in the middle of his forehead. cannot enter owing to the stone that
Hewas chief of a race of one-eyed giants blocks the cave. So they call to their
called Cyclops. great chief to know who hurts him , and
Ulysses and his men were waiting in from his den he answers :
the cave that even “ Friends, No - man
ing when the giant kills me ; No- man ,
in the hour
came home, driving Of sleep.. oppresses
before him into the me with fraudful
cave a flock of giant power. "
sheep, and rolling To this they call
before the entrance back :
a stone which “ If no man hurt thee,
twenty ordinary but the Hand Divine
men could not have Inflict disease, it fits
moved. To him thee to resign."
Ulysses came for Then they go away
ward and, offering a and leave him . But
skin of wine - for all the Greeks to
in those days bot gether are unable
tles were made of to move the stone ,
skins - pleaded for and so they have to
mercy to himself wait till dawn, when
and his men . The
giant
wine
drank
and
delighted with it.
He promised a boon
the
was 10 the giant himself,
now blinded, pushes
the stone away to
let his flock of enor
mous sheep go forth.
to Ulysses for his After his long years at Troy and hismany adventures, He himself sits by
Ulysses returned safe to his wife, Penelope, and his son .
gift ; but as he im the entrance, mean
mediately proceeded to eat up two of ing to prevent the Greeks from escaping.
the Greeks, it was clear they could not: But Ulysses has been wise enough to
hope for any mercy from this monster. expect this, and has had one of his men
Polyphemus then asks Ulysses to tell bound under each of the sheep, so that
CTDETROLOCOCE
541
 THE CHILD'S STORY OF FAMOUS BOOKS
SHULU
as the animals pass through the door
they carry all the Greeks with them.
Ulysses and his crew escape to the
ships, and so ends the third of his
wonderful adventures.
A stranger adventure still befalls the
Greeks when, in their wanderings, they
come into the hands of a witch named
Circe, who gives them wine to drink
that turns them into beasts . Here ,
again , Ulysses is too wise to be caught
by any snare , and refuses to drink the
wine. It is well for him that he
does, as his wisdom makes the witch
admire him, and for his sake she re-
stores all his companions to their natural
shapes.
Many of the adventures of Ulysses
are full of meaning for us, and teach us
valuable lessons if we care to take them .
One of the most interesting is the ad-
venture of the Sirens, who are beautiful
singing maidens that sit along the
shore and sing so sweetly that sailors are
tempted to come to land. But these Penelope were there . Nobody but his
Sirens are really furies, who kill the old nurse and his dog knew the king, who
men that land , and strew their bones
along the shore. Here, again , the wisdom
of Ulysses secures the safety of his
crew . He puts wax in the ears of his
sailors so that they may not hear the
singing of the Sirens, and thus they
row safely past their land.
Their next adventure is the sailing
between a rock called Scylla and a
terrible whirlpool called " Charybdis,
THE VICTORY OF THE
The Story of the “ Eneid "
A MONG tne Trojan princes who took
prominent parts in the great war
there was one named Æneas , and nearly
eight hundred years after Homer had
written those two great poems in praise
of Achilles and of Ulysses , Virgil, the
Latin poet, followed the style of Homer
by composing the great poem known as
the “ Æneid ,” which means “ about
Æneas.” The real purpose of this
poem was to please the Latin people
and their rulers by showing how their
kings had descended from this great
Trojan prince, the story of whose life
had ceased to be true history, and had
become , for the most part , pure fable.
We have now to learn how the
Greeks succeeded in destroying the city
of Ilium , or Troy. It was due to the
542
which Ulysses succeeds in doing. But
we must now come to the end of these
extraordinary adventures and see
Ulysses landed safely on the barren
shores of Ithaca, the Greek island of
which he was the king.
Twenty years have passed since he
first sailed away to take part in the
great war against the Trojans, and all
this time his wife, Penelope, who is
famed for her goodness, her beauty,
and her wisdom, has been patiently
awaiting his return. Many other men
have been anxious to marry her, and
have come to the palace , saying,
“Ulysses is dead, or he would have
returned ere now ." But she has
refused them all, telling them she
would never wed again until she had
woven a shroud , and as she undid each
night what she had woven during the
day, the shroud was never made.
When Ulysses reached his palace, some
of the princes who wished to marry
was so changed in his twenty years of
wandering. But Ulysses told his son ,
Telemachus, who he was, and together
they killed the princes who had been
pestering Penelope. Then Ulysses sought
his wife, who at first could hardly
believe it was her husband back again,
but at length was overjoyed to think
her wise and noble king was safe at last
and all his wanderings done.
WOODEN HORSE
wisdom of Ulysses that the long siege
ended in victory. He it was who caused
an enormous wooden horse to be built ,
and inside of this were concealed a num
ber of Greek soldiers . This very strange
erection was wheeled to the gates of
Troy and left there. Then all the
other Greek soldiers got into their
boats and pretended to row away, as
if they were tired of the war. The
curiosity of the Trojans got the better
of them , so they went outside and , at
great pains , drew the wooden horse
within the walls of the city. In the
night the Greek soldiers inside of it
crept out and took the Trojans by sur :
prise , while the main army , which had
made a pretence of going vay, caine
back and joined in the siege. Troy
THE STRANGE WOODEN HORSE OF TROY

D
A

་
ནད

The Trojan War was ended, after ten years, by Ulysses. The Greeks built a huge wooden horse, hid a number
of soldiers in it, and pretended to sail away. The Trojans came out to draw the horse into their city, and,
finding the gate too small, broke through the wall. In the night the Greeks returned, and their friends came
out of the horse and opened the city gates while the Trojans slept. So the Greeks captured the city
543
 THE CHILD'S STORY OF FAMOUS BOOKS
was soon in flames, its inhabitants finds his father, who shows him the race
killed or flying for their lives. The of heroes that is to descend from Æneas
beautiful Helen, who was the cause of and is to rule over the Latin people.
all the trouble, was restored to her Æneas sets forth , and reaches the
husband, Menelaus, and so the famous land of Latium , or Italy, whose king,
siege was at an end. Latinus, entertains him well, and
The story of the “ Æneid " does not promises him his only daughter, Lavinia,
begin by telling us this, but opens with heiress of the crown, as his wife. But
the description of a terrible storm which another prince, named Turnus, King of
overtakes the fleet ofÆneas,who,afterthe the Rutuli, a Latin people, is in love
fall of Troy, from which he had escaped, with her, and is favoured by her
carrying his fatheron his back, but losing mother.. So war is declared between
his wife, had gathered together many the Trojans and the Rutuli, in which
followers, and put to sea , setting sail, there are many stirring battles, and
after seven years, for Italy . towards the end it looks as if the
In this great storm many ofhis ships Trojans might be completely defeated
are wrecked, but his own boat and six in the absence of their leader. But
others arrive safe at an African port, Æneas, who has received a shield made

Priam was the King of Troy, and after the Greeks got into the city by the trick of the wooden horse, as
told on page 543, Priam and many of his princes, as well as most of the Trojans, were killed by the victors.
and he finds himself in the rich and by Vulcan, the fabled god who made
wonderful region of Carthage, to whose the armour of Achilles, on which shield
queen , the lovely Dido, he tells the are shown the future glories and
story of the fall of Troy and the wooden triumphs of the Latin, or Roman, nation ,
horse which we have just heard. He returns to the field in good time to
also describes his different voyages after change the fortunes of thewar.
his escape up to the time of coming to In the last battle of all a single
Carthage. Dido herself grows to admire combat is arranged to be fought between
this noble prince and wishes to marry Æneas and Turnus, but the followers of
him, but he is warned to leave Carthage, the latter succeed in wounding the
and no entreaties of the queen will Trojan prince. Æneas, however, iscured
make him stay. In her despair at this of his wound by his mother, Venus, one
she kills herself. of the goddesses the ancient Romans
After sailing to Sicily, where he cele- believedin , and, forcing Turnus to fight
brates the memory of his father, Æneas a duel, succeeds in killing him.
is supposed to visit the Elysian Fields, So ends the story of the mighty deeds
0
where the ancients thought the souls of of Æneas as told in the “ Æneid . ”
people went after death , and there he The next story of famous books is on 632
544
 The Child's Book of
chi
Its Own Life
WHAT THIS STORY TELLS US
We have seen that life of any kind must have
L'Femust
food to havebegun in theuntil
support it, and sea,the seas were made there could be no food for
life at all. For life of any kind must have water - nothing in the whole earth can live
without water. The great waters, which cover nearly three parts of the earth , are
crowded with life — the bottom of the sea is a carpet of living things, growing and
dying, growing and dying, far from the eyes of men . Yet life can never become
important in the sea , for life needs oxygen , and there is very little oxygen in the
sea. The first living things must have swum ashore / helped, perhaps, by the moon ,
which makes the tides, so that life, washed ashore by one tide and carried back by
another, could grow used to the land without a sudden change. On the land, life
found the oxygen it needed, and all the progress of life has been made on the land.

HOW LIFE CAME OUT OF THE SEA

forcer
knowthat
We tain liquid we call it
there CONTINUBD PROM PAGE 365 water. If we make
was a time in the o
it very cold it turns
story of the earth hard and solid, and
when there was no life what. we call it ice-but it is still
ever upon it. We know this water all the same . On the
because, as we see in another other hand, if we put it in a
part of this book, the earth kettle and boil it long enough it '
was once far too hot for any living will all be boiled away into the air in
thing. Now , in our story of life, which the form of gas, just like the other
leads up to the story ofour own lives, gases of the air. It cannot be seen,
we have plainly to make a beginning but it is there all the same ; and, in
just at that very time when life first deed, there is always some water in
appeared upon the earth , which, up the form of gas in the air. Now re
till then, had shown no life at all; member that it is still water, just as
and I think we shall see that this is ice is water, only it happens to be not
a very interesting story . wet water, but gas water ; just as ice
Now , to begin with, what was it is solid water.
that life wanted in order that it might Now that is all very simple and easy,
exist at all ? Well, we know that all and we all knew it , in a way, though
living things must have foodof certain per
perhaps we had not thought about it;
kinds. Weknow also that all animals, and no one really knows anything he
large or small, require the help of the has not thought about. But though
plants to prepare their food for them ; it is so easy, there is no bigger or more
but plants can make use of the sim- important fact in the whole world.
plest things in air and water and For if water, when it is very hot, is
earth. Undoubtedly the plants, then, not wet, but is a gas , all the water on .
came first, and so far as the need of the earth must once have been in the
food was concerned they might have form of a gas. Of that there is no
come long before they did, for the doubt. How long there has been
simple things that they required had water in one shape or other on the
long been on the earth. But there earth, no one can say ; but I am quite
was one thing which they needed, and sure that it must have been for
which, until this time, could not be several millions of years, ages and
supplied them ; and that all-impor- ages before life came. Only, before life
tant thing was simply water. came all this water was gas ; and it
Now, before we can understand this is the first fact , perhaps, of all living
we must remind ourselves that there things, that they must have wet, or
are three different ways in which liquid, water in them . Wherever
water may exist . When it is wet or there is no liquid water there is, and

22:52
545
 THE CHILD'S BOOK OF ITS OWN LIFE
can be, no life On the earth, when
it had nothing but water in the form of
gas , there could be no life at all .
So, as the earth went on cooling and
cooling throughout so many ages, it
always travelling slowly and
was always
steadily towards a certain fixed point,
which was to make all the difference,
and that was the point where the earth
was just so cool that the water in the
form of gas , which covered the solid
part of the earth all over, began , or
partly began, to become liquid , or wet .
Apart from life, the difference between
began in the sea somewhere in the
neighbourhood of the North Pole or the
South Pole, because we may guess
that the water in those parts, which do
not get so much sunlight and heat as
the rest of the earth, would become
cooler first, and would be first to reach
that point where the water became so
cool that life could exist in it . I dare
say he was quite right. At any rate,
life would come first wherever the water
of the earth first became cool enough .
THELEIVINO, CARPET . SPREAD OVER
FLOOR 1

water as gas and water as liquid is not Now, just as life began in the seas, so
so very great, and it will pass from the seas are full of life to -day. We must
one to the other state in a moment , not forget this ; we must not even
or back again , a billion times , and then think that there is no life in the seas
a billion more . But so far as life is except the fishes and a few seaweeds .
concerned, the difference between water The water of all the seas and oceans ,
as gas and water as liquid is this : which cover much more than half of the
that so long as water is only gas life whole surface of our earth, is simply
is not possible, but wherever there is crammed with life. Though many living
liquid water life is possible. things have long ago left the sea and
Though we do not know what life swum ashore, wemust always remember
really is in itself, we are quite sure that the seas, in which life began, are
that, whatever it may be,it is something still crammed with life. We must also
that happens in liquid water. remember that the whole of the floor
ALL LIFE MUST FIRST HAVE of the seas and oceans - much more
WHY BEGUN IN THE SEA than half of the whole surface of the
I do not say that life began earth-is thickly covered , without a
directly the first few drops of wet water break anywhere, by living things , grow
began to fall from the sky and filled ing and dying, growing and dying , far
the hollow places of the earth. There from the eyes of men . These form a
may have been a long time before life living carpet spread without a break
came ; but it is certain that life did or a hole over the entire ocean floor,
not , and could not , come before this whilst the waters above them are
happened . Also , there can be no doubt crowded with active life of thousands
that when life did begin it began in the and hundreds of thousands of kinds.
water . Life was born in the ocean , and the
The first shower of rain that ever ocean now holds and supports by far
fell upon the earth must have been the greater number of all the living
made of boiling water ; and the first things upon our earth.
pools that it formed must, therefore THEONE SINTOTHE WORLD
, LIVING TO
have been very hot-much too hot for
living things. Though life can live, Now, at present we are trying to tell,
and must live , in wet water, the water in the shortest way, the story of the
must not be too hot . All living things different stages of life upon the earth ;
are killed by boiling water. But as and so we shall not here say anything
time went on, and the earth still be- about what the first and simplest living
came cooler, the water in the pools and things were like , but we shall go right
lakes would become cooler also. Per- on with the story . We shall remember
haps by this time there was enough merely that the first living things
liquid water on the earth to make not must really have been kinds of plants ,
merely pools, and ponds, and lakes, because, being the first living things,
but even seas and oceans . they had nothing but the simplest kinds
So one of the first men who ever of food to live upon , and it is only
thought about this, a great Frenchman plants that can live upon these simple
called Buffon , said that probably life kinds of food .
NOTE
546
 HOW LIFE CAME OUT OF THE SEA..AKER
in the As the ages went on, the first living have done. They make possible the
Le of the things gave birth to many more, and of change from the sea to the land, be
these some differed in many ways from cause they prevent the change from
hich do their parents , so that the seas would being too sudden . We know hosts of
heat 25 hold not only many living creatures, living creatures to -day that teach us
becer but many different kinds of living this lesson. Their proper place is in the
0 paun
creatures ; and amongst these, cer- water, and especially the shallow water
ame tainly, were the first forms of animal life. near the shore. Very often they live on
Idare HE GREAT AND WONDERFUL
THE CHANGE the rocks , and as the tides come and go
WHEN LIFE CAME ASHORE
they often learn to do without the water
Now, at some time or other some- for a time until it returns . Can you not

I
thing very remarkable must have hap- imagine how they might learn, so to
R pened. Living creatures, born and bred speak , after a long time, to do without
in the sea and, like all living creatures the water altogether , and so to live on
in the past and the present, needing the land ? Of course , I do not mean
ག་ liquid water for their life — just like a that they or any other living things
thirsty little boy of to- day-must can do without water , for all life is in
actually have dared to leave the sea. water , and though we should be drowned
Now, this was a very brave and very big in the sea, our bodies are more than
thing to do . threc - fourths water themselves. But I
Perhaps some of them left the sea by mean that these creatures could learn
flying up into the air above it , but I do to live without being actually sur
not at all think that this was likely. rounded by water.
Do you not see that it would mean a This step from the water to the
very sudden change and a very difficult land was really the greatest step that
feat ? What certainly happened, and life ever took after its first beginning,
probably happened in every case, I and the reason is a very good one,
think, was that life swam ashore. Now, though it is not quite exsy to see at
I have put it in that way because per- first.
haps it willhelp you to remember; WHY. LIFE
but I am quite sure that this great event MAKEHAPP TO COME Ashore
PROGRESS
did not happen exactly like swimming What is the real reason why life has
ashore. I wonder whether any little made such little progress in the sea
boy or girl can guess how the change and so much on land ? Well , before
from the water to the land can have we answer that question let us remind
been made without being too sudden ourselves that life has made very little
and without requiring that the crea- progress in the sea. The highest kinds
tures who made the change should of living things that are natural to the
“ make up their minds about it ? sea are the fishes, and even the cleverest
For, really, you know , they had no fishes and the biggest are very stupid
minds to make up. Now, please do not and humble things. They are quite
read on any further until you have cold, like the water round them ; they
guessed . haveamscarcely any sense at all, and
W THE MOCN MAY HAVE HELPED I quite sure that they will
HOLIFE to swim ASHORE never come to anything more so long
It must have been the moon, I think , as they stay in the sea.
that came to the help of life, and that It is true that there are certain won
really led to making life possible upon derful creatures , like the whales and
the land, for the moon makes the tides , the seals , whose blood is warm , who
and it must have been the tides that live in the sea , and who, though
made it possible for life to swim ashore . they look like fishes, are not really
I think this is only one instance more of fishes, but far higher, and far younger
the great truth that all things work in their history. But though these live
together. It has not occurred to any. in the sea they breathe air, and even
one, so far as I know , to suggest that the cleverest whale must sometimes
the moon played a great part in helping come to the surface to get a new supply
on the story of life upon the earth , but of air . Now that, I believe, is the
I think it must have been so . whole point .
The tides do what nothing else could As we know , every living thing must
547
 -THE CHILD'S BOOK OF ITS OWN LIFE
breathe or die -- that is to say, it must supply of oxygen that at last would
get supplies, and always fresh supplies, learn to— “ make the plunge," I was
of the gas called oxygen. Now , the going to say, only it was a plunge
rate at which it gets and uses up not into the water, but out of it into
oxygen decides the rate at which it the great ocean of air.
lives and the amount that it can do in Now , whilst the amount of oxygen
the way of living. The rate at which in water is, at best, only a tiny gift
it can get oxygen depends, of course, from the amount of oxygen that is in
upon the amount of oxygen that is air, the oxygen in the air is actually one
there to be got—that is plain enough. fifth part of the whole air, so that the
THE BREATH OF LIFE IS CARRIED difference between water and air in this
H °WOTHAE ROTTOM OF The sea respect is like the difference between
Now , though life began in the water bitter poverty and boundless wealth.
and lived for many ages in the water So life was abundantly rewarded for
when there was none anywhere else, the great step from the water to the
it could never make any more progress land. I have no doubt that times
in the water than is allowed by the were hard at first, because the arrange
very small amount of oxygen that ments which do very well for breathing
water contains ; just as, if you only oxygen in water are of no use at all for
have a very little money, and cannot breathing oxygen in air . That is very
make or get any more, there must strange, and yet we all know it very
plainly be a limit to the amount of well , for we know that when a fish
spending that you can do. Life in the is taken out of water it dies , and though
water went on for ages and ages learning, it is surrounded by far more oxygen
better and better, how to “ make the than it has ever known before, it
most ” of the oxygen that is in it . actually dies for want of oxygen—that
And when it had learnt how to make is to say, it is suffocated. It has no
the most of that oxygen, it could make lungs, you see, but only what are called
no more . gills, which are arrangements for filtering
The whole of the small amount of oxygen out of water which contains it .
oxygen
, supinporsea
ts -water
somuch- which,
life—though
is got THBEGREATESTEPOWAS TAKEN AND LIFE
WONDERFUL MARCH
small
from the air . Thus , there is a fair So , as I say, when life first came
supply of oxygen near the surface of ashore it had to learn how to invent
the water, which is next the air , and lungs which would enable it to use the
much less down below . It is believed oxygen of the air. Without them life
that the oxygen which supports life would die in the midst of plenty, just
at the bottom of the deep oceans is as the fish does, dying for want of
carried there in streams of cold water , oxygen in the midst of a boundless
which were once near the surface in amount of it .
the cold regions of the earth , and This great difficulty was got over,
which, as they are carried to the warmer however, in one way and another,
regions, sink down and down, carrying and we have already seen how the tides
the necessary oxygen to the life in came to the help of life by giving it
the depths. opportunities to learn how to breathe
THE FIRST LIVING THINGS MAY air when the tide was out , and
How HAVE COME ASHORE SLOWLY coming to its rescue with water when
Now, if we think about it , we shall see the tide was in . And so, after a long
that the waters near the shores of the time, and many failures, the great
seas, which are very shallow, and which step was taken ; for whilst much life
the tides are constantly spreading out remained in the water, and remains in
into thin iayers — which will wetyour feet the water to this day — for there are
unless you are careful-must really be as good fish in the sea as ever came out
the best off in the way of oxygen . And of it - yet all the great, high , and
that , we may be sure, is the reason why wonderful stages in the story of life
there is so much life of so many kinds in came after this time and are stages in
the waters and upon the rocks of the the story of life on land . This is the
shore ; and it would be the creatures subject we must now go on with.
which were accustomed to a good The next part of this begins on page 615.
MOORE DOOXER
548
 The Child's Book of
SCHOOL LESSONS
WHAT OUR LESSONS TEACH US
E are getting on with our Reading now , for in these pages we are learning
WE to read words of two syllables. In our Writing lesson we are thinking
about letters which go above the lines that Nora and Tom call their crutches.
Our Arithmetic lesson teaches us the names of the numbers from 10 to 19,
080

and the Music lesson tells of the meeting on Bass Road. We draw the
Union Jack and other flags in our Drawing lesson, and in our picture
stories in French we hear about the party's adventures on board the boat.
CONTINUED FROM PAGE 443

S READING C
WORDS OF TWO SYLLABLES
So far we have only been trying to it wants two sounds. So, if you
read and pronounce words of add the letters ER to MILL you
o

one syllable . That is a long word , get MILL -ER , the man who looks
but its meaning is very easy to after the MILL. You must have
remember, for a word of one syllable played “ There was a jolly MILLER

is a word that can be spoken all in one
sound, and with one effort of the voice,
like BUT, MILL, DOG.
Now , if you add the letters TER
to BUT you get BUT- TER , and
BUTTER is a word of two syllables.
You cannot say it as one sound ;
M
and he lived by the Dee.” And
when, instead of calling out DOG,
you say DOG-GIE, you are turning a
word of one syllable into a wordof
two syllables. Now let us try a few
more words that have two sounds, or
syllables, in them .

DOL - LY DON—KEY MON_KEY

CA-BLE TABLE STA -- BLE

2

BUT_TON BERRY CHERRY

549
 THE CHILD'S BOOK OF SCHOOL LESSONS
We all know the old nursery rhyme, “ Sing a Song of Sixpence." It is a very
old favourite, and it is set to music on page 321. You remember how it says :

The was counting

in his out his

KING COUNTING-HOUSE MONEY

was PA eating
in bread
The
the ZZATO 0 and

QUEEN PARLOUR HONEY

So, you see, these longer words are not so very hard after all. But just let us
read two or three more, to make quite sure that we can do them . You know
all about Old Mother Hubbard, of course, and so do I. But I have often
wondered — and I am sure you have, too — what happened after the poor dog had no
bone because the cupboard was empty. Well, I think it was something like this :
When Old Mother Hubbard Was the crust of his lovely plum PIE.
Went off from the cupboard

And there was Miss Muffet, too .

What happened to her afterwards ? I
think it must have been like this :

When little Miss Muffet ran off from her

tuffet
The DOG said, “ Now I'll have a try ." And spilt all her curds and whey :
That wicked old SPIDER ,

And there in a CORNER , His mouth opened wider,

Just left by Jack Horner, And tucked all the good things away.
550
 5 WRITING PRRDse.
LETTERS WITH LOOPS ABOVE THE LINES
HEN their mother came to Nora The next letter is t, and it is
WHENand Tom she found they had quite easy for you now , ” their mother
already ruled their lines. told them , as she wrote some to be
Before we write any new letters ,” copied. It has no loop like 1 and
she said, " suppose you write all the b ; its top is only half the height
letters you know. What are they ? ” of the loops you have made, and it is
“ I, u, n, m , o, c , a, e, r, v, w, x , s.” crossed by a little line like this .”
“ Thirteen ," said
said Tom , counting
them . Nora said there were twenty
six letters in the alphabet , so that they
knew just half of them, because twice
thirteen is twenty -six.
tttt
“ You remember we said that each
Their mother was pleased with the little i has its own little eye ? Well,
rows of letters , and put the papers every t carries its own little cross,
aside to show father later on . and if we don't cross t , the letter
6

“ You have never written outside changes into something else - into what
66
the lines,” she said . To -day we shall do you think ? ”
make letters that go above the line as Nora guessed quite right , for she said
well as inside them. This is the first- 1 without a loop. Tom was thinking of
1, and you see it has a long loop , then something else . He had seen his father's
a long down-stroke, and it ends in a T -square, and remembered being told it
pot-hanger.' was called a T -square because it was
like the big letter T. ( 0

“ But this,” said his mother, “ is a

l ll ll l
little t; and the cross -stroke cuts
through the upper part . The big T is
just like a T-square, and has the cross
the top.”
“ It is a big letter, mother,” said stroke onwriting
Nora ; just twice as tall as the After t, the children were
others. It looks as if it were trying to shown how to make h .
grow up and up and off the paper. ' Now, Nora,” said her mother ,
“ The loop is difficult,” said Tom, as “ how am I making h ? "
he tried to make a nice one . But he Nora looked while her mother wrote
had not noticed that the loop had to h, and thought the first part looked
end on the down-stroke where both like 1, but the second part like the
touched the line, and when he always second part of the letter n .
did that he no longer made bad loops.
“ I begins loop,” said their mother,
" so that will help you to remember the
first tall letter. There is another letter
with a loop made like 1, but it ends in
a curly tail, just like v. It is b, and it
h h hh hh
" True," said her mother .
60
Take
is made like this ." care to keep the pencil on the paper
when you run up the down -stroke
again, to make the pot-hook and the

bb b bb bf pot-hanger, and let the loop be just as

tall as those of 1 and b .”
H took Tom some time to make
Tom and Nora found b easy to nicely, but he soon discovered what
make after writing , and they Nora had said was true, and then he
understood why their mother was so made really nice h's.
particular about their making 1 “ The last letter to learn to -day,"
very carefully. said their mother, “ has a poor crooked
" I helped us to make u ,” said back , but it is a very useful letter , and
Tom , " and now 1 and v help us to belongs to kitty, though kitty cannot
make b .” make her back quite so crooked .
551
 THE CHILD'S BOOK OF SCHOOL LESSONS
Dron
You will think it very like h - h with back like h, and no loop turned to
a twist in its back . Here it is - k .”
k k k kk
When Tom began to make khe
very much wished it had a nice straight
ARITHMETICE
NAMES OF THE NUMBERS FROM 10 TO 19
АтI last we know enough to be able
to learn the names of some
numbers bigger than twelve.
Suppose we take twelve pencils and
arrange them as we did in the last
lesson — that is , make a bundle of ten
pencils for the left-hand box and put
the two other pencils in the right-hand
box. Remember that the figures which
stand for twelve will then be 12 .
Next, we are to find out how many
pencils we shall have if we get one fifteen (15 ).
more than twelve. Well, it is clear that
we must put this one more pencil into
the right-hand box with the other
loose pencils. But how many pencils
will there be in that box now ? Three .
So that, instead of having a figure 2
on the box , we must now alter it to a 3 .
This tells us that the figures which
stand for the next number after twelve
are 13. All we want now is a name
for it . As there are three things in the
right-hand box and a bundle of ten in
the other, we call the number thirteen ,
which is something like three-ten .
To get the next number after thirteen,
we put one more pencil into the right-
hand box. That will make four pencils
in that box now , and the figures on
the boxes must be 1] 4). So now,,
instead of having three- ten, we have
four-ten, and we call the new number
fourteen .
We can go on in the same way,
putting one more pencil into the right
hand box each time, and get the names
of the numbers after fourteen.
First we have fifteen (which is five
ten) , then sixteen , seventeen, eighteen ,
nineteen. The figures which stand for
them will be 15 , 16, 17, 18 , 19.
do not put any more pencils into the
right-hand box after we have nine in
the left in the middle of it .
But Nora said she liked writing k.
She thought it was much prettier than h.
“ Next time,” said their mother, “ we
will write d , g, and q. I am sure
father will be pleased with the way
you have written your thirteen letters.”
there, because another pencil would
be enough to make a new bundle of
ten, and we should tie them together
and put the bundle into the left-hand
box .
This , then , is what we have found :
One more than twelve is called
thirteen ( 13 .).
One more than thirteen is called ,
fourteen ( 14 ).
One more than fourteen is called
One more than fifteen is called
sixteen (16 ).
One more than sixteen is called
seventeen ( 17 ).
One more than seventeen is called
eighteen ( 18. )
One more than eighteen is called
nineteen ( 19 ) .
To help us to remember the names
of these new numbers we will answer
a few questions like those in Lesson 3 .
Jack had a box of soldiers with 9
soldiers in it . He had another box
given him containing 8 soldiers. How
many soldiers had he altogether ?
There are 9 in the first box . Begin
the second box by saying " ten ,,” then
eleven ," and so on. By the time you
have counted each soldier you will
have said seventeen ."
How many do 9 and 8 make ?
Seventeen ( 17).
There are eleven swallows sitting on
a telegraph wire, and eight more on the
wire next to it . How many swallows
are there altogether ?
WW
We
552
 MUSIC

How many do 11 and 8 make ? Count the pennies first and see that
A boy learned six lines of poetry one there are sixteen. Then count five,
day and nine lines the next day. How and take them away. Count those
many lines is that altogether ? which are left . 3

5 taken from 16 leave how many ?

|||||| IIII ||||| In the next lesson we shall learn
6 and 9 make how many ? some of the numbers which come after
Harry had sixteen pennies in his nineteen. You remember that when
money -box. If he spends five, how we get more than nine things in the
( 0

many will he have left ? “ loose pencil ” box we are able to

make another bundle of ten and put
(
them in the bundle box ; and we
have not had anything yet about
2009) numbers which have >more than one
bundle in the " bundle ” box.
Carbon
MUSIC gru
THE FAIRY MEETING ON BASS ROAD
“MA
AKE way! Makeway !Make way !”
cries little Bass Clef, for his
still on duty, and Bass Clef has
now taken up his position at the
road is to be the scene of a fairy meeting entrance of his road, to tell us what
to-day, and he has been up and about the fairies are doing down there.

The Fairies' cocoa -nuts on the Bass Road

since early morn to see
that nothing is wrong
with the motor-lines,
and to be ready to
tell you and me what they will tell their little guides, but
is happening. Treble
Clef has told him
what a success her fairy
procession was, and he
is quite determined that
the Bass Road Meeting shall succeed
just as well. Here is an illustration of
the two roads to show you how very
close they are together. In fact, it is
like one long road, half of it bearing
one name and half of it bearing another,
while Fairy C's middle house is situated
in the very centre :
Fairy C
E G B D F
The fairies' motor -cars are still
standing in their proper places in the
Treble Road, so little Treble Clef is
553
IO
These little people have many games
of which they are very fond, and they
have many different ways of carrying
out their various plans ; sometimes
at other times they just take them
by surprise .
To -day Bass Clef has to wait very
patiently. There are the motor-lines,
there stands our little guide, but, so
far, all is silent . Suddenly he sees
what looks like a cocoa-nut on the first
motor-line :
Fairy G's cocoa-nut
As quickly as possible he beckons to
you and me to run to the piano
and call on Fairy C in her middle house.
We press the panel of her door, and
find her quite ready to help us. She
says we are to pass by the nine little
white doors lying to the left of this
particular house of hers, and when we
come to the tenth we are to press it
 -THE CHILD'S BOOK OF SCHOOL LESSONS
very firmly and we shall hear something
we want to know. Press it down and
listen . This time we hear a deep voice ,
for there is something about this road
that makes fairy and goblin voices
very deep indeed.
On line number one you surely can see
A cocoa -nut dark-it holds Fairy G.
Yes, Fairy G has come first, and has
told little Bass Clef that to-day she
and her friends are arriving in cocoa
nuts. Fairies like to have ways of
their own, and they know it will be
a surprise to you and me , because,
somehow or other, we have
tried to ride in a cocoa-nut , have we ?
But while you and I have been talking,
the fairies have not been wasting their
time. Look ! another cocoa-nut has
made its appearance :
Fairy B's cocoa -nut
" You mustgo to the piano (
again ," whispers Bass Clef, " and this
time press the door which is next but
one to the right of Fairy G , who has
just been singing to you .” Again we
listen , and this time we hear Fairy B's
voice :
Cocoa -nut does what I want her to do,
It shows you B's home on line number two.
Yes , for some reason or other the
fairies have made up their minds to
be very mysterious to-day, and even
Bass Clef cannot foretell their coming.
For one minute there is nothing to be
seen ; the next moment another cocoa-
nut, the fairy's strange carriage, is on
its line :
Fairy D's cocoa-nut
See ! here is a third one , and Bass
Clef has just said we must go to the
next door but one to the right of the
house we have just visited, and if we
press it gently we shall hear Fairy D's
voice. This is her little song :
Cocoa-nut dear, your friend Fairy D ,
Very inuch wants the line number three.
Hardly has she sung this little
rhyme when we find a fourth cocoa-nut
has arrived :
Fairy F's cocoa-nut
Again we must hasten to the piano
and call at the next door but one
to the right of Fairy D, pressing it just
as we have pressed the other doors.
We hear Fairy F's low voice :
On line number four I'm waiting to-day,
' Tis Fairy F's voice, what more need she say ?
“ The fifth cocoa-nut ! ” whispers
Bass Clef, who is quite astonished at
the new game of the fairies :
Fairy A's cocoa -nut
never However, sure enough, here is the
fifth cocoa-nut , and inside it dwells a
fairy . Once more we must run to
the piano to find out all about it.
Bass Clef says we must go to the next
door but one to the right of the house
where we have just heard Fairy F's
voice . Press the door very gently and
listen. Fairies never keep us long,
and this time it is Fairy A who sings
to us :
Fairy A's nut could not roll very fast,
But line number five is now reached at last.
What a funny day we have had ! "
says our friend Bass Clef, and you and
I think so too, and to make it funnier
still the fairies have been making up
a rhyme while sitting in their cocoa
nuts in the Bass Road , and here it is
for you and me to read :
The first line, children , as you see,
Was taken by the Fairy G ;
When B came up the second line ,
6 )
· The third ,” said Fairy D , " is mine."
The fourth was Fairy F's ; and last
The Fairy A went singing past :
" My line's the fifth ," she sang, so I'm
Not really late, but just in time."
This time we have two little puzzles,
and we will see how quickly we can find
them out .
116
You see , the fairies in both roads are
having a game of play. They want us
to find out their names very quickly,
and directly we discover each fairy we
must go to her home on the piano,
wherever it is, and press down the
no te . Then she will sing to us.
554
 DRAWING AS
HOW TO DRAW STRAIGHT LINES
A LITTLE while ago we drew an crossing at the centre ; then draw lines
envelope ; now we are going to from side to side , both ways, also cross
draw a square . It has four straight ing at the centre, where the other lines
lines, all of the same length. crossed. It is a good plan to put dots
We shall want aa sheet of white paper, on the sides immediately opposite the
a B pencil, a piece of soft indiarubber, centre before you draw the lines from
a flat ruler with inches marked on side to side .
it, some red chalk , or a paint-box Now draw lines on each side of the
with brushes and water . lines, downwards and
Fasten the paper to the across the square from
board , and have your side to side—not the
pencil sharpened with a lines from corner to
chisel-point. corner - as you see in
Now look at your the illustration. You
ruler, which is marked 1 , will have a cross now
2 , 3 , and so on . Each 2 in the middle of the
of these divisions is one square , and if the lines
inch. Put the ruler are straight we can paint
away, and see if you this cross bright red, like
can make a little line the cross of St. George
from memory exactly an of England and the cross
inch long. Get the ruler which the Army nurses
again, and see if your 3
wear as a badge. Per
Indrawing
line is the right length. that the cross of St. George, be sure." haps you have seen it
the lines are all straight and "true
Now look well and see painted on the ambu
how long the ruler is from one end to lance waggons. Rub out all the other
figure six—that is, six inches. Put the lines before you begin to paint. Rub
ruler away again, and see if you can very lightly, or else you will rub the sur
draw, from memory, a line six inches face of the paper away, and then the
long, then measure with the ruler to see paint will sink in and look untidy,
if it is right, and make it aа little longer if instead of lying smooth and even .
it is too short, or rub out what is not If you have rubbed out a good deal in
wanted Try to draw trying to make it right ,
a square - that is , three do not try to paint it at
more lines all the same all , but draw a better
length, six inches long, one. Use plenty of wet
and all joining at the colour, unless you prefer
corners. Hold your pencil to use red chalk .
well down , away from When we have finished
the point , and use the this , we should try to
side of the point-not draw another shaped
the tip . cross in another square,
Take the ruler again and paint it a different
and place it against each colour. If we look at
line—without ruling a the Union Jack we shall
fresh line- to see whether find it ; it is called the
yours are very crooked . To paint the cross, begin at the top, using cross of St. Andrew, and
If so, try to alter them , plenty of wet colour, andpaint downwards. he is the Scottish saint.
but if they are very wrong draw a fresh There is an Irish saint, too,
square. If you rub paper too much called St. Patrick , and he has a
it spoils the surface, and the drawing cross of his own . If we do all these,
looks untidy ; besides, the pencil will we shall get plenty of practice in
not work properly after indiarubber straight lines and colouring.
has been used too much, and one cannot We must also remember how to
paint on dirty, rough paper. put on a flat wash . We shall not find
When we have a good square , we this at all difficult, because we learned
must draw lines from corner to corner , all about it in our second lesson.
555
 LITTLE PICTURE-STORIES IN FRENCH
N our story this time, which is continued from page 443, we read how the party
IN spend their time on the boat. Remember that the first line under each picture
is the French, the second gives the English word for the French word above it
and the third line shows how we make up the words into our own language.
Nous quittons l'Angleterre. Elle descend dans la cabine.
We leave the England. She goes down into the cabin.
We are leaving England. She goes down into the cabin .
Nous restons sur le pont avec papa.
We stay on the deck with papa.
We stay on deck with papa.

By
M
Tout le monde contemple la côte.
37
1

All the world looks at the shore.

Everyone looks at the shore.
Il fait très beau temps .
It makes very fine weather.
The weather is very fine.
Nous ferons un bon voyage.
We shall make a good voyage.
We shall have a good voyage.
Il y a beaucoup de falaises.
There aremany of cliffs.
There are many cliffs.

Nous aimons beaucoup la mer.

We like very much the sea .
We like the sea very much.

Maman n'aime pas la mer. Jeannette voudrait voir des poissons.

Mamma not likes the sea. Jenny would like to see some fishes.
Mamma does not like the sea. Jenny wants to see some fishes.
Cela la rend malade. Nous croisons un bateau à voiles.
That her makes ill. We pass a sailing boat.
It makes her ill. We pass a sailing boat.
556
 un homme dans le bateau . Nous essayons de le faire parler
Il y a We try him to make talk .
тап : in the boat.
There is a We try to make him talk.
There is a man in the boat.

Il va attraper des poissons

He goes to catch some fish .
He is going to catch some fish.

Il dit : " Va -t'en ! ”

He says : “ Go thou from it ! ”
He says : “ Go away !”

Bébé dit : “ Un bateau comme le mien !”

Baby says : " A boat like the mine !"
Baby says : “ There is aa boat like mine ! ”
La dama au perroquet est malade .
The lady to the parrot is ill.
The lady with the parrot is ill.
Le perroquet est tout seul.
The parrot is all alone.
The parrot is all alone.
Quelqu'un dit : " La terre est en vue.”
body says : “ The land is in sight.”
Someebo
Som dy says : “ Land is in sight . '
TAN
TE

Nous courons à la cage .

We run to the cage.
We run to the cage. Maman se sent beaucoup mieux .
Le perroquet est en colère . Mamma herself feels much better.
The parrot is in anger. Mamma feels much better ,
The parrot is angry . The next School Lessons begin on page 647.
Dohodou ODBOTTOTTE

OLDU
557
PATTERNS FOR THE TIGER, TO BE TRACED & CUT OUT
VV ^^

Where to
stitch on ear
V

Where to
stitch on eye
Х

ΑΛΛΑ
VX

SIDE HALF OF BODY I

XX

XXX
AXA

EAR
+
TAIL
4
AMMA

Centre of breast

UNDER HALF OF BODY 2

XXX
XX
VXV

MA
v
vv

NOSE
PIECE

3
The pattern 1
turned inside
out, showing
х

the parts
sewn together

These patterns can be easily traced on thin paper, which can then be used for cutting out
558
& CUT OL THINGS TO MAKE
THINGS TO DO
WHAT THESE PAGES TEACH US
THESEpages
on page 449, begin
wherewith more instructions
we learned how to makefor aourcat.toy By
Zoo,placing
which a began
piece
of tissue-paper over these patterns you can draw the patterns quite easily, so as
to be able to cut them out without spoiling the book . We continue the build
ing of Modeltown by making a large shop, for which instructions and plans
begin on page 564. With our girl's work - basket we learn how to proceed with
the dressing of a doll : our gardener tells us what to do in the middle of May ;
and the games on page 568 are specially suited 456
to the fine weather of May.
CONTINUED FROM PAGE

A LION AND TIGER FOR OUR TOY ZOO

Thisa time weare goingto add alion and
tiger to our Zoo. Our lion is made of
smooth beaver cloth that will not fray.
After the pattern is all cut out, there will
be seven pieces : two upper halves (the
whole outline) to face each other, two under
halves to face, one nose piece, one tail piece,
and the ear. Get the nose piece in place first.
Now look at the diagram on page 560 and
observe the following instructions.
Put x to x on the animal's head, and stitch
carefully right down to v. The two edges
are quite a different shape, but take no
notice of this, go straight on, and make them
come together. When you get down to
point v, fasten off the thread. Then put the
throat part of the two halves together, and
wood from slipping out, and at the other
end round off the edge of the extra half an
inch , sew four or five stitches round it to
keep it folded together ( these stitches will
represent the lion's toes), and catch it back
with a stitch or two at right angles with the
leg, so as to form a fuot.
Now push each of these legs into one of
the holes left for them, leaving about three
quarters of aninch showing of the front legs
and half an inch of the back ones, and make
the feet turn the right way.
Having made sure that all the legs are the
same length and ingood position , sew down
the edge of the cloth of the upper part ofleg
on to the under-leg. As it is thick and firm
it will not need to be turned in. The upper

THE LION AND TIGER FOR OUR TOY 200, MADE AS DESCRIBED IN THESE PAGES
stitch up till you come to where you left
off. Then go up the other side of the nose
to x again. Next get the two under halves
in place, as they are the exact shape of the
upper halves which they fit.
Leave the openings for the legs open.
Next stitch from x on the top of the head
right down the back to where the under
parts are joined on. The shape can now
be filled , beginning at the head .
Now take four pieces of wood, one and
a quarter inches long and about as thick as a
thin slate- pencil , and cutfour pieces of cloth ,
each half an inch longer than the wood and
wide enough to wrap it in comfortably. Sew
each piece of wood into a piece of cloth,
bringing the edge of the cloth to the end
of the wood at one end , and taking a
thread or two of cotton over to keep the
part of the back legs will seem a little too
large . This is quite as itshould be ; it isto
be sewn up to look like the big joint of the
hind leg. If the front ones also seem too
large, the extra piece can be disposed of in
the same way
Thetail piece of cloth must be rolled up
till it is as thin as a pipe, and sewn along
with atuft of mending worsted to match the
cloth fastened in at the end. Round the
corners off at the other end , and hem
neatly into the proper position. The nostrils
are marked by stitches of black worsted in
the seams of the nose ; the mouth goes
grimly across the chin in the way shown in
the little sketch on the next page. The eyes
should be made of amber beads or sequins.
The mane, which goes all round the
face and head, leaving only the nose and

dong
559
 THINGS TO MAKE AND THINGS TO DO
chin showing, is made of worsted to match When only the paws are visible, turn in
the cloth , sewn on in tufts of half a dozen
strands, three inches long, doubled. The
ears, almost hidden by the mane, are shaped
like the cat's ears, but as the cloth will not
fray, a single thickness will do.
The tiger is made in very much the same
way as the lion , but of orange -brown vel-
veteen . A quarter of a yard is ample. The
chief difference is in the legs , as velveteen is
not too thick to turn , and cannot be left raw-
edged. The wood for the front
legs must be one and a half inches
long ; for the back legs , one and
three -quarter inches only, as in
the hind legs it is only to reach
the big joint. Cover the wood
with velvet, forming the paws
in the same way as in the lion, and
push it up the “ trouser -legs
waiting for it. It should meet the stuffing in
the body, and, in the case of the front legs, be
embedded in it, so as to prevent the wood
from showing at the shoulder. It is some
times well to leave an
opening in the under
seam till quite the last,
that a piece of extra stuf
fing may be pushed into
the thighs if necessary.
the bottoms and hem down on to the paws.
Then take the extra material and sew it
tightly together on the inner side of the leg
as far up as where the joint should come.
From that point it may be left, and filled up
with wadding, to show the shape of the thick
upper part of the leg.
The tiger has green beads or sequins for
eyes, and tufts of white cotton for whiskers.
His nose and mouth are made just like those
of the lion , and his stripes, copied from a
picture, are marked with pen and ink. His
ears are just like the cat's, only, of course,
much smaller, as the animal is on a much
smaller scale. The tail , which is longer
than the lion's, has both edges rolled
till the two rolls meet in the middle and are
sewn together. This is the under side of the
tail , of course, and the tip must be tapered to
a point.
EAR

Inside of pattern, showing parts sewn together

Where to
stitch on ear
Where to
stitch on eye
vv

SIDE HALF OF BODY I

L
ЛХл

vvv ^

NOSE PIECE
3

TAIL
4
VXV

UNDER HALF OF BODY 2

VVV
+
THE PATTERNS
FOR THE LION

These patterns can be easily traced on thin paper, which can then be used for cutting out
560
WHAT TO DO WITH A GIRL'S WORK- BASKET
3. The Doll's Little Stays
Last timewemade thedoll'slittle chemise; soft tape, just against the edge on the right
to-day we are going to make the stays, side, and running them together. Then
which aremade just like a little girl's corsets. turn the binding right over the edge, and
A straight band of material , of either twill or hem it neatly on the inside.
coutil , is all that we The little shoulder
need. The band should straps are made of a
be about 3 or 4 inches strip of the material
Shoulder-strap folded double and
deep, according to the
size of the doll, and as stitched like the tucks,
long as is necessary to and finished in mitre
go round the body point — that is, the
about 8 or 9 inches. little corners are turned
Fold this piece of inside to form a point.
material exactly in All that now remains
half to mark the to be done is sewing
middle of the front, on the buttons and
and form a box-pleat 1. The pattern of the stays
making the button
about one inch wide. A holes. Always re
box -pleat is , of course, member to use buttons
made like a very wide a size smaller than the
tuck which is opened buttonhole , as this
and laid flat in such a prevents it from being
way that the stitching stretched and torn .
comes together in the There are many ways
@

centre underneath . of sewing on a button ,

Tack this down , and but the best way, if
then make another you have а linen
tuck half the width of 2. Stitching button which is pierced
the pleat - an ordinary with four holes, is to
CE

tuck this time - each take the cotton through

,3

side of the box- pleat, %% and through to form a

96

3 cross, as the button

and lay them so that
they fold outwards. 9 z 66 marked a in picture 3
ie
Goe

Pictures i and 9 ex s shows. If you have a

plain this quite clearly. ré 00 button with no holes
08 9,
When these have been
tacked firmly, they 29. 29 in it, make a little ring
in pencil round the
C
3
should be stitched 3. Three ways 00 e centre of the button ,
-5

along each edge with of sewing on a v and follow it all round

button
Do
996

the stitch called o

with little back
stitching. This is just li stitches, putting the
ordinary running, ex needle through at the
cept that each time the back and pulling it to
needle is taken out of the front. This is
the material it is put 6 7 8 shown in 6. The third
in again exactly where Feather - stitching way of fastening the
the last stitch ended , Buttonhole ends button , and the
as shown in picture strongest, is shewn
2. These folds to also in the picture [ C] .
gether - the box-pleat This has two holes
and the tuck on either with very narrow tape
side of it - form the run through and fas
front of the corset and tened at the back. One
make it firm. piece of tape should
0
At the back a row thread the whole row
of buttons and button of buttons.
holes are needed to The fastening off of
fasten the little stays the cotton when the
together — about four The garment finished
button is secured in
will be enough. On its place isan important
each side of the space for the buttons matter. First of all , you should never begin
and buttonholes a pleat is niade exactly to sew on a button by making a knot in the
10 match those in the front, as picture 9 cotton, but start by doing two or three small
shows, stitches in the material just where you are
The next thing to do is to make the edge going to put the button, and then put the
neat at the top and bottom . The best way needle through both material and button,
to do this is to bind them by first laying and back again. Then raise the button
a piece of silk binding, which is like a little, bring up the needle and cotton
node
561
 THINGS TO MAKE AND THINGS TO DO
between the material and the button, and
wind the cotton a few times round the sewn
stitches to form what is called a stem . This
will protect the stitches and make the sewing
firmer ; it will also raise the button from the
material and make the buttoning much easier.
The needle should then be put again through
to the wrong side, a few back-stitches done,
and the cotton cut off.
Making the buttonholes will be quite easy,
because we have already learned the stitch on
page 328 ; but what we have not yet learned
is how to finish off the ends. There is more
than one way of doing this, and it all depends
upon where the buttonhole is to be put. If
it comes in the middle of a band, it should be
finished off at both ends like picture 4, but
when it is intended to fasten two edges
together, like the back of our little stays , only
one side need be made firm by buttonhole
stitches across the end , because it is only the
side nearer the edge that the button presses
against. See picture 5.
When we made the front of the little stays,
we finished off the edges of the box -pleat
and the tucks by back-stitching them , did we
not ? But there is another way, and a prettier
one, to do this, and that is by feather-stitching
them , which holds them just as firm as the
back -stitch, and looks much prettier.
When starting to learn how to do feather-
stitching, the best way is to trace a straight
PULLING ONE MATCH THROUGH ANOTHER
N this trick the performer takes an ordinary
I The (6
wise between forefinger and thumb, as in
picture 1 . He brings his hands together,
holding them so that the matches are cross-
wise to each other. Strange to say, instead of
clashing the one against the other when they
meet, the one passes right through the
other, and the two hands are
thereby linked together, each
match being now within the
space enclosed by the match,
thumb, and forefinger of the
opposite hand. It would seem
as though they could not possibly
be again separated without
dropping one or other of the 1. Holding
matches . And yet the per
the match
former, by virtue of his magic
power, disengages themwith
the greatest ease,
drawing the hands
freely apart, quickly
or slowly, as may be
desired , and re
engages them in like
manner, the matches
remaining through 2. Position of hands
out undisturbed be after the matches have
tween finger and passed each other.
thumb as at first. The
trick depends partly upon the kind of match
used, and partly upon a little cleverness,
which, though by no means difficult, must
be practised diligently before the operator
ventures to use it in public. This, by
562
line from top to bottom of a piece of canvas,
and take up each time the same number of
threads on each side all the way down.
Thread a crewel-needle with cotton, and
bring it up on the line ; then hold the cotton
under the left- hand thumb, insert the needle
at a little distance to the right side, about a
quarter of an inch higher than the place
where the needle came out, and, pointing it
in a slanting direction, bring it up on the line
a little below the place it was previously
brought out. Pass the point of the needle
over the cotton held by the thumb, and draw
the needle and cotton through. Repeat this
on the left-hand side.
You will now have a stitch on the right
side and one on the left. Now again hold
the cotton down , and make a slanting stitch
on the right side, repeat this on the left
side, and go on in this way, making one
stitch on the right and one stitch on the left ,
until you have made the length desired . If
this is not clear, look at picture 6, which
explains much better than words. The
cotton must not be drawn too tightly,
especially if the work has to be washed , in
case the material should shrink.
Now , if you want to make fancy feather
stitching, such as shown in pictures 7 and 8,
you only have to work two or three stitches ,
one below the other, on each side of the middle
rib, forming double or treble branching.
the way, applies to all conjuring tricks.
matches used are those known as
“ white pines vestas," which can be bought
from any tobacconist. These are not of
the “ safety " kind, but have large red
heads, into the composition of which a
good deal of glue enters. The performer
prepares for the trick by privately moisten
ing the tip each forefinger ; and, in
taking the matches between finger
and thumb, he places the “ head "
end next the moistened forefinger. A
little gentle pressure makes the
match adhere to the finger
strongly enough to carry its
own weight. When he brings
the hands together, he does
SO in such a manner that
the match in the left hand
comes into contact with that
in the right, close to
the lower, or non
adhesive, end. A
slight relaxation of
the pressure of the
right forefinger lifts
the match in that
hand away from the
thumb in a very
minute degree, and
allows the match
in the opposite hand to pass through the
gap thus created . As soon as it has
passed , the thumb closes on the end of
the match as before. The matches are
separated in like manner.
 A LITTLE GARDEN
WHAT TO DO IN THE MIDDLE OF MAY
&
WE have already considered the sowing of stake and tie up any plants that show signs
annual plants, and even yet-for it is
not too late for autumn Aowering to make
a last sowing, if necessary - Frenchor African
marigolds are suitable, as their bright orange
and chestnut-coloured flowers are always
beautiful.
But there are other seeds beside those of
annuals that must be thought of this month ,
and sown at once, if we wish to rear plants
that will give us plenty of flowers next year.
These plants are either perennial or biennial
—that is, they flower once a year or once in
two years, and all those mentioned here are
quite hardy and able to stand the winter
without protection. A true biennial takes
much longer than an annual to arrive at the
flowering stage, but, having flowered, like the
annual , it dies.
A perennial continues to flower year
after year. Six packets of inexpensive seeds
that may be sown at the present time would
include Wallflowers, Sweet-williams, Bromp-
tor: Stocks, Canterbury Bells, Everlasting
Peas, and Daisies.
If we have no room in our little plot for
them at present, we may still rear them in
boxes, pans, or pots. The boxes should not
be too large ,but they should be deep enough
to afford sufficient room for the roots of the
little seedlings. Holes must be bored in the
bottoms, and over these holes we must place
bits of broken pots.
It is a good thing to put some cinder-ashes,
as large as nuts, all over the bottom , if
sufficient bits of broken pots are not at hand,
to a depth of an inch or so, in order to allow
the water to escape from the soil. The soil
itself should be fine, and, unless already
sandy, some silver sand or other fine sand
should
be added to it.
After the seeds are sown , they should be
put in some place that does not catch the
midday sun, or, if this cannot be managed,
some shade must be given. After a time,
when the seedlings are well up, they can be
planted out wherever we can find room for
them . It need not be the place we wish them
to flower in ; and in the autumn, if we
desire it, they can be moved. They might,
perhaps, be planted where a crop of cresshas
been cut.
Sow thinly and plant out thinly - this must
never be forgotten . Although only six kinds
have been mentioned , there are hundreds of
different kinds that can be reared in this way,
or sown in the open ground.
In dealing with the seedling plants, we
must remember that when it comes to
planting out the stocks we may throw away
the largest and strongest ones , and plant only
the smaller ones, because the big, sturdy
specimens will be the most likely to produce
single blossoms instead of the fine double
rosette - like flowers we hope for.
Some seasons are a great deal more for-
ward than others, according to the weather ;
therefore we must be on the look -out to
563
MONTH BY MONTH
of needing it. Once let them grow crooked,
or begin to lie along the ground when they
should stand upright, and there is little hope
of ever tying them up so as to make them
look as they should . 1
This tying and staking is a really important
matter, and should be done very carefully,
Many people never tie out a plant to the best
advantage. Where there are many stems,
three or four stakes will be better than one ;
and some of the stems will be tied to each.
To tie a plant into a tight, thick sheaf
is the worst thing possible, both for its
appearance and its health . It wants the air
to circulate quite freely through it, or it will
not produce nearly the number of flowers it
might and could do.
For small plants bamboo canes make
capital stakes ; the stems can be tied out
with raffia or, better still , raffia tape. But
for tall, heavy plants — that is to say, those
that will become tall and heavy before the
end of the summer - like the hollyhocks, for
instance, strong stakes are necessary, and
these must be driven deeply and firmly into
the ground . Strong tarred line should be
used to tie the plants securely to the stakes,
but they must not be tied up too tightly or
closely
The stake being driven down, the tying
material should first of all be tied to the
stake, and then brought forward round the
stems of the plant, as by this method there is
no fear of the line slipping down. The
illustration on this page makes this quite
clear. The first tying will have to be followed
by a second later on , when the plant shall
have made further growth, especially in the
case of tall ones .
We must remember
that we are not tying
up our plants solely
for fine, still days,
but to help them to
withstand sudden
storms and high
winds. Many of
them would never
need tying at all if
the weather were
always fine and
sunny, but these are
often the ones that
need it most when
rough winds buffet
them and heavy rain
beats them down .
If a sowing of
Thisis how plants are tied up radis hes has not yet
to help them to grow straight,been made, the seed
may be put in at any time. It is best to sow
a few seeds at a time, and make three or
four sowings, so that they may all be eaten
at their best. Radishes sh uld be carefully
attended to and watered every day if
necessary , as the best and crispest radishes
are those that are grown quickly.
PLANS FOR A LARGE SHOP IN MODELTOWN
ROOF OF SHOP

000
FRONT WALL OF
司 UPPER FLOOR

OTS
SON

N AU
WHE

ROOF OF FRONT SHOP

3. Bending the card

1. The completed shop

FRONT OF SHOP

4. Bending the first floor

SHOP FLOOR

BACK
WALL
턴/ 2. Plan of shop
on scale.
Measurements
to be taken
FIRST FLOOR with rule C

6. First - floor partition, full size 7. First - floor partition. full size

6. Plan of top floor, full size

8. Attic partition , full size 9. Attic partition , full size 10. Back of the house open
564
 COLORED

A LARGE SHOP FOR MODELTOWN

ITT is to be hoped that we did not find too glue the edge slips where they go behind the
difficult the work of making the cottages walls and so make it strong and rigid . The
and shops that we have erected in Modeltown. turned - up edge of the first floor must be glued
They were really not so difficult as those we to the inside of the high front wall.
are now going to make, but with care and At the four crosses onthe plan we make pin
patience those we are now about to make are holes in the walls , and glue inside the walls at
well within our skill. We shall make a larger these places slips of wood , such as wooden
matches without their heads ,
shop than those we have so that they may support the
e
already built. Small shops are top foor. We have don
very well for a small village, this work before, so that it
but the village gives will not be at all difficult.
as
evidence of growth that will We must now draw and cut
make it an important town , out of cardboard the plan of
large shops begin to rise. the second floor as shown in
Some shops, also, need much picture 5, and the partitions
more room than others. A in pictures 6 , 7 , 8 , and 9,
furniture shop, for instance, making all these the same
is usually bigger than a baker's size as the pictures — that is,
shop , because the tables and using the full-sized rule both
sideboards take up much more for taking the measurements
room than do the loaves and and for marking the sizes on
cakes . So we shall make a the card. Picture 10 shows
larger shop , and let it serve how the top floor and the four
for a cabinetmaker or any partitions are to be placed .
er kin
othThe d of sho pke eper who 11.eBack of hou se, with fire-escape Those with the slant go into
shop we are about to mak is shown the attics at the very top and the other two
needs a good deal of room .
in picture i, and if we refer to this as we go into the poor below it. Wemust glue all
along it willhelp the building operations these carefully into place, We find that the
very much . Picture 2 is the plan of the frame back wall of the building hinges open, except
of our shop . It is drawn to one-third scale, the part on the ground floor, and we shall
so in making the drawing on our card we find this very convenient when we furnish the
must use rule C to take the measurements upstairs rooms. We will add a very necessary
and make our drawing with the full-sized rule. provision for tall buildings — a fire -escape. If
We have already seen, on page 218 and we look at picture 1 ), we see the fire-escape
elsewhere, the meaning of the different kinds attached to the back wall. As the upper part
of lines in our plans , so we need not go over of the back of the house hinges open , we
these particulars again. Having made the must make the escape in two parts. First we
drawing and cut out the card in the usual draw and cut out a card to the shape of picture
way, we bend up the card as shown in 12 , which is a full-sized drawing . We attach
picture 3. This picture shows by dotted this stairway to the lower part ofw the backw
No we dra
lines the end part that folds up to make wall, as shown in picture to.
the floor of the upstairs, so as to give a better and cut out the plans in pictures 13 and 15,
view of all the parts. This part isshown in making the drawings the same size as the
solid lines in picture 4. Having folded up plans. Picture 15 is the upper stairway with
the card to make the frame of the house , we the top and the intermediate landing, and

13. Side of upperpart of

full size
fire - escape,

12. Lower part of fire -escape, full size

14. Stair and platforms

16. Stair with railing

15. Upper part of fire - escape, full size

565
 19. Chimney , full size 20. Chimney, full size

18. Skylight

21. Large signboard , full size

17. Plan of skylight, full size

22. Small signboard, full size

picture 13 is the hand-rail that goes right only the signboards, of which we shall
down the side and is attached to the walls want three. We have a big broad one for
and also to the edges of the stairs and the front, up near the attic windows. This
landings. we cut out to the same size as picture 21, and
Picture 15 shows the upper part of the fire- the plan of two smaller ones, one of which we
escape after it has been attached to the wall, attach to the front and one to the side of the
and picture 16 shows how the fire-escape shop just above the ground -floor windows,are
stairs with the hand-rail attached would look given in picture 22. All the signboards we
if we could see them from within the house will make the same size as the picture plans,
itself. It will perhaps using only the full
be easier to attach sized rule for taking
the hand-rail to the the measurements
stairs before we and for making the
attach the latter to drawings on thecard.
the wall, but so long We see in picture i
as we cut everything where the signboards
out neatly, and glue are placed. It will be
the pieces into posi very nice if, before
A
H

tion firmly and putting up the sign

correctly, this is not boards, we put the
important. There lettering on them.
are lines on the plan WALNUT & BIRCH We can make the
in picture 2 showing shop any kind of
exactly where the trade we like. Let
stair has to be at us have it a furniture
tached , and picture shop. So we will
II gives a good idea put on the broad sign
of how the whole the name of the
fire - escape should E RS owners of the shop.
look after it has been HOUSE FOREST We will call them
CABINETMAKERS
glued into place. Walnut & Birch,
The back of the which is a very good
house is now com naine for furniture
plete, and we shall makers . Now , upon
now turn to the front one of the smaller
of it. First we make signs let us print the
and cut out the sky word Cabinetmakers
light, the plan of and on the other
which is given in House Furnishers.
picture 17. We make But before gluing on
it the same size asin the finished shop, made as described in these pages the facias we might
the picture . The paint the building.
place where it has to be fitted is indicated in The sun -blinds we will make striped in green
the plan in picture 2,and picture 18 shows and white, and we will have the glass of the
how it is attached. We can also see the skylight and of the windows a pale blue. The
building with the skylight in position in vertical walls of the building we will have
picture 1. red. We can use red ink or red paint, but a
We have now to make two chimneys, and better effect will be got by powdering a piece
the plans, which we make the same sizes as of red brick, and, after painting the walls with
the plans on our card, are given in pictures weak glue, applying the powder before the
19 and 20. We have already made and glue dries. Indigo or slate -coloured paint will
attached chimneys several times, so we know donicely for the roof.
how to do it by this time. There now remain Our next building in Modeltown will be a villa .

566
 LITTLE PROBLEMS FOR CLEVER PEOPLE
"HESE problems are continued from
THESE
page 456, and the answers below
refer to the problems on that page.
WAS IT QUICKER TO CYCLE ?
36. James and John are cycling from
Liverpool to a village 20 miles distant, and
when they have gone only 4 miles John's
machine breaks down . They wish to reach
their destination at the same time. They can
both walk or they can use the cycle alter-
nately. They can
walk 4 miles an hour
and cycle 8 miles an
hour. Which is the
quicker way ?
WHICH ROAD DID
CHARLIE TAKE ?
37. Charlie started
from his home in
tending to cycle to a
village io miles away.
He came to cross
roads and found that
the signpost had
been pulled up and
lay in the middle of
the road. Yet he
made the signpost How did Charlie know the way ?
tell him which was
the proper way to go. How did he do it ?
HOW LONG WERE THE CANDLES ?
38. I had two candles, one of them an inch
longer than the other. I lit the longer at
4.30 and the shorter at 6. At 8.30 they were
both the same length. The first burnt out at
10.30 and the second at 10 o'clock .
How long were they before I lit them ?
WHEN WILL HARRY HAVE A CYCLE ?
39. Harry, aged 12, has been promised a
bicycle when he is one -third the age of his
father, who is now 56 years old.
When will Harry get the bicycle ?
THE ANSWERS TO THE PROBLEMS ON PAGE 456
30. The train passed me—that is, travelled
its own length - in 9 seconds, and it travelled
its own length and 88 yards in 21 seconds.
Therefore, it went 88 yards in 12 seconds,
and, seeing that it travelled its own length in 77. minutes, and at 10 miles an hour he
9 seconds , its length is three- quarters of therefore saves 12 minutes in each mile. As
88 yards—that is, 66 yards .
31. In another 3 years Tommy will be 6
years older than he was 3 years ago . If
his age is then 3 times what it was 3 years
ago, 6 years must be twice his age 3 years
ago, so that he was 3 years old 3 years ago ,
and he is 6 years old now .
32. With no current Duncan would go
three-quarters of a mile in one quarter of an
hour—that is, 3 miles an hour ; but he actually
goes only at the rate of 1 % miles per hour,
and the difference between 3 miles and 12
miles is the speed of the current, which is,
therefore, 1/2 miles an hour.
33. Ten miles an hour is i mile in 6 minutes,
567
HOW LONG WAS THE TELEGRAM ?
40. A man sent a telegram to York. If he
had sent it to New York it would have cost
him a shilling a word, and the total cost would
have been 45. 60. more than he paid.
How long was the tele m?
HOW MUCH WATER WAS SPILTI
41. A boat leaving a wreck had water to last
13 days, allowing each man one quart each
day. After 5 days some water was spilt,
and one man died on the same day. The
water then lasted
just the expected
time . How much
water was spilt ?
HOW MANY TRAINS ?
42. A train leaves
New York for San
Francisco every
morning at 9 o'clock,
and another leaves
San Francisco for
New York every
morning also at 9
o'clock. Each train
takes exactly five
days to make the
journey across the
continent.
If I travel in one of
these trains, how many trains shall I pass
coming in the opposite direction ?
WHICH FARM WAS THE BIGGER ?
43. A farmer in Canada boasted that he
had a farm of 4 square miles. Another
farmer, who heard him, said : “ My farm is
bigger than yours. It is 3 miles square."
Was the second farm really the bigger?
WHICH IS THE HEAVIER ?
44. “ Which is the heavier," asked Herbert ,
00
an ounce of gold or an ounce of feathers ?
An ounce of gold , of course," replied his
sister Maud . “ But a pound of feathers is
heavier than a pound of gold ,” said Herbert.
Was he right ?
so that if the farmer had gone home by the
road he took on the outward journey he
would have saved 24 minutes instead of 12
minutes. Eight miles an hour is a mile in
the saving in time would have been 24
minutes (which is 16 times 12 minutes) by
the shorter route, it must have been 16 miles.
Thus the outward journey was 16 miles long,
and the homeward journey was 18 miles.
34. The whole sum wasin 4s. pieces.
35. When the first party of men met the
second party they had used one day's food,
and the remainder would have lasted them
4 days more, but as the addition to the party
curtailed the period by one day, the new men
must have eaten as much in 33 days as the 9
men ate in one day. But 3 men would eat
as much in 3 days as 9 men eat in 1 day.
Hence there were 3 men in the second party.
 MORE GAMES TO PLAY OUT OF DOORS
ERE are some more games for boys
HER!and girls to play out of doors.
Some can be played on the lawn ; others
are more suited to the playground.
TUG OF WAR
A STRONG, long rope is laid on the ground
across a chalk line. The players are TOMa TIDDLER'S
then divided into two parties, one side taking the playground. The boy chosen for Tom
up the rope on one side of the line and the
other the opposite side. At a given signal
they pull against each other with might and
main, and the side that draws the enemy
over the line are the victors.
LEAP- FROG
Thefrog bends down with his hands on his
knees and his back up. The leaper runs
toward him, places both hands on the bent
back, and, spreading out his legs, passes
over, to come down on his feet the other
side. Running a short distance, he bends in
turn , and he who has lately been frog goes
over him in the same way. If a number of
boys be playing it becomes very warm fun,
for as each one goes over he runs and bends,
so that there are many backs to leap before a
turn comes to stoop.
A SACK RACE
this race each runner puts his feet into a
IN large
sack , and draws the top of it to-
gether round his body , where it is tied with
string. Before beginning to run it is best to
push your feet well into the opposite corners
of the sack , so as to have as long a step as
possible , and not to try to go too fast. If
you go fast you may fall, and it is not at all
easy to get on your feet again once you are
down . FIELD GOLF
We are going to playgolf ina new way,
which is quite simple, but very good
and Choose a starting -point in a large field
fun. dig
there a very small hole . One
hundred steps away, in a straight line from
this, we make another hole in the ground .
Then, at the end of another hundred steps,
another hole, and so on until we have gone
round the field and are back at the starting
point. These holes mark our golf-course.
Each player is armed with a club -ended stick
and a small, hard indiarubber ball . The
game is to strike these balls round the
course, knocking them into each hole as it is
reached, and the one who does this and gets
round to the starting-point with the fewest
strokes wins. Each player, of course, only
hits his own ball. The starting-place should
also be used as the last hole.
TIP-CAT
THE tip-cat is a short piece of wood,
sharpened like a lead pencil at both
ends. It is placed on the ground in the
middle of a large circle, and the first player
strikes one end sharply with a stick. As it
leaps into the air he strikes again, and if he
succeeds in driving it to a distance he follows
The next THINGS TO MAKE AND THINGS TO DO are on page 655
568
it up and continues to “ tip " it till hemisses,
when the next player carries it back to the
circle and takes his turn. The one who
makes the most " tips " without a miss wins
the score .
TOM TIDDLER'S GROUND
chalk line, GROUND is marked
and should off with
be nearly half
Tiddler takes his stand on it to protect his
gold and silver, and he must never cross the
chalk line. Presently some of the other
players rush over the boundary, crying,
" I'm on Tom Tiddler's Ground, picking up
gold and silver.” Any boy that Tom can
touch before he escapes should be made to
hand over a forfeit, or stay as a prisoner. On
the other hand, if Tom chases him beyond
the line, and another player enters the ground
before Tom gets back, the new - comer may
take his place, and becomes Tom Tiddler.
STEEPLECHASE
Thisishard work aswell asgood play:
Before starting, a certain point is fixed
upon at some distance ,with fences and ditches
and hedges and brooks in between. Then
the word “ Off ! ” is given , and the players
race away to see who can get there first.
In such a race it is not certain that the fastest
runner will win , for the boy who knows
how to get over a difficulty stands a good
chance.
THE TRAVELLER AND THE WOLVES
The smallestboy or the slowest runner isthe
traveller, and the traveller has to get to
his journey's end without being caught. The
rest of the players are the wolves. Before
setting out on his journey, the traveller is given
as many tennis- balls as there are wolves,and,
of course, there should not be more than four
or five, or he will have too much to carry.
When he has got some distance away, the
wolves roar out that they are coming, and
the race begins. When the traveller finds a
wolf overtaking him, he throws out one of
the balls, which the wolf must secure before
he can take up the race again . Of course,
the traveller's object should be to throw the
ball in a way that will lead the wolf from the
direct path . Thus, he should never throw it
in front, or the swifter runner will pass him to
secure it, and then merely wait for him to
come up. Knowing what the traveller is
going to do, the wolves will probably spread
out a little to either side in the hope of stop
ping the balls more quickly. Therefore, the
traveller should do his best to find out where
the nearest wolf is, and the more skill he
shows in managing the balls the greater will
be his chance of escape. Above all, he should
not throw them away too soon .
If the chances against him are very
great at the start, he might be provided with
more balls than there are wolves. Of course ,
a distant spot should be chosen as a goal.
 The Child's Book of 93
ALL COUNTRIES
THE HISTORY OF OUR LAND
THE Normans left their mark on England, and their influence works in our life
THE even now. But it was not all real progress after the death of the Conqueror.
There were still fightings for the crown, and the throne was all the more insecure
because the Kings of England ruled over provinces in France stretching away to
Spain. The Conqueror was succeeded by his son, William Rufus, who was
succeeded by Henry I. and Henry II. Then came Richard, who was nearly always
away fighting. After Richard came John, a bad king, whose reign is important
because the real power of the people then began. The barons forced John to sign
the Great Charter which gave England freedom and good laws. John's son Henry
became king at nine years old, and in his reign the people took another great
step forward by founding Parliament, the Great Council of all the people,
which has grown until, in our own day, it is the chief power in the land.
THE BEGINNING OF OUR FREEDOM O

HEN Taillefer, in the French lessons

WH the minstrel ,
led the Normans to
victory at Hastings ,
tossing and catching his long
sword as he rode forward on
his gay, prancing horse , the
words of his bold song were in
CONTINUED FROM PAGE 518 in this book . The
writer of long ago
says that he has so
arranged it in order that the
children may understand what
they are reading, and when to
son et sa , mon et ma , le
use

French . What a roar of deep bass et la .”Even the accounts of what

voices as the whole army behind him was done in the law courts , and at
took up the air ! the meetings of the Wise Men , who
Post

When the voice of the archbishop helped the king to govern the country,
rang out in Westminster Abbey two were all in French. But the use of
months later, on Christmas Day , ask- the language spoken by Bede and
ing if it were the will of the people Alfred did not die out, as some

that William should be crowned king,
he spoke first of all in French.
But , you say, all this happened
more than 800 years ago ; how do
you know what they said, and in
what language ?
Look again into that eight -sided
case in the British Museum , where we
received the actual message from the
past, in the story of Bede , and in the
Anglo- Saxon Chronicle. You will re-
member that the opened pages tell contains many words brought over
of the “ Angel ” boys at Rome, and a
great victory over the Danes.
Next to the Chronicle comes a
history of the Norman Conquest , in
French, written by a man who knew
many of those who had fought in the
great battle. For many years authors many other places. Most of them look
wrote in French, becausethe king and strong enough now to stand a siege ,
0 his court , and nearly all the richest
people in England , spoke French.
There is an old poem written for the
children of those times, in French ,
with English meanings below, just as
.
IR D 23
o
O
thought it would, any more than did
the English nation, sorely oppressed
as it was. By slow degrees the
English and their language rose again ;
Normans married English wives ,
and naturally their children and
grandchildren spoke both French
and English.
By slow degrees the use of French
as a separate language passed away,
but the English which we speak now
by the Normans.
Amongst other traces left by the
Norman conquerors are the strong
square towers, or “ keeps,” to be seen
not only by the banks of the Thames,
but at Norwich and Rochester, and
and take us back to the days when
the nobles shut themselves up in them ,
and sallied out to make prisoners
and to steal and plunder. There was
no redress for the unhappy neighbours.
WINখলে ।
569
 THE CHILD'S BOOK OF COUNTRIES-***
DIZKUULICA

We have already looked at the stone set up in the beautiful forest , to

beautiful little Norman chapel in the mark the spot. But there was no
Tower of London ,where the Conqueror mourning for the Red King ; people
and his family are believed to have were glad and thankful when he died.
attended service, and all over England His brother, Henry I. , was king after
and the south of Scotland we can find him . His nickname was Beauclerc,
examples of the round arches and the French for fine scholar. He
beautiful mouldings which go towards began well by giving his people, three
making what is called the Norman days after his brother's death , a letter,
style . in which he promised to set right
HE MONUMENTS AND PICTURES OF the bad rule of his brother's time,
THETHE NORMAN TIMES and to keep the laws of Edward and
Some of the abbeys and cathedrals Alfred .
are still standing, having been repaired There are many of these letters, or char
and added to through the centuries ters, that we can see in the Manuscript
since the time of their founding ; others Room of the British Museum , promisesof
are in ruins, without roofs, with grass all kinds about lands and government,
and ivy showing up green against the made through many years of history.
grey stone . If we cross over to Nor- The earliest belong to Saxon times, and
mandy, we find many more of these you can find on them many names
buildings in the old home of the Nor- that you already know, such as Edgar,
mans ; at Caen, where the Conqueror lies who rowed on the Dee ; Canute, the
buried, and whence stone camein barges Danish king, whose flattering courtiers
up the Thames to build old St. Paul's ; asked him to command the waves of
at Bayeux, where the famous tapestry the sea to stop ; Edward the Con
is kept ; at Rouen , the old capital of fessor, who built Westminster Abbey.
Normandy, and hundreds more. WHO HELPED THE
As we look out theseplaces on the HEPBORTHE BEASTMUSTICE
south side of the Channel let us think of Then you can pass on to those of
the amount of coming and going there William İ . and his two sons, granting
was across this “ arm ” of the sea, which land to various nobles and Churchmen ,
lay in the midst of the dominions of the all with Norman names . Next comes
Dukes of Normandy, who were also a grant by Matilda, the daughter of
Kings of England . Barons and soldiers Henry I., of land to the lovely abbey
were constant travellers, for wars were at Reading, where to this day the ruins,
unending then ; traders, too , came and kept in fine order, can be visited by
went ; workmen and builders ; fair the thousands of people who live near
ladies as brides, as well as the kings and work in the great biscuit factories
themselves, who had often to cross from and in the seed nurseries of blazing
side to side to look after their posses- colours that we can see aswe travel past
sions. The pictures of the ships of on the Great Western Railway.
those days, so beautifully painted Henry had pleased the English very
by the monks in monasteries, suggest much by marrying a princess who was
small comfort on board, and very little the daughter of Queen Margaret of
room . Scotland, belonging to the old Royal
KNIGHT
THEKING WHOSE ARROW KILLED A Family of Alfred and Edgar. They felt
, AND WHO FLED IN FRIGHT now that they had some share in their
There was a man who fled over the country, and took heart once more ,
Channel from Southampton in the first and hoped for better days. Queen
year of the twelfth century who must Maud was a good woman , like her
have felt in desperate anxiety for his ship mother, and she helped her husband in
to go quickly . He was a knight, who had many ways. He put down the great
been hunting in the New Forest with and oppressive power of the nobles,
the Conqueror's son , William , called and destroyed many of their castles.
Rufus, or Red, on account of the colour He also helped the poor to get justice.
of his hair. Either by accident or not, Henry lost his only son, William , when
the arrow he shot killed the king, and he was eighteen. He was drowned,
the knight was so frightened, he rushed with a number of his young com
away to Normandy. You can see the panions, while crossing the Channel.
570
 autifulbars THE CONQUEROR'S CORONATION & DEATH
at there was

ul whenhet
I was bez
was Bali
scholar
his people
s deat,hale
brother's
of Edwards

letter,s and
theMans
um,prome
dgovern

LEGAL
Its of La

XEOUS
ton take

OS
many
luchasE TI
Came
ing our
he w ਗ॥

isterdu
HELPE

to the
S, grze

ext or
When William the Conqueror reached London, after defeating Harold at Hastings, he was crowned King of
uughter England in Westminster Abbey. A great riot immediately followed , owing to the Norman troops outside, when
they heard the shouts of the people in the Abbey, thinking that an attack was being made on the new king.
site

Ron

William had been twenty years in England when he had to visit Normandy, which had been invaded by French
w
barons. One day he was riding down a steep street at Mantes, when his horse threw him . He was carried to
Rouen seriously injured, and died in a monastery. At his death his servants robbed him and fled , and he was alone.
mon 571
 GEODICAT
O
THE CHILD'S BOOK OF COUNTRIES
The fine new White Ship , in which order in England, by destroying castles
Henry had been persuaded to let his and re- establishing the power of the
son travel, struck upon a rock , and only courts of justice , he made the Scotch
one of all the passengers managed to king give up Northumberland, Cum
hold on to the wreck till morning.
Henry never recovered from the great of berl andChev
the d tWeHil
anio stmorland,triall south
ls . He ed to get
pr
shock, and though the nobles omised Wales and Ireland , but without much
to take his daughter, Matilda, for their success . The only Englishman who
queen at his death , it was his nephew was ever Pope of Rome lived at this
Stephen who succeeded him .
WAILING OF THE PEOPLE WHEN time, and made Henry a present of
THHE
ETHE LAND BARE NO CORN Ireland , because it was said then that
islandco belonged to th Po ed , wi
anthd
In Henry's reign the Anglo- Saxon all
that he s ul d do what hee likpe
or English Chronicle begun by Alfred ,
and continued year by year in different them
Natu
. rally , the Irish did not agree to
hands , came to an end. Matilda and this. They preferred their own wild
Stephen disputed long for the crown . ways , with wild chiefs always struggling
An old chronicle of the time gives an
account of Matilda escaping from andnryfigh
He suti eedetod geinther
ccng ; inan
gett thou
g dsome sorght
Oxford with her companions, over the of order in the part of Ireland that was
Christmas snows, all dressed in white, nearest to England, things were as bad

ORTI
so as not to be seen . Fighting went on , again , or worse, as soon as hewas gone.
and the barons began building castles A French king said of him, with amaze

TIRYTAXT
again , and taking people's property ment : " The King of England is now

RE
from them and doing as they liked, till in Ireland, now in England, now in

OTTENE
MEETODE
ILIMITIERNA
all the good that Henry had tried to do Normandy. He may be rather said to

PENIPUOTTEE
in the way of securing peace and quiet fly than to go by horse or boat ! ”

TURUN
and justice was undone.

2
Th land
bare no corn ,” wails the “ histeorian . TEATERBURY CAG TH ATRAHA
You might as well try to till the sea
THIfENyou THIN THED
go to Canterbur L PP
y Cat
ENED
hedral
as the land, for the wickedness that is
done in it. " you will see the spot where the great
The King of Scotland was Matilda's ' arcth
dea hbi. shoHis Hen
p of na me s stimTh
ry'wa e om
meas
t hisà
uncle, so he was glad of an excuse to Becket. He had quarrelled with the
make war on Stephen ; and there was king about some Church affairs, chiefly
a famous battle fought in Yorkshire, about how the clergy were to be
called the Battle of the Standard , on punished when they did wrong. Henry ,
account of the banners of three great in a passion one day, said he wished
churches of Yorkshire being taken into someone would rid him of the trouble
the fight . The victory was not of much some archbishop. So four men hastened
use to Stephen , for the King of Scotland over from Normandy, where King
kept Cumberland without owning Henry then was, and, taking the king
Stephen as his overlord.
THHE POPE OF ROME GAVE
EOPH IRELAND ca
at thhis
edralwo
. rdTh, e kil
steled Thatomle
ps th as to th
ad in hies
E ENGLISH KING
When Stephen died, Matilda's son spotwowhe
are thearc
rn rebythe knehbi of ppilwa
essho s msbuwh
gri ried
o
became King Henry II . His wife , for long years went to pray at the
Eleanor, was a French princess. She tomb of the man who had suffered
was heiress of three splendid provinces for defending the clergy against the
in France, and Henry was in his own
right Duke of Normandy and over- king.
Henry was not forgiven till he had
lord of Brittany, so that his dominion walked barefooted and bareheaded to
reached from the north of England tos
HARVAJak

the chapel, and received a beating with

1414414
3845'44
464

the Pyrenees, the great mountains rods from each of the monks in turn .
4444
HD
MU&
44#kದ|*³(#

which separate France and Spain . Much Before he died he portioned out his
as he had, he was always going to great dominions to his sons ; but they
war and planning to get more; especie did not like his keeping the over
ally he wanted to be king over three whole lordship in his own hands, and there
of the British Isles . After st oring were mise fa
rable qumily arrels in
TrrU
IT
572
CLETELDELCO ROTEINAKATTENTIALREDELITELE

THE ARCHBISHOP WHO DEFIED THE KING

Thomas a Becket, the great Archbishop of Canterbury, had a long struggle with King Henry II . about certain
rights of the clergy. The king, who was in Normandy at the time, at last few into a passion, and said he
wished someone would rid him of the archbishop. Four knights at once hastened to Canterbury ,
and in this picture we see them arguing with Thomas à Becket in his palace behind the cathedral.

As the archbishop w. nld not yield to the demands of the knights they threatened to kill him. He fled into
Canterbury Cathedral and took refuge before an altar, but the knights followed and murdered him . The steps
that lead to the spot where the archbishop was buried are worn by the knees of pilgrims praying at his tomb.
MITTIT MONOTTI
573
 -THE CHILD'S BOOK OF COUNTRIES mini mara
consequence. When the name of his cross on their arm , and hurried off by
favourite son , John , was found on the sea and by land to gain renown in
list of those fighting against him , the
old man could bear no more. Turning
his face to the wall, he said bitterly
“ Let things now go as they will. I
care no more for myself or for the
world ."
His son Richard I. then became king.
Look at the statue of him set up in
front of the House of Lords at West-
minster. It is a fine figure on the great
strong horse , clothed in armour made
of little rings of metal , and holding
aloft the long spear he used against
enemies far away from England. During
the ten years of his reign he was
nearly always away , and his wife was
the only Queen of England who never
entered the country .
The great barons took advantage of
Richard's absence to break out again ,
and the people suffered much from
bad trade and bad cultivation of the
fields, and from having nearly all the
money they had squeezed out of them .
Perhaps you are wondering who had
the money, and what for ?
R'IGOT
CHARD THE CRUSADER , AND HOW HE
MONEY FOR HIS WARS
Of all things, Richard loved fighting
and adventure best , and in his time
the most exciting adventures were to
be had in the Holy Land , at the eastern
end of the Mediterranean Sea. The
country and its capital, the scene of our
Lord's life on earth , had fallen into the
hands of men who did not believe in
Him , and who treated very badly the
Christians who went to pray at the spots
that were so sacred to them . So the
Christians of Europe - French , English,
and others - determined to get up
expeditions and do their best to get
the Holy Land away from those men .
Richard I. joined the third of these
expeditions, and he needed a great
deal of money to pay for the journey.
He even sold a treaty which had
been gained by his father from the
Scotch king, William the Lion , in
which he had acknowledged Henry as
his overlord for the whole of Scotland .
But Richard did not care ; when once
the fever and excitement of the
Crusades—as these “ holy ” wars were
called — were upon men , they seized
what money and arms they could lay
hands on , sewed strips of cloth like a called an interdict, or forbidding. It
574
fighting the enemies of Christ. We
read the story of these Crusades in the
Child's BOOK OF MEN AND WOMEN ,
beginning on page 33 of our book .
So money was squeezed out of every
body - barons, people, and even the
clergy — to pay for Richard's “ holy ”
wars, and to get him out of prison
when he fell into the hands of enemies .
R ICHARD
" DEATH - FORGIVES HIS
BED, AND JOHN
ENEMY ON HIS
BECOMES KING
Round the base of Richard's statue,
opposite the House of Lords, are shown
the scenes of his death at the siege of a
castle in France . On one side is the
terrible fight going on ; on the other
the king lies on his bed, pardoning
the man whose arrow caused the
wound from which he is dying.
Richard's brother, John, was the
next King of England. It is difficult
to say anything good about him .
He seems to have been cruel to every
body, and to have had no friends.
When the barons would no longer
serve him , he wrung money out of his
other subjects, and hired foreign soldiers
to fight for him in Scotland , Wales, and
Ireland. He had not been very long
king when he lost not only Normandy,
so that the English kings were no
longer Dukes of Normandy, but the
other parts of France that had belonged
to his mother.
One of the most violent quarrels
John had was with the Pope, who
claimed , as Popes did then , to have the
right of ruling the churches of all the
Christian countries, such as France,
Spain, Germany, England, and they
were very angry if any appointments
or laws were made without their leave .
HEN THE CHURCHES WERE CLOSED AND
WHENO BELLS WERE RUNG IN ENGLAND
So when John refused to accept an
Archbishop of Canterbury chosen by
the Pope, the Pope sent an order that ,
till the king gave way, all churches
were to be closed ; no bells were to be
rung calling the people to service ; no
one was to be baptised, married , or
even buried by the clergy. This made
everyone very wretched, especially the
poor, for they were used to getting help
and comfort from the monasteries and
clergy. This order from the Pope was
 ti
antincen
మంద hinnaririramhు
KING JOHN SIGNING THE GREAT CHARTER

Ty

IZBORE
TEXTOT
MET
HET
OSO

T
ZOOM

King John was such a bad king , and brought England into so much trouble , that the barons and bishops forced
him to grant a great charter to the people , promising to maintain their rights. There is a little island on the
Thames, near Windsor , called Runnymede , or Magna Carta Island , where John met the barons to sign the
Charter. John was furious , and it is said that he threw himself on the ground an . gnawed bits of wood in his rage .
-

575
 anonim.THE CHILD'S BOOK OF COUNTRIES
seemed as if a blight were on the land
while it lasted , and John only got
more and more angry and violent. The
Pope made a present of John's throne
and kingdom to the King of France ;
then suddenly John changed his mind,
received the archbishop, and restored
what he had taken from the Church.
HE GREAT DISGRACE THAT JOHN
THE
BROUGHT UPON THE NATION
And now, see what a disgrace John
inflicted on the proud, independent
spirit of the nation . To show his
submission to the Pope, he took off his
crown and handed it to the Pope's
messenger, receiving it back again as a
gift from the Pope. John's letters
about this time are dated from Dover,
which reminds us of the story of his
riding from place to place, from Windsor
to the ports between Sandwich and Rye, quicksands as the tide came flowing in.
and then crossing to the Isle of Wight,
anxiously looking for the help from
abroad which never came.
In the British Museum hangs a copy
of the Great Charter, often called by its
Latin name, Magna Carta. Look at it
well . It was forced from John, with
great courage and difficulty, by the
barons. In it he had promised certain
rights to the people, so that they might
live in safety under good government.
This Great Charter, which is often
called the foundation -stone on which
our liberty is built, was drawn up from
the charter which Henry II . gave
to the people when he became king, Abbey - the old Norman Abbey of the
which, again, was established upon the Confessor. In one of the illuminated
laws of Edward the Confessor and
Alfred .
1E GREAT CHARTER THAT JOHN
THESIGNED IN A TEMPER
You would like to hear what sort of
promises are made in that cramped his being so shown is that one of the
great works of this king's long reign of
Latin writing. Among them are these :
1. The king was not toent
make the peoplet
pay taxes without the cons of the Grea
Council.
2. No one was to be punished for any
wrong-doing without a proper trial according
to the law of the land,
There is a little island on the Thames,
near Windsor, called Magna Carta Island ,
and on it John met the barons to put
his seal on a lump of wax to show that
he “ signed ” and consented to keep
the promises set out in the Charter.
He was in a furious state of anger all
576
XXXXX
the time . It is said that as soon as the
deed was done “ he threw himself on
the ground, gnashing his teeth , and
gnawing sticks and straws in his rage.”
The Pope soothed him , and said he
need not keep his word , and crowds of
foreign soldiers came to help John to burn
and rob and kill all over the country.
It was a troublous time . Louis of
France evidently felt he was going to
take John's place you can see amongst
the charters a grant from him, giving
away the town of Grimsby. Then the
end came suddenly.
John had to cross the Wash, that
broad inlet between Lincolnshire and
Norfolk . When the tide is out there
are miles of sands, and the long train of
carts and waggons which were carrying
the king's treasures were lost in soft
Quite lately a handsome cup was washed
up near the shore of the Wash, and it is
believed to be part of this lost treasure
of King John.
The grief and worry of it all caused
John's death . The whole account of it
can be read in the open page of “ The
History of Matthew Paris,” beside the
chronicle which describes the extra
ordinary efforts made to ransom his
brother Richard from captivity.
KING WHO
HENRY. THE THIRD, THE ABBEY
John's little son Henry, only nine
years old , was soon crowned at the
manuscripts in the Museum, gleaming
with illustrations in bright colours
and thickly -laid -on gold paint, there is a
picture of Henry III . holding a model of
the Abbey in his hand . The reason for
more than fifty years was the beginning
of the rebuilding of this church. He
pulled down the old Norman east end,
and built it up again in the new style
that had come in, with arches pointed
instead of round, and with much higher
walls, columns, and roofs.
Wecan still go and look at this beautiful
work of more than six centuries ago. Only
part of the splendid tomb Henry set up
in it for the body of Edward the Con
fessor now remains. The golden shrine,
and golden statues, and precious stones
are all gone. You may think it looks
 LECTUELEGEVUSED ammaamraanamdammadaraatamaaraadhanandamam డు యువ

HENRY III . PROMISING TO OBEY THE LAW

Ion
ani

1k
bot

try
的
眼
如

hat
and
ក មួយ ។

no

ALAS

re
TYTUT
FTTTT717

King Henry III . wanted money to carry on his wars, but before they would grant it the people made him promise
to keep the Great Charter granted by John. A procession of bishops and clergy, with splendid silk robes,
carrying lighted candles, arrived at the Great Hall at Westminster, where the king awaited them. Standing
round him , they spoke strongly of what would happen to a king who took away the freedom of the land, and,
throwing down their candles, cried , “ May all those who take away our rights perish, as these lights perish ! ”
577
 -THE CHILD'S BOOK OF COUNTRIES KOERTELE

dusty and dingy now , as you look close
into it to see the mosaic or inlaid pattern
of tiny pieces of glass ; but remember
that it has stood there for hundreds of
years, and that round it have passed not
only generations after generations of
quiet folk come to pray in the holy place,
or to admire its beauties and read the
story of the past, but also rough soldiers
and thieves , who tore down the orna-
ments and jewels, and made sad havoc
with what had been the pride and joy of
their forefathers.
SIMON DE MONTFORT, THE PEOPLE'S
LEADER AGAINST THE KING
It has been said that the great result
of Henry's long reign was the giving back and more fighting went on, till at
of England to the English . It was pos-
you almost feel the hush after theloud,
passionate talking ?—they flung down
the lighted candles, saying :
May all those who take away our
rights perish, as these lights perish !”
The king made solemn promises as
the candles were relit , and the bells
rang out joyfully to tell the news to the
people outside.
But the promises were broken, and
the country had to fight again , and
Henry was forced to draw up new laws
and add to the good old ones. The new
laws were written in English for the
first time since the Norman conquest .
Again the king broke his word,
last Simon succeeded in forming a
66

sible for a poet who lived towards the talking place," called a Parliament,
end of this reign to sing : after the French word parler, meaning
Now England breathes in the hope of liberty, to talk .
The English were despised , but now they This was even more useful than
have lifted up their head . the old Assembly of the Wise Men
You will remember that William the had been . In not only barons
Conqueror claimed all the land as his and bishops could discuss what was
own , and parcelled it out as he pleased ; best for the country and the people ,
and , also , that when he wanted money but knights from every shire had the
he forced the people to pay asmuch as he right to come and talk ; also citizens
chose . Now , two centuries later, when from the towns, and these, too, had a
Henry III . wanted money for his wars, voice to say what the people in their
his buildings, and his foreign favourites,. part of the country wanted done , and
the people were strong enough to refuse how they wished the money to be spent
to give it to him unless he promised to which they paid in taxes.
keeplawto ofthetheGreat
the land .Charter
In theand ruleby
great fight THEUSHREDBENOS
OF ENGRSLOPEDIA OP
between Henry and the people about The battle of Lewes was the crown
this, the name of a great patriot stands ing victory of the barons under Simon.
out - Simon de Montfort. When Henry was taken prisoner at its
6

“ I fear thunder and lightning not a
little, Sir Simon ,” said Henry to him one
day when caught in a bad storm , “ but
I fear you more than allthe thunder and
lightning in the world ."
THE BISHOPS FLUNG DOWN THEIR
HºwCANDLES
AT THE KING'S FEET
Before the actual fighting began,
Henry made promises over and over
again , only to be broken . Let us see and
hear how these promises were made on
one occasion . A great procession of
bishops and clergy, with splendid silk
robes, carrying lighted candles in their teaching others as poor as himself, is of
hands, arrived at the Great Hall at
Westminster, where Henry awaited
them . Then, standing round him , they
spoke strong and terrible words as to
what would happen to the king who
took away any of the freedom of the
land. As their voices died away-can
ITXEROX
578
close, did he think, one wonders, of the
words he had said long before about
fearing his conqueror ?
Three years after this battle a great
thinker, named Roger Bacon , wrote
a book about every sort of know
ledge, which has been called the en
cyclopædia of the thirteenth century.
He speaks of geography, grammar,
music, languages , arithmetic, and many
other matters . The story of how hard he
worked , how he collected his materials,
how poor he was, how kind he was in
great interest.
Henry's son Edward helped him at
the battle of Lewes ; later he went to
join in a crusade, for these wars were
still lingering on .
The on
next part of the history of our land
begins page 745.
*UXTONTITEITE
 The Child's Book of
NATURE
WHAT THIS STORY TELLS US .
E read in these pages of the animals that are nearest in likeness to our
WE selves. Once upon a time there were no monkeys, but lemurs. Just as
different races of men have descended from one great family, so huge apes and
many sorts of monkeys have descended from the lemurs. Some have become
animals like squirrels ; others have grown into great creatures so like human
beings that they are called man - like apes. The apes have brains like those of a tiny
child, but they are as much below the savage in brain power as the savage is
below you. The apes are made in body as we are made ; they have great strength
and courage ; they make rough homes of branches and leaves, but there the like
ness ends. The gorilla, the orang - utan , and the chimpanzee, with their power
and ferocity , the gibbon , with its strong voice and wonderful leaping powers, are
described in these pages, where we read also of the many kinds of monkeys.

THE ANIMALS MOST LIKE MEN

GORILLA ORANG MANDRILL COAITA LEMUR LORIS
CHIMPANZEE GIBBON BABOON HOWLER MARMOSET AYE-AYE

WHHAT animal in all

the world would CONTINUED FROM
PAGE 503.
the wild men of Aus
tralia, and those sav
you most like to see ? ages who lived in
You can see lions and Tasmania until the
tigers and all manner of fierce middle of last century. The
beasts alive at the Zoo . But savages can make tools and
there is something you never throw things. The apes use
have seen, something which it stones to crack nuts, and
is almost certain you never will see. when they are chased by hunters
That is a full-grown, live gorilla. You they break off the branches of trees
will probably never see in England a and throw them at their enemies .
full -sized gorilla or an old chimpanzee, The biggest of them all is the gorilla,
or an old orang-utan. They are too which lives in the forests of West
big and strong and fierce to be caught. Africa. The biggest are as tall as a
We may call the great apes man's tall man . Like all the man-apes , the
savage likeness , because they are more gorilla is what we call four -handed .
Its proper hands are just like ours , but
like men than any other animals are .
They have no tails. They have hands its feet are hands as well as feet. Its
like our hands . They have the same toes are like fingers, but the great toe,
number of teeth that we have , though instead of being close up to the rest
theirs are much larger than ours . as ours is, stands off like our thumb
Their bones are like ours ; their brains and acts like a thumb . Thus it can
are like ours , only smaller and not so not only walk on its foot ; it can hold
well developed. things with it as well, and clasp the
Yet , for all this likeness to ourselves, branches of the trees along which it is
they are very terrible-looking. They climbing: Its arms are very long, so
look terrible because, while we cannot that its hands reach below the knees.
help seeing that in many ways they This is, of course, longer than our
are like The
ugly. ourselves, they are
orang-utan dreadfully
looks arms, but
like a shorter then the gorilla's legs are
than ours .
hideous old man . If the gorilla were These long arms are necessary for the
not covered with thick hair he would gorilla's way of living. When it wishes
look like an ugly negro, for his skin is to walk or run upon the earth, it cannot
quite black, like that of the negroes of go far in an upright position without
Àfrica, in the forests of which the touching the ground with its hands.
gorilla lives. The orang -utan is a It trots along like a baby toddling, but
reddish-brown . keeps touching the ground with its
These apes have brains not quite hands, doubling up the fingers and
as good as those of the lowest savages, pressing upon its knuckles . But that

579
 -THE CHILD'S BOOK OF NATURE
is not the most important way in
which its long arm serves it. No
matter how quickly it may be travelling
through the trees —for that is where it
chiefly goes — it has to be very careful
about finding branches strong enough
to bear it . e holds
So whil it on to one
bough with its feet , it reaches out with
its great long arms and tests other
branches to see if they are strong .
N ANIMAL Like A HIDEOUS OLD
It is a heavy creature, and if it fell
it would hurt itself badly. The gorilla
makes its resting -place about twenty
feet from the ground, not at the top
of the tree, because the higher it goes
the more the wind catches it . Lower
down, of course, it is sheltered and
warmer .
All sorts of stories have been told
about the gorilla carrying off people
and making them work as slaves, but
those stories are false. The gorilla,
though it is one of the strongest beasts
in the world , never attacks a man
unless it is itself in danger. Then it is
a terrible foe indeed . Its first thought
is for the safety of the mother gorilla
and the baby gorillas. While these escape
from danger the big gorilla stands on
guard , beating its chest till it sounds like
a drum . Then, when its family has got
away, if the enemy does not retire, the
gorilla often rushes at him , and unless
it be at once shot it will kill the man ,
no matter how strong he is, or, at any
rate , leave him hurt for life .
Once a man fired at a gorilla which
had come close up to him . He missed
his aim , and the gorilla, seizing his gun
with its hands, put the barrel between
its great teeth and bit it till it bent
like tin . Then it seized the man and
bit his hand off.
GREAT STRENGTH OF THE
THE
HEGORILLA AND CHIMPANZEE
No wonder that we have never seen a
big gorilla alive in captivity. With
With its
powerful arms, its mighty teeth , and its
savage nature, it is impossible to capture
a big one alive. Little ones have been
caught,, but they have always died. They
are better where they are, in the great
gloomy forests. There they never do
harm to man or beast if they are left
alone . They eat only fruit and herb-
age , though now and again they may
catch a bird or eat its eggs .
580
We have had young chimpanzees
alive at the Zoo , but never long enough
for them to grow into great, strong
creatures such as live in the forests.
Big ones have seldom been caught,
for they, like the gorillas, are very
fierce if attacked . They are not quite
so terrible as the gorillas, because they
are not so big. The largest, when
fully grown , areonly four feet high, but
as they have huge teeth and very
strong arms they are too powerful to
be captured. Not being so fierce as
the gorillas, they always run away if
possible when attacked ; it is only
when they cannot get away that they
fight. They live in the same part of
Africa as the gorilla, but cover a wider
area, and they are great thieves . They
steal the natives' crops of fruit and
vegetables, and it is this which causes
the black man to kill them .
CHIMPANZEE THAT BEHAVED
A LIKE A CHILD
When caught young they can be
tamed, and then they make amusing
and interesting companions. Dr.
Livingstone, the great missionary and
traveller, had one given to him as a
pet. It became very fond of him , and
used to beg to be taken for walks with
him . It would hold out its hand to
him if he were going out, and if he did
not take it it would cry like a child .
When he was not going out, it would
get leaves and sticks and grass and
make itself a nest and cover itself over ,
just as it had been used to do when
wild. If a native or a dog came near
it would run to Dr. Livingstone, put
its back against his legs , and then make
ready to fight, just like a boy .
Have you ever known a jealous child ?
A chimpanzee, when it gets fond of a
man , becomes jealous of anybody else
for whom he has a liking, and it will do
far worse things than any jealous child
will think of doing. Once Sir Harry
Johnston was coming home to
England from Africa with a chimpanzee
on the ship. Everybody was very
fond of it , and made such a pet of it
that it used to sit at table and have
its meals with the rest of the passengers .
All went well until the ship stopped
at a port where a lady and gentleman
came on board , bringing their baby
with them . The people on the ship all
fell in love with the baby, and the poor
TOU
 camera
morreu noma mammaricomico

THE APES LIKE MEN AND THE AFRICAN BABOONS

AUTO
CALIZADO
Oxunmur

The biggestof the man-like apes is the gorilla, which The chimpanzeeis not quite so terrible as the gorilla ,
lives in the forests of West Africa. This picture shows because it is not so large. Several young chimpanzees
a baby gorilla. The largest stand about six feet high. live in the Zoo, and this picture shows one of them .

The orang -utan lives in Borneo and Sumatra, and can travel at
great speed along the tops of trees, but when it is on the ground it
is slow and awkward. It builds a rough sort of nest for itself in the
trees, and when the weather is cold covers itself over with leaves.
The gibbon is the smallestof the man -like
apes, and is the only one that habitually
walks upright. Its arms are so very long
that it can touch its ankles when walking.
LLLLL
OLLAG-

The baboons live thickly in parts ofAfrica,and come The mandrill is the strangest looking of all the baboon
down at night to rob the natives' fields and gardens family of animals. Instead of being simply brown or
of corn and fruit. They go hunting in great troops. black or grey, it is violet, blue, purple, and scarlet.
581
 auzoaEUX THE CHILD'S BOOK OF NATURE
chimpanzee felt himself forgotten and It is the slowest of the apes when on
neglected . It became very sullen and the ground. It cannot put the sole of
unhappy. One day the chimpanzee its foot flat upon the ground as we can,
was missing from his place at the dinner- but walks upon the outer edge of the
table . Sir Harry Johnston went up on foot. This makes it look very shaky,
deck and there saw the wicked chim- and like a baby or an old man.
panzee about to throw the baby over- It builds a rough sort of nest for itself
board . TI animal had found its little in the trees , and when the weather is
rival sleeping in its cot, and, thinking cold or damp covers itself over with
that if the child were thrown into the leaves. It eats figs and the leaves and
sea there would be no more rivalry, blossoms of various trees. Generally
was in the act of ending the poor baby's it can get enough to drink by sucking
life when its master caught it . As soon the dew from leaves, but if the weather
as it heard Sir Harry Johnston coming, is dry it has to go in search of water.
it put the baby down on the deck and Strange as all this sounds, the orang
ran away : utan, when caught young, becomes very
A MOTHER CHIMPANZEE PROTECTED good friends with human beings. Some
HOWW
HER BABE FROM THE HUNTER years ago there was one at the Zoo,
In its wild state the chimpanzee which was very fond of its keeper.
range among the trees as the Sir Richard Owen and his wife went one
gorillatodoes
loves , but it goes about on the Christmas morning to see it. The
ground a good deal. It is not such a keeper let it out of its cage in a big
solitary creature as the gorilla . Large house. It did all sorts of pretty tricks
numbers of chimpanzees are sometimes to please him . It really tried to talk.
to be met together. They show great When it had been playing for some
love for their babies. Once a mother time, the orang wanted to have a look
chimpanzee sat with her little one out of the window . She crept quietly
watching a hunter. She did not know along, hoping that her keeper would not
what a gun was. But when she saw him mind . He called to her, You come
raise one to his shoulder and point it at here this minute ! ” She looked at him ,
her she seemed to know that he meant but wanted to have another peep out
to do her harm . So the poor creature of the window . “ Now I'm cross with
covered her baby as well as she could you," he said , and he pretended to be
with one hand, and with the other she angry.. The poor animal was in great
made signs to the man to go away, distress . She leapt down from the
just as a woman would if her little one window , she rushed up to him , she
were threatened . put her great arms round his neck , and
Another one, when shot, put its hand kept kissing him till he forgave her.
to its side,
gushing then, its
between when it feltitthe
fingers, heldblood
ont THE GIBBON, WHICH LEAPS Like
A HUGE BIRD THROUGH THE FOREST
its hand to the man who had shot it , There is another of the man -ape
with a most pitiful look, as much as to family of which we have not yet spoken.
say , “ See what you have done, cruel This is the gibbon . The largest of these
man .” The man who had fired the shot
said that he felt as if he had committed
is a little over three feet high , but it
a murder, and never again did such a does not look big, for its body is slím ,
and its long arms, by the aid of which
thing. it can touch its ankles when walking,
THEORANG-UTAN, THAT SKIPS ALONG make it look shorter. It is the only ape
THE TOPS OF TREES
that habitually walks upright. To do
The orang - utan is somewhat like the this it balances itself by waving its arms
chimpanzees and the gorillas, but it aloft . Gibbons are s'en at their best
does not live in Africa . Its home is in when in the trees, for they are the finest
Borneo and Sumatra. It can travel climbers in the world . They might be
with great speed along the tops of trees, made of elastic, so wonderfully do they
but when it is on the ground it is slow leap from tree to tree . Some of their
and awkward . It rarely walks in an leaps measure as much as forty feet.
upright position , and has to keep Fancy for a moment that you are
touching the ground with its knuckles. looking at one. It hangs by one hand
582
SOME MEMBERS OF THE GREAT MONKEY FAMILY

The proboscis monkey is one of the queerest looking

and ugliest of all the monkey tribe. It has a long
nose that looks almost like a tiny elephant's trunk.

The Barbary ape is the animal which scampers about on The coaita, or red - faced spider monkey, has a small, slim
the Rock of Gibraltar. These apes climb splendidly, body, with a beautiful tail, which, when not used for
and are the only monkeys that now live in Europe. climbing, is carried over the back with a curl at the end.

The Indian monkeys oughtto be the happiest of all their tribe, for they are regarded as sacred monkeys. They
have beautiful groves and gardens and temples in which to live, but they go into the cities and villages, and
shops and bazaars and houses teem with them. No one is allowed to kill one of these troublesome monkeys.
The Photographs in these pages arc by Lewis Medland, Gambier Bolton, the Autotype Co. , Chas. Reid , W. Dando, and A. Rudland.
caram
583
 -THE CHILD'S BOOK OF NATURE
from the branch of a tree . Suddenly ,
without any sign of effort such as even a
bird would make, it darts away through
the air to a distant branch. It catches
this with its other hand, then , without
resting for an instant, leaps straight on
to another branch, and away again
without stopping to rest or gather
strength. It can go on like this for
hours. Sometimes as its hand clasps
a bough to which it has sprung the
gibbon will spin itself right round the
branch, then be off again to another,
so quickly that the eye can hardly
follow it. It looks like a huge bird
flying through the forest.
SOMETHING
A
THAT, NO DOANIMAL BUT
This is what a gibbon once did : It
was resting when it saw a bird flying.
The gibbon took a spring, caught the
bird with one hand , went sailing on
through the air , and with its free hand
caught the bough at which it had aimed .
Another, which was tame and in a
great cage, like a room, suddenly swung
itself full at a window . Everybody
thought that it would crash through the
glass. But no ; the wonderful creature
caught the thin wood between the panes
of glass, and, almost with the same
movement, sprang back again to its
first place . This requires great
strength and skill. Nothing else in the
world could do it .
Although it will bite if angry, the
gibbon can be tamed , but you would not
want to keep one long if it took to calling ground,
as it does in the woods . It has such a
piercing voice that its cries can be
heard for miles.
GIBBON THAT USED TO STEAL HIS
A MASTER'S SOAP
Gibbons love their babies, and may
be seen to take them down and wash
their funny little faces in a stream .
One which was tame loved to play tricks
on its master. It would steal his soap
if he were not looking. One day its
master was writing and pretending not
to see ; but he did see Master Gibbon
quietly take the soap and steal off
across the room with it. Then he spoke, have them swarming everywhere, run
quietly , and not in a temper. The
gibbon looked quite ashamed . It went
softly back across the room and put
down the soap in the place from which
it had taken it .
584
TERU
Now we pass to the monkeys, of
which there are many sorts. They
are divided into two great families :
those which live in America and those
which do not. These others we call the
Old World monkeys. You can always
tell the difference at a glance . The
American monkeys have their nostrils
set wide apart; the Old World monkeys
have their nostrils close together.
There is a very ugly monkey in
Borneo called the proboscis monkey.
You know that proboscis means a
trunk or snout, and this one is called
the proboscis monkey because it has
a nose like a tiny trunk . But even that
has the nostrils close together. The
American monkeys have two more
teeth than the monkeys of Africa and
Asia , and two more teeth than human
beings . There is another difference ,
too . The American monkey can use
its tail as a help in climbing, as if it
were an extra hand or foot ; the Old
World monkeys have never learnt to
do that.
THE LIVELYMONKEYS THAT LIVE IN
Of the American monkeys the best
known are the coaita and the howlers .
The coaita has a small, slim body, but
a beautiful tail, which , when not in
use for climbir.g, is carried arched over
the back with a curl at the end . This
monkey should be better able to walk
than the man -like apes, but it cannot.
If it wants to toddle a few steps on the
it has to swing its tail about
to balance itself. The howler is a
savage -looking little fellow , but his
howl is worse than his bite. That is
dreadful, and is kept up all night
long.
The Indian monkeys ought to be
the happiest of all their tribe, for in
India they are regarded as sacred
animals . They have beautiful groves
and gardens and temples in which to
live, but they go into the cities and
villages ; and shops and bazaars and
houses teem with them . Woe to the
man who dares to kill one of the
people's pets. It really is not nice to
ing over food which people eat . Still ,
if they are properly treated they can be
great pets. Here is a story to show
you how clever and amusing they
are .
 -THE ANIMALS MOST LIKE MEN-
Hanmanta

A gentleman in India was going for a the monkey sat down in the middle,
holiday, so he asked a friend to take on the ends of all four tails, and so,
care of his pet monkey. “ She is very without hurting them , was able to
good and very clever," he said, “ and keep the babies near her while she
she looks after four little baby dogs cracked and ate her nuts .
for me.” Well , the friend took the Smaller than the man-apes, but bigger
monkey and the puppies, and they were than the monkeys, are the baboons.
all very well behaved. The monkey Their home is in Africa, and they live
looked so carefully in hilly parts, whence
after the puppies, they come down at
and they were so night and rob the
good , that it might natives' gardens and
have been a proper fields of corn and
nurse with little fruit. They are not
children. The gentle at all nice things.
man was delighted , They have great
and he gave the mouths with terrible
monkey a handful of The aye-aye is a very strange animal. One of its teeth. They have
nuts. long fingers, instead of being like the rest, is thin snouts like pigs .
and bark
That meant trouble the long to a bird's
likesee claw.
if there It uses
are any for tappi
thishidden
grubs ng
in it. Some of them have
for the monkey. If silly - looking tails
she sat down and ate which seem to be
her nuts , both her rooted far up the
little hands would back, and curl over
be engaged, so the and down like a tea
puppies would stray pot handle . They
away from her . She hunt in great troops,
could not bear the and few animals dare
thought of that . She The marmoset from South The loris is a slim little
America is the smallest of creature, with big, round attack them . There
wrinkled up her little all themonkey family, and eyes and a pointed nose. is one which has a
face as she wondered is easily tamed and petted. It seeks its food at night. tail like a pig, but
what she was to do , the strangest of all
for she badly wanted has only a stump for
to eat the nuts , and a tail . This is called
at the same time she a mandrill, and is,
wanted to guard the indeed , a strange
baby dogs . At last animal . Instead of
she knew what to do . being simply brown
She took a puppy or black or grey, it
and laid it down has the brightest
with its head to colours, violet and
war is the door and blue and purple and
with its tail pointing scarlet . The end of
towards the middle its snout is scarlet ;
of the room . The then in deep grooves
next puppy she along the sides of its
placed with its head face you have purple
towards the window The lemur not only belongs to the monkey family, and blue and scarlet,
and its tail towards but is believed to be the father of all the apes and while the hind quar
the middle of the monkeys. It now lives in the island ofMadagascar. ters are violet . It is a
room . The It has a head like a fox, but hands like a monkey.
third nasty -looking beast.
puppy was laid with its head towards the It is hard to be fond of a baboon, it is
wall, and its tail touching the other two ; so ugly and fierce. Still, if you catch
and the fourth puppy was set with one young it will become very tane
its head towards the fireplace and its and friendly.
tail touching the tips of the other There was one at the Dublin Zoo ,
three tails. So the four little doggies which was very fond of the chief man
lay like this t, heads all pointing out- there, a gentleman named Dr. Ball.
wards, tails all pointing inwards. Then Whenever he passed Dr. Ball would
YT

585
IS D 33
 казахлахкики
THE CHILD'S BOOK OF NATUREuritathattare
go and have a word with the baboon The lemur tribe , which had scattered
and give it a friendly pat on the head. to many parts, changed and changed
But one day, when he was showing a
great man round , he forgot the baboon .
The baboon was deeply vexed at this
and when his friend next went to see
him it would not go near him . It
did not forget, and for long after that
it would not have anything to do
with him . If a monkey sulks or is
miserable it does not live long. So it
was with this one . It became very ill .
The day came when it could no
longer run about. Dr. Ball went to
see it .The baboon dragged itself to
the front of its cage , and put out its
hand to its old friend . Then the poor
thing lay down and died.
BARBARY APE , THAT
THEROCKS CLIMBS THE
AT GIBRALTAR
There is another monkey which we
ought to remember, the Barbary ape.
This is the animal which you read of as
scampering about the rocks at Gib .
raltar. These creatures belong to a
family of monkeys like those which
used to live in England. Their cunning
is so great that a man could hardly
ever get near them .
Perhaps you have seen a tame
marmoset, for they are easily tamed
and petted. If you have ever seen one,
you would scarcely think it to be a
monkey, would you ? You would take
it for a kind of squirrel as you see it
darting about its cage, or frisking in the
trees of its native forest in South
America. If it surprises you to hear
that the marmoset, with its curious
ways and its bird -like whistle, is a
ary hind feet or hands of monkeys.
monkey, you will be, perhaps, even more Those
surprised to hear that the lemur is a in front consist of four fingers
kind of monkey.
LEMUR , THE FATHER OF ALL
THEHE APES AND MONKEYS
Not only does the lemur belong to
the monkey family ; it is believed to be
the father of all the apes and monkeys.
Ages and ages ago land stretched out
in many directions where the ocean now
flows . The lemur is supposed to have
been the first of the monkey family
and to have wandered from North
America, where it first appeared, into
Europe and Africa. When the sea
washed away great parts of the land,
it left new continents and new islands,
so everything that could not fly was
shut up where it was .
LITTLTDUTE
586
and changed in the course of time. In
America it grew into the monkeys
with wide -set nostrils . In Africa it
grew into the man -like apes and
monkeys with close-set nostrils. The
lemur which remained a lemur now has
its home in the island of Madagascar.
That once formed part of the mainland
of Africa . The sea cut it off from the
great continent , and left the true
lemurs in an island home, hundreds of
miles from the east coast of Africa.
The head of the lemur of to -day is
like that of a fox , but it has the four
hands of the monkey. Like the gibbon,
it has a loud voice , and can leap long
distances. It moves about at night,
and goes so silently that not even a bird
can hear its footfalls.
In this quiet way of creeping about
it is like another member of its family,
called the loris, a slim little creature
about the size of a cat , with big, round
eyes and sharp -pointed nose. This is
also a night worker.
THETSSTWONDERFUL CLAW -FINGER WITH
If it is wonderful that lemurs should
in time grow into chimpanzees, it is
almost as wonderful that they should
become aye-ayes . There is hardly a
more curious animal than this . It has
a body something like a big squirrel ; it
has large ears without any hair on them ,
and big eyes which enable it to see at
night. But the funniest thing is its
hands. Those behind are like the ordin
and a thumb. But the long finger
is thin and bony, like a claw of a bird.
It is used for tapping the branches of
trees, to see if there are any grubs
hidden in them . How did the aye -aye
come to be as it is ? Long, long ago
one or two lemurs in Madagascar were
born different from other lemurs. The
children of those strange lemurs were
like their parents ; they chose lemurs
most like themselves, and little by little
an entire tribe of aye -ayes was formed .
It is all very wonderful and hard for
little men and women to understand and
believe, but these marvellous things do
happen in Nature's family of animals .
The next stories of animals are on page 717...
 The Child's Book of
SHAKES MIL
PEARE
MEN & WOMEN • TON

QUBENSALB
RAPMAE

BE
THE COTTAGE IN WHICH GEORGE STEPHENSON WAS BORN

NAP
OLE
AN
MEN WHO MADE THE RAILWAYS WEL
LIV
GTON
along the way to
SUPPOSE when you
want to go to CONTINUED FROM PAGE 530
London , would
the seaside or to travel the whole
visit your friends in journey at the rate
the country that there should be of ten miles an hour.
no railway to the place. " Such a " Oh , don't go by that
thing could not be," you think , coach
(
! ” said one of his friends.
CRO DAD
MW
ELL
" there are railways everywhere But I must,” he said. WIN
about Great Britain .” You cannot “ Well, if you do, be sure not to
think a place where there are not go straight through ; rest for a day
railways somewhere near, can you ? or two at York ,” said the friend .
66
Well , whenever you hear to -day of Why should I do that ? ” asked
anybody being ninety or a hundred the judge.
Well," said the other man , " the
6
years old , you may think to yourself,
66
That is somebody who was born rate at which it travels is so great that
when there were no railways anywhere if you go all the way by that coach it
in the world .” will force the blood up into your head ,
The first proper railway was and you will die. Either go by a
opened on September 27th , 1825. coach which is not so terribly swift ,
Until then people travelled as they or promise me that you will rest at
had travelled for thousands of years. York.”
They had to ride on horseback , or in What would he have said if they
coaches , or else they had to walk. It had told him that the time would
used to take as long to get from come when men and women and
STONES

Scotland as itnow takes us to get from children, riding in express trains,

PRIVING
STEPHEN

London to Egypt. People on setting would think nothing of travelling at

out for Edinburgh or Glasgow used to the rate of sixty or seventy miles an
say, “ This is a very long journey hour ? He would have thought the
which I have to make, and I might person telling him that had gone
never return, so I had better make my mad , would he not ?
)
will before I go ." Who made the railways, which have
They thought they were almost brought about this great change in
flying if the coach went along at the travelling ? It was George Stephen
rate of ten miles an hour . Once , son, one of the poorest boys ' you
CLĄD
STO
when a great judge was coming from ever heard of. RUS
NE Edinburgh to London, he thought He was born on June 9th , 1781 , at KIN

that he would ride in the coach a little village near Newcastle -on
which , by having fast horses ready Tyne . There were five other children
to meet it at different villages all in the family, so, with George and
botaRJULIUS CÆSAR
TON HER
Non
BERT SPENCCA
587
 THE CHILD'S BOOK OF MEN AND WOMEN
the other five and his father and Thomas Newcomen, a Dartmouth
mother , there were eight of them alto- blacksmith, who was born in 1663, and
gether. Their father, Robert Stephenson, died in 1729, made a steam-engine which
though he worked very hard as a pumped water out of the mines.
miner, and afterwards as a fireman for This was a wonderful engine , con
an engine which dragged coal up outsidering that it was one of the first ; but,
of the pit, earned so little money that of course, it was far from perfect.! A
he and his wife and all these children model of Newcomen's engine was sent
had to live in a tiny cottage, which to be repaired, and a young man named
had only one room . That one small James Watt was put to work on it . This
room was their kitchen , scullery, was in 1763, when Watt was twenty
parlour, bedroom -- everything. seven .He easily did what was wanted
HOW.GEORGE STEPHENSON , BEGAN TO to make the model work, but he saw
THINK WHILE WORKING AT A COAL - PIT that the Newcomen engine wasted
Children did not have to go to school nearly all its steam . Watt, who was a
in those days if their parents did not very clever man, thought long over this ,
wish it ; poor people's children hardly and in 1705 he invented an engine of his
ever did go, and George Stephenson own , which was far better than New
was like the rest of them . He used to comen's -- stronger, and not wasting any
run about the village as a child , instead steam .
of learning lessons ; then , when he got Then Watt and a man named
a little bigger, he set out to earn money Matthew Boulton became partners at
by looking after cows. Afterwards he Birmingham , and made many engines
was put to mind a horse which was kept on the plan of Watt's. These pumped
at the colliery where Robert Stephenson water, but they were fixed ; they could
worked . not move about . Watt knew all about
But, though the boy did not go to the science of steam-engines , but poor
school, he was clever. He used to make George Stephenson did not.
little clay models of the engine at the IE GREAT GIANT THAT DASHED THROUGH
THE
colliery, and he got to know so much THE LANES AT NIGHT
about the engine that he was employed William Murdock , the man who found
to look after one which pumped water out the way to make gas from coal, also
out of a coal-pit. He loved this work . knew the secret , and made a toy steam
But he wanted to know more about engine which ran on wheels. Murdock
the engine than he already knew . He had a friend named Richard Trevethick,
could see for himself what there was to who did better than this. Trevethick,
be seen , but he wanted to know why the who was born in Cornwall in 1771 , and
fire in the furnace caused the water in died in 1837 , made a steam -engine in
the boiler to change into steam , and why 1800 which would travel along the road .
the steam was able to drive the engine. One dark night he and a friend, when
He could not understand these things, out for aa ride on the engine, dashed up
for all that he wished to know was to a toll -gate. The toll-keeper came
written in books which he could not out to take the money for their toll, but
read . To be able to read seemed to him when he saw the engine spouting
the most wonderful thing in the world . steam and sparks , he was so frightened
' HE MEN WHO HAD BEEN THINKING ABOUT that he could not speak.
T “ How much have we to pay ? ”
He knew that if he could learn to read Trevethick asked him .
he would be able to learn the secrets of The poor man was in too much fear
the steam - engines such as had then been to answer , so Trevethick asked him a
built. Stephenson himself did not invent second time.
the steam - engine, for there was one The toll-keeper flung open the gates.
already in use at the colliery when he “ N -nothing to pay -nothing to pay
first went to work .
please pass on as quickly as you can ,"
For a long time men had been trying he said .
to make use of steam . Men in France He thought that Trevethick and his
had tried , and men in England had friend were two evil spirits , and that
tried . Each in his turn did a little the steam-engine was the carriage which
better than the others, until at last evil spirits used.
588
THE MEN WHO MADE THE FIRST ENGINES

THE BOY WHO THOUGHT OUT THE STEAM- ENGINE : JAMES WATT WATCHING A KETTLE STEAM
From the picture by Marcus Stone, R.A., published by Messrs. Hy. Graves & Co.

YOUNG GEORGE STEPHENSON AND HIS ASSISTANT WORKING A MODEL ENGINE

589
 -THE CHILD'S BOOK OF MEN AND WOMEN.
Trevethick's steam - carriage was the When he got home he found that
first that ever ran along a road. When an accident had made his poor father
that was made, George Stephenson
was nearly nineteen years of age.
He had just got a situation in which
his wages were twelve shillings a week.
STEPHENSON LEARNED HIS ABCWHILE
INVENTING THE RAILWAY ENGINE
“ Now I am made for life ," he said,
the money seeming so much. But still
he did not even know his letters . He
could not bear this any longer. He
made up his mind, big as he was, to
go to a little school and learn to read
and write, to do as a young man what
every child in the land can now do .
He had to begin at the very beginning,
to learn his A B C , and to learn how
to do the simplest sums. He did not
mind that. Although he worked hard
at his engine from early morning till
evening, at night he would gladly
run off to his school to do his lessons .
He soon learned, because he made
up his mind that nothing should
stop him .
Having learned to read and write and
do sums, he could now read and under-
stand the wonderful books which told
him what was known about the making
and working of steam -engines. While
other youngmen were wasting their time,
George was working at his engine or
at his books. If not doing that he would
be mending boots . He mended boots
so that he might have a little more
blind, so George had now to keep his
mother and father, as well as himself
and his little child . He had a hard time
of it. The Army wanted him to go for
a soldier, and he had to give up all his
little savings and run into debt to be
allowed to stay at home and work for
his child and his parents. His troubles
were so great that he shed tears , and
thought that it was of no use trying to
live in England, that he really must
go to America, where so many other
people were going. What aa difference it
would have made if he had gone ! We
should have had no railways in England
for years and years .
Stephenson was not the man to sit
weeping. He got better work , this time
at Killingworth colliery, some little
distance away from his old home.
At this colliery they had a steam
engine working to pump away the water
which leaked into the pit. The engine
worked so poorly that it could not pump
quickly enough . For more than a year
it had been at work, yet the pit was
still full of water. Stephenson asked to
be allowed to try what he could do .
They laughed at the idea of his suc
ceeding where better men, as they were
supposed to be, had failed. Still, his
masters let him have his way.
THETHEFIRST RAILWAY ENGINE RAN
BOTTOM OF A COAL - PIT
AT

money, for he had fallen in love with He took the engine to pieces, he altered
a pretty country girl, and she had one or two parts, and then set it going.
promised to marry him as soon as they In two days it had pumped all the pit
could save up enough money with which dry. That was a great thing for George,
to furnish a little house . and his masters saw that he was a great
They did save up and get married . deal cleverer than the rest of their men ;
They had a nice little two-roomed so they gave him charge of all the
cottage of their own, and a baby boy machinery at the colliery, and paid him
was sent to make them still more happy.. two pounds a week . He still worked
TH1EE GREAT SORROW THAT CAME INTO away at his studies, but there was new
GEORGE STEPHENSON'S LIFE work for him to do at the colliery.
But great sorrow came to poor George. This work was to build a steam -engine
His wife died . So he went to work in to run on rails in the pit, and draw the
Scotland, walking all the way to Mont- coal from where it was dug out to the
rose . He stayed there for a year and bottom of the shaft, where it had to come
saved [28. But he loved his baby too up to the surface. So the first railway
much to be longer away. The boy had on which a steam -engine ran began at
been left at home, so Stephenson felt the bottom of a coal -pit.
that he must go back . The man who There had been rails there before,
was afterwards to give the world its but the trucks of coal had been drawn
railways came back from Scotland in over the rails by horses. So well did the
the same way that he had gone there- engine work that instead of a hundred
he walked all the way on foot . horses only fifteen were now required.
590
 CONDIZKLEECOCITICOTUCO TECannon EODOTEICAL OTELLE

THE FIRST ENGINES & THE FIRST RAILWAY

::4

he

In 1765 James Watt was asked to repair This was the first locomotive engine ever made in England, and was
this model engine , and in doing so found constructed by William Murdock , the man who found out the
out a way to make a much better one. way to make gas out of coal. It was only a little toy model.

$90KEY

vy
The first steam -engine that could run along the road The Rocket was one of the first engines that ever ran
was made in 1800 by Richard Trevethick in Cornwall. on a railway from one town to another. It was made
It frightened the people, who thought it an evil spirit. by George Stephenson, and drew a load of 13 tons.

This picture shows Parkside Station on the Liverpool and Manchester Railway, which was opened in 1830
This was the second railway ever made, and was constructed by George Stephenson . There were no station
platforms and the trains were quite small, and we should think them very slow if we saw them now.
591
 THE CHILD'S BOOK OF MEN AND WOMEN
It was only a little engine, and not a
Very good one, so he built others, each
one being better than the last. He
found time to do other things, too. His
little boy was now growing up , SO
George, who still needed more money
than he earned at his work , used to
clean and mend clocks at night, so
that he could afford to send the child
to a good school. Little Robert, who
was very much like his father, was a
wonderful scholar at school, and what
he learned by day he used to teach his
father at night . In time he came to be
a great man , and helped his father in
his work, and built engines and railways.
SAFETY LAMP FOR THE MEN IN THE
A MINES , AND THE FIRST RAILWAY
Besides making engines and mending
boots and clocks, and learning from
books, George Stephenson also made
a famous safety-lamp. At that time
men had to work in the mines with
candles to lighten the darkness. Dan-
gerous gas often escapes into the pit,
and when this happened in those days,
the gas, meeting the flame of the candle,
used to explode, killing many men and
wrecking the mine . Stephenson tried
and tried until he was able to make a
lamp which would not explode. This
was such a great thing that kind
friends made him a present of a
thousand pounds.
He was now getting famous, and the
owner of another colliery engaged him
to build engines for him. George made
five engines, each of which could draw
a load of sixty-four tons along the rails .
When George Stephenson was forty
years old, a gentleman named Edward
Pease made up his mind to build a
railway from Stockton to Darlington.
He meant to have the trains drawn by
horses, but Stephenson went to him
and asked if he might build engines to
draw them. Mr. Pease was surprised
at the suggestion ; but he went to see
George's engines at work , and said that
he would have one for his railway.
MAN ON HORSEBACK RODE IN FRONT
A OF THE FIRST TRAIN
So George left the colliery for ever,
and set to work to have the rails laid
and to build his engine.. He spent his
£1,000 to help in starting a business
to build engines and railway trucks,
and from this workshop came the first
engine to draw a train.
592
The work was finished by Tuesday,
September 27th, 1825 , and thousands
of people were at Stockton to see the
train start . They thought that the
thing would be a failure, and wanted
to enjoy the fun . But there was no
failure . The train, made up of six
waggons carrying coal and flour, and
one coach for passengers, moved off
with George himself driving the engine .
A man on horseback rode in front
of the train, waving a great flag. He
thought that he would be able to lead
it all the way, that the train would
never go fast enough to pass him. But
presently George made a signal to him
to get out of the way, and set the train
going at fifteen miles an hour, although
the weight which the little engine drew
was nearly ninety tons.
It was a happy moment for Stephen
son when the train reached Darlington
without accident. The coal was left ,
and the train started back, carrying only
passengers. When Stockton was reached ,
it was found that about 600 people were
riding in or hanging on to the trucks.
THEWISE MEN WHO THOUGHT THE
TRAINS WOULD
That was the first time in the history
of the world that a steam-engine had
drawn a train carrying passengers over
a railway, and the man to do it all
was the poor boy of other days who
had been glad to earn pennies by mind
ing cows, and to learn his A B C
while other young men of his age were
wasting their time in public -houses.
Of course, after this, Stephenson
became very famous, and he was at
once called upon to build a railway
between Liverpool and Manchester.
He was not afraid of the work, though
he had many trials . First of all the
consent of Parliament had to be gained
before the railway could be built, and
the silliest things were said against the
work . Great men declared that the
engines would burst and blow the
trains and the passengers to pieces, or
that, if they did not do this, they would
set the countryside on fire ; or that
their smoke would poison all the cows
and pigs and hens, and all the birds
would drop dead as they flew over the
railways.
The papers were as bad as the
people. They all wrote against
Stephenson and his works.
 CITATE LEDE

THE FIRST TRAINS TO RUN IN ENGLAND

A man on horseback riding in front of the first railway train to run in England.

A race of railway engines at Rainhill, near Liverpool, in which George Stephenson's Rocket won, 1829.

A scene on one of the first railways, which were quite open and not protected from the roads.

DE CHOPIFREE PORROELO SIO BALRANGBE3

KOUTOUT

How first -class passengers travelled 70 years ago : a train going from Liverpool to Manchester.
TOMOT

How second-class passengers travelled 70 years ago : a train on the second railway built in England.

How third - class passengers travelled 70 years ago, before all carriages were covered in .

How goods were carried 70 years ago : a goods train from Liverpool to Manchester.

How cattle were carried in the early days of the railways

SOME OLD PICTURES OF THE EARLIEST RAILWAYS BUILT IN D
ZO

TUTDUUTX VITELTIITETTONICITITUTEXTITUITECTE
593
 THE CHILD'S BOOK OF MEN AND WOMEN -irammes
“ You might as well expect people to make the famous Thames Tunnel.
to let themselves be fired off on rockets In boring their way they found that
as trust themselves to steam -engines the earth and water would rush in ,
and railways. ” That is what one of
the papers said at the time.
But people did trust themselves to
railways. Stephenson, remembering
this talk about rockets, called his first
engine for the Manchester and Liverpool
railway " The Rocket."
HE LITTLE ENGINE THAT STARTED
THETHE WORLD'S RAILWAYS
For the opening of that railway,
several engines were sent. The com-
pany promised £ 500 reward to the
man who made the best engine for
their work . When all was ready there
was a public trial of the engines. The
others were not nearly so good as
George's splendid little Rocket. They
broke down on the run , or could not go
fast enough . His did all that was
required to win the prize. It had been
built at his own works, and his joy was
very great because his son Robert
had made the improvements which
enabled it to gain the prize. The Rocket
drew a load of thirteen tons at as high
a speed as twenty -nine miles an hour.
It was only a little engine drawing
a little train on quite a small railway,
but it was the day of small things.
Little beginnings have great endings.
From that time George Stephenson
became gradually richer and richer.
His son worked with him . They
made engines for all parts of England,
for railways which they built.
POOR BOY'S ENGINES WERE
THEORDERED BY KINGS
Foreign kings sent for them to build
railways in Europe, or to advise them
how to do so for themselves. From
George Stephenson's works engines went
to all parts of Europe, and he made a
fortune, and lived to see his son even
more successful than he had been .
They never forgot that they had been
poor, but helped others who were as
poor as they had been, and did great
good all the rest of their lives.
Since that day many men have carried
on the work of building railways.
Mr. Brassey had at one time as many
as 70,000 men working for him in the
making of roads for the iron horse.
Isambard Kingdom Brunel , who built
all the bridges and tunnels on the Great
Western Railway, helped his father
594
so the younger Brunel invented a
wonderful shield . He watched a poor
little worm at work in the water ,
and saw how it made its way into timber.
As it ate its way into the wood it built
round itself a tube, which became
hard like lime, and so made a safe path
for itself. And Brunel did something
like that for his father's tunnel . Hie
made a tube of steel , which was driven
into the earth , and so kept it from
tumbling in. Then between the tube
and the earth above he forced in cement ,
which set as hard as rock. Had he
not learned this secret from the worm ,
he could never have made the tunnel.
FIRST TRAINS THAT
THETHROUGH RAN
TUNNELS
This shield was of great importance
for the building of the Underground
Railway in London . This was the
work of Sir John Fowler. Wise men
said that the work could not be done .
“ The wheels will be so greasy that the
engines will never be able to draw the
)
trains,” said one famous man . Other
people thought that the tunnels would
make all the houses fall down as the
railway passed beneath them . But
the shield and other clever inventions
enabled Sir John Fowler to get his
railway built under London, and when
the first part of it was opened, on
January 9th, 1863, there was as much
rejoicing in London as there had been
at Darlington when Stephenson opened
his. The first train was made up of
goods trucks, but Mr. and Mrs.
Gladstone rode in them .
All things change. The Underground
is now giving up its steam -engines.
Trains carried along by electricity have
taken their place . London has “ tube
railways nearly everywhere, in which
electric trains run. Everywhere the
same rapid progress is being made
Trains run up high mountains and in
tunnels bored through mountains. They
cross rivers and lakes.
George Stephenson would be sur
prised if he could see what the railways
have now become. But all the railway
wonders have grown out of the railways
which he first invented.
The next stories of men and women
begin on page 679.
 The Child's Book of God
FAMILIAR THINGS
WHAT THESE PICTURES
THE REAL WEALTH OF A NATION
LOONG ago there was
CONTINUED FROM PAGE 470
no money any
where . But as soon
as men began to build
homes, to till the earth , and to
breed cattle , there arose a need for
something which should represent
these things . A man might want to
exchange a sheep for a goat, and that
was simple enough ; he could give his
sheep to, his friend and take the goat
home in its place. But if he wanted
to buy the goat without giving the
sheep in exchange it was not so easy,
Or if he wanted to sell his house and
build another it was not easy. It is
not easy to be always handling goats
and houses. So men agreed that
instead of handling goats and houses
they would handle something else
which represented goats and houses.
The thing they agreed upon was
money, and money may be made of else that can be named is nothing
anything. In some parts of the world
people use shells as money , and in
nearly all parts of the world they use
paper, printed in a particular way so
that no one can copy it .
But most commonly the things
used are coins made of certain
metals , with their value marked on
them . The coins are, of course , of no
use in themselves. You cannot eat
gold , or drink it , or make cloth s out of
it. A great Englishman, John Ruskin,
said , ma y years ago, that if all the
money in the world were destroyed,
human beings, taken altogether, would
not be any richer or any poorer than
they are now, as they would be if all
the bread in the world were destroyed ,
or all the clothes. If all the money
were destroyed , all that would be lost
would be simply the amount of power
which some people possess over others.
595
&
SHOW US
It is true that some
of the things of which
money is made, such
as gold and silver, can
be made into beautiful ornaments ,
so that the metals have some
value in themselves ; but that
is a pure accident . We use gold
and silver for money simply be use 1
no one can make gold or silver, and
we practically know where all the
gold and silver in the earth are. If,
to -morrow , a great mountain of gold
were found , we might have to fix
onsomething else to make money of.
John Ruskin said that " there is
no wealth but life," and he told us
that the real wealth of a country is
not the amount of the coins , or
counters , or bank-notes, that it
possesses , but its people, and, not
least of all, its children . Everything
at all compared with this. The real
wealth of England is not in the
Bank of England, but in the homes.
Unfortunately, most people do not
understand these things. Some day,
perhaps when the boys and girls of to
day grow up and rule England , we shall
spend more time and money in taking
care of the real wealth of England , its
men and women and boys and girls .
At present one baby in about every
seven that are born in England dies
before it is a year old , and very few
people care, because they do not un
derstand that a baby is real wealth.
The opposite word to wealth, said
Ruskin, should be illth, and anything
that destroys life or degrades it is illth.
We spend much time and life in England
in making illth every year, and perhaps
you will stop that, too, when you grow
up, and help us to make real wealth .
EROTY
 ODCOCTIT RECIMOCULO

WHERE THE MONEY IS MADE

This is the Mint , where the money comes from. The great money factory stands on the banks of the Thames,
almost in the shadow of the gloomy Tower of London. From this building comes nearly every sovereigu
spent in England, every gold and silver coin in the land, indeed, except those that happen to come from
Australia. The Mint could make a million sovereigns in a week, but the money actually made is about £ 8,000,000
a year. These pictures show how a penny is made, and they would be just the same in the case of a sovereign.

The first of these two pictures shows the great stack of metal from which the pennies are made. What we call
" coppers " are really bronze, which is a mixture of copper, tin, and zinc. In the first picture tons of bronze are
stacked up in long bars ; the second picture shows us the weighing of the metal before it goes to therolling -room .
TEZITTOYIXX
596
 waarumaranmanam.cnmaataramanamaamaramitanterinaranuarmarnarenittaaramaaminatinchaandaamanam

MAKING THE METAL INTO LITTLE ROUND PIECES

The metal is here being melted in the furnace. It is The melting purifies the metal and frees it from any
put into a closed " crucible, " like a copper, such as thing that may have got mixed with it ; and the pure
we see stacked up in this picture, and the crucible is metal is poured into long, thin moulds, or iron boxes,
then placed in a closed furnace, where the heat melts and allowed to cool. It comes out of these moulds
the metal until it runs like water . The man here in long, narrow strips, which are pressed through
is opening the closed furnace to look at the metal. rollers and made the exact thickness of a penny.

The long, thin strips of metal then come to this machine, which cuts them up into little round discs the
exact size of a penny. This machine, called the “ cutter, ” works so rapidly that it cuts out about five
hundred pennies in a minute. The metal strips, as they are cut off, fall in a heap on a tray underneath,
and are taken back to the furnace to be melted down again, so that nothing shall be wasted. The pennies
are now the proper shape and size, but they must be passed through another very wonderful machine and be
well baked in an oven before they will look at all like the pennies that we carry in our pockets every day.
OLLUT TOUT CEDOMENDADO
597
ILCOLLECCAD COLECA caracaramannamacaram CORREC DE

A PENNY'S SLOW RIDE THROUGH A FIERY FURNACE

If you will look at a penny you will notice that the edge of it is raised all round. This is the machine that
raises the edge, in order to protect the face of the coin. Money wears away with constant handling and
by rubbing against the lining of the pockets , and it would wear much more quickly if the edge were uoč raised.
in

The blank penny has now a slow journey before it-a journey that none of us would like to take. It must pass
through a fire for two and a half hours. This picture shows the furnace through which all money passes, carried
round in little iron boxes on an endless chain . When the penny has been well “ baked " it is ready for stamping.
RE
598 morri
 en CLIMAX COTOON TUCCIAIORELLOTGERIDONECOID

THE MAN WHO TOUCHES ALL THE PENNIES

1907

This is the machine that stamps the pennies. They are dropped through into the sloping tube seen at the left of
the picture, at the bottom of which they are struck between two dies, coming out stamped on both sides as
here shown. On one side is the picture of the King ; on the other side is the name of the coin, the year in
which it was made, and the figure of Britannia which is meant to represent Britain as mistress of the seas.

Every coin made at the Mint must be properly tested. The men in this picture are examining them . They
touch all the pennies before they leave the Mint. The coins pass before them on a moving belt , on which
they are placed by the man at the left. As they pass slowly by, the man with the wonderful fingers examines
them to see if they are properly made. If badly made or of a bad colour he at once notices it and they are thrown
out. If good they are carried on by the belt and are dropped into the tray seen near the man to the right.
599
 ETXED ALLCLLLERIES
maamaaiaanmaaraannutunaமயாaanunnaenuamanar

THE MACHINE THAT COUNTS THE PENNIES

This is the most wonderful machine at the Mint. After the coins have been weighed they are placed in bags
and brought to the counting machine. This machine counts them all and makes no mistakes. The truck
full of bags is pushed under the platform , as seen in the picture, and the bags are carried to the top in a small
lift. The man a the top empties the pennies on to a plate, and this wonderful machine does the rest. It tests
the coins once more, counts them , weighs them , and finally drops them into bags ready to be issued.
ணனாகவாணாசனார்

The bags of pennies are packed in boxes, asseen in picture,and taken to the room from which they are sentout.
All the sovereigns go straight from the Mint to the Bank of England, but the silver and bronze coins are circulated
in many ways. The boxes seen in this picture are packed for Australia, and some of the pennies in them have
probably by this time been spent in buying the ChilDREN'S ENCYCLOPÆDIA at the other side of the world.
The next Familiar Things begin on page 665
vorum XDU
600 min
 The Child's Story of
THE EARTH

WHAT THIS STORY TELLS US

JE come in these pages to the story of what the earth is like to -day. We
WE have learned how men arrived at the great fact that the earth is a moving
ball going round the sun , and how we suppose the ball came into being. We
have considered its shape and its size. Here we learn what men know about the
stuff the ball is made of, and the way it is held together. We are born upon this
great ball which is carrying us through space, and we cannot leave it. Though ,
compared with all the stars and suns and planets, the earth is only a grain of dust,
yet it is to us the most important part of the whole universe, and we are right
to think so . Therefore we cannot know too much about it. We read here of the
earth's crust and its inside, and we begin to learn how the world is kept warm .

THE EARTH AS IT IS TO- DAY

So farwe have been CONTINUED FROM PAGE 483
to imagine such
distance as
a

goingover a kind
of history , showing
very shortly the chief
things that have happened in
order to make the earth of to
day. But we have seen also
what people are SO apt to
forget-that the things which went on
in the past are going on still ; Wie
earth, which is the product of changes,
is still changing
We shall not talk here about the
oceans and the seas and continents
and mountains — what is called geo-
graphy. That is important, and we
shall come to it in its proper place
and at the proper time. We must
begin now by thinking of the earth
as a ball, speaking about it just as
one might speak about a cricket-
ball . Perhaps you know that a
cricket - ball has a certain weight,
that it has a cover, and that inside this
there is a core , which is made of
certain materials put together in a
particular way. You may also know
that a cricket-ball is elastic, so that figures which say how many square
when you throw it against a wall it miles there are on the surface of the
comes back again instead of spreading earth , or yet many millions of
out and sticking to the wall, as a
lump of mud would. Now , just in the
same way I want to tell you about
the great earth - ball, tiny little pieces
of which we put together to make
cricket-balls, cathedrals, and other
things.
Inthe last part we said what the
size of the earth was . Now, we have
a good idea of what a yard is and
what a mile is, but it is very difficult
miles ; yet,
25,000
though
this sounds such a
big figure, I do want you to
realise that, compared with
other things, the earth is really
very small. For instance,
there is a very good way of comparing
the size of the earth with that of
the sun, as shown in the picture on
the next page. If the centre of the
sun could be placed at the centre of
the earth, the surface of the sun
would reach far beyond the distance
that the moon is from the earth
that is to say, the sun occupies far
more space than the whole of the
space swept by the earth and the
moon moving round her.
And yet the sun does not look so
very much bigger than the moon,
though really you might throw a
thousand moons into the sun, and
the difference they would make
would not be worth mentioning.
Now , I am not going to give you the
millions of tons it weighs, because we
cannot realise what these figures mean ,
and so they are of no use to us at
present.
There is, however, one enormously
interesting thing about the earthwhich
can be expressed in a way which we
understand, and which is interesting,
because it means so much, and this
is the question of the density of the
earth . First of all, I want to tell

IT 601 D 22
 -THE CHILD'S STORY OF THE EARTH
you what density is ; second, how the Now, if you can imagine a cube of
i ensity of the earth can be found out ; water, such as you might have by pour
and, third , what the earth's density is ing water into a cubical vessel, that
and what it means . would have a certain amount of stuff in
A tennis-ball is bigger than a golf- it according to the size of the cube. If,
ball, but it is not so heavy. There is now , you poured the water out and filled
more stuff in the golf-ball than there the cube with mercury instead, you
is in the tennis -ball. A big piece of would have the same volume, or size ,
coal is heavier than a small piece of or bigness , of mercury, but it would be
coal . There is more THE DISTANCE ACROSS THE SUN'S FACE much heavier. The
stuff in the bigger mercury gets more
piece ; but if you stuff into the same
took two pieces of amount of space
the same size they than the water
would be the same does. Now, the
weight — that is to proper way of say:
say, they would MOON ing this is that the
have the same mercury is denser
amount of stuff in CEARTH or has a greater
them . Now, there mass than
-
the
is a special word water. Perhaps you
for the size of a will say that you
thing—that is to do not see any par
say, for the amount ticu ar reason why
of space that it it should not be
occupies. This good enough to say
special name is that the mercury
volume, and really is heavier than the
it is not difficult to The sun is so much bigger than the earth that if the water. The only
understand, for it sun could be placed at
edgeoutit would reachfasfar beyond the moon as the objection to that is
only means size , or moon is from the earth. It is fourtimes as far across that, though it is
bigness. the sun's faceas it is from the earth to the moon. quite true for here
Now , as
the tennis-ball and the golf-ball show , and now , yet the heaviness, or weight,
the volume of a thing tells you nothing of a thing depends upon the earth's pull
about its weight, or, rather, about the for it and its pull for the earth ; whereas
amount of stuff in it - unless you can the amount of stuff in it — which is
compare it with a different volume of the what we are interested in—would
same inaterial , as in the case of pieces of remain the same even if the earth were
coal of different size. So we want a moved a million miles away, and so
special word to mean the amount of stuff could scarcely pull at all. Therefore ,
there is in any particular kind of thing as instead of describing the amount of
compared with a similar volume, or size, stuff in a thing by the word " weight,
or bigness, of something else. You know we use the word mass, or denseness ;
what a cube is—a thing like the bricks and the mass of a thing would remain
you used to use for making pictures . the same, of course , even if it were

These pictures help us to understand what we mean by the density of the earth . Here we have four glasses.
The first contains a little mercury , or quicksilver ; the second is more than half full of glycerine ; the third
contains just a little more of water ; and the fourth is nearly full of petroleum. Yet, though the space occupied
by these is so different, each has the same density, or the sa amount of stuff, just as a piece of snow
wlien melted into water, has the same amount of " stuff " as before, though it takes up less space.
teoro
602
 KOLIKO THE EARTH AS IT IS TO -DAY-καταπικαιιιιαιικκαιιταιιταιιταιικκαι
moved to the moon , where it would measure the extent to which the earth
:ཨ༉༢༈་༧༣;：，

weigh far less, as the moon is smaller, makes a pendulum swing, and the rate at
}，་ཱི

and therefore pulls less hard , or if it which that pendulum swings , we can
were moved to Jupiter or the sun , measure the force with which the earth
where it would weigh much heavier, acts upon it, and therefore , as we already
since these are much larger than the know the size , or volume, or bigness, of
earth , and pull much more powerfully. the earth , we can say how dense it is—
Now, in order to compare the massive- that is to say, how tightly the stuff
ness of different things—which we in it is packed .
usually call their density—we take a EARTHTHAN
THETIGHTLY INSIDE IS
PACKED MORE
ANYTHING WE KNOW
certain volume of water under definite
conditions, and call its density one ; Now, the extremely remarkable con
then , if we find that something else clusion to which we come is that the
is twice as massive , or dense, as water, earth is somewhere between four and
we say that
its density is two- and so on. six times as dense as water.
I am sure you will understand that if Water, you know , is a very heavy
the thing we were comparing with thing, and as long as we think about
water were at the same distance from things at the surface of the earth , that is
the centre of the earth, then, if it were as good as to say that it is a very dense
twice as dense as the water, the same thing , because weight or heaviness is
volume, or bigness, of it would be twice a perfect guide to density or massive
as heavy , or would weigh twice as much. ness, so long as we are comparing things
But I have explained to you why we do at the same distance from the centre of
not use the word weight, as weight the earth. Now, if the earth, as a whole ,
depends upon the earth's pull - or is five times as dense as water. the stuff
the moon's pull if we were on the moon ; in the inside of it must be squeezed
and if you think that it is not worth together more tightly than we can
while to make this distinction, I can imagine. None of the things we know
very soon show you that it is. and can examine at the surface of the
IT IS THAT THE SAME THING Does earth, no rocks or coal, or anything of
that sort, are nearly as dense as this
If we take two metal cubes of exactly average density of the earth, and there
the same size and material, and place fore, away down beneath us, the stuff
them side by side on a flat table , then, of which the earth is made must be so
besides being of the same density, or tightly packed that the densest things
massiveness, they are also, of course, we know, such as lead, can be almost
of the same weight. But if, instead of nothing compared with it.
having the two cubes side by side, you THIN CRUST OF
THEWHICH WE LIVE
THE EARTH , UPON
put one on top of the other, though they
are still of the same massiveness, This is not only very interesting in
or density , though there is still the same itself, but it is also very important,
amount of stuff in the one as in the because of what it tells us as to the
other, yet it can be shown that the one tremendous forces which are , so to
which is above now weighs less than speak, chained up underneath us.
the other, because it is a little bit further Sometimes, as we know, these show
from the earth , and therefore the earth themselves by means of earthquakes .
and it do not pull each other quite so It is also interesting to know that the
hard. Now, I hope you agree with me, crust of the earth , compared with the
after this , that there is some sense in whole size of the earth, is really ex
distinguishing between mass and weight. tremely thin. It feels firm enough under
How are we to find out what is the our feet, and there is no fear of its crack
density of the earth ? How are we to ing and letting us through , but I think
find out whether this great ball is less that if the earth could be cut right
massive, or dense, than water, or more through the middle like an orange we
massive, or dense ? This is a problem should be very much astonished , if
which men of science have long been we could take a sort of birdseye view
engaged upon , and it has been thought of the whole cut surface, to see how
out in various ways. Just now , perhaps, thin is the crust on which we walk and
it is enough to say that if we can from which all living things have been
603
 THE CHILD'S STORY OF THE EARTH...
produced. Of course, when we learn
that the inside of the earth has this extra-
ordinary density, we are apt to think of
it as solid - far more solid than lead .
But another great fact about it is that
it is intensely hot, so hot that no heat
we know on the surface of the earth
can compare with it . It is, indeed ,
probable that the inside of the earth
is so hot that the stuff of which it is
made is not really solid at all. On the
other hand, we may be wrong in think-
ing of it as liquid or as a gas, for it is
more than likely that matter inside
the earth, owing to heat and pressure,
has a state which is like nothing that
we know.
we COULD THROW THE EARTH AT A
IF , of course, but still enough to produce
We said something a little while ago
about a cricket- ball being elastic, so that
when it is thrown against a wall it comes
back again, instead ofspreading out and
sticking there like a lump of wet mud .
When we say that a thing is elastic, we
simply mean that when it is put out of
its shape it comes back to its old shape
as soon as it can . When the cricket -ball
hits the wall, it is flattened at one part for
a twinkling of time, and then it springs
back to its original shape, and that
makes it bound back from the wall .
Now , if you could throw the great ball
called the earth against a wall, it would
spring back more perfectly than a
cricket -ball, more perfectly even than a
ball of steel. Only I do not think this
experiment will ever be made.
There is a cheap kind of cricket-
ball which is called a composition
cricket-ball, often called compo " for
short by boys. This means that it is keeps the crust warm , and then it
a composition of a number of things passes away from the crust into the
put together.
HE DIFFERENT MATERIALS OF WHICH
THE
THE EARTH - BALL IS MADE
Well , the earth is also a compo ,'
composed of a large number of different
materials put together in a particular
way ; and this question of the composi-
tion of the earth is an immensely
interesting one, which we must study
carefully . But before we go into that
I want to tell you about the very newest
thing that we have just learnt about the
composition of the earth ; and I want
to tell you this first, though it is the
thing we have learnt last , because it
tells us far more than ever we knew
604
before about the history of the earth ,
about what is happening to it now, and
about the wonderful way in which the
earth is kept warm. This is a perfectly
wonderful discovery. The special kind
of stuff with which it deals is very rare,
but it is one of the substances which
make up the earth . There is so little of
it that if the stuff were not so wonderful
in itself it would not be worth mention
ing. Its name is radium ; but before I
tell you why its discovery in the earth
is so important, we will ask oursei es in
what ways the earth might be kept
warm .
In the first place, the earth might be
kept warm by the heat of the sun - of
which we catch only a very tiny amount,
all the life on the earth, our own in
cluded . However, during the night
the earth throws back into space the
heat which it got from the sun during
the day, and as you know what night
and day mean , this is as much as to say
that all the time one half of the earth is
getting heat from the sun the other half
is losing it . We are quite certain that
the earth would soon freeze solid , and
become as dead and cold as the moon ,
if the sun's heat were all it had to keep
it warm. The moon gets the sun's heat
just as we do , but the moon is cold.
YEARWASEAR OUT;ITSTHE EARTH IS
LOSING
Secondly, we know that the earth is
kept warm by the heat in its inside. It
is not making any heat in its inside,
however-or so , at least , we thought
until the other day — but the heat from
the inside simply soaks outwards and
air, and is finally lost.
Year in, year out , then , the earth
is slowly losing its heat, and , of
course, this could not go on for ever.
The moon , of course , was hot when
it began , but it has got cool much
quicker than the earth,, because it is
so very much smaller. A small thing
always loses its heat quicker than a big
thing, because a small thing has a bigger
amount of surface to lose its heat by in
proportion to the amount of stuff in it.
That is why a baby has to be kept so
very warmly clad.
The next part of the story of the earth
begins on page 705.
 The Child's Book of
STORIES

ALSA
AMO
M
MU

RUM- PEL-STILT-SKIN
a certain kingdom but his heart grew
IN once lived a poor
CONTINUED FROM
PAGE. 493
still more greedy, and
miller who had a very he shut up the poor
beautiful daughter. miller's daughter again
She was , moreover, exceedingly with a fresh task. Then she knewnot
shrewd and clever ; and the miller what to do, and sat down once more
was so vain and proud of her that to weep ; but the little man
one day he told the King of the land presently opened the door, and said ,
that his daughter could spin gold out “ What will you give me to do your
of straw. Now, this King was very task ? "
fond of money , and when he heard the “ The ring on my finger," shereplied .
miller's boast he ordered the girl to be So her little friend took the ring, and
brought before him . Then he led her began to work at the wheel, till by the
to a chamber where there was a great morning all was finished again.
quantity of straw, gave her a spinning- The King was vastly delighted to
wheel , and said, “ All this must be see all this glittering treasure ; but
spun into gold before morning, as you still he was not satisfied, and took the
value your life .” miller's daughter into a yet larger
(6
It was in vain that the poor maiden room, and said, “ All this must be
declared she could do no such thing : spun to-night ; and if you succeed you
the chamber was locked, and she shall be my Queen ."
remained alone . As soon as she was alone the dwarf
She sat down in one corner of the came in, and said, “ What will you
room and began to cry , when the door give me to spin gold this third time ?
opened, and a droll-looking little man “ I have nothing left," said she.
hobbled in, and said , “ Good-day to )
“ Then promise me,” said the little
you . What are you weeping for ? ”
66
man, “ your first little child when you
“ Alas ! ” answered she , I must are Queen .”
( 6

spin this straw into gold , and I know
not how . "
“ What will you give me," said the
little man , to do it for you ?
“ My necklace , ” replied the maiden.
He took her at her word, and set
himself down to the wheel . Round
about it went merrily, and presently
the gold was all spun.
When the King came and saw this
he was greatly astonished and pleased ; the little man and her promise ; but
That may never be," thought the
miller's daughter ; and as she knew
no other way to get her task done,
she promised him what he asked, and
he spun once more the whole heap of
gold . The King came in the morning,
and , finding all he wanted, married
her.
At the birth of her first little child the
Queen rejoiced very much, and forgot

Food pobo
605
 Anuar - THE CHILD'S BOOK
one day he came into her chamber and
reminded her of it . Then she offered
him all the treasures of the kingdom in
oxchange ; but in vain, till at last her
tears softened him , and he said , “ If
in three days you can tell me my
name you shall keep your child .”
Now, the Queen lay awake all night,
thinking of all the odd names. that she
had ever heard, and despatched messen
gers all over the land to inquire after
new ones . The next day the little man
came, and she began with Timothy,
Benjamin, Jeremiah, and all the names
she could remember, but to all of them
he said, “ That's not my name.”
The second day she began with all the
comical names she could hear of, Bandy-
legs, Hunchback, Crookshanks, and so
on ; but the little gentleman still said
to every one, “ That's not my name . ”
The third day came back one of the
messengers, and said , “ Yesterday, as
I was climbing a high hill among the
trees of the forest where the fox and the
THE GEESE WHO KEPT GUARD OF ROME
OME was besieged . A new and terrible young Roman named Manlius lay sleep
RONenemy had swooped down upon ing beside his sword near the Temple of
her. These people came from the North.
They were tall and fierce, with piercing
blue eyes , and flowing locks of glistening
gold . They were called Gauls.
Fierce battles were fought in the city,
and the legions of Rome found them .
selves driven back again and again .
The Gauls were not only strong — they
were fearless. They rushed on the
Romans with terrible shouts, and tore
their ranks in sunder.
At last the poor Romans were forced
to retire to their last fortress , called the
Capitol. They were safe here, for who
would dream of climbing up the steep
rock to force the mighty walls of the
Capitol ? But sad and dreadful was it
for the Roman soldiers, though they
were safe , to look over the walls of the
fortress and watch the savage Gauls
burning their homes and carrying off all
their precious things as booty.
The Romans began to be dreadfully
hungry. Many a time they must have
looked at the sacred geese which lived
in the Temple of Juno, and thought it
would be no crime to kill and eat them .
But the geese were sacred birds to the
Romans. To kill them would be sacrilege.
Now , it chanced one night, as a brave
606
OF STORIESXXXmom
hare bid each other good-night , I saw
a little hut, and before the hut burnt
a fire, and round about the fire danced a
funny little man upon one leg, singing :
Merrily the feast I'll make,
To-day I'll brew , to -morrow bake ;
Merrily I'll dance and sing,
For next day will a stranger bring ;
Little does my lady dream
Rum -Pel -Stilt-Skin is my name ! "
Then the Queen jumped for joy ; and as
soon as her little visitor came she said :
“ Is your name John ? ”
No ! ”
6
Is it Tom ? "
No ! ”
Is it Rum - Pel -Stilt -Skin ? "
“ Some witch told you that ! ” cried
the little man , and dashed his right foot
in a rage so deep into the floor that he
was forced to lay hold of it with both
hands to pull it out . Then he made the
best of his way off, while everybody
laughed at him for having had all his
trouble for nothing.
Juno, that a strange sound striking
across his troubled dreams woke him
suddenly out of slumber, and made him
grasp his sword and get upon his feet.
He recognised the noise at once. It
was the hissing of the sacred geese.
What could have roused those birds ?
The noise increased ; it became a
panic of alarm ; the whole flock was
filling the night with its frightened cry.
Manlius ran to the walls of the for
tress and looked down . He came face
to face with a Gaul !
The leader of the Gauls had led his
men up the pinnacle in a night attack ,
and he was just about to pull himself
over the wall when Manlius appeared .
In an instant Manlius seized the strain .
ing wrists of the Gaul, and , wrenching
the fingers free of the parapet , hurled
the enemy down the hill.
Louder and louder grew the night
clamour of the geese. Romans started
from their sleep, and , picking up their
arms, hurried to see what it could be .
They found Manlius defending the walls .
With a shout of victory they rushed to
his rescue , and in a few minutes all the
garrison was roused, and the Gauls were
beaten back and utterly routed.
 OmAIUTO PERILL WIN DILARANG
LOCATIOxa -

Ises THE DROLL LITTLE MAN WITH THE UNKNOWN NAME

Gues
;
e

11

Mui

.
AN
UN
UJE

-til
nhau

IBAckham .
When the Queen was rejoicing over the birth of her baby, the little old man who had helped her to spin
the gold came and threatened to take away her son unless she found out his name within three days.
So she thought of all the names she could, and she sent messengers all over the country to find out other
ones . On the third day came good news. “ Yesterday," said the Queen's messenger, " as I was
climbing a high hill among trees of the forest, I saw a litt hut , and before the hut burnt a fire,
and round about the fire danced a funny little man upon one leg, singing, ' Rum- Pel-Stilt-Skin is my name. '
20

. common ETOURZENDUTYBUILD
607
 UdoOCNIC amanna.mmmmor
THE KING WITH THE GOLDEN TOUCH
K ING MIDAS OF THRACE was a man who
" loved gold very much , but he was
sorry when Bacchusgave him the power
to get all the gold he wanted.
Bacchus , the Spirit of the Vine,cameto
Thrace in the form of a beautiful youth,
to fill the people with wild joy and
rapture. With him came a merry old
man , whose name was Silenas. One day
Silenas was found in the rose- gardens of
King Midas , and the men bound him in
wreaths of flowers and brought him
before the King. The King feasted
him , and led him back to Bacchus; and
Bacchus was pleased, and said to Midas:
“ Ask what you will, and I will grant it.”
THE VASE FROM THE ARABIAN SEA
A POOR fisherman
in the Arabianwasfishing
Sea, and onenight
he fished punishmehe sealedme up ."in this
up a little vase . It was made of copper
and sealed with a wonderful seal. And
when the fisherman opened it a black
smoke came out , and took the form of a
gigantic spirit .
(6
Mercy ! Mercy ! " cried the Spirit .
' I will never disobey you again , King
Solomon ! "
King Solomon ? " said the fisher-
man . He died long ago . It was I
who set you free . ”
“ Then I shall kill you ! said the
Spirit. “ I shall kill every man on earth ,
and so avenge myself for the harm King
Solomon did to me ! Listen, before you
die ! I was the only spirit who dis-
obeyed the great wise King, and to
THE SILKIE WIFE IN THE SHETLAND ISLES
*HE waters around the Shetland
THE Islands are crowded with seals .
The islanders call them “ Silkies,” and
they tell many strange tales about them .
One night a young fisherman saw
two seal ; ' skins lying on the shore. He
picked one up, and two beautiful women
came swimming towards him and cry-
ing. One of them seized the seal's skin
on the ground and put it on , and
changed into a seal, and disappeared
in the ocean . The other remained by
the shore and wrung her hands, and
begged the fisherman to give her back
her skin , so that she could rejoin her
companion. In return for this she
promised to bring him much treasure.
608
12mmanaman
Midas at once asked for the power to
turn everything he touched into gold .
This power Bacchus gave to him . At
first Midas was delighted . Everything he
laid a finger on , everything he brushed
against , changed into gold. But when the
water he tried to drink, and the food he
tried to eat , turned into hard gold in his
mouth, he sadly discovered that some of
the commonestthings on earth are worth
far more than the most precious metals.
He returned to Bacchus, dying of
thirst and hunger, and begged to be
released from the magic power, and
Bacchus showed him how to get rid
of it by bathing in a certain river .
You can kill me if you like," said
the fisherman ,“ but you can't make me
believe in that tale. No creature of your
terrific size could get into this vase.
" Nothing is impossible to me," said
the Spirit proudly. “ Look !
And , changing back to a black smoke ,
he got into the vase, saying :
6
Do you believe in the tale now ? "
“ Yes," said the fisherman , as he
sealed the vase up again .
The Spirit then solemnly vowed that,
iſ he were set free once more, he would
reward the fisherman , and do no hurt to
mankind. So the fisherman opened the
vase , and the Spirit helped him by his
magic to become a rich and happy man .
But the young fisherman wanted a
wife , and he kept the skin, and spoke so
lovingly to the Silkie woman that she
agreed to marry him . For some years
they lived happily in a cottage by the
scashore, and the Silkie wife had two
charming little children . But one night
the fisherman came home, tired and
hungry after a day's fishing, and as he
had caught nothing he was in a bad
temper. There was no supper ready.
This is what comes of marrying a
Silkie ! ” said the fisherman .
The Silkie wife said no word . Slie
went to the seashore, and took off her
clothes and put on her seal's skin ; and
the fisherman never saw her again.
ITT
YUTUTITETETT
 THE MAGIC BOY
Perowasa merry, simple lad,andhe
lived in a village in the beautiful
island of Sicily. His parents died when
he was young, and at the age of fourteen
he set out to make his fortune .
wandered about the country, and at
last a miserly old farmer engaged him
as a goatherd . But Pero forgot to
arrange about wages, and when , at the
end of the three years , he asked his
master to pay him, the miserly old
farmer gave him only threepence .
FIDDLER OF SICILY
a violin that will make everybody
dance , and a gun that will never miss,
and the gift of speech, that nobody can
refuse me anything .'
Не The Spirit granted Pero these wishes ,
and Pero turned back to the farm .
Seeing a pheasant fly by, he fired at it
to test his magic gun . The bird fell ,
but before he could pick it up the farmer
ran out and seized it .
“ Well,” said Pero , “ you can have it
if you like to dance for it. ”

yo
Moura

Soon
For
MTBANK

Pero, with his magic fiddle, was travelling in Sicily, and fell among enemies, who resolved to hang him . But
just as Pero was going to be hanged he played on the magic violin that made everybody dance, and
the magistrate and the hangman and all the spectators danced to his playing. He played till they were
weary of dancing, and the magistrate promised at last that if Pero would stop playing he should go free.
But Pero went away as light-hearted He played on his violin , and the
On the road he met a beggar-
as ever . farmer capered like a madman.
man , who said : Stop, Pero !” he cried at last . “ I
“ My son, I am starving. Give me treated you badly, I know ; but
something to buy some bread ." stop, and I'll give you a thousand
)
“ You can takemy wages,” said Pero, crowns.”
“ and I will go back and serve three Pero received the money, but as
years more.” soon as his back was turned the farmer
“ You are really as kind as you are ran to the magistrate and denounced
simple," said the beggarman, and as he him as a robber. There was little mercy
spoke he changed into a bright spirit. for robbers in Sicily in those days . Pero
I give you three wishes . Ask and was quickly arrested, tried , and con
you shall have.” demned. But just as the hangman was
“ Well,” said Pero, “ give me , please, putting the rope round his neck he
TOTUNITY TUTTOmerr IZRAZIZUERTEX
609
 uomenna
- THE CHILD'S
asked the magistrate to let him play
one tune on his violin .
)
" Don't give him the violin ! ” cried
. the farmer .
But Pero had the gift of speech , and
nobody could refuse him anything.
The magistrate gave the violin to him,
and Pero played on it , and the magistrate
and the farmer and the hangman and
the spectators danced to his playing.
He played till they were weary ; he
THREE NIGHTS IN THE ENCHANTED CASTLE
ONE summer there was a great “ Very well,” said Juan , “ I will
drought in Spain , and when autumn
came there was no harvest. Many
peasants wandered about the country in
search of work and food , and among
them was a good -looking, brave lad
whose name was Juan Lopez. His
mother and father were dead, and his
master was ruined , and he had nowhere
to go to .
One evening Juan came, hungry wounded him again , but he neither
and homeless, to the town of Granada,
and, finding no other lodging, he
settled down to sleep amid the green
ruins of an ancient Moorish castle .
But just as he closed his eyes he
felt a tap on his shoulder. Looking
up , he saw a hand holding a lighted
candle . It beckoned to him , and as
Juan was desperate with hunger he
followed .
The hand led him into a gorgeous
hall where a table stond loaded with
exquisite delicacies , and there Juan
feasted to his heart's content . The
hand then beckoned again , and led
Juan into another splendid chamber
with a bed in it . Juan took off his
ragged clothes, and put on a silken
nightdress which he found lying on a
heap of rich garments, and got into
the bed, and went asleep.
When the bells of Granada struck
twelve, the hand came and awoke him ,
and a sweet voice said :
' It was very brave of you , Juan,
to follow my hand. You are the first
who ever dared to do so . Now , will
you show yourself braver still, and
set an unhappy, helpless maiden free
from a wicked spell ? ”
What must I do ? ” said Juan .
You must stay in this bed for three
nights and days,” said the voice, “ and
you must not move or cry out, no
matter what is done to you .”
BOOK OF STORIEStamamex
played till they were worn out ; he
played till the soles came off their boots,
and still he played. And the magistrate
at last promised that if he would stop
he should go free . Pero then came down
from the scaffold, and took his gun and
his violin and his thousand crowns, and
returned to his native village , and,
having the gift of speech , he won the
prettiest girl in Sicily as his wife , and
settled down contentedly .
see if I can stand it ."
On the first night a troop of spirits
came with bludgeons , and beat poor
Juan until there was not a sound bone
in his body. But in the morning the
hand appeared , and brought him re
freshment, together with a magic
salve which cured him of his hurt.
On the second night the spirits
moved nor cried out ; and the next
morning the hand brought him a magic
medicine which healed him . The ordeal
of the third night was fearful, and no
hand appeared at the break of day. But
there came instead a princely maiden,
who bathed Juan with a magic water
that made him hale and whole again .
Juan then put on the rich garments,
and went into the hall where the table
stood , and feasted with the maiden.
She was wonderfully lovely, and her
loveliness was of a kind which Juan
had never seen before . Her skin was
of a creamy tint , with a deep rosy
colour showing beneath the cream ; her
little mouth was like a scarlet flower ;
and her dark eyes were large and
liquid and tender, like the eyes of a
beautiful fawn .
66
“ Surely you are not
not a Spanish
lady ? " said Juan .
lady
No , ” said the maiden . “ I am
the daughter of the Sultan of Morocco .
And now that the spell is removed I
must return at once to my father's
palace. Follow and find me.”
She vanished , and Juan found him
self sitting, ragged and poor, amid the
green ruins of the castle.
He bravely set out to follow the
Princess, but as he had no money to
pay his way it was a very long time
Ceture he reached her palace. The
Princess thought he was faithless,
610
காமாலையையாலாயாவா
TU

PRINCE JUAN AND THE CAPTIVE PRINCESS

MILAR " us

On the third day of Juan's life in the enchanted castle came a princely maiden, who bathed Juan with a
magic water that made him well again. Juan put on the rich garments and went into the hall where the
table stood , and there feasted with the maiden. " I am the daughter of the Sultan of Morocco," she said.
Then she vanished, and Juan followed her to her father's palace, where he made the princess his bride.
Bontonom Umron Omrum
611 mu muMTOM
 - THE CHILD'S BOOK
and she arranged to marry the King
of Arabia ; but as she was getting into
the wedding coach she saw Juan
standing, poor, ragged, and sorrowful,
by the palace gate .
Some timeago," she said to the King
of Arabia, " I lost the key of my jewel-
case , so I got a new one. Now I have
found the old key ; which shall I use ? "
“ You should use the old key ," said
the King of Arabia.
THE FABLES OF ÆSOP THE SLAVE
THE FOWL AND THE JEWEL
A fowl searching for food found a
precious stone.
“ A great many people would be
pleased to have this,” he said ; " but if I
had all the jewels in the world I would
willingly give them for one small
barley -corn."
He could eat the barley -corn , you
see , but the jewel , of course, was useless
to him .
The best thing in the world is worth
nothing to you if you have no use for it.
THE WOLF AND THE CRANE
A wolf, when eating his dinner one
day, swallowed a bone, which stuck in
his throat . He went about howling,
asking every animal he met to help him,
and promised a large reward to anyone
who could get the bone out. At last a
crane , who had a long, slender neck
and bill , undertook the task .
Poking his long neck down the wolf's plenty of fine ripe grapes. Unfortunately
throat, he got hold of the bone and for him , these grapes were growing on a
pulled it out ; but when he asked for trellis so high up that, though he leaped
the reward the wolf laughed and said, his utmost, he was not able to reach
“ You may think yourself lucky that them.
I did not bite your head off when it
was in my mouth."
Some people are like this wolf. They
are not grateful when anyone does them
a kindness.
Zone
OF STORIES
“ Here is the old key I meant,” said
the Princess, taking Juan by the hand .
“ It was this brave, handsome boy who
rescued me from the enchanted palace.
So I will marry him, and you , O King,
must find another bride.”
And marry Juan she did. The
King of Arabia, who was really a
generous man, gave the happy bride
and bridegroom a magnificent wedding
present , and they lived happily together.
THE DOG AND THE SHADOW
A dog was once walking along a
plank over a stream, carrying a
piece of meat in his mouth. Looking
down, he saw his own shadow reflected
in the clear water. Thinking it was
another dog carrying another piece of
meat, he was so greedy that he snatched
at it. This caused him to open his
mouth, and the meat fell out and sank
to the bottom of the stream.
People who try to get what belongs to
others often lose more than they gain .
w
hu
yo
THE FOX AND THE GRAPES
A hungry fox happened to come one
day into a vineyard where there were
9
“ Oh, well, never mind ! ” said the
fox. Anyone can have them for all I
care. They are sure to be very sour.”
People very often pretend to dislike
things that they are not able to get.
O12 mm LTT III
 COLLELLELLILLA COLLIELOKRULLULUKLE
LITTLE JACOB'S FRIEND
HERE was a little boy named Jacob
THERE
who lived by the Docks in London,
and whose legs were so twisted and thin
that he could only get about the streets
on crutches .
His father worked in the Docks, load
ing and unloading the great ships , whose
tall masts Jacob could see above the
roofs of the houses. There were many
children in this family, and his father
could only give poor Jacob very cheap you are to be carried there and nursed
crutches, which were too short for him
and hurt his arms and bent his back ; and
so poor little Jacob grew more and
more ill , until his parents thought he
would die .
Well, one hot summer day, as Jacob
lay on his bed beside the open window , trade, sonny,” said the mother. “ You'll
listening to the sounds of children like that, won't you ? You'll be
playing in the street , and gazing over earning your own living before you
n
the roofs and betwee the chimne ofys
the opposite houses at the tall masts
piercing the blue and cloudless sky , he
heard strange voices in the room under
neath , and then he heard his mother
crying, and he thought to himself,
They have come to tell mother that
I am going to die." But presently there
was a sound of footsteps on the stairs,
and the voices became cheerful and
happy. And then the latch of the bed-
room door was lifted, and in came his
mother, followed by a very beautiful lady
with a pretty little girl clinging to her
hand .
The lady came to Jacob's bedside
and stooped down and kissed his poor
little wan forehead, and spoke to him
as if she had known him all her life .
Then the little girl kissed him , too,
and said , “ I hope you will soon be
better, Jacob .” And his mother
brought chairs, and the lady and the
little girl sat down beside Jacob's
bed , and Jacob could not think what
had happened to bring him these beauti-
ful visitors, whose dresses seemed to
smell like a conservatory .
“ There is someone who loves you
very much , Jacob,” said the lady,
and who is very sorry to know that
you suffer pain . She is a great lady,
the very greatest lady in the land, and
her name is Queen Alexandra .”
Jacob's eyes opened wide, and then
he smiled and looked at his mother.
“ It is quite true," said the lady.
613
“ Queen Alexandra loves you so much,
and is so sorry for you , that she spends
many hours of the day in her beautiful
palace thinking what she can do to
make you happy. And she has sent
me to you, because my little girl is
one of the helpers in Queen Alexandra's
League, to tell you that there is a
beautiful bed for you, in a beautiful
big house in the country, and that
till you become well and strong.".
And you will have a garden all
to yourself, Jacob,” said the little
girl, where you will be able to grow
your very own flowers ."
And they'll teach you a little
> )
know where you are .”
All this sounded like aa dream to Jacob ,
and he could only say, You're sure
it ain't gammon ?? It beat him alto
gether to think that the Queen of Eng
land knew of his pains and wanted to
make him better. But one day a nurse
came, and there was a cab at the
door, and all the neighbours crowded
round to say good -bye, and Jacob
drove off like a hero to the railway
station , and was lifted by the kind
nurse into a carriage, and was carried
out of London into the country.
It was quite true what the lady had
told him . There was a bed ready for
him, and a piece of garden , and the
house was so big and beautiful that it
seemed to him just like a palace.
He met there other little cripples, and
made heaps of friends, and listened to
the birds singing in the trees and enjoyed
the scents of the flowers and the smell
of the upturned earth ; and his dreams
were all of lovely things. And he learned
to read books , and everybody about
him was so kind that he quite loved
them all, and wondered if heaven
could really be as nice as this beautiful
house .
One day, as he was in the garden,
kneeling on a mat , and picking out the
weeds from his flowers, he heard the
rustle of a dress close behind him ;
and a voice he had never heard before
called him by his name. He looked
up quickly. A lady stood there He
 - THE CHILD'S BOOK OF STORIES
could see through her veil that her " Mustn't you have a heart, just ! ”
eyes were moist with tears. Jacob's said Jacob , with enthusiasm . Then he
heart beat. The lady bent upon him plucked his best flowers very quickly,
a look of such kindness that he felt and lifted them up to the lady .
the tears suddenly surge into his eyes. “They're yours," he said. They
He knelt on the mat, looking up at belong to you. Í belong to you. Ail
the strange lady , and feeling as if he the cripples belong to you. '
must cry. But the beauty of the lady She took the flowers, lifted them to her
prevented him from weeping ; he felt face, and then, leaning down , gave them
that she must have stepped out of a back to Jacob. “ I want you to send
picture or a coloured window ; and he them to your mother , with my love."
stared at her face as if he had seen a “ With your love ! ” cried Jacob .
vision. He got up quickly, picking his crutches
A lark was singing in the blue sky from the ground, and made off at a
above the lady's head, and all about tremendous rate for the Home .
her were the beautiful flowers of the “ Nurse, nurse ! ” he cried, as he
cripples' garden. She entered . “ I'm to
was like an angel . As send 'em to mother,
Jacob stared at her, in a cardboard box ,
he became suddenly and I'm to write
pale and his eyes that the Queen sends
started. It was quite 'em to 'er with 'er
true , then ! It was love. Just fancy !
really, really true . The Queen sends
Jacob was conscious ' er love to my
of the heat of the mother ! "
green grass , the smell
of the flower -bed, the On the mantel
song of the lark , the piece of the parlour
blue of the sky. But of the little home
these things were as by the Docks there
nothing to the vision is a coloured mug
of the great lady. which once belonged
" Are you happy, to Jacob, and in the
Jacob ? " asked the mug are the faded
lady. and yellow flowers
He nodded his sent to Jacob's
head and swallowed One day, as jacob was weeding his garden, he mother by the Queen
a lump in his throat. Icoked up and saw a beautiful lady watching him. of England.
“ Do you know who I am ? " Often the father and mother look up
He nodded his head again , quickly at the dead flowers as they sit by the
this time, shaking a tear from his eyes. fire at night , when all the other children
“ Have you seen me before ? " are asleep upstairs ; and Jacob's father
He shook his head . sometimes says, solemnly and slowly :
66
Then how do you know who I “ Them flowers has been touched
am ? " and smelled by the Queen of England.
“ The pictures," said Jacob, rubbing Them flowers up there, in my little
the earth from his little thin hands. lad's mug , touched and smelled
Only you're much more prettier actually touched and smelled — by her
than the pictures.” Majesty the Queen of England .”
The lady smiled. And she sent 'em to me," says
(

Then she stooped down and put her Jacob's mother, " with her love."
hand upon his head . “ I am glad
you are happy,” she said gently.
(6
Mother," says Jacob's father,
" there's only one thing I'm afeared of. 1
" You want all the little cripples We shall soon be too proud to live.
in England to be happy, don't you ? ” People oughtn't to have crippled
he asked .
66
children these days. It makes people
Yes, Jacob.” vain ."
The next Stories begin on page 733
OULUULOK COOL HER
614
 The Child's Book of
Its Own Life
WHAT THIS STORY TELLS US
E
Weswamashore, where life found the,oxygen , of which it could not get enough
in the sea . Without this oxygen life can have no warmth . If the oxygen in the
air could be withdrawn, the warmth that stirs our blood would go with it --our
blood would cool and we should die, All men and women, all land animals, have
warm blood, which fishes have not. Fishes, therefore, cannot advance in life : they
can never have life at its best and highest, because life is at its best only when it
is warm. Yet, though life left the sea to get warm , it can keep warm only in water.
That is one of the great wonders of life, and it is true that every living thing, a
mouse in its hole, a lion in the forest, a lark in the air, a boy or girl at school, inust
have water in their bodies every moment, or die. So that, though life came out of
the sea to get warm , it brought from the sea the very means of keeping itself alive.
WHY LIFE NEEDS THE LAND
Wewhat
havehappened seen
CONTINUED FROM PAGE 548
Now, the reason

why life in the sea is

to water - breathing
life, and now we have
to study air-breathing life. The
first important thing is to make
sure what the difference between
the two kinds of life really means.
What will be the result if a creature,
instead of being able to use up a
certain quantity of oxygen in every
minute of its life, is able to use up,
perhaps, ten times as much ? All life,
we must remember, is, in one way, a
process of burning - of mixing certain
materials with oxygen , just as we make
coal mix with oxygen in aa fire every day.
Now, so long as life could get only
the very small amountof oxygen that
is in water, it had nothing to spare for
any kind of extravagance—that is a
long word, but I think most of us will
soon learn what it means . Its income ,
or pocket-money of oxygen, so to speak,
was very small, and all of it had to go
in necessaries. Certainly, there was
nothing to spare for keeping it warm.
Of course, you understand that
when I say this I am only making a
comparison. But if you will think of
a fish - a poor, dying fish, which you
may pick up in your hand—and will
compare it with your hand itself, you
will see at once what I mean . One
of the great differences between the fish
and you is that the fish is cold and you
are warm . We usually call the fish a
cold -blooded animal , and contrast it
with warm-blooded animals . Birds are
the warmest blooded of all animals.
cold blooded is that
these kinds of life use
up only a very small amount of
oxygen. There is so little oxy.
gen to be had that the fish can
not use any of it for the purpose
of keeping itself warm. And so the fish,
like other cold blooded animals , be
haves , so far as its warmth is concerned ,
just like a piece of stone, or anything
else that is not alive at all. If you have
a number of different things in a room,
and leave them there for some time,
each of them will soon be just as hot as
the others ; if now you bring a tumbler
of hot water into the room, it will get
cold, and the other things in the room
will get a little bit warmer , though you
cannot notice it. The rule is simply
that the amount of heat , or warmth , in
any place spreads itself about over
everything, so that no one thing is
hotter or colder than any other . Now ,
this is what a cold blooded animal,
such as a fish , does . It is just as hot
as its surroundings. If it is in very
cold water, the fish is very cold ; and
if it swims into warm water , then it
becomes warm too, but not warmer
than the water .
Now , this is very serious for the fish,
and for all cold- blooded animals . It
is aa serious matter for any living crea
ture to be hot at one time and cold
at another , and , indeed , to be almost
always getting either hotter or colder,
according to whether it is colder or
hotter than its surroundings. It is

615
 -THE CHILD'S BOOK OF ITS OWN LIFÉ -
'always having to make new arrange- that there is just a certain level of heat
ments , and can never count on having
things fixed . This , I believe, is the
real reason, or, at any rate, one of the
most important reasons, why no cold-
blooded animal-no life in the water-
can ever do such wonderful things as
life on land. We shall soon see the
other most important reason for this.
Н OWITSELF
Hoy LIFE LIGHTS A FIRE TO KEEP
WARM
For now let us contrast with the
fishes the case of warm- blooded
animals. The fish in your hand is
cold, and your hand is warm ; your
whole body is warm, and that is why
other things - unless they have been
specially made hot - feel cold to your warm -blooded animals.
hand . The truth is that air-breathing
animals can help themselves to as much
oxygen as they please, so to speak, and
after they have taken all they need for
necessaries — which is all that the fish
can ever get - they can help themselves
to more for luxuries. And what they
do with it is simply to lightaa fire within
themselves-you know I do not mean
the sort of fire that you have in the
grate—and so they keep themselves
warm. The warm -blooded animal is
nene
at which all healthy people must be
all the time . The hotness of the blood
of a warm -blooded animal is a fixed
thing—from minute to minute, from
hour to hour, from hot day to cold
night-it never varies, except to such
a tiny extent that you can scarcely
find it out. It is the same on the
coldest day in winter and the hottest
day in summer ; it is the same whether
you go as near the North Pole as you
can , or to India, where the sun blazes.
As long as you are well, your hotness is
strictly fixed all the time.
Now , this is true not only of men and
women and children, but also of all
The changes
in their hotness, or temperature , as we
say, are of the very tiniest kind , and
when they do happen, last for only a
very short time. It was only a few years
ago that any instruments were made
clever enough to show these differences
in hotness, so small are they.
THE FIREHEAT
BURNS ALL THE TIME AT THE
What is true of us is true of the dog
and the cow and the sheep and the birds
and all warm-blooded animals . The

ཨ་
ཁབ་ཕབ་
hotter than its surroundings, because hotness, or temperature, of the fish goes

བ་
it is making quantities of heat inside up and down, down and up, according
itself with the help of the large supplies to whether the sun is shining on the
of oxygen it can get from the air. water, or cold streams of water are com
Now , what is the good of this ? ing in, and according to a thousand
Why is it that the warm -blooded other things . A thousand things play
animals are so much cleverer and more also upon the warm - blooded animal, but
wonderful than the cold blooded it keeps its fire burning within it,
animals which we find in the sea, or so that, whatever happens, it is no
than the humble cold blooded animals hotter and no colder than it was before.
which we find on the land, such as But it is not merely that the hotness
the frog ? We shall not understand of the warm-blooded animals — that is
this until we ask ourselves what it to say, of all the important life on land
means to be a warm-blooded animal. -is fixed .The other great fact is to
THEFIREW ITHIN ALL LIVING THINGS
KEPT STEADILY
be found in the point at which it is
fixed. Wemight expect, perhaps, that
It does not mean that the animal a little bird would have a certain
just makes itself as hot as it pleases- amount of hotness, or temperature,
one day very hot, and another day not anand elephant something quite
so hot. The great fact about the different, and a man something different
warm -blooded animals is that they are again. But when we come to compare
just as hot one day as the next , and as the hotness of all the warm -blooded
the day before. Very likely you have animals, we find that it is just about
had your temperature taken with a the same for every one of them. The
thermometer when you were ill . Now , birds are generally a very little hotter
that is done because the doctor wants to than other animals, but the difference is
find out whether you are too hot or too very small indeed. It is fair to say
cold , or just as hot as you ought to be ; that all warm-blooded animals live
for he knows, and everybody knows, at just about the same point of
616

con CarnaWHY LIFE NEEDS THE LANDcon
hotness. Now, what do you think this
must mean ?
It means , we may be quite sure,
that there is a particular hotness, or
temperature, at which life goes оп
best, and since life is everywhere the
same thing, whether we find it in a
sparrow or an elephant , that particular
point of hotness is just about the same
for both . When this hotness is reached
and kept, all the changes that go on
in living matter do so with the greatest
ease and success . So long as life lived
in the water, which holds only a very
little oxygen , it could never hope to
reach this point of hotness at which
it lives best. One or two fishes have
been found which are always , it seems,
a little hotter than the water around
them , but only a very little.
It was not until the great step was
taken to the land, and until living
things learnt how to breathe air instead
of water, and how to make the most
of all the oxygen in the air—it was not
until then that living creatures could
keep themselves warm enough all the
time to do the very best that is possible
for them.
NIMALS ON THE LAND THAT HAVE NOT
A LEARNED HOW TO USE THE OXYGEN
There are cold blooded animals on
land, but they are very humble
and lowly creatures, and they suffer
from just the same difficulties as
the fishes, getting hotter and colder,
one or the other , almost all the time.
These cold blooded animals have not
learnt how to make the best use of the
oxygen of the air. They have not lit
a fire within themselves to keep them
selves warm, and so they cannot do
so much work, or such good work , as
the higher or warm-blooded animals.
We cannot say much more at this time
about the greatworld of plants, except
to notice only one very important
fact about plants, which is that without
them animals cannot live. But it is
interesting to remember that, though
the plant-world also has covered the
land as well as the bottom of the sea,
it has not taken any advantage of the
large supplies of oxygen in the air.
It only breathes very slowly indeed,
and though some plants , like some higher than the fishes - frogs, lizards,
fishes , are sometimes found to be rather
hotter than their surroundings, they
are never very much hotter, and they
617
IU
XXX
never comeanywhere near the point of
hotness which we find in all the warm
blooded animals . When life reached
the land , it had done all there was
to do, so far as the place it lives in was
concerned - simply because it had
reached the place where the most
oxygen is to be found. There are other
very great advantages of living on
land , but this is the real one .
L'FEREASTER PONTA THE AIR IS NOT OF
IMPORTANCE
You might think, perhaps, that yet
another great step was taken when life
left the land for the air, as in the case of
the birds ; but this is not really a step of
any great importance. Animals that
do not fly live just as much in the air
as the birds do . It is true that birds
spend much of their time actually in
the air, and can swim about in the great
ocean of air, while we can only crawl
about at the bottom , unless we trust
ourselves to a balloon or a flying
machine ; but, of course, the bird
really lives on land just as much as we
do. It does not sleep in the air, and it
does not make its nest in the air. The
real beauty of the bird's life is that ,
though its home, like ours , is on the
land , it can soar about in the air when
it pleases.
So really there is only one great step,
so far as mere place is concerned, in
the story of life, and that is the step
from the water to the land. The bird
is really a land animal, and though it
can soar, it never really roams from its
home on mother earth .
M'LLI ONS OF LIVING THINGS ON LAND
NO BETTER THAN THE FISHES
Now, we have spent some time in
seeing why it is that the step from
the water to the land was so very
important. We must not forget , how
ever, that there are hosts of living
creatures on the land which are not
warm - blooded , and which are really
no higher and better , and are often,
indeed , much lower, than the creatures
which live in the sea . In the first
place, we have seen there are all the
land plants ; in the second place, there
are not only many animals which, as
we shall see afterwards, are really
serpents -- but there are also millions
and millions of insects which, though
they live in the air, are really much
 THE CHILD'S BOOK OF ITS OWN LIFE :
humbler animals than the fishes.
These last are, of course, cold -blooded ;
and , indeed, it is not quite right to speak
of their having any blood at all , for
their blood is not like ours .
In the world as we know it to -day,
life is to be found wherever life can
be, and as much life as the amount
of air, and food, and water make
possible. Wherever life can exist at
all, there we find just so much life as
there is room for, whether in the sea
or on land . But though already the
earth is filled with life , this is by no
means to say that it is filled with the
best and highest life ; on the contrary,
the greater part of the life on earth,
compared with the highest life , is
humble and far from beautiful, but , as
time goes on , the great fact is that
these low and humble forms of life are
giving place to higher forms. This,
perhaps, may not be true of the
sea, but it is certainly true of the land .
ONLY KIND OF LIFE THAT IS
THEOINGFORWARD ALWAYS
There is only one form of life on the
carth that steadily and certainly and
naturally
life increases,
. All the other and
kindsthat is human
stand where
they were. Accident may cause one
kind to increase for a time, then another
accident will cause it to decrease. But
from age to age there goes on the steady
increase of man , as it has been going
on for hundreds of thousands of years
in the past . There are more men ,
women, and children in the world when
I write these words to -day than there
were yesterday ; and there will be
many, many more when you read these
words than when I wrote them . This
wonderful fact never stops ; it never
has stopped since man first appeared
on the carth, and we cannot say when WE CAN
MUSTU NEVER FORGET THAT LIFE
LIVE ONLY
it will stop ; though plainly it must
stor some day. Meanwhile, though
ercryone knows it in a kind of
way, it is one of the biggest facts in
our lives, in the story of the earth and may
in its future, and they are very stupid which
people who allow themselves to forget like sea -water ; and even when most
it . As we go on increasing we take the of the sea is dried up, and the earth
place of low and humble forms of life, becomes smooth with land , like our
and , indeed , we make all other forms
of life serve ours, including even the
life of the sea.
Now, if we compare this chapter
with the last , we shall see that all the
TOT
great part of the history of life is to be
found on the land , or, rather, it is that
part of the history of life which is lived
in air and not in water. But though
we shall not have very much more to say
about the life in the waters, we must
never forget what we said at the be
ginning — that life is something which
alwayshappens in liquid, or wet , water,
and never anywhere else.
WHAT THE LARK TAKES WITH HIM UP
This is true not only of animals
or plants that live in water, but
also of those that live in air ; and
it is as true of the lark soaring
in the sky as it is of a flat fish lying
at the bottom of the sea . When
the lark goes up in the sky he takes
with him all the liquid water in his
body, and it is really in that liquid
water that his life is lived . Take it
away , and the lark must die ; and this
is true of every living thing.
So we must remember that even
though the first stages in the story of
life, which were lived in the water, and
also the life in the water now, are
quite unimportant compared with the
life which is lived in air, yet , in order
that there shall be any life in air or on
the land, liquid water must be carried
wherever the living thing is to be. A
clever Frenchman has quite lately
made a study of the water in the
bodies of animals, and he has shown
that this water has in it a quantity of
different kinds of what are called salts ,
the most important being the ordinary
salt of the dinner -table . These salts
are the same as are found in sea
water, and occur in just about the
same amounts .
I think that it is a most wonder
ful thing to have found this out,
for it teaches us that, whatever life
do on land, it is yet something
is lived in what is very much
wonderful neighbour in the sky , called
Mars, I do not doubt that life will
still be lived in that common but
wonderful thing which we call water.
The next part of this is on page 727.
618
 SoThe Child's Book of
WONDER

t HOW TO READ THE QUESTIONS

Sº are related to one another, that the only way to answer them sometimes is to
group them together. Many boys and girls who have asked questions about
buildings, and water, and sand, and iron bars, will find their questions answered
in these pages, where the Wise Man talks about buildings ; and these pages
should be read through from the beginning and not each question by itself. Where
6 a question stands alone, it is answered by itself ; but when many are related to one
another the answers to them must be related too. So the best way to read the
BOOK OF WONDER is to begin at the beginning each time and go to the end,
NO instead of picking out questions here and there and reading them separately .

WHAT HOLDS A BUILDING UP ?

Of course, said the
Wise Man , we all CONTINUED FROM PAGE 508
know that mortar
holds the bricks together ;
but we must remember that
the wise builder always uses the
weight of his bricks to make his
building strong ; and since it is
the earth, with its steady pull,
that gives bricks, and all other
things, their weight, we must not
give the mortar all the credit. No
bricks and mortar would ever make
a strong building if there were not spill itself and run all over the table,
the earth's pull to bind them all
together, or if the builder forgot it.
WHY DOES A STICK HOLD TOGETHER ?
Mortar, as you know, “ sets hard ,”
like many other things - jelly and
water included - if you give them a
fair chance. And the power by
which it, or paste or glue, holds
things together is called cohesion — a
word which simply means sticking
together. We cannot see what really
happens, but cohesion is one of the
commonest things in the world .
When you move one end of a stick,
why does the other end move ? Be
cause of cohesion between all the
parts of which the stick is made.
All the parts of the stick hold together
as if drawn to each other by a magnet.
WHY CAN'T WE MAKE A ROPE OF SAND ?
Ah ! said the Wise Man, that is the
whole point. You can't make a stick
or a rope of sand, and you can't build liquid air — did you know that air
with bricks and sand. The sand has
no cohesion, except just the least
little bit when it is wet. Have you
ever thoughtwhy seal
ing -wax melts when it
is heated ? The truth
is that cohesion is one of
the most important things
in the world, and that the world
itself, indeed, could not exist as it
is without cohesion . Everything
that we call solid is solid because
the tiny parts of which it is made stick
or hold together. A piece of sealing
wax, for instance, if it is left alone, is
held together by cohesion. Itdoes not
and if you lift it up by one end the
other end comes too. But if you
apply heat to the sealing -wax it
begins to run - it begins to lose its
stickiness, or cohesion. This shows
a second state in which anything
may
liquid.be,Running
and this
waterstate we call
is liquid.
WHY DOES WATER RUN ?
That is cohesion again ; water runs
because it has no cohesion, or else
very little . While all solids have a
great deal of cohesion—without which
they could not be solids - liquids
have very much less. But all liquids
are by no means the same. Liquid
water has very much less cohesion
than liquid sealing-wax or liquid
gum, which, indeed, has so much
cohesion, or sticking together, that
we appropriately call it “ sticky.”
On the other hand, liquid alcohol or
could be liquid like water ?-has very
much less cohesion even than liquid
water. But there is a third state in

619
 THE CHILD'S BOOK OF WONDER NXX

which anything may be, and that is cohesion , and in the wooden bar, whici
the state of a gas—like air in its has this cohesion ; yet the earth is so
ordinary state, like the water which enormous, and therefore pulls so hard on
comes out of our noses when we all parts of the bar, that the tiny little
breathe, and like the gas we burn for pull of the parts of thebar towards each
light . Now, the thing which marks a other would go for nothing if it were not
gas is that it has no cohesion at all, for the great strength of cohesion.
it runs wherever it can . However big Cohesion, however , is a wholly
the space that it is in, the gas always different thing, and entirely depends on
fills it . It goes under doors, out at the way in which the parts of anything
chimneys, and out at windows, and so catch hold of each other. Thus any
on . It has no cohesion. thing you can name may have cohesion
HOW DOES A BAR STAY IN ITS PLACE ? at one time, like ice ; may have less
All solid things have cohesion , and cohesion at another time,, like water ;
we can almost imagine the tiny parts and may yet at another time have
of which they are made holding on absolutely no cohesion at all, like
to each other, as if they had little water-gas or water -vapour. Yet in all
arms or hooks. That is why things can these three states - solid , liquid, and
be solid ; that is why they can have a gaseous — the attraction due to gravita
shape and keep it . You see, the earth tion is acting all the time .
is so enormous, compared with anything IS THE EARTH'S PULL STRONGER THAN
ANYTHING ELSE ?
that we can make or move, that , if there
were nothing else to act against the Nearly everyone thinks that gravita
power of the earth's gravitation , every tion is one of the most powerful forces
thing would crumble down quite flat, so in the world . This is not true, and we
that all the stuff in it might be pulled as only think it because we think of the
near as possible to the centre of the earth . gravitation of the earth, which is so
A bar holds together, said the Wise enormous ; but we forget that when
we lift a poker by one end the other end
always because,
Man, though
acting, and is very powerful,is
gravitation follows, even though the whole earth
cohesion is very powerful too. You is pulling it down , because the force of
know, for instance, the horizontal bar cohesion, or sticking together, in the
in the gymnasium ? How does this poker is more powerful than the force
stand ? How does it come to stand so of the earth's gravitation.
firm that it will support your weight ? And now we can go back to buildings.
The answer is that, though the earth The picture on page 621 shows us two of
the most wonderful churches that have
is pulling it down all the time, the ever been built . They are in very dif
earth's pull is balanced by the cohesion
of the bar. If you tried to make the ferent styles of building—St . Mark's at
bar of something that has very little Venice belonging to aa far older style than
cohesion, like sand - well, you might try the great marble cathedral at Milan
for a very long time before you suc yet they are both wonderful, and none
ceeded ! Of course, it is true that of us can realise how extraordinary
gravitation acts between everything and they must appear to people who have
everything else . It acts , for instance, never seen buildings of such a kind.
between the tiny parts of which the They are wonderfully high,forinstance,
bar is made, or of which the bar of sand compared with simple buildings, and
-if such there could be — is made . they have wonderful galleries and arches
WHY DOESN'T THE EARTH PULL A BAR
and domes, some of which almost look
DOWN ? as if they were resting upon nothing.
You are right to ask me that, said the
> But really we cannot understand how
Wise Man . Gravitation acts upon all wonderful buildings like these are
things, and we must remember that, just unless we remember what man's first
as the earth pulls everything towards it , buildings were like.
.
so every part of everything pulls every WHAT WERE THE FIRST BUILDINGS LIKE ?
other part. But do not imagine that it is Well, said the Wise Man , I think
this attraction between the parts which that the first things men ever lived
explains cohesion, for this attraction in began by not being buildings at all ;
is found in a gas, which has they just holes or caves in the
620
 TWO OF THE MOST WONDERFUL BUILDINGS

One of the things thatno man can describe is thewhite marblecathedralat Milan, so wonderful a thing that
it might have been built by fairies in the night. It is said that there are a million points on this cathedral, and
there are 2,000 statues. It is as if men had cut up a marble mountain into small pieces, fashioned each piece
into a thing of loveliness, and brought them together to teach their silent lesson of beauty to all the world.

AST HUBE TEN

There aresome buildings that make us wonder, some that make us feel. St.Mark's Cathedral at Venice,
of which this is a picture, does both these things. It is so soft and beautiful, and yet so vast, that we
feel that we are dreaming when we look at it. And most of it was built up inch by inch, with small pieces of
marble of many colours, making pictures that are part of the building itself. It has stood nearly 1,000 years.
621

.
N
 THE CHILD'S BOOK OF WONDER
earth . We have found some of these were moved away by Lord Elgin, and
caves with bones and teeth and other you may see them in the British Museum ,
things which tell us what these men where they are known as the Elgin
had for dinner long ago. The first Marbles. You will also see there a
attempt build , ' very perfect model of what the Parthe
that man made to build,
I think , was simply to make the caves non was like when it was built.
that he found rather bigger and more WHO INVENTED ARCHES FOR BUILDINGS ?
convenient ; and so he scooped them
out and made them deeper, and often I am glad you ask me this, said
he scooped away much of the roof so the Wise Man , because it is one of the
as to make the cave higher, and let him remarkable things about the great
stand and walk upright in it . And buildings of Greece that they do not
when at last man began to build for have arches. Their buildings, indeed,
himself, he made huts, such as many were in principle the same as you can
men live in even nowadays, like the make with toy bricks. Now, it is a
Eskimos. And these huts are really very curious thing that somehow or other,
like caves if you come to think of it. though the Greeks learnt so much from
Like caves, they have only one storey the Egyptians as regards science and
and only one room , and no chimney. art andmany other things, they did not
Men were a long time in rising from the know about the arch. Yet , even in
use of these early huts to such cathedrals very early Egyptian buildings, we find
as those of Milan and St. Mark's. various kinds of arches, including even
WHAT WAS THE FIRST GREAT BUILDING ? the pointed arch which you must have
In time man learnt to use stone , seen in many churches. Now, I wonder
and even to make artificial pieces of whether you have heard the word
stone which we call bricks, and , of “ keystone ” ? There are two kinds of
course, with these he could make fine arches - one is like this :
buildings ; and some of these, though and the other is very
they were built thousands of years ago, interesting, for it is built
and are far older than the cathedrals up from the two sides, and
in the picture, are not less beautiful. then at the very top of the arch there
Everyone agrees which is the finest is put in, last, a stone called the key
building ever made before the time of stone, because it keys, or , rather, locks,
Rome, and before civilisation reached the two sides of the arch together.
Italy. This is called the Parthenon, People who study buildings say that
and, indeed, so far as beauty is con the kind of arch they call Gothic does
cerned, it still is the finest building in not have a keystone, the two sides
the world, though far from being the meeting in a straight up and down line.
most wonderful as a building. The
Parthenon was built about 500 years WHO WERE THE BEST BUILDERS ?
before the birth of Christ, in the greatest Now, you know that the Romans
age of Greece. It was built entirely came after the Greeks, and that nearly
of white marble , and the figures of everything they knew and could do
horses and men that ran round it out. they learnt from the Greeks. Indeed ,
side were made by Phidias, the greatest I am afraid that there was a great deal
sculptor who ever lived . Many ofthese which the Greeks knew and the Romans

A GREAT LINE OF ARCHES BUILT BY THE ROMANS , WHO WERE FOND OF ARCHES IN BUILDING
OURCOLUULOLDOTWOOL LICEULOTTE MODULUIDOCOUCOUNT
622
 LOSSLES 12
THE HOMES OF MAN IN ALL AGES

These pictures show the first kinds of buildings that men made. At first they were, perhaps, simply huts
in trees , or holes in the earth . One picture shows an underground house ; others show huts built on lakes, and
little clay- brick huts with small doorways, which were the be of proper houses. At bottom is th
inside of a house in Rome, and the last picture shows an enormous stack of houses, one above the other, in America .
TRETTER
623 பாபயவானபானனனானனானன
 -THE CHILD'S BOOK OF WONDER
forgot . Now , the Romans did not build
so beautifully as the Greeks. There
never was any building in Rome so
lovely as the Parthenon . But one thing
the Romans had which the Greeks had
not , and that was the arch . I do not
think anyone knows whether some
Roman found out all by himself how
to make an arch , or whether they found
arches in Egypt, or somewhere else ;
but, at any rate , somehow or other
the Romans had the secret of the arch ,
and they seem to have been very
proud of it , and used it whenever they
could .
They were very fond of building what
they called triumphal arches in honour
of some great soldier or some great
event, and you will see such arches in
Rome and many parts of Italy. The
Marble Arch in London is the same
sort of thing.
In our own times we have made
a great discovery as regards buildings.
You know that instead of building
ships of wood we build them of iron and
steel . Well , we do the same thing now
in building ; instead of stone we use
steel .
WHY ARE HOUSES NOT MADE OF TRON ?
Indeed , said the Wise Man, I think
we are doing just what men did long
ago when they passed from the “ Stone
Age, ” in which they used stone for
knives and weapons, to the “ Age
of Metals," when they used bronze and
copper and iron . I think that we may
say we are passing from the Stone Age
to the Age of Metals in buildings.
Of course, in the case of a bridge,
we simply use steel and do not think
it necessary to do any more . The most
wonderful, though not the most beauti-
ful, bridge in the world is the forth
Bridge, which is made of steel , and
which in one part runs clear a third of
a mile over water. Now , that is all very
well , but when it comes to ordinary
buildings, such as, let us say , an hotel,
the builder is rather in a fix . He makes
his building of steel ; but we are not
accustomed to buildings made simply
of steel , and they would look very
funny to our eyes ; so after he has
made the steel skeleton of his house ,
or of his hotel , or whatever it is, he
covers it all up with stone, so as to
make it look as if it really the
ETTELDEUILIN VOLUUTIN
624
stone that was holding it up ; yet
really you might take all the stone away,
and the thing would stand as before.
Sometimes, too—and this is funnier
still - the builder wants to have a lot of
shops with big windows along the street
below his hotel, and he leaves so little
space between the windows that it
looks as if the whole thing must come
crashing down . There is so little stone
showing that it looks as if the hotel
were built on glass, though really, of
course, it is a huge skeleton of steel.
WHAT IS THE SKELETON OF A HOUSE ?
The skeleton of a house is the real
framework underneath the outer cover
ing which we see. Really we are waiting
for some very clever man with an original
mind who will be able to make a modern
steel building without having to face
it with stone and pretend that it is
made of stone. Of course, anyone
could do this, only the building would
look so ugly. We have not yet learnt
how to treat the steel so as to make
it look beautiful. I am sorry I cannot
tell you how to do this, said the Wise
Man. If I could, I should be the genius
we are all waiting for. But he will
come ; and if we do not yet know
how to make steel buildings that are
both beautiful and useful, it was, after
all , just the same when men began to
use stones and bricks.
WHY IS IT DARK AT NIGHT ?
If you take a ball and hold it near a
bright light, said the Wise Man, the
half of the ball next to the light is
shone upon , and the half of the ball
away from the light is dark . If you
mark a spot on the ball , and then turn
the ball round and round like a top,
that spot will be shone upon half the
time and will be in the dark the other
half of the time. We live on a big
ball called the earth , which is always
spinning round and round, and it is
shone upon all the time, day and night,
by a bright light called the sun.
The place where we live is like the
spot on the ball, and as the great earth
2
ball spins, part of the time we are on
the side next to the sun and part of the
time we are on the side away from the
sun . When we are on that side it is
dark at night, but while it is our night
it is daytime for the people who live on
IETEET
 LOUDCALOOCOMO POLITICALCESAR

THE STEEL SKELETON OF A BUILDING

12

E:

This is what is called the " skeleton " ofa building. It is one of the new ideas in building to make a framework
of steel and cover it up with stone. Sometimes in a great building there is so little space between the windows
that it looks as if the building must come crashing down ; but the strength is in the steel, which we cannot see
and not in the outer covering, which we see. This beautiful building in the Strand, London, is the office of a
great newspaper, “ The Morning Post.” It is built by the famous builders, the Waring -White Company.
122
EDOT
625
 -THE CHILD'S BOOK OF WONDER
the other side of the ball. However is curiosity. Man is always wanting
dark it is where we live, the sun is to find out things. And naturally the
always shining somewhere, and the first thing he most wanted to find out
earth is always travelling towards it was the kind of earth on which he lived .
or away from it . The sun does not So our early ancestors looked across
come to the earth , but the earth comes the waters , and dreamed of lands on
into the sunlight. If you think of the the other side of the globe.
ball and the light you will understand The curiosity of men is the beginning
that, however dark it is, the earth will of geography, for curiosity led men to
soon carry us round into the light look about them and observe the earth .
again . Have you ever heard one of When they had learned to build ships,
the most beautiful lines in all poetry : they sailed across the seas, visited
" There is a budding morrow in mid- many foreign lands, and returned with
night,” meaning that every night a day descriptions of those places and the
is being born ? people they had lived among. These
HOW BIG IS THE WORLD ? descriptions we call geography, and
The Wise Man told the children the they are given in the ChiLD'S BOOK OF
ALL COUNTRIES, beginning on page 63.
story of the earth, which is given in WHY ARE THE RAINDROPS ROUND ?
another part of our book. The world ,
he told them , is nearly round. From I think that really you should have
the North Pole to the South Pole, first asked ,Why does the rain fornı drops
straight through the earth, the distance at all ? We know now that there is
is about 7,899 miles. A pole thrust always something which we may call a
through the centre of the earth , from speck of solid stuff in the inside of a
side to side, would measure about 7,925 raindrop, and when the drop was
made it was made by the water-gas or
miles. The distance right round the water
outside is about 24,850 miles. - vapour in the air turning liquid
The round world is a vast mass of upon this solid speck , as steam from
land and water, surrounded by air. boiling water turns liquid on a cold
It spins like a top, it travels round the plate held above it.
sun, and it moves forward with all the But you want to know not merely
stars in the heavens-forward and why the raindrop forms at all, but also
forward, for ever and ever. So tremen why, when it is formed, it is so nearly
dous is the size of this huge globe, that round. The answer is the same as the
the mighty range of mountains which answer to the question why water
we call the Alps are only like the forms in round drops on a plate, and
burrowings of a mole on the ground. the question why it runs in drops down
Now, if the Alps are so small in the window -pane when it rains. When
comparison with the size of the earth, water turns liquid it really consists of a
how much smaller must man appear ? kind of crowd of tiny parts, each of which
He is like a speck of sand. is itself a part, or particle, as we say, of
water, just as a human crowd is made
IF MAN IS SO SMALL, HOW DID
of men and women .
HE CONQUER THE EARTH ?
Now, these little particles of water
Man conquered the earth , on which behave rather as a crowd might behave,
he is like a speck, because he is not if all the men and women making it were
content to stand still like the Alps. to catch hold of each other's hands, so
Though he is so much smaller than that they were all joined together. If
these mountains, he has a brain which they all held on to each other as tightly
enables him to triumph over the as they could, and especially if all the
weakness of his body and the smallness people on the outside of the crowd held
of his size . He can move ; he can each other's hands so as to make a ring,
think ; he can manufacture. then that crowd would be something
You can imagine how, in the far like the crowd of particles of water that
distant past , our savage ancestors would make up a drop of water. They all
watch birds sailing through the blue prefer to hold on to each other, and
air over the deep waters, and long with stick together, and that is why the drop
all their souls to have that power of is formed at all .
flight. For one of man's chief qualities The next questions are on page 689.
626 E TEXTO
 Ben The Child's Book of
GOLDEN DEEDS
དུང

FLORENCE NIGHTINGALE TRAVELLING ON THE BATTLEFIELD

30

THE LADY WITH THE LAMP

BOUT eighty years young lady, who had
o
A ago there was a
CONTINUED FROM PAGE 521
to go to London with
pretty little girl living her parents to be pre
in a beautiful English home, sented at Court . But she did
surrounded by a handsome not like the easy and pleasant
park, who played with her dolls occupations of society, and
in quite a new and startling instead of going out to parties
fashion . She was fond of she visited the London hos
cuddling these little creatures, and " pitals and studied how sick people
she undressed them and put them to were nursed back to health and
bed, and made tea for them in dolls'. strength . In those days hospital
house china, just like all other little nurses were very ignorant, and Flor
girls in every age of history . But ence Nightingale was shocked by the
she did something else as well. She roughness and stupidity of England's
used to pretend that they were ill, hospitals. So she went away to
and nurse them ; and also she used Germany and studied nursing there ;
to pretend that frightful accidents had and then she went to Paris andlearned
happened to them ,and would bandage all she could there. At last, when
their legs and arms with strips of she was quite certain she had mastered
linen , and treat them with great care. her subject, she returned to England
As she grew older she used to go and began her work of improving the
into the cottages of the peasants nursing in our own hospitals..
round her father's estate, and if she While she was engaged at this work
found any of them ill she would set a war broke out in the Crimea between
about nursing them and trying to Russia and England. At first people
make them well. It was wonderful thought only of the glory of battle,
to see this bright girl, who might have and the courage of soldiers who went
spent all her time in games and sports, singing to death. But soon other
giving herself with delight to nursing stories came home to England, dread
the sick people in her village. She was ful stories—stories of wounded men
intensely fond of animals, and the being left to die, and of other wounded
first patient she had was a dog. men being operated on by surgeons
Well, the years passed away, and this in the blood -soaked trenches. England
happy child, whose name was Flor- was shocked by these things, and
ence Nightingale, became a handsome everybody cried out that something

627
 THE CHILD'S BOOK OF GOLDEN DEEDS
must be done, something heroic, some-
thing that would put a stop at once to
the sufferings of our brave soldiers.
That was done by Florence Nightingale.
The little girl who had nursed the
sheep -dog and bandaged her dolls
now stood forth as England's Angel
of Pity, and as long as England's
You will understand what wonderful
work this noble woman did when we
tell you that at the time of her coming
forty - two men died in every hundred
of the wounded, while soon after her
arrival only two died in every hundred .
She had as many as 10,000 wounded
soldiers to care for, and when they had
7

history is written the name of Florence to be carried into the operating-room

Nightingale will shine in golden letters
on the page. She went to the Crimea
with less than forty nurses, and in a
few months from her arrival she had
made an absolute change in the nursing
of the soldiers. Can you not imagine
the peace that came to our poor
wounded soldiers when they found
themselves tended by gentle women,
and you must remember that in those
days there was no such thing as
chloroform - Florence Nightingale would
go with them , and stay by their side
and cheer them to bear their sufferings.
England heard of all this splendid
work , and the name of Florence
Nightingale became a household word
in the land. A subscription was made

MISS FLORENCE NIGHTINGALE AND HER NURSES COMFORTING SICK SOLDIERS

laid in smooth and comfortable beds, for her, and £ 50,000 was raised as a
and felt tender hands which shrank gift. A man-of-war was sent to bring
from causing the smallest pain lovingly her home, and preparations were made
fastening the bandages about their for a glorious triumphal entry into
throbbing wounds ? Florence Nightin. London . But Florence Nightingale did
gale used to be always in the wards, not want fame. She came home secretly,
and at night she would go slowly and went quietly back to her father's
between the beds, carrying a lamp inhouse . And as for the £ 50,000, she
thanked England for the gift, and used
her hand , to see that her patients lacked
for nothing. The soldiers, looking it all for founding a home forthe train
through the darkness at the figure ing of nurses. Her health was broken by
moving like an angel among them , the hardships she had undergone ; but to
called her “ The Lady with the Lamp.' this day she has nothing dearer to her
Her name, it was found, contained heart than the work to which she gave
letters enough to make the sentence herself as a little girl with her dolls. She
" Fliton , cheering angel." That is has never asked for fame and glory ;
what she was to those thousands of all she wants is to do good. It is her
tortured soldiers in the Crimea - a -
joy to lessen pain and alleviate suffering.
cheering angel. The next Golden Deeds are on page 743
UDET
628
 The Child's Book of
BIBLE STORIES

WHAT THIS STORY TELLS US

E know that Abraham had a son called Isaac, and that God had promised
WE to bless the children of Abraham and make of them a great nation . In this
story the Bible tells us of the beginning of the fulfilment of that promise. We see
how God guides men, and how patiently He deals with His people. We see how
God blessed Isaac with wealth and happiness, and how His mighty promise
began to fulfil itself in Isaac's son , though he began life weakly and even wickedly.

THE STORY OF ISAAC AND HIS SONS

ISAAC, son of Abra CONTINUED FROM PAGE 473
ham , was married
to a woman named
Rebekah , and he loved her
tenderly . He became a rich
man. He not only increased his
flocks and herds, but he set himself,
in addition, to plough land and grow
corn . His courage and his skill both
helped to make his wealth. When
famine came, he did not sit down
and mourn , but moved away to
more fertile country, and began again.
When his wealth made other
people envious, and they stopped up
his wells so that his flocks and herds
might perish, he quietly set himself to
dig other wells and prayed to God for
His protection .
God, who had blessed Abraham ,
blessed his son Isaac, and appeared
to him in the midst of his troubles,
saying, “ I am the God of Abraham
thy father ; fear not , for I am with
thee, and will bless thee, and multiply
thy seed for my servant Abraham's
sake."
Isaac rested in this promise. His
character was so calm and noble, his
manner of life so honourable and
beautiful, that even those who had
sought to do him harm became his
friends, and confessed that God had
blessed him .
After nineteen years of marriage,
Rebekah, his wife, gave birth to two
sons , Esau and Jacob . The joy of
Isaac was now complete. His farming
prospered, his heart was filled with
peace, and his sons grew up in
health and strength to rejoice the
eyes of his age .
Now, these two boys were very
different in character. Esau, the
elder, was what we should call an
outdoor lad ; he loved
& Co
riding and hunting, he
was strong and power
ful, he rejoiced in the splendid
and dangerous risks of a wild
life. Jacob, on the other hand ,
was a quiet and thoughtful lad ; he
was adored by his mother, who kept
him at her side, and he preferred
thinking to action.
We can imaging how his mother
would tell him of his wonderful
grandfather, the rich and powerful
Abraham , who had seen visions of
God, and to whom God had made
the promise that his children should
be a great nation. Jacob would think
much of these things.
Esau probably thought little about
Abraham and his dreams . All he cared
about was the joy of hunting and the
exercise of his bodily strength. In some
ways he was a fine character, for he was
entirely free from avarice — he did not
think how rich he would be when his
father died , and he was not proud of
being the eldest son and the heir .
He married women of аa tribe which
greatly displeased his father. He did
not care. He probably laughed when
his father reproved him . And yet we
know that in spite of this disobedience
Isaac loved his brave, gallant , and
wilful son , and yearned after him
with his heart.
To show how reckless and wild was
this bold hunter, he came home one
day hot and weary from the chase,
and found Jacob preparing a dish of
food, the smell of which was very
pleasant to him . He asked for it , and
Jacob, who probably thought his rough
brother unworthy of God's blessing,
replied that ine food should be Esau's
if Esau would give him his birth

629
JACOB
DECEIVING S
THE
,I
-TEALING
FATHER
SAAC
BLIND
HIS ESAU
FROM
BIRTHRIG

AUD
EXE
THE STORY OF ISAAC AND HIS SONS
right ; and Esau agreed . For a dish of
food, because he was hungry and faint,
he gave up the privilege of being the
eldest son of Abraham's son , Isaac.
Such were the characters of these
two men. Esau, reckless , careless, but
brave and generous ; Jacob, gentle and
thoughtful , but inclined to cunning .
JACOB AND HIS MOTHER DECEIVED
HOW
ISAAC AND STOLE THE BIRTHRIGHT
When their father, Isaac, was an old
man , and his eyes were dim , he called
Esau to his side , and told him to take
bow and arrow and go out to shoot
venison and return to him with meat ,
that he might lay his hands upon his
eldest son and bless him. And Isaac trembled very exceedingly,
Rebekah , his wife, heard these words ; and said, Who ? Where is he that
and directly Esau had gone out she hath taken venison and brought it me,
whispered to Jacob that he should go
and kill two kids, and she would make
meat of them , and he should carry it
to his father and receive the blessing.
It was the advice not of a wicked
woman , but of a mother tempted at that
moment by love for her favourite
child. Jacob listened to his mother
and agreed to do as she desired , only
saying that he feared to be discovered .
Behold, Esau my brother is a hairy
man, and I am a smooth man ! My
father peradventure will feel me, and
I shall seem to him as a deceiver.” )
Rebekah dressed him in Esau's clothes,
and put the skins of animals on his arms
and neck . They both set themselves to
deceive the blind , old, dying man .
>
HE STEALING OF THE BIRTHRIGHT AND
THE THE GREAT BITTERNESS OF ESAU
Jacob carried the meat to his father,
and his father was surprised . They
spoke together by r, the
this mannethe
in suspicion,
father troubled son
trembling with shame and tear :
Isaac art thou
JACOB :: IWho
am Esau , my
, thy son ? n ; I have
firstbor
done according as thou badest me. Arise, I
pray thee , sit and eat of my venison , that thy
soul may bless me!
ISAAC : How is it that thou hast found it so
quick ly, my son ? the Lord thy God brought
JACOB : Because
it to me.
Isaac : Come near, I pray thee, that I may
feel thee, my son , whether thou be my very
son Esau or not. The voice is Jacob's voice,
but the hands are the hands of Esau. Art
thou my very son Esau ?
JACOB : I am .
Thus Jacob received the blessing of
Isaac, who smelt the raiment of Esau
TUDITT 100
XXL Cancunz
which Jacob was wearing, and ex
claimed with fatherly love, “ See, the
smell of my son is as the smell of a
field which the Lord hath blessed ! "
When Jacob had gone out , and
Isaac lay alone in the dim chamber,
thinking of God's promises to his
father , Abraham , and praying that the
son whom he had just blessed might
receive the guidance of God , lo !
there came in to the poor old man his
son , his elder son , Esau , whom he loved
with a deep passion.
Isaac , his father, said unto him ,
“ Who art thou ? ” And he said,
I am thy son , thy firstborn , Esau .”
and I have eaten of all before thou
camest , and have blessed him ? Yea,
and he shall be blessed . ”
When Esau heard the words of
his father, he cried with a great and
bitter cry, and said unto his father,
“ Bless me, even me also , O my father !
NE OF THE MOST PATHETIC SCENES
This scene is one ofthe most pathetic
and beautiful in all the writings of the
world . Who cannot see the horror
in the dying, sightless eyes of the grand
old farmer , and the bitter repentance
of the reckless son as he knelt there,
knowing too late, that he had
squandered his birthright ? We can
almost hear the sobs of the hunter, and
see the trembling of the dying patriarch.
Esau's fury against the brother who
had supplanted him was deep and
terrible . He vowed to kill him . But
Rebekah heard of this , and , making a
pretence that she wished Jacob to
marry one of their own people, she
persuaded Isaac to let Jacob go to her
brother Laban, who lived far away,
and there find a wife .
Her purpose was to send Jacob
away only till Esau's wrath had
vanished ; but her purpose was frus
trated by the will of God. She had
sinned ; she had taught Jacob to
deceive. Though her act was prompted
by love , nevertheless, like every other
sin , it had to meet its own punishment;
and in kissing her son and sending him
away for a few weeks, she was in
reality parting from him for ever.
The next Bible Stories are on page 685 .
OPOZTE mm cm
631
 THE PILGRIMS AT THE TABARD INN

In olden days, when England was a Roman Catholic countıy , there were many places to which pilgrimswent to
visit the shrines of saints . Chaucer, the first great English poet, wrote a book of “ Canterbury Tales" which
were supposed to be told by a party of pilgrims on their way to Canterbury, where the shrine of St. Thomas
à Becket attracted thousands of pilgrims every year. In the top picture we see the mixed party at the Tabard
Inn, at Southwark, and at the bottom most of them are mounted and on the way , one ofthem telling his story,
for it had been agreed that, in order to pass the time pleasantly, each one would tell a story on the way to
Canterbury , and another on the way back. Some of these stories are re -told in the following pages.
632
 The Child's Story of
FAMOUS BOOKS
CHAUCER'S CANTERBURY TALES
THE most famous of the writings of Geoffrey Chaucer, the first great English
THE poet, is the work known as 66 “ The Canterbury Tales .” Its plan is simple.
We are to imagine a company of “ pilgrims " —which did not mean religious people,
but good and bad alike - setting out from the Tabard Inn, at Southwark , in April,
1387, some on horse and some on foot, to visit the shrine of St. Thomas à Becket,
at Canterbury. The landlord of the inn proposes that each pilgrim , to pass the
time, shall tell a story on the way to Canterbury, and another on the way back .
As there are thirty -three people in the company, including Chaucer himself, that
would mean sixty -six tales, but the poet only wrote twenty -four. Though the book
is incomplete, it is longer than the “ Iliad . ” Seven of the stories have been chosen
for re -telling here. Our language has changed so much since Chaucer's time that
many words have to be altered, and some syllables have to be pronounced which
are not sounded now . In our quotations these are marked with accents, like " called.”

THE PATIENCE OF GRISELDA

The Tale Told by the Clerk
CLERK ” in Chau
A cer's time meant a
student, or any learned
person. We still speak of a
clergyman as a " Clerk in Holy
>
Orders.” This is the story told by
the student to his fellow -pilgrims.
A gifted but pleasure-loving
nobleman named Walter, lord of the
noble country of Saluces, in Italy, was
asked by his subjects to marry, so that
an heir might be left to them when he
had gone. Near by his palace was a
littlevillage, whichthe marquis passed conferring with her father, the marquis
through when he went hunting. asked Griselda if she would marry hm ,
Among the poor folk of this village giving him all obedience. Griselda
dwelt a man called Janicula , who had
a daughter, “ the fairest under the
sun." This humble maiden , whose
name was Griselda, was as virtuous and
dutiful and hard -working as she was
beautiful. Often, when on his way to
the chase,had the marquis's eye rested
on Griselda, and, bearing in mind his
people's wish, he determined that if he
didmarry she should be his wife.
He had fixed a day for his wedding,
as his people had desired, but the day
came and still none knew who was to
be the bride.
All preparations were made for the
ceremony. Costly dresses were made,
gems prepared for his lady that was to
be, and a gallant company were invited
to the feast. Then a brave procession,
headed by the marquis, set out from
the palace to escort the bride . The
marquis led the way to the little village.
IX
Here Griselda was
CONTINUED FROM
PAGE 544 busily engaged getting
her household tasks done,
so that she might afterwards
stand åt her father's door and see
the wedding procession. As she was
setting out to draw water at the
well, the marquis stopped the pro
cession at her rude dwelling, and,
calling her by name, at which she
almost swooned, asked for her father.
Griselda answered that he was within,
and then brought him forward. After
pleaded her unworthiness of so much
honour, but replied that if it was
her lord's will she would marry him and
obey him in all things. Then the mar
quis, taking her hand, led her forth
from the hut, and said to his people,
“ This is my wife. Honour and love
her as you love me.”
Griselda was straightway dressed in
royal robes, and, looking more lovely
than ever, was set on a beautiful horse,
on which she rode to the castle, where
the marriage was celebrated with much
feasting.
Walter and she then lived for a time
in great happiness, Griselda winning all
liearts near and renown afar.. Then was
Walter moved to try her obedience
sorely. When a little daughter was
born to them he told her thathis people
were displeased, and that she was the
cause of the trouble. Obedient to her
ADOLED
633
 -THE CHILD'S STORY
husband's wish , Griselda gave up her
child , thinking she would never see it
any more . So, when a son was born ,
him also she gave up. Then the mar.
quis, chiding her with her lowly origin,
though her conduct was such that one And when Walter saw her patience
bornand reared to fill a great position under this great trial, his heart was at
might have been proud of it, said that
she must return to her father to make
way for another
In this, as in whom he was
all other to marry
things, was.
Griselda submissive. in his arms, and sought to comfort her,
The people , who loved her, were so overcome was she at what he said .
angry at the marquis's cruelty. But
when the new bride came in state with
her brother from Bologna , and the
people saw that she was fairer and
younger than Griselda, they, with the
fickle hearts of the crowd, thought that
the marquis had done well .
Yet was Griselda to be further tried ,
for the marquis sent for her to greet the
new arrivals, because she alone knew
how such ceremony should be carried
out. So in her humble attire Griselda
went back to the castle to obey her
cruel lord's behest. And all the guests
wondered who this humble and beauti
ful lady was that knew such honour and
such reverence. At last , when the
feast was spread, the marquis called for
Griselda, and, as if in jest , asked her
how she liked his new wife.
Right well, my lord,” quoth she ; " for in
good fay,
A fairer saw I never none than she.
I pray to God give her prosperity ;
And so hope I, that He will to you send
Pleasaunce enough unto your lifé's end.
One thing warn I you, and beseech also ,
Hurté not ever with no tormenting
OF FAMOUS BOOKS
This tender maiden, as ye have done me ;
For she is fostered in her nourishing ,
More tenderly, and to my supposing
She could not adversity endure
As could a pooré fostered créature . "
length touched.
' Tis enough, Griselda ! ” he cried .
“ Be no more afraid . Now know I , dear
wife, your steadfastness.” He took her
He told her that it was her own daughter
whom she had just received as his new
bride, and that the boy was her son .
He had se the two to Bologna, where
they had been fittingly cared for and
brought up secretly. Griselda was then
dressed in the royal robes ; there was
great rejoicing, and the rest of her life
was full of happiness. Says the poet :
Full many a year in high prosperity
Lived these two in concord and in rest,
And richly his daughter married he
Unto a lord , one of the worthiest
Of all Italy ; and then in peace and rest
His wife's father in his court he keepeth ,
Till that the soul out of his body creepeth .
His son succeedeth in his heritage,
In rest and peace after his father's day ;
And fortunate was eke in marriage,
Though he put not his wife in such a say,
This world is not so strong, no, by my fay,
As it hath been , in oldé times yore,
And hearken what this author saith there
fore.
This story is said , not for that wives should
Follow Griselda in her humility ,
For this could not be borne, no, tho' they
would ;
But for that every wight in his degree
Shouldé be constant in adversity
As was Griselda .

THE FOX REPAID IN HIS OWN COIN

The Tale Told by the Priest
*HERE was oncea poorwidow , inthe and,taking courage, beggedthat they
THERE
little yard attached to whose dwel- should talk of cheerful things. By
ling was a very fine cock , called Chanti- this time daylight had come, and, de
cleer. One morning this bird awoke with scending from his perch, Chanticleer
terror and told his mate, Pertelot, of strutted around like a lion, chucking
a horrible dream that he had had , of whenever he found a corn .
a beast like a hound that threatened But one day, ashe was proudly walk
him . Dame Pertelot laughed her Chan- ing about the yard, crowing at the sun,
ticleer's fears to scorn . It was, said he spied a fox that had crept in the 1

she, the result of indigestion, for which
she suggested that he should take
certain medicines.
While Chanticleer was enumerating
stories of dreams that had come true,
he looked upon Dame Pertelot's face,
634
night before and hidden in a bed of
herbs. Then Chanticleer, reminded of
his dream , would have fled , but the
fox, addressing him , said :
Gentle sir, alas ! why would ye
go ? Be not afraid of me. I am
 -THE FOX REPAID IN HIS OWN COIN
your friend . I only came to hear you and Chanticleer . But as he was lying
sing, for, truly, to you as sweet a voice helpless in fear on the fox's back the
is given as any angel hath that is in cock thought of a plan.
heaven . Your father and your mother “ Dear sir," said he to his captor,
both have been in my house. I never “ if I were you I would turn on yon
hear anyone , now
as your father except
did . you
Let sing so well
us hear now Iproud fellowstheandtell
am near wood , them
the that,
cock shall
if you can imitate your father .” here abide , and I will surely eat him ,
Chanticleer , much flattered by the when I choose, whatever you may do .'
66
remarks of the sly fox , stood' high ' In faith ,” declared the fox, “ it
upon his toes, stretched his neck, shall be done.""
made his eyes to close , and began to But as he spoke the cock slipped
crow right loudly. Then DanDan Russel, from his mouth and quickly flew high
the fox, jumping up, seized him by up on a tree out of reach . The fox
the throat , and fled with him towards then cried that he was sorry for frighten
the wood . ing the cock. He did it , he said, with
Such an alarm was then raised by no base intent ; and if Chanticleer
Dame Pertelot and the other hens that would only come down again he would
the widow and her daughters ran out tell him why he had acted as he had
of their dwelling and , seeing how matters done .
stood, called the neighbours, who joined But Chanticleer replied that he had
in the chase. Jack Straw and all his been deceived once and would not be
company never made such a to-do as deceived again. And so the fox was
was caused by the chase after the fox paid in his own coin - flattery.
THE STRANGE ADVENTURES OF A PRINCESS
The Tale Told by the Lawyer
ONSTANCE, the daughter of the Em- bring her to a shameful death . He
CONST
peror of Rome, was of such good killed Hermyngyld secretly and accused
ness and beauty that, when travellers constance of the crime . She was tried
returned from that city, they could before King Alla of Northumberland,
not sing her praises too highly. The whose gentle heart was touched with
Sultan of Syria heard of her from his pity by her tears. A miracle occurred ,
merchants, and was so affected by which was thought to prove her
their reports that he sent word to her innocence ; so the false knight was put
father offering to become Christian, to death, and she became King Alla's
with all his nobles, if he might have her wife .
hand in marriage. But Alla had a mother, who was
The marriage took place ; but the bitterly opposed to this marriage, and
Sultan's mother, who was secretly in her son's absence had Constance
opposed to the union , invited the bride once more sent adrift with her baby
and bridegroom, and all the Christian boy. When King Alla discovered this,
knights who accompanied them from he killed his wicked mother with his
Rome, to a great feast, at which she own hand , and gave himself up to
caused them to be treacherously mur- grief and lamentation. Meanwhile ,
dered , all save Constance . Her she Constance and the little Maurice were
sent adrift to sea in a rudderless boat, rescued from a heathen land on which
with all the rich wedding gifts and a they had been cast , and eventually
store of food and raiment. taken to Rome, where they were
In this frail bark Constance was befriended by a senator and his wife.
driven far, and finally cast on the shores All this time Constance kept her
of Northumberland . Here she was pitiful story to herself, but her goodness
found by the constable of a castle caused her to be beloved by all.
which stood near , and he and his wife, Then King Alla , smitten with repent
Hermyngyld , befriended her and be- ance for the death of his mother, jour
came Christians. neyed on a pilgrimage to Rome , where
A young knight of Northumberland, he was received by the very senator
being refused by Constance, sought to who had befriended Constance ; and ,
635
 THE CHILD'S STORY OF
being invited to a feast by Alla, the concerning the treachery of King,
senator took young Maurice with him .
Attracted by the child's face, Alla
asked as to the boy's history. Musing
on all that the senator could tell him ,
and full of thoughts of the wife he
mourned as one that was dead, Alla
afterwards went as a guest to the
senator's house . Here Alla and Con-
stance met, and knew one another
immediately. Constance, who thought
it was by Alla's orders she had been
cast adrift, sank down in a swoon .
Then the truth became known to her
THE MEN WHO WENT TO KILL DEATH
The Tale Told by the Pardoner
N those days there were men who were
IN
permitted to sell to others, in the
name of the Pope, “ pardons ” for their
sins. Such a pardon was known as
a " Papal indulgence." The men who
sold these were called “ Pardoners. "
Here is the story told by the Pardoner
whom Chaucer includes among his
pilgrimgroup :
In Flanders lived a company of
young revellers who practised all forms
of folly and wickedness. Three of
these ne'er -do -wells were one day seated
in a tavern drinking, when a bell was
heard tolling for a man who was dead.
One thereupon called out to his servant
to get for them the name of the dead
man . The varlet replied that he had
no need to go out to learn who it was
that was dead.
" It was," said he, " told me two hours
before you came here. The dead man
was an old comrade of yours, and he
was slain at night as he sat on his
bench drinking by a silent thief men
call Death, who hath killed a thousand
of pestilence in this country ."
The lad's story was confirmed by
the taverner, who added that Death
had that year slain men, women, and
children , peasants and pages, within a only between two ofthem .
great village a mile away.
At this one of the roysterers invited
his fellows to join with him that they
might seek out Death and slay him .
And the three set out on their errand
towards the village spoken of. On
their way they met an old man , who
besought their mercy.
“ Nay, old churl ," said they, " tell
us where this same Death is, that
636
FAMOUS BOOKS
Alla's mother ; and , husband and wife
being reconciled, Constance made her
self known to her father, the Emperor ;
so at last all were come to happiness.
Alla shortly after took his wife back
to England. But only a little while
in joy and pleasure lived Alla and his
Constance before Alla died.
Constance then returned, for the last
time, to Rome, where Maurice was
made Emperor in course of stars ;
and the remainder of her days were
passed in acts of virtue and charity.
killeth all our friends, or thou shalt
die .”
“ Now , sirs,” replied the old man, “ if
thou art so eager to find Death, turn
up this crooked way, and you will
find him in yonder grove beneath an
oak -tree, where I left him .”
On learning this the three rowdies
ran in the direction indicated, and,
coming to the tree, found a great store
of golden florins piled up. No longer
did they think of their quest of Death ,
but forthwith sat down by the precious
hoard .
“ Fortune," said the youngest of
the three , “ has given us this treasure
that we may live in mirth and jollity .
It must be carried home to my house
or to yours by night, because if men
saw us with it in the daytime we
should be hanged for carrying what is
our own ."
He proposed that they should draw
lots to decide which of them should
go to the town for food' ar:d wine,
while the other two kept watch over
the treasure. The lot fell on the speaker.
When he had departed, one of the others
said to his companion that it would be
so much better if the gold were divided
of us are stronger than
Two one,”
said he, “and when our companion
returns do you engage him , as it were,
in a playful wrestling bout, when I
will strike him with my dagger, and
if you despatch him with yours,
then all this gold shall be ours to
gratify all our wishes and enable us
to play at dice as much as we like.”
The second villain agreed to this
 THE MEN WHO
dastardly plan . But wicked thoughts
entered also the mind of the youngest
as he went towards the town, and,
thinking how he could gain the gold for planned to do, they said, “ Let us sit
himself, he bethought him of the
apothecary's, where, on the pretext
that he wanted to kill rats, Next
he bought
he
some powerful poison.
borrowed three bottles, into two of
which he poured the poison. Filling
then the bottles with wine, he re-
turned to his companions, to whom
Torronk
he purposed giving the poisoned
THE ROMANCE OF THE LADY EMELYE
The Tale Told by the Knight
ONCE upon a time in ancient Greece
there lived a great duke named
Theseus. No greater conqueror than he
lived under the sun . He defeated the
Amazons of Scythia , and married their
Queen, Hippolyta, whose fair young
sister, Emelye, he took captive. On
his way back to Athens he was met by
weeping women , who besought his help,
because the tyrant Creon had massacred
their husbands and captured the throne
of Thebes. Sending Hippolyta and
Emelye to Athens , Theseus turned aside ,
and with his army marched on Thebes.
There he slew Creon by his own hand,
and routed the tyrant's forces.
After the battle there were found,
wounded and lying near where the fight
had been fiercest, two handsome and
richly -dressed young men ,
Palamon and Årcite, cousins of the
royal house of Thebes. Now, because
of a vow he had made against Creon's
house, Theseus ordered these young
men to be kept in prison at Athens for
life. When they had recovered from
their wounds, Palamon and Arcite vere
therefore thrown into a dungeon in a
strong tower near Theseus' palace in
Athens, where they remained captive
for several years .
It also happened that the narrow
window of their dungeon overlooked the
royal garden , and here, one bright May
morning, the Lady Emelye
Far fairer to be seen
Than is the lily on her stalké green ,
And fresher than the May with flowers new,
came forth to walk and gather flowers.
Her yellow hair was braided in a tress ,
Behind her back a yardé long, I guess .
And as an angel heavenly she sang.
WENT TO KILL DEATH
wine, drinking himself from the third
and harmless bottle. When the other
villains had killed him , as they had
down and drink andmake merry before
we bury him .” And one, taking up a
bottle - it was one containing poison
drank from it and passed it to his com
panion, who also drank.
So, both dying of the poison , the
words of the old man who had told them
that they would find Death under the
oak-tree were proved to be true.
Palamon himself awoke with the sun ,
heard the sweet song, and , peering
through his prison bars upon the fair
scene beneath, was stricken to the heart
with love for the fair Emelye. His
cry of pain aroused Arcite.
66
Cousin mine," exclaimed Arcite in
alarm , “ what aileth thee ? Why criest
thou ? Take in all patience our im
prisonment , for the stars ordained it
when we were born ."
6
" Cousin ," replied Palamon , " you
are wrong . It was not our imprison
ment that caused me to cry out. The
fairness of the lady that I see yonder
in the garden is the cause of my woe.
I know not if she be woman or goddess
in human form ."
Then went Arcite to the narrow
named window , and when he too saw Emelye
walking in the sunlight his despair
was even greater than Palamon's.
“ If," he cried , “ I cannot see her
day by day, I shall be nought but a
dead man . Then, for the first time
in their lives, there sprang up a feeling
of enmity between the cousins.
This continued till one day a duke
who knew Arcite, and who was an old
and valued friend of Theseus, came to
Athens, and, hearing of Arcite's cap
tivity, begged Theseus to set the young
Theban free. The request was granted
on the condition that Arcite went his
way, consenting never again to set foot
on Athenian soil. For two years
Palamon, still in prison , and his cousin ,
now at freedom , bewailed the cruel fate
that divided them from the beautiful
Emelye.
At last Arcite could bear his pain no
longer, and returned to Athens as a
637
 -THE CHILD'S STORY OF FAMOUS BOOKS
poor labourer. In this guise he But I bequeath the service of my ghost
obtained a humble post in the household To you aboven every creature,
Since that my life may now no longer dure .
of the duke , where his manners soon Farewell, my sweet | Farewell, mine
won him advancement . Then, one Emelye ! (two )
night , Palamon was enabled to drug his And softly take me in your armés tweye,
For love of God , and hark to what I say.
gaoler and to escape to a little wood I have here with my cousin Palamon
near by, where he met Arcite, and the Had strife and rancour many a day i-gon
two fell to quarrelling afresh over the (gone by),
object of their mutual affection . At For love of you, and eke (also) for jealousy. "
length Arcite said he would bring food But, he went on to say :
and weapons, so that on the morrow “ In this world right now I knowé none
they could fight for the lady Emelye . So worthy to be loved as Palamon ,
They were engaged in this conflict That serveth you , and will do all his life.
And if that ye shall ever be a wife,
when they were surprised by Theseus Forget not Palamon , that gentle man."
and his retinue. Theseus, learning from
Palamon who they were, condemned And so a brave man died. Emelye
both to death, but on the intercession and Palamon were stricken with bitter
of the ladies of the company he ordained grief, and Arcite's death was mourned
that the two rivals should go awayfor byallAthens. Even the DukeTheseus
fifty weeks, at the end of which period bowed hishead in sorrow . None could
each should return with fifty knights, comfort him save his aged father, Egeus,
to attend a great tournament, the “ that knew this world's changes," and
victor in which should have the fair who said :
Emelye's hand . “ This world is but a throughfare full of woe ,
And we be pilgrims, passing to and fro ;
The time passed, and when the hour Death is an end of every worldly sore.'
of the tournament arrived it was
Theseus cut down the wood where the
decreed by Theseus that life should not
be wasted, but that should either of cousins had fought, and gave to Arcite
the leaders be taken prisoner or slain a befitting funeral. Then it came to
pass , .when time had brought healing
the tourney should cease. Palamon to the hearts
was struck down bythe Indian King Theseus sent forofPalamon
all concerned , that,
and Emelye
Emetreus in Arcite's company, and
and, that of two sorrows might be made
taken prisoner ; but as Arcite was perfect joy, the duke ordered that
riding proudly to the spot where Emelye athese two should take one another as
was sitting his horse stumbled, and he husband and wife .
was fatally injured by the fall. Whilst
lying at the point of death in the palace wasSo,celebrated
with great rejoicing, the marriage
, and Emelye loved Pala
of Theseus, Arcite sent for Emelye and mon so tenderly, and Palamon served
Palamon . To Emelye he said :
Nought may the woful spirit in mine heart Emelye so nobly
Declare a point of all my sorrow's smart That never was there word between them two
To you , my lady, that I love most ; Of jealousy, nor of none other woe .
THE KNIGHT AND THE UGLY CLD WOMAN
The Tale Told by the Wife of Bath
A KNIGHT of King Arthur's Court, by met an uglyold hag, who, addressing him ,
an unworthy deed, had earned the inquired what it was that he sought.
penalty of death . But, the Queen and Promise me ,'," said the old woman ,
66

her ladies gaining the King's grace, the when he had told her his story, that
knight was handed over to the Queen , you will do the next thing that I re
who promised him his life if, within a quire of thee ,if it be in thy power,
year and a day, he could tell her what and I will tell thee the answer .
it was that women most desired. The knight gave her his word , and
Time passed sorrowfully for the together they journeyed to the Queen's
knight. No satisfying answer could Court. Here, as instructed by the
he discover of anyone . Then , when old woman, the knight declared that
the day on which he was once again to the thing most desired of women was
appear before the Queen drew near, and power. This was the answer, and he
he was returning from his quest , he was adjudged to have saved his life.
638
 -THE KNIGHT AND
Then up rose the old woman , and,
telling the Queen of his promise, asked
his hand in marriage.
"" Take all my goods and let me go
rather ! " exclaimed the knight .
he was kept to his bond . When his
newly wedded wife upbraided him
for his treatment of her, he taunted
her with her lowly birth, as well as her
ugliness and poverty . To this she
replied in words that have been full
often repeated :
“ Look who that is most virtuous alway,
Open and secret, and most intendeth aye
To do the gentle deedés that he can ,
And take him for the greatest gentleman.
Christ will we claim of Him our gentleness,
Not of our elders for their old richesse.
For tho' they give us all their heritage,
For which we claim to be of high peerage ,
THE DEAD BOY
The Tale Told by the Prioress
It must be borne in mind in reading this
tale that , at the time to which it
relates, there was a great hatred between
Christians and Jews. Both misunder-
stood one another, much as they do in
Russia to-day ; and few perhaps of
Chaucer's pilgrims would have known
enough to cast serious doubt on the
truth of the Prioress's story, which was
an old fable that may be briefly told :
Once, in a great city of Asia, was a
quarter filled with Jewish money
lenders. The street in which the Jews
lived was one through which was
constant traffic. At one end of this
street was a little school, to which
Christian children went. Among these
children was a widow's son , seven years
of age. He had learned at his mother's
knee to pray, and when he heard the
hymn Alma redemptoris ” (Mother
of the Redeemer) sung, so moved was
he that,, though he knew no Latin, he
soon learnt to repeat the first verse .
Then he asked another boy to tell him
the meaning of the hymn, which
finally he learnt by heart, and grew Jesus, appeared to him and, placing a
to love it so much that he sang it
regularly as he went to and from school
through the street where dwelt the Jews.
Satan then stirred the hearts of the
Hebrews against the little singer, and
they hired aa wicked man to kill him and
cast his body into a pit . The next day
the widow sought everywhere for her
son, and made piteous but useless The next
appeals to all the Jews to tell her if page 699.
639
THE UGLY OLD WOMAN
Yet may they notbequeathé, for no thing,
To pone of us their virtuous living,
That made them gentlemanly called be,
And bade us follow them in such degree."
But When the knight had repented him
of his unknightly mood, his wife asked
him to choose which she should be
as she was, old and ugly, but devoted
to him , or young and fair, but vain
and fickle. In reply the knight put
himself in his wife's " wise governance .”
“ Then,” said she, “ I have the
mastery. And I will be to you both
>
fair and true . ”
The knight, looking up, now saw , to
his rapture, that what she said had
come to pass . And the two lived
to their lives' end in perfect joy.
WHO SANG A HYMN
him . They
and where they had seen .
all said “ Nay ."
But Jesus of His grace
Gave to her thought, within a little space,
That in that place after her son she cried,
Where he was casten in a pit beside.
And hereupon the dead child began
to sing the “ Alma redemptoris SO
loudly that all the place began to ring,
The Christian folk passing through the
street stopped to wonder at this mar
vellous thing They sent for the
Provost, and he, praising God for the
miracle, had all the Jews taken and
bound, and the child's body carried to
the nearest abbey.
The guilty having been punished,
preparations were made for the burial
of the child . All the time the voice of
the boy was heard singing the hymn
he loved so well.
“ Dear child,” said the Abbot, “ I
conjure you, tell me why you sing,,
since that your throat is cut.”
And the child replied that, as he was
about to die , Mary, the mother of
grain upon his tongue, said he would
continue to sing , till from his tongue
this grain was taken.
The Abbot then took away the
grain , and the boy " gave up the ghost
full softily.” Everyone was thereupon
deeply moved. And the little martyr's
bodywas placed in a marble tomb.
stories of famous books are on
GUES

THE WRECK OF THE HESPERUS

A This beautiful poem by H. W. Longfellow is one of the finest ballads we could choose. The tragic .
story of the wreck of the vessel, the picture ofthe raging storm , the finding of the drowned child - all is told
without waste of words, but in just the very words that mean most and stir the imagination of the reader .
IT was the schooner Hesperus, “ O father ! I see a gleaming light,
That sailed wintry
the sea ; O say, what may it be ? "
And the skipper had taken his little daughter, But the father answered never a word,
To bear him company. A frozen corpse was he.
Blue were her eyes as the fairy - flax, Lashed to the helm, all stiff and stark ,
Her cheeks like the dawn of day, With his face turned to the skies ;
And her bosom white as the hawthorn buds, The lantern gleamed through the gleaming
snow
That ope in the month of May.
Theskipper he stood beside the helm, On his fixed and glassy eyes.
His pipe was in his mouth ; Then the maiden clasped her hands, and
And he watched how the veering flaw did prayed
blow That saved she might be ;
The smoke now west, now south . And she thought of Christ, who stilled the
waves
Then up and spake an oldsailor, On the Lake of Galilee.
Had sailed the Spanish Main :
" pray
I thee, put into yonder port, And fast through the midnight dark and drear,
For Í fear a hurricane. Through the whistling sleet and snow ,
“ Last night the moon had a golden ring, Like a sheeted ghost, the vessel swept
Towards the reef of Norman's Woe.
And to -night no moon we see !
The skipper, he blew a whiff from his pipe, And ever, the fitful gusts between ,
And a scornful laugh laughed he. A sound came from the land ;
Colder and louder blew the wind , It was the sound of the trampling surf,
A gale from the north -east ; On the rocks and the hard sea -sand .
The snow fell hissing in the brine, The breakers were right beneath her bows,
And the billows frothed like yeast. She drifted a weary wreck ,
Down came the storm , and smote amain And a whooping billow swept the crew
The vessel in its strength ; Like icicles from her deck.
She shuddered and paused, like a frighted She struck where the white and fleecy waves
steed , Looked soft as carded wool,
Then leaped her cable's length. But the cruel rocks, they gored her side,
“ Come hither ! come hither ! my little Like the horns of an angry bull.
daughter, Her rattling shrouds, all sheathed in ice,
And do not tremble so ; With the masts, went by the board ;
For I can weather the roughest gale, Like a vessel of glass, she stove and sank ,
That ever wind did blow ." Hol ho ! the breakers roared !
He wrapped her warm in his seaman's coat At daybreak, on the bleak sea -beach ,
Against the stinging blast ; A fisherman stood aghast,
He cut a rope from a broken spar, To see the form of a maiden fair,
And bound her to the mast. Lashed close to a drifting mast.
“ O father ! I hear the church -bells ring, The salt sea was frozen on her breast,
O say, what may it be ? ” The salt tears in her eyes ;
“ 'Tis a fog -bell on a rock -bound coast ! ” – And he saw her hair, like the brown sea -weed ,
And he steered for the open sea . On the billows fall and rise.
" O father ! I hear the sound of guns, Such was the wreck of the Hesperus,
O say, what may it be ? " In the midnight and the snow !
“ Some ship in distress, that cannot live Christ save us all from a death like this
In such an angry sea ! ” On the reef of Norman's Woe !

640
 The Child's Book of
POETRY
THE PLEASURES OF MEMORY
THE memory ought to be a storehouse, not a lumber-room, says an old writer ;
THE and there is nothing we can store away in this magic chamber of our mind
more worth having than the riches of the poets, which will outlast other possessions.
“ The pleasures ofmemory ” have been sung by more than one of our poets, and
though , of course, poetry is by no means the only one of these pleasures, it is one
of the greatest. Here we are to see how it may best be stored in our memory.

HOW TO REMEMBER POETRY

ec2 There are
A LITTLE girl was many
CONTINUED FROM PAGE 538
“ systems” ofremem
her memory was, and bering, but if we begin
she said , " It is the thing I young to remember what we
forget with. ” To how many of have read we do not need sys
us, both old and young, is the ,
tems ; our minds,when young and
memory the thing we forget with ! fresh , form systems for them
Yet it is quite an easy matter to selves without any effort on our
make it the thing we remember with. part. But there are a few simple rules
All our faculties can be made better that can help us.
by use . If we do not practise walking We must read with close attention to
regularly, we shall in time become what the writer has to say, be it in
very poor walkers. That is so apparent prose or poetry. Secondly, we should
that any boy or girl does not need to read once in order to get a general idea
be told it . If we do not practise of the author's story. For instance,
remembering, we shall in time find our to remember The Wreck of the
memory is of little use to us. That is Hesperus,' we read it first in order to
perhaps not so clear to everyone, and get the story, noting how one thing
people, but especially young people, follows on another : the skipper's
need to be told this . little daughter, the skipper at the
It is with our brain that we remem . helm, the rising of the hurricane,
ber ; our“ memory ” is one of the depart. binding of the child to the mast,
ments of the brain's work . One might skipper struck dead, and so on. By
think that memory could do only a noting these points we remember easily
certain amount of work ; that it could how the story proceeds.
remember just a certain number of We next read more closely still, noting
things ; that a time would come when, the chief points of each verse, thus :
so to say, the storehouse of Memory ( F ) wintry sea, little daughter ; (2 ) eyes,
was full. But that is not so. There is cheeks, bosom ; (3 ) beside the helm,
no limit to what our brain , if properly on the look -out, and so forth. Finally,
set to work, will enable us to remember. we have the actual words to remember,
In olden times, before printing was and this we do , first, by noting the
invented,whole books, such as Homer's rhythm (see page 531) and the rhyme
“ Iliad,” described on page 539, (see page 41) ; secondly, by emphasis
were carried for years in the memory ing in ourminds the " picture words,"
of people. Most of our legends existed as we call the particular words in
for ages in the memories of common each verse that raise up a picture
people only, and were not written down before our minds. In thefirst verse of
in some cases until hundreds of years “The Hesperus," the picture words are
1 )
had passed away. Now, of all written " wintry sea" ; in the second, " fairy
words, none are easier to carry in our flax ” and dawn .” These words
minds than poetry, and we should make
66 )
suggest “ pictures ” to us at once, and
a habit of learning by heart ” as when we remember them the rest of the
many poems as possible ; not merely verse is easily recalled. Of course , we
for the sake of remembering them, must read the poem many times before
but to exercise our minds, just as we we have it " by heart," and it should
go for walks to exercise our legs. be read aloud as often as possible .
Lates ‫ܣ‬ ya : DOG PRIREDO .
041

0
THE CHILD'S BOOK OF POETRY
FATHER WILLIAM
Robert Southey, in writing this poem , sought to illustrate A psalm is a song of praise or thankfulness. This noble
the blessings of living a suber , industrious, virtuous life. He poem , by Longfellow, is full of thanks to God for the good
makes Youth ask of Age the way to live , and this is the
only wise course. We should profil by the experience
of those who have travelled the road of life before us.
are old , Father William ," the young
" Youman cried ,
“ The few locks that are left you are grey ;
You are hale, Father William , a hearty old
man ;
Now tell me the reason , I pray . "
In the days of my youth ," Father William
replied ,
I remembered that youth would fly fast ;
And abused not my health and my vigour at
first
That I never might need them at last."
“ You are old , Father William ," the young
man cried,
And pleasures with youth pass away ;
And yet you lament not the days that are
gone ;
Now tell me the reason, I pray."
" In the days of my youth ," Father William
replied,
“ I remembered that youth could not last ;
I thought of the future , whatever I did ,
That I never might grieve for the past.”
" You are old , Father William ," the young
man cried ,
" And life must be hastening away :
You are cheerful, and love to converse upon
death ;
Now tell me the reason, I pray . "
“ I am cheerful, young man,” Father William
replied ;
“ Let the cause thy attention engage :
In the days of my youth I remembered my
God ,
And He hath not forgotten my age 1 "
THE LITTLE BUSY BEE
We cannot cal: this good poetry, nor can it be said to be
remarkable for beauty of thought. But there is a certain
quaintness of expression and simple truth in the verses,
which were favourites with our forefathers. The writer was
Dr. Isaac Watts, about whom we have read on page 532.
ow doth the little busy bee
How Improve each shining hour,
And gather honey all the day
From every opening flow'r 1
How skilfully she builds her cell i
How neat she spreads the wax !
And labours hard to store it well
With the sweet food she makes.
In works of labour or of skill,
I would be busy too ;
For Satan finds some mischief still
For idle hands to do.
In books, or work , or healthful play ,
Let my first years be past,
That I may give for ev'ry day
Some good account at last .
642
I
A PSALM OF LIFE
giſts of life. li counsels each one of us to do our best to -day,
not to dream of to -morrow or to mourn for the past. " Let
the dead Past bury its dead , " means that we must resolutely
turn our back on thepast,do the dutiesthat call us to-day:
and inarch breast forward "with a heart for any fate."
TELL me not , in mournful numbers,
Life is but an empty dream !
For the soul is dead that slumbers,
And things are not what they seem .
Life is real ! Life is earnest I
And the grave is not its goal ;
“ Dust thou art, to dust returnest,"
Was not spoken of the soul.
Not enjoyment, and not sorrow ,
Is our destined end or way ;
But to act, that each to- morrow
Finds us farther than to-day.
Art is long, and Time is fleeting,
And our hearts, though stout and brave,
Still , like muffled drums, are beating
Funeral marches to the grave.
In the world's broad field of battle,
In the bivouac of Life,
Be not like dumb , driven cattle !
Be a hero in the strife !
Trustáno future, howe'er pleasant !
Let the dead Past bury its dead !
Act - act in the living Present !
Heart within , and God o'erhead !
Lives of great men all remind us
We can make our lives sublime,
And , departing, leave behind us
Footprints on the sands of time
Footprints, that perhaps another,
Sailing o'er life's solemn main ,
A forlorn and shipwrecked brother,
Seeing, shall take heart again.
Let us, then , be up and doing,
With a heart for any fate ;
Still achieving , still pursuing,
Learn to labour and to wait.
THE MINSTREL BOY
Thomas Moore, the writer of this famous song, was an Irish
poet, born in 1779, and died in 1852. H : was a great
favourite in his day, and published " Lalla Rookh," bis most
famous work, two years after the battle of Waterloo . " The
Land of Song," mentioned in the following, means Ireland .
Theminstrel boyof tothe
In the ranks death war,hasgone,
you'll find him ;
His father's sword he has girded on ,
And his wild harp slung behind him .
' Land of song \ " said the warrior bard,
Though all the world betrays thee ;
One sword, at least, thy rights shallguard,
One faithful harp shall praise thee !
The minstrel fell , but the foeman's chain
Could not bring his proud soul under ;
The harp he loved ne'er spoke again ,
For he tore its chords asunder ;
And said : “ No chains shall sully thee,
Thou soul of love and bravery !
Thy songs were made for the pure and free,
They shall never sound in slavery 1 "
 -THE CHILD'S BOOK OF POETRY
THE FOUNTAIN THE BURIAL OF SIR JOHN MOORE
James Russell Lowell, the writer of these happy lines, which Sir John Moore was a great soldier who won the battle of
express so well the feeling that comes to us in watching the Coruna, in Portugal, on January 16, 1809, but was killed on
play of a fountain on a summer day , was a famous American the battlefield. This solemn, dignified poem , describing his
poet and humorist. He was born in 1819 and died in 1891. burial, was written by an Irish clergyman, Charles Wolfe,
who died in 1823 , and, although he wrote other poems, this is
IntoFulltheofsunshine,
the light, the only one that is remembered ; but it is sure to live for ever.
Leaping and flashing, Nor a drum was heard , not a funeral note,
As his corse to the rampart we hurried ;
From morn till night !
Not a soldier discharged his farewell shot
Into the moonlight, O'er the grave where our hero we buried .
Whiter than snow,
Waving so flower-like We buried him darkly, at dead of night,
When the winds blow ! The sods with our bayonets turning ;
Into the starlight , By the struggling moonbeam's misty light,
Rushing in spray And the lantern dimly burning.
Happy at midnight, No useless coffin enclosed his breast,
Happy by day ! Not in sheet or in shroud we wound him ;
Ever in motion , Buthe lay like a warrior taking his rest,
With his martial cloak around him .
Blithesome and cheery ,
Still climbing heavenward , Few and short were the prayers we said,
Never aweary ; And we spoke not a word of sorrow ;
Glad of all weathers, But we steadfastly gazed on the face that was
Still seeming best, dead ,
Upward or downward And we bitterly thought of the morrow .
Motion thy rest ; We thought, as we hollowed his narrow bed,
Full of a nature And smoothed down his lonely pillow ,
Nothing can tame, That the foe and the stranger would tread
Changed every moment, o'er his head ,
Ever the same ; And we far away on the billow !
Ceaseless aspiring, Lightly they'll talk of the spirit that's gone,
Ceaseless content, And o'er his cold ashes upbraid him ;
Darkness or sunshine But little he'll reck, if they let him sleep on
Thy element ; In the grave where a Briton has laid him
Glorious fountain I
But half of our heavy task was done
Let my heart be When the clock struck the hour for retiring ;
Fresh , cheerful , constant , And we heard the distant and random gun
Upward like thee ! That the foe was sullenly firing.
BOY'S SONG Slowly and sadly we laid him down
There is real joy of country life in this song of rural boy From the field of his fame fresh and gory ;
hood , by James Hogg, the Scottish shepherd poet, who was We carved not a line, and we raised not a
known as the “ Ettrick Shepherd ," having been born at stone
Ettrick, in Selkirkshire, in 1770. He wrote many poems, But we left him alone with his glory.
chiefly of country life, that are still favourites,and died in 1835 .
WHEREthe pools arebrightanddeep,
Where the grey trout lies asleep, ALL'S RIGHT WITH THE WORLD
Up the river and o'er the lea, This is a splendid outburst of joy at the goodness of God .
That's the way for Billy and me. In these eight short lines Robert Browning has donemore
than others in long poems to convey the delight of being
alive that comes to us on a beautiful morning in spring.
Where the blackbird sings the latest,
Where the hawthorn blooms the sweetest, THEAnd
year's at the spring
day's at the morn,
Where the nestlings chirp and flee, Morning's at seven,
That's the way for Billy and me. The hill's side's dew-pearled,
Where the mowers mow the cleanest, The lark's on the wing ,
Where the hay lies thick and greenest, The snail's on the thorn ,
There to track the homeward bee, God's in His heaven
That's the way for Billy and me. All's right with the world.
Where the hazel bank is steepest, THE RAINBOW
Where the shadow falls the deepest,
In this little poem by Wordsworth occurs the famous line,
Where the clustering nuts fall free, “ The Child is father of the man ," which means that , what
That's the way for Billy and me. our character is in childhood , so will it be when we grow up.
Why the boys should drive away My heart leaps up when
sky
I behold
Little sweet inaidens from the play, A rainbow in the ;
Or love to banter and fight so well , So was it when my life began,
That's the thing I never could tell . So it is now I am a man,
So be it when I shall grow old ,
But this I know , I love to play, Or let me die !
Through the meadow , among the bay ; The Child is father of the man ;
Up the water and o'er the lea, And I could wish my days to be
That's the way for Billy and me. Bound each to each by natural piety .
643
 LITTLE VERSES FOR VERY LITTLE PEOPLE
AFFY - DOWN -DILLY has come
to Thecock's on the housetop, blowing
DAFtown his horn ;
In a yellow petticoat and a green gown. The bull's in the barn , a -threshing of
corn ;
The maids in the meadows are making
Bessy BELL and Mary Gray,
They were two bonnie lasses : of hay,
The ducks in the river are swimming
They buiſt their house upon the lea away .
And covered it with rashes.
Bessy kept the garden gate, or cross buns !
And Mary kept the pantry ; Нот Hot cross buns !
Bessy always had to wait, One a penny, two a
While Mary lived in plenty. penny,
Hot cross buns !
IF( F the evening's red and the morning
grey , Hot cross buns !
It is the sign of a bonnie day. Hot cross buns !
If the evening's grey and the morning If you have no daughters,
red, Give them to your sons.
The lamb and the ewe will go wet to
bed .
L, snaul,
SNEERobbers are coming to pull down
'He south wind brings wet weather ,
T: your wall ;
The north wind wet and cold Sneel, snaul,
together ; Put out your horn ,
The west wind always brings us rain , Robbers are coming to steal your corn ,
The east wind blows it back again . Coming at four o'clock in the morn .

HERE WE GO ROUND THE MULBERRY BUSH

Here we go round the mul-b’ry bush , the mul-b’ry bush, the mul - b'ry bush ,
C:

Here we go round the mul-b'ry bush On a cold and fros - ty morn - ing.

ERE we go round themulberry bush, This is the way we clap our hands,
HERE
The mulberry bush , the mulberry Clap our hands, clap our hanis,
bush ,
Here we go round the mulberry bush This is the way we clap our hands
On aa cold and frosty morning. On a cold and frosty morning.
644
. PEC . THE NONSENSE OF EDWARD LEAR
1

We E are told that " a little nonsense now and then is relished by the wisest men . " Many
wise men have laughed at the nonsense of Edward Lear, an artist who did much serious
work, most of which is now forgotten . He amused himself by drawing funny little pictures and
writing funny little rhymes, which have been called “Learicks," after him ; and it is those
nonsense rhymes and pictures of his which are still popular, while his serious pictures and
books have long since ceased to attract readers. His nonsense must be good nonsense to have
lived so long. We have chosen some of his funniest pictures and rhymes to reprint here.

HERE was an old man of Melrose, HER E was a young lady of Dorking,
RE
THERE
Who walked on the tips of his toes ;
THE Who bought a large bonnet for
But they said : “ It ain't pleasant, walking ;
To see youat present, But its colour and size
You stupid old man of Melrose .” So bedazzled her eyes,
That she verysoon went back to Dorking .

'HERE was an old man of Peru ,

"HERE was an old man of the Cape, Who watched his wife making a
THEWho possessed a large Barbary ape ; stew ;
Till the ape, one dark night, But once, by mistake,
Set the house on a light, In a stove she did bake
Which burned that old man of the Cape. That unfortunate man of Peru .

HERE was an old man of Jamaica , 'HERE was an old person of Cheadle,
THE
TH Who suddenly married a Quaker ! Was put in the stocks by the
But she cried out : “ O lack ! beadle ;
I have marrjed a black ! ” For stealing some pigs,
Which distressed that old man of Some coats, and some wigs ,
Jamaica. That horrible person of Cheadle.
645
 6

THEREwas old manwho said." *HERE was an old man who supposed,
How THERE
Shall Ianflee from this horrible That the street door was properly
cow ? closed ;
I will sit on this stile, But some very large rats
And continue to smile , 9)
Ate his coats and his hats,
Which may soften the heart of the cow . ” While that sleepy old gentleman dozed .

vi

TH* EWhose shoe -str

-
ings wer
lady of e seldom THERE was ayoung lady of Troy,
Whom several large flies did
untied ; annoy ;
She purchased some clogs, Some she killed with a thump,
And some small spotty dogs, Some she drowned at the pump,
And frequently walked about Ryde. And some she took with her to Troy.

HER E was a young lady whose bonnet HERE was an old person of Anerley,
untied when the birds sat THEWhose conduct was strange and
THE RCame
upon it ; unmannerly ;
But she said : " I don't care ! He rushed down the Strand,
All the birds in the air With a pig in each hand,
Are welcome to sit on my bonnet ! ” But returned in the evening to Anerley.
HERE was an old man of Moldavia,
THER
Who had the most curious be.
havio'ir :
hur while he was able ,
He slept on a table,
That funny old man of Moldavia.
The next Verses and Rhymes begin on page 709
646
 The Child's Book of
SCHOOL LESSONS
WHAT OUR LESSONS TEACH US
CHE Reading lesson in these pages teaches us something new, for in it we learn
THE for the first time something about Grammar. Our Writing lesson gives us
three new letters which come above and below the lines. If we are learning
figures we can turn to the Arithmetic lesson and learn the names of the numbers
from 20 to 99. The fairies have more surprises for us in our Music lesson, and for
our Drawing this time we are going to draw and paint a spray of leaves. And
last, in our Picture- Stories in French, we read how the party arrived in Paris.
CONTINUED FROM PAGE 557

TOROS READING CUS ,

A FIRST LESSON IN GRAMMAR
ow we have got on far enough to
Now and you will be able to think of
be able to do a little English a large number of words like these :
Grammar. We shall find that it will FA-THER MO-THER
help us to learn to read more quickly. BRO-THER SIS-TER
And there is no need to be frightened UN -CLE AUNT
of the word grammar, because Your father calls you his SON if
grammar is really very you are a boy, or his
interesting DAUGH-TER if you are a
If you are a BOY, and girl ; and your mother and
if you have a sister, you father can speak of each
will not call her a BOY , but other as HUS - BAND and
a GIRL . If you have a WIFE . And when they were
schoolmaster, you will call being married people spoke
him a clever MAN ; but if of them as BRIDE -GROOM
you are taught by a mistress, and BRIDE .
you call her a clever WO You will have noticed that
MAN . There are lots of pairs, the words in the first column
or couples, of words like this. always belong to men , or
One is used of people who are males, and the words in the
males — that is , men and boys second column always belong
—and the other is used of to women, or females.
females — that is, women and The same thing is found in
girls. Here are some of speaking of animals. If you
these pairs of words : go into a farmyard you will see
BOY GIRL lots of fowls and ducks and
MAN WO -MAN Bridegroom and Bride geese, and hear them, too, for
KING QUEEN they do make a noise. When
MAS-TER MIS -TRESS you want to speak of Mister Goose,
LORD LA-DY you call him GAN-DER ; and if you
You can go on thinking of plenty are anxious to get to know Mrs. Dučk's
more of these if you only try . Ask husband, you ask for DRAKE. So we
yourself what relations you have, get some more pairs of words to learn :
re

COCK HEN . DRAKE DUCK · GANDER GOOSE

647
 -THE CHILD'S BOOK
Don't you remember that in your
nursery rhyme you used to say :
" GOOSEY GOOSEY GANDER,
whither will you wander ?
Upstairs and downstairs, and in my
LADY'S chamber ."
All the words that mean males are
said to be of masculine gender, and
all the words that mean females are
WRITING
LETTERS ABOVE AND BELOW THE LINES
some time for Tom and Nora to
IT took
write a good I, b, t, h , and k, because
they all have loops above the line ;
but when they were able to write good
ones they came to their mother to
find out how to make three new letters :
d, g, and q .
D ,” said their mother , when Tom
and Nora had ruled their lines , “ will
remind you very much of an old friend.
This is it :
dd d dd d đ
Directly she had written one d, Nora
exclaimed :
“ It is like a grown tall, and it does
make.
See," tosaid
lookeasy
66 )
her mother, “ I start Loops, she told them, must be made the
making d like the first part ofa, but when proper length, and the pencil cross
I bring the pencil round to the upper
line I do not take it down again at
once, as we do in writing a, but carry it
right up above the line a little further
than the top of the t, but not quite so
far as the loops of l, b, h, and k . Then
Ibringthe pen down againmore heavily
over the up -stroke and end in a pot.
hanger, just like t, l, and h . If we
top tothat
Noraa says, d is is
a
grown tall, as
remember, a with it, there
really nothing new to learn about it .
Tom was busy thinking about d,
and when he started copying the d's
his mother had made he whispered to
himself. " a, d , a , d .”
Now, Nora was learning to spell little
words, and she knew that a d spelt ad
at the beginning of words, so she said
that would also help Tom and herself
to remember d was like a with a top
added .
Nora and Tom soon learned to write
good d's , and then their mother said :
.648
OF SCHOOL LESSONS
feminine. Try to remember these
two difficult words.
Now, after all this hard work, here
is an easy little rhyme to end up
with :
When BABY wants to use her teeth
She bites her FATHER'S LOCK - ET,
And you should see how quick she is
To find it in his POCK - ET.
29: 8
“ The next letter, g, has something
new about it.” She then wrote this
for them to copy :
JYGG
“The first part of it is like a ; but
the last part—the tail - what is that
like ? "
Tom and Nora watched their mother
as she made the g, and then Tom said
the tail had a loop like 1, but the loop
was down below the line, not above it.
His mother said that was quite right,
and that the loops of all letters below
the line were just the same lengths as
the loops of 1, b, h, and k above it.
over just below the line. Though at
first Tom found it by no means easy to
make the loops of g all the same length,
he found, after a time, that the more
carefully he looked at his mother's
g before beginning to make one, and
saw
the how long to
less likely make tomake
hewas the loopeda tail,
bad
letter.
That's the secret of it, Tom ," she
said. “Look carefully ; be sure you are
right ; then go ahead."
One other letter the brother and sister
learned to write that day, and as their
mother made it for them to copy they
watched her to see if they could find
out what it was like.
0444
It has a tail," said Tom.
)
' But it is not a loop," exclaimed
Nora. “ What a funny letter ! It seems
tan.
G
 ARITHMETIC

in a hurry to end itself, and has no
time to make a proper loop like g.
1)
What is it called, mother ? '
“" It is a q ," she replied. “ Its tail
is just as long as g's ; but you see when
my pencil comes to the bottom of the
down -stroke of the tail it turns up
to the line again on the right. No other
letter does that. How can we remember
it ? This will help us : q begins queen .
It begins the word queer, too, so shall
we call it queer q ? "
Nora said that she thought that
would help them to remember q .

Tomato
30010 ARITHMETIC ROOM

THE NAMES OF THE NUMBERS FROM 20 TO 99

By this time we can do without thirty-one 31
always speaking of a bundle of ten thirty - two ... 32
pencils. We will call them “ tens ” thirty -three 33
only. And the odd pencils in the right. up to thirty -nine . . . 39
hand box we will call ones.” To go After this comes the number made up
on, then, from nineteen, which is a of four " tens," which is called forty (40 )
number made up of a ten ” and nine
When we put one more to
ones. ” theThen
nextwenumber
go on after
again forty-nine
till we come
(49 to
) ;
this number, we have ten ones in this will have four tens in the
the right - hand box, like this : ten ” box and ten ones in the
1 (10 " one " box, which can be made into five
60 “ tens ” and no ones " -50. This
But we now have to tie the ten ones number is called fifty.
into a bundle and make a “ ten ” of We will now write down the names
them, which we put into the “ bundle ( 6 of the other numbers which are made
box . Then there will be two tens
in the left-hand box and no ones
up of an exact number of “ tens," with
no ones " left over. The names of
at all in the other box , like this : the numbers in between are easy.
))
o The number made of six tens is
called sixty (60).
The name of this new number, made The number made of seven tens ))

up of two " tens,"is twenty . The figures is calledseventy( 70 ).

for it , we have just seen, are 20. The The number made of eight “ tens )

names of the numbers after this are is

easy to remember, up to the time when is called eighty (80).
we again have ten ones ” in the The number made of nine “ tens ” is
( called ninety ( 90 ).
one box. We only have to put the
one, two, three, and so on, after the So that now we ought to know the
names of all the numbers from one to
twenty, and we get : ninety- nine, and the figures which stand
twenty -one 21 twenty -six 26 for them .
twenty-two 22 twenty-seven 27 Let us try a few of them.
twenty - three 23 twenty-eight 28 What number do the figures 57 stand
twenty - four 24 twenty-nine 29 for ? Fifty - seven ; because the right
twenty -five 25 hand figure means 7. “ ones,” and the
9) 6

Another " one ”" put to twenty - nine figure to the left of the " ones ” stands
66

gives us ten “ ones 1 in the one ” box,

60
for tens," so that we have 5 tens ,
which we can tie into a bundle and put and the number made
( 6
up of 5 tens
into the bundle box. Then we . and 7 ones ” is what we call fifty
have three tens and no ones," so seven .
that the figures which stand for the What are the figures which stand for
number are 30 . eighty-two ?
This number, made up of three Eighty-two means 8 " tens ” and 2
" tens," is called thirty. In just the ( 6
ones," and, because we always put the
same way as before, another one " ones " figure at the right hand, the
added to this makes thirty -one, and figures which stand for eighty- two will
so on . be 82 .

649
JY
 THE CHILD'S BOOK OF SCHOOL LESSONS
What are the figures which stand for
fifty ? 50.
Why do we have to write the o ?
Because we want the figures to stand
for 5 tens and no ones, " so we must
(
put the 5 for the “ tens and the o for
the " ones." If we did not put down
the o, but only wrote 5, this would not
stand for fifty at all. It would simply
mean five “ ones," or whatwe call “ five.
Here is an exercise which you can
Bobo
VJMUSIC
Code
THE FAIRIES
Whento oncewe begin toletfairiestalk
us, is quite
it wonderful how
much we learn from them, and how
many new things they will show us.
We have let them introduce us to the
Treble Road and the Bass Road , and
already we have seen a fairy procession times they can sing to us out of several
in wee motor- cars, and a fairy meeting of their houses at once ; sometimes they
when the fairies arrived on the scene will leave one of their houses and sing
in cocoa -nuts . The motor - cars are still
waiting in the Treble Road, and the
cocoa- nuts are still to be seen in the
Bass Road. But even now there are more
fairy wonders in store for us ,
One morning Treble Clef was heard
G B D F
The cocoa - nuts on Bass Road
telling Bass Clef that her road was
prettier than it had ever been, for,
curiously enough , in the night beautiful
flowers had grown in the spaces between
the motor -lines, flowers of different
colours, very much like the shape of
tulips.
Indeed, that is strange," answered
Bass Clef, “ for when I opened my eyes
at break of day I looked down my road,
and saw shells of varied hue lying
between the cocoa -nuts in which the
fairies arrived yesterday.”
Now , you know , fairies can do all
sorts of strange things , and they are
very fond of big surprises. We heard
do by yourselves. Say to yourself, or
write down, the names of these numbers :
73, 49, 88, 60, 92 , 17, 54, 31, 23, 40.
What are the figures which stand for
Twenty -one Eighty
Forty - seven Seventy -six
Ninety -eight Thirty -three
Fifty - five Sixty -nine
Eighteen Fifteen
You will have learned all these names
before we come to our next lesson .
IN THE TULIPS
the other day that they shut themselves
very closely in their little cars to protect
themselves against the weather . And
so, when the cocoa-nuts arrived on the
scene, we heard the fairies' voices,
but still we could not see them . Some
to us from the door of another ; but we
always have to be very wide awake
to understand what is really going on.
While Treble Clef and Bass Clef were
having their little talk, the sun whispered
the fairies' new secret to Treble Clef
A E G B DF
The motor -cars on Treble Road
and the wind told all she knew to
Bass Clef.
The fairies thought Treble Clef had
managed their procession so nicely
that they would give her a treat, so
they decided among themselves that
when she woke in the morning sheshould
see beautiful tulips growing in the
spaces between the motor-lines, and
FairyF, Fairy A, Fairy C, and Fairy E
said they would go and stand inside the
tulips, and sing when the right note
was pressed on the piano.
Do you notice that the little white
door is called a note ? Because the
fairies think we are getting to under
650
 MUSIC
stand them so well that we can begin
to speak their language, and they call
these little white doors, and the black
ones, too, notes. We remember that
Fairy E's motor - car stopped on the
first line, and directly she arrived there
we had to go to the piano and press
the next white note but one on the
right of Fairy C's middle home. Treble
Clef now says that if we go to the little
white note on the right side of Fairy E
on the fourth line. Let us press it.
down gently and listen.
Rat-a -tat- tat ! at space number three ;
“ Who is at home? " " It is Fairy C.”
Fairy C's tulip
Still there is a fourth flower, and
again we turn to Treble Clef. She tells
us we can find out all about it if we

F А с E
The fairies ' tulips on Treble Road
we shall find out go to the piano and press the little
about the flower white note lying between Fairy D's
in the first space. motor on the fourth line and Fairy F's
Directly we press motor on line number five. So without
the note we hear more ado we go to that little note.
Fairy F's voice. Space number four for wee Fairy E ,
The very first space Tulip and I as good as can be.
I chose for rest,
Henceforth'tis
known as Fairy
F's nest. Fairy E's tulip
All the fairies are so happy that those
in the motor-cars and those who are
Fairy F's tulip nestling in the petal of a flower join
“ What about the second flower ? " together in another fairy rhyme :
we ask our friend Treble Clef. On lines one, two, three, four, and five
EGB D F arrive ;
As usual , she sends us to the Then FACE come between,
piano, saying, “ You remember which In the four spaces we have seen ;
little white note told you about Fairy G's Here on the treblestave we've spied them,
motor on the second line ; well, the very With little Treble Clef to guide them .
next white note on the right of Fairy G What a beautiful game of play we
is the one to press if you would find can have ! No less than fourteen little
out about the power in the second fairies will play with us.
space.” We find the note quite easily, GBDFÀ are to be found in their
as it lies between the Fairy Ĝ and Fairy cocoa -nuts on the five lines in the Bass
B. Press it down gently. Road. We must run to press down
“ Who's in the second space ? ” _ you say , each note and see how quickly we can
And a little voice answers, Fairy A. " find them. EGB D F enjoy being in
their motor-cars on the five lines in
the Treble Road .
Now for the little fairies who love
Fairy A's tulip their tulips in the four spaces between
Now we come to the third flower. the five lines in the Treble Road.
If we would understand this flower we F in the first space.
must go to the white note on the piano A in the second space.
which lies between Fairy B's motor C in the third space.
on the third line and Fairy D's car E in the fourth space.
651
 W DRAWING i
Qes

DRAWING & PAINTING A SPRAY OF LEAVES

his time we are going to draw and 1. The drawing board and pins.
THISpaint a spray of leaves. First, we 2. The black and the white chalk and
must find a spray. Any kind of leaves brown and white paper.
will do, but it is better to begin with the 3. The jar of clean water, the sponge,
sort that are called evergreens - laurel, the paint-box and brushes, and two B
ivy, box, or even yew. This is because pencils — one with a chisel and one with
all leaves and flowers change very a sharp point.
quickly, especially after they are picked ; Now draw the leaf from memory, with
and, unless you are clever, they will its stalk, on brown paper in black chalk,
alter almost before you have time to or, if you like, on white paper. Draw
begin, and this is very confusing when several if the first is not a good one ;
you are trying to copythem carefully. then get your leaves, and see if you have
You remember when we drew the remembered well what one of them was
twigs how the stalk was thicker where like. See if you have drawn it large
each little bud grew ? Now you will enough or too large ; if the tip is the
notice that wherever the leaf springs right shape ; if it joins the stalk
from the stem there is a little swelling; properly. Then copy carefully a leaf
sometimes it is much bigger than at by itself. You cannot put in the veins
other times . nicely with the black chalk , so do not
The stalk of the leaf is not the same try. It is better to do this with the
thickness all the way down, either. Some pencil afterwards, or even to leave them
kinds of laurel leaves are rounded at the out altogether till you have had more
tips and where they join the stalks, and practice. They are so fine and delicate
some are pointed. Whichever kind of that they must not be made to look as
leaf we have chosen, we must look at all if they were coarse and hard. The veins
these things and notice the different are just little hollow pipes which carry
shapes, because to-day we want to try the sap to feed the leaf, so they want
to draw from memory a single leaf with very careful drawing.
its stalk before we copy the spray. Now we will try the spray. Put it on
When we think we can remember first, and see about how much
the paper
it quite well, we should hide it away space it takes up. Put a dot where the
somewhere, and then get out our tip of each leaf comes on the paper, and
drawing things. Let us number them . where the small stalks and the big stalks

This is how the laurel spray should look when it is If we have chosen ivy leaves to draw instead of laure!
drawn from memory in black chalk on brown paper . leaves, this picture will do to compare our drawing with .
பண்பாயானாய TITILO CITITZITYYYYYTT
652
 DRAWING

begin and end. If you have not drawn
stalks and leaves before, this way will
help you, but do not always use the
dots ; you will not learn to draw so
quickly if you do. Put the spray on
A good, bright green is made by
mixing Prussian blue , gamboge, and
burnt sienna. A good dark green is
made by mixing together indigo and
burnt sienna, or Prussian blue and

Now we have to make a copy of our laurel leaves, Here is a picture of a spray of ivy leaves painted
painting them straight away on white paper. on white paper. Remember to start with the stalk .

the left- hand side, and begin with the Vandyke brown. We shall find that
big stem . Notice if it curves or bends, there are a great many ways of mixing
then draw the leaf-stalks and then the greens when we knowour paints.
leaves themselves. We shall find it If we are not tired of our spray by this
better not to draw the leaves with a time, we can try to draw it in pencil on
single line round white paper. We
them at first, but must draw the long
to rub the chalk stem first, just in
sideways on the the same way as we
paper, getting the began with the
direction the leaf black chalk, but
takes carefully , and now the leaves
drawing it big. The must be drawn in
pictures on the last outline. This is
page show laurel much more diffi
and ivy, but any cult . Use the
leaves must be chisel - pointed
drawn in the same pencil first, draw
way , beginning first lightly on the
with the long stems. paper, and do not
We can practise put your fingers
drawing the spray This is a spray of leaves drawn in " outline" in lead pencil close to the point,
on white paper. Use the chisel -pointed pencil, and make
with abrushful of the stalksandthe biggest of the veinswithdouble lines, pencil.
but well down the
colour in green Use the
paint to match the shade of the leaves, or sharp point to draw all the fine parts
in brown or black paint like the picture the veins and the thin stalks . Do not
above. Moisten the paper with the damp try to draw all the little veins , but only
sponge first. If the paperglistens when you the big ones. Remember to make the
hold it level with the eye , it is too wet. stalks and the big veins double.
653
 LITTLE PICTURE -STORIES IN FRENCH
N our story this time, which is continued from page 557, we read how the party
IN travel from Calais to their hotel in Paris. The first line under each picture
is the French, the second gives the English word for the French word above it,
and the third line shows how we make up the words into our own language.
Nous sommes à Calais. Ils ressemblent à des poupées.
We are at Calais. They resemble to some dolls.
We are at Calais. They look like dolls.
Le bateau s'arrête . Ce sont les gendarmes .
The boat itself stops. They are the men - at- arms.
The boat stops. They are gendarmes.
-Nous allons à la douane.
Nous courons au côté. We go to the customs house.
We run to the side.
We run to the side.
We go to the custom house.

Les marins baissent la passerelle.
The sailors lower the gangway.
The sailors let down the gangway.
Nous voulons quitter le bateau.
We wish to quit the boat.
We want to get off the boat.
vy
Tout le monde cherche ses bagages.
Everybody seeks their baggage.
Everybody looks for their luggage.
Le train nous attend.
The train us awaits.
The train is waiting for us
Il y a le temps de déjeuner,
There is the time of to lunch.
There is time for lunch .

Bébé dit : " Regardez ces bonshommes ! "

6
Papa nous dit de rester près de lui.
Baby says : “ Look at thosemanikins!" Papa us tells of to stay near of to him
Baby says: “ Look at those funny men ! ” Papa tells us to keep by him.
654
Nous avons du lait et des gâteaux.. Un garçon prête un livre à moi.
We have some milk and some cakes. А boy lends a book to me.
We have milk and cakes. A boy lends me a book .

Papa regarde sa montre. Je dis : Merci bien ."

Papa looks at his watch. I say : " Thank you well.”
Papa looks at his watch. I say : “ Thank you very much."
Il faut se depêcher. Je regarde le livre .
It is necessary to hurry oneself. Í look at the book.
We must hurry . I look at the book.

Nous montons pour chercher des places. Je le montre à Jeannette.

We mount for to seek some places. I it show to Jenny.
We get in to look for seats. I show it to Jenny.

po

Le train est complet. Nous sommes dans le train quatre heures.

The train is complete. We are in the train four hours.
The train is full. We are in the train four hours. 1

Enfin nous nous asseyons. Enfin nous voila arrivés à Paris.

At last we ourselves seat, At last we there are arrived at Paris,
At last we are seated . At last we are in Paris

Maman est trés fatiguée. Nous allons en voiture à l'hôtel.

Mamma is very tired. We go in cab to the hotel.
Mamma is very tired. We drive to our hotel.
The next School Lessons begin on page 767
655
 THE PLANS FOR MAKING A TOY ZOO

HALF
OF
TAIL Place to
stitch on ear

Place to
stitch on eye

SIDE HALF OF BODY

v
HALF
EAR
OF

( vv XX >

UNDER HALF OF BODY

XX
Х x

The pattern for the rabbit

IVVV

UNDER HALF OF BODY

HALF

^
OF

VV
EAR

Place to
stitch on ear Place
for tail

O Place to YIDE HALF OF BODY

stitch on y

VV
The pattern for the pig
Those patterns can be easily traced on thin paper, which can be then used for cutting out
656
 THINGS TO MAKE
TOYI THINGS TO DO
WHAT THESE PAGES TEACH US
IN these pages are instructions for the making of two more animals for our toy
IN Zoo, which began on page 449. Those of us who have our own little garden
also learn what we can do in the garden at the end of May. Those of us
who are building Modeltown find here plans and instructions for making a
villa . Another conjuring trick for boys, another little doll's garment for girls,
and more problems for both of them , also come into this part of our book.
CONTINUED FROM PAGR 568

A RABBIT AND A PIG FOR OUR TOY ZOO

The rabbit and thepig are bothmade of
swansdown calico ; a quarter of a yard
of the best, unbleached , at about tenpence a
yard will be more than enough for the two.
Piggie has legs of hat-wire.
The rabbit is so simple to make that
anyone who made the cat shown in our
first article will scarcely need any explana-
tion of the pattern . Two
pieces to face each other
must be cut of each part
shown except the ears,
and of these the under
La
made by big stitches of coloured cotton, and
bead eyes. All the seamsshould have the
nap carefully fuffed up, to hide the stitches.
Now we are going to make our pig.
Leave the piece where the dots are in the
pattern open when all the rest is stitched
up for the openings where his legs are to
be fixed in . After piggy is stuffed, a stitch
or two of double thread
sent through in the direc
tion of the arrow in the
pattern will wrinkleexpres
it up
into such a natural

halves are of pink satin sion that you can almost

or inch-wide satin ribbon . hear him grunt ! The
The neatest way to sew pink -lined ears are turned
on a rabbit's ear is to downwards, towards the
cut a slit, as shown below , face, SO the point of
in the stuff on each side of the V -shaped slit should
the head after the animal is be turned in the same
stitched, and before it is direction ; they are folded
filled. The point should The rabbit for our toy Zoo over and inserted in the
be towards the tail. same way as those of the
The two sides of the ear should be folded rabbit. Piggy's legs will each need a
towards the middle, to make it small piece of bonnet-wire about three
at the root, and secured with a stitch inches long, doubled, and bent as
or two. Then pokethe ear through the shown here. All except the bent
slit so that the three-cornered flap part must be sewn up in a piece
made by the cut goes in along with it of material turned in at the lower
to the other side. Look inside to see end , and turned under — as it would
what you are doing, and when about a fray otherwise where you sew it up. The
quarter of an inch of loop of wire must be
the ear is well through , covered with a black
fasten it down on the glue, cailed " elastic " or
wrong side. Then hem * Prout's ” glue, which
it neatly round on the most oilshops sell at a
right side also, fasten penny a stick . This
off so that the ear will becomes soft directly
fall over the fastening to you warm it. Put a dab
hide it, fuff out the nap onthe loop of wire, and
all round where the ear quickly mould it all
is joined to the head, and round the wire with a
it will look almost as if wet finger and thumb.
it grew there ! If you If you press your thumb
are making the ears to nail into the groove be
stand up, do just the tween the double wire,
same, only make the you can imitate piggy's
point of the slit incline The pig for our toy Zoo cloven “ trotter." The
upwards instead of to legs are poked up into
wards the tail. The tail should be sewn up the body after it is stuffed , until only half
and turned before the back seam of the an inch, in addition to the foot, can be seen.
body is quite finished, so that it Turn in the raw edges of the leg-holes
can be inserted and sewn in with which were left, and hem them neatly
the seam. It is impossible to make down on the legs. His eyes are made of
it look neat if sewn on after the rest two black beads . A bit of white worsted ,
of the rabbit is finished. Bunny has a pink or crocheted up to a piece of chain , can be
fawn -coloured worsted nose, as shewn here, sewn on to form piggy's tail.

657
 A LITTLE GARDEN MONTH BY MONTH
WHAT TO DO AT THE END OF MAY
Thisyear
is about the busiestmany
timeplants
in thewhole each. At the end of the row the stakeis put
where there are to put down into the ground, and the tarred line,
out that have had protection through the which has been neatly wound around the
winter. unsecured stake, is unwound to the required
We will suppose that our geraniums and length. This stake is inserted at theother end,
fuchsias have by this time become thoroughly the tarred line lying straight along the ground
hardened by standing out in the open ; there. between them and makinga guiding line forthe
fore, they may be taken from their pots now, required holes the whole distance of the row.
and planted out for the summer months in In planting our garden plots we must not
thegarden plot. altogether overlookthe fact that some colours
If the geraniums are what are called ivy- agree better together than others. If there
leafed geraniums (with smooth , glossy leaves) are half a dozen geraniums, and some are red
they may be treated in one of two ways — the and some are pink, it is better to keep them
growths the soil pegged separate . White Aowers
down to may be or they
, can be placed next to
may be liſted and tied up anything, and they show
to 'stakes – it depends off well at a distance.
whether we wish to make Rose - coloured flowers
use of them as tall or as make a splendid display.
dwarf plants. These ivy Dahlias must not be
A
thatgood way planted
aretobe to get in
a rows-
straight
getline
twofor plants
sticksand planted until all fear of
leafed geraniumsare also
splendid to treat ashang stretch sometarred line from one to the other. frost is over, and the
ing plants. Wire baskets first week of June will
may be bought, and carefully lined with moss, be soon enough except in the south ; this
filled with soil, and the geraniums planted. applies to all plants that have been brought
Long trails of flower -covered growth will by. forward under glass.
and-by hang down on all sides. Of course, at this season we may feel
It makes a charming addition to the little cramped for space. There is such a num
garden plot if we can procure a couple of ber of things we should like to grow if only
small tubs to stand at the entrance. And no the plot would hold them. The best way out
plant looks better in them than the pink- of the difficulty is to transplant anything that
Howered hydrangea. Fortunately these has finishedAowering to some nice cool spot,
Aowers continue for months in good con- if we can but secure it. For instance, our
dition . In the South of England and in primrose plants that have been so gay, and
the neighbourhood of London they need no their near relatives, the polyanthuses , may be
winter protection. But if we cannot get tubs, carefully lifted with plenty of soil about the
even fair -sized pots with roots, and put somewhere
some pretty flowering else for the summer. They
plants in them that we must be watered into
may happen to have their new quarters, and
could be used like this. through the coming
If tubs are used they months they will need
should be raised above watering from time to
the soil by placing three time. Until they have
bricks beneath them . If become settled they
pots are to stand out in should be shaded from
this manner, either they the sun. A cool , showery
should have a small ring day should be chosen for
of wood beneath them , or taking them up, and
a layer of ashes, the they should be replanted
object being to prevent point at once. It is well to
worms from entering Some pots of pink-flowered hydrangeas will remember that, whatever
through the drainage make a charming addition to a little garden plot. We are planting, the
hole at the bottom . roots should not be
Just at this season there are thousands of allowed to become dry. If there are many
small plants to be bought for a penny or plants to be lifted, those first removed should
twopence each , or less, so that, if we have have their roots coveredwith a piece of damp
not sufficient material to fill our plots, a sacking, or a spadeful of soil should be
shilling or so expended now will go a long thrown over them. Never transplant any
way to help us. thing in windy weather if it can be avoided ;
It may happen that we wish to put out for, after it is in place, until the roots are
certain plants in rows, either floweringplants freely at work again, a plant is terribly suscep
or vegetables, and here is the gardener's tible to the drying effects of wind .
method of making his line straight and Put in your plants firmly, draw up the soil
keeping it true. Two stout stakes must be and press it well about them , and in putting
procured and they may be pointed at one in a large plant even tread the soil about it
end . A piece of " tarred line, ” such as is after you have planted it , and never plant
used for tying up strong plants, is fastened to when the soil is wet enough to be sticky.
OUTSTIDER
658
 LOUSE
LITTLE PROBLEMS FOR CLEVER PEOPLE
'HE problems are continued from
THE page 567, and the answers below
refer to the problems given on that page.
DID HE CATCH THE TRAIN ?
45. “ The station is twelve miles away," said
a cyclist at a hotel , “ and I have an hour and a
half to catch the train. There are four miles
uphill, which I must walk , and can do at four
miles an hour ; there are four miles downhill,
where I can coast at twelve miles an hour ; and
there are four miles level , which I shall do at
eight miles an hour. This is an average of > >
eight miles an hour, and I shall be just in time.”
Did he catch the train ?
HOW MANY RUGS WERE THERE ?
46. “ This is awkward,” said the carpet
manufacturer to his accountant ; " there is
an entry for a sale, and many ofthe figures
have been obliterated. It reads : • rugs
at £ 10 os. 2 d. each = £ 1 , * os. 272d .
" Then we can work it out, ” said his
assistant, and he did.
Can you ?
WHAT WERE THE TWO SUMS ?
47. “ I have two invoices ," said the mer
chant , “ which together amount to £34. In
one the pounds, shillings, and pence are equal.
In the other the pounds are twice the shillings
and the shillings are twice the pence."
What were the two sums of money ?
THE ANSWERS TO THE PROBLEMS ON PAGE 567
36. It would take 4 hours to walk the 16
miles still to go , but cycling is the quicker
way. If James rides8miles in 1 hour, and namely, 6d ., we have 5s ., which wouldpay
then, leaving the machine, walks right on, he
will complete the journey in 3 hours. If John
walks for 2 hours he will cometo the machine
and can ride it the remaining 8 miles in 1 hour,
thus arriving at the same tinie as James.
37. He knew the name of the village from
which he had come, and by supposing that
the arm of the signpost with that name pointed that would be starting as I arrived. There
in the direction from which he had cycled, he
was able to tell what roads were indicated by
the other arms.
38. The first candle burns for 6 hours and
the second for 4 hours. In 2 hours (8.30
to 10.30 ) the first burns as much as the second
burns in 1/2 hours (8.30 to 10 ). Hence, in
6 hours the first burns as much as the second
in 4/2 hours, so that the second would require
one half-hour to burn 1 inch, and it must
have been 8 inches long originally, while
the first must have been 9inches long.
39. When his father is three times as old as
Harry, the difference between their ages
must be twice Harry's age ; but the difference by avoirdupois weight and gold by troy
between their ages is always 44: Therefore
Harry will be 22 when his father is three times
as old . Harry, then, will get the bicycle in 10
years ' time.
40. To send a telegram between any two
places in this country costs 6d. for 12 words, gold is heavier than an ounce of feathers, but
or any fewer number. The difference a pound of gold is lighter than a pound of
between the price to York and to New York feathers.
659
DID HE LOSE MONEY ?
48. “ I have just sold two houses," said
Thomson, " for £495 each. On one I lost
ten per cent and on the other I gained ten per
cent." " Then you are exactly where you
were, " replied his friend.
Was he ?
HOW FAR DID WILLIAM GOI
49. John met his friend William starting
out from his house at 5 o'clock. “ How far
are you going ? ” said John. " Perhaps you
can guess," replied William . “ If I walk at
the rate of four miles an hour I shall be there
five minutes late, but if I walk at five miles an
hour I shall be there ten minutes too soon ."
How far was he going ?
DID HE CATCH THE TRAIN ?
50. A train started from a station 1 minutes
late, and went at 10 miles an hour to the next
station, which is 1/2 miles away, and where it
stops 145 minutes. A man reached the first
station 12 minutes late for the proper starting
time and walked to the next station at 4 miles
an hour to try to catch the train there.
Did he succeed ?
HOW LONG DID THE FROG TAKES
51. A frog fell into aa well that was 30 feet
deep. He climbed up 3 feet every day and
slipped back 2 feet every night.
How long did he take to reach the top ?
was 4s. 6d . If we add to this sum the mini
mum charge for a telegram in this country,
for a telegram of 5 words to New York.
41. The amount spilt would have served the
man who died for 8 days, and this, at
i quart each day , would have been 8 quarts.
42. I would meet 11 trains coming in the
opposite direction, not including the one that
would be arriving as I started and the one
is 24 hours' difference between the starting
times of the trains ; but as the trains from
opposite sides are going towards each other
at the same speed , each train will pass another
train every 12 hours. Thus, my train will
in 6 days pass ! 2 trains, including the train
that will be leaving as I arrive at my destina
tion.
43. Yes, the second farm was the bigger,
and was more than twice as large as the
other . Three miles square is 3 miles each way
and contains 9 square miles, while the other
farm contained only 4 square miles .
44. He was right Feathers are weighed
weight. An ounce troy has 480 grains, but
I ounce avoirdupois has only 437 %2 grains.
But a pound troy has only 12 ounces or 5,760
grains, while a pound avoirdupois has
16 ounces or 7,000 grains, so that an ounce of
 லைகளையலாமாபானமை
caram

PLANS FOR MAKING MODELTOWN VILLA

am
11

6. Villa with floor and partition fixed

1. The design for Modeltown Villa

ROOF

6. First - floor partitions

Half - scale .Use rule
B for measurements

2. Plan of first floor : half -scale ROOF

Use rule B to take measurement

SPACE
FOR
KITCHEN

3. Ground - floor partition 7. First -floor partitions

Half - scale . Use rule B
BACK
BACK WALL Half - scale. Use rule
B for measurements

SPACE

FOR
SIDE WALL GROUND FLOOR CONSERVATORY
SIDE WAZZ

4. Plan of villa : half -scale

Use rule B for taking measurements

FRONT OF
VILLA

9. Plan of chimney : actuaj size

8. Villa with all partitions
fixed
YTTEU TYTTROMOTORYTETTY
660
 1
1

SLUDABLE LU

OWN VILLA
MAKING A VILLA FOR MODELTOWN
Nowwhich
let us build a Modeltown villa in the partition forthe ground foor, which is
arma

we may live ourselves. If we had given in picture 3. We make these double

to build a real villa we would require tolook
carefully into the cost, or we might find that
we had spent more than we could afford, or
more than we could pay for ; but in building
a villa in Modeltown we may have itjust as
nice as we desire without considering the hinging open. There are two partitions up
question of cost, because twopence worth of
cardboard will make a villa with
“ all the modern conveniencies," as
the builders say. So we shall make
a fairly large villa with a
nice porch, a conservatory,
a shed for bicycles, and a
kennel for the watch-dog.
Picture 1 is a drawing of
the villa when it is finished,
So we see nere what the
result of our work ought to
the scale of the picture - that is to say, we use
scale -rule B. When we have fixed the first
floor and the ground-floor partitions into
their proper positions, the building will look
as in picture 5 , which shows the front wall
stairs, and the plans of these are given half
scale in pictures 6 and 7. We draw
these by using scale-rule B, cut them
out and then glue them into place
at the dotted lines marked
on the plan of the floor.
Now let us make the chim
ney as seen in picture 9,
drawing it the same size
as in the picture. Weknow
how to attach the chimney
to the roof, and the dotted

2
be. Picture 4 is the plan
of the walls before bending
them up. We draw this
plan upon our cardboard ,
making it to double the
scale in the picture — that is,
n
10. Plan of porch : actual size
using rule B to take the measurements and place and with the chimney attached.
making our lines with our full-sized rule .
We remember, of course, the meaning of the
three different kinds of lines as explained to
us on page 218 and elsewhere. At the places
where there are crosses in the plan wemake
pinholes. After cutting out the card, we
bend up the walls and glue the side walls to
the floor by the projecting slips. To the
walls inside we must glue slips of wood, such
as large matches without heads, so that the
floor will have something to support it.
Then we draw and cut out the first floor,
the plan of which is given in picture 2, and
line on the plan of the house
in picture 4 shows where
the chimney ought to be
glued into position . Pic
ture 8 shows the building
with all the partitions in
We now come to picture 10 , which is the
plan of the porch over the front door. This
we also make full size and glue on over the
front door. The dotted lines around the
door in plan 4 and the finished house in
picture i show where the porch is to be
placed. The lower window in the front of
the house is to be made into a bay or oriel
window, and picture 12, which we make the
same size, gives the plan for this. Its position
is seen in the view of the finished house in
picture 1. We shall find the conservatory a
little more difficult than the porch and the

SIDE
WALL
D SIDE
WALL

FRONT
ROOF
11. Conservatory FLOOR : FRONT
being made
WALL

SIDE SIDE
WALL
WALL

ROOF
15. Plan ofwindow :: actual size
0

KITCHEN
ROOF FLOOR

13. Conservatory 14. Plan of kitchen

12. Plan of bay window half-scale half -scale 16. Plan of chimney
actual size Use scale -rule B Use scale -rule B actual size
mos
661 NYITOTTI
 18. Chimney

19. Dormer window

17. Plan of bicycle -house : actual size

20. Plan of kennel : actual size

21. Dormer window 22. Kitchen complete 23. Folding kennel 24. Finished kennel

bay window . The plan of the conservatory Its plan is given in picture 17, and we make it
is given half -scale in picture 13. This we the samesize as the plan, cut it out and glue it
make by using scale-rule B for taking the to the side of the kitchen as seen in picture 1 .
measurements . As we bend it up and glue We may want to keep a dog , and after
it into shape it will look like picture ir, and having made such an elaborate villa it is an
when attached to the side of the house it will easy task to make a kennel. The plan of the
be as seen in picture 1. kennel is given in picture 20 , and our draw
We have now completed the building of all ing on the cardboard must be made the
but the back of the house. We have made same size. When we are folding it up it
no kitchen and we now make this separately. will be as seen in picture 23, and when glued
Picture 14 is the plan together it will be
of the kitchen half like picture 24.
scale size, which we We have now to
make by using scale paint the walls, win
rule B. The kitchen dows, and roof. If
has a dormer win we put weak glue on
dow, the plan of the walls but not on
which is given in pic the windows, and ,
ture 15, and a chim before the glue is dry,
ney, the plan of which dust on some dry
is in picture 16. We sand , we shall have
make both the same a good stuccoed sur
size as the illustra face. The windows
tions. The chimney we shall make blue
when bent and glued and the roof we shall
will be as seen in paint a slate colour,
picture 18. The dor. which we can get by
mer window when mixing some red and
bent and ready to black if we have no
be glued will be as slate . We can make
seen in picture 19, Photograph of Modeltowa Villa when finished the outside doors and
and when glued to the porch green, as
gether ready to be attached to the roof it they are supposed to be wood. We can
will be as seen in picture 21 . Then the also make the bicycle-house and the dog.
entire kitchen with chimney and dormer kennel green ; but the roof of the bicycle
window is illustrated in picture 22 . house we shall make black , because a real
Having done all this, we shall glue the bicycle-house would probably have a roof
kitchen complete to the back of the house, covered with black felt well protected with
the position being indicated by lines in tar. We have now finished the villa, of which
picture 4 and by picture 1. Our bicycle-shed a photograph is shown on this page.
is to be attached to the side of the kitchen . The next building for Modeltown will be a church.
662

WHAT TO DO WITH A GIRL'S WORK - BASKET
.
4.
Thenext garment we are going to make
is
are not quite so easy to do as
the chemise or the stays, but,
with a little care and attention, we
shall soon get over the difficulties.
Picture i shows one leg-half
of the knickers. Trace a pattern
like this, just as we did for the
chemise, according to the size of
the doll, and cut two pieces of
nainsook to the shape of the pat
tern, allowing a little over for the
seams and hems.
Each piece forms one leg, as
shown in the picture. Take one
piece, and make a French seam
-
as from A to B in picture 2, which
shows the pattern laid on the
material for cutting out. This is
called the inside seam . Then take o
the other piece for the other leg,
being careful to fold the material
the other way. If you did not do
this, the two pieces would fit one
leg only.
Now sew the two legs together,
joining them from c to A and
from A to D (see picture 2) .
This is better done by running
and felling, if you can manage it,
although the French seam answers
the same purpose. The legs are
now joined, and need
finishing at the top and
bottom .
The first thing to do
is to make a slit in the
nainsook about 2 in. long
on each side of the
knickers - that is to say,
make a slit at the top of
each leg on the opposite
side to the inside seam.
A glance at picture I will
3. The false hem
show you the dotted lines
at the side where the slit a shows the extra
is to be made. One side
of this slit is finished off with a
tiny hem. This is the back of the
knickers. The other side of the
slit , which is the front part of the
garment, is made neat by what is
called a false hem, about half an
inch wide. A
false hem is a
hem made of a
piece of stuff
joined on very
neatly to the
main part of the
work ; and the
way to fix it is
to join the two
sides together
by little running a
stitches. Then
turn over the a shows the band run on, and b shows it being hemmed down
-
The Doll's Knickers
materiai, and make an ordinary hem. Of
course you will see why this
is necessary . If we tried to
make the opening neat by
turning in a hem both sides, we
should make our knickers too
small, and so , to prevent this,
we join on extra stuff in this way,
Picture 3 makes this quiteclear.
This side - the wide side - of
the knickers folds over, and but
tons over the other side. To
prevent the knickers from split
ting right down the leg, the bot
tom of the false hem should be
MATERIAL
1. Pattern of one leg sewn downon the right side with
TOP OF BACK two rows of stitching, as picture 4
shows.
FOLD
Now, if you hold up the gar
OF
FRONT
HIP
ment you will find it is in two
parts, divided by the slits on
FRS
either side. The wider part is
EENA the back and the narrower the
front, and each has to be put into
CM
a band to make it fit the doll's
N
waist.
The back part of the knickers,
which you will find is much wider
than the doll's waist, should be
gathered into a little straight
B band, which must be cut accord
Laying the pattern on
ing to the size of the doll . To
the material put this band on, gather the
material, and lay the
edge of the band against
the gathered edge of the
knickers, and run them
together. Then take the
other end of the band,
turn in , a tiny fold to
make it neat , and hem
it down to the gathers
on the other side, taking
up each little gather on
the needle separately.
plecerun on , and b shows it The picture ( 5) makes
hemmed down this quite clear. But
there is one thing we
must not forget, and that is to
“ stroke " down the little gathers
before the band is put on.
TT When the gathering is done,
pull up the thread as far as it will
go. Then take a pin and stroke
down each little
fold evenly, just
as if you wanted
to make the
material look
The side like a piece of
opening paper that had
been folded up
in tiny foldslike
a concertina.
Use the side
of the pin or
6. The waist-band you will tear
the material.
663
 -THINGS TO MAKE
The two ends of the band are then folded
in , and sewn over with tiny “ ewing "
stiiches . Picture 6 shows how this
stitch is done
Now we have finished the back
band . The front one niust be treated
in just the same way, except that
the material will not need to be
gathered , but only “ eased ” accord
ing to the size of the doll's waist. 6. Sewing stitch
The next thing to be done is to
finish off the bottom of the legs.
If you hold up the little garment
again you will see that the ends
are much too wide. This fulness
must be gathered with running
stitches and put into a little band .
Cut a straight piece of material
for this, which should be about half
the width of the other bands we
made. Make each one long
enough to fit the doll's leg, and
join the ends by running stitches. 7. The finished garment our last picture (7 ).
THE BOY CONJURER'S
Thetrick we are going to describe is more
usually known as " The Afghan Bands,"
but the title of “ The Magic Scissors " is
better, as it tends to persuade the spectators
that the secret lies in the scissors used,
though, as a matter of fact, they are quite an
ordinary pair .
A little preliminary preparation will be
necessary, as follows. Take four strips of
stout inch-wide paper, each 6 ft. long. A
coil of suitable paper, in length enough
for several performances, may be bought
at a conjuring depôt for a few pence.
Taking one of these strips , we paste the
one end over the other so as to make an
endless band, taking care, in this case,
not to twist the paper. We do the same
with a second strip , but give one of the
ends a half-turn before joining
them . In the case of the third
strip we must give it a complete
turn, and in that of the fourth
a turn and a half. The bands
so prepared we will call re
spectively numbers 1, 2 , 3 , and 4.
To help us to distinguish them
in use, we may, if we please,
mark the three last with two,
three , and four little dots or
pinpricks respectively.
When about to show the
trick , we come forward with
the four bands hanging in A А
regular order over one arm , and Bands cut with the magic
lay them on a table or across
the back of a chair. We
remark that we are about to exhibit a very
curious experiment with these pieces of
paper. Experiment ” is a more imposing
word than “ trick. " We take band number 1,
and, with a pair of scissors, snip a small hole
midway anywhere in its breadth, after which
we proceed to divide it into two portions by
cutting onwards from the hole so made
throughout the length of the paper. The
The next THINGS TO MAKE AND THINGS TO DO begin on page 755
ZLODUIREZIZE UTILUTULTURDAY
AND THINGS TO DO..mama .....
Turn in a little piece, top and bottom ,
and then put the gathers on to it by stitching
or feather-stitching top and bottom .
But we must not forget the button
holes which fasten the knickers on to
the little stays. These are not at all
difficult, for we have already learned
to do them on page 561.
In the middle of the front band we
must put a buttonhole with barred
ends, like the picture (4) which
is shown on page 561 , and one
at each of the four corners of the
bands .
All that now remains to be done
is to trim the garment. This must,
of course, match the trimming on
the chemise - either buttonhole
scallops or lace. This we learned
on page 451. When this is done
our little knickers are complete,
and should look as shown in
MAGIC SCISSORS
bands, thus divided , appears like those
.
marked a in the picture.
" Nothing very remarkable about that,"
we remark. “ Just what you would expect,
isn't it ? But now I am going to show you
something you would not expect. It's all
done by virtue of these scissors. You
don't notice anything particular about
them ? No ; I didn't suppose you
would. But, as a matter of fact, these
are inagic scissors, and, naturally, they
produce all sorts of magical results. Í
am going to show you one of
them . I take another of these
bands' ' (here we takenumber 2] ,
" and cut it just the same as
before ; but, you see, the result is
quite different. We have again
two separate bands, but the one
is linked within the other. ” The
result is two bands, as before,
but one of them is linked within
the other, as seen at B.
“ Now I will show you a still
more surprising result. I take
another band " [ here we take
No. 3] , " and cut this one also ;
but the result is again different."
The band is now converted into
one of double the original length ,
and appears as shown at c.
“ And now for the most sur
B prising effect of all . This time
c D
I shall not only make the paper
scissors band increase in length like the
last one, but the magic scissors
will tie a magic knot upon it. Please notice that
I do nothing to produce the result. It's all
done by themagic scissors. " The last paper
band now appears as shown in D in the figure.
The frequent reference to the scissors
diverts attention from the minute difference
between the four bands. The reason , by the
way , for making them so large is that the
necessary twists become less noticeable.
664
 PLEASE RETURN TO
ALDERMAN LIBRARY

DUE DUE

11-9-94
2-8-95
 LC

UX 002 147 155